IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-S)

fc ^!

i4»

1.0

I.I

1.25

^1^ llii^

■^ !■■ IIIII2 2
^ \& 1 2.0

Ilk

U IIIIII.6

-#*

Photogrdohic

Sciences

Corporation

3o WEST MAIN STREET

WEBSTEP.N.Y 14SS0

(7V6) 87^.4503

/.■*s

CIHM/ICMH

Microfiche

Series.

CIHM/ICMH
Collection de
microfiches.

Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques

Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques

The institute has attempted to obtain the best
original copy available for filming. Features of this
copy which may be bibliographically unique,
which may alter any of the images in the
reproduction, or which may significantly change
the usual method of filming, are checked below.

Coloured covers/
Couverture de couleur

I I Covers damaged/

Couverture endommagie

Covfsrs restored and/or laminated/
Couverture restaurie et/ou pelliculie

Cover title missing/

Le titre de couverture manque

Coloured maps/

Cartes g6ographiques en couleur

Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/
Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire)

Coloured plates and/or illustrations/
Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur

Bound with other material/
Relii avec d'autres documents

Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion
along interior margin/

Lareliure serr^e peut causer de I'ombre ou de la
distortion le long de la marge intdrieure

Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these
have been omitted from filming/
II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajout^es
lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte,
mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont
pas dt6 filmdes.

L'Institut a microfilm* le meilleur exemplaire
qu'il lui a 6t6 possible de se procurer. Les details
de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du
point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier
une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une
modification dans la mithode normale de filmage
sont indiqu^s ci-dessous.

D
D

•

D
D
D
D

Coloured pages/
Pages de couleur

Pages damaged/
Pages endommagdas

Pages restored and/or laminated/
Pages restaurdes et/ou pelliculAes

Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/
Pages ddcoiordes, tacheties ou piqudes

Pages detached/
Pages d^tachdes

Showthrough/
Transparence

Quality of print varies/
Quality indgale de I'impression

Includes supplementary material/
Comprend du matdriel suppl^mentaire

Only edition available/
Seule Edition disponible

Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata
slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to
ensure the best possible image/
Les pages totalement ou partieilement
obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure,
etc., ont dt6 fiimdes d nouveau de fapon d
obtenir la meilleure image possible.

Additional comments:/
Commentaires suppldmentaires:

Various pagingt.

This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/

Ce document est film* au taux de reduction indiqui ci-dessous.

10X 14X 18X 99y

12X

16X

20X

OKV

30X

24X

28X

32X

Th« copy filmed her* has been reproduced thanks
to the generosity of:

IVIacOdrum Library
Carleton University

The images appearing here are the best quality
possible considering the condition and legibility
of the original copy and in keeping with the
filming contract specifications.

Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed
beginning with the front cover and ending on
the last page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, or the back co'«er when appropriate. All
other original copies are filmed beginning on the
first page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, and ending on the last page with a printed
or illustrated impression.

The last recorded frame on each microfiche
shall contain the symbol —»•( meaning "CON-
TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"),
whichever applies.

(Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at
different reduction ratioa. Those too largo to be
entirely included in one exposure are filmed
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to
right and top to bottom, as many frames as
required. The following diagrams illustrate the
method:

L'exempiaire film* fut reproduit grAce A la
g^nArositA do:

MacOdrum Library
Carleton University

Lee images suivantes ont it6 reproduites avec le
plus grand soln, compte tenu de la condition et
de la nettet* de l'exempiaire film«, et sn
conformity avec las conditions du contrat de
filmage.

Lee exemplaires orlglnaux dont la couverture en
papier est imprimie sont fiimte en commenpant
par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la
dernlAre page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration. soit par le second
plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires
originaux sont film6s en commenpant par la
premiere page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par
la derniire page qui comporte une telle
empreinte.

Un dee symboles suivants apparaitra sur la
dernlAre image de cheque microfiche, selon le
cas: le symbols — «^ signifie "A SUIVRE ", le
symbols y signifie "FIN".

Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre
filmte d dee taux de rMuction diffirents.
Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre
reproduit en un seul clichA, il est film« d partir
de I'angle sup^rieur gauche, de gauche A droite,
et de haut en bas. en prenant le nombre
d'Images nteessaire. Les diagrammes suivants
illustrent la methods.

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR

U. S. GEOGRAPHICAL AND GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OP THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN REGION

J. W. POWELL IN Charok

CONTRIBUTIONS

NORTH AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY

VOLUME II

PART I

WASHINGTON

OOVEENMENT PRINTING OFFICE
1S90

CONTHIBiiTIOM TO NORTH AMERICAU ETHNOLOOY

(•AMI I ( HUM l,tt'lt.« L

Scale : 15 miles to 1 inch.

MAP OF THE HEADWATERS OF THE KLAMATH RIVER.
By Albert S. Gatschet.

1066 531 5 01 8X

DEPAltTMKNT OP THE INTEKIOK

U. S. GEOGRAPHICAL AND GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OP THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN REGION

J. W. POWELL IN Charok

THE

KLAMATH INDIANS

SOUTHWESTERN OREGON

ALBERT SAMUEL GATSCHET

?f . 1

WASHINGTON

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
1890

CONTENTS.

PART I.

Letter of transmittal \\i

Etbnograpbiu sketch j^

Texts " J

Oraminar igg

PART II.

Dictionary— Klamath-English 1

Dictionary— Euglish-Klamath 49a

ILLUSTRATION.

Map of the headwaters of the Klamath River Frontispiece.

LFrrTER OF TRANSMITTAL.

Smithsonian Institution,

HUKKAU OK IvniNOLOOY,

Washhif/ton, D. (!., June 25, 1 8!)().

SlB: I ha"o tlio honor to tnmatnit to you my report upon tlio Khuniitli
Indians of SoiitliwoHtorn Orofron, tho result of lonjr and patituit study. It
d(!al.s with thoir bohofs, h'},''()n(ls, and traditictus, thtiir govornnioiit and social
lifo, their racial and somatic poculiaritics, v >l, mon* oxtcnsivoly, with their
lanfTiiiifro. To this tho reader is introduced by numerous ethnographic
"Texts," suggested or dictated by the Indians themselves, and accompanied
by an interlinear translation and by "Notes," a method which I regard as
tho most efficient means of becoming acquainted with any language. In
this report I have given prominenco to tho exposition of tho language,
because I consider language to la^ the most important monument of the
American Indian, Archa'ology and ethnography are more apt to acquaint
us with fads concerning the aborigines, but language, when properly inves-
tigated, gives us the i(l,m that were moving tho Indian's mind, not t.nly
recently but long before tho historic period.

Repeated and prolonged visits to tho people of the northern as well as
of the southern chieftaincy have yielded sufficient material to enable mo to
classify tho language of Ijoth united tribes as belonging to a distinct family.
In their territorial seclusion from tiio nearer Indian tribes they show anthro-
pologic differences considerable enough to justify us in regarding them as
a separate nationality.

There is probably no language spoken in North America possessed
of a nominal inflection more developed than the Klamath, although in
this particular, in the phonetic elements and in the syllabic reduplication
pervading all parts of speech, it shows many anahjgies with th.- Saluiptin

• ••

VIU

dialects. The analytic character of the language and its synthetic character
balance each other pretty evenly, much as they do in the two classic lan-
guages of antiquity.

Concerning the ethnography of both chieftaincies and the mythology
of the Modoc Indians, 1 have gathered more material than could be utilized
for the report, and I hope to publish it at a later day as a necessary sup-
plement to what is now embod'sd in the two parts of the present volume.
Very respectfully, yours,

Albert S. Gatschet.
Hon. J. W. Powell,

Director of the Bureau of Elhnolo(iy.

^^h'*

;er
u-

ed
P-

ETHI^OGEAPIIIC SKETCH

OP THE

KLAMATH PEOPLE.

THE KLAMATH INDIANS OF SOUTHWESTERN OREGON.

By Albert S. Gatschet.

ETHNOGRAPHIC SKETCH OF THE PEOPLE.

INTRODUCTION.

The Klamath people of North American Indians, the subject of this
descriptive sketch, have inhabited from time immemorial a country upon
the eastern slope of the Cascade Range, in the southwestern part of the
territory now forming the State of Oregon. That territory is surrounded
by mountain ridges and by elevations of moderate height, and watered by
streams, lakes, marshes, and pond-sources issuing from the volcanic sands
covering the soil. The secluded position of these Indians within tiieir
mountain fastnesses has at all times sheltered them against the inroads of
alien tribes, but it has also witliluild from them some of the benefits which
oidy a lively intercourse and trade with other tribes are able to confer.
The climate of that upland country is rough and well known for its sudden
changes of temperature, which in many places render it unfavorable to
agriculture. But the soil is productive in edible roots, bulbs, berries, and
timber, the limpid waters are full of fish and fowl, and game was plentiful
before the white man's rifle made havoc with it. Thus the country was
capable of supplying a considerable number of Indians with food, and they
never manifested a desire to migrate or "be removed to a better country."
The topography of these highlands, which contain the headwaters of the
Klamath River of California, will be discussed at length after a mention of
the scanty literature existing upon tliis comparatively little explored tract of
land.

Xll

ETHNOGUAPUIC SKETCH.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

Tho list below contains titles of books and articles upon the two tribes
of the Klamath people, which are of scientific interest, whereas others, also
mentioned in this list, are of popular interest only. Several of the latter I
have never been able to inspect personally. During the Modoc war a large
number of articles appeared in the periodical press, expatiating upon the
conduct of that war, the innate bravery of the Indian, the cruelty of the
white against the red race, and other commonplace topics of this sort. As
the majority of these were merely repetitions of fttcts with which every
reader of the political press was then familiar, I did not secure the titles of
all of these articles.

Abmy and Navy Journal:

A weekly periodical published in New York from 1863 to 1880. 4°. During the
Modoc war of 1872-1873 many strategic articles appeared iu it upon the con-
duct of that war, composed by a specialist.

Atwkli., William:

War correspondent of the periodical "Sacramento Record" at the time of the
Modoc war. Mentioned in Note to Texts (p. 48).

Bancboft, Hubeet Uowe:

(1) In section: "The Northern Californians" (Vol. I, pp. 326-361) of "Native

Races," where the Klamath Lake and Modoc tribi's are relcrred to in connec-
tion with other tribes. Notes and literature, pp. 443, 444.

(2) Remark on the Klamath language; list of numerals. In "Native Races,"

Vol. Ill, p. 640. (San Francisco, Cal., 1882. 8°.)

Bland, T. A. :

Life of Alfred B. Meacham, together with his lecture, "The tragedy of the lava
beds," delivered in Park Street Church, Boston, Mass. Illustrated by seven
portraits. Washington, J 883. 8°. 48 pp. (Published by the author.)

Claek, W. C:

Vocabulary of the Modoc of Southern Oregon. Manuscript, 12 pp. 4°. Collected

in 1878 at Yaueks. In the Library of the Bureau of Ethnology.

Clabke, William J.:

Bock piles and ancient dams in the Klamath Valley. American Antiquarian,
1886, pp. 40, 41. (Refers to the obstructions in the river at Liakville, etc.)

Dbakk, Samuel G.:

The Aboriginal Races of North America, etc. Fifteenth edition. By Professor
Williams. New York, 1880. 8°. Appendix: The Modocs and the Modoc
War, pp. 707-714.

BIBLIOGUAPHY.

Xlll

Fields, Captain, U. S. Army:

The Modoc War. Tbe cmises wbicli led to it and the results. C .respondence
of the Constitution, Atlanta, Ga., Sundays, October 13 and 20, 1889.
Fremont, Col. J. C:

The Exploring Expedition to the Rocky Mountains, Oregon and California, etc
New York and Auburn, 185C. Sipall 8o. 456 pp. jind ninp. (May, 1842, to
August, 1844.) Klamath Country of Oregon, pp. 283-294. Snake Indians,
p. 297. Summer Lake, p. 29(). Abert Lake, p. 292. (Passed only through
the eastern part of the country and from Klamath Marsh northward.)
Oabb, Db. William M.:

Vocabulary of the Klamath of Southern Oregon. MS. 10 leaves. 4°. 150 words.
Collected by means of the Chinook Jargon in 1864. In the Library of the
Bureau of Ethnology.

liATSCHET, ALBERT S.:

(1) Adjectives of color in Indian Languages. In American Naturalist, XIII, nn
475-485. Philadelphia, 1870.

(2) The same was, with few changes only, published in German under the head-
ing: "FarbenbenennungeninnordamerikanischenSprachen." In Zeitschrift
fur Ethnologic, Vol. XI, Berlin, 1879. The first of the seven languages spoken
of is the Klamath of Oregon.

(3) Sketch of the Klamath language of Southern Oregon. In Amer. Antiquarian

I, pp. Sl-84. (1878-1879.) '

(4) Mythologic text in the Klamath language of Southern Oregon, with transla-

tion and comments. Ibid., 1, pp. 161-166.

(5) The numeral adjective in the Klamath language of Southern Oregon. Ibid

II, pp. 210-217. (1379-1880) "'

(6) Volk und Sprache der Maklaks im siidwestlichen Oregon. In Globus, illustr.
Zeitschrift f. Liinder- und Volkerkunde, Vol. 35, No. 11, pp. 167-171 nnd
187-189. 40. Braunschweig, 1879.

(7) Three short texts were published in the First Annual Report of the Bureau of

Ethnology, Washington, 18>J1. Imp. 8°. pp. 583-587, with commentaries:
Details of a conjurer's practice; The Relapse; Sweat Lodges. (They are also
embodied in the author's Report, under "Texts."

IlADLEY, Lewis F.:

Vocabulary of the Modoc. Manuscript in three blank books, on 34 unpaged
leaves. 4°. In the Library of the Bureau of Ethnology.

Hale, IIobatio:

Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition during
the years 1838-1842, under the command of Charles Wilkes, U. S. Navy.
This work forms Vol. VI of the report of that expedition, and was published
Philadelphia, 1840. 4°. It contains abont 190 words of the "Lutuami" or
Klamath language, pp. 570-629. The words which Mr. Hale obtained for
f.ither, nine, yes, dead show that his informant was a Klamath Lake and not
,> Modoc Indian.

XIV

KTJJNOGRAI'UIC! SKETCH.

ji'!

■ it

M
i

Jackson, William Henby:

Photogriiphs of Klamath Lake and Modoc Indians wore taken by hini, and the
subjects described in his Descriptive Catalogue of the Photographs of the
IT. S. Geological Survey of the Territories, from 1869 to 1873, inclusive; F, V.
Haydeu in charge. 8°,

Latham, Eobekt G. :

Comparative vocabulary of the Lutuami, Shasti, Palaik, and Yakoii. lu "Ele-
ments of Comparative Philology," London, 18G2, pp. 407-408. Compare with
it the list he gives in "Transactions of Thilological Society of London," 1856.
pp. 74-76.

Matthews, Db. Washington:

Notes and Vocabulary of the Modoc. Obtained from Slulks or George Denny,
prisoner at Alcatraz Fort, in the harbor of San Francisco, Cal. Manuscript
pp. 50, fol.

MeaCHAM, a. B. :

(1) Wigwam and Warpath, or the Royal Chief in Chains, with portraits, etc.
Boston, John P. Dale & Co.; second edition, 1875. 8°. 700 pp.

(2) Winema and her People. Uartford, Conn., Bliss & Co., 1876. 12o. 160 pp.
MiLLEK, Joaquin :

Life amongst the Modocs: Unwritten History. Loudon, Ben tley, 1873. 8°. 400
pp. Also with the title transi)osed: Unwritten History: Life amongst the
Modocs. Illustrated from new designs. Hartford, Conn,, Amer. Publishinjr
Co., 1874. 8°. 445 pp.

MODOOS, THE, AND DEATH OF GENEBAL CANBY :

In the "Republic," of Washington, I). C, Vol. I, 118, (1873.)
MoDOC Massacke, the:

In Harper's Monthly, Vol. 47, p. 139. (1873.)
MiJLLEE, Dr. Friedbicu:

Gruudriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Vol. II. (Wien, 1882.) P. 431, the numerals
of the "Lutuami."
Nbwbebuy, J. S,, M, D. :

Geology of Pit River and Klamatii Basins. In "Report upon Explorations for a
Railroad Route from the Sacraint'nto Valley to the Columbia River ; made by
Lieut. R. S. Williamson." Washington, 1835, Vol. VI, Part II, pp. 34-39.
New York Hebald, the :

J. G. Bennett, the proprietor of this daily paper, had dispatched a special corre-
spondent to the seat of the Modoc war, who sent home many long and graphic
accounts, which were published in the Herald, accompanied by maps.
PowEBS, Stephen:

(1) Vocabulary of the Modoe, Language. Manuscript, 1 fol. sheet, 31 words. In

Library of Bureau of Ethnology.

(2) The Modok. Forms Chapter XXVII oC his " Tribes of California," printed in
J. W. Powell's Contributions to North .Vmerican Ethnology. Washington,
1877. Quarto. Vol. Ill, pp, 252-260; numerals also on p. 45.

THE HOME OF THE KLAMATH PEOPLE. jy

(3) The MoUocs. Forms No. 8 of a serial of Powers's articles: "Tho Califoniian
Indians" (1872-1874), and is contained in tbe Overland Monthly, San Fran-
cisco, Carmany & Co., 1873, Jnne nnu.ber, pp. 535-545. With a mvth "The
woman of stone" (at Nilakshi mountain). '

RussEtL, Israel C. :

A Geological Iteconnaissance in Southern Oregon. In Powell's Fourth Annual
STr M ^; ^^«'"«S'«'*1 Survey, Washington, 1.S84. I„,per. octavo: p,,.
4.33 to 464, with maps and illustrations. This article has furnished several
data to my "Ethnographic Sketch."

SUASTAS, THE, AND THEIR NEIGHBORS. 1874:

A manuscript in the possession of Mr. U. H. Bancroft, San Francisco
Turner, W.M.:

Scraps of M^J« History. In Overland Monthly of San Francisco, Vol. XI,

ViOTOE, Mrs. Frances Fuller (of Salem, Oregon):

(1) History of the Modoc War. In manuscript

(2) Indians of Oregon. In Overland Monthly of'sau Francisco, Vol. VII, 344-^52
especially p. 348. (1871.) ' "•• » ii,o44-joj,

(3) All over Washington and Oregon. San Francisco, 1872.

Williamson, Lieut. R. S., and Crook, Lieut. George H •

Vocabulary of the Klamath Language. In Reports of Explorations Vol VI
Part 1, pp. 71-72, Washington, 1857. 40. 'oraiions, Vol. VI,

GEOGRAPHY OF THE KLAMATH HIGHLANDS.

The first part in the historical and social study of a tribe or nation
must be a thorough examination of the country and of the climate (in the
widest sense of this term) in which it has grown up, for these two a<.en-
cies give character to peoples, races, languages, institutions, and Taws
1 his principle applies equally to the cultured and to the ruder or less
developed populations of the globe, for none of them can possibly hold
Itself aloof from the agencies of nature, whether acting in a sudde^ man-
ner or gradually, hke the influences of climate. The races inhabitin.. coasts

r. dtiierTff "'^"f "' p'""' p"'"'"' "'''^'''"^^^' ^-*-'""«' --"tain.;;

and valley differ one from another in having distinguishing characteristi.;
t}pes indelibly impressed upon their countenances by their different envi-
ronments. That upland and mountaineer tribes have made very different
records fro„. those of nations raised in plains, lowlands, on coasts and islands
i« a fact of which history gives us many well-authenticated instances

zvi

ETHNOGKAPHIC SKETCH.

THE HOME OF THE PEOPLE.

The homo of the Klamath tribe of southwestern Oregon lies upon the
Gustern slope of the southern extremity of the Cascade Range, and very
nearly coincides with wliat we may call the headwaters of the Klamath
River, the m<iin course of which lies in Northern California. Its limits
are outlined in a general manner in the first paragraph of the treaty con-
cluded between the Federal Government and the Indians, dated October
14, 1864, which runs as follows: "The Indians cede all the country included
between tlie w.ater-shed of the Cascade Mountains to the mountains dividing
Pit and McCloud Rivers from the waters on the north; thence along this
water-shed eastwards to the southern end of Goose Lake; thence northeast
to the southern end of Harney Lake;* thence due north to the forty-fourth
degree of latitude; thence west along this same degree to Cascade Range."
It must be remarked that the homes and hunting-grounds of two "bands"
of the Snake Indians were includud within these limits, for these people
were also made participants to the treaty.

Here, as with all other Indian tribes, the territory claimed must be
divided into two parts, the districts inclosing their habitual dwelling-places
and those embodying their hunting and fishing grounds, the latter being
of course much larger than the former and inclosing them. The habitual
haunts and dwelling-places of the tribes were on the two Klamath Lakes,
on Klamath Marsh, on Tule Lake, and on Lost River. Some of these
localities are inclosed within the Klamath Reservation, of which we will
speak below.

The Cascade Range is a high mountain ridge following a general
direction from north to south, with some deflections of its main axis. The
line of perpetual snow is at least 10,000 feet above the sea-level, and the
altitude of the highest peaks about 12,000 to 14,000 feet. On the west side
the sloping is more gradual than on the east side, where abrupt precipices
and steep slopes border the Klamath highlands and the valley of Des
Chutes River. The range is the result of upheaval and enormous volcanic

* Harney Lake is tbe westeru portiou of Malbear Lake, uud now united with it
into a single sheet of water. No\ ■W".e.-o«vi«%..

THE HOME OF THE KLAMATH PEOPLE.

XVll

eruption, the series of the principal peaks, as the Three Sisters, Mount
Jefferson, and Mount Hood, marking llie general direction of the ridge.

The formation consists of a dark and hard basaltic and andesitic lava,
which also forms numerous extinct volcanic cones and basins lying on the
east side of the range (Mount Scott, Crater Lake, craters in Sprague River
valley, etc.). This formation underlies the whole of the Klamath River
headwaters, but stratified deposits cover it at many places, consisting of
sandstone, infusorial marls, volcanic ashes, pumice-stone, etc. Prof J. S
Newberry* describes this volcanic rock as "a dark vesicular trap".

East of the basin of the Klamath Lakes and south of the Columbia
River water-shed lies an extensive territory extending to the east towards
Owyhee River, and having its largest area in Nevada and Utah. It has
been called the Great Basin of the Interior, and has an average altitude of
5,000 feet. The numerous fault-fissures intersecting it from north to south
form its principal geologic feature. In the Quaternary period long and
narrow lakes marked those faults on the obverse side of their dip; and
even now, when evaporation has left these depressions almost dry, small
bodies of water mark the site of the fissures even where erosion has oblit-
erated most traces of a fracture of the earth's crust. The most conspicuous
of these fissures in the basaltic formations are in Oregon, northern Cali-
fornia and Nevada: the valley of Quinn River, Alvord Valley with Pueblo
Valley, Guano Valley, Warner Lake with Long and Surprise Valley, Abert,
Summer, and Silver Lake Valley. A geologic reconnaissance of the country
west of this northwestern portion of the Great Basin, the central parts of
which were once filled by the Quaternary Lake Lahontan, with its enormous
drainage basin, would probably prove a similar origin for the two Klamath
Lakes with Klamath Marsh, and for Goose Lake Valley.

These two .secondary basins lie nearest the base of the great mountain
wall of the Cascade Range, and therefore receive a larger share of the
rain precipitated upon it than the more distant ones. The supply of water
received during the year being thus larger than the annual evaporation,
the excess flows off in the streams which drain the basin. There is much
analogy between the basin of the Klamath Lakes and that of Pit River;

• Pacific Railroad Reports, 1854^'65, vol. 6, part 3, pp. Si-iid.

xviii

ETHNOGRAPHIC SKETCH.

both form elongated troughs, and the waters escaping from tliem reach the
lovvlanda through deep cuts in the resistant material. Tiie difference lies
only ill this, that the drainage of the Klamath headwater basin has been
less complete than that of the Sacramento and upper Pit River; and largo
portions of its surface are still occupied by bodies of water.

The lakes which show the location of longitudinal faults are the more
shallow the more distant they are from the Cascade Range, and those which
possess no visible outlet necessarily contain brackish water, as the alkaline
materials in them are not removed by evaporation. It is a noticeable fact
that those lakes which were nejirest the seats and haunts of the Klamath
Indians are all disposed in one large circle: Klamath Marsh, Upper and
Lower Klanuith Lakes, Uliett or 'I'ule Lake, Clear or Wright Lake, Goose
Lake, Abert Lake, Summer Lake, Silver Lake with Pauline Marsh. Be-
sides this several other depressions now filled with marshes and alkali flats
show the existence of former water-basins.

rOPOGRAPHIC NOTES.

The most prominent object of nature visible from the level parts of the
Klamath Reservation is the Cascade Range with its lofty peaks. Seen from
the east shore of Upper Klamath Lake, it occupies nearly one hundred and
fifty degrees of the horizon. Though Shasta Butte, visible on the far south,
does not properly belong to it, the ridge rises to high altitudes not very far
from there, reaching its niaxinnim height in the regular pyramid forming
Mount Pitt. This pyramid is wooded on its slopes, and hides several mount-
ain lakes — Lake of the Woods, Buck Lake, and Aspen Lake — on its south-
eastern base. Following in a northern direction are Union Peak, Mount
Scott, and Mount Thielsen, with many elevations of minor size. At the
southwestern foot of Mount Scott lies a considerable lake basin about twenty
miles in circumference, and at some places two thousand feet below its rim.
The water being of the same depth, this "Crater Lake" has been pointed
out as probably the deepest lake basin in the world (1,996 feet by one sound-
ing), and it also fills the largest volcanic crater known. At its southwestern
end a conical island emerges from its brackish waters, which is formed of
scorioe — proof that it was once an eruption crater. The altitude of the

TOPOGIiAPflIC NOTES.

xiz

water's surface was found to be 6,300 feet; and this remarkable lake is but
a short distance south of the forty-third degree of hititudo. Capt. C. E.
Button, of the U. 8. Geological Survey, has made an examination of the
lake and its surroundings, and gave a short sketch of it in the weekly
"Science" of New York, February 26, 1H8(J, from which an extract was
published in the "Ausland" of Stuttgart, 1887, pp. 174, 175.

On the west side of Mount Scott and Crater Lake rise the headwaters
of the North Fork of Kogue River, which run down the western slope, and
a narrow trail crosses tlie ridge soutii of the elevation. Northeast of it and
west of Walker's Range lies a vast level plain strewed with pulverized
pumice-stone, and forming the water-shed between the affluents of the
Klamath and those of Des Chutes River, a large trii)utary of the Columbia.
Upper Klamath Lake, with its beautiful and varied Alpine scenery,
verdant slopes, blue waters, and winding shores, is one of the most attractive
sights upon the reservation. Its principal feeder is Williamson River, a
water-course rising about thirty miles northeast of its mouth. After passing
through Klamath Ma-sh it pursues its winding course south through a carton
of precipitous hills, six miles in length; then reaches a wide, fertile valley,
joins Sprague River coming from Yaneks and the east, and after a course
of about sixty miles empties its volume of water into Upper Klamath Lake
near its northern end. The elevation of this lake was found to be about
eighty feet higher than that of Little Klamath Lake, which is 4,175 feet.
Wood River, with its affluent, Crooked River, is another noteworthy feeder
of the lake, whose shores are partly marshy, partly bordered by pr^iiries and
mountains. Tlie lake is embellished by a number of pretty little islands,
is twenty-five miles long in an air-line, and varies between three and seven
miles in width. On the eastern sho.-es the waters are more shallow than on
the western.

The waters of the lake first empty themselves through Link River
(I-ulal6na), and after a mile's course fall over a rocky ledge at the town of
Linkville. From there onward the stream takes the name of Klamath
River. Passing through a marsh, it receives the waters of Little Klamath
Lake, then winds its circuitous way towards the Pacific Ocean through a
hilly and wooded country, canons, and rapids, innavigable for craft of any

ETDNOOHAPUIC 8KETC11.

coiiHiderable Hize.» ll..t HpriiijrH of Hiilpliuric tiwto flow wentwurd east of
Linkvillo, one of tliom Hliowin^ a toiiiperatiiro of 11)0° Falir.

Tlio Klaiimth Uosorvatioii iH stiultloil with a larjfo nuiiibor of isolated
mid short vohMiiiic, hill ri<lfrt)s, with a jrniiorul direction from northwest to
Honthoast. So nth of Klamath Marsh there are elevations cnlminatinjf at
n.fi.'JO and <;,0()() feet, and in Fue<ro A[<.iintain 7,020 foot are attained.
Yamsi Peak, between Klamath Marsh and Sykan Marsh (/i.lTO feet; loaches
an altitude of not less than 8,242 feet, thus rivaling many peaks of the
Cascade Range. The Ulack Hills, south of Sykan (SaikJni) 31 ush, rise to
6,410 feet, but are surpassed by several elevations south of Spraguo River,
near the middle course of which the Yaneks Agency (4,450 feet) is situated.
Sprague River (P'lafkni Ukej, the most ('onsiderable tributary of William-
Hon River, drains a valley rich in pioductive bottoms and in timber.

The basaltic ridge, which forms a spur of the Cascade Range and passes
east of Fort Klamath (I-ukak), slopes down very al)ruptly toward the Qua-
ternary lake basin, now forming a low marshy prairie and watei-ed by Wood
River (E-ukalksiifjii kokc;), which enters upper Klamath Lake near Kohashti
and by Seven iMiie Creek, nearer the Cascade Range. This basaltic; spur,
called Yanalti by the Indian.^ represents the eastern side of a huge fault-
fissure. Its altitude constantly decreases until it is crossed by a rivulet one-
eighth of a mile long, called Beetle's Rest (Tgulutcham Kshute'lsh), which
issues from a pond, drives a mill, and then joins Crooked River (Yanalti
k6ke, or Tutashtalfksini k.'.ke). This beautiful spring and stream were
selected by the Government as the site for the Klamath Agency buildings.
The old agency at Kohashti (Guhuashkshi or "Starting-place") on the
lake, three miles south, was abandoned, and a subagency established at
Yaneks. The agency buildings are hi-ld.jn in a grove of lofty pine trees.
South of these the ridge rises again and culmiruH-s in an f ievuion, called
Pi'tsua (4,680 feet). The junction oi' .■?piague and Williamson Rivers is
marked by a rock called Ktai-Tupakshi, and described in Dictionary, page
149, as of mythic fame. South of Spragne River the ledge rises' Lgain,
and, approaching close to the lake shore, forms Modoc Point, a bold head-

• I bave uot boeu able to visit pevsonalUj other imrts of the Klamutli biglilaiuls
t.jui tbe eastern shore of Upper Kliunatb Lak<', from Fort Klamath to Linkville.

TOPOGRAPHIC NOTES,

XXI

land, which oulminiites in im elovation east of it, inoafluring 6,650 feet, in
N(hikH Mountain (Nflakshi, "Oaybreak"), on tho lake shore, and in Swan
Lake Point (7,200 foot), about eight niiloH from Khunath Lake. A deep
ihjprossion south of this height is Swan Lake Valley (4,270 foot), and a
high hill north of tho two, near Sprague River, is called Saddle Mountain
(6,976 feet), Yiinoks Hutte, with a summit of 7,277 feet, lies midn-av
between the headwaters of Sprague llivor and tho Lost River Valley, A
long and steep ridge, called the Plum Ilills, rises between Xdaks and tho
town of Linkville.

We now arrive at what is called the "Old Modoc Country." The main
seat of the Modoc people was the valley of Lost River, tho shores of Tule
and of Little Klamath Lake, Lost River follows a winding (MMirse about as
long as that of Williamson River, but lies in a more genial climate. The soil
is formed of sandstone interstratified with infusorial marls. Niishaltkaga is
one of its northern side valleys. At the Natural Bridge (Tilhuaiitko) the.so
strata have been upheaved by a fault, so that Lost River passes underneath.
The sandstone is of volcanic origin, and contains pumice and black scoria
in rounded masses, often of the size of an e-rg. Tho largest part of Tule
Lake, also called Rliott Lake and Modoc Lake (Moatak, M<)atokni d-ush),
lies within the boundaries of California. It is drained by evaporation only,
has extinct craters on its shores, and the celebrated Lava Beds, long inhab-
ited by the Kombatwash Indians, lie 0!i its southern end.

Clear Lake, also called Wright Lake (by the Modocs, Tchap.s;to), is a
crater basin, with the water surface lying considerably below the surround-
ing country. Its outlet is a tributary of Lost River, but is filled with water
in the cooler season only. Little or Lower Klamath Lake (Aka-ushkni
e-ush) is fed by Cottonwood Creek, and on its southern side had several
Indian settlements, like Agawesh,^ It has an altitude of 4,175 feet, and
belongs to the drainage basin of Klamath River. South of these lakes
there are considerable volcanic formations, which, however, lie beyond the
pale of our descriptive sketch.

Peculiar to this volcanic tract is the froqiieiit phenomenon of the pond
sources (wijlwash, nushaltkaga). These sources are voluminous springs of
limpid water, which issue from the ground at the border of the ponds with

XXll

ETHNOGRAPHIC SKETCH.

a strong bubbling motion, without any indication of other springs in the
vicinity. They are met with in soil for ned of volcanic sands and detritus,
have a rounded shape with steop borders, and iotm the principal feeders
of tiie streams into which they empty. Ponds like these mainly occur in
wooded spots. Some of them have a d'ameier of one hundred feet and
more, and are populated by fish and ampiiibians of all kinds.

The lake region east of the Reservation was often visited in the hunting
and fishing season by the Klamath Lake, Modoc, and especially by the
Snake Indians. Goose Lake was one of the principal resorts of the Snake
and the Pit River Indians; and even now the numerous rivulets flowing
into it make its shores desirable to American stockmen and settlers. Warner
(or Christmas) Lake, fully thirty-five miles in length, was once enlivened
by the troops camping at Fort Warner, on its eastern .iide.* Chewaukan
Marsh (Tchua^e ni) has its name from the tchua or "water potato", the
fruit of Sagittaria, and is by its outlet connected with Abert Lake.

Tl.e Indians of tlie Reservation annually repair about the month of June
to Klamath Marsh (E-ukshi) to fish, hunt, and gather berries and w6kash
or pond-lily seed, which is one of their staple foods. Its surface is some-
what less than that of Upper Klamath Lake. Its shores are high on the
southeastern, low and marshy on the northwestern side. Water appears at
single places only, insufficient to warrant the marsh being called, as it often
is, a lake.

The Oregonian portions of the country described belong politically to
Klamath and to Lake Counties, the county seats of which are Linkville
and Lakevie»v, on the northern end of Goose Lake. The latter place also
contains a United States land office.

FLORA AND FAUNA.

Vegetation usually gives a characteristic stamp to a country, but in
arid districts, as those of the Klamatii highlands, it is rather the geological
features wliich leave an impress on our minds The further we recede from

• Goose and Wariiir Lakes ure desitribi'.l in Lieutennut Wheeler's Report, Annual
Report of Ctiief of Entfineers, ISTS 8°. A|i|>eiiaix N X, pp. II.VIJO. Goose Lake,
by Stephen Powers, in "A Pou.v Riilu on Pit River," Overland AJoutbly of San Fran-
cisco, October, lt74, pp. 342-351.

FLORA AND FAUNA.

XXUl

the Cascade Range and its more humid atmosphere the less vegetation is
developed. The lake shores and river banks, when not marshy, produce
the Cottonwood tree and several species of willows, and the hills are covered
with the yellow or pitch pine and the less frequent western cedar. In the
western parts of the Reservation large tracts are timbered with pitch 2)ine,
which seems to thrive exceedingly well upon the volcanic sands and de-
tritus of the hilly region. These pines (kd'sh) are about one hundred feet
in height, have a brownish-yellow, very coarse bark, and branch out into
limbs at a considerable height above the ground. Tiiey stand at intervals
if twenty to fifty feet from each other, and are free from nianzanita bushes
and other undergrowth except at the border of tiie forest, leaving plenty of
.Sjjace for the passage of wagons almost everywhere. A smaller pine species,
Pimis contorta (kjipka, in Modoc kiiga), which forms denser thickets near the
water, is peeled by the Indians to a height of twenty feet when the sap is
ascending, in the spring of the year, to use the fiber-bark for food. Up high
in the Cascade Range, in the midst of yellow pines, grows a conifera of taller
dimensions, the sugar-pine- (ktt'leam ko'sh). Tlie hemlock or white pine
(wa'ko), the juniper (ktii'lo), and the mountain inaliogany (yi'ikmalam) are
found in and south of S])rague River Valle}-.

The lake shores and river banks produce more edible fruits and berries
than tiie marshy tracts; and it is tlie sliores of Klamath and Tule Lakes
which mainly supply the Indian with the tule reed and scirpus, from which
tiie women manufecture mats, lodge-roofs, and basketry. The largest tule
species (nu'i-i) grows in the water to a height of ten feet and over, and in
the lower end of its cane furnishes a juicy and delicate bit of food. Woods,
river sides, and such marshes as Klamath Marsh, are skirted by various
kinds of bushfec, supplying berries in large quantities. The edible l)nlbs,
as camass, ko'l, I'ba, ipo, and otiiers, are found in the prairies adjacent.
Pond-lilies grow in profusion on lake shores and in the larger marshes,
especially on the W6kash Marsh west of Linkville, and en Klamatii :^Iarsh,'
as previously mentioned. Tlie Lost River Valley is more productive in
many of these spontaneous growths than the tracts within the Reservation.
It is claimed by the Klamath Lake Indians that they employ no drugs
of vegetal origin for the cure of diseases, because their countr/ is too cold

ZZIV

ETHNOGRAPHIC SKETCH.

to produce them. This is true to a certain extent; but as there are so many
plants growing there that narcotize the fish, liow is it that the country
produces no medical plants for the cure of men's diseases? Of the plant
shle'dsh, .it least, they prepare a drink as a sort of tea.

The fauna of tlie Klamath uplands appears to be richer in species than
the veeetiii jrrowth. What first strikes the traveler's attention on the eastern
shore of the Upper Lake is the prodigious number of burrows along the
sandy road, especially in the timber, varying in size from a few inches to a
foot in diameter. They are made by chipnmnks of two species, and others
are the dens of badgers, or of the blue and the more connnon brown squirrel.
The coyote or prairie-wolf makes burrows also, but tliis animal has lately
become scarce.. No game is so frequent as the deer. This is either the
black-tail deer, (shua-i, Cerv us columhiumis), or the white tail deer (mushmush,
Cariacus viryhtianiis macrurus), or the mule-deer (pakolesh, Ccrvus macrotis).
Less frequent is the antelope (tclie-u, Aiitilocnpra amcrlcmia), and most other
four legged game nuist be sought for now upon distant heights or in the
deeper canons, as the elk (vun), the bear in his three varieties (black, cin-
namon, and grizzly; witii'm, naka, lu'k), the lynx (shioa), the gray wolf
(kii'-utchish), the silver or red fox (wan), the little gra\' fox (kc'tclikatch),
the cougar (tiisliitch), and the mountain sheep (ko-il). Beavers, otters,
minks, and woodchucks are trapped by expert Indians on the rivers, ponds,
and brooklets of the interior.

The shores cif the water-basins are enlivened by innumerable swarms
of water-fowls, (mii'miikli), as ducks, geese, herons, and cranes. Some can
be .seen day by day swimming about gracefully or fishing at Modoc Point
(Nilakshi) and other promontories, while others venture uj) the river courses
and fly over swam})y tracts extending far irdaiid. Among the ducks the
more common are the mallard (we'ks), the long-necked kilidsliiks; among
the geese, the brant (lalak) an<l tlie white goose (wa(wash). Other water-
birds are the white swan (ki'ush), the coot or mudlien (tuhush), the loon
(tAplal), the pelican (yamal or kumal), and the pinguin (kuftsia). Fish-
hawks and bald-headed eagles (yau;jal) are circling about in the air to
catch the fish which are approaching the water's surface unaware of danger.
Marsh-hawks and other raptores infest the marshes and are lurking there

THE ASPECTS OP THE (JOUNTRY.

XXV

for small game, as field-mice, or for sedge-hens and smaller birds. The
largest bird of the country, the golden eagle, or Californian condor (p'laf-
wash), has become scarce. Blackbirds exist in large numbers, and are very
destructive to the crops throughout Oregon. Other birds existing in several
species are the owl, lark, woodpecker, and tiie pigeon. Migratory birds, as
the humming-birds and mocking-birds, visit the Klamath uplands, especially
the Lost River Valley, and stop there till winter.

The species of fish found in the country are the mountain trout, the
salmon, and several species of suckers. Of the snake family the more fre-
quent species are the garter-snake (wishink), the black-snake (vvaraenigsh),
and the rattlesnake (kc^-ish, kl'sh). Crickets and grasshoppers are roasted
and eaten by the Indians, also the chrysalis of a moth (pul/uantch).

THE ASPECTS OF THE COUNTRY.

Elle cat riante ainsi que I'ltalie,
Terrible ainsi que les rives (In Nord.

The Klamath ])lateau presents very different aspects and produces very
different impressions, according to the observer's condition and the character
of the localities he enters or beholds. Travelers coming over the monoto-
nous rocky or alkaline plains extending between Malheur '^ ake and the
Reservation are gladdened at the sight of rivulets and springs, imparting a
fresher verdure to the unproductive soil, and greet with welcome the pine-
ries which they behold at a distance. Feelings of the same kind penetrate
the hearts of those who enter tlie highlands from tiie Pit River country of
California when they come to the well-watered plains of Lo.st River after
crossing the desolate lava formations lying between. The scenery can be
called !,mml only there, where the towering ridge of the Cascade Mountains
and the sliining mirrors of the lakes at their feet confront the visitor, sur-
prised to see in both a reproduction of Alpine landscapes in the extreme
West of America.* The alternation of jagged and angular outlines with long
level ridge^ on the horizon suggests, and the peculiar lava color retained by

o.JZ^\^^'^^ pyramidal cono of Mount Pitt is a rather accurate .luplicateof the

XXVI

ETHNOGRAPHIC SKETCH.

the hij^hest peaks confirm the eruptive origin of these mountains. The pure
azure sky and the perpetual silence of nature reigning in these uplands add
impressions of grandeur which it is impossible to describe. Tlie sense of
the beautiful has no gratification in the austere forms of these mountains,
but the blue and limpid waters of the lakes, their numerous islands, and
the lovely green of the sliores, delight it in the highest degree.

The other eminences perceptible on the horizon lack the boldness of
outline seen upon the main ridge, and with their dusky timbers deeply
contrast with it. They seem monotonous and commonplace, and people
easily impressed by colors will call them somber. The open country, whether
marshes, plains, clearings, meadows, or bare hills, presents an extremely
bleak aspect, especially wlien under the influence of a hot summer sun.
Its unvarying yoUowisii hue, produced by the faded condition of the coarse
grasses, renders it monotonous.

Tlie solitude and serenity of these places exercise a quieting influence
upon tlie visitor accustomed to the noisy scenes of our towns and cities.
Noiselessly the brooks and streams pursue their way tlu-ough the purifying
volcanic sands; the murmur of the waves and the play of the water-birds,
interrupted at times by the cry of a solitary bird, are the only noises to
break the silence. Beyond the few settlements of the Indian and away
from the post-road, scarcely any trace of the hand of man reminds us of the
existence of human beings. There Natui'e alone speaks to us, and those
who are able to read history in the formations disclosed before him in the
steeper ledges of this solitary corner of the globe will find ample satisfaction
in their study.

The Klamath plateau, though productive in game, fish, and sundry
kinds of vegetable food, could never become such a great central resort of
Indian populations as the banks of Columbia River. The causes for this
lie in its secluded position and chiefly in its climate, whicli is one of abrupt
changes. Tlie dryness of the atmosphere maintains a clear sky, which ren-
ders the summer days intensely hot; the sun's rays become intolerable in the
middle of the day at places where they are reflected by a sandy, alkaline,
or rocky soil and not moderated by passing breezes. Rains and hailstorms
are of rare occurrence, and gathering thunder clouds often dissolve or "blow

LIST OP CAMPING PLACES.

XXVIl

over,"8() that the running waters never swell, but show the same water level
throughout the yet^r. Nights are chilly and really cold, for the soil reflects
against the clear sky all the heat received from the sun during the day, and
the dry night air pervading the highlands absorbs all the moisture it can.
Winters are severe; snow begins to fall early in November, and in the later
months it often covers the ground four feet high, so that the willow lodges
(not the winter houses) completely disappear, and the inmates are thus shel-
tered from the cold outside. Tiie lakes never freeze over entirely, but ice
forms to a great thickness. The cold nights produce frosts whicli are very
destructive to crops in the vicinity of the Cascade Range, but are less harm-
ful to gardening or cereals at j)laces more distant; and in Lost River Valley,
at Yiineks — even at Linkville — melons, turnips, potatoes, and other vegeta-
bles rarely fail. The mean annual temperature as observed some years ago
at Fort Klamath was 40.47° Fahr.

There are several instances in America where highlands have become
centers of an aboriginal culture. Such instances are the plateaus of Ana-
huac, Guatemala, Bogota, and of Titicaca Lake. They contained a dense
jiopulation, more cultured than their barbaric neighbors, whom they suc-
ceeded in subjugating one after the other through a greater centralization
and unity of power. The Klamath highlands can be compared to the pla-
teaus above named in regard to their configuration, but they never nour-
ished a population so dense that it could exercise any power analogous to
that al)ove mentioned. Moreover, there was no intellectual and centralizing
element among these Indians that could render them superior to their neigh-
bors, all of whom maintained about the same level of culture and intelligence

TOPOGRAPHIC LIST OF CAMPING PLACES,

To form a correct idea ot the dissemination of Indians in this sparsely
inhabited country, the following lists of camping places will furnish service-
aide data. The grounds selected by the Miiklaks for camping places are
of two kinds: either localities adapted for establishing a fishing or hunting
camp of a few days' or weeks' duration or for a whole summer season, or
they are places selected for permanent settlement. Winter lodges (lulda-
mal.^ksh) or slab houses are often built at the latter places; whereas the

xxvm

ETHNOGRAPHIC SKETCH.

transitory camps are marked by frail willow lodges (li'itchash, stina'sh) or
other light structures. Indian camps are as a rule located near rivers,
brooks, marshes, springs, or lakes. Hunters generally erect their lodges in
convenient placus to overlook a considerable e.xtent of territory.

In the lists below the order in which the localities are mentioned indi-
cates the direction in which they follow each other. I obtained them from
the two interpreters of the reservation, Dave Hill and Charles Preston;
and as regards the old Modoc country, from Jemiie I^ovwer, a Modoc girl
living in the Indian Territory, who remembered tliese jdaces from her youth.
The grammatic analysis of the local names will in many instances be found
in the Dictionary.

CAMPING PLACES ON KLAMATH MARSH.

The permanent dwellings upon this marsh have all been abandoned;
but the Modocs and Klamatii Lakes, together with some Snake Indians from
Sprague River, resort there ainiually, when the pond-lily seed and the ber-
ries ripen, for a period of about six weeks. Its shores were ])ermanently
inhabited in 1853, when visited by the United States exploration party under
Lieutenants Williamson and Abbott, and even later. Dave Hill's list below
follows the localities in their toixigrajjliic order from northeast to southwest
and along the southeastern elevated shore of the marsh, which at some places
can be crossed on foot. A few rocky elevations exist also on the northeast
end of the marsh.

Kata'gsi ''stuinjiy bushes."

Tiiktiikli.slikslii "n'ddish spot."

Yaukf'liim Lashi "oajjle wiiij,'."

YiisliLaiiifi'ds "projecting willow."

Siiuklisli La wish "sweat lodge on promon-
tory."

Jlbrtknalsi "at the withered tree."

Kunitchiiyiiksi "at the old man's rock;"
a man-shaped rock forinatiou near the
open waters of the marsh and visible at
some distance.

Lalawaaje'iii "slaty rock."

Takt^ish "cricket noise."

T--sdaara PiSwas "skunk's dive."

Ktal^Wasi "rocky hollow."

Sniils^eni "at the rock-pile."
Liilpakat "chalk quarry."
Kapfjfi'ksi "dwarf-pine thicket."
Wiliitas^iiiii "water moving through ponds

perceptibly."
Tcliokeam Psish " pumice-stone uose."
Kaksi " raven's nest."
Iwal " land's end."
Ln.vCuisti "within the circle."
YaukClam Siiolash " eagle neat."
Tcbikas^VVali'ikish "bird- watch;" secreted

spot where hunters watch their feathered

game.
Tiiilkat "at the small rail pyramid."
Awaluash^g'ni "at the island."

"tt

i^i^

LIST OF CAMPING PLACES.

ZXIX

T^ahiiiiKiplis " back away from the west;"
probably referring to a turn of the shore-
line.
Wiik-Taliksi " white piuo on water-line."
Wfshinkani Tinnash "drowni'il snake;"
place where a garter snake was found
drowned in the opeu waters of the ,
luarsh. '

Lfe'fi'm. A-iishi "coal lake," with waters

looking as black as coal.
Si'unde "at the mouth or outlet."
Nusksi "skull-place;" a human skull was
once found there. This is one of the spots
where the natives submerge their dug-out
canoes in the mud or sand at the buttoin
of tiie lake for the wintry season.

Some of the above places near the outlet are also mentioned in Pete's
Text on the "Seasons of the Year," and the following additional may be
inserted here from it (74, 15-17):

LCmd-isham Nute'ks "impression of thun-
derbolt."
LAl'laks "steep little eminence."

St6palsh=tama'd8 "peeled pine standing

aloiiH."
KAk^^Kshiiwaliiiksh "raven on the pole."

CAMPS ALONG WILLIAMSON RIVER.

In this list Dave Hill enumerated old camps and present locations of
lodges (1877) on both sides of Williamson River, from the lower end of
Klamatii Marsh (4,.^47 feet) to Upper Klamath Lake. The river runs for
six miles or more tin-ough a ravine about two hundred feet deep, and the
road follows it on the east side, leading over the hills. The wigwams are
built in proximity to the river coarse. At its outlet Williamson River forms
a delta, projecting fai out into the lake, and filled with bulrushes.*

Kultam VVa'sh "otter's home."
Stilakgish "place to watch fish."
Y.laga "little willows." Here the road
from Linkville to Fort Klamath crosses
Williamson Kiver on a wooden bridge

KakagO'si "at the ford."

Samka-ush^ii'ni "cliffs iu the river;" a
Usliing ])lace.

"Yalealant "clear waters."

Tanua=LutiIsh "flat rocksnnder the water."

Ka'k=Taliksh, or Ka'k=Talish "twin rocky
pillars."

Awalokdksaksl "at the little island."

Mbiishaksham VVa'sh " where obsidian is
found."

Tfdlmakstant (supply: KtAi-Tupd,k8i) "on
the west side of (Standing Rock)."

Tchpindksaksi "at the graveyard;" ceme-
tery and ancient cremation ground of
the fi-ukshikui.

Ktd-iti "place of rocks."

Tchikfisi "at the submerged spot."

built by the United States Government;
liere is also the center of the Indian set-
tlements on Williamson Uiver.
Kuls^Tge-ush, or Kulsam=Tge-us "badger

standing in the water."
Witii'mamtsi "where the black bear was."
KuyAm^Skii-iks "crawfish trail."
SlaukoshksOksi, or Shlankoshkshu'kshi

"where the bridge was."
Kokdksi "at the brooklet."
Kuydga, a former cremation place in th^
vicinity of Yd aga.

• Compare Prof.wor Newberry's description, pp. 38, yy, and Lieutenaut Williamson's report (part I), p. 68.

XXX

ETHNOGRAPHIC SKETCH.

CAMPINO PLACES AND OTHER LOCALITIES ABOUND UPPBB KLAMATH LAKB.

Places situated on tlie lake are as follows:
SkohuAsliki, coiuiiioiily called Koliashti, ShuyakO'ksi or "jumpiug place."
Kuluii'isliti by Americans and Iiulian.s,
"starting place of canoes, boats." For-
merly location of the United States

Agency; now uumberiug four or five
Indian lodges.

Tulisli, tisbing place near the outlet of
Williamson Kiver: "spawning place."

Tokua or Ti'ikua, near the outlet of Will-
iamson River. From this the neighbor-
ing pai t of the lake is sometimes called
Ti'ikua Lake.

Nflakshi: lit. "dawn of day;" is now used
to designate Modoc Point also, though it
properly refers to the Nilaks mountain
ridge only.

A-ushme, an island in the lake near Modoc
Point.

lulaloiia, or Yulalrtnan, Link Kiver above
the falls at Link ville; lit. " rubbiug, mov-
ing to and fro." The name was after-
wards transferred to the towu of Link-
ville, which is also called Tiwish^e'ni
" where the cascade noise is."

U^otuash, name of an island near Link-
ville.

Wi'ikaksi Spiiklish, a ceremonial sweat-
lodge on west side of the lake.

Kunibat " in the rocks." Locality on west-
ern side of lake, c.dled Rocky Point.

Lukuashti "at the hot water." Name for
the hot sulphuric sprinKS about half a
luile east and northeast of the town of
Linkville, and of some others west of
that towu.

EMINENCES ABOUND UPPBB KLAMATH LAKE.

Of the majority of these names of hilLs and mountains I could not
olitain the English name, the usual excuse being that they had only Indian
names.

Ill Cascade Range:
Giwash, or Gcwash, Mount Scott; Giwash

6 ush, Crater LaKc, in » depression west

of Mount Scott.
Kukume'kshi "at the caves or hollows;''

northwest of the Agency.
Kiikilsam Yaina "mountain of the great

blue heron;" northwest of Agency.
MO'dshi Yaina or Long Pine; lit. "on the

large mountain;" nio'dshi or mu'nptchi

is a compound of the adjective muUi,

great, large.
Mbdush Sbnekash "bosom burntthrough,''

legendary name of a mountain located

Ke'sh yainatat, Mount Pitt, a high mount-
ain lying south west of the Agency. TLe
ModocscallitMClaiksi "steepu«»"""'' ihe
Klamath Lake term signifies '■ .
the mountain," snow-capped peak,
in the warmest month.s Mount Pitt is f ,
of snow.

Til^o-it, an eminence south of Mount Pitt;
lit. "drip water."

Wiikakshi,Ka'kashti,Tchiutchiwilsamtch,
mountains bordering the southwestern
portion ot Upper Klamath Lake.
On the east shore of the lake:

Wdtanks, a hill on southeastern side of the
lake.

west southwest of the Agency; mbd-ush ; Kdlalks, hill near Captain Ferree's house,
here refers to a piece of buckskin serv- I south of the JSilaks ridge. A ceremonial
ing to cover the bosom. \ sweat-lodge stands in the vicinity.

LIST OF CAMPING PLA0B8.

XXXI

Nflaksi, lit. "daybreak;" a point of the
steep ridge of tlio same name extending
from Modoc Point, on east side of lake,
along the slioie, and thence in the direc-
tion of Lost Kiver Valley.

Wdlpi, Mrtyant, T6plani6ni, L(i,vit: other
elevations of the Nilaksi hill ridge.

Pftsua, hill ridgo extending north of Will,
iamson Rirer.

Ydnalti or YAnaldi, a steep volcanic range
stretching due north from the Agency to
Fort Klamath and beyond it. It is the
continuation of the Pitsua ridge.

Eukalksini Spu'klish is un ancient cere-
monial sweat-lodge near Wood River,
and not very distant from Fort Klamath
(I-ukiik).

CAMPING PLACES IN SPBAOUE IIIVEU VALLEY.

Of this portion of the reservation I submit two separate lists of local
nomenclature. 'J1ie more extensive one I obtained from Charles Preston,
who remembered more place names because he then was employed at the
Ydneks subagency, which lies near the center of the Sprague" River settle-
ments. Botli lists follow the course of the river from east to west. Both
Sprague River and the settlements above Ydneks are frequently called
Flaf, "above".

Charles Preston's list :

Tsuitidkshi "dog-rose patch," near head-
waters.

ULIIkshi "Cottonwood."

Pdlau fi-ush "dry lake;" a large Hat rock
is near the river.

Wel^kag-Knuklekshakshi "at the stoop-
ing old woman," called so from a rock
suggesting this name.

Aish Tkaliks "column rock."

Tsd^eak Tkawals "standing boy," from a
rock of a boy like shape.

Suitstis.

Wiiksi "fire-place;" at same place as Suit-
stis.

Tchii'kCle Tsiwish "running with blood;"
a little spring with reddish water; a set-
tlement of Snake Indians.

Kos Tuets "standing pine;" settled by
Snake Indians.

Kawamkshi'ksh "eel fishery."

Suawilti "ford, cros8ing-i)lace." I

Lftldam Tchl'ksh "winter village."

Spawatxksh, on bank of Sprague River.

j Yainaga "Little Butte," a hill at the sab-

agency.
I Yainakshi, Yaneks, "at the Little Butte;"
I location of subagency buildings, two

miles from Sprague River, on left-hand

side.

Tatdtnii, a butte or hillock in the vicinity.
Liinikosh "willows;" name of a creek,

called by Americans "Whiskey Creek."
Skiiwashkshi, or Skii'wash, "projecting

rocks "

KiVtai, name of a little water spring.

Li'ilnkuashti "at the warm si)ring."

Tchdkawetch.

Kawa ".el spring;" inhabited by Modocs.

York ash.

U^vashksh "in the coomb."

Kiiktsanikshi, name of a spring and areek

at the subagency.
Te-uiiolsh "spring running down from a

hill."
U^ad6 ush "planting a willow." (?)
Shlokdpashkshi "at the house cavity."

xxxu

ETHNOORArniO SKETCH.

A\viiI6kat "Ht Littlti Isliimi," in Sprngiio

Hiver.
Nt'ukish "coiiHiieiico."

Dare II ill's lint:

[Imhtisli LiK'lkM "Littlo Sucker Fishery," j
on lu'iidwators. j

Kiiilii lYiliiiii, for Ktii'lu Tkalamnish "ju-
nilii'r tvw Ntautliiig on an ominenw." '

Hopats "imssaKo" to tlie tiinluir. I

liiildan* Tclii'kfli "wiutor housos." i

Tsiinodanksh "(.■oiilhuMifo.''

Vainakshi "at tlio Small Hnttt'.'"

StdktakH "ond of liill."

KPniutchani LAtHa.-k.slii "attlioold man's

liousf," naniu of a hill; kt^mi'itcham in

Haiil to Ntantl here for K'miikiiaitsam.
Kiiwam,|iini "eel .s|>iinpr."
K<^ka,)')ini,or Kokiiksi "at tho creok."
Kiima'kNi "at the cav«."
KAtNUiits "rocks slopint; into tho river."
Nakosksiks "river dam, river barrage,"

eHtalili«hed for the capture of tish.
Ktai Tdpaksi, or Ktii i Topoks, "standing

rock," situated near Junction of Spraguo

with Williamson River.

CAMPING I'LACES OF TUB MODOU COUNTltV.

Oil Lost liivor, clost' to Tiilo Lake, wore tho following ciinipiiifr places:
Wii-islm, whero Lost liivor was (tosscmI, throo or four iiiilos iionhwost of
tho lake, and iioar tho liills which cuhniiiato in Laki i'oak; AVatchaiush-
wash, a villaj-o upon tho river, close to the lake; ■Nakosh;(o'ui "at the
dam," at the mouth of Tulo Lako.

On 'l\ilo Lako, also called Modoc Lako, Rhott Lake: Pash/a, or Vanxa,
nauio of a crook and a littlo Modoc villaoe on the northwest shore, whoso
inhabitants wore callod lVish;januash ; -Kalolk, camp near lV.s;^a, on north-
ern shore ;Lc-ush, on uorthorn shore; Wolwash;K(rni "at the large sprinj.-,"
east side of the lake, where Miller's house is; AVuka;Ko'ni "at the coomb,"
one mile and a half east of Welwash;^o'ni ; Ko'sh-Laktchuish "where ip'o
grows (on rocks)," on tho southeastern side of the hike ; • Kiimbat "in the
caves," on the rocky southern side of the lako, once iiduibitod by about
one hundred Kumbatwash, who wore mainly Modocs, with admixture of
Pit Kiver, Shasti, and Klamath Lako Indians.

On Littlo or Lower Klamath Lako: Agawesh, a permanent Modoc
settlement upon what is now called "Fairchild's farm," southwestern shoi-o;
•Ke-utchish;jo'ni "whore the wolf-rock stands," upon Hot Creek ; fcjputuish-
Xe'ni "at tho diving place," lying close to Ke-utchish;^eni, where young men
were plunging in cold water for initiation ; •Shapash;^e'ni "where sun and
moon live," camping place on the southeastern shore, where a crescent-
shaped rock is stx-vnding: 8tuikish;^(-'ni "at the canoe bay," on north side
of the lake.

inuiAL aviiur ^Lom.

TRIHAL NAMES AND SUHDIVIHIONS.

XXllU

The two bochoH of IndiuMH tormi,.,r tho Hubject of tho proHont roport
are people o tho.une ato.k and lineu^o iUun.rU n.,-.,, I.u.,ua,., institutil,,.,
custo.nH. and l.ab.tat. In la,.,n.a,ro thoy radic-ally difler fVo.n tho Mc.ij,bbo.-
...^ pooploH called Hunk., U„.„o River, Slmsti. ...ul Pit, KivxT In.li^uH, uh
well a« from th. other inl.abitant^ ot Orcyon, (.'alilornia, an.l Nevada

1' or the A7««.,^/. ,>ro,./e of rtouthwc-Htern Oregon there exi.tH no ,.e,.eral
tnbal name con.prehondin,. the two princ-ipal bodies, except- Maklaks, In,lia.
riuH tenu whe.i prononnced /,,/ t/<e,nsel,>rs with a lin.nutl k ba^ a reHe.-tive

us Khunath Lake l„d.an«; when prononnced with our conunon k it n.eans
Indian ot any tribe whatsoever, and ma„, person of any nationalitv. The
denvafon of n.aklaks will be found in the Dictionary. I have rl-frained
^oru us.n, . in the title and body of n.y work to de^.nate these O^
ludans because .t would be invariably n.ispronounced as n.ii'kliiks by^he
wue people, and the peculiar sound of the k would bo nuspronounced'also.
ro all the n snnp y Kl.anatk Indian, or KlanuUl. would lead to confusion,
tl e vv^nte people upon the Pacific coast call the Shasti. the Karok or Ara
the llupa, the ^ urok <,rv\b'kwn Indians on Khunath River of (.-alifornia the
.hast, upon the Sdet. Reservation, Oregon, and our Maklaks all.Kla.il 1

Z 7f ':;"^"'^^"'"" ^^ ^^'^" ''^ ^=^"""^""^ '^"1'^"-'-- '-''^i- ^
; Southwestern Oregon." The Warn. Spring and other Sahaptin

nd.ans possess a .^enenc nan.e for all the Inaians livin-. upon this rese v.-

t-n and :ts v.cunty: ■Ai-.i^alunm, abbr. Af^spalo, Afkspa u, , W "/ 1

^U>.un. fron. the innun.rable rodents peopling that' pin;iol.U ^

the K .unatl Lake people. The name of Klanutth or/n/unat, Tla.net River
prooably or.gnntted at its mouth, in the-Al/kwa language

I he two main bodies forming the Klamath people are (1) the Klamath
Lake Indians; (2) the ilodoc Indians. ^'amatli

XXXIV

ETIIJSUUHAI'IIIU SKKTUU.

lUK KLAMATH LAKU INUIANH.

The Kluiniitli Lake IndiiUiH iiiiiiihur iiioiu tliiiii twicu as mtviiy uh the
Modoc Iiidiiiiis. Thoy speak tlio northoni dialect and t'orm the iiortlioni
chiet'taiiicy, tl.o IkmuI chief residiii}^ now at Y)i-a<,'a, on Williaiimon liiver.
'riioir dwelHiij^H are scattered aK>iijf the eastern sliore of Upper Klamath
Lake (K-ush) and upon the lower course of Williaujson (Kf'tJ^etat) and
Spra{,'UO liivoi's (P'hif). They call themselveH -R-ukshikni nniklaks, abbre-
viated into •I'^-ukrthikni/K-ukskni, -A-nksnl pi'ople at the lake. 'The Shasti
near Yreka, C/al., call them Anksiwash, some western Shasti: Makaftserk;
by the I'it River Indians they are callinl Alanunitiiakt (sh, from Ali'immif,',
their name for IJpptu- Klamath Lake; by the Kalapuya Lidians, Athlii-
ineth; by the Snake Lidians, Sayi.

According to locality the Klamath l^ake people may be subdivided into
the following groups: The people at the agency; the people at Kohiishti, at
Va-aga, at Modoc I'oint and upon Sprague River. Their settlements at
Klamath Marsh, at Nflaks and at Linkvillo are now abandoned; the last
luimed (Yulal6na) was held by them and the Modocs in common.

THE MODOO INDIANS.

The Modoc Lidians speak the southern dialect, and before the war of
1872-1873 formed the sourhern division or chieftaincy, extending over Lost
River Valley (K<')ketat) and the shores of [..ittle Klamath and Tide Lake.
Of their number one hui.dred and fifty or nioie live on middle course of
Sprague River; some have taken up lands in their old homes, which they
cultivate in their quality of American citizens, and the rest are exiles upon
the Quapaw Reservation, Lidian Territory. They call themselves Moatokni
niiiklaks, abbreviated M(jatokni, Md'dokni, Mo'dokish, I'lc'ntu at Moatak, this
being the name of Modoc or Tule Lake: ''in the extreme south." A portion
of the Pit River Lidians calls them Lutu.'imi, "/«Ar," by which Tule Lake is
meant; aiiothei-, through a difference of dialect, -Lutmawi. The Slitv ti
Indians of Yreka call thenrP^jinai, the Bahaptins upon and near Columbia
River call tlienrMowatak, the Snake Indians,. Saidoka.

The more Important local divisions of this p('f)ple were the groups at
Little Klamath Liik(- (Agaweshkni), tli«Ki'ijnbatwash and tho'F*.4s;(antiash

TKIHAL MCHDIVIHIONH.

XXX V

at Tiilu I.ake, tin;- NiMlmltxi'igakni or "Spriiij^-pi-oph." nojir Hoiimizii, and
the*I*lantiii or "U|)laii(loirt" on Spiagiie Uivur, at and abovo YAik-Icb. Vox-
nieily tlio ModocM miifjod as far wost nH Hiittc Lake (Na-iiki) and Hiittc
Creek, in Siskiyou County, CJalifornia, ahout Mixtuon iniluB west of Little
Klaniatii Lake, whore tlioy Hsiied and dug the camaas root.

THR BNAkE INOIANH.

A body of Snake Indians, nunihoring one hundred and forty-five indi-
viduals in 1HH8, is the only important fraction of native population foreign
to the Miiklaks which now exists upon the reservation. They belong to
the extensive racial and linguistic family of the Shoshoni, and in 1864, wlien
the treaty was made, belonged to two chieftaincies, called, respectively, the
Yahooshkin and the VValpapi, intermingled with a fow-Payufo Indians.
They have been in some manner associated with the Miiklaks for age.s, though
a real friendship never existed, and they are always referred to by these wi'th
H sort of contempt, and regarded as cruel, heartless, and filthy. This aver-
sion probably results from the difference of language and the conflicting
interests resulting from both bodies having recourse to the same huntin.r
grounds. (Cf. Sa't, .sha't, Sha'tptchi.) They are at present settled in the
upper part of Sprague River Valley (Flaf) above YAnek-s. They cultivate
the ground, live in willow lodges or log houses, and are gradually abandon-
ing their roaming proclivities. Before 1864 they were haunting the shores
of Goose Lake (Newapkshi), Silver Lake (Kalpshi), Warner Lake, Lake
Harney, and temporarily stayed in Surprise Valley, on Chewaukan and
Safkiin Marshes, and gathered w.')ka8h on Klamath Marsh. They now
intermany with the Klamath Indians. As to their customs, they do not
flatten their infants' heads,* do not pierce their noses; they wear the hair
long, and prefer the use of English to that of Chinook jargon. Before
settling on the reservation they did not subsist on roots and bulbs, but
lived almost entirely from the products of the chase.

Among other allophylic Indians, once settled outside the present limits
of the Klamath Reservation, were a few Pit River and Shasti Indians,
• By the Modocs they arc called mmralheaHed (wakwaklisl, n.Vs!. gi'tko). ~ '

XXXVl

ETUNOGHAPUIC SKETCH.

staying before the Modoc war among the 'Kimbatwush-Moilocs [q. v.) in the
hiva beds south of Tule I^ake.

A few fainihes of hunting •Molale Iiulians, congeners of the "Old
Kay use" Indians near VumatiUa River, were formerly settled at Flounce
Hock, on the headwaters of Rogue River, and farther north in the Cascade
range. The Klamath Indians were filled with hatred against them; they
were by them called Tchakii'nkni, inhabitants of 'J'chakxe'ni, or the "service
berry tract," and ridiculed on account of their peculiar, incorrect use of the
Klamath language. In former times Molale Indians held all the northeastern
slopes of the WillamOt Valle\-, claiming possession of the hunting grounds;
the bottom lands they left in the hands of the peaceably disposed, autoch-
thonic race of the Kalapuya tribes, whom they call Miikai or Moke.

OHARACTEUrSTICS OF RACE.

These are either bodily or mental. To ascertain the former no meas-
urements were made by nie by means of instruments when 1 was among
the Klamath Lake Indians, and hence all that follows rests upon ocular
inspection. For Modoc skulls some accurate data are on hand, published
by the United States Surgeon-General's Office, Washington, I). C

The Mongolian features of prognatiiism and of high cheek bones are
not very marked in this upland race, though more among the Modocs than
in the northern branch. If it was not for a somewhat darker complexion
and a strange expression of the eye, it would be almost imjjossible to dis-
tinguish many of the E-ukshikni men from Americans. The forehead is
compressed in the tender age of childhood and looks rather low, but does not
recede so acutely as might be expected from this treatment. Prognathism,
where it exists, does not seem to be a consequence of head flattening. Tiie
cheek bones are more prominent than with us, but less than with the Central
Californians. The fact that the head-man, Tatapkash, who was among the
signers of the treaty of 18G4, was called after this peculiarity shows that
high cheek bones are rather unconunon. The nasal ridge is not aquiline,
but very strong and forms an almost continuous line with the forehead.
Convergence of the eyes is perceptii)Ie in a few individuals only, and anat-
<»mists have shown that it is nowhere produced by the structure of the skull

RACE CnARA(5TERrSTICS.

xxxvii

itself, but it is the result of tho mother's manipulation on the baby's eyes,
and causes them to look sleepy, the opening of the eyelids becoming nar-
rower. (Cf. Texts 91, 5-8.)

These Indians have a piercing look and their eyeballs are of the deepest
black, a circumstance which accounts for their great powor of vision. In
many Tndijins, namely in children, the white of the eye shows a blue tinge,
perhaps the result of head flattening. The mouth is small and the teeth
good; but with many Indians the thyroid cartilage, or Adam's apple, is very
prominent. The hair upon the head is straight and dai-k. I did not find
it very coarse, but with many Modoc women it is said to be so and to
grow to an extreme length. On other portions of the l)ody the hair is short
and scarce, the natives doing their best to weed it out, the beard especially,
with metallic pincers or tweezers (hushmoklo'tkish), which they always
carry with them. As among most American aborigines, the beard is of
scanty growth. The late chief l^elekash wore a beard, but I never saw any
Indian wearing one except Charles Preston, the Yaiieks interpreter. The
contents of the song 1 8."); 44 should also be noticed in this connection.
Baldness is rare, and in fact it appears that the dearth of iiairy covering of
the skin is fully compensated in the Indian race by a more exuberant
growth of hair upon the he;>d, to protect them against excessive colds and
the heat of the sun.

Among the Lake people the complexion is decidedly lighter than among
the cinnamon-hued Modocs, and n difference between the sexes is hardly
perceptible in this rev,j)ect. Blushing is easily perceptible, though the
change in color is not great. Those most approaching a white complexion
like ours are numerous, but their skin is always of a yellowish lurid white.
Owing to their outdoor life in the free and healthy mountain air, these
Indians are well proportioned as to their bodily frame, and apparently
I'obust; but their extremities, hands and feet, are rather small, as the
extremities are of the majority of the North American Indians.

The average of Modoc men appear to be of a smaller stature than
that of the Klamath Lake men, but in l)oth tribes a notable difforence
exists between the length of body in the two sexes, most men being lank,

XXXVUI

ETHNOGRAPHIC SKETCH.

I<l

tall, and wiry, while the women are short and often incline to embon-
point. Nevertheless obesity is not more frequent there tlian it is with us.
No better illustration of their bodily characteristics can be had than a col-
lection of their personal names. Tiiese sketch the Indian in a striking and
often an unenviable light, because they generally depict the extremes ob-
served on certain individuals. TIk sex can not, or in a few instances only,
be inferred from the name of a person. We frequently meet with designa-
tions like "Large Stomach," "Big Belly," "Round Belly," "Sharp Nose,"
"Grizzly's Nose," "Spare-Built," "Grease," "Crooked Neck," "Conical
Head," "Wide-Mouth," "Small-Eyes," "Squinter," "Large Eyes," "Half-
blind," or with names referring to gait, to the carriage of the body, to
habitual acts performed with hands or feet, to dress, and other accidental
matters.

With all these deformities, and many others more difficult to detect,
these Indian-^ have bodies as well formed as those of the Anglo-American
race, and in spite of their privations and exposure they live about as long
as we do, though no Lidian knows his or her age with any degree of accu-
racy. A very common defect is the blindness of one eye, produced by the.
smudge of the lodge-fire, around which they pass the long winter evenings.
With the majority of the Indians the septum of the nose hangs down at
adult age, for the nose of every Indian is pierced in early years, whetlier
they afterwards wear the dentalium-shell in it or not.

Stephen Powers, who had good opportunities for comparing the Modocs

with tlie tribes of Northern (California, says of them:

They present a finer physique than tlie lowland tribes of the Sacramento, taller
and less pudgy, partly, no doubt, becaii.se they engage in the chase more than the
latter. There is more rugged and stolid strength of feature than in the Shastika
now living; cheek bones prominent; liiis generally thick and sensual; noses straight
as the Grecian, but depressed at the root and thick walled; a dullish, heavy cast of
feature; eyes frequently yellow where they should be white. They are true Indians
in their stern immobility of countenance.*

Passing over to the psychic and mental qualities of these Oregonian

natives, only a few characteristics can be pointed out by which they differ

from the other Indians of North America. Tlie Indian is more dependent

•Contributions to North Amer. Ethnology, in, 252, 253. By •Shastika. he means
the Shasti Indians of middle Klamath Kiver, California.

■I
-i

KACB CHARACTERISTICS.

XXXIX

meuna

on nature, physically and inontally, than wo aro. What distinguishes th^
civilized man from the primitive man of our days and of prehistoric ages is
his greater faculty of turning to account the patent and the hidden powers
of nature, or the invention of handicrafts, arts, and sciences. In this the
savage man lags far behind the man of culture, and although we often have
to admire the ingenuity and shrewdness displaj-ed by the American native
in his hunting and fishing implements and practices, the art of agriculture,
without which there can be no real human culture, has never been pursued
to any considerable extent by the Indians living north of the thirtieth par-
allel of latitude.

The climate of their home compels the Maklaks Indians to lead an
active and laborious life. Except in the coldest days of winter they are
almost always engaged in some outdoor work, either hunting, fishing, or
cutting wood, gathering vegetal food, or traveling on iiorseback. Pursuits
like these and the pure, bracing air of the higlilands render their constitu •
tions hardy and healthy, their minds active, wide awake, and intelligent.
They are quick-sigiited and quick in their acts, but .slow in expressing de-
light, wonder, astonishment, or di.sgust at anytiiing they see. Often they
do not grasp the meaning of wliat they observe being done by the white
people, and thus appear to us indifferent to many of the highest attainments
of modern culture. Cliildren and adults are prone to reject or slow to adopt
the blessings of civilization, because many of these are of no practical use
to a hunting and fishing people, and otliers are past their understanding.

The first things they generally adopt from the white people are the
citizen's dress and handy articles of manufacture, as beads, tobacco, knives,
guns, steel traps; also wagons and other vehicles; for when in possession
of these last the horses, which they had obtained long before, can be put to
better account They are also quick in adopting English baptismal names,
sometimes discarding but oftener retaining their descriptive or burlesque
nomenclature from the Kliimath language. Gradually they adopt also witii
the money of the white man the elements of arithm(;tic, and learn to conqjute
days and months according to his calendar. After another lapse of time
they introduce some of the white man's laws, discard polygamy and slavery,

ETHNOGRAPHIC SKETCH.

bury their dead instead of cremating' them, and commence to acquire a
smattering of English. Indian superstitions, conjurers' practices are not
abandoned before the white man's ways have wrought a thorougli change
in their minds; and a regular school attendance by children can not be
expected before this stage of progress has been reached.

In his moral aspects the Klamath Indian is more coarse and outspoken
than the white man, but in fact he is not better and not worse. He lias
attacked and enslaved by annual raids the defenseless California Indian
simply because he was more aggressive, strong, and cunning than his vic-
tim; his family relations would be a disgrace to any cultured i)eople, as
would also be the method by which the chiefs rule the communit3\ But
the passions are not restrained among savages as they are or ought to be
among us, and the force of example exhibited by Indians of other tribes is
too strong for them to resist.

The character of men in the hunter stage depicts itself admirably well
in the mythic and legendary stories of both chieftaincies. Low cunning
and treacherous disposition manifest tliemselves side by side with a few
traits of magnanimity hardly to be expected of a people formerly merged
in a sort of zoolatric fetichism. There is, however, a considerable power
of imagination and invention exhibited in these simple stories, and many of
the ferocious beasts are sketched in a truly humorous vein.

Man's morals are the product of circumstances, and the white man who
judges Indian morals from the Christian standard knows nothing of human
nature or of etiinologic science. The moral ideas of every nation differ
from those of neighboring peoples, and among us the moral system of every
century differs from that of tlie preceding one. The fact that the Modocs
showed themselves more aggressive and murderous towards the white ele-
ment than the Klamath Lake Indians may thus be explained by the different
position of their homes. The latter being more secluded have not molested
Americans sensibly, whereas the annals of the Modocs, who lived in an open
country, are filled with bloody deeds. They are of a more secretive and
churlish disposition, and what Stephen Powers, who saw them shortly after
the Modoc war, says of them is, in some respects, true: "On the whole.

"H,

TRADITIONAL FOLK LORR.

xli

they are rather a cloddisli, indolent, ordinarily good-natured race, but
treacherous at bottom, sullen when angered, notorious for keeping Punic
faith. But their bravery nobody can deny."*

THE PREHISTORIC PERIOD.
Before the middle of the nineteenth century the Maklaks people was
unknown to mankind except to the nearest neighbors in Oregon and Cali-
fornia. We are therefoie justified in begiiming its period of documentary
history at that time, and in relegating to the domain of prehistorics all that
is known of their previous condition. The information upon tliese points
is furnished by three factors: tradition, archfBologic remains, and languao-e.

A. TRADITION BEARING UPON HISTORY.

Traditional folk-lore, when of the mythic order, generally dates from
an earlier epoch of fixation than historic traditions. The remote origin of
(/enuiiie mythic folk-lore is sufficiently evidenced by the archaic terms em-
bodied with it, by the repetition of the same phraseology for ages, and by
the circumstance that all nations tend to preserve theii- i-eligious ideas in an
unchanged form. I am laying peculiai' stress upon the term fjenu'me, for
Indians have often mixed recent ideas and fictions with archaic, original
folk-lore and with ancient mythic ideas, the whole forming now one inextri-
cable conglomerate which has the appearance of aboriginal poetic prose.

The Klamath people possess no historic traditions going further back
in time than a century, for the simple reason that there was a strict law
prohibiting the mention of the person or acts of a deceased individual by
miiiff his mm: This law was rigidly observed among the Californians no
less than among the Oregonians, and on its transgression the death penalty
could be inflicted. This is certainly enough to suppress all historic knowl-
edge within a people. How can history be written without names?

Many times I attemjjtod to obtain a list of the former head chiefs of
the two chieftaincies. I succeeded only in learning the names of two chiefs
recently deceased, and no biographic details were obtainable.

This peoi)le belongs to the autochthonic nations of America, called so
because they have lost all i-emembrances of earlier habitats or of migrations.

•Coutributioiis to Amer. Ethnology, III, p. 253. ~

xlii

RTHNOGKAPlIIC SKKTCII.

As a result of their secilusioii, all their fi^oogonic and creation myths are
acting around the headwaters of Klamath River and in Lost River Val-
ley, and the first man is said to have been created by their national deity,
K'mukamtchiksh, at the base of the lofty Cascade Range, upon the prairie
drained by Wood River. I have obtained no myth disclosing canj' knowl-
edge of the ocean, ■' • *- carcely one hundred and fifty miles distant in
an air line from then > ; . They have no flood or inundation myths' that
are not imported from aoroad; and what is of special importance here, their
terms for salt (a'dak, sho'lt) are not their own, but are derived from foreign
languages.

There is an animal story embodied in the Texts, page 131, forming
No. II of the "Spell of the Laughing Raven," containing the sentence:
"Hereupon the Klamath Lake people began fighting the Northerners." I
believed at first that this contained a historic reminiscence of some inter-
tribal war, but now am rather doubtful about it. The song 192; 1 was
supposed by some Indians to be a very old reminiscence, while others
referred it to the presence of the Warm Spring scouts in the Modoc war.

I conclude from the foregoing facts tliat historic traditions do not exist
among these mountaineer Indians. If there are any, I was unable to obtain
them. The racial qualities of the Modocs, and still more those of the
E-ukshikni, indicate a closer resemblance with Oregonians and Columbia
River tril)es than with Shosiionians and Californians.

n. ARCHVFIOLOmO REMAINS.

The Klamath people have not evinced any more propensity for erect-
ing monuments of any kind than they have for perpetuating the memory
of their ancestors in song or tradition. In fact, structures the probable
age of which exceeds one hundred years are very few. Among these may
be particularized the three ceremonial sweat-lodges and jierhaps some of
the river-barrages, intended to facilitate the catch of fish, if they should
turn out to be of artificial and not of natural origin. In the Lost River
Valley is a well, claimed by Modocs to ])e Aishish's gift — probably one of
the large natural springs or welwash which are seen bubbling up in so
many places upon the reservation Stephen Powers reports that near the

'^•^N.

LINGUISTIC AFPINITIKS.

xliii

shores of Goose Lake, ciuefl}' at iJavis (Jreuk, .i nuttiber of stone mortars
are found, fashioned with u sharp point to be inserted into the ground,
and that in former times ]\Iodoc, Payute, and Pit River Indians contended
in many bloody battles for the possession of this thickly inhabited country,
though none of them could obtain any permanent advantage.* Since the
manufacture of this kind of mortars can not be ascribed with certainty to
the Modocs, we are not entitled to consider them as antiquarian relics of
this special people. The three sudatories and the river barrages are regarded
as tlie gifts of Kmuki'imtch, a fact which testifies to their remote antiquity.
Excavations (wash) forming groups are found on many of the more level
spots on the Reservation, near springs or brooks. They prove the existence
of former dug-out lodges and camps.

0. LINGUISTIC AFFINITIES.

Anthropologic researches upon the origin of a people do not always '
lead to decisive results as to the qualities of the primitive race of that
people, for the majority of all known peoples are compounds from different
races, and tiuis the characteristics of tliem must be those of a medley race.
As to antiquity, language is second to race only, and much more ancient
than anything we know of a people's religion, laws, customs, dress, imple-
ments, or style of art. Medley languages are not by any means so frequent
as medley races, and less frequent still in America than in the eastern hemi-
sphere; for in this western world the nations liave remained longer in a state
of i^ lation than in Asia and Europe, owing to the hunting and fishing pur-
suits to which the natives were addicted — pursuits which favor isolation and
are antagonistic to the formation of large communities and states. This
explains why we possess in America a relatively larger number of linguistic
families than the Old World when compared to the areas of the respective
continents. It also ex))lains why races coincide here more closely with lin-
guistic families than anywhere else on the surface of the globe. Instances
when con(|uering races have prevailed upon other nations to abandon their

• Contributions to North Ainer. Ethnology, III, p. 252. Davis Creek enters Goose
Lake tVoni the southeasi. The TT. S. Geological Survey map marks "Old Indian Vil-
higes" in latitude 41° M' und longitude 12()o 36', to the southwest of that hasiu.

xliv

ETHNOGRAPHIC SKETCH.

own luiiguages are scarcely hetinl of on this liumisphere, but the annals of
the eastern parts of the globe make mention of such.

Whenever it is shown that the language of some American people is
akin to the language of another, so that both are dialects of a common
linguistic family, a more cogent proof of their common genealogic origin
is furnished than lies in a similarity of laws, customs, myths, or religion.
To decide the question of affinity between two languages is generally an
easy, but sometimes a very difficult task. When a relatively large number
of roots and affixes having the same function coincide in both, this argues
in favor of affinity. The coincidence of single terms in them is never for-
tuitous, but we have to find out whether sucli terms are loan words or
belong to the stock of words of the languages under process of investigation.
Other terms show an external resemblance which is not based on real iden-
tity of their radicals, but oidy on a deceptive likeness of signification.

Fic n all this the reader will perceive that we can not expect to steer
clear of shoals and breakers in determining by the aid of language the
affinities of our Klamath Indians. Hut the infjuiries below, whether suc-
cessful or not, will at least aid future somatologists in solving the problem
whether linguistic areas coincide or not with racial areas upon the Pacific
coast between the Columbia River and the Bay of San Francisco. In
making tlie.se in^-estigations we must constantly bear in mind that the track
of the migrations was from north to south, parallel to the Pacific coast,
which is sufficiently evidenced by the progress of some Selish, Tinne,
Sahaptin, and Shoshoni tribes in a direction that deviates but inconsiderably
from a meridional one.

To establish a solid basis for these researches, a list of the Pacific coast
linguistic fixmilies is submitted, which will assist any reader to judge of the
distances over which certain loan words have traveled to reach their present
abodes. The country from which a loan word has spread over a number
of other family areas is often difficult to determine, because these languages
have not all been sufficiently explored. The families below are enumerated
according to the latest results of investigation. Some of them may in the
future be found to be dialects of other stocks. The Californian tribes have
been mapped and described in Stephen Powers's "Tribes of California";
Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. III.

ILNGUISTIC FAMILIES ON THE J'ACIFIC SLOPE.

xlv

The'Shoshoni t'ainily extends tlirouj^h eastern Oregon, Nevada, southern
Idaho, Utah, parts of VVyomhig and California, and embodies the tribes of
the Snake Indians, the Shoshoni, from whom the Conianches separated
centuries ago, the Paviotso and Bannok (-I'anafti), the Pai-uta, Uta, M6ki,
and the •Kawi'iVii brancli of Cahfornia. This family occupies an area almost
as large as the Selish stock, but the population is very thinly scattered over
the vast territory of the inland basin.

■ Wusho Indians, near Carson, Nevada, inclosed on all sides except on
the west by Shoshoni tribes.

Selish Indians occupy Washington, portions of the Oregon coast and of
Vancouver Island, northern Idaho (from which they extend into Montana),
the Fraser Hiver Valley, and the adjoining coast of British Columbia. Some
dialects of this famil}' are remarkable through a profusion of consouantic
clusters. Chiitook dialects show many Selish affinities,

Suhaptin family, dwelling around middle Columbia and Lower Snake
Kiver. An offshoot of it — the Warm Spring Indians — settled in Des Chutes
Valley, Oregon.

Wayikfpu is a Sahaptin name given to the Kayuse people on the
Yumatilla Keservation, which has abandoned its former tongue, called the
"(Jld Kayuse," to adopt the Yumatilla dialect of Sahaptin. Molale is
related to old Kayuse; its former area was east of Oregon City.

Tinnr or At/uipas/iun triljes, wherever they apjjear near the Pacific coast,
are intruders from the northern plains around Mackenzie River and the head-
waters of the upper Yukon. Those still existing on the Pacific coast are the
Umpqua and Rogue River, the Hiipa and Wailaki Indians, whereas the
Tlatskanai and Kwalhioqua have disappeared.

The following three families on and near the Oregon coast were explored
by Rev. Owen J. Dorsey in 1884 (Amer. Antiquarian, 1885, pp. 41, 42):

Ydkivina, subdivided into Alsl', Yakwina on the bay of the. same name,
Ku-itch on the Lower Umpqua River, and Sayusla.

Kus, Coos Indians on Coos Bay and Mulluk on Lower Coquille
RiA'er.

Takilma or Takelma Indians, .south of the Kus, on middle course of
Rogue River.

xlvi

IMJI.SOUKAI'IJIC; SKETCH.

Tliu KaUqnijia IiidiaiiH oiico oi-.-iipiod flu' fiitire WilliiuiOt River Vallo}
siivo its southeaHtoni portions. Its b«8t atiulied diiilect is Att'aluti, als..
called 'rualati and Wajjatu Lake.

On tlie lower Khunatli Hiver, California, and in its vicinit) , there are
four tribes of small areas speaking languages which re(iuire further inves-
tigations to decide upon their aflinities. At present their languages are
regarded as rein-esenting distinct families, as follows:

Am, Ara-ara or Karok, on both sides of Klamath Hiver.
■AUkira or Yurok, at tiie mouth of Klamath River.
Wislmk or Wlyot, on Humboldt Bay.
.('hiiiiariko or Chimalakwe, on Trinity River and environs.
The Poino dialects are spoken along the California coast and along its
water-courses from 3'J° 30' to 38° 15' latitude.

■i'Kki dialects were spoken in the mountains of the Californian Coast
Range upon two distinct areas.

Whiti'm (from witi'i, wintu man, Indian) is spoken in many dialects upon

a wide area west of Sacramento River from its mouth up to Shasta Butte.

■Noja, sjjoken near Round Mountain, Sacramento Valley.

■Maidu (i/om i.ialdu man, Lndiun) dialects are heard upon the east side

of Sacramento River from Fort Redding to the C6sumnes River and up to

the water-shed of the Sierra Nevada.

Shastl dialects properly belong to the middle course of Klamath River
and to the' adjoining parts of Oregon; the language of Pit Ulcer or Acho-
niawi, southeast of the Shasti area, is cognate "with it.

• Mutsun dialects, north and south of San Francisco Bay, are cognate
with the Mi wok dialects, which are heard from the San Joaquin River up
to the heights of the Sierra Nevada. The littoral lamily of the Esselcn is
inclosed ui)on all sides by the .Mutsun dialects. We have vocabularies
from the eighteenth century, but its e.xistence as a separate tamily.has been
put in evidence but lately by H. W. Henshaw in American Anthropologist.
1890, pp. 45-50.

UADICALS UKU) IN OOMMON.

xlvii

UAI)I(!AL3 WHICH KLAMATH HOLDS IN COMMON WITH OTHER

FAMILIES.

A nuiiibor of mdioiil Hyllal)lnH (xuuir in the Hnino or in (^offnuto wigni-
ficnlions in scvoml Kiijjiiistic faniiliea of tlio NortliwcHt, and Honic of tlicni
I'Xtenil oven to tlio stocks cast of the Korky Mountaii.H and of tlic Missis-
Hippi Kiver. Tliin fact is of frroat sifpiifipanco, as it |)roveH certain early
connections between these Indians, either loose or intiniatif. If the number
of sndi (lomnion radices .4hould be increased considerably by further re-
search, the present attempt of classifyinfr Pacific hmguapfes into stocks
Ml nld become snl>ject to serioii'i doubts. From the (|Uotation8 below ' have
carefully excluded all roots (and other tern^s) of onomatopoetic origin. I
have made no distinction between pronominal anil predicative roots, for a
radical syllable used predicatively in one stock may liavo a pronominal
function in another family

-illl, -f"', -«»», -»( frequently occurs as a suffix for the possessive case
in the Pacific coast lanfi'iiaf,'es. Thus in Klamath -am is the usual suffix of
that case, -lam bein^'' found after some vowels only; cf. Granunar, paj^es
317 et 8e(|., and suffix -m, page .'55."); also pages 474-47<). On page 47.5 I
liave called attention to the fact that -am occurs as marking the possessive
case in the Pit River langiuige; it(5shC'xam yj'mim deer's foot-prints ; -am, -im
in Molale: pshkafnshim, possessive of pshkafnsh beard. The Sahaptin dia-
lects use -nmi, -mi, etc., to designate this case.

ka occurs in many languages as a demonstrative radi.x, though it often
assumes an intenogative and relative signification and changes its vocaliza-
ti(m. In Apache-Tinnc dialects it is interrogative: ;(ate tvhof in Navajo;
in the Creek ka is the relative particle, a substitute for our relative pronoun
who. In Yuki kau is this and tliere; in Yokai ((^alifoi-nia) ka- occurs in
kahama this, kawi'o here, j-okai'i there. East of Mississippi Hiver we have it
in Ire ; .!)is dialects: ko" in ki'"'t"ho here (t'lio jtlarc); in Tuskarora: kyil'
that or this one (pf)inting at it), kyii' nii" thit one; t'ho i-kiin that one <>.* In
the Klamath of Oregon this root composes kank so miieh, kani somebodi/,

• My authoiity for (luotiilioim from Iroquois dialects is Mr. .L N. K. Hewitt, ol the
TiiNkarora tribe.

xlviii

liTUNOUltAl'UIC aKliXCU.

kaiif? who* and kat who, proa. rol. As a Muffix -ka, -j^a \h foniiiii^r factitive
vcrlm and is of ;.iwit fio<iu()iicy (cf Part I, pp. 341, 342); ka-a, ku-a, ka
18 adverb: i/natli/, .sho>t//lf/, nri/.

kJl-l luid Miuiilar forniH are Herviiig to dony Btatoiueiitu and to form
nej-ativo and privativo conipounds. In SlioHlioni dialects g'ai, ka, kats,
karii-u, etc., stand for no! in Ziiiii kwa is tlio teal ne<>ativu particle, like
aka(! no! in 'i'onkawe. In Ivwakintl no! is kets and kie: in I'ani kaki; it
also occurs in some nortiiern dinlectH of Algonkin as ka, kawine etc. In
Klamath ka-i is no! and not ; it composes kfya lo lir and such words as are
mentioned in (irannnar, p. (IS.!; cf also p. CAi. In some of the Maskoki
dialects -ko, -o-o, -ku is the privative |)article in adjectives and verbs.

mi is a pronominal demonstrative radix, like nu, ni, and also serves to
express pers'»nal and possessive pnmouns. In (!reek ma flint points to dis-
tant objects and al.so forms istii'mat who (intenof^ative). In many western
families it expresses the second person: in .Mutsun dialects men is thoti, in
Miwok mi; in Wintun mi, me is thou, met thine, Ihif; in Maidu mi is thou,
mfmem //<■, mo'm, mu-um that our; in Yuki meh, mi is thou and in Porno ma
is i)r (me this)- in Ara and ,Sahai)tin mi is transposed into im, thou. Sliasti
has mayi and Pit Hiver inih, nn for thou; Sahaptin im, imk thou, ima, imak
//('. In Klamath mi stands for thi/, thine, inish for thrc, to thee, but i for thou ;
-ma is a verbal suHi.x, (]. v. There are laiif^uages where mi, ma makes uj)
the radix for the lirst person and not for tiie second, as Sioux and Hidatsa
of the Dakotan family; while in the Shoshoni dialects thou is omi, umi, um,
em, etc., and in Yuma ma-a, ma. In the Nez Perce of Sahaptin nia is the
interrogative pronoun who? and which? and also forms plurals when suf-
fixed to nouns.

Ililka, the Kl. term for cinnamon hear, probably related to nakish sole,
as the bears are Pluntifpuda; has many parallels in American languages.
The Yuma dialects have nagoa hear in Ilualapai, nakatya, nogudia in Tonto;
Y6kat has nohoho hear, Alikwa nikwi;;^ t/ri^^s^l!/ hear. If the yaka of Sahaptin
is from nyaka, it belongs here also. East of Mississippi Hiver there is only
one species of the bear, the hlack hear. The radix nak-, nok- occurs in the
Toiiica language n(')kushi, and in the Maskoki dialects: nok'husi in Creek,
n6;(usi in Hitchiti, but nlkta in Alibamu.

RADICALS HELD IN COMMON.

xlix

llkol, nkA'l, nxdt in Kliiinatli doHigtmteM tlio //r«// white-tniUd rabbit, and
the Haino radix appears in ko'lta, kulta .fiih otter and in kiVlwIi badi^er. In the
Han Antonio liin;.niage of Sonthorn California tiio radix is represented by
kol hare {rabbit is map), in KasuA (Sa. Barbara dialect) by kiVn, in Tonto
by akoli'i, kula, in Ilualapai by gula. Even in the Inuit dialects we find
for rabbit: ukalik (Hudson Bay), kwi'Unk (Kotzebue Sound).

Illl or nl. A pronominal demonstrative radix n- followed by almost
any vowel (na, nu, ni, etc.) is of great freciuoncy in America as well as in
the eastern hemisphere, where it often becomes nasalized : nga, ngi, etc
In American languages it forms personal possessive and demonstrative pro-
nouns, prefixes and suffixes of nouns and verbs. In South America nu, ml
designates the pronoun / or me so frequently that the explorer K. von der
Steinen was prompted to call Nu-lanf/uaf/c.s a large grouf) of languages north
and south of Amazon River, including Carib dialects. In America im, ni
designates more frequently tho Jirst person of the singular and plural (/, we)
than the second thou, ye. It stands for the first person in Qiiichhna, Moxo,
Tsoneka, in Nahuatl, the "Sonora" and Slioshoni languages, in Otomi,
Yuma, the Tehua and Kera (no in hi-«o-me /) dialecits of New Mexico; in
Wintun, Maidu, Wayfletpu, Sahaptin, and the numerous Algonkin dialects.
For the second person it stands in Yiikwina, Tonkawe, At/ikfipa, and in
Dakota and Tinnu dialects. As a demonstrative pronoun we rind it used in
many langiniges, e.g., in the Onondaga of Iroquois, where na'ye' means that,
that it is, and nii'" (Ji long) this. In Klamath nii, nl is /, niitoks mi/self,
nish me, to me,- nat, na we, nalam ours; -na is case suffix and transitional
verbal suffix; n- prefix refers to objects level, flat, sheet- or string-like, or
extending towards tlie horizon.

Shl'im, Sii'in is the Klamath term for mouth of persons, of animals,
and of rivers. Forms parallel to this are disseminated through many of the
Pacific coast languages. In Kayuse it is sum^aksh, in Molale shfmilk, in
Nishinam and other Maidu dialects sim, in Yokat sama, shemah.* Inti-
mately connected with mouth are the terms for beard: sln'i, slio, shwo in
Sahaptin dialects, shimkemush in Kayuse, and for tooth: si, shf in the

• It occurs even in Sonth America: 'siini in ^K^nals ni^fA and worrfT^hfun in
the Patugon of Brazil, Up; Martins, Beitrftge, II, \il\,
iv

ETIINOOKAPUIC SKETCH.

Wintiin dialects, sii;^ in Yuki, sit, si-it in Mutsun (coast dialects), sa iu
Santa Barbara, tcluiwa in some dialects of Maidn. it is justifiable to regard
Kl. slu'uii as an ancient possessive case of the sf, sa tooth of Central Califor-
nian languages; cf. what is said concerning the suffix -ini.

tilt tooth aj)poars related to tnpjt tooth of 8a> usla, a dialect of Yakwina
and also to tit of the Saliaptin dialects; ititi "his tooth" in Wahiwiila.

tclli-, tsl- is a radical often used on the Pacific coast referring to
water or liquids, their motions, and the acts performed with or within the
watery element. Wliilo in Klamath it figures as a prefix only, q. v., otlier
tongues make use of it as a radical. Tclif is water in Yakwina, in Takflina,
and in tiie Yuchi of tiie Savannah River; in Zuni 'tchawe is water ('t alve-
olar) in Noja tchudshe. The Saliaptin dialecfs show it in Warm Spring
tchiTsh H'rt^'r, atii tcliash ocraii; in Klikatat tch.iwas wa^c/-, atiUchis om/»,
tchdwnt to drink ; while in Nez- Perec tchil'sh changes to kush. Chinook
has 'Itchi'ikwa water, Ch. J. salt-tchuk ocean, but the Selish languages employ
a radix se-u'l, si-u'l, sha-u instead to designate any liquid.

Wli to exist, lire, to be within, and to grow or (jenerate is a radix to be
traced in many of the Western tongues. In Klamath we refer to wa and
its numerous derivatives, as wawapka to sit or he on the ijroiind, vva-ish ^;to-
ductive, wa-ishi, wcwanuisli, we'k arm. and limb of tree, lit. "what is jrrowin"-
upon," we'ka of spring, wekala, wash hole to live in, wa'shla (a) to dig a bur-
row, (b) ground-squirrel, and many others. In Kwdkiutl wats, watsa is dog,
but originally "living being, animal," and is represented in Klamath by
\\k^\\ prairie-wolf, watch horse, watclwiga dog, lit. "little animal." the idea of
"domesticated" or "belonging to man" to be supplied. In Chinook the
suflix -uks (for -waks) points to living beings also. The Saliaptin languages
show this root in wash to he, exist, in Nez Percd wa^osh alive, watash place,
field, earth, in Yakima wak^ash living, and in other terms.

AFFINITIES IN WESTERN LANGfAGES.

Many of the Western families exhibit but little or no affinity in their
lexicon with the Khuiiath language, the reason being undoubtedly that tiiey
are but litthi explored. Thus in Mutsun a single term only was found to
cori-pspond: tcluh'a stiaUow basket in the dialect of Soledad; rf tchala and

LlJyGUlSTlC AFFINITIES.

tcIuikGla, by which two kinds of root baskets are specified in Klamath.
The Sayusla tseokwa ley answers to tchu'ks, Mod. tchokasli leg and to
sho ksh, Mod. tchO-o'ksh crane, this bird being called after its long le"s
The Shoshoni stock, with its extensive array of dial.-ts, spoken in ti»e closest
vicnnty of the Klamath people, is almost devoid of any resemblances- cf.
]<a-i not, and n.ipal e,j;,, compared with .lobave in Payute, nobavh Cheme-
liuev., n^pavh Shoshoni. This probably- rests on no real affinity In the
•iV2^« language, spoken near Redding, California, putsi hmmmi-hird corre-
sponds to Kl. pl'shash, and tchashina, tchashi, a sn.all shmk species, to Kl
tchaslush. For Wintm may be compared Kl. pan to eat with ba, bah; kalo
sky (from kalkali, round, globiform) with k'altse 6"^^.

From Selish sa.'ga feld the Kl. saiga, saika .rairie, field, meadow was
certan^ly borrowed and t'ta.e gm,sU,,er of Kalispehn reappears here in
ta hta-ash and m Mod. kan.tata. Kauka wak yeUo. of ( l,nooJc is kauka-uli,
kevkovh h-own ot Kl.; and tthias yomg, recent reappears in Kl. tcMni new
young, te-m.wa-ash young woman; of tc<nase infant in Aht dialect of Van-
couver Ishtnd. The long array of words which Khunath has borrowed from
Linnook jargon are enumerated in Grammar, pages 220-222

iV«/r/«.--An uncommon number of affinities are found to exist between
Klamath and the Mafdu dialects east of the Sacran.nto River. Of tTese
terms some are not loan words, but appear to be derived fron, some common

hala slope of mountain; Kl. lala, hlala to slope downwards

kala hot-water basket; Mafdu, k611o cup-basket.

kiiwe rcl; Maidu, kowo

I'giilu, kuia, kulo female animal; Mafdu dialects: kii'le, kii'lle k,'.!-.
^oo,.,n,w^e, and female animal. This word also composes tie terms y-i;
and chdd, and hence means " to generate "

pAn to oat: Mafdu, d. pen, pap, pa, pepe to eat; pun to smoke in M-.M
corresponds to Kl. paka; pani. pan is t^alco in Maf.lu "*"'

pen, pa'n again, a second time; Mafdu, pene two.

vulal, ulal Cottonwood tree; Mafdu, wflili

From the S.asti language Modoc has borrowed more than X,a„vtth
i^ake, and the term« as ,. as known .e all mentioned in th« Dic^!::::':

ETHNOGRAPHIC SKETCH.

They are fpo, ipshuna, etchmu'nna, a'dak, hapu»h (cf. also h<ipa kanyaroo
rat and striped squirrel iirJloja) and probably also kala hot-wafer basket,
miidna sunflotver.

Its southeastern or Pit River dialect shows a number of terms probably
not loaned, but resting upon some indefinite common aflSnity. Thus ^dshash
milk, breast, udder is in Pit River Idshit female breast (cf. Ara : iitchis milk),
wdn silver fox, dim. wanaga, in Pit River kwan silver fox and wan- in
wanekpusha fox; kiifla earth is in Pit River kdla, taktakli red is ta^tAze,
tfdshi good is ti'issi, tiislii, kd'sh ime tree is kashii.

The only families in which a considerable number of terms possibly
rests upon a real and not fancied kinshio are those of Wayiletpu and
Sahaptin.

WAYfLETPU DIALECTS.

Wayiletpu, of which two dialects only are known or accessible to us,
Kayuse and Molale, shows the following affinities:

Kl. gi to be, to exist, Molale, gisht he is, gfshlai he will be. Compare to
this in Maidu: bishi alive and dwelliuff place; Wintun: bim to be (present
tense).

Kl. ke, kek this; Kayuse, ka, ke, ke, kai this, this one.

Kl. gu, ku, kune that; Kayuse, ku, ka, ku yiiwant that man, kappik
they.

Kl. fna, d. yana downward, yafna mountain; Molale, yangint elevation.
Kl. \iik forehead ; Molale, lakunui/«m

Kl. la'pi, lap two; Molale, lapka ttvo, lapitka seven,- Kayuse, lipuyi,
iiplint <<t'o; liplin«7"«s.

Kl. hikua to be hot, warm, 16kuash warm, hot, and heat, liiluks Jire;
Kayuse lokoyai warm, hot.

Kl. muknuikli cinnamon-complcnoned (originally "downy"), tch'muka
lo be dark (as night); Molale, mcika dark, nu.kimuki dark complexioned ;
niiikimuk'=wai "black m-AU," negro.

Kl. mpato, pato cheek, cf. patpatli; Molale, paktit cheek.

Kl. nii'd.sh one; Kayuse, na one; Molale, nanga one, conipoaes napitka
s^x. '^ •

LINGUISTIC AFFINITIEa.

IHi

Kl. nanuk all, nanka some, n part of; Kay use, nang, nangiua-a all;
Molale, nangkai all.

Kl. nApal egt/; Kayuse, lupil, laiipeii egtj.

Kl. pAn to eat; Kayuse, pitanga; Molale, pJi-ast to eat.

Kl. pa watch tongue: Kayuse, push; Molale, apa-us.

Kl. pa';utgi to dawn, the dawn; Molale, pakast morning.

Kl. pfla on one's bodg, on the hare skin; Kayuse, pf'li meat; Molale pfl
bodg.

Kl. shuaf black-tailed deer; MohUe, suaf d^er aiul white-tailed deer.

Kl. tiinii mang, much; Molale, tarn mang.

Kl. wafta to pass a dag and night, or a dag, waftash dag; Kayuse,
ewe-iu or invaya, weya dag, u-awish, huewish sun; Molale, wdsh dag and
sun, wasaii) summer-time.

Kl. wako whitepine; Molale, wAkant, wAkint, wakunt tog.

Kl. wek limb of tree; Kayuse, pasiwii'ku limb of tree.

Kl. wekiitiish green frog ; Molale, wakatinsh //o^.

In the morphologic part we also detect a number of close analogies
between the two families:

hash-, lush-, is a prefix forming a sort of causative verbs by anathesis
in Molale. like h-sh of Klamath; e. g., fshi he .said, hishashi he replied.

-gAla, kala, a Molale case-suffix to, toward, corresponds to -tala toward
of Klamath.

-im, -am forms the possessive case in Wayfleptu; am in Klamath.

p- is prefix in terms of relationship in both families, and -p also occurs
as suffix in these and other terms; cf Sahaptin.

Distributive forms are made by syllabic reduplication in Kayuse exactly
in the same manner as in Klamath: y:.nna great, d. yiyfmu ; lnhAyls old,
d. lalhayis ; ludstu bad, d. laludstu ; suayu good, d. sasuayu.

SAHAPTIN DIALECTS.

The Sahaptin dialects coincide with Klamath just as strikingly in some
of the words and grammatic forms as do tho.se of Wayfletpu, and it is sin-
gular that in a number of these all three mutually agree, as in Mkua, muk-
miikli, and two Juiraerals.

liv

ETHNOORAPnrC SKETCn,

Kl. ka-i.ka-uli, kovkiVll, ke-ukr-uli hrmiw ; Nez-Perc(^ ka-iizkii-iu
drah, Ih/hf yoUow, <hv1; rmiiii.

Kl ko, krk fhis : Noz-Percd, ki, pi. kima fins ,- adv. kina here, kimta.n
near.

Kl.^ kit.chk.'ini litfk, adv. kftoha, kt^tcha; kiiskus, Noz IVtcc!, smaU, little;
ikkes, Yakima: kiskis, Warm Spring.

Kl. kta-i mi; s/o,i,. .. ktii't liaid, Yakima.

KI. la'pi, lap two; lapit, k^pit two, No/. Wnrv ; napit, VValawala ; nii'pt,
Warm Spriiij»'.

Kl. l.ikiia to hr warn, hot, l.'.kiiash an<l liishliishli warm; \x\\vik^ fire ;
liu'.;futs /mm, No/. Porcv; ilukshaymMi. Noz IVm! and Walawala; (Iksl.',
Warm Spring; olusha to h„r„, lokautcli eimlers, Yakima; Ia;Kui;t, lalioi;^
mirm, Yakinia ; lii;^ wai, Warm Spring.

KI. miiknnikli, miikmiikli riiiiKiinoii-rolorrd ,- ma;^.sma;^.s, Nez Perec'
rflo'i- ; mAx^h, Yakima and Warm Si)ring (also as mnkHh Idoiide, attbitni,
Warm Spring).

KI. miVlk worm, myjuot, mrmk, //// .- mu;^limu;^Ii///, Warm Spring.
Kl. mi'ishnnish nittk, row, originally moant "lowing like cattle," from
the Salia|)tin ini'i eaftlr; of. Texts, Note to 13, l;{.

Kl. ua'd.sh our .- na'/s, Wxs, Yakima ; nii';jsli. Warm Spring.

Kl. uanka somr, a portion of; nauka some in several Sahaptin dialects.

Kl. pa watch foiif/iir .- pa wish, Noz Perco.

Kl. po-ip d(U(f,Idtr ; pai), Noz l\n-ci', Warm Spring, dmiflldrr (not one's
own).

Kl. pf he, she, p'na, m'na him, her ; pina stif, oneself, himself, etc., Nez
Perce ; pi'ni he, this one. Warm Spring.

Kl. taktakli level, eve,,, flat; tikai>/, Yakima; cf tii-i'h hottom Umd.

Kl. tataksni ehildre,, ; (na)titait „,m,, Yakima; tit.'.kan people, Nez
Percti.

Kl. tchumi'ika, tsmnka to he da,i; of. mukniiikli : tsrMiui;{tsomn;K dark
brow,, (v>rieto),ofda,-k complexion, hlark, Nez Porco; shmnk, Yakima; tchmu'k,
Warm Spring, dar/: ; simmkakusha to hlarken, Yakima.

Kl. viVnsh, u-unsh boat, canoe, diig-ont ; wassas boat, Yakima, Warm
Spring.

TUK KLAMATH A SKPAUATK FAMILY.

Of ngreemonts in tlio iiiorpliolojric ])art of ^rruniuiiir we notice (ioiisid-
erablc lumJogy in the inflection of the Saliaptin .substantive with its numer-
ous case forms :

Hcditplivation for inflectional purposes is syllabic also, but not so gen-
erally in use as in Klamath; Noz Perec tayits //ow/, abbr. ta'lis; plur. tita'hs.

Kl. -kiii, en(lin<r of adj. " cominf,-' from;" -pkinili, subst. case, //wh ,-
init lioust; initpkinih/n^w a house, in Ncz I'erci'.

p- prefix forms most names of relationship: jji'ka mothn; pfap elder
brother, pet sister ; -p as suffix appears in Nez Perec as;rap i/outif/er brother,
asip sister (fsip Walawala). The prefix pi- forms i-cciprocal verbs ; hak-,
hah-, radix of verb to see, forms j)iiiiiksih to sec each other.

Kl. -na is transitional case-siifHx ; cf Noz Pcrci- ki'na here, from pron
ki this.

(H)N(JLUSIONS.

The conclusions which can bo drawn with some dejrree of safety from
the above linguistic data and some mythologic facts, concerning tiie pre-
his-^oric condition of the peo))le wliich occupies our attention, are not unim-
porliUiT, and may be expressed as follows:

Although it is often a difficult matter to distinguish the loan words in
the above lists from the words resting upon ancient affinity, the table siiows
that the real loan-words of the Maklaks were borrowed from vicinal tribes
oidy, as the Shasti, and that those which they hold in common with other
tribes more probably rest on a stock of words common to both, as the jjro-
nomiual roots. The affinity with :\Iaidu appears more considerable than
that with other Californian tribes only because the Maidu dialects have
been studied more thoroughly. Scarcely any affinity is traceable with the
coast dialects of Oregon and California, and none with the Tinne dialects,
though the ITmpkwa and Rogue River Indians lived in settlements almost
conterminous with those of the Maklaks. The latter were acquainted with
the Pacific Ocean only by hearsay, for they have no original word for salt
or tide, nor for any of the larger salt-water fisl- or maummls, and their term
for sea is a eonipoiiud and not a simple word: muni ('-nsh ''great water-sheet,"
just as the Peruvians of the mountain., call tiie ocean "mother-lake," mama-
coc.ha. The scanty knowledge of the sea, whicli was scarcely one hundred

Ivi

ETUNOGUAI'HIC SKBTOll.

and fifty miles distant from the mountain l.on.es of the Klamath people,
proves more than anythinj,^ else their protracted isolation from other tribes
and rtlso their absence from the sea-coast during their stay about the head-
waters of the Klamath River.

No connection is traceable between the languages of the Klamath and
the Shoshoni Indians, botirinmiediate neighbors, nor with the Kalapuya.
Chinook, and Selish dialects north of them. They must have remained
strangers to each other as far back as language can give any clue to pre-
historic conditions. The Sahaptin and Wayfletpu families are the only
ones with whom a distant kinship is not altogether out of the question.
Some of the terms common to these languages could have been acquired
' by the Miiklaks through their frequent visits at the Dalles, the great ren-
dezvous and market-place of the Oregonian and of many Selish tribes
Friendly intercourse with the Warm Spring Indians (L6kuashtkni) existed
long ago and exists now; friendly con.iections of this kind are frequently
brought about by racial and linguistic affinity, just as inveterate enmity is
often founded upon disparity of race and language.*

The resemblances in the lexical part of the three families are not unim-
portant, but in view of the small knowledge we have of either and of the
large number of words in these languages showing neither affinity nor
resemblance, we have to maintain the classification prevailing at present and
to regard their dialects as pertair.ing to three linguistic families. Sahaptin
shows more likeness in phonetics and in morphology with Waylletpu than
with Klamath.

Nowhere is syllabic reduplication so well developed in Oregon and
about Columbia River as in the three families above mentioned and in
Sehsh, the distributive as well as the iterative. The latter exists in every
language, but of the former no traces could be detected in the Kalapuya
and Northern Californian languages, and but iesv in Shoshoni dialects
though in Mexico it is frequent. This point will prove very important in
tracing ancient migrations.

T I ^"^ 'niiy compare the long-hisdng friemlly relationT^iic^l^,^^^^
Lendpo and ShAwano, the SI.,.shoni and Bannock (Panaiti), the ChiLa aJ he
Kasi'hta (a Creek tribe), the Illiaois and the Miami Indians.

EARLY HISTOHY.

Ivii

The imiueration system cf u peoi)le is a relic of a remote age, and
therefore of importance (ov U-.mng tlie aneient connections of tribes. The
quinary system is the most frequent countino. method in America, and often
combines with the vigesimal. The pure .piinary system prevails in Ara, in
the Chimarfko, Yuki, and in the Shasti-Pit River t-unilv, in Sahaptin and
Wayiletpu, and it is also the system found in Klamath. Curiously enough
the Maidu Indians count by fifteens, and the decimal system form.s the basis
of the Wintun, Mutsun, and Selish dialects. The mvstic or "sacred"
number occurring hundreds of timos in mythologic stories l.five among all
the Oregonian tribes.

To sum up the result of the above linguistic inquiry, it may be stated
that our present knoNvle.lge does not allow us to connect the Klamath lan-
guage genealogi(.illy with any of the other languages co.npared, but (hat
,t stands as a Jhv,uistic famihj for itself. It has adopted elements from the
tongues spoken in its neighborhood: and a common element, chiefly pro-
nommal, underlies several .>f these and the American languages in general.

THE HISTORIC PERIOD.

On account of the superstition previously alluded to, the traditional
historic lore which foi.ns so attractive a feature in the unwritten literature of
the nations east of the Rocky Mountains and of Mexico is wantin.. entirely
among the MAklaks, and we have to rely upon the meager reports of trav-
elers and Government agents for accounts of the condition of the tribes in the
earlier part of this century. Such notices of historic events are as follows-

According to a tradition recorded by Stephen Powers, an epidemic of
small-pox broke out among the Modoc Indians in 1847, by which on. hun-
dred and fifty individuals perished.

The earliest historic conflict which can be ascertained with some chro-
nological accuracy is the massacre of eighteen immigrants to Oregon by
individuals of the Modoc tribe, and Ben Wright's massacre, consequent upon
that bloody deed. The massacre of the immigrants occurred at a place en
1 ule or Rhett Lake, since called Bloody Point. Undoubtedly this was only

Iviii

KrnNOOUAPHK^ Hivimuf.

one in a series of similar hiitclieries. Appiirently it occurred in 1852, and
the particulars are all jriven in Texts, pages liJ and 14.

One of the earliest reports npon these tribes made to the Bureau of
Indian Affairs at Wasliiiifrton is that of Joel I'almor, Superintendent of
Indian Affairs for Oregon, dated Dayton, Oregon, September 11, 1854.
Palmer states that the lands of the Klamath Indians extend npon the east-
ern base of the Cascade range for about thirty miles east, and that east of
them live the " Mo-docks," who speak the same language as the Klamaths;
and east of these again, extending farther south, are the ".Mo-e-twas" (Pit
River Indians). Those two last-named tribes have always evinced a deadly
hostility to the whites, and tlie Modocs boasted of having within the last
four years murdered thirty-six whites. Palmer entered into an agreement
with the Klamath Indians to keep the peace with the white people, and also
sent messengers to the Modocs and Pit Rivers, believing that henceforth
the immigrants would be spared from their attac^ks. The Khunalh Lakes
were then enfeebled by wars with the surrounding tribes and by conflicts
among themselves, and were said to niunbcr but four hundred and fifteen
.souls. Ho counted seven villages on Upper Klamath Lake, two on Pliock
Creek (P'laikni or Spragne River), three on Toqua Lake (Ti'ikua), and one
on Coasto (Koliashti) Lake.* The Indians had some guns, horses, camp
equipage, and the aboriginal war-club and "elk-skin shield" (kaknd'lsh).
Little Klamath Lake he calls An-coose, a corruption of Agfiwesh.

Neither Klamath Lake nor Modoc Indians have taken any part in the
great Oregon war of 18.^j4-'r)(J, altliough their sympathies Avere of course
strongh- in favor of the aboiiginal cause.

For the year 1854 Powers records a battle fought by Captain Judy
against Modoc and Shasti Indians on the Klamath River, north of Yreka,
in which some women of the Shasti were killed.

The Report of 185!) speaks of continued hostilities on the side of the
Modocs against passing innnigrants and of the murdering of a party of five
white men in Jackson County, Oregon. Two of the nnu-ilerers belonged
to the tribe of Chief LeK'kash, and three of the perpetrators were seized and
killed by the Klamath Indians (page 392).

•This would make only six, not aoven, villages.

EARLY HISTORr.

Alexander S. Taylor lias t\u> folluwiiiof passage In his "California
Farmer" of June 22, 18()(>: " (hiintiikus, l.alacks, Sclionches, and Tertup-
kark are names of chiefs among Klamath Lake [ndians of tlie Onkskenah
tribe. The big Klamath Lake is called Toakwa." Kxcept the first, the
above head-men were all identified in the Dictionary with the well-known
names of Leh'kash, Skontchish (a Modoc chief) and 'i atiipkaksh. Ciimi-
tukni, who died al)OMt \HiUi, is mentioned by Stephen Powers as a great
orator, prophet, and rain-maker.t

•Whether the two incursions made u|)on the Klamath Lake jjeople by
the liogue River Indians of TiiUK^ lineage, across the Cascade range, of
which detailed accounts were furnished in our Texts by Dave Hill, took
place about 1855 or earlicsr I have not the means of ascertaining. The
Lake tribe were not slow in inflicting vengeance upon the attacking party,
for they crossed the mountain pass and fell upon the camps of their enemies,
making sad havoc- among tliMu.

Frequent disputes and em-ounters occurred between the two chieftain-
cies and the Skasti Indiana around Yreka, California : but the warlike quali-
ties of the latter were often too strong for the aggressors, and the conflicts
were not very bloody.f With the Pit River or ••M.'.atwash tribe the matter
was diften-nt. Tl.oy were not, like the Sliasti, possessed of the warrior
spirit, and therefoie liad t<i suffer terribly from the animal raids perpetrated
upon them. In April aiul May the Klamath Lakes and Mo.locs would
surround the camps, kill the men, and abduct the women and children to
their homes, or sell them into slavery at the international bartering place
at The Dalles. Some of these raids were provoked l>y horse-stealing,
others by greed for gain and plunder, and the aggressors never suffered
heavily thereby. When they began is not known, but the treaty of 1864
put an end to them. Tho recitals in the Texts, pages 13-27 and 54, 55,

• Overland Moutbly, 1873, Juuo number, page rm. His a|)i)earan(!e had some-
tluiig fascinatuig for tl-e Ii.diii.is, an.l s,.nie are said to have tniveled two hundred miles
to consult bim. His niuiie }i{>poars to he Kumctakni=" coming from a cave," or " liv-
ing in a cave.''

tone of these ttgh s w/- ,fj,,,,, Iwtween tiio Sliasti, Modoc, and Trinity Riv.-r
Imlians for the possessfr<(i ^ o (,0» "an .luarry north of Shasta Butte, mentioned by
B. B. Redding in American flatnaj/, XIII, p. 668, et seq., and Archivf. Anthropol-
ogie, XIV, p. 425. '

fi0

ETHNOdllAI'firc yivKTCFT.

{five IIS gmpiiic sketclics of tlmnv iiitiTtribiil broils. Some of tbe eHsteni
I'it Rivers seoni to hnvo lived on fri(*iully tonus with the Modocs ; but tbe
bands further south, especially the -Hot Spriuff and Wig Valley Indiau?i,
were the principal sutterers by these iiuMirsions. In a raiil (tf 1857 fifty-six
of their women and children were enslaved and sold on the Columbia River
for Cayuse ponies, one squiiw being rated at five oi six horses and a boy
one horse.*

The Pit River Indians were a predatory tribe also, and very dangerous
to the immigrants passing through their country to northwestern Oregon.
Their continued depredations made it a duty of the (iovernment to inflict
upon them a heavy chastisement, and Afaj. Gen. Oeorge Crook, connnjind-
ing the Colorado Department of the United States Army, was intrusted
with its execution. This campaign of 18t!7 is described by him as fol-
lows :t

I continued tlie cunipnif;!! into tbu Pit River country with Company II, First
Ciiviilry, Lienteniint PiUiielle; Company l),Twentytliirtl Infantry, Lieutenant Madi-
gan, FirvSt Cavalry, commandinfi; and Anliie Mcintosh, with his twenty Fort Boisd
Indian scouts. We found on Pit River a party of warriors in camp. They fled.
The next d;iy we discovered a large party of warriors in the bluttVi on the river. We
had a severe flglit, lasting two days and nights. They cttected their escaiie by means
of holes and crevices in the ground. A great many were killed, nniong whom were
some of note; how many coultl not bo ascertained. Our loss was Lieutenant Madigan
and three men killed, and eight soldiers and one citizen wounded.

The more nnruly portion of these Indians were subsequently removed
to the Round Valley Reservation, Califoinia, and about two hundred are
still in their old homes.

Between the Klamaths and the neighboring Snake tribes there was
always a sort of disaffection, based npon dift'er«'nce of race, language, and
habits; but whether their earlier relations were always those of open hostility
or not is past finding out.| The wording of the treaty makes it probable that
the hunting grounds north and east of their present seats on Sprague River
were shared in common by both, and that the Snake Itidians frequently

•Alex. S. Taylor, "California Farmer," Miiy, 1859. "

t Report of the Secretary of War, 18r>8-'0», Part I, p. <J9, dated August 22, 1807,

St'iphen Powers refers to this fight in Contributions III, p. 208.

t One of the Texts, p. 28, shows that the Snukes in t -o instance attacked and

massacred iu a very cowardly way some women near the outlet of Williamson River.

THE THKATY OF 1801.

lit

rlianjfed their hcttloinuiitH, us luuitinjf natioim iiro in the Imhit of doiiifr.
Tliiis I'uiiliiio Marsh, ueur Silver Lake, and I '.inline Lake, on one of the
head HpriiigH of Des ( Chutes Kiver, wore both named after the Snake chief
Panaina of tmv Text.- The hands established upon the Hoservation since
the treaty was (sonchided are called Walpapijuul-Vahushkin. At first they
run otr and committed depredations in the vicinity, whereupon the Gov-
ernment was compelled to force them back. (Joneral Crook made several
expeditions in the execution of the task. These campaijr„s were short and
decisive, and the Klamath Lake scouts enjraged in them did good service,
iiH evidenced by General Crook's reports* and Dave Hill's Ti'xt, pages
28-33. Upon the dcifeat and killing of I^anafna, the VValpapi chief, the
tribe finally (juieted down and remained neutral in the commotion caused
by the Modoc war of !K72-'73.

No indications are at hand of the nuniber of Indians formerly inhabit-
ing the headwaters of the Klamath River. Before the first census was
taken estimates deserving no credence were made, varying from one thou-
sand to two thousand Indians. In those times the sc. urges of small-pox,
syphilis, and whisky did not inHict such terrible ravages as they do no;v
among the Indians; but instead of the.se the continual tribal (piarrels,
family vengeance, the ordeals of witchcraft, deai-th of food, and the inhu-
man treatment of the females nmst have claimed many more victims than at
l)resent. Emigration and intermarriages with other tribes were rather the
exception than the rule, and an^ so even now.

THE TREATY OF 1864,

During the ten years following Wright's massacre the country began
to assume a somewhat different aspect through the agri.-ultural and stock-
raising settlements of white j)eople that sprung up in Lost River Valley,
around Little Klamath Lake and in other places. The cession of lands to
the "Oregon Central Military Road (Jompany" from Eugene City, in Wil-
lAmet Valley, through the Cascade range, across the Klamath Marsh, to

•Contained in tlio Heport of the Secretary of War, 18«8-'(J9. Part I ni> fio 70
dated Se„tember2, l«(i7, and March 10, I8(i8. Tin- tn.o,,« killed twentv-Voir Snake
Indiiuis HI th. expedition of 18C7. See also Texts, Note to 28, M.

Ixii

liTllNCJGUArUlC WKETCU.

Wuvim- Luke, mid thence to the boundary of Id.il,,,, witl. it8 "six miles
limit" grants on both sides, took place before the conclusion of the treaty.
In order to snbject the troul)lesome Snake and Afodoc tribes to a
stricter control, and to secnre more protection to settlers and the immi-
grants traveling through ()reg..n, Fort Klamath was established north of
Upper Klamath Lake, in Lake Count)', and garrisoned with several com-
pam-es, who were of great service in preserving order in these sparsel)
inhabited tracts, 'I'he Klamath Lake Indians were more inclined to keep
up friendship with the white people than the other tril)es, nevertheless
some turbulent characters among them necessitated military restraint.

The Superintendent of Indian Affairs of the Northern" I )istri.-i of Cali-
fornia, .Judge E. Steele, adjusted s,.uie grave dithculties between the Shasti
and the Malclaks Indians, which threatened to break out into a terrible war
of dovastatii)n against the Shasti and the white settlers alike. Some of the
MHklaks " braves " had been kille.l upon the lands of white settlers, and the
nijured Indians lia.l begun retaliation already. Colonel Drew, stationed at
Fort Kla.natli (who fought marau.ling bands of Shoshoni and Bann<,cks
durmg the summer of IHCA), had arrested and executed "Captain " George,
a Klamath Lake chief, for criminal acts, and killed an Indian connno.dy
known as Skukum John. The chiefs and some representative Indians of
the contending tribes met Judge Steele near Yreka, California, on Febru-
ary 14, 1S64, and for some trifling consideration agreed to forego all further
hostilities among themselves, to allow free passage to anybody traveling
through then- territories, and to maintain terms of friendship with all whites
negroes, and Chinese. The Modocs also made the .special promise t.i
harass no longer the Pit River Indians by annual raids. It also appears
from Mr. Steele's allocution to the Indians that they had been selling to
whites and others Indian children of their own and of other tribes, and also
squaws, the latter mainly- for the purpose of prostitution.*

The establishment of Fort Klamath, the increa.se of white men's settle-
ments, the possibility of Indian outbreaks on account of the greater vicinity
of the farms to the Indian villages, and the desire of the Indians themselves
to ..btan. rations, supplies, and annuities brought the opportunity of a
• Ueporl of tbo Comuiissioucr of ludiau Attiiir.^ for mi, pp. 84, 85 aud lO^-llO.

TDIi TKliATi: OF iaU4.

liiU

troaty witli these Iiuliiitis more forcibly before the Government thuii over
before. In coinpliiuite with iuHtriictions from Incliiin Commissioner Will-
iiim R Dole, Superintendent J. V\^ I'erit iruntington, uccompanied i>y
Agent Logan, went tin-ough the Ue« Chutes Vallo} to F<.rt Klamatii, and
found there a hirge number of Indians of both sexes assembled, seven hun-
dred and ton of whom were Klamath Lake, three hundred and thirty-nino
Modoc people, and twenty-two of the YahuHkm band of Snake Indians.
They unanimously concurred in the desire that Lindsey Ai)plegHte, a settler
of Jackson County Oregon, be appointed as their agent. The treaty was
c<mcluded on the 14th of Octol)er, 1H64, and duly signed by the contract-
ing parties, including twenty-si.x chiefs and principal men of tiio tribes.
Huntington's estimate of funds necessary for fidHlling treaty stipulations
and subsisting the Indians the Hrst year amounted to a total of .S6!),400.
The text of the treaty being too long for insertion entire, I restrict myself
hero to the contents of the principal paragraphs:

Article 1 stipulates the cession of the territor) described above (^p. xvi),
and sets apart as u rv.inrafion for the tribes referred to the tract included
witiiin the limits following: Beginning upon the Point of Rocks, about
twelve miles south of the month of Williamson River,* the boundary follows
the eastern shore north to the mouth of Wood Kiver; thence up Wood
River to a point one mile north of the l)ridge at Fort Klamath ; thence du3
east to the summit of the ridge wi.ich divides the upper and middle Klamath
Lakes (now called Klamath Marsh and Upper Klamuth Lake); thence
along said ridge to a point due east of the north end of the upper lake; thence
due east, passing the said north end of the upper lake to the sunnnit of the
mountains on the oast side of the lake; thence along said mountain to the
point where Sprague's River is intersected by the Ish-tish-ea-wax Creek
(probably Meryl Creek); then in a soutlierly direction to the sunnnit of the
mountain, the extremity of which forms the Point of Roc^ks; thence along
said mountain to the place of begi.ming. The tribes will remove to this
reservation immediately after the ratification of the treaty and remain
thereon. No whites, except eniployds and officers of the United States
Governme nt, ar e :^llowed to reside upon tiiis tract, and the Indians have
•At the foot of Nilakslii Mouutaiu. ~

Ixiv

EXHNOGKAPHIC SKETCH.

the exclusive right of taking fish and gathering edible roots, seeds, and
berries within the reservation. Provii^lon is made by which the riglit of
way for public roads and railroads across said reservation is reserved to
citizens of the United States.

Article 2. As a payment for the ceded lands the Indians shall receive
$8,000 per annum for a period of five years, $5,000 per annum for the next
five years, and the sum of $3,000 per annunj for the five years next suc-
ceeding.

Article 3 provides for the payment of $35,000 for removing the In-
dians to the reservation, subsisting them during the first year, and provid-
ing them with clothing, teams, tools, seeds, etc.

Articles 4 and 5 provide for the establishment of a saw-mill, a flouring-
niill, a manual-labor school, and hospital buildings, all to be maintainrd
and sHpplied with working material at the expense of the United .States for
the period of twenty years. Employes for running these establishments
shall be paid and housed by the (rovernment also.

Article 6 reserves the right to the Government to provide each Indian
family with lands in severalty to the extent of forty to one hundred and
twenty acres, and to guarantee possession to them. Indians are not allowed
to alienate these lands.

Article f). The Indians acknowledge their dependence upon the Gov-
ernment of the United States, and pledge them.selves to be friendly with
all citizens thereof, to connuit no depredations upon the persons or property
of said citizens, and to refrain from carrying on any war upon other Indian
tribes.

Article 10 prohibits the sale and use of liquors upon the Reservation,
and Article 11 permits the Government to locate other Indian tribes thereon,'
the parties to this treat}- not losing any rights thereby.

The treaty was proclai-.ied February 17, 1-S70.

Like most of the treaties concluded between the United States Gov-
ernment and the Indian tribes, this compact was made much more to the
advantage of the white man than of his red brother. Not only were the
•stipulated aniuiities rather small for a bo<ly of Indians, which was then
c onsidered to number about two thousand peojile, hut those annuities were

THE TUEATY OF 1864.

Ixv

to be paid only after the mtification of the treaty by the President and the
Senate, vvliich did not take place till five years after the conclusion viz
February 17, 1870. Meanwhile the Indians were always subject to the
imss.b.hty ot l)eing renmvo.l from the homes of their ancestors by the stroke
oi a pen. The bungling composition of the document appears from the fact
that a grave mistake was committed by in.serting the term "east" instead
ot west (Italicized in our te.xt above), and by not mentioning the land
grant n.ade to the Oregon Central Military Wagon Itoad Oon.pany before
1864, winch, when insisted upon, would, with its twelve-mile limits take
awa;. the best parts of the Reserve, the Sprague River Valley, for insiance
At the tune when I visited the country, in the autunn. of 1877, *'.e Klamith
Lake Indians showed mucii animosity against the settlers establishi„<.- them-
selves within their domain. The company having left n.anv portions of
then- projected wagon road unfinished, Congress, by act approVed March 2,
188!), dn-ected the Attorney-General to cause suits to be brought within six
months from that date, in the nan,e of the United States, in the United
States Circuit Court for Oregon, to try the questions, an.ong ot'.ers of the
seasonable an.l proper completion of said road, and to obtain jud-nnents
wind, the court was authorized to render, declaring forfeited to the^^nited
States all lands lying conterminous with those parts of the road which were
not constructed in accordance with the re.pnren.ents of the granting act.
(Cf on th,.s subject Ex. Doc. 131, Mouse of Represontative.s, Fortv-ninth
Congress, first session, and Ex. Doc. 124, Senate, Fiftieth Conoress 5

The hrst representative of the Government, Subagent Li.ulsev Apple-
gate, erected some buildings at the northwest point of Upi-er Khunath
Uke, called Skohuashki (abbr. Kohashti); but as earlv as IHCV, ho called
attenfon to the fact that ,he place had no .suitable water-power, but that
three mdes above the little creek at Beetle's Rest was a most excellent
motor for driving a saw-mill and a grist-mill, and, being on the ed^^e of the
pn.e woods, was a well-Htted and shady place for the agency bm-ldin..s
Tins adv.ce was followed in ISOS, two years before the ratification of the
treaty. In the same year the old practice of cr.Mnating dead bodies was
abandone.l an.l inhumation introduced. The grave-vnrd was .-stablished
"•-.Hi the ash-pile of cremation, still visible iu 1877. and in 1878 a Second

kvi

KTUNOlJKArillC SKETCH.

cemetery whs iiiaugunitod between the Williainsoii River unci Modoc Point,
one mile and a lialf south of the brid<re.

President LI. S. Grant's peace policy in regnn] to the Indians was
inauguratcid by act of CVm-ress ,lated April 10, 186!>. The supervision of
the Indian agencies was phvced in the hands of the authorities of religious
denominations, a board of commissioners appointed,* and the spiritual in-
terests of that reservation turned over to the Methodist Church.

SCIENTIFIC RESEAHCnES ON THESE INDIANS.

The study of the ethnography of a tribe usually precedes that of its
language: sometimes both are pursued simultaneously, and this is undoubt-
edly the coi-rect method. In the case of the Maklaks, Horatio Ilale.f the
linguist of Oh. Wilkes's United States Exploring Expedition (18;{8-1842),
and still holding forth as a pioneer in his lines of research, took down a
vocabulary from a Klamath Lake Indian whom he met on the Columbia
River in 1841. No ethnographic remarks upon the tribe accompany this
vocabulary, probably because information obtained from interpreters, who
speak the Chinook jargon only, is notoriously unreliable.

Next in time follow the extensive explorations of .John Charles Frdmontt
of the interior h^sin west of the Rocky Mountains and of the Pacific coast
from 1843 to 1844, and again from 1845 to 1846, during which the
Klamath Lakes and Klamath Marsh were visited and explored. His re-
ports contain graphic, sketches of all that was seen and observed by his
l.arties ; but scientific accuracy is often wanting, and many countries are
described without giving the Indian local names, which are indispensable
to identification.

The acquisition of the Pacific coast by the United States (California
in 1846, Oregon in 1848) naturally suggested projects of connecting the
two oceans by a transcontinental railroad, starting from the Mississippi
River and reaching to the Hay of San Francisco, l^he Central Govern-

• Cf. Revised Statutes of the United States, aeeond edition, 1S78 i) ,339
t Born in Newport, New Hanipshiiv. in 1817.

tliovu at SavaunaL, Cl.-.,r«ia, January 21, m:i; can.li.late for tlie I'resi.leney of
the Minted States in I8r,(i; ,lied in New York City, .Inly Vi, 1890.

SCIE^'TIFIC RESEARCH.

Ixvij

ment sent out in different .liroctions urniy officers and engineers to survey
ti.e proposed routes, and to publisl, the results in a series of volumes.* For
tins purpose the Thirty-second Congress approi)riated, by an act passed
May 3, 1853, the sum of SlaO.OOo, which was by two hiter appropriations
n. 1854 nicreased to a total of $340,000. A branch of this railroad was to
run up the Sacramento Valley to the Columbia River. In this portion the
Klamath headwaters were jjrinc^ipally c,)ncerned, and it is that which was
surveyed by Lieut. Robert Stockton Williamson.f assi.sted by Lieut llenrv
Larcom Abbot, both of the Corps of Topographical Engineers. Their joint
report, together with the reports of .specialists on zoology, botanv, .reolo-ry
etc, is contained in Vol. VI (1855) J These reports me valuable and on a
level with the condition of s,;ience as it was in those days; but the use of
the volumes is inconvenient when reference has to be made to the bulky
maps, all of which are contained in other volumes than the reports them-
selves. Lieutenant Williainson, assisted by Lieutenant Crook, when on the
border of Klamath Marsh (August 22, 1855), obtained one hundred and
two terms of the Klamath Lake dialect, which are published in Vol. VI,
Part I, pp. 71 , 72. This vocabulary is brimful of mistakes, not throu^rh any
want ot attention of these officers, but because they questioned thei." inter-
preter through the imperfect mediums of gestures and the Chinook jar-ron
The vocabulary taken in 1864 by Dr. William M. Gabb at Kohashti
shows the same defects, and was obtained through the "jargon" also •
other collections were made by Dr. Washington Matthews, W C Clark'
and Lewis F. Hadley. The words of Modoc as cp.oted in the publication!
ot A. B. Meachani are misspelt almost without exception. From Stephen
Powers we possess a short Modoc vocabulary, as yet unpublished.

Whosoever inspects these word collections will see at once that the
staidy of the Klamath language had never gon^beyond the vocabulary

•Reports of explorati..n8 and surveys to ascer ain^th; most practicable and eco-
noancal route for a ra.lroad from t!.e Mississippi River to the Paciflc Ocea,', made „
H^r^iiZrZ:^ ^-"'--"•— -• Q-arto, i.lustr.wit,.,^.J:.;S

Vbbot, a native of Beverl.v, Ma«.sachu8ett.s, was born in 1831 raucmoo.

tTlH. am pur, of Vol. VI contains Abbot's report, and is cUietly topographical.

Ixviu

KTHNOGRAl'UIC SKETCH.

stage before the publicatitm of the present volume. Even the author expe-
rienced considerable difficulties before lie could pass beyond that limit.
When he reached the reservation agency lie found not over three or four
individuals wiio were able to speak a toleral)le Knglish, and the knowledge
of this tongue is ab.solutely UG'-,essary to any one who aspires to the \)oa\-
tion of an interpreter of liis own language in those parts. The Indians
were nearly all pure bloods, and most of them knew scarcely more than a
dozen Englisli terms. Many could converse in Chinook jargon, but the
majority, especially the females, were not ac(piainted even witli this preca-
rious means of inter- )urse. Indeed, tliese people nuist be slow in ac(piir-
ing an Aryan language like I^nglish, for it presents so many character-
istics entirely oppo.site to those of Klainatli. Knglish is not provided with
reduplicatit)!!, prefixes of form, nor with the nudtii)le suttixes of Klamath ;
it differs from it also by its more complex syntactic structui-e, its imperfect
nominal inflection, by its distinctive form for' the nominal plural, tlie grada-
tion of th(i adjective and adverb eflected by sufhxation, its personal inflec-
tion of the verb, and a long array of irregular and auxiliary verbs.

Tims it will be easily ))erceived that the obtaining of correct and reli-
able ethnographic and linguistic information in such a tribe is fraught with
many difficulties. Sometimes it is practicable to get the terms for visible
objects bv making gesture signs or by pointing at the objects, but it just as
often misleads; and if the investigator has to do with people who know no
other language than their own, he must revise his notes with many of them
before he can place any trust in what he has written down from dictation.
The Indians and mixed bloods who have made some progress in the acquisi-
tion of Engli.sh pronounce/ as ^;, v as b, r as I — are modeling Englisli after
their own language, using he for our he, she, it, they, him, her, them ; all this
being luVk, hu't, hu'nk for them. They do not know how to use our conjunc-
tions, a defect which makes all the tale.s, myths, and other textual informa-
non unintelligible. The only means of obtaining results is to pick out the
best people from the crowd and to train them for awhile for the purpose
wanted, until they are brought so far as to feel or understand the scope of
the investigator. Women will lie found more useful than men to infcrm
him about mvtlis, auiiuiil stories, the gathering of vegi-table food, house-

SCIENTIFIC llESEARCH.

Ixk

liokl iitfiiiivs, iiiul terniH leferring tc> colors; uieu more appropriate tliaii
^\onu!n in instructing liim about their hunts, fishing, travels, their legal
customs, wars and raids, house-building, and similar work. Omit asking
them about tlie detjeased, for it makes them angry and sullen, They do not
as a mle willfully lead the investigator into error when they see that he is
in earnest. Errors often originate in preconceived notions or theories and
inappropriate questions of the investigator, sometimes also in the want of
abstract terms in the interpreter's language. To insure coi-rectness in an
Indian myth, animal story, or any relation whatever, it should first bo
taken down in Indian, and of this a verbatim translation secured.

Ethnographic sketches of both tribes, but chiefly of the Modo(vs, were
l)ublished in the newspapers of the Pacific coast at the time of Ben
Wright's massacre, but they were not accessible to me; more circnmstantial
were those written at the time of the ^rodoc war (l«7-_>-'73), and specimens
of these may ])e seen in A. H. Afeacham's publications, in the " Overland
]\[(mthly " of San Francisco, and in Stephen Powers's " The Modok," in
Contributions III, pp. 2r)2-2G2.

Ethnographic objects manufectnred by and in actual use among both
tribes were purchased at different periods by collectors. The National
.Museum in Washington owns several of them ; but the moi^t coiDplete col-
lection is probably the one made in 1882 by the Swiss naturalist, Alphons
Forrer, a native of St. Gall, which was partly sold to the Ethnographic
Museum of St. Gall, partly (eighty-five articles) to that of Heme, tl°e capi-
tal of Switzerland. Forrer lived several nu)nths among the Klamaths,
and thus was enabled to secure the best specimens. There are two hiiniisish
or " magic arrows," an implement which has probably become very scarce
now. The majority of these objects are manufactured from wood, fur-
skin, and basket material. There is no suitable clay found in the Klamath
Hiver Highlands, hence the.se Indians never made any pottery.

Tne report of Lieutenants Williamson and Abbot contains a lai-g<"
array of astronomic positions and of meteorologic ol)ser\ations made during
the expedition, which will prove useful to later observers. The zo^.logi(^
botanic, and geologic reports made by different scientists were considJivd
of high value at the time they were first pui)lished. It will be lemembered

Ixx

HTHNOCJKAPUIO SKETOll.

that these explorations were the starting-point of all further researches upon
the Pacific coast, and as such they are creditable to the men with whom
and the epoch at which they originated.

The topographic map of the Klamath headwaters is now being pre-
pared by the U. S. Geological Survey. It is laid out upon a scale of 1 to
2r)0,000, with contour intervals of 200 feet, the rivers and water sheets in
blue. The sheets are named as follows: Ashland, Klamath,* Shasta,
Modoc Lava Red, Alturas— the last three belonging to California. The
surveys were made from 1883 to 1887 by Henry Gannett, chief geographer,
\. H. Thompson, geographer in charge; triangulation by the George M.
Wheeler survey, by Mark B. Kerr; and topography, by Eugene Ricksecker
and partly by Mark B. Kerr.

THE MODOC WAR OF 1872-1873.

The well-known maxim, " it is cheaper to feed the Indians than to
fight them," has forced itself upon the governments of all American coun-
tries in such indelible characters that it has become a rule for them to con-
clude treaties with the different " nations" to keep them at peace, feed them
by rations or annuities, and confine them within the limits of certain terri-
tories. The treaty of 1864 was not attended by all the favorable results
expected. The Snake Indians ran off from the Reservation during April,
1866, the Modocs in 18G5. The latter tribe were not compoll"d to leave
their old domain, now ceded to ihe United States, till 1869. Moreover, it
always takes several years to gather straying Indians upon a reservation
after a treaty has become an accomplished fact. The Superintendent of
Indian Affiiirs in Oregon, Mr. Meacham, on December 30, 1869, after a
lung and excited "talk," succeeded in bringing two hundred and fifty-eight
Modocs to Modoc Point, upon the reservation allotted to them. On April
26, 1870, the supply of rations was exhausted, and the more obstinate half
of the tribe left the Reservation again for the old domain upon Lost River
and the lakes, whereas the other half, under Skc'mtchish, went to Yaneks,
on Sprague River, where the Superintc ndeat located them. All Modocs
• The name for tbe sheet east of Klaiuith has not yet been determined.

THE MODOC WAR.

Ikx!

hud become disgusted iit tlie close neighboiliood and secret enmity of the
Klainiith Lake Indians, their congeners.

The presence of the Modocs in their "ohl country," though contrary
to the letter of the treaty, was tolerated by the Government until the
autumn of 1«72, when the complaints of the white settlers against the
Indians became too frecpient and serious to be further disregarded. A
struggle to secure the enforcement of the treaty could no longer be post-
poned. The Modocs open defiance to the authorities could no longer be
endured, and this brought on the Modoc war.

Space does not pernn't me to give more than an outline sketch of this
bloody contest of a small, sturdy people of mountaineers against the regu-
lar army and a large body of volunteers; but many references in detail
have been made to it in the Texts and Notes, to which the reader ma^'
refer. A monograph of the Modoc war doing full justice to the importance
of this event and to its ethnographic features would alone fill a volume of
considerable size. Here, as well as in all other Indian wars, the result was
tbat the strong conquered the weak, which is always the case in the end
especia'ly when the former ha^ the law on his side.

According to the war chronicle obtained by me in the Modoc dialect
from the Riddle fan)ily the war originated in a petition sent by the settlers
to the President to have the Indians removed from their old homes to the
Reservation, in fulfillment of the treaty stipulations. The President agreed
to this, and sent an order to the connnander at Port Klamath to have them
removed— " peaceably if you can; ff)rcibly if you must!" In the morn-
ing of November 29, 1872, Major Jackson surrounded the Modoc camp
upon Lost River, near its mouth. When he tried to disarm and capture the
men they escaped to the hills. The soldiers and the settlers of the neigh-
borhood then fired upon the unprotected women and children of another
Modoc camp ftirther north, for which brutal act the ^Modoc men retaliated
in the afternoon by killing fourteen settlers upon their farms. Hereupon
the Modocs retrpated with their families to the Lava lieds, south of I'ule
Lake, the home of the Kumbatwash, and there liiey strengthened some
select positions, already strong by nature, through the erection of stone
walls and earth-works. Kfntpuash or Captain Jack, who now was not the

1*»
xxu

ETnXOOKAPUIC SKETCH.

■

cliief only but also tlio militiuv K^jkUm- of tlio Modocs, selected for his head-
quarters tlie Hpacioiis cjivciii called Men Wrii^Hit's Cave, and there the tribe
nMnaJMiMl, iinattackcd and unliarnied, until the 17th of January of the year
enxuin;r.

Till' wintry season and the <liilicult condition of the roads, or rather
trails, in those mountainous tracts delayed tins concentration of the trooj)S
a!id provisions to tlai Lava Hcds for nearly two months. On the day
al)ove mentioned Colonel Frank Wheafon, then in ('(Mninaiid, resolved to
attack from two sides the seventy* sturdy warriors in their stronghold.
Many of the troojs were fresh from Arizona, and had fought against
Apaches armed with bows and lances only. The Modocs carried the old
octagonal small-bore Kentucky rifle with the greased patch and small ball,
wbich within its limited range had a very flat trajectory, and conse(piently
n large dangerous space.f The fog was so thick that men could not see
their right or left hand comrades, \m\ in spite of tli'in the commander ordered
the attack. .Scarface Charley, a leader possessed of the best military and
engineering ciipacity in this war, cdaimed that lip held his station, with three
scpniws to load, against a platoon of cavalry. The troops counted in all
about four hundred men. One corps had to attack from the north, viz,
the shore of Tule Lake, the other from the west, and without connecting
both by a field telegraph the commander ordered them to unite upon the
top of the hills after storming the Indian positions. The fog ainiihilated
these plans entirely, and the decimated troops were in the evening with-
drawn to V'an IJremer's farm, west of tlu* Lava H^'ds.

After this signal discomfiture another ofticer, (ieneral Alvin C. Uillem,
was assigned to the command, and the troops were reinforced by four com-
jjanies of the Fourth Artillery from San Francisco. Instead of attackinjr
the Modocs again on a clear day and bombarding their positions, it was
deemed })roi)er to nego. tte with them for jieace. There was a jjarty of
extremists for war in the Modoc camp and another inclined to listen to
peace overtures, and upon the latter the body of the Peace Connnissioners|

•For the fater period of tlie war, beKimiiiig Aprif IG, Frauli Kiddfe .states tfie
iiiuuber of tlie Modoc waniors to have been lifty one; i2, 20.

tCaptaiii Fit-Ids, "The Modoc Wir."

t Appointed by the Secretary of the Interior, 0. Delano. The particulars in
Texts ; note to 38, 1, page 48,

THK MODO(J WAR.

Izxiii

pmu^ipally rolio.l. Several uttomptH af parleyi... woro uns„..ossn.l, I,,.,
Inially tl.o partios were appointed to .onveiie on April 11 187'5 TIm
.•..|.ture or Kfn,pMa.sh's ponie-s Uy the tn.op„, i„ „pite of General (Janl,> 's
l"om,se ot a total .snspension of l.ostilitios, l.a.l exasperate.l tl.e cl.i,.f to

1.0 dark deed was Huecessfnlly perpetrate.l u,,on two n.on.her.s of tl.e
lea... Conu.Ks«io„. The others Hed, and henceforth, after the da.stardlv
.nunler of General Oanby, a new plan was adopted for a .speedy tenninJ-
tioii ot tli(i war. ■'

Wright's Cave an<l snrronndin.s were l,o„>barded with heavy shells
on Aprd U, 17, and IH, and atta.-Ls n.ade hy the troops sin.nltaneonslv
IV tins t,me about ninety Indian s,.onts had joine.l the Arnn-, two-thir.ls oi'
who,., w.. Warn. Spring, on^-third Waseo Indians, all nn.ler the eon.-
■nand ol Donal.l MeKay. The Modoes vaeated the cave on April 19 -.nd
woro .net by a detadnnent of .•egnla.-s and thbty scents at «and Tlilh'th.n-
""^'s ron. the cave, on April 2(;. This enga,.ement was n.o,. di.sasfons
n he foops than to the Modoes; In.t at the Dry Lake %ht, Mav 1.,, tl.
.tte.^«...e ft>.-ced to .-etaeat. This was the beginning of the dissolnticin of
tl.. Modoc fo.-ces; the,r p.-ovisions con.n.ence.l to .ive out, and one praiion
of the wa.-no..s be,.an.e dissatisfied with Kfntpuash's leade.ship. This p.ntx
sunende.-ed May ■>5 to the .onnnander-in-chief, Gene.-al Jefferson c' Davi^
who had o,. May 2 relieved Colonel fSillem, the inte..n,ediate eonnnan.ler'
Soo,. after tins, on June 1, Kfntpuash. with the few .nen who ha.l ren.ained'
true o hn., o-ave hin.self up to a scoutin,. p,,,,- of cavah.-, led to his hid-
ing place by the t.-eache.-ous Stean.boat F.-ank,* who, it ...ust be acknowl-
edged notwithstanding, had been one of the .nost valiant defende.-s of the
Modoc cause.

The captured Modoes, nu.nboring with their won.en a.ul children
about one hun,l,-ed and forty-five persons, were for awhile fed at the ex-
pense of the(iove..nn.ent,aud then b.-ought to the no.-thea.ste.-n con.er of
the Indian 1 e.-ntory, whe.e thei,' renu.ants live at the p.esent tin.e. Before
tl.e.r depa.-tu.-e a nun.ber of then., while being conveyed in a wa.^on to
some place near Tule Lake, we.-e fi.ed upon and some fen.ales killed bv
the .-evengeful settle... The u.u.de.v.s of (lene.-al Canby a..d D.-. Thou.^M

•Cf. Texts Tm; 14, l"), and Note.

Ixxiv

KTHNOClUAl'llIC SKKTCIl.

could not jomaiii iiupiinialuMl. Hrmij^lit Ixttore ii jury at Fort KliviuHtli,
Khitiiimah, Chiof Sk«'»utcliisli. Black or lli'ika Jim, and liowton C^harley
were condemned to the fj^allows an<l Ii" ij at tlio Kort Oiitolior 3, 1M73,
wliilo two acceflaories to the deed — Bruitcho and SliVlkn (now Geor;f«
Denny) — were condemned to incarceration at Fort Alcatraz, San Fran-
cisco Hay.*

Thus ond'jd tin long-contested struffgle of the little Modoc baiul
against the Oregon and ('alifornia voliintoors and the regular troops of tho
United States Army. Certainly the heroism and ingenuity displayed Ity
the Modocs would have been wortliy of a better cause, and would have
passed down to posterity in the brightest colors of patriotism had not the
murderous "entreacte" and ("anby's death deprived the struggle of itH
heroic luster. The unworthy termination of this war is well typified by
the fact that the skeleton of the Modoc captain is now dangling as an ana-
tomical specimen in the nuiseum of the Hurgeon-C^enerars (Office, atWanh-
ington, District of Colinnbia.

STATISTICS,

From the end of the Modoc war to the present year the condition of
affairs has not changed much in the Klamath Highlands. The reports of
the United States agent rejaiat the siune story of progress towards civiliza-
tion every year; but in view of the dilficulty of bringing a iuuiter tribe
into the high road of Christian culture and industrial progress we can not
attach much credence to such reports so long as they are couched in gener-
alities and do not contain special facts attesting mental improvement by
schooling.

In agriculture success is possible only in the Sprague River Valley,
but pasturing will succeed almost on every spot of the Reservation. The
report of 1888, compared with that of 1880, shows a considerable improve-
ment in this direction. The 2,500 horses and nudes counted in 1880 had
increased to 4,532 in 1888 : the 200 head of cattle to 2,201. In the latter
year the number of swine figured 208, of doujestic fowl, 1,000. Of the
20,000 tillable acres of land 1,400 were cultivated by the Indians in

* Slfi'lks was released, auil stays now at tlie Mo<loc Reservation, Indian Territory,
with Scai'faoe (/Iiarlov and some other wanictrs of tliat war.

Tnnui, STATrSTICH. Ijjjjy

1888 .t„,l rm 1,,-nkn,, l.y tho.n ; 10,.M)() ......s vvo.v inHoso.l l.y fH,...

11,0 cropH of I8SH u,nounto,l to 8,(.0() JhihIh-Is of .lu-ut, 4,(M)0 ,/ onin and
mrley, 1,000 b„sl,oI. .,f vc.,rohtJ.I..H, ;),(),.,) to„H of hav; ,uu\ 500 po.mds of
...ttor woro nmnufartnro.l. Of I,„„l„., ,o.,,„o(, f..;,, ,voro „awe.l Tho
In.l.ans trauHporto.l with tl.oir ow>. tcm.ns T.OO tons of t'r,ight, an.l tluM-ol.v
earne. 81 500. Tho two I.oanlin.-H,.hoolH. ono at tho Kht.nath A^enc-y
ami the other at Vanoks. in th. sa.n.- year l,oar.lo.l 21a pnpils at a It t'o
tho Government of .Sl8,764-abont SlO.K. ;. n.onth por -apitH

, nJan,rTl 'f "'" '''•'""'"'' ^''*'"" ^'" '^''""""' ^^^^ervation in
.0., .,000. and of thono only abont 20,000 acreH are con^i.leml to bo tiih.-

•I" l'""l- I .0 rost is oc-cupiod i,y woods, n.arshos, rocks, and other hin-
(irancos to cnltivation.

The Hchool and chnrch interests are in tho hands of tho Jfothodist
Kp.soopal Chnroh, which also has a vote in tho appointn.ont of tho Unito.l
htatos ap-ont.

The statistics of popnh.tion have fnrnishod reliabh- ,h,ta only from the
tn.,e when annnitios wore fn-st distribntod an.ong these hnb-ans." This no-
oessitatod an annual oonnt of each fan.ily, .ivin. tho nnn.bor of the indi-
viduals bolon,nn. to ,.ud.. . )no of thoso was n,ad<. dnri,,. nu- presence on
1.0 reserve on October HO, 1S77, before tho wint<.r supplies wore dealt out
to the tribe. I lie summary is as follows :
l)avi(l Hill, ,:l,ief, at Af,'cM.ey and <,n Wiliiitinson River . . . .„.

1 l.i, Lea.1 chief, at the bridge, Williams.,,. River f.f,

hong John, chief *''■'

Jack, chief 1«3

Lilo. chief »^

■ ■ " ^3

Total — -

The census taken in the Sprac^no River \-alley, Yanekssnimgenc'!^
furmshe,! tho following figures, Klan.ath Lake Indians and Modocs bein...
indiscnmuiately included: "

Littlejohn, chief

Skoutchish, chief ^*

Moiloc Johnson, head chief ^^

Ben, chief ^1

Brown, chief *»!

Total

1!»4

Ixxvi

HTIINCMIIIAIMIK; yivKTCII.

Tiiu Siuikc IiuliiiiiH wcru not (-(MiiittMl at tliat tiiiio, Itiit wore UM.siimod
to liiivu t)ut Miiiiit' popiilatioii at* in IHld : MVL 'I'lim ^ivoH a total of InditiiiH
for tlui HcHcrvafioii of S'Jfl. TliiH count includod aliont cif^lit mixed bloods
and scvt'U Wiinn Sprin},' Indians from tliu lh(s (Jlnitcs Uivor. Tlit' board-
in{?-Hclio(d at tin- Klamath Affciu'v thou had (>ij?htoon pnpils of l)oth t)t«X0H.

Tlio irports of tlic Indian (^)nunissioiu'r for IHHO, IXHI, IH82, 18H;{,
nnd 1HH4 can not be fully relied on, since they ;,'ive the same fif^nreH for
aacli of these yean, with an unvaryinjr total of 1,()2;J Indians — Klaniaths,
707; Modocs, 151: Snake IndiaTia, 105.

The report of l.SHH, iFoseph Kuier\ ii;f(Mit, jfives THS Klamath lialeand
Modoc Indians and 145 8nake Indians, a total of Il.'i3 individuals.

Probably the most reliable <lata were fnrni.shod by the Indian censuH
made in ISHl for the United States Census Hiu'eau, from March to Auyust ;

Till 111 ciftriUoH on Ki'sorviiticm

Niiinlicr (iriiitili'H

NiiiiiliiT 111' IVinali'H

I'mimrriiMl at loiirti'i-n y«arn and iipwunU

Niinilier iiiiinU'tl

Number ori'iill IiIiiiiiIh

Niiinbor of inixi'd l>]ont]s

N'iiiiil>(<r Ih'Iow l»onty-oiir yourH

Xniiilirr aliovc Iwt^iil.voiie yours

Siipimrtcil one lialf or more liy civilized indUH-

tries

Snpiiorled one-lialf or more liy (lovernmont....

Nninlier weariiii; eili/i'n^' drenn

Ae.-eH nnder eiillivation

Nninber atteudintt hiIiooI

Klitmiitlm.

(J7«
ilHH

:ion

10!)

•im)

004
Vi

:ui

6:«)

'i,'H9

ModDeM,

Mulale.

Hnakea.

189

105

r>8

:io

189

5»

»5

lOTi

1
11-2

105

t40

:ic

Tot all

t.OIS
454
504

i:ui
4W

I,(H)4

473*
545

4U
U

968

8, 425

This enumeration is remarkable on account of the large number of
Molale Indians mentioned in it, an element of the population which is no-
where else designated as such in the periodical reports made by the agents.

NATIHAL I'lllLOMoi'llV

Ixxvii

NATURAL I'lIILOHOI'IIY.

In the ...annor of .•onHi.loH,,,. the ImnHco.ulontal v ,1 hu.I i„ view-
in,' t..o ,,r„l,Io,„H of tlu, Hupornaturul wo lu-n-eivo o,um„o„K .littbre.u.«H
..monf, fho vanons nu-os of .„ankin.l. Tl.oso .li.ro.vn.... ...ainly ariso fro.n

"'"' "T" """T"' ""' '^"•'"•"l""""n>l'i P|>li..l to the doirioH sup-

1.OS0.1 to roproMont tl.o poworn of nat.no and to ,ul.- tl.o «o,I.| Tho nrin i

t.vo man .-o^anl. overythin, .I.owin, lifo o,- spontan.o,. n.ot L ani-'

mated by a «pM-.t an.l ondowod witi. certain Innnan faculties, wlaroan
a..w.n, tl.0 n.o..o adva-u-od nations tl.oso san.o .odn and ,o..ii ..pp...- .no.,
tulb a.. l...opo,no,.pln.,.d a..d thoi,- n.o.-al and intollc-tnal atfibntes .non-

posed to ...do tl.o ..nivo..so l.oco.no ....ifiod i..to 0..0 'VS-.p...... ,L"" '

A peopIeH religion aiw..ys rosts np.,.. a basis laid do,v,. in"...,n.ot,.
«.es a..d fa.th .lly dopiots tho i..toIloot..al and ...o.-al ..ualities of its spi.-it-
al loado. at that pe.-iod. Wo., they fo..ocious and cruel, tl.o ,ods J,..,...
y -l';-';! ••!'- n.o people .u. ba.-ba.-ie also; were they ki..d a..d n.iid-
"anne..e , the., tl.e.r deities show these sa...e .„e..tal .p.al.'ies. Deities a. t
.y.n.rae!es,and a.e .ni.aeles then.selves; fV>r a n.i.-acle or act cont.-uve..-
"..' the huvs of natu.-o i« the o..ly ca..sality which tl.o .ni..d of p..i„ntivo
«..a,. .s al,le to .n.ag..,e to solve the ditHc.lt p..oble...s of phvsies, .eteo.-ol-
o.y .n. other processes of natn.-e As there is no co.l.e.ed syste... in
.u. of t e saya,.e .•eh.no..s, it is by ..o ...ea,.s ditKcult to ove.-th.-ow the
behetsot apn.nitive people and to substit.Ue othe.-s for it, p..ovided !l,e
new ones a.-e .-esti... ..po.. tl.o sa...e f„..da.nental p.-i,.ciple of spiritH dei-

.e« and .n.racles. D.-ea.ns a.-e to the sava.e ...a., what the Bible is to us-

he sou..ce ot d.v...e .-evelatio.., with the in.po.tant dirte.-ence that he ca,.

1 od,.co rove at.on tIn-o..gh d..ean.s at .Ui The ...o.-e tho..,l.tfuI religio..s

l".'l. t.cMllv estabhsh .dealis.n a. opposite to .nate.-ialis.»; but i.. An.erica
no re|,,,on J..,,, „., ,-,„,,,^„. ,,„,„ ^^ ^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^ disti..ctio... The higher

: :: r "'^""^ ^r '^'^''«'' '--^'--j«- -^^^^^ --uoniai wo.-ship. di:.i..e

-acl s. p..aver a..d sac-itice, and atte.npt to elevate .nan's .-ha.-, ter bv
-nd teaoh...,s; he.-o in the wcste.-.. hen.isphe,.e ce.-eu.onv is .naJ^a d

> »

m
m

Ixxviii

ETHISOGUAI-HIC SKKTUH.

witchcmft only, religious tciists ure orgies, divine revohitiou is luunun hal-
lucination, and the moral element, when present in religion, is not urged
upon the conununity. While in the religions of the white man the gods
originally rejjresenting nature's powers gradually become teachers or
examples of morality and mental improvement, those of the other races
remain the stern and remorseless deities of the sky, the atmosphere, and
the earth, whose good will has to be projjitiated by sacrifice.

As zoodemonism is the most appropriate form of religion for man in
the animistic stage, the majority of the mythic characters in American relig-
ions are animals, especially (juadrupeds ; and even the fully anthropomor-
phized deities sometimes assunn;, in Oregon and elsewhere, the masks of
animals. The earlier Indians tirmly believed that such animals as were
the prototypes of their own species had human faculties, and talked and
thought as men do; in whatever tribe there are totemic gentes or clans
the members of these are supposed to have desctinded from that prototype
of a bear, deer, alligator, eagle, or whatever animal a gens is called after.
Certain qualities of man, physical and intellectual, fouiul their closest analo-
gies in those of animals, and the animal world is much nearer akin to man
in the mind of the Indian than in the white man's mind. Scurrilous and
grotesque acts ascribed to so many Indian deities were not intended for
derision, as with us, but for faithful portrayings of the habits of typical
aninnils; and zoodemonism — not exactly zoolatry, as in Egypt — is the form
of religion existing amcmg tlie icilil Indians of Aiwericia.

The large amount of ni}thologic and transcendental material obtained
among the Indians recpiires subdivision into several chapters. I present it
under the following subdivisions: a. lOlementary deities ; b. Spirit deities ;
c. Animal deities.

Of the mythologic data embodied in the present article the larger part
were obtained by myself, but not all. The others were gathered by
Messrs. Stephen Powers and Jeremiah Curtin, niainl}- b\ the latter, who
obtained over one hundred Modoc myths in 188;! and 1884, now formino"
part of the unpublished collection of the Bureau of Ethnology.

K'MI KAMTCJi.
THE BLKMENTAUY DEITIiiiS.

Ixvix

In tho KIa„.ul. thoology tl.o deities of the elements luwe preserved
ln.os ,n act t e,r character as represer.tatives of the po.ers of aatt.re
■nperfectly ant rop<nu.rphi.ed as they are, they appear rather as spirits
han as gods ; a 1 of the.n. the Earth perhaps excepted, are of the .nale sex.
I.ke he annual genn tney assun.e the adjectival suffix .untchiksh, ahhr
-|t.ntch h,„nu, a,>nent, ieion,in, to thr ,>a.sf,* though less a.noug the Modocs
t un n. the northern <.hieftaincy. The splendor, power, and ^ve-inspirin.:
quaht.es of these superluunan heings is not din.inished in the least by the
grotesque extenor and acts ascribed to son.e of then,. The skv gods wer
-ore plasfcally dehned by popular in.gination than the subterrane .
deities, and hence we begin our sketch with the fonuer.

K'MTJKAMJ'OU.

IIIk iiiilii par HS811 dco vidctiir,
Illo, «i fas e«l, superiiro (liv().s'

The chief deity of the Klan.ath people, the creator of the world and
ot mankind, ks K'nu'.kan.tch, or the "Ohl .Alan of the Ancients " the <4
njoval Old Man. The f.ll f^.n of the nan. is K'n.uk' ..l!' |,
Modocs f..quently use the shorter fbnu K.mnsh, K'n.nsh, an abbrevi tion

O'i He s aso nan.ed Ftfsi. amtch nalau., our old JutJur. tie was -dso
aes^natod Haitalkni, t,. on. on „,„, though the tenn is now Id fort
(.od of the Christians. In every way he is analogous to the 'ol .^
above" or the -ch ef in the skies" of the Indians of Central (California

Wutt the Indians .say aiui think of their chief deity 1 h.ive outlined

the Dictionary pages ,.H-,40, and what follows here will substantiate

data given there. Though K'n.uka.ntch is reputed to have creat d

ho earth, what is really meant is only the small portion of the g be

known to an inhabited by this mountaineer tribe, l.d not the ilml^

terrestrial globe, with its seas ami continents. Neither have these InZs

-. Idea of what the universe really is when they call him the .-reator .ind

..... ;!;;iit:\;7.;;sr;r V':; 'S'"; ""i^ •^^"'' '"'" "■ ""--" •"""-

ai.osl.oni ot i.laho. " ' ' '"""" ""'' '" '*"""""'' ''^ ""''""'"■^ "«/ n. flu-

1^-

Ixxx

KTIlNOCiUArilU; skktcii.

niiiiiitaiiu'r of the iiiiivorse. Tho Indians du not {'liiini thiit lio i-rnatod
tlio world with all in it by ono sinj^'lo and sinudtanoons act, hnt wlien lie is
Treating, nielaniorpliosiny, or destroying, his acts are always special, directed
towards certain objtH-ts only. After making the earth, the lakes, islands,
prairies, and mountains he gave a name to each locality (j). 142, 1 stjq.).
Some of these names must ho regarded us giving indications as lo the ear-
liest places iidiabited by these Indians, especially when they designate hsh-
traps and ceremonial sudatories. Tluw on Upper Klamath fiake we find
Ku'inbat, Ti'ikwa, 'Puh'sh, Kohashti as lishing places, Kta-i Tupaksi aiul
Yulaloiia as iisli-traps, the special gifts of the deity to the people. Other
places of this kind are Sluiyake'kish and Ktii-i Tupaksi. In the (dd Modoo
country, on Lower Klamath Lake, there is a rock sliaped like a crescent,
and called Shapasli;(e'ni, because "sun and moon onc(^ lived there." On
Sprague River tlu're is a hill called "at K'niiikamtch's Lodge"— K'nn'itcham
Latsashkshi. Other legendary residences of tlu^ deity were a- Vamsi,
"Xorthwind's residence," a high mountain east of Klamath Marsh; others
on Tide Lake, at Xilakshi Mountain; and finally K'nn'ikamtch was clianged
into the rock Kta-iti, which stands in tlie Williamson River (q. v.). Tho
old people of l)oth chieftaincies remember many localities alleged to have
been the theater of his miraculous deeds.

K'uu'd;amtch creates the Indians from the purplish berry of the service-
tree or shad-bush {Anicldiicliit'r cdiKulcnsi.'^, in Kl. t(diak), and the color of
both has evidently suggested this idea. He also i)rovides for man's suste-
nance by supplying him with game and tish and the means to cai)turo them;
also with the necessary vegetal products. Objects noticeable tln-ough their
jieculiar shape are called after him. e. g., the tliisffc, the piercer of K'mu-
kamtch, K'nmkamtcham kii'k. A })eculiar haze sonu^tinies perceptible in
the west or northwe.«t, shnuish, is regarded as his ]»rccursor or that of his
son Aisln.sh.

Although but a passing mention is made of a wife or wives of his,
K'mukamtch has a family. The myths speak* of a father, of a daughter,
and of Aisiiish, his son "by adoption," as members of it. The name of his

• Ct. Te.xt.s, pj;. 100, 1'. .skiiki'sli p'tis lulsliiun. ^[I'ntioii is iMuiloofoueejed wives
of Siiti'l :inil (irTcliiislil;ai.

K'Mr'KAMTCH.

Ixxxi

(hiughtor is not givon, but she represents the (feuded or mottled evening
sky. When she leads liini to the under-world they meet there u vast crowd
of spirits, who for live nights dunc^e in a large <-irele around a fire, and on
each of the intervening days are changed into dry bones. K'mukamtch
takes with him son.e of the.se in a bug, and when reaching the horizon at
daybreak throws the bones around the world in pairs and creates tribes
from them, the Modoc tribe being the last of the.se. Then he travels in the
path of the sun till ho reaches the zenith, builds his lodge, and lives there
now with his daughter.

K'mukamtch also figures as the culture-hero of his people; but since
he does so only in one of the n.yths which came to our knowledge, this
myth may be borrowed from some neighl)()ring tribe. In that myth the
primitive arts and practices, as hunting and bow-and-arrow making, an,
taught by him to men, as was done also by Quetzalcoatl, by Hotchika' and
in Oregon by the Flint-Boy of the Kalapuyas, in whom the sim's rays were
personified.

What the national myths relate of him is not of a nature to make
him an object of divine veneration. lie resembles men in every particular,
is born and dies, acts like other Indians, travels about with companion.s,'
starts on gambling jamits, is indigent and often in want, and experiences
more n.isery throughout his eventftd career than Zeus ever did on account
of his illicit love-making. Like the chief go.ls of other Indian nations, he
IS the groat deceiver and trick.ster for all tho.se that have dealings with him,
is attacked and drubbed repeatedly for his meanness and crime" ; but after
coming out "second best" or being killed over and over he recuperates
and comes to life again just as if nothing had occurred to disturb him.
(Compared with other fictions representing powers of nature, ho is fully the
eciual of such characters as Nanabozho an.l (lluskap, or of the Kayowe
demiurge Sinti, "the Deceiver." Some of the most attractive fictions de-
scribe the various tricks and stratagems by which K'muka.ntch allures his
son Aishish into perilous situations, from which rescue seems impossible.
IVompted by him to climl> a tall pine-tree, he would have perished on it
by Imngev had not his charitable wives, the butterflies, succored him in
time. The general couHagration by which the earth and 'ts inhabitants

If si

' 4

m
u

.■it*

Ixxxii

ETHN()(JHArHI(; SKCTCH.

were oonsmiiod tlirou^rh a rain of hurniiifj pitch was also ln-ouj^lit al); itt,
by K'mukamtcli's liatrcd for his son. Afshish escapes tVoin this inhmnaii
persecution, and 8iil)se(pieiitly seeks to revenge himself upon his father.
Aishish's son jerks off the glowing tolmcco-pipo from his grandfather's neck
and throws it into the fire; Afshish pushes it farther into the flames until
burnt, and thereby K'nu'ikanitch's death is brought about.

It is singular that when he and his sou Afshish are expected to join
social or gambling parties the other participants always e.xperie' ice some
difficulty in recognizing the oiu> from the other. The camp-f^re which
K'mukamtch made on approaching the meeting-place was buriiing badly,
the smoke seeming almost to stifle the flames; but that of his son, pinple-
blue in color, sent the smoke straight up, while the fire of Silver Fo.x, the
companion of K'nu'dvamtch, was yellow. When shooting at the mark, Afsh-
ish's arrow hit it c^very time, but the arrow of K'mukamtch struck the jrround
short of the mark. While gambling, Afshish became the winner of all his
companion's stakes.

Assuming tlie mask of the Marten (Ske'l, Ske'Iamtch), K'mukamtch
sends out his younger brother. Weasel (Tchaahkai), to look out for one-
eyed women and to bring them home as wives (Texts, pp. 107-tIS).
Both try to stop t!ie Xorthwind and the Sonthwind at the very orifice
whence they are blowing. Weasel loses his lifV' in the attempt, but Marten
kills both winds. After Weasel has come to life again, both proceed to the
lodge of the five brothers, the Thunders. When inside of the lodge Marten
puts on the head-cover of the dead Northwind, and the Thunders feel his
gigantic power. At night an internecine fight takes place between the
brothers, and while their lodge is on fire their hearts explode in succession.
From the almo.st infinite wealth of Klamath folklore many more par-
ticulars about this chief deity could be adduced, but what stands above is
amjjly sufiicient to indicate the powers of nature which he represents.
The facts that Wan or Wanaka, tlir siiu-hnh, is his constant companion*
and that the seat in the'sky which he constantly holds i.s that of the sun at

•Tlie Hiiii-halo is an iiuportaiit factor in some Iiuliau m.vtiiologies, Tlic Zuni
Iiidiinis .say thiit when a .stDrin is brewinfj the sun retreats hit(} his home, wliich hit
I.Milt for his safety, and after tlie .sf.nni \n' leaves it again. Among tin- Znfiis the .snn
IS iIk' prjiicipal deity also.

K'MPKAMTCll.

Ixxxiii

noontime, would iilono sufllico to show that ho rcin-osonts tho sun, the most
potent, we may .say iiui(nio factor in {,'ivin<r life, nouriHlimcnt, and health
to livin-r or-ranismH, tho most important of the sky-jrods, and the great
center of myth production anion<r all nations of the world. In one of the
Modoc myths it is stated that "at tin* call of the morninfr star K'mnsh
Hpran^r from the ashes (of the fiery sky or am-ora) as hale and as hri-ht as
ever, and so will he continue to live as lonjr as the (.solar) disk and the
uiorninfr star shall last, for the morm'ufr star is the 'medicine' (nu'duash?)
of the disk." In other myths lie appears in tlie form of the golden or
bright 7>M-, inhabiting the higher mountain ridges and l)ecoming tiio suitor
of females afterwards deified. Thus, like Ilor, lia, and Atum, he appears
sometimes as the morning sun, at other times as the noonday and evening
sun, and in the myths referring to weather he is either the summer or the
wint^v sun. The burning pipe which Aishish's son takes from his grand-
father and destroys in the camp-fire represents the sun .setting in a glowing
red evening .sky. As the sunnne- sun with his gigantic power he brings
on a conflagration of the world and as a cloud-gatherer he causes an inuu-
dation. In the warm season he appears wrapt up in haze and fogs, which
the myth in its imagery represents as "a smoky camp-fire," almost impen-
etrable to the sun-rays: "his arrows fall to the ground before they reach
tho nnirk."* To typify his sagacity and onniiscience, K'nnikamtch appears
under tlu^ symbolic mask of a quadruped, tho pine-marten or Ske'l, in Modoc
Tchko'l, which changes its bl.ick winter fur o a brown (oating in the hot
months of the year, and thereby became a sort of portent to the Indian.
Similar changes occur with all the fur animals, but with the marten the
difierence in :he color appears to be greater than with others. Sko I sends
his brother Tchashgai, or Weasel, to obtain one-eyed women for both, these
being sun and moon, which the F]skimos also represent as one-eyed, deified
per.sons.t The North wind, which is l)lowing in alternation with the South
wind, is attacked and killed by Ske'l. Hero Ske'l repre.sents the sun of the
summer months, for the sunmier's heat defeats tlie cold blasts of the wintry
• Texts, pp. 99, 4 (shlayaks ak), and 5.

tCf. the Miiidu myth of Kodo-YampO in Stephen Powers's "Califoruia Tribes-."
Contributions to Nortii Amfiiciui Ethnology, IH, 29.X '

^ I.

' i 1
1/

■ -^

"•■■M

■^ :i

;.^

' il

1:4

Ixxxiv

KTllNOU KA I'll IL! SKKT( ^U.

and eciuinoctial soa«oiis; wlieu lie places the North wind's hat upon his liead
ho puts an end to the noise of the Thunder brothers and then represents
tlie wintry sun.

The attitude which K'nnikanitcli observes toward his son Afshish will
be spoken of under the next headin},^ It is necessary to add that the former's
position is by no means restricted to that of a solar deity; several of his
attributes make him also a <rod of the sky, or at least of the clouds, for
I'louds and the weather's chan}i;-es are due to the sun's agency. When the
sun is environed hy lamb-clouds, or a mottled sky, this is figuratively ex-
pressed by: •' K'mi'ikamtch has taken the beaded garments of Afshish and
dressed himself in them." A peculiar red smoke or haze appearing in the
northwestern or western sky, shnuish, announces his arrival; he is also
recognizable by his bulky posteriors, or, as the Modocs say of him: "K'mu-
knmi-h nuinisli kutiilish gitko." Hy this they evidently refer to the white
and ii':a\-y, mountain-slia|ied sunnner clouds.

Greek mytliology depicts the fecundation of the earth by rain showers
and thunder storms as the illicit amours of the sky-god Zeus with the wives
and daughters of mortal men. Exactly in the same manner K'nuikamtch,
as sky-god, seeks to approach illicitly the numerous wives of Afshish, of
whom the majority refuse him, though he has by some stratagem previously
removed their husband from the scene.

In the aboriginal mind the creation of organisms, vegetal and animal,
seems to be in connection witii the fecundation of the earth, whereas the
creation of the earth, world, or universe implies an act entirely different.
All the names of Klamath localities are said to come from K'mukamtch.
The manner in which he created plants and animals was, as we ar^ told in
one Modoc myth, by (liiiil,-iii;/ and by wisliiuff, this probably imi)lying that
after forming an idea of some creature he made that idea a reality by the
strong energy of his will. Many creati-'v>s, especially birds and (piadru-
ped.s— even men— the myths tell us, were brought forth by him in this
manner. The moral qualities ascribed to this deity are in keeping with
what is known of his physical and intellectual powers. He provides for
mankind, which he has created, but does not tolerate any contravention of
his will ; for he punishes bad characters l)y changing them into rock . or by

Alanian.

Ixxxv

burning tHem. Our ideas of justice, efjuity, protection, or love towards men
do not and can not enter into the spiritual range of a god whose prototype
is constituted of physical powers only.

AfsHISH.

faiytrai /lot Ktjvoi I'doi Oeotdtv.

Afshish, or Afshishamtch, the second in importance among tho Klamatli
deities, and certainly the most popular of all, is tho son of tiio woild-( leator,
K'mukamtch, and also his companion and rival. He is beautiful in appear-
ance, beloved and admired by men. and is the husband of many wives,
selected by him among the birds, butterHies, and the smaller (piudrupeds!
Ilis name signifies the one secreted or coiimiled, and was given him at the
time of his birth; and since "The Hirth of Alshish" myth explains the
nature and position of this deity better than any other mytli, I translate it
in full from the Indian text obtained from a Modoc woman at the Modoc
Reservation, Iiulian Territor}-.* The liame <.f Ai'shish's mythic mother, as
other natives informed me, is i.e=tkakawash. 'i'his is an Oregonian bird of
the size of the tchn'kshash, or blackbird, with a brilliant red or yellow
plumage, colors rarely found in birds of that western State. Ornithologists
identify it with the Louisiana tanager: Pjiianga huhviciana. Thus the bird
is an appropriate symbol of the bright sky at moonrise or sunrise, which
]jijenomenon Aishish's mother is representing. The myth runs as follows:
In order to remate the body of an old sorcere.ss, Le tkakawash gath-
ered wood while narr>ii!g her baby son on the back, piled up the wood and
set up the ceremonial mourning wail. Proposing to leap into the fire her-
self, she was imcertain wiiat to.do with her son. Siie fastened him tiglitly
to her back, and when she had applied the fin; K'mukamtch perceived that
she was in tears and ready to leap into the burning pile. " What on earth
is this pretty wonuin going to do?" said he to himself; and when he saw
her retreat more than once before accomplishing the dangerous leap he ap-
proached, intending to reach her in time to restrain her ; but she rushed

• The myth of Aishish's birth forms a portion of a long cyclus of related myths,
wuh the title: Aishisham shapkala' ash niuhunin'ilashti. I obtained tliei.i from Lucy
Faithfnl, wife of Stutflatko, or " Fiiithful William;" of. Dictionary, p. 412.

Ixxxvi

ETIINOGKAPUKJ SKETCU.

into the fire, and K'nnikanitcli, ro<4iottin<r to liuvo arrived too late, man-
ajifod, Iiowovor, to withdraw from her back tlio baby, and to rOHCue it. lie
wopt as hn carried the cliild oft' in his arms. Hut wliorc shouhl ho phice it!
If ho phicod it on his forehead it woidd h)ok (juito nj,dy, thought he; thoro-
Ibre he phiced it on his knee and went home. lie comphiincd that he had
an ulcer upon his knee, and asked his daughter to open it, for it pained him
o.xcrucialingly. She spread a sheet under the knee and another over it, to
squeeze the ulcer open He exclaimed: "It hurts nie terribly! Go easy!
He careful!" Then she replied: "What is the matter with you? Some-
thing like hair comes out in a Itunch from the core. Why does it look like
hair?" And when the baby appeared on the surface and began to cry she
said: "Wiiat have yon been doing? I have suspected you for (pute a
while before!" And the babe cried and cried, nntil the "father" propo.sed to
give a name to him. None was found to answer, for the child cried on and
tm. Then he proposed to call it Aishilam'na.sh ("the one secreted about the
body"). This stopponl its cries somewhat, but not entirely; so he proposed
the name Aishish, and then it became restful and (piiet. So the child grew
up with this name, then lived in the company of Iv'nn'ikamtch, became an
e.xpert in malcing shirts, and when gambling won all the stakes, even from
his father, who became jealous on account of his superiority.*

This is the extent of the myth so far as needed for our purpose. The
jealousy of the grim and demoniac K'mukamtch against his more popular
son forms the subject of a considerable luimber of Aishish myths, which
are highly imaginative and interesting. By various stratagems based on
low cunning he brings his son into perilous positions, from which he is res-
cued only with the utmost difticulty by others, or is perishing in the attempt
to save himself. Meantime he is robbed of his garments by his "father."
These constant persecutions finally force Aishish to revenge himself upon
his father, who is killed by him repeatedly, but not by any means so often
as he is killed himself

•The coiiuectioii of the mythic pyre of self sacrifice with t\\Qdawn is not only
based on similarity of nature, but also on etymological <jroun(ls; for the verb nl'Ika,
it <JairnH, with slight vocpIIc <!liange turns into nelka, n6])fii, to he on fire. Cf. the
Latin niirorn, which is a derivative of urere, to burn, and Appendix VI to (Jramraar,
pp. 70(i, 707.

AfHIIISIT A LUNAU DKITY.

Ixxxvii

MMhWh camp fin, is ..f a ,|.,),r, bri-l.t |)iii|,lisl.-l,luo color (yiinumsl.-
ptchi); liG makoH his HliirtH with his own han.ls luid oinmnunts tlieHo luul
his h^^-i.ifrs with all sorts of heads As a inaiksti.an ho excels all his
coinpaniotis, whoso arrows do not ovoii strike the tarfr(;t (Texts, pa-'. !)!»,
4-6). Ae(;ordiii<r to the .Vfodoe story his wives are Mole, Hadfre'r, Porcu-
pine, Bitch, Crane, Mallard, two .Maidiktak-hirds, Wren, TcLk'titi bird,
Vauliliks or Snowbird, lhitt(M-fly, and a h..st of others; the Klamath Lake
myth (Texts, p. !)!), •». !()) names five: (Joot, Lon-.tailed H.p.irrel, Crane,
Mallard, ChafKnch. Tchashkai or Weascd, the youn-er brother of SkO'l]
8. metimes plays the part of Aishish, but he is not found in this .p.ality so
constantly as his brother Ske'l is in that of K'nnikamt^h.

The various attributes ascribed to this deity by the myths show Aishish
to be in many respects sin,ilar to Quetzalcoatl of NahuatI mythoh.Hy, who
has been made alternately the {Genius of the mornin- star, of the calendar
and of the at.nospheric chanjres. As to Afshish and the personal beauty
invariably ascribed to him, it may appear doubtful, i.i view of so many
other complex attributes, whi.di idea was the startinjr-point that created this
mythic HfTure, and subsecpiently gathered other but less material attributes
about this son of the s.ni. He could represent ori-inally the mornin<r star,
or the rainbow or the moon, l)ut after mature reflection upon his complex
attitudes I now believe him to be a lunar deity. The splendor of the full
moon is of a yellow hue, like Aishish's camp fire (kiikii'kli) and the shadow
ofthefamished Aishish, as seen from below throno-h the pine-trees of the
forest, is the narrow crescent c.f the vvaxing' moon followiiio- its di.sappear-
ance at the new moon period. At the new or "dead" moon^Aishish is fan,
ished or dead, to revive again on the days followino-, and this, like other
phases of the moon, which result from her chanoeable position in regard to
the sun, are represented to be the result of the jealousy and enmity of
K'mukamtch against A.'shish— and whenever Aishish succeeds in killing his
father, this implies the decrease of sun-heat .hiving the winter sea.son. " No
myth shows a more striking analogy to the "Birtn of Aishish" than that of
the birth of Bacchus from the thigh of Zeus after the .lestruction of his
mother Semele by a thunder -stroke caused by Zeus, the Sky-god.

The moon is the originator of the months, and the progress of the

iXXXVlU

ETHNOGRAPHIC SKI-yrOH.

months brinnfs on the Hoasoiis with the tiew life aeon sproutinfr up overy-
wliero (liiriiijr spring und smnmor. So the qiiiuInipodH and hinis whicli aro
the first to iippeiir after tlie hiiig winter nionthH are considered us the wives
of Afshish, and the flowers of siinimer ve<fetati(»n are the l)ead8 of liis gar-
ments. He enjoys more j.opnhirity than his father, for the moon's hglit is
mihl, not Ijurning nor r.^'lnsivo, nor does it dry up vegetation an i make
men and beasts ch-owsy Hke tlie rays of the nii(hhiy sun. Many nations
also believe that the changes of weather are partly due to the phases of the
n>oon. Althongh the "Birth of Aishish" myth obtained by me represents
Afshish rather us the adopted than as the real son of K'mnkamtch, other
myths state him to be his son resnlting from the union of the sun-disk to
the red sky of the morning or evening, symbolized by the woman Le tka-
kawash. We must recall to mind that the term for father, p'tishap, in
Modoc t'sln'shap, is really tlu; iwarishrr, fm/n; and not the progenitor, fin-
it is a derivative from t'shin tu f/ron.* Most other mythologies consider the
relation of sun to moon as that of man to wife, or of wife to man (cf Dens
Lunus), but here the thing is diflerent. There are no female characters of
importance in Klamath mythology, nor does the language distinguish
grannnatically between the sexes.

The difficulty which we experience to distinguish solar r.nd lunar dei-
ties from each other in some of the American religions is caused by the
circumstance that in many languages of this western hemisphere the term
for SHU and for moon is the same. In sncdi languages both orbs are distin-
guished from each other by being called day-lumimxry, or night-sun, night-
luminary, and with some tribes the belief haa been found, that both are
actually the same celestial body, one being merely the image or shadow of
the other. In the Maskoki languages hasi answers for both, but the moon
is commonly called ni'li hasi or "night sun." In the Tonica language ta^-
tchiksh, abbrev. taxtchi stands for sun, moon, ami star, but the moon is
usually named la-u tap^tchi "night luminary," the stars taxtchi tipula,
while the sun is either apjshukun ta;,tchi, "day luminary" or simply ta^-
tchi. Of the Tiime languages many have tsa, sa, of the Algonkin languages
kfsis or parallel f..rms for both celestial bodies, separate distinctions being
• Cf. tlw Grumiuar, in Appendix VI, p. 710.

TERMS FOK SUN ANI» MOON".

Ixxxix

■

added for "day" and "night." In the THimHi.ln und in 8o>no <.f tlio SoUnh
dialects tlie terms for both also agree, l.ut in the Shoshoiiinn und Pueblo
hu.guagos they .liffer cMtiroIy. In Utah and other Sho.shonian dialects the
term for moon .shows the archaic or reverential suffix -pits, -piits previously
noticed (,«a-at;Uva-p:ts in irtah). which clo.seIy corresponds to naXahparo,
as used in the Homeric poems.

Wiiile the sun .livides time into ,hiy«, sea.sons, and years, our sections
of time called weeks (quarters of the moon) an.l nmnths (lunations, moons)
are due to the revolutions of the mo.)n. This is what cau- ' the Klamath
Indians to call both orbs by the same name: shapash ///. o„c who HI,
which signifies: "which tells the time," or "time measurer." For the moon
a parall.-l form exists in the Tinnicua, once spoken in Florida: acu=hiba ,v/a;-
whirl, Hfs, vh: "star measuring the time" and in the niune of the K.ryptinn
nu.on-god Telmti, called Thoth by the (Jreeks,* also in our Genna.dc nuh>,
English: moon, Germ. Mond, "the measurer."

Here as elsewhere the moon appears under different names, for in
Mamatli she is also called ukan;.r,sh "the one broken to pieces" This
ter:n never applies to the sun, but only to the moon in the four phases as a
changeable body.f Originally this wa.« only an epithet of the moon, but in
course of time it gave origin to a separate deity, for Ukan;.r.sli distinctly
appears as moon-god in a myth, which relates his n.arriage to Wekctash \
frog-woman living with ten beautiful sisters on the west side of Upper Kla-
math Lake. Ukaupjosh now carries her, the frog, in his heart, and this is
what we are wont to call " the man in the moon." Should .mly a little bit
be left of hi.n when in the bear's ,„outh (referring to eclip,se), she would be
able to bring him to life again.

LfiMK-ISH on THUNDEB.

All elementary deities in the Klanu.th religion, except K'mt'.kamtch
and^sinsh, are mysterious, shadowy bei.,g.s, not sufficiently anthropomor-

• Various functions nre assifjned to THmuI ; Ins symbol is th. /A/.-cmne wLosfl
ong, pacn,g steps cviacotly suK^ested to the .n.vth.nakcM.s ol Kgvpt the idea tb't
bewas-ueasunngtheearti.. Tlun.an.c IVhu.i is derived f.on. t CyiZl ve'l^
te^u to be full, for tl.e .noasuring of li„uids, grains, etc., is .ttecte.l hy£a va^s
pos.se8se.l of ...Ttain cubic diinen8ion.s. ''*'<^ »i JMmg vam

t Derived from alia ukua to knock to piars.

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)

&?A

1.0

I.I

1.25

■so

IIIM

|12
1^

IIIIIM

ilM

1.8

U III 1.6

% >

■rf

Photographic

Sciences

Corporation

23 WCST MAIN STREET

VEBSTERN.Y. 14580

(716) 872-4503

^^2»

^^A ^

U.x

KTUNOORAPHIC SKETCH.

! 3>

' i:

])hizod and too dimly deliiied to deserve the name "gods." Those among
them that are most frequently mentioned in myths and popular stories are
the genii of the Thunder and of the Winds.

The genius of the Thunder, LCmo-ish, is sometimes mentioned as a
single person, or abstract mythic being, but more frequently as a company
of five brothers, the Thunders or L6mel6mc'-ish. At times they make them-
selves formidable, for their terrible weapon is the lightning or thunderbolt;
they cleave the mountains, rocks, and trees, kill, roast, and devour human
beings, in which character they are called maklaks=papfsh. The interior
of their lodge is dark, for a sky obscured by a thunderstorm is lacking the
full daylight. K'mukamtch entering the lodge, disguised as the " strong
man" under the mask of Ske'l or pine-marten, annihilates them, for the
winter sky with its cold blasts is antagonistic to the display of celestial elec-
tricity. The eldest of the Thunders is married to Skule, the meadow lark,
who is the sister of pine marten. After having made themselves thoroughly
odious upon the earth, they were, as the myth tells us, relegated to the far-
off skies, where they can frighten the people by their noise only and do no
further harm

The parents of the Thunders are supposed to live in a small hut or
kayata, and in their stead two dogs are often mentioned as accompanying
the Thunders. Of these there are five, because the thunder rolling alono-
the mountains is heard in repeated peals, and these peals are in the myths
likened to repeated explosions of the Thunders' hearts. The shooting up
of lightnings from the earth to the skies gave rise to the idea that their
home is underground, and that the lightnings coming down from the skies
are simply the Tiiunders returning to their homes. As the spirit of the
Thunder Yayay/i-ash is mentioned in a mythic tale.

The Thunder-bird, which plays so prominent a part in the myths of the
Eastern and Northwestern tribes, does not appear here under this name,
but is represented in some stories by the Raven or Kiik.*

•Tbe belief iu the Tluuiderbira is found more frequently among Nortberu tban
among Soutberu Imlians. Of. "Tbe Tbtinderbird amongst tbe Algonkins," by A.
F. Cbamberlain, Amer, Autbropologist, Jan., 1890, pp. 51-54; and my "Migration
Legend of tbe Creek Indians," vol. 2, 49.

THE WINDS AND TFIE EARTH.

XCl

YImASH and MtTASH.

North wind (Yamash) and Soiitli wind (Muasli) are more important to
tlie inhabitants of the Klamatli higldands tliaa any of the other winds, and
therefore are mentioned njore frequeni'y. Winds always appear in con-
nection with K'mnkamtch or his representative among the animals, Ske'l.
Tims when Ske'l visits his sister, Meadow Lark, who is married to the
oldest of the Thunders, he is accompanied by Kak (the Uaven, or storm-
bird), Yamash, Tchakinksh, Yewash, Muasli, Tkalamash, and Gu'pashtish.
The Thunder receives and feeds them with the blood of the people slain by
him.

Tiie conflict between Ske'l and Tchashkai on one side and the Winds
on the other is related on page 1 1 1 of the Texts and is purely meteorolog-
ical. The South Wind obscures by clouds tiie face of the moon, and thus
kills him temporarily; but when the sunnner sun appears in the form of
Ske'l both winds disappear at once to make room to an unclouded sky.
The hat of the dead Yamash afterwards serves to frighten the Thunders, as
related on the same page. Which was the southern home of Muash is not
l)ointed out in the myths, but that of Yamash was Yamsi Mountain, which
is called after him. Yamash corresponds to some extent to the Kabibo
nokka or Northwind of the Ojibwe Indians, and is as much an object of
folklore as he is. In other mythologies of America the winds are the
blasts of monsters or big beasts; for the animism prevailing in all the
ancient myths requires them to be the manifestation of some living being.

KAfLA OR THE EARTH.

The Earth is regarded by these Indians as a mysterious, shadowy
power of incalculable energies and influences, rather mischievous and
wicked than beneficial to mankind. The Indians ascribe anger and other
passions to it, but never personify it in clearer outlines than the ancients
did their "Epa and Tellus; and it never appears as an active deity in the
numerous mythic tales gathered by Mr. Ourtin for the <(>llection of the
Bureau of Ethnology. I know of it only through the song-lines gathered
by myself from individuals of both tribes.

Among all nations of tlie world wo lind the idea, which is real as well

XCII

RTRNOORAPniC SKETCH.

Ill

as poetical, that the Earth is our common motlier. "She is doaling out her

bountiful gifts to her children, the human beings, without envy or restraint,

in the shape of corn, fruits, and esculent roots. Her eyes are the lakes and

ponds disseminated over the green surface of the plains, her breasts are the

hills and hiiiocks; and the i-ivulets and brooks irrigating the valleys are the

milk flowing fron her breasts." This is the poetical imagery in use among

the Eastern Indians when the Earth is mentioned to them.* The idea that

earthquakes and unaccountable tremors or noises within the body of the

earth, also the malarial fevers, are the utterances of threat or displeasure

at the misdoings of mankind, is as general among Indians as among other

nations, and a consequence of the animistic tendency of primitive nations.

The Indian prophet Smu^ale at Priest Hapids, on Jliddle Columbia River,

and his numerous followers, called the "Dreamers," from the implicit faith

these Sahaptin sectarians place in dreams, dissuade their adherents from

tilling the ground, as the white man does; "for it is a sin to wound or cut,

tear up or scratch our common mother by agricultural pursuits; she will

revenge herself on the whites and on the Indians following their example

by opening her bosom and engulfing such malefactors for their misdeeds."

This advice was proljably caused by the common observation that ground

recently l)roken up exhales miasmas deleterious to all people dwelling near.

That the Earth was regarded as an animate if not personified being is
shown by the form kiiflash of the objective case (12r), 1), this case being
formod in -ash only in terms applied to man and quadrupeds. Their myth
of the earth's creation of course does not refer to the whole globe, but only
to the small part of Noith America known to these Indians. The earth's
interior is also the home of the Thunders, because lightnings are often
observed to shoot up from the earth into tlie skies.

Special songs referring to the Earth are contained in 175; 16: kafla
nA shuinalla; 176; .'} kiii'Ia ai nu walta; 158; 48 kiiilanti nfi shflshila—

* After Tecmnseh had delivered a speech to Governor Harrison at Vinceiiiies, in
1811, he was offered a chair by the interpreter, who said to him: "Your father
requests you to take a chair." To this Tecuniseh made, with great dignity of expres-
sion, an answer which lias since become classical : " The sun is my fUher, and the
earth is my mother; and on her hosnm will F repose,'' and immediately seated himself
in the Indian manner, upon the ground. '

iMUNATALKNl.

XClll

the two latter alluding to niniblings below the oartii's surface. In the son<r
192; 3 the term hiiniola should be changed to t'liiimola, tem<>la, tvas covered
with haze or mist, a phenomenon often jiroducing malarial and other fevers,
iind therefore regarded by these Indians as of bad augury. Other passages
mentioning the Earth, personified or not, are quoted in Dictionary, p. 12.'{;
in one of these, K'mukam'ch is threatening to " whirl the earth around" in
a dance, and probably this song forms part of some mythic story. (Texts

munatAlkni.

Besides the Earth there is another chthonic deity known to the Kla-
math people, Munatalkni or the Genius of the Underworld. I have met his
name in one story only, which is that of the creation and first sojourn
of the people around Wood River, between Fort Klamath and the Upper
Klamath Lake. English-speaking Indians readily ? I ^ntify him with our
(leril; but no wicked or inmioral (piiilities are ascribed to him, as morals
enter into the religious ideas of tlio hunter tribes but sporadically. There
is something of the aboriginal in him, and he is also called Umunakni, the
signification of both names being ai.alogous.

He appears in the following tale: When K'mukamtch created this
world, he made one man, and one woman intended to be the man's sister.
The creator placed them in a garden (hashuash) studded with trees produc-
ing sweet fruits and built a house for them. The adjoining stable con-
tained domestic animals for their use. All this was upon the prairie
watered by Wood River. Man and woman were both blind, and had to
remain so until the fruits would be ripe. K'mukamtch told them he would
visit them on a Sunday and would knock at the top of their house. Should
anybody knock at the door, the knocks would be those of Munatalkni and
tiiey nmst not open. Munatalkni came and knocked at the door, informing
tliem that the fruits were ripe and that he brought them all kinds of berries".
The woman said to the man: "Open the door, K'nn'ikamtch is here!" but
the man .said: "Don't open; it is not K'mukamtch who stands at the door!"
The woman opened; Munatalkni put one sweet berry in her mouth and she
tasted it. He was wearing a long iiead-dress of feathers tUnl to tlie toj) of
his hair, his emblem as conjurer, and this string of feathers was so long as

i: .*

XCIV

ETHNOGRAPHIC! SKKTOH.

to touch the grouiid. Ho tlien stole all the fruits in the garden and went
with them to his underground abode.

Then K'mi'ikanitch, who had observed svU this from a distance, arrived
and knocked at the top of the house. This time it was the man who opened.
When asked what had become of the fruits he excused himself by stating
that Munatalkiii had taken all of them. This put K'mukanuch into such a
rage that he threw the woman out of the house and whipped her to death.
Then he cut open the eyelids of both, which previously had been fastened
together, and the man said: "I can see the sun." K'mukamtch tlien
instructed the man how to make his livelihood by using the bow and arrow,
and how to manufacture sinew-strings and obsidian arrow-heads. Upon
this he brought the man's sister into life again and both wont into the
mountains to hunt, for they had nothing to eat. Ever after this K'mu-
kamtch remained angry with them.

Thia is but the conunencement of a long tale designed to show the
mir.iculous growth of the family which sprang from the first man and
woman, and their jjrogress in the life-sustaining arts and manufactures.
There is no doubt that the above is a singular distortion of the Bible tale
concerning Adam and F^ve in paradise. The question which remains to be
sobed is this, whether or not Munatalkni himself is borrowed also from the
Jewish story. If he is, then in connection with him we may recall Afshish,
who, according to some Modocs, is nobody else but Jesus Christ, who two
thousand years ago passed through Lost River Valley and dug a deep well
there which he presented to the Modocs — all this on account of a phonetic
similarity between the names Afshish and Jesus.

The remainder of the story is exactly like what other Oregonian myths
relate concerning the origin of mankind and is incontestably of Indian
origin. No further mention is made in it of MunatAlkni.

shO'kash or whielwind.

Another of the numerous elementary deities is the Whirlwind or
Shu'kash. An interesting mythic tale about it, which I have obtained
among the Modocs in the Indian Territory, makes of the Shu'kash an
engine brought into play from time to time with tremendous effect by the

Sl'IRlT DEITIES.

xov

{?eii!u8 presiding over it. Thi« gonii.s is called Tcliitchutszii -a«l. or " Uig
Belly;" ho ih repreHoi.ted to be an old man wIio«e vigor of life is on tho
decrease. When he leaves his lodge, his appearance embodies the rain-
laden, dark-hued, thick nimbus clonds overhanging the earth. When his
engine* conies into action, he attracts by it all the objects within reach ho
oppresses tlie earth with his weight, and forces wayfarers to walk in other
paths than they intended to travel lest they may incur danger to life
When he has spent his force by this wanton display, he is rent by a stroke
of lightning or a strong gust of wind; he is dissolved into atoms, and tho
bones filling his big ,,aunch, which had produced the rattling noise attend-
ing the course of whirlwinds, fall down to the ground. Tsaskai, the Wea-
sel, the brother of Marten, wrestling with the old man and conquering him
after a hard struggle, is the mythic agent who brings about his final dis-
comfitur©.

SPIRIT DEITIES.

'K«T(Tn/mt (pofie/iiiv ippivn, irinnri TiiAAuf.

No people has ever been discovered that <lid not believe in the return
of human sonls after death to their fonner homes in the form of ..hosts
Ghosts or spirits hovering through space are invisible and may inflict dam-
age to anybody without danger of being recognized; therefore they usually
inspire awe and terror, and wherever the existence of these fanciful beings is
recognized imagination fills the earth, the atmosphere, and the waters with
such spooks^ Not all of these are necessarily supposed to be the souls of
the deceased, but they may also represent the souls of animals, the spirits
of mountains, winds, the celestial bodies, and so forth, for animism has its
widest sway in this sort of superstition. Very different qualities are
ascnbed to each of these hobgoblins or spooks. They are either gigantic
or dwarfish in size, powerful or weak in body, attractive or repulsive, of
beneficial or wicked influence. They chiefly appear at night or in stormy
weather; some are seen single, others in crowds, and a few of their number

XCVl

ETIINOOIIAPFIKJ HKETCU.

(!an bo porcoiveil only by the trained eye of siicli as are initiated into the
conjurer's proffsaion.

The chissos of specters mentioned more frecjuontly than otliers in
mythology are the spirits of the dead, and yianta, dwarfs, and fairies.

The Sko'ks, or spirits of the deceased, occiipy an important phice in the
j)sychologic marvels of the Klamath Indian, and are objects of dread and
abonunation, feelings which are increased by a belief in their omnipresence
and invisibility. The popular idea of a ghost is suggested in all climates
and historic epochs by that of a .shadow of somebody's former self, and in
several Indian languages the same word is used for shmlow, soul, and ffhost*
The proper signification of sko'ks, slikn'ksh is "what comes out of;" like
sktVhs, sko sprinfj of the year; it is derived from skoa to come out of, to
emerqe from, sprout up.

In the mind of the Indian the ajipearance of a sko'ks comes pretty near
the popular idea of a witch or spook as held by the uneducated classes of
our popidation. The soul of n man becomes a skuks as soon as the corpse
has been buried or consumed by fire. It hovers in the air around its former
home or the wigwams of the neighbors aiui at night-time only. Its legs
hang down an<l produce a rattling noise, and the whole ajjpears in a white
or a black shade of color. Usually nobody sees them, they do not harm
anybody, nor do they produce any dreams; they appear to the senses and
sight of the living only when they come to presage death to them. They
imdergo no metempsychosis into animals or jdants; after hovering awhile
around tiieir fo"tner homes tiiey retire to the spirit-land in the sky, "some-
where near K'nu'ikamtch." Their arrival there is afterwards revealed by
dreams to the surviving relatives, who express in songs what they have
seen during their slumbers.

• lu tbe Tonika or Ti'iiii;fkii language of Louisiaua tclia or telia'litch signify
shadow, soul, and reflection in the water; iu the Clia'hta, State of Mississippi, shili'imbish
is shadow and soul, while a ghost is shilup. The Egyptian ka and the Greek eUu,k,>v,
the soul after death, really signify image, and to this we may compare the use made of
the Latin imago. The Chorokces, as Mr. James Mooney informs me, distinguish
between addnta soul in the living being, u"dali' secondary soul of an animal killed once
before, and asgina an ordinary specter, ghost of malevolent disposition, whicli last term
served the missionaries for transcribing the word "devil."

8PIK1T DEITIES.

zorii

The ootnmo/i belief „f the Oro-onianH in tliat after death the soul
tmv«Ks the path traveled l,y tlio sun, which is the westward path; there it
joins in the sp.rit-la.id (.Ynj) the innumerable houIs which have gone the
same way before.* If the .leceased wan a chief, comn.ander, or n.an of
note, h.8 "heart" can l>e .seen going west in the i\,.-m of a shootin- star
The Egyptian belief was that the sonl of the dead was following Atun.
the su.king sun, to the west; an.l since then innumerable nations .nd tribes
have adhered to the same l)elief

From the Texts obtained from Dave Hill, pp. 129, m, we learn that
other abodes of dead men's spirits are the bodies of living fish. Perhaps
Hill learned of this belief among the maritime and river Indians witii whom
he lived on the Uoluml,ia Uiver, where the idea of fish eating corpses could
suggest Itself more readily than upon the lakes of the Klamath hi.rhlands
The Notrs which I a.hled to these curious texts give all the explanations which
It IS at present possible to give. It appears from them that such spirits can
enter the bodies of "spirit-fish," that one skuks can see another, and that
Indians, not white men, sometimes see the skuks, but at the ,,eril of their
ive.s. A distinction is also made between good and bad skuks, the latter
being probably those who render the Indian's sleep uncomfortable by
unpleasant dreams.

Some natural phenomena often appear to these Indians in the form of
specters or hobgoblins, as clouds, water-spouts, snow-storms, columns of
dust, etc Noisily and rapidly they pursue their lonely path, and their
gigantic, terrific frames reach up to the skies; whoever meets them una-
wares IS knocked down senseless or killed outright, or must exchange his
body tor another. Some of these specters look dark on one side and light
on the other. °

In northern latitudes, where polar lights are frequently visible, they
are supposed by the Indians to represent the dance of the dead, and when-
ever Christianity is introduced among them they identify this beautiful
spectacle with the last ju.lgment, when the spirits of the deceased move
about in tlie expectation of the coming Christ.

•Cf. Dictionary, sub voce e'ni and Grammar, Appendi7vj7pT702rTheWai™
Sprnig^I„,|,a„8 call the spirit.land.-ayaydDi. See also Texts, p. i 74; 11. ^^^^'^

'"9

fit

xcviii

ETH N()( t R A P H IC S K VAV 1 1 .

From ii Klanintli myth wo j^iitlier tho iiiforination that thore in ft
guardi'in ovor tlie spirits wftftiiig tlimngli the sky, cnllod Wi'ish k'inush, or
the ffray fox. This name is evidently borrowed from the coloring of the
sky, as it appears before or (hiring a polar light, and nniat bo compared with
another beast name, the wi'in or wani'ika, tho red fox, which is the symbol
of the sun-halo.

Another class of spirits embodies the spirits of those animals which
have to be consulted by the kfuks or conjurer when he is called to treat a
case of disease. Such persons only who have been trained during five
years for the profession of conjurers can see these spirits, but by them they
are seen as clearly as we seo tho objects around us. To see them they havo
to go to the home of a deceased conjurer, and at night only. He is then
led by a spirit called Yayaya-ash appearing in the form of a one-legged man
towards the spot where the animal-spirits live; this specter presides over
them; there the conjurer notices that each appears different from the other,
and is at liberty to consult them about the patient's case. YayayA-ash
means "the frightener,"and by the myth-tellers is regarded as tho Thunder
or its spirit.

Giants. — The imagination of every primitive people has been busy in
producing njonsters of all qualities and shapes, human and animal, even
walking mountains and trees. What wo call giants are generally personifi-
cations of irresistible powers of nature, which are supposed to peiform feats
impossible for man's utmost strength; by dwarfs are symbolized powers of
nature which achieve great and wonderful things by steady and gradual
work unnoticed by the generality of huuiaii beings.

Giants are often the originators of geological revolutions of the earth's
crust. Thus the giant Lewa represents the circular, lofty island lyin"-
within the waters of Crater Lake or Givvash. He went by an underground
passage (fissure!) from his seat over to Yamsi Mountain to wrestle with
Ske'l, the all-powerful pine-marten, whose home is at Yamsi. After con-
quering him, he carried him through the same passage again to Crater Lake
for the purpose of feeding him to his children, and his daughter, Lewam
pe-ip, struck him with a heavy flint-stone.

Like the walls of tliat lake and tiie whole Cascade range, the island in

SPIRIT DEITIES.

zoix

question iu of volc'nnic origin. The natives avoid gnmg near the lake or
even ascending the Hurronnding heights.* Earthquakes are often ascribed
by foreign nations to giants stretched out below, who are shifting their
■underground position. Giants often appear also as ravishers, ogres, and
man-eaters, like the Scandinavian Viittur, and two giant-women of the
p]lip tilikum or "Primeval People," were changed into two columns of
sandstone, near the Yakima country, on Middle Columbia River, for having
preyed upon the human race.f

Dwarfs.— A miraculous dwarf is mentioned under the name of ua'hnias,
whose foot-prints, as small as those of a child, are sometimes s«en upon the
snow-dad slopes of the Cascade Range by the natives. But the dwarfish
creatures who make them can be seen only by tho^^e initiated into the mys-
teries of witchcraft, who by such .spirit-like beings are inspired with a
superior kind of knowledge, especially in their treatment of disease. The
name is derived either from ncna to swhif/ the body from one to the other side,
or from nainaya to shiver, trciiM'

Another dwarf genius, about four feet high, Gwimvin, lived on Will-
iamson River, where ho habitually sat on the top of his winter lodge and
killed many peojjle with his black flint hat. He is now a bird.

The Klamaths appear to know about certain spirits having bodies of a
diminutive size, but the characteristics of such are not distinct enough to
permit identification with the fairies, Erdmiinnchen or Kabeiroi of Euro-
pean mythologies.

ANIMAL DEITIES.

The deification of animals in the primitive forms of religion is highly
instructive, and instances are so numerous that it would take a series of
vohimes to comprehend its details. Animal stories and shamanism are

• Araoug the snmmlts of the Sim Juan Mountains, New Mexico, there is today a
lake bounded by precipitous walls, and there is a little island in the center of the lake
with a hole in it, and something sticks out of the hole that looks like the top of a
ladder, and " this is the place through which our ancestors emerged from the fourth
into the fifth or present world." The Ndviijos never approach near to it, but they
stand on high summits around, and view from afar thei. natal waters. (From Ndvajo
Creation Myth, Am. Antiquarian, V, 1883, p. 213.)

t G. Gibbs in Pacific Railroad Reports, I, 411.

\h^

ETnNOORAVniO 8KRT(in.

olmptorH of ctliiiolnijfy wliicli afford iih tho <I(<o|)OHt iiiftij^lit into tho thoiiglitfl
wliicli ffw'uU- tlio untiitor«(l roiiHoiiin^ of tlio Ho-ntlltMl mivuffOH.

Wlicn'vcr w«f liiul ilcificH in tin* Htiiffe of iin|u>rf(>('t luitliroponiorphiHin
W(> arc likely fo fiiKl also (Icifu'tl iiniinals in fli(> sta;^(f of /luxloiiioiiiriin and
iH)t ill that of zootlicism or zoolatry. \VIior(< ^rods and {roildcHHuM liavo
riiiu'Iu'd II fully antliropomor|ilii«' sliapo, wliicli oi-ciirroil in a fovv American
natioHH only, tlicrc we also find priostH, tomploH, ccronionit^H, oracliiH, Hucri-
HotM, luid prayers; hut vvln»ro doitiiiH roinnin in tlio undcfvidopod oondi'ion
of spirits and diMiiona, propitious or malovolont to inaiikind, wu may expect
to siH' till' natives deifying- (piadnipeds, birds, or snakes, instead of f?iviii<r
their jrods the hnniaii form, wliicli is the most perfect form of this world's
creatnroH For in iiiiiiiy |ihysieal <pialiti(!s animals surpass the human lieinj^.
This excites the admiration of man in his ruder stances; he wonders at their
eiinniiifr and shrewdness, and thinks them his ('(pials in more than one
reapect. Why should he not (ixpress such feelings as these bv reverencing
them and includin<r them in his unpolished and naive, hut pictorial and
candid folklore atoriesf

It would he a mistake to assume that the animals which the folklore
of the Indian in the hunter stance chiefly celebrates an* jramo animals or
such as are of material advantaj^o to him. Folklore selects for its purpose
such beasts which the liuntin«i: ami tishin-r Indian, with his f,M-eat practical
knowledfie of animate creation, admires aiiove others for such qualities uh
their surprisinjrsafracity, their wonderful a^fijity, the love for their offsprinjf,
the helj) afforded by them by discoverinjr the hidden causes of disease, the
beauty of their skin or other coverinj;, and the chaiifro in the coloriiij>- of
their fur-skins wroujrht by the alternation of the seasons — or such animals
as h(i dreads on account of their ferocity, their nifrhtly habits, their power
of briufrinji- about storms, thunder, or rain-fall, and last, but not least, for
their demoniac power of preaa<«ing future events, especially war, disease,
and death. The great scarcity of certain animals is also a .sufKcieut cause
for introducing them into the ])opular stories.

The animals which form the subject of mythic stories and beast tales
are pretty much the same as those mentioned in the magic songs of the
medical practitioners, of which I have brought together a considerable col-
lection in Texts, pp. 163-181. The birds get an unusually large share in

DKIFIKI) ANIMALH.

l,o«. ,M,r.o„H Ho„« !l„o«; th« Ion.. (t,',,,lH|) \, ..otirod then, for being the
benf ,l.v.n^ l,.r,l of H.oh. „„Ia„.I wuf..,H: fl.. yollow.l..„,„„o,., or U-mZu u
woo,lporkor, for hn l„„..,tif.,| ,.,.,1 pi,,,,,,,;.,,; tl.. kUiwu.h, a„„H.,.r woo,huH.ker
for ifs pro<.io„K HHtlp. Tl„. ,|.,..|<H un. w.,11 n....,.„.lH.r..l i.. f,|.,.„c, „,.„.« on
m.co..nt of thoir nl.i.p.ity, t\mv mum;m, Hpocion. tho ,.I..^H„n. of th.ir
oxt«r.or. M.nlH ro.iowno.l for tl.olr infli.onco npon th. wo,.f,|„.r ur,. tl,„
wf-nnsl. „„.l tl,« fHintsfwiiHl., who c,„, pro.h.co Know-f,.Il; fh„ k.VIn or
ki.lxnlHh, who poHHimH(.s t\w power of niftkii.^r Jh^rn (160; 22. 2:\).

Tho .in.phihianM, innoots H...1 rho ...oHMis.o.H stan.lh.K l"'low those In the
/oo^nmoti. H,.,tl., .u-e .iUo .-opnt,,,! to posHOKH n.a^n,. powo,-s; M,o Ho„^r„ ..f th.,
toad an.l of tho Hpi.jor aro HuppoHo.l to l,o ospodallv olfoctivc. That tl...
plants di.l not i.nprcwH tho .nontal capa.-ity of thono l.„lia,.s to h.,o1, a poi,.t,
..H to ...ako thorn ol.JootH of rovorenoo can not ho wondoro.l at. an the n.in.l of
tho I.Hl.a,. ... n.hi oli.nates is not t.,rno,l i., this .lin-otio,, i>lH..ts in whi.-h
tho Ivhunaths wo.-o h.to.ostod a.r all n.ontiono.l. p. 180; 1 9, and the pond-lilv
with ,tH soodH, stands at tho hoad of then.. Kvon a.-.-.n^. tho toto... na- ,oI
ot Kastorn tril.oH only a fow plant nan.os ...-o .•op,.oso,.tod, „>uhr l,oin. tho
...08t frequent amon,. those; bnt in tropical conntries, with their l..xn,.ia,.t
vo,^otal ,.rowtl., n.a,.y foes, l.nshes. a,.d stalks become objects of worship
lik(» the copal and tl.<! coiba tree of (jonti-al A..ioricii.

The .leified ani.n.tls of Kla.,.ath .nytholo.y a.o' all capable of ass.un-
m,^ the predicate an.tchiksh, abb,-. -;'.,..tch, -an.ts ,,n,„rraf, of which ...o,.tio,.
has boon made p,-ovi<,nsly. and ...any also appear ...lleetivelv, as //.r(or/.«,
..•..thors or M sisters, sometimes with their old pa.-o,.ts (tit.-hka-a.r.,
h.s .s the case o..ly with ..roKa.ions H..i...als, a.>d al.so applies to (ho Thu..-
ders. Many of the la.fr... ,p,ad.-,.peds appea.- constantlv with two you....
only. ' "

The perso,:ified animals which receive the most frequent attention in
Klamath Lake and Mod.>c myths are the marten, the weasel and the prairie-
won or coyote.

Marten or Sko'l, Ske'lamtch always appears in connection with WW/
or Ich tshka.. Weasel is .oputod to be the youn^e.- b,-other (tapiap)
of Ske 1 and acts as l„s serva.,t and e.Tand-boy. I,, the execution of the
da..ge,-ous o.Ta..ds he is int,-uste<l with. Weasel is ofto.. killed, a.,d Ske'l

, ; ;■ i^^lP

I *']

^:^VA'

. r.'-;

BTHNOORAinilC SKETCH.

sometimes also, but they inanago to revive again ami to revenge themselves
on their enemies. WJiat brought «-hese two beasts into nnitual connection
in the popular mind has been already pointed out: Ijoth change their furs,
more than otJier animals, from a darker Ime in siinuner to a lighter one
in winter, when the weasel's fur becomes white. They are both supposed
to live at Yamsi, "Nortluvind's Home," a high peak east of Klamath Marsh.
To act like Sk("'lamtch is to do something not meaning to do it apparently.
Ske'l IS a great wrestler, and like K'mukamtch has tiie faculty of changing
himself into a bird, beast, dog, old woman, etc., at will. To a certain
extent ho is tlie counierpart of K'mi'ikamtch and performs the .same deeds
as ho does, it appeiwing as if K'nu'ikamtch acted under the mask of Marten
and rdiaskai under that of Aishish, in whom we recognize a lunar deity,
liut there are other acts by which tiie two pairs differ considerably, and
where Marten and his brother appear to represent the wintry season only
and the rougli weather attending it.

Another deity of the same type, and far-famed over -"11 the Pacific
coast, is the praiyie-ivdlf, little wolf, or coyote. This quadruped belongs
rather to the genus, /(•"t«/ than to the wolves, looks as smart as a fox, carries
a beautiful fur, and does not attack people unlcvS.; iniited in j)ackd of a doieu
or rno.e. His habit of living in earth holes, and his doleful, human-like,
winning ululation, heard especially during moonlit nights were probably
what set him nj) in the esteem of certain Indians, like tlie Eastern Selish
and the Central Californians, so high as to make of him the creator of the
world and of man. In Modoc stories he ai)pears more frequently- than i •
-Klamath Lake folklore, iind at present there are but few of these animals
left on the heiidwaters of Klamath River. Wash, or Washamtch as the
Klamaths call him, always appears in sun and moon stories, and is, like
8k'"'l aiul Tchasligai, a substitute for the sun-and-moon deities. When he
ran a race with the clouds ha thought at first that there were two of him,
for he always saw another person, his shadow, going by his side. When
he stayed in tlie lodge of the Firedrill brothers he took the fire-sticks of
these in his hands and they all blazed up. In the lodge of the ten Hot-
Watei' Basket brotliei,! he was burnt terribly by tiie inmjites, and when
repairing to the Ant.V lodge the imnates puni.siied him fearfully by their

DKIFIKI) ANIMALS,

• ••

0111

savuge bites. Once when caught in the act of "steHling" • wonmn h.. w.s
(•aptured hy the two husbands of the same, who skinned him and hun<. up
the sk,n to dry, after which the woman was abducted bv the five Bear
brothers. The female prairie-wolf also appears in folklore vv^th her pro.renv
e. .., ,n the tale of the "Creation of the Moons," page 105, which exists in
several vanat.ons. Such stories and others rei,resent the coyote-wolf as a
bemg which has many points of contact with K'n.ukanUch, but is distinct
from lum. Hoth are regarded siu.ultaneously as sky-gods and as funny
T\ . !''^\!^''^-S^^^-S the one from the other, we notice that the
wolf s body ,s believed to harbor wicked spirits (Texts, page 128, 4) and
that Ins higubrious voice is the presager of war, misfortune, and death (1 -53
1 2). A d.stmction has to be made throughout between the covote as an
annual and the coyote as representing powers of nature in a deified, abstrac-t
lorm

Of the three varieties of the hear species, the ,r/>.>.//y hear is the most
popular but also more dreaded than the others on account of his enormous
plrj'sical force. What makes him popular is a peculiar bonhomie which ho
exhibits in his behavior, and which forms a peculiar contrast to his bodily
strengtl. In the myths he, or rather the female bear, is called Luk, Luk-
juntch, bhashapamtch, Shashapsh, and her two young Shashapka, the
latter name probably referring to the fact that this beast was at one time
uiore than other quadrupe.ls made the subject of mythic and folk-lore tales
(shapkca, shapke-fa, shashapkalnt fo narrate a story, shapkaleash, distr
shashapk.v , .. U',e,„1, tale). The tale of the "Hear and the Antelope" is
perhaps . . most attractive of our collection of Texts. Generally the bear
.s the aggressive party in those stories, an.l he also gets generally worsted
whenever a hght occurs or a stratagem is played on him. Sometimes there
are f,v<, bear !,rothers acting in unison. In the "old yarn," narrated p 131
this bear is killed by Gray Wolf near Modoc- Point, and in his magic song
157; 46) he is made to say that he has five springs whi^h are all dried up
Me IS otten mentione.l in the song-lines, but always under the name Luk
not as Shiishapamtch. -'

Gra,, Woiy or K.^-utchish, Kc-utchiamtch is another of the carnivores
which sometimes appear prominently in folklore stories. Gray Wolf is

CIV

KTHNOOHAI'lllO SKKTlJ.l.

reputod to bo a relative (slui-apioksli) of Marten, aiul consequontly of
K'nu'ikaniteli; he stayed at the lodj^c- of the live Thunders at tlio time when
it was burnt (h)wn, pp. 112. ll.'l. One of his residences is at Mount Sliasta.

Other (piach-upeds frequently mentioned in these stories are the skunk
(ti'hi'ishash), the three ditferent kinds of ilrcr, the atifchpc (telu'-u), the elk
(vu'n)) 'he titole (imVnk, .Mod. mu-i'ie). Men or Indians appear but inci-
dentally in beast stories, jis psho-utfwush, a plural noun, and uro eiigaged
«tnly as a passive element in every occurrenco where they are mentioned.

Among the hints the most prominent part is assigned to the rdivit (Kak,
Kiikamteh), for he is l''<itr per.sonilied, and his oiHce is to punish by deatii
all those who act antagonistically to his or his allies' interests. This is done
bv changing them into rocks. In all nations the croaking, doleful cries
of the raven leave a deep impression on the human mind, and hence in
mythology the raven fullills the function of a .soothsayer and mes.senger of
woe. In Hritish (^dnmhia and farther tt) the northwest he is (as Yehl)
considered the cn^ator of all organisms, and almost all the folklore centers
around him as the main figure.

'Vho (foldi'ii faille or the one "floating in the skies" (P'laiwash) is in the
Klamath lore nientioned as often as the raven, either alone or as a family
of five brothers, but does not command so much respect as the raven does.

The teafrr hirds, as cranes, ducks, geese, coots, form the light infantry
of the inythtdogic make-up, and mostly figure in crowds of five or ten,
the coot representing the (^jibwe Shingibis so well known through Long-
fellow's Hiawatha. Some of the lower onfnnisms rise to an unexpected
flignity, like the woodtick or shko'ks, which becomes the wife of the tricky
Marten, and a cater[)illar of beautifid ctdors, whose exterior makes him the
rival or "master of the sun" (shai)sam ptchiwip). Aishish counts among
his plural wives two butterflies of the gayest colors.

PlilNCIl'LKS OF MYTIIIFICATION.

The idea that every phenomenon and every change observed in nature
and mind is caused by some spirit, ghost, gtMiius, god, or other mysterious,
generally invisible agent, eml)odies what we call animism, and forms the
fouiulation of all religions of the world, however abstract they may Imvo

PRlNOIPLiia OF MYTIIIl'iCJATION. Qy

become in course of time. Tl,e working of anin.ism can best be traced in
polytheism and polydenmnism, in the shan.anistic ideas as well as in the
n.l.ff.ous. The principles traceable in the -nyth-making of the Klamath
Indians, winch differs in some points from those of other Indians, may be
summed up as follows:

The sky-gods, as sun, moon, winds, thunder, etc., hero as elsewhere
surpass m .mportunce and strength the other deified powers of nature for
"theology is meteorology." Some of these chief god. assume the mask
of animate beings and inanimate things when thev appear among men

Creation myths do not generally mention the n.aterial from which or
the mode by which objects were created, but simply state that K'mukamtch
produced them by his thinking and will power.

The spirit, life, or heart of a deity is made distinct from the deity itself
uud can live at a distance from it. CA. the pipe of K'mukamtch burnt in
the hre, which m another myth figures as u small ball (kd-iks) and is his
spirit or life.

The burlesque element, which the religions of Asia and Europe have
banished almost entirely, appears here as an almost integral attribute of a
god or geniu8. This appears to form an offset for the dire cruelties ascril,ed
to tbe same demons, and is also characteristic of the religions studied east
ot Mississippi River.

The element of obscenity is only incidental to the burlesque element
but IS sometimes very pronounced, especially in the beast stories It was
added to cause merriment only, and not for such immoral purposes as wo
see It applied to in the Decameron of IJoccaccio and other products of a
coiTupt age.

The deified beings of a lower order, as animals, etc., appear sometimes
as one person, but just as often in the mystic number of five, if not of fen
Fire waters, springs, and plants are not deified, but lakes are sometimes.
Uouds do not appear here deified as witches, as they do among the Eastern
Indians.

Certain miracles are here achieved by bodily contact and symbolic
acts; so dead animals are brought to life again by jumping three or five

CVl

ETHNOGRAPHIC SKETuH.

times over them or by blowing at them, an act which is supposed to impart
life.

CONCLUDING WORDS.

The limited space allowed for this ethnographic sketch forces me to
suppress the larger part of the matter for the present and to relegate it to a
future volume. A few points characteristic of the two tribes may, however,
be added on the last page of this Report.

The Klamath Indians are absolutely ignorant of the gentile or clan
system as prevalent among the Haida, Tlingit, and the Eastern Indians of
North America. Matriarchato is also unknown among them; every one is
free to marry within or without the tribe, and the children inherit from the
father. Although polygamy is now abolished, the marriage tie is a rather
loose one. This tribe is the southernmost one of those that flatten their
infants' skulls, this practice continuing about one year only after birth.

Cremation of the dead has been aboHshed since 1 868, though during
the Modoc war these Indians burned several of their dead. The custom of
suppressing the personal names of the dead is rigidly kept up at the present
time. Art never had any encouragement or votaries among the Klamaths,
and the only objects seen that could be regarded as art products were a
few rock paintings and a head-board on a grave near the Agency build-
ings, whicii was painted in the Ilaida style and represented a human face
flattened out to the right and left. Some baskets are artistically formed.
As there is no clay to be found on or near the reservation, pottery could
never become an art among these Indians. Their songs and poetry are also
artless, but nevertheless instructive, and several songs have beautiful tunes
that should be preserved. The musical and sonorous character of the lan-
guage flts it well for poetic composition; but a national poetry, to be of
success, would not have to adopt the rhyme as a metrical factor. Allitera-
tion, assonance, or the prosody of the ancients would be more suitable to
this upland language, with its arsis and thesis, than the artificial schemes
whicli poets are devising for the modern European tongues. Who will be
the first to teach the Muses the Klamath language!

TEXTS OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAaE.

WITH EXPLANATORY NOTES.

CTU

WS"

Rff^

i '

IHlIk

1^1^^^

' fj.

fl^^^Ba'

l^HnP^'

^^mt-

can

niei

con

not

and

fill

phy

sup(

its r

ers

full

com

mem

or S3

sess

Allc

incid

prov(

ducti

varie

THE KLAMATH INDIANS Or OREGON.

Br Albert S. Gatschet.

IIITKOD0OTION TO THE TEXTS.
The n,08e important and valuable m„„„mo„t of iteelf which „ peonlo
can ransm,. .o posterity i. „ national literalnre. B„. to answer .he reonire-
n,en., ally, the hterature of a people m« possess a certain degl of
completeness ,n portraying ,ho „„„„„„, pe„„|i,rities. I, should embrace
o only sketches of contemporaneous history, of national habits, custZ
. d laws latd down .n the native i,ii„,„, but we expect from it also „ trntl,:
M rendenug o the spiritual side of national life, of its physical and ,neta-
Phy..ca speculafons as we find them embodied in fts myths, belief
»»pe„t,.o„s and conjurers' practices, and of speeches and discourse „
.ts representattv. men held on solemn occasions. The tnost fragrant flow
e.. .u any nattonal literature are certainly the poetic produ^ion.if a

1:^:^:. "■"' °"^'" -"^ '-^-^ " .*■• »« -^« '"^ -ny

While cultured nations are constantly engaged in pernetuatimr .h.
memory of their thoughts and achievements l.yL'ans of soIX^.
or sydabtc system of writing, the uncivilised hunting or fishing tribe »!
»ss none, or only the most imperfect n.oans of recording fh i „Z
All of them possess mythic tales, ttaditional his.o.y, and songs for v^tt
...etdents of hfe, not a few are even originators of didacti! folklorof
proverbs, and of verged rhythmic poetry. Many „f these mentr,'.:.
ducfons are remarkable for .,rti„ic beauty, others for a most interes in^
vanety of detail, but all of them will, if collected with accuracy an "Z

||! '*

2 lNTl{()l)U(!TION TO TIIH TKXTS.

judgment, throw a profusion of light upon the physical iind uiontal charac-
toristics of the nativoH and on their past and present condition.

The task and care of fixing the unwritten mental productions of un-
cultured races and tribes thus devolves upon the white man. It is by no
moans an easy undertaking, and success can bo attained only when the
investigator is favored by circumstances. Ethnologic texts taken from an
uncivilized people are of much intrinsic value only when the scientific
collector is lucky enough to secure the services of intelligent and well-
informed individuals whose veracity is above suspicion, and who have
constantly resided among their own people.

Considerations of this nature guided me when I endeavored to commit
to writing the strange mythology of Oregonian tribes, replete with the most
fantastic stories of their elementary deities and tricksy animal daimons;
and when the weird and unearthly strains of their war-whoops and dance-
yells first struck my ear, I considered even these worthy of notation. I
have not hesitated to assign the first and foremost place in this linguistic
volume on the Klamath language to the "Texts" obtained from trustworthy
Indians of the Klamath Lake and Modoc tribe.'*, for I know that they fixith-
fully portray the characteristic fe.itures and idiosj'ncrasies of these dusky
denizens of a secluded upland region. These literary specimens are the
foundation and basis upon which I have rested my investigations.

The language of these specimens, as the organ of transmission of the
national ideas, had to bo carefully sifted and overhauled before it could
become the basis of linguistic and ethnologic investigation. Numerous
revisals and comparisons were needed to eliminate involuntary mistakes of
Indian informants, who never elevate themselves above a purely empiric
mastery of their native idiom. That an accurate grammar can be composed
upon the solid foundati(»n of faultless texts only, nobody will contest. Nei-
ther will it be doubted that the more copious the specimens are the safer
the conclusions of the linguist will be concerning the principles governing
the forms of speech.

Literary productions enlarging upon national and ethnologic matters
are of much greater importance for the scientific, stud}- of the language in
which they may be compo.sed thiiii any otiicsr t(\\ts. How poor and frag-

rMI'ORTANCB OP KECORDING UNWHl'lTKN LITERATUBBS. .'{

u.ontury would our knowledge of Latin nnd Greek be, if the poet«, orators
and hmtonans who wrote their compositions in these sonorous idioms were
lost, and ,f nothing in them had come down to our age but versions of
foro.g.i books and reproductions of foreign speculations and ideas! A
wr.tcr or informant is most capable of acquainting us with matters concern-
ing Ins own people, country, and epoch, because he feels more interested in
these topics than ,n any others, and he will select from the national stock
ot words the proper term for each object or idea he desires to express
Investigators will therefore, when they address themselves to intelligent
natives for national, tangible and concrete topics of everyday life gener
ally obtam correct and trustworthy information on their object; of research
but will meet with disappointment when inquiring for equivalents of terms
or ideas totally foreign to the simple understanding of the native pon-
Illation. ^ '

An expenence of short duration will convince any linguistic investi-
gator that a multitude of characteristic, quaint, and unfrequent expressions
idioms, phrases, and inflectional forms can never be obtained by mere ques-
tioning. The natives must be allowed to speak out their own free minds
without bias or trammelling; after a short acquaintance they can easily be
induced to recount popular stories, myths, incidents of history, or intertribal
wars, to reproduce speeches and national songs from their own reminis-
cences, and thus they will spontaneously use peculiar forms of languacro
winch often yield a deeper insight into the genius of their vernacular idiom
than pages of information gathered after the usual method of the scholarly
lexicographer or the pedantic verbal translator.

Legends, myths, and lyric productions, when obtained in their onVinal
shape from unsophisticated relators, furnish us with the best material for
inquu-ies mto a far remote antiquity, even when the historic horizon of the
informant's tribe does not exceed the limit of two generations. If facts and
dates do not, words and radical syllables will tell us a tale, and may enable us
to trace ancient migrations or intertribal connections, teach us the origin of
certain customs, habits, or national ideas, and inform us of the shaping, the
material, or uses of old implements In some instances thev will guide us
•.U.> remoter perio.ls than prehistoric archaeology can, and supply us with

2 IISTKODUOTION TO THE TKXT8.

judgmont, tlirow a profuBion of light upon the physical ntul incntnl cliarac-
toristics of tlio nativca and on their past and present condition.

Tho task and caro of fixing tiie unwritten mental productions of un-
c\dtured races and tribes thus devolves upon tho white man. It is by no
moans an easy undertaking, and success can be attained only when tho
investigator is favored by circumstances. Ethnologic texts taken from an
uncivilized peoplo are of much intrinsic value only when the scientific
collector is lucky enough to secure the services of intelligent and well-
informed individuals whose veracity is above suspicion, and who have
constantly resided among their own people.

Considerations of this nature guided me when I endeavored to commit
to writing the strange mythology of Oregonian tribes, replete with the most
fantastic stories of their elementary deities and tricksy animal daimons;
and when the weird and unearthly strains of their war-whooj)s and dance-
yells first struck my ear, I considered even these worthy of notation. I
have not hesitated to assign the first and foremost place in this linguistic
vohmieon the Klamath language to the "Texts" obtained from trustworthy
Indians of the Klamath Lake and Modoc tribes, for I know that they faith-
fully portray the characteristic features and idiosyncrasies of these dusky
denizens of a secluded upland region. These literary specimens are *he
foundation and basis upon which I have rested my investigations.

The language of these specimens, as the organ of transmission of the
national ideas, had to bo carefull)'^ sifted and overhauled before it could
become the basis of linguistic and ethnologic investigation. Numerous
revisals and comparisons Avere' needed to eliminate involuntary mistakes of
Indian informants, who never elevate themselves above a purely empiric
mastery of their native idiom. That an accurate grammar can be composed
upon the solid foundation of faultless texts only, nobody will contest. Nei-
ther will it be doubted that the more copious the specimens are the safer
the conclusions of the linguist will be concerning the principles governing
the forms of speech.

Literary productions enlarging upon national and ethnologic matters
are of much greater importance for the scientific, .stud}- of the language in
wliich they may be composed than any otlier texts. How poor and frag-

rMPOUTANO. „p KKro,.,„«, „,„„,,„,,, UXHKAT^BS.

".ontary m>uld o„r knowledge of Latin and Greek be if tl.« .
and historians who wrote thnlr ..«». •.• ' ''^ P*^*"^' "''"tors,

1".., and if .othingrlt Ld" r?" '" ""^ ■°"°™' ■•*-« "-
foroign book, and reprodLtan, 7l "" '" T °^" """ ™"'»"- "'
"riloror informant i, mZ" u °'/°™«" "P'ouhlion. „„d id<,„,| a
ins hi. .„ p.; „:„ Td' " ° 7""'"«"^ "» "i* ."".tor, cone™

*e« .pic.^,j, i;,::;x » t'':r:::erfr\r '"'^'"""^

of word, tho proper lorm for „. i. ,, ""' "°""™l """k

natives for „„,i„n.,, tangi I Id J '^,"'',''''!'' "'"«''™ '» ""«"ig™.
aiir own eorroet Jnd ^ / Cat Z':!:™?'"-^ "^' «--
but wt-ll meet „,,,, di«.pp„i„.„ent wl Jin IC f °''!°T ""^^'"''^
or ideas lot,illy foreign .„ ,|.„ ,• , ^°'"'* ''" «q'"valents of term.
^^I^^^.^__ y .ore,g„ to tl,e .,„p,e nnderstanding of ,l,o native pop.

i^i«.s,p,n.„se.,„ndtr:Lrr:r~

tioninff. The natives n,i,«f T. ii , obtair.^d by mere ones-

indueedtoreconntpopniar-;;::!:: : : 3;:--*ey-n ea.i,,be

-a,,, to reprodnee .p„„el,es and na ion iTotTrotl''' °'' '"''"*"'
eences, and thus thev ^v.'ll o,.^ . , ^ *^®''' "'^" reminis-

wWch often ,ierd TIJ^ Z'TT/ "" '"""'"' """" <" '""«""?«
«.«n Pa,e. of inLntt rjZ^atTr'"?' '',"'■ ™™"""'^^
ie-o.rapher or the pedantic JeTwtltor'"" "'"""' "' "'° '*'"'^

date, do no, word, and radieai ',;:;: " '-"^ -O

to trace ancient micration. or i„, . , , ' ""'' ""^ """'>''* "

certain c„„„,„. IS "n . . ™''""'"''>»Meacl, „. the origin of

- «»o.er ,rio,i. t„an uiv ixir::::::™:;:^;:

)
I

I ' >■ •;

4 INTRODUCTION TO THK TEXTS.

iiioro iiRoluI <liitcH and i'actH. Such roBuIttt as those miiy bo confidently
U)oked for when several dialecta of one linguiBtic family can bo compared ;
and a careful comparison of one language with otherH npokon in the
vicinity, belonging to the same or a difTcrent family, will always bo at-
tended with beneficial reHults for the increase of our scientific knowledge.

The aboriginal literary monuments printed below are authentic national
records of a bravo and industrious mountain tribe of Indiims. Ethnologic
notices have at a comparatively early period been gathered concerning the
Modocs and Klamath I.ake Indians, but most of them were of doubtful
scientific value, because the information was gathered fntm them in the
English language, which they understood but very impertectly. Even now,
the dates and facts recounted by them, as well as by Indians of many other
tribes, in English, are so extremely confused, that only texts written iti
their own language can give us a clear insight into their traditions, myths,
and mode of thinking.

No Indian tribe possesses a history of itself reaching back further than
two or three generations, unless it has been recorded by whites at an early
date, and what goes beyond this limit is tradition, on which we must bo
careful not to place any implicit reliance. But mythology records in a
certain sense the intellectual history as well as the metaphysical ideas of a
people, and thus by the gathering of the luimerous mythic tales and legends
of the Maklaks a start at least is made for the investigation of their intellec-
tual development. A very moderate estimate puts at several hundred the
more generally circulated myths of the Klamath Lake or E-ukshikni alone,
and the number of their popular song-lines, so interesting and unique in
many respects, may be called infinite, for their number is increased every
day by new ones. The bulk of their mythic folklore is of great poetic
beauty, freshness, and originality, and, like that of other tnbes, full of
childlike "na'ivetd." Tiiis latter characteristic forms one of their greatest
attractions, and the animal myths of every uncultured people will prove
attractive, because they were invented for religious or poetic and not for
didactic purposes. To some of the n)yths given below we may confi-
dently ascribe an antiquity .f <" •; three centuries, for their archaic terms

i hA

LIST OF CONTUinU'lOItS. 5

and locutiona, rcpontod from generation to generation, are not alwiiyn under-
Btood at the present day by the young people, who most attontivdly h'sten to
the aged rhapsodiHts, wlion they expound tlieHe niiriieulons HtorieH in tlio Ini id
glare of the nocturnal (lampfire. Nothing in them indicates a migration of
these upland tribes from any {)art of the country into their present homos,
and hence ilie Mj'iklaks must have had undisturbed possession of the head-
witors of Kliu.iath River for some centuries prior to the advent of the
white papulation.

The various texts obtained clearly exhibit the character of the hm-
guago actually spoken and the difference existing between the two dia-
lects, but they do not all possess the same linguistic; value. The texts of
Dave Hill and others are worded in the conversational language of the
tribe, which in many particulars differs from the more elaborate and cir-
cumstantial mode of speech which appears in the mythic tiiles given by
Minnie Frobon. The " Modoc, War" and some of the .shorter pieces C(»ul(l be
obtained only by putting down the English first and then getting sentence
for sentence in the dialect, whereas the best worded stories and specimens
were written in continuous dictation. All texts obtained were carefully
revised first with the informants, then with other natives, and all the neces-
sary explanations added at the time.

From a purely linguistic view the popular songs or song-lines are the
most valuable contributions. The melodies of some of their number deserve
to be called pretty, according to our nmsical taste. To the natives all of
them appear harmonious; but when the Western Indian calls some melody
"pretty," guided by his musical principles, he very frequently does so in
opposition to what our ear tells us to call by this predicate.

The Klamath Lake dialect was spoken by the majority of the con-
tributors to my linguistic anthology. I obtained these specimens, with the
exclusion of the Modoc texts, in the autumn of 1877, at the Klamath
Reservation, Lake County, Oregon. Though many of these natives speak
the Chinook jargon more fluently than English, I never availed myself, for
obtaining any information whatever, of that imperfect and hybrid medium,
through which the Indians of the Northwest cairy on so much of their
intercourse.

INTRODUCTION lO THE TEXTS.

The following is a list of the most important contributors :
1. The Riddle family, consisting of Frank Tazewell Riddle, a native of
Kentucky, bom about 1836; his wife Toby, a pure-blood Modoc woman,
who was, as stated in her biographic notice, born in 1842, and their son
Jeff. C. Davis Riddle, born about 18G2. Among several texts of linguistic
importance 1 obtained from them a circumstantial chronistic account of the
Modoc war of 1873, in wliich Mr. and Mrs. Riddle had served as interpre-
ters of the Peace Connnissioii. ITavii;g been introduced io them in Decem-
ber, ISTfj, in New York City, by Mr. A. B. Meacham, late Superintendent of
Indian Affairs in Oregon, when ihey travelled with him in the eastern States
in connection with the Meacham Lecturing Company, I took down the
contents fir.st in English from Mr. Frank Riddle, then added the transla-
tion from the other members of the family. Mr. Riddle liad no intention
of giving a full and autUent'c account of that desperate struggle, but merely
wished to render his own impressions, and to relate in the plainest words
the events witnessed by himself. Here we have the opportunity of hearing
also the Modoc side of the contest.

The wording of the other Modoc texts was the almost exclusive work of
the boy Riddle, who speaks the language perfectly well, and only in the more
difficult portions was he assisted by his mother. From the Riddles 1 obtained
also several hundred sentences, over sixty songs, and about two thousand
three hundred vocables, which were twice revised with their assistance in
New York City, and twice again with the efficient help of such natives at the
Klamath Lake Agency as were conversant with the jV^odoc dialect.

2. Dave Hill, a dusky, pure-blood Lulian, subchi-jf of the Klamath Lake
tribe and interpreter, born about 1840. Having been a prominent war-
rior of Ills tribe up to the treaty of I8f)4 and a scout in subsequent expedi-
tions against hostile Indians, he has also seen much of the white man's ways
by staying for years in Northwestern Oregon and by traveling East with Mr.
A B. Meacham on h.s lectiu-ing tour in 1875. How he was then kidnapped
in New York Cit\-, confined in a cellar, lestored to liberty, and how he
worked his way home, is related with full particulars in Meacham's Winma,
pages 9r'-102. In the Modoc war (1872-73) he was put in command of
the auxiliary forces of his chiefraincy, whicii were detailed to obscrx c the

LIST OP COxNTIUJiUTOltS. 7

belligerent Modocs and to check any dangerous movements which thov
nnght have undertaken against the settlers or the Indian Reservation
IIills fathor Skaftitko, or the "Left-Handed", v. as for son.e time a guide
to General Fre'n.ont on one of his expeditions through Oregon, Nevada,
and Calitornia. *

Readers of Hill's texts will notice that his diction is very concise, preg-
nant and to the point, and so is the speech of these Indians generally
But since that conversational language, or popular jargon, as we may not
m.properly call it, n.oves along in contractions, elisions, metatheses and
ellipses I have had to revise his texts many times with him and other Indians
be.ore I could make them praclic .Uy available. In the myths, Dave Hill
i« not so pictorial and graphic as Minnie Froben, but in mutating his feats
of war he readily furnished all the points that could be expected, Coii-
cei-ning the conjurers' practices and national beliefs, he was more communi-
cative than the majority of the Klamath Indians, whom superstitious awe
8t.ll deters from revealing all that the investigator desires to know Hill's
list of topographic names is a very important addition to aboriginal topog-
raphy since he has added the correct etymology to the majority of these
Jocal designations.

3. 3Unnie Froben, born about 18G0, the daughter of a pure-blood Kla-
math woman, who lives on the Williamson River, and of a (deceased) French
sett er Froben or Frobine, was, at the time of my visit, the assistant of Mrs
Kickerson, the matron of the boarding-school for native children at the
Age,u>y. She and the subchief Hill w^ere the most important contributors
o my mythic and other ethnologic anthology, and the pieces dictated by
hor excel all the others in completeness and pcr.oicu<ty. Moreover I
obtained from her a multitude of popular songs, tlie names and uses'of
esculent roots and plants, the Klamath degrees of relationship, a large num-
ber of words and sentences, a good deal of grammatic information, and
revised, with her assistance, the whole of the Modoc contributions, as well
as the majority of Klamath Lake texts.

If any further books should be composed in or about the Klamath Lake
dialect her assistance would perhaps be preferable to any other native help
to be found at present in the tribe; for during her stay with white people

,-,t

INTK()])UCTrON TO Til]'; TEXTS.

she has succeeded in acquiring more mental training than Indians usually
acquire on reservations.

4. Charles Preston, a pure-blood Klamath Lake Indian, born about 1 840,
is now stationed as interpreter at the subagency of Yafneks. Preston hod
previously sojourned five years at Oregon City on the WillAniet River and
vicinity, and there he learned to converse in English quite fluently, acquir-
ing also the idiom of the Wasco Indians, of wliicli he has furnished me over
three hundred of the most usual terms. During a stay of three weeks
which he made at the Klamath Lake Agency, I obtained from him valuable
grammatic and lexical information, texts, populiir songs, and proper names,
and revised with him the Modoc dictionary.

f). Serffcanf Morgan, a pnro-blood Indian, living at Koluishti, born about
1830, and jocosely called ''Sergeant" on account of his wearing an old
sergeant's uniform wliich he had obtained from soldiei-s at Fort Klamath.
From this good-natured, intelligent old Indian I obtained a few short texts
and some ethnologic information especially relating to mythologic and
shamanic subjects.

6. " The Captain" or "Captain Jim", a pure-blood Indian, living at the
junction of Sprague and Williamson Rivers, about five miles from the Agency
buildings. When I saw him he was about fifty years old, and as he spoke
but Klamath and Chinook jargon, all the mythology which he remembered
was obtained through Minnie Froben. He received his nickname "Cap-
tain" from having been a help on a steamboat plying on the Willdmet
River, Oregon.

7-U. Other informants of whose assistance I have availed myself are
mentioned at the head of the texts. They were Johnson, the head chief of
theModocs at Yalneks; the conjuror Kukash ov Doctor John ; and several
young Indians then scarcely over twenty-five years of age : Pete, Frank,
and Long John's Ben. AH of them are pure-blood Indians.

To facilitate the study of the Klamath language, and to increase the
popular interest in the acquisition of Indian languages in general, I have
inserted with the texts an interlinear translation, and subjoined to them a
variety of commenting notes of linguistic, ethnographic, and historic im-
port. The large majority of the Indian words could be rendered in their
literal meaning; but in some instances, where literal translation was nearly

HINTS FOR THE STUDY OF THE TEXTS.

impossible, the sense of the word or phrase was reproduced as faithfullv as
could be done within the narrow space allotted. Words in brackets were
inserted only to render the sentence complete.

But to the student striving after a thorough understanding of the texts
all these helps will prove of partial assistance only. A thorough study of
the Grammar ought in fact to precede their perusal, and reference to all
the three portions of the work will frequently be necessary.

The material portion of a language can be faithfully conveyed to our
understanding only by the correct pronunciation of its words, sentences
or texts. Hence all that is said of Klamath phonetics must be studied tirst,
and more especially the alternating processes, the proclisis and endisis, the
sounds not occurring in English (as the Unguals, the aspirate x, the vowel
«), and first of all the pronouncing list of alphabetic sounds, which is sub-
joined. To initiate readers into the distinction, empirically obtained from
the mouths of the natives, between the clear vowels a, e, i, «, and the
dumb or deep-sounding a, 6, t, '&, the earlier pages of the texts contain
more indications than are given in the later. In certain terms long vowels
can turn into short, and short into long ones. Special attention must be
paid also to the study of elisions, apocopes, metatheses, etc.

In the morphologic, part of the Granimar, the verbal and nominal
paradigms are particularly recommended to the student's attention, and a
previous knowledge of the mode of forming the distributive reduplication
from the absolute form is indispensable to the reader of my Texts, not only
for their full comprehension, but even for the use of the Dictionary. The
suffix of the future tense is written -uapka, to distinguish it from a homony-
mous form -wapka, of different signification. The apocopes occurring in tlio
conversational style of language will soon be recognized as such by the
reader ; for example, -tk for -tko, -ks for -kshi, dropping of -a, -ash, etc.

To make the study of the Texts too easy by a flood of notes would be
as obnoxious to the true interests of science, as to present unsolved too
heavy grammatic difliculties to intellects yet untrained in the modes of
Indian speech. Scholars may decide to what degree I have succeeded in
avoiding both extremes.

-ll«l

;

a
b
d

e
g

h
i
i
1

y
k

INTEODUGTION TO THE TliXTS.
LIST OF SOUNDS OCCURRING IN TIIH KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

as in alarm, wash; German. Mann, hat; French, pas, gras, ftanc.
longer sound of a, as in far, father, smart, tart; German, schaden,
lahm, Fahne.
• as in law, all, fall, tall, taught.
as in hat, man, fat, ass, slash.
as in blab, bold; Gorman, beben; French, harhe.
as in dread, did; German, das, diirfen; French, de, darder.
as in judge, julep, George, dudgeon.

as in then, swell, met; German, .schwebt; French, 6e//e, st'//e.
as in last syllable of preacher, butler, tippler; German, BUcher;

French, le, je, me.
i's in theg, fade, jade, shade; German, stehlen; French, chaire, maire.
as in gig, gull; German, gross; French, gros, grand, orgueil.
lingual guttural produced by bending the tip of tlie tongue back-
ward, resting it against the palate, and when in this positi.ui
trying to pronounce g in gag, gamble, again.
as in hag, haul, hoot; German, haben, Hals
as in marine; German, richten; French, ici, patrie.
longer sound of /, as in bee, glee, reef; German, spiegeln, Stiefel.
as m still, rim, whim, split; German, fnster, sehllmm, Wille; wlien

long, it is i in German ilin, schielen.
as in year, yolk; German, Jahr; French, yeux; not used as a vowel,
as ,n kick, kernel; German, Kamm, Kork; French, soc, eoque, quand;

Spanish, quedar, quizd.
lingual guttural produced like g by bending the tip of the tongue
backward, holding it against the palate, and then trying to
pronounce k, c, in kindness, killing, cool, craft. The tongue must
be placed more firmly against the fore portion of the palate
than in the g, in order to allow less breath to escape,
the aspirate guttural in lachen, trachten, Rachen, Sache, as pronounced
in Southern Germany; not occurring in English, French, or
Italian; Spanish, mvjer, dejar; Scotch, loch. It has nothing in
common with the FiUglish x.

"11 ,

m I' i

ALPHABETIC NOTATION.

11%

as in lull, loon, lot; Gerniiin, Lilie; French, lance.

as in madam, mill, mimic, mum; German, Memtne.

as in ramble, gamble, nimble.

as in sample, thumping.

as in nun, net, noose; German, nein; French, nuire.

as in ring, bang, singing; German, singen, hangen.

as in prank, rink, spunk; German, Schwank; French, cinquante.

a combination of n with k.

a combination of n with x-

as in home, lonely, most; German, Molken; French, soUe.

longer sound of o, as in note, rope; German, Floh, Boot, roth;

Frencli, sauter.
as in bird, burn, surd; German, blode. Homer; French, deuil, cwm:
asm pipe, papa; (^ormaw, Puppe; French, jj«W.
as in sad, sale, soul, smell; German, Seek, Sichel; Frencli, sauce,
seul.

as in shaft, shingle; German, Schale, schon; French, chereher.

as in trot, tell, tiptop; German, Tafd; French, tour.

as in church, chaff, choke; German, hatscheln; Italian, cicerone;

Spanish, chaparral, chicha.
as in smooth, truth; German, Fuss; French, loup, poutre, outrage.
longer sound of u, as in crude, flume, fool; German, Stuhl, Huh;

Blume; French, lourd, sourd.
as \n full, pull; German, Flucht, Klvft, Russland; Italian, /mw</o.
not in English; German, kiihl, Gefiihl; French, lunc, puce.
as in z;afee, veer, vestige; German, Wolke, Wasser, tveben; French,

vautour, veut.

the ti before vowels; wafer, wasfe, wolf, wish, wayward; in Gei-man
it con-esponds nearest to short u, not to w; nearly as French
ou in 0M^■, ouate.
z as in ^-ea/, zone, frozen; German, Ease; French, ^efe, rose.

The English a; is rendered by gs or ^s, the German z by * or ts, all
being compound articulations. The two points on a, o, u {a, o, u) are
not signs of diteresis; they mark softened vowels.

5
P

Bh
t

tch

u
G

ft
ti

INTKODTICTION TO TllK TEXTS.

ai
au
ei

yu or iu
oi

wii or iia
wi or ui

The prominciution of the dipMovfts may be easily inferred frcmi their
component vowels; it is as follows:

as in lij'e, mine, sly, die, difc.

as in mouse, hud, arouse.

a combination of e and i resembling the vowel sounds in

the word greyish, imited into a diphthong,
as in pure, few, union.
as in loin, groin, alloy.
as in waieli, wash; French, lot, roi.
as in squid, win, switch.
All the diphthongs being of an adulterine character, they can generally
be separated into two vowels, and then are hyphenized, as in i-u, o-i, d-i, a-u.

GRAPHIC SIGNS.

- arrested sound : skd^hs, spring time; tchiiika, to swim up stream.

apostrophe marking elision of a vowel, of or any other sound:

heshuilmp'Ii for hoshudmpgli, to reeover one's health.
hiatus, separating two vowels as belonging to two different

syllables: pdla-ash, /owr; l6md-ish, thunder; or two consonants:

tsiiils-ha'mi, at salmon-time.

separates the parts of compound terms: skiiks kiii'm, spirit-fish or
letiferous fish.

acute; the only accent used for marking emphasized syllables,
vowel pronounced long: mu'iii, large, great.
vowel pronounced short, except 6, to which a distinct sound is
given: yiimftltka, to return from berry-harvest.

EARLY TRADITIONAL HISTORY OF MODOCS AND CAPTAIN

WRIGHT'S MASSACRE.

GiVKN IN THE Modoc Dialect by Toby Riudlk.

The K6nibatnMb

from the Klaniatbn

At lh»t
time

fi-ukflhlkni Modoki'ahash slieggAt^a lapgsliaptdnkni taiinap illo'la at;

The Klamath Lake* from ihn Moilnca ecparated seven time* ten jeara nowj

tdnktchlkni kd-i pen nadslia'shak tchfa. Gumpatflash E-ukshikni'shash

(they) nince then not again tofether lived. — — . - - —

sheggiit;ua viindpni tauniip illo'la at.

eeparaleil forty years now.

K4iu nidklakshash shdllualslit, til'nii B6shtin Ya'matala mddshantko

licfore the (Modoc) people had fought, niiumber of Americana to Oregon emlKratiiiK

k6-idsha welekilpkash Modokf.shash shnuka, y^wish ktdktaknan tuntisli

»■> "Kly old woman Modoc caught, (both) heels having rut through .i lopi-

tihtuiika, topftan wiig'n shlftchta, shpukd'gatchnan 8hiuka,.Shdtash B6shti- 6

pasHi'd behind » wagon tied (her), by dragging killfd (her), Snakes Anieri-

nash shuenkslit pall5'tan hd'nkelam B6shtinam sha-dmakshash. B6slitin

cans having murdered (and) robbed of this of Ami^ricans P>rty. Americans

tAukt lupidAna liiin weldksuin tcliekeli kititchne,.

firstly of this old woman the blood spilled.

ShAlani 1852, nash Boshtin Capt'n Wright sh^shatko shA'ldshash 9

(In the) fall (of) 1853 one American, CaptAlu Wright named, soldirrH

f-amnatko Mo'doka kaila g4tpa, mdklakshash shana-nli6ka 8hish6kaslu

having with liini (to the) Mmloc oonntry came to tlic (Modoc) people because be desired to make war

KA-i nidklakshash shl^a. Modokishash snawddshash lutatkatki pish

Not (any) Modocs ho saw, A Modoc woman going to interpret for him

found.

sha'tela; sha'tSla hflnk snawddshash: mdklaks gatpantki, shu-utdnktgi pi'sh 12

he hired; he iiistractcd this woman (U> .«ay) : that the nhoiild come to lueet In council with

Mwlocs him

giuga mdklaks; shapiya, nidklakshash nash md'nish wiishniiish shiukit'stka.

theMo<locn; he nnaounced (for) the Modocs one large ox he wotild kill,

MAklakshash shapiyulan Td-uni shpaiittsh shnidktcha. At td'm Mo'dokni

The Modocs having notified, to Treka poison be sent for. Then many Moilocs

town

gdtpa; at tchek hdnk wiishmush shiukulan shpautish itd. Na'sh tclie'k 15

arriviid; then forthwith the ox having butchered the poison hepnton. One thru

Iifink Ydmakni B6shtinash tchawfnatko Mo'dokishash shapiya

Warm Spring Indian the Americans having lived among the Modocs notlHml

tchti'leksh pdtki, shpautish itdnipkush gi'sht. At tdnkt kd-i tidsh

(any) meat they should poison put on it having been. Now at that not well

eat, time

kdnka, Mo'dokiil at gii'nipiSle. 18

tiilkf,!, tlio MiHitK-s then lefi for home. ,

kd-i

not

honi-

it was

^^i

IIISTOI.'M'AI, TKXTS.

ss±'' »'■-!;'>• i-'i^'iiii^i." te!'»'' *' '^•-'"i^-" ^^Zo< ...;:;;

The I'lirii- bid

Moldierii

]*| I ,. limUClt^. "".M.Win

iiliaaliiifil;ifiui sliu'ldshitsli slianivii- "^f!il.'.l..^).f..l. -, i m ,

';'""'7' """'■• • -» Ti- • 'S;;'± '\,;.„"t'' ',;"¥'• ""'^^^'^'^-

Bliasll fn«liiii'f.iH" AI'll-J 1 - . , . iliipip-, ih..j|ii.

'I':''" ''J=;:M ^:'|1± '"'"'^ "''r'"^ wawa,,kan shu-atanko'tky..

& ?±' »',ii'±,ii;" -'e '.--k "^1. i.,w,. k, ^,iuu„.

1/,1.,,„K„ 1 , ,, , , AniiTicaii iimii.ItT ' '

'"h^i"' ^'!;^>;t' 'Sis i:i^-^;e:' ^'"^^si^':f'^^'' ^''■•'''^•-'' yAto-

tampka, at nanuk uiaklaks noo'slm. Boshtiu ni.n.k m.'.L.I-l"'r"T. - ,'

wmiiiili.,1. ' ' Moilocs klllwl-

9 ti'inep toks kslii'ta.

Ave hoWKver p«ia|)(M|,

NOT KM.

13. I.

Ha. ..i«M S:;r:jr;;^;!;;:,;^i;;;:;:';;i;;'' r -^ -'-•: "•■- '^ ~*o, .,.,

tlu' tribe, is or recent .lat..: m" . i,: ' ': [^'^r *'"; *"" -'"-♦'"» of

latest raids made on fl>e Pit Kivo, r , , . <''"'<'"tf'' <'"«', lo>' even the

Lake Indians nnder .^^ II"':; • '' tSS! ^^^^^^^^^^^ f "-"«.

of Tule (or Kl.ett) Lake, California -J^"'"l>''t»asli hved on sonthea.stern end

or ilSko.'- "^^ '''"" '"' "•^'^"" *'"''''"^'' -^"' ^•--^" !-•<- would say: iU.Ua,

ern Oregon, by Modoc warriors' v,!;; h d w^^^H ^r n.:"nS;;;'r " n""'""*"
beach of KLett Lake. This terrible wholes.h^ nV •! ,', • . ' "" ""^ *'"'^™

i..ediat«.urso Of captain Wrii^s^;:;^ u;r:^;:i.;:^:;r ^^ ^^>'^^- -« *•>«
Ko.::'^;^::r^;i,;^:;:;^^^^

their wagon, thinking her to be a Snal^ squa^; tL y d L • .^.^SZT u"""

~r^s;;:^tr"-^"'"-^'-^-^----^^^^

13, J). An article in the " Overland Monthlv" of San Fnnnispn t.,i io-.
signed V^ M. Wr, ^ves the t^Uowing pLcuSTiil^JS W £.^: LJS;:;:

In 18a2 a train of eighteen emigrants attempted to reach Ore-onbv ZiJi^;
Lake route. They had eucamp.d for dinner at the eastern XeolXt/... f
a bluff since caUed "Bloody Point" Snddonlv tJ.a Z ^ , '^''*'' ""''^'''

.->1

TUADITIONH, K'\'().

Cs<!ii|M'(l on IioiNcliiick to Yr<^ka, which Ih over oi^lity iiiilfs (lislaiit, to t«'ll of the IIh-
imtir. Tlio goiienil indignation arouMod by his nicital prompted (Japt. Vtvu. Wriglit to
oiKaiiizo a force of fifty-one vohinteers at Yreka into an indc^pendont company in the
cnHninj,' wpring, and to make the tribe atx)M<' tor the l)loody deed. The spot wilect^'d
by VViiglit lor tlie wjinieil was on liie iiortli bank of LoHt iJiver, a ftsw hundred yards
from the Natural Bridge (Tiliuirmtko), and this was also the scene of the muasacro.

C<»ncerning the time of Wright's m»Hsiu;re, Turner differH from our informant
about one year.*

13, i;}. For the Modoc wuslimusli, u'Mlimusli, the Klamath Lakts dialect has tlie
original Sahaptin term, mCislunusli, the primary signification of wiiicli is, "lowing li"h'>
cattle." The Lower Chinook has emusmus, the Kalapuya, amdsmus. The Nez rere<>
•lialfKst of Sahaptin has mCi for ox, cow, cattle.

13, 13. shiukiestka is the verbal desiderative of shiukht, to kill for soniebody, to
liutcher for 8omelM)dy's benefit.

13, U. tfi'm ■ O'tlokni instead of: tfi'mi MO'dokni. This language favors elisions
of short and sinj. ', vowels standing between two consonants pronounced with thcs same
voeai organ.

13,10. Yamakni is "Northern Orcgonian, Northern maji", in general. Hut this
informant wa.s, in fiust, a Warm Spring Indian ixom Des Chutes lliver.

13, 17 and tH. tidsh hemkiiidca means: to discuss an arrangement resulting in
goo<1 to both parties; this is, in most eases, equivalent to "conclude i»eace".

14, 4. shtalalashtak is a contraction of shtahVhwht tak, both particles tak Iteing
correlative to e'lish other, and referring hero to the future. — shtalalasht is verbal con-
ditional of staliila, to fiU, derived from 8tAni,/M/?, through assimilation of consonants:
shtal^la for sttinala.

14, 0. i-.llp'a, distributive form of the verb n;fa, 41/a: every one had unstrung and
laid down liis oicn bow.

14, 7. The lifting-up of ashes from the council-fire by Wright was the signal for
the soldiers to fire at the forty-six Modctcs. Forty-one were killed on the sjjot.

14, 9. kshfta not in use among the Klamath Lak(>s.

* >!itptain Wright was shortly al'terwanl killed by tlio biiUot of an Indian, who saw him standing
^f his house, ni.Ar tlie outlet of Roguo River, Oregon.

lit
ml

IlISTOllKUIi T10XT8.

fi-UK8IIKNI BUf.LLVAL WaLAMSkI'sHASU.

FIOHTS BETWEEN KLAMATH^LAKE AND ROGUE RIVER

Orv«, Br W.w;IuK«, „„ Dxv. HuZTsobchikp, in x„b Klamat., Lakk Dialkct.

i"Mi Ibo Lak.. men 1.1,1 tUmiim,lv«, thou itttrtud up ihi«y

ohiof

"TlieHiMl'

o
ilreii

aim.

>■ , 11 I'l 1 1 ... .u..i,j women ohll-

1 1 « / . . . wani« hiod

^^""^"•5^ "'"' "^'" a?' sr ,s 'r- -sJi?^
■' s:; •■■;»& -£S'' '!■;'= ,;; '»iL»«" i^i^ *„«'.i,,„,a„k »h„,k.i;a";;.

1/1 I . , ,m, •olslDg forced t() diinci.

loloks wiggHta •

flro close by.

"'•'""■"">"' ahC™, """ """P™' (nn'l) rctniDcd, Tl.e,rho

15 sapfyii gatpjinipalaiik, tsiii sas liu'k a'nka savii-'ikfn.f l„vi. i -'i

maileiTis. aflcr ^..t.Sighomo, and m„ thatnmn hr^ i., ^'^J U'lKt.lUt lUl k killlil iriujr.

oloanrea « ,1!/,';^^ that man bronght w.^l ar.,„»inted (1,1a „ith ^|,„|,|^

^.^' ffe" '.T' sSS:: *!,S:S2.tr.!' S±:?'- '•«/.k"rK.i<„;

at Mumon-tlmo and tliey oroaaeil Will am-

's «S=i" lis;- IS' '"trr"" '!;?i<f; ,6j?"» ™> n««ni< i'Z

wercn. "■'"''"" i,;!.'^';';! "'"' ■-"""• "'I of them toKhmu.b

ROGUE KIVER RAIDS.

gCMdunktsuk Y<1mnki8n8. Tapt'tn sha gAtpa WAlaniskni tclif'Hi.tat. Tbi'u

l..l..«.,o.l, tl...,. ,l,.y Mtack..,!. „„, «,oy f.,„gl,t. That ,ln,e tU.y kllM ,«.™.,', fl.l „"ly

nii'iklC'ka Ni'lakskni tdiikt, tMiii lifi'k sa son^tank knn'tsaninCli saa kikln's 'i
I.iVk tn'iiopni. Kd-i lift'iik viVsa tumA nuiklaks kakakn61atk fffiiir """"'

kat link ti'mkt nii'ik'lP;ja : "tatdtuk rui'iklaks gAtpa f Thiu link saVsa nil
"Jsd-i n! viVssa; sliawfgank giikA ni mfi'mah tumi'." Tchui ni iiA-ash el sa-

-not I .„,„fraMi 1„ „y ,ury Mart nut I („,„„„.„„„,)„ larao Tu"n 1 J ,gi,'''^,„

waliniiaHli gd-u: "giikAn a na't! ft'tch na'lsh hushtcho'ktgi ! Lrekudnauka i)

MluoUKlUin miuo: "will , tart out wel m.ver n» ih„„ „,.„ wm ° » t _n. ' 1^^" "^

iit'ver
mind I

thfiy niny kill.

I will pivcueil

kanf!" A na't gii'ka, at na'lsh slia ng^-isha, tsi'ii ndt sliawi'rra kd-a
tsui nat kpu'dsa liu'nkiii,sli Walauisk{'sluisli.

UD(1 wu illuv..b«k lUimn Kotjui. KIvimh.

•Sf"" ,T^''"1 "'"''^'''' li"li'^'t'it gevvd sa, udoddmkuaaa; tsui sa sa'ksa 12

iid-ast hfi'ksa tiVnepni. Tsui E-ukskni nd-aslit lh : "liaitsimt sas nii'ii

tiMi (t»u«) ihem. liv^M,™. T|„.„ tbi. I,„k.. ra.n .1,„» .^(!i "'"l»""l SaS pa U,

lnislitcli6ktat liaftsnank." Tsi'ii sa peno'dsa, tsiii ndnka ffao-.ridha neno'-

K.l,y„,>h«a., „,„„.,„«... ^„., u.ey pur»uod, „„„ „„,„„ fTia ffiS C

dsasani, tiii'niislitka tsui ndnka hntkak ts6ka, ndnka toks ga'mpgle. Nirefsiitk 15

pnrs,„.r,, by »mrva,i.,„ „„.„ „o,no ,iRht,l„.,„ p„r„W .ome lH.vov,r^,,„r„Vab,,u,,,. E«l

hu nk sa slildslila tsokapks tcha.

(iJUH) iliiy loaml ilimh.iios alwi.

Tclifssa Walainskfsh stqiual titnd a Kd-i sa tud sii'ika E-ukski'sas

tdiikakak siuka wewalii'ksas k'mutdidpkas tchi'sli. At mi'tak ni sdvuakt-i 18
hu'mjisht siniual A'-uksknl Walamski'sliash ; kd-i tatd liVluagsla A'-ukski'-

b»w fought th„L«ko„,l„. n«ain»tthoRoK«..IUv,.rs, u„v, r thoy ,„a,lo*'Hl„v6» oftbeLako

A-ukski'saa.

tbo Lake tribe,

•I

lllSTOHIdAh IKXTH.

Sii-a<|ji8 tsi's Moatuasaa IhI's Adi'iyun, SuijtifiHli Mn Walaiii«kr«li t«in

TTi,.HimK,.« liM>, UiePil Riv<t« t.w ohoy) wlilppnl ihoHlmxti.. I.w, Ihi. I'.iku.- RIybm iw

M^)kt■a^*ll tNi'H Adi'iyua A'-ukskni. Waitiiniri'sliam tMi's ti'tattm tOnirBkii

lh.< Knlaiunuii imi vlilpMnl ihuUkotrlba Knun lh« W.nu S|,mi,„ „n„ ,i v»rlum KkiIi awnr

t> Wat.S I.-IKsllklll.
Iiorwn th» Ijke nion.

NOTES.

16. I »avo Hill Hiok part hiniNcIf iu one of lliosc .Nkiraii.sht*. Hm liistoiinil accoaiit.s

uiv all givin in the ( V( rsatimial .style, which nlino.sl tIirouf{boat «al)«»itat<«M tlio

siuipio H lor nit. I littVf not bt-en able to (Ictt'iniiao llio .xiict <latt>8 of these K'ogao
River niid-s; l.ul (jiey mast have o<'earreil belore the end oC 18.55, wlu'ii tlm Oregon war
broke oat, lor alter its lei aiiimtiou luost of the n„tiiw Kiver Indians were removed from
their old homes '.o the coast reservations of Northwestern Oregon. The ruitls ocuarred
in the early .vo.ith of Dave Hill, who was born about ISIO; so they may be placed be-
tween the yeiu.s ls|,s and LS-Vt.

16, 2. tinatoks forms antithesis to tina of the preceding claase. Tho literal

nu'aningof both is: -'one tinm the other tiau'."

16, .1. WalMasi, The .safllx -i. i, is the adverbial particle hi, and formH a locatire
c((«>, mainly fmi'Hl in local ami topographical terms, as in Yamsi, Kakago.si, Ktalwashi;
also in a few generic nouns designating localities, emampnu'nts, aMainlains, etc.

16, .-). shflshiVdshapclisii. The sulli\ed sli is the proiaain slia, tlicy, and in this
sutlixed form also appears as Icli. s. This verb stands in the distribntivi- Ibrm ;
shiidshapeli, to rel)aihl a tire, being the absolute Ibrm.
16. 7. niin/atch, lor miii/a tcliish, •■others also".

16, 1(». yilkanuMpkuk, verlial .ansative of the future of yakna. The forms yii'kna,
yii'ka, yekna, yeka, are preferable to yakna, yaka.

16, 11. Stl-atsa. It is a connnon cust(Mu among western, and sonu' eastern, wihl
tribes to force their captives to dance in honor of the victory gained over their own
tribe. This is done es|)eeially daring tlie scalpdaiu'cs.

16, II. TitnA Ifi'ks, etc. Here begins the account of a raid made by the Koguc
Hiver Indians upon the Klamath Lake settlements. It nuiy have occurred one year
after the raid lueviiaisly narrated.

16, l.">. sapiya, etc. .\fter es<aping. he informed liis own countrymen of all the
local (ondilions of the Klamath Lake iieopie and their country, and used all his topo-
graphical knowleilge in guiding their wariiors to the attack.

17, 1 and 2. Tsui ne'lka. Iiulians and uncivilized races in all portions of tho world
begin their raids u[)on the eiuMny before daw n. <a' at the earliest apjiearance of daylight.

17, !t. giik.in and gekui'inapka, iidlectional melathesis lor giikiia and gek.inuapka.
17, II. hushtcho'ktat for linshtcho'kat at, at (//t) being repeated twice.
17, Hi. ts('>kapks teha is a coutrai'tion from tsoki'ipkash tchi'sli a.
17, 17. Tehis.sa, for tchi sha: thus they.

17, 20. sellolok: syuizesis of the lunger form shellualuk, shellualaga: through
fighting.

17, I'L yuyi'ilks^sitk, abbreviated from yuyrtlkish = shitko, looking like jjersons
najiirning over their lost companions, oi made sorrow I'nl by bondage to Indians of a
foreign tril)e.

PIT lilVElt 11AID8.

IS-DKHKM HKLUJAL MoaTIjAhUAHH.

PIT RIVER INDIANS RAIDKD BY KLAMATH LAKK WARRIORS.

Givw* nv Davk Uiix in tiu Klaiutu Lakk Dialkct.

E-ultHkni tftiitiKi sdlliinl Si'iHtiiiH; tsuHsuk tokH Hdlluul, tCl'iu hft'Hhtchoz

'Ihnl.nkiMii.n niilnrii'ii wum.l «|ii(li.i.t lli« riiiitlliimlly how. foiiKl.l, (mull kllM

Slnwil; Lvor iiMiriv

'M/mtuHHliush. A'-ukHkiii lfi'liiagHliit« tfl'm niimik hko'Mis. Ku-i hfi'k

rit Klvcr iiif n. TlmL.kum™ <-ii>l*v <l iil«, ,„„n.v .■vi.ry •prlnu-llm*. ~N„t tboy

(lUIJ)

ki'Ilitk, kd-a wo'sfs Hliliio'tnk A-iikHki'HiiH ti'iisna, ku-itat Ha rielll'nat q

WIliu.H,., v..ry (IcKi-'iKl-nt «lllienHi..»lKli( ,lli,k«,H.„ III. y i,.n nwuy. ~i„.v.r tli..y ».«lp«<l

luVMtcliok liiiyu liak m; tft'ni tAt Ha liustsoka -AlcSatuash. Ka-itata si'ukat

''"'"' ""'y Ihoyi many t|i»n tlwy k;!!^! Pit Klver in...i N«»i.r inHMcrnt

A-nksk/sas M/iatuash.

tliK Luke iiii'n iIki I'lt Ktvnra.

WawIlIKS LUPf SHltLLUAL MoATUiSHASH.
DAVE niLL'S FIRST FKIIIT WITir TRK PIT RIVER INDIANS.
Kitcliki'min tj'iiikt nO gi^mi nikf-nitfri'k ni'la uyaninatk. Tsui nad 6

"'"'«"'"'>' ll".llim„ I w,.„t „«,inll,,M..l y nurjliiK. Aud w

K-ukskiii gelo'la pd-uk Koks'iksak^lii, nfi'tih iia'ds Jj^shtln t(i'la Thiu

^l.iiki.min iliMiKMii,!,,! i,„i.i,,«t i,i Mill,. I!iv, ,. ,„„. „nh iih Am can (™„I„b). Tlini

liislitcli/ikta lidtakt; wAts mliA-uta na-ii'nani ; sawfka lifHlinaksIi hmikdnti

""■'""" "^ ' """•" "'".:,r'"' w,:;;:,,.,, "^r/i^r "•— «'^ """"•" •••"«*

watch ni'Mii nil))'i-ntiH}it, tHui huslit6pakta tiha l^loksoish : tclii nha hdtokt 9

'"""" '''" l"'^in»!l«',nHlH,l, ».„l ,M,ll„loMt M,..y (llu-li) k"ii»: ~. Ih.-y .l„.r.-

gokVlaiik sliewiitxiistka. 'I'sui goiia, tu' ik/ii nidklfya slia, tsui .sa mbfi'-

.ll.n,n„„„.,l „lK,uti,on„.li„„.. 11,..,, t,av..l..,l, r„r Vain .a^p..,l" n,,.,,' ,h„„ ,u,j. „, „,„

Haiit j-i'iia jrn'n, tsiii sa mak'l0;^a Wu'ksalks, tsiii sa uii'n gdna uibii'sant.
tsiii pii'n sa nir.k'l6xu ^J'iuiiu'lsli ; gitaks p'lafki,slitka sapiwsli. T.Mii .«sa 12

oml aKaln llioy i-mmniMil „lTi„i,..lHl, , il„.i,(«„„) i,.u.- . ,ili„h,„t,„„ tUxm, aii.I Ihrv

{MliUt

kdkta, tsiii sa mfi'lua li't;^!, tsiii sa psln gdna, ru'shta sha gdiia

li.Mhl.«t„, tl,™ ll,..y uiaden-mly tu tU« and they at tluht iTav.ll...l, all uight they w.i.toi,

tilklfiktsnank.

atu|ipiii|r at intervali.

Tsiii nibft'sant sliliiA Mdatuashasli tclil'pksh, tsiii gti'lki nad tclnii 1.5

Ami iii'it u,.,ri,ii,,.' w..aaw II,.. I'it Iii;x.rn i.ui.ai„p..,l, „„.! °iMk..il wo. ' .,,,,1

ti'iiHiia M6atuash, vusso'k sas tilli'ndsa wt'wanuisli ; tsiii sa hi'iuafisla

.»»«»»} 11,1. Pit Rlvern, IriKhtened thf m Ih^v »l,nnd..n,..l (ilirii-) wonau; Iheu ibe.v (iliLm) wad. '

»t

MJ.STOJJRiAJ. TKXT.S.

Nn'sli ni ],Vf.;slji BUinvii'.Ls. Slilii'i)oi)kiu. 1^/itakt 8lian6tanksht iidi'nmi

' "' ' '""'""■'' f""'^''"' N,.tir,..ll ,. ™«„K,.,1 l„ llKl,tiI,K

till CO

liiliasHiiaksli 51<')atuasl) ; I'l-ukskui toks li'ipik. Tai'ii wi-ri'ibilni slioiu'jtnnk

""■" I'iHilvii-Hi I.ul<rni.i, bill nv„>Mi,. A,„i .. .S„.t „i,ii.. „i.i....,..,...,

uKiniiiHbi'il

B lii'iya sluisli, tsiii kil'ktsim slia, tMii luYpi'litsiiank jimbutat Wna; ku-idsi

"'"""'•■'"■ "'"•" "'"' ""■>■ 1 il-t.i..|.-nii.Hil,., Imotli.Mvater ^ent, ' Tniprm-tl.

.•mibu Iiatakt liiuln.iatk. Tsui uisli ka-a kii'dsbika, tai'u iii kaki'dsapglo, at

""■""'"' "'^•"' P^i"::^'M.v. .MM i,„ ;;,va.ly i, tiitipi,..!, am) I went l,.Mm.i»,

tchi'ii kuk^vi ; tiV -L'na M^atiuisi, k'liiwf«liiuii at. Tsui l^ukskni ffii'Djianeli

til... l.m,i!,.|,,-,l,,„„.„ «..,„ 111,. PI, l!iv,..„ ,vli,.,i(.li...,.i.is) Tl.„„ ,l...I.„K.,,„cn ^ .Itur.il

()' kalihiaiik tfliipkash ucuaimish, tsiii sa shliia yastat li'ukainksli. Tsui mi

l.."kil,f;.,i,l lot- 11,,., ,.»,,,.. «„.ii,,,, „,„: ,h,.y ,„„n,l -(il,,.,,,)!,, „r„w(l',.,l. A.,,1 tl„-v

shmVslin;.a, luVtis iiasli slimVka, Isui f-vp^i'ipi?]! itukskui kd-i sbasli tuA

M..^eJth,M„, I„l«, .,„„ ,„.,K, ,1,™ ,!ir?.,lr!.w <l.oL„k,.n,o,. -u,l of the. none

shift, Moatuashasli pi'la sa siu}>a tankak.

wiiB dliiil I'it Kiviis only ll,i.y kilU^il „ lew. •

!» Nasi, se'gsa taidct l-l-iikskui sukd'lkipiilnk. Tsui Tiuuo'leshtat nu^k'Iak-

All,.f ,.rrt,.„.,l , ,]„. l.„l„. „„.„ l„ „.:,s,..„,l,l,. Th„n nl Tl,.„„l«h tho.rcami,e,l

pi'lc, tsi'ii sa ])ii'ii shnikslir.'lxa lu'hiags Iiatakt maklaksksi'iksi. Tsui

„i,n,i„. ,„i,l tli,-y ;,l,s„ M„„„.,l,i„«. racli Slav,, il„.r,. li,t„.o 11.,) IndluuH. .\i,.l

j'vpi^iipf'Ii t^lia iiibusaut, fsui slia M^atak maklakiiGle, tsi'ii ht'itokt maklaks-

""■'■■""■'■ ""■>■ ""M'l^y. „,h1 il„.y „tM,.,l,.<. e„«.>„,i,.,l, .„„l J,„t there IilSh,!.-

]-' ksiiksi guki'kak Ii'.luags. Kd-i sa liu'nk liaftcliant; uuak ta'ds mft'luauClo

(„«„yi.„„„ ,„,,a„„y ,,,,,iiv». >,., ,h,.y tl„„. ,„„s„,.,l; ..aviy h„„ev.T got rea.ly Jl^Ju.

Tsui sa yulmashktclia, tsui sa gidu'la Kokii'ksaks; tsiii sa sakatpaninCld-

.\.„1 ih,..v si„.i,.,l,„„, ,.,,,1 ih.y .li«ra„„i,iL.,l „il.„i!,. li,v,.,-; ih,.u ih,.y waiiu-U to |«rf,„„.

astka gi: "Kalimi niaiani tidsi' wats gl, laVk at lupi' giltpaniDeli-uank '

.>r,.cc! "Towl,,.,, „ry,. ,u.,.t U.,.M.« ,„•,■, ih.im, JO fl.'-t, ° nhnll return Lome l'

15 ksi'utakia'ik at g('Huapk!"

tilstl-r (tl,;,l, Wf) yo t.-avcl!"

'J'siii sa gena, tsiii luc^lual/ uiinka watch, i>au;tatoks g/itpamp6le

""'" "'"'-^ ,^;™|| ""'' nav,M.,il B„„„. hnrBPN, m> others }«tiinie,l

E-uksi li't;^!. Tsiii sa tchla giit])au)pL'laiik, Isi'ii gc-u guikak bu'k liiVs

'"Ma',"'h"' "\''il'"' ■''"'" "'"■■ "'K; -".■...'"..,. ,h™ hy.no Van away the sh.?o

18 spuiii'sh; uii-eus hissiiiiksiis spuui'n luVnk. Tsiiyuk hiinkC'lAmskni ciiikak

.h,,|ia,mf,.,,,.l i„„„,„l„.r n,a„ 1 ha.l Rive,. her. Au.Ish,, Hum hl» l„.luo ^an away,

luinzatoks sa c^na Anipxii'iii st'satui tchiVk watchat; tsiii sa i'tpa tfl'in

liuloth.Ts lU.-y brouBhi i„ tb,' I)„ll,«. i^,a,l,.,l th..,,. forhoiece; ami they brotlght many

lil

watch liu'nk liVgs sosatui'tkuk.

hiirm.s thii8<' flaviN having si, I, I

I'siu sa)uakta ti'iia Moiiliiashash st'lliialst I'l-ukskui.

■|li,.» I li,;nw(l„,H) „i,co will, II,. I'll l!,M.,,i ln,i-bl II,,. l.aU,. „„.„.

l\ i

PIT RIVKK RAIDS. 21

WawAliks TArt' sni5Ln;AT,snA MoATuXsnAsn.
DAVE niTJ/S SECOND FIGnT WITFI THE PIT lilVEU INDIANS.
N^i-iintka sko'sl.tka nfl gdna ; tdnkt ntd-isl, ni I'-amnatk gdna l.'.Ioks-

N"xt -„rl„„.,ta., , ,,tma, then b„w „„,l I ,»„.,.,„« ^,„„„, „;.

iirrowH

ne-u;Cjili)'lish gi'ntak l;'ikiam E-ukski'.sliani ; tsiii nat nin'ris-oitk slii'-'uX G
Si!i!!^!:5, ^!' ''S^!^' ':S'^'?li'^ ' ^^=^'"' nat fT^^na mbu'snnt, tclmi nat

ii|iill<;;

llien

wo ttllVilftI itirxt dav.

ta' nit'ikleka Mu'atak. 'Fsui nat nibu'.sant ircna, tsui nat tiV ni'iklr-k'

nvpr ciiiuiwd o; llndoc l.aki.

tnuro

at TIuiiuIhIi

in ihuMicirniiiK MJiitvcluiit, iinil «■., over intup.il

tlldo

'ill' :s^? ^™j; 'S? ™' -Mis ^1"; ^ -' ";^ sfss, "£' '"i-

ivo piiswil nl.Mi 11 iiM.iintnin ovi rliiokinii
tin) (lay

til ^py

*^?^S:Kib,^ ' ^if "''* "•''"" *'''''l''^«'' 5 ^•"■^^•^"t tclu'a ktayat.

Kr:iyi.)l

•^^rtS' 'S-'^ i^s^lr lif ps^s ^:S±^- .?SS sS&is^ '»

It the tltail Inp

tlii'v camo ih'nr mi lii'ailtnprii'lil thiii-

WlllUllliU;^

'hull.t

lliat

""'SiS^'"- ^]:*^*';!r^*"!^;^^ «''![" ^^^f^^«k-l'- Tsui nat l^wakkd-a: 18

in tho wiiB sliot (i\) Mocioc ninn.

And wt' (wcrr) un- very:
(letiiitd

driflwiioil.lieap uiidtr, »|1 woinin nnil «ll ihero

wiirn iliosB (lownhnlow thpv
erowduU

•I

J
i

HIvSTOlMOAL TKXTS.

li'-nplva hV .mVnn. Tcl.ui ni UV luUokt p'k^ntant tchl'wishksaksi

were InniiH'il <U>c|>
titjit'ther

just IIhto uliovn

gi; tcliiii

thiiircsiiiiiiuK-pliuiH wjM; niiil

tbo« Iwhll„,uye<l: "Nm we knowwlmtf, »„t wo (knnw) ?o.„pro«chel,m„lv!" „„tho>'

'I". how (Hiiiilj

iii hfl'tsna tiV, t«di Hi luVtpa hihassuakaas li/itokt li-ukA-isi h.-ltakt tchinuuk

I ran „„v ,„„1 I reach,,.! th« (I.ako) n.on U.oro ooIl«t«.I ,here il",,

tlll'lP,

I'uiiiiin;;

'""' flSS"''"' ^\fu" '"'"•' •f*'' I'^^^'i'-^^'l'^ InVkuapksht kn'kalain palkui'sl.ain ;

"*•'"'"'•■ ""' •""■ "'•■•V «ol,.ll,iwe.l loMuuu'ros, , ivo.V ' .liy l„„t,„>, •

.hntnpot ,.pp„.i,„ „.„„„ i,„k„,„o„ ,,„,,,,, l,or,... tl,oyw..n.|i,l,.. rnc^s 1,1,1u,'k L .l„d

Oclutlil ; iii^

An,, ,„„„. Mow: ..,.„„•, ,loi„ „„„■, n„,, „„.,v willL.ot y,,,.," ,., t,,„„, ..nly

.hoSf, • 'ft? ^r "l<iVt.;lianuapk" tclu ni ki', "wikd an' {r/,ldsui.sl, «Ana-

tiio.. MM. Ihr„ I: •I»h„llrn»h„v,.r" „n I sal,!, .,wiv 1 to app,„aol, I

J l.oli" tcliin I.Ataktk "Ka-i ki'Iank pi'hi 1-u'ta, tiVni at noJi'-islia- u'ts

wa„f „n„. ,„oro«„„.. ..Not J„,,n..k_ ' they ,I„h„'. ...,„y rLl.,!'' " ^^

liiTir

^,!"!' t'n,!,!^' ",?"'''" ^'''" ''* f^'!- f^ •" '''"^'t«"«» «^^ ^«''i ni«l» kdki'ha, tsi'ii

• ih',;; • ""' """■'"'"'■ ^''"" I r„M towanlMthe,.,), n„,l mo tlil.y miH«,.,l, and

'^"^'I'h^i'ltTii' "'' '"'•\^"'" ^^^•^^t«kni shli'n pii'n mush; tsui ki'iluiha shli'sl.am

, '"«'li woiinilirifr

ih,',!' "f wlril'' "/'''-"'^l''^' tsui »i nA-astg: "lu'i-gi! i'sh ktiyuiaki'at!"

Ih,n «,. „ on. at a fornrran«in^-, and r «„ „»,k.„ ..look^o^ol ,„e lift np thoreyel"

' ""'"■ '^"'' ""■•^- l>l.i<^<'<l on lop, ,„„1 I ,.,rpt forward, thoi, I Vhero tho I'it liivoiH

I poro,.,,..d .h^ohy ,. row...,! mono all Ipcrfoctly na'w' ,„f, thom. And I

"Oily ; well

^^ ''^'I'S.f ''"'' fi «nld8an,p6l6k sas; tsui ni : "ktfwal;^at na-6,tch

cn.p,b„,k ^oj..,^ „,roport ,o them ; and .: "poatyonp another man

^Sl"''" *!''' "/ ^7|- Ktehl'tpaiupnlank sl.apfya sas, tchui sa: "wdk

l...„i,l,.H „o r «,ld. Ilavinu crept hack I roiulrt.^l to them, and they: "how

"'"■''thin fir' *^^" ?'^'* f' «■'• '^^^^"" ""' "''""kash shlii'shki" tchi' ni m ;

therolsitJ eo to mo tl.cy »aid. Upon thw "1 :,llolih6m caneee" », i S.id'

18 Mnyii shash, tsui sa ktiwi';^! na-ii'nds tchkasli. Tsi'ii nat la'p k'lC'ka, tsiii

'""' /•"""• "■"' i' ""<""">• .">"th,.r(n,a„, t,H,. Th..n we twJ ^^I-re tl-re.' «,,d

uat ktsi'ktsa, tsi'ii nat sas td' shla'popk, a ni nd-aslit jji: "hdo-.-a shlii'kl"

wo cr,.p, along, and we , horn .tow,; pcXi, 'andl .„ Si.,: ',:ft1S ahlr

Tsui hfl'k na-as luitokt, til'shtCik M6atuasli li'wa, ndnuk sa lift'nk no-ji'-is

And toon., man iher,., where ihePltKlvors weio ' all (othora) ,„ htm Ttbelr,

„, . Sinliered, arrows

''h!'ndi?'*' "^^-'^'^.^i^^k luVnk i-<i'ta satslzi'imitk la'paks. Tsiii tchfn a ni

'"""""• ■"•"'"'"' >■" .1,--^ -ratctpainte,, wltlTchalk. A»d thi" , n-fw 1

PIT RIVER RAIDS.

slildvval ]61oks^rish, tsiii iii slilfn liu'nk, kdt hi'ik yu'tsi, tsiii nddwanga ; tsf

cockixl (my) gun, nnd I shot him, thnono who waa shoot- and hufell: thin

Inu,

tAnkt at iiat .si'uga InVukst.

utiaat wu killwl thnt fellow.

At liCi'ksa Hwatk tu'm w.dltka tdnkt. Tsui Miiatokni niin;i;a tfi'mgnatk 3

Mow thoy, crowilcd much tHlkid theu. And ModocH wmio undemtood

toffetbor,

M(jatuasani hc'nikaiiks; tsiii hd'k t<l'ni6na at Moatuasam waltoks. Hii'k

of ihii Pit Rivira thu liinuuttuuj and Ihcy undeistood of tbo Pit Kivera thu dl«cour»o. They

shai)iya na'tcli : "fitcnen gakdyoluapka, iicn sa skuyokayo'la wo\v,4ni-

notiflid na: "prfspntly they will pet inviiy, thpy si-ndout ol tlio himh thof...

Hhasli; iia-aHlit iien willtka." Tsui gakayuluk lil-ukskni slifs]iat;ja 6

■""'""i "" thoy any " Th™ louvii.R tlio woocIh tho Lake iiicri i)i(ki'd out'

wuwaimish, tHiii hfi'k ki'nualk sa; n,4n;^a huliashtlina kaftua slimVkuk.

wotni'n, thou nciitontho thoyi Bome quairolled none havioK obialnod.

Tsiii mits liiinn^ze: "slmu'kslitkanna'sh sivvak liu'nk ati'iisli lulk lak gitk!";

And I too said: "waiitUigotI onn ylrl this lonn hair wearing!' ;

tsui ui'sli sha ka-i wii'-ula. Tsiii iii kii-i sam wii'walsh slilin, tsiii liiik 9

but to mil thoy not allow(Ml Ihci). 'Ihcn I not they coocediOK shot, and hIio

nde-ukuii'iap'l ; liu'nk n'link slilfn siwiiga.

rollod ilown (tlio bill) 1 that I killcil girl.

Tsiii tiinkt at lifhassuaks at tinkayiila, tsiii ni shlfn pti'n n/is htitakt,

Tliorciipon the (Pit Kivoi) ran out of -ho anil I «hot anothir (man) then-

uitiu l)UHb,

tsiii at n<in;;fa tini';(i. Shta tok sa E-ukskni lia.shdnipka; tsiii sas gawi'na 12

when some w.mii up Conipadly thoy iho I.ako niou iiiciroli'd (ilicni); then thorn iHoinnI

hill.

lul'ksa, kak at tini'^i tsa, ndiinni lifhassuaks, na'sh gitsgaiiits liissiuikga.

Ihoao, who Ju»t had tnni' (viz:) lliico m™, one ' voiirmal«n linv

up iho hill, ■ n

Tsiiyunk vu'ssa fi-ukskni, tsiii hu'k Mtiatuasli ti'ii;^aiisha; tu' ati \aiiiatat

Then worn frinht- tho Laki' mill. as tbci Pit Rivora lau out of the c:r- ovii-von. to the luoun-

>•■'""' oil-; di-i- tains

tflshtanipkank a-61io mitcliiia, tsiii slinushndta. Tcliiii ni ml luVlipeli, tsiii IT)

cdlniuK iioar thoy liallood whilo run- and built (Ires. Thereupon I I onternl iiealn anil

ni hopgldnsa, tsiii ni liupiikl(3;(a kip-^a

I folhiwud up (tho and I oncountorod two

dry crook),

rhereupo:

lifliassuaksas.

nitin.

ntemd acain and
(tbocanou),

Tsiii ni'.sh h<i'k

Ad(1 at mi) tb(\v

liipukaiitka slilatiinipk, tsiii na's towi, kalihia n's ; wigga n's hu'nk ktiiliha

bothatatiino droi- ibo laiw, ami one shot, (hut) missed mot by a bair- mo ho missed.

linadtli

Uii-ans tsi'n shlin nepni'ni nguldsb6taii, ntu-isli tehisli n;(il'\va.

tho other thou I hit, about tbohand Litruck (hliii), the bow also broke

man

giital;;ja h<ik nga'-ish tiikstala; tsiii iide-ulz. Naslitoks hukayapk, tsiii

entered tho bullet iiitbonavol; and h.i IVU. Th- other rii»hi-d into Ibo and

Tsiii 18

And

thicket

ti'ntpa sa E-ukskni tAnkt, tsiii sa hu'nk siuga kandan liiVnk sliliii. Tsiii

arrived (they) the Lake men at last, and they "' ■ "

him killed whom I had shot. Then

h<l'k na's hukfiyapk ma'ns hii'k tchakayank i-il'ta; tsiii sa shlfn tiVkni 21

the one who went Into tlio for some (ho) sitting iliiwn was shoot- then they shot (him) from

iug{

■»

■|
1
3
t
I

J ■- ■

»■

woodn

timo

niSTORTCAL TEXTS.

P .hu?L^"' kfn8lmkpkniik. Tsni'pal sa slili'n ; nd-iins shlfn, liA'k tchakA-
yan, wii'k E-ukski'shas. '"""'"""' """^ '"" ""■

W(mm1«, in the ft Lako man.

arm

3 Tsui iiat at gii'tak, a nAt sukiVIkip'l' tfl'shtok spukd shli'tk l^-ukskni

JNatak Iifi nk Iii slilan M6atuaslmHh ksi'ipok ; laki njriVnislika iii-ii'-ish l„Vk
S™ "»t^^''its'it8l»"tii'lanK'i-i sku'lhaah pet; ts.'.i iiat ksii'Iai)k lifi'nk «lil,'„k8-

1 1 or

himI wo HiiotI iutti (ir) ttiiu

woiiiitlt'd
mail :

' ""s^' ';2^ SIS'- 'S- -' 8"l±!!!i?'«' -i-ss^f ^ ':: ■;? «»;±"

nga'-Kshtka, nashtoks M-ii'k shli'tk luVmtaaiitkak, inushtokH liA'k ]iiIul<so-:i'

9 islitka, ki'uida iiat liil'nk wiitsat KlmtJi'lank li'uu. Tch.'ii nat ni'iU'I^ilvi.-i'
lii'uhiiish tzalanita. "'""' '"''

•if llMMiiiirsli westwaid.

lumrs *

|::;:S;:^"'»" -Ei;" «=" '"--^^ -2;±r ™?;w, sijk^,,^,,,,,,!.

IK. '• '''""i

_ iiiiiii '

ksaksi, tankt saluVnk gawal kikaskankatk.

then Hicy Mint (Pii Uivorman) .vliilo walkinB about.
foniid

Tsi ni tamgno'tka tind tapi' a )u tclu'ii tdnksknl kd-itata gfi'nt

Iho. 1 WMo.it there ono, fortbe I f„„, that time ""A.. h...

lut time,

never

PIT RIVER RAIDS.

Rellu.'ilHhiik. Nddnnitaksni taingno'tka; tinA nat kAyak sheii6tankatk,

flglitlDK. TImwtlniMi Iwaathnrn; nnoe we ootatRll wern 6|:htlni;,

kiiikilk i nat liiluagsla. Tclifn at nat at eii'tak nddni tAmSnotk.

few only tberfl wn rimlaved. Sol, when we quit (flKbtlDK), three time* hid beta tbere.

NOTES.

19. The lonj; and fertile valley of tlie Pit River, an eastern atfluent of tbe Sacra-
mento River, m inhabited liy sevcnd tribes of Indians who speak dialects of the same
lansnaso family. Of the itcmliiiritics of these tribes, Stephen Powers has fjiven the
first comprehensive sketch in the Ovnland .Alonthly, 1874, pp. 4lL'-4ni, and in Contribu-
tions to North American I'lfhnolot'y, vol. Ill, ])p. 207-274. The varions tribes greatly
difler in their physical and mental iinalities. The .Pacamallies, on Hat Creek, at the
lower end of the valley, weni umk li dreadfd by peaceable travellers on account of their
sudden attacks from an ambush. The Indians in VAa Valley are a fleshy, stout, and
physically wellmado people, wliiU^ the Hot Hprinj,' Valley i)eople has become deterio-
rated through ))rolonKed national misfortune. Against both of these the slaving raids
of the Klamaths and IModcxts were inairdy directed.

19, 2. The raids were undertaken by the ]<lamaths and Modocs just before wokash-
time; that is, in April and JMay. They had no other piupose than to make slaves of
the females and children of the unwarlike, jjoor, and sutl'ering Pit River Indians, and
to keep them either at their homes or sell thein for ])onies, provisions, beads, etc., at the
Dalles to the Columbia River tribes. Adult men were not enslaved, but killed outright
if captun d. Similar instances of .sui)pression of weaker tribes of the West by war-
like Indians who were their neighbors are those of the Kayuses on Middle Cohunbia
L'iver, of the Yuki between Sacramento River and the Pacific Ocean, of the Hi'i])a on
Trinity River, Cal., all of whom were, at the advent of the whites, the terror of the
districts surrounding their homes.

19, ;$. shliiotak f(a- shliiota ak ; the Pit Rivers ran away at the mere sight of the
Klamath men; ka-i fata siukat, the Pit Rivers never killed any Klamath men. Roth
statements are exaggeiations; Hill's own account and Toby Riddle's biographic notice
tend to i)rovo the contrary.

19, ;{. nelh'nat, or ndi'nat. When they had killed an enemy, they did not follow
the custom of the Oregouiaus of taking the scalp. This custom is not found among
any of the Central Caliloriiia)! tribes.

19, 4. hu'stchok-huyii ; by the suflix huya, -uya, the action of the verb is shown to
take place at intervals, or in a small degree. "They did only little damage by killing
or massacring." Cf. .shenotank-huya, 20, 2, and -uya in the "List of SuflQxes".

19, 4. tiVm tat sa. Change of the subjects introduced by the pronoun sha, sa, in
consecutive sentences, is sometimes observed, as here and in 19, IG; 20, 3. Hill often
uses sha when s])eaking of the Klamath Lake men, where nat, we, would be more
appropriate.

19, G. Kit(!hkanin nu for kitchkiini nfi (or ui) nd. I'ronouns and particles are
repeated quite frequently.

19, 11. Wuksalks is a camping-place distant about six miles from Link\alle. It
was not possible for me to obtain definite information about the traij followed most
generally in those rai(b^, l»ut Dave Hill said that from there they went due south. He

i
t

2«

rirsToiurAL tkxts.

M, -. rapik (m- liij.i gi: '. hv x', two wert'."

80, !1. rn„„vi™|,„„. TUe .li»t,ii,,» l.„t,tc,.|, Kl„,„.„u Jl„„l, | ,, , „,„,

Z!',r;::r ;;■ ~ •'^" -• '•"" *■ ' -"» -" '"'■■^•.- »- "s

;;.2:X'Sp.^s;z,ri;-;:rit;=s:^,=;,!;;;;:

Kl.ott Lake, wind, latter is also ealh-,1 Tulo and Mo,l<„. Lak.

,v,,.^n;;i!,ir;:;r,;:^:!i-;^;;,::r,::,-;:--;r;;r:vs

.MOi.t for (li.prwlatioim c.n.nitt.Ml. I„ tho fight wlii,-]. tr^.l n1 .. J V

killedhv tlio T>;f T?;,-..,.. i *, ■ ^ ^^lll<ll took place, some wliitcs wcro

X fi... L T ^''"^""' ""-^ prompted the aboveinentioruHl settler to slan-ht.T an

tntmj. nie beef was slaughtered and eaten at, his farm

liie tamons Captain George was at that time war-ehief both of the Klamaths n.d the
Modoes. 11. bad ordere.l Kiukan.teh, the h.-a,! n.an of the XushalH p = U ^ to

im uwpedition, the pariieshes were returned to their owners

21, 7 Hnmasht nat. A verb like gi or shnta has to l„. supplied.

21, 18. l^'wak, ii verb composed of two particles G^-'tik •mH fc.-.,.i.f.,i f
ahnost in the same manner, are also used asVerbs"^ Bel^tt.^L i e;^ l/t 'iTto
Its two components by a^pronoun : lii nat w.^,k ka-.l ; la' nat w.'dc galdsawiH
nhr«! « ^t''"°'"'-.. ^■"'^ *"■""""' ■"' *"™^ ^'"' ^v6wanuish into a kind of adiectivil

22% tS^^^^^^
hdtakt'gj. " '' '' *"' '''■^ ^'' '^'' "^""'"5 t^'l"'" "'^'^•''Ktk is: tchi nu

22, 21. 8hatchl;,iimia is one of the various modes of painting face and bodv in n.«
among the western Indians. White paint was put on in'this mtn." lee Siona ■
onlj when the Tnd.nns were on the wnr-pnth. From the same verbal base iL, Si

T»TT nTYF.n RAIDS.

HhatflhOlRi, to contraot (he hnlf oponofl hand or flnRera. Coraparo also: shafyfi'dslia.
sliiVtuii;fa, shdteiakisli.

23, (!. gakiiyuluk lefris lo llic woiiioii, not lo tlie Khii.ialb men. These latter
retired with tlK^captnre.l f.-inales to the topof a hill, to .secure theiii.selves better against
further hostde attacks, .slifshatp^a, distributive form of shfat;^a.

23, 1 1, tinkayula. The Pit Hiv<-r men run out of tlie timber to flee from further
attacks, and some ran up the steep bank from tlie dry ri ,er bed. While thev did so, flie
Lake men surrounded them and ••omplet.'ly elosed the vivvh (shta hash.lmpka). Never-
theless, sonic of them manajied to break ihrouKh the intervals; this frightened the
Klamath men, and then the (.llu'i' Pit Kivers also e.senped t.nviiids the hill.s.

23, 12-14. The three men iiiid the boy who went up the hill belonged to the Pit
Elvers. The Klamath Lake warriors were so .suri)rised at their sudden return to their
surrouuded companions, that th.^ Pit Rivers had an opportunitv to escape dnrins the
confusion.

24, 4. mtak. The .sentence has to be; construed : n.''.tak hishlan liiVnk, Moatiui-
shash hu'nk ks.lpok. "None others but ourselves shot, at him; though he was one of
our men, wc thought him to be a Pit Hiver man".

24, 4. Idki. He had been .shot in the eye-bone.

24, 0. klii'kat stands for klii'ka at ; cf. 28, 12. gut pant for giitpna at.

24, G. shewat;.u'lsi : for shewat;fo'la.sh i, or shewat/o'lish i; the i api)eariiig hero

not as a local, but as a temporal ease-sullix. shewat/a, noon; lit.: the day divides

Itself in two; shewat;.o'la, uflernoon, the day has divided itself in two a while ago.

24,8. luluksgii'-i.sh, uncommon form for luluksgish. lolok.sglsh, r/^s. amm lit "fire-
maker". . . .' ?

24, 17. siukshtka stands for the full form siukshtka gi.

24, 18. tuti'la. By inadvertence the distributive form is used here instead of the
absolute form tuila, for the Pit River man spoken of had an abnormal fleshy exeres-
eence on one foot only.

25, 1. sh^llualshuk : he means lighting with the Pit Kiver Indians.
25, 1. ndannitaksui, incomplete grammatic form for ndanuitdnkshni.
25, 2. kinkaak i, only a few; meaning females of the Pit Eiver tribes.

■■■*

.■4 '
4

L'8

IIISTOKKJAL TKXT8.

K-UK8NI 8kli-i;ai- SAtas.
HOW TIIM LAKE MKN FOIJCJHT TIIK SNAKK INDIANS.

(iiVKN i,Y Davk lint. >N rn.: Ki.a.maih I.ak,, D.a.rct.
LlTpf si^iM.iAi,. rriK FIH8T riOHT.

"l"±^' ^::!:bS' 'S:' ll^'^ll^'l^r''"^'^ wowunufslmsh n.,lk'l,.k...pkst;
isui inaklc'ka wOwaiiiiisIi, tsui liUiL-f .vW,,.. *-;'♦ * '• ••/ • , , .

floh.

.i". ^"•"""'"-"■■"h 11- L.i,„„„ ,,,i,,ii,,,,-,,,i'i,,id

12 k.l-.-.a.ag4,p»„tSl,r,',,„,v,.halC-uk.* ■";;:„ ' '"" -'" •"'

■...,^1. ..., ,„.,„„„.,„, ,!r,." s ;""■

feared
L()'LDATKtSH B6sHTINASn tO'LA SHEN6tANKA ShXtASH.

DAVE HILL FIGHTS THE SNAKE INDIANS ON THE SIDE OF THE

AMERICANS.

^St» n?'- K;S «■■■ "-iS"^ S.--; i'lpa Jloaciok..,, ,„,„,„

"':;"■ sr* ''lp° e. '*- •*■. „,., „^, "'":^„, „,„„ i,,,,^,^,,^

KKMITS \MTII SNAKi; IVDIANS.

Shii't guikak. Ilfi'k hipi laliiki : S.Vt ri4-u8 TchatchaktchakHh nd-asht

tlin WMIlt KWHy

Himkiiii

I'born two
(wor«i

cblafa: Hniikn
iiiiiii

M'Hatk, iia'Hh U-]i\ir: Patialna tchi' Hc'witk. 'I'chui Ho'ldHlias Khawif'a, tedi

iiiiiiii'il. (iiih (mnm IwnliliiH: I'MiiInu ho imiiii!)). I,|Hiri Ibln ibn iiiilitiirv wap. »r«ti»Ml, nod

}>t'na; tiV Spii-isli Vall(!y j^jitim Mlio'lsaHli lifi'k, Urn Kakciniiwaiik hdtokt 3

mloiiii far oil loMur|iri«4, Vallin inunliMl ilo' n lilirr-. «n(l riinib-/,.voiii)lug tbore

niiVliia ; la'i* im'pokH iriUui Mliu'ldwliasli ; ikVhIi IJeutenant Oafnian nA-asht

col irjlllj , IHo Ulloimlilrp. wclll (of I »olill«-l«, oljo l.llMlt. OaMIIUI thua

Hhrrtliatk lakf hlnVMshaHli, iia'.sh tcliik Licmtonaiit Small tia-asht shdbhatk

MuiiM'il iwiiH) (bli.f ol wililii'in, Olio honlili-a l.ioiil, Hiimll thua DWDtid (wm)

lakf HlnVlilshaHli. TiV nat tjilaaks yaintital fr('iia.

of flotiluini

iKroio) wo Kiraliilil noMbwnrila iiiori^ilril
iboro

THui nat (•-iislitat, f^<'lnan(lHa, tHui iiats slilii'pka Sha't; ki'lilks HhlJia;

I Inn »o iilako ntlit nrouiiil. aoil ua iioll. oil ilm l-uitkMi tho dust tbf v por-

C^-ivi-fl ;

tcliui vaiiiatal kakolakpka, unn/n ('-ushtat gii -iipkapk f Warner Lake, tchf

Ihoii WuriiiT KmIco woillniliiil, ai.ioo Ibro ifli llio «a<loil (Warner I^k*. m

luko

link nri'fsh liiVk ise.satk (•-uh). '\\:Um Canijt Waiiier iiidk'lGk tina nat wai'ta; 9

""'I "'"• iMiiotil lake). Tht-n iit Chihii Warior ramund oii« we dav ami

""" <*""! lilKliI ,

tHi'ii nat <;iilia.slikt<!lia talaat t;jalanili'tal Tclii'ii nat telo'U "TcWwam

tlon w Mliwltd oni dinclh lowaida wtMt. And »o l.wkeddown " ADtllope'»

StQ'", tchflnik ht'satk kiifla; tsi'ii nat lai.i oiili'ndsa (HkuyiVi natch hfl'k

Tinll", aotbia namod (i«, locullty; Ibiii iwoofua vMut d wn idBf«bo<l na tbo

lintoitl itwo,

laliiki), tsui .shnii'-uldsha nat. Tclii'ii nat tiiloli; ^a\6'\ii nat k'makuapkuk 12

coniinand and galloiiid oil' «,. And wo woul.d ; diainonnlMl wo to rwoliDallio

Si'ifas inaklakHaH, tsui nat wawapk k'niakka nat, tsiii nia'ntsa"- ffi'tk la'pi

Ilii-Simku Indiana, and «e »at down (anili apii-d wo. thon ahortly afurwarda tw.i

Sn't tiVkni gep'^{\]Hi\(i : kokagtalkni gep;r(,p'l'. 'I^sui tilO'dsliipk uat, tsiii

Ann HAW ibem cuuiin^ we, thi-u

Simku from a

rolurDtid :

(»vtra rivulet lli^y tflnn' Imck.

tiilaak gutl'lapkap'li nats; tsiii nat wal'hlia kawaliii'kuapk sa-ui'. Tchii

Iowa-da Iboydoan lodwoilo iia ; and wo waKhod ll.ov w.inld nacond liellovinS But

dial loundlnit a bill (ihonii

kii-i gawaliii'{,ni, lii'tok tu' «,'.itpan»p6le tchi'-islitat m'na ; nat raa'nts=ei'tk

not limy CHOio .i|), but from away tbiy ntnrnod to.ninp tboira: we aft*r a whilo

j^alai)<,rap6lo .shtilshamp6li-uai)kiik. Tsiii nat "anipCdi, tsiii na'ts ffavii-

'■'"'" '""■'' •" "■P'lrt agniii. Wbin w. .amo back, ilu front, " bad

m i;

itsampk shu'ldshash huk, liipiak nats jialyaliii'Dka

of na

advancod

Ibo military,

bot'oio wo

bad tullv ili'nroiidod
I'loni till' bill.

Tsiii tii'=hak luits a ge'pksi at .slilii'pka. t.siii tassuipk, tsiii ktaftal

'''*"'" uJi?."''.!^?'' wbon wo iHine down ib. y saw (Mi- and cbarsi^d (thorn), and to tho rocka

IrBnllMI (IIIO SlIilhl'Hl

HoMior»^

ti'nshampk Sa-at huk. Siindtanksi nat .sa.sh gatpa, tsiii tiV shlikshgan's

acaippereduff IbeSnakea At the moment of we ihom leacbed, and nearly ahot mo

flxbting itbeanldierai

a Sa't. TiVtaks h<ik .sho'ldshash nanuk ga-iileka kpu'l/iik Sa'ta.s : li-iui'K 21

••■" Kariip tb» aoldlei. ,-.ll "olimlie d Uli lo dialiKlgo IheSl.ako., I b« packer

the
.iuakoB.

n
i

)

I
t

MISTOrMCAl, TKXTS.

^£^ Hit tSr ^!i!^:J' '£^- '^ «a -..^tank; watch na'.h l.atnkt

n(>ral^ « hIiikIo urer (bora

ijss' "- ..= .-. ■;„,;:■ ". .r,~',:r.

^ lirln^r!" **

..n «t ..i iM^uikank : •; l,,uva ! " '1 s^i ^ena ki'llikankank, t«,\i Sa't l.uk tdwi

t 'I II I • 1 «/ 1 Sniikcj

rmclu'd '*"" riBht.iM lli.Mliin look (1m«) xkiii „ir huHct ,!,„(

•^ Tr •:? k;r ""'•■" »i;;;u" -:-" '■in- -^ '.j^ £. m,;.,. ... ,,a;k

uriill (111 Ihc lull.) Miiiki'p. vM'iitliilo

untjiv ' ' * ""■'"'. O'l'l biTiinm Ibu truuiis. Ti,„n

}aiia fi lyn sliiip])risli, tsi'ii nat yt'iniic'lc.

ilmvn. iiirl„„.,l „„.„,i,. ,„„, „,. ,,,,„;„,,,

iio (Mniji),

Kayaktsiia shuld.sliasli uVwaimish; ui'fwnu slia, tsi'ii nf, shl:;/.

i., ,. ,, , , . ""'""""'■» ". tli,.,, i„an.|„.,lii,fi,,„t(il,., th„u I ,„.,.c,.iv...l

(111 INK) *" '' ' Hii-iii),' liiin V'li'it-

pakst, tsiji iii si'ktsa-slan uika : tsiii ni shli'wal nainiyar.k tyii'lva- tcliui
'•^ "Lf'' ,bi:r S:?' ^"'*^^' '''^:''*'^ ^"lli!"' 1:^1^' ^'ilii-o'lan-s. ThuI ni shii'n ;

»«> f|,(,t, ,,„i„„.,i *'"" •""'"' I"' '""I «•■>■> iiie. TliMi T (Imli

K^ r ^J'lii: '± "^•i'l!''^^ = !i' r J'^:^*'' tsui nl pa'n shifn nu'sl.

cheek "'""■ """ ' ','"^','"> ""'' ^ ".^»l>' .slioUhiiiil in 111,.

8ikei.i'tk«tka. Tsui ,s6'ld«liasli ti'utpa, fsui noli'iiu im, t«ui kuivaM Sn'tas

(liliu). I i,,.,,,

^^ ''iil!,'''' '':^!,±" ''^'"'^ ±ll!r;'- *^if'^'^>'' ''f^^ '"'^"^.,1; E-uksk(«ha.ii

iul»iislu.altk ; na-aslit liiVk sl.dsatk Liipji=Kfu=grtk ; tchfliuk .slu^satk At

(W-ftH)

rllMwt

..„, x>„,-iv„uips.u„viiiKi tJlilslie ,„■„„, >;„„,

'"""' liniiM.I.

mit nenmlank at gcmpGlt- mak'liiktsuk, at ti'uniioa. 'IVi'.i ,)at niak'lfiy

MCttiU''.

^' ^ftl^' '",','"''^ tiViisiui, saij-ataks lu'itokt ki ; hu'nkaiit tchi'k hu'k kok^W

FidHTS WITH SNAKK INDIANS.

tlVIls;tUlll^sil yi'islmltk. 'I'chui kissii'nii HliiVdsha SiVt: tiV wali'sh i-utllii

wMnmiilMK ""'|ll''"»i'l' ■•■l"n ut nlKlitCiM ,„ad, . tlm thn .her.- il,«.li(r, 1h.!«w

wiiiown. Sualiciii

tu'shtuk kiVuimc. Mu .skti tAiikt slii'wi ; tsi'ii uhIu mium Sa't i-iita

ilMr.Mwa.) ,,,av„ Vriy cold that tl 111.1 (tl... wlu.ll and I., 111. .am,. ihr .and) flr...!

"""»■ ■ i.iKhl Siiaki's

'rsui sslnildsluish viV.ssa, tM'ii nat nuVliia, a imt "uliuaHliktsa, psfnak ^

An.l ,lH-H„ldl.T» .....kniglii, an.l „., «.,ir.«d.v, an.l w,. " „,ar, I, il,«Mm«

iiiiV*itaii iiat f-i^iiii : iiislitii imt, (^x^iui 'IW iiat vai'iuitaf i)ii'kt"r, tsA'i nat

!■ Willi, 1I1..WI1..I,. «« iiiuich.d I'ar «.■ 011 tlii' iiionii w,.i„al Ihiii wo

"'«'" wwiiv lainn daivn,

Htiiiihwanli.

iii'lka.

Mt(i|tpt>() Ihei'e

HI III" curly hiMii'N.

LtVluiij-shisli tiiiikt lii|)kwi|)t wewaiiuisli; iiiui nat hiVnk, tsiii nat niiii 6

lll..VCl.Mav,.,l ihullirn.. wnrn women ; lir.iu«lit wo l>„«o, then w,. .„«lii

mmax Nii'wapksl. yi'minkstaii gii'dsa fxiilamna. Tsui kokdff liaUikf

•;;";■"" ' ir..i..ii.»...„i.ak,. i,„ih»i, I- "aiiiii,, .uiiiowo-i. .,,,,1 lib;:;.," .'"re

nViisiia; tsi'ii jjsiii oatpa Sa't. tsiii k;'.-i nat kdktant ; iii'shta nat kd-i

..niiiuing; and at nlKlit .■».„.. ,i,„ „„,, "not »„ ,|^p,, ' ..| „,^|„ .... -" '

Hi.!

.■^iiuk.'

n.it

kdktant. Tsui nibusiuit jjiiii giUpa Sa't; yalna-ag kiiita nuts h(ik tfi 'pka, 9

"''■'" ^"'' ""il "iiirnnig »Kain .aino (he a h;:inok back ..f n- ai'ml

SnakOBi

tsiii hatakt li'wal Sa't, tsiii kaki"hha sho'ldshash ; atf hfi'nk kaki"lihu

aii.l tb..r.» K«,l,„r,.d .1,,, .nd nn-a.Ml ,the„i, ,h„«iWi..r.; by a tbeni -.U^T' m d. '

niniKis. long wa.v

'I'si'ii nat n-atsatka tiilnak-hiiya ; tsiii gdya-a na'ts liA':. Sa't. Mbiisant

linn we ..n l...r».l.ack i,„lr .ilur them , and w.ro liidlDB belore u. Ilie Suak.«. In thr n,.,ru n«

luit geppp'Ii ; at j-ii'tak Sfitiis sliia, tsui nat gdtpampOle. Tsiii shu'ldshash 12

"" i.'iiiineil; uol,.nac.r any f„ii,„l an.) we went bu.k h..m.' »"■'

no l.piiac-i any fiiiih.r ami
."^nuk.'H Wf.

And

the inllitarv

liiVk shiiwana wewan'sh na'la hiVnk, Sa'tas wdts tchish la'p. A nat ffat-

liuve women t.i u, th..8e ..f l ho Snake hotHea aim. tw^ Then we * ,«.

iribo

pdnipC'le gi'ta E-ukdk; lui'ktoks Lieutenant Small tiV shipi'tk Nii'wai)ksh

'■ there

guni'gstant ge.npaluk Spd-isli Vulloytala. La'p Satas W(iwanuisli ii'na

"m...».t« l,.r reiurnini: i„Snr|„i«e Valley. Tw„' Snake fen.al.H he tm,k

^vith him.

NOTES.

28. The various bands „f Siiako luiliaiis iiihaliitin- On-Koa .-a.st „f the Cascade
.Mouiitams are naininj.' their .sustenaiiee ehielly by the cha.s... Tiiis ac.ouiit.s for their

eon.staiit wanderings and ubiquiious presence s etimes at Caiiii) Uarney, or the

Owyhee and Saalu- Kiver, ut otiier tiiue- .-ar Waiiier Lake, or the Kli.inatii Marsh.

The date of this raid coukl not b,. (U^tcrMiiiie.! ; it naay have iirtMrded the fl-ht
related lielow by ten or twenty years. '^

28, 1. fc-iiksi, "to Klamath .Mi.r.sh"; on WiUiinn.son Itjver iKoke^. whieh Ibruis
fht! outlet of the Marsh, the .Snakes saw women of tlie Lake tribe erossiug or nassins
doNvn Ihf liver ill lh.Mr.luj;..iit ,,„.o..s. xvhi.l, Ih.'y list, for Katheriii- wokash (the see«l
ol the ))(iiidlily; on the Marsh.

■»

'flHTOlllCAL TEXTM.

«}

sf i SS,'"','', ''""" '*."' """" '"""■" '■""" '•"■I'Wl.kU"!. i c-f. 29. „,,

m-T , '. ■ II'. '"""iivl., M»Mioil.

.•i,...iM.:i ,!; r:"ir r't;:::^;;;;:;;:":'" ' ;';•• *•""■«" ™"" •■■■l■•■

(tan. II,,. i„i,l,.,s. '">l.„«liK»ir„.|,„g, |,„„„| ,„„„ ,„ ,,„,„,„, |„ ._ 1 ^

..., J t if ::::;;:i".,:;:„:™^;;;r;„:s'^,:.r'"""" ■■"-"• '»-» "

"™ -;" ;;."';■ "-■■■h, 1 •,;::,;;;";■,,,,;:;:'•'' "■■"""■'""• ' .V '«• ■■■-

w..MV,,;;;,;.i;;:;;;;;S;:;;;;:S':;;;,,;';;;; ivjr''"';; »i» ». .. .,, ,„ ,.,.

i.*,i.iisi,,.,iKi,,,,,,.ii,ii,.„,„., ,^''M''' ''';'°'' ''''""'"' '"^^^^^^^^^

' 1 Ki„„„„„ ,„,;.„ i :;;;:'' '" "■'■ ':'""■ '••"■i ■-■ "«■ i-

a r..Hi,;;i,":n::,:';::;;;:;i;;!;;ii;":::;;<;;;;;;;;;^;;;';v'' "■■■ '< >■ '■»^.' ^^«..t. .»*

lls,.» ,,.|| ,1 ■ ,, ,„ r. " , '.'" ' ','' '■■'i'»"i.v „r ,11, lii,li„„ s,„,„. ii„

'»•' I ^'■''■■'™^-i.!:i-:;:,;;;';v't'",«

WiisconcI.KlHloii ()c(,.lH.r n l,S(ll .,,,.1 II. Huiiliii-toii. Tlic tivatv

"f Snak.. In,Iians wl... a, . 1 ! "' ^ ' , T' "" "* "" "---'""" - '-h1

.•x<.'tH..a,..induc,..it«.v ,„. n .yV" '^r ":"'.'"' '■'""" •"">■ ""^■'' '""-•'

;;;r,:"S;!;;;-' -«•"-- -t^^i^r ;i;,.'«;:r ;:;;;;;- r

"" '- •'^i-'.H-"";'^:;^;:^^^^^^^^ ■«• i- -

'■ --,, „ ;:';;„V^T ,;,;:;:,;;,;::;.;;;;■ ::,; , '<'»;■»"■ ™« ' .■

'ifil't Willi a Imn.l .,f hostil,. s,ni .. In.li.,, * ■^' "'.^ • "ral.T Lu'iitenaiil .S,,,,,!!, ha,| ;,

••'"t<"^' t.<.op,s w.ro i.blij,,.,, „.„i,,;, ; „,,'"" "'" ;'":"-^-' «l'«Mi' I.o.si(ion

" •-^''i"-;:;;.;:;;';^;r;;:';;'r:,;rt;^^^ r 'r ^ -/"' ^^ -^"^* =

l'V.rt Klmaath, 10 Suake l,.,li,.,.s woro ki k^l ■ '"""■^ ""*' «'""^^- '•"li""''' -"■=t.'

«.. as . .^ ,„,...,, .;,-r;ir :;;;;:;:;, .yx;--- •-• -• --
in ti.o i.';,;; ts,. :^:i 7:^Tt 'r T'r ''•'''''■ ^'^'^ -'"•> '^ ^'^'""-'

TfFK M()l)0(5 WAR.

80, 17 niMl 18. KiiyA itsninpk. Tlio iwlvance of the troops was ordowl in roi.so-
qu«iuM> of Hill's report tiiat, Mii.ike In.li.ins li.ul bt'on Hcei, l,y hi.n hikI his fellow-scout.

29,11). tft'=hivk; link imsmm: on this side of soinetliing or somebody, referring to an
object located between Uie Hi)eiiker and something more distant.

89, 10 an.l 20. shlii'pka (for shiii'apka) and laHsuipk (for tAssuiapk) "they saw and
attiusked them in Hill's al)sence''i tinshampk " iliey scampered off unseen by Hill" If
the simplex vrbal (..rms shUl'.., tAss.ii (or tilshui), finshna were used, they would imply
that Hdl then saw the Snake Indians himself, that he was among the troops charging
them, and that he had seen them in pcmm scampering off.

30, 3. lewd-ula really means: not to permit, not to allow, to forbid.

80, .'I. tchfn gi, short for tehi nl gl: ".so I said."

80, 5. InHt^iid of gatp.''inkshkshi could also stand in the text: gatpanuapkshi ; tho
nnal -i being used in a temporal sense in both teniis.

30, 8, kft'mets, coiitr. from kft'mme tchish, or from kfi'metat tchJsh.

30, 9. smishuAla, etc. They piled up rocks to servo them as barrica^lcs to shoot
from behind.

30, 11, ui'tsiia, distributive form of 6-itchna; see Dictionary.

31, 7. Nil'wapksh, etc. Transcribed into the fuller und more exj.licit gramnmtio
forms, this phrase would read : Nii'wapkash yamakfshtana k^^tcha tyAlamna, "to tho
northwest of Ooose Luke." For Nii'wapksh, Nii-uapksh, see Dictionary.

31, 13. This campaign terminated in a decided victory over tho runaway Snuko

warriors, but failed to im;c plisl, its real purpose of bringing them back to tho

Reserve. Nevertheless, tliese Indians had lu'en severely chastised by losing quite
a number of men killed and wounded, and seven women of their tribe captured bv the
luilitury. *^ J "

Mo'dokni MAklaks shelluai:*.
THE MODOC WAR.

■■■*

i:^

ODTAINKO KltO.M TUB KiDDLK IaMILY IN THE MoDOC DiALECT.

ShAlarn 1869 A. B. Meiuaiam shuashuldliampkish uduuk mdklaksliash

"■"jSi";""" '''*r!'"^ "iss^" ^"iS'k" -.-ssi' ssf-

».'.,"'€?" '"'SS''' ''ti"*' "1* »°'»''*l'a»h gi-« tula shtola 3
lutatkatkt.

to bo liiterpreterfl.

il we' "^r^ ne-ulakgishze'ni gdtpa; nanuk maklaksh waw4pka,

Theowe all toooucdl.groun.l went, th.whole Tribe w»«,dttl»gW!

^VolP"' ""Zt"^ & "S^' '^-^y „£ viinip pcMila hihashudtch^ash, 6

i.:ST()UI(\\l, TKXTS.

mri'lasli ml sliii*ilkisli;ft:iii itcliaiiinii»ka K-uksliitala."

>'' ' I'llliiMiwrviition I Klmll i-.MucivK to Kliiiimlh l.nko, '

;$ Capt'ii .lack, luiiklaksam laki, lioim^i" : -Ka-i ,„i fata yv-u kiifia

"'"il'n'"'- '"•|"'^'''''<" '•>' Hnshtinasli, l.ii s ,a-uli n.cdsliapkasli, WhUi.

Kii-itoks iiu M^r,, t.ita kiii'la slu'sliii't-.r, luVtoks Skoiitcliisli slicsliii'Mii "

^"' ' "''" ''^•'■"' '■<•"""■>■ ""rtw-ll. luith. Sknnlv.hi«li «..l,l(io,"

slu-'sl,asl. sliumaluash: prMi i.aimkasli tii sliaiia-iili itcliamprlisli shhi'lkisl,

kiiila. Ki-ukska-i .shana-uli -.;n.p('li.sh ; Ini -i:... lowitcl.ta tpiHvasli. At

!l •"'akli'lvs Irwitol.ta k.^-ish shiiVlkish kiiilu. Moachani killrtai.a nalAsl, »rnt..v

at tiiu-ii'j.a inajilokfi i-aninau I.'.Ioksoisli. |{.'..shtiii tclii'sh. '|\,),v hotanisya

'■""" <fl« tw

!^S'". Sir "'i^'^''!'!^^' ''^'■" l'^''"»^"nk.I. luatcLatkat, U-i Ji hun pi-
12 |K'laii-islita samtchatka. Aroacham niri'lr.m hu shi'tclilip, iKMiikanka ti'dsli

-1 Ml 1 ■ 1 • lienillt,

uial ti.lsli tcliitki oiiij-a. Kiinktak gi'u wawalkan niatchatkat ; ka-i kiliiat
Uosl.tin, at nil talaak slnVta! Naiiuk Nvawal;(ai. i'lkat nia'Iiiin IuIoLstLsI, >

^'" ' ilown

la at toks iiiri'l pr'n sliana-uli mak'.aks hassasuakisli "

"""' rJlli'.r', "-"'" ''•■"'"' 11... I.ulians to ilWmte."

K.'d^lia pfMi litMukaukiltko tind'li; at iiamik lutinkanka, M.bu'Hluui

lo,„.,„M,n,.. ,.„.,„ .,„.,. ,„Ui„K ,,,;'»- -.■»„ ^ .1.™ all ,.«r.e.l, ' „„t .Uy

{•■oiiuapkriga sliiMlkislix('iii kiii'la.

tnlliii

MbiV.sliaii iiaiiuk sliirilkisli;.u.i j-vna M.Vdokui ; Meachani tula m-un.

Mt^HOlinin

with Irnvoli'd.
".tl,..,tlR.,„,v«^ ,„ M„,l,K. 1.„,„| „t»nm„„. llM.yw,.nl.tl„.n M™.ta,„ ,„„,.,

sliash slmlu'tisli uai.ukriiasli slirwaua sliapiva. tidsli p'nalasli sluialalianina-

Mo.l<K.., ll,..cloll,in,- to ..very,, li»„ll,„....l ,a„rt' -ai,!, wHI ' l,„- ,l„.u " 'j,,,,,,,

■Jl kuaptjaslit At M.Vd.ikui K-nksliikisliasli tiVia wawaitka: al liatak Iiisj,-

TIIK MODOC, WAR,

:$")

^^^^ "*:^;±;r r!:SI± 'l;3tr.,2±r- S±

SalSif' ^1 :r 'Sti i^± i""i|^i;;5». M»^i„„„ ,;,.,„.„ K,„i|,-

Iwo >"rprotMiMe. Me»oh«m tiiCnptalu Kimiin

prtHl, Hl.nnii<l,sl.a inaklrtkHlmHl. ,sliuahiIiHniiK'.fki .riM..a

uin ininuiH ,„|,p their ;.«Bi,(,

.^1 ^!i:illl" '^^••ll!i:'<«'' "|^Syf'""i>l<'^ sl.tishtnao'tH,. ; ndankHl..,,.

tfilH """ t" -pill r„inrn.M,.e,l t.. IniiW h.mH«» ; ,.,^^1

!i:^"' '=::;' '^'<'!!:!:'^«'' i^i:^::^^"- At l.(nnas).tf,inlan K-ukHhikni k6-i

""""""'" ■'•"" "rtcr..,l,i..vl„Kthi, .h.,KI,.,„a.l, I.,,ko» ,7l,k.
,'„/.|,„..V , ,, ./,,,,.. yt,K,k«w».v. ,I,.,,uH„K: ..,h„,„,„,

';;Si:s:' t±;^:,. •■«:S;:t::'. i*±|.". i^tje^ "SS; ^t±:-

(W'liHj wfirti, (iiitti) ihf* Anion-

"'l»K '■ "'" "i.nld pml,..t t),., M«.Io<;h, tl,., Arn.T..

liikia,sh .sliira .slianiya, K-uksliiki,sliani ktcliink«li tr.n.oslik.^h L-'. ; W'

(hilnl, •li»KI,.M«,h l,„k.., ,h„,ail» lm.l lake,, ,. way ->iul, ,„ ,|,„

'i-l';;:' '"iil:"'' >:;;,'::;!,i»:" »;r;,"i,r '"k.; y-i .|,av„ i.;.„i<»i,iki,h,,»i, m.-.. 12

'»•"> OHmv,M„.. 'I„.A,,„.„ ,.«,.„, ,„„ „„|.r,.,l Ih.. Klamath I,ak,., t„,l,„

lllfr'"^"'' "^^il:^^^'' ^'--!;:;;i;f''^'<i. k>M K-uksl.ikfshash t,K^va tala giu

Mil' Kl.ini.(,li K.'tkcH

DTclt'ii'iI inrinov

pun MoMokiii ktcliiiik.sli tiiiioniii toiwaiid sluVt., ..,-.1 l." ..i- 1 -i • '.

■win th,. Mn,i,«., ,„,„ ,1' "'"""';' •''1111 t.i, icii h-iiUsliikiii u-atnam- 15

iiaii Mo.loki.sha.sh iianuk ktdiinksh i.aDaUa

ukea roiiilnfr to
their Io3k

"f "II raila ■ rf.'hliwl.

I 1 » I niuri-

!h:';±- -is* ss- r^ .'.f-.-e. •';;:? e -

i«il

n
■Jt

' I

HISTOBIOAL 'illiJXTS.

S?i,!i" ^'\ir^' ''^t?/-^^ ^t'.^Kf^'i'J.'^''^ P^'«^ ^^^'"^ shewandtki ktcWnkshtat.

^meri ngent told tho Klamath Lakes to him moDOy ehoal.l ,my for (hl») r»ll».

ran Mgea "I^'e- If you iicain ramp hero, then yon 1

'* "" !E'J' ''^TniS*^^,¥-^ "'^'^'* E-ukshiki'shasl. slinun.atclikutgi." At Mo'-

Ihere w.ll lock „p (whoro) you the Klamath Lake, v ill bother (any longe?,." Hero- , ho

ii|Min

,!^S:^f,l±''i!',S;!i'&P£f '"pW'apttnkni tndoepni nute m&t. At

milea aouth.

Then

^' ^^'''3""''^ "'S^^' sheggdtzaii lakiash tcliu'i lupitala nit^dsha Yainakslu

the half tribe separating |n,m the .nb.e- oartward niiRratod to TAneks

chief qnently

'^'''iS''''' ^'''I^St?''"' *^f^?i^^"^ ^^^^' hiltaktok tclifa Modokfshash

-ocued in May the midrfle 1870, at that place .tayed the Mo,loc.

shdllualsht.

while I'onght.

the Modoo

Indians

oti Lo8t River

shlodsha itcMmpelish Mo'dokiu laki lienit^yo: *'Hanisliiin

vmtea to take (tbcm) back wishing. ^ Th« xf™i„„ „i.-> AV..^^ ..,- "^^" ""

Tho Modno chief piiid •

^S±'S."S' *"»'±3*k'"'<. -lis ",« «" Agency, ^ M .„h« ,„
^.HS'"''- .SIS.?. '.S '«1'1"» '""V.^*!?'»''. M"'i'*«' I* W'vitohta

to aasent,

the Modoo chief declined

ge'sh, iidAni B6shtin Ijikiam kfyan ne-ulkfash; shand-uli kanash ddlaak

'"'"■ t'i'r, "■"ctn™"'- *'"™™"""" t«f •--'"« ™~«'P-'^-'' --anted .onl^dy rSf

^•'^loni '•^I'rl'*^'' 1'" ^hayuiikta TchmiVtcl.am dalaak shlepakudpkash.

' """""• '"> ^»^'' Frank Riddle rightly wofnd protecUim,

^mJi't^ kiiflatat tchi'sh hdmgno shi'ddshash pi'sli sbiukatki ; kd-i pfl'sh

. Hi-own ineonntrr to stay hepreferred themilitary *^him in order to kill ,' "mt Phim

shpH'nshnan shiulkishze^ni, hashtdwan shiukdtki pi'sh.

takins forcibly away to the reservation, by starvation in order to kill hlni.

Saftua slm'ta tchi'sh pani shalatn 187:>. B6shtin liatak-tchi'tkn

Nothing was done further 'till autamn mi. The white settle™

"^TsSd"^' "'4S,'''^™ ¥^>' "I'iklakshash 8han4-uli kaila tpflliuash tfi'm

des.red thelnaians' land, the Indians they wanted from the to drive off wide

land

kshundlpash kafla shana-uli6ga. Mdklaksani wevvanfshasli U-i shu'tsi

p«iture.l»nd, coTetiug. Of Indians the f. raalos " had ontraged

^^ ?hoS"- S<5ketaWchitko B6slitiii pipa slninii'.l.ian mfi'ni Idkiasli .slini^/jta

the whites. OnLo.tElv.r.,ettI«l An„.rioan, f.£i „„„„- up to ,lo, Pr^sidenr ^""Sl'

THE MODOC WAR.

kA-i shana-ulidga mdklakshash hi tchl'tki. MA'ni lakf vraiza: "Idshd

not wantlDS the Indiana there to remain. The President replied i "Remove

mdklakshash Agency kdyak hishtchdktnan ; kd-i g^-isht, tpfldshdntak."

thelndlani) to the agency not boisterously t not (Sey) going, «lTe (them there)."

Vfin^pni taiinep shfl'ldshash, Capt'n Jackson lajd, Mp6ni taiinep B6slitiii 3

Forty soldiers, Captain Jackson com- twenty while

manding,

hatak=tchltchl8h tiila Ana'k gakidmna. B6shtin lakf hem^ze : " 1 lakf gdpki ! "

settlers with early aonoanded (the TheAmeri- com- cried: "yon, chief, come here!"

(them) camp). can mander

Scarface Charley gdknan hem^ze: "Jackkd-iupdtkal!" B6shtin lakf Bar-

Scarfaoo Charley comingout said: "Jack notyet haagotupl" Lieutenant Bar-

tellhem(ize: "i pushpiishli watchdgalam wdasli, 161oksgish ml hfln dlk!" (J

tell said: "yon black of a bitch thoson, rifle yonrs this lay

down ! "

Scarface Charley hem(5;je : "nA'toks kd-i watchdga gi; hishudkshash^shftko

Scarface Charley said: "I not a dog anij to a man-alike

Ish hc^rakank!" Bartell hemd^e: "1 piishpushli watchdkalam wdash, 16-

tome speak!" liartoll said: "you black of a bitch the son, ri-

lokshgish nil^ (51;^ ! " Jackson hera^ze : "161oksgish hiinklsh fi't^l." Ldpok

^""' "" "the gun from him take away."

tie

yonrs lay
down I"

Jackson

said:

Both

nadshdshak shikgnltkish shushpdshkan sh^tui ; ldpok shakl'ha. TAnk hun

"* *'•" " ^--.- - drawing " ' * ■* * "

At th» same mo*
mont

revolviT

fired ;

both

iniasHd.

Henci

shellualtdmpka.

th« war commenced.

Tdnktak B6shtin til'gshta K6ke yutetdmpka; at nAnuk shellualtdmpka.

Just then the whites on opponito of Lost totthont-conimenced: then all t^t flght-commenced.

the whites on opponito of Lost totthoot-conimenced; then
shore River

Tdnkt 1dpi taiinep mdklaks tchfa, tun^pni taiinep shfi'ldshasli B6shtin tchi'sh

That time twentv Modoc wni staved fifty soldiers American settlnrH

riors (In camp),

shlikdltko. Lapgshdpta shu'ldshash liiela, kdnktak nge'she-uiya. Mdklak-

mlxed with. Seven soldiers were ns many were wounded. Of the In-

killed,

sam wewdnuish tdtoksnl na'sh taunep kshfkla shu^nka nge'she-uiya. Ki- ] 5

dian women (and) children eleven were killed (and; wounded.

nksam mdklaksh K6ke gunfgshta ydmat tamgnuo'ta hdtakt^tchitchfshasl

conjurer the band Lost River across northwards while running the settlers there

or the
1

shiidnka, kd-i na'sh gin snawddshash tatdkiash kd-i liiela. Mdklaks lakf

massacred, (but) not one there woman children not they killed. The Motl^i chief

ktavalshtdla gdna, pen ndnka gapt6ga gdna tiila ; hataktok tcljia 17th Jan- 18

to the lavabeds went, then others Joined (him and) went witli there they January

uary 1873 tche'k.

(him):

stayed

17th

until.

Tdnkt vflndpni hundred pen vunip shii'ldshash, B6shtin shfikdltko,

That day four hundred and four soldiers, with settlors mixed,

gutdmpka. Wafta shdllual, kelidnta kd-ishtat, tinolo'lish tchek kgldwi; 21

attacked (them). AH day they fought, without snow (on the at sundown finally they ceased i

ground),

shfi'ldshash gdmpfilln at vflnl'pni taiinep stdwa luel6tan ngesh6tan

theralllt«ry retreaUng, than forty theymUsad (In) killed woqnded

: t

HISTOKICAI I'KXTS.

sliiVIdshiUi) poiiuish inaklnks sliiu'iika liu'nk.

Ibesoldlera' rctrcBt tlic Indinim killed tlicm.

T.,e„ ,1,..Premdem PUbM-l ,, with ,he Modo.,. to «,„elud„ pW ^ \\ B Me„." ,n

"'^' Hir "'iWSi?''' ^''"^'"'ktSi; General Edward Canby tula shusl.u-

^InTd ""'"'"■••»'•• ""^"""T. 0..n..r«l Edw. K S. ,•„„,,/ alo„K , he Peace

tanki'shash oo,ui, tula MeachAsli 'I\,bv, 'IVlunu'tchani suawodshasl. lu-

Co„,„,l,,l„„e„ went, with M,ach,.,n T.,l,> Iti/idl,.. Kmuk KMdl,.', "'"-Wl UsnahU, IU

^ ^'*H^ Shushutankisli u/muk .John Fairchildainkslii jri'itpa Vulalkslii
gishi', iia'lan. kiiilatat, Febr. 20, 187n. At niaklaks liashtiuash liemkank-
tmnpka, Tchmu'tch Toby tclu'sli lutatka. IVjslitin uiaklnkshash no-uly/a

" ¥,"' n'"*!'!'" ^''I'l'iVfl'"'!''"'^''' niaklaksliasli .sluV-utanksh i.o-ulaksl, pani'

not .h.,vl,„6, .l,„„ld ,„..k„ war wi.l, ,1„. M,„loc» , he peace- ,rae. waa boiuK-JSa" 'while;

Maklnksnii. laj^i sliewc^-ula licnikauk.'.ta Hoslitiuash ue-ulyfa ka-i m lunf

'""""""■■ '"'^' "'■'^ ' <.md,d,.cla,e,, (whne,U»>An».^ wore™„kiK T„t f.6 "Vt

cans peace

l.'.loksj.i«h tewiuapkujra. At nanka inaklaks oatpa Fairchildanikslii • at

..K«u would Hreofl-. Then .„,„.. i^-Jiana ^,,L a, Fairchild; fL„. ' ' .h"

12 liassasuakiti'impka.

'I\mkt Skuii' StTl, Atwell, iiu tclnsh Toby toliisli gdna Mo'dokisliam

Iben S„„„e Steele, W„,. AtwCl. , „1., Tohv"' alao ^we,,t of the M^. ,,

ir.Kiaui t('lii'«htat slmshotankl'shani lu-ulaksh .slitiltcIimVka ; niaklVa tchui

.•h„.f tnthecamp, o, the Peace C«mn,U.i„„..„ a ,„e,«„„ ,„ carry , ,we)pas«d ."„

;-, I "'•' ^'•'"^•I'^^^'i" ^'l'''fi>ii. lienikanka: "palpal tclioleks oitko lAni ku'-i

!her„d.aua „a trleudlv r ived, , „ ,„id : ' '..h .Wacea " at flis, ^1«1

sliusliiita, BoHhtiu tchushak f^i'yan ninklakshash .shti'lsho-;,, slnVldsIiasli Iiuuk

.omnnlted, the wlme« c„„ti,-,uall.v I.Wuk onThe Indian, repor.e.r troops

inaklak|sliasl, liuiia,sliak <,nltmnpka, luaklaksl. ka-i k.'.pa tiVsli i/nalain k.V-i

-he Indian, tor „„ reason Mn.d, at;acked, the Indiana ,di7l) not Thl/,k over there ' their mi\ ^o,Jy

18 f.-iwisli; H.'.sbtiii niaklaksliasli ktayat tpilli' vutetanipka ktavat .-{pkasli "

Imd acted: TheAtneri ,he Indian, ,„,„,he flrove " i ., tirinuian. in ,-he «'1"^'<^'1-

"""" '■'"■•'" cedat rocka

thern stayii.^,"

■ ■■■ iif M III IIILKS

^nSJ,'"' ''''±''''' '■ "S ^ ^'•^^'' >'l"'f'i>'k"''l>l<a ua'lash, k'lewiuapkH na

llieln,l,.,n, de,l.„e,l, if ye «,11 n.^lliale peace „1,1, ua, atop will we

'''hK'''= 'f? S f «hollualuapka, p.V.htin lupi sludlualtampku^^pka;

*•'"""■ " ■'*"" "'■ «lH-"ld 11,-1,1. "";.,;);,:"'''■ "■■»' war-atan-wonld: '

21 luaklaks ka-i lupi" tinviuapka."

llie Indiana not at Hrst will lire.

8til at hinni-yj^: "Mn'lain m^nap li.'.shtinftm tdirkelt nanukasli o-inta-

Meele .hen aanl : ■■ Vou, hands' „> the white.' hlood .Hover ".ulned

TnK MODOC WAR.

natk6 gi Canby inii'lasli killotanuapka gi^kisli tcliek k'lewiuapka; Canbv

«le. Canby on ve will insist to lilni until jc will giv« it up, (•..nliy

nia'hu' ichi'ii tidsluuitala kiii'la idslianuajjka gen weli'tan, tu'sli mHl kiV-

i» "»■» loiiKDod Innit will remove from ili»tant, wIibib ye ~ t\w

Uero

idsha Yaniaki'sliash ka-i shu(<nktgi. Hii a gfta tchiuApka, shu(5nktak nial 3

wicked Oregonlani. not will murder. If ye hero would remain, they would kill y«

iln uanukii'iiaah."

**vory one."

Md'dokni lakf \mn6xe: "Ka-i nA shanA-ull gt'-u kiifla kcknvfdsliilsli,

TheModiM, chief «aiil : ■Not 1 want my country ~ to have,

ka-i kuii pen kiii'la shayuaktnu'ga tchl'sli. Ge-ii t^shi'shap, Daislian, (J

not any Ix-sldea country as I do know to live in. My father, mother

tze-unap tchish gfta vflmi', .sliam'diuli p'natak kiiflatat tclifan keleksh.

brother also hiTi< are buried, I denirc in my own country llvlDg to die.

NiVtoks kaftua k()-i gfta slul'ta, ka-i tchik lisli kani' tat 8hpanslianujiT)ka ;

Myself uothlnK wrong here have done, not »o that any one hence should take away (inel -.

gc'tak inish ml vu'la wakaktok.s liu namik tclii'a." q

loli<

this only of you I rci|ucst, in the sami' manner um

Heiiikankfilotak Capt, J. Biddle nanuk watch Mddokfsliani lakirnn palla.

JuHt after that l.ilk Captain James Hiddlo all horses of the Mo(lo<- cWcf laplured.

Nad (Ijimbianigshi geiia .shana-uliil'ga watch Mridokfsham shewananeh'tki

We lotieneralCanhy went (and) requested the horses Modoc to return

hikinni tubakshash. Canby L' ....i shewanapeli.sh lienikankota: "tidsh l'>

the chiefs to the sister. Canhy refused to return (IliemI declaring'; very "

toks nu An hun watch shuakvhanipjiktak, shu-ntankiVhish tchek iAlr.(U)ki-

**" ^ "'""« ''"'"'"' will care lor. (and) alter making peace then to the Mo-

shash watch shewanap'lishtka gi." At iMeachani lienit'/e: "tpc-ii i she-
docs th«bors.iH III Intend to relnrn." Here- Moacham said: -Kive tore-

"PO" orders

wanap'lftki sha.sh niaklaksnni watch! ni'a i hcnikanka kaitua k()-i ne-ul- 15

""■" to them of the Indians the horses! ,jn,st .v"u promised nolhinu mtn- to

now (totliem) ^eons

knapki'iga, kaftua k<')-i shute-uapkuga."

oriler, noihluj; outra- In perform.'

^eous

Canby shiashna slnVhlshash tnnepni hundred tinolishyeni, tineyish-

()en.Canl.,v raove.l .soldiers tivo hundred o„ west side, on cast

Zcni pvn tnnepni Iiunthvd la]) miles pipeljingshtn Jrndokf.shrish l.ikiash • 1^

»"'" "«"'" flvehumh^d two mile, ' !,n hot h sMes of.he Modoc 7\'wf

gfta pen hemkanktampka.

there aKaIn ne,:(itialint;coninienced.

Toby lakiash shtiltchna, tnniena tu shushutanki'shash sluu'nkuanka.sht-

(While) to the ehier ,e„«.„.,i she learned there the Peace Commissioners '

(While) to the chief
Toliv Kiildle

reported,

• to he assassinated ;

tchni lakiash shapfya: "hii i un shu'tanktak, ti'dsh mish iln slmalaliami)(''c-

thon tothcchlel said: "if yoi. makepeace, well „f you < .11 take can

^""^ ^^" i'l^f'""Vf^'' V'"''"'' '!'""^ "^^^ f?(^-n maklaksham k6;(pash

Lauby. Uiechiel said to cousin his: •■ where of my people "tUeteart

f !

fflSTORIOAL TEXTS.

under (mo) will
lie."

Meaohom

» • «T- D-r Tho^- >.e;si!'=e, :.n,.;ji ,^.h, „.;ao. «jl

Kd-itua shfl'tan mbfl'shan tchek. Boffus Charlev shnlHsli^mtfll,*
^^Sf ^riP'" tr^ vflnt'pni ta^nepni yards hushtdnkan h(^mkanka:

UWTAU 1' 1 - -1 1 ys , ,., " (»w«.V) meeting (bin,) said:

Dian ^ (j^°j^, ">H"1- Bogns

'■^■"if''- "SJy ^iiS" "-I«*-". 'Ky?" B^gl-s Charley

v/ii //lAT.t •"•.yo \B";. iwgoa Charley

^''"i^"^'" ^ i^ ^'^'^ ^'^nlt'^^^'' ^,;>'? " Ketnutchdtko kf-uks h^mkanka :
21 "kl' shdwa na hfl'hkesh." ""'"" "^'"' """^^

"to tell tbouglit
liea

her."

^ =te- « »ss±i'" ^^ie pfi?f s -^S'

in a short
vbUe

while — "■«""«

usuuK* ""' uiiiciing to thM Indian oamp til come:

THE MODOC WAR.

"kdnftm, mi hft'iik shaplyash laldkiftsh, shaplyal" At gdtplsht vfild: "kanl'

"■who, yoa what (yonf reported totheofflcera, toldf" Then after arrival thoy aakod "who

(her« :

mish shaplya?" Toby hem^ze: "KA-i nfl fin ma'lash shapltaki" At

toyon tol<l((iftlil»)t" Toby aatd: "Not I toye wiUtelll" Then

ffakidmna 8hli8hlol61an : "he i nal <in k4-i shapi'tak, shfuktak mish na 3

(Tiey nmrouiideil cocklnggnnB: "if yoatoua not will tell, will kill you wul"

(in!" Toby villd: "Nil tchfsh Mo'doknl gl; I, nH shapfya shiishotankf-

Toby replied: "1 also a Modoo ami yc«, I told (it) to thu Peace Commie-

shash; kd-i nil tin mal tatd shapi'tak. Shll'sh hamCniiiga, i'sh shla't!"

Blonersi not I toye whence will tell. Toehoot if you want, ine nhootyel"

Lakl kd-i shand-uli kl-ukshiish snawddshash shiukdtgi: "snawi^dshash M'-d 6

The not wanted (that) tin. conjurer (thie) woman Hhouldkilli "awomiiu nim

gi, kaitua shdyuaksh."

Ta, notliiuK elieknowa."

At litxi g«5mp6le, shuldshdmkshl gatpdmpgli; pan laldkiash shapiya,

then in the eho returne<l, to the aoldiera' camp ehe came back ; nBaln the Commis- ebc told
evening " ,,„„„„

kd-i mdklakshash hushtdnktgl. 9

not the Indians to meet in council.

Mbd'shan Meachash kdlianta nidklaksli gdtpa. Doctor Thomas Canby

On the next day Meachnni being absent someModoca came. Dr. Thomaa (and) Gen. Canby

mdklakshash sheno'];^a mbu'slian hushtankuapkuga. Tundpni mdklaks

with the Indians arranged theueitday to meet. Five InTiana

hushtankudpka mbu'shan, nanuk kdliak l^loksgisli. Pshfn hil at gatpdm- 12

were to meet the next day, all without rillea. That oven. when la.! re-

ing

p6le Meacham, Doctor Thomas shajifya p'nd shen6Iakulsh. Meacham

turned Mencharo, Doctor Thomas i lioued hia promise. Meacham

hemd;(e: "Doctor, ha i fin nen hak Kii-ulaktak, kd-i i {In pen tdta n4-

eaid: "Doctor, if you (ever) this compact-keep, not you again ever will

ulaktak. T6biash n<l 161a, nidklaksli nfil shuenkudpka; kd-i kanl mish fin 15

compact-keep. Toby I believe, the Indians us intend to kill ; nobody to you ever

shapftak, T6biash ki'-isht." Doctor Thomas hiim(i;Ke : " hfi mish mdklaks

will tell, Toby to have told Doctor Thomas said: "this you Indian

lies.

snawt'dshash hushpdtchta ; kd-i i p'laikfshash 161a tidsh."

woman has Irrghtened ; not yon in God trust enough."

Mbu'shan la'pi mdklaksh shfishotankishdmkshi gdtpa vfild: "tamfi' Itsh 18

Next morning two Indians to the Peace Commissiouere' tent camo (and) in. "(are)

quired:

a mulo'la mdklakshash hfishtankuapkuga?" Hfi'dshaheme'ye: "1-i." Nd-

y« ready Iho Indiana to meet in council I" They replied: "yes." All

nuk lald^i shugfi'laggi at, Tchm'fi'tch ham(<ze: "shand-uli nfi nen siidpiyash

the Peace Com. gathered then, Frank Riddle said: "want 1 to till

missioncra loieu

mal, kd-i gt^nat, shu^nktak mal fin mdklaks, kd-i nfi shandhtili nfish sha- 21

V», do not go, will kill yo thoModoca, not I wish me to have

akaktdntgi." Doctor Thomas vfild: "nfi'toks p'laiki'-lshSsh loldtko si";

ablameoaatupon." Doctor Thomaa aaid: "aaforme. In God I am troatiii " ,

gfihudshktcha.

he started.

UlSTOltlOAL 'JIIXTH.

liL'mkuiiku ; "MiVi.a gen sliA'tanksli hemkankel.'i'" Laki -if li.:.,.Unl.'.

t I - 1 » 1 .>" J will liicnrcM'or tu\mif

«.k. ^ In. „„„„k™„.„ ,.,.^,,,, .,„,,,,„ ,,„ ^,,^^ ,,,,^^^,^^^
6 "ki^shga iiA huii Imniasht kisli."

"cannot I totlii« iwwMit."

(lllril). IMH)IIS1V n m I .mnim n

"lli'l Im

.11./ , , ..~»n„„i, inii'i II

!r" .sr "'^z-i-'. i^i^i .w„ cj^^ ....jsis -'"^ li-

^'=-" "it^ '-^^^i-' rg. -y;^ is^s v^,j, ,„,.™,„,

*"'"""""'' M.acl.aii. milm niidwd;

^K^ !!2;'S;: -S" '"iSS''" X;;»l;e «i;"".;'i.i*. i.M,.,.i,isi,

Sknatt'liiHli.

- ""■ III NHVC

'" * -- "^ilsc!'""'' ^S± "';-:;-" "*;"''• 'li^ 'i^^ ''^lir-

nkdna: "HluVld.sliiisli oc'nka!" Vt makl-.k^ l.iVt,.l.,i.. 'v i -'. i i'.
slmasliualiampkish ksliita nki'llai. hillio tclma

'' ?S±:±;' :S -e litiUs'^ i;^;±r JsM^s, -s »""'li-
:^r" r^-Ss "i:*r "iiii-r '"'»sl?"^"- Uri^" ^-Srf

'""'■''S.'.ir™'"""" "S' I'-'Wkl"!-!'"'!'. (".i|M.tala k,.pl],ia. VVewamii,], la-

„ th.' waLTfiom cutting „ir. Tl»- w.mion (a,,,!) ,|,e

-^ !:±:^' ^!^^^ *±^' '^1^ wewanuish tata'ksni kCi'meti kektchanuanka.

""^ """»■» '»•"" ■>''l'<"«" fmmthe will 1«. ,vitl,dr.i„

TflR MODOC WAR.

Mo'dokni ndiVni wa(ta slielluultkd la'p liash/G'gl hishuAtchzftsh ; iiiu'iio

Mmloo for three ilnyn wnicinK war two wi-re ktllod roeO) A big

8lidw<al»h mbfiwan shuf^nka.

aliell bursting killi-cl (theni).

Kr-'kgii mlnTHluui ku'motat; ki?'kt}jral rt'imnli, wig/i ktaftala gdna, Aviffi'i 3

o
Thi'v wont

<>nt

nntniornlnK from tlir cave; viicutiil (It) o»rly tin ,v. not fur into thu liivu

be<lfi

thoy
went,

(fin pGii tchfa. I'Gn tiinkiii waitolaii Inpi lalaki rndklilksasli ki yaktcha

• ■ Again (in)afi'W ■ «> - .. . ...j, ■ 1

ii»y» .

two olliri'rH

tlie Inrtlanx

liiintt'd

from Attain tboy
tln-re Htayed.

nadHliaptaiikni tauniip sliu'ldsliassli f-ainiiatko. Nda'ni tauniip Yaiiiaknt

sixty »oliiier» liuvlnu witli thorn. Tbirly Warm Spriuu

Inillana

Hhu'ldsliAHli tula gtiiia. Hoshtiii Yaniakni Mndoklshash shk'a wijjatan 6

llio troopN with went. Tlii'Anieii- (auil) the Warm the Mmlocii found a short dia-

rana Springs taiico

ku'metat. Scarface Charloy lapCni taiinep piiii la'p pt'-ula Arodokfshash

from thtuavo. ScBrfaco Charley twenty and two Modoes

fyaxnuatko, taktaklaiita liiushtanka Wrightftsh slienotanka. Mantch sheuo-

liavinu under him, in an open Held encountered Lieut. Th. l\ (and) fought. Long time they

Wright

tanka. Charley na'sh inaklnks stanodshna; iianka BdHlitinilsli luela, iiAiika 9

fought. ('luirtev* Mw tiiati lost; aonie Aniericnns they some

killed,

ngt'-ishe-uya ; liipCni tai'mep pGn iida'n pt'-ula shiildsliash nashksliaptaui

they wounde(i ; twenty and three soldiers six

lalaki tclu'sh ka-i sluu'uka. Maklaks walhh'kan yaina-aga gislit lioslitiuasli

oHlce^a also not were kitltMl. The ifodocs standing on a little mountain near the Americans

watch

wawapkapkash gu'lkl. Gita hu .shc'llual K'laushalpkash Yaina-aga-giHlii. 12

H4!ate(i on ground char^red. Hero they fought Kund.covered Hill at.

Liipeiii suudi"* kaitua sliu'ta. Capt'n Hasbrouck maklaksliash haitchna.

For two weeks nothing was done. Caittaio Hashrouck (then) the Indiana followed.

Shltia niaklaksliasli Palu'ipkash Ivusli gi'slii. Hadokt slienotanka, 1}('ih1i-

He founil the Indians Dried-.ip Lake at. There they fought, Ameri-

tinasli lapksliapta maklaks sliii'ika, nda'n Yaniaki'sliAsh ; ti'inep jx'-uhi 15

cans seven the Modoes killed, three Wartu Springs ; fifteen

iigT'slie-uya. M("t(U)kisliash hutclu'impkasli nash stant'itchiia.

they wounded. The Modot^s on their flight of one they deprived.

At Mo'dokni slieggatka tankt. Lapr'iii \vait(')lan I'aluitko E-ush

The Modocs separated then. Two days after Dried-up Lake

shelli'il(">'laah, Capt'n Hasbrouck taunepanta tiinep pe-ulapkasli Mtldokfshash 18

light. Captain Hasbrouck llfteeu Mwlocs

sldi'a wlgatan Fairchildam (Piiilshayam) shtina'sh; ma'ntch sliislid'ka tak-

found near Faircbilds' farm-house; a long time fought f>n

takliinta kiiilatat la'p'ni taunt'pni taiinep shn'ldsLiisli pen nadsliksaptankni

level ground two humlred soldiers and six-

taiinep Yamakni. Ka-i kanasli iia'sli snawt'dsliasli shiuka, Yaniakni nell'na. 21

ty Warm Springs. Kot anybody (but) one wonuin tlicy killed, tlie Warm .'Scalped

Springs (her).

'Hfi snawi'dsliash stiltclina shu'tanksh hanienisht Modokfshasli.

That woman hiul reported, to surrender that desired thu Moilocs.

i
»

h 1):

' In

HJSl'ORrCAL TEXTS.

^' -.w!^' '"^^S^ nadHhg8hdptuja.'.ncp pc<-ula Mo'doki.l Gen. Davis

(him) cr«k) '^" """yeutrapwSd.Ira), ..if -„,

(logger)

(him) ' t'rwit)

"*' «*ptalii ShdDtohlKh, IiiiM-k

^i:^' ^Slfe:^' Smks. Jin;^t.ho n^klaks k«ha«K%a. La;p f«hka atf
^S*^ "li'SS?"^ *1^J»^' -^r^^^* F--* Klamath Va.„atdrfgl^^'"^"'

9 At ntf L.-UIo ,.' 1 ' •"" •■en.tKort KWh ,„ Oregon ,^,^J„,:

!&'■" ^'ft^S*'' 't."" «!± y.ti 'f'" ";S'"- ™r.'n.eh„i.h
12 millions tdla. *'"■ '^""'

nillllonii ofclolliirs.

NOTES.

the SwtntunJ (^^^^^ "^^T^'^'^Y'T ^^" ^^'«"* ""'^ ^^
ov-,r fort- of their amnber T^ n Kntn..! 7 V ''''' ^''"'"'^ '" ^"^'^"«''' ""^ssacred

uaiB.d,e^ . :irndit2u::t^si^^^^

swelling waters of Lost River. Mr. A. B MelchZ tlln 1 • . *" ^""' ^^ *^«

tribe, of ILta section by t,JC o?OMrr Hil T'i.iT' ?', 'T\ "'^'^'^ "" ""

Tfll'; MODOt) WAll.

Juck, aiKl tlio orifiinal forum of the other three names are Skontiihish, Shhikcifatko,
Ndsakiaks. (See Dictionary.) Captaiii Jack denied having put his name to thi' t ifiity
oi Halo, Ills refusal being from ropugniinoe to quitting Iho ancioiit home of his trilic on
Lost River and on the lakes, where th(^ remains of so many of his ancestors had boc.i
Mined. Moreover, the Modocs abhorr..d ; he vicinity of the Klamath Indians at M(mI.«-
I omt. That Jack should have himself signed his name to the treaty is simply an iri|.
lK.ssibdity, for none of the MckIocs was able, to write. The treaty preserved in tli<-
agent's office at Klamath Agen(ty does not even show crosses, other marks, or totemie
signs, a« substitutes for signatures; but the projier names are written by the same
clerical hand wliich engrossed the text of the treaty.

34, 6. The words kai hu, itpa and lift pC'ua would in the Klamath Lake dialect be
substituted by : a hfi't, ^-pka, hfi'k p'na.

34, 8. The conjurer (ki-uks). who objected to the presence of Riddle (g6-u) in the
capacity of an interpreter, was Sk.intchish, called John Schonchin by the whites. ITo
was the brother of the present Modoc subchief at Y.lneks, seems to have exercised
more influence over his tribe than Jack himself, and thn.ugh his unrelenting fanaticism
was considered the leader of the faction of extremists in the Modoc camp.

84, 9. g^ntgo stands for the more commonly used gentki.

34, 10. i-amiia, iyninna, to seize, grasp, refers to a pbiralitv of objects of lom,
shape, as guns, ix.les; speaking of one long-shaped object, uyamna is used.

34, 11. kie, m, thus, stands for kek or ke' of the Klamath Lake dialect.

34, ]«. kddsha, kitcha, the adverb of kitchkrtni, little, small, refers to hemkank-
atko, and not to tino'li.

34, 18. Mbfl'shan, etc. The return of the Modocs is referred to in Agent Knaoii's
report in the following terms (Ind. Aff. Rep. 1870, p. 68) : "On D<-e. 18, 18(!9, the super-
luteudent (Mr. Meacham) and iiiysell', accompanied by Dr. McKay, J. D. Applcate
and others, visited the Modocs oft' the reservation at their camp on Lost River, for%he
purpose of inducing them to return to the reserve. After talking for ten davs thev
consented to return, and on Dee. 30 wo returned to the reserve with l-'.-.H Indians
Blankets, &e., were issued to them, the same as to tlie other Indiims, on Dec ;!1 Thev
remained quietly on the reserve until April L't!, wheul stoppe.l issuing rations; then
they left without cause or provocation ; since that time they have been roaming around

the country between Lost River and Yreka The old M.mIoc cl.i.^f, Sehowschow

should read: Skrtntohish], is still on the reserve, and has succeeded in getting 67 of
his people to return and I have located them at «:amp Yia iiax . . The Kla

maths have made a large number of rails for their own use, also 5,000 for fences re-
quired at agency." The old Modoc chief alluded to is the brother of John Skontchish,
34, 19. The locality assigned as the permanent home of the :\Iodo(;s n\ as near the
base ot a steep promontory on the eastern shore of Upper Klamath Lake, since called
after them "Modoc Point". It is an excellent spot for hunting waterfowls and for
fishing in aie lake, but the compulsory presence of the rival Klamath tribe made it
hateful t J the Modocs. Many excavations made for the Modoc lodges are visible there
at present. Here they lived first in the lodgcx of the Klamath Indians, after Meaeham
moved tiem to this spot in 1809. After the first complaint ma^le by Kintpuash or Capt
Jack Agent Knapp removed them about 400 yards from there, away from the lake;
and tlie third locality assigned to them was about one mile fuither north. Then, after

rrrHToin* Ai, tkxts,

'"m ■",,'::' ' "'" '*• ~i"""»™' t.. v,.,„*^„v,„. ,„irt, „„,,, i„i,.„„,,„

,....iS/:j!;:r;;;:zr;;;:\:r;::if:;:r::i::::,:::r-rrr-

38, J. Iiipi i„N|,.,i,I „(• |,i,,f.„i, |,„,'„j ; „is„ 41 IS "•

w;::il:;:C;:;;r,ir:,:::;';,r;;;:r,::.;;;;i,;r"' ""*'"""" '

or,>:int:tt'«;:N:,,^;;s:j::;'';;;;r"w''7"''':T"'''''''"'™'''''

;v ;-....,, .,„,,,„■ ,„.„,„,.' ;„;,;::;:.;.;;;;.':, ':zJzzt:z:z::;::; "'z

"i..-; i»Mi,' wi/i::' ;;:;:-:' """ ""■"»■"" ""■"•• »'"••'■ - ""-i...*.! ;,„:

ll Is r'i""',"','l!"'; '"";,'"? '" ""■" ""■ "' » "•' ""■ "■ Ill l.'.ni.l'm..ik

'"^"i!;"* "•;,;:,E^/;,ni;;: z,;!; r:,;:!- '"■ ''■ -"'"■ "• -'^ -

niii. w:,;'',:vi:'',i";';-, ■;''';■"'";:'■"■'"';■■ '"" i'"»'"-iv • «•> ti„„ .„,.i, , ,„■

.mil; t:tr':iZ' """' " ""• "■■ ' ■ ■ "■■•• ""'""«

liv,. «l'h7;';ii',tr'' '"■"■"""■ " '"" '"*•■" ""■«•■' "■ """ ■■■' '«•*' "- -"i»i....-

.m,!^:.^;- ;:!? i, ^;;;r;:;:j';^::;:r;-::^,:: r i-r::: r T'
;it;;;;„: - ' '"■■" "-'- ''-^ ■■"".■ K"!;.:™;i;t,:\ir;i;::r;:

36,0. (/i.l:.nii.Mnki,.M-ki,i, Mod...; lor (af/iilainimni in Khm.alh
til K.i.na h Lakes w..i,l,l sa.v .n.st.NHl : Yainak.aksi, ,„• Vainaksl.i, Yainaksl, S>..» .•
''■'-'■' ■'■ •■••''•'•'''"•■•''-''•»"'«'•«<••'< ''M<lnn.aM.A«..no;'ai.,ai:(M^^^^^^^

TRR MOfiOC WAtt.

iiimI |ihiriii^ Ihr M'tdocs iiiiil \Viil|)i'i|ii iiiiil) r ||ic iiiaiiii|0'»ii'n( III' ('iiMiiiiiHs:ii',v •!. 1).
A|i|>li '^'iilr ill NiiMi'Us. 'I'liis witH iliiiii' III prfM'iit riii'tlicr liioiU anil NlaMi|i<-il*>N III' tlui
Irilii's. On accdiiiit nl' IiIh tall Ntatini', wliit'li i'miimIh nIv Iffl, the MimIocn railed Ap-
|iU>Kitti* "(livv KaKlf" (jriniwaNli), liiis liviiij' the iarjfcKl liiril in llic ronntr.y.

36, II. H:i'ii(ak nn an Aurncv; <'a|il. .lack nii-anl In sa,\ : "I wiiiilil k" •'" Hk' iv-
scrvaliiin apiin with all ni.v MimIimh to .sitlic iImit, if I had the rcrtaintv of licint; pio-
tri'ti'd."

36, It. .\ vt'ili liki' .s|ia>uaktaii. "kimwinu". has tii In- inM4>rti-il litlwci'ii ^v'sh ttnil
ndiini, I'liini » liirli lU' niliia.sh is niaiii' In drpciiil : >• he lU • liiii'd to pi, kiinu in^' that tho
pivi'i'nnicnl liiul runiparti'd with thr .Moihii's ih'iu'i\ infil.v", ftc.

36, l.'i. Mhifpakt^i riaild ln' I'tiniii'itcd hirr with pi'sli.jiist as well as with pfi'sh.

36, 17. Siiiiji'i't (il'shpiViishiian and iiCshiiikatki is shiildshash.

36, llhiiid L'O. tn'ni k.>hnnalpash kiiila, '• land piiNlistinf; ph-nt.v of grasses (kHlu'in)"
for tin- nitlh'. Thi' host KiviT ((inntr.v nintains the licst Kia/inK: liiiids in all Lakw
('oiiiity ; this explains the nnrelcntinfi elVtnts of the Aini'riian settlers tn net rid of tho
roaniiiiK and sometimes tnilinleiit hand of Captain .laek. <'iinhl also lead : kiiihi t(t'in
kHlinin'ilpkash Ki'sht shana ulin};a.

36, '20. wewaiiishaHli syncopated for w«>\vanuishash.

37, I. hi implies the idea of \ ieinilv to their settlements; ''on this Ki'oiind hero".
37,1'. ka.vakh.: not thioiiKh aionsin;;: tlieii' an;;ei'.

37, .'I. Major John (Ireen, First Cavalry, wuh then eommander of the tnwps jjairi-
soneil at Fort Klamath, which consisted of Company I!. I'irst Cavah.\, and Company

F/fwenty llist Infantry; aHnrey:ate jiresent, I conimissio I otliiers. !i!l enlisted men.

.Major .lackson, of Company I!, left I'ort Klamath <>ii Nov. L'H for the Modoc eamii.s,
near month of Lost liiver. In (he attack on the .Modocs, Lientenant Itiintelh , who
tried to disarm Searfaee Charh'y, had his coiit-sleeveH jiiened liy fonr halls.

37, 7. The Klamath Lake form liishnakshash shitko is here nsed in.steu<l of the
Modoc form hishniitch/ash shitko.

37, 10. All the verbs in this liia- are retlectivc verlis. shakdia for Klamath HhaHh-
kihan; tank for Kl.iinath tiinkl.

37, IL'. tn'nshta Kiike. The Modocs had a camp on each side of Lost Hiver, ono
of them ([nite a distance below the other. On Nii\. L'!l, the snldiers and settlers tired
across the rivei' at the nniiroteeted Indues of the northern Modoc camp, thus killing
abont 1 "> sfpiaws ami children, while the Modoc men llr.st retreated to the hills, but
returned in the afternoon and recommenced the ll;!lit. The >• doctor's" band (37, Hi),
also called Itlack .lim's band, visited the farms of the vicinity and killed 1 4 settler.s,
but did not molest wiinien and children. On the Tide Lake settlcnient three men wero
killed.

37, l.'i. Kleveii may be cxpresscil also by niish kslnkla tannepiinta.

37, 17. li'iela can indy be nsed when a plurality of objects issjioken of, and therefore
in a better wnrdinn this sentence would run lliiis: ka-i na'.sh },'iii smiwedshash shiugii
«ha, tutiikiash ka i biela.

37, IS. ktayalshtala. Captain Jack with his wariiors and their families retreat<<d
to the lava beds. They i|nartereil themselves in the sjiacious subterranean retreat
called lien Wright's cave, or, since the war, ''Cajit. .lack's cave", and be«an to fnrtily
their stronu'hold.

:| I

i I

niST()F{.r(UL TKXTS.

i !

11' fl SSuTtL'".'!,"'^.? ''"^' hence gut^mpka: attacked (them).
liokS.lTEdStk.'^'" ^"^"'"' '^'^'•' ^"^"^"^ •''^" «-* "-^«* Kaw..utchaltko

Of ti^;;rSLS:;. "" '''^^"'*^" ^'^^^'^^^^ ''^ ^"- ^•^^•^^ ^ ^- -*'- «outh

aut, 'Jitj" j^zrs^sSusi^ «;T'^" r ' n^''^ ""''''' ''''''' -'^ - «*^-

38, 17. ^opa for the Klamath Lake term bu!,bkdnka.

with fifty men of Troop K, First Carah.yrMar' 13^ ^ T"'"^^' '""^^

3«. 11. Hhewauapfilitki. The lan^nago lik.. to form inverted «<,u(«ucee Uke thin.

THE MODOC WAR.

showanapglitki wlitcb MOdokf-

whero a more regular position of the wordg would be :
sham Kikiam tfibakshilsli.

39, 15. nfa : quite recently, a short while ago.

89, 15. shash refers to tp6-u and is at the same time the grammatic subject of
shewanap'litki, thonph standing in the objective case: "give orders to them (viz. to
your soldiers), that they return the horses of the Modocs!"

39, 17. shi&jhna. The troops located on west side were only half a mile distant
from Jaok's camp. The army took up these positions on April Ist and 2d, 1873
(Meachani, Wineraa, p. 45).

39, 17 and 18. The numbers of men stated here are not quite correct, since there
were at no time more than COO soldiers on duty around the lava beds in the Modoc
war, exclusive of the Warm Spring scouts.

39, 22. p'ndna p'na, to his cousin. Toby was the cousin of Captain Jack, as both
descended from brothers.

40, 1. ndfi'n p(5-ula. td-unep is sometimes through neglect omitted in numbers run-
ning from ilevon to nineteen, p6-ula, or any other of the " class! ( is", supi)lying its place.

40, 3 and 4. Notice the local suffix in?, in these names and in tfi-una.

40, 4. kayilktgi is not here verbal inten rional, but exhortative form of kii-ika, kd-ilui,
kaiha, to liunt, pursue.

40, 5. ni'sh ought to stand after giati'ltak also : " will lie under we."

40, 0. A new Peace Commission had been formed, composed of the following gen-
tlemen : A. B. Meacham ; Eev Elder Eleazar Thomas, D. D., of Petaluma, Sonoma
Co., California; Leroy Sunderland Dyar, acting Indian Agent at Klamath Agency
(assumed charge of agency May 1, 1872); and Gen. Edw. R. S. Cauby.

40, 0. h^mkankuish, the spoken words; -u- infixed gives the form of the preterit.

40, 8 and 11. shapitak stands for shapiya tak.

40,9, 10. n6a8btgi for the Klamath n.i-asht gf, ua'sht gi, "to agree with"; na'lam
tJshisha shanrUmli nu ne-ftsht gi : I desire to go with God, to aet in harmony with his
will, to agree with him.

40, 12. The participle shfl'tan answers to our English: "Nothing doing that day",
since both stand for the passive form.

.40, 12 etc. To bring on the desired opi)ortunity for the murder of the Peace Com-
missioners, Bogus Charley was shrewd enough to avail himself of Meachani's absence,
for he knew him to be opiwsed to a meeting with Indians when unarnu'dand unattended
by troops. He succeeded in capturing the mind.of the good " Sunday-Doctor " or min-
ister, who was unacquainted with the wily and astute character of the savage, by de-
claring that: "God had come into the Modoc heart and put a new lire into it ; they
are ashamed for having attempted intrigue, were ready to surrender, and only wanted
assurance of good faith." (Meacham, Winema, pp. 52, 53.) Upon this, Dr. Thomas
promised that another council of peace should be held, and thus, unconsciously; signed
his and General Canby's death-warrant.

40, 13. 1». 20 etc. A quotation of spoken words in oratio recta is more correctly
introduced by heni6^e than by hemkanka, as it ic done here.

40, 15. idslia, idshnu, is in Modoc used only w^-en many objects are spoken of.

40, 20. ki.Mi, ki'a, gia. This verb is pronouncecl in many ways widely differing
from each other; cf, kl, 40, 21.
4

HISTOmOAL Tl'^.XTS.

41,3. shliwala: to cock a gna; shliwaWlan, aaer having cockoil his fjiiii; (Hsfr
shhshloal6hiii, contracted: shlishloh^lan, each man after huvinj,' cocked his cun
Shhnlola means to t4ike the string off' the Iww; to uncock the gun,

41, 4. .-.. According to Mejichani (Wineml^ p. 50), Toby" leliverc.l these plucky
words, pistol in hand, from the fop of a lock, which raised her alwve tl»(> lieads of the
angry mob.

41,5. tatil, '-whence, from whom", is composed of tAtaf where? and the interro-
gative particle ha. The sentence is incomplete, though intelligible to the Imlians- (hc
fiill wonling would he: tat.l nft tiVmena, or: tat liA nft tumgndtko gi: "from whom 1
have heard it".

41, 7. kaitua shilyuaksh: "she Las not the ability or intellectiml disposition to do
us any harm."

41, 14. hak, short for hiik ; althougli rendered here by " this ", it has to bt^ taken in
an adverbial sense : •• this time ". The adverb corresponding to the hak of the incident
clause is the tata in the princijial one.

41, 18. tamfl' lish etc. : "have ye made yourselves ready?"

41, lit), siiugulaggi. See Dictioiiaiy, s. v. shukfi'lki.

41,l'l. After nush kanash may be .supplied: "1 do not want tJmt anvbodv cast a
blame upon me."

42, 1 etc. The party, on arriving, were greetc.l by the Indians with extreme cor
diahty, and General Canby gave to each a cigar. Eight men were there, instead of
the hve unarmed leaders, as j.ioir^i.sed by Hoston Charley. The parts for the blood v
work had been allotted as follows: 8kontchish had to kill Meacham ; Boston Oharlov,
Dr. Ihomas; Hhick .lim. the ag.'iit Dyar; Kantcho, Kiddle; and if (ten. (iillem had

been jucsent, Huka .lim would have lircd i im. (^hief Jack had undertaken the

assassination of (ien. Canby. The two „ihcr Modocs present, comiih-ting the number
eight, were Shacknasty Jim and KUen's man. Scarface Charley also appeared on the
scene, but not with hostile intentions. The datf of the assas.sii.ation of the Peace Com-
missioners is the llth day of April.

See full account of the massacre in iMeacham's V.-j}. wam and Wariiath, and (much
shorter) in his Winenia, pji. 57-02.

42,1'. hemkankelgi' is probably: hemlcanko'la gi: "has to be talked over to the
end."

42, ;i. After shlejmktgi there is ellipse of shaiu'diuii, "1 desired", or "desire"
The rights alluded to were such as would be equivalent to American citizenship. The
sentence has to be construed as follows: nil shami-uli ma'lash tidsh nush(-toks)
shl6i)aktgi. wakaktoks, etc.

42,4. shkuyuepelitki. Capt. .lack's condition for further peace-negotiations was
the removal of the troops from the Modoc 'ouiitry by General Canby.

42, T. Modoc tgo I'll/a i'or Klamath tg(''l;^a.

42, 9. When Gen. t"aiiby liad been killed and strii)pe<l of his uniform, he was
turned with his face downwards and his scalp taken. The scalp was raised on a pole
in the lava beds and dances performed around it, which lasted several days.

42, 11. Dr. Thomas was killed by a .second bullet, which jiassed through his head ;
he was stripped of his garments and turned upon his face, after his niurd.'rers had
Uuuted him with not believing Toby's statement.

THE MODOC WAR.

42, 12. A "Sunday kf-nkH", or Suiulay Doctor, hUuuU lor i,rc:i<aicr, and tlic u.eau-
ing ot tlie Hontcncc is a niocliory, contrasting Dr. Tiionias' vocation of preacher and
mediator between the two contending powers witli his ignoble death brought on by
cowanlly innnlerens.

42, !2-l(). Sk6nt(!hisli's bullet passed through Mea<;hani's coat- and veNt-eollar; he
retreated ibrty yards, while walking backwards; Tol)y in tlie mean time tried to save
hnn by grasping the arms of his pursuers. Jle fell from exhaustion on a rock, and
there was shot lictweon the eyes by Skoutchish and over the riglit ear by Shacknasty
.lim.» Tins Indian despoiled the unconscious man of his garments, and prevented ail-
othei' (rom shooting liim in the head, declaring that he was a corjtse. These two left, and
Toby stayed alone with him. Then Boston Charley (;ame up, holding up a knift^ to
scalp hnn. Toby prevented him by force Irom doing so, and in the struggle which ensued
she received a heavy blow on the head from the end of his pistol. IJoston Charley had
(•omj.h.ted one-half of the scalping operation, when Toby, though stunned by the blow,
shouted "Hhuldshash g6pka!" Though no soldiers were in sight, this caused the des-
Iierado to take to his lieels immediately and Meaeham's life was saved. Kiddle escaped
the Indian bullets, being eovenul by Scarface (Jharley's ride, and agent Dyar was res-
cued by running fa.st, though hotly imrsued by lluka Jim.

42, 18. After the massat.j of the Peace Commissioners, the services of the Kiddles
as interpreters were no longer required. From this date, the report given by them
becomes meagre in details, because they withdrew from the imme.liate vicinity of the
battk'li(;lds. •

42, 18. ()n« of the two divisions was commanded by Colonel Mason, the other by
(.eneral Green, and the three days' tight took place on the Kith, 17th, and 18th of
A])ril. A heavy bombardment of (Japt. Jack's hea.lquarters in the cave (ku'mme
lalaushaltko) went on at the same time.

42, li). kiVinme lalaiishaltko, the rocky cave, forms epexegesis to lakiam tchl'sh,
42, 18 : the refu-e, or stopping place of the .'Modoc chief.

42, L'O. iimputala. The troops cut the .Modocs off from the waters of Tule Lake, the
only water they could obtain to quench their thirst.

42, L'O and 21. W(>wi'iiiuish, etc. The meaning which the author wanted to convey
by this sentence is: "the women and children remained in lien Wright's cave, though
a portion of them were to bo moved out from it." Sec kii'ktMia (in Dictionary).

43, 1. Mo'dokni is here an adjcvtiv,; (iiialiiying the sul)stantive hislmatch/ash, and
shelliiilltko IS participial iihrase determining the verb temporallv : " two Modoc men
after the fight had lasted three days, were killed." ' '

43, 1. hash;fe'gi is a "plural" verb used only in the .Alodoc dialect; Klamath : hush-
tdi6xa. To kill one, the singular form, is .shiuga in both dialects. The two Indians
killed by the explosion were boys, who were playing with an unexploded shell which
they had discovered on the ground. One of them was named AN'atchnatafi.

43, 3. ke'ktga!, etc. The Modocs vacated their cave in the lava beds on April lit
on account of the terrible losses experienced by the three davs' bombardment, and
retreated, unseen by the troops, to the vicinity of Sand Dill, about four miles SSE
ot lieu Wrii,ht's (ta ve. The two oflicers who followed them with al)out 7r. regains and
SOJVVurm Spring scouts^ere^ Capt. Evan Thomas, Eattery A, Fourtn Artillery, and

•Tliis is iu<lieat«.l in the text by the instiuiuuut.-il .:asi. of lui)'iii7 lipuutkurby two bhotsTwhicli
wi'to flrcd bii two wen. Tdu (Ive other wounds ho had received before.

•A

HISTOEICAL TEXTS.

First Lienf. TIiomkks F. Wright, Twelfth Infantry. The Stind HiU fight took place on
April lO, and lasted about three hours; the troops wore surrounded by the enemy and
lost 21 men killed, 18 wounded, and 6 missing. The Modoc loss ainounted to four
men. as su|)i)osed.

43, .!. wigi'i gin for wikd gen : not far from there they made another stand.

43, 4. t<1nkni waitolan can also mean : "the nerit day " in the Klamath dialect.

43, 5. Yamakni. The Warm Spring Indians occupy, in common with Wasco In-
dians, a reservation on Lower Des Chutes River, Oregon, and are congeners of the Nez
J'erc<5s, both being of Sahaptin race. Being tlie inveterate enemies of the Shoshoni or
Snake Indians, the U. S. Government formed a corps of scouts from able-bodied men
of that tribe, which did good sernco in the nnmerous hard-contested lights with the
Snake Indians. At the outbreak of the Modoc war, these useful allies naturally sug-
gested themselves as the best auxiliaries against the revolted tribe. Donald McKay
organized a corps of 72 sconts and ivjoined with them Col. Mason's r uiip April 10, 1873.
A few later accessions carried them up to an effective force of about ninety men.

43, S. To taktakirmta sujiply kiiilatat.

43, 10. lapcui taiinei), etc. Instead of giving the numbers of killed and wounded,
our iiitormant simply giv.'s the number of the survivors. The Warm Spring scouts
are not included.

43, 13. Capt. Masbiouck, of the Fourth Artillery, was then in command of a
mounted battery, and accompanied [,y Vn]>t. ,lacks.)n, in command of B troop, First
Cavalry, and by sixty AVarm Spring scouts.

43, 11. The light at Dry Lake or C.rass Lake occurred on May 10. Thirty-four
Modocs attacked llie troops at dawn, but were forced to retreat. The troops susttiined
a co:iii)aratively trilling loss.

43, 15. tuuep penla stands for tannepanta ti'inep p6-ula: fifteen. Cf. 40 1 and

Note. '

43, IC. Chan-es of grammatic subjects, and even their omission, are not unheard
of in incoherent Indian sp. (cli. Thus Boshtin has to be supplied here between nash
and stanotchna, and the meaning is: "the troojis killed one of the retreating Modoc

warriors."

43,17. l'aliiUk(» l^usli stands for the more explicit form Pah.ipkash E-ushci'shi-
cf. 43, 13. r s ,

43, 22. shutanka properly means : " to negotiate ", but stands here euphemistically
fo. "to surrender". The same is true of gawina, 44, 2, the proper signification of
which IS "to meet again".

44, 1. General .lefferson O. Davis was the officer whom the President had, after
Gen. Canby's assassination, entrusted wiih the conduct of the Modoc war. He assumed
command on May 2, relieving the intermediate commander, Col. Alvin C Gillem of
Benicia Barracks, California. '

44, 2. shiit'la kiiyaktcha stands for sh. a kayAktchtki and was preferred t» this
torm to avoid accumulation of consonants.

44,2. laki for Klkiash. When speaking last, Klamaths and Modocs sometimes sub-
stitute the subjective for the objective case in substantives which are in frequent use
as mJiklaks for m.iklaksash, 44. 9. 65, 4. : wewanuisli for wewanuishash, etc. ''

44. 3. «iiii.lA.giulau, ..ver a wcvk ; lit. "a we^'k elapswl". On ,Tiuie 1, 1S73 Capt.

THE MODOC VVAK.

Jack and liis last warriorH suiroudercd to a scouting party of cavalry, not to tho llv<'-
Modocs sent after him.

44,5. Fort Klamath idsha, or better: Fort Klaniath/C'ni idsha. The national
name for this locality is I-ukdka, Iiikfik, E-ukak.

44, 5. hashufttko, uncommon Mo<lo<', form, contracted from hasliashuakitlco, by
elision of two syllal)les.

44, 0. stina'sh for slitina'shtat. Generic nouns of placer,, dwellings, etc., easily
drop their locative case-suffixes and case postpositions; cf. kiiila lor kiiilatat, 44, 8 and
9. YAmak, 44, 10, is an abbreviation of Yilmatkshi or Y.1inat=gishi.

44, 7. kshaggi'iya is incorrectly used hero instead of igg.lya, wlii<!li is said when ii
plurality of long shaped objects (incjluding ])ersons) is referred to.

44, 8. iggaya. The execution of the lour malefactors took ]>lace at Fort Klamath
on tho 3d of October, 1873, under an immense concourse of Indians and wliites living
in the vicinity. It is estimated tliat the whole Klamath Lake tribe was present, men,
women, and children. The gibbet constnicted for this i)urpose, of enormous magnitude,
stands there at the present day. Bantcho and Slulks were sentenced to imprisonment
for life. Bantclio died some tim(^ in 1875 in the fortress and prison of Alcatraz Island
in tho harbor of San Francisco, California, and Sliilks is serving his term there at the
present time.

44, 9. ati kiii'a. The approximate number of Modocs brought to the Indian Ter-
ritory for having participated in the revolt, was 145, women and children included;
they were first placed on th<^ Eastern Shawnee reserve, and afterwards removed to
that of tho Quapaw Indians. (Jwing to the moist and sultry southern (climate of their
new home, many of their children died during the first years alter their airival, and
the Keportof the Indian Connnissioner for 1878 stites ]().'? as the whole inuid)er of
the Modocs remaining in tho Territory.

•4

w
,1
-t

.1
J
.)

To facilitate a prompt reference to the historical events described in this long
article, I present the following division of its contents :

33, 1. Negotiations terminating in the return of Capt. Jack's ]\Iodoc8 to the Kla-
math Kesorvation.

34, 18. Difficulties causing a split in the Modoc tribe. Capt. Jack returns to the
Lost River country with one half of the Modocs.

36, 9. The Government of the United States called to the rescue by tho Lost Eiver
settlers.

37, 3. Tha massacre on Lost Eiver, and the attack on the lava beds.

38, 3. President Grant appoints a Peace Commission. Negotiations progressing.
39, 10. The capture of Modoc horses makes furtlier negotiations impossible.

39, 'M. Toby Kiddle reveals her terrible secret.

40, 12. A Doctor of Divinity among the Modocs.

40, 22. Toby Eiddlo tried by htr countrymen. Last warnings given to the Peace
Commissioners.

42, 1. Assassination of the Peace Commissioners.

42, 18. Bombardment of the lava beds and the Sand HiU fight; the fights at Dry
I^ake and near Fairchild's farm.

44, 1. The I'losiiig scenes of the tragedy.

HISTORICAL TKXTS.

i-j

BIOGRAPHIC NOTICES OF MODOC CHARACTERS.

OiVKN BY J. C. D. Riddle in thk Modoc Dialect.

I. TOBY EIDDLE.
'^t}/ ^^'S.I^^"^ mdklaksh gdtpa Ya-ciga k6ke Yamatkni'sham kafla

^ """'* ^'"''"" '•>■<■"'■>" onWIll.an,. Biv,r of .ho Or..KonlaD« iu coun.

son tfj.

pji'dshit sko' 1842. Hi'mkPhlm t'shi'shap T-'shikka; hiinkghlm p'ki'shaD

I..mtheu ,„Hprl„, 18«. He,. f,.,„.„. ' ,1.) T.».,lkk«, ' .^^^ ^ t„.h'r ^

^ -1>^ l^ "S^ '^^'^^^^t' f;^ P'"'' ^'^''^^^'-^ td-unapni ilI61ash tula tchfa,

.1...1 ^^ho^^ three .vears-old. She ,wUh, „uhr,. ,e„ ^ ye,,r« t-Rether livo,l '

at. tu g(^nan TA-uni wi

Ihi'ti fni
off

Koiiiir

Treks

vigdtan Tp'x&dshp p'na tiila tchf

close by couBln Berown wiih she liv

lived.

Ndankshaptfinkni td-uriip M6atua8i! ),,dklaks M6dokf.shfl.sli watch 1857

'^'^'"'' Pit River fiidiaoH from Ihe M..d„cH ll,ehor«« isr.T

b ilk) lash palla. M5'doknt vvc4tch haftchna, at Dshi'n maklf'ka • nibil'slnn

.n,he.vear „«,e. The Modoc, .he horses pursned, 'and It ",h^ "'wd t'. "^/..h.y"'

pii'ktffisht M(5atuash gfi'lkf. Mo'dokni tchAmptakian huhiUchr.a- ^Pobv

i.-he^fawn .he I-.t Rivers at.acjed The Modoos fri.Lned s,.„ed in flii," -,^^7

'"'"'Sd"^^^ ".K"^ J»<^hatchantgi", nda'ni td-unepni Mo'dokni .shellual-

""'■ ""' they must rm,", (and) thirty "^ Hodocs .oflBht-

•' tampka Ma'ntchtoksh shisho'ka, at M6atuash tpudsha, lil'luayshla vfl'ninni

..,...,„,uo„eed. For a Ion. lime ,hey fought, the,, the Pit Ki, era ,ly ,ep„lsed, ,„„d ';.','i;t„ ed ' "r

t(^-unep Moatuashash i'pkan lu'luagshlan. Pan pshi'n Moatuash Lm'lkl

" P.tR,ver, keeplns (and, eusl.vviDK (then,) ARain ^t„iBh. the i-it Itivers ?t,acke,l,

ta'mi tchiii M6atuash. E-ukshlkni at Modokfshash shidshla, pen vuiye

■nan,. (more, Pi. RH-ers. Klan.a.h Lakes then ,he Modoos h, V "'?««" .bey £

10 4 U ' 1 qi'ered

1^ yiraeshgapalan p'ndlam wAtch, M6atuasham tchi'sh watch fdsha Liingni

.»l.inBback .heir own horses. of , he PI, Rivers „,so the horsed .{," drove ?„"

to-nnep pan tunep M6atuash shudnka, tu'm kd-i shlda; lapModokfshash

""''_ "^ Plt'R'vers were killed, many not f„„„d ; twi M«d,«s

^.h *kn,¥' "?^" shlfuiya, tunep E-ukshiklshasli nge'she uiya. At maklaks

IS rn:: 1: ,""": "7 """"•■»-• «- Kl.,nath Lakes ^hey wnnn.e,? itn T^!^^^

10 16biash sheshaloli'sh.lsh shdyuakta.

''"''.V » fighter knew her to be.

Shdlam ilMlash 18^0 at ha hishuatchkdshla Tchmfi'tchash, I1161ash

mthoantumn in year ,85!. then she carried Frank Kiddle In the Tear

^fm ''^' !t^}T'}p ^hdshtiash E-ukshikfshas Modoki'shash tchi'.sh, at

1862 she called together the Shastis the Klamath Lakes the Modocs aUo 'whtn

^^ uSJ '^''"£'''" hemkdnka ndnnk mdklaks: "at ndnnk tch^kfili vaml'

' d.js a,.da,«l ,.1, ,he tribes: .now all blood Is burled

BIOGHAPHH! XOTH^Ba.

p'nAlam shellimluish". At sha-utdnka Td-uni Skuii' Sti'lamgshi, Skua'

or their hoatiUtloii". Then the; mtda the treaty ntTreka InSqalra Steele'e office, Squire

Stil na'lain lakf.

8t«ele onr

mannKer
(being).

TA-uni hfink hushtAnkan inAklaksh Oregon Dick shdshiitko hd'tnan 3

NearYreka enconntering an Iniilnn Oreijnn Dick byname attacking

shish^ka palpal =tchA'leks=gltk'itsh J. Hendricka shdshapksh; liA maklrika

foaght » while»kinne(i (man) nendrtoka byname; hfi Ihi' Indian

vuto'l;fa. Mdklaksam snaw^dsha.sh shikgni'tkish uyamndtko hfitchfpko

threw down. The Indian'a wilo a pistol holding ran towards

Hendricks shliuapki'iga. Toby shnuka shikgnftkish xi'tza, h<ink kudta 6

Hendricks to shoot (him). Tol)y sciied tho pistol (and) wroiiohod her firmly

(it Item her),

shnukpdpka maklakshash ^hiuk^lasht, tchek tashka.

•he neld the Indian nntil was killed then let (her) go.

(or beaten),

II. STEAMBOAT FRANK.
Tchimii'ntko shellualshe'mi lApgni ta-unepdnta lap pd-ula illo'latko gi.

steamboat Frank nt the time of the war twenty two .vearsold was.

Hu'nkelam t-sbfshap Shdshti nuiklaks gi, hiinkf'lam p'gi'sliap Mo'dokni gi. 9

His fatlier nShasti Indian wa». Ws mother a Modoc was.

Mil Iftchlitch shish6ka sliellualshe'nii ; hiik nda'ni kek6-uya shiu'lkish;jeni

Very bravely he fonght dnrinK the war i )w thrire tried ' into the ri'servation

g(ishtga giil'ga Faircliildan kafla gishi'kni, ta-vinepanta tx'niep kshiklapkash

to enter Pairchild' Irnra form (ciimi.c). ten (andl five

mAklaksh hishuAtch;^ash i'-amnatko; tchu'i hfink tpugidshapglitamna. 12

Indian men Imviog with him; (bnti h'm tlicy drovi. l)ack every time.

Kd-i hiik laldkiash shucnksh lidmgni, shdllualsh tads hi shand-uli. At

Not he the Commis- to kill wanteil, to make war however he w;inted. Then

sioners

hu'kshin shdyuakta hiink laldkiam shtfltish kd-i kshaggayudpkash huk

surrendering he was informed of this of the officers' promise not ihey woolu by hanging him

shiu'ga, M5'dokni Idkiash kaigiviga shil'ldshash. Kdiliaktoks hii tupdks 15

execute, the Modoc chief if he hunted for the soldiers. Without ho sisttr

gi t'^iiunap tchish, weweshdltko pi'la ; ldp6ni hii snawedshdla. Lupi'ni

la brother also, having children only; twice he married. First

hiinkglam snawddshash slieshatko Steamboat, mu'=stiitxdmpkash gtsht.

his wife was called Stenmlmai, of strong voice possessed lieing.

Lupi' hfink kuihdgshash shitko shpunkdnka, tchii'i lakiald.

Firstly bim orphan-alike she kept. afterwards married (him).

III. SCARPAOE CHARLEY.

I/'

Tchlgtchiggam=Lupatkueldtko Modoki'shash shtshnkshe'mi Idp'ni ta

" Wagon-Scarfaced " Modoc at the wartime (was) twon

unepdnta lap pd-ula ill61atko. Hiinkglam p'gi'shap t'shi'shap ketchkani-

ty and two yeara-old. His mother (and) father In-

dnash o' gisht wdngga. H<i'nk6lam t'shi'sha B6shtin kshaggdya. Ketch- 21

taut be being died. His father the Amerl- linng. Wkeua

HISTOKICAL TEXTS.

t \

6 na

ganidnash o wiig'n lupatkfldla. Shelhmlshe'mi hflk knd shdllual; hflkt

.m.lllK.y ^^o^^ avragon pa,..d „ver tU« face. I., tl,o war b« l,rav,l.v fonwhti ho

nanukdnash laliikiash wi'nia;uian shdllual. Modokf'shash shudnkslit lalA-
kiash Tchigtchi'ggftm=Lupatkudlutko kii-i shand-iili tfili'i slmdnksli IIQ

liZ«'" "WaKon-ScrfacU" „„t w.utad along to ..,a«,|„„t,. Ho

la p BdshtiP laldkiash vu'i;jln Kgla-usliAlpkHsh-Yaindkishi, hipgni td-unep

two Amorlcat offlcr. dcfoaiod San,|.oov..ro.l' Illl|.„, ' ' ,w«nty ^

piin la'p pd-ula mdklilks f-amnatko; lilpAk Bdshtln hildkiilsh shudnka. Pen

"■"; ''"' '■""""" bavlnu win. him , both Araerlcnri comn^urt. r» ho klUwI. Again

nadshash slielludlsligishf p'nd maklakshash lii'ushga kA-i iidnuk shfi'ld-

(on)o„o (Of the) b»ttlo.?ol,U hi, InUim. men he„rder?d "not all ,he»l.

shSsh na'sh waftak shudnktgi.

iliers 00 oua day to kill.

NOTES.

54, 1. ketchkiinc or kitchkdui m. g. is a queer way of expression for the more
coininou gii%a: "was boru".

54, 1. Y.i-aga k6kc i.s the present name of the locality on Williamson Kiver wlicro
the Government bridge was built since her infancy, about one mih^ from the mouth of
the nver. Williamson River is simply called Krtke, " river", and on its lower course
resides the Inrgest portion of the fi-ukshikni or Lake People.

54, 1. Yaniatkiii'sham, E-nkshiknfsham, etc., are forms often met with, though
ungrannnatic; the correct forms are Yamatkisham, E-ukshikisham, Modokisham, etc.
54, L'. T'shikka means simply " old man ". He was still living in 1870.
54, .5 etc. The event described in these lines took place on one of the laids whit^h the
Klamaths and Modocs undertook every year before the gathering of the pond lily seed
against the California tribes on Pit Kiver, for the purpose of making i.laves of their
temales. If the numbers of Indians enslaved, wounded, and killed are <oirect, the raid
of 1857 miust have been of unusual magnitude, as will be seen by compiuing tlie state-
ments of Dave Hill in another jiortion of our texts. Among the horses stolen was a
line saddle-horse belonging to Toby, and this theft may have stirred her personal feel-
ings of revenge to the utmost degree. After her successful charge at tiie heart of her
braves, she did not allow the ftiUen Pit River Indians to be scalped.

54, 0. tpMsha. The accent rests on the last syllable because the particle ha has
coalesced with the terminal -a: tpfi'dsha h&. HA is equivalent to "with their own
hands"; ha luyamna, I hold in my hand. Many other verbs are occasionally accented
in the same manner, as itd, shnflkd, lakiald.

54, 12. yimeshgdpalan ; through a diflference in the pieHx, the Tlamath Lake
dialect would say t'meshgdpalauk.

54, i;5. See Meacham, Winema, p. 32 sq., who speaks of three dead enemies only.
55, 1. 2. Mr. Elijah Steele, Superintending Agent of Indian Atlairs for the Northern
District of California, met in council the Klamath Lakes, the Modocs, and three tribes
of Shasti Indians, with their chiefs, near Yreka, on April 14, 1.SC4 (not 18(>2), and to his
mediation was due the peace-treaty between these tribes, including also the Pit River
Indians (who had not sent any deputies), published in Ind. Aff. Report for 1864, pp.
100, 110. Toby does not figure among the interpreters at this council; but thera art

fill

BI0GRA1»H10 NOTICES.

two other names of "interpreter for the Modocs": H. K. White and T. S. Ball. The
raids on the Shasti Indians were mainly undertaken for horse-stealing, and the hostile
feeling between them and the Klamaths and Modocs was never very intense, since
ftequent intermarriages took i)laco. Of. Steamboat Frank's biographic notice : 86, 9.

06, 1 and 3. Tiinni. Ever>' town is termed so, as Linkville, Ashland, Yreka; San
Francisco or Portland would be uifi'ni tduni. In this connection, Yreka, Siskiyou Co.,
Calilbrnia, is meant. Cf. also 64, 4. Td-uni hag the inessivo postposition -i suffixed,
and means in a town, near a town, or: the country around a town.

60, i. ^gitkash is an ungrammatic form standing for ^gipkash.

66, 3-7. Meacham, Winema, ]). 34, speaks of an aitVay in which Toby interfered in
a perfectly similar manner, though the names of the coinbatants ditt'er, and the end of ■
the flght was not extermination, but personal friendship.

66, 8. Tchiniii'ntko means " widower ".

66, 10. Had Steamboat Frank, with his fifteen warriors, succeeded in entering from
the south across Lost River into Klamath reservation, near YAneks, and in surrender-
ing there, this would have saved him from further prosecution, as he thought.

66. 12. For uyamnatko and iyaranatko, see Notes to Modoc war, 34, 10.

66. 13. The sentence sh^llualsh tads etc., refers to the vote taken by the tribe a
few days before the ominous eleventh day of April. Tl' irty warriors voted for continu-
ation of the war, thirteen voted for peace; cf. 40, 1. 2.

66. 13. hi means in the interest of the tribe and its independence. See Notes to
Modoc war, 37, 1.

66. 14. He went with the American troops in the quality of a scout. Nothing illus-
trates the real character of some Indian wars as well as this instance : an Indian who
lias fought with the most decided bravery against the enemy of his tribe, is ready, as
soon as the chances of war run against his chief, to sell himself for a few coins to tlie
enemy, body and soul, and then to commit upon his own chief the blackest kind of
treason. Cf. Motlo(! war, 44, 2.

65, 14 etc. From the verbal stiltish depends the sentence : kiii kshaggayuApkash
hflk shifi'ga (or: shiugdtki), and from ki'i-i shiii'ga depends kaigiuga. This is the
verbal causative of kaihfa, to hunt for or in the interest of somebody, and the indirect
object of it is shft'ldslulsh : "for the troops". Uhk in link shiu'ga refers to Steamboat
Frank, not to Captain Jack ; were it so, hfink would be the correct form, pointing to
somebody distant.

66, 17. stat^iimpkash, to be derived from stu, sto: way, road, passage; moaning
passage-way of the \oice through the throat.

66, 21. 66, 1. The pronoun hii', he, appears here under the form of 6'.

66, 1. Scarface Charley was run over by a mail-stage, and obtained his name from
the scar residting from that casualty. For shellualshe'mi there is a form shelluashe/mi
just as common.

66, 1. 2. Scarface Charley surpassed all the other Modoc chiefs in skill, strategy
and boldness ; he was the engineer aud strategist of the Modoc warriors, and furnished
the brains to the leaders of the long-contested struggle.

66, 3 etc. Hft la'p etc. The two commanders referred to were Capt. Thomas and
Lieut. Wright. Cf. Modoc war, 43, 7-12 and Notes.

66, 7. na'sh waftak for: nfl'sh wafta ak : on one day only, on a singl* day.

««

•'>8 MANNEKa AND 0UflT()M8.

E-DK8HIKf8HAM NliKLAfWAJH NE-UlAKfl.

LEGAL CUSTOMS OF IMIE KLAMai'H LAKK PEOPLE.

GlVKN BY SUBCHIBP DaVK HlIX W THE KlaMATH LaKK DiaLKOT.

'i.;£l?:' ";;'' '£■/ 't'" ^- ™ J* "-"-s'"'- "It Ji:™
S'.l,;*L'':!r'' '"£11"'' '-tS'"" "*:!»" •"£;.""■ "if" *"> 'iisl'

3 River Jack LAnk/rdii'innHli tiini'taii, Liln tn

RIvor J„ok LoDK ,r..l,ii aft,.r, nnd Lili,.

Pit River Chai-lev Moatiiasliiuii lakf K-ukshl'.

I'lt Iilv,.r (•hnil..,v o(PitH|v,.riir.,|il.. inih.' i.l Ihn I.ako.

lakl tapi'tan .T61msonasli.

flilef aft«r Johnsiin.

Tchdktot Sdtam lakl.

T<ih4ktot

of Snake la chief.
Iniliana

9 ^'^""'^ l^^kj A'-uksi na'dsant shiu'lgishtat tsf sa lu^mkank ;

All tliechlof* .n Klamath <m one anil roHervalldti thim they sneak-

Kfi-i i shl£-uapk shash : ksagfrnyuapka m's ni ; kd-i 1 palhiiink sas

^ot yon ahallahoot eacho.her. '?,^„la''h„n/ ,„„ ,;' 7,ot you ' U'oo' ..eh

sndwedsh: spillhi-uapkii m's ni, hii' i sas palluapk. Ktl-i i w.4tsain tclii'k-

wlvee: w„,„,Hn.pri,„„ ,„„ i, ,f, ,„™ *^ se.luce.' l^^.t you a hor,e *^^' .h»,,

12 luapk wfirmiki'sham; lui'doks i tchlkluapk, spull.i-uai)kd m's ni. Kd-i i

ride of another B,«n; but if you should rldi \„uld ImprlL you I. ^ot you

P.tte'' fro' ^''^"»;^t"^' ha'doks i pdUuapk sas sptill.i-udpka m's nt.

.hall steal Jro,n anything. fori, y„„ ahould atJal front 'would liopri Jon you I.

each otuer

(Ndnuktua kd-i i pdlluapk; lui'doks i yeka'-uapk nii'-uLiks, hunkanti'

(NothlDK you n,u«t«t,al; lor if you should Imail tholawa, ' thereat

^^ fill "f slietchdktanuapk.) Hii'doks i snawii'dsh B6shtinash ^lia'tolakuapk,

at you I would Ketungry.) If vou, „a a f,.n„do, with a whit., man ehould sleep ^'

wmSoThS''t^i"f ^J'^^'^" ^ ha'szalp'luapk ndnuktua shdshatuish m'na,

wuiottt off hair to yon 1. U yo„ should huTO leturf.ed the whole marriage re. hli.

t<) yourself ^ ^

LEGAIj customs oI' nil) KI.AMAin LA ICE PEOPLB.

H;f(5ktuank i luispjulp'luiipk, hunkuntchii' iiiIbIi ni k/i-i ne-ulakiiiipk : wuki'-

pftylnjc you nhfiuld rcnbtafn it, on account uf th.tt yoa 1 not iihHll try t !><>'•

anlnm spd'lhi-impk. Hfi 1 hlshuaksh pAlliiapk snuwil'dshaHl), liii'doks

hapt* (I) will tmprlmn. If >miu, afiRmHrrte<l miui, atnluuo a roarrlml wunian, If

1 nti-iinf snawJi'dshaali shoto'lakuapk, nii-ulakuapkd m's nl. Hti 1 kl'- 3

you anotlii'i wllb wlf« cohabit, ahall pnnlah yon I. If yon alioulil

uapka t8, nii'-ulakuapka m's ni.

lie alao, would puniiih you I.

Hii'toks 1 na's luliiksaluapk k'la'kapksh, mft' nilsh nl nii'-ulakuapk.

*" '" Hhoiilil iT«ntati', who iti<U'(ul, heavily yiiu I ithall pnnUh.

you u p<'r-
anii

Hii' I kitiks tsls tJiwi-viapk, nifl' niish ni nii'-ulakiiai)k. Hii 1 flhi8h6kuapk fl

Tf you aaa Hhonlil bewitch, linrd voti I HhiiM cbnntlno. If you hnvcuflpht

conjiirci'

illf-uanka ni's ifinukilii.s ; hii i siiawii'dsli uii 8i8s6kuapk, ilhi'-uapka iii's

I will liH-k up .tllofyo; if y(ni (iitid) wife your r>houlil flKhf, will lock up yon

ni lapuk smnsodlemamkH. Hii i Hhuht'iiik 8itk nissukuapk, liipiik iiiisli ni

I both rufirriotl tolkM. If you cvcnl>' whip each other, bi.th of ye I

nii'-ulakuapk ; liii'toks snii'wedsh i mi ud^pkuupk, tcln'ii inisli kA-i sekak- 9

will puniHh t but if wife you ynui' Iteut, anil to you not returns

tauapk lulk siiavviidsli, ka-i ni nii'-ulakuapk snawii'dshaHli, mi'sh ni hiasuiik-

blowa the wife, net I will punlnh tho wife, you I. the hnn-

aliasli spft'lhi-uapk. Hii i tu/inksl wudwhdyiiapk hfi'nkst, ini'sli ni infl'ak

band, will lutjirlaon. If you nnywhei-e hriilae her, you I more

heavily

nii'-ulakuupk; hii'toks laki iVdupkuapk snawii'dsh m'na, sniikGluapka ni. 12

Hhalt iiunlHli : but If u chief brnlMCH wlfo biH, Nball remove (hiiu) 1.

Hii'toks i hi'hashuaksh shishcSkuapk, lapuk niish ni ilhf-uapk. Hii'toks

If .vou with men ahnubl flifht, Ixitb of ye 1 will lock up. II

i 8hnii'l;(uapk Idtchash mu' niish ni nil'-ulakuajik.

you Hot on tire a lodge bard you I will obUHtlse.

Hii laki shish6kuapk liumdshtak ni .shnJikelui-uajika ; hii' tcliik laki 15

If n chief Rtnrta a flgbt, in tho aamn man I i>hall remove (him) : if a chief

ner

huntsak a maklaksas shishtjkuapk, lapi3ni, ndanni, tankni shislnSkuapk,

for no rcaaon people Hliould iK'at twice, thrice, many tinn-a should bent,

taukt ni snii'k6lui-uapka ni. Hii' tcliik i'-alhish tchish kiii gi'uapk, shnii-

theii I nhall romoviMhiio) I. If aguardiun wrong doea, ahall

kC'lui-uapka ni; hii nanuktua kiii gi'uapka, tankt ni shniikflui-uapkan 18

remove (htm) I; if in cverytbiuK wroni; doea (he), then I will remove (I)

i'-alhishash ; hii'toks i'alhish tids, nannktuanta tfdsli gi'uapk, ka-i ni shuii-

tho watchman ; but if wntcbnian mcII, all tbroui^b well abail act, not I will

kPlui-uapk. T^iakifish tchish ti'dah gisht ka-i ni shniikglui-uapk ; hii B6slitin

remove f him). .A chief also doing hia duty not I will remove; if wbite-inaD-

ydlank nii'-ula; kuapk, ti'dsh hvink gi'uapk, ka-i ni hi^nk wut6dshanuapk. 21

alike he dealH, rijibt heahnllact, not I him will caat away.

Kd-i 1 liussl'nuapk; hii'toks i husst'nuapk nil hfi'nk i'-amnuapk i';^ aks

Not you muRt rnn hor»*e- but If you mn horae-races 1 the will take away gain

races ;

mi. Tchf laki nii'-ul;fa.

yonr. So the order*,

chief

flO

MANNERS AND (Mia'l"<)M8.

-i

ail

Hii' t kii'liak hfHhuaksh nd-iiiids Hiit('»lakuai)k, hu'k tchtHli h(M«uuka

ir you, not having » hiubRnil. wllh itDi>lhnr nluinhl coh»bU, thin alao man

kii'liak snAwiulHh, spfl'lhi-uapku iiA kti'liHli snAwedsh. Hii hfl'kHa lieslitd-

(IH) without »wir<., shall Imprlaon I thi^ unnmrrliMl (man). If they ahouLI llvo

3 lukuank, hfl'iik ni ti'imOnuk iiii'-ulakuapk Hpi'illii-iuipka mi liishudks liO'iik

'" img«, "' " ' '"'"'"* "'" '"'"'"'■ *'""" "'" '"'1'''""" 1 ■»••' that,

Tchi" A'-ukMkni lalAki nil'-ulffka tchl' huk kiiflatat in'nAlam ; tsiii ki'llitk

So the Klamath (■hl.'fa nnliT ho thoy lu dlitriot their, and 'i^vara (la)

the Klamath
Lako

na'-ulaks lali'ikiam.

the law of the ohlefir,

6 Hii'toks 1 sA'iiisealstka jffuapk sl-l'huapk ! lApuk, snawa'dshash

And II VOtI (01 tbuDolllt of niltr Hhniihl hn ntiil >h..,il.l <iT.»» ^.... iF^.i. > ..

you 101 the point of niur
rIaK"

nhould be and ehunid auree you loith,

female

hisHuaksh tchl'sh, tsiii i gt'pkuapk lakiuiiiksi ; tsui rut'Hh lakf Hiia'mpsa-

lUHle alao, then yon niuet (Mmie to oblef '• houiw i and yon Iho will unite ta

chief

aluank, tiVnop i n's tAla skiVktimuapk lift'iik pil nid'yiiiia pl'la lAkiash-

wfillmli, flvo you tome rtolluiH ehall piiy only to th« principal only Thief,

9 hii'toks i yi'nilks, tsi hu'k i luhiii tala, wakiiinhua la'p tAhi skfl'ktanuapk.

but If you (,m.) P.KU-, then jou Ibreo .loUiii,., nmy be two dollara have to pay.

Hii i yuiilks tsi gfuapk Huiusii-ahiapk, gii't i n's skfl'ktaimai)k. Hiits 1

If you p,»,r ehonhl Iw (and) Intend to marry, that yon to have to pay. And If vou

ranch n*

ska'ktish hAm^^iiiuk til'nia wiUch gitk, tiinlp i skfl'ktanuapk snawii'dshash :

tni'i'.v want of many bornfs pos- flvo you can give In payment for the wife.

pofl.
neaaed, (borai'a)

12 hii'toks yiialks tsi i lApi wdtch skii'ktaiiuapk, wakiAnhua iidAn wdtch,

and If poor you two boraea .-an pay, or perhaps three horMt,

tiVma=kau8 wdtch gi'tkiug.

many horaea when having.

Hii' tchi m's snawii'dsh gfi'skuapk, H-i 1 wdtch shnil'kp'Ii-uapk

And If yon (yoni) wife ahould leavo, not yon the horsoe can take back

15 ki'i-i tc.h snawii'dsh hilk wAtch spuiii'-uapka m'sh; i pi'l 1 hissuAksh pil

and not (your) wife a horse need trnnsfei' to you i you alone, you husband only

shii'wunuapk snawii'dshash gii'shkank.

TDnst give (Iheni) (your) wifo when leavini;.

KA-i i lAp siiawii'dsaluapk; na'sak i snawii'dslank giuai)k ; hii'toks 1

Not you two wives shall marry; one only you raarrying mnBtlivei but If you

18 lAp snawii'dsaluapk, nii'-ulakuapka m'sh. Hii' tchik wt^wanuish la'pi gfug

two wives marry, shall punish (1) yon. If the wives double foflwlng

hishtchAktanuapk, tAnkt mi'sh ni skuyfl'shkuapk snAwiidsh nii'sh: tsflshni'

should quarrel, then from you I shall divorce wile one; forever

m'sh ni skuyii'shkuapk, jcA-i i tatA mbushiiAlp'luapk. Hii'toks 1 mbuseAl-

frorayoul ehiill sever her, not you ever can marry her again. And If .vou asaooiateagalu

21 p'luapk spiilhi-uapkA m'sh nl. Hiits na'dsiak mi snawii'ds tsii'ssak 1

(wltbhei) shall Imprison yon I. And if monogamlo your with wile conetanlly yon

hishtchAktanuapk, tAnkt mish nl skuyfi'shkuapk, ampkAak i hisha'kat;

skoald ^narrel, ina!ly from yon I shall separate (lier), or else ye may kill auh

other 1

LKGAL OUBTOMH OF TIIH KLAMATH LAKK I'KOl'LE.

hA'umHht rniMh iii gfug rtkuyii'Bhkuttpk. Hii iii Hkuyfl'rthkuapka id'hIi,

ibBiKforii je I will Mporntw. If I iliuiilil ncpnrale (bur) friim you,

tsft'shnl ni'Hh nl skuyA'Hhkimpk.

rurever ttom yoii I ahiiU lUvorit (hi'i)

Kd-i iniMli III hft'nk ki'tgik; uriimktiiuutii kt'iktak pfia iii'h n hft'nk h^ni- ,'{

Nut yim I ttmt tiitellUrn uIh.iiI ivi'ivlliliili In tell llie «lnne to yiiii I tliilt ti'

tflldi Inilti

kanktgikj iiii'-ulukt gi'tki 1 Hiiawil'dHluiMli IcIii'Hli kuktak pil. KA-i n

Iplluldi to otMorv « thaliiw* you wIIm nlwi in Ml tho onJjr. Not I

truth

hA'nk gi'tkik ni's pfla, liihasluidkHliHHb tcliisli ii/mukaiiHli.

thin tnilntrll to you only, (but) t« men li«) ull (otlieri.)

Ul.

SnAwedsh tcliik sluVldshasli .shot61xa, t«ui nat ktoktatska; at liiliik 6

A foin»Io (If) with n Kolillor copulutfH, then we rot her hnir ofl'i hlw

yakil'wa nil'-ulaks, ka-i hfl'nk tiVinCna Hhuiifl'kanksh nAlarn lalakiaiii.

broke the law, not »lie lliit^nn to the bebetta of our eliU<fa.

'I'cliiii tchik titdtiia heshsx'ilpGH sfSsatuish m'nAlam, tsiii szo'ktuank tchil'k

Alao Konietlniea nhe ncilitnliia the |ii lee paid to tlieni. luid liy lutyinu

I brough burtet' ( tor bei )

IidshszalpCli. Tsiii simwii'dsli tcliish nuBh hishuaksh wut6d8lu8h ni'iia ])!l'ii U

ahe ri'obt»ln» It. And wHi> one huHlmnd who repiidliiteil lii» iiualu

lifi'nk sni'ikp'la, tsiii nii'-ulekan titiitnan liiVniaHht=gi8ht shriii'kp'li.sht la p

her tgkea up, then chaatlae 1 (liltn) miiriellniea I becnuao he look her liuck fur two

.-hi'ippash spftihi, titatnattJks iii iidiiu shappasli, titatna tchfn Mash slu'ippasli

luoniha Imprlaon, Imt Homtalincn I Inrtlnre moDtbH, lU tiniea and I for one month

spti'lhi. Tsiii tch' hishtchukta hu'k kat laliipa wti'wans gitk ; tsiii tsiii nil'- 12

Imprlaou And quarrel thev who two wives navei and thua I or-

(hloi).

ulka skuyii'shkan. KA-i ni iia'-ule^a, HguyushkuyA nl; ga'tak. Tftatna

(and) aeparate (them) I. No more I try (Iheni) In aoparatejuat ' .i...-- .1... a i...«.

der

tbnt'n the
end of It.

tch pAlla shash rui-iints hihassuakKart snawiidsh, tchiii ni na'-ulkan ndan

itlao aedueea (them) other married men n female, then I try (her) I land) for

three

sappash spAihi. 15

months Imprlaon.

Tchui shish^ka tftatna, tchui nAyans wudsAya; hiVnkst nt nash sil'nde

And they fight «ometlme». and otBors they injure i him I one week

spiiihi, kat saa lifi'k wudsliAya. Tftatna tch 8hi8h6ka shipap6lank8taiit hak,

impriaon, who them baa whipped. At times alao they have amoDi; eaeh other only,

' flRhta

ka-i shA'tka, sissukiiya hak; tsui ni nd-ul6ka hfi'nkiasht kakat hAk sissoka. 18

not Injure, but scuffle merely ; then I try those who had the row.

LAp su'ndin hipukAyans ilhi'. Tftatna udii'pka hissuAksh snawa'dsh m'ua;

Fortwo weeks I both partlea lockup. Sometimes whipe a husband wife bls;

hiVnks ni hi8suAksa8 spdihi ndAn sil'nde ; ha kaa ud6pkpakuapk suAwedsh

that I bnaband hwk up fur three weeks; if roughly he should whip wife

m'na, hu'inasht n'unk gfu<> ndAn sunde apil'lhi. Tftatna tch snAwtidsh 21

on that account I hini

for three
(Other!)

weeks imprison.

Sometime* ulwi

a wife

MANNET?S AND CUSTOMS.

, '"'"' *"*■' ^ "'fe that panlsh, not the

hishuiiksliasli, lap siiudG.

huHliiinil, (iir tH(i weeks.

Tsui tchik kiuks tclii'ah tftatna tawi shash, tsi'ii link k'l6k<4 tawi'sli.

Then

Ht times hewilHien them,

aeon. ,.„„ ,„,me« newilehes them, nn.l dies theliewilch.cl

!.«"' V' ' tVi' '' i?."' ^i' «"'• «'''4Mja^l. spu'll.i siukst ; tsi'ii tchik watch nisli

iiiu. I try(i,ir,», a,„l for Hve monthn imprison f„r mun. mul (if) horsoH („ mo

Hlau^rhtur ;

''I'^iff ^'le'J'' *,f '' "/ ^''■' '^t'"'"^'* «Zokti'sht nisli. 'IVui tch laki ts ktiVpka

i.ei.».\« H^o. then 1 „oi nm.v imprison hHiavioK ,mia me, Aml,il) a eWef heats

6 ni'iia siiiiwiidsh, tsui iit sua'kchia ; yii'tak laki <.i hiik.

'''* "'f'' then I remove (hlmi; no longer chief ?v. ho.

mains

NOTES.

58-62. The legal piactiet-s, leguhitioii.s, and oidiuauci-s given Leie by a subchief of
tlu' Klamatli Luke tribe urv obseive.l by nil tlip cliiefs, and are apparently fii.slnc.ned

alter Aniericiin i lel.s. The iniiieiple whieh .seems to guide most of the judieial de-

ci.sion,sof the chiefs, is given in one (59, L'(». L'l) of the,se regulations: "If a chief makes
iuw like white i.eople, that will be right."* This article is compos.-d of three parts :

l'((rt J. List of the chiefs acting iis. judges on the reservation in J877.

I'ldt 11. Legal customs governing the Klamath Lake jteople.

I'artlll. Instances of application of the.se legal customs; amount of tines, terms
of impri.soimient, etc. These are the >'«o(r//rt^" of Klamath legislation.

58, 1-.?. P'li'i, r.ilii, and some other headmen mentioned here have signed the treaty
of Oct. 1-i, 18()4.

58, 4. Moatnash. 'I'here are only two Pit River fumUku living on the whole
leservation.

58, 8. Tchaktot belongs to the Yaluiskin tribe of Snake Indians. Of. Ind Alt'
Kepoit 187;>, p. ;!:.'4.

68, 10 et(.-. Tlie future tense eui])loyed in the.se behests, regulations and defeiLses
recalls the French future used in an iini)ressivc manner instead of the imj)erative: tn
Hv tmruK pobit, tii m: ih'n)ben(H jxiint.

58, 10. shli-uai>U shash. 'i'he laonoun shash has Jiere almost the force of a reei-
[irocal pronoun, for the :i:eaning of the .sentence is: "do not shoot at people of your own
tribe." The same is true of sas in i)alluai)k sas. 68, 10; 68, Vi (twice); m'llia sha.sh,
61, 14.

58, 10. ksaggayuai)kamsni is pronounced as one word, as the removal of the accent
from the syllalile -uaitk demonstra.es; and so in many of the following verbs standing
in the future tense. For the sake of (clearness, 1 have jnvferred to resolve these Ibrms
graphically into their ctmiijonent elements.

68,11. wat.sam, etc. The ])o.ssessive watsaiii stands here instead of the insmi-
meutal case watsiitka through attraction from wiinnikisham. Tchikla here means to
ride away on another's horse, the horse being missed by his owner.

•DavoHill h.tioducos hiiuwaf m the fust i.erson us iliu'l'; but many of tlieBC^7d8ioD8 can bo
Xiven by the iKinUbU-f only, not by any of tbu sub<bi.fn, Ic, wlioso nniubor J)avo Hill belonK<Ml. Tb«
.MiKloPN af Vdueks ilaiiu to obacrve tljese n.>gulatiou.s ; tlir Snake Iniliaua do not.

LEGAL CUSTOMS OF THE KLAiMATH LAKE rEOl'LE.

58, 15. slietcliilktaiiuai)k .stands for the more coiinuou form : .shitchaktammpk

58,16. ndnuktua sh^shatuish m'ua: "all what your hiisbaml has trausferred to
yonr parents to obtain your liand"; m'na atamls for hi luiak.sham. C-f. 61, 8.

69, 7. mieh, you, to you, is oft«ui used in this articl:^ lor niiilasii, miilsh, ye, to ye, in
allocutions to twoov more persons. This is a way of cxincssins what may be callud the,
"inclusive plural of the second person". This ukmU' of speaking is observed in m's
li'ipuk, 69, 7; l.ipuk misb, 69, 7. In the same mann<'i' ■ stands for fit, 69, 8: i sissok
uapk, if ye whip eaeli other; also 6Ci, 22.

69, 9. i mi stands for mish mi.

69, 17. hii kfii {^i'uapk: if be shoulil fail t(» do his duly ; 59, 1!». bil tid.sh gi'uapk :
if he does his duty well ; nanuktuiinta : in every resiiect .

69, 22. i';fak8 mi: what you may win by betting on the lioi.ses engaged in the race.

60,2. ka'lish is the objective case of kii'liak, kcli;ik. "not liaving", the simple
form of which, without -ak, would be kii'li or kii'liu (kii'li hiij.

60,11. tflma wiiteh gitk. The horses have, of course, to be transferred to tim
jiarents of the bride and uoi to any of the chiefs.

60, 12. w^tch. The horses owned by the Klamath Ijake and Modoc jieoplc an-
valued from 20 to 25 dollars each ; they descend from the hardy, enduring laie oC
Cayuse ponies, ajid Avere originally obtained by bartering commodities with the Colum-
bia Eiver Indians at the Dalles, Oregon.

60, 15. wdtch spuni'-uapka ; watch rel'ers to one hor.se only, for the verb spuni', to
transfer, is used of one (living) object only; shiiwiina is: to give ni'Miy ol)je(ts. " Not
even one horse your Avife has to gi\<' to you, if she leaves you ; but ii' you le;ive her,
you must give her several."

60, 17. ]&\) snawii'dshla. I'olygaiuy was abolished by the headmen of the tril)e
shortly after the e.stablishnu-nt of the reservation, and this ruling was one of the great-
est benefits ever conferred upon that tribe by tMe progress of civilization. Hiit those
who had several wives then were not coiupelled to dismiss all but one, and .so in 1877
two or thiee men were still i)olygauiists. The irascllile and excitable disposition of the
Modoc and Klamath females must have produced many chiii-music intermezzos with
their husbands at the time .vhen jtolygainy was ])redoMiinaiit.

61, 3. Kil-i lui'sh etc. In thisparagra])h, iii: ki'tgik, kAktak,heinkanktgik, gitkik,
the terminal k contains the abbreviated gi, which joined to the foregoing nfi, n means
] mid. The construction runs as follows : Hd'nk ni gi ka-i mish ki'tgi ; minuktuaiita
k^ktak gi pila m's n hu'nk ht'smkanktki gi ; nii'-ulakt gi'tki i snawil'dshash fclii'sh
k^ktak gi pil. Kai etc.

61, 0. tchik. This ])arlicK' does not mean i/, but cannot be rendered lirrc (and
below) with a more appropriate word. It is identical with tchek, tlwii. A subordinate
clause is here expressed by a co-ordinate one. Of. 61, 'J. 10. 12. 62, 1.

61, 0. kt^iktatska: "we clip their hair in every instance", is the distributive lorm
of kt6tchka, ktotska, occurring in 58, Hi.

61, 0. Tsui etc. This inverted sentence has to be couslriied as follows: Tsiii t hisl.
iiAsh hfshuaksli wutddshish snawji'dsh m'na pii'n hu'nk snfikp'la, tsui nii'-ul{'kan ou'.

MANNERS AND CUSTOMS.

HtjMASHT lalIki n^-ulakta Kakashash.
DOCTOR JOHN TRIED BY THE CHIEFS.

Obtained in tub Klamath Lake Dialect.

I. ACCOUNT OF DAVE HILL, SUBCHIEP.

Then they trea^e.l several conjurers, (and) Aunt Snsie

tchiite,; tchui sumtsal;^^ Doctor John a ffdn tawi ■ tiV i\wUA fnf/. n^ *■

trente.1 then (she) .Uscovore.l (that) Dr iV,!,,, ^.^ i , V ', I'lVVipk, tatU DoctOl"

(liira); "'"' '"'""iJ'-- •l"liii him bow.lehe.1; over he bewitched when D»<t«r

o T 1 , , """■« (liim),

I killed:

liee

'Si\^^.^£j;!il'fei^ ^^'^ ±i l>^'"k mdklaks 161a Tetg.natsf-

up ■' ' auontall the IndinnH believed Aunt

i^ ^^'i^SlrfSk^^ ^^^ir^ Doctor Jolin, tft'm he^mkank na-a«ht:

""'" ^'- Jubn. atlongth hespoko ihiw:

!Se^"^*^»S,J;»''SS.''-Te...^.«, AUalayhu.^^
1 lien 161a, kgldmtsank si'tk Ift'dshna; kd-i nti hd'nk siiiffat K4tik nTLn

yo u..eve. clOHinBy„„reye..aUko walk alon., ' -„,h I 1. ''"f f" f^.f^a. 'V

'' ^''^!^' l{!±t' "£«h shlaVopk ha'nikankst. Tud nl £ta'-uapk

„!•' ,, . , , /. " , ,, '"^'"' ^>»I»pe»k. What I wonMhaveprollted

S f "IS; s '',S» *&!, ™f s"" !A ¥.-■ ■;■ ^i^ *t»i'

16 ,anaho-ll; ha' ni Vji^ku^f, hdmoshtak t Mnl;,, Uiik,M, gi„t „a'.l,

... . _,. , «ball perish. equally ye will perish ns Ilm?e died.

"" "»'■'' aUuver. FornocAUHB thus niu

DOCTOR JOHN TRIED BY THE CHIEFS.

spfi'lhi: kd-i tchfn w/ik 6'skank. Undsa' ni nd-ulakuapk; la'nwak na'-

pri8,n' ""' I about it am angry. Son... timo I Bhall armiRn (lK.r) , ' :,ot I know to have

ule^a Tdtmatcliishash wAk hft'nk nen sdmtsalka; la ni wdk na'-ulaktanuapk

*"™ Aunt Susie for thi» maimer bv shu fminilonr. tint, t !,„,.,« i, * i „^ ..r.

for tbt* niaiiuer by
which

8ho fuund out; not I kuow

how to proceed aguiuHt

(hor)

sheshamtsalijrfshash hil'nk. Tdnkt nii'ilsh ni shii'gsuapk mdlash lalakiash. 3

furdi»c«verlngallaoout it. That tinm ..,y„ I will apSk ont'n^y toyo chTeft.

Ed-i nil shayuaktant Tetgmatsi'aas ; hfi'nk p'liiit^lkni shayudkta Tetgmat-

**"" ' '""™ Hl»,.tS..8io, it th«Mo8tUiMli 1>-;,„W8, AuntSu.

sfsas wdk gisht sil'mstsalkst, wdk ta ntl'sh tchlsli kdtak sha'gshasht

.10 in which ,u«nn..r d„covBred (it), (buuhow me al«, ,ho truth t„ ^,ve told

sla'popka n'sh luVnk. Sakdmkst pi tsf n'sh htl'nk ne-ulakuapk, ha ni 6

ha««.«n mo (ho). ^^^^B 'h„ thn» mo .-,.,.8t pani,!.* 'if I

siki'tnank sii'gsuapk. Kdtok ni gd-u silgsa'wa ; tchi ni hii'skank "

f»l»ely reporting should spoak. Truth I °my thmklsay, thus I think."

lYtemadshish hu'nk nd-asht k'ldkuish at gi : " Kdtak am'sh nt sdmt-

Annt Susie m after the doath had said; "Truly you I have

(of Prtkiah)

sal^a, sufa mi'sh gd-u sijid ; i' Inln sfuga, nii'nsak toks i nen sakamka. 9

foun.iuul.tnu.4„u^ y„„ ,„, ,,„,„eon, you tjjat murdfred, in vain you give a denial.

Nd-asbt kiikiaks tsu'ssak siukiik; kfya hu'nk nd-asht gi'uff; tfds taks mi'sh

" co^Ju^rors always after kiliinK, ^^iTo^^ when so saying P ' pretty well you

ni killed m's ni. Udhak hil'k na'-uhiks K'nuikdmtsam : nd-asht hu'nk

I know you I. Long years this (was) the law of K'n.rtkamtoh : in this manner

ha'nikanktgi sfukuk maklaksas. Hiimasht tchi nen hdmkanka i', Doctor 12

to HpHak

a pertHUi

That wnv

talk

yoti,

afUT mur-

John!" Tsf liji'mkank T^tematsis shapuk.

John!" So spoke Susie whon sneak-

inn (about it).

Tsiii laldki wdltka. "Sfuga i'", tchf ndnka wdhk lahiki; ndnva ts

Then .the chiefs deliboratod. "Killed you", »n some uttered ehiet"; others

(him)

"kd-i shfuk i'" sii'wa; tsdi tchl'k sa wdltaknapk.

"not killed you" thought ; and afterward they wore to dolihoriti-
"""" as;ain.

II. ACCOUNT OF MINNIE FKOBEN.

Tt'temadshish hil'nk shiunii'tnuk sh(initchal;{a tawi'sht Doctor Johnash

AuntSuKui hy singing tam4una,sh. discovered that had bo- Dr. .John

^ songs witched

E-ush guni'gslita mdkhiksha.sh tchl'pksh. Tekmal gena Doctor JtShnauiksh

mluh'So "Trf" """"""" """*=■ '^«'"""' '"""f™" »"Dr. .lohn's lodge

shndkidshuk tchfi'tantki gfug hfi'nk shiUalpksh, kdnt sha Doctor JtShn- 18

'■ailing (him) totr.>al that (man) who fell sick, whom they Dr. ,John

ash tdwiaiik shi'uks gishapa. Tchui h<i'nk Doctor John tchutanhuva;

*w^?ohed" '*"''>'""'"' »»'•'• 'i'"' Wm Dr. ,Tohn treated a whiYe,

kdyak tfdsh we'mp&hink k'lekd, tchui sa shiiina k'lekuish tuti'ks m'ndlam

never lecoverlng lied, then they sang afloi his death dreams their.

MANNERS ANT) (TSTOMS.

Tsui Toteniadshish hii'iik sheintcli<il;^a tawi'sht iJoctor Ji)luiaish k'lckan-

Tlii-n AuntSii«ii' iliwovorcd that liiiil lu' Pr. Joliii llic (Ic-

kasli; tsi'ii nibiVsliant waitolank iia-eut waitashtUa i'lktclia; Doctor Joliiiash

ce,i8i)il| aii(\ iioxtiliiy lii'inj; over dii other il:i.v biirivil(liiiiil ; Ur. Jiiljii

o tilii'sli slia shpunslina, at klcwiauk sha Doctor Johiiash shpunshaiupelank

ftliin tlipy touvi'Vi'il, now alter tliiir return Dr. J. Iiu liililii^' alciu);

slipi'illii, tohi'ii slui ka-ishiiank ski'ikum-liouso uipaiupatkia tchikemiiiatka.

iuiprisolieil, and tli.y Inekiug the strongliuuw uallvil (it) ilown witlitiron) nails.

Tchikciskni Shkelaksh tu'la shpi'ilhi Dortor Johiuusli. 'IVlmi tcliiwi'xii

Tcliike«l<ni Skel^ij: with iiiipriwmeil Dr. John. And Ije mil in"

() liAtokt, tcliiii luVkslia gil'inpele spullii'tkuk. Piiii iida'ni tchek wait6Iaiik

therein, and these men w.'ut lionie alter ini|iri*inaient. Again three at liwt days p«Ht

Slip^i'lag gjitpa ktiVtp'imk i)Ti»h; tdiiii S^t'lag ga'mpele kdyjik liassasiij'ikiank

SliOIaj: eaniB tii liriii;; (htltl) fmiil ; and Sli6hi« returned nnl at all liavin;; spolien

Doctor Johnash. Pan gc'iia S;^elag ndfini wait61aiik pasli iiufyuk ; shu'lip-

toDr. John. Auain went SkelaR three d^ivs elapaid vietilaU to b'rinn ; hand

9 kank i)'laikni hak slu'wnna Doctor .loliiiasli, l*'iri toks lapPni slicwaiia

ins Iromahuve there lie jiare ilheni) to Dr. John, lilow however tniee aavri

iiayaiit waitaslitat. IliVkt ])il na'd.sliek; luVksha toks, iiiiiika kd-i lnVmasht

another on day. 'l'hi» one (was) the only (Uio ; those <menl (did), othi'r (men) not like (hini)

sht'waiiat slii'ukslitka giug Doctor Joliiiasli. 'rchusliak If'ipi slia sliikoiiitksh

^•ave (any lood) kill in order Dr. .John. lonMlantly two they a pistol

'*' (lueni

1-* shishi'tilatk shliiitiiapkug liiViik. Agency tdiui gt'])kslit tapi' ti'ta sliasli,

'""■'"■" ■■■■'"■ to tire iMi him To the Aseney (llieyl hail ....

Kone

were iMnvin^ in
tlirir dii

iit'uT a wliilo til

ktiug'fuliuik kii-ishtish, tolnii wiitch hatokt tkiVtkapksli shliUnik oe'lilap-

he kicked open th 'm-nnvi, ami a iioiHe (In-ir 8ta^(liu^^ limlhi^r (lie) luoimtr.l

tchapka, lu'ua unakani <i*atpi^TU)laslh Tchui gi'tu hushotpa aoency, tchui

"' "'■'" "" ' ' ' tu the jiseiiey, :ui(l

IlJH

Imvint; nitiie (with
till- horse).

'i'lieii Jiere lie rode np

ya-uks niOnamksh gatpenank guli'. Tcliui agenci'nfsli hikiasli liashasbu-

iu the physieiau's house eouiini; entered And ' to the nyent he np-

akia, Mfnniash shahaniuyank shmVntatkii l;'ikiiiwi

pled, I'or Minnie sendintr' to inler|ucl

liiiSM liiisiiasiuiaKitKi giug.

lot Lollversill;: ui(h.

ent

lakitki

NOTKS.

64, 1. Ill Si'|)teinbei' 1.S77 I'likisli, an t'klcil.y Indian, dictl alter a. vi'i;v .sliort illness
on tlu.' western side of tlpjuT Klauiatli Lake. The iiniior that he had lieen bewitehed
and thereby feloniously killed by Kakasli, one of the conjurers wlio treated liiiii, soon
j,'ained eretlenee, and the exeiteiueiit in the tribe ran hij;li. The lirst account of the
occnirence was obtained i»y one of the .snbchiefs. who, witli iii.s colleiii>ues, passed
sciiteni'e over the niilbrtnnate Kiikash.

64, 1. hft't, "this one", forms one of the substitutes for iiiiiiies of deceased persons,
which no ludian dares to pronounce. IliVt refers to a iier.soii staiidinj,- visibly ic/(>rc
the .speaker, and it is reinarkal)ie that the dead are referred to Ity this jKonoun, and not
by a pronoun marking distance out of sifiht, like hiikr, iiiVkta etc. (T. iiiVt hishiiaksb,
64, t»., jxen. 64, I'., hiVnk pi'sh. 64, 5., 68, 11. etc The subject iiiinka kukiaks does not
exclude the use of the .sHiltJect pronoun slia. tlni/. the account bein^ worded in the con-
versational stvle.

DOCTOR JOHN^ TKIED BY THE OfTIEFS.

64, 1. Tetfimrulsliish or Aunt Susie i.s one of the iinmorous female " doctors", wlio
eke out a scanty living from some patients of the Klamath Lake tribe. She received
the above name for liavinj,' been a wash-rwoman to the soldie.s .stationed iit Fort Kla-
math, and the nickname Wfiya-ak was bestowed on her on account of her predilection
for small sucker fish.

64, •_'. siinitsiil;ja. The means employed by her to discover that Dr. John had
cast upon the patient a spell of a deadly cliaracter, were the singing or recital of taman-
uash songs, and the dreams which she had on that subject. Her tamdnuash songs had
xecii those ol the accused conjurer. See 65, !>. The great majority of the tribe still
believes in the possibility of witchcraft.

64, 7. The two sentences contained in this line anticipate the result of the whole
trial, and the popular verdict. The projjcr plaw for them would be after 65, 15.

64, 9. Tuil ni etc. The defense made by Dr. John in his own case is not an unable
onfe, nor ia it devoid of oratoiical powers. l!ut if the arguments were delivered in the
order as given by Dave Hill, they ouglit to have followed each other in a more logical
order to attain their full efl'ect.

64, 10. wdk lish etc. The logical connection existing between tliis sentence and
the foregoing lias to be supplied by : " why .should he have been my personal enemy?"

64, 10, 11, 1,-) etc. i, ik .stands !». ve for at {yt); because, when"^ the headiaiief is ad-
dressed in council, all the others a. addressed also. Loli stands for lola i. The trial
took idace on William.son I'iver.

64. 13. kukamtchish. Tiie distributive form is used here in.stead of the absolute
verbal k'mu'tchish, because old age comes on nmtUinJhj, hi/ dqimx.

64, 10. tchi insh instead of tchi ni.sh: th(;ianguage lilies juxtaposition of two short
equal vowels, even when a metathesis is required.

65, .S. Ki'itak etc. Aunt Susie's opinion, given just alte • Pukish's death and some
time bifore the trial, did not fail to have a striking ettect on ibe superstitious judges
and tribe, for her arguments perfec^tly iigre.; with the national ideas. But to us the
arguments seem so weak, that no convi<'tion seems jiistitled, if not based on other
evidence.

65, 9. uii'nsak etc. " Your defense does not disprove any of the points advanced
against you."

66, 11. K'mukfimtsam nii'-ulaks : " the old customs of the people."

65, l(i. The second i!-;count of this tamAnuash-case was obtained a few weeks afier
the trial ; Dr. John was present at the agency buildings at the time of the dictation,
furnishing the facts to my informant.

66, 4. kii-ishnank etc. This underground jail was in such an unhealthy condition
that Dr. John could not have lived in it through the tenth part of his long term of
impri.sonment.

66, 5. Tchikeskni and Skelag, names of two watchmen (i-dlhish); the chiefs appoint
watchmen from time to time. Sk61ag is "the young weasel" and Tcbik^,skni '-nian
living at Tehik<5si camping-place". They were armed with jiistols to foil any attempt
at escape.

66, 10. na'dshek f' , n. '..yli ak : "the only oue". Compare uddshiak, 60, 21 : waitak,
56, 7. and Notes. '

38, 12. shishi'tilatk. Th« past participle often stands for forms of periphrastic
conjugation: shishftilatko gi, tln-y «r/r<'arrying in their <lress. Cf iUolatko, 65, 20.

MANNERS AND CUSTOMS.

66. 13. f (i'lilaptcbapka. The verb gelApka means to step on, to mount, a«cend ;
wil]« 'h infixed, to mount upon something by using one's hands ; ge'hldptcha is to per-
form ibis while on tlie way, while going or travelling; ge'hlaptchapka, to perform this
at a distance from other peoi)le and unseen by tlietn. Doctor John escaped, aided by
his son, in the midnight hour.

66. 14. m'na linaivam gatpCn6ta8h. Gatp6n6ta is a derivative of gitp'na with a
durative signitication, the suflix ota pointing to .•'n action performed while another is
going on. " His son having arrived close by, ^vhile he was imprisoned."

88, 10. shnfl'ntatka, verbal intentional of sbnfi'nta, the suffix -tka being sometimes
substituted for the usual -tki, -tki giug.

PUNISHMENT OF MANSLAUGHTER THROUGH WITCHCRAFT.

Obtained fuo.m "Sekgka-Nt" Moroax in tiif, Klamath Lake Dialect.

Tina m4klaks ma'ntcbgi'tk nd-ar-,bt gi: "tu sal;^i'ta snavvt'dsh gd-u

Oaoe man long agn '■ 'M. Hpoke: "ovc is bewitched wife my

shfllalsht! 1 a-i tawi!" Tsui tchikash skuyui t,udkithatki gfug; tsiii gdna

liavinu fallt-n yon iipwitchpil Then nn old man ln'Rentnnt to call a conjurer; an<i he

«iclii (her) I" sUrtO'l

3 tchfka s«udkitsuk, tsi'ii sliuakiuk nddna, tsiiyuk tunigna shuishuk, kfuksam

theold to fetob the coil- nntl to rallhini oiii halloed, and he heard the niapic wongH, conjurers'

man Jnrer,

yafnatat shui'ali; dti ha shiifshuk. Tsui gdna kfuks tsut/insuk, tti'shtaks a

on tberoonn-
tain

songs;

far (are) songs Then jioch thoron- to treat (her), to the spot

away these. jurer where

salpjfta. At shti'ta hu'nk, tchui hantsna. Gi'tpa mu'us summatka, shul'shuk

slio lies Now ho works on lier. ami sucks. t'omesout o higthitig through (hin) tosing

bewitched.

moiiih,

<j tpdwa, sunimAtka hdntsantkiug. Tstii hantchipka, tsui putd, tsui hiisatchip-

heordnrs with (his) mouth while ho would snck Then ho sucks nut, aud feels nurt throws up

(those present). on. choked.

gapgle hilnshish m'na; sx(i'd;^a .utatkish. At hfi'k s^^tka, kii-i huki' tsutish

again sucked^out his; swallows (it) (his) esT'onnder. Now he hasswal. worse that being

article (after) l.iwid (it), (patient) trealeil

gi'ntak, kii-i gi, wigd telsdinpka k'lii'ksh. Kiiiks hu'k tcM-ulxa, shu'kpal-

In spite of, worse is. almost she looks towards the Conjtr.rer the starts to leave wtintlng to

(she) spirit land.

9 taking kii-i gi'sht ka-i gi'l^isht pdsh; tchui hfi'k na-asht gi kAlamtak

retire worsrt hecnnHn (an<U paosinj; through the food ; hereupon hit thim Hpenks whose r^r

Hbe turned not (bowels)

sn^wedsli shi'la shal^i'tnuk, kiukshash: **i a-i tawi luinksh." Tchuyuk

wife issick for being bewUohed, to the conjurer: "yon have her." Bat

bt^witcheil

sakAmka kfuks: '*kd-i a nil tdwit! shi'Iaka hiit!" kiuks tchiii na'sht

op-v)8e8d{'niftI the otn- "nut I fUd bewitch bnd berome flhe!" ronjurer then bo

the otn-
Jurer :

I did bewitch bnd berome
(her) I nick (before)

12 h($mkaiik. At k'liika snawddsh.

BAld. Xnw difM the woman.

inJNlHliMENT OF MAN.SJ.AUOHTER.

WudokA Iui8lit86;ja sha kfuksas Hdl^itnuk kl^ksht hunk snawtjdshash.

Stniok (and) kllied they the coivlurer Tnr IicIdk bo- haTlnii died tbin Wuman.

witched (and)

TsTii sa liiluksla snauddsh klr.ksam sfuks; luVnk sa kiuksas il'mpele

Aud oieniated tbevonian by tbe conjurer killed) him they thecoiv|urer brougbt back

tchl'slital, tsiii sa liiluksla nic'iklaks.

to (bin) lodge, and cremiitcd the peoplt.

(him)

NOTES.

68, 1 etc. TUis is a pretty good illustration of the inetliod of doctoring by suction
adopted in similar tiunAnuash cases. Persons sent out to call for the conjurer <lo not
enter liis cabin, but loudly lialloo outside till be appeiirs ; in this instanct; he is suit-
posed to sing bis medicine songs amidst tbe solitary wilds of the mountain sloiios.

88, 1. ma'ntch=gi'tk. This temptaal adverb i»hices the mode of punishment de-
scribed by the informant among the ancient customs of the people. Compared to what
is stated here, the trial of Doctor John shows a material modification in the dealings
with suspected conjurers, attributable to the influence of the white population.

68, ]. 10. saljfita is always used in a passive signiflcation, "to be afflicted with the
tiimanuash spell or bewitching power", which conjurers can send out at will.

68, 1. 2. The words inclosed in quotation marks nnticipata all that follows up to
68, 10.

68, 2. 8. a-i. This particle has the signification : "undeniably, evidently".

68, 5. shii'ta hfi'nk. The "working" of a ctnijnrer on a patient's body consists in
rubbing, pressing, magnetizing, in blowing on it, and in jtonring water over the face or
other parts. Su<;king out tlu^ object which caused the disease is of coiuse the i)rincipal
operation called for to effect a cure.

66, 5. iiiu'ns; it is not stated whether this hdnshish was a frog, a worm, a small
stick, or any such thing; this is immaterial, for the Indian strictly believes that the
article was removed from the jiatient's body and that it caused the disease.

68, 0. hiintsantkiug and 68, s : shukpaltakiug stand for liAntchantki giug and
shukpaJttki giug; cf. shfl'kpfli.

eft.0. hiiutchipka properly means : "he sucks towards himself "; husatchipgapeie
"he throws uj) again to himself"; viz. into his month, so as to be able to take it out
\vith his hands.

68, 7. lutatkish is the conjurer's assistant, liis ofiice is to repeat his tunes or
speeches before those present in the h)dge, to expound or explain his sayings, to start
songs and tunes in his stead, and to perform such manipulations as mentioned here.

68, S. k'la'ksh, contracted from k'liikapkash, the dead, the deceased ; k'lekdpkash
telshrt,mpka, to be on the point of death.

68, 8. tch6ul;^a : he rises from his seat on the ground, or on a blanket near the
l»atient's couch, for the puq)ose of leaving.

69, 1. liushts(')/a. The killing of a doctor or doctress by the relatives of the pa-
tient who died under his or her treatment was nothing unusual in the Columbia Basin
until quite recently. In some tribes the third failure in curing brought certain death
on the coiyurer, especially when he had received his reward in advance.

ill

' fi

MANNERS AND CUSTOMS.

ili

SHAMANIC DANCE-DIRECTIONS.

GivKN BY Davk Hill in thr Klamath Lakh Dialrct.

"WAlok mat ttl'nepni wait6]at ndt jrdnuapka ksliiulilktaufipkuk \ve-

"Fort eatiug tlurlugBvo -liiyH wo hIhiU no tu bave o (lonco the

wala'ksh tchish. At gdntak i'lksat p/in a. Wfl'sa ni luskuapkuff. Kflank

..1(1 women nlso. Ye almll go od a fenst to int. I fenr I may got to<> warS. Load

(men)

3 al tsufnuapk; tiinepni at nfttfah tsui'nuapk. At tchish hihashnaksh ksfu-

yo mnBtBlnn; at ave ye flroa ye have t« nlng. Ve too (worn™ niid) lillowa bi-gin

laktampka Htstaki-ak; untsa'g nii'tnag- pi'i-ua])k tft'iii mbil'shant. "Sfhilsh

tnilnnoo with ei- /■lion j liy anilby ihoii ye«hall«,.t plonty tomorrow.

■Ul»

mat na'baknapk'' kluks nc4-asht shapa, yayaya-as mat nd-asht s.ipa; "kii't-

wlllroiuonn" ihosha- thns »ay», sonic tnniiSniiu8h. (to hlni) "itinso" Bays; "oraniall-

"!"'* IlKUlk'illO

kaks mat sfssalaluapk" yayaya-aa mat na-ast shapa. SuAssuaktch mak

pox it nays will suffer (the peo- the tainilnuaah iii«f «<. anva a,„«„.o»!..» _~

plo) "

JUMt SO

Are weeping

laks nannk wu8s6ga kil't;^akR. NA-ast kfnks walok sapa: "TAniii flksh

l'"" •'" afraid of smnllnox. So the sbn- before Bpiaks: "How many food-

mail awoutliig buckets

.shJi'tu at? tankSni at i'lksh? LApni td-unepanta pii'n tunep pti-ula:

do ye count? Iiow many already bnoketa? Twice ten and flvei

9 kdnk a ni sa'iu."

no ninny I iciiint."

NOTES.

70, 1 etc. This is a fair speciuum of the careless, juison-Iike conversational style
in vogue among tlic ft-iikNiiikni, and witiiont coinnientarics iiiul glosses it would be
impossible to get at the tiut^ iiieaiiiiig.

These directions are intended to gather the people at the comuinnal dance-
hoiise for a dance lasting live nights. The dance is performed around the (ires with
almost superhuman exertions, in order to ])roduce profuse iierspiration and to i»rtnent
thereby any inf(,';tir)ii by (iiscase. The foiijiiivr or .shaman is cliarged with tlie inaugu-
ration of all dar.cfs, most of wliich are of a religious cliaraeter. Tliis liiiid of sweating
is called "wdliv" , while sweating in a temazcalli or 8weathou.se is "spukli". The kinks
is introduced as speaking all these words. The jmrticle mat indicates that the words
given are those of another than of the narrator.

70,1. waitijlat; in common parlance: tiinepni waitash gi'ulank, or : tiinepni giu-
lank, or in Modoc tunepui waitolau.

70, 1. kshiulaktcha ditterent from ksiul6;fa; see Grammar (List of suflixes). These
daiKies take place in winter time and are held from two to four times every season.

70. 2. wewalii'ksh. This is one of the festivities from wliich old women are not
excluded ; they often take part in the daneo them.selves.

DETAILS OF A CONJURER'S PRAOTHK.

70, 2. i'lks (from (!l;fa, il/ii, to lay down) m tho full dlsb, basket, or bucket (kiila), on
which the victuals arc brought in ; but it means also tho food itself, and the dance-feast
on wliith tlioy are eaten, fiocative case: I'lksat.

70, .'!. sluiiua is often incorrectly pronounced tsuinu.

70, 'i. nuti'sh ; verbally : while burning fivefold ; while five fires are blazing.

70, .'{. At tclii'sh : the young men, who strip themselves naked down to tho hips
during I lie iierformance, begin their dance after the women have hiul one turn.

70, 5. nii'bakuai)k : see nepka, in Dictioniiry.

70, 5. yayayii-as means a certain tamAiuiash witchcraft which inspires the conjurer:
the conjun-r tells the people Just what (mi ast) the yayaya-as said to him.

70, (i. 7. s, xh is here in three words (loublcd to hk: shishalaluajika, shuashu.'iktchii,
and wiisoga ; kfi't/aks forms the indirect object of the first of these verbs.

70, 7. wAU)k siipa. The kinks gets the inspiration from tho yayayCias only aft«r
sweating ; then he can tell (supa) the peojile, when the disease will come.

70, 8. tiinkSni: after tiinkfini at i'lksh supply itpa? (did ye bring in?).

70, 8. 9. shii'tu, sii'tu for the more usual form shii'tua; pii'n alter td-unepanta is
incorrect and unnecessary ; this conjunction should stand there only after ta-un6pni or
tdrunep.

DETAILS OF A CONJURER'S PRACTICE.

Given in the Klamath Lake Dialect by Minnie Frobrn.

IVIi'iklaks shuAkiuk kfuksasli ku-i giVl'liI hunkClam ludshashtat, nddna

liidiitnA ill callini; the conjur*'!- nnt onter Inn into ItMlge, they

Imllott

8ha'hm6knok; kfuksh toks wi'm kiiikuyank inuinash m'na kaiiftu pi'sli.

to cull (h(iii) out i ihi' conjurer ri'ii fox hansius; o"iit on ii assign his oiitnido "ofhim".

pole.

Kiikfaks tchu'tanish jriit])'iiank wigata tclic^l;ja ina'shipksli. Li'itatkish 3

Conjuri'rs whrn treating approaching cIo^e hv Hitilown the patii'ut. Tho expounder

wigata kfukslifish tcha'hlaiishna. Shuyega kfuks, wtjwanuisli tchik win6ta

closo to thn conjurer sits down. Starta choruses tlie con- females then Join in

Jurer, "inging

liukiAmiumk iiadslia'shak tchfitchtnfshasli. Hdnshna ma'shish hiVnk

crowding around hini siuiullanoouslv wliilo he treats (the sick). ITo sucks diseased that

hishuiikshasli, ti'itktl.sh I'shkuk, liaiitchfpka (chl'k kukiiaga, wishinkaga, 6

tuiin, the disease to extract, liesuclisont then a sniali frog, small snake,

mu'lkaga, kdko gi'ntak, kdhaktok luiuuktua iishendshkAne. Ts'tl'ks toks

small insect.

afterwards, whatsoever

anything

small.

A leg

k^-uslit tchdkele itkal; liilp toks ma'sliisht tchekcditat Igfl'm shiVkglaiik

being Irac
turod

tho (had)
blood

he ex*
tracta ;

but,

being sore

into blood

coal

mixing

ki'tua lu'lpat, ku'tasii tchish kshdwa Iiilpat pti'klash tiu;tampgatk 9

bo pnnrs iuui tho eyes, a louse too introduces into tho the white of protruding

, , . 1 , eye eye

Ituizaktgi glllg.

lor eating out.

w™

MANNRKS AND (HTSTOMH.

NOTK8.

71, 1. Hliui'ikia .1.),..- ....t .ri.'au 'Uo eutt on sornvhodi/" gviioiallv, but onlv "^^ call on
the vonjurcr or ineiliciiu- iiiuu".

71,2. WHi. stuiHlN torwjinuni nl'l: the furor skin of a rod or silv^M- fox ; kaiifta
plHh stands for kiiii.'fiina lutcliuMh in'i.i'il.un : "outside of his lodge or fid.in" The
ineanniKonhestMitcMce is: they raise their voices to call him out. Conjurers are in the
habit ol lasteunifT a fox-skin outside of their lodges, as a business sign, an.l to let it
dangle froui a rod stuck out in an obliciue direcliiui.

71, 3. tch(51/a. During the treat.uent of a j)atient who stays in a wintwhouse, the
lodge is often shut ui> at the top, and the people sit in a cirde inshle in utter da.kuess.

71, r. hukiriu.uank. Th.> wouu^n au.l all who take a part in the chorus usirdly sit
in a cncle around the conjurer and his assistant; tlie sutlix -.nna indicates close
proxniuty. Nadsha'shak (pialifies the verb wiuota.

71, 5. tchutchtnishash. Tin, distributive form of tchfi't'na refers to each of the
vuriouH mainiudations performed by the conjurei' on the i)aticnt.

71, '}. nui'shish, shortened from nirishipkash, miVshipksh, like k'lii'ksh friun k'liik-
fljikash, 68, 8.

71, 0. 7. There is a stylistic incongruity in using the distributive tVuiu only in
kukuaga (kuo, frof,), kiihaktok, and in nsheudshkanc^ (nshekiiui, ndsl.ekani, ts6kaui
tcheki^ni,«»m/0, while inserting the absolute form in wishiukCga (wishink, qart-rmake)
and ni kako; mu'lkaga is more of a generic terui and its distributive form' is therefore
not in use.

71, 7. kfihaktok for ka-akt ak ; ka-akt being the transposed distributive form kJikat,
ot kat, which, what (i>rou. rehit.).

71, S. Igft'm. The application of remedial driius is very unfreciueiit in this tribe ;
and this IS one of the reasons why the term "conjurer" m- "shaman" will prove to bo
a better name for the medicine num than that of " Indian doctor".

71, 9. kfi'tash etc. The conjurer introduces a louse into the eve to make it eat up
the protruding white portion of the sore eye.

KjClak.
THE RELAPSE.

Given in the Klamath Lakk Dialect iiy Lave Hill.

Hii ndyaiis hissudksas nia'shitk kiilak, tsui kfiiks iia'-ulakta tclmtiln-

Wliou another „mn iWl akk :u.nidap»o th..,, the coiOmei- c„„clu,l,m t-. treat

uapkuk. Tchui tcluita ; tcliiii yd-uks link shliiii kAlak a ffek. Tclif Imk

"''""• '^"'' '"'treats, an,) reinmly ihlx flnilH out <ihat) relapsed ho. Thus th»

shui'sb sApa. Tsiii na'sh shui'sh si'iyuaks hu'iutclia kAlak, tcliiii nanuk liQk

sonK-rom- Indicates. And one Boug-rem- hnvioK found (thai) of the kind uf re- then oil those

'"y «<iy out lapsed (he Is), ' ""

shui'sh tpa'wa hii'nksht kaltchitchfkshash heshuiimpglftki fffuo-

Kuieilii.s indicate (that) him the spider (reniBdy) '■■ ^ O'

would cur

Tchiii

Then

THK KKLAI•^SI':.

hfl'k kAltchitchiks yd-uku; ubu-us hftk kAltchitohiksani tchutOiio'tkihh.

tiM iptder trrntalilmi apleoRiif iif tbpnpldor (In) tbti carlnK-tool.

Tsui hunkantktt iihd-ustka tclititu; tiitiiktak link kAlak ma'Bha, gji'tak

Then by meiiim of that drn'rakln hi< tmiti Jiiat thn itio that nliipue itUitecuA, in miiih

(tiiai)} ofiliuflpol

ubd-ush ktil'shka tii'tak huk ina'sha. Tsui hCik ki'iltchitchiks 8iuii6ta ;J

of doiT akin Iwciilnuut im where he In miiririni; Thiin lh« • ■ npider " iiiUK la ■turtt'd

nil'dskank liA'nk iibd-nsh. T(;lul'yuk p'lafta iiotatka HkutaMli, tsiii aha liA'nk

while appiving lint sklnplwo. Ami lie ovrrlt he atrnlihi'a n hl.iiiket, and Ihey It

iidft nka hiin liislitka, tsiii hiVk {fiitaga tHiilii'kslitat ; ;>a'tsa lujif kiati'ga,

Btrllio Willi iniijiirir'nnrrcuva, thin It. inter* iiitu the hmlv j « piirllcln (Irntly enieiii,

tHiii tsule'ks k'lilkf'i, tclu'ii at piishpushuk shlO'sii liAk ubi'i-usli. Tsui nia'ns (J

then (ID Inidy liicjiueB, niiil nuw dark It to liMik lit that »klnplece. Thiii nlliru

while

tiiiikfini ak waftash M'k pdshjuishli at ma'ns jfitk tsulii'ks-sitk sblil'sli. Taf

alter aohud diiya Ihiit liliiek (Ihlngl nt loat (la) Hiali llkti to In<ik iit. Thiia

He ninny

ni adyuakta; tunii hd'nk aliayuakta Iiil'inaslit gislit tchutj'sht; tsi'iyuk

"^ '" " ' " knew, ithnt) In tbia umniier ~ "

am lufermed :

mHiiy men

were effected
curea;

and he then

tsuslini wii'mpele.

iilwHya wna well tigiiln.

NOTES.

72, 1. udyiins liissufiksus: another iiiuii tliim the coiijiirera of the tribe. Tlio ob-
jcctivo case shows that lufi'shitk bus to be leKiinhMl here us the participle of un imper-
sonal verb: iiiiVsha nfish, antl iiia'sha iifi, if iiils me, I am sick.

72, 1. ki'ilak, relapse. l{elai)so is not substantive, Imt u(IJ(H:tivo in the sense ot a
person havinj,' fallen back into the saint! disease by which he was alHitited before;
kalkfila, to fall sick.

72, 2. yd-uks is remedy in general, spiritual as well as material. Here a taman-
uash song is meant by it, which, wiieu smig by the conjurer, will liuiiish him the cer-
tainty if his patient is a relapse or not. There are several of these medicine-songs, but
all of them (ni'inuk lift'k shul'sh) when consulted point out the spider medicine as the
one to apply in this case. The spider's curing-mstrumeut is that small piece of buck-
skin (ubaush) whitih has to be inserted under the patient's skin. It is ciiUetl the
sjiider's medicine because the spider-song is sung during its application. A spider-
song in use among the Modocs is given below.

73, 5. hii'uiishish appears as the subject of an incantation song in the song-list of
Sergeaut Mofgan.

73, T). gutii'ga. The whole operation is coiicealeil from the eyes of spectators by a
skin or blanket stretched over the patient and the hands of the operator.

73, 5. kiatt'ga. The buckskin piece has an oblong or longitudinal shape in most
instances, and it is passed under the skin sideways and very gradually.

73, 7. tankfini ak waitash. Dave Hill gave as an approximate limit five days'
time.

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)

1.0

I.I

125

UilU

110 "^

2.5
2.0

1.4

1.6

^. "/^

^;.

^l^J^' .^

^ <^"

Photographic

Sdences

Corporation

23 WEST MAIN STREET

W^QSTER.N.Y. 14580

(7^6) 873-4503

^<\<i^

•if

MANNERS AND OUSTOMS.

THE MONTHS OF THE YEAR.

0«TAINKI> KR„M "I-KTR" IN THK KlAMATII LaKK DlAUiOT.

"''''*t..ev,'*' P'lmS'S^ ""^^tw' ^*,H^ Popakuapk sdtnallmapka sa, suaftlal-

, wmuigoama,„ they, they will bnko (it>. ro«,t It (:t .lay«) they rox.t It

uapk ; sakd a po ks.

(1 lifty) ; oat raw carapen.

,,,,.. , , , , Uorgmund, ninth Marsh tORMher

"!?*> "S?'' :*t' E?SS; s/j;^" -*'ss«"^"' "t-"^

" '"'*''?'l'#"''"' "t'f '' ,':S' ""l?'"'?"!'"*. ">v5'la^ p^ksat, sMulfaa,

.I»J. "'"°"^Ijl>«'-. they grind, oook, rub Bue, ' winnow,'

't^^!^ll ''„^2"' e? '3!:- ^^^ ■■« ';s- ,;«::!;» M

., »"''"" ooantry. '

12 lapk^hapta kan iwi'.a willf^hik?" "nft td-unip willi'shik iwi'.af" Wd-

°*'""'' I *«» nicUa hnvefllled Wo.

1 , , „ , muli-deers, nntrlopes. Kow thfy will haul

rt 'l^rT ^i£f- i* '^ t^.oie^''iri-rP^' ''^^''^^"^'^ «^^"^' "^^ttsina
IK \!-^' V,1 U- -/ sn, t ""'>•'«>">« ^tll bring ,t; lotheialond th.yrow,' can.p there

'^ ^tiSS^'Ta^lh J^..*Sv^^"'^-it-^^^^^^ Tfnuash, Ldl'laks.

in iL'b bulTo^ «tThnnderh„lt, a. "Snake.Drowned", af -Slope-

^Sl^;^*^^' ^S? ••^l±I'«^ ^^*^'^^' St6pal8l..Tama'd8h, T^nkat

atiuelorrt the riiio drop, at PeeledPino, atKail-Pyra-

pi'la wf'hla; tchfa ndnuk Kdk=K8hdwaliaksh; ndnka tchfa Tchfklss-

Looknnt.

THE MONTHS OF Tllli YEAE.

SptSIuishtka at h^wi, iwf-idsha wokash. Nat a g^iianuapk! n^nuk

In the indoxmonth thpy hniil, take home the Uly-see<1, Wo will go there I nil

nat dna! ndtoks waftuapk, wewdlha wdtch, hfl'masht nat gl walta w^wal-

ofns carry 111 but wo wiUwaitono aroHoro (our) hureea, therefore we waitooe because

day, day

hasht wdtch ka'mat. Nad gitd pi^nuapk p6l5kuantch, ktalowalshudpka 3

are sure hnrHns on back. We there will scrape np raoth-chrysRlidt*, gather plne-nnta

nad. Tchatclidpglu, h611aksh, tjltdnksham, hahashkem61sham, lol6Ioisam,

wo. Sweet resin, whijied pint;- lilacklwrry, black cherry, wild guoseberry,

nntfl,

tsindjijam, kId-ads, wdshlalam fwam na'd std-ila. K6-id8e, sht^altk kta'lo.

Bort of w6ka8h,

prunes,

squirrels'

hnckle*
iHirrieH

gather.

Of bad taste, full of rosin pine-notn.
(are)

T%6powatka f-umami wdtcli lald-a; gdpgapele mdklaks kelii'vviank, 6

In the thumb-month at berry-time mares foal; return thelndians haviDg done

(gathering),

at wtiwanuish o-olal6na, at sa i'-unialtka. Bfl'nuapka tcha'k^le i'waui,

the fonialcs dryberiiosby they ii'tnrn fmm berry- They will uiink redjnice of burkle-

the tire, ' gutluring. berries,

tchildlat hiin i'wam. Anshat dnika sliash i'wam ; wi'dsika ndnka i'waui.

boil tho berries. You may go and ask thoui for buckle- retentive some (are) of berrleM.

berries ;

Tupeluish aiii'k t^lil'ks, tchdkCla n's skaf tak; tsdkglatka n's skaftki sta. 9

Tonextlodge I send tule-basket, willow-hnHket to me to giro in; inthobaaket tome tngiveit ftlleil.

Pahdpk tchish Iwam liiitki n's It^witchta a. Kd-i sheshatui'shtka.

Dried too huckle- to give to me they did not want. Not I intend to sell tbem.

berries

Spi'luishtka spu'klishtat kslifwal;^a, papiil'iia liildamalakstat. At hu'k

In thi> indt'x-month in tho swent-honse they dance, inantiurate by the wiuterbonao. Now such n

tViXhi man

"TiVsh 12

" Where

kshu'n hfvvidshuapk, at hu't hi'wi ; tunepni na'd sh6pelakiiapk.

hay will bnal home, and that hauls (it) in fivn (stncliH) no will ntack (it) up.

nA 8h6pelakuapk"? "Idpash i'l;Kat, ati'sh shui'nshnank i'l^at; i' tchkash i

1 Bhail 8tacl£ it " ? "In two heap it in n Inn^- (Htnck) Htactiing heap it yoti also yon

stacks ye, sti-etehiug ,Ye 1

nii'sli sIiatuAyuapk mbiisant. tJnipni waitash 1 n's shatuayuapka."

luo lunsl help to-morrow. Four (lays yon me uiurtt help."

T4t;f6lam hehat;(e tapak. 16

In the roUlllnjeer- fall the loaves,

inoutb *

GaptchSlam shinAktishtka kii'na.

In the ring. finger month it is snow-

ing.

Gdptsatka niH ka'iia.

In the month of heavily it snows,
the small flngor

TpC'^powatka w^tko ^-ush ; k^na. 18

In the thumb-month Is frozen the lake; itissniw-

ing.

Spdluishtka kto'tsa mfl; wAla kshiulgishtat.

In the inilex-montb itrnina much; they in the dance-honse.

ilance

TAt;f6laai tsudni luela Nflaksi Tsuyake'ksni.

In the ni dSngor- large kill at Nihiks tho I.iukville Indians,

menth suckers

Gdptsglam shindktishtka iidsdksalsha K6kgtat, ka'shla sa. 21

In the ving-fln<iRr month they take large in Lost River, (and) get ipos.

snetters

MANNERS AND (JUHTOMS.

NOTES,

This text intends to give a sketcli of the various occupations of the northern tribe
or B-ukshikni in every month of the year, and is partially worded in a form which
may be called dramatic.^ These statements are not always arranged in logical onlcr,
but a profusion of ethnologic details gives intrinsic value to them.

The months of the Miiklaks year do not coincide with the months of our calendar,
for they extend from cue new moon to the next one, and therefore should be more
properly called moons or lunations. Twelve and a half of them make up the year, and
they are counted on the fingers of both hands. The first moon of their year begins
on the first new moon after their return from the wokash-harvest at Klamath Marsh,
which is the time when all the provisions and needful articles have been gathered in
for the winter. Work is then stopped and the communal dances begin, the doctor-
dances as well as those conducted by the chiefs, and everybody participates in them
except those who are out hunting in the mountains during the latter part of the year.
This mode of counting the moons on the digits was once popular, but on account of its
imperfections it is uow forgotten by the majority of the tribe. Instead of it they reckon
time by the seasons in which natural products are harvested, as: udsaksii'mi, "in the
big sucker time"; i-umii'mi, ''in the berry season", or they use our calendar months.

The first moon mentioned in our text, gdptche, answers generally to our May.
The two next moons are counted on the thumb and forefinger of th^ liand not used
immediately before ; with this last moon their year has come to an end. The next
five moons arc counted again on the digits of the first hand, and so lorth. The half
moon making up their full year is not accounted for in this text.

74, 2. Ktai:Tu])akshi is a locality of renown in the folklore of the Klamath tribe.
It lies near the confluence of Sprague and Williamson Rivers, on the property of an
Indian named Tchelo^ins. The otilks is the fish dam (from ulila), where the Indians
wade in the water with their dip-nets and catch the fish while it ascends the river in
si)ring-tiHie in enormous quantities. This fish-dam does not reach the water's surface.

74, 2. The direct object of liiela is kapto, its subject maklaks hO'ank.

74, 3. kamalsh paha means : they dry the fish which they have just caught by
exposing it to the sun on limbs of trees, and then make k.imalsh by pounding it
Kilmalsh is a derivative from giima, to jmund.

74, 3. k6-i;i;aga is identical with guikaka; derived from kui, "away, far ofl"; gui-
jf.1tchka is: to start out annually to the prairies where roots etc. are harvested.

74, 5. sakd a po'ks : they eat sometimes the camass raw, but only at the time when
digging it. Bulbs, roots, pods, chrysalids and berries are gathered by women only.

74, G. pahil at p. ; this is equivalent to pahdtko po'ks iwidshat. They bake the
camass and put it in their caches at the place where they intend to stay next winter.

74, 8. shnikanua. During the time when a pause is made in the gatheringi)rocess,
the conjurer carefully Matches the ripei:iiigof tlie pods not yet harvested and arranges
public dances. When the sun has done its work, he solemnly announces it to the
women, and tuey go to work again in their canoes.

74, 9. shiulina. From the preceding we should expect shiulinat, lulinat.

74, 1(». willishik is the generic term tor larger kinds of prqvisionsacks ; it means
here a sack of fifty pounds seed or grain, while the wil;^ok8 holds hundred pounds. lu
p&lasham-wA/oksh, however, the latter word is taken in its generic sense of sack, bag.

A SKETCH OF BALL'8 MARRIED LIFE.

All these diffcreut kiuds of sacks or bags were originally made of bnlnishstalks (tnle)
and the tdyasb was made of straw.

74, 11. kaitua u6 ka'ila. The sense is incom])lete. Probably shfiyiiakta is left out :
"I do not know of any in the whole country", kiiila often standing for kailatat.

74. 14. ^iwalues. There are several islands in the shallow waters of the vast
extent of Klamath Marsh, but only one is meant here.

74. 15. wo'ns ilktsat. Thoy submerge their dug-outs at several i»laces on the beach,
where they are certain to find them in the next wokash-season.

74, 17. pi'la wi'hla (or pila willash) contains perhaps a proper name of a locality,
or stands in connection with Toilkat, "at the Rail-Pyramid"; wilhaslash means top,
apex. The stations from the " Ford " to " Bird's Lookout " are pas.sed by the tribe when
they return home with the lily-seed harvest crop. "They drop the rirte" is: they take
a rest. All these localities are either on the open waters of Klamath Marsh or on
Williamson River, which forms its outlet.

76, 1. iwf-idsha wdkash. The distance between Klamath Mar.sh and the William-
sou River is from 20 to 23 miles, and horses carrying w6kash can make it in one day.
The next day they return to carry another load.

75, 2. ndtoks waituapk : we will lie over one day to let our horses rest, or recover
from the swellings on their backs. Niitoks stands for nsit toks.

76, 5. klii-ads is probably a kind of wild pranes. See Dictionary : k614tch.

76, 8. wid8iL;< i /am. " Some are economical with their own hemes, and prefer not
to scatter them iu the hands of others"; iwam, huckleberry, has become the generic
term for all berries, and i-umii'mi is " herryxeason^.

75, 11. spft'klish here means the large comnmnal sweat-house; it is used frequently
for dances and kshiuw.^ishtat, coutr. kshiii'l;^ishtat might stand instead of spfiklishtat.

75, 11. papiii'na, vocalic dissimilation for papa-6ua; derived from p.'in, to eat.

75, 13. ati'sh etc. " Heap ye up that hay in two stacks, which nmst have a lengthy,
long-stretching, and not a high, cone-shaped form!" For heaping up long stacks
one verb is here used, and another for making the high, round ones.

PO'lAM SHUMSHE-ELSHTAT SHASHAPKELEA8H.

A SKETCH OF BALL'S MARRIED LIFE.

Given my Dave Hill, Subchief, in the Klamath Lakk Dialect.

P(51uk kii'liak snAwiids t'shf n. Tsiii snawji'dshla Panipiam pa'-ia lupi' ;

Ball bo without ft wlfo ^rew up. Then hemairieil PArapi's daughter at first ;

tsiii wii'kala, tsiii tatA mdntsak mbusa'lan gi. Tsiii kii'tsa, tsui mbusa'-

aml ahe had ft babo, and then qui.« » whilo ho lived with (her). Then he left (her), and 1 vcd with

alp6li pan, tsiii piin k^tsa sissii'kuk tsu'ssak. NAsh wtl'ka sham kliikd, na'sh 3

ftgaio, and again loft (her) qunrrelini; coiitiuuall;. One habu to them died, aniilher

(her)

tchia; at sa sipi'tza, tsiii na's shnawii'dshla piin L4tsampii'-ia; Avats siiwana

lived; ntlll they separated, then one lie married after LAichnph's daughter; horsofl he gave

(womnnl

(this)

Ill ^ 1i

MANNERS AND OUSTOMS.

ninlhri',

bubo

<IU!ll.

nil-asht, .rfuy. Ts.'.isilkuis.Vtn .»•. H' T , "^ M..n tbo,f.„bl

" siL "»;z'^» '"';i,'.;^*' '''ii,-" -»-;«»«», k.,r,.,.> « i„-,k ,„iaki »«.

... ts:' rfcafc -- ;- ti- g- sr t- S; »^ »S^

togctbsr. nK»m

th., „«„,„, i,„p,„„„„, ,h,j. „„„ ^___, i^^^^^j
■'^r'" ,?i» e '*^l'. OJ' » »l';,i'SS.* pan, uui «. pan h«Ck

nioro '""^ sit (biui) free ngain, and they again

sumsU'-alaiik tsfa.

marryiDR Uvea.

18 Wakak tsik sa tcbi'a, ka-i ni tfi'mgnat.

How since tl>ey have not I Jearnt.

lived,

NOTES.

consequences of S S enL„ t.f^ r^^^^ ?'^-''' '°' "*' '''' ""'^voidabl.

brutal husbands th.^nght^hrS L ^^f. ^'^"'"l-^^ ^om tl.e for.ner rule of f hoi.-

eorr„pti,.,„ei,..,.H.oofo ' .ollV:;i^>irS^ "'" "^^ "'^ "'"™'« "^^

GAMES OF THE KLAMATH LAKE PEOPLE.

77, 1. Tlio uaine Pfil i'h pioiioiinwd in very (UHiTcut ways, aud most people tbiuk
it in the English name Ball ; I'oluk \h V(>'l hft'k ; ((^hia, "lived", would be preferable to
t'slifn in this connection.

77, -. 3. kii'tsa, kiitwa [iroperly nieaua to cast away; here: to abandon, leave ;
almost identical with wutodsna occurring below, 78, 2.

77, 4. siiwana sas : he did not give many horses lor her to Ler parents.

78, K. pallank sas. This shasii projx'rly refers to IVunpi and his family, for Pfd's
wife took th(i dug-out canoe of Pampi and rowed with it to the soldiers. This was in
the northeastern part of Upper Klamath La .e, and occurred in the winter of ]87C-'77.

78, 13. Eustat is the location of liie old agency buildings at Kidiiishti, in northeast
corner of Upper Klamath Lake.

78, 14. hi'-i. On that occasion JJall left his wagon in the midst of the woods; hi,
hi-i means "on tlici ground".

78, 15. nil'ul/a sha pil'n. About the; middle of Septendier 1«77 a strong escort of
Indians brought Hall aiid his wife to the "lawhonst!" at the Klamath agency to be
tried by the (iliiefs. A delay cf scveriil days occurred l»el'ore \\v was confronted with
the Judges, and during t he time ho was imprisoni^d at the " skukum-house", a strong log
cabin at the agency serving as jail. He is still a \ery young man, and on 1)eing
brought there he was allowed to ride on horseback with a ritle on his shoulders. His
father is an Indian from the Spokane tribe, and Sjmkiin is his nana-.

78, Ifi. s;f6kta, to pay a fine; to bo fined (by the chiefs). See: "Legal (Justoms",
62, 5.

GAMES OF THE KLAMATH LAKE PEOPLE.

Obtainki) in thk IClamath Lake Dialkct prom Minnie Frobem.

E-ukshikni shdkgluk slii-i'^aga ydmnash, watcli, skulasjh tchish.

Tilt" I.Bko penplii in friimblinj; win from each lieada, linrges, blanheta also.

ullier

Vii'nii) shulsheshlank ; Idp inft'mgni, szii'tasli tchish lApi ndshekdno.

With four they pliiv iho Htlck'ganiit; (thrio thick (sticks), skincnvcri'il also two Blonder.

(Hticks) arc) two sticks

Ndsh^kansli sha s;j^tchashtka sliUii, mu'mCnish toksh a yii'shakgiiank H

Atthoslmiter tliny with ludrx and mid- guess, at the thick (ones) liowovcr (tliey) with index flnger

(sticks) <llo finger

sliHii; vil'ish sha kldtchnank shliji, tzopov?dtka tch l(^naiik shliii. WA'ishtka

Ijuessi at the they moving ha-iil side- gness, with the thumb also making » they ruoss Bytheviiish

also making ft they ruobs
H.de move at.

toks sha na'shak kshe'sh w£-uka; s^^tchashtka sha lap wf-uka kshe'sh,

they only one conntlng. (can) win i with Index and mid- they two win coontiug-

stick die finger sticlcs,

yii'shpfiah sp^lshisht. Tchui aa kfilewi uddiwisham i'^aguk iidnuk.

the Index

hnviug put for
ward.

Tlien they stop.

from the losers

when ilicy all (stakes),
have won

'*f^

S-M

(11 il

MANNEKS AND 0U8TOMS.

II.

Kiimo.

III.

lot nxin, b.,»«» in the nildcllB of tlio sWrtinLMih.ces (IIirv) .tl,.k„'

' *^;!!?' t "^r'^^ tSSiflS^ tchfmraH-a«h. Kawa'tuuk «ha vu-

f.-.'l 1 X 1 - 1 , will, (Ihel.) polos thog»Ec.8til,.B. Uavingc»..RUt(it> tlH.y tUiow

o^S "Sr" -a*^?- *tSf" sjsi *' t ■-'-» ":-

12 shiVdshna ya'ashtala sha tchdi. '"''"

cliosooaeh other tothebnses they then. •

ran
aalde,

NOTES,
giiessing same, and U,« Baes»c» am mad, k„„„, „. „„,°n i LaLl™ "

GAMES OF THE KLAMATH LAKK PEOPLE.

79, 3. 8;;i5tcha, to extend two flngoiM, viz. tbo iixhtx iiud the iniddlo finger; the instra-
mental case of the verbal subHtantive, H;;(Stcha8htka : by extending these two fingers.

70, 3. HbUn, to shoot, to shoot forward, to bit ; figuratively used for the rapid
motion of the bund in guessing at the location of the sticks lying nndor the tray or
p^v'hla. yft'shakna, ydsbkCna, or yfi's/a, to pnt forward, to use the index finger. In
this game that finger is called yfi'sh;fish, and not by its usual name, sp<^Iuish.

70, 4. vft'isb is tlie location of the thicker sticks couplvd on one side, and of the
thinner ones on the other; the gesture for guessing at it is to make a side motion with
tlic band, thumb included. In the text, the sense would become clearer by wording
it thus : vu'ish sha ndpatka t;;opow&tka tch Idnank shlin, " they guess at the vtiish,
whirling around with the hand, thumb included.** L^na is to perform a cbrcular
motion ; kl^tchna, a side motion.

70, 5. s;^(^tchashtka sha Idp wi-uka. S^^tchushtka collides here apparently with
yii'sli/ish sp^lshisht; it seems to stand for: "they win two checks, if they have guessed
right at the slender sticks".

70, C. wi-uka. They win one (na'shak) of the six checks or counting-sticks, if the
party opposite did not guess correctly.

II. To play at dropping beavers' teeth (shkA'slui) is the subject of this paragraph;
the game itself is sktisbasb. The four teeth of the beaver are marked for this game
by the incision of parallel lines or crosses on one side, and a small piece of woolen or
other cloth is inserted into the hollow to prevent breaks in falling. The two longer or
upper teeth of the beaver are called the male (laki), the pair of lower and shorter the fe-
male teetli (giilo, kiilu; distributive form: ki'ikulu). The teeth are dropped on a hard,
level substance, as a metate or grinding stone, to make them lie flat. The marked
side of the teeth wins, if it is turned up after dropping. The teeth of the woodchuck
(nifi-i, m6i) serve for the same i)urpose.

80, 2. Shfishmalntuklpksh stands for shtishmaluash^gipshtka or rgipkashtka, the
instrumentid case of the participle gitko, possessed of : "(if they fall down) on that
side, where each is possessed of marks" (shumalnash).

80, 2-4. kshe'sh. In this game of beavers' teeth (pi'unam t6t), or woodchucks' teeth
(niuyam tfit) they use twelve check-sticks to count their gains with. The game is
played by two persons, or by two partners on each side.

80, 5. Kshawiuasht tuksh. Kshawina means several teeth to fall down, but, as the
prefix ksh- indicates, only one tooth with the marked or winning side up.

III. The t(!himm4-ash game is played almost exclusively by females. The tchim-
md ash is a string about 2-3 feet long, to the ends of which sticks or pieces of cloth are
tied ; it is taken up and thrown forward by two flexible willow rods (shu^kflsh, wd'hl-
kish) to playmates, who divide themselves into two parties. Before the commence-
ment of the game, two limits (yiiash) are meted out on the ground, which serve aa
bases. Both of them are located between the lines of starting (8hal;fu6tgish).

80, 7. shudkftsh : two poles ; players hold one of them in each hand.
80, 9. Kawfi'tank refers to the playmates of the opposite party, who are bound to
catch the flying tcbimmO-aah.

80, 11. shiwdkuash seems to be a dissimilation of shiw&ka-aah.
80, 11. kiudshna 14na, or better : kiudshnank l^na.

li I

■i J

MANNERS AND CUSTOMS.

SWEAT-LODGES.

Given m thk Klamath Lakh Dialkct hv Mixnir Frobrit.

Tb.L.kop«pl« two aweatlodg., h.ve. low^pov.r th»deoJ««l thiy balld .w.,t,. %g.

ImlgM

pank kafla ; stutilantko spfl'klish, kafla waltchAtko. Spfi'klish a aha shfl'ta

«in««p.h.^„„a, .„We.. „V...,.w„t. ,.. cover.,. ,A„L„,p

^ ^Itmo*^^' ^^^^'Sr'"'' ' »"fc''?^ ' ''''h?'^''' '^ ^^'^«*^'' 8piVkli8htat tata-

iwiuowi, BiittlB MhlnTooklDKllk.., blanket. they ,pr,«d .,rer the .we.tlD|,. when

lod^e

I inaf];e

in It .hey ,we,t. Whenever obUUrendled, or when . ha.band became wld-

, J , ower,

'"SeS T.f w.S H?'- f^^'^'^'^r*^' «P<i'klitcha t^rai shaHhamoks^Mlatko ;

(or) the wife (1.) widowed, Ujey for e.n«,of deatl,, «„ .we«.i„K ,n«ny relative, who have '

6 tdnepni waltash tchik m hfl'nk spd'klia. Sliiiilakiank a sha ktdi hdyuka

day. then they ewe,t. Gathering they ..one., (they) heat

(ttiem)

skoilakiiApkuk; hiitoks ktAi ka-i tata spuklia't'liulsh Souklish liTnl.i

t«he.pthem„p,after thoee .tone, "never L.n« been „«d for ' sCol<Ke iK

t&hSf -t^^^'^J ^^' ^""** ^*"'' kfdshiia ai 1 ambu, kliuMla. SpA'kli a

.h^^heat "»-< "«'»K.wh.»,theybr.„^_^aton», pour ^^.„_ water, ' epr.nkle. "Cj'lZ

^ ty *i™S* "^o»»'«"; Ifilpknk g^ka 8hualk61tcliuk pdniak ko'ks pepe-udshak

' «-ra. hour., ,„,„^«_,,.,,e .^bey <-,., U.^coo,;^he,„. 'without "dre^ ^onl^ to go bathln,

^KSif ' -%?***' '^",?^ ""l^^J^- Spukli-uapka uia'ntch. Shp6tuok

inaaprlng, river. lake cloaeby. They will ewo.t for long honre. To make then-

Bclvea utroni;

1-ak^wa kdpka, skti'tawia sha wc^wakag knii'kstga. Ndshit^tchatka knft'kH

"■tt"" ■Vn««Kplne.,tbey,tle.o«e.her,hey -.nalU.ru.h^ ,v„h rope^. On^.Z^T th.^pe,

^^ * tv '^Sf *''■ G^dtpampglank shkoshki'lza ktaktiag liii'slikankok kele-

they make. On going homo they heap np into .mall .tone. in retnembmnee "of tho

kdpkash, kt4-i shiishuankaptcha i'hiank

•'•M, .tones of equal site selecting.

XOTES.

No Klamath or Modoc sweat-lodge can be piojierly called a sweat-/*ou«e, aa is the
custom throughout the West. One kind of tht^se lodges, intended for the use of inouni-
ersouly, are solid structures, almost undergroun.l ; three of tliein are now in existence,
all believed to be the gift of the principiil national deity. Sudatories of tJie otii.r
kind fu^ found near every Indian lodge, and consist of a few wiliowrods stuck int..

LAMENT OVER A WIFE'S 1-088.

the unmnd, both ends b«'inK b»mt over. Tlio procoRH jroiio through whih* swfiiiting in
thi! Hiimo in both kin«lH of hxlKCH, wi'li tliii only ditlereuco as to time. Th(> ccrcnionieH
niciitioncd 82, t-Kt., all lofcr to Hwuiting in the inournerH' HwoatlodjtPw. Tlui hikIu
toricM of the On-ffonmns have no analogy with the €ntu/aii ni the Pufbh) Indians of
New Mexico, aH far an their constniction is (ionci'rned. Cf. Noteii to 70, I. 78, 11.

82, 1. li'ipa Hjifi'kliHli, two Nwcatlodgcs, standH for two kindH of sweat lodges.

82,5. shash^iniokN Idlatko forms one eonipoiind word: one who, or: thoN«( who
have h)st relativi's i)y death; ct. lafshdfilsh, pgish Ifdsli ; hishuAkga ptish luliitk, male
orphan wlioNe father has <lied. In the same manner, kfilekdtko stands here as a pnr-
ticiple referring simnitaneously to hishnaksh and to snAwedsh w6nuitk, and ean be
rendered by '■'■bereaved'". ShashCimoks, disfr. form of shd-amoks, is often prononneed
sheslKimaks. Tnnii ete. means, that nniny others accompany to the sweat-lodge, into
which about six persons can crowd themselves, bereave<l husbands, wives or parents,
because the deceased were related to them. C'f. le'pk'le;fa, le'pk'lekatko.

82, 0. Hhifdakiank ete. For developing steam the natives collect only such stones
for heating as are neither too large nor too small ; a medium size seeming most appro-
priate for con(!entrating the largest amount of heat. The old sweat-lodges are sur-
rounded with large accumulations of stones which, to Judge from their bhurkened
exterior, have served the purpose of generating steam ; they weigh not over 3 to 6
pounds in the average, and in the vicinity travelers discover many small cairuo, not
over four feet high, and others lying in ruins. The shrubbery around the sudatory
is in many localities tied up with willow wisps and ropes.

82, 10. SpukliuApka ma'nteh means that the sweating-process is repeated many
times during the live days of observance ; they sweat at least twice a day.

LuAtpIsux-a 8n6wed8H m'na.
LAMENT OVER A WIFE'S LOSS.

Obtained khom Uavk Hill in the Klamath Lakk Dialbot.

Sndweds k'lekd. Tsiii tsik 8hp6t(i hissiiAksOk, pa'wa tstii, pa'ng

1 ~i«. ji.. jjpon ,i,|g stiejigihejis (liur) linsband alouo. plnngM thoD, again

Awifo

dim.

mAkual, 8ta-6tank kaftua pdt; tstii tiiti'z yafnatat tti'tshna. Tsui shlaA

uampiioat, fonii»hr(l nothing oatc; tben (he) dreaniH, uii the mnint- hu doioa. Then lie mi-a

(and) ainH

iiiAklaks, t<iti';f hiink nd-asht ; tstii ga'mpgle Iddsaslitat, tsiii psln hdshti'k-

people, dreams (he) thu»i thin he returns to (bis) lodge, and ht nluht he frequently

tamna, tsiii shla'popk, tstii at shla'popk siunoti'sh tchkash. Tstii at shui'sh

dreams, and bu visions, and then hotaaslialliiol- of (female) also. And raaglcsangs

nations chuniseB

hfi'k na'slrt ki : "tcha'keli g^kanuapka, siimat tstik at gdka tchdkele"! tstii

tkesr thus saj: "bUwd wUlenmeup, to the Intlme comesnp Wood"! then

, tlirnnt

MANNRRN AND (!|IHT<»MS.

liuk tchM' n ;^i:pka. Tsiii wt^wan'sli ^rdli' wino'tniHh; HliUNhiiukiHli idii'sli,

"""' 'omMBp. Then wnra*ii tiiUir whn furni i^hnrna ; |>~>|)l< vbn osll the Iwi,

uoqjurar

luUitki'sh tchlsh, ahuashudktchlBli matchatirl'Hh tchish irull' Idtcbashtat

the aonc-rvPMtrr too. hmslkn ii.. P ..^. * -«v<"««>ut«»

! •onc-rvp'Wtrr

3 m'oa.
hit.

bawallera,

llat«o«n

lodf*

NOTES.

The asiMjtic porforiuances and ceremonies here dcNfribed are going into disuse at
the present time. When they were fully obHerved, the ttereaved liusband wandered
alone through the woods and wilds (spotu) lor five days, but to thti widow these oh-
servances extended over a shorter time. For this purpose both sexes wore warm
elothinj,', but took to worn out blankets or old articles of raiment, and used wisps of
the serviceberry-bush as belts.

83,1. shp<5tft: strong and unusual bo<lily exereise, running up hill, plunging etc.
was and is still considered beneficial to the body, and is much in favor with the
Indians. Of. 82, 10. 11.

83, 1. hissuAksftk for hfshuaksh ak ; the husband alone, not in company of others ;
pii'nC for pii'u a, pCn a, (if. (ItSnen for iit a nen ; «nd sC for slin, they, 82, t.

83, 2. ka-ltua pat or p'At: he eats nothing at the time while wandering; piink,
p'iink might siaud ." iire instead of pAt; tft'tshna : for dozing they did not lie down, but
tried to catch a little sleep while walking and wandering.

83, 2. shhiii, and tchdkMe 83, 5, forms sometimes used in conversation instead of
shM, Bhle4 ; tehil'keie, tcht^Cli. Cf. ydka for yii'ka, y<5ka : yole to 16, 10.

83, 3. hftshti'ktjvmna; the suffix tamna shows that pshin stands for nlinnk i)shl'u
gi'sh: "nightly, every night."

83, 4. siunO'tiah and shul'sh are both tamCinuish-songs, but of a ditterent chartwjter.
See Dictionary. Shlii'popka: he sees in his dreams whut he has heard mentioned in
the songs. To sing or repeut songs started by tlus conjurer devolves almost exclusively
on the women present at the ceremony.

83, .'>. si'imat: into the mouth; their blood, disturbed by the constant excitement
produced by the night rambles, ascends to the throat, and is sometimes spit out by
them.

84, U. shuashudktchish. By their loud iind noisy lamentations (shuukfcha, to cry,
to weej)) they expect to avert from the bereaved husband the eftects of the tamfinnash-
spell (shul'sh) which he has seen in his dreams.

84, 2. matchfttgish : those listening to the words uttered by the coiyurer and bia
repeater or expounder; they are of both sexes and also act as bewailers.

l) I

DKBMATION OF 'IHK I>HA.U.

CREMATION OF THK DEAD.

ODTAINSD from J. C. D. RlI>DLK. IN TIIR MoDOC DiALKOT.

Tll-ukshtkni Mo'dokni tutom!pni wait(51an keldksht vflmi'. At Idshl'sht

Tbn Klamnth
hnken

(Kiiil) Mmlooa on th« uhh

ilnv •ftlT

(letienM

bury.

Whflii hrlnfflng ont
(lb* bii<lli<»

la'pi gdiui tfdsh Hhutedshnoku. At (ifdtnamnaii ktUlatat wawal^a wawafha

two R(i(ihetd), wnll to iii«k« (nil) rriidy. Thru taavlnu arrived on theiiround thayilt down (and) wiilt
(nieu)

kelekApkash itpand'pkaaht. Skentanapkash at itpand'pkaHlit k«liet'lii;((p- 3

th» ili'nd iMtmon to bo broiigbl. Sewed up lor trnunporutton (wid) lied Iriuu-

kaflh wAtchtat at tchplnA'tat ftpa. IlekHliatlekf'ko k'lexApkaHh Iflpl' wiltch

v«f«ely oD > hnrie to the buryinK- they Curryhm ir»ii»i7 ' thodecMned abiwd the horu

Rruuud bring.

gdna; k'lezApkftni ndnuk shii-anioksh tilpi' gAlampaga.

mnrcbeai of the deouud ull reliitlnna liebind riillow in h Hl«.

TAnkni niaklflks kslH^I^a k'lekapkash, watch sliiuka, kHluiwal at hflnk 6

The ADolent Indlunx Inbl down the unrpar, the burao they klllrd, depoaited then the

k'lekdpkash (iiiko kedslihikstat, wiltch hflnk tchiii ktoddga, wAtchftm

deceaaed of wood on » plli', the borne then cut up, the horae'a

tchft'loks lu'inukasli k'lekii[)ka8h I'tlshxa. Ldkiftni tptjwash viinl'pi hihas-

fleah all over thixKiipau atrewcd. Chief 'a by ordera four

suAtch^ash luloksh shnuitdmpka. PipClantan hiolual6yan ahnuitdnipka 9

men the Are were kwplng up. On both aldna atandli.uTiy they kupt (It) up

tchu'shak pftchash tchuk, tchiii sha k'lcwi.

conatantly, It wont ont until, then llii'y quit.

LA'laksli shpftcht tchiii tzalftm

The Are being out then Intbenililat

hlksldkdhtat hib^na, Ifikshiksli ndwisht tchl'sh shekcike, kiifhi kG'hi-unau

oftboaahea (a hole) they Ibcaahea, the remaina alao they .-aked Into ea, th tbrowins over

duK, (It),

tchiii ktA-i Ikappa. Viinii-iVhin iifinuk tchi'shtala kikantchiinipgle. Ge- 12

then alonea (they) plied Alter burial ull towardahomo they marched liack ainslo Hnv-

up- die.

luipgdp'Un p'na'lani tchi'-ishtat k'lekApkftni tchi'sli 8hndl;^an tchiii iianuk

Ing returned to tbeir aettienient, of dcceiaed the lodge burning down then all

indklaks shemdahla. K'lekApkftin tchfwishtat ktai Idlktcha; Ic'le^Apkam

Indluna ronioved elaenhore. Of doceiiacd on the late dwell- atonea tlieyleft-, of dcceoaed

ing-piaoe

shA-amoksh hiidaktna genS'ga ktd-i hddakt nutola'ktcha. 15

(any) ralative bylbiaapot paaaing a atone on it threw.

Ha kani tfi'ma weweshdltko k'Uxa, pen hiinkglam w^-ash k'Idka

If aomebody much oflepring-haTing died. again bla rhildren after death

hat<iktok hflnk vdml' ; ndnka atl' fdshnan Imtft'ktok pen vflinii'.

right there them they buried; aome ft'oni bringiUR at tbia very iigaiu they lmrie<l.

afar (thera) apol

ffl

MAIOEKS AND (JIJSTOMS.

NOTES.

(Jremating the de>id is a practi(!e wl.icli was abolished by the chiefe on the terri-
toii of tuo redervatioii in or about 18CS. At the Indian graveyard nortli of the Wil-
lianKson River a hill of VJ feet altitude, where the corpses of Indians of the Klamath
Lake (not ..lo.loc) el ieftaincy were burnt, is still visible and untouched since then.
\\ Jth the exception of the sentence from SkentauApkiish to itpa, the first i)araL'raph
relers to the present as well as to the former mode of funeral, while the second describes
the ancient mode ot cremation. Cremation prevailed also among the Snake and Pai-Uta
Indians, living in the vicinity of the Maklaks; ef. J)r. W. T. lloftman, Pahute CremP-

T^'^^Tf^T "°'*'°*'' ^^^^ ^''^^''' ^"'*'''"'' "' P'"^eedings of the Am. Philosophical
Soc, Philadelphia; vol. XIV, p. 297 sq., 414 sq., (1870). According to Stephen Powers,
eiematiou prevailed among the Pomos of Northern Calilornia, west of the Sacramento
Kiver, and the Lno, a tribe living at the mouth of Russian liiver, believe that all
deceased Indians wU' become grizzly bears if not disposed of in this mauner The
Indians inhabiting the shores of iMiddle and Lower Columbia River placed their dead
on platforms erected on hills, or into the canoes of which they had been the owners: the
Kalapnyas on both sides of the Willamet River buried their dead by inhumation.

Our notice makes no meutiou of the mourning ceremony among the Modocs, by
which widows had tneir long hair cut oft' at the fuueral of their husbands, then dripped
the resin trom the pyre, liquefied by the heat, u,H.n their bared heads, vowing not to
marry again before this ghastly head-cover had worn oil by length of time The
3Iodocs cremated their dead on any ih,s from the fir nt to the'fifih day after decease
according to choice. '

86, 1. tutenepui. Here we have again t!ie sacred number fiv occurring so often
in the traditions, myths and customs of th- Oregouiai.. tribes. Cf 70 1 3 82 (! 88 4

86,1. Instead of idsh.. maybe used Klam-itii Lake il/a (or ena)' lulukshW-shi.k,'
to bring oi't for cremation. The northeru dialect uses v.m.i only in the sense of putting
dned provisions into the ground. A funeral is ilktcha in the Modoc dialect

86, 2 shutedshna: they remove obstacles upon the road «.r trail, Kuch as fallen
trees or logs; they clear the passage, kiiilatat means here the same as tehpinfi'tat,
00, 4. * '

85, 2. wawaiha. Another form of the verb wai'ha s said to exist in the Modoc
dialect: wawaiha; its distributive form : wa wawaiha.

86, 3. itpauo'pkasht is th'i syiiizesis of itpaniiapkasht.
86, (J. Tiinkni; the term aia'iitchni is often used instead.
86, 7. luiKo for iinkiiam kedshlakstat.

86, 10. pitchasli for Klamath Lake pitclikash, " until it has gone out"

86, 11. Modoc hib6na or ipena for the Klumatl. Lake y<5pa, y^pona: to dig a hole.

8f. il; "owisht. Of this term the original meaning seems to be "thrown by hand
into the air ', a manipulation resorted to t.y »omc Indians, though im.i here, with the
burnt iishes of the de(!eased.

86, 12. Ikiippa. These piles of stones oxidently were, as well as the piles erected
on the spot of the burnt lodge, intended as monuments of the deceased. Tlu-se cahna
are of coi.sKlerable .«ize, aii.l ..an be seen in tlu- old .Modoi' country at the present time

86, 10. pen hiinkf-lam etc. Pen introduces the -erb viimi', aud k'Wka is a verb co-
ordinate to vumi': -his eliildreii .lie, right thc'ie agnin they biiry tham "

^-t. y

J'KESENT MODE OF INHUMATION.

PRESENT MODE OF INHUMATION.

Given nv Minmr 1^'iioben ik tub Klamath IjAKE Piai.ect.

Hishuakshash snaw^dshash gfntak k'le'ksht tchi^i sha hfi'nk b6xtka

Mr^.le or female upon tiariogdied then they (him or her) in a coffin

fsha hunkantka waftashtka dtupka waitolank tclilsli. PApkashti shfi'tank

bnry oiithosame day or ouo day pn»t iilsn. Of lumber they are mak-

hnry

Ini:

box, shnutchlii'ktagiank kAyak tadsh lalakank B6shtiuam=shftko. Pii-

acoffln, planing {itj, not however they aro paint- in the American shape. Small

Ing (it)

pakuak gi'ntak a sha ndnuktua ilzota, shuWtish gintak, kma' tclii'sli,

ilrinking'Cups thereupon they of everv kind bury with clothing hereupon, HkuUcapa too,

(him).

yamnash tchish, tdlatoks kd-i. Ha' nen wa'g'n kit' git, watchatka sha htl'nk

l>bad8 too, but raorey not. If a wagon is not on on horses they them

hand,

dnauk i'l;jtcha.

bury.

Tu'mi shasha'moks ilk8;j5'ni shash, tiimi wdwanuisli 6

Many relatives to the arave them, many women

carrying
oiit

tchi'sh, hihassudksh tchi'sh, kd-i tatilksni, gasliaktsina shash ilksze'ni.

too, mon also, (but) no children, follow them to grave.

llksgish y«^pontk tu'nep nAdshgshapt pe'tch at£ gintegatk.

The graves are dug tive (or) bix teet deep into the ground

Koing.

Wii'g'n a lu'pi gena flks;{eni, shashanioks tchi'k ki'nshaksna; hiVd- 9

The wagon first goes to the grave, relatives hereuiwn walkinflle; those

shatoks atikni gAtpa, wAtchatka gatpa. Ilksh^e'ni a sha shniika ne'p

who from afar come, on horsea come. At the grave they seize by the

hand

k'lakapkash, a tchfks hfl'nk unegank k(^lua kaila ilzuk, tanktak tchiksh

the dticeaaeil, ttuMi him lowering fill up tiio earth to bury simultitnecmnlv also

(hini)^

a hii'nk luatpishluk shiiina. Gakiamnank tu'k sha tXtilamtana giV'hliank 12

over him for mourning they sing. Forming a circle from it they through the middle passing

shnu'ka st^lapksh ne'p, kipi'tal tchik sha gekamp6le; t^Hshtoks vviidAmatko

■bake (his) right hanil, to the first tlieii tliey return ; (his) fare is covered

place

handkerchipAtka: "Tchi'i sh^kiig mi'sh ml shniika ne'p; tchi'i at tchi' m'sh

by a handkerchief : "Now to bid good to yon I shake (seize) hamli now thns to you

bye

nu shdka gen waftt^h ; g*^na mi at huki'sh!"

I bid fan^ this dnyi gone is your spirit I"

well

Tftatnatoks flags maklaks ki'utchna llkszeni wa'ginat; shashdmoksh

flags

the relatives

Sometimes flags an Indi^tU sticks up at the grave on tlie wagon

Up ki'mbaks gashilktchna, wt'vvanuish nt'ish ki'mbaks, hihashuaksh tchi'sh

in two Ales follow, tlu^ women in one tile, the males too

MANNERS AND (MISTOMS.

•..kill, bnthCown th.y h„r«. ,™,lenfl- .orMunkot. t.. bury I'.m 1„

NOTES,

This short notice cUvsoribos a iiinon.l (isha) of the Klanmth Lake trilw in the nio.lo
as mloptod l.x>,n ho Aauu-i.-ans not long alt.r tho tirat, of 1804, wh.n .ro.nation Z
1 . .0. was an., shed. Whats.Hnor of th. annont onston.s in disposing of <ho d«a 1 Z
st.Il ohsei v.Ml, (ho ivador will easily gather fron. tlu- present sketch

pain'if^hif h^ivr::, piis; s:t :::^.r ^"" ^'^ ""-•' ''^-^^^ ^^ -•^ -^"' ^"^

87,17. hip kiuibalisgaahaktehna: the.v f,.lIow the corpse, which is placed on (ho
wagon, in two Hies o„ horxehack ; kirabaks is apposition to shashAuioks.
son m2'r i T'vJ^'' appearance of their graveyanl (tchpinft) ne.ir the Willi,;,,,-

wLs Fir«.;i:i Tr '"" n- 't ''"* "*■ ""^ •^•"•'^•"^ ^ •* ••^'^ •" ">« »»^«t «t- tho

woous. J? or tataa8;^Atko see Dictionary.

FUNERAL OF WARRIORS.

OIVBN W THK Kl^AMATH.L^K D.ALKCT »V "SKRGKANT" Mo.lGAN, AN INDIAN FHOM KoHisUT,.

^ ?,i'„i' *''''"k* ™<^'ka«l' tx^'txnk: "mdklaks k'lii-k!" Tsiii jjiitim

All^mRht ..r«.ch.., ,heWK..«., pr.,«gi„g. ..p,7pl. -„,„,- Th.,„ °tr

inagaks ktakl£sh, tsili shneshualzo'ta l.ushtsdzok. Na's w/pka lit! dmbotat,

cS?;";^',-, •'"'' '""'"K"'^''"'^" ">"r.l.rtb.-y. o«c o«.„V., i„,„ ,h„ „„,er

, . ""in™ (man) '

tsui shti'ld^hna tiV sa-auioksduikshi m'na ; ..end shtl'ldsliniik. Tsui ffduka
S*"" Sis,' "-'i-" I'l*^?' i;;.. ^nlag^" W2!S'^ v«^,h^,

I'TrNliUAL OF WAJiRiOKS.

tsiii sha ahiu'lgit)'! ts(ixapksh, tsiii an Ankuala td'm, tadi hu ksliu'iwal Ifi'-

lliRK they t'lillcuti'fl thofJlltn, and llioy ciitUmb* miny, uid tboy laid nn tba pyre to

(uf traeii)

lukshaluapkiig. Tsi^i sa nut4 hd'k, ndnuktua nuta ; pualdla sha iid'nkglaiu

vraniats (him). Then thny flrod It, tho wbol* tbev cnat Into tboy hia

flriMii

tfl'kanksh. Stiit;ui8hla shayutdtkug; k'ldksht shtutzishlH. Ai hA'k n&nuk 3

quivor. HoiTowrally wopt tbny liimournlDKi ntblHdnalh tbny wept. Now tbal wbnio

Mdtspka tchuUl'ks, at sa ndnuk gji'mbclo 16l6kuhaltkuk. Gdtpatnpgle

wimbiirDliip boily, then thny all nttiimnd from iTi'fnatlnf{. Tli«y cninn Iwck

tchf Hhtat HhiHlidBlika ulia Idk hfi'k HndwedHli hii'nkulam wen6ya; luBHudksli

to home* (and) out nff Ihuy bnir to wife bin, who wan btinband

widowed ;

m'na k'ldkslit woiicSya.

her bnvlDffdlcd hIio becuino
widow.

Ti'miprii spi'ik^li, k'lii'wi at ; at gji'mbfile, kiii'm pdn. At gii'tak.

Klve (dujH) nliK nwontwl, atnppiMl then; and reltirned hnm«. (nnd)fliib al«. That 'nlbn end.

SlitfO Hhupfil6ka iiiVhh wen6yuk, tHui Hpdklitch.

]tt>Hln nbinaldon ilin) IwcauHO widowed, tlifii went nwc-nthig.

liettd

NOTES. ,

Tho Htylc of this littlo piece is far from what wc would call accomplished, and of
iiicongrucncies and uniiecessai-y repetitioiis there are a score. The light in which tho
five warriors were killed is imputed to the presaging, night-long cry of an car-owl, and
in ancient times Indians seem to have been justilled by universal custom in attacking
and killing their neighbors if an owl or raven was vociferating at night in' close prox-
imity to tho lodge or hidgcis of these unfortunate jM'ople.

88, 7. hushts6;^ok for hushts6;^a litlk.

88, 9. 10. hushtso/a is used hero in an active sense, but is better translated by tho
passive fonn.

89, 1. kshuiwala has for direct obj«!ct ts6/apk8li, the dead body. For tho same
operation tho verb kshAwala, kshAwal is also frequently used : 85, «. From here tho
informant begins to speak of one body only, as if only one warrior, not many, had been
killed in this battle. Cf. Note to 80, 5.

89, 2. htiukClam .stands in this line for hunkt'ldmsham or p'niilam: "their, theirs".
89, 5. lAk. After their return they cut olf the hair of the* widow and then sh<»

put pitch or resin on tho head. In most tribes they did it at the time of eremation,
while they witnessed tho action of the flames upon the body.

89, 5. hftk snliwedsh : one widowed wife only is mentioned hero instead of many :
^^pars pro toto "-construction. This sentence, if built regularly, would run as follows :
shishiishka sha Iftk hfi'nkeiam snawt''dshash, kat lifik wenoya; hi8su.iksha.sh m'na
k'Wksht wen6ya.

89, 7. spft'keii, to sweat in the sweat-lodge, viz. in one of the three sweat-lodges
given by E'mukamtcb to the Klamath Lake people : spft'klitcha, spfi'klidsha, to start
out for sweating there. Cf. Iumk6ka and wAla. To eat flsh only, and no ineat, means
to fast on fish.

MANNEK8 AND CUSTOMS.

VARIOUS ETHNOGRAPHIC NOTICES.
I.

8hute-u»i.ka laH " "'"•."-d

Will ba elected a chlof.

' ""tf' !f €^- S'-Sr^o Uk; snawddshasl. kailish p„ Idk gitk. "Sa

'"' '!,i?JV ""•-'"'»•' Wt .Un hair "^ear.. If

sndwedshash hishuatcl^ash rx^Wshni, lulnk ktii'tchka ; hishudkshash wdtch
8Z6kta: tfl'm wdtch ^vu,6-we. — <'— ^ -- r„r.„„e.

theyflno: many horsfs lie h.s'to givB up.

tbey have n
Are.

goes (aud)toall crieaoiit: "HtralKht .Und

if 'ttl^.'' T.!^,^-' -rflr ! «Winat! hfshuaksh pil sh^inatf

np! Bit down voalll ataml n'ni .■ i

y stand up! eingi the men ..lly mu.t.ingl

apkl 1

enough

o „ — . »u»^Q, Aluw X nave

K-.^ J « cUlX I L / . »t»P»lnglng >e all I cry and weep ye every one I

^:l':i^' ■'■sf=-4."i.'i* «ir\«t-?r ' "SA^"

15 k'lekdpksh!"

the corpse I"

II.

Ji" S£=h «;•■• sisr' -sttiS **:•::*". p-r-

l.n.champka.h k.-ilal4_^,Mtk„, vj„a„ ,„M,,«|, teh„.cI,i.«h4I.ko.
8he8hal61e8h keldza. '^''^

• warrior he beoanitt.

then

VAU10U8 ETIJNOGKAPHIO NOTJCES,

Nka'kgiuga t'slii'shap p'ki'Mhap taiinapni wafta kd-i tchd'leks pdn,

After M I'hlldbtrth IhiMattier (mid) tbu mdllin- ten dHy.s n» moat Mt,

Hlii'ipSlc tniikltlksilni tclif'ali I'flsit p&ii; ti'inepMi wiiita loink6kt', nadshksap-

biead, tliii IiiiUhiih ii1w> fii'Hl oat; Hvm ilayH ItiHy Mweat, aizto

tdnkni at wait61aii slinlcStisli p'ndlam iianuk jjuedsha. 3

then day over, garnieutH Ihclinivii all cimI away.

Tishiwdpkash wa'k gftko shueutchuga p'gl'shap hii'nkglain wa'k tkuyd;

Crooked llmlm having aba1>e iiiutlier Itn the ruua;

liniba

ha lish kad kalkdlish liVlp gltko hil'nkglftm p'gi'shap Idip tkuya nepdtka,

It' too roiiuded t'yeM Uavinf; Itn mother the eytm rtibtt wiib band,

kikann^ga lii'lpiit nepdtka, tchiii shishatchClo'tka; at tfdsh tchek Hhutii'lan G

appUpH totUooyos the bands, then apmndn (tboin) npnri; then well finally after arrnnsiiiK

kfiliiwi. Hdmasht taks hfi Md'dokni giiiga ktaktanapdtko sliftko shle-ish

blie Mtopa. Tbereture the Modoca aleepy- allko to look at

nduviki. Hii lish k6-idshi wawdklsh gi suentchain, p'ki'shap fciks tidsh

all are. If mtaabaped theeara are of tbe ba1)e, the mother nrii(bt

shii'ta, patddsha Budntchdm wawdkash, rienpdga, peptchdga. Naishhxeihldk- 9

shapes she streii^bea tbobabo'a both eara, little lianiU, tittle feet. Toads-

(tbem),

gi8h=gitko ktchdyash tchi'sh wektat itd ni'sh tchi'sh.

borued lieetles with fangs also on the 8be on tbe alao.

arms laya, neck

NOTES.

With the exception of the first, these ethnographic notices concern the people com-
posing the southern chieftaincy as much as those of the northern.

I. The four items of section I are worded in the Klamath Lake dialect, and were
obtained from Franlc, a young Indian settled at Knyamska'-iksi, "the Crab's River-
Trail," on the Williamson Eiver.

90, 1 etc. The census figures given in the first paragraph refer to one of the latest
counts made of the individuals in the tribe, probably to that of 1870.

90, 1. vun^pni laMki gitko. Correctly worded, this phrase would read vunepa'nash
lahikiash, or vun^pnish, or at least vun6pni lalfikiash gitko.

90, 2. p6-ulatko ought to Iw used only when units are mentioned after tlic decads
of figures. If the relator wanted to say, 180 men wore conntod, the verb .sliii'tui,
sh^tui would be the proper terra. Cf. Note to 70, 8. 9.

90, 3. Tumdntka, "by tbe many", by the crowd: by the majority of the men in
the tribe.

90, 7. hishudtch;^ash is a form for the word man, male, common to Klamath Lakes
and Modocs, but more frequently used among the latter. The reverse is true of the
form hishuaksh.

90, 10-13. Part first of tlit! fourtli notice refers to dancx?s at the fommunal diince-
lodge, organized and directed by chiefs. The chief starts the songs ; sometimes the
men, sometimes the women sing in chorus ; or a song may be sung by all present.
When the chief sees one, who does not sing, ho cries out : "i tchuin; t<ila shuin il"
AH 'lances are accompanied by songs or other music.

'0, 10 til probably stands for fax, fi'n, u'na, a conjunction more frequently used in
the A/ xloc than in the Klamath Lake dialect.

MAJMNEKS AND CUSTOMS.

90. 11. tcUa'l^et for tch&'l^at I ait yo dowu !

90,11.14. w6wal;rat,waw%at W^ameaus: tolookoutfor.tobeexDectant- fh«

90. 12. tchHinuapk. See Note to 70, 3.

«.,K ^'l^^^'J^l ''''^^^ *"™"' Sldmuapk to k'lek^pksh are commands of the chiefs or
subchiofs heard at the solemn ceremonies held in or around the lodgeof adeid
sung by tho«e ,, ^^^ ^^^^^^^^^ ^^^ .^ ^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ mp ohorusea

n tL ?;«^i ?^ i?' shhimi-uapkat, or shlAmi-uapk' !! See Dictionary,
worded h^rrdrdt^t." "^"°" " ^'^"^ "^'^^"^^ '-- '■ «• ^- «^'^<*'«' -"^ -

90, 17. The Klamath Lakes wore a kind of elkskin hat, wide brimmed hieh and
pamted ,n colors, which they called pfikalsh tchuy^sh. laggings werSledS
lapsh, because they rea^shed to the ground (kSila) ^"

make'";ar;toflSr"'' "' ^"eshal^lish ; both derived from the verb sh^llual, U>

00, 18. sht^tmashtka. All Indian tribes of the border region between California
and Oregon are reported to have fought with poisoned arrows I earlj ttmes.

.^ . V.^ ^'"f ' ''^^'^'''^^ "" ^•'''"""t "f » childbirth. That the father denies
to himself the use of meat during ten days is a custom not unlike the wori^ reno^ed
<^uvade; the sweating has the effect of keeping him at home in such a Tmt wSer^s
family stands most in need of his protection. ^

i.v^n"' ^/Il^f If'" *.""'■ *'^*°^' ^'°^ •'^ ^'^•"^ »»d the bread made from such- m^k-
laksam pdsh, Indian food: edible roots, berries, w6ka«h etc.; lomk6ka for the Kla
math Lake: spfikli: to sweat in a sweat-honse. Cf. Note to 80 7

01, 3. p^&lam sbulotish the dress which they wore at the time of the childbirth
.• J\ Tishiwapkash. The Modoc tishiwatko, crooked, stands for Klamath Lak«
tishilatko, to which compare tikiwatko and tis^antko iilamath Lake

01. 5. kalMlish. This adjective is variously pronounced kCHkali and k61koli.

would ^aVllM'Tn"'"" '••'''! "^^''''''''' '''''''•''' ^ ''^•P^t,-'^^ the-Klimaths
would say, Ifilpftt, however, involves the idea: she rai.es her hand m to theevps

This manipulation probably contributes to some extent to the oblique rn™cvo^

Se oTlSd AP T " ""f •'*°' ^PP^""''"'''^ ""^ OregoniartoXSSan
?nH nlrf , .. u^^ '"'^•"Pulations described are frequently repeated bv mothers

01, 8 nAnuk, stands for nauuk gi. su^^ntchftm: in the Modoc dialect Lntch

stripped or tied '"'' """ '' '''''''''^''' cradle-board, to which th; infant ii

01, 10. ktchdyash. The appUcation oi insects et«., is certainly done for the nnr
po^ Of 1-enderu.g chUdren fearless against danger and unmove^'by rdd:n Jrigh'tin

AN OPINION AFJOirr THK WASCO JNJ>IAN8.

Amp;Uankni mXklaks.
AN OPINION ABOUT THE WASCO INDIANS.

ODTADfKD IN THE KlAMATH LAKB DIALECT FROM CHARLES PllESTON.

Aiup;(ankni gdtpa ma shandholiuk siuiwedsh, kA-i spuni vushiik:

OneW.80o oame yery dMirinpr a wife, (bTtlnot gavo from fear-

OAffle very
mndb

Amp^iinkni shawfgatk; kfya Ampzankni. G«^nuapk tumi fi-nkskni

theWa«ooe» are Irrliable , ll.rsaro thoWascoes. Would go many Lake men

Amp;)(ani sheshatulkuapk W'ksh ma'ntch=gftko; skiitash shaiidholiuk 3

cotbeDalloH. wonlil triulA nfr uiotri^u t 1? .1 , . _

»'"''<=» formerly J blankets (they) wanted

pa'niak, skiitash I'ktsa Amp;jani ydmnash tchlsh. Nash sdpash ff^pffapg-
Huapk, tsfalsh ^pkuapk, kdwi tchlsh dpkuapk. Tanni sha gdna? td-unipni

return, Mimon tbev would l«n,„™v. .^ ''bring.^ How many of *'did got ten n>en

tbera

lev would lamprey. too
bring, eeU

a-i aha gdna, sndwedsh tchish gdna, kd-i sha i-a. vil'sha Ampyiinknlshash. 6

tbey went, (a) woman also went, not they of feared the Wnscocs.

course

^™P^^"k"i "k sas hushtsozuapk; sassdgank i gi! Kd-i iifl shtfnta

ThoWsBooes them might kill. Imperilled yo an, I "Not I like

Amp^anknishash, kd-i tfdshi, kd-i tfdsh hii'shkank. Ha' tidshl eitk

theWa«oo,eople, not SO<^^(they not well iutentloned. If good.hearte.l were

mdklakr. Amp^iinkni, tdnkt ni ge'nt, sassdguk kd-i g^na. Tfdshi ha'k 9

people theWnscoes, then I may go being imperii ~IwlU5i)tgo. Good If to he

, _ there,

tumenank genuapka nil.

I bear (them) shall go I

(there).

NOTES.

The Wasco Indians form a portion of the Upper Chinook Indians of Columbia
Eiver. Their ancient homes were around and at the Dalles, and a few of them still
live there, while others now inhabit a section of the Warm Sprin}? Indian reservation
on Des Chutes Tli\er, Oregon. The Dnlh^s ibrinorly were, and arc still to a certain i
extent, the locality, where all tlic tribes of the Columbia Hiver Basin sold and bartered
their products and commodities. The Warm Spring- Indians call the Wascoes: Wsis-
kopam, " men of the grass region"; the Khikamas-Chinooks call them Guithlasko. The
Klamath Lake and Modoc Indians also were among the frequenters of the intertribal
market, exchanging there the slaves cauglit on their raids for ponies, provisions etc.
when they went down to the Dalles on their annual trips. My Indian informant'
Charles Preston, had livtvl long at the Dalles, and also gave \\w, a list of Waw.I
words and sentences.

MTTHOLOaiO TEXTS.

man" ntands hero for "son.e men of the WasS^pSpk?' ' "°" ^'^•="

93, 3. 4. Amp^a'ni, contraction of ainbu/S'ni "thither whern ti.n w..t^„ • » ,

K'mUKAMTCHAM AiSHISHAM TCHIsh SHASHAPKfiL^IASH.

K'MtJKAMTCH ATOEMPTS THE DESTRUCTION OF HIS SON

AlSHISH.

Obtainkd in thb Klamath Lake Dialkct from Minnik Fbobkn.

"-S* *»f.hSr» ^- S-t. 'Sa hj;k ia;pi *^„5,^

-—"-■., i™»i;i.uipinB», wmcnever (are) heiVrtni)

"i"±r Hr Sl'S,' »i f^Llte -^^y,-* e MaMaa„.

live, eTistenoe. *•"'" »» »« ontlet at

enoe, * rapidly the nnhlon running

' tT^^'^ ^' T£f ^'itejl'^. t^^uyunk mdklaksash kisCVtklank

•iry, wlSd when Wows. and hereupon the Indiana theflsh «ooplngnp

pdlshtat pAtki gl.

on the bottom aJiouId feed
left ury upon.

;"Jllf"''lrM±,!;''K'Si±^'- ^-ta tchkash ™.„a AisU-

ones

peroelvinu nponakgndwat-
atalk

' "'" A wile toabdurt (from him)

KMDKAMTCH ATTKMPTS THE DESTRIM TlON OF AfSHIsn. <>5
gfug tchuymik K'miVkmntch spft'iiHlina. K'ma'kamtiih \mmx^ Hld'ash-

th... K,u*k.n,toh took (him) .long. K'mdk«„.U.h t.,ld (hl,„, ,„uk,

s£:& 21:.^ i^Sf .*!^ .»i ''^'-k .ch« *w t^i.^SIf''" i'^''-*pk»i'

gft'tppelish; hi'-itak tchiii tclji'-uapk

10 climb biwk, there then he w.« going to

going t
»Uy.

'^'?2:fc'«'- Ji* "»'"•= »!- A<*.h.. ,M16.Uh .l.„jU, ^

±1' ^ses'" '^si*?'" sstt '?;;? A<.hw„. w.;::,;,i,h ,

Alnhiflh'rt

Wl.|>«

ka-i shanaho'li.

not wanted (him).

At toks hak Afsliish sluVisha, iidnuk kdko pil k'Igkd tia'muk hiium

but

(and)
nothtn);

^Ji- ''t^' 'r ""''':±=-i»i' i^att tl* A"Sr'' ii

lashtat kshi'klapksh

lying.

Nii-iti in'rifilam sha skayamtch pdsh arabutch 15

In banket thMv ,hoy o.rriil on b«k \„«., watl.To ^^

A/1 , .,,. , .,,., . ■■ "••"."■ uiiuMK too.1 water»l8o

',!iSi' a™ t' AS»l7l. «l-;»:an» ,,M,, dmbu ,„l,i-sh jba lchl,„

t;''"i"''ntet>""'' *;«&&■■■ A** '"i;* »!'-'' '■'•''"''
±±^'Sst' ".cr "!•'' «j;;,„K;i'' 't±t^ iv«*,. «;., K-;„kta.

lchik8M"hrt'nkn.,.a'shtglA(sl,isl,

Kl«lUh icniif.i

MYTHOLOOIC TEXTS,

'^3

tA'la. Wii'kaltk hii'kt ki.

vttkal. Child huTlng tbli wm.

Tchdi Afshtsh jj^^na nio-ishzdni, tapt'tankni

Then AlibiKh wonl to tho.llBglng. kMplnii Iwliliid

prairie,

ill 1 l"i>iri«,

gA\Mm Tcldkash; Tchfkalnni wJi'ka shh^a iniihiaHh AfHliiHham tchiii

bew,lk«l„p ,„TeWk», „r TohlU ,1,„ „„ll.l porck,,! ,he.h„l„w .V aLi,"., ' „„"'

.•rl..r"n.U,.rr. _ supped T,.Wk» l,.r ehlld Inwm.l,; ^I.erH.pou AY-h'-h «,d^

" wht*" i t ^'"^'' ^'&'" «Jf td^iAinnu Tchi'ka, hI.Wi Afohishash

"•^ """ "" •■■?' LookoJ iinmnd Tchlk», e»w .he Alehl.h

huyeg-ank, hft'tan kn ishtHvank shIii'p6lo; t.^lii'ii Afshish BpanshAmnelo

.l.t...B.l..wn. r»,..he r,.J„W„« .„m..e.,l,l'm).«aln, th.n AUhi.h S J home »!,ll„

Tohlk. pHeh ..uher l,e,Ml h»vl,„. KIMl.h '„l.„ " .pproeortng becllod (her)

n6le; tclu'ii shash lApok il'inpClo tchl'shtar m'na. 'IVJii'ii Hhash tchi'shyeni

ho.ne, .hen ,hei,. both he br.,„Kht U.w.rd- home hU „.,b.,„, ,„l.|,|'„7„,

i'tnampelaiik yj'imnash Bla^wana, tchdlisli lifl'nk li'ielank ydmnashla; lulan-

huvluK brought iMck „eok.we.r he g.v^ p„r.„pl„™ k„„„g b-^ m.d. Deoklace-'i "

•J ne'ntch hA'nk wdwansliish yAmnash slidwana.

three (of hie) wivea neckwear he guve.

'I'chiiyuk K'nnl'kamtch tumgna m'na unaka tchi'slit, mft'lua ff^nuaDkutr

tTiMm.hl, K'mrtk»rateh heard (th.Ohl. .:>n w« (.till) (,nd) pre- toprie!!d **

»Ilvp, pared

hAtaktala. Tchui Afshlsh unakAka m'na shtiilf pa'k-s nutolaloliitkiuk liV-

'"""■■ AUhleh to little son bin enjoined the pipe toewlngoff Into

^ '^ .tS'^''* K'mukiimt(;ham. Tch.'ii K'mflkdmtch ff^-itpanank tchdl^a; Afshisham

theflr. Of hn„*k„„,tol.. Then K'mrtk™,.ch '^ .Irlvlntf „t down , ' Al-hUb"

liA'k weka ku-ishe-iik lullladsliuitfinnia p'liikshu m'na.

•on rejoicing run forth to mid back from lils grandfather.

rcluii liiVnk jiji'ksli

Then the pipe

pakak61e8htka K'makAmtcham ; pt-n lifillAdshui K'niukamtdiash lld'nk

bo tried to Jerk off of K'nitlkamfh; '„Kain boron up to Knnikan.teh. X

IS anti K'mukdmtch kii-ashtamgna: "tchftchiks a hiVt ffi." I'ji'n hfi'khio-

that K'n,*k.n,tcb reprimande,!, .atop that matterl" Again thatoblW

M'llatchuyank pakak61ank pa'ksli nfltoh'ila liViakslitat; tcbiii Alshish

rnnnlognptoblm Jerking off Vhe pipe threw It into. bo fire, then AUhi.h

^^■Mml^^PK^ nadshpaksht, tche'k keU^wi. K'mukamtchasl. shi'uga tchui

pu8hed(lt)fu,tbor ontll'fearnt, then bo quit. Kmtikarateh hokUlS

18 hft'masht gink, tchiii medshA.

bymdoloK. then he moved away.

Ma'ntcbgitk pt^n K'mft'kamtch wdmogle; i)!' tchkash nd-ulakta m'na

Long after again K'mikamtch became alive, 'l,e thou proceeded againat hi.

""fn^"' Sf^ ''S'!^ "t""'' ^''">'*' P"^V Ji''^'"*t; ^«'"'' shnatgalka kAlo

eon. There (be) all over pifofi danteS' ontho.ky; then he set on Are th"»aky

21 hii'mashtgiiilank. HiVnkanti Afsliish tfa kfuyaga; hiimc'yo- "kd-i nd'sh

after doing. For tbi. reawn Atohl.h a tray held eVten%d ! hc«,ld: -n„t me

shfugat tAta," wdwanuiah m'na shi'namshtisht Sti'va a'-usheltkal hfl'k

bo may kill ever," wivea h„ belngafraid. Th.plt.b turned Into a lake

nAmikash kiifla, Afshishamkflh pi'l pnhA. Tchi'n' IHi'hash talpatk61a, sti'va

all over the world, AUhUh'. bom. Vv fem^ne-l Then Mod Hen potCh^on.; the pL

K'MOKAMTOn ATTKMI'TS THE I>KSTRITrTION OF AIBHISH. 97

00 Mod U«D.

tcliik hil'nk iixi'-uligu li'iki; k.it hiik hfl't tchiii lali'ffa Tfthft'Hliash. IW

thnii to It (Irlpimil im fiini. whioli tbiDK dao* atDSl

hM<l I

gdtnk iiA'nk Hhkulkela.

uuljr wu hurt.

Tbli oM

NOTES.

This is one of the most popular mytbs current among the lil-ukisliikni, and wo
shall find it purlially repeated in another niyfli, recounted by Dave Hill. AfNhlsh and
hiH father K'iniikAintchikHli n^i)re(«^nt powers of nature engaged in everlasting strife
for mutual extenniiuition. In this myth K'mi'ikaniteh resorts to the following trick to
destroy his oflspring. Seeing young larks in a nest on the top of a sorrel-stalk, he
inforuiH him, that if he climbs up there, he can obtain a nest of eagles witn all its
innuites. Oliuldened with the lu-ospect of this capture, Aishish climbs up, but the
insidious father causes the plant to grow miraculously fast under him, so that descent
bee mes impossible, and Afshish comes near perishing by hunger and exposure.

In the recollection and wording of some portions of the myth my informant was
assisted by "Captain Jim."

94, 1-7. The short fragment of a (ireation myth preceding the Aishish tale stands
in no causal connection with it, and could as well be inserted elsewhere. Myths enter-
ing upon the tletaih of the creation (.f the worhl by K'nuikAmt<;hiksh <lo not, as far as
ascertained, exist among this i)coi)le, but in their stead we have many myths for
HiK'cial creations (of man, animals, islands, mountains et<-.). A grammatie analysis of
the terms occurring in thi« fragment (from Lfipi mVlsh to p»Uki gl) was inserted by
me in the Ammcun Antuiuarian,\it]. I, No. 3, pages 1(!1-1G«, under the heading:
" Mythologic Text in the Klamath Language of Southern Oregon."

94, I. Lfii){ shutiiy^iga is not to be considered as a rci)etition, for it means: when
K'miikamtch began to create the worid he made «« before he made the flab, other
animals, and the dam at Link\lllc. This is, of course, only a small fragment of all the
creation myths of this people.

94, 2. shasluipkflia: to tell or count stories, myths or fables in the interest or for
the pleasure of somebody; the i is here doubled to obtain a rhetorical effect.

94, 3. K'nuVkamtchish is a contraction of K'mfi'kamtch tchish ; Afshish, K'mfik-
amtch also. The longer form of the name of the deity occurs 96, 20.

94, 3. kdiikt, metathetically for k.ikat ; kAt is pron. relat. which, what, the thing
which. nAnuktua kSi-akt giig comprehends all animate and inanimate creation.

94, 4. wa, uA, to .stay, exist, live in; is always connected with an indirect object
indicating the place, spot, locality or med.um where the subject lives or exists.

94, 4-0. The construction of the sentence nins as follows: Tchuyunk(K'muk<imtch)
n(:'-ul;fa gi'tki giug paplishash Iidalonan, prutki ti'wish glut udulsh6mpkash mfi' nkil-
lipkash, mfl'ash sliKi-uyuk; "when a south wind blows, it will stop the waters from
rushing down rapidly over the cataract." The outlet of Upper Klamath Lake, called
Link River, runs from north to south, over the falls at Linkville; hence a powertul
south wind will stem the current of Link River above the falls, leave its bottom dry or
almost dry, and enable the Indians to catch the fish swimming in the shaUow water
or wriggling in the mud. The rocky ledge under the cataract is supposed to be the
gift of K'makamtch.
7

"I
1

VitsJ

MYTH(>I.()GIC TKXTH.

M, 4. Iu1iil(Wmn or Yiilftlrtna in tlio riiiliiui iiaiiio of tho (iuhcimIo of Link River
above thu town of Liiikville, hiuI for that town itwlf. Tlio origin of tliiM name in ex-
plained in 94, fl. 0, for the vt-rh i iiliilona nieiiiiH to move forth and bnek, refi'rrinu here
to the waterH ot the river rt'icding niider Hie presFture of tlie nontli wind.

94, 0. ftklank, partic. prew. of itkal, ineaiiN liere: obtaining by battketfuU.

94, 9. The kfinAwat is a plant growing higli in the warm clinnit*) of Northern Cali-
fornia, OHitceially in the anciient habitat of tlie Hhasti IndianH, and in this myth it sag-
geMteil itnelf to the IndianH on acconnt of its property of growing very fast.

98, r>. g<i'hlapka: lie swung hiinwlf Into the nest by elimbiug over tho rim. Cf.
Note to 66, 13.

96, 10. kafarema K'mukiiintchiNli for tin- regular form K'niuklVint<;ha8h. Cf. 91, s.

95, 15. Hk^yamtch etc. More pliilnlv expressed this sentence runs as followi^ : sliu
Bkiiyanina pdsh tehisL anibu tcliisli; the Hrst t«li!sh being placed liefore pasli and
appendetl to the apocopated skayamna.

98, 10. slaf'waua hen- used differently from tchlya, which applies to liquids only.

98, 17. p'lfi' itchuank seems to be a quite modern interimlation, for it smells of
pomade and hair-oil; bul it is as ancient as the myth itself.

98, 23. 96, 2. 3. 4. Tchika. I have rendered this bird-name elsewhere bv "Chaf
finch," and K16tisli by "Sandhill Crane".

96, 3. shl&mia, Ut feel Insulted. She resented it as an insult that the child (tailed
her deceased husband by name; for it was a capital crime among the ancestors of the
present Klamaths to call a deiul person's name for many years after his demise.

96, 5. hft'tna is changed to hft'tan on account of being followed by a word eom-
meucing with k.

96, «. stiya. The custom of widows to put pitch or resiu on their heads at the
death of their husbands was abolished only at the time when cremation became a thing
of the past.

96, 0. galdsha-uyauk is a more explicit form of the participle; the verb gAldshui
being the contracted form of galdshdwi.

96, 8. ydmnashla. He used the bristles of porcupines to make necklaces of.

96, 11. unakfika m'na was the son of Aishish and of the above mentioned Tchika.

96, 11. 12. K'mukdmtcham qualities pa'ks, not lulukshtat.

96, 14. pakak61eshtka, verbal desiderative of pakak61a, to jerk away from. The
sutHx -61a indicates that K'mAkamtch wore his toba«co-pipe tied to his bo<ly; he wore
it on his neck.

96, 15. tchitchiks is used when speaking to children. It signifies so, sol and
means: be quiet, shut up, stop!

96, 17. tche'k kei6wi. lu similar connections this n1r ase %-ery frequently ends a
whole narrative in Modoc and Klamath. Here it meau^, a.at Afstiish ceased to poke
the piiMJ into the tire. Cf. 86, JO. 89, 7.

96, 18. medshd: he removed from that spot with . In. irivr , and children. An-
cient customs forbid the oflspring to stay where the father had breathed his last.

96, 20, G^n hftnk ndnuk etc. This portion of the myth describes the destruction
of all the living organisms on earth by a general conflagration caused by K'mAkamtch.
Myths of this kind are suggested by intense heat experienced in summer. This mode
of destroying life on earth is less frequently met with in myths than tho drowning in a

A MTTHIO TALE AIJOITT AfSniSH.

10, 21. kfuyliga. AlsIiiHli held tiio trii> over liimsolf, hlH whole fomily, and hin
lodge. The miniu prefix ki- rcupiieiirs in a iiuwilizcd furru iii ii;(l'-ull|ia: 87, 1. It in
iiUHiilizod there on account of the pi-eceditiK -k in lib'nk.

06, '2'.\. kUilit. Where I have rendered tliia term by »'worhl", an here and elsewhere
in creation niythH and niytliN of a Hiniilar character, it doen not Hignify tiie whole Hur-
face ot the earth att known to ns, but only that nection of country which i» known to
that tribe of IndiunH. TIiuh ancient creation niytlm only dcHcribe the creation of that
part of country where the«e myths orip^inated ; the creation myths (»f coast trilM*« will
incUuh* the ocean in their term for "world".

06, 1.'3. Tuhush talpatk^lu. Mud lien, one of Aishish's live wiWM, lookeil out iiom
under the roof of Alshish's 1o<1ko or shed to see what was going on. This fiction ex-
plains the round <hirk spot visible on the mud-hen's head) its round form ia indicated
by the prefix la- in lollga.

AisHIHHAM BHASHAPK£L^A8H.

A MYTHIC TALK ABOUT AlSHISH.

Given dy Davk Hill in thk Klamath Lake Dialect.

ShashnpkClo-udpkun Aisliishash :

I ftin K^FuK tu tell ft Htury about AlabUh t

Afohiah mat Hdkla tCl'mn nuiklaks (yamnatku ; Hhuddshnuk mat aha

AInblali, tbey nay, giiiiililid many |>ei>ple bavinK with him i when gainblliiK on ao they they

their way, aay,

shndiia lA'Ioks. YAmnashptchi mat IQ'loks Afshisham, WatiAkalum kiikii'kli 3

built Area. Pnrpleblue (wan), aa ro- the fire of Alabiah, nf Silver Fox yellow

|K.rtc<l,

ICl'Ioks, K'mukamt(^liam shlAyaksak. Tsiii sa slO'kla ; Afshish shlfn tdlaak,

thn tire of K ludkumtcb (it wiif) nnioko only. Tlicii llii'V nhiitiittbi' Alalilab hit (II) straight,

(waa), iiinrk ;

Wandka yfl'tlansna. K'mukdmts tu' liak yuTka, ndiika toks tH' hak a-dti

Lltllo Silver nilaatd the mark. K'milkaniteh thiHnlilonf Htruck, tbeothorabnt far th's aide nf

Fox mark the murk

hakyfiTka; tuf sa lidmaslit gfulank siikaliiiga. Tiim sa hdslikH, tsiii sas 6

atruukf rlsht they after so uulng commence<l gam- Many tliry bet on, tbec over

then bllng. tbtniia them

Afsliish i'kak; sdwatkaslitka ndnuk watchpka, tsiii sa gii'mpgle. At td'

Alaliiab won ; about noon all men had lost all they then they went home. Ever

bad,

tsiissak i'zak ndnuk eas.

since be won them all.

Ttl'nipnish wdwan's gitk Afsliish : Tuhfl'sh ndsh snaweds Afshisham, 9

Five wives had Aiablab: Mud Hen (waa) one wife ef Alshlafa,

St6kua nosh endwedsh, Kli'tish ndsh, Wii'ks ndsh, Tsi'ka ndsh sndwedsh.

Loug'tall one wife, Sand-bUl one, Mallard one. Chaffinch one wife,

Bqnlrrel Cmse

100

MYTHOLOGIG TKXTS.

Th?' ^-"'i^*?** na'-ulakta; at undk uii'-ulakta Afsisas. Tsui

The, K mtikanitcb plotted .worolly ; after day. I,,, plotted »g«in«l At,hUl:. Then

break

"^ IVofh ^* '''IP?'-^*^ Afshishash K'mukAmts: "at ta' lu^lkish p'lafwash

plttco ca([lp8

^S r''^ r",^'>' -''^"' 1^.^'" yavakiuk", sndwedsas kfi'ktakiuk K'mdkamts
t^!i^' ^lu^^^!''^ ^^''''^- ^^ ^^"'^ '^P"*^^ ^^«'« K'mukamts tchish g^na.

ofAl8l.(,h, Llttlo bquirrel, Then Botunt both: Al«hl«h K'm,Skanitcli aUo «ent

(there).

Tchiii slU p'lafwash, tsiii alahia K'mukdnits kokrntki sius; tsui

Then «nw the eagles, an.l pointed out Kintiknnitcb (thepine) to ciimb up, then

p'lafwash hunkdya kdpkatat. Afsis kokdntsa til'; tsiii kedsii hiik • atO

tbeeagleH How on the pine. Al,hi»h climbed up,' then Irew it, 'ft/,,,,

ka1(i kapata at kfipka. Tsui hflnk gukuank slaa tchililikg jku'lelam,

the»ky touched i.ow thepine. And (it) having climl,ed he h„w tbe young ones ofalaik,

D slini'ilas toks hfi'k p'lafwashani. Atflnk at suaktclia Afshish 8hnul,4sti>t

theeyrio though it (ku») oftboenglo. Theie no»- «ep, Alehiah in the eyrie"

tchi'klank ; K'mu'kamts gii'mpgle at, sillu'tantsa Afshish sliitk sla's. G/it-

Bilting, KmAkaniKh wi^nt iiway, dressed lM,u«olf to Alahish iilike to appear. Ho

pampgle tfl' tclii'shtat ; tchiii shp6niik, tcln'ii sliii't<ii)k Stu'knaksh : tchui

laraeLck fr- todwelling, then it w,.8 Inle, iind b,> sU'pt with Little Niuirrel, then

Tsiii n/inuk w^wan's kti-ikema, tsui sa k(5-ika.

'be wlve.H became auspicious. ,»nd they round out.

nil

12 kaikfima Stukudg.

auspected (bim) Uttle Squirrel. Ther<>.

upej

"K'mukAmts a ho't ki!" tsf sa hft'n ki liiVksa Afsisam wewanuish.

"K'n,uk4inta this one ia!" thus they said those Alshisba wives.

Tsiii shash at shuii'tsna mbu'sant, tsiii sa naiuik g(ina tiila, kat

Then tiora the,n .lepa'teil for neit morning, and thev M went with tboae

gambling |,,,,^, ^^„

15 Afshish tiihi shuetsantAmgna. At aha shiit'na lu'loks .sut'tsnuk sas Tsiii

withAlshisb wefolntiieba.itof And they built fires while on their And

gambling. gambling lour.

K'muk,4mtsam sldyak.ak lu'yiiga, at sa k/iyek'ma, at sa : "kti-i a ke'k

to K'm4knnitcli smoke oiiiy curled „|i, now Iney suspicted, and they '^ot (is) this

(said) :

Afsis!" hiVksa na-ast sa-Jankiinkatk. "K'miikaints a ke'k gi!"; na'sht sa

Alshlsh!" Ibnsedn ibe thus ibis) foUoneis. ' K'mflkamtcb this lap so tbev

distance) (salil) ' '""'

18 hfi'ksa tii'kiii; "ka-i a Afsis gii'pkat, kti-i hu't kl'Ioks Afshishani nfi'ta".

(»aid)tho«e farotr, -not Alsbisb can,,., n..t (here) the fire of Afshish is burning"

Ha'ksa tu' na'shtk tiili'tankpkuk : "a'^ gen slt5kalsht hf slila'papakuapk;

Those afar thus said a-eing bin, e.iming; ■yr this alL-r le has shot .it wllUlnd out thenS

nian the mark

Afshish toks shli'tam'na tdlaak!" At gdtpa at shlo'k!a, t<i' hak v<iTka

Alshlah however always hits straight!' Then theyai- and they ebot, (but) far this Side atruek

rived

21 K'nuikaints; WanAk tads yii'tlausiiii. Tm'u sIdi siikaliiig, tsiii sa K'nnikan)-

K'mlikamteh; Silver Fox "missed i, lllilr. Then ib.i , ,i,.,nenrn;i and they over K'mf,.

ga,ning,

A MYTHIC TALE ABOUT AfSHISH.

101

tsas i'kak; waitash a t(i'm i'kak, tsdi sa ga'mbSle, tsiii sa gdtpampSle

kamtoh won ; all duy long many thoy won, then tbey retamed, and they went back

stakea

Idtsastat. At sa tsiii {fii'tak sdkla saldkiuk Alsisas.

tothelodgea. Then they qnlt gambling, for they Alahlah.

missed

Tsiii Afsisam wdwanuish sudsuaktsa tsfl'ssak, k'lewfdsha m'ndlam 3

And Alshlsh s wives wept constontiy, (and) left their

Idtchash sta-ildshuk. Shti'a sa nfi'shtat shi'dsho wen^pi wdwanuish; ndsh

lodges to dig roou. Pitch they on heads pnt four wives i one

toks Wa'-aks kd-i hli'la Afsisas. Tsiii ludtpislals Kliti'sam Aisis t<i'm6na,

bnt Mallard not monrnod Alshlsh. Then the weeping cries of Sandhill Alshlsh heard,

C ioo

tsiii Afshish shudktsa tli'mgnank. At Afsis t(i' kdlo wika't. at k'l<^knapk G

and Alshlsh wept hearing (them). Now Alshlsh (was) sky close to, then ho was morl-

far away bond

kak6 bSla ; at shi'tsa 1dpi wdkwak tu' kdlo wikdta ; at shlad Afsisas. Tsdi

iMnes nothing then soared np two butterflies far the sky close to ; snd (they) Alshlsh. Then

but J up saw

shitsliatzdpgle shla-61ank, tsiii gatpanipglissa, tsiii sapa, p'tisd m'na sapiya :

they flew back having seen (him), and returned homo tlicy, iind tofd, to lather their saying;

"tfdsl k'la'kuapk hi'ssuaks; tu' ni kalci wigdta shliid hfi'nk hissudksas kak6 9

" a good will (soon) perish man ; far off I sky close to saw that man "bones

belat; ti'dsi liA'k k'lii'kuapk!" Tchfssa shapfya p'tlsa m'ndlam.

nothing good this will perish I" So thev said to father their,

but; (man)

Hfl'k p'tfssap sani shkiiyui shash mbd'sant at undk gd-ulakuapk ydki

The father their ordered them on next morning early to soar up a'baaket

shldyamgiiank. Tsiii slia gdna saptdlaltk, tsiii sa tii' gdtpa pds a I'yamnatk 12

strung aroand (them). And wont tbo sisters, and they up arrived food carrvine

' thero •" *

dmbtits i'yamnatk. Tsdi Afsisas llwdtkal sluiu'lashtat hii'nkant, tsdi wil'la

water also carrying. Then Alshlsh they raised in eyrio that, then inanired

hu'ksa w<5kwak: "wdk i gdn gftk?" nd-asht sha wCi'la. Tchdi Afsis

tbMe butterflies ; "what are here doing?" so they Inquired. Then Alsbish

you

hamd;ue: "K'mukdmts an'sh p'lafvvash sliti'lta; tsdi ni k(5ka kapka-dgatat, 15

said: "K'raiikamtch me after the eagles sent; and I clirabed on the snialT pine,

tsdi kedsnfl'tan's ; kddslia kapka koki'sh gt^-u Tsdi nd hd'nk shliid

then it grew up under me j grew up the pine during climb. my. Then I (those) «nw

ing

p'lafwash, sku'lalam tads n'u'nk shlad tsi'liliks." Tsfhunk Afsis hii'mkank

eagles, of the lark only I found the young." So Alshlsh said,

sii'gsuk hd'nkies.

giving ex-
planations

to them.

At sa hd'nk sldnkok shl6a tchakgldtat ks^koga baa Afshishas shewan6-

Jfowthey spreading a wild- in tbo willow- placed into they Alshlsh after eivlnc

cat's skin basket " "

lank pa's dmbuts, tsdi sa skdt/idsa, kiiflatat at gatpdmpgle. Tsdi i'pka

(him) food watcralso, then they took him down on the ground ho returned. \nd hol»v

In tbo basket ^[^^^^

ma nts, at wii'mpfilo.

» longtime, then he recovered.

t';i

102

MYTHOLOG1C TEXTS.

NOTES.

PortiouH of tho same inytli, though differeutly conuected, will be found in the
mythic tale: K'milkamtch attempts tlie destruction of his son Aishish. Both narra-
tives are complementary to each other in some important details.

99, :i. shnC'ua. It is the custom of {iumblers to build fires at every place where
they stop on their road or trail. Any i)arty of travollinff Indians will do so when stop-
ping on their way. Cf. 23, 15.

99, 3. Yamuashpt* lii. Several adjectives designating colors are taken from arti-
cles of dress in both dialects : tolaluptchi, green ; tch;?C"-utch;^e-ushi)tchi, a shade of
blue; and si).'ilptchi, light-yellow, is called after a face-paint made of a kind of clay.

99, 3. Waniikalam Jfi'loks. The fire of Young Sdver Fox was yellow or yellowish,
not only because the fur of this fox-species turns from silvery white into yellowish by
the change of seasons, but also, because this animal represents in mythic stories the
lialo around the sun. Cf. shakatchiilish in Dictionary. Wandka always figures as
the companion of the principal national deity, K'miikamtch.

99, 7. Wiitchpka: to stake everything in one's possession and then lose it all;
wi-uka, to win all the stakes lost by the others.

99, 10. 100, 5. Stokua or Stiikuaga was, accordiutr to another of my informants, a
fish of this name, and not a squirrel. The other wives of Aishish all have names of
birds.

100, 3. ludlks: K'miikamtch had inherited a locality where his father was in the
habit of hunting and killing the giant-engle (p'laiwash). Thinking of this place,
K'nuikiimtch went there with his son Aishish, after sclieming a stratagem to let him
perish there. To kill the eagles, it was necessary to climb a pine-tree ; this K'mu-
kamtch w.is afraid of doing, and wanted to send up there his son instead.

100, 9. shnulas toks etc. The lark had her young in the nest of an eagle.

100, 10. sfdu'tantsa. He dressed himself in Aisliish's garments, as appears from
the ibregoing mythic tale.

100, 15. sas. Dave Hill often uses shash, sas in an almost reciprocal sense: while
(or: for) going to gamble among themselves. This pronoun does not dei)end here on
slinena, as we might assume. Cf. Note to 58, 10. It refers to the playmates of Aishish,
who set out with K'nn'ikamtch, whom they thought to be their beloved Aishish on ac-
count of the dress he had abstracted from him. In ICO, 14 shash was explained to me
by "from them", viz. from tho wives of Aishisli, in whose lodge K'miikamtch had
passed the night.

100, IS. gii'pkat for g(5pka at: did not come now, or: has not come yet.

101, 2. gii'tak. This adverb gives to understand, that they were loth or too tired
to play any longer for stakes, because their beloved Aishish was not present. " To cease
or stop gambling" simply, would be expressed by saklola.

101, 4. shti'a etc. Cf. Notes to 89, 5; 90, C; and general Note, on page 86.

101, 4. shi'dsbo wen(:!pi, rather unusual forms for shi'dsha hfi vHU(:'pni. Hfi, "up,
above, on liead," has coalesced with shi'dsha into one word.

101, 5. Kliti'sam. Aishish heard the cries of KK'tish only, because of all the birds
which are believed to be his wives, the long-necked sandhill crane is the loudest and
noisiest.

101, 8. gatpampglfssa for gatpAmpfili sha, as tchfssa for tchf sa.

ORIGIN OF HUMAN RACES. DURATION OF HUMAN LIFE. 103

101, 8. p'tisA m'ua for p'tiHha m'ndlam.

101. 10. kak6 b€lat for: kak6 pU at.

101. 11. p'tisaap sam. Sham, sain "their", is found standing instead of m'n&lam,
p'ndlam, or huukeiamsham in the conversational form of language. Cf. 107, 13. 108, 4.

101, 13. liwiUkal. They lifted up the famished Aishish, almost reduced to a
skeleton, and seated him upright in the nest ; they imi)arted new strength and life
to h'lu by feeding him.

101, 10. kMsha, to grow, forms k^dshna, kedshutita; n'sis: n&'sh, to me, with me,
under me ; a sort of dativua commodi.

ORIGIN OF HUMAN RACES. DURATION OF HUMAN LIFE.

■<«»
'^

Given by "Captain Jim" in the Klamath Lake Dialect.

K'md'katntch hu'nk at iKi-ul^a nd-asht gdn : Hii'nk E-ukshikfshash

E'mtikamtcb ruled asl'ollovn; Tbe Klaamth Lako

tchdk mdklaks shfi'ta; tchui p^n Ka'kakilsh tchdgsh mdklaks shft'ta;

from a Acrvice- people he made; hereupon ibeK^kHkilHh from akunka people made;

berry buuh

yAmatala gdniita shiisht^dshna. E-ukshkfahash ktchdlzishtat i'l^a, B6sh- 3

noithwarda v bile ho he created (thini) on The Klamath Lakes in tht sun-heat he laid tbe white

batl gone liia way. down,

tinash toks shiit61ank mahieshtat i'l^a; hiimasht gfug na'd mdklaks mfi'-

people however after en-ating in tbe shade laid down; therefore we Indians <are)

(them)

makmdkli, B6shtin toksh papdlpali. E-ush guni'gshta kailali'a.

dark, the wliite race but llgfat-C4>m- The sea beyond he made a

ploxiuned. world lor them.

At sha pii'n ne-ulakiega, K'mukamtch md'nk tchl'sh shkishki'sh tchish 6

Then they began ti> leuishite, K'm6kBmtcb, mole also, fly-bug also,

wishl'nk tchish. Mii'nk haind;{e: "N(i a gii'ggaintchlshash mdklakshash

gnrternnake also. Mule said; "I of old age thi' human beings

gi'tki gi!" Hunkanti vi^ishink nd-asht ham^;ce: "nfi'toks gdmptcha

to become want!" On that suliject gartersnake thus spoku: "and I thunmade

mdklakshash gi'tki gi!" Tchfhunk vri'shink shkintchi8hxag6ta : "gd-ash 9

themen to become order I " Thus garteranako while shedding its skin: "thisway

nil hfi'nk mdklakshash k'ldktgi: ti'dshok ndtnak git k'mii'tchatk gfntak

I the men to becemo having grown then to be of old age though

(want) :

tchiltgipgletdm'nfik."' Hdnkanti mii'nk nd-asht hemd^e: "nO a gdmptcha

always to grow young again." Ontbatsulfjeot mole thus said: "buti thus-made

pshe-utfv*rashash gi'tki gi: gfl'ggamtchishash ! " Pi muimfl'yuk: "gd-asht 12

the human beings to become want : decrepit by age I " <Andl it shivering (said): "thus

n<l pse-utfwashash gi'tki gt!" Skl'shktsh tchish nd-asht tok nii'-ulza

I ttw homno beings to become want 1" Fly-bog also thiu vot«d

104

MYTHOUX^IO J'KXTS,

luA'nkasli tulak. Pi skl'shkisli nil-usht : "kui ti'idsh ak lift'k tiimi mho-

mnlo »l,.i,K with. It thefly-biiK Ihiia (Mill): " vory criwlly nwuy 'bnm.n

utfwasli gfug kl'shtclikaiik hidtalt nM\".

Ihmdkh

a c tint;,

(<m me)

(Will) oruah uio".

I Tchi'lunik pa't liAshtaltal iid-ill;^ilg. Tchiii aha i)aI|)oli&u; nifl'n':

Thus lh..j. mutii«ll.v (ILpulml fonicllcm. Thfii thoy Ikjuhm workmu; Ih.. im.l«

yafna slmtevi^ga; shtfl'ya yafnaliik. At pi'pil lii'mta nd-iilya K'mukiim-
tchilm shutdlash.

h«i1 Untahed ormtliiK.

NOTES.

103, 3. toli.ik. TluMXi is evidently a >■« dc mots intdiidwl between t^blik and tclii'iksli.
Which nortliern tribe the Kiikakilsh were, my informant and other huliuii.s were nnsibb)
to siiy ; it is « niekname, (U'lived from kii'k, ,)f some ()reH:onian tribe held in eontemi.t
by the Maldaks, and any reference to it eanses mvM merriment to llie Klamath Lako
Indians. Middiiks is in both plaees separated from the tribal name bv inversion ;
tehak and tehitfish form apposition to those tribal names and t.> maklaks, and tor
tcliiiKsh we would expect tehi'ishish, which is the usual f(«-m of the word.

103, r.. fi-usb. The ,sea or oct>an. which is meant lierc, is miiid <5u8h, while e usb
means a lake, laj^oon or lar;;f pond.

103, (i. neulakit'j;a. Three of the lower animals are hew brought together to confer
with K'mukamteh todetermin.> the duration of man's life, and every one voted according
to its own experience. Stei)hen I'owers mentions a mythic story comparable to this,
heard by him among the Pit Hiver Indians (Contrib. to North Anu'r. Kthnology, vol!
ill, p. 27;{): "The coyote and the Ibx participated in the creation <-f men and animals
the first being an e\il si)irit, the other good. They tpiarreled as to whrth,;- the,/ nhovld
let men lire alirai/s or )wt. The coyote .said: "if they want to die, let them die"; but
the fox said: "if they waut to corao back, let them come back." But nobody ever
canu> ba<;k, for the coyote i)revailed."

103, !). 10. After shkintchish^agota supply heme^e, and after k'ldktgi: gi.

103, 10. ti'dsok. or tit'shok, distributive form of t'shok, of the \'erb t'shin to iriow
Of. tit'sha, 107, V>. ^ '

103, 1-2. pshe-utnvash, abbreviated psheutnash, an archaic word used only in the
coUectire sen.se of people, human beings. It occurs only in mythic stories. Ctl 105, 8.

104. 4. shtu'ya. This fiction was suggest<_"d by the maniu'r in which moles throw
up molehills and shows that the ancient myth-makers were not without a humoristic
vein.

104, \. pi'pil. Every mountain was thrown up by the mole alone, each one sepa-
rately. The special creation of K'mukamteh was mm,, and whatsoever .stands in direct
connection with hi.* existence, welfare and customs, as fisliing-i)laces, islands, funereal
sweat-lodges etc.

104, 4. himta, abbreviation of huutala: by i»rocewling in this ununuM', in the same
manner.

OEBAXION OF TUli MOONS.

105

HO'mASHT HHApaSH hfl'Pl SHUTKYl^JQATK.

CREATION OF THK MOONS.

GiVKN IN Till'. Klamath Lakb Dialkot uy Missik FbobkW.

Wdsh hfiiik lAi)6ni te-iinopant, wil'nip pd-ula sliApash shiVta. Ldlap

Tho (fiiimlc)

cliVotD

■kiUl-

m'-upkatki irfui? alia shipatxukaiik; tchui at vu'nauk iggii-idHlinauk {ri^kaii

*^ «l!on «o,„lDK .u- th«y c.,vfr<Mle.cl,nll,..r, Ukm tMM«x »u»|.onmnK (then,) -I.., wm.t

sha. K'lmVkamtch miCUVi' kii'liant wiisliasli, vve\vc{-a pll tchi'shi; vft'la 3

out. K'lnrtkHii.ldi .,Ml..r«l, l...ln){ .il.»«nt 111., coj »t.., (Iiw) dilUliMi only In tlio l,..lge, li« a.kod

fihas: "tat' \w .rempkar' "Go't a f.(MuVla!'' K'niu'kauitdi l.oii.(5xc): "tu'.sli

th,.m: -when. dl.l Hh.'go to?" '•TImt,, i-h.' went I ' K'ni.-.kan.ld. «ii>l ^ ■'"•l'""

haftch inAlilni i)'gi'shap tchfa?" "Hitdtclua!" Tc\m\ K'lnfl'kaiutch liAtakt

(.l.M») your ' niotlior MV • lln,. «ho nitai- Th.n K'n.ftkan.td. there

tchelvank sha'shanika : "hil liii! hii liilf" vvakash tt^talzok haha'tamna. 6

,lltlngd«wn l.«nune,h ' l.ii htt! I'll l.ttl" bon.-awl. "•J,~;'\';- l."»«nton Kr,.nlin«.

PJi'n sbash vCl'la: "wakuitch liA'n giwg nii'g ta'm haktcli sliiipfish shushata?

AKaluoflherahelnqulnMl, ■ why tlun ihnal.»ent t<« nm,.y allnBeiher .n.Km, .11.1 niiiko!

' why t

the iMMiplto

(hiothf 1)

wAkak hClnk i)sc-utiwash tchf-uapk la'ldam? t(;li(ikat ak Imk Ifi'ldarn liak;

how then ' thoi..«.pU cml.l llv.' in winter I 'l»y _)?_;;»>'» in»ach(,.l.,n- w.nt..r;

ati hfik lu'ldain ei't tft'ini sliapash gdig." Washa=w(?ka t^U'wag Umfx^:

toolonglhl» winter w.nil.1 t«. many nnHmn .siHtiuK" Coyotcohil.l the .,l<lf at aalil;

lie,

"wakal Idlap a hiln shneku'pkashtkak iV Tcliiii K'mukanitch hem^z*':

"why n..ttwoni.i lime «hlninK np there .lo y<m nee.l!" lI..r.i.|.on Kmftkamtoh a»M:

'kd-i ml shanaho'le tu'ma shdpasli gi'tki glug."

"not I want t.ra muny niiKnm toexim."

Tirelya i'tyo taty6lanipaui wliApash, tchiii i)ek(<wa K'mflkAmtchiksh, 12

Stafleilnp,t<K)k.lown .mo-half (nf the) m,«.n8. then Hi.ia^,h...l (il,e,,,i K'm.-.kami.h,

tchui ffdmbele. Ma'ntch gitk wash gdtpampCle; tzii'wag sliapiya p'gi'sha

then left attain. Look after thia the .mother-) returned fiom..; .i.....i.le.. told mother

eoyot<t

th.) oldeHt
(chli.l)

ni'na: "K'lmVkamtch a gatpanflia gt'ta." Wasli vCi'la: "tu'sh haftch

Hh: •Kin.ikarach has b.*n hen-." The coyote asked: "where (did he)

tchii'lva?" "Ili't a tcha'lza", ahaplya ra'na p'gi'sha. Tchiii hAtokt tch^l- 15

alKlown!" "Hew heaat.lown", »«l.i (i.) -o its mother. Then right there alttlng

yank ti'lankanka t41ke-ug K'raakdmtchiksh. Kltl'ta pttdk iikAsh.

down she rolled ;.,rt hand Joking aboat K'mdkamtch. (Then) h.ir»l B.m uwn howeta

it
It
■*

v:=1

106

MYTHOLOtilO TEXTS.
^OTES.

nected i„ M.o n.imTortre Imltm with H.« I"*" i^'f ''' ^nrrower") became cou-

«la«n; sometimes alon^ sometimes in mtlnf il , V '"'*'' *™"' "'Sl'tfall to

wlunins howl is likened b7S "T. . hn's tv u. n "T.f u"'" f ' !'"'" "''^ 'l"*™'"-'
above is basednpo„thedolw;:e;;:!o'i:L^S^^^ moon" 0„.. tale

'ind,eator,"from shapa to tell, in.lieat.) i. u "Jd S ido of ^^^
twelve moons originated in the delnsion tlnit i, l^erv perioVe .. ^l " "' *'''*'"

were really made or n.annfaetared ,w,c b- the "re, tor Z T '""""' "'"""«

perhaps suogested by the observ.tio . of i '"'""•*''" *«'''"ty-<""i- was

hazy weatluT. The c^vote ns h > . f . . ''''"'"'' ^^ '""'''^ '"""""^ a„pearing in

a.n.j.gthecent^;';^?^;:::-:!; Xl";;^^^

while K'mukamtch, as the wolt 's mP.ZLt 1 T u "'"•^' ""'""'^ '''*' Possible,

creation, the Inuna^ be ngsoVt^mTe I ^^ '*'?'''''" '"'*"'*^''''»^

twelve months i..steml 7sixto v Z^ ^ "" ^ '""^- '^ "'« ^"'^^^ '''^^ *« ''^^t

enough to live thrSi:ir;/;r,;::;; sr"^'*'* '•""^«' ^"'•'•^' -«^' ««^ -<• ^amo
-iiSn ts;;:r£ei j:^~ h^zr^t.^^ """'^— ^ -- —

^nJ^ylJS^'^l^^r::^:;^::Vf """^ -• thetwentyfour moons
signifies the sky. The ^ffir dsh ! nl f 1 T ^^'"^'''■'"^'j''^- ^vhieh in this myth

lodge. anothe.^hiie;:;;^^s::;p:di;s"s:::;r ^^""^'-^ '^"•" ^-^ ^""^ «^ ^"«

his astuteness in enUg t^XZ::\^ll::^'Z^Z::;^ St "^ '"""''^'^*^
lor her there. "ff^/wf. oni.v, ami to prepare a trick

105, 4. tat' u6 for tdta nen.

Jm r" ^f '^;'/'^"'f • 'V'""""*'"""'''' '-"' •■♦' '^ ^^'«'^ »"" ^vord only: hitatchia

o.voi.,..didt.di:niSr=i;;,;-;-^^

105, / . wakaitch composed of wak hait<-l. • w'wi. . ,,-/.i. . ^ "" '•

MYTH OF THE MABTBN AND THE WBASLBT.

107

Sk^LAMTCHAM TcHASHOATIKALAM SHASrAPKftL^ASn.

MYTH OF THE MAIITEN AND THE WEASLET

Given in the Klamath Lake Dialect by Davb Hiix.

K'mukdmtch Ydmst tchla. SAtapealtk Tchdshgayaks; Idpiak tchla

K',n<ika„,tch lutlH.Nor.l> livo.l. His youuW brother We«,lef, only two hej|

kiifliak wii'wans. Tsiii sa saikiln g^na w^wansb i'ktcha; tfl'mi aaikiln tchla

-without wiv.9. Ami they tolho *'wont wlvoa tobrlnKln, m»ny o„ the nel.l were

prairie

maklaks tdnkt. Tchiii sguyue Skii'lamts Tsdsgayaks i'ktchatkt snAweds: 3

S, .hen. And .lf»pi>he.l oM Marten Little W.a».l to fetch a woman.

"kd-i i Iab6=lu'lp=gipk8li shpu'nshipk, shtchokApsh i a'pka!" Tsiii gena

■•^.,1 yo,, „two.ey«?«ne brln„' along' aoncoyeaone yoa bring 1" Then went he

nMsluak i'ktchuk wi^wans, tsiii tii' m<^-ipks gdldsui. Safgatat tft'nu

alone to fetch women, and far off digging (rcHa) he met (them). On the prairie many

w(iwanuish ineva; slitd saika; hlliashuaksh kii'gi, gdukanka sba. At 6

femaU^a wee digging; foil the prairie them... were away, h,.nt«d they. Now

waa (of them);

w(^wanuish ikdyula ti'tatsa pi'la, kd-i liA'shkank K'mukdmtsam stu'leols:

wo...en h,7pl/kedo,.t pret.yonea only, not rai.»iing ef KmSkamtch the order,

shtcha'shtsyapksh K'mii'kaints (5pkatkt gi'ulatki; at i'tpa tu Iddsastat

one-oyodonea^ ,„ K'm.M<«mtch Ic. bring " enjoining, then brought over tolhelo.lge

Tsdskai : " gdn m's ni spAnshipkf a." At hamd/e K'mukdmts : ' ' kani nd-asht? 9

W..1.1: "thi-onoforyoul ^ brougl!.." And «aid K'.ntikam.ch , "who (said) aol

kanf nd-asht tidsd a'pkatki? shtchil'shtskapksh mi'sh ml a'pkolatkik; kaltoks

who so (said) proity t'obrinRt one-eyed (ones) you 1 tolHingtoM, and rot

onna

mi'sh 111 ti'dsa a'pkatki gi!"

you X pretty ones to bring toldl"

Tchui at wa'wansUink shash, taiii pdlakak n^akgl Idpuk; tchui tft'sha 12

And took as wives them, and pretty soon became both; and grew up

motberH

wewdas, at mat sa washxUi Tchui si'ssok hil'k wew^as sham; tsui stuli'

Ihochildrcn, and, Itis they hnnte.1 And qna-reled boys their; and advised

Raid, cbipmunkH.

Tsasffdvak: "shli't i hu'nks!" taltsidgatat sa-uli'a. At sla'popk h^i'nitak

We^slot- shoot vou him!" (andl on the li.tle heputstono And was aware by himself,

i.rrnws beads.

K'mukdmts stuli'sht pi'ts. K'mukdmts stuli' wji'ka m'nd: "shli'sht m'ndlsh 15

K'.nflUamtoh that had ad- '^hlm. K'mAkMm.oh entered son his; "l"«»f«''" >>'"'

vlrted '

1 shHn!" At la'-udsha hfi'k tdtaksni, tsiii shli'ii Tsasgaydkalam vA'nakag;

yonVhoot!" ri.e.. went to play the children, and shot MtSe <(^ea,er, Httle.on,

108

.MYTIIOUKUO TKXTH,

^iJ'' ^;!?S.t!ilf » •'^li''^ -±^p tchui «a Lfshlan. Tsaskavnkalam

- - - . - mtlo«ot,. ,),,„ tli«v8hnt.it..uolioih.T MitloWcasol',

vunak hnnk Hhl/n lu^p. K'„.ukd.m^^^^^^^^ vunaka; tchai hfi'nk h.Vtkalpalank

,r ^'''"^;^!|;lV'"" '"'^^^> tchui ts6ka l^ipuk.

bet'

t IS' P*'r±!^l' ^hauK T«asVu at kayaktsa, K'.„uka.,.ts kd-i

(tlieiii) w,i.„.| «enl«pnri'blnK. (tut) Kmrtknint.li "not

fe^S!i!!^.,,tte/^:jh -^^-l\^nm^k; da'bopk htVnitak t.V «as hisho'kst

"OlMl wr«l'p.«l up; hok,„.w by hira.elf, out thoin to h.va killBd

ibtn nwh other,

NOTES

107, 5. w6wau8 a very coiuinoH elision lor wtiwanuisli.
107, 9. kani na-aslit? ellipse for kani ud-asht <.i*

107, 13. » wa»l„l,i. Tlio two boj. wont tOKMher l„m,l„g „l,r,„„„„ks.

are usually provided with wooden points only. ^'

107, 15 K'n.ukaintsstinisl.tpi.ts stands for K'raukikntclmsli stuli'sl.t m'sh tb«
pronoun referring to the little son of K'mukamtch ' '

objecToVsLf fnot ei^re'si^^^^^^^^ "'"'"^' '' ^'''^ ^"^^^''^ «^«^'^'«^*' -«! ^^« <l-et

107, 10. Hi -udsba: they went out to play, from U^yn, la'wa to play.

MYTHIC TAI.K Ol'^ ()LI> MAIJTKN.

lOJ)

SKKriAMTCHAM SHASItAI'KKLKAHII.

mythk; talk of om) marten.

Odtainkd in riiK. Ki.amatii I^akr Dialrot i-hom Minnik Kuoukn.

Wt^wanuisli mat til'mi ineyu kil'sli siiaigatat yaki slikii'shkatgaltk.

Women, the; say, ninny were dig- Ipo on prairin, bankeln cnrrylng on liiiok.

glU(t

Shkil'lanitcli mat tchfa slietxt'-uiialt^ Tcliasligayaks. Shkii'Ianitcli slitiiK

Old Mnrt«n, ho th(\v lived an the older lnotht-r <d' F.ittle Wwwel. Old MHiif ii wnt

•i>y.

ta'pia m'na Tclu'isgayaks i'ktchatki gfug kma' shtchft'shtchxapkam. Tchiii 3

votmuer Idn Weiutlet toiibtain the Hkiill- nf the ono'eyed niien. And

brothur ojtpH

Tcliashgayag gdna; gAtpnaiik i'tp^a sliash minuk kma' k.4-i shtchu'shtcli-

WpAfiiet ' wentj ooniln;^ the:o, he t'xik from them nil Hknll-nnpd, (bnt) oftlieime-

awny not

;(auksham tclii'sli, itpampgli Tchashgdyak, sliewana Skelamtcliasli kma'.

eyed (women) iiIho, brought Little Werwel (iind) gave to Old Marten the uapn.

Skdlamtcli hami^x*? '■ " t'^ta ml'tth ml tpewa ka-i shtchflshxapkam epki'itki G

Old Marten said : ' ■ when you I orden^d not of the ono-t^yed to bring ?

giug? hipilk iniHh ml cpkatki gt'ula HhtcliiYshtchxupkam pi'l." Wcwamiisli

ot both yoii I tobrin;: hiul told <d' the one-eyed only" FenialcH

nanuk g/itpa Sk^lamtchamkslii shkashkAtkaltk kil'sli. Skt?lamtch shew.iiiii-

all came to Old Marten's honi > carrying on linok ipo. Old Miiiten le-

pftle kmJl' wevvan'shash, puiikaiupele laflslu'slitat, hii'meta TcliasligAvaksli: 9

turned thecnpH to the women, threw (themM>-iek out of hiH loilge, (and) aitld toWensiet:

"tata mlsh nu tpa'wa t(im kmil' ii'pkatki giug? lapok amsh ni a'pkatki!"

'when von I onlered many oaps to bring! otlioth yon I to bring (tohl)!"

(only)

Wdvvanuisli tcWk tchiii gdmpfile, Idpuk shtchfl'ahtchxatk tchi'dsha.

The women after thie returned, (but) both one-eyed ones remained.

Tchiii huk shtchil'shtchzatk wdwanuish wewa'kala. Shf^'haiik shitk 12

Then the oie-eyed women iHrre children. At the Hame time when

md'mkak gi'ulza Sk«^lamtch iiteyakaliya, m'na u'nakag mu'ak t'slil'sht.

thn infanta were born Old >farten made a little bov", lor hi h little son, taller when he would

grow

Tchashgayak tclii'sli nteyakali'ya m'natak I'lnakag. Tclii'ii tcliatchakiag

Li.tlo Weiwel aUo loiiile a little how for hi.'* own little lui)." And the little boyw

Id-utoha; hi'slila ntti-ishtka tataldsliiak. Lcwatkiik tiitakshiii gatparapeli ; 1.5

wenttopa.v; they chot with their how « little ariow.s. l-'roni t lie play thebnyH returned;

at the mark

TcMslikayagalam uiiakag liemL';{e: " litlt au'sli til' shli'ksliga." Tchasli-

Little Weasel's hoy remarked: "he me out well uigh shot," Little

there

gtiyag wil'la m'liti unakag: "tarn liai tt^lii' in'sli iiiViik lAyaiik tewi ?"

Weasel aiked IiIh youii.iisnu: 'lenlly thus at ycoi inkingaiiu liefhoK"

■19
1

1
t

MYTUOLOGIC TEXTS.

sha hilnk, shlc^aiik msli.ish hishldk«likii). Tclu'ii Tcliaslijjayak slituli'

I'licll lltlll'l). ■••Kin.u

;j urmkajr ni'im shli'tki Shkcqanitcham ^'.rlakaJ,^ "ha luVt mish piin slili'Hiitka

llule«,n hi, ,o.h,H.t or 01.1 Mar...,, .he.,,,,"' ■it „„ „t,.,u „%l„ JI.m'k

gl uapk." ShkLqaintcli shayiuikta hunk lu'iinik I'chash.rayakahim ht^m-

»ho,H.UH.. ()1,1M«,...„ h,.cu„„.,.«-..r„ ,„r,h., „l,„ tUnZsL..\,, ",.

kaiiksh; tchui pi' tchish shtuli' ui'na iVnakas" «l'lftki jffuir TcliaHh"-i'ivam
(I linaka: ''hii' mish «hh'-uapk, klil';^atk oi'ntak i hiVtkalpalank shh'-iiapk
hu nksh."

Ulni."

Tchui nibu'shan pii'ii gena wdshlaltchuk; shiaa sha wJiehhi, gdnta nha

Ihen „,.xt,l,.y ,,g»i„ u,..,. |„ huul .h.pmunkH, «„»■ th»y a chlpmimk, crept th..y

(al It)

!) at. Skdhuu I'makag tdwi, kd'hhiaii washhi; wiggata i-iilya Tcliashfrdvara

th.,u. M«ru.u', l.t.l,.™,,, .hot, mlBalu,. ,h,.c.„p. ' .L?, ,o 1,„ „,r„ok Wc.!^', ^

'»""ki IhogriiUMcl

Sii"' 'Tchashjrayam I'u.ak luiruc;j6: "wak ta i giug shll'kshga nilsh?"
MaSll" "cJ.'.m'' •"^'"I^J'na: "shui'ulatchgankan h.l'n gi." Guhdshktcha pen

Maitonn child replmd, "Kl«ncl»K?ff it ,^,," Thoy ,larI.Ml (W

£!.n.!., fhof ' "''^"'' f/'*' "^f^"^'^^- ^^•^1"^'' pi'pdiiutana ganta shawahankank

..au.li.«l ,ho>, «.w they a.hlpmnnk. H,„h .run', . pp„»i„. ,i.l..» frept up niovlnK nloog the «r„,„„l

*'i'a'' ^^I'f ''"" ,??''•' «''|''k«liga Tchasiigayam unaka. Tcliashgayam viinak

»hot, Mari..,,» ll„h.«,„ „lm„,thit Wean", mtl« e«... Woaa..)" ^ llttIo,«n

^mI!? 'un'f' ^'''^*^''^"» vi'iiiaka; tchui shp6ka nu'intcliak Tchashgdyam
15 unakag. Tgi'ts^ank shldpapka, kdkahriash wewatkuehi kVli), k'mdka ttriVt-

"'""• oyes, arounil

-fa"',h Ht?^- ^J'f "™ "'"''■' '"'^^'*''''^' «'''^" '^t Tchashgayam vdnaka

""" "■ "■"'• M.rtan'a „„, JmupoU np, «hot then WoaSl'a"' chlhl

iVshutal; h'lpuk tchui k'ldkl;(atk i'pka.

Ill the bp list I both then ihmd lay the™,

Tchashgai hem'ta Skt^lash: "wak ta ma'nshaktch tdtaksni kii'gi wafta?

Wea»«. „al.l ,0 .Marten: "Why for a„ long the ohil.lren "ro a?>. the whole

tu sii ak nen hil'k wdk ka'hi?" Skdlamtch ka-i kdktchank hiVnksh, shko'l-

(are. they aurae. ,|„i„«r' 01,1 Marten "not answering him, ' recu-n

sump-
whftt

Em'"^ M"-' Tchashgai gdna kayaktchuk tatakiash, kd-i slildank gatpdm-

"'"^P' ^O'"''' wont tolookontfor thechlldren, Tind) finding ° returned

uot

21 p6le, Mdntch=gitk Skdlamtch guhdshktcha tu gawdlpgH. Tchdzaoksh

fiomo. After a while old Ma, ten * ,ur,ed -mt far ^o And (,Lm). MuPdZ

out

*iSu«n^ ^''^^T^'^P''?''™'' itpdmpelg; shuashuaktchdta lu'lukshalshok mii'lua,

the children dl«)overlnB he carried them with mourning erles to cremate (th.m) thoy ^0"

MYTHK! TAIvH oK OLD MARTKN.

Ill

tiinip wuniiwliik i'-auimiHli ISko'l dim, TcWishgui tchi'sh tun«pniiti wullishik

tlvo bagii ofncckwtwr Martoii t<«)k, W««wl twi ttvo b.igH

i-Aniuash t-na. Tclu'ii slia liVluksla, tft't6nii)iii' sha li'ipuk iwalpgle. Skii'lam

ofbauh bniiiiiht. Anil thry burnt (thuiii), enob Hve Omu") tbev btiih I'luutltil im Tn Miirtxn

Inom.

tchi'k i'ninnash wewiHiia. Tclu'ii slia j^t'inpfilc tiililHlixG'ni k'li'wiaiik. 8

llnnlly hcuih wimii li It uviir. ihin ihi'v retnriinil totbilr IdiIkk JilUr iiirlimn-

unco.

Skclanitch lii'in'ta Ti-liaHligayash gt'ntki ;^iu<>' Mu'Hhauikshi, pi g^-

01(1 Marten niiiil lo Wi'iincI, bi< HbouM |in to thi' S<iiith Wlnd'a bim- pro-

bouni', Hi'lf

nuapkug Yam'shamkshi. Tchasligai ka-i shanA-ul' YAuishamkshi gti-ishtka

poslnntogo tothuN(.rtb Wlnd'n Wi'usi-l not llki-ii to Nurih Wtnil'B l(.il«n to triivtl

liitnif.

gfiig. Sko'l honic;(t': "ka-i i genuapk Yanishamkshi, niVtak gdsh shaiu'i- (>

Mttili'ii Huiil: "not you Hboll go to the North Wind, niyHcir to go wnni

uli Yanishainksli'; mi'sh nil g«5ntki Mi'isliamkHhi." "Ka-i an Md'shainkslii

to the North Wind I yon I (want) to no to Soiiih WInd'ri "Not 1 toSoulhWind

llOIIMO."

ge'sh shana-iil' ", at pi lidm'ta na-asht. Tchiii gt;na Tchashgai Yani-

togu doHire", now he aald so. And wont Wriwel totbi'

slianiksh ; gatpa liatokt ef^a Miiash ; ei'zishtok Mfi'shash k'lc'ka TcliAsh- !)

North Wlnd'n hociinii' Ihcrc, put the IboSonlh while hnd put thi< S<iuth Wind, dlid Little

lo4);;o; (when) liead out Wind; thu head out

gayak. 'iVlu'ii Skdlamtch Mu'sliani nil'sh lalkddsha; pji'n Yamshanikshi

Woiisel. Anil Old Miirien of the South the head ontoffi axaln, to the North WlndV

Wind liKlge

g(;na Skelanitcli, lalkadsha Ydnisliamtcliam nu'sh.

went Old Marten, land) cut off thu North Wind's head.

K'ldwiaiik guliu/isliktcha Lgnid-ishash gdlniptchuk Tchasligayaksli 12

llcronpoii ho Bet out Iho Thundora to visit. Llttlu Weiiaul

hakshaktcliuitk. Lemd-ish huslitanka Skt^lanitchash, snowedsh tu'tasli

cui'i'.\ ing In hi.H ilri'HH. Ooelhuuder I'l-ll in with Old Marten, u woman lonSHhelli

hahaslitamnipksli Hliii'litanka. SnAwedsli luiii'ta Skdlanitcliish: "wAk isli

havini; aHear-utuuineiit.4 ho purmied. The woman cried toOldMurluu; "Honiehuw ine

shiVta, g(j-u slia-amoksh!" Tclu'ii Skc'lanitch lioint';^e: "wAk liai tclii' ni's IT)

pnit<ct, my friend!" And Old Martin repliid: "how then you

nu shutti-uapk?" pniudaktan tclia katcliannat, tclu'ii guliiiiisliktcha. Tapftak

I ahall protect?" blow (her) iiiislantly Intoa iiltcbpino and cimtinned hia way. Right after

log, ■ (him)

Lfime-ish petdgank bi'mboks kshatgatnii'lank shiuga snawedsh.

the Thunder teaiing up the log (aiidMixtiacting (her) killed the wiinnn.

Skelamtcli til' at gdtpa Lemd-isham ladshaslitat. LApi i;ftsga-ak Lemd- IS

old Marten then arrived of tbo thunders iit lodge. Two dccie|iitohl Thun-

ish tclifa sluiki'kash hu'nkimsliam. Sk<^lanitch wa'slii gull' tcluiyfitk Yam-

dera lived the parenta o' thtm. Old Marten into the stepped having aa hat of North

(there/, room on

sham niish; wayalpa nanuk wa'shin, wdkish tchish Mkglaka. Ka'-utcliish

Wind the bead; froze lo iciules everything In the bulge the Inside too became slippery Gray Wolf

room, ladder with Ice.

gankanktka, Skii'lam shd-amoksh, wawa'kalam pi'l hu'k tchi'sh ka-i wdtk. 21

returuiil from tbo Marten's kiusuiau, of bis children nioue tbo jilnce in not froze up.

bunt, thu lodge

L6md-ish gatpdmpSle; radklaks til'm I'tpa. TitskA-ak Lgmd-ish sti'llidanka

The Thnndeiv returned homo. [ndinns iiianv they The Old Thunders reported

llTODflht.

''^ MYTIIOMHWf! Tl'JXra.

S?:!;:^ '^:i:i;r'' ''*!:i^^««^ "*Si.i!!!i"^ HLkafMilmkuI .utpu, ..a'ak ya hQn

■■' '''S&,*'""'2!S'' 7',:*';!:ir "fl;:-*',:;; «-"i«i:«ai*ie ,m.ci„vi„:r;;.i,„k

(liKlK). „|" ri, w.Mtoni ,|„M. ,.||,„| ,,, „„,,,, „ ,,,,,, ^j^ ^

wukisli, ki'shtchiiuiik liiii'yii)6li> "Ti'ifiitn (" l,,'it-.i aI'^ t /.i

«lr «..J^kl,„l .,r,.„«,.r„„„ l,.l„l„Kl,"l,|,..' ,j ^

'^'■mau*""' ';"'^'l'Vl''t'i' ytilipOl.lnk 8hash kat.ii shapfya: "Nveiuifni t.iA

"^'^i-iSf"-^ «i;;i!S!i t± fs!' ,:±li -'ij»" ^i-|'"''i^.

12 a ..n'lsh winni';{itk tiuV ki." Tapi'ni tchkash ..vkansha- "kT"ti,/.f=i
hfi'kampgla ' '""'»'•'•"'■■«<-

inn nut aK'^lti.

i:) Tchui ma'ntch=«itk tcho'k Kd-udshiamtcli ffiitpampSle- HlhankHhti

Ihwi win.. tiiii(«iill.r ilnallv ((hi «'„lf " "1^"'"!'"'" I •! lHHIIKHIin

brouRht. i.Mjm.v Woli. i,y(„,. tlmnwo aorim «l router (ouo) Ha.oome".

'■T'' '1'' ^'-ei'"" S:e- ■'"'■"Sir""'' ".f ",p* ""'i;. L«u.-

uiiin ' """ BDterml (llio upnii thin, I'liiin.

liui'kal

liYTHIO TALE OF OLD MARTEN.

113

shlAltpft tAluodsh mAklaks. Tchiii Hha ktAi kdlpokHlitak I'kujrank i wa

gkvii tiir uwi, toaluw tlin ponpls. And Ihay Iha itunita "u wmu h hiwtiii) (<Mk uiit (ami) illnpnil

(lliaml

kAlati Atnbo tohi'p^imk; I'wa aha tch6i N^kHlitak hIui ktAi t';^akpClc,

inUiakiU watar contalnlngi put In tUj than. Aaxmn aa abiwail Ihay thealonxa (imk nnlaK*ln.

Lemd-iHil hAslina HhaHh Skc'laintchaHh, gaptchiitka L6m(i-i8li tolil'lxi'i Bkd- 3

Iha Thiinilnra haiulxA thfrn Ici OIil Mart»n, with ihi< amall thn Thiinrtcira plac^nl on lh« for

Boor (Iba k*la)

UH flHI'l

Itiignr

laah. Sk(5Iamt(!h giiptchatka HhitchiUwlmo maklaks kulati. 'I'cliui Ski^lanittli

Marten (Mil Martxii »lih Ihci llttin movwl (ni»r«Mnillaiia towarila Thmi Old Hutan
)I"K«<- tha ktl*

pAtampka; 'IVhiiHligayag tfililifrdtchktcha SkcMatntchash shako' tkug nirtk-

botfiui 10 cat I Wb»«I..i pliiolimi Old Marian Innlatliiu for h un

lakHt! tchal(<kMli

flnab.

rclu'ii yiJit'lamtcli kA-i uhdwuna; "kuidHlia gislit", leklok- 6

(Uul) Old Marten not KaxMunyii " It brtuK bad ", li»

tchfimpka TtliatchgfiyaHli ; " uiulHho'k niish nl tchultJ'kHh li'lliaukHhti tch.Vk

wlilnpiired to I.lllle VVraaid; "byajidby l» yon I mxat

iif vm>liM>ii

at I iHt

sht^vvanuapk." Tchiii ni'muk wiVta kayak hft'iiksht shdwaiiaiik. Hlilt'-ipfdo

will nlve." Than all hnntaiip not any to hini tri^lnil' Kituini'd

Hhasli kiUa, Kd-iulshiiimtchkash nflkaltAmpka tchule'ks. Tdiiii ml'kst 9

totbaiu tbebnrkat, Old Wolf also kagau roaatlug meat. When It waa doiii-,

tl'atat I'kclaiik shdwana Hkt'lanitchash, tchui pi hCl'nkanti tche'k slidwaua

on a pud*

dl«

putting it h« RAvo (Iti

lo old Miirlen,

and

of It

then

K«TI1

tchuIe'kHli Tchaahgiiyaksh. 'rdiiii aha Ifi'Ial^a pd-ulank ; Skdlamtcli ktaii-

inaat lo Llltlo VVeaaid. And thi>y wi-nt t/i Iwd liaTlnadonn pat. Old Marten f. II

shati nAnui sh^olz^tak.

Mieep aa Hoon aa lyiOK down.

LCnid-ish sheshniVlxJi Hhiukiiapkuk Skdlamtchash; ka-uloktantk-

Tho (.'I) Thiindi'rH plotted iliow) to kill OldMarUini walkiuK up and itonn

tdin'na slia. Tclidkag pi'l telHlianipka Lgnid-ishash kjiyak ktAiislina. Pdn

conlluuod they. Bliieklilrd iidy lookod towards thfi Thnnclira <»uil) not woa aul.ij.. And

LOmd-ish giikui

tbo Tlinndi^rH iippr

likuii shln'dshuk Skdiamtchash, tarnu'dsh ktiiiishisht, Hlii'uguiip-

piiiai hill to look 111 Old Mm ton, whilhor lio waa aHloep, proi)oalni{ '»

kiig hil'nk. Tchdkaksli LGmd-ish inbiVshaksh yi'yu;^oga lu'lpat; tchiii

hill liim. To Bluekblrd th» Tliuiidcra arrow-hi'ads pushed into lliueyeai then

hfi'nk kil-i ktanuapkiig ktAmpsh shftk slildash gi'-uapk. Pshfn tdtzClatii

he not KoiiiK to alfop, nsli^np-allko appt^urlng would be. At n .dnlcht

LCnid-ish kaktansha; Skdiamtch skishksho'huik pi' tclikash kako'dsha 18

tbi' Thinulere wiinl to nloep ; IMI Marton awakening he thon went nvii-

L6md-ishaniksh, hihashlQtchtAnka lak Lemd-isham, tC'kish shash huhashli'-

to Thnndof"' place, tied logethor the bair of the Thunders, awords to tbem banded ovw

amna; heshamkanko'ta: "Skdlam tdpia gen liielat". Tchiii Skdiamtch

toeaohi tboy oidured each other : "Marten's younger him kill ye". Then Old Martir

brother,

gdkantgi Ka-iitcht'shash tpa'wa; tchiii Kii'-utchish gdka, wewdka m'na 21

togooot Gray Wolf onlerodi and Wolf wentont, children bin

I'ka. Skdiamtch 8hndl;fa LSmd-isham Idtchash, tgd-ulank wAl^a hiVk6n-

took out.

Old itatum
8

set on Are of tk« Tbaadvr*

the lodge, (and) araodtng on he waited
It* top

to rash

"I
,.1

i;^j

114

MYTHOLOGIO TEXlw

ukslit Ldiuc-isliash; shtdyakclakpu tgati'dnank ; mu tchii'k uutfsht syi'sli-

oiii .l,«IlM.,„Ur»; l,M,..8.k™...l «tttn.liDKo,.u,l.l,.. ainmnly at l,.«t when (the ,,w..k..

Urn) bliiivd,

kshola Luiiu'-ish. Huhashtapka tfiki'shtka; "Skdlaiii toina sen luelat"'

th.. Thun,l.r«. They »uhb«l each wlththelonK " M«r.en'» v„>V him klllyc'l '

V) ' i. 1 1 I I i ' 1 1 bhidesi brother,

6 ])atak liuhaslitapkuak.

they fitubbcd eatii other only.

Tchi'ii naimk nfi'nataiik tcliii'ka; mbtiwa stoiiiash luVdshuuk. Skd-

^"'"' *" hyblazingup p,.ri»heil, exploded (one) heart while flying off. Old

Ifl^J^^ wfi'Wzank wi-iilaldp6le stefnash lu'luk«htat ; pii'n na'sh inbawa.

Marten looking on s.rnek (one) heart i„ the lire; Vain one exploded.

*' '''ofdMa!l!^^'''''","¥'^P^^*'' P'^'" "'"^'^'^ inbdwa, pii'n wi-ulalAp6le Sk(51amtcli.

OldMa.ten strnek »«»■» ; and another bnrel, 'a.-ah, (when) H.r'.ok Old Marten.

'^'i^'i'^^Sh'^^ liJimd;;e: "Skt^lanitdi! inV tchkasli na'sh wf-ulalek!" tchui

L.ttleWeaael ^ «aUl: "Old Marten! I „,„„ „„„ willatrikel" then

Ijii'n mbilwa na'sli. Tchi'ii Tcliashf-ayak kiVhliian, tolu'ii steiiiash hii'k nu-

a.a,n burat one. ,Hu,) Wea^let"' " n,i»se.l. ' and heart that went

^ t'l'hte' ^l^"',^'^^ shfi'waltktcha Tcha'kaksh tu'la, sliliVshlakshga 8hual;«6ta.

totde.,k5; Magpie flew after it Blaekbird with, and pieked ,1.) to piSea, while if flew.

Sakdlamtch liaui(i^e: "U-i i tua sliayuaksh kiuapka, hu'nshak i pshe-

Old Marten said: "nothinRyon go-alfor will be, in vain yon ^ tb.

utuasliasii shnuliVkuapkak."

pcoi'lo will Irigliten only."

12 Tchiii .Sk^lamtch shndl;^a Lgme-ish titskd-aksh.

Then Old Marten burnt Thunders the Old.

NOTES.

This relation of the myths is iiioro ciicuiiistautial than tlie corresponding one
Obtained from Dave Uill, which omits some of tlieir cliaracteristit; features. We have
her« an interestinR and probably the most i)()puliir part of the whole cycle of marten-
mytliH known to the Klamath Lake people; the above is not a single myth, but a series
ol myths, some of them tlirowii tof-vther in a rather loose connection. What connects
them all is the tact that Weaslet is the eonsbint companion of his older and more saga-
cious brother Old Marten, who combines the qualities of Eeineke Fox with that of an
elementary power of irresistible force (shkaini). The Skelamt«h myths present them-
selves in the followiiifj order:

1. Selection of the one-eyed females as wives.

2. The <!hildren of the twf> brothers destroy each other.

3. The fathers cremate their children's bodies.

4. The Winds are exterminated by Skelamtch.

5. Skelamtch hides a woman before one of the live Thunders.

G. Skelamtch enters the lodge of the Thunders; the hat on his hea<l acts as a spell
and prevents them from entering it.

7. Old Gray Wolf, Martin, Weasel ami the live Thunders are. feasting on human
flesh in the lodge of the Thunders.

S. Skelamtch sets the lodges of the liv.' Thiin<lers and of the two Old Thumlers
on lire and kills the inmates.

MYTHIC TALE OF OLD MAKTEN.

116

109, 1. ulikii'sligatkiiltk. A veibiil iuljective of NhkAtkgla, to carry on back; k^,
ka is the radical syllable, found also iu kii'iiiat, havh. This distributive form is appar-
ently due to vo(!alie dissimilation. Women carry conical baskets (ydki) on their backs
when digging r.iots or bulbs, and throw them over their shoulders into these recep-
tacles.

109, 2. C. 8. Skelamtch. See Dave Hill's relation of the same myth ; Note to 107, 3.
In speaking of somebody who acts on the sly, and diflfcrcntly from what he professes
aiiil ineans to do, the Klamath Lake people will say: "He acts like Sk^lamtch." This
is one of the few proverbial locutions, or at leiist figurative modes of speech that can
be traced in this tribe.

109, 3. knuV is the rounded light cap usually worn by females, fitting tight to the
skull. It is made of the stalks of aquatic plants, several species of them entering into
the manufacture of each cap. The taking away of the skullcaps was intended as a
signal for the women to go to their new homes.

109, 0. tata. The words of reprehension aildressed by Old Marten to Weaslet are:
" Did I ever order you to bring the caps of any other than of both the one-eyed women t
I told you to get the caps of both ono-eyed women only." Lapuk belongs to shtchush-
;fapkam, though separated from it by the inversion of tlie sentence; kmsV is left out.

109, G. shtxjhfish;^ Apkam. The distributive form of shtchu';^a is so difficult to
articulate, that abbreviations of it like the above and others, liave resulted. Shtchii/a
is evidently the medial form of tch6;fa, and its meaning is therefore "to suffer destruc-
tio!' on oneself." Of. shtchuyami)ka.

109, 10. ni a'i)katki. After ii'pkatki supply gi: "said, told."

109, 11. The text forgets to mention the calliTig in of the two one-eyed women.

109, 12. Shu'hank:shitk. In many mythic stories tiie newly-born children are
made to grow miriiculously fast, so that when a few days old they handle bow and
arrows, and after a month or two they are adult people.

109, 13. ntfvala, to make a bow or bows (nte-ish), ntevakaia, to make little bows
(nteyAga), nteyakalia or nteyakaliya, to make little bows^br somebody.

109, 13. unak, Kon, is variously pronounced ii'uak, viinaka, wiinak; and so is its
diminutive iinakag, I'lnakaga, vunakak. Utile son, '■'■sonny".

109, li"i. hislila iias two meanings, both reviprocal : to shoot at each other, and to
shoot at tlie mark, rivalUnij to outdo cnvh other in markn)anship. (Jf. 24, 17.

109, 15. L6watkuk for lewatko hiik: they, after having jilayed; participle of lewa
to play.

110, I. hushutankai;ksh et<!. "This was an approacliing himself on the sly towards
me" is the literal rendering of this sentence, in whicli the first term is a nomen
fwtionis, a verbal indefinite. The two pronouns are governed by it.

110, 3. mish shli'shtka gi'uapk, if he shoidd want to shoot you; if he should shoot
at you purposely.

110, 4. Shilyuakta, "he knew." Omniscience and prescience are among the cha-
racteristic features of Old Martei, who is the personilication of K'miikamtch. Of. 107,
1. 3. U. 108, o. and Note to 107, 3.

110, (i. hiitkalpeli, to rise up suddenly, to jump up again (though killed before-
hand). Of. 108, 2.

'•J

110, 11. "shni'ulatchgaukau hiVu gi." Marten's sou said,

that his arrow, when

116

MYTHOLOGIO TiiXTS.

dispatched after a chipmunk, struck a log or tree, glanced off from it and came very
near killing Weasel's little son.

110, 11. 21. guhilshkt^ha instead of guliu^shktcha, cf. Dictionary.

110. 17. va'sho, breast, chest, is also pronounced wft'shu, ft'shu ; fi'shutala, in the
cliest. k'lekljfdtko is the distiibutivo plural of k'lokdtko ; k'Wka, to die.

110. 18. ma'nshaktch, so long ; stands for ma'ntchak tchi. The terminal -ak has
to be taken here and in 110, U. in the sense of '.he diniiuutive suffix: "a little long".

110, 19. ka'la to do or <wt iu the »ense of amusing oneself, playing, gesticulating"
or acting iu a loud, noisy, or grotesque manner.

111, 1. tuuepanti. The partitive case in -ti, if it stands for tunepanta, is used
here, because the bags of neckwear brought by Skelamtch were counted on the digits
of one hand, while those of Weasel were counted on the fingers of the other.

Ill, 3. wewilina. Beads were left over to Old Marten, because he had brought
more than live sacks full to the tchpiuft or family burying grouud, emptying only live
siMjks on tlie child's pyre. This was a tabulously extravagant expenditure, the beads
standing high iu price and the sacks or willishik being rated at more than one bushel
ea«h.

Ill, 4. Mft'sh and YAmsh, syncopated from Mii'ash and Ydmash.

Ill, 9. ef;irishtok Mu'shash. The South Wind had put his head out; that is, a
south wind had been b' wing when Little Weasel died and hence was supposed to be
the real cause of his death.

Ill, 12. L6m6-isha8h. From tlic following it api>ears, that the five Thunders re-
Itresent more the flash of the lightning (luepalsh) than the roll of the thunder. There
iU-') many of them, because the thunder, when rolling o\ er mountains and valleys, often
increa*ies again in loudness after having almost died out, and five is the often recur-
ring " sacred " number of the Oregonian anil other North westeru Indians. 'J'he radix
of 16m6-ish is lam, which indicates a circular, whirling motion. The five Thuuders are
brothers, living in a wniter-lodge or earth-house: LCme isham tchi'sh, thought to be
a dark cave; their parents, the two Old Thunder*, live in a kiiyata or low, suiidl hut
covered with buhush mats. The short episode 111, li>-17 does not reler to all the
five Thunders, but only to one of their number.

Ill, 13. tii'tash is the loug white marine shell, known as dentalium; it is one ot
the most common Indian body-ornaments. The white resin flowing out of pine-trees
seems to be symbolized iu this myth by the dentalium-sliell.

Ill, U. wiik ish shu'tii, for wak shi'ita i nish : ''somehow do (something) for me."

Ill, 20. In wa'shin are combined two locative particles: i and n (for na).

111, 22. miiklaks tiVm (for tu'ma). The Tlmiiders brought home as food mauy
human beings stiuck by lightning.

112, I. waniinga, the distributive i)lural of u'nak ; explained in the l>ictionary.
112, 1. wenuini a tua gatpa etc. Here and throughout this paragraph tua means

"some kind of."

112, 2. 3. shkaini combines the meaning of strong with that of bad or mischievous,
and answers to our demoniac ; shkainiak or shkainihak stands for oiu- comparative:
stronger. The -tch, -s, -sh appended is an abbreviation of teha, noir, and shkayent
stands for shkaini at.

118, 3. G<''k«n8ha. Old .Marten hiwl eiiU;re<l tlic soli. I •earth house" of the Than-

MYTHIC TALE OP OLD MAETBN.

117

ders, while the Thunders stopped in the small kayAta which was the abode of their
parents. To enter such an earth-lodge a high ladder called ga-ulfdkish must be climbed
on the outside, and another ladder, as long or longer than the other (wakish) leads into
the interior PiitchO'le na'shak, p6patchle (for p^piitchole) lApok wakish: "he had
stepped once", "twice" down on the inside ladder; that is, ho had made one step,
two steps on it commencing from the top. Each one of the Thunders, when trying to
l)enetrate into their own lodge, gets a little furtlier down than the previous one, but
all are driven out by tlie ohilling, powerful spell of Sk^lamtch's headdress.

112, 7. gi'ilipfil^uk. The second of the Thunders, frightened at the ill-success of
his experiment, retired again to the low hut or kayAta, where the other Thunders were
and where their parents dwelt. This word has two accents on account of shash being
enclitic; cf. Ill, 2. 112, 13. 113, 9.

112, 8. TAt;jeiamni refers in this connection to the relative age of the brothers :
"the third in ago of the Ave Tliunders."

112, 9. gekausheniVnk : for g^kanshna hil'nk. Cf. 113, 12. ktAnshan nAnui spjol-
;^otak, for : ktAnshna nAnui sh;fol;^6ta ak.

112, 9. g&'t;fitkt, a contraction of gfi tkitko at.

112, 11. 12. " Ya! ati' a na'lsh winni';^itk tuft'ki." This was said by all the Ave
Thunders simultaneously and unisono. In tua' ki, A is altered into &', almost 6. The
inserted particle hfi, ii "in the distance, out there, over there" seems to have pro-
duced this change.

112, 1.5. li'lhanksliti i'tpa "he brought some venison," a phrase corresponding
exactly to the French: "il apporta du gihier"; both nouns standing in the partitive
case. These partitives are governed by another noun in 113, (nuiklaksti) and 113, 7.

112, 21. pftelhi' : they threw the dead Indians down into the lodge from its roof.
The suffix 1- indicates a downward direction, like -ila, -kuela etc., and occurs also in
112, 17, hii'mgle, to speak in a downward direction, to shout to somebody standing
below. Tlie suffix -hi means down to the ground, or on the ground, earth, soil,
and since the lodge-floor is the soil itself, it also means "into, or in the lodge or
wigwam".

113, 2. iwa sha tchi'ii. They put into the bucket the bodies of the dead Indians to
stew or boil them up.

113, 2. N6kslitak eto. The gray wolf, the marten and the weasel all being carni-
vores, there is notliiug extraordinary in the fact that mythic fiction lets them partici-
pate in a meiil consisting of human flesh.

113, 3. hAshpa shash. Shash stands for maklaksash, the dead Indians.

113, 8. nanuk wft'ta. Mart«n ate up all the human flesh which he had taken out
of the kAla.

113, 8. sb6wanank. The verb shdwaua refers to a plurality of objects, the objects
being sometimes expressed by a collective noun, as here (tchule'ksh).

113, 9. K^-udshiAratchkash stands for K<5-ud8hiamtch tchkash ; nfi'kla is to roast
on coals; tchule'ks is here venison meat.

113. 13. ka-uloktantktaiu'na. The verbal suffix -tAm'na, which marks an action
often repeated, or continued for a long time, is not here, as usually, appended to the
simple form of the verb, but to its derivative in -tka.

113. 14. Tch6kag. The blackbird has yellow eyes shining bright in the darknttss,

118

MYTHOLOGIC TEXTS.

and on that account the myth makes it watchful at night. This is another bird-
species than the Meriila, known in Great Hritain as blackbird.

114, ,3. liuliaslitApkuak. They suspccred eatih otlier of the trick, by which tliey
hail been tied togetiier by the hair when ii> danger of being consumed l)y the mging
flames, and in revenge stabbed each other. Huhashtaplaiak is vocali(^ dissimilation for
hnhashtiipka ak; v.L shiwi'ikuash, 80, II.

114, 8. ka'hhian. VVeaslet missed the heart in the Are when striking at it.

114, 10. shayuaksh: "You will not be able, or not be powerful entmgh, to do mis-
chief." The last heart that flew up is a meteor going through the skies, while the four
other hearts indicate successive thunder-claps. When a meteor is seen flying west,
the tribes of the Columbia River will say: "That's a deceased big man's heart going
to the Great 8ea." Cf. Note to 41, 7.

ShASHAPAMTCHAM TcHEWAMTCHAM TCHtSH SHASHAPRfi^jfiASH.

THE MYTH OF THE BEAR AND THE ANTELOPE.

GiVKN BY Minnie Fboben tN thk Klamath J,ake Dialect.

Shashapamtch TcWwaiutch tii'la tchfa. Shiishaparatch Idpa wewdasli

Old Gmil.v Old Antelope with lived. Old ShH-Orizzly two chlldrun

gkko, T(!Ltivvamtcli tchish liipa weweash gftko. Mbu'shant unak sha ffona

luKl, Sh.'Aiitriopc aUn two .Uildren liad. Ouo nioriiiiii; parly th.'y w. nt

3 mc'-idshuk kii'sh, kldwidshnank ni'nalam weweash tclil'sli;teni. Tchiii Tohd-

todig ipuroots, Icaviiig ilicir children at liou.0. And Old

wanitch .slitagi m'na ytVki liVpiak Shcishapanitoliash ks'iyutcli tua kii'sh

Anti'lo|M> filled her aeedbaHket sooner than ShoOrlzEly (imt) yet any ~ i|)o

nie-islit. Sh,4shapanitch hu'nk shpe'-ukitchna; tchui slia gTj'mbele tchi'shtal.

had dug. Old Grizzly (ihenii kept on eating up; then they returned honiewardn.

Pa'n sha nibii'shant gena nu'-idshuk kii'sh; tchi'ii pii'n lii'piak Ti-ht'!-

Ajjnln they nest day went nnt to din ipo; and again sooner Old

wamtch yft'ki shtagi, Lu'kamtdi gi'nka meya; pii'n sha gii'mpdhj. GAt-

Antelope ihor) basket filled, Old (iHzzly liiile dug: again they illumed (ho ). After.

pampehink sha kii'sh sht'shuaii' a m'nalam wewc'ka. Tchui sha hVlalvank

■■'""'•" "".^' "'f'P" each gave to their children. And they when going to

bed

9 shtiill' m'nalam we wdka; Shashapamtch na-ashtshtuli' m'na wevvt'ka: "ka-i

left orders to their children , Old Grizzly thus enjoined to her eubs; '"lot

a't shnlnl'hile-uapk hitchashtat: stefnash ma'Ish ndi'-ushkuapk! k4-i a't

y« shall skip down from the lodge ; the heirts to ye would get loose ! ' not ye

8hampatia%i(^-ua[)k : liu'walakuapk a't ankutat; k4-i a't shiki'kiuapk

shalljump over the logs: would nin against ye (some) sticks; not ye shall dive

12 iimbutat: pu'tank a't k'lii'kuapk."

under the smothering ve nilgbtdie."

Wktor:

MYTH OF THE BEAK AND THE ANTELOPE.

JU)

Tchui pii'ii Sliashuparateh nibii'shant Tch^wamtchash tfi'la gdna md-

Then again Old Grltzly noxt raorniui; Old Antuliipe with went to

idshuk. Tch^waintch lil'piak shtfigi, Shdshapamtchash gi'nk md-islii kti'sh;

dlKroots. Old Antelope wioncr niM OldOrlzily alittle having dug iporoots;

wioncr filled

<lhe banket),

tchui Shdshapamtch galdshui Tchewash. Vft'la: "gu'tash nu'sb ku'pj^a

then Old Grizzly went to meet Antelope. .She begged: "lico me bite

nti'sh; kuatchdki we ish!" Tchdwauitch hemi^ze: "lintchtik nil iiii'sh

on the
head:

bite in the hair for me!
awhile

Old Antelope

aid:

'' a while from
now

gA'tchaluapk tchi'8h;xen tche'k gatpampglank." Pen Sluishapamtch sMt6la:

will bite, homeward when (we) have retnruoii." Again Old Gnr.zly declared:

"kfllank I'sh gH'tash kuatchdki!" Tehiii mautcligitk Tch(^\vamtch kua- 6

"very hard me the lice bite in the hair!" And ef'er a while Old Aiitclupe bit into

tchaga SMshapanitchash. Pii'n pi tclikash kuatchagash hamgni Tclid-

the far Old SneOrizzly. Then Hbe alfio to bite the hair wanted to Old

wamtchash. Tchdwamtch heniti;^e: ''kii'gi nilsli gi'itash." 'rchiii Shasliap-

Antelope. Old Antt-lope aaid; "none are tome lice." And OldtJrizzly

amtch ka'sh tchdkiank kuatchaguk pu'kpuka, tchui kowaktcha ni'sh, Tchd- 9

ipo-roota putting in month biting cracked, then bit tbroit;;1i (her) tieck, the

wash shfuga humasht=gi'nk, tchui ktetega nanuk. Tchiii hiink nanuk

Antelo])e killed in thin manner, (hen cut (her) up wbolly. And .ill the

kii'sh Tchdwamtcham i'kuga m'natant yfi'kitat, tchiileksh p'le'atant ipene'^i.

ipoB of Old Antelope placed into tier baaket, the meat nii the top Hhe placed.

Hu'nk toksh nAnuk igg<i-idsha, tchu'leksh gi'Ht tchi'sh lagga-idsha, kuikag 1 2

Those bnt all she etank on a pole, the meat the nnna ton che hung ou a ntiek, a email

portion

tchu'leks dmpgle tchi'shtal, tehuyuuk m'na weweka.sh .shewana

of the meat she took home, and it to her children i^ave.

Tch(5wam

ADtelo]ie*8

tchish wewdkash tchildya t(;hu'leks. Tapi'nkani heme^e: "pgi'.sham-sh£tko

also to the children 8he gave

The younger

mi id :

"to mothor alike

toksh ndlam ma'sha"; t^ewag huk kti-udshna: "tchi'tchiks! ka-i na-asht 15

the elder

but

it tastes"

(it)

"be silent !

pushed :

gi!" Tchila'l;fa sha tchuleks mbu'shant tche'k pa-uapkuk. Shashapamtch

say!" Saved they the meat next day until toeBt. Old Grizzly

hamd^e: "tft'hak toks nt'g niaklepca, tiVm ne'gsh p'gi'sha iiiahim uidklaks

said: "where (she) pnssed the uigbt, much a1>Hent to mother yours the Indiana

tchii'leks shdwana, nu'sh ttiks sha gi'nkak shewana. Mbu'shant pe'n nil 18

meat gave, to me but tiny a little only gave. To.morrow again I

gdnuapk ne'gsh maUini ji'gi'sha hai'tchiiuk." Hfi'nk tchi'sh shash shapiya

shall go absent for your mother to look out." Also to them she said

na-asht: "hli'tmAlani p'gi'shap makl6%uk shiVdsha, kiUi't hunk laggayapksh,

thoa: " there your mother for passing the built a Are, the anus suspending,

night

shd'dshash hflnkidrasshani, p'gi'sha;" gishdpa, pan u'nak guhuashktcha 21

while had n camp. these (Indians), nmthrr;" •aidso,(and) again earlv she started out

lire

i'ktchuk tchu'leks.

to fetch the meat.

Tchui wlwalag vi]fhi shashashapkash: "shuhillulena nat?" Shasha-

Now the young asked the gvizzlyeuhs; " shall skip down from we?" The hear-

antelopes the house

120

MYTHOLOOIC TEXTS.

™«|

shapka hemdxe: "p'gl'shap nillam kA-i shanAhiile ndlsh shuhAluldatki slus,

™'" '"''■ "moilier our not watt. u« f. gi. ....I «kip .t„wi,, ° °

pAla nAlsh tcWshknapsht." WHag pe'n vQlA slmsh: "ImffgAt nat sl.amna-

thellvor ,,8 to have hurt." '^y^^^^ ««">■' "ked thoo.! "loofiiorel wo wIlljLp

^ !iXlr"'" ShashAshapka hemd;Ke: "ndlan. p'gi'shap kd-i shanaluile ndlsh

morlog,!' Th«culM Mid, "„ur '^mother ' "not w.nia „.

shampatiazieatgi, hiialakuanl-- v : . ais); diikutat" Po'n wlVas vii'la: "h&<r.

to Jump over log^ lo run agal, i. tree.Ilrah»." Again ayoang a.ked: ■'loS

autulope

B 'i' "^t^^^" L5'S^ -^^r- ""^Ir p'&p ¥:> «i«-"«i'o'ie

not

wanta

6 ndlsh shikixiedtki dmbutat; pii'tank ndlsh k'lekudpksht." Wil'hde- vu'la

im toplmig« in tl,n water, smothoilng u>. toMptic." The voung a»k«l

nntt Idpeii

pe'nak: ''hdggat ndd lepleputii'na." Lukdg hem^ze: "nen ndlam pWsliap

only^ono. "lookT,erel „a let play ••smoko ont." TboTi.b* «.|d7 ..„„r '^^,,01"'^

ka-i ndlsh shapfya; tchd-u hdtak ndd lii'una hil'mashtl"

not iiH *<''\, , presently lieio we will nlay ihnsl"

(alwut this) , ' •"

9 1'chui wiwaldg mfi'lil vv($tli Idtchashtat, tsiii Ift'pi guli' tchiii shashd-

'an^te'iSpe? 'S "'""' '"» the lodge, and flrA ^entin.o, an.l the bear.

shapka vutdtchkia. Wfwalag nd-asht, gi: "pdlakag a't hutdtchkiuluapk!"

out,, puttheeoveron. T'>'';VO..nB so »„id , •■{.ret.y aoo.f you „,„«t open again l"

"i"', a lu'l;:ag; tchiii wiwalag "leplepntda, lepleputea, lepleput^a

■ye«, (said) the Cuba i then the young cried: -two smoke in, two smoke ont, two snmke in

antelopes

12 puta', puta', a', a'." Tchui Ifi'l^ag kaishndla, wfwalag tii'shkampgle : pdn

•mother, smother, 3, O!' Then the cubs opened np, Iheyoung wentont, then

antt^InpcB

lu'l^ag tchkash gilli': "pdlakag a't kaishnu'luapk." Tchiii Ifi'lyaff "leo-

theeubs also went down; "pretty soon ye most onoover." Ant theeubf cried:

leputt?a: pudshd, puta'-a." Pdn wfwalag vu'ldliank: "lepleputd lepleputd

•■.moke in: smother, smother." Again the young wont into: " two smoke ont, two smSke in

antelopes

IS puta', puta'a'"; l(il;^ag kaishn61a, tchiii wfwalag tfl'shkanipgle, lulydff

"""''"»' »nioke"; the eubs n.icoveied, and theantelopea came .mf; the cub?

tchkash vu'ld'll: "lepleputt^, leplepute puta', puta'." Wiwa'hldff kd-i

also ran into: "two smoke in. two smoke in smother, smother." The young ant^ ~ot

kaishnuli'at lu'l^agsh; tchii;(asht tche'k kaishnil'la. Tchiii i''kamp6lank

would uncover for the cubs; ;.fter their death then they uncovered. Then takiiTgout

18 liilkdgsh k'lii'pki I'pza telishtat; t;(dwaksh dnkutka shfi'm tdkuank shndt-

theoubs red paint they lined in (their) faces; to the elder with a ^-sg the snout gagging they raised

kual Idtchashtat, tapinikdyentch tchish dnkutka tdkuank shu'm ffa-uld'l-

(■t)..p ontbelodgetop, the younger too with a prop gagging the mouth on lodge-

kishtala .shndtkual. Tchiii sha shnd-ilakshtala gutdktcha, nanuktudlash

Lidder they fastened. And they to the flro-pl ee " went in, to every article

21 sha shtuli'dsha kd-i shdptki giug Liikash gdtpampglisht; wdkash pi'l sha

they en,|oined not to report (to) the Grlz.ly having retamed, the bone-awl ione they

ydmtki dggaipksh.

forgot .IS It stuck In the

celling.

MYTH OF THE BEAK AND THE ANTELOPE.

121

Tchiii ma'ntch=gitk Shdshapamtch gdtpamp6lank shataliAyapkiiga;

Then aftorawhlle Old Orliily relarned, looklnK ahead of heraelfi

sliawfgank k'lepgi' kekewdlaksht shash hem^ze: "hdn ak 8ha g(j-u k'ldpgi

aiifiTiod rril paint nt their havlnfj waatml ehesaid: "they my red palm

kek(^wel;ja, pshe-utfwashash go-u anuli'pkfitoh"! Tchiii wiki\tant galtchd- 3

have wnateit, from the Indiana I whioh filchfd"! Then nearer approach-

wiank shlda Id'lzaS tclifi'kapksh It'gguta liiimd^e: "at ni'sh tdtaksni Tchd-

in^ ahe anw the cuI)h to be ileail (andt nobbinc flhoaald; "now nie the children of Old

watntcliam ne-ulaktampka!" Tchiii vviwiiraaksh liamdasha: "tAt a't

Antelopo liavo punUlifd!" And the .VfiitOK antelopes ehe called: '-where ye

tatakshiii gi!" tsiii tataksni vudl^a Shashapamtchash: "gi'n at a ndd 6

eliilili-en are?" and thechildren replied to Old Grizzly : " rlglit here we

wawatiiwa ktcMl;(ishtat." ShAshapamtch hokdnsha tii'sh hai at tataksni

iiie Bilt'n^ in the nunnhiiie." Old Grizzly ran out to where now the children

wawatdwa. Pan t.itakshni wdshital hara^xe vudl;(uk Shashapamtchash;

werealtting. Auain the children towarde the epnlie in reply to Old Grizzly ;

mud-houHe

pii'n ShAshapanitcli hulhl'pgle: "tdtatataksni!" Pdn wiwalag kani gidnk 9

again Old Onzily riinintnit: "children!" Ajjaln tbeyonng outdoors beluu

antelopes

wdl^a Shiisliapanitchash: "gi'n at a ndt kdtni Idwa; Idshnia ai i' ndlsh."

replied to Old Grizzly: " liere we ont-doors play i not find ymi n«."

Pen Shdshaparatoh h6kansha.

Afcain Old Grizzly ran out {of Ihi'

ii(MiHe).

Tchui lirt'k maiitch gitk in'natak shdkta shapfya: "genii'l a hfl'k und 12

Then Home time nl'tt'v her bone-awl aaid T "went away lonR

ago

tdtakshni, kakiash li'sh i ka-iga." Tchiii Shdshapamtch vu'la: "tu'shtal

the children, whom yon look out foi.' And Old Grizzly asked: "which way

haftch sha gena?" Tchui shdkta shapiya Shashapdmtchash : "gi'tal a

thou they travelled I" And the awl told OldGrizzly: " through hero

sha gutdktcha, gtin IgiVm sha shdlgidsha gutekul'shtala. Tchiii Shasha- 15

they crawled, hero coals they placeil opening against. Then Old

pamtch hdtaktal kutc'guk tchuktj^akdnka; kdshguk guteksh. Tchiii gutd-

'fiizziy through It t<i crawl In attempted; conld not she crawl in Finally getting

gank g(ina dmnadsha: "mii'hl rau'lu te-utew.i, nm'h'i mii'lu te-utdwa,"

ill she went crying on her way: "rotten wood rotten wood breaks eaay, rotten wood rotten wood breaks through,"

geniita shudktchn iia-asht hu'k Shdshapamtch; pen hem(i;^e: "tfish gint 18

walking wept so OldGrizzly; then she said: "whero

mdlash nii gdntak shleta tatdkiashi" hemkankatchna ge'nuk.

ye I am going to find the children t " she said repeatedly while walking.

Tchiii wiwalaksh pinii'dsha rndklg^apkah ku'mgtat; mA' shiidshank

Then the young antelnpes she overtook while they camped in a cave ; building a large Are

sk{i'l;ja. At tataksni shdmtchal/a Shdshapamtchash pin6dshasht m'ndlsh; 21

she lay down. Noav the children became aware, (that) Old Grizzly liad overtaken them ;

t;udwag tapi'nkayentch wil'hdgsh skishd'la; "at a na'lsh hii'ktakag pinu'dsha;

the elder the younger antelope woke up; "now us 'she' caught up with;

-"1

a^shiUtl" h<$mta m'na tdpia.

wake up!" it said to Ita younger.

Tchiii a;uf8h<ila hA'ktag. Shdshapamtch

And woke up thl« little one. Old Grizzly

122

^rVTriOLOdK! TlvXTS.

\±o ^'^,';!Z""'' '*^'l"S***- "Mba'«hant tchek nidlsh nfl tnfikiash shAkfi-

•leop 'J '■>(«"'«'■ thoam •Toim.irow „. 1,m „i,i, y„ , ,,„|,,,^„ will play

xuiyuapk Fbopslm la'lpatka tchek"; tchui na-asht gfulank skft'l^ank
3 ktdndsha. Tchui wi'wal'hag ktauhuush shdtflyakit^a dnkutka- tamfl'fkh

«heKot«l...p. Then .he yonnK.nfl..?..- ,h.„eep..»„„.. b„mbi,ied SLk^ whler

kti'indshi sht'wuk 8hutiiyaki(5a. TdnW slm ki5-i shi'ktifishf tu'shkanslia

.h.w«..le,.p .r„„«, .he.vthri.„he.,. Ao.l th.,- ".nt »h" „,„vlr« Zl ^ii o^ "f

^'i'l^i!?'^' **^'.^!S"'' i' palukmahvnk; vfi'shuk Shashapamtchash m'ndlsh

ran.waj they at a quick pace, afraid (that) Old Grizzly them

" '•'ttl'.':"!*'''' ■'"•u'kanuc,,,,.,, »ha h.„,*^k„, k^.„g,, ».«;kjpks,,£al,H.
:.t^ ""li^b" "«• IS'"- ±*. "»','*""* "«* kprfiipka prnod-
±1IK* "•*'' ^l" '''±" 81'S;k?">teli AO'tza .hash, wfwalag ha*,<g.ha

now. ADd Old Crane oroMcl ever ihem, the .voiing® explilued

(lutelopea

A C»l A/1 1 "Ul«ll>pi*8

^ ^IlSr''- '^±" ^^'^ite'*^'' l'"":^''^'^**^ •''•r'' .«W<^l"^htHt, ka-ukawd

, , oiairane blew them Int.. a whittle iilck, (and) ra- tied

the? h.uif''* ^n^'iy-'^"'^ shi'namshtnuk. Wiuhigalam shapfyash Tchd-

they In the lodge ,„i„K hung „p f.,r fear. Of ,he.voJ,K„„,e. „p„„L^e«.«e „hat"oid

r:Sr'^ ^l!S^ ^*'^te?^^?^"^'"' ^''^;fe"'^^ ndshenshkdni tchish

oyumoniziv, 01dCr,ii,e the yoiniK ones too

12 shuashuaktcha. ShiVkanitch shuaktcha: "t<-ush tchiwd, d-iish tchiwd!"

7 OldCnne wept(rrylDB): "h.ke waier, lake water-

^itrSr ''t'^' «»'»ashuaktch: "d-ush tchi'tch.l tchi'tchfl."

""•"■ lake w:i- w;<- wo-tcr"

^ol^'"'' **tll.n' ^'^•''^^);*Pa'"teh indnt('h=gitk szishft'lank te'lht kd'mgtat:

,r .< " • , Oldflri^ly uf.er a time awakeniu,. looked In the cave:

^ ..^.?' l"'^ "'""^ tat/ikiash shakemfyuapk i)shdpsha lil'lnatka- fl'nao-in shmh

•TMherhard n.y«.,f with the children I ,h.ll pla/„ g.Je l!, the ..Iv tin.e w"'K.t^, loS a'eMhey

gcnnish tCi'toks hfi'ksha gatpa .Shu'kaintchaniksh." Tchui pdn ffuhud-

hfX.becave), out there ,l,„y ^^oh^ed ,„ Old One « home.' "henP ^ "f^Jld

shktcha Shdshapamtch haftchnuk wfwah.gsh; kuefsh sham haftchna.

,„ ', , 0'''«'1"1.V to follow the .vounp antelopes, the track, of them ,he followed.

18 Crat^apshank k6k6tat vtl'hi Shil'kaintcha8h : "tain tatdkiash slile'sht?"

^Koachln, to the river .he a,ked Old Crane, 'T thtlhfren tilatnV

^^'otr^!'^ ^"^'^ "Mt ^ f "^5^ *^Hf^''/' ^'^ ^ kudntzapsha tdtakiam

^^nuio Ma. not I Haw the children." Here (were) the ont-pulng of theehlldi^n

tracks

gdtzapshnish; ha'mtchna nd-asht Slidshaparatch : "aishfutr ta'dsh i shdsh

hav.ngreaohed,.hen,„ hallooed .„ o.dG^I„,y: ..toconcea^ then you them

21 nen; ki' lank Ish s;Ka'tki!" Shfi'kamtch hamdze: "kagi -c^-n vu'nsh"- niin

(want,, quickly .e setover!" old Crane eald,^ .NTnef, tJe canc^", ' ^^

""S^S"^ "]&'^ ^^ ^i^^^ ^i ^^r Tchui .dntd^k

.MYTH or THE BKAK AND TUB ANTHLOPK.

123

gfug) tchfi'kslitka sli;(fi'tkii. Slii'iHliapamtch gdlapka tchfi'kshtat ; tdt;{«5-

Iwiiig) iintlieIeK he crusncii (hni). (MclOilzzly stepped ontholPK; tn the

lanipani gAggutk Ampfl pft'nua luAkshatka. Tchui wudfi'pka inAkshatka

mldHttuf river) cuiiiing water nhe dmnk from the Hkull-cap. Auit she Htriiok with the nkall-cap

Shii'ksliain tchCl'ksli puuu'lank u'hlftclmg. 8hil'kamtcli sluiwlguk Shdsha- iJ

Crano'H leg urtitr drinking, to shake oat (the OhI Crani' aniiriui Old

water).

pamtchash shnindil'wa iinibutat; tclu'ii iito-iHli i'ktcliappli Shft'katntch,

Grizzly doused into the water; then a Iiow fetched at home (Jid Crane,

ngd-ishan Shasliapamtchash. WiwalAga tchuk geknaiik shliVluHhtat, Sho'k-

■bot OldOrlzziy, Tlie yonnit then cimeont of the whistle, Crane's

antelopes

shtim wewdkalam sha hCi'nk tiUdshitko ngt^-ishan Shashapamtchasli; tchiii 6

of the children they armed with the shot UldOrizzly; then

arrowH,

sha shiuga.

they killed (her).

NOTES.

The myth of the Bear and th(i Antelope is one of the most attractive and best
stylicized of this collection. It forms a whole mythic story by itself, and not a series
of myths like the preceding article. The (tiizzly Bear's fignre is drawn in very
natural and characteristic outlines, and the same may be said of the (jlher animals of
the story. Some archaic words seem to prove that the myth has been handed down
for many centuries to the present generation, which repeats it to tlieoHspving with the
same expressions as used by the parents. The archaic terms alluded to are Shashai)-
amtcli, psepsha, pshe-iitiwash, kukui, tchitchu; probably also leplepiitea.

118, 1. 7. Shiishaiiamtt^h alternates in this tale with Lu'liamtch, the "Grizidy Bear
of the Ancients," and so does In'kaga with shashiipka. I'lmtch, Cunti-niksh is the
usual attribute "old'' appended to mythologic characters. In the mythologic stories of
the Indians bear-cubs always apjiear two in number, the older and the younger one.
The same may be said of the majority of the other (juadrupeds; cf. the two young of
Old Antelope, in this story, and t/(''wag, 106, it, as well as of many of the personified
powers of nature, i'f. the term lepleputt'ja.

118, 7. 119, U. gi'iik or kinka: a little, not much; meishi contains the particle i or
hi: "on the ground".

119, !). pu'kpuka: she cracked hard ipo-roots, feigning to crack lice whic!« she pre-
tended to have found on the antelope's body. Pitjking lice from each other.s' heads
(gutash kshikla) and eating them is a disgusting priMtice which travellers have
observed among all Indians of North and South America.

119, 10. niinuk : the whole of her body.

119, 11. ipr'ne';^i: to i)lacf something into a basket or receptacle which is already
filled to the brim.

119, 20. 21. hu t imllam etc. The construction is as follows : " m&lam p'gi'shap liu't
miikl6;^uk shu'dsha, p'gi'sha laggayili)kash hiVnk killi't, hunkiamf/nam shu'dshash":
yonr mother made a fire oat therti because she must have passed the night there, and
because she hung up this anus on a stick, while the Indians (whu gave meat to both
of us) had a carap-flre.

.11

]24

MYTHOLOGK! I'l'^XTS.

120, 2. tclifHliknapsht iusteud of tcliiNlikiuipkaslit.

120, 10. viitfitchkia i8 also pronounced iitfitchkia, hntAtchkia. Kartlilo.lffi-8 which
open on the top can be (!k)se<l by moans of a lartfo cover phiced tv.T fh(. Hnioke-hole

120, 1 1 loph-puti-Mi or properly : leplep-putc^a, " to phiy the smoke out name with
two on each side," ih a comimund of lapPni tno in tlie .shorten' form lap, ami piUa to bo
smothering. Lap has changed its vowel into a shorter vowel, f, on acconni of removal
of accent and is here redoubled by iterative, not by distributive redui)lleati(m. Cf
lop;rl<5ks ft-om lap and J<'I6ka. A series of points after loplcpntea indicates that the
animals repeated this word an indeilniti. number of times, while the others were inside
the lodge, and while pronouncing puta'. they opened again to let them out.

120,17. tchiVasht tchO'k kaishnft'ia. Literally rend>jred, this nu-ans: ha vine
perished Anally, thoy uncovered. The subj,.ct of tch.Vasht, Ift'l/agsh, has to be su,!^
plied from what precedes. The smoke of the burning rotten woc.d killed the <uibs.

120, 10. ga-ulft'lkish, from ga ulola to go out, is the outside ladder of the In-
dian " mud-house" or winter-lodge, averaging in length from 10 to 15 fee* ; the inside
ladder, wrdush, is somewhat longer to reach the excavated floor.

120,21. The complete wording of this sentence, in which shaptki stands for
sliapatki, would be: kAi shiiptki giug Liikash, gatpami)f'lisht hiVnksh (hfi'nkiash).

120, 22. aggaii)ksh, contraction of aggayapkash: aggaya to b<> hung ni., or to be
stuck into ; said of long-shape<l arti(!lea only.

121, 3. anulipka. to take away something from another's lodge or house without
asking for it ; the suflBx -ipka expressing the idea of " towards oneself." Anulipkuish
"what was once abstracted from others" appears here in the contracted form am.li'p-
kutch; g<5-u "by me, through me."

121, 9. tatatati.!:M.i .o-ows repetition of the two first syllables of tatJiksni children,
but at the same time means ''where are the chiidrenf"

121, 15 shCtlgidsha ; the antelopes placed the coals there to secure their flight from
the Bear, bad the coals been put there by somebody else, Wkidsim would be used.

121, 22. 122, 7. hu'ktakag: familiar diminutive name given to the Grizzlv Bear-
hfi'ktag, 121, 23., stands for one of the young antelopes. ' '

122,1.2. Mbushauttche'ketc. Thesenseof this exclamatory sentence is as follows:
'lo-morrow at last I will play a sharp game with ye children, when in the day-tiine
I cau use my eyes to advantage." Lfilpatka is: lulpatko a; "possessing .^yes" is the
pnmary signification of lulpatko, but liei-e it means " enabled to make use of the eyes"
Cf. mukasham n(i Idlpatko : I see as sharp as a horned owl. The distributive form
P8h«:.p8ha, of psh(5, "during day-time" means "any time when the sun shines bright."
Lt. psheksh, uoou-time.

122, 9. This blowing of personified objects of nature into sticks etc., is a fiction of
which we have another instance in 111, 10.

122, 11. ndshenshkiini. See Note to 71, G. 7.

122, 12. 13. tchiwii, tchl'tchu: tchi is a syllable found in many words referring to
water and liquids, as tchiya to give water; tchi^ga to overflow. ' This radical is no
doubt an obsolete Klamath word for water and recalls the term tcbft'k "water" in
Chinook jargon: tltsuk in Lower Chinook, tl'tchuku in Clatsop: tchauk in Nutka.
It also occurs under various forms in the Sahaptin dialects. By this lake undoubtedly
¥pi)*r Klamath Lak« is meant. Of. tchfwa in Dictionary.

K'MOKAMTOU, the KIVK LVNXEa AND THE ANTELOPE. 125

122, 15. K» t'u'i iiiiik fur ki'i-u tuu ui giunk; k&ii luetuis here " vobutuuutly, ui-uolly,
Hbarjtly", tuA: " iu some way or other".

122, l(i. Hhaah t,"'!iiiiish : after tliey had left the cave.

122,20. "aishiiig tiVdsh i Hhilsh iioii". Here uen btuiuls for 8ouie fluite verb;
eitlier .stiaiiii-iiH i: you want to conceal them; or for iii'iiuiht i shapiya: "you upeak ho,
in on\w to conceal thcui".

122, -.'!. spft'iiua. The .s|ireiul out legs of the Crane luul to s<-rve a.s a bridge to
tlic Grizzly Bear, for tlicns wum no dug-out canoe at thcii' di.'<i)osal to cross the river.

122,23. niAk»ha ncklank. OKI (Jrune carried on Imh leg a vaHe or skullcap that
belonged to a dug-out cunoc, but did not poHise.>*s a canoe hiniNclf.

123, ;t. u'l'.litcha. ( drizzly .shook out the remainder of the water to let the MkuU-cap
become dry. SUuUcai s are used throughout iw drinking va.se.s.

123, (i. taidMhitko. This sentence has to be construed : wiwalag, shO'kshaui wewa-
kalam tAldshitko, nge-i.shan, and tdldshitko stands for taldshi gitko: "the yoong
antelopes, armed with the ariows of tlu^ 'Irane's children, shot" etc.

K'MIIKA.MTCHIK8HAM 8HA8HAPKSLEA8H.

THE MYTH OK K'MtKAM'I'CH, TIIK FIVE LYNXES AND THE

ANTELOPE.

OUTAINKI) I'HOM .r. C. I). RiDDLK IN Till-: M(>I>0(; DlALUCf.

K'miikanitchiktch Iiiiiik j^eiitko killlatut, kJiflasli shutolau, tiiiiep shk^a

K'niAkiitiitdi wjilkiug c»rUi iipuri the world liAvlug oruatcil, tlve he aaw

sliloa ankotat wawakayApkasli. Kallio skiitatko K'nuik6nitcliig'sli shpakdj^a

ljiiii-8 (in trL«« silting. In a rubliit-blauk. t clnd K'oii'ikaniloli tore to pleci-i

p'ii4 kaflio skiitash, hem^p^cn : "tidshf fin g^-u skiVtasli gftak shlii'a lue- 3

IiIh rabblt-Bkin robe, (anil)»alil; "asooil tome robe 'villbi' ilio l.vuxea whun

16ka." Ktt'ii pe-uyegau 8hl6a kai'hho'ta; iiasli shirk hiltp^i'dslinaii liudshna.

I kill." StoneH plcklni; up the ho misiied ^ one lynx juuipiu,; ilown ran away.

lynxt'M

Henie^en: "o, ki'i-i tfdshi skutash gi-udpka ! " Pen kai'hho'ta ktaydtka.

Uosaid: "oh! not a i;ood mantle it wlUlwcomo!" Afain lio nilnsed wltiinatone,

pe'n nash 8hl6a hiltpfidshnan hu'dshna. K'miikomtchigsh hemd/en : "pe'n 6

another lynx Ji.nipintfaown ran off. K'lniikamtrh snid: "again

Hash hOt;uldsha; at g«^-u ketchgdne skutash gi-iiapka." NdAni shl6a wawag-

ono skipped a«ny ; now my sraaU mantle will Iwoomo." The threo lynxea sitting on

gdyan K'mukamtchash shushaludkta ; p^n ktayatka shlda kaf'hha. Na'sh

(«r- js) at K'ralikamtob acoflM ; again with u stone the he missed. Another

lynxes

p6n hfltzldshna hudshua. K'muk6mtchiksh ham^;^*': 'kdmat pi'la nish J)

om- jumpe.; down (and) ran 'tway. It'iniSkamtoli said: "the back uiilv tome

120

MYTHOIXXWd TKXTH.

All wuldshtuk." Poll ktui luytlKaii hIiI/,h kuChha, hipuk lirthatyfdfllinan

U will cover." (An...l,«r) »t.me l.U.kl"K u,. 11,. Iv,.,.., T,« ml«,,l iL, "k "plug down

haiiatcliim. K'lmikointcJiiksli Hliimktclitaiiipka :

mn»w«y. K'nmkiiintiill ■•vvliiKComiiielK wl :

'M6-i li'.VHii loyak, l6-i I6yaii l(')yHk,"

poll kanio ndaiKlkalk.iiikaM lialiushtatchniavan anktltka kaflio n'na oSn
HkiVtan kdhaslifrdsliu.

Piitlliiii II marli'il oir.

■niiinil IiImiukH'

(i Wi.ru liak m'unu U-hi'-n kiiiiadNliAm p/itko kladsliat ffHhl'kla. KaHio

pW. tclio-u wHldshan tclirwash luliik idfi',,ka tohekfdi t(lktf.i. MlnishakHli

'"" I'mHo,',; ""■ """• '""""'-'"I- l-klke.! ,on.,,keltl,l,«,Uh.';;. Kov ,. .U.a« kuli"

kaviiktanipka iiaslifriiVtiia ; tchu-ii tapituniia liiVdsInia; lo'ltki liilnk tchiii

'' ''^''I'-T''^ ''?r" *^'l''"'' ^'?i"*^''^' ^'■' 'i^^l'^'-" K'n.iVkamtchJiHh luml
0( sl,„. K inukomtc iiksh ka(li(, n•,lH^vat sliloklapkasli nlilra, homdy(»: "tffcMy

*^H^' l*«lio-utivvaHh iiii^h ill, shuHhaluaktaiitak, ku-idnha mlali kafliu

^OaZ\\-\ 1 "";"""■"" ■^■"'; ,, wll..ler..l«, .-he„.l«r«l.I. ,„„ rabbit

12 amptchik«li {Ti'-u Hkutash skutapkasli."

"'■1 luy gBrraent wrapped In."

NOTES.

125, 1. kiiilash is one of thd low iiistauces wl.orc ii.aniinatc umms assume the
omlinff -sh m the objectivo ,me. This is, howovi-r, no instanw, of jKM-sonittcation. Of
pAphshasli 94, 5. (Concern! nj,' the sitjnilifation of kiiila, cf. Note to 96 "a

125,:; kailio, kailia, rabbit skins sewe.l toKether to form a frannent, mantle or
b anUet. As the name indicates, if was ori«:inalI,v nuMh- fn.m the fnr of the kaf-rabhit
SkuUish may be rendered here by dirterent terms, sinee many Indians use.l their ,skin
robes, in whu-h Ihey slept at ni},rht, as f-annents .),• eh.iiks dminK the day

125, .{ hieh.ka. The plurality of the lyn.xes is indieated by the verb luela, whieh
can be used only when manij are killed; its singular form is shin«a. A similar remark
applies to pe-ny^KPn and to wawasgCiya. Lynxes are iis.iallv spoken of in the West
as wild cntn.

12e,;(. 16i loyau 16yak is probably an interjectional and satiric, variati.m of the
verb ludlui;fa: "they make fun of me", the distributive form of luai>a.

io« ?; ^)>'l'''"'- ""'" " '*"''' '''''^- ''^"'^J^''^ «*■ «•'"'"' '^ K'mnkamtel.iksh.
IM, 11, 1-. 1 sheutiwash ete. This sentence shows the followinR structure: The
human beings wdl laugh at you, dressed (as yon are) in my miserable, good-for-nothing

olmtHriir^"" '""^'-■':*^^'' 'T '""^""^ ^^«™ «»t' old, good tor nothing. This word is
phonetically ransposed from 6mtch gish: "old being", "long existing". As such it
appears also .n K'mfikamtchiksh, a Modoc form for K'mukamtch

TIIK HAT, TIIK SKUNK, TIIK IKXl ANI> Tllli I'UAlUIi: WOLF. 127

KHJHIDSJIUAM, 'IVllAHIIAM, Gt/HHIMM, WAhUAM WIIAHIIAl'KKLKAHH.

THK STORIES OF TirK HAT. TIIK SKUNK, THK IlOd AND TIIK

I'KAIIMK-WOLF

UBTAINK.K I'IIIiM .1. ('. II, HlUDLK IN TIIK MulHIU IIIALKUT.

Ktchi'dHhri UTiuk HJcrtliips Hhulti'liitko tcliiiwal ktiiyat. Mo-6\vn lnliik

A b«t iHily a li«t lioldliig iiniliT ila nut ' " "

on ft riH-k.

A moll'

liilti'iiiftnaii ; iuo-6\ve liilnk Iienn5x«: "li^i^'ga mi HkdlapH .sliK'-i-yk"

ruu pant

tbt) inolu

(toll)

mill

WBll,

your

Imt

iKt mi'

Ktclii'dahr) vflla : "kii-i iiu rihand-uli sztilaps shle-etki." — " Ha<ffra ta .{

TliBlmt mplhiil; "nol I wnnt the b»t to nhow (you)." "Wult,

(yoo).'

slil('-ek". Ktchfdslio Ikjiir'xo: "kd-i tche nft inish neii." — Mo-6wt' ktchf-

Oiowli". Thi' l)»t Hiilil: "not I yon ■■yiiii Tim niolo "ii ilir

Buy."

dHhuash luVtuan Hkiilapsli U\'txa; Ift't^an kawak.iLm, tcliiii vva'shtat liiVllie.

''nt loaplui; tlin Imt took nwny ; h«TiOR ripppil (It) with then Into mlmi ran

takon (It) IiH teeth,

Ktclii'dHho luliik Anko tfiin HliiiVlagian, tchi'ii wa'shtat yaiikdpshtiaii wf-uka. G

The bat wiMiil much xnthiTed, thermipoii llin diii initlliin (It) l>el'iiri> liliw ,in thii

HiDoki*.

Mu'-uu pfl'taii hfikansha, pen miyanta wa'shtat lifi'Ilje, Ktchi'dsho tcliiii

Thiiinolo smothorind ran out, and nuother Into a hole ran. The lial thi'ii

kdshga hushdkish.

conid not drive it out.

II.

Tchflshnsli tu'ma watchaltko na'sh walta nanuk watch ktcliinkshtat 9

A eknnk many horaea ownlnu one day all horaea Into an liiclomire

n(-ille. Nash tcha'shSsh tchokftsh nkewatko gatpa. Tchashash biki iifiimk

' ' ■""" ' ' (with) a log cntoir arrlvi^d. The akunko.tiier nil

drove.

Another

Hkunk

p'na watch ni'-iiknan shtutka nf-udshna kiike yiilalfna, kuketat tcln'ii ni'wa

his own horses drivlnR out cm thi. rraul drove (them) « river 'alongside, into the river then drove

Namik watch tchhi'l;^^, pitaknianf.

All horses were drowned, itself too.

(them).

III.

K-ukshikni Mo'dokni Inhx k6-id8ha sku'ksh gii'shiltat washtat tchioh

Tk. Tri.„„.i. (and) Modocs Iwlieve » wicked spirit In the hog, in the coyote

The Klinath
I.aki'a

also

wdnkogsht. Tati'itaks <JiVshu iii'innk imViii c-ushtal gt'-upgaii wt'nu-ga,

III reside. That time, «lien hogs all iiitii the aca running porisheil,

128

MiTHOLOGIG TEXTS.

na'shak pushpiVshli gu'shii kshi'ta, tdnktchik h<\nk gft'shuash k6-id8hi

one only Ua„k ^„^ ^^_ „,^„^, ^,„U,ho«, "a wicked

shku'ksh gdtkta. KA-i tddshitoksh M mdklaksh pupashpa'shlish fffi'shil

Bplrit entered. Not therefore theTudlm. ^ ^ bliok ^"offi

luela.

kill.

IV.

Tfna uidklaks wash shldan shiiikash shauahuli, shku'ks washash vu-

"uce »Modoom«n a coyote finding to kill , it) want,.,!, a dotnon tho coyote ''l"

hiena gi'sht 161an ; wiish padshiiyan,at gakay^pkaii ka'kin. Pt^lakaff mii'ni

.Mo to bo .I,inki„g.,l,oc„ote into a ™£za„ita. " ent^rlnl dUappoarod. Saddenly ^ a toge

f> vvitam ktchikayiVla. K(^shga kanf hiink witJi'ni shiiikash, shtfi'ishtat trdt-

brownboar cuno out of it. Could not anybody (this) brown !««.• kill, a (gophcr'a) den ^ en

pamiiaii at ka'kin Nduka gakankankish shfshalj

terilljr

Several

buntera

1.
became sick.

ho disAppenred.

'rina mtiyaksh tu'nia wash shk'a kshi(il;K^pkash wigatan tchish ; tcha-

Once an Indian many coyotes ,aw dancinK*^ fear (his) can.p| hobo-

'•^ ]':}^''^ 1"^'"*^^' shle-uga. Tanktchi'kni kd-i wash ludlsh hdmgni. Hfi'k

Since thoD not coyotes to kill they tried. Theae

came for some time for seoinL'
insane 'them).

wfish maklaks=sh£tko shldsh gi, tapi'tni tchii'kash nfish p^'ni

coyote. men-alike to look at are. from behind tho hip the head up to.

NOTES.

I. lu mythology the bat is sometimes regarded as a symbol of watchfulness at
iiight, and this is expressed here by the adverb unak.

127, 2. 3. 4. sliI6i-ek for: shlea i gi, "yon cause to .see;" shl^-etki for shl(5atki in a
passive signification: "to be seen, in order to be seen"; shl<5-ek for shl^a gi: "make
it to be seen, let it see."

127, 2. skillaps, a Modoc teiiu for a hat of some kind. The verb lut;fa, used in
eoiiiiection witJi it, indicates its voiiiided shajie.

127, 4. ka-i tche nfi luisli neii. Tclie is abbreviated from tchek, particle pointing
to the future, or to the termination of an action or state; the verb gi to do or shl^a to
see or to bo seen is omitted : " 1 will not at all show (it), as jou say."

127, (i. yankapshtia, to place into the entrance in order to impede or prevent
egress. The radical in this term is tkdp, stalk, straw, little stick; vCma, "down, down
into", serves as a prefix.

II. This story of the skunk is manifestly a mere fragment of a longer one, for the
omission of motives renders it as silly iis can be. I have inserted it here to show tho
various verbs formed from niwa, "to drive into the water, or upon a level ground".
This IS a verb applying to many objects only; speaking of one object, shi'iwa is in use.
For all the derivatives of both verbs, see Dictionary.

127, 13. pitakmani stands for pi tak m'na hi'.

III. This hog story is evidently the result of the consolidation of aboriginal super-
stitions with the evangelist's relation of the Gergesene swine throwing themselves into
the IaiU- of Galile(>. from the headhmds of Gndara. In Cluipter XVII of his **Winem<r

HUMAN SOULS MKTEMPSYCHOSED INTO FISH.

129

Meachain has given several of these concretiouary products of the uncultivated Modoc
mind. lu making a study cf aboriginal mythology and folklore such fictions must be
disregarded, though they may be of interest to psychologists.

IV. Races in an undeveloped, primitive state of mind are prone to regard living
animals us the abodes of spirits, and most frequently the wild and carnivorous quad-
rupeds are believed to harbor wicked spirits. These are either elementary spirits, or
the ghosts of deceased persons. To see a spirit means death, and in their terrilied
state they often behold, as here, the spirit in a half Imman, half beastly appearance,
when coyote-wolves, gray wolves, bears, cougars etc. come in sight. Such a sight ciin
cause the instant death of the hunter, or deprive him of his reason, or make him sick
for months. In Greek and Boman mythology. Pan, the Satyrs and the Fauns retain
something of these primitive notions (in the panic tenor etc.), though these gemi were
largely idealized in the later periods of national development. In every nation a rela-
tively large amount of superstitions refers to hunting and the chiise of wild beasts. "

128, 9. TanktcM'kni is in fact an adjective, not an adverb; literally, it means "those
who existed, or hunted since that time", and is composed of tdnk, a while or time ago
tchek, finally, and the sufQx -ni. Cf. 13, 2. 128, 1.

Sku'ks=kia'm.
HUMAN SOULS METEMPSYCHOSED INTO PISH.

Given in the Klamath Lake Dialect uy Davf Hill.

Kd-i hA'nk shla' at kanf kia'mat skii'ksliasli. IliVk nil link shla't

^"^ oniiBco anybody inaflsli .i dead niaiiH spirit. D.'iiil mmi only can hob

shku'ks; pil iiiiikiaks liu'k shla't sku'ks. Hushti'xak tsa'taks ni'sh si'uks

"pintSi only drnd Ii.diiilis <an s™ Hpirits. lliMiluki's driNin t if me ' to kill

■ Uily cilinnt deii-iiMMl) ' (,„,.)

tche'k sanalio'li link, wakianua shuishaltki tchii baiits' "I'lur niish. Ha'toks ^

then liBwqiitu, or i.<-ilmp» to keep llindonii- l.fcan™ lio «iint? mo. If

orpcrlmpa to keep llin dotlfi- Iwcftnso h,\
medicine

ni' shliiAt k'lakatak ni; hii n' u'uk shliiat sku'ks kiiini, liii n' il'nk ssliljiat

^ ahedlid* ""«•"■'"" ^> "■ I " 9l.«uld«ee, tho Rplrit-fmh, if I him ,h„,iM see

ini^klaks hii'nk sko'ks tchi'sh, k'lakiit n' il'nk shla-6k; wakidnua liissunnk

tl- doa;lper.,->n thonplrit nlao, „,„y die I, l,i,„ fnr having s,...„; orpr.h.ip, if ^onK-niedirino

In nppHnil,

(chiitrh ni'sli ka-i siu'^at. liiVniaslit InViikasli slilii-iikit na'd mdklaks, ft

♦'"'" '"" ""'- honiaykii;. lih.relore l,i„, if hIi.imM m ,■ «„ In'dian.,

hfx'k ti-.hisli kiii'ni, kat fjok wi'i; ka-i hu'nk .slilaat luVnkesh kia'inat

thedend al,.o (wonid appear wlit.li Hine live«i not I can wo ii Intheflih

sk(5ksha.sli.

the dead tnan'B
uplrlt.

130

MYTIIOLOGIG TKXTS.

TI.

Kia'ni k'lokd tchft'shni; tsuyunk hii'ksa ts();(iitk pil kiil'm, naauktua

Fisli Mmain foroviir; tlierefore those dead (e.\i»l) iw flsh, »« all kinds (if

dead (people) only

kia'm, ndnuktiia iniiklaksni ts6katk. Ha' ii' hii'nk hu'nkiash shlaat skfi'k-

flsh, all kinds oflndiiins dead. If I (of » deceased) should behold the

o shaah, k'lakAt iii hfi'nk sla6k; ha'toka nt sliufshaltk, tchek giug kd-i

spirit, would dio I it throngh lint If 1 recnr to m«eic then not

seeinit; songs,

siiigat nls.

he may me.

kUI

NOTES.

My efforts towards obtainiug exUaustivo texts from tlie natives concerning their
belief in tlie transinisTation of liumaii souls were not crowned witli entire snccess.
Of the two items obtained, Xo. II is intended as a comiiieutarv of No. I, both treating
of the inesence of IninKiii sonis in iish. The cause wliy so many Indian tribes shun
the flesh of certain fish lies in the fact that these s]M>cies were seen feeding upon the
bodies of drowned men iind swimminp- nrotiiid thciii. This induced the belief thiit
man's soul will pass into the (organisms of these finny inhabitants of the wave, even
when death has resulted from otiicr ciiiises than from ilrow iiiiig. .Vccordiug to Hill,
the lliiklaks believe tlii't the souls or spirits of the deceased pass into the bodies of
living fish; they become inseparably connected with the fish's body and therefore
cannot be perce'ved by Indians under usual circumstances. But in un<! status only
they become vi-iible to them; when Indians are bewitched by the irresistible, magic
spell of a conjurer or of a wicked genius. Then they enter into a tamanuash-dream.
and when they see a dead person's spirit in such a dream, they are almost certain to
die from it. Only the intervention of the conjurer and of his sougiiiedicine can save
tluMu from perishing; rigorous fasting and ascetic performances cannot be then dis-
pensed with, and with all that no certitude of his final rescue is to be had.

Here as elsewhere the ])rononns Iifik, hi'inkiash etc., are inserted instead of the
unpronounceable name of tlu; deceased, and mean: dciul perxou, xpirit.

129,2. pil maklaks; only dead Indians, not dead white men, because during
their life-time these did not believe in the skfi'ks; this belief is a privilege of the
Indians.

129, 2. Hushti'/ak etc. This sentence runs as follows: Tche'ktoks hushfi';fa ak
nish, hiik tche'k nish siiiksh shanali(Vli, wakianhua. tchek p'liash (or piYsh) niVsh shni-
shaltki giug shanaho'li: "if he (the bad genius) makes me only dream in that manner,
then he intends eifiier to kill me, or i)eihai)s he wants me to keej) (he song inedicine
for myself." To keep the soiigmediciiii', shiiishla. is to undergo lasts and asci'tic prr-
formauces under the supervision of some conjurer lor an almost unlimited time, live
,\ears at least.

129, o. 4. Hii'toks ni' shliiat etc.: if J should see (llie dead) while I am aimlc.
129,4. 8ku'ks kiiim, a compound word, may be rendered by spirit -fish, letiferoiis

fish.

130, 1. Kiii'iri k'leka etc. The rather obscnie sense ol this slateiii(.>nt may be inadw
coniprehensible liy flu; following: " Wh '.ii lisii are dead, lliey are dead lorever; hence

THE SPELL OF THE LAtrGHING EAVBN.

131

the souls of all dead Indians continue to exist in the living flsh, in all kinds of liviva
flsh only." -^

130, 2. t86;i;atk. This refers to Indians who have perished by a violent death, aa
well as to those who died in the natural way.

THE SPELL OF THE LAUGHING RAVEN.

Oivht bt "Oaptaw Jut" m thb Kijuiath Lakh Duutor.

Shiiyuzalkshi tchiiyunk fi-ukshikni mdklaks hdtokt shuyuvgla, tiiini

Af'dniiceplaco" wfien the Klaumth Lake pcoplo thero pilpil.dancwl, nmn.v

hfik hdtokt maklaks gi. K'nuikamtch liatokt i. -c'na. Tchiii KA-akamtch

there pi-opln wore. lCmiikiniit<h (liero wont. Then OldKnven

shash hatokt wdtanta sliuyu;^alpksh, tchui lul ktd-i k'la'ka ndnuk mdklaks 3

at them ther<< langhed whim thoy danced, and rooks beoame all peopli,

shuyukaltk hdtokt.

dancing there.

II.

Ydmakni hiVk Kdyutcliish gatpa Ki'iiti kuitit; tchuvunk i'-ua->-

From the North Gray Wolf urrived Kluti al.ovo, then ho »topp«l

shkii'lp^a kdyak tchi'sh gatpemiiik, nanuk shuliYtainantk liatkok vdnmawii (j

'""(tiXpr" "'"■*'''' '"'""' >">""(.' roaci.ed, in Mil ,lre«« at that spot ^^ beads

wAwakshnatk tchish; tiila tchish hu'k gtikatpantk i'uag sha hil'nk tiYkglya

with moccasinB on i,m; togothor with (him) Ihoso comina Htopp,,? thoy (and) rostod.

Tchui Shashapamtch IiiVnk gdldsha-uyank Ke-utcliianitc.liash skd'lpkaiik

Thou Old Grizzly iippioiiched Old Orny Wolf ~yinB(anil)

ktdmpsh. Tchui Shashapamtcli piilhi Ke-utchishasli wakshna ydmnasli <)

""'■^l'- And Old (5rizzly 8lol« f,.„n, firay Wolf tho mucciwins boads

tchish shCilu'dshnank wii'kshxen gdnuapkug. Tchui Ke-utchiaiiitrh

also, (and) piiMhoni on, to tho n«hiii,f phico for Ridnpr. Upon this Old Oray Woll

s^ishu'lank kti'ukuela Shashapaiiitchi.sh; vud'hitakuehi ktdyat ndllaiiksh

w.iWnKHp throw down hill tho Old Grizzly , ho lollod (hirni down over tho for haviiiR

loohs ix)l)l)P(l

p4sh wAkshua yamnash tchish. Tchui liu'nk shiiiga ni Sh.ishanamtchasli 12

him ofmocoasins neckwear also. Thon kilhd ho tho (>ld GriMly, '

tchui iS-ukshikni maklaks shelhialtiimpka Y;iniaki.s]iash, Shashapamtchasli

whoic- tho Klamath I.akopooplo conimonced liKhlinj; tho Xoriiiornow, ( liooaiine) Old Griialy

hdnk Ka'-utchishash shiug«ht. Tclu'ii Ka-akauikh wt-'taiita sliash slu'l-

byGrayWoir I.m,! boon killod. Thon old Kavcn lauchod ol thorn wlion

lualpksh, ktd-i sha k'lcka. ik

flgtltlng, and ro('l..-« thoy boi-amo.

ill

132

MTTHOLOGIO TEXTS.

III.

K'mukamtch hfi'nk nAkosh hfl'nk tAplalash n^-ul^a shne-uyali'itki

K'miikamteh a dam the loon onlored todiiitroy

shaah. K'mukamtch hfl'nk pi tpii'wa tdplalash shnewl'tki fffuff, pi kA-i

to them. K'ralikanitch Tio ordere<l tho loon to destroy (11° (fiat) ~nn

tud kia'm liieluak. Hfi'ksha hii'nk nakushkshdkshni kd-idslia kiii'm

flsh to kill. Those who dwelt at the dam rotten flsh

nutuyakfa ntikosh gii'tant, K'mukdmtchish shiuguk, ku-idsha kiil'm uiltki

throw over the dam to lli other (Cor) K'miSkaintoh to kill, rotten flsh (he> co.

aide of, **

Tchiii K'mukamtch shAwiguk ku-i sham ndkiish .«hfl'ta: tchui

Then K'mlikamtoli in wrath their dam spoiled, upon this

iiAkushzenkni shlAmiuk shti'ya shishi'dsha shil'ktaldshank lAk. Tchiu

the damueighlmrs in nioumlnp pitch put on head, tuttinis off (their) hair. Then

Kd-ag wdtanta shash, ktd-i sha Ic'I^ka. Tchiiyunk K'mukamtch liipaksh

theKaven laughed at them, rooks they became. Hereupon K'miikamtoh ehalk

shna-uldmna tapldlash.

gfug

ing to eat

•pit over

the loou.

NOTES.

I. This myth intends to explain the existence of the large number of rocks found
at the locality called Shuyu;^alkshi.

131, 2. Kft-akanitcli. Tlie adjectives -amtch, -Amtchiksh appended to animal
names designate mythologic characters. Adjectives of iin equal meaning occur in all
the western languages, as far a.s these have been studied. Cf. Note to 126, 11. 12.

II. In this myth, as well as in other grizzly bear stories recorded in this volume,
this bear is always killed, conquered or cheated by his quicker and more cunning
adversaries. Nevertheless his clumsy form and narrow, ferocious intellect are very
popular among the tribes, who have invented and still invent numerous stories to
illustrate his habits and disposition.

131, 5, Kiuti is the name of an Indian camping-place situated a short distance
north of Modoc Point, on eastern shore of Upper Klamath Lake.

131, 6. h^tkok qualifies shku'I;fa and ydmnash is the indirect object of shiilu'tam-
antk. Shku'l;^a, iianuk yamnash shidft'taniantko, wawakshnatko tchish: "he lay
down to sleep, keeping all his neckwear on himself, and not taking otf his moccasins."
Shftlft'tamna can in other connections refer to the clothing, but hero it has special
reference to the beads.

131, 11. kti'ukuela. Tra^lition reports, that Old Grizzly was pushed over some of
the high rocks at IModoc Point.

131, 13. Yamakisliash etc. In these words may be recorded the reininisceiKM^ of an
ancient fight between the Klaiiiatli jieople and some Ncuthern tribe which had come
South on a hunting e.\pe<lition. A Klamath song-line given in this volume also recalls
an ancient inroad made by the "iNortherncrs". The giizzly \w.,iv reinesented Ww.
Klamatli tribe, the wolf the Northern Oregoniaus, periiaps as ancient totem signs; {\w.
bear having been killed by an intruder, tlie Klamaths had to take revenge for the insuK .

ril. The object of (his myth is to exiilain, among other things, the origin of tiic
white spots im (he heail and back of the loon (liiplal). But (he myth as given in the

liKMI'M'VS AND Siri'Kll.STITIONS,

138

Uixt. iH liu rioiii boiii),' (Hmiplet*). It reftirs to » locaJit.y altovo tlio ('.tuitliieiice of Spraguu
and Williiuiison Rivers, called Ktaftini, or "Standing Koek", A high rock stands
there at the edge of a steej) hill, and, according to the legend, the Indians who put
])itch on their head were changed into that rock. Near by, a huuber-daiu looking
like a beaverdani, across the Williamson River, partly resting on rocks projecting
from the bottom of the river. K'mukamtch longed for the destruction of this dam,
muddied the water to prevent the Indians from fishing and hired the loon to destroy
the objectionable struc-ture. The loon dived into the waters and forced its way through
the dam by main strength. The Indians dwelling on the shore depended for their
living on the flshories, and seeing their existence at stake tried to gig the loon, but
succeeded only in hitting its tail-feathers. When the loon had accomplished his task
K'miikamtch offered to reward him in any manner wished for. The loon then wished
to have whit« spots on its back, and K'miikamtch satisfied the request by spitting
chalk upon the downy surface of its body.

188, 3. Ifieinak; formed by vocalic dissimilation; cf. Note to 114, 3.

BELIEFS AND SUPERSTITIONS.

Wdsb t^fi'tpfatkish; tsiii sa lA'la wdsham t^A'tzash.

I'rnirie-wolf innonllissyer ; mill they lipliive in wolf 'h prnpheoy.

Mdklaks hil'nk Id'la Wiisliam i)dkluipkash k'lekuapksht tche'k; t^u'-

TndiaiiB believe, prairie-wolf when hnwlH, they will ilie after a while; pie-

tj^uk pdkluipka.

HuginK ho howls.

Mdklaks hH'nk M'la piishisli lia'masht i-undgsLtka, tzu't;tuk li^ma;

Indians believe, the cat when oiies juat after fliinnot, for presai^ni; itmnwH;

oeath

tchiki'n tchish lia'masht i-un^gshtka g-u'lu, t;tii't;^uk tcliek hii'ma. Wdtchag

also

when crowH

jUHt ftftf r HuiiBot tlio ffmale, for presa^infr then
(ieath

it crows.

The doe

tchi'sh wawfi-a i-undgshtka, kii-i tchamldk.

also (when) whines rifibt after snnsft, tlie signs are bad.

WatsAg tchi'shtat tx6txa 1-una'gshtka ; tsi'ii gdtpa mdklaks, gd'lki ng

...{.

A dog

at a lodge howls Jast after sunset;

prophetically

comes an Indiiui,

attacks, wonnd*

islia at hu8ts5';ua. Sa-dmoks lidtokt tchfa tu'slit hushtcho'^a, kd-i huuk

and kills (the owner). A relative, (who) there lived right where the murder wa8, did not him

shiiiga; tsiii tfi'tiik spu'nsiina hl'gslila vunsli s;{dna witsu'ls ^na tA'tuk J)

kill; then seizing (him) they arrest, enslave him, the canoe row nway, fishiuguet carry taking

with them

ktst'k, sndwedsh spii'nshna hfssvaks hiiikaluk. KiM'sh at k^tak a

iLtrs, biawife tbeyabdact, (her) husband beingthemurderer. Fariona hsqalta and

tsa'wik.

la demented

t -

134 MYTnOLOGIO TEXTS.

. E^ tzil'tzatkish; tsiii sa liiluk sa kdkam t^a'tzatkaali, tsiii sa

sheiKStanka; pits ha'nk pAu kdk mdkUxks

Uahtwiolidthori ftnlso eats, tlio (dsad) raon.

rnveu,

y Tutiksh mdklaks sluifna tchil'^apkam m'ndlam sluishAmokshani-

I)ie»in» the uativi'S mug nUout (fon.I th..lr rolallvoe;

lii'imasht slu'ihunk gfiig kfukayunk flags.

•'"•'his flame rcaaou thoy stick out flngs.

'^?,'il''f'' 7^^^" shaklo'tkish tfdsh tfn^a; tii'ni l^aga. Tm<^lbak ta'dsli

»n"irre' " "• ""' 8'™'''" "oil m.cco«ls, n.uoh IwA. TUe tmilhak (U)

, iHrtnliily

•••shayuaks;. shakdlshtat lakf, tids sualaliiimpkatko.

iifmiioh account! in the game (it is) well manaKlni(lt)

. clilef, '• * ' '

T.cli,4slmsji imViia lushantsnank nibj'iwa ski's; tsui iiuiklaks nj^iiiik

ThKsliiink deep down wliilo acmtcliing a hoi.. ..miHwl a blual ; uimnlhls prnplc. ail

hushte(5ga tsashash^kiuka. Sndwedsh' shanah61ink spfi'iislnia p'laiwasliiun

^kilM thOflkunk-cmnrer. A wilo woking he caniod ntr ' i|,o....gl,.,,

;' tu'paks ktaiiApkash. Shldank tcliawika p'laiwasli, wf-udsria i'lnkutka

KiHtor when asleep. Seeing (this) became fnrions cagl.., beat with a Huh

tolii'isgs, wf-udsish k'lakd, tsiii k6-i pilui. Ndop6g ktso'l luimotsfpka:

thoaknnk, the beaten ono died, then badly stunk. SmelliiVg (it) the stirs said:

"piitkal!" at p'laiwasli pAtkalp'le, st(')natchka, ts.'ii gc^mpelc tuijaksliasli

jietup! ami eagle rose up again, washed the face, then went I'omo siatw

12 m'na dnanL

his taking with
him.

Ha shaklo'tkish pj'sham shiul'lash ntaggal, shaklo'tkish tidsli viimi',

If a gambler ofhuraming. thi. nest liuds, (and) the gambler well hides (it)

' away,

kaitoks kanf vuiiii'^i. Ha k6-e shl«^a iiahapkash, iw'tch ktdkta ska'tish

not any one conquers (him). If a frog he finds dried-up, the leg ho cuts off ""left

If) tapi'dshiiish vumi'; lu'iuiaslitak sliiYta shaklo'tkish, kaftoks kaiu viuni'yi

hind (leg), hides r.wayi (if)ihu, ;uts the gambler, "then) not anyone beats (him).'

Hti kani tchatchlafptcha shlii'-a (kinkanl tflt wa), tidsh ti'nya. Ha kanf

If anyone a kind of flrednig finds (scarce there they are), good lack it If anyone

brings.

ma'ntchnish mdklakaani shtap shualka, jiahapkash kaila slmshati'shash

old fashioiiwl Indian arrowhead B,ives, drh'd-up aroole

18 tchi'sh, hfi'kt humdshtak tidsh ti'u;ja tchi'sh.

»'»o, he in the same way well Hui:ceeds also.

fi-ukshikui Mo'dokni 161a p'laiki'shash Idkiash, shtinta tcblsh wenudn-

The Klamath Lakes (and) Modocs believe in the heavenly ruler, revero also of the <fe.

kam shko'kshash.

ceased the spirits.

Mo'dokni shtupuyiika tunapni waita tuniipni pshin gshiiilaka kdvak

Tlie Modocs at first menstruation five days (and) ffve nights dance ~ never

ktdkt'nan ; wewduuish ta-una'pni wiiita ka-i tchU'leks pdn.

Bleeplngi the females for ten days no meat oaU

HRLIEFS AND SUPERSTITIONS.

135

Ha' i shnia-litchdktak yalnatat, kA-i i iln k^sli slild-etak; hii'-atoks

If yna M. your statiilon fnll on the hill, not you Ipo will flnil j bnt If

1 kd-i Hhma'htchAktak, tA'in 1 fin k^sh shl^-etak.

yiiii not lot your Hhuilow full, much yuu tixi will Bnd.

M6atuash, k'le-ugtkiudpkaslit tchfalash Mtfatuasham k6kotat, M-i mlifi' a

The rit River (l«!it) woulil oenae In coino thonalnion up thnPitBivor, not grnuaim

Tndianit,

liiela sk6 ; Mo'dokiii tchi'ah l<51a sbuatash kfam tchiikd shdtma, liumAaht-

tlieyklU insprlug the Modoca also naauiue, Biiim-hens the fl«h toawlmnp invite, there-

timo:

gisht kd-i luela.

lore not they kill

(them).

NOTES.

T. What is contained in these short items refers equally to the Klamath Lake and
to the Modoc people, although those contained under I. were obtained from various
iiitbrinants belonging- to the former chieftaincy.

133, 2. pAlca to howl, bark; ])i'ik'la to liowl repeatedly, to howl for awhile; inlk-
liiipkit to howl for a while in the distance towards somebody.

133, 4. 5. The cat and the chicken being but recently introduced among these tribes,
this superstition must have been traiisferied to them from other animals. By inver-
sion, the words tchikin gil'lu, the hen, appear here widely separated from each other.

133, 0. Kii-i tchiimlfik has to be resolved into: kii;! tche mAl (for m^lash) hu'k:
"liad then for you this is!" Cruel (iglits will follow.

133, 7-11. This story is not clearly worded, but we arn taught by it how these
Indians are couversiiig among eacli otlier witli laconic breviloquence. An Indian living
ill the vicinity has heard tlie wliiiiing of the d(»g which means death to his owner. He
goes there, shoots the man and takes to his lieels. A relative of the murdered man
comes up ;iud is mistaken by others for the murderer. They deprive him of his wife,
his property and his liberty ; he becomes a madman on account of the injustice done
to him.

134, 1, 2. The raven (kak) is sii])pose(l to be a bird of fatal augury, because he was
seen devouring the flesli of dead Indiiuis. Compare: General Note on page 130.

134, 4. kinkayunk. They adjust a rag or piece t»f skin to a pole and stick out
that improvised ^«(/ on the top of the lodge to notify neighbors that they had adi-eam
last night and desire an interpreter ibr it.

134, .5. One of the legs of a dead bhick tm^dhak-squirrel is cut off and laid under
the gaming-disk or tlie pa'hla to insure luck to the i)layer.

134, 7-12. Tchdshiish etc. Tliis is a fragmentary extract of a scurrilous skuiik-
myth, which I have not been able to obtain in full from my informant, the Modoc chief
Johnson, who speaks the Klamath dialect. This myth m well known through the
whole of Oregon, for parts of it are embodied in a popular and melodious song of the
M61ale tribe, whose anciiuit home is the country east and southeast of Oregon City
and Portland.

184, 7. 8. m^klaks niiiiuK- is the direct object of hushtsdga; the skunk killed them
by his stench.

184, 9. tft'paks stands for tu'pakshash ; tiipakship, abbreviated t6paksh, is pro-
perly the younger sister, as called by or with leferencc to an elder brother, while pa-^nip

tlj

136

MONOI-OnURS AND DIALOOUKS.

iHtbe elder sister, cullod so I. y or with rofeionco t^) ii .vomigor l.iotlior. 'I'wo oIImt
tcrrim exist for the rohitive ii},'« of sisters ninmig themselves.

134, 11. imtkulp'h". Tlie iiiytU mhls, that the eajfle «ot up ajraiii iUdiiiiier-tiiiiM luid
that after washing the face he took a nap before taking his sister home.

II. These it^ms were all obtained in the Modoc dialect from .1. C. 1). l{iddl.\
Many of the articli's mentioned as gamblers' amulets are supiiosed to bring good
luck to the gambler on account of their .swimiiy, wliich unist have nnule them more
interesting to the aboriginal mind than other objects of a brighter exterioj-.

134, i;{. ntiiggal, ndAkal: to find accidentally; shl^-a: to find, generally, after a
search, vumi' is to liide away either on one's own person or in tin* ground.

134, l(i. 18. lidsh tinp^a is to succeed, to be lucky; without tidsh in: hutoks tiu-
/antko gl, that man is lucky.

134, 17. 8ht6p is a black arrow-head made of obsidiaii, a volcanic rock found in
several places iu these highlands.

186, 1. hii'-atoks is formed from ha toka with intercahition of the declarative
particle a.

136, 3. k'le-ugtki-u^ipkasht is a periphrastic coujugatioual form composed of gi-
u4pka«ht, of the verb gi, and of k'l(5-utka, the usitative of k'16wi, to cease, stop, termi-
nate; -utka has turned into -ugt- by metotheais. Literally: "would habituaUy cease
to b^ in the Pit Eiver." mhft', the grouse, is called by the Klamath Lakes tmft'.

REFLECTIONS OF EVEKY-DAY LIFE

MONOLOOUKS IN THE KLAMATH LaKK DlAiBCT BY JOHNSON, CHIBF OS' TlIK MODOCS

Kd-i mish ml 6-it ntt tidsa'wa iitc^-ish, shliutuk mii'makla pa-uk shlink

Not you I to let I like (my) bow, for shootini? <lucka to oat klUliij;

udekti'shtka. Tidssi'wa ka-i ratsh iiya, tii g^nuapka uyaninank ntd-ish

w.tl, arrows. I liko „„t to you to gl« over " I wlllV taking along bow and

(It), there arrow*

3 g4-u, hishlAtsanuapka. Y6-ishi! tatdlu kaVi, kd-i shlda tatdkni viVly •

.ny, (ami) will amuae myself Are lost I right IheyS-o "T.ot Hound whore Vhey went

u> siioonni;. (aliesid) mil, (thorn) down:

y6-ishin, ma'ns k4-ika. tJnds mbiisant pea kavakuapk.

they are lost, for a loiig I aearoheil
timu

Sotuis

tllllO

to-inorrow ajjaiii I will lookout (for
tlifin).

Sliikutchipk tchikd kemutsatk; undse'ks st^wanuapk pj'itki oiuo-a

W«lk« on stick an old docrepit (niau); some tim« Iwill ^ive (him) lo ™7 '^

C nichiess; yuyalks tsi pa-uk hfin tche'k tfdsh ki'-uapk. Ki'8htcliii)k liuk

trout; l)eingi).«,r thus ihruugh o.' it then at ease he will feci. Comes to mo this

snewedsh; oni'sh klam sh(jwant 1; td'm nu'sli shewantamnudpka sawalktko

woman; to her flsh you may give; plenty tome she will continue to give having received

jrf ,1 1 1 /!• 1 pieeents.

Kamp kuk kdliak pasli tia'nia. Undse't kdtchkal pa-udpk ed-utala stefnash.

The indigent without food la huuKry. By and by tobaeoo I will ohew to my hearts content.

UEFLEilTIONS OK KVKRYDAY TiJPR

in?

Siindliolo kiUchkal titdu'wmik; iViids jujii inbrisiiiit pi'i-uapk kaU-liujil

I llkA UibHoco Well I'liongti; l),v uiiilliy uicatii Io-iiiditow f wtll ehiMV tobitccii

ptitk^lunk. Ktinf nhltj-iiupka u'us stovu/ipka; tulu pi'ikmipkii u'litcli ; p»lii

whlln t;ptttiif; up. Otitdotr uliniiltl t muo, (lirii iMl i^tit nU' with (iiu<) hn will Aiiiukt^ theiit iisaiii

(ituybody) (Muiiio fur liiiii) : (it)

wutiu'ipkii kinkani katchgal; kinkani, kA-i tutiii, tclie'k pen tiiiiii pdkuapka, 3

r Hliiitl M)ti'iitt alittU^ tttliucuti; (lint) "ttle, not iiint'li, itftcrwurdN ugniii niticli [ will nmnke,

pak61ank s^^lakuapka.

ttkPtl) aftur Hiiiok' ^u to Ix'tl.
ini:

Of the two imnigiaphs of "lU^Hection.s" sabiuitteil, tlic first refers (o tlus loss of
soaie liuntor's armws, wliich liatl been loaned to somebody togetlu'V with the bow.
The socoiid speaks in a rather ej^otistical sense of the pleasure whieli is altorded by
succoring helpless and indigent peoi>le.

136, 3. kii'gi. This refers to sonio arrows, which cannot be found at the spot, to
which they seemed to lly.

136, t. 5. IJntchek, abbreviated uudso, u'ntch, I'inds, ftiis, point to some undeter-
mined epoch in the future: by iind by, after a lapse of time, some time from uowj
undsfi't, 136, 8., through apocojie and synizesis, stands for untae'k at; undse'ks for
untchek tchisli.

136, 5. Bhikutchipk t«hiki'i kemutsdtk, grammatically incomplete forms standing
for skikutchipka t'shika kfimutsAtko. The word uticlc is not expressetl in the text, but
the suffix ipka, united to sliikutclui, expresses the idea of "walking while leaning
oneself upon something or somebody". Of. layi])ka, to point the gun at the one
speaking ; tilo'dshipka, to see somebody coming towards oneself.

136, 6. ki'shtehii>ka, to step towards the one speaking; cf. Note to 136, 5.

136, 7. oni'sh for hunish, ef. o'skank for hfi'shkanka, 65, 1. Hiinish is the objective
case of hft'n ; but this jjronoun is not regulnrly used when speaking of animate beings;
hiVnkiash would be grauunatically correct.

136, 7. sh6want i. The words oni'sh kijim she want i are supposed to be diretrted
to one belonging to the speaker's lK)usehold.

136, 8. The term katchkal, tobacco, expresses the idea of an t»tennw<Mre of several
kinds of weeds or leiives for the purpose of smoking them.

136,8. pa-u(ipk. A more appropriate term than this for masticating tobacco is :
katchkal kpu'yumna.

137, 1. titch6wank. This is in fact the participle of a verb : "I like tobaeco, being
fond of it."

137, 2. stoyuiipka : 1 shall cut off a piece trom a stick of pressed tobacco and gi\o
it to him. Cf. stuydkishka, to clip the hair.

137, 3. kinkani kiitchgal. If this and the following were not worded in the con-
versational slang, it would read: kinkaiiish kdtchgal; kinkanish, k&-i tiima, tche'k jtf.i
tiima (or tu'm) etc.

137, 3. Mi tumi. lii<lians arc not often seen to smoke continuously as we do; those
inhabiting the Klamath Ueservc take a few whiff's from their small, often home-made
pil)e, then pass it to the neighbor and emit the snu>ke through the nose. Sometimes
they swallow the smoke for the i)urpose of intoxication, and the elder women smoke just
like the men. Cigars offered to them are cut small and servo to fill up their tobacco-pipe.

138

MONOLOdUES AND DIALOGirEa.

WAILINCS AT Tfll.; API>|{()A(;n OF TU\<] FA'I'AL HOUR.

OiVKX i.y nocroB Jons, on KXKAsn, in thr Klamath I.akk 1;/ai.k

fant.'' •• '""'"■"■ KI'Klloutir,. (anill oroi.iate tlioy In the tiro

liiViik k'ldkapksli.

the <loc(<a8ii4l inuu.

NOTES.

This sl.ort iucident of war i.s lull „f tl.o nu,.st dramatic interest, and givos so.uo
.< .'a o tlu. ..ratonal powers of tho avna«v In.lian. It was oLtainod from a «mn who
undoubtedly had witnessed nmre than one sin.ihu- seeno during, the nnu.erous raiding
exiMMhtions made by h.s tribe b.'for.' the eo.H.Insion of the treaty in l,S«4

138, 1 ngaMsh a ni tii'l;.apksh shhn antsa, forms of the conversational huifriuiBe
stand.n,.- for nga'-.sh a nish tal.apkash shl.n a sha. «e.„ .ii'Jak 'Mnv arrow," a poeHc
symbohsiM lor the arn.w that causes my (h'ath. , i '^

138. ;. shk.-k antsa, for shkeka a 'sha, but nasalized hke shliu antsa. Sldcdka
properiy means to pierce, hut is used in a medial sen,««.

138. li. mpata prop,.rly uu-ans to dry up by heat. The cap or hat is said here to
kUl the man b,\ excitinj,' an iutolerabh; fever lieat witliin him.

138, 3. ma'slia u'sh. Som.>. impersonal verbs can a!s<. assume the personal form of
ntmnsit.ve verbs : u.a'sha, nu and uuVslm nish : " it pains me "; kedshika nfl an.l nish :
I leel tucd . liu' .Modoc diah-ct luefers tlie peiscmal form

v^ lf;«''-^"/f'i^'o, "!''"'• C*-«^'82,4. tchitVt 90, U. atfinish, atCni 90, 12.
13. jfg'utCni, N^ote to 93, 7. 0. '

THE LOUD'a I'UAYKR.

1B9

THE I.OUD'S IMfAYKK.
I.

Niiliim p'tfHhiip, kilt p'lnf tolifii: Nuimk nad liil'iik int slu-HliaHh kdtak

Our fnlhiT, ulil.h ,.ii liit'h IhcK; .\i\ i,t m lliy iiiiiiin tiiily

slitl'iita. Mi In'islikiiiiksli <.iVta iia'lsli. t InViik viViiliiiapk yviita kiii'latat,

woriUllp. I'li.v liilnil foiiib l» im. 'Ihoil will nuliluvu uli thin ilirlli.

wi'tkaktak p'laitalkiii f{i. Shdwan i iialsli g^'n waftasli iii'ilaTii jtala-asli 3

i'i|llull,v il« (llinii) onlil^h ilciHl. (ilvo thou iii ihlil ilii.y oui- breilil

iii'uiuk waitaHlitat. llii ual.sli tiia ko-idslii ^iiitanuapk, kt'i-i liiln, p'laftalkiii,

uvery mi .liiy. If on im any- Mic:kud nhimlil atiok uii, not II, iiinii iin liUli

ililnij

liA'shkank i ! hiimiislitak na'd ki'i-i lnVslik»nkiiai)k, liil kaii/ ii/iLsli ki'i-i

mind

ua]

hIiomNI tl

ttioii!

Ka-

Nol

jllrit lis

wiiiilil niliiil II.

if HiiniplxHly

gi'uapk. Ka-i naish i tua rtliutc'tki ku-idslia, i im'ilmaslikpak Iiak iialsli

^l.«..t.1 .i\ V... .1 1 . ..- .... ...... . »

t>t UH Ihttll uuv-

thiiiu

wleke<l, (butj
thiiit

ki'i'|t i)wik>

w roll a

iMll\ I'MIHI

tua ki'i-idslia. llumaslit '/\n<>; ini iio-ulaks, iiki'Uitk tchi'sli, ktclialnhkasli

ny. wlcknl. Km thiiix (iio Uh' riili-, lorce kImi, alurv

mug * '

thing

tchish tchusliniak. Hrnnashtiik an huii gitk gi !

alao forever. Ihim I It u, \m (ay I

II.

NAlam t'shi'shap, p'lai tchia: Mi shi^shtish ndnuk stfnta; mi k<');^pash 9

Our fnther, on high (who) Thy nnnie all revere; thy lulml

liveHt:

gAltchui nanuka'iiasli nT\'\. GitA tchi'Hli kiii'la ImmashtAk gi, wi'ikaktoksh

winiB to rviry 0111' (ofl UH. Ifi've too on enrth In the same lii' ,|iist»ii

inannor ilone,

])'lal ki. Nalash gtln wafta.sli sliap6le slicwan i. Kt'i-i nalash k6-i shu'tii,

on high la Tons iliin day liread glv« thou. Not iin wicked render

douo. Ilioii

liiiniasht iialam inaklaks sldtko stinta. 1 luiaHhgi ualamtant ko-idslia V2

iiinnlly as our iiieiikiiidred (we) love Thou Isrep ntl' from our liiid

stefnashtat koxpasli; tfdsli lu'dam .stefnash Hliutii. Mi tala litcldftcldk mi

(from) heait thonjihts; nfKXl our heart loiike thou Thine alone (In the) power. tliv

stefnash litchlftcldi tcliussak, inA'ni Mkiam steinasli. Humasht toks tidsli.

he»rt atronif (In) perpetually, great o," i he Lord the heart. Thus (it will well.

be)

NOTES.

These, veisions of the T-ord's Pia.ver iiio sood iustance.s of what can be aitaiueil,
witliout imiiig too many circuinlocutioiis, in rendering relipous, luonil and other
al).stract ideas in a lanj^iiage delicieut in many of tlieni.

For reign and kingdom no words e.\ist, and tlicy Imd to I)e rendered by lift'.sli-
kank.sii, or in .Alodoc ]v6;^i)ash, "miud", ne alalis, "lale, law"; .sin and forgive w<-re

{ Sf

140

MONOLOdllKS AND 1HAL(MIUE8.

roudorcd by "m.„„.ll.i„g wick.d" an.l "not «o mi.ul"; lor "(liy will I.., .1«.h," sUuds

m'hiovo t ,.>„" t'ovv..,' :..Kl Klory hoco "force, impet.iomty " ..nd " r.uliuiK..", mid

dftily l.mwl: "llouro,, .wvy .lay". 1„ »|..> M,„ioc verNion, (he wording „f which i.
iid.'iior to tliuf o|- voimou 1, tl,,, „8o of Hiiiiilur expedients will be observed.

I. Ill the Kluiiiuth Luki- diideet; by Minnie Froben.

139, (t. im'iliun.Hlilvp.iU, phonetic inversion tor iiiulniashkai.k' i ; see Dietionaiy
,,;• " '''•;'"'.''''' '^'"^I'. '''■«>'" •""• ^^<•'•d ktchal;fi., t<. shine, to be radiant, resplendent.
ia», H. Kitk, lu an hfm gitk gl, is the verbal intentional gitki.

II. In llie M((doc ilialcct; by the ItitUlhi laniily.

189, l(». Oilii kiiila is c<|nivalcnl to g.-'nla kiiihitat ; in hinnasliti.k gl the verb gt has
to be taken in the panMiiH: s((nse.

139, II. ko-i shft'tii : "do not render uh wicked." For slintii coiunare 111, 15. luid

Note.

139, lU. hnnuwht n.'iiani. Hetweeii these woids and the preceding ones there is a
hicnne m the text, n.rtklaks sl.itko, "onr kindred": those who l(H)k like ouraelves.

139, l.{. 14. In ml tala lilchlitddi the a^ljective strong stands for "strength,
power", whde in nd steinash litchlitchli it is nsed in iU udje.tive signiflcution. In this
liHignago ttl»stmct ideas are sometimes rendered by at^ectives and by verbal adjectives
m tko. ^

^H ^m

DIALOGUES
I.

TsKMATK. Tatj'i lish slui ksfulakuapk?

Wh«n iliey will ,i„„ce»

Ska'lag. Pd-ak ka-i an shayuakta! unA a slia iid-aslit aho-t^dshtat mat

*"'' ' know! ono« thsy •« (nnUI), ou SMurdny

sha ndnuk shttka'lki-uapk kshl'ulzish.

"'"y «" will aiueiulilo fi.rlliiMlanci'.

Tatai tchl'k aha kshfulakuapkl Ple'tikanikshi a? tAm hak

Where afu,rnll they «r« ««ina t„ .loucM At Fr»nk'i, hoiiMl „„ri,«p.

haftch i hil'nk shliiatk^ kui a sha uen luliik miisliiisli ffish shaua

(dUI) yon him „„I „.,i„„«lv they l,|,„ ,il.pn,e,l ,o be ^

KaI'IIAK.

6 Ska'lag.

»«y.

KAyak an liatokt gatpaiitk, nA-asht ta'dsli toks nu tiVmena gdn

*'"' ■ "">'■•' winKoiriR, thus however I hoard ihU

mbil'sliant pil, mat pa-ula: gat t6k.s ml watch kayaktgilk, ki'iinaff

.norolug only, (th»t)hewa.e«tlnK: oat I of my while retDSlng «wny from

boraea from tlie aoarch, uy boaio

9 Kai'iiak.

gc^pgapele.

1 roinrued.

there

Ska'lag.

Ti'im haftch 1 nii'gah shfwaksh shlad gunl, g^mpktcli Kuv-

(Dld) you iihiient the girl ,oe over there, who wont to

from hoiuH

amtspceksh, Ellen Ddbidam mft'kug sh<^taltchapk8li mil'shishtt

Kdy.raSkH'lkKhi, ofAlleu D,.vid ,i huby to visit hftvlng fallen Blok I

Kd-1 an ta'sh shleA p<ish. Kapitak. 1.

"-' I anywhere wiw l,er. lathrt

Not

iol

DIAIiOUlJKS.

141

Ska'lug guhuAshktcliii; KiiptindnikBhi tchkash Hha vQlAiikta: "Tdt 1

MtUk I«ft| tt Ui* Captoln'i lodf* alw tb«y Inqniriid "wherayoa

(or him) I

tamnfl'tka?"

Ska'lao. Go't an vv/itch kdyaktka, k8(ulak.sli;Kun genA'tuap!;uk.

Through I (if (iiiy) ruturnoil rnmi tiiwnrda thii ilanor. whil« inlitniliDg to gn.
then nnt'M thoMnruli, hnnns

Captain. Tdta liaf tcht'k sha kshi'ulaktchuapk!

Wh^rft flriiiUy (hoy ar« jjolng todanoftf

Ska'lao. Mbil'Hhaiit a sha Hhc-Mshtat kslifulaktohnapk Ml)rt'B!iak Shi-

To-iiiorrim Ihfly "ii H«tiird»y will ilitiirn tho iIwhIU ■ iit Mini-

vvashkni, I'lk tuhish nanuk gdpkuapk.

•lisk'Slilwnsh, prul>' to<i all will noma,

ably

Tchui guhuaHhktcha gdmbaluk.

Thnn lia utartixl off tn go home.

Hl^kosh.

Pi;PAKLI.

11.

lina gekno'Ia;

a whllR he went out;
ago

T4t lish mi fl'nakf

Where (la) yonr aonf

Le-utch6lan kanl'

For plftylng onMriora

tat/ikiuuh tula.

Obllclren wllli.

Hl^kosh. Wakaftch g^-uga kaf gdpgaplef

Why not returnaliet

P^PAKLI. Tutaks atf lewa; hotaks tatdksiii

Away far they play: thnae ohililreu

le-uteliiilan tunepa'niHh 9

for playing Bra

wafta Idwapka; litki gat- 12

llie whole will play ; In the they

pamp6li-uApka.

will return home.

(lay

evening

NOTES.

I. Dialogue about a dauce to be lield on the WilliauiHou River; in the Klamath
Lake dialect, by Minnie Froben.

140, 2. PA ilk kdi an shAynakta ! i.s iiittirpreted by " wliat do I know ! "
140, 9. nii'gsh Hhlwaksh gemiiktcli stands for no;?sli sliiwi'ikaslt ;ron,'ij)kasli. U is
very rare that diminutive nouns, like shiwak, .sliiwn^ja, iwsimie tlic ciidiiif; asli in the
objective case; cl'. 23, 10. Bui shiwak means not only a little {,'iil; it means an iidiilt
girl also, and is therefore inflected like snilwcdsli.

140, 9. Kuyamts;feksh. For this local name tsf. I'ufje 91, first Xoiv. Frank and
Allen David live both at that place, close to the steep western bank of the Williamson
River, while tho communal dance-house, a spiwjious, solid earth-lodgts, lies furthiu- lo
the northeast.

141, 5. Mbu'shakrShiwasiikui, term cttiriipted from MbiVshaks-Hhawalslikiii: "the
one who lives, or those who live at the locality of lli<! ohsiilian arrowhcatls." INfbfi'-
shaks-Shdwalsh lies on the eastern shore of tln^ Williiiinson Kivcr. CA'. Ifotr to 134, J 7.

II. Dialogue in the Modot! dialect; by Toliy K'iddh'.

141,!). L6wa, to play, forms the dtMivales loiitcha lo go to play; liViit^'in.ji to
play while going, to play on I In* way, (;f. shuiidsliiia 99, ". ; Ic iilclii'ila lo gu lo play in
the distance.

142

TOPOGHAI'lIV AND XATUUAL PI{()D[TOTS.

141. 11. ;;('ii<;ii lor (lio moid (UHmiion f>iuga, giuff.
141, 12. I('wai)ka to |)la.v in Uic distaiiec, out of sij-ht
tLi,s tciiii is more probably a .s.vni/.'.sis of l.hviiai.ka, die fu

or iiiiseen by us; but here
future teuse of lewu.

NAMES BESTOWED ON UPPER KLAMATH LAKE LOCALITIES.

Given by Davk Hill in the Klaimath Lake Dialect.

^'^^^'^ ^S ^' "^^ T«u5.unks il'-alk knila nhut^lan:

.HV .nnmrv Ibe tollovtiui.. ..ami's g»ve 1I,o after creatinj; :

^!;i;eS» '^':;*»'' ..liSs. ^:!S=« -'i:"'^ '-r;?-

"■i*"' "":",""' ^1'," ""'f ' '''>"> e;i''» TiVkua; Gu'mbat „r,'»m gl, ,•!,„;

/' '*. T*'/! 11 • — / . I.JHIH';

iiapk, ka-i jwlak i kfiimitt Imapk."

I.H-,.Mie. iM,t f,„i >„„ willl,H.,n-i„l,l.'

'Nr..sht

' ThiiK

III
I

w,-n']yji A-iismi sluyuiapk; iia'.siii ayn ..Pu ]<;,•(

ll|M>t.

.siiawfdslitat, liisliiiakslitar, wrasliiat."

'"i"ifc, ill! Im»li»iiil, fi.nliilil."

NAMES OF UPPER KLAMATJl LAKE LOCALITIES.

143

"Nak6tk Wi'tlris kokt'tat hi tchi'sh luniks kiiim fn'-uapk; na-dst slie-

"By(it9)clnni Wltliwh in wmiam. th.r.. also « a»hl<im.,K plnce «h»ll bf- tlniH

■on Rippr

shash dl^a ni: KtA-i=Tupak8i. Mbu'saks na'st sh^shatk maklaks <n'-uapk-

nam.. givo I: Rock«.wl»rc.»t(>n(l. "OhBl.llmi" ao called « i^oplr • bIiuIIohW;

Sma'k na'st sesatk gi'-uapk maklaks gi'ta. Kii'katils na'st sesatk fff-uapk 3

" Hairy" ho named Himll exist o people there. " Aimpitlialry bo called »h»ll exi.t

gi'ta miiklaks."

there a pooplo."

NOTES.

All Mdklaks admit that K'mi'ikaintcli created tlieir couutrj', tie cartli and the
luiiverse, but as to the sjiecial process Ly which he created thein they seem to have no
definite idea, though Ihey possess a innltitiuk' of myths for special creations.

Most ot the plac'cs III. iitioned in tills item are situated around Ujiiicr Khiiiiatii
Lake. That they arc localities inliabited (or ccntmies past, and identilicd with tlie
history of the tribe is proved by the liict that their naniiii},' is ast- ibed to K'limkamtch.
'fhe most noticeable i>i tiiem arc no doubt the three sweat-ho'ises, all of which are of
remote aiitiipiity, and were put to use only when families wcie .iiouriiin;; tlic loss of one
of their members. Two of them are (]iiored jierc: Wakaksi or Kiiilalksliiui s|u'iklish
on west side of Lake and E-nkalksi, a short distance soutli of Fort Klamath. The
third lies about three miles south of Modoc Point; it is called Ka-ashkshi spuklish.

142, 1. kiifla. About the meaning of this term in creatio'i myths, cf. Note 96, 2:i.
In other connections, in the present text, kiiila or kii'la means spot, locality.

142, 2. 3. Tulish. To enaltle tlic Indians to catch fish at that place, K'nu'ikamt<!h
built for them, as tradition has it, an obsti action resembling a beavcr-dam. (if.
nakotk, 143, 1. ; giti for gita hi.

142, ;}. r>. Tukua and Koh^isliti are camjung- and tishing-placcs on the eastern shore
of the Lake. At Sliuyake'ki.sh the Indians leap over rocks for anvisenient.

142, .'>. n.'iasiii, na'sni stands for in'i-a.sht ni : "thus 1".

142, f). 11. (Innibat is called Kocky Point by the white jiopulation, and lies on the
Mcstern shore of lli»iier Khiinatli Laiic. A-usini is an island of the Lake.

142, (i. Wakaksi or VVaka is named after the tuakish-fowl wJiose cry is wiika wiika.

142, (MO. 1L>-I(i. These mourning customs arc grailiiatly disaiipcariiig at tlic inv-
seiit time. One reason for this is tiie progressive assimihitioii of the tribes to American
ciisfoms, another is the circunistaiicis that all of tlic llirci^ aucienl sweat houses arc
situated outside of the reservation limits.

142, 1.^. ndrnnuintak is compo.sed of inlannaiiti or ndannaiitat ak : " only for three
(kinds of relatives)".

143, 1. iSiikotk is tlie instrumental case of nakosh, lumberdam: "on account of
Its dam VVitlas will be a fish-killiiig locality." A loon destroyed that dam by foiring
Its way under it; one of our texts gives this myth. (;f. 132, l-S and Note to 74, 2.

143, 2. 3. MbiVsaks, Sma'k and Kii'katiis are names uiveii in cout<'mpt or .b^risioii
of the respective tribes; the latter to Indians living at the Dalles of ColuinbiM River,
Smak U, i tribe living south of that locality. (Jf. 103, li. H. iMbiVsaks is a name for
Iho ynako 'ndiaus.

144

TOPOGRAPHY AND NATUEAL PRODUCTS.

MISCELLANEOUS NOTES ON ANIMALS.

Given bv Johnson, Chief at YiNKKs. in the Klamath Lake Dialect.

?h? o7l^l^ P'^,?'*'^''' mdklaks shu'lhasliluk s;(o']liok; ktanuapkuk

The of mallard- pull ont the Indiftim m m«v., ,.*ii-.^- *_ ii_ __ ' . "ttpixcin.

The of mallard-
down duck

to mtikH pillows

to Ifo on ;

for ileppiiig

8;Ko'lliank ni'l Ikugank williahi'kat.

(undi rcHting iLo they are pnt- pillowcases,
down ting into

Mbu'shant nilaksht w%ak hil'ma.

In the mornint; at dawn the wlavnk- Hinea.
lifrd '

Wdtsak wdwa a gulindshishain ; le g^nuff wAwa

^•t" howl becniseli-ftbrtiind; for not Rolng they howl.

(with them)

liSie^ tchaggAya ankutat ii-nnank ; nntsa'g a-un61ank hi'mdshan-

Jlald eagle .it, „„ ,,ro« replete with afterawhlfe after depleting

fooJ i himaelf

he will

6 uapk, t6-ugshtaat hiindsanuapk A'-ushtat.

fly off, to the opposite he will fly of Upper Kla-

math Lakh.

Tchd-u gaukankatchuapk; ti'tnak niaklakuapk, waki^nua lAuCni-

Antelopea (people) are going to hunt, once only thP.rwiH can.p^ut,' orperhap" ,We '

JeS g^Pgapl'Jfpka pAlak. tJndsh mbushant pii'-napk s^^lakok.

•"nganldopeH)'^"^ """'""' ''""'°" ^"»'"'»" ""'O-y they will tike to induce aleep!

a cold bath

^ M:i ^^"^^^^ ''''^^}'' P'^"''^ "'^^ '^*'^«^'; k6-id8hi wdsh. Miiatch kpo'l

W,ckedly ac,« prj.H. -tea,. f„. „,.,,.,. ,„,,„,,„.„,„ „,,,,„. ^ ,„„^ ^V^/

gi'tko, tidsa no'l gitko wAsli. Kinkaiii wash E-ushtat

(he) ha,, ,lelic«te f„r l,a» prairie- Scnrc- prairie- a.npperKI,,.

"""• fill") wolves nmth Lake.

^'t"woi''''' "i"'' ii,¥-i'^; liilos kd-udsis; .shld-a nish (.slalskagHiitko

<.r..,, wolf „„ I,,,,., „„,,„ „„ i,g,^j.,,„|f. ,„|,^„^ „_^ jump, „„ my throat

12 k(<-udshi.sh

gray wolf.

Moa

NOTKS,

144, 1. ni'l w(^ksi. siaiids for ni'l wok.saiii ; iiiVl'lika for inWy.i or i.ulkii- -'li- '<l,v
hiiiMl." " ) J

144, !>. 10. These .•liaTM.^(msti(vs<)fUuii,iiiiiiV,)i,o.v,,(,.-wolf,wlii,.|, i,s ,so h]^U]y
nnwciiced by the (^iilifoniia tiihcs, place hiia b,Uv.>oii the. wolf and llic fo.\- NV,'|
.s(aii(ls for m'l and ini'iat<-li for imiiiisli. Tidsil i.s (Kr-slia a.

144, 1 1. l,s'a(,ska..aiifko; llu, v,.,l>al adjwfiv of (••IdakaKa slaiids )„.iv in lis

(iil)Utivc Ioiim: "..a.'li time wlin, ho .soe.s n.e, he jnnii.s o,i my Ihmal." The / of (ho
Neeoiiil s.vllahh' i.s .siipiiicKHod.

OLASSES OF ANIMALS AND PLANTS.

145

CLASSES OF ANIMALS AND PLANTS.

OlVKN IN TBK KlAMATn liAKK DIALECT BY DaVK HILL.

Quadrupeds: hohdnkankatk Iflhanks; ndnuktua hohdnkankatk; wunlpa
tso'ks gi'tk kiiilatat tcliia ndnuktua lilhanks wikts ndkanti.

Birds: Idsaltk ndnuktua. 3

Forest birds of small size: tchfkass.

Forest birds of smallest size: tchlliliks, tchlHlika.

Bucks and geese: mii'makli. 6

Night birds: psfn hiintchna.

Water birds: nanuktua huhdnkankatk ^-ushtat, dmbutat tchfa.

Swimming animals: ndnuktua iidddamkanksh sdyuaks; ndnuktua ud6- 9
damkankatk.

Fish: kia'm.

Jumping amphibians, toads and frogs: skdskatkankatk. 12

Snakes: wlshink; wdmgnigsh.

Lizards; lit. ^'walking straight out": uli-uldtchkankatk.

Reptiles and worms: skfskankankatk. 16

Flying insects: indnk.

Creeping insects, snails, some moUusks etc. : mfi'lk, mft'lkaga.

Grass, seed-grass: kshi'in. 18

Berries: Iwam.

Edible roots, bulbs and seeds: mdklaksam pdsh; lutfsh.

Trees: dnku; ko'sh. 21

NOTES.

These generic terms are quite characteristic, but by no means systematic. These
Indians chissil'y animals otherwise than we do, for they regard the mode of loco-
motion as a criterion for their subdivisions of the animal kingdom, thus sometimes
placiug in the same class animals which widely ditt'er in their bodily structure. The
Indian miud likes to specify and is averse to generalizations; there are a few Indian
languages only that contain comprehensive generic terms for "animal," "carnivore,"
10

140

TOPOGRAPHY AND NATURAL PROD DOTS.

"loptile," "iiiii])liibiau" or "plant." Eveu the English language had to borrow these
terms from Latin. The Klaniath Lakes often use kS'sh (pine) generically for "tree,"
and wishink, "garter snake" for "snake," the Modoca wAin6nigsh (black snake) for the
same order of reptiles, these species being the most frequent of their kind in their
respective countries. Birds are hohdnkankatk as well as quadnipeds, because they
fly "in a straight line".

ALIMENTARY SUBSTANCES.

List obtainbd in tui: Ki,ama.tii Lake Dialect from "Sergeant" Morgan and Minnie Froden.

Ydntch kalkali, tz6po=pdtpan, paki'sh; kak tdn: 18"; kiillatat M'sha,

c.vlindrii-, tlniuib so laijie an, entablo; so lonp: Is"; on gronnd It Hen,

ktaiyatat lushfl. Shldps pushpiishli, la'pi shldpsh.

■' "■" ""■•• ""-" '-el (lark, two flo*ers (to it).

on I'ocka

it IICH.

The flowora

3 Kdpiunhs&m kddslia saigatat: liVk pvipa8hpu8h=tkani, liii^itk tchl'pshash.

tsrowa ill the pia'ric; the scetlB (are) blHckiah, larger than tohlpaah.

W^wanuisli hfink slitii'ila wtikank vakitka pdta=fflul8hemi. P^k-

The women

gather (it) by beating (it) into aced-
baaket^-

at aiiiunier'a end.

B,v

shank sha hu'nk ydpiunks shiita; tchilAla sha tftatna. WH'kasb

grindlDR the,v kipionka prepare; boll (It) they sometiraeB. W-^kaah-

6 shitk luashetk kdpiunks,

like taaten kHpiuuks.

Kdshma k^dsa walidsat, kiiflatat usha; palpal shldpsh, tsmo'k pi'luitk.

grows on rock eliffn, onthoground lies; while (la) flower, after flab amelllng,

K^ldtch k(idsha wl-ukayant kelddshamat; kglddsh ntchekdni mamatch-

grnws oniheliiw kelAilah-bushes ; kelddah-berry anuill blue

9 ma'tchli Idlkaya. W('vvanuish kglddshla waksWlank; shpahd sha

grow on The females eolU'ct (it) nfter wOknnb- dry (It)

buahea. aeason ; ' they

tchiii ishku'lank, i'l;^a sha shpdhank i'lkshluk Mldam, tchildlank

then after jiathering, keep they (it) by drying to priaervo (it) for winter, bollinjf (It)

tchek sha pan.

then they e;it (It).

12 Ke^dwat k^dslia safgatat, tsdlas ka tanni 1', paki'sh; p'ldi shldps pushpiishli,

growa on prairie, atalk ao long 1', eatable; on top tho flower la dark,

tidsh piluitko.

good amelllng.

Kldna pdlpalish shldpshaltk p'lai, ke'dsha kuketat, pdkish, tfds mdsitk; md-

a white flower harinj; on top, grows in riverp, in patflblr, well . tasting; the

15 klaks pdn.

[n'liriDR nut (It).

ALIMENTARY SUBSTANCES.

147

Kldpa kdlkali, pakl'sh; ka tdnni 3"; takt^kli pfl'dahak, tdpa^ kitchkdni.

Isoyllndrto, nublei solong: tbroeinobes: red (U) the pftilahak- (its)le»voB small.

gnus,

KlUf kdlkali luti'sh; kedshd M6atok; pakfsh.

isaronnded routj grows In Modoo country i (it is) o«t»ble.

Ktii'ks w6ka8h=8hltko, k^dsha tdletat; ktfl'ksam shldpsh pii'pash, pdlpali, 3

nuptaar-alike, grows on straight stalk ; of the ktdks tlie bud (Is) (itsMop, tswWte,

paki'sh.

is eatable.

KH'ktti A'sha kaflatat, pakl'sh; g^mtchi tsdlas: 0.

Ilea on the ground, entnbli'; so shaped (ite) stalk:

Ka'ls kdlkali, paki'sh; mu'iia Ifl'sha ambutat; kitchkani shldpsh witch- 6

globular, eaUble; deep down it Ilea in the wnlorj Brasll is (the) flower of the

pay am.

wlicbpnl.

Ka's wd-ujjalks ts^lash gi'tk, slildpsh gftk; paki'sh.

a forked stem having, flower having! pnlatsble.

Ko'l. Tiiktakli tch(?lash gli'lam nu'kuk. I-ukak mdkhiks hu'mtcha aii'l 9

Ked (is) the stalk of the kol when ripe. Around Fort the Iniliaus this kind of kol

Kiumuth

shta'-ila turn, gftatoks kd-i tud kol. Amffrtka sha meya pfi'kgu-

gnthe.- inquan. but here not th-re is kol. Witbostlik' thoy .ii" (it) totheir

tity, (at agency) any

ishamtat shiu'lagiank, tchui sha pfi'ka; i'kagank pa'n shtdpka

roastlng.place bringii.g it, then they roust (it), taking it out again thevpTnnd

" (it)

ktdyatka. K6-i pi'luitk, tfdshi tadsh pa'sh; ha kanf ko'l e'nt, 12

with stones. Badly flavored, good however afood; if onylmdy ~kol cariies

on him,

Wk hii'nksh shti'kok vfi'shat.

a giiwly him smelling will flee,

bear

md. Lupi' 8ha'hlmal;(;o'tchtat shdpashtat I'bd u6ka; wdwaimish stii'-ila

At the first autnmu-coramenoement in (tlin') month lliU tipensj the females gather (it)

ydkitka w^kank tfatka. Tsui sha itpanipalank shpdha, shiit(?shluk 15

in baskets, beating (it) wiiha And they bringing it home dfy (it) for cooking

sha gdma; skdtka gdraa ga'mkishtat. Willishikat sha ikfi'ffa

they ponnddWi with a pestle (Ihey) inamnrtar. Into sacks they fill (it) In

pa'sht, tchiii sa vfiml vumi'shtat willishikat ikugank.

»Tt»r drying, and they bury (it) in eaehfis, in sacks after p?itting it.

Lphiash kedshd M6atok; gi'tatoks fi-ukshi kd-i Idvash kt^dshant. Tdnapsh= 18

grows in Modoc land; but right here in Lake not igyash isgrowinc TSrnin

(at agency) country is h iuruip

shftko shle'sh le'yash; wl-uka le'ntk le'yash ; tchdlash toks M-isham

alike tolookat (i8)16y»shj notvery lies iV.r.inhj stalk of Wvash

deep

na'sh pdtch atf taktdkli shldpsh gi'tk. M6atokni shnltchi'ya

(is) one foot tall, red flower having. TheModoos fry (it)

l^puinatk pdlash shti'tank Idhiash. Ku-i ma'shetk

innyingpans into bread mnklnir Kivnsh Ttmiiu >ii,.>i,.. ,i. 4.>

Badly tasting litis).

148

TOPOGRAPUY AND NATUKAL PRODUCTS.

■«

-^ ^B.

1 <

■

Md-i. E-uksliikui luayalslmk vu'nsluitka s^^na shl^ank t'-ushtat. Tchd-

Ib« Lake people for talcgatberliii; in canoes row ont flnding (it)

row ont flnding (it) in Inkea. Tlie

lash sha 8hn<l'kank I'shka, yaiiaiiBli pil p-dnk puedsha. YAnakiinia

•talks tbey aehiag imll np Iheir lower only eating throw awav Bacli at tlie lower

ends (the rent)." end

pAlpali gi ni^p panani. Stt'i-ila sha kshune'mi, kd-i ma'nsh I'pka

white is hiinU-long. Gatlier (it) tbey nt graB»-time, not long (ciu)l.e

md-i; pa'shtak sha piiodsha ki'i-i kldksht.

tole; lis Boon 8» dried they iia«t(it) bad having lif-

away, ri)nii'.

Nii'tak kddsha ntdidkavant kshu'iiat shafgatat; Wk tchipashptchi gi.

K™"" onamafl grasa-stalka in prairies; seorta tchTpaabnlike »n.

Kdpiunks shftko stii'-ila iiiVtak wdwanuish w(ikaiik ydkitka.

Kdpionksjnatliko (jntber ndtak tlio women, Ii.v beating (It) Into baskeU.

Fdwash a kt-dsha ait;fa;rieiiash k(")'l, kd-i ki'i-i pi'hiitk kiVlani^shftk, h'liluyatk

grows smaller ihaii k(il. not stinking kdllike, sweet

toks kpapshasli. Yafnakshi pil sha tuiii slilda. Tch(^la8h pd-usham

bnt to taste. At YAiieks only they niuili find. Stalk of n4wnsh

(of it)

wl-ukani, mii'knmkapsh pdlpalsh shldpsh gi'tk. Pu'ka sha hfi'nk

Is low, feathori'd (iod) wliiti> flowers havlug. Bako tbey

pdwash, tchui sha gdma, shpahauk sha i'l;ja lu'ldam pdshluk.

piwash, tlien tliey pound (ill, iifli r dr.vin'; (if) they pri'fcnT forwlnter gatberingin.

P^'ks iidnukaslukiifla kt'dsha tiVm, tftatna kd-i tii'mi. Pd'ks kddsha

everywhere glows in ()|iariti. siinietinus not in profu Gamass grows

in ()nariti- siinietinii's
ties.

In nri

slot]

Oregon saigatat, tch^kenish metsmtitslish leld-usani gl'tk tchdlash;

..-n ... „,„„. .. (its) Stalk:

on Orego-
nian

prill ries,

tinwers

a'
having

piVks tchtik'ni 6iiioas=shitko siuo;

oamass small onionsslmilarly looki:

iasii palpali KJuinkitk gfug, pukdtk

kinir, iswliilish raw being, when baked

tohek luiluyatk ma'sha n6;cuk. Pahdtko nia'ntch gi'ntak i'pakt

then sweetly ta°tes when it is When dried, a long time afterwards itmay

done.

tuiugni ill61ash ka-i k6-i k'ldkant. Shldps tsmo'k piluitk.

itmay
remain.

for many

years

not spoiled may become.

The flower flsh stink smells after.

PtVlxmntcJi. Plena mdklaks pu'lp^uantchluk pienA'tkishtka; pu'ka a sha

Seiapeiip the Indians fur gathering the chry- witbapnddle: roast (them) tbev

till' ground saiids

ktdyatat kc'lpokshtut kshu'n puetflank, wdldsha tchfk sha kshiin,

with stones heated, grass putting under, lay on top then they graas,

knt^-udshi lokdptchxa, tchi^i sha kiiila kji'lua pu'kflg pdlzuantch.

rough bnrk pile up on top, then iliey with fill up t\)r roasting tlie chrysalida.

earth

StopakJi. Mdklaks kiama'mi guixakshii'migshta st6palsha piikshaini' tch. Ka-

The jieiiplo in flsbing.seasnii, :it home-leaving time peel trees. In cnmasaaeasoii also.

kowdtka sha kiulo'la st^palsh ; kdpka sha sttSpgla. Liiiluyatk 8t6p-

With hones they |ieel off the inner Imrk ; small pine, they peel. Of sweet taste (is'

trees

alsh; shanks hak sha pan. Kdut i )u*iM shliid shtoi)alhui'sh kii'sh

tbebark; Just raw tliey cat it. Somany yoo (i.fiheni) find peeled off pine-trees

i tdineuug. Kd-i kii'sh ndniik tchn ka st6paluish: nauka tchiika.

yiMi u hen travelinj; Not pine-trees nil |»in ,i which wero peeleii; Home dry up.

A r.lMKNTARY SCTBSTANORS.

149

Tdksiih kdlkali, paki'sh ; lAwal ka tAnian sldpsbtat ; kii'ilatat Id'slia, kA-

oyllndrlo, imlntnMni iswliln thnt mnoh nt the bad; onthsgrmiid It lien, not

pi'luitko.

hiM aniell.

Tdk paipali kshu'n, k(?dsha d-ushtat.

rsawbltlsb Kf*^"* growB iu L4kke.

Tsi'kal atfni kshu'n, kddaha d-ushtat.

(In ») high grana, (.Town In Lake.

Tchi'psam kddsha kshu'n=ptoliI pAta tchi'k ndka Tchui radklaks tchipasli

grows grasHlIke (nn.l) in iiuniraer-time rlpena. Then Indians tchlpnsh

shta'ila, wdwanuish wiika ula'^uga ydkitat. Lulukshtka tU'ksli a 6

gather, the women Iwnt (It) hanl (it) In «e€>dba8keta. In tlio hot coiilii In a Are

inio

tchfpash shnu'za, tchiii tchi'k aha humashtgfulaiik pekaha lem-

thetobipaab they parch, and after they having thu» ilcpne (trlnil (it) on the

atchdtka shilaklgi'shtka yi-ulal6naiik; a tchl'ksh hil'iik peksli61aTik

metate with tlio rnbblng-Bjonn " lubMnir; now thon having dom-

grinding

pan dwa pAlatka ambu kitufnank, tchiii sha hilniasht-gi'uhmk 9

again they upon n water pouring into (it), then 1h«v after thus doing

empty (it) matted di»h

patdmpka wawAl^ank ndpatka hl6pa. Gi'ta tchfpash ka-i til'm

begin to eat (it) sitting around with hands sop It np. Uiifht hnro tohlpai-h not In qiian-

kddshant, M6atok pi'la toksh ttl'm wawawish gi.

(ia) srowinff, tlio Modoc only however much pr(Mlnotlvo in
coumry (of it)

Tchud kalkaH: t;^op6=shitko, gt^t pi tchuA; kddsha Ambutat; ntcheudshkAni 12

oyllndrio; thnniblike, ao it (In) wApatni srows In waters! rnther small

tchuA, tchuyunk mAklaks fshkateliui tchihUank pan; kukankasha

(ia) wipatii, and it the Inillnnn pulling and iioiling eat; masticate they

tiitatka. Taktii'kH tchuAlani shlApsh ; kinkAni tchuA.

with (their) Purple (is) of wildpotat" the flower; scarce w4patn

'"etb (is) (here).

Tsudk kiiilatat lu'sha, paki'sh; ka tAnni tst^las: lap pe'tch; kakAlkalish shlAps 15

on jn'onnd cxtundA, (ih) entablo ; ho long is tho t*^" *''-"*- '■ — -» ^ —

feet;

round

fliwers

p'lAi gi'

on top \\Q.\

tko.

Tnun^ka kddsha kallant, e-ushtat, wali'dshat; paki'sh. ShlApsh 2" lawA-

grows on ground, on Lake, on cliffs ; eatable. The flowers 8" are

latk, tfdsh piluftko, mii Ibfi'ka gitk ; ka'latat Wsha.

wide, nicely emelliug, ;i large bulb liavingj on ground it lies.

Wdtks&m m^'na fi'sha ka'latat, paki'sh ; kddsa walfdsat, pa'lpali shlApsh.

deep lien in ground, eatable; crows auioni; elitls, white (Is) flower.

Wifwi atini, kddsha tAletat ; paki'sh shlApsh ; kiitsa pAlpali.

Is tall, grows on straight eatable (in) the bml ; grnwa white,

stalks;

To THE ABOVE ABE ADDEIJ A FEW NON-ALIMENTABY SUBSTANCES:

KU'lxnmsh tfi'sh a td'pka kaflatat, kA-i paki'sh, ptchi'nk: kia'mJuelS'tksh 21

upwards standn from ground, not eatal' thus looking: as » fl8hkl|i|»i,.8rtlolo

wits61slank vA'nsat tamAdsank tdwas ; kitchkAni shIAps.

while net-flnhing, in the ennoe they fasten (it) the forked small (is) the flower.

on bow net ;

160

aX)POGKAPHY AND NATUltAJ. i'ltODUCTS.

.iffl

Skdwanks pushpA'shlish shlapshdltko, klii'kots, kdd«lui tdletat; kii-idslii, kd-i

haa a dark fiower, (h) a poinoner, gnwa on i-trHlnht (tastes) bad, not

stalk I

piikish, Pa'shp^am kApkalam s;Kiivvank8 k6-idse k'lii'kotk'sh.

e»lal)Ii.. Thi. limbs of iho .vmniK (ami) wilii pnrM. (iiro) bml "" poisoners.

pIno nips

3 SId'ds kd-i paki'sh, mukmukli slihips, kia'm=luel6'tkbh; witsdlslank d-ushtat

not eatable, .lowny fluwtis, n flihkllllun article , whilo nol.flahing in Lake

shti'l^a.

thi-.v pill It
Into (theni't).

TiTihasJi k'lAtsuo'tch-ilnku vii'nshtat shtdkla.

a»n "Bwimmliidsnokpr"- on cnnoc they stick up.

WOOll

a Wnkinsh a kddaha pdnAt. Mdklaks fshka pdrifit lultdmpkash shutelomd-

(irows ""''"'j;""- Xb(. IndlmiK pick It on pan-treo mlcklutf tosniearthomselves

shliik, liishnank sha shne'lakshtat. Tchiii tchik slia imkslit wd-

wlth,

mast (10 they on flropliice.

Tlien

they nl'ior baklne with
(il),

titka vukutank shushateldma tdlish, p'na'sh ktchdl;^islitka shkuk-

knlvos Boraplnn (il), smear il on facts, tin uisulves Ironi snu-hnrns to pro.

ludpkaslit; pW tak sha Iwfnank shte'wa.

""'''™i grease they putting Into mix up.

NOTES.

Several plants iu this list appear, according to granunatic rule, in the possessive
case -am, while their fruits or edible portion are introduced in the subjective case. To
the former the substantive auku or ts^lasli has to be supplied. Small grtsses are
alimentary plants on account of their seeds only, while the larger aquatic grasses con-
tain nutritive matter iu their stalk.s. Of these notices the shortest and most laconic
were obtained from Morgan, who did not enter into particulars concerning the i)repa-
ratiou of aliments. By this list the articles on which these Indians feed are by n j means
exhausted; they eat almost everything fi/und in nature whi<,b is not positively obnox-
ious to health and which contains a particle of nutritive nmiter, and hence a full list of
their kitchen repertoire would be at least three times as long as the one obtained.

146, 1. kak t^n for k4 ak tdnni "so long oiily"j the length being shown by gesture
of hand. Also expressed by ka taniAni, 149, 1. and Xote. The ydntch-plant grows to
a length of 18 to 20 inches, the height of the camass- or pu'ks-i)lant.

146, 3. Kdpiunksam. The i: 'ipiuuks-seed grows on a prairie-<7ra««, like the tchf-
pash- and nu'tak-seed.

146, 7. 14. pdlpal stands for piilpali (originally p^lpal-li), having lost its terminal
-i by apocope; pdlpalish shlapshaltko incorporates the adjective white into the verbal
adjective "having flowers". This phrase may be circumscribed by p<11palish shldpsh
gitko. Of. 123, 0. and Note, and 160, 1.

146, 8. wi-ukayant ki5ladshamat. Here the adjective in its locative case, used
attributively, is united with the partitive case of the substantive, the original form of
both being wi-uk^yantat kglAdshamti; the subjective case: wi-ukdni kfiliidsham.

146, 12. Kenilwat or horse sorrel is mentioned in an Aishish-myth and does not

ALIMENTAKY SUBSTANOEa.

161

grow HO tall iu the cold Klaniath highlaudti as iu the Californian and Oregouiaii valloyH
atUoiniug them to the southweBt and west, where its height attains sometimes three
feet. Cf. Note to 94, 9.

146, 14. Eldua, an aquatic or tule-grass, of which they eat a portion of the young
stalk. The term "tule," from Aztec tolin, serves in the West to designate all kinds oi'
rushes, stalks, and grass-like plants growing in the water and wet grounds, liy
kdkfitat are meant the Williamson and the Sprague Kivcrs.

147, 1. Kldpa is the name of the eatable bulb or root growing on the pfldshak-
plant. The ptidshak-grass becomes red in the autumn, when dry.

147, 3. Ktft'ks is the eatable root of a species of the cat-tail plant; tAletat, loca-
tive case of tdlish (or t.lleshf), straight stem, from tiiltali "forming a straight, unbroken
line." The ktft'ks grows iu the water, like tlie wihi parsnip (skAwauks); the uatives
dry the tender roots of the ktft'ks and bake them into a sort of brea«l. The epithet:
"like w6kash" probably refers to tha taste of this kind of food.

147, 5. Kft'ktu. This plant attains a length of about inches.

147, 6. 7. Kdls is the globular bulb of the wftchpai water-plant.

147, 8. Kii's, kii'sh. This plant prodtu;es a hard, whitish, farinaceous bulb, which
is commonly spoken of as ii)o, a Sluisti term, and is one of tlie most iniporiant foml-
articles of the Oregonian Indians. To dig or collect kii'sh : kii'shala, kii'shla.

147, 9-13. Ko'l, also pronounced ku'l, giVl, giil, is a kind of .* ilia. The root is eaten
only when roasted, and is then very nutritious, though spreading an abominable smell.
This odor is so penetrating that, as alleged, the grizzly bear will attack nobody who
smells after roasted kol; to this we may add the restriiition : " if he is not \ery hungry."
Johu D. Hunter mentions in his "Manners and Customs of Indians," etc. (Phila. 1823,
page 370) that the Osages ascribe to the ])lant washoba-i)esha the power of scaring
away the black bear. This plant is an annual growth possessing sudorific and cathartic
properties. Washobe is the black bear, mitchu the grizzly bear in that Southern
Dakota dialect.

147.9. hft'mtcha gtt'l: "the kol in this couditiou," viz: iu the ripe state. The
kOl-plant is ripe when the stalk becomes red or reddish.

147. 10. m^ya. Speaking of many women digging bulbs or roots, std-ila, stii'-ila is
the regular form; its proper signification is: "to fdl up" "to fill" (the conical root-
basket worn on back, y^ki).

147, 10. 11. pfl'kguishamtat: "to their old roasting place"; pukuishamat might
stand instead. The locative suflQx -tat, at is here appended to a verbal substantive
of puka, to roast, standing in the possessive case -am, and -u- is the infix marking past
tense. The guttural k has become distended into kg.

147, 12. 6'ut or e'nd for enat, conditional of 6na. Instead of e'nt, idshant (for
idshnat) may stand in the Klamath Lake dialect.

147, 14. Lupi' etc. Tlu- import of this sentence is: "L'bd ripens in the month
when autumn begins."

148, 1. Md-i is the common reed or tule-grass growing sometimes to the height of
8 to 10 feet. The shallow borders of the lakes in the headlands of Klamath Kiver are
full of this growth, which is one of the most important economical plants for the
Indian. Women manufacture from it mats, dishes, baskets, lodge covers, nets, sacks,
bags, and the young stalk yields in its lower part a palatable marrow.

152

TOPOOllAPHY AND NATURAIi PltOUUOTS.

148, U-4. YrttiakKiiin for ynnakilnfni ; cf. suffix iii, niiii in Dictionary, mft'nsb for
ma'iitcb. piVHliiiil. (...■ ,..'ihuMlit ivk, ft: inVwIit, 147, 17. lor iiAliimLt.

W. ■■>. Xfi'r,, , I lis prrasH beIoiiK« to the fjoruLs Cilyijcriuin, us identilltMl by Dr.
E. Fon-timu, uiij -ixxiuces u tiny, jn'i'yiNb brij,'bt need of tcbipasb kIzo. Tbo llowi-ra
are of n bgbt red uolor. 'i\,o prims is found aroui. tins agency buiiilinga and glows
about ono loot bigh.

148. 7. lYiwasli projierly nicana tongvc.

148, 11. I'fi'ks or cam<w«. Its bulb is oiio of tbc iirincipul foodartick'H of all tbe
nortb\vo.st('rn Indiium, but dooa rmf (.-•",v in jjrofusion in tlio wanner portions of Cali-
fornia, It is of tiie :nagni!u.ioof ttio walnut, very sacchariini and nittiitions, ripena
iu May and June, a.id by the roaatiny: or baking process described in Hie text becomes
as Lard as stone. Tbe iMAklaka call it alter pft'ka to want, Hie Sliasti name is soU, the
Pit Kiver name tihuald, while the name kuuias, "sweet," is of Nutka origin. The
botanists call the jilant Heilla or Camassia csculenta. Cf. Note to 146, 1.

148, 14. ipakt, metathesis of ii)kat, tne conditional of Ipka to lie there, to remain.
148, IG. pul;fnantch. The gathering of this pupa or chrysalid an<l of its caterpillar,
the s;feshl'sh, is chielly done by the women of the tribes, who llud them inibedded at
no great depth in the sandy ground around jiIpo trees. Another chiysalid, the kfdi'ga,
is collecteil and roasted by them in the same way and tastes like eggs. ksluVn pueti-
lauk: putting grass under the cluysalids, not under the heated stones. The atones are
replaced by other heated ones, as soon as they have cooled oil"; tho larva assumes a
black color after roasting and tastes like eggs. See pul/uantch in Dictionary.

148, 10. gui^a'jsbii'migshta. Tho season of the year, when the exodus of tho whole
trilH) to Klamath Marsh takes place, where ponJlily seed is collected for the winter,
is about tho middle of June. The ending ta is an abbreviation of the ease suffl.x -tat.
Three seasons are stated in tho text, when tho iieeling of the inner or fibre bai-k of
small pine trees is performed; of these the caniass season precedes the e.\odu8 to
Klamath JIarsh by a few weeks only, and the Usliing season lasts from February to
the end of tho summer. Of course, the iieeling of tho kApkapine coincides with tho
season when tlm sap ascends through tbe young tree. The bark is removed from
about five feet to fifteen or twenty feet above the grouiul, and most of tho beautiful
pines treated in this manner are doonuul to premature decay, though umny survive
the operation. Tho aspect of a forest with some of tho pino trees peeled is rather
singular.

148, 21. shanks bak, contraction of slu'iukish hak m ak.

149, 1. ka tilniau for ka taniani "so much iu width or extent." The bud of tbe
tdksish baa a width of about half au inch. Of. Note to 14tt, 1.

149, .3. 4. t6k. This aquati(! grass grows about two feet high ; by <5-ushtat is meant,
here and iu tsi'kal : Upper Klamath Lake.

149, .]. pii'lpali, vocalic dissimilation of palpali or pii'lpali; cf. taktii'kli 149, 14.

149, 5. Tchi'psam is a prairie grass on which the brown tchipash-seed grows.
This seed is extremely small, and it takes a long time before a sufficient quantity of it is
gathered to afford a meal for a family. Still smaller is the nutak-seed, and both are
striking instances of the persistence of the Indians in keeping up their old mode of
living, when by agriculture and stock-raising they could procure provisions with
infinitely less trouble and in much shorter time.

INCANTATION8 OI' THE KLAMATH LAKK I'KOPLl'

149, (S. tU'ksli is pr(>l)nM,v the adcRsivo cu.su of t6k<i (rt) lliopluco, hearth; tok kshi.

140, 12. Tclnii'i iH th<> Ion;;, (;>iiii<h'ic luot of tho Sagitturia Hagittifolia, an a(|ii ttic:
plant coiurnon iti tlio AVt-st and East of the United StatOH. In Oregon tho term potato
ur wdpatu (Chinook Jiirgon) is inoHt eouimouly heanl lor it. The name of Cliewaukun
MarHh, a sink and h>\v ground situated east of Upper Khimath Lulce, ih a corruption
of Tchna/e'ni: "where the arrow-leaf is found." Tho tlower of the wdpatu varies
l)etween red, reddish and whitish.

149, 17. Tsuril'ka. The tlower has a diameter from two to three inches.

149, 21. Kfi'l/amsli is put on strings by t lie women and thus serA'es to attrart the flsh.

149, 21. ptehi'nk: after tliis word ouglit to be seen the pieture of a liny vegetal
cylinder, about one ineh long .uid slightly curved.

160, 1. Skawanks oi' wild parsniji, a poisonous plant growing in wot i)laces to the
lieight of three feet.

160, 8. p'ua'sh, eontnujted from p'lialnsh, is the direct object (reflective) of shkuk-
ludpkusht: to guard themselves against bec»m»iug chapped by sunburus. The wakinsh
seems to bo a kind of resin and furnishes a red paint, as does also the k'16pki.

E-UKSHIKISHAM KlUKSIIAM SUUi'sH SHUINo'tKISH TCHIsH.

INCANTATION SONGS OF THE KLAMATH LAKE PEOPLE.

1 . Introductory song:

Yii'k.a n(, yii'ka ni, ya'ka ni etc. ' | -

1 siug, I Hint!, I Biiig (ill clioruH).

2. Song, reference unknown:

Wiwiwd ! ni shdwiilsh witnaiik ! - - 1 ^ ^ |

Illowii off! tho i)1niii(-<n'st \\nn (Imnvpcared from mel

3. Song of the wind:

KanftaLi m'sh fl shlewitaknti'la ? - ^ | - - -i | -
ndpaksh a-i ni'sh shlewitakntl'la. - - 1 - - 1 -

Who, 1 wonder, is blowing out of my mouth t
Tho iliseaso is emanating from my mouth.

4. Hie conjurer's song:

Tut'i ki nd shatashtakna'la? --i|_-lwj.l^j

na'paks nfl shatashtaknu'la. _i | _ . | _ ^ | >. j

tuA ki' n<i shatasbtat;(i'sh? _ j. | _ _ | .^ j. |

na'paks nil shatashtat^i'sh. i I _ _ | _ .i |

What do I remove from my mouth Y
The disease 1 extract from my raoiitli.
What Is the thing I take outt
It is tli» diaense I am taking out.

X' )

164 l'(JKTI(" TEXT8.

6. Soii;i of the woodchuck:

Kiifla ml gutl'la n(i ' - | .- . | ■ . | ,

I am doAcendlDg into ttu) gtuuutl.

6. Little ffirl's sotif/:

SbniUMhini'iyalti, shinaHhinAyulti _--l-|__z-

In quUlft-lngud liiiokiikln dreg»ed,

In port iiiilnc-fiingi'd buckskin droued.

7. Soriff of the washpdlaks-fox:

A'kalJi'kCia nft, ii'kalii'kcla n(\ -i- | - - | -i - || ^ , | . . I .<_

I.oiiK mill Hlim I am, long and Hllm | ain.

8. Sony of the firc-mantte:

Lii'luksash ml slikutfya s | - - I -'

In llro-fljiincs I nm t'livolopcd.

9. Sonif of the tudkish-cnme:

NA Hhiul'lashtat ml tfroli'wa - - ' | - x | , ^ .

I Ntiind upon tlio rliu of my ncsl.

10. Song of the blind medidnc-ffirl:

TcliatchelushkankH ml tclifutchiflHli Mlmo;Ki'tko

I BParch tho Krouiul with my Lands, Hnd f Ihto (ho fofttliom of tho yellow
hauiincr and devour them.

11. Another song of the same:

PalAk! ish lul hllpalpalfat! --l|_^--.|>>^|_

Quick! mako yo oycH for inci !

12. Bird's song:

NiVah ].i'laii tilj'iliianslia -l-.|^-|^

As ii hciul duly, I roll nroiind.

13. Song, reference unknown:

Tuil pasli ml! tud pasli ft nil? - ^ | _ i || . ^ j _ ^ i

Whnt am If what inii IT

14. Song, reference unknown:

Hd liiyam'na, nil liiyam'na _ j | _ ^ j I ^ _ ..,

This round thing 1 hold in my hand.

15. Song of the long-tailed black marten:

A wdljjatchaka n<i gatdml'^a j. .\-l^ ^\j.^\i ^

I thei hlnilf marton, T travel around thii land.

IKOANTATIONS or TllE KLAMATH LAKE PEOPLE.

16. Song of the skunk:

YAmashtka nCi tuituigftlsha j.~\^ ~\j.^\^^

III tho north wind I danco around, toll xiirend, fostlTu ani* gay,

17. Chorus song:

TudklnClk6gal -|^,_|^>
nii'paks ai nft k6ga.- -l - - - 1 -t -

What do I snok oiitt The dl«oaiio I urn Mioldng out.

18. Song of the boards:

P/ipkash huAlta -l _ ^ | -• -

Lumbur-bnanlN ari< rattliug.

19. Song of the lizard:

Ki ! kl'y a nd alkana j. - 1 -: - 1 ^ —

Lol thuB I the lUard stivk ray head out.

20. Song, reference unknown:

Ydmash ai n A'sh wflamnapka -i_|^-|-:.-|iw

Thu north wind has followed mv.

21. Song of the black mouse:

Tud kl na tashul61a? >^|--i|-.^|-
nii'poks ai nil tashuld'lii. --i|--il i|-

Throngh what ilo 1 jiass with ray paws t
My paws gliili< over the hair of the dineuHo.

22. Song of the tvashpdlaks-fox :

LViklsh, I'dkish gend ^ _ [^ - | - ^

Crazed I am wnndcrhig.

23. Song of the weasel:

Sha'ka nii, shtika nA _l - - 1 J. - -

I am Bquealiug, I am squalling.

24. Song of the dog:

Wdtchag ai n<i nA'kanka, j.~\d ~\j.~^
ydmashtka nfi nii'kanka. j. - 1 j. _ | j. _ w

I the dog am straying,

In tho north wind I am xt raying.

25. Song, reference unknown:

ShlJi' wish d-i nish wilhua j.-|^--|-;._>.

The Rtomi gust dnshrs right on uio.

155

^^^ PORTIO TEXTS.

26. Song, reference unknown:

Ma'nigni gd-u stii'kish gi -i > _ | _l ^ | ■_ _ ( ^ .

Heavy hailstones I poggoss.

27. Song, reference unknown:

Nainaya ! ni'sh shlewish witnank ! -— j. j _ z | ..

I am shivpiingi the wind blows down on met

28. Song of the bug:

Shaf^ish a-i nl k6ga j. ~ | j. _ _ I ^ ^

I the hug, I bite iinil siirk.

29. Song of the mink:

Mft'ashtka nil uduinulipka -'^|--i-|^-n_

I am swimming out while the south wind Wows.

30. Song of the young silver-fox:

WAnani w^ash nil wilamnApki jl - 1 j. - , | ^ _ |

Thn young red fox I follow up.

31. The incantation sings:

Shui'sh hatak nfi gena nu

I the Hiing I tun walking here.

32. Foa^s song:

LalAlashtala wikA nd ^^1 |^_

I am blowing air from my flanks.

33. Song of the tudkish-crane:

Tudn^i, tiiiiii;^!, tudu;i;i, tuau;ti ml. ^_|

34. Songs, forming refrains to song No. 33.

a-ahahfya, a-aha-a-ah£ya -i__|^_|j. \_ s

a n<i hd-e-i, a ml hd-e-i - ^ | ^ - - |l ^ ^ I <. ,. _

35. Song of the disease:

Tud ml shlewllam'na? ^ _i | - ^ ^ | _ ^
ndpaks an shlewilain'na. j-\ - | - -

What thing do I blow around 1

The disease I am blowing around in the air.

36. Song of the grizzly beards cub:

Yaf natat ml eitaktmila, _;. |--|^'

Ifi'kam n<l wdash gi. .i _ ^ I j. . _

On the mountain top I am peeping out,
Of the gr\7.^^y bear I .nm the child.

INCANTATIONS OF THE KLAMATH LAKK I'liUl'LE.

157

37. Song of the female wolf:

Ka'-utchish gfi'lft h'lllantana -i _ _ | ^ - | .

I, tlio slie-woli', am rolling aguinst (a tree

38. Spoken hij the conjurer while manipulating:

Neta, neta hahayi-fa

Nenu', nenu' hahayf-fa

39. Song of the tcJiiwititihaga-hird:

Ki'i-i witi'Ia, kii-i witi'la

Fearfully the wind blows underneatli hcrt>.

40. Sovg of the blind girl:

Luashtka ml Id'tchipka, j. _ _ _ | j. _ _
kiiila n4!:ant ni luyapka. |-i — [.l^w

In the fog I am straying blind,
All "over the earth I am wandering.

41. Song of the tcater-bug:

Adshi ddshi tchdya, c'ldshi adshi tch;i ya - - 1 -

42. Song of the grizzly bear:

Kaila ml Inl shla'tila jl \j.^^

I nni scratching up the ground.

43. Song of the little gray tchikass-bird:

Yafnash a-i ml shlul61a --|- 1--

I tuu wafted off iVoni the mountain.

44. Song of the sko'kii or spirit:

Kak6 pila nu la-ulAvva

Reduced to inevc boms, I rattle (Iiioiigli the air.

45. Sung by the disease, found to live in water:

Shlewishash mi tilutaknu'la

Itreuth I am emitting.

4(). Seng of the grizzly bear:

Tuntipni gi-\x wdlwash gi, _ ^| - i| _ ^| _ j.
p.^iltko g^-u w(ilwasli gi. _; | _ j. j ^ .i | ^ j.

I have (Ive water springs and (all) iny springs are dry.

47. Song oftlie black snake:

Wi'unnaksh m i' nu ttuullula — | - -i| l\±.

1 the lilaokspotfed Huake jiai hanaii.g hfie.

M-l

1''58 POETIC TEXTS.

48. Conjurer's own song:

Kallanti n{i shl'lshila jl \j.^^

I, the eortb, am resoTinding like the roU of thunder.

49. Bird's song:

NenA nfl, nend ml ~ j. _ | _ ^ ^

I flutter along the ground (while walking).

50. Song of tJie grizglg bear:

Yafnalam shuhiyualsh j. I - - -

61. Woman's song:

Shutpashultk g(in sne we^dshash gl, J-,-|_i_|jL^|^_
shutpashuftk a ni snew^dshash gl. -;.--|-!._|j._|j._

Painted I am on the body,
I, a woman, am painted black.

62. Song of the weasel:

Gaikasl i , galkash n uy anin a -i ~ | -i - ( j. _ _

Fooling, fooling I run around.

63. Song of Hie gray fox :

Ndnuktua nCi papi'sh gi -j.\ lI-^^

Everything I can devour.

64. The ronjurcr speaks as follows:

"Ss"; s^* V "^S' '^'^Lt""^ 'istsF s±*

56. Conjurer speaks:

Wl,..t („«.:) whj then ,,„■ toward, „,e awMlo were npeaking Imloor, to hold up, {ho

kish?

patiout) f

56. Conjurer's song:

TuAtala nish hfi l^etknula ? ~-i(-_-i|__j.|_
gii'pal a-1 nish l^etkniila. J.\-^ j.\~ s\j.^

What is coming out of my mouth?

Black Nubstance is hanging down Ironi niy mouth.

57. Song, reference tmknown:

Luash ai nfl'sh a lii'laninapka j:>_|j.^U

Fog followed drifting after inc.

INCANTATIONS OF Till'; KLAMATH LAKIO PEOPLE.

159

58. Song of the turtle:

Tud kJ ntsh l(5-ula ? _ -lj ^ | ^

Whirh game did you play with met

NOTES.

Tbis loug series of sbauumic souys in use on tlie Williiunsou Itiver was obtyined
from Mary, a young pupil of the boarding school of Indian children at the Klamath
agency. When living among the Indians on the Williamson River she had heard all
these songs very fre(piently, and in an interesting evening entertainment she faithfully
rejiroduced the manipulations of tlie male and female conjurers upon a little rag baby
lying on the tloor on a bed made up of old blankets, the figure representing some poor
snfl'ering Indian ])iitient. The other Indian girls of the school joined in a lively chorus
every time when she had fairly startt>d any of these incantations, and given the signal
by clapping hands.

On the day following these incantations were dictated, translated and explained
to me by Minnie Froben, assisted by Mary, and though both persisted in the statement
that the order in which the songs are sung was quite immaterial, I present them here
in the order in whicii I obtained them.

Each t)f these song-lines is sung many times by the conjurer, then repeated by the
ciiorus a dozen times or more. The chorus varies the melody somewhat each time, bnt
this musical variation is so slight and insignificant that the general impression of
monotony is not dispelled by it. Quite a number of these songs have very pretty
melodies, but by long rejjetition e\ en those must of course produce tediousness and
disgust; other songs have weird and strange tunes, others are quaint, but almost
repulsive by llieir shrill accents; these may be said to form the transition to the mere
howls and imitations of animal voices, which are frcqiient also in doctcning ceremonies,
but more frequent in the war-sJiouts and funereal cries and wailings.

The aninuil or object of nature to which the conjurer attributes each of the scmg-
lines was not remembered in every instance. Where this reference was obtained, it
was added at the head of the song or song-line. The animals mentioned in these songs
are all supposed to have been .-lent out by the conjurer to look out for the whereabouts
of the personified disease, from which the patient is suifering, and whatever the con-
jurer sings about the animals refers to what he sees them doing while on their errand.
On the distinction made between slini'sji and sliuinO'tkish cf. Note to song 0.

Kiuksam shui'sli is not merely a conjurer's song, but a mysterious agency con-
nected with a spell of preteruiitural power. This spell is not exclusively attached to
a song sung by a conjurer, but it may be bornc! also by a dream, disease, by some
dnig, or by that kind of witchcraft which is called elsewhere the evil eye. Kiuksam
shui'sh is therefore a bene.'icial or destructive tamanuash agency, which when applied
to a patient can cure him or msike him worse; when appearing under the shape of a
dream, it is a dream of good or one of bad augury.

The conjurer sometimes diversities his songs, all of which are sung in the mimr
keys, by inserting spoken words relating to the condition of the patient and the eflfects
of his treatments; .speciimens of this are given in .'58. r>4. .'")."). Parts of them are also
repeated by the chorus.

160

rOiiTJG TEXTS.

Many Indians do not understand all these songs, whicli contain many arcliaic forms
and words, and the conjurers themselves are generally loth to give thcir'meaning even
If they should understand them. Some songs aie of a stereotypic iii)i)lication in the
treatment of all or the majority of the maladies. A itlose familiiiritv with the habits
of i.nimals of the forest inanifosts itself throughout, as well as in the mythic tales

The translations added by me are not literal; they render the nieaning of the
songs in a free and i)arai)nrastic manner. In the metrics the accentuated syllables
designate a higher pitch of the singing voice.

153; 2. Literally: "I blew off the feather-crest."

163j 3. To read: .slilewi wit;.niVhuik, seems preferable in this connection. Of. 35.

164; G. On grand occasions young women were in the liaoit of dressing in buck-
skin robes, fringed with p()rcu|)ine quills {shm.4yalsh). In a mvth the bull-frog was
reported to wear constantly this kin.l of dress, and lu-nce originated a sort of i)ro-
verbial locuti.m: ko-e sluuawhinayalti: ^'the bull-frog in the shmilyalsh-dress." Cf
shniAyam. Zoologists call this frog: Eana pipiens.

154; 7. This is called washpalaksam shui'sh, the medicnie-song of the washi)iilak8-
lox spe(!ies, \ulpes velox. The exterior of this fox may be sketched by the words:
a kela'kCla wAtehag i.iVtchnuk, a loiig-bodied dog is running or trotting, 'ci'. song 22.

154; 0. This is called the tuiiksham shuino'tkish or incantation sung by the crane
itselt tlirough the mouth of liie conjurer. Nobody ,.,)uld hear the bird's voice if the
conjurer did not sing its song. A song, which tiie conjurer sings for himself and by
which he does not interi)ret any animal or other object of nature, is called Iduksaiu
shui'sh and is endowed with magic powers. In the West of the United Htates the
tui'ikish IS popularly known as shitejioke, in the East as tlyiiii-the-creek.

154; 10. The leathers of the yellow hammer are worn on neck as an ornament.
164; 12. This refers to a certain large bird not specitied, which contracts its body
so that the head seems to be its largest part. When walking, the bird seems to roll
around on the luairie. Pilan for jiila nu.

164; 14. The object to which song 1-i refers is not known.

154; ir.. VVal;;atchaga is very i>robably, though not ctertaiiily, a kind of marten.
Mantles were made of its fur. This rimed incantation is calle<l walvAtchkalam
shuino'tkish.

155; Ui. Called: tcuashisliiim shuino'tkish; inelod.N y.-rv prcttv. The diphthong
III IS pronounced here as one syllable. Skunks, while ninning around, i.re in the habit
of liolding Straight up their bushy tails, which are almost as long as their bodies.

155; 17. This pretty song is chanted by the choristers while the kinks feigns to
suck out of the body the tiny object which is suj.posed to have caused the disease
and before he gets it out. k6ga, koka means originally to hitc ; bite first, then suck
the disease out.

155; 18. Pajikash is pronounced almost like pAvkash ; 144, 11. kopka like k6vka.
166; 19. Alhides to a peculiar nodding observed in lizards when running out of
their holes and stopping at the issue.

165 ; 20. The anunal to which this song refers is not known. Compare No. IC. 24.
The literal meaning is: "The iiortli wind blows around me from the distance."

156; 21. This song, with a beautiful melody, is the shuiuo'tkish of a mouse species
with pig-like proboscis.

nrCANTATIONS OF THE KLAMATH LAKE PEOPLE.

161

185; 22. I'dksli, 16ksb, distr. Idlaksh crazy, maddened, intoxicated. Tliis song is
sung also: iC-CksIi, IP-e'ksli gend : - ^ | _ ^ | _ ^ Of. 164 ; 7.

"55; 23. The weasel is sfiuealing, because hunters have caught or trapjted it.

166; 20. Proliabiy refers to one of those birds to whom the power is attributed to
bring about storms, fog, snow, or any change of the weather.

166 ; 27. Compare songs 2 and 3.

166; 2.S. This bug. perluips a scarabee, bites the skin to suck out the disease from
t)u> wound.

166; 30. This is probal)ly a song of the wind, not of the young silver-fox (as I was
told), and I have translated it as nuch. The song No. 20 is analogous to it in every
respect; the winds, which the Indians constantly compiirc with tlie si)read of tho
disease, are frequently mentioned in these songs as blowing upon some animal or other
object Rent out by the conjurer to discover the whereabouts of tho disease. Cf. No. 10.
2t». 24. 2.-). 20. 39. 43. and 57.

186 ; 32. This song is said to allude to the circumstance that one fox's howl seems
to sound like the cries of many foxes howling together. LaMlash are both sides of one
and the same beast.

158 ; 3.3. With these monotonous sounds the tudkash or tuiikish calls itself by its
'vn cry: tuak, w6k, tuAk. Tuiin;fi is: tuiik ni gi "tu^k I am crying." Cf. 154; 9.
1 wo refrains to this line are formed by the two lines of Xo. 34.

158; 35. The personified disease spreads the germs of sickness through the atmos-
phere. This song is (comparable to songs 3 and 45.

157; 37. The signification of h'lilantana could not be disclosed, but it seems to be
similar to that of tilantana.

157; 39. This s)iiall bhd is dark, and has a red or yellow neck.

167 ; 43. Speaks of a fog drifting away from the mountains and turning intx) a
cloud, which is drifting also.

167 ; 44. The bones of a dead person's skeleton are supposed to rattle against each
other, the spirit being here identified with the skeleton.

167; 40. Often sung w^lwashi gl; epenth' tic syllables are frequent in these songs,
e, g, wal^dtchika in song 15.

157 ; 47. The wdmgnigsh or wdmn'aks, a species of Pityophis, has large bhick spots
and frequently occurs in the Klamath ccuntry. Tunulilla means to hang down over
something as over a rock.

168; 48. This is sung when water is poured over the patient. A more literal
translation would be: "I am resounding within the ground."

168; 50. Yainalam shuhiyualsh means round, cylindric or globiform objects stand-
ing in a row on a mountain. The den of the grizzly bear is supposed to be in the
mountains or on a mountain top. Cf. song 30. My informants did not know what the
objects were which stood in a series, but if any religious notions were connected with
them, we may compare the three sacred rocks standing on a mountain top in Peruvian
mythology. These rocks were fetishes indicati%'e of stone worship, representing a
mother with two sons. Another myth mentions four of them, representing Catequil
(the god of thunder), Vira<;ocha, a sun god and a Are god. The song No. 60 is simg by
the chorus while the kiuks is dancing.
11

162

POETIO TEXTS.

168; 51. Thf j)aiiil was put ou oxinessly for the dance and smeared across her
breast or anywhere on body; «(in for ke uu, gC uu, vowel fi inverted.

168; 54. These ,S])oken words are also repeated by the choristers. The rejjetition
is very long and noisy and winds up in a h(»wlin{,'. tuti/olatko, after having ceased to
di-eam. This would imply, that after dreams fasting must be obser\ ed as a religious
custom, k'16kshashtala for the correct form k'lekilpkashtala. This phrase occurs in
68, 8., and is explained iu Note.

168; 5r>. The moaning is rather obscure, probably owiiij,' to omissions.

KitJKSHAM SHUi'sH,

conjurp:r's incantations.

Obtained khom (^hikf Johnson' and SuB-ciiiKif Dave Hill.

1. tSonff of the dmase:

Nii'pakshtka hfnni ml; kuluashtat iiu

H.V sickneHH ! iiiii prostratt! ; I urn (now) up in tlid rU:av nky,

2. Som/ of the woodpecker:

K^sliash kti-a nft piupiutdnna j. ^ | -i - _ | j. _ | .

I am pkkiii); hard at f lio bark of a phu- tier.

3. Souff of the iuktukuash-hawk:

Kudta nil Ichilikd nu _ 1 1 _ -i | i | ^

I nm pinching hiuil.

4. Sony of the white-heailed eatfle:

Kalufishtat nu tehutchua ,-!.j_-^j i-

I am iToakiun higli iij) in tlir skifs.

5. Sonff of the weasel:

Kiiilash nu shniuu a ni yana > j. j ^ • | _ _ ^ | «

From undi'i- tlic j;i'(iiiii(l I am singing.

6. Sovf) of the mink:

Atin tchelii'wasli gdua ^ J. j ~ j. | :

KipplcH iu 'be « att>r-slu'«t I am s|iii'a<lin|{ far and wide.

7. Sqh<j of the f<kunk:

Ti^i, tt=-i, ksiul^a ' - | j. _ } ~ _ .

Willi ^ll(M'l^n^Ml stt-ps I am ilamiiji;.

CONJITREH'S INOANTATIONS. 163

8. Song of the quiver:

Yahiash nfl tadsl tadsf -:--|^_|__|j.

9. Song Inj a companion of the old frog:

Kn-e weldkash nd wcl' .'ash tchalekfya ~j.|_j.| i|-^_^

An old frog-woman I sit down at the spring.

1 0. Song of the gdwi-hird:

Shdwalish haf nd shlatanfya -i-_|-;. |j.-

A flint-headed anow I am ready to dispatch.

11. Song of the eagle-feather:

Mil'kaBh a gi nfl, gend nd, ho -l~\ i|^ j.|w.^

I am the oagle-feather, I am going down, hfl!

12. Song, reference unknown:

Kii-i hai nen kslul'ka

I feel too bad for dancing.

13. Song of the dwarf:

Na'hnfas nani narif nanf-a a a nania nam, nani-l-a

14. Song, reference unknown:

Kaila nu spi'amna ± — \j. ~ ^

I am dragging out dirt.

15. Song, reference unknown:

Shdppashti nii lakf gi

I am tho lord of the sun.

1 6. Song of the shai^ish-hird:

t3hai;iji'sh giiluaga lula iniiola -.^|~.-^|-j.|^^|-

I the little black female bird am lost and strayed.

NOTES.

162; 1. By othtrs this song was giveu as follows: Na'paks kiuuina kalowat iift:
" I the disease am ineaudering through the skies." This variant is evidently prefer-
able to the one abovt^.

162; 2. In the iSahaptin language of the YAkiiua, Washington Territory, a eertaiu
bird is called piiipiu ; the Klamath Lakes call a spotted kind of woodi)ecker shj)iu'hpu8h.
Both terms are derived from an onoaiatopoetic radix pin, imitating the picking at tho
bark by the woodpecker.

162; 3. The tuktukuash or Ushhawk, Tandion carolinensis, o'vurs in large num-
bers on the hikes of the Klamath highlands. Like that of many other birds, its Indian
mime is derived onomatopoetically fiom its cry.

164

PORTIO TEXTS.

162 ; 4. Of the ya6/al, white-headed or bald eagle, Haliaetus leucowphalus, another
eonjurei-'s song was obtained. Cf. 165 1 5.

162; 5. The wording of this Hong could not be obtained with certainty.

162; (i. Stands for: ati tchelii'wash nfl g6na.

162; 7. t^i, t45-i has no meaning, bnt simply serves to beat the measure when
dii.xcing with short steps.

163; 8. This song is said to be that of thi3 quiver (tokanksh) and its purport the
same as that of No, 7. Yiihiash is a kind of ii<(niitic bird.

163; ». A similarly worded song is in tho Modoc colleution, given by Toby Kiddle.

163; 10. Shiiwalsh is here lengthened into aliAwalish for metrical reasons.

163; 11. This is a favorite song of a kiuks on the Williamson Blver, called Sktikum
Doctor (stout doctor). Given by Dave Hill, also 12 and 13.

163; 13. Foot prints not larger than those of a baby are sometimes discovered in
the higher mountains of the Cascade Huuge. The Indians refer them to a dwarf called
na'hnfas, whose body can be seen by the conjurers of the; tribe only. The dwarf gives
them his advice for curing the sicknesses of others and inspires them with a superior
kind of knowledge.

163 ; 14-lG were dictated by an Indian whom 1 found at Linkville.

163; 15. The name of the animal, probably a bird, to which this coiyurer's song
refers was not obtained. Cf. sliApsain ptchiwip in Dictionary.

I]-UKSHIidSHAM KillKHAM SHUl'sH.

INCANTATIONS OF THE KLAMATH LAKE CONJURERS.

Obtained FROM "Sergeant" MoBOAW.

1. Song of the Lake:

Ktsdlui g^-u d-ush

My lake is glittering in azure colon.

2. Song of the rain-storm:

Gd-u a-i iKipaks ndpka,
gillkdsli g^-u hil shufsh.

The (lisoaso produced by me has arrived,

I !im the Btorni and wind and this is my song.

3. Song of the conjurer^s arrow:

Gd-u a hfi't hana'sish

This here is my loujf magic tiiiow.

4. Sot^ of the North wind:

YAmsam ge-ii ge'-ish kapa -i -^ - - | .i

I ;i!ii thft North wind, (iiid in iriy path I am irresistible

IN<!ANTATIONS OK TJIK KI.AMATH LAKK (JONJOKEKH.

6. Song of tfie yaukal-eagle:

Plafna nd kshakl'dsha j. - | j. - | -l _

High up ill thu HkiuH J describe my inagiu ofrole*.

6. Song of the little sucker:

Y^nash ai nlsh sldwish wita j. , | j _ | -i _ | j. .

Now tho wiud-gust slugs about mo, dm yt'm-flah.

7. Words sung hy the East wind:

Y^wa, y^wa, y^wa, ydwa -i - | ^ _ | -l _ | ..' _

Knster, eaater, eastern, eastern.

8. Song of a black snake:

Kiimtilagam g(^-u gdnhuish -iw|^-|_i»|^_

This )H mine, the black snakeV, gait.

9. Conjurer's kat'hidwash-incantation:

G4-U hi1t k^-ish kat'hiAwasam

Thus I walk when I lie up the hair.

10. Song of the black ground-mouse or keldyua:

iifunAna n<l shuinA

Down iu tho dark ground I am singing mystTain.

11. Cot^urer's song of the rope:

Kgniiks a-i nfi 8til'n;ti-uapk ~j.\^j.\^j.\

I will puU a ropo from my entrails.

12. Gray wolf's song:

Kd-utchish ai nfi shui'sh gl -i-~|-i^_-|^_

I am tho gray wolf raagio song.

13. Song of the female lizard, Ma Jculu:

Skfl'lala gd-u ka'la kfalam k^-iah

The land on which I, tho female lizard, am treadiug, belongs to the lark.

14. Song of the male lizard, Ma laki:

Ktsdlui ki'alam g(^-u k^-ish

Wlii'u I tho lizard am walking, my body is resplendent with ooIom.

15. Song of the kilidshiksh-duck:

Tseldwa g4-u d-ns _ -^ | _ -^ | , _-. ^

III my Ittko ripples I am spreadiag.

16. Song of the yellow jacket or Mnsh:

Nil' ai nen nfltd'yamna

Here I am buzzing around.

165

x/6 I'OETIC TKXTS.

1 7. Sntiff of the young deer's claws:

Kodsi'ngs a ^i-\x walta

My iIi'iT-olowR nre rattling.

18. Song oftlie ksM'kshnish-hawk:

Wt'ash d-i ml kshflkutkul -_-!.|-j.|_j._

1 carry my offHpring with me.

19. Song of the pelican or himah

lli'i wlshtkak nfl miyanina - ^j.\^s^^

NuiHlly I am blowiug arouud.

20. Song of the swan:

Kd'sham gc'-u wftclitaks

By me, bv the swan, thin storm lias been produced.

21. Woman's song:

Kutclii'iigslika bd' mft'kiesh

'I'hr luot of II .\oiin;; (l"<<r arc my medicine-toolH.

22. Song of the male kdls or kdlxalsh-hlrd:

Ka'lsam gi'-u liiinalaks .

Tlii.i \h my Noiig, the kulali-bimVH, who made thv tot;'

2ii. Song of the female kdls-hird:

KAlsam kii'io gd-u lu'nialaks

•• Like my consort, the kalHh-biril, I produce fog at will.

24. Song of the otter or kolta:

Conjurer: Giitkaks ge-u n«5pk

The small-pox brought by me, the otter, is upon ye.

Chorus: Killi'lga ki'jltam genuiah

The otter's tre.id has whirled up the dust.

25. Conjurer's song:

K(5-id8i ai ml shui'sh gi

I am a conjurer's fatal song.

26. Funeral song:

Lft'luksam ml skfx'tchaltko

I am now wrapped in tho garments of fire-flame.

27. Song of the mdmaktsu-duck:

Gutitgiilash g^-u ndpka _j.|w-:.|__j.|-

Belly-ache is the disease which I carry along with mo.

IN(!ANTATI()NH OK THK KLAMATH LAKK OON.HIK i'UH.

1B7

2K. Song ofnipdnipakHsh-iluck:
Gutl'tkulH gi'-u nii'pakH

BiOlv-iicliK In I III' (lUofiHo I nin lirinKiiiK un.

29. Song of the South wind:

Mfi'u«h iii nfl' sliui'Hh gl, ±- ^\i.^\j.~
kafla nft wikdnsha. ^ , _ | _ j. _

I am the Soutli wind'M niugic hoiir nnil nwi'i'ii hvit the earth.

30. Song of the conjurer's implements:

Tchf hfi tchd-us miVluasli ;
k61tain }jr-n lift inft'lnash,
s^i'l gt^-vi lift inft'lujisli.

80 lookN thu uiediciiie-toul tukuu IViiiu the yellow hammer;

TliiH ix my curing-tool, that of tho otter;

TIiIh m my cnrinx-tool, thiit of thi> otter-Hkin lielt.

31. Song of the black ndta-dMck:

N(\ ai nata slmi'.sli

The iifitn-iliirk in now Ninf(inK nhnnt itjwif.

32. Song of the nu' shtilatisumsh-hird:

Lft'paksli ge-ii nift'luash j. _ | „ j -l _ «

White chalk \m my meiliciiie-tool.

33. Song of the pipe:

Kdtchkalam inft'luash,
pa'ks g(j-u mft'luash.

The HmokiDK pipe iH my medicine-tool, the implement for the tobacco.

M. Song of the scoop:

fi-nsam mft'luash,

pdla lift g^-u mft'luash hu.

This Rcoopiiig-paddle is my enriuK-instrnment, thnt loul used on the lake.

35. Song of the pop-tchikas bird:

P6p tsikas nft' shui'sh gi -i -^ | jl ^ | ^ _

I am the incnntatioii of the little ))6p-tHikikR bird.

36. Song of the shka' -bird:

Nft ai nen nft shui'sh gi, - 1- — j-^ -
p'lama nft kaki'dsa. j- ^\j...\s ^.

1 iiiii a magic song and circle high above thr earth.

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)

1.0

I.I

1 2.5

1.8

1.25

l.4_ 1,6

■« 6"

"> ■>

Photographic

Sciences

Corooration

■S

%<^

23 WEST MAIN STRE2T

WEBSTER, N.Y. 14SB0

(716) 872-4503

■V ^^

t'.

168

POETIC TEXTS.

37. Song of Old Marten or SMamtch:

NA' ai nen aggl'dsha -i >. | j. _ | j. >

I go np and stick fast to the tree.

38. Song of spirits' walking-stick, or sk&'ksam hd'kskish:

Skd'ks ai iiii sl'kamba i

Leaning on a staff, I the dead man's spirit am traveling.

39. Song of the large black woodpecker:

Skii'kashak n(i nii'pka

I the young woodpoclcer have brought on siolmeas.

40. Song oftJie strap made of otter skin (sxi'l) :

S^i'l ai nii niil'luash, -i ,., _ | j^ ^ _
s-Zl'l ai nH shui'sh gl. _:. _ _ | - ^ _

I the skin-strap am a conjurer's tool, I am a magio song,

41. Song oftlm sxi'h-hird:

S^i'pa nfl slmi'sh

Of the 8;t(b-bird I am the song.
Or, in other tcorda:

I the 8;):tb-bird am singing about myself,

42. Song of the storm-hlast:

Sldwish ai nd wuydmna

I the stonn-wiud I wind around.

43. Song of the lark:

Ndnukash gd-u na'paksh,
Sk6Ialam g^-u na'paksh.

The disease brought on by me, the lark, spreads everywhere.

44. Song of the spii'm or female shka'-bird:

Kaflash nA shnoldka

I am snapping at the ground.

45. Song oftJie sweat-lodge stick-hole:

Stsaiisawalks gd- u shui'sh gl ^ - _ | jl _ ^ | j. ^

This is my song, that of the stick-hole.

46. Song of the loon or tdplal:

Tseldwash nlsh shidlamnd tapldlas

I am the loon and my waves follow me.

47. Song of the bodily pains:

Tatktt'sh ai n<i nii'pka

I the painAilneas have oome upon ye.

INCANTATIONS OF THE KLAMATH LAKE CONJUUBRS. 169

48. Song of famine or hunger:

Tia'mish ai g^-u na'pka

The pangs of hunger I oarry aboat.

49. Song cfthe West wind:

Tzalamtdlkni kii-idsi nft
sl^wish hft widsdpka.

I the West wiud, high above the earth I blow as a pernloions wlnd-gnst.

50. Song of the tvMukuash fish-hawTc:

Flaina nft kshakddsha,
kal6 nt ksh^kansha.

High ap in the skies I soar and tain my ciioles.
Through the clear skies I am carrying my prey.

51. Song oftJte tsdkenush, an aquatic bird:

Ka'lash ak nil wuya tsdkfiniisl'.

I the tsrtkennsh would like to ily over the country.

52. Song of a gray aquatic fowl, called tchdkiuks:

ghaikish ai nfl y fi'ta -^ - 1 -i ~ | ji -

I the 8ha{ki°.h I walk with ponderous steps.

53. The little boy's song:

Tsdkiag a-i nd shul'sh gi,
Ifimd-ish a-i nA shul'sh gi.

This is my own, the little boy's, song;
About the thunder I am singing now.

54. Song of the tsdntsan-hawk or Ungfislier:

Tsdla-esh nA k6ka tsdntsan __-i~|-!.-|-!.-

I the tstbitsan-bird am rating up the salmon.

55. Song of the weasel or tsdsgai:

KtsdUxi nii g^nhuish

While walking I shine in my multiple oolois.

56. WeaseVs magic song:

TsaskAyam gd-u ka'la,
guyiima k^-u ka'la.

Mine is this ground, the weasel's,
Muddy is my ground, the weasel's.

57. Song of the tchdwash-fish:

TsAwas ai nO. shul'sh gi

C . J

I the t«t(was-flgh am singing my own Hong.

170

iMM'/rrC TKXTH.

59.

60.

«il.

58. Sonii of the Mktu-huwk:
Vrinmsii H nA Hhul'sh;
yiininsh n {{•(^-ii sluii'sli.

Abmit ilic iidilli wind 1 iim Miuging,
About till" c'o)<l wIikIh I (till NiiiKinK.

Tmxixi-l'inrs song:

NA iii noil iiu slmi'sh gi

I inn HiiiftiiiK iilmiit myaelf,

Smifi of the tmitsiwa.<^h-bird:
Tsiutsiwii'sam ktl'sh miiluu

rXw 8UOW iiuul.' by mo, tlio tMiut«fwaHli.bii<l, U iv««ly to arrive.

t^mj of the hhejay, or tsxa-Htsx(i'-»>^h:
Sankfiwaltk ai ml ahiu'.sli

Itixh-croHtod [ Ninjr my »ong,

()2. Song of the large hlaek rulture:
Tclmafsh ai ml naggi'dsa

I llio vulture dcHcrUw iiiy circlm iii ilio uir.

63. Song of the leiiknsh-crane:

VViikas 111 tcheklc'la

r tlm wiikiiNli-cruiii- crouch on the wiktor'n od«e.

64. Song of the young ivdhash-rrnne:

Wakiishak ml nii'pka

The aiseiise brought on coineB from me. \\w yonnK wiikuNh-binl.

65. Woodpecker's song:

Wilkwakins wiiita walashtat

I, tho woo«li>eeker, iini holdinft (uNt (lie t i-.e-«l<.ni.

66. Song of the wd'hlas-tree:

Walasli ai ml wawikanka ^ - | - -i U j I . ^

I the jiole-tree am HlinkinK ">.V erown.

67. Song of the wd-ulifiiash-duck:

Wa-u'htA'ssam g<?-u nii'pka - - j I ;. _

A sickness hns como, nnd I the wii-iriitniish-.luek have |irodi .1 it..

68. Song of the mallard-duck:

Wii'-aks ai nt tclidwa -— j ^ ^ i • ^

I the mnllitrd float on tho water's bomuii.

69. Sang of the weiwash-goose:

Gc<-u ai hA't wftchtaks

This tempest is my work.

INCANTATIONS OF THK KLAMATn LAKK (30NJnKEES. 171

70. Song of the little wipSU'wash forest-bird:

Wipgli'wash nd shui'sh gi,
wuipl^wfish nfl sliut'Hh.

My own Hong I siiiu, I tln' h ipivHwasli-Wrd.
I tho wuip1<SwaHh »m NtngiuK alioiit myaelf.

71. Song of the wltkatkish-hawk:

Gt'-u af hil tft' Hilvvals, '_ | i - _ | -i _

witkatklsani g(i-u sdwnlH. .i _ | -l .. | j. _ | j. _

My head-crc8t thiH in, it ih timt ol' tta wftkntkisli-liawk,
NOTEH,

Tho incantations obtained from Morgan am mostly of tin- kind ciillpd shuino'tkJHli,
and a larfjo number of tliem are attributed to birds. Some of tliem i)robabl,v exist in
a more explicit form, wliicli was not remembered, and (lie rhythmic, or musical form
was obtained of a part of them only. A literal triinslation of these song-lines is an
impossibility in most instani^es, if their sense has to he rendered in full; I have then^-
foro furnished only parai)hrastic interpretations. The list, is alphabetic, and was
arranged after the names of the animals, or other per-, i lied objects, to which tim
incantations are attributed. Many of these s<»ngs are reterred to in the " Subject List
of Incantations" given by Morgan.

164 ; 1. Ktsi'ilui, to be resph'udent with colors, is mainly said of objects showing a
blue or purple tinge: pfi'ksam shliips ktsi'duitko, tln^ eamass plant has a bluish color.
This verb is also n.sed when sjjeakinp if tho raiidmw; of the lizard: 166; 14., also of
the weasel's fur-skin : 1C9; 5.5.

164; .'$. The use of these conjurer's urrows is mentioned 73, '>.

164; 4. Yanisam for Yamasham; ef. Note to 111, 4. Of the persimilied North
wind the Indians say "he lives ui> in the mountains". On the north side the basin of
the WilUamson Kiver is clo.sed up by high mountains. Geish and genuisii, geidiuish
means tho action of going and that ofliaving gone, or tho present and tin* past going;
both were translated by ^^gait", "tread", a term which does not differ much from tho
real meaning. Both terms also occur in the songs obtained from "Doctor" John, and
are nniinly used of quadruped.s, amphibians, and reptiles.

164; 4. kiipa probably for g.'^itpa (nfi), " I have come".

166; 6. The ye'n sucker-lisii is <iuife abundant in the lakes of the Klamath high-
lands and has been identified by Prof. E. 1). Cope as the Catostomns labiatus.

165; 7. y6wa. In Morgan's series of incantations there are song-lines on wind-
gusts, tempests, rain-sto'-ms and on the winds blowing from each of the four cardimd
points of the compass. These latter are not positively stated to be producers of dis-
ease, though they are dreaded on account of their force and violence. The East wind
(y^wash) blowing over the alkaliiR", <«■ volcanic, arid lands of Southern Oregon .sings:
yewa, y6wa (utl) which does not only signify "1 blow from the East", but also "I am
howling".

165 ; 11. Feigning to draw a rope or string from their own posteriors is a trick
sometimes resorted to by doctoring practitioners to make a disease disappear.

172

portk; texts.

165 ; 13. It. is by no means certain wbotLer the above is the full wording of this
song or not.

IM; 16. neu involves the idea : "you hear it yourselves." Of. 167; 36. 170; 69.
166; 17. k6d8ink8h was in this connection explained by Iflhanksam ste'ksh. Con-
jurers' rattles are made of deer's claws.

166; 18. This hawk is a kind of sparrow-hawk, Faltio sparverius.
166; 20. Compare the song of the wei wash-goose : 170; (i!t.

166; 21. This song of a female conjurer or "doctrcss" is quite analogous to
the song 166 ; 17.

166 ; li2. The kdls flies around in cold nights followed often by foggy mornings
hence the belief that it makes the fog. ' '

166; 25, Compare the gray wolf's song, 165; 12., which forms alliteration to this.

1G6; 26. Refers very probably to the cremation of the dead.

167; 30. In line 2 the same objeot is alluded to as in line 3, k6Itam s;^i'l. This is
a broad strip of dressed otter skin, ornamented in various ways with shells, feathers,
bird-scalps, etc. To all these objects a magic power is attributed severally, and as they
are now all united on one strip of skin, this strip mnst unite the magic powers of them
all. The conjurer suspends the s;?i'l on his neck and lets it dangle over his chest or
back, according to the manipulations in which lie is engaged at the time. It is con-
sidered as one of the most powerful of iiU the curiiif- toolM or muluash.

167 ; 32. Alludes to the grayishwhitecolorof this bird, which burrows underground.
This bird is also mentioned in 154 ; 12. and Note; cf. also 132, 7. 8.

168; 41. S/i'pa is the abbreviated form of the possessive case in -am, aa in wdsha
w4ka 105, 9. and Note to 105, 7.; in: ni'l weksa, 144, 1. cf. 165; 13.

168; 44. Interpreted by others: "I am scolding and threatening the earth".

169; 50. Another tiiktukuash-song is contained in 162; 3. cf. Note.

169 ; 52. Shafkish is another name given to the tch^kiuks.

169; 54. The kingfisher or Ceryle alcyon is called in Klamath Lake tchfintchan,
tsdntsan, tchdnshan after its cry : tchatchfttcha, and chiefly feeds on salmon.

169; 56. The second line was referred by "Sergeant" Morgan to the otter. Of.
177; 13.

170 ; 58. This alludes to the name of the bird, which imitates its twittering.

170 ; 62. This bird circles in the air to discover fish on the lake's surface and to
pounce upon them. The tchuaish is the red headed v ult u re or black buzzard : Cathartes
aura. The Indian name is an imitation of the bird's cry.

170 ; 63. 64. The wdkashcrane is identical with the tudkish, the name being derived
from its cry. These birds creep along the edge of the water in search of small fish.
Compare the tuakish-songs 154 ; 9. 156 ; 33. 34.

170; 65. This song is much better expressed in the series of Modoc incantations:
174; 13. Here as well as there alliteration is perceptible.

170; 07. After g6-u, the subject of the sentence, nii'paks or the disease, is omitted.
In the name of the duck the final -s, -sh is geminated here in the possessive case, to
Rtand for wa-u'htfi'asam.

170; 68. In the onomatopoetic word wa'ks the dissimilation of the vowel into
wa'-aks is frequently observed. Also pronounced w6kash.

170; 69. The welwash- or waiwash-goose is a long-necked white bird, commonly
kaown as snow-goose : Anser hyperborens.

INOAKTATIONS OF MODOC (JONJUKBRS.

178

MoUOKISHAM KIUKSAM SHUi'SH,

INCANTATIONS OF MODOC CONJURERS.

Obtained fhom Tonv Riddle in the Modoo Duoject.

1. ShJco'ks or spirifs incantation:

PlaitalAntnlsh nft shufna -_-i|--i|--!.~

I am Binguig to the heavens above.

2. Another of the same:

Nulidsha nulidsha nulidsM _-j.|~.~-i|w_^
ko-idshAntala kailAtala kailpdkshtala, — tchiA.

I am alidiug, slipping, sliding,

Towards that wretched land, towards that burning region, to remain there.

3. Another of the same:

Tud hak tdla? tua hak tdla?
hu'-iitak tdla, lul'-Atak tdla!

What was itt what was it. It was he, it was himseUI

4. Song of the dry water-spring:

Wdlwash kal nish paldlla -!.-.|j..-|j.-|j.>.

Indeed my spring has dried np.

5. Song of the old frog:

K6-e wela'kash nu tclialekfya, -__^|_j.| !.•

welwdshtat n{i tchallka. -j.\^j.\^j.^

I, the decrepit she-frog, sit down here by the water spring.

6. Song of the wind:

Shl^wish nu vuydmna, s~\j.^\j. ~
ndnukash nH vuydmna, -i _ ^ | -l - | .± -
p'laina nO. vuyt'imna. _-. - | _l ^ | ^ -

I the wind nm blowing,
I'jvery where I am blowing,
In the skies I am blowing.

174

POETIC TEXTS.

7. Song of the five female elks:

Wt'iti lellwa, leliwu; wdti lellwa, lelfwa

The knife lying at the ond of the knife range.

8. Song of the fisher, a species of otter:

TuAtala nish 1 shudshi'pka! niniu, niniA

tudtala nlsh i shudshi'pk if neiney,^, lieneA

Why then do you pursue uio ho f You flutter and bout your wiuga.

9. Young otter's song:

K61talrtm ml weash geiia <imputka;
at kti-u gufzisli kiilla nilfwa,
at kai lemle'nia kiifla.

The otter's ofl'8]ning, 1 phmged into tho water,
When I erjerged from it, the ground blazed up,
The eiirtli whs shaken to its foundations.

10. WeasePs song:

Tchdshgai nii goua, j. _ - ! ^ _

kaf la nt\ gakdla, ' ^ | j. ,

tchdshgai nA gakdla. -^ | -i -

I the weasel am starting;
On the soil I draw my circles;
I the weasel I travel in circles.

11. Song of the weasel:

E-eni nft witka (^hkO'ksam stefnash j. i - - | -

lu the spirit-laiul I lilen out from nir the heart of the sko'ksh.

12 MinUs song:

Kli'pa lift geniilla j.^\j. ^\±^

I the mink am utartiug oif,

13. Sony of the woodpecker:

Wdkwakinsh nu wfnta, j. ^ | j. . | _i _

p'laf tdlshnan waps'ilatat; -i _ j j. _ | j. ^ | _

wdkwakinsli nft wlnta, ^ ^ | j. . | j. _

nft ydna tdlshnan vvinta. -i _ | ^ _ | j. - | _

The woodpecker, I om sticking fast,

L'pwards looking I stick to tho tree-Htiinip :

The woodpecker, I am sticking fast,
Downwards I look, ami hold myself.

INCANTATIONS OF MODOC CONJURERS.

14. Horned oivPn natty:

Mfl'kisham nA Ifi'lpatko, -i | -l _ ^

ude-uddlkatko ktj-u wakl'sh gi. j.__|j.-.|j.__|j.^

I iwsHesH the homed owI'h xlmrp viMiou ; my n>nf-ln4(l«r is of Hpeckled wood.

15. Spider's incantation:

Kiiltchitchlks ml liiy;iiuua, - — | .'. _ | j. ^
p'lafna lift luyaninu. -'- - | j. - | ^ w

I the spiili'i' 11!!! ;;<>iiig uji; upwHnls I travel.

16. Patient's song:

KJifla lift shuiniilla -l~\ 1 ~

I nin miiKiiiK iiiy Knrth Mong.

17. Another of the same:

At gt^-u stefnaali wakidsha!

Now my lipart hiw lutumed.

18. Another of the same:

Atfttft huggi'dsha!

Now it has turia-tll

19. Another of the same:

Gt5-u lift gdpkash kiifla shuaktcha

At'tir 1 Iinil iirrived (in tlio Hpirit laud) the Earth wept and uried.

175

NOTES.

The Modoc series of coujurcr's songs obtained from Mrs. liiddlu is ouc of tbe most
valuable of tbe collection of songs, because it gives them all in tlieir full lengtb and
original sbape. TIk^ majority arc in use among the Klamittli Luke conjurers also.

Tbe songs 3. 9. 17. 18. 10. are delivered ratbor in a siieaking than in a sniging
motlulation of the voice.

173! 1. Sungby a "doctress" whohasaeut out into the air a deceased persou'.s
spirit to search after the disease of her patient.

173; ti. Rime, alliteration and assonance are combined in this interesting song,
which is said to be sung by female conjurers. A spirit is sent underground to prospect
for the disease. A tripartite division of the song-line is found in none of the other
incantations obtained. Kailpiikshtala is a dialectic form for kelpokshtala; after this
word a short pause is made in singing.

173; 3. The conjurer asks tbe returning spuit: •• what did >(iu find to be tbe cause
of the disease, when going below the ground f" The answer is: "he was the cause of
it"'; he is some subterranean deity, or genius, probably Muuatalkni.

173; 4. Probably attributed to a grizzly bear; cf. 167; 40.

173; ."). The frog is piosi)eetiiig for llu^ disease around and within (lie water. Vf.
163; !>.

176

POETIC TEXTS.

178; 6. The wind, while entrusted witli the search for the disease, is blowlnB
through the skies and sweeping over the earth.

174; 7. The mythic elks who sang this were said to Ix- tmdowed with human
faculties. Allusions not triu;oable.

174; 8. This is an incantation which would seem to i)roceed rather from a duck or
goose beating its wings while chamng another, than from a ttsher. First line Modoc
second, Klamath Lake. '

174; 0. The animal had found the dineasv in the water and chased it out to the
• shore; when there it set the slioi-o on «n^ and the ground was shaken up under its
destructive, ravaging steps.

174; 11. The weasel, returning from its errand, rfports to thecoiyurer, that having
found the cause of the patient's disease to be a wi(!ked skft'ks's heart, this was brought
by the weasel to the spirit land and breathed out, to be loft there. This is the most
probable iuterj)retation of all those suggested, for song II. is said to form a sequel to
the weasel's song 10.

174; 13. The kiuks had sent the red headed woodpecker to prostwt for his
patient's disease in the atmosphere. Alliteration and assonance in profusion.

178; 14. Meaning: My eyes are well titt«d for the discovery of the patient's disease,
hovenng in the air, for they are acute, being those of the owl; I am just stepping up
my lodge-hulder, the si)eckled bark of a tree, ou the search for the disease. Allitera-
tion is a prominent feature in this incantation. Of. .Vote to 122, 1. 2.

176; 15. Sent by the conjurer, the spider goes up in the web to prospect for the
disease. The verb shows the prefix 1-, because the body of the spider is round-shaped.

17«; 16. On falling sick, a spirit orders the patient to sing and repeat this Earth-
song line for hours.

1715; 17. "1 have recovei-ed the use of my senses."

KiKASllAH KIUKSAH SHUISH.

INCANTATIONS.

Given by KXkash ok " Doctor John " in the Klamath Lake Dialect.

Kdlo. Kdlo nil na sha'shatk, sla'wish nii iiu sliil'sliatk, ml kdlo p'ldi ml
wftsa.
3 Kdila. Kalla ai nil shui'sh gi; kafla ai nl wdlta, kalla nd ai shawAlta.
M'k. Shdshapsh na sha'shatk; shdshapsham gdnuish, gd-u g^nhuish ml
g^na.
6 Witd'm. N<\ ai wita'm gi, nfi ai shiiina wita'm; nil ai na .sha'shatk an, at an
g^na: g^na an atf, g^mpSle an.

INCANTATIONS.

177

Wm'm Mlo. Witii'm ai n! gdna; nfl a kfl'luak, kft'luak ai n gdna.
Witdmdga. NQ a wl'tftmak, h6tchna n wl'tUmak; witumdk a n; 1dpi ai n<l

wita'mak. 3

WdUag. Na ai hfl wAtsag; flhul'shank, nd ai shulnd u wAtsag.
Wi'hldg. Nfl ai wil'h%, h6tchna n wl'I'hag; gdna an wi'l'hag, ati' ni gdna

nil ; nA-asht sha'shatk williAga n. 6

Walxdtchka. Nfl ai wal^Atchka, wal^Atchka n gdna; kafla ni g^na, nd wul-

kdtchka.
M'lUt. Na a ka'lt gl; kA'lta i ni gdna, kU'ltam at hdk gdnuish. 9

Fe'p. Pa'p a nd gl; pa'p an a nfl sWehatk; nfl a gAtpa pii'p, atf ni hfl'dshna,

nfl a hfl'dshna.
Tchdshgai. Tchdshgai nfl kA-ika, tchushgai nfl gdna. 12

KU'pa. KIlpa nfl ai shul'sh; koydma kli'pam gdnuish.
Gi'wash. Nfl ai ^'wash, p'lafna nfl ai ho'tsna; la'pi ai nl gl'wash, shdshatk

nfl gfwash. J5

Kdk. Nfl ai ka'k gl; sAwals gd-u yA-uya.
Wikwekash. Wdkwekash ai ni shahuAltarapk; nfl wdkwekash slfl'ka, shA-

waltchnlsh slfl'ka wdkwekash. 1 ^

Tsdntsan Nfl ai tsAntsan shui'sh gl; nfl na shii'shatk tsantsana-ag, nfl ai

tsAntsan sha'wa n.
Shke. Nfl ai shgd gi, hfl'ntsna a nfl, tia'muk a hfi'ntsna, nfl a hu'ntsna, mil'- 21
makla nfl shnfl'kuapk, huntsAmpfiluapk a nfl; nfl a kela'wi,
tchaggAya nfl.
Nani'lash. KAlowat shidshfyanina nanflash. 24

Pfshash. Nfl ai pt'shash, pfshash nA-asht shii'shatk: hflt na'sht sha'shatk

pi'shash; guyAntsa pi'shash, nfl guyAntsa.
Shne-ish. Shnd-lsh an na'sht sha'shatk.

Tdplal. Nfl a-i taplAl gi, nfl'sh a-i shlawi'ta, ka'mat a-i shlawfta.
Mpdmpaktish. MpAmpaktlsh an shiun6ta nfl, k'lekAtk an shnaya'na.
Kdwiaga. Nfl a-i kAwiag, ski'ntsn an kAwiag.
Tsialsh. Tsfalsh nfl a hfl'tsna; gd-u nfl kAluish.
TseUyash. Nfl a tseldyash shui'sh gi; tsela'yash mish k6ka.
TM'pksk NA-asht tchkAsh tsfl'pkish, nfl a na sha'shatk, nfl ai mfl'ni kia'm gi. 33
Nxdka. Nfl kitchkAn nfl an n^Aka gdna.
12

17R

POETIC TRXTH.

KH'tcha-aga. VVfnuu ml u kA'tMUg, Hli^Hhatk kA'tmif;; pukitili wi'ik kiVUug.

Wekitaah. N{i ai wekotAsh gi: wdkota nA Hliahualtdmpka, nA Hhahualtdmpka,

3 ml wekt^tuHli Hhcvva.

Mdnhiyti- Nd-u8lit Hhil'Hliatk, mtinkag uhii'Hliatk.

Kakndkh. Gil' a gu-u kdknAlsh, gd-u hAt kdktiAlHli; ml Hhla-ip6lti k^knulsh,

'i p'lii{\va8h kdkmilsli.

Pdpkanh. Papkush wulta gd-ii a gd-inh; wtilta gii-ii gd-ish papkshant lA'lp;

kii'gi gd-u pupkiuth gc-ish.

9 SpA'klisk Nd ai apd'kliHh, nd-asht uhil'Hhatk.

ShlakdtkLsli. Gd-u a Kliliiko'tkHh, gii' ki hfi shlako'tkisli ; wuflni'ts! duku, turn

udsl'tsl; tuiu i'\x'i} tumx iiiiku, ti'mii ge-u anku gi.

12 Pd'ksh. Shui'aham gd-u pa'ksh; ktitchgal gd-u shul'sh.

WeUkag. Nfl ai wolii'kag; nd a tcWa wela';uatkank; ge'k a lA'lp, go'k a irni-

muatch.

NOTES.

The majority of tlx^He souga ar« destitute of iiuy interesting; and ohurocteristio
features, and being of easy interpretation [ gave tliein witliout translation, addinf;,
however, the necessary remarlis in tlie Dititioiiary. These plu-iwes are oomtnon-phice
repetitions of some shaiuanic uhnis current in the tribe, and are given in a low Jargon
or technical shing rednndant in elisions and contractions. Only a few of their number
are rhythmical. The i)ronoun nfi, I, is often repeated tlirec times in one sentence, in
the form of ni, ufi, an (a n(i), ank (a nfi gi), na (nfi a).

Of the thirty -seven objects which have given origin to these songs sixteen do not
occur in the shamanic songs given by other informants and two are given here under
other headings: the sky, paishash (under k(ilo), and the marten, Sk^lamtch (under pefj)).
I have arranged all the songs in cat*»gories of natural objects.

Kiika«h also liirnished a series of limbs and organs of certain animals which were
supposed to exercise supeniatural powers, and therefore were made the subject of a
shul'sh, shuiuotkish, or incantation. They are as follows: of the liUwk bear, the heud,
snout, paws, fur and heart; of the <htg, the head, hair, fur, ears, tail and paws; of the
wetwd (tchiishgai), the head, o.yes, snout, nose, chin, long hair, ))aws and tail; of the
mink, the paws, snout, fur, tail and heart; of the nhn^inhiJuA; tlw heiul and legs; of
the salmftH, the head and llns; of the ffy, the wings (ias, black or white) and legs.
About the young antelope and oM woman^n fipirit (wil'hag and weV'kaga) see below.

176; 2. witsa. When the clear sky is said to blow with a shrill sound (wftsa), and
thus "to sing its own song", this means that tlie winds are blowing flereely through
the air, high above the ground.

176; 3. This song on the grumbling or rattling earth (wtilta, hualta) was made by
Doctor John on the subject of his own imprisonment, the cause of which I have related
elsewhere.

176; t. Shiishapsh, SliAsliapamtch is themythologicnamcol'the grizzly bear: 118, 1.

SUBJECT r,iaT or incantations.

170

177; 2. "Tliero ivre two of m black J)cur cubs" rpfere to tho oirciimfltanco that in
in.vthologic talcH two tubs only iii(» found to bt'long to one Iwiir fumily. Coniimru what
18 suid of tho tflwiwli, 177; 14. antl Note to 118, 1. 7.

177; 5. Tho niiuin of tlio youujr untchtpo m very dittorontly pronounced. Ita ourn
(munift'atch wil'hAKatn) form the Hidtjfct of u Hhul'Hii.

177; 13. Koy6uni. Tho Hunie idea in met wUh in 168; 5(1. 166; 24.

177; 14. K^wash (the i pronounced nhort) ia the long, Braycobred Hquirrol.

178; 7. P(V|ikHHh. This hour of the bimber-boanlH wiw more completely remem-
bere«l than the one quoted 100; \H.

170; 12. I'a'kHh. A Hiniiiar tobacco iii|)o Hong jh to be found 167; S3.

178; i;<. wel(^kag. Here im well as in all other iiortions of the j;lobe tho idea of
Horcery and witchery is assoiiiated with that of old women (weKikaNli, «)ld woman;
welokdfftt old wouiau's spirit). VVelil'/atka, to travel around or appear as an old
woman's spirit.

NInUKTUA Kll/KBAM SHUi'sH.

SUBJECT LIST OF VARIOUS KINDS OF INCANTATIONS IN
USE AMONG THK KLAMATH LAKE PEOPLE.

OBTAIfmO FnoM "SF.nGKANT" MOROAN.

YAmash kidksam shui'sh, mii'ash, tzAlaraash, v($wa8li, sla'wlsh,

North wind bu an lno«ntatlon«oiig, Math wind, went wind, IsMt wind, Riiit of w.nd.

paishash, Igm^-ish, liiepalsh, ktddahash, gulkiish.

cloud, thunder, llghtnlnK, ruin, r«Tn nilxid with

Know.

Sdppas kiuksam shufsli, shap'sam stutl'sh ; yafna, wAlidsh, ktd-i sA'- 3

Sun haa a tamtnaoahmng, mnckaun; mnuutalu. rockcllff, rockn

smaluatk, hii'nuash, yati'sh, sdniza-uah, Ji-ush, wdlwash, kAwam, wiiyd-

•pottod, upright rooks, upright rooki, rooka in river, lake, water-apring, eeUprlng, floMing

amaller,

lapsn.

loe.

SnAwedsh kidksam shut'sh, weli^kag, tsdkiag, tsdkiaga tsfl'^atzant; 6

Woman haa a taintanaah-eoDg, old wnman'n little bov, little boy recUwwi

uplril.

k'mutcha'witk : kiS-idshi shui'sh gdnti kii'ilati.

the old man I (la) an nnto- aong inthix country.

ward

Gil'tkaks kidksam shui'sh, gudftguls, shfllals, tdtktlsh, luMlish, til6-

Smallpox la an IncantaUon, belly aohe, oUr.-.nIo pain, orampa, canne

aickneaa,

takna, tia'mish. 9

of alokneaa, hunger.

Mundna tatAmnish kiuksam shui'sh, kSlAyua, raiikukag, wAshlaag,

Mote liaa H tamAniiaHh-soDf;, inYtnnHninnic fii rtnoiite, ohlpmnnk,

'< :^

180

rOETIC TRXTS.

u/t.il

II !

gi'wash, ts^sgai, tsdskaya wdash, k61td wt?as, Skdiamtch, walpjatska, kutcL-

aqnlrrel, vreanol, wattBel'n yonng, otter*!! yonng, Old Marten, bI«ok mnrteo, doer's

ingsh, w&n, kd-utchish, witii'm, M'k.

claw, sUTer* gray wolf, black bear, grlazlr.

fox,

3 Yaiikal kiuksam sliul'sb, tcLuaisli, tstisxibs, sk61os, p'laiw.ish.

Bald eagle bnn a roedioine^ong, Mack Tultare, a black night* tnrkoy* gray eagle.

bird, buzzard,

Nduki'sh kiiiksani shui'sh, wftkatkish, tsfktu, tsAntsaii, tiiktukuash,

Pigeon hawk liim ;in iiiuniitittion, small liiivvk. inico-huwli, liltleliabing- flab hawk.

hawk,

slikil', spfi'm.

gi'.i.v bawk apeolea.

(j Wdkwakinsh kiuksam shui'sh, shpfu'huush, skaukush.

]v«d-headed wood- baa an inoantatlon, spotted wn.iclpecker, large black

pooker woodpecker.

K^ikan kiuksau. shui'sli, tsoks, tchiutchfwiish, niL'-uHnsli, ^hua't.

Crow ia a medlcino-eoiig blackbird, "snow-prodncpi," itiiv-k forest bin), Re<lge^:ock.

Wlhursh kii'-ishalsh shAyuaksh kiuksam shui'sh, ka'kak=tkanl tsfkka.

Snowbird in eiiov making expert is a conjurer's medicine, vi'liowiah bipl,

9 kal;jals (kdls), tchfkass kshikshnlsh, wuipl(5-ush, skulii, tsfs^izi, tchii'-ush,

a epotte<l nl^t-bird, a mountaiB forest biid, litilo forest bird, lark, tiixxix') yellow-hammer,

niisbtilansn^ash, tsx{i-ut8;ija'-ush, p6p4sikas.

"rollbeod'', blue Jay, pOp-tsikas.

Kd'Ua kiuksaui shui'sh, wdaks, ndla, mpampaktish, tsaolaks, luamak-

Red-becaed has nn incantation, malf.ird, little sniaildaok, red-oyed dock, black and

dnck Itlack duck,

12 tsu, kflidshiksh, vvd-u'htush, tiiiti, miilalak, p6p=waks.

white large dnck, long legged c^.nck, "oung sboveler-duck, pop-witks.

dnck, (I k.

Wefvvash kiiiksam shufsh, ku'sh, kiimal, tsakfiuuish, tidiakiuks, tap'.al.

White K -'OB** in a doctor's medicine, swan, pJican, twlk^Qosb, ugrnytbwl, loon.

Mdhiiis kiuksam shui'sh, yii'n, tsuam, tsil'lpas, tchAwash, ku'tagsh,

Tn-nt is A co^jnrer's medicine* siuali iurge sucker, tsdlpuah- a little sucker, mlnnow.flsh,

song sncker, tlsb

15 tsAlayash.

salmon.

Wamgnags kiijksaai shui'sh, kdmtilag, wfssiuk, kd-ish.

RIaek sunke i.i a poDg-modicinc, a black siiake, gartersnake, ruttlesnake.

La=a-dmbotkish kiuksam shufsh, wii'kiitas, k6a, kfa, skii'tigs; lakf

■ Xever.Tbirsty" is a conjuror'^ song, green frog, toad, li'ard, lizard; chief

18 shuisham k(5-il. Klnsh kiuksam shuish, ampuam l/ik.

(is) of songs toad. Yellow- is a conjurer's medicine, liorse-hnir.

Jacket

Wil'kash kiuksam shui'sh, wAssuass, ktsdamu, sPi'l, waktii'lash, wa'lilas.

Pond-lily seed is a medielne-song, lacnstrine grass, aquatic grass, arrow sliaft-wond, iwle-tree.

reed,

W^i'ns kiuksam shui'sh, ktsfk, sakuas, ki'sh; sx'i'l, k'nuk«, ndti'ks.

Dug-ont in an incantation, oar, flsh.spear, iiarpiioii ; otter.skiu ro)ie, pestle,

canoe strings,

21 p^ia, kAtchgal, sawals.

sooop, Indian toba.wo, arrowhead.

Tiint waki'sh kiuksam fhui'sh, shashtauu'lols, wash, sluiuhish, jjiipkas,

Oi.iweat* inside ladder is a coivJorer'a 'tong, outnideladderof sweat- eTcavatinn, rafter, lumber,

bouse floor bonso,

8tsA-usa wi'ilk.s, hVloks, phl'kops, slfi'mdamd^wasli.

Hiiek.hole, Arc, citvity, remains of old sweat-house.

SUBJECT LIST OF INCANTATIONS.

181

Lfi'baks, kldpki kiukaauj sluii'ah, tsd-usaui skli'tatk, t=(4-usara teiiyatk,

white r.hAilr red palDt are dooton* Bon^, tflhd-nsh-dresiied, fn».A-n«K.ii««ji.«/.^ii..jui

Whit* chalk, red paint are dooton' aonga,

tsd-usam la'sh, witkakfaham la's.

tata6-Qsb'feather, hawk's feather.

Kat'sitsutsudas kiiiksam

SnoW'ttake nitcbcraft is a Jootor'a

skd'ksam bii'kskish, hii'uusiHh.

•plrit'a valklnR-staff, roijnrer'a arrow.

tcbi-nah-h«sd.0OTered.

shulsh, kat'hidwash, l{l'luks=Rk<i'tchaltk, 8

nnK, hair-tying, in flre-rob«d.

NOTES.

All these subjects of tamdnuasli songs were obtained pell-mell and jotted down in
a confusion. A clear insight into the quality of the Hougs known to this Indian coiilrt
be attained only by classifying tlioni into categories, as those of natural agencies,
the winds, rocks, genera of animals, ]ilants, tools and articles of native dress. Morgan
had heard all these songs sung in former years, but when I met him he could remember
the texts of those 71 songs only, which are to be fouiul from page 164 to page 171.
Many songs of this subject list are sung by tlie Modoc conjurers also.

Cartain names of uncommon species of animals could not be rendered in English
for want of information ; to others the Dictionary will atfbrd the best clue.

179; 4. kiiwam or kdwara is a possetsive case, requiring as its complement s'imi»fi
or k6ke, kokeaga. To bathe in eel-springs is deemed to be of great influeuec on
character and personal courage, for tlie constant peril of being bitten by crabs, snakes
and other reptiles nnist necessarily make the bathers scornful against sudden iiains.

179; 6. tsft';^at;^ant, or in its full form: tSH;^aT/4ntko, has to be connected attribu-
tively with the Ibregoing word: tsiikiag tsu';i^at/antko "a restless boy, a little boy
unable to keep quii't on his seat."

18C; ]. tsaskfiya wt'ash, kolta weas show the apocopated form of the possessive
before a vocalic sound. This is another example of the ride that Klamath seeks rather
than avoids hiat'iK. Cf stsA usa=Wiilks 168; 45; 180; 23, and Note to 168; 41.

180; 5, spu'm; said to be the female of the fat shka'-bird. There exist conjurers'
songs about both, which I have given in this volume, page 167; 3(i. 168; 44.

180; 10 'p:tchikash seems to mean the *' drinking or sipping bird" (cf. popo-i).

180; ara-.lmbotkish, "the one which refuses to drink" seems to be a newt,

Amblysv ■ , according to the description given of it by the Indians.

180; .1, k6ii. The toad or bull-frog tamilnuash song is i-eputed to be the most
efBcient of all these 'ncantations.

180; 18. Ampuam Kik is a fllm-like organism moving rapidly in spirals or meanders
through the vater, and supposed by rustics to originate from the long hair of horses.
The primary sigaiflcatiou of dmbutka, to be thirsty, is " to return to tlie water", and
the distributive form a-dmbutka here indicates repetition.

180; 19. The h&t oiplanU is very small when compared to that of the animals, and
enbodies economical plants only.

180; 22. w6sl! means place of residence in general ; but since all the objects in this
category ro*""! to the sweat-boubo, it may be referred to a removal of earth in the floor
of this structure ; Ifiloks is the Jre burning in the centre of it.

182; 1. ts6-usani .skii'tatk: "dressed with feathers of the yellow hammer or red
shafted flicker."

■St

i;-

182

rOSTIO TBXTS.

bS;>

COOING AND WOOING.
I.

1. Yuyulinne, yuyuliniie, yuyulinne

I havu passed into womauhood.

2. I-uneksze'ni a yulina ^ -_|-i,-|.!.>.|^_

After sunset I get nuwell.

3. Gii' Ush kanl hudshdtcbipka? ^j.|-^|-^|_^

Who comes there riding towards mot

4. G^nu f gft', o-61ka, kinhiii'na! j.|_^|»^|_j.^

My little pigeon, fly right iuln I lie dovecot !

5. Gindla h61akank ; dtfltd pa'ztgi ~_|_-i|--|-j.|-j-_

This way follow mo, before it is full dayliglit!

6. At mish mbusha'aluapka Idkiam wdashash gi'sht

I want to wed you, for yon uiu the vhiuf 's sou.

7. Kd-a mfsh nvl kd-a nl mbushdaluapka, i|^-.i.| :.|_„j.-

hilmilninslit tuma tud gi'tkuapka. --i| !.|_^j.|^

Very much I covet you for a husband,

For in times to come you will live in affluence.

8. She: Tatd 1 n'sh tud wojj6we, woz6we, wo^cSwef
He: £-ukik pi'la ^wank, dwank, dwank!

She: And when will you pay for me a wedding gift?
Be: A canoe I'll give for you half filled with water.

9. W^wanuish kahidvvuk tdla k(5kekanka -i. |_-i-|j._-|z^

He spends much money on women thinking to obtain thvut easily.

10. Miishmush shfi'dshipka kdwantk tchilloydga j.^\j.--\j.-\~^^j.

Tbu poor youngster, he is driving one cow only.

11. G^ntala kd-i gaikanka pdshpushlish hisbudksbash!

It is not that black fellow that I am striving to secure I

COOmG AND WOOING.

12. 1-u n^nak yan'wdn 1, ^-|jl^|j.__
1-u n^nak 161al;{' t j.^|_!._j^__

'Ibey Bay, that you are abandoned,
They say, that you are homeless.

18. Ndnuk kall'napka w^wan'sh, na'dsbek 'mutchdwatk tut'bidna

All women are dead; only an old man is tottering about.

14. Kd-a tldshi snaw^dshash ni'sh shA'-uashipk !

That is a pretty female that follows mo up!

15. Wdk 1 Biish giik vuldlat inotfla? -^j.|_-^|-.,^|--

Why do you send me to sleep under the shadow of the cotton wood- tree!

16. NA'sh ak gi'ntak 1 wltchnoka -^ . | j- - - | -i ^ _
Idlula wltchnoka ^ ^ ... j j. , _

That 's because you love me that yon rattle around the lodgtti

1 7. Tchdki mish gunl'ta, ^ _ _ | j. _ _

tcbdki mtsh guni'ta, j. - _ | -i w -

huwali^ga luld-uash skiitatk, j.__|-i~|-L__|j._
lulii-uaah skiitatk huwalidga. -i_^|^-)j. — | —

A youngster beyond your home, a young man beyond your lodge

Ban up the hill, wrapped in fogs, ran up the mount while robed in mists.

18. Kaydta hii'lhe, lid'Ihekaiika tchdki, (bis) -|--|

kaydta Ift'li, Ifi'likauka tchdki. (bis) -|--|

Into many of tho little houses ran the boy,

Roughly ho touched many of the little houses, tho boy.

19 Gd-u lakl wayo'sham 8tfi't;^antk h(i't

My husband has the voice of the white goosu.

20. Gd-u lakf ydkikam shkutdntki

My husband is dressed in the feathers of tho jay-Iiird.

21. Ydkikam stA'tzantk gd-u laki j.--|j.^|j.^^|^

My husbaud has the voice of the mocking-bird.

22. Pdlpali watsdtka huah61al;{a

He is bouncing around on a white horse.

23. Tatsa'lka wdts snukdtkank _ j. | _ j. | _ j. ^

Ho pets the horso before he grasps him.

24. Tdplal w<3-a hA'ndank nifi stfi'tzantko

Loudly cries tho spotted loon while skimming the waters.

25. Wf-uka huli'lzank skfi'Ie huntchfpka |--l_|^^.|^^

The lark flics towards mo grazing the ground and stopping every little while.

183

184 POETIC TEXTS.

26. Wdk 1 nflsh gfug wetA', wetfl', --^| ^|--t

i-d-uka hft'lhiank wetfl', wetfi'. ---i.| ^|-.^

Why did you become estranged, ostrauged.

By running in neighbors' honses estranged, estranged f

27. W6k wennfluta niish gl'tkl
wdk 1 nflsh gl'tk wennflotat

Why have yon become so estranged to mef

28. Kd-idsi mdklaks ho'lalk tchawi'k sandhoHug

A wicked man approaches fast, desirong of n fight.

29. Sheniiyatko nl wdti luya'nitki •

I fleo before the man who tramps around in the lodge, knifo in hand.

30. Kd-idshi wdtsag shkandkapka k6kuapkug,

kd-i nl shandhual nd k6ktkinshkiuk. L|_.i.|_jL^^|j!..

That viciong dog assails me and will bite,
But I prefer not to scold him for it.

31. Ka'-udshish topfnkan w6kanka, j.~~\~j.~.\-l^^
ydmat tdluitgank w6kanka. _!.-|j.__|^^-

The younger brother of the gray wolf is howling,
After haying gone North he is howling.

32. Wdsh a l<5ka gl'tk g(i' n'sh hiiyaha ^~\^~\.l^\j..^\j.

The prairie-wolf full of anger runs away from me.

33. Wdsh lekd gltk washdlal^ tchikglank wdtaat

The maddened prairie-wolf gets away riding on his horse.

34. Wdsh l^ggatz nl'sh hiiyaha,

wdsh 1 Idggatk' kd nish hdyaha ! hu-l-yfthft!

Crazy-minded the prairie-wolf flees mo;

Maddened in Lis scnsos he rttns away to a far-off distance.

35. K<5-id8hi wdtch genudla, j.-~|-:.--|-i-
hai ydshinko, y6-osink! _ ^ - „ |^ ^ -

A vicious steed has gone out ; he is lost, he is strayed I

36. Tatd mlsh kanl Idpukni ggndlla?

Who has touched yon at both places f

37. A n<i toks shiwdga sh^wa, jl.-_|j.-w|j!.^
kdy utch mlsh pdtchnam palaldant -L_|j._|-iw|i_

I hold you to be an innocent girl, thongh 1 have not lived with you yet.

COOING AND WOOmO.

38. TdrnMsh pdsh n<l tum6na, -^ -
wdtchagalam wdash shil'walsh tilimSna. -t - - - 1 -i .

Over aud over they tell me,

TbAt thJH RROundrel has insulted me.

39. Gdtala std' newAlza ! -i - _ | j. - 1 -l -
tudtala tsdyalalz' i*? ^^~ ~\j. ~\s~

Bight ahead I follow the uiihill iiatli !
Why then do you swing the body around t

40. Wafwash gancUla shiwdksbash,
shlwamptchasb waiwash gaiidfla.

White gocgo saw a womuu hiding,
Saw an old maid hiding in the grass.

41. Tiihush o wlllaslina, j. _ - 1 j.

wilhaslasna, wlllaslina. -l^ |-i

Mhush o wHlasla, j. - _ | j. - _
wilhaslasna, willasla. -•- 1 - - -

The mud-hen sprawls on the top ;

On (ho top it rests, it slides from the top.

42. Wi-iltf nil shotelo'la, ^^|^_|^-,|j.-
puniam nfl u-dsh goy^na. ^-|j.>-|j-_|-1_

I am rolling up the wl'l, and shall walk around in the beavers'

43. KA'lsh kule6tank kl' nak 6n gi', -l__|^_|j.

mdne kule6tank kl' nak 6n gi'. j._-w|^_|-l-^

The badger entering his den maltps uak, nak, nak,
The fat (badger) entering makes nak, nak, uak.

44. Kd-i weli'sht i mish ahmdkalpsh gi'sli shtipa; -t _
w^wanuish gfntak shewal, shdwal.

Just now you affirmed that hairless you were,
But the women say, that hairy yon are.

45. Ndpal ai na'd shuntdwa-udsha ^j.|_-i|_-i|^-w

We are throwing eggs at each other.

46. E antl^ya mdyas a

47. Yuyuline'pka, yuyuline'pk; . c „ | - -i _ || ^ - 1 w j: ^

48. Ynnigshjje'ni yulfna

185

-?ai

den.

-l^-k-l-

186 POETIC TEXTS.

49. Wdnni talna, wdnni teina, --jl^( i^

w^nni tafna ihi'-n- i- i- i- vi!

A different yonng woman I .,ui now ; iUt-n (

50. Tdt 1 wdktch li<ik a t^lak shayantildsha? ^j.\^j.\^1\^j.\^j.^

Whence have you carried off tliiit (innu'd) wainfoont?

51. Un4 mlsh sha luel61a tchaggdgatat netllapkash

Long ago th«y killed you when you lay under the serviceberry bush,

52. Tchltchaluish kintdla, -l . . | ^ _|_l _
wdwanuish ka-ig6ga. -i^_|^^-|_l_

Young chaps tramp around ;

They are on the lookont for women.

53. Hinawdla ! hinawdla ! !._(|_„i„

wdtchagam wt'ash, wdtchagam weash, i.-_|-:-||j.,^|^^
mfi'at geno'ga, mfi'at geno'ga. -i-^I-i-||jl,_|j.,

Shake your head ! yon son of a bitch, and go South.

54. Girls to boys:

Kd-i mish nil wftchta tchilluydgash
hll'kank kailt^ak skiitash ;
kd-i nil shandhuli M'mtcha hishudtchzash.
Boys to girls:

Kd-i n<i shandhuli k(5-eptcha snawddshash,
k6knapkash hVlp gfpkash.

Girls: Yonng man, I will not love yon, for you run around with no blanket on ;

I do not desire such a husband.
IIoi/h: And I do not like a frog-shaped woman with swollen cyps.

55. Kdnl lakf ! giuga shlda shlanlya ! ~-:-|--i| !-|^-l[^j.|_

You say you are ricli ! and you don't oven spread a wild-cat's skin !

56. Ko'pe bunu'tchatko stfi'pat wintila;

nfl'sh shana-uhtko nfi'toks mlsh kd-i shand-uli.

Lying near the stove you are going to drink cofteo ; although you wanted me for
a wife, I do not w.int you for a hnsbaiul.

57. Shf nuitko hiiyaha, -l ^ | .^ _ [ ^ ^ j _
wdnuitko hiiyaha. -l ^ | ^ „ | j. ^ | _

After c— she went to hide ; the widow, sho hid herself.

68. Mu'ni wenuf tko gdlash shipalkdnka -i~\-L-^\j.^\j.^\j.^

Th« itout widow is stalking around intent upon the business.

OOOING _VND WOOING.

187

NOTES.

I. Erotic tiODgs obtained from Chief Johnsou, Miunie Frobeu, aud others, in the
Elauiath Lake dialect. The twelve songs obtained from Minnie Froben are among the
prettj(«.st and most melodious, as for instance 9. 16. 17. 18. 25. 26., and the eighteen songs
dictated by Johnson are of importance for the stndy of manners and customs, viz: 0.
7. 8. 10. IL 19. 20. 28. 29. 41. 42. 43 etc.

With the Indians all of these aud many other erotic songs pass under the name of
pilpil or puberty songs. They include lines on signs of womanhood, courting, love
sentiments, disappointments in love, marriage fees paid to parents, on mairying and on
conjugal life. Some love songs have quite pretty melodies. A few songs of the present
interesting series of song-lines stem to treat of commonplace subjects only, as 22. to 24.;
28. to 31 ., while others apparently contain nothing but heartless mockeries and satiric
strictures, like 9. 28. 40. 44. But they all refer in fact to love-making and kindred
sentiments, the satiric lines confirming the proverbial inclination of lovers to fight
among themselves. I have deemed appropriate to gather all these songs under a
heading which unmistakably expresses their real purport.

182; 1. The accent is laid sometimes on first, sometimes on second syllable. This
word is abbreviated from ynyuline'pka, as it occurs in the Modoc pilpil song. The
event mentioned here is followed by a dance-feast ; cf. shOyu^alsh, and 134, 21.

182; 4. g>uhi6na "inside" means into a secluded spot, lodge or enclosure. 0-61ka,
6'laka is the diminutive of O'lsh, the grayish pigeon with the plaintive voice.

182; 7. gitkuapka, a contraction of gitko siuiipka 1.

182; 8. Pay a wedding gift is equivalent to purchasing a girl from her parents for
a handsome consideration.

182; 11. Sung by women. The original a& given to me does not contain the
negative x>article: G<^ntala nft haikanka piishpuahlish hishn&kshash.

183; 12. yan'wdn 1 stands for yanhuCmi i.

183; 13. kali'napka: they are not only "dead but out of sight", as the suffix -apka
indicates. This being an erotic song-line, kalinapka simply means that the females
looked for are either asleep or absent, aud not deceased, as kalina would seem to
indicate. 'nmtch6watk for k6mutchewatko; <tf. 136, 5.

183; 14. 15. These two songs follow a purely anapaestic metre. No. 15 adding two
acatalectic syllables to its three anapaests. Compare also the first line of 182 ; 7. with
one supernumerary syllable. As for the contents of 183; 15. compare the analogous
Modoc song 186 ; 51.

183; 17. Melody very engagiug. In liiluash the second n is redoubled for metrical
reasons. Dactylic rhythm prevails here, in 16, and in 182; 11.

183; 18. That is, while he was seeking young girls inside the kaydtaa. Melody
very beautiful.

183; 19. waydsham, possessive case of walwash, q. v.

183; 20. shkutAntki stands for sklitatko gi or shkutandtko gi: "he is wrapped in."

183; 31. The much more so, because he is in his festive garb, the patash and l&s
stuck on his headdress.

184; 26. Melody very pretty. A young woman addresses these words to a lover.

184; 27. Sung by young women who have fallen out with their beaux.

188

POETIC TEXTS.

184; 28. Said to be an erotic 80ug.

184; 29. luyii'iiitki contracted from luya'nitko gl. Of. Note to 188; 20.

184; 30. k6ktkiii8hkiuk. The proper meaning of tliis verb is "to set upon like a
dragon-fly ". Sl.aniiliual is an uncommon form for shanahO'li, the long being resolved
mto Its component sounds. Cf. niiwal, and 184 ; 35. : genndla for geno'la.

184 ; 31. Why did the wolf howl ? The reason given is that he could not meet any-
body. This wolf is a loving young man who was looking out for women.

184; 32. Sung by one woman and repeated by a female chorus. Tliis song-line
treats of the abandonment of a female by her husband or lover for some reason.

184; 33. Pretty melody. The song refers to u lover disappointed in his aflectious.

184 ; 33. tchikla wAtsatka is preierable to and more frequent than wdtsat, wdtchtat,
cf. 183 ; 22. Alliteration is perceptible in tliis song-line.

^ 184; 34. The wdsh is the lover of the girl who Kings tliis song; the lover is com-
pared to a prairie-wolf on account of his importunity and lack of moderation. Com-
parisons of Icrvers with quadrupeds and birds are IVeqiiently met with.

184; 35. yoshiuko for y6ishiauk o, yo-ishinti. hu: he is running astray.

184 ; 37. shiwdga. In the objective case sometimes inflected like sndwedsh woman
80, 11. sometimes as a diminutive nonn, as here, and 33, 10. In 185; 40. shiwdkshash
stands incorrectly for shiwAgash, through phonetic analogy with shiwamptchash in the
same song

185 ; 39 to 44, perhaps including 45, have a literal and direct meaning, and besides
this arc intended to convey an indu-ect meaning, wliich is of an obscene character
The same may be said of songs 15 and 51.

185; 41. This melodious song alludes to the habit of mud-hens to rest and sj.rawl
on the top of the waves ; wilhaslasna depicts their motions while on the wave-top
willaslina the sprawling observed while they sail down from it. With slight phonetic'
variations, this same melody is also sung as follows : Tohosh o willaslln; willaslasna
willaslina; wlllasl I In.

185; 42. wi'l seems connected with the diminutive word wil'haga, youni/ deer.

185; 43. ki' nak fin gi', stands for gi' nak, nen gt: "he cries nak, so he cries »•
assuming that Cn is abbreviated from nen.

185 ; 45. This is a "dream" song.

185; 40. Pilpil song worded in another than the Mdklaks language.

II. Erotic songs obtained from Toby Kiddle and J. C. D. Riddle in the Modoc
dialect. The Modoc pilpil songs obtaiueO arc all of a satiric character.

185; 47. See Klamath Lake pilpil son^vs 182; 1.

186; 48. See Klamath Lake collection of i)ilpil songs 182; 2.

186; 49. Pilpil tune sung by girls. Taina is equivalent to t'dna, teiniwilash etc.

186; 60. A song repeated for hours by young Modocs; it is of the true pilpil kind.

186; 61. Originally a pilpil song, but sung now by children playing hide and seek.

186; 52. This is a very popular and prettily tuned Modoc song.

186; 53. Sung by Modoc giris who feel themselves importuned by their lovers.
Often the boys join them by singing it in chorus. This well-meant advice of sending
the boys to the South, no doubt to the Pit Eiver country, is to keep them at a distance,
for the song refers to the appearance of the first signs of puberty. Watchdgalam is
ftill form of watchdgam, for which wAtcham is sometimes incorrectly substituted.

SONGS OF SAT IRK.

189

186; 51. 'J'hiK satiric carmen amaheeum is one of the longest pieces in the coIUm--
tion and contains words of reprobation addressed by disappointed girls to their jid-
mirers. Sung in chonis by both sexes, with frequent dacapos after different tnnes.
The sufllx -ash repeats itself at the end of every line and in koknapkash.

186; 55. This little iambic improvisation is very ai)lioristicnlly .ind indistinctly
worded, but is endowed with perhaps tlic, prettiest tuuo of all songs in this collection.
It is an apostrophe of a newly married wife; to her husband, Reeing lu>rself deprived
even of the most common comfort, a small tanned fur-skin, fo repose on and to avoid
the dampne^'s of the bare soil.

186; 56. A lover is taunted. on aiicountof his predilection for the white man's
habits. The Modocs say this is a scmg of the Klamath Lakes.

186; 58. Admits of no literal translation.

SONGS OF SATIRE.
I.

1. K^tcbkal A'yank amniyaiuna -L~|^^|-i.^|^^

He goes around giving away itioks of tobacco, and is very noisy about, it.

2. Get gena'la tsidlash patso'k Yainakl'ahamkshi

This man has started out to feed on salmon luiioug the nmtlu'iii ludiauN.

3. Tii'sh hu wikd ndnu sh^sha wafwash tchdamnu If

Where is it, that oloae by on a hill wafwash-gccgi^ ar« crowding together!

4. Gd-u kdni vii'lkashti wdtch hushdtchipka? -._-i|_-^(,-L|_^|

Who rides np to me on my horse, borrowed of mo t

6. TidshA k6katk i shdwa, hashudtan' J! ^_-^|^^-f.|.^_i|_^

You think you are finely dreased; thou mind your own dress!

a. VHijjashti klli'wash shkiitatk ii'lilutufna

He dresses in a borrowed woodpcckcr-blankot and tvails it along on the gronnd.

7. Kd tal M'k vaU shdtaluatk? j. - 1 ^ _ | ^ _ _
Ke' lish tok wal;udtchkatko gAlf ^_j-i^|.. «,^|_.i

Who is he, the alleged wealthy mau f

She has entered the houHo of a poorly dreased hnsband.

8. Lelah6witko w/itoh \vu;^/)yi ^-|i__|j._|j._

Slow-running hor«es lio paid for his wifo.

Ill

190 VOKTW IMXTS.

9. Anifita tcwank viVya tefnivvnsli • _ ( - _|z_I^__

Th(« y.mng girl tihnkiM her liorty wliuii pluiitiiiK Mir ciiiiiitHit-Htiok into tha gronnd.

10. AmCta yti'kuank viiyanina -i- -Ij. _ _|j. ^ .

SliiikiiiK Iii>r liody hIid hrokii Hie canuisa-apade.

11. Ldkiani pt'-iu mat sha kiifla kiwalnpata

The ohinf » <laiiBht«r, thoy wiy, wiw lUaggM nlonn the Bronncl.

12. t haktcluiniposh wonui t(;hik(')liil;(ii, J.,j'-,l.?.,.lz__
kUtishain vvcawli wcnni tchikoli'il;^' i. ~|-i-|-i-li._|j.__

You always strangoly stride on on your Ioiik I,«m.
The eniuu's progeny, you walk strangely Idiiff-lfjfKfil

13. E-nkshiwash tenuyaga ha'la-a IiAla -^--|-'-_|^>|j._.(__

A young woman from Kluiiiivtli Marsh is swallowing, Hwallowing.

14. Wika^tdlantko tcliii'lish pAwa hfl --i|--L|-.|--i|„.

Short-faced like a porcupiue that fellow is tatiug.

15. Liielat lid'uksh lii't; yanta, yAnta jl__|j._|j._|^_

Kill ye ihat fellow on the sjiotl down with liim, down, down!

1 6. Kii'utchlsh gfl'lo silmfinaki' wd'ii lakf ---i|^_-L| ^l__

When the female wolf Iiiw devonnd the elk-liuik she cries for more.

17. Shnnuf-uya shuaktcha ~ ^s\ j.\.

I feel unwell and hence inu sobbing.

ir.

1 8. Ledsli Antak wi wakni'ka ; gafgaikanka --i|--i|j.^l,-^|^^

They whipped a telltale ; he is now sobbing.

19. Bl'nash inilt lul hUvasli tilaiikaiisha! -i _|-!.-| j.^ _U_ _

The root-basket, they say, is swinging to ami fro on Bi'ns back.

20. L6-i 16yan 16yak, 16-i I6yaii luyak

21. fi-ukshikni tenuydash hald, hald-a -^|-~-i-|~j.(s,^_

A maiden of the Klamath Lakes is Hw:illM\vinK. divoniiiin.

22. Nfggn heiie hdyo, ni'ggft h^yo h^we - - | ' - || - -|-l

tumi nfggfi, ti'imi nfggft -^ - | - || _ _ |_ ,

NOTES.

The feelings which dictated these sarcastic song-lines are those of derision satire
and criticism. The majority are of a drastic, some even of a (^rnde autl very offensive
ohnraeter, scourging mercilessly the infirmities observed on lellow-men. Many of them

SONdH OF HATIUK.

19t

iiIho i»a«8 as pulMnty Hongs, hut I have i>refen'od to clu«tt thtwo uiiUi'i llio houiliiij,' of
mugs <)f Hatiif. Some are sung with mclodios, others ui-o Hpokcii and recited oiilj .

I. Satiric mmgn ol)taiiicd in tho Klamath Lake dialect froin Chief JolinHon, Miiiiiio
Frobfiii and uthorH.

189; 1. ft'yank. In this term tho pretlx u- RivcH the Hhajie in wliieh the tobacco
waH Kiven away.

189; 2. ItoferH to somebody RoinK to the Dalles or other plmie nhmg tho Columbia
River. CI", page 98, yotc.

189; a. In this vorso there aro four particles pointing either to distance or to eleva-
tion (altitnde): tft'sh, hu, tho -u sufllxed to nen (nen hu) and to tchflamna. This sonj,'
is sung by a woman, who hoars (nen) lor the first time of this assembling of geese;
sh(''sha waiwash stands for shdshash walwash, or sh^shatko waiwash: birds called
waiwa8h=geo8e.

189; 5. A young woman is the object of this song-lino.

189; 0. Woodpecker-scalps of shining colors are still in use for ornamenting vai-i-
ous articles of dress, implements, &e. ii'hlutulna: he flaunts it and pai-ades in it.

189; 7. K(i tail who then? who after all! abbreviated from kani tala. Dresses
nuule of walj^fitchka-skins passed for the poorest and meanest of all garments.

190; 9. This is sung by men only.

190; 13. A satire on feminine voracity. Sung by Klamath women from Klamath
Marsh. Cf. below, 190; 21.

190; 12. haktch&mpesh ; -pesh is the suffix ptchi phonetically altered, the word
introducing a comparison of the "striding one" with the young klitish-crane in the
same song. A sarcasm on a long-legged person with swiugintr gait.

190; 10. l{(igularly worded, this ])roverb like verse would reiwl as follows: Kii'-
utclush gti'lu wO'n=lAUia8h shamenakia.

XL Satiric songs obtained in tho Modoc dialect from Toby Riddle and J. 0. D.
Riddle.

190; 18. A tatler has received the deserved bodily pnnishnient for his gossip-tales.
Of tho first word no grammatie analysis could bo obtained in either tribe.

190; 1!). The business of gathering edible roots devolves excslusivoly on woman,
but here an old man, Bin, who still lives among tho Modoc; at Yiineks, is indulging in
this useful pastime. That 's where the point of tho satire lies. HHvash is a word
unknown to the Klamath Lake people iu the signification of "basket".

190; 20. Sung by the national deity when foiled in the attempt of killing five
lynxes by throwing stones at them; rei)eated from the sha.shapk(516ash, page 126, 3.
Of. Note.

190; 21. To be found in another version among the Klamath Lake songs j there it
refers to a female living on Klamath Marsh, not on Klamath Lake.

190; 22. This tune was with many similar ones improvised by the Modocs, who
visited the East a short time after the Modoc war, ou seeing crowds of blacks filling
the streets. All Indians feel at first a peculiar very strong aversion against the Ethio-
pian race, though subsequently they often become friends and intermarry.

fi9

IIMl!

192

I'OKTKl TRXTH.

MrSCELLANEOUS SONGH

Obtainku in Tiut Klamath Lakr and Modoo DiALicn*.

1. g<i-i tJc a na'pka YAmatkni gutpmu'ndka

UiHHMtroiiH tlaip* we hod whfii tlio Northern IndliiiiM arrivrd.

2. Na'nu wfka-shftko imikush liii'ma ± 1^ |j._

I hour the owl'n <rry and very near it HPciim to be.

3. MbiVahant kaila hamo'la, .i - 1 j. _ | ^ ^ ^
Hhitchi'iktu iia'ts kafla, _^_|^_
shiukuapkiika na'ts ka'la. :. | l | -

lu the morning thn Enrth rt'miiindod,
Incensed at n» wax the Kiirtli,
For to 1(111 UH wniitnd tlin Kiirlh.

4. Wiikaptch nen ht'tksh fi-ukshi ne'pka,
nA' kam hl'tksh telA'lit.

To see how Klamath MiuHh uppuaiii irom thero,
I wish to look down on it from that height.

r>. Kd-idshi nil ki'panh ml hilfna

Dressed iu poor gnrniciilH I Htruy urouuiL

«. Tutf^ash nfl lulfna - ^ | _ j. | - j. | _

I nm going astray wliilo dreaming.

7. KapkAblandaks ! o'kst a tkaldga nd^wa -j.|---i|__j.|^^..

Bo silent! her body arises from tho dead to scroaml

8. MA'ni nft lakf gi, kd-i kAnam shU'ktsli ; ^ _ 1 1. _ [ j. _ || ^ , | j
k6- idaha ne-ulz6ga kafla tilangddshu. -l~^\j. -\j.^\\j.^\j.

I am a pott'iit chief, nobody iiiutrols me;
Tho mlBcbief-doing world I upset.

9. "Kallanfishulgmoke'dsha", j.-_|'.-,|^,
ke'nta kaflatat tgi'kfilaii nhufna. ---| '-\ ^|-

"I take tho Earth up in my annt an<l with it whirl around in a dance";
On this soil I am standiDg ai.i' th 'i." [the Above wordH],

MISOBLLANBOUB 8ON0B. ]93

10. Aishinh kaf nfl sha-ftlfi'la, ^.|^ |a-

yuhandaHh kal iiQ sha-fllS'la. -J\j.~\jl \j.^

I AUbUh I thsll bruidUb, I ibftll brandUh my huK« (word.

11. AfHhishash hfln gAIdHhui, .i . _|,a _
hft' mlsh ha' shnekHhitudpka. j.-^\ !.|«

Qo to meet Abiblah ; he will nave you.

12. TlflHli hAn liulekAn tchiAlash (shakatch^alu !

Halloot let un form » circle aud icrueu tbe Mimou agulDRt Hun-he*tl

18. ElilidHhl'ga Hh^polainna -i \j.

They curry loDg-neoko<l duokH on their baok>..

14. Kaukdtsi Yaf na w6'n a shfl-a'dHhant 11 -!.~-|z-|j.«|j..|j.„

Follow up the elk and vbase him upou KauktfUl Mountain I

NOTES.

The first oitfht songs are worded in the Khimath Lake dialect, the third in of a
mythic character. Songs 7-12 are worded in Modoc; 8 and aie K'lnnkdnitchiksh
songs. A few HoiigH or fragments of such, whidi would come nearest to wliat we
call nursery or Mother Goose's songs, will be fouml in the Mvtli of the Bear and the
Antelope: liW, 11. 12. 1.]. 121, !). 17. 122, 12. 13.

192; 1. This song is sung by women only, and seems to point to an ancient inva-
sion of the country by tribes from the North or from <\)lumbia Hiver.

192; 2. The owl's cry is of fatal augury.

192; 3. Girls' song. Wlien at sunrise a haze or fog extends over the country, this
is supi)osed to be a sign of the Karth's wratli against men.

192; 5. kl'pash is no word at all, but seems to stand for gftko=ptchi.

192; 7. The Indians were reticent about the meaning of tliis song, and iience I
presumed that o'k was intended to mean some deceased person, since these are spoken
of as hfi'k, he, nhe. Then the sense would be: "Be silent! that detul squaw is arising
to sing a loud song." One Indian informed me that o'ksta meant a squaw, and pro-
nounce<l it o'ksht (hfinkishtt). Cf. Note to 35, 8 and page 130, second Note.

192; 8. Tliese trochaic verses are called tl»e K'mukamtchiksh-song, and a variant
tu61am, exists for k&nam. The alliteration of the k's and n's is very conspicuous!
The meaning was given as follows: "I the omnipotent and unseen ruler of the nni-
verno will chastise and turn it over for the manifold crimes committed in it by Indians
and men of other races."

192; 9, This is another K'mukaratchsong, in which ho menaces to destroy the
world for its misdoings. I have put the first line in quotation marks, because it forms
the words or text of the song. The first line is sung about a dozen times befon^ the
second is sung once.

193; 10. Christian song, referring to the day of last judgment. Aishish, who is
a deity representing the lowers of nature with animal attributes, has been in the
mind of some Modocs identified with Jesus.
13

ill!

rOKlJG TEXTS.

103; II. 8uiig of Ghristiau origin, in ^rhich Aisliisii is also identified with Josus
for no other rciisou than a fancied similarity of names.

103; 12. WHien of <a party of flailing girls one catches a salmon or other lai'go flsh,
all the others quit their lines, arrive on the spot, roast the flsh whiJ'i singing these
'.Tords and eat it up.

193; 13. This song is common to Modocs and Klamath Lalces and is descriptive
of children amusing themselves with ducks. Pretty melody.

TUNP^S AND SONGS WITHOUT WORDS.
WAR WHOOPS.

wdaha wea w^yaha, kuwe'ha kaweiha, kawe'ha
ka' ka' ka', wdha wea w^yahu

3 n6ke n6ke n6ke

howiena' howiena', tchdlam tchdlam wi(5na wieu4
howiena' howiena', tcbdlam etc.
6 hf ellov4 hi ellovd hf ellovti

nkeiha np^elha n^eiya, nkefya n^ti-u.

a'-oho a'-oho e-oh6 f-ihi, i-ihi-i, f-uhii

HUMMING TUNES.

9 diainuini dianandna, diatafnia diatanana

tunanani nannanani, taninanaui tanni naninanani

taindnni tanin&nna, tainaina taninaini, tananana
12 tiini tayanani tani na'n6nani

nanatd tdannana nanat^ nanatdana natt-ana

kaiienatdna nenankan«lna tenandnate
15 uianaindn kianaindn, kianainia riainan iiaiiifan

kalena tend, kalena tena, kalena ten4

nawetana nawetfya, iiawetana nawetla
18 1/ggaiha Hggaiha, ha'hai Ifggaiha,
e bi tchiiima, Hggaiha Ifggaiha.

wfdshiggaya hi'a, widshiggaya ht'a
21 ha' ho widshiggaya ho; ha' ho ha' ho, wfdshiggaya h6.

'•nhili' ynhalt' gdya, yuliilt' yuhali' gAya

TDNE8 AND SONGS WITHOUT WORDS.

ta'-inannan na'-inndnnSn, ta'-inndnnftn na'-inndnnftn
td nanidnai ndniana, td nanidnai ndniana
walwiliga palpildga^ walwildga palpildga
pdlpilega pdlpilega, pdlpilega etc.

195

DANCING TUNES.

A, Tunes heard during Puberty-Dances.

ho'-wina we'na tchdlam tchdlam w^na
liha ii-ai hai hai hdvglftli,

hdhai u-ai hehai lidv6laU.
witcha kenna, wftcha k^na keno', wftcha kenna ken6
n(i kSno kfino k^no, n'o k6no ii'o k6no kt^o

B. Tunes adopted from Shasti Indians.

hui'no ho hotino hfl-fl huino hA'tnino kfl'ino ho-o
wfnna hadina luiwina, hd-ina a-a, hdwina na-ina
t6yo wfiino hoyo wfnna n6, weyawiniia n6, heyowinnd
ho owfnno lieyii'nha kina ho-owfnna heya'nlia kena
he-ilnnowinnd, innatd lowinna, he-eiinno Avfnna
hewu' iwiiinana o wi'nna 6ho hiina wfnna 6h6
hiinnandwiya nd-uya ndyua hiinnand-uya o-uya
hL'wa enna hd-aii wenn^a hd-aunnd heyawenn^
ha wenno hahiy6 wenn6 wean6 ha wenna, awen6 hewo
h6 ninu henu hen6 inQ' ho-inii h6nino-u heni'>'

C. Dance and war tunes adopted from Snake Indians.

hdwinna hadinna no', I'nna hawinna hdwinna no'
hd-a wenno, a hda, heahe, hda wenne
hawea' wenna, hau-d, hawennd e'nna, hawd

D. Dancing tune heard from Warm Spring Indians.
kanf hiya iiya tasf wene nSai

■9

196

T'OKTK! TEXTS.

E. Modoc (laiicivg tunes.

heo ht'o lu?o lniO, \\io heo lido lieo

hai'ididusii liaudidiisli haudidu^ii haudiduaa
3 stun stdn stdiii assi stAiii assi

lioy6-inna hoy6-inna,

hoy6 winna hoy6 winna, hoy6 winna'-a'.
6 hdw6n6n-i' hawgnneiifiha, haw6nn6nAha h!'i\v6ii6ii-i'

fwop t(!harle komtuho'

TUNES UEAKU AT 1- lIXRitALS.

kdlakenmi kdlakennii kclakemiu kc'lakenii kelavA-a

9 lahalia U'lliaha lAhaha Isihaha

liihihi yiiyaya yiiyaya liihihi

hdya heiia hdya heiia hdya heiia

NOTES.

194; 1-8. These whoops and liiiieH were .suii}^ by Modoc, wiiiiiors wheu on the
war-path, or after tlieir return in reniembriuice of their exploits. The whoops were
ehanted !ind howled wliile \nm\\i round in a eirile for one to two hours; even now
they are Iiemd on solemn occasions. Tliis unifoiin [lerforniance was, however, iider-
rupted sometimes bv feifjned attacks on a supposed liostile force lying iu ambush or
marching past. A scalp-dance tune, beginning with nkeiha, is added, also battle cries.

194; 2. The kii' kii' kii' refrain serves as an iiu'idental interruption of the weaha-
and other whoops. They i)roM(iunce it almost voicelessly by tai)ping their hands upon
the blowu-uji mouth or (;heeks in a cpiiek measure.

194; 3. The nojic mike is sung either us an intrixluction to the howieua'- whoop, or
a« a conclusion to it. It is i)ronounccd in a similar niannei' as the kii' kii', and often
accentuated noke'.

194; 7. Tiiis scalp-dance luue is one of tiie many heard at tiiese dances during the
earlier Modoc wars. A peeled tree, sometimes twenty feet high, was jdanted into the
ground, otter and rabbit skins fastened on or near the toj), and below them the scalps
of the enemies killed in battle. Forming a wide ling around this jmie (walash) the
tribe danced, stood or sat on the ground, looking sometimes at .solitary dancers, moving
and yelling (yii'ka) around the pole, or at others, who tried to .shake it, or at fleet
horses introilui'cd to run inside of the ring, (circular dances are of course jterformed
by joining hands.

194; S. These are the Avar-whooi)s alluded to in 23, l.">. t'f. ii oho u'telina in
Dictionary.

194; 9 etc. I include under the heading " hunnning tunes" lively tunes of short,
e\er returning jieriods ol words whose signilication is generally obliterated. Some
of them nmv inchide an haic words and forms no longer nnderstood by the picseul

TIJNKS AND SONGS WITHOUT WOKDS.

197

generation, while otliers (sontain words of tlie language iieliially in use but ground down
or defaced in such a manner as to make them unintelligible. The variations in which
these songs are sung are infinite in inimber, since they are fancifully produced at the will
of tiie siuger. I thought it sulHcient to gi\e a lew of these variations only, and took
care to mark the higher pitch of the Aoice, a sort of musical arsis, by the accentuation.
The majority of them form an accompaniment to the motions made while gambling.

194; 9-17 were obtained from a young Indian, PVank, living on the Williamson
River. Of. page 91, second Kote.

194 1 10. kalena tenj'i is rendered by : "ye are all dead at once"; which means: all
of you have lost in the game.

194; 18-195; 4. Playing tunes sung by Modoc and Klamath Lake Indians when
sitting at a spt'lshna or other game, also while musing, travelling or working; given by
Jeff". 0. D. Kiddle. The person who deals the sticks in the six'lshna-game is the one
who sings the tune.

194; 18 and 10. L'O and Ul. -I'i. Melodious tunes sung by Modocs and recently
introduced among these Indians.

195; 2.3. These are among tlie most frequent tunes hummed while playing the
spCdshnagame. Like 3 and 4, 1 and 2 are often sung alternately. .

195; 3. 4. These words are uiade up from the terms by which buttertiies are called:
walwil(''gash, yapalpul^ash.

A. These dance-tunes, 195; 5-9, are in use among the Klanjath Lake people and
were obtained from Minnie Frobeu. The flist of them .sounds almost like 194 ; 4. 5.
Little bells are often rung while dances are performed and dance-tunes are sung.
Women and girls of the Modoc tribe end their songs with a protracted i fi, while the
men habitually conclude them with a loud u-o'liu.

B and D. Obtained from Dave Hill; sung among the Khimath Lake people.

C. Given by Long .John's Ben. They begin with the sound h . like the majority
of the Shasti tunes.

E. All obtained from Jeli'. C. D. Kiddle.

196; 1. Repeated indefinitely, as soon as dancing assumes a quicker measure.
Compare with it the song of the skunk 162; 7, that of the quiver, 163; 8, ami Notes.

196; 3. sUun,fHll, seems to allude to the formation of a ring for dancing. Cf. stti
hashdmpka 23, 12. and what is said of 196; 7.

196; 4. .'). The last group in this tune, hoy6 winna'-fi', serves sometimes as a refrain,
sometimes as a stop.

196; 7. Of foreign introduction, as shown by the sound r. Sung in alternation
with Stan, stiin 196; 3 and said to come from Warm S])ring Indians. 196; 2 sounds
very much like: " how do you do, sir?"

196; 8. Probably contains the words: k'lekA a hu, "he, she is dead"; k6kiyd-a
serves as a refrain, sometimes as a stop.

196; 9. The day before the funeral of Piikish, mentioned in Doctor John's trial, I
heard his aged mother sing this tune. Other mourners in the funeral tent sang what
is contained in 196 ; 8. 10.

196; 10. Funeral tune heard from Snake Indians at Y6neks, on Klamath reserva-
tion. They join hands and sing this melancholy tune for hours ; the higher the deceased
stood in his tribe, the longer lasts the wailing.

^^^^P^^:

1 ':•

Li
1

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

199

s?f

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

INTRODUCTION.

A few remarks on the structure of American languages, and on the
difficnlties encountered in their study, will, I presume, be acceptable to the
studious at a time when the first grammar of the Klamath language ever
composed is presented to them.

Students entering into the vast domain of American languages find
tliemselves puzzled and bewildered by many faefs and peculiarities which
never occurred to them during their study of the classic tongues in which
Demosthenes and Cicero delivered their orations. Like other illitenite
languages, those of America bear within themselves phenomena which
appear to us as strange peculiarities and mysterious fancies, but also pre-
sent a grand and fascinating aspect like any product of nature undefiled
and unaltered by the artifice of man.

Superficial minds are easily repelled by the oddities of Indian sounds,
some of which are croaking or strongly nasalizing, partly faucal or other-
wise unpronounceable, and disagreeing in their phonetic rules and pecu-
liarities from all their former notions of language. But the educated, who
at once perceive that they have to deal with a problem of natural science,
readily comprehend that these freaks of human speech are worth a pene-
trating study. The phonetic side of an Indian language, in fact of any
language whatever, can be but very imperfectly acquired from books, and
what I offer below under "Pronunciation", "Mode of utterance", in the
phonologic section of the Grammar, should be considered as only an
attempt to do justice to the real utterance of this upland language.

'201

202

(iKAMMAlt OF THE KLAMATH LANdUAiiE.

Moro diversity may be discovered in the morphologic structure than
in the phonetics of the languages of America. This variety is so bewilder-
ing, so disagreeing with our old-time notions of language, that the classify-
ing tendency of our age has endeavored to simplify this apparent chaos by
imagining a general category under which all American languages could
be classed. Fr. Lieber styled them holophrastic; Du Ponceau called them
incorporating, but applied this characteristic only to those languages of
America the verbal inflection of which he was able to investigate. The
truth is, that no general characteristic can be applied to them that would
clearly distinguish them from many other tongues spoken in both hemi-
spheres; like these, they are all agglutinative, many of them polysynthetic,
though in very different degrees; their transitive verb is governed by its
object, the intransitive by its subject; the distinction between noun and
verb is morphologically but an imperfect one, though this imperfect dis-
tinction varies in degrees between the various linguistic families. Many
American tongues do not possess any form for the plural in nouns, while
others have one regular phiral ending or a variety of such, or a distributive
form answering to some extent to a plural. Some languages have no ad-
jectives, strictly considered, but use participial forms instead; others possess
real adjectives, and to form tiieir plural reduplicate the latter part of the
term. Synthesis is carried to an extreme wherever the verbal inflection
is no longer the vehicle of purely relational categories, but associates with
them material ideas as those of beginning, continuation, distance and prox-
imit)- of the object spoken of, negation, desire, approximation, and others
which do not properiy belong to the sphere of verbal inflection. The verb
with its incorporated subject- and object-pronoun tlien becomes a whole
sentence, and its derivational affixes often accumulate in a degree which is
quite perplexing. Other languages run exactly in the opposite direction,
that of analytic development. They separate the pronouns from the verb
governing them, possess only two tenses, but very few modes and voices,
express by separate terms what other languages indicate by derivation, and
reject the apparent luxury of nominal cases, of the dual and of the various
forms for the plural.

The diversity of American languages shows itself in their syntax not

INTRODUCTION.

203

leas than in their morphology. Generally the structure of a sentence is
simple, being based only on the coordinative and adversative principle. But
where there is a lack of the relative pronoun, or an inadequate supply of
conjunctions, as in the dialects of the Mask6ki family, verbals are necessary
to supplant them. This produces encapsulated sentences, which, by the
frequent repetition of the verbal, soon become tiresome through monotony,
and diminish the perspicuity and comprehciisibility of the spoken word.

A coi. tinned study of the Klamath language has convinced me that it
occupies a middle position between the extremes of synthetic and analytic
structure just ref-^rred to, but that, nevertheless, it shows very plainly all
the characteristic of agglutinative tongues. The distinction between the
noun and the veio is made pretty clear, although most substantives can be
considered as nomina verbalia; the verb is not overloaded with forms point-
ing to material ideas, neither with tenses, modes, nor voices, and possesses no
real personal conjugation. As to derivation, Klamath is undoubtedly poly-
synthetic in its affixes, the suffixes preponderating largely over the prefixes,
and differing from them in their functions. Outside of Klamath and the
dialects of the Dakota stock, but few languages have been discovered in
which the prefix indicates the exterior form of the verbal subject or object,
or even the quality of the verbal action. Reduplication for inflectional
purposes is as well developed here as it is in Pima and Selish and forms
one of the characteristic features of the language. As to its syntax, Kla-
math may be called analytic; a profusion of conjunctions relieve it of the
tor- ' ^e of participial and similar constructions, as does also the

relati, . a k/'.t, and the use of the substantive verb gi simplifies the

verbal ii.. > a great extent.

These a..d other characteristics impart to the language of the Md-
klaks a well-defined type, and approach it to some of the tongues of
modern Europe, in which analysis has not preponderated over synthesis.
An attentive study of the numerous texts obtained from the Indians, paired
with constant comparison of Klamath structure with the structure of many
foreign and American languages, could alone furnish a solid basis for
establishing the grammatic rules of this upland tongue. The rhythmic,
stately, and energetic tenor of its periods, especially those of the larger

204

(iUAMMAK OF THIO KLAMATH LANdUAiJi:.

mythologic piocos, will plt?ii«c ovoiy studwit wbo Ikih ever lent his nttentivo
ear to the woll-jioisccl periotlH of Romnii limtorians, and will oven evoke
comparison with them, not a» to their contents, but as to the flow of the
well-ct>n8tnicted sentences, which appear in these narratives.

Oral language is formed of voiced and audible units of thought, called
words, which consist of sounds grouped together and possess definite and
conventional meanings. To be understood by the tribe, people, or ra(!e
which converses in it, a language must necessarily follow certain laws,
which are partly of a logical, partly of a conventional nature.

The scope of a scientific grammar therefore consists in presenting these
laws; (1) as thoy manifest themselves in the present status, or some given
historic stage of the language, in a systematic form; (2) to deduce these
laws from the previous historic status of that liinguage, and from its cog-
nate dialects, as well as from the comparative study of other tongues, viz.,
from the science of linguistics.

Not only does every language possess a stock of words and idioms
peculiar to itself, but also a peculiar character 'in its phonetic rules, pro-
nunciation, and mode of thought, which impresses itself upon the senses
and memoi}- even of persons who have never Itecome familiar with the
language, and prompts them to distinguish it readily from other tongues.
The causes to which every language owes its peculiar stamp are the om-
nipotent climatic influences of the country which the forefathers of the
people have inhabited, and also, wherever migrations have occurred, of
the country presently occupied by it.

Grammars are usually made up of a large number of laws or rules,
restrained by an equally large array of exceptions. Many of the latter
are only apparent and not real exceptions; when they are real, they gen-
erally show that conflicting phonetic laws have been at work, or that the
principle of grammatic analogy or some other conventional element has
prevailed over the logical formative principle of language. Had all lan-
guages been evolved through the logical principle alone, grammar would
contain rules only and no exceptions. Mnro real and perspicuou--^ regu-

INTKODIK riON.

205

larity can liowt'vor \h- claimed for the large majority of American languages
than for thoeo of the Indo-Fhiropean family, for the simple reason that the
former are of the agglutinative type, while the latter are built up after the
principles of the inflective tongues. This distinction is founded upon the
difference in degree, by which the fusion of the affixes to the radix has
taken place in the earlier stages of linguistic evolution; a fusion which has
been much lass energetic in agglutinative languages, as the name itself of
these latter purports.

A "Grammar of the Klamath or M/iklaks language of Southwestoin
Oregon" must hence be defined as a scientific or systematic exposition of
the natural laws which have been active in forming and evolving the above
Western American language, in its whole as well as in its two dialects, that
of the Klamath T.ake and that of the Modoc people.

The subject matter I divide as follows:

The first and finidaniental part treats of the Phonology; it enumerates
the sounds composing its phonetic material and expounds the laws jjresiding
over the composition and alteration of the sounds.

The second part treats of the Morphology; it enters into a statement of
the laws, logical and conventional, observed in the inflection and deriva-
tion of words, and of the apj)lication of the phonetic laws to these elements
of speech.

The third part deals with the Sgntax; it defines the laws according to
which words are arrayed into .sentences or units of speech; it also explains
the relations of words among themselves and to the sentence, and of one
sentence to another.

The abbreviations of the Grammar are those indicated on the first
pages of both dictionaries.

20G

UKAMMAK OF THK KLAMATH LANHUAOK.

:;f

PHONOLOGY.

The sounds or phonetic elements of lanfjiKige are either vowels or
consonants or clicks. The former two are uttered bv expiration of air
fhronffh the vocal tube. The votveb or voiced breaths are cither simple or
••oinpouud. Compound vowels may either combine by passing into diph-
thonjrs or tri,,hthoiig.s, or when coalescing into one vocalic sound, become
■softened v owels. " Umh.ute." Consonants are sounds uttered without voice;
they are either checks, momentaneous sounds, or breaths, sounds of dura-
lion. Clicks, or sounds produced by inspiration of air, do not occur in the
Khm.uth langua-o as parts of words, though they are occasionally intro-
duced in the form of interjections. Cf. o, o' in Dictionary and Note to
194; 2.

VOWELS.

The five simple vowels of the Klamath language given in the order as
they increase in pitch of voice, are: u, o, a, e, i; each of them can be pro-
nounced short and long, and this makes up in all ten vowels. Only three
of them, however, are i)rimary vowels when pronounced short: the gutt.n-al
vowel a, the palatal vowel i, and the labial vowel u. They are called
primary vowels because the large majority of the radical syllables in Kla-
math contain one of them, which may also be said of a large number of
affixes. When pronounced long, the five simple vowels are often the
product of sym'zesis or other sort of vocalic coalescence. In pitch, o
stands between a and u, e between a and i; a rapid pronunciation of au
and ai has produced o and e, as we observe it also in French.

The softened vowels or -Umlaute" are U, o, a. as in German, and can
be pronounced short and long. They originated through a coalescence of
different vocalic components into one sound, as can be shown in many,
though not in all, instances. Only one of them, ii, is of frequent occur-
lence, and is observed to alternate constantly with e, both being a product

I'H<)N()|,(MJY.

207

of ft+i: ii-i, III, ii or o. Concerning the occurrenco of (i and ii, cf. below:
Frequency of Sounds.

Nasdmng of tlio vowels, ns in the French an, in, tin, h unknown in
pure Klamath speech, iilthough consonants nro frccimsiitly nasalized. At
times it occurs, however, in the conversational form of Klamath speech.
Where words from other Indian languages are quoted for comparison in
this volume, the nasal utterance of their vowels is indicated by n superior.

as: u" ii" o° o" a" ii" e" i"

Tho deep, obwcure, hollow pronuncinlion of the 8inq)l<^ and Hofteni'il
vowels should bo .sharply distinguished in this and in other liiiiguagi-s from
tho clear, high-pitched, or ringing utterance of tiio same sounds. It is pro-
duced by opening tho glottis to a wider passage of the voice than for the
clear pronunciation, and is as common in Klamath as it i.s in Fiiiglisli unac-
cented syllables, or in syllables closing in consonants; compare: a \u father
(clear pron.) and in water (deep), i in marine and in fill, u in shoe and in
lunff. To call these deep vowels short will do for English only, where
those sounds usjudly are mot with in syllables brief in quantity. But it
would bo a misnomer in the terminology of other languiiges, for they can
be protracted to any length as well as the dear-sounded vowels. With ii
and (■) this distinction cannot be made; a deep utterance of the other vowels
was marked in this volume by circunifli^xing tiioni The vowel A, (in fall,
fall) coincides with o, and 6 was henco omitted. Tiio spontaneou.s or primi-
tive vowel, "Urvocal", was given the letter e instead of e (the deep e).
Thus I use the circumflex only on a, i, u (ft, i, ft); it may be used also
on the softened vowel ii. Examples:

ta[)ini second to, subsequent.
shtl'lta to announce, report.
bft'nUa, piVnna to drinh.

To obtain a full insight into the phonetic chariuter of Indian lan-
guages, the difference between the clear and the deep i)ronuiiciation must
never bo lost sight of; i and u are generally sounded deep in final syl-
lables followed by one or more consonants. Of. Alternation of Sounds,
Quantity, and Introduction to Texts, p. y.

ill

1>()8

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

Tbe genesis and mutual reliitionp of the vowels are set forth in the
following- table:

a a I i u 5

a a i i uH

e e a

ui=zu

o 6

<»i:z:ii

DIPHTHONGS.

The vowels i and u placed before or after a vowel and pronounced in
one and the same effort of the vocal organs, form diphthongs. In a true
diphthong the position of the organ necessarily changes when passing from
one component to the other, and when it stands at the commencement or
in the midst of a word, the i- and u- component assumes the consonantic
natino of y and \\. Tlie word-accent may rest either on the first or second
vocalic component, and when the two are pronounced separately the com-
bination changes from a true to an adulterine diphthong.

Thus, Klamath possesses a series of diphthongs which can be uttered
in two different ways:

(a) as dissyllables or adulterine diphthongs, with hiatus intervening.
This pronunciation l)ears an anthaic type and can be best observed in the
Spanish language. Ex.: spa-utish poisow

(6) as monosyllables or true diplithongs. Ex.: spautish.

In a limited number of terms diphthongs always remain adulterine,
and sometimes insert even an h between the two components: knd-udshi
outskk harh of tree; shaiui-uli, shana-61i, and shanaholi to defiire; muimiiya
and muhinn'iya to shiver. A few other terms are constantly pronounced
with the genuine or true diphthong, as stainaksh hed, v/hile the lar'>e
majority may be piononnced in both ways: kta-i, ktai stone, ku-idshi,
kuidshi mischievous. The 8imi)le hyphen, e-i, a-u, etc., was used instead of
the usual mark of dia-resis (ei, aii) to mark the hiatus in adulterine diph-
thongs. In some grammatic forms of the language the two parts of a diph-
thong beconu! separated from each other, a fact which will be observed
especially in the study of distributive reduplication.

PHONOLOGY.

209

The series of diphthongs is as follows:
ui, oi, ai, ei ; in writing they often appear as uy, oy, ay, ey.
in, io, iiv, ie ; appear more frequently as yu, yo, ya, ye,
au or aw, ou or ew; ou coincides with au, aw.
uo, ui, ua, ue; appear more frequently as wo, wi, wa, we.
sii (in stiifla, sta'-ila to collect).
iii (in tchiiitchuili sorrel).

Triphthongs are not frequent, since Klamath has a greater tendency to
accumulate consonants than vowels. Ex.: shuiu;^a to drive out of, shuu ush
anfjling line, weweshahko having offspring, g('wa, tx^waga, tclii'iyunk, aggiiya,
tchuafsh, wtifta, etc. Some of tl>ese terms contain adulterine groups which
cannot properly be called trij^hthongs.

CONSONANTS.

Consonants are divided in two Hasses: cliecks, or mute, explosive
consonants ; and breaths, semivowels or fricative consonants.

MUTE CONSONANTS.
Their full list is as follows:

Gutturals: k, g, ;; Dentals: t, d

Palatals: tch, dsh Labials: p, b

Linguals: k, g
Here the surd sounds are placed first; follow the sonant checks or
"medice" mutes, then the aspirate class, represented hy one sound only (x)-
The surd checks or ''tent(es" are equal in number, thougii more used than
the sonant checks. As for the series of the aspirates, the two dental aspi-
rates of English (Anglo-Saxon [> and d) and the labial aspirate f are want-
ing here, and are rather scarce also in the other American languages.*

The two lingual sounds are k and g. Tiie former is produced by
resting the tip of the tongue against the middle or fore palate, by bending
it either back or forward wlicn in that position and then trying to pronounce
k; g is brought forth in the same manner, though the tongue has to be placed
less firmly against the palate in order to let pass more breath. Both sounds

* T/i aiird occurs in Shiwann, in aoino western cllnlenta of Yuma (Mobavo, etc.), nnd in Tnhnn
(lialfPts, New Mpxico.
14

4^*

'mS

sP'i

§:H

■|\i

>-'

frl

M '

210 GUAMMAU OF TIIK KLAMATH LANGUA<>E.

are uttered witli dilticulty, the latter especinlly, by stranyers, and when first
lieard, seem to prcx-eed from the lower throat. A sliort stop of the voice
always follows them, and they usually stand before vowels or the "Urvo-
eal" e. Modocs use them more frequently and pronounce them, like the
Warm Spring; Indians on Des Chutes Riv(!r, more forcibly than Klamath
Lake Indians. These sounds may be called just as well palatalized gut-
turals.

Nasalised mutes; see Semivowels.

Of mide palatals there are two only, tch (^Eng-. and Span, ch) and its
soni .t, dsh (Eng. j). They alternate in every instance with ts and ds. In
some terms they have originated from s, sh, and at times alternate with
these spirant sounds.

SEMIVOWKLS.

The semivowels, breaths, or consonants of duration are, but for a few
exceptions, identical to those found in English. While the trills are repre-
sented by one sound only, the nasi*! series is fully rleveloped.

Spirants. NtiKiilH aii<l niisalii'.rcl Tiillu.

IIMlh'N.

Ciiitturals h ng, nk, n/

Palatals y iid.sli, iitdi

liiiigiials . . sh uk 1

Dentals s, z ii, ml, lit

Labials v, w in, nib, inp

Among the .spiniiit.s the laryngeal class is rei)resented by h, which is
often pronounced with great (emphasis, like hh. Scientific alphabets, like
the one used b}- me, employ no silent letters, and hence I have placed an
apostrojihe before ciicii ii, when closing a syllalile, to remind readers that
it has to be sounded. \' often |)asses by alternation into the consonatitic
w (in wire) and the more vocalic w (in tvater, wall); it sounds like our s-,
but has evidently a dift'erent origin, for Klamath Indians pronounce David
as Di'bid, and v is found only in the combination vu Y is used by me
as a con.sonant only; zli, the sonant of sli, does not occur. Ts and ds,
which are compound suunds, may be classified with the dentals.

PHONOLOGY.

211

Nasals. In many of tlie nasalized mutes mentioned in the table above,
tlie nasalization is often scarcely audible; of. Alternation of Sounds. The
ny or Spanish n is so seldom heard, and only resulting from alternation
with other sounds, that I have preferred not to burden the alphabet with a
separate type fi. With initial nuites nasalizing is observed extensively, but
in certain words only; puka to road may be pronounced mbuka, tulslma to
run through, ntulshna, tohc'tch hark, ndslu'dsh; pdta cheeh is also pronounced
mpata, but pAta summer is always pronounced in the same manner, and
ndani three is never pronounced d.'ini, tamii. Vu- and the vowel u- can be
supplanted in a few terms by a nasal, if standing before a mute: uba-ush
skin: mbd-ush; udiiyua, vuduyua to heat, ndiiyua.

An instance of a medial mute becoming nasalized is sankd-a for saka-a
to he raw.

PHONETIC TABLE.

The following classification of the vocalic and consonantic sounds
occurring in Klamath, tabulated after the quality of their tone and the
organs producing them, will largely facilitate the comprehension of the
numerous phonetic figures^ contractions, and alternating processes to be
described hereafter. For the classification of the vocalic sounds, see:
Vowels and Diphthongs.

CONSONANTS.

Moinentaneous or mate soiiudH.

Breaths or sounds of duration.

Not aspirated.

Aspirated.

SpirontH. Nivsals.

TrillH.

VOWKLS.

Snrd.

Sonaut.

Surd.

Souaut.

Surd.

Sonant. Sonant.

Sonant.

OiitluralH . .

tch

dsh

g
d
b

i
li ng, nk, ii;t

y ntch, iidsli

1 nk

Palatals....

I i>

u u

e e it

Liiij^iials ...

8
V

DvntulH —

z n, nd, ut
w m, mb, mp

LabialH ....

212

QllAMMAR OF TEIi: KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

rKONUNCIATlON OF THIC SOUNDS.

My scientific alpluibet \» based on the oriffinal pronunciation of tiie
letters, which is still in nse in some countries of tiie Knropean continent.
The English pronunciation of the letters is entirely unfitted for transcrib-
ing unwritten languages, and readers of this volume will have to discard it
and adopt the value of the alphabetic signs as given below. The conso-
nant y had to be placed after the vowel i, its. usual position in the conti-
nental alphabets.

a as in alarm, wash; German Schwamm, Tatze; French y/a«t', sawj.

a longer sound of a, as in smart, tart; Gei-man Krahn, Schwait;

French saae.
d, iis in fall, tall, taught.

{I as in chut, fat, slash; Vnmch jnv, saint.

b as in blab, bulk; German bald; French beau.

d as in did, do ; German dass ; French dieu.

dsh as in jealous, junk, 6cor(/c.

e as in met, sell, tell; Gernian erst, es; Fi-ench selle.

6 as in last syllable of lodger, bungler; of German dieser, Manner;

Frenc;h ce, que.
e longer sound of e, as in fade, main, trail; German Speer, Wehr ;

French fvclr, maire.
g as in gi{),gore; German ^le/fe/ YxQwdi gras ; never has the palatal

sound of dsh.
g pronunciation given on p. 209.

h as ill house, lint; German hoffen; never used as a silent letter.

i as in marine; French abri, ir.i; Italian lido; Hitanish gridar.

T longer sound of e, as in fee, stream, skcii; German hiechen, sicch.

i deep, as in fit, grit, mitten; German rinnen, Sinn; when long, it is

i in German ihn, Siegel.
y as in yoke, bei/ond ; German Jahr, jiidrn ; French geux; Spanish

agiular, ger>to. Used as a cousoiiinit oiilw

rnoNOLOGY.

213

k
X

nip

ndsh

nk
nk

nt
o

tch
u

as in kick, kcHk, core; Gernuin kennen, Koter; French coque, soc;

Spanish cavar, quedai; querir.
pronunciation given on p. 209.

not occurring in English, French, or ItaUan; Gei-nian rh after a,
in Dach, lachey, flach, Nacht; Scotch loch; opanish hrujo, dejnr.
This sound has nothing in common with the Enghsh x,
same in all languages,
same in all languages
as in nimble, stumble; German Stammbaum.
as in imp, thumping; German Rump/; Italian stampa.
same in all lanji'uag'e.s.

as in stand, asunder, squander; G(*rman Munde; French amende.
the palatal dsh nasalized,
as in (ding, rang, singing, not as ng in finger; German hangen,

springen.
as in prank, spunk; Geiinan frdnken ; French cinquante.
the lingual k nasahzed.
the aspirated guttural nasalized.

as in rent, want; German drunten, Ltinte; French crainte, ereinfer.
short and clear, as in oracle, proxy ; German Hop/en, Sloppel; French

folle, sotte; Spanish pelota, rndilla.
longer sound of o, as in note, roast, rope; German Koth, Moor, roth;

French cat4, oter, sauter.
as in bird, burn, surd: German losen, stromen; French /cm/-, seul.
same in all languages,
explosive p, described on p. 216.
as in seek, sore ; German Sack; PVench salle.

as in shell, shingle; German schicken, Schutz; French chercher, echoir.
same in all languages.

alveolar and explosive t; explained on p. 216.
as in charred, chicken, catch; German hdtscheln, Klatsch; Italian

cicerone, cielo; Spanish hacha.
as m forsooth, truth; German Gruss, muss; French loup, sous, ecrou;

Spanish luna, uno.

214

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

fl longer sound of u, as in nude, hloom, loom; German IJhr; Froiicli

cour, sourd.
A deep, as in pun, ruff, slum; German krumm, Sclnifi, Stunde; Italian

lungo.
u not in English, Spanish, or Italian; German Dime, suhne't F"dnc!i

lune, nu, sucre.
V as in velvet, vivid; German Wesen, tcirken; French veau, vv i

w is the \i before the vowel a, as in water, walk, watch; in German it

corresponds to short u before vowels; nearly ou in French oui,

ouate.
z as in sine, frozen; German Hase; French gero, zigmf/.

The English x is rendered by gs or ks, the German z by ds or ts;
according to the nature of their components

More examples for the pronunciation of the above sounds will be found
in Dictionary, pp. 6-8.

For the pronunciation of diphthongs see the statements made on p. 208,
and the examples given in Dictionary, p. 8. The difference between ai
and ei can be shown to best advantage by quoting Gorman words:

ai as in Kaiser, Bain, Haiduck.

ei as in heiser, leise, reiten, schleichen.

The pronunciation of the other diphthongs not mentioned in Diction-
ary, p. 8, can be easily inferred from that of the vowels which compose
them. Adulterine diphthongs are hyphenized, as in ji-i, i-a, i-a, i-u, u-i.

GRAPHIC SIGNS.

i arrested sound, a pause brought about by the altered position of the

vocal organs; t-cpa species offish, k-lewfdsha to quit, depart.

apostroplie marking elision of a vowel, of 6, or any other sound :
k'lewi to cease, for keldwi; 'mpetlal6na to float down stream, for
ampetlal6na ; met'tdms;ja tn excavate between or near, etc. The
apostrophe also stands before h, when not beginning a syllable.

hiatus, separating two vowels as belonging to two different sylla-
bles : me-iitkish digging tool, sha-apd-a to provoke.

PHONOLOGY.

215

separates coiniKumd wortls into tlieir components: wika=te'Iantk(i

short-featured, 161oks=vvil'g6nam=8tu railroad, lit. "fire-wagon's

road."
acide accent; the only sign used for emphasizing syllables: ti^lish

face, tfla and tilu to roll, to flood.
vowel pronounced long: ta'^tki to blush, tchlaiza to be drowned,

wo'kshi, etc.
vowel pronounced short : mh'ah species of plant, sAlkakish necktie.

LAUYNGEAL MOJ)K OF (JTTERANCli}.

The phonetics of the majority of American languages cannot bo fully
understood without takinji' in consideration tlioir mode of prominciation
from the throat. It may l)o detiued as an utterance produced by a powoi-
ful gush of breath emitted from the lungs and forming its sounds, tlirough
the glottis widely opened, in the rear portion of tlui mouth rather tlian in its
fore parts. The war-whoops and dance-songs of the Dakota and other
Mississippian tribes are but a series of vocal strains due alone to the action
of the lungs and windpipe, and ejected through the open glottis. Tiiis gives
a peculiar, weird character to their vocal music. Of the Cayap6 Indians,
who inhal)it the Brazilian province of Goyaz, travelers report that their
language sounds "as coming from the upper throat, and that they speak
with the mouth closed."* The real cause of these i)eculiarities has to be
sought for in the Indian mode oi living, and may also in part be attributed
to assumed habits of pronunciation.

The pectoral or laryngeal pronunciation of the Klamath Inrlian is
attended by the following phonologic consequences:

1. Guttural and laryngeal (h, arrested sound) sounds preponderate in
frequency over dentals and labials, being formed in the rear part of the
vocal tube. The ])alatal and alveolar sounds, which l)y the lifting of the
tongue to the roof of the mouth tend to confine the sound to the rear, are
not unfrequent in this and other languages, while in most of them f, th,
r, and others, which are produced in its fore parts only, do not exist. The

"Dr. I'liil. von Martiiin, " Ilcitriige zur Ktlinugrapbie AnierikaH"; Vol. II, p. 131.

lifif^

i !**• / '

21(5

QRAMMAU OF I'HE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

'li

Shasti, Smike, and Modoc tunes printed in Texts, pp. 195. 196, are fair
."specimens of u thoroughly Inryngeal substratum to Indian song-music.

2. Interchangeability or alternation of the sounds pronounced with the
same vocal organ is naturally favored by the pectoral-laryngeal pronunci-
ation, and is observed as well among vowels as among consonants. Cf.
Alternation of Sounds.

H. Diaeresis of vocalic sounds into two vowels forming or being parts
of different syllables; the frequent insertion of the laryngeal li, and of the
"arrested sound," between these two vowels, and between a consonant
and a vowel;* the prothetic, h- figuring as initial in certain terms; the
existenc'j of the "explosive" mute consonants, as p', t'. A curious parallel
to this instsrted h is found in Pit River and Northern California generally;
the natives often interrupt their speech by inserting, often in the midst of
words, a sigh or melancholic-sounding breathing, seemingly produced by
inspiration of air. In Tuscarora I heard the inserted h distinctly accom-
panied by the same noise. Examples from Klamath: yimuign and yaina-
,4ga; Sa'taw/Shii-at; giia, gi'i-ua, giihua; sh.ilam, sha'idam; sko'sh, sko"hsh;
kldla, kU'iJha; Idyash, k'hiasli; walta, hualta; lii-a, hla-a; ibena, hipt'na.

4. The arrested sound, or "sound-catching," consists in a sudden inter-
ruption of the voice while speaking, and leaves the impression of a nio-
mentaneous deficiency in breath. It is heard in the commencement,
midst, and end of words, and after mute consonants only. It is always
heard after the linguals (which in the Modoc dialect sometimes disappear
before it), and frequently after t and p; it always follows the explosive
t' and p', well known tiu-ough granunais of Central American languages.
Dr. Wash. Matthews describes in his manuscript Modoc vocabulary his
"maiked t" as being uttered like English t with an extra pressure of the
tip of the tongue against the gums or teeth, and mentions the following
terms in which he distinguished it after the initial t : tdpak, t61alui, tulfsh,
t'sfn, tsuleks. This t is therefore an alveolar sound. The Indians of many
western tribes often apply the arrested sound when vocabularies are taken,
and Aztec grammars describe it as the saltillo accent, marking the syllables,
where it is heard, with the gravis accent: ^. This curious peculiarity

• Tliia epenthetic nso mnrte of h slionlil not ho ronfonnded with the affix 'h by hand. Cf. holow.

PHONOLOGY.

217

has been noticed by travelers among the nide and hunting tribes of other
parts of the globe; it seems to have a physiological cause, and not to bo
intended for rhetorical effect.

FJJEQUENOY OP SOUNDS.

The frequency of each alphabetic sound or clai-s of sounds in a given
language largely depends on their mutual phonetic relations with neigh-
boring sounds within the body of the word, and will be treated of elsewhere.
A few hints on this subject are as follows:

The three primary vowek, short u, a, i, are the most frequent of all
vocalic sounds; then follow Ji and e (both interchangeable), 6, o; the
softened vowels o and ii are rather scarce: tci'dshitodshi, and Modoc po'sh,
8tel(5pgosh; utiissust'i-ash, tii'kaha.

Of all vowels, u commences most words, and a terminates a much
larger number of them; it is the most frequent of all vocalic sounds in this
upland tongue. Of the diphthongs ai, au, ua (wa), ui (vvi), ia (ya) occur
much oftener tiian ei, vi, vu, or wo, and oi may be called a raritv.

The most ubiquitous of all consonants is prol)ably s, sh- then follow the
gutturals, g, k, k, x, the liirynj^eal h, the palatals tch, dsh, y, the surd mutes
p, t, the nasals m, n, and the trilling sound 1. Unfroqiipnt are g, b, d, z;
also V in the midst of words. None of the Klamath words end in g, y, ng,
nk, V, rab, mp, z, and a very restricted number in b, d, 'h; cf s^i'l), e'nd
(for dnat), nad {or nat). Every sound of the; al|)liabet can begin words,
but initial dsh, x- and ■/, are rather exceptional. Over one fourth of the
terms in our Dictionary begin with s, sh.

On the phonetic structure of the syllable, see below.

GROUPING OF SOUNDS.

We are prompted to call a language harmonious when the quality and
intonation of the sounds strikes our ear agreeably, and, when the giouping
of the seveial sounds in the word-unit appears to be even, rhythmical, and
musical. In due time high-pitched vowels have to follow those of a lower
pitch, consonants produced with one vocal organ should vary at short

lilil

218

(IKAMMAH OK TIIK KLAMATH LANOUAUR.

I' i

interviiKs witli c soMiints pronounced with iiiiotlicr. Wo also expect tliut

coiiMoimiits <lo not crowd uihui each otlier in dense cIusterH, but that they
bo supported, uphehl, and separated by the true vocal elonK^nt of the
hunjan voice, tlic simple and compound vowels, and wo tleprecato the
presence of croaking, clicking, or whirring sounds or sound-dusters.

Americans may be prejudiced in calling such vocalic languages as
Italian, Odshibwe, Tarasco, Arawak harmonious in preference to conso-
nantic ones. For if a tongue replete with (^onsonantic clusters groups its
component sounds in siu^li a manner as not to offend the ear by too abrupt
transitions and freaks, and subordinates them closely to the vowels or diph-
thongs as is done in Russian, Creek, Aztec, Kechhua, and in numerous
other languages, we have no palpable reason to deny to these the predi-
cate liarmonions. A large portion of the Indian languages spoken within
the United States answers to this (U'Hcri})tion, and one of their number is
the Klamath of Southwestern Orc"-on.

(Considering all the various elisions, dia'reses, syucopes, and apocopes
subsequently occurring, the syllables of this language were originally built
up on the following fundamental types:

1. Vocalic sound only (vowel or diphthong).

2. Vocalic sound preceded by one or several consonants.

'A. Vocalic sound preceded or not preceded by one or several conso-
nants, but followed by one consonant only.

These items typify only the present state of the language, and refer
in no manner to the structure of its radical syllables. Phonetic processes
have altered the primitive aspect of this and all other tongues considerably,
and many sound-groups now make up one syllable which previously formed
two or three of them. In some words vowels largely i)rei)onderate, as in
lewe-uola, le-u-e-u-<51a to cease to irrohibit, yayaya-as hcwitchiny power;
while in mi»st others consonants exceed in number th<i vocalic elements,
excessive groups occurring in ldigl;ua to Iciu-cl down, shk^shltcha to go visitimj,
shtchiishtchxapksii, d. obj. case of shtchu'katko one-ci/ed.

Gemination of simple vocalic or consonantic sounds frequently occurs,
and with vowels it i& produced through a sort of emphasis or the distributive
reduplication (t^inku tree, d. A-anku), with consonants through the prece-

PHONOLOG7.

219

(Icmco of n »liort vowel, us in genft'lla to start, kmft'kka to look ahout, udl'ttu
to whip. More ahout this under: Plionetic, Figures.

The folHsiou of sounds of a different diaracter, produced hy two
different ])arta of the vocal tube, is a fruitful source of phonetic alterations,
whenever tlie natives find it difficult or impossible lo pronounce them in
succession. No language, we may safely say, is exempt from phonetic,
changes produced by iuniiediate collisions of this Ivind. Tims the Klamath
suffixes -tka, -tki will frequently appear as -tga, -tgi, but never as -dga, -dgi
or -dka, -dki.

In the following table 1 have disposed various clusters of sounds after
their initial sounds, without taking ruitice of tho fact whether the comnonentb
belonged to one or more syllables; y and w being cimnted at voweh.. xMany
of these clusters form parti: of distributive reduplicated forms.

CLU8TKRR ((JMI'OSKD OF VOWEI, SCSTfNDS.

u clusters: wawakogsh, wawawuiha, tchuaish, hielualuya, wu-utch(jwa,

sliuc-usham, wiifta, wdwaleks, vufvui.
o clusters : kuloyil'na, 6ya, o-oakgi.

a clusters: npfai-i^itko, skdwanksh, kdwantko, ka-ukd-uli.
Ji clusters : ii-iiiil;(a.

o clusters : wewiUna, shewana, Idyash.
i clusters: yukiaka, sldtiaika, tsliuyag^tkish,

CLU81KR8 COMPOSKD OP CONSONANTS.

k clusters: shlepAktgi {or shlepaktki), sliakti'ikt;(a, knuVkka, kpAkpa,
tsii'ktsika, ktchidshfl, tchligi'iktchktchka, ktch/iktchak,
ntfkshktcha, b^xtka (for bokstka), jiufuksla, utchiklxa,
shektliih'niii, hishtchaktna.

X clusters: nipetla^sh.

^>- clusters: })ip6lAngshta, ICl'gshla.

t clusters: tl6;(o, t^tjpo, tkAp,tgakiauii.a, Tniukila, tatktish, ldshuat;fsli

tch and dsh clusters: litcliHtchli, vulakatcliktcl;;!, tchvu'ntka, kititclma,
tslats[l]kagantko 144, 11, ts;^e-uts;^e-us!i ; ndsh6ndsh;^a,
shiidshna, vuggidshlin.

p clusters: k'k'kapksh, gt'pktak, taps;{oya, lapkshiipta, nshfptchpa.

'J20

GKAMMAJt or IIIK KI.AMATli LANiJUAGK.

i rri

8 and sh cliisk-ih : liiiiiiii.->lil;.i, liiiki'islitkii, yii-islitnrilrt, slitchiaxiza, Hhtchi-

Hlitchiik'lxti, sliiiiV«hnxii, •^liUHhpilHlika, tguHhii'HhgiHii.
hcliiHtors: Hlm'liiii(Skii, liliilila, tsn'liltsiVlili.
n clu.storw: Hhutt'mktjri, iiKMlsliiiiitko, lul'luiltxiigu, ntdntiag, iidshdulHlialo,

ii;u(nxl(liii.
m clusters: HliiiumpHi'la, \v;imla, lmtams;^a, uili'imtclma, I'lmtfliiksli.
1 cliisterrt: sp^i'ilpka, tiniMliak, tiilsjja, Vi'iHlialtko, iidi'ilf;^a^ru, Iki'ippa, Islifklza,
Ifclianin'slika.
The iiispt'ctitm of tliis list, wliicli is by no innaiis exhaustivo, shown
the great adaptability of sounds in this lai>guayv, and the linn't for the
clustoring of consonants is a very wide one. Some of the terms arc real
"jawbreakers", but none of the group is unpronounceable for us, for they
are all snbordinatcd to one vowel or diphthong and are not discordant among
tlieniselvos, so as to otlend our oir. Sonic sounds appear rnon; apt to
begin clusters as initials, while others prefer to stand second or third in
order The language shuns Ittitial clusters (tf more than two consonants,
three being a rarity ; but it favors their clustering after the vowel to any
pronouncealilo extent.

FURKION TKHMS AND TUBIK I'RONITXCIATION.

The proniuiciation of words by the natives, from the investigator's
own tongue, or from other foreign languages, gives a valuable clue to the
physiology of their sounds. Many Klaniatli I.ake and Modoc individuals
converse with tolerable fluency in English, and a difterence mav be per-
ceived between the P^nglish pronunciation of the pm-e-blood and that of
the mixed-blood Indians.

The Maklaks learned a few French and English terms through the
Chinook Jargon, a medley speech from the Northwest, in which these
Indiana are far better versed than in English They obtained the know-
ledge of this jargon from the Indian population on the Lower Columbia
and Williimet Rivers and on the Pacific coast, where it had been in vo<rue
for the last hundred years. According to G. Gibbs, who wrote a mono-
graph of it*, two-fifths of its vocabulary was taken b}- the Indians from

•O. Oilil>n; a Pictionary of theOliinooW .liirKon, m- I'laiic LnnKiinRe of Orc({Oii. NVw Voik, ISftJ.

I'llONOLOOY.

221

Lower Chinook, (.iio-fiftli from Eiij^liuli, Iosh tlmn ono-fiftli from the Canii-
tliiiii tnukirH* Freruli iiiid the MiHsoiiri pHtoiH, and the rust from Chehuli,
Kalaimvii, tinil other toii;;iicH. The moiiikIm x aiid the puliitalized 1 in
LowtT Chinook terms vvfif llie oidy ones materially ahcrcd by the Kla-
niatliM. In every nection of territory where ('liinook Jaryon is spoken
dialeeti(^ din'erences can be dintinifnished. Thus the bVeneli sauimga be-
tanie sauvash on (Jolnmbiii River, but ehanjfud to safvash in the HoiitJiern
jMU'ts of Oregon.

Distinction nmst bo made between the European terms introilneed at
an i-arlier date into Klamath, throuf^h the use of the Chinook Jar^'on, and
the more recently (chieily Hiuce lH(i4) ailopted Knj^lish terms, for tiiey differ
sliyhtly in their phonetics. Of En;,dish and French words the lan;ruage
forms inflections, derivatives, and reduplications almost as easily as from
its (,wn words, as will be seen from the lists followinir:

KKKNi;ll TGKM8 OUTAINKU TIIROIIGII CHINOOK .lAKOON.

kapo coat, tlrcas; F. capot ororout; kapt'ip^le h ilrcfis oneself, and other

derivatives.
Iflapai ribbon; V. le rulMn; Ch. -J. lih)be (G. Gild)s).
liml'l mule; V. le nadet or la nude; limi'lnian mulr-drirer, packer.
mftash, mftas leggin;), d. miindash; l-'. mitasse.
slu'iifffai sH'ior ; F. le sucre; Ch .1. lisnk, shM<iii, shukwa.

KNOMSIl TKKM8 OUTAINKU THIiOldU CIUNOOK .lAUOON.

lioshtin (d. Boljushtin, rarely used) American, white person ; F. Boston. Cf.

Dictionary, p. 26.
Kin;.'' Dshudsh, Mod. Skinj^ Dshi'idsh, En()lishman ; F. King George.
k<5i)e, v.. coffee,

])ot hoiit, vessel, skif); F. V)oat.

shi'l rlolh, especially coHoii clolli, kiUco; G. Gibbs derives it from s«U.
sd'lt, slio'It, shnl, F. salt.

stick stick, wood, pole, tree; F. stick; stickshni hnol, stickmiin tarpeniv.r,
sunde arck ; Siiiidaf/; Iv Snnda}'.
tAla iliilliir, I ash, coin; F. dollar; tulalfko liaoiiui momi/, ritli, intiltliif

222 GRAMMAB OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

KNGLI8H TERMS OBTAINED DIRECTLY FROM AMERICANS.

a'plgsh, a'puls, poss. a'pulsliain apple, bi hce, bl'sam wax beeswax.
box, iiiatr. b6xtka box, coffin. Dehid, K. Daivid. Do'tchman, Mod. Dotch-
nial, German; from vulgar E. "Dutchman". Dshif'p, nom. pr., Jefferson;
E. Jeff, liji'nkortcliip, instr. Iiaukgrchipiitka 87, 14., handkerchief; cf. kftch-
kam. Imft, ivhcnt, yraiu, cereals; E. v.ueat. yaiksmim plij/skian; a hybrid
torm. kApji cftp, teacup, saucer, dim kapAga; E. cup. kftti domestic cat; E.
kitten, kitty; Mod. for pusl:ish Kl. kudta quarter of a dollar, 25 cents; E.
quarter. U'lkish in h'lkish shi'ishatish locksmith may be as well the E. lock as
the Kl. htkish knob on door— d()ubtful. lipin, E. ribbon; lilapai is also used.
Lanktchan, nom. pr., Long John, oin- hour (of tlie day). pl'ii,s|i, E. beans
pi'pa tobacco pipe; from E. pipe, not from Ch. J. lapfp. ple'k, plii'g flan,
banner; E. llag. Plenk, nom. pr., Frank. Pot KlAmat, nom. pr., Fort
Klamath; for Kl. I-ukak. pi'ishish domestic cat, Kl ; E. puss, not from Ch.
J. pusspuss. shawel, E. shovel, shilba, E. silver, slio'p, sop, E. soaji.
Spain'o'lkni Mexican, obtained probably from California, stoginsh, E.
stocking; stoginshala to knit stockings, shup, instr. shiipatka, E. soup
shuldshash, poss. shiildsham, E. soldier, shushap, E. jewsharp. t/mapsh,
?:. turnip, tii-urn', E. toton. taiisgn, E. thousand, tcbul, loc. tebullat, E.
table; not from Ch. J. lata'b. tu=pitcli quarter of a dollar ; E. "two bits",
tchfkon, obj tchfkinash, E. chicken.

It appears from this list that Klamath drops the final r of foreign
words, converts f into p, v into b, r into 1, and sonant mutes generally into
surd mutes.

ALTERNATING OF SOUNDS.

Permutation of sounds of the same i)honetio class has been observed
to exist in the two classic languages, which belong to the same linguistic
family, several centuries ago. It was plainly seen that a connection ex-
isted, with mutation of certain sounds, between Svai and duo, r^rra/oe? and
quatuor, ia:^?)? and vcstis, invpo? and soeer, and some suspected even affinity
with the corresponding terms in the Germanic and Slavic languages. After
J. Grimm had formulated his law of sound-shunting, the process of permu-
tation became a matter of evidence tor the Germanic and Indo-European

PHONOLOGY.

223

langiuiges, but only as far as the transition of words from one dialect to
anotlier is concerned. But in illiterate lavguages the same interchange, often
a more utensive one, talcs place within one and the .■iume diahct.

So nuich did tliis fact contradict the time-honored, ancient ideas of
gianiniar lodged in the heads of missionaries and school-teachers, and so
little did it conform to Latin, Greek, and Hebrew models, that the puzzled
granwnatical writers on American, African, or Oceanic languages bluntly
denied tiio existence of certain sounds wliicli they knew to be in the lan-
guage, but found to alternate with others for no apparent causes. This
relieved them from the necessity of accounting for this puzzling phonetic
fact. The existence of the sonant nnues was flatly denied to many Amer-
ican Indian tongues, and the Mohawk-Iroquois* alphabet was proclaimed
to possess sixteen sounds (or "letters", as they were called) only, while in
reality it has over twenty-four, all of which ai'o easily expressed by the
Roman alphabet.

I have observed alternation of sounds in all the North American
languages which I have studied personally with the aid f)f natives, and
have also hinted at one of its hidden causes, viz. the laryngeal or pectoral
pronunciation of the red man. Even those Indians whose languages have
been reduced to writing for tifty or one hundred years back, and \n whose
books all traces of this interchangeability were suppressed by the mission-
aries, etc., as the Creeks, Cha'hta, and Iroquois, permute their consonants and
vowels with the same liberty as if these books had never appeared in i)rint.
It would be exactly so with us if our ancestors 'had not had a literary
training for the last thousand years at least.

i have recorded the alternations observed by me in the Kayowe (or
Kiowa) language in a monograph published in the American Antiquarian,
IV, PI). 280-2«5, under the title: "Phonetics of the Kayowe Language"!
the results obtained there being almost identical to those to be given below
This permutability of cognate sounds torms one of the prominent plu.-
netic features of Klamath, and occurs in initial as well as in medial or linal
sounds. Still there are words in which cei-tain sounds do not interchange
witli others. This is especially ol)served in homonyms, whore ix'rmutatlon

• This ilialcet of IniqiioiH IhiUn li, jt, and f.

lilHi

224

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

would cause tvjnfusion; slik6ks yhost is never pronounced slikdks, wliicli
means tick; gfwasli is kept distinct from giwash, ilsha from viisha, shi-
kanti'lu from shikantfla. Cf. Homouymv.

Vowels alternating:

u with wu, vn, hu : udumtclma, vudumtchna; u-iin, vun, wiin; utatclikiti,

vutAtchkia, hati'itchkia.
u with o: h'lk, 16k; lapuk, lapuk; hutclma, ho'dshna; pulzuantch, polDku-

antch; liiloks, loloks; ti'menu, tAm'no, but not huy6;ja with

h^yg^a-
u with a: putputli, patpatli; kfi'lkiVd, kalkali.
u with il: mukash, m^'kash; cf. nat, nftt.

w with ii: nduyna, udii'yua (by dissimilation); shuyu;^alsli, su'yii;(;alsh.
ua with d, u: genm'ila, geno'la, genu'la.
a with 6: maklaks, ms'ikloks (Modoc); kalkali, k61k(.li and ku'lkuli; skun-

shna, 8k6ntchna; hishpli'unna, hislipMmna; suffix -udpka,

-u6pka.
a with a: taktdkli, taktJi'kli, and in many other adjectives of color (by dis-
similation); yaka for yii'ka, is considered vulgar slang; cf

shlfiank for shk'ank 6(i, 1 3.
ewithii: nt^p, niip; pdn, pe'na, pii'n; tclR;i;^a, tsii'l/a; hemd/e, ham^ze;

shh'iyaks, shlil-ika, shlii'yaksh, shlii'-ika.
e with i and ii: elpja, il^ii, ii'ljja; kdtcha, kfdsha, ga'dsa; shetchtikta, shi-

tchakta; A-ushme, A-ushmi. Cf. also: nuikasham, miikisham

U^r, 14.
e with !: ne'I, ni'l; e-e, I-I.
i with iy, y before vowels: shlanfa, shlanfya; f-amnaah, yamnash.

The circumstance that many of these alternations occur in accented syl-
lables proves that they constitute a fundamental law of Indian articulation.
In diphthongs very few, if any. changes of this kind are noticed, neither do
long vowels alternate often. The most frequent alternating processes are
observed Ixitweon a and u, (; and ii, u and wi;, vu, u, and o. In many
words \o\ve!« can be attenuated intci e.

PHONOLOGY.

225

Consonants alternating:
k with g, gg : kd-u, gc'-u; kitchkani, kitchgani, gitcligani; wukdya, waggAya;

lutatkdtki, liitatgdtki; ke'k, ge'g.
k with k: kaftua, kaftua; maklaks, niakloks. This permutation is usually

attended with a change in signification. Cf. Pronouns,
k with%: hushkalka, liuslikalpja; hishkalul;Ka, hiahz6lulza.
k with X : kdmkeni, ;irm;^eni, cf. Dictionary, p. 176 ; Ikdn, ]x&n. Initial k,

omitted by aphseresis, is replaced in Modoc by the arrested

sound: k6ko, -oke. A similar process is observed in some

Polynesian languages when k is elided,
k, g with h, hh: gaikanka, haikanka; taktd-ash, ta'htd-ash.
k with g: ko'l, gil'l; kiilu, giilfl.
k, k with nk, nk, n^ and other nasals: kfla, nkfla, nkfla, n^flla; kdwa,

nkdwa, n;|ja'wa; kdta, ngata.
tch with dsh, when not initial, and with ts, ds: titchi, tidshi, tfdsi; tcliA-

shish, tsdsis; natch (for nu tchui), nuts, uuds; geluantcha,

gdluandsha, gt'luandsa.
tch, dsh with sh: ntultchna, ntuldshna with ntulshna; tildshui, tdshui;

na'dsh, na'sh; willatslfna, willashlfna. Willidsh for wdlish,

and pawatch for pAwash are considered vulgarisms. Ta-

pinikayentch for tapinikaydnash 120, 19. 121, 22 ; kiishga

tcha for kiishga sha 9 " , 17. Changes from one dialect to the

other: skA, Mod. tchga; shgi'inila. Mod. tchgiimla; sho'ksh,

Mod. tsfio'ksh; spal, Mod. tchpal.
tch with ntcii, ndsh: tchekani, ndshekani; tchdtch, ndshg'dsh; tchishl^a,

ntchf8hl;ija, ndshfshlka.
ts with (Is, in every instance except when beginning words: kdtsa, kddsa.
t with t', d: tclish, tVHsh, dolish; e'nt (for c'nat), e'nd; shataltiltamna, sha-

taldildamna; tfinkatch, dankatch.
t with nt, nd: tiinshna, ntunshna; ntd-ish from tdwi; tdga, of. nddga, but

not nddwa and tdwa ; nd6pa, cf tiipesh.
p with p', b: pAhalka, pVihhalka, bahdlka; pi'ipanuish, bubanuish.
p with mp, mb: pakuish, mpakuish, mbakuish.
15

226

GRAMMAU OF THE KLAIMATH LANGUAGE.

p with 111 : suffix -ptclii, -lutf.lii, -tciii ; aiiflix -puna, -miui; pronouns p'n<5,

p'lu'ilani, Kl. ni'iij'i, lu'iiiilam
p with w : paklkish, waklkisJi.

s with sh, ill em-«/ instance : steiiiiis, shtahiasli; Kto'ks, shtG'ksh; na's, na'sh.
s witli z, chiefly initial : safga, zaiga.

s, sli wit'i as: shashaphinitch, sassaphuntch ; shishoka, aissnka.
m with u, before hibials: mba-ush, uba-ush.
n with u, before a dental or ))alatal : ndupka, udi'i])ka; ii(h'iku, vudi'ika,

udijka; ntchaya, utchaya.
iidsh with ntch : ndsli<5ka, ntchoka.

nwitht: natnapenapsh for iian'na))t'napsh; n('tn<%isli for iKjn'nolxish.
1 with n: ntnlshna, tunshmi; kildshna, kintciina, khishiia, Mod. kilshiia;

Itchania'shka, ntchania'shka; liesheliuta, slKMiiiUa; tslipal,

tchnipal; tchikeniiin, ]\rod. tchik("nial ; pniukshla, piiiuksna;

but not tiuiiola and tiuloia.
1 witii hi : li'i-a, hla-a ; laklakli, hlakhlakli.

A few more of these alternating processes will be found nieiitioned,
with examples, in the Dictionary, pp. 9-11.

As to their fnquciici/, consonantic alternations differ very larjiely. 8
interchanges with sh in every iuf^tance, and tiie permutation of k with other
gutturals, especiall}- g, gg, x, and of tih with ts, ds, dsii is extremely fie-
(pient. The substitution (.f k, g for other gutturals, though frequent, is not
exactly the rule, for these sounds are linguals while the rest of the k-series
are pure gutturals. AI)ont the difference in signification produced by tliis
change, cf. Pronouns. II becomes frequently disconnected phonetically
from vowels or consonants preceding it, by tiie arrested sound \ and when
pronounced with emphasis, undergoes gemination: -hh; cf hliilantaiia,
sha-hni6ka, kaiha ami kai'hha. S and ts are heard much oftener than sh,
tch in the conversational form of language, and before x the assibilated sh
scarcely e\er occurs : s;jona to row, hutanis;ra to rush between. Words with
initial t and p that can jiass into d and b, may also change these initials
into expl(isiv(! sounds: p^, t^. The whole series of consonants through
winch a term as tchalamna can pass is: tch, ts, t'sli; a word like patadsha

PHONOLOGY.

227

may also bo pronounced patiitcha, jjatdtsa, patddsa, but paddtcha w ba-
dc4tsa is s-- . cely ever heard from natives. Some terms, as pfpa 'pa'per,
ndani three, undergo no vocalic or other changes whatever, while others
cannot assume certain alternations without a change of signification. Cf.
Homonymy.

All these conversions of cognate sounds often impart to certain words
a quite different appearance, which renders them unrecognizable to the
unexperienced. Still the interchange of sounds is more extensively devel-
oped in some dialects of the Caril) or Galibi, as well as in Kdyowe, Ili-
datsa, and other languages spoken on the Mississippi plains.

Like all phenomena in nature, this interchangeability is not produced
by the fancx- or option of the natives, but is based on natural Lws, and as
language is one of the effects of nature, we nuist look to physiology and
not to psychology to discover its latent causes. One of these is the tend-
ency of rendering pronunciatit»n easier; this we perceive, e. g., in the
dropping (.f the laryngeal sound h in: mint for mi hut, atunk for at hunk,
n'unk for ni {ur nu) hunk, and alsc ■ ='yut for a hu't. It will be remem-
bered that h can be droi)ped even when belonging to the body of the word.
In S)7, 1, hunk kfuliga has probably been nasalized into hunk n;tiuliga to
avoid the collision of two identical sounds. Another cause of these permu-
tations is tlie laryngeal utterance of the Indians, which I have discussed
under tliat heading (pp. 215-217); it also accounts for the circumstance that
permutation among sounds originating in the rear mouth aie much more
frecpient than those produced by the action of the lips and the fore part of
the vocal tube.

I'ilONETlC FJGUliliS.

Hesidcs the phonetic changes spoken of in the foregoing .section, there
ai-e otiier alterations in the sounds of words which generally affect the
body of the words more th(M-ouglily, and occur in all the languages ex-
plored. 'I'he.se alterations are ])roduced by various causes, as the shiftinn-
of the accent from one syllable or word to another, the attenuation or
increase in quantity, the habit of fast speaking, etc., and chief of all, the
desire of saving vocal (exertion. The tendency for retrenchment is more

228

GRAMMAR 01" TUi; KLAJIATU LANGUxVGK.

energetic in this upland liinguage thiiii that lor the increase of sounds, and
thus the chapters on elisions and contractions will ho more extended than
that on phonetic additions.

I have classed the phonetic figures into the following distinct groupa:

A. — Addition of phonetic elements other than afflaes, to the tvord.

1. rrothesis, or the addition of vowels or consonants at the coniniencenient

of the word: v in vuhupivga, vnduka, etc., for u-uj^cga, udiika;
Sking Dshu'dsh, Mod. for King Dshu'dsh. Yfkashla for fkashla
may be considered simply as alternation of sound.

2. Epithesis, or the addition of vowels or (ionsonants at the end of the term:

ta-uni, from English town.

3. Epenthesis, or the insertion of vowels or consonants in the midst of a

word. Some of the inflectional affixes are epentiietic, and will be
considered under the heading of affixes. The insertion of u in
tuankshi for tnakshi, kailantala for kailatala, tiii'mantko (a verb
tiii'mna does not exist) for tiJi'matko had .better be considered
a nasalizing than an epenthetic process. F^penthetic v is ob-
served in ICviita for Ic-i'ita, I'l'ita. Epenthetic h has to be care-
fully distinguished from the -li- of the verbal .suffix -ha, as in
skulha to lie mi something, compared to sknl^a to lie, to steep,
and fn n) the 'Ii which indicates an act done hy hind (see below).
We find the epenthetic h in :

tsials'hii'mi in the salmon season, for tsialsJi'mi, tsialse'mi.

gf'ihipa to eateh air with a //runt, for ga-ipa.

shawalhinii'a to necumfmiiy somebody, for shawalina'a.

muhinu'iya to shiner, tremble, for muimuya.

4. Nasalizing or nasal pronunciation takes place in regard to certain con-

sonants only, when initial or medial. Nasalization of vowels in
the manner as observed in French and Dakota does not belong
to the features of the Klamath language. The deep pronuncia-
tion of a, 1, n has nothing to do with nasalizing. The gutturals
g. k, k, x are thereby transformed into ng, nk, nk, n^; the dentals
d, t into nd, nt; the palatals dsh, tch into ndsh, ntch; the labials

PnONOLOGY.

229

b, p into mb, nap. This process was discussed under the heading;
"Alteriiutioii of Sounds," and examples from the Dictionary will
be found there to illustrate it more fully. Instances where no
alternation takes place are shcmpeta to an/uc, for shcpdta; shikdmba
to walk OH a sticky for shikapa (radix: kap in tkap).

B. — Droppinff of phonetic dements from the word.

All the causes that are productive of decay will also operate in favor
of sound-removals, as : fast and indistinct pronun(Mation, shifting of the
accent, etc. Elisions of all sorts are especially frequent.

Elision, or removal of a phonetic element within the word, is frequent
in all languages. In Klamath it is chiefly brought about by the tendency
to bring vowels into close contact with vowels, even identical ones, and
consonants with consonants, whether identical or not; a tendency which
causes elimination of intervening sounds. Cf Assimilation. The various
kinds of elision make a sul)division desirable into syncope, ekthlipsis, and
elision of a whole syllable.

5. Syncope, or elision of a vowel before a consonant. Ex.:

jtkla to collect, gather up, for ftkala.

liilpaltko provided with eyes, for lulpAlatko.

hiinsak, nensak to no purpose, for hunAshak, nenashak.

telshna to look oid, for tclishna.

tchkash also, too, for tche'kash.

k'lekapksh dead, for k'lekapkash; k'le'ksht for k'ldkasht.

E-ukshkni Klamath Lake Indian, for E-ukshikni,

tati'inmish traveler, for tattimnuish.
G. EkthUptiis, or dropping of a consonant from the midst of a word.
(rt) When stiiiiding before one or more consonants. Ex.:

shelluashe'mi in the war time, for shollualshe'mi, cf. 56, 1 and Note.

puekampgle to throw out again, for puelpfdmpgle.

ktchiik arlone shell, for ktchiilk; l)asis, ktchdlp^a.

shMtpamptJili to return, bring back, for shlaltpampSli.

shtc]u"ish;jiii)kam; cf. Note to 105), 6.

ill

230

OUAMMAU OF THE KLAMATff LANGUAGE.

'ii^'

(b) Before vowels consonants are elided in the following terms:
nte-ish how with arrows, for ntrwisli.
hnsliiitaukfi to approach oh the sly, for Inisli'lu'itjinka.
sanioiuikiu to wish for oneself, for sli'lianiraiakfu.
sukuasli y/,v/{-7Jj/, spear, for slitcliiikuasli.
nn'iati'li larye, tall (obj. case), for nu'inish.
7. Elision of a syllable, accented or nnacccMited. Ex.:

pil'patclile to step down from, 112, 6. !), foi- |)eiuitcli61e.
kshnlo'tcli mowinfi sei/thr, for kslmlutkisli.
.slialiilli.sli J'an'sjtute,jtwshurp, for .slialaliilisli.
lii'inkinisliani theirs, ubbr. fr-Mn hunkelanisliani.
wowansliasli, wi'wansli women, for wewann/sliasli.
int'ssai.i in the season of trout, for niehiashii'nii.
nilkanti everywhere, for nanukanti.
vu^Usliti borrowed 189; 4, for vnl;i;ai)kasliti or -tat.
Cf. also pnksla, wo'ksla with their longer forms, and stelapksh 87, 13,
for Bteh'ipkishash.

8. Aphaeresis, or the retrenchment of an initial sonnd. Ex.:

kdp, Mod. for tkap stalk of plant; dim. kiipka, Kl. for tkapdjja.

ndiu, Mod. for tmu Kl., qronse.

'mutchaga little old man, 'nuitchdwatko old, for k'mntchaga, k'mutche'-
watko.

'mbute'ze, for himbnte'^e to jump over sometliing.

'(')ke, -J^lkoli, -lo'sh, Mod. forms for koko river, k61koli round, kO'sh pine-
tree This aphieresis before the lingnal k, which snbstitutos '-, is
heard in the Modoc dialect only.

uk, link, pron. that, and adv., for hiik, hunk; cf. hu'ksht awrf o'ksht.

9. Apocope of sornds. — Nothing is more frequent than the retrenchment of

siigle sounds at the end of words; the quality of the initial syl-
lable of the w( rd following is sometimes the cause of this, though
more frequently it is brought about by the location of the accent
upon a distant syllable :

shftk, sitk alike to, for shftko, sftko.

tchi'shtal towards home, for tchf shtala.

l'IlONOl-(KlY.

231

iid-asli, niish, thus, no, for iiii-usht, na'slit.

nil wt'; Ti ye, Mod. for na't, iia'd; at.

kalo clear skif, for kalo-u, an Hecni by tlie infloction.

Cf im for i mi, .09, 1); tuiu l)i'foiv coiisoiiants, 13, 14. 19, 1. 20, 19.

10. Apocope of syllahlea. — In the convcr.sational form of language tiiese

apocopes are freijuent and often very puzzling, as Ixal^am luli-
nauli instead of l^al/anmisliti liilinaKli in 74, 10. Ex.:

nakant toiiihi/j from everywhere, for ni'ikantkni.

gunigshta on opiioMe side of, for gunigslitana, with many other pre-
und postpositions, as vvigu't, etc.

paha, n^itsa dried, partic. pass, for pahatko, nxitsatko.

mdklaks hik( tribal chief, for makhiksam laki.

yuyalks^shftk wretched-lookiny, for yuyalkishash^shftko.

C. — Contraction and dilatation of phonetic elements.

Here, as well as in other tongues, contraction is chiefly limited to vo-
calic sounds, and although Klamath seeks rather than avoids hiatus, there
are instances enough of two vowels becon.ing contracted into one. A special
sort of vocalic contraction is the weakening of a vowel into the primitive
vowel e, generally when unaccented. Instances of consonantic synaeresis
i\re Moatokish for Moatok gish, tatiitli for tat-tdtli, kii'kjikli for kak-ka'kli,
shului'iktcha for shuluakt-tcha, etc.

Dilatation or expansion of the vowels of a word is called diaeresis; that
of consonants is usually gemination or redoubling.

11. Synaeresis, or "gathering up," as the name has it, is a figure drawing to-

gether vovVels into one sound (eventually into a diphthong) to avoid
hiatus. This coalescence of distinct vocalic sounds is quite fre-
quent and usually produces long vowels, whether accented or not.

ga'shtish door of lodyc, for kd-ishtish.

talak, d. tatalak straiyht out, for tdlaak etc.

ke'sh rattlesnake, for ke-ish, ;^e-ish.

nge'sh arrow, shenge'sha to shoot at oneself for ng^-ish, sheng«5-i8ha.

shenijtatko confluence, for shenuatatko, shenewAtatko.

pan(')pka to desire to eat, for panuApka.

M..J.M

232

GRAMMAR OF THI'. KLAMATH LANOUAGK.

r .

m'lkoah stojtpuge of waters, for uakuash.

sliu'dslinn to chase each other, for Hhii-udHhiia, Hhuhmlslina.

Wt-iilta to permit, for wt'wnlta.

giigf-iitko, 123, 2, crossed over, for gdkuatko.

liukiiiinna to t/athcr around, for livvnkiamna.

12. Krasis or "interniixturo" is tlie union of vowels forming part of differ-

ent syllables into (.ne vowel sound (or diphthong) to avoid hiatus.

The sound h is easily dropped if it stands between the vowels,
shea tJiey of course, for sha i-a, sha ya, [)3, (',.
tfdshiik ffood if to he, for tfdshi iik, tfdshi hii gi, 93, y. and Note,
nifut i/ours that, for nil hdt.

13. Vocalic uflniualion or shortening, weakening of unaccented syllables

into the primitive vowel 6 forms the transitory stage to the figure

eiilled syncope. We find it in :
skdtkela to carry on back, for skAtkala.
shulemokodsha to swing around, for shulamokc'dsha.
shukpeli to withdraw, for shukpali, cf (iH, H and Dictionary.

Weakening of an accented syllable: te'kish sword, for tekish.

Attenuation taking plaee between words is ol)served in: ge'ntgni /
tvouMfain go, for ge'ut a nl; atenen lor at a nen ; tatatCnat ivherever we, for
tatiit a nat; tatatiiksg spdklia when theg sweat in it, ^2, 3. J., for tatatak sha
spilklia. 'Fo this may bo added the weak pronunciation of -Am, -lam, the
suffix of the po.s.sessive case, especially frequent in the Modoc dialect,' and
almost equivalent to -6m: maklaksam, sut^ntcham, etc.

14. Diaerepis or vocalic diremption takes place when a vowel, which is gener-
all}- a long one, is redoubled or even tripled, and when a diphthong
is pronounced with hiatus, that is, as an adulterine diphthong.
a. Diaeresis of a vowel:
kf-intch wasp, for ki'ntch, kl'nsh.
nio-6we woodchuck, for m6we, miiwe.
ni'i-as one, a single one, for na'a, na'dsh.
shl(5-eta to discover, find, for shldta.
ki-i-fa to tell lies, for kla, kfya 64, 4.

PHONOLOGY.

233

These examples involve »imply ihetorical empliuBis, but there are
instances iniplying u change of sigiiiticiition as a cotisequenco of the
diajrc'sis: sha-apii-a lu dare, provob; iVi'iii slu'ipa to tfll, amnt; i-iulfua, yi-
ulfna to send over the edge, compared to yulina to menntruate.

b. Diphthongic diaeresis, as in f-iita for yiita, nd-i for ndya,
I^-ukshi for luiksi, has been fully discussed Iii the article
on Diplithong's, p. 208.
If). Ocmination or doubling- of consonants occurs only after vowels short
in quuiiiity :
Bcsstilolish MJrt/Wo/*, for slic^liah'ilish; vussa ^ /ear, for viisha ; gcniUla
to start, for jj^cuiila; ncllina to scalp, for noli'na; wi'tta to lant/h, for
wi'ta, cf. wetanta; luh'tta fo whip, for udi't.i; limlinnna to l)c dark,
for limlima; tchfn)nia-asli string-game, for tcbinui-ash ; kiVmme
cave, for kA'me; summatka with the mouth, bill, for shumatka;
tchaggiiya to sit upon, for tchakiiya.

1). — Phonetic changes through coutiguitg.

These changes mainly occur in unaccented syllables, and are produced
by the inlhu-nce of sounds either preccdiiij^- or following innncdiately, or
forming a part of the syllable protcding or following. It is generally the
subsequent sound which tries to weaken and then to assimilate or dissimi-
late its pre<lecessor. The altered jjosition of tlie accent sometimes i»ioduces
a similar result. In Latin we lind similar changes accomplished in mcridics
foi- mcdidies, medius Jidius for me Dius filius, occupare for obcapare, occiput for
olmujnd, exultarc for exsaltare, appono for udpono, doceor, audior for doceo-sc,
aadio-se.

16. AssimilalioH — Vowels and consonants of the same vocal class, either
standing beside each other or belonging to adjoining syllables,
assimilate more closely or become identical. This proce.ss forms
just the opposite of the dissimilation to be des<n-ibed below, both
of them being the result of pronounced tendencies of the language

waydlapsh icicle, piece of ice, for wealapsh.

Wiiitii'ngish Warm Spring Indian, for Waitil'ngish.

y^y";COf,''n t» ■'^liove into, for fyu^oga, i-u^oga.

■i *

234

(iUAM.MAU OF Tlli'; KLAMATH LANllUAUK.

-It

HliukattdiolotkiHli .sLiit-shvi) t'ml into the huif, fur HliukutanolotkiBh.

ttUiiat t;ijiilaiutftalii (fui- wvst, 21), 10, fi.r talaak etc.

t«uftwiiin IiiwIhIi id inr-lil(i(lclir, fur wliiiidsliam Itiwalali.

tilKiidsIia to ahanilou, fur tiiiKiuislia.

ntiilsliaiiipkimli Jtowini/ down (obj. aiHo), for iitiilHln'mtknHli, ntulHhi'in-
pka.sli; cf jrcniptclii for {rc'ii ptclii.

liil iK^iii (for ncii) wii'j>'ii kii'f^it, H7, ft. and Noto.
17. JJifishnilution. — 'I'liis phonetic law, wliicli U dirocfly opposite to tlmt of
asHiniilatiou, consistH in avoidin;- tlic repetition of a vowel or con-
sonant Htandiii'T in contignous syllables, and converts one of the
two, fifenerally the first one, into a cojrnate sonnd pronounced
wkli the same or<>an of the vocal tube. Dissimilation is more
frequent than assimilation, bnt applies only when the sounds
referi-ed to tlo not stand in the soiiir syllable. It operates alst) from
one word to tlus next one, as in:

Imhashtapknak tin;/ stahhcd vavh othrr ntdi/, for huhashtajtka ak, 114, ,'}.
Vocalic dissimilation is freijuently observed in terms formed
by iterative reduplicati<m :

Mmlemsli dizziness, iwliriafiun, for lamlanish.

liefhai yrd fox, silver fox, Mod. for la-fhei.

kt'tchkatch littti' t/ray fox, derived from ketchketchli loiufJi- furred.

kti'lkali round, for kalkali, kolkoli.

kil'kakli, kakii'kli ifellow, for kiikii'kli, and all other adjectives of color,
in the al)s(dute as well as in the distributive form.

Instances of vocalic, dissimilation in distributive reduph'cation :

wewii'kala, for wewekala, d. of wekala to ifire birth.

jjepuel^a, for pupueljj") ''• <>^ puel;^a to throw down.

shkii'shkatkala, for shkashkatkala, d. of skatkala to carry on hack.

kiikakii'kli yclhw, for kiikiikii'kli, d. of kakii'kli ; also all the other adjec-
tives of color, and many of those descriptive of surface-quality.
Other instances, where vowels become disshnilated, are as
follows :

wa'-aks, wc-aks mallard duck, for wu-eks; cf. wckash.

yanakiinfni heiny at the lower end, for yanakanfni, 148, 2.

kiamii'mi in the fishiny season, for kiiimii'mi.

PHONOLOGV.

235

HliiwakuiiMh to the yirls, for Hliiwiigu-UHli, 80, 11.

udii'yuu to heat, whip, for luluyim.

Cvnsonanlif (liHsiuiilutioii Ih obHorvod in the following terms
formed by ittTativi* rediiplit'iition:

ked8lianil<(HlHlialki'ii to wheel around on one's feel.

\)a\a\ii\\H\n\\k tcith rapid (jait, \\)r \)iihik\){\h\k; cf pi'iluk.

tchfptcliiiiia, ]\lo(l. Id drizzle dovii, for tcln'intciiiinii or tclifptcliipma.
18. Mctatlieiiis Ih an inversion or transposition by wliich a vowel or cohho-
innit nnitnalij' exclianj'o the position wliicii they normally ocenpy
in the word. Thid may take place in onc^ and the same, or in con-
ti<>uou8 syllables, antl is a iiynre of euphony, sinee it nmders the
pronunciation easier in that coimeetion where the word is applied.
Vowels can exchany^e their location with other vowels or with
consonants, and consonants with consonants.

shium'tta to hiikj in eliorus, for shuinota.

shui'la, shuilla to shake one.self, for shiula.

iush, lush )ne, to me, fur me, for nisli, ni'sh.

shnewadshka little ()irl, for shnawcdshka.

kmoknmka to (jrowl (dogs), for kmoknuika, d. of kmiiku.

Hamtchakta to vomprehend, for sanitchatka.

WJil'hka to look out for, for wi'i'hlka.

amtciiiksh old, former, for amtchgish, this probably for ma'ntcli gish.

shuipuklash smalt enaliion, for shnipkulash .Mod.

shaki)tfiksiia lo eluelc with the tonyue, for shakiipshtaka; from kapata.

t;{iVt;(a to presarje death or misehief, for tiVkt^a, from ti'ika to frighten.

leshnat;(ash/«w, sport, joking, for lewasht/ash.

iie-uxali)eli to order again, for ne-ul;^ai)eli.

li'ishgapCli to go and take off, for luktchapgli.

'I'here is another form of phonetic inversions taking place through the
agency of verbal or n.ominal inflection and derivation ; examples of it are
as follows:

kd-akt for k/ikat, d. of kdt who, which, pron. relat.

shdynaksii for ahayukash Icnotving, .'■direwd.

230 (JUAMMAU OF TUK KLAMATH LANdUAUE.

waltaksh promiscuous talking/, for vvaltkasli Mod.

hdslitaksli perforation of earlobe, for hashtkash .

fpakt it may stay, remain, for I'pkat, 148, 14.

wiulalek! strike it! for wiulalx' i !

hiitan, nge-islian they ran, they shot, for hi'itna, nge-ishna.

shulutamantk heing dressed in, for sliulutaninatko.

These inverted forms may bo explained by metathesis, but it is prob-
ably more correct to derive them from supposed forms as ka-akat, shdyua-
kash or -kish, waltaicash, hdshtakash, fpakat, wiul/ihik i! hutaiin, ngd-ishana,
etc., which, under the weight of the receding accentuation or other influ-
ences, lost their second vowel (a). This exjdanation is sustained by forms
like ni'-ulakuapka, fut. of ne-ulza to order, which, compared to genuapka,
fut. of gt'na to go, ijokshuiipkii, in*, of pi'ksha to grind, shows that the end-
ing -a of the "infinitive" does not appeitr in the future, but that the first -a-
m nc'-ulakuapka existed there previously, and induces us to presuppose an
ancient fornj ne-ulaka, ne-ula;(a.

19. Anathesis is a new grammatic term, by which I call a sort of vocalic
metathesis, almost entirely confined to derivative verbs and inflec-
tional verbal forms with their derivatives. Numerous instances of
it are found among the verbs beginning with the prefixes sh- and
h-sh-. This subject will be developed in full in Morphology,
Section: Radical Syllable.

ACCENTUATION.
I. LOCATION OF THE ACCKNT.

The accented syllable of a word is uttered with a stronger effort of the
voice, and frequently with a higher pitch than the syllables surrounding it.

Long words have a principal accent and a secondary accent. The
only sign used in this volume for accenting syllables is the acute accent, ',
as in ibdna, tiipka.

A curious difference is observed in American languages as we proceed
from the South to the North. For in many parts of South America, espe-
cially the t'astern and northern, the accent is placed towards the end of the

THOISOLOGY.

237

word and accentuation of the penult and final syllable must be considered
as the rule. In Central America the enii)hasized syllable begins to shift
towards the radix, and in most North American languages, which are rather
suffix- than prefix-languages, the accent has a tendency to rest on the root
or at least on the first syllables of the word.

In Klamath the emphasizing of the radix is the natural and funda-
mental law of accentuation, but it is so often interfered with by other
agencies that it seems rather to be the exception Many short particles
have no accent of their own, and in terms formed b}- iterative reduplication
each of the doubled radicals has an equal right to the accent; so the accent-
uation is here decided by rhetoric convenience.

To obtain an insight into the uuitual conHict of the accenting princi-
ples and the variability of accentuation, distinction must be made between:

(1) accenting the radical syllable.

(2) accenting by means of the secondary accent.

(3) accenting through quantity.

(4) accenting through syntactic emphasis.

In polysyllabic terms the root or radical syllable alone is invested
with an intrinsic notative signification, while the other syllables or sounds
of the word, verb or noun, express only its relations to other parts of the
sentence. Hence the root is the most ajjpropriate place for the word-
accent ; nevertheless we find it constantly shifting in American and other
illiterate languages under the guidance of certain phonetic, logical, and
rlietoric considerations. This establishes a great contrast with the accent-
uation of English, German, and the classic languages, but in French we
see the accent shift to and fro with almost the same liberty as here Thus
we find in Klamath, e. g. : tiila, tulA in company of; tawipka, tawipka to
bewitch; shniika, shnuka to grasp; viinepni, vunc'pni four thna ; hcmkankii,
hemki'inka to speak; ftpamp6li, itpampgli to carrg home; ktayalshtalrt, kta-
yalshtala, ktayalshtala into the rocks; shewanap'litki, shewanap'li'tki in onlrr
to restore. In the readings placed first, the accent rests on the radix, and
iu the second readings shifts toward one of th i formative syllables of rela-
liou. Very often a prefix is invested with the accent, as in hisluiaksh
husband, d. hihtishuaksh.

i il

238

GRAMMAU OF THE KLAMATH LAN(}UAGE.

Ill words of four sylhiMes or more, our ear is not satiafied by the subordi-
nating of so many unaccented syllables under one syllable, but seeks relief
by accentuating another of their iniiiiber by what is called the secondary
accent. In the same wa}- as the siioken sentence hurries towards )'^ i end,
the main accent of long words will also follow this forward rush; thus the
secondary accent increases in strength and tends to biing down the main
accent to the level of the other unaccented jiarts, unless its (luaiitity offers
resistance to this leveling process Thus shliutuapkuga hi order to shoot
tvlth, with the secondary accent on -iig-, may under the inHuence of the
following words become shliutuapkuga, the vowel i of the radix being short.
The same holds good of terms like shnfulatchganka to (jlance off from,
bilukshahuipkuga for the piirposr of rrniiatinp. Shifting of the accent can
also take place when i»roclitic and enclitic words crowd around accentu-
ated words, especially verbs.

Long vowels are not always accented; that is, quantity exercises no
decisive influence on accentuation. (!f. vi'ikshpreni toimrd the (uifilhnj place,
where -u- is a contraction of -uya-; but in saiga;jeni to the prairie, the suffix
has the accent. Nfshtak during the same tiight (from nislita ak) is just as
possible as iiishta'k.

The syntactic accent, as determined by the sense of the clause or sen-
tence, constantly interferes with the other principles of accentuation and
imposes its own laws Inhere are two sorts of syntactic accentuation; one
lays the stress of the voiiie on that term of the sentence which seems of
paramount weight to the speaker, while the other lets it fall on eertain syl-
lables of one, two, or several words of one sentence. This latter accent is
the one to be studied more carefully, the other needing no commentary.

In using the terms frieudlu, pluralitif, selfishness we think of them as
whole words only, and do not concern onrsehes about the real meaning of
their roots or suffixes. Indeed, very few of us know, that in friendly the
radix fii- means to love, oJierish, that -end- represents the old Saxon form of
the [iresent participle, and that -ly is our like, alike to, originally lie body,
Jlesh, form. But in Klamath this is <lifferent, for tliese and many other
Indians possess an intuit, ve if not a real knowledge of the functions of their
affixes A verb like gntilapkaprdi to wake turns while descendiny suggests at

PHONOLOGY,

239

once many ideas to the native. Gu- recalls tlie radix ga-, go- to yo, -tila a
motion doionward, -apka an occurrence taking place in the distance, -p6li return,
repetitiu)/, redouUinf/. Shnahualpdkta to cause echo is composed of the me-
ilial sh- "for somebody, or for oneself, or by itself", -n- in shn- forms
causatives, -a- is a vowel repeated from the syllable following, -hual- is the
radical syllable to sound, resound, he noisy (\\\u\\\i\, walta to sound, rattle) -pka,
the simplex of -piikta, is a suffix of verbs indicating repetition, iteration.

Still better is the Indian acquainted with the meanings of inflectional
endings, and though unable to give abstract names to the granmiatic
categories as we do, the correct use of innumerable sinij^le and compound
prefixes and suffixes is constantly jn-esent to his mind and guides him
through this lab}rinth of forms which can be joined to every radical syl-
lable of his agglutinative language. Now he has it in his power to accent-
uate every syllable or affix, which, as he thinks, exceeds in importance the
other comi)onents of the word for expressing his idea. If in the first ex-
ample given he lays stress on the distance from himself, then he accent-
uates gutilapka|)eli ; if descent is more important to hii:i, gutilapkai)eli ; in
the second example slniiiluudpakta would express strength of the effort to
cause echo. Cf. heshs;^jilpeli Gl, 8 with hc'shsxalpeli 61, 9; kiuyiiga 96, 21
with kiuycga; skuyil'i 20, 11 with the usual skuyiii.

Even monosyllabic i)articles can be lengthened into two .syllables by
(liaM-esis, and either of them may i-eceive the accent with a shade of differ-
ence on the meaning: ha-a, ha-a; hf-i, hi-i'; or pronouns: i, i-f, i'-i.

This feature adds largely to the natural expressiveness of the tongue,
and saves many circumlocutions which the less pliant languages of modern
Europe would have to specify by words. It is the idea of actuality, of being
done right then and there, that distinguishes shh'a, shla-a, and shla-a to see,
Jind, gcwa rtH^^gewa to go into water, guka and gukfi to climb up, guhua, guha,
guha to swell up, etc. Verbs in which the last syllable usually bears the
accent are: shi(') to bet, stuli to report, vumi to burg, vula to inquire; guli to
go into, is always oxytonized, but its d. form ki'llii is not.

In terms where no syntactic or rhetoric influences affect the location
of the word-emphasis, a shifting of the accent is often causcnl l»v the in-
crease (if tiio word through inflecHonal or derivative aflixes. In short

240

GKAMMAU OF TUli; KLAMATH LANGUAGK.

words thu accent luay then settle upon a prefix; when the term becomes
lengthened by suffixation, the accent may shift towards its final syllables.
Examples:

lieshla to show itself, from shk'a to see.

hi'shlau to shoot at each other, from shli'n to shoot.

lakiAmkshi at the chiefs house, from lakf chief.

shuktampka to beyin ff/htiiif/, from slu'ika to fight.

yamatiila eastward, from yuniat cast.

tataksnfptchi childlike, from tataksni children.

skukluc^pkasht from possible chapping, from skiikla to be Capped.

In the four last examples the sec(»ndary accent has entirely eclipsed
the accent originally laid on the radical syllable.

Oxytonized terms, as guli and others given above, will not shift their
accent unless increased by two or "^oro, syllables.

When a word of more than one syllable is increased by distributive
rediii)lication, the accent will usually shift away from the initial syllable
% the length of this increase:

hikl^a to shatter, split, d. liihi'ikl;{a.

ngiimshka to brcal; fractm :, d. ngumgamshka.

l6mev»'il;ija to drift. awa>i, d l6melemewllxa.

uldksha to lap, lick, d. ula-ulaksha.

Instances where the accent gravitates back upon the beginning of the
word, respectively upon the radical syllable through apocope, contraction,
or elision :

mt'ssiim in the troat-season, for mehiashJi'mi.

pallapksh the stolen one, for palldpkash.

k'lii'ksh telshAmpka to he moribund, for k'lekapkashtala telshAmpka.

The appending of enclitic pronouns and particles, which form a pho-
netic whole with the term governing them, sometimes effects a shifting of the
accent, but at othev times has no effect whatever. Examples of shifting:

nii-ulapknapka m's ni I shall punish you, 59, 3.

.stildsump6l6k sas hi order to fnuwn'/re to them, 22, 15.

PHONOLOGY.

241

tzop6=8hitko, tzop6=sitk like a thumb, 149, 12.
shliuapkA m'sh sha Ihey will shoot you, 30, 3,
gepgapglfssa they returned home, for gepgdpgli sha.
Cf. ki-iika gi, 42, 12; kak6 b6la, 101, 7; humtchf kl, 126, 9; aiunotfsh
tchkash, 83, 4.

Instances where enclitic terms have not affected the position of the
accent are as follows :

shnii'-uldsha nat we galloped off, 29, 12.

tchi'-ishtat m'na to their camp, 2;), 16.

tsA'shni m'sh ni I forever from you, 61, 2; but: tsMinl m'sh ni, 69, 20.

In ha ni skuyti'shkuapka m'sh if I should separate (her) from you, 61, 1,
the proclitic ha ni may have retained the verbal accent in its usual place.

II. — PnOCLISIS AND ENCLISIS.

A number of particles, mostly conjunctions, some pronouns and adjec-
tives, or rather adjectival suffixes, are liable to lose their accent if placed in
certain positions, while others among them alway appear unaccented.
These are monosyllabic ; those composed of two syllables are capable at
any time of reassuming accentuation, and hence can be classed here only
under restrictions.

These unaccented terms may be said to lean either forward on the
coming accented word— fe he proclitic; or to lean backward on the accented
word just spoken— to be enclitic. 'I'heir influence on the accentuation of the
main word is only a casual one; cf Accentuation, pp. 237, 240.

Proclisis is less frequent than enclisis; all proclitic words are capable
of assuming the accent. A list of them reads as follows :

at now, then; mu, m<X greatly, largely (not when apocopated from miini
lurge); hil if, when; tam, interrogative particle; wak? howf how so f A few
personal pronouns in their subjective cases, as nfi, ni, i, pi, hiik, hil, etc.,
and the possessive pronoun mi thy, thine.

Enclisis is frequently observed and generally appears when a personal
object-pronoun is connected with a transitive verb. Two enclitic monosyl-
IG

«i^

242

(lUAMMAU OK TIIK KLAMATH l,AN(}IJA()r';,

liibloH can bo pliicoil iii't(;r itti lu-rcuUul word, and ont; of tlicin rn;«|ii(!nt]y
(jlidcfH it.H vow(!l. Knfilifl*^ t«trrnH may Ixt claHMMl uii folloWH:

Sii//i.n(l (i(lji'ii.i)'i's ai'(! iinaccfintcd fciniH of air adji-cfival fmuttion (jiiali-
fyin^ a noun aftrilnitivitly, not |)r<:ilicativ(!ly ; two of flK^tn, f^ffko aritl nliltko,
poHmtHH a non-<-riclili(; iliMliilniiivo lorni and an; inflcf'ffid tluonj^li all <;aH«)H,

(inifcliikHli nncii'iit, ottl, usrit up, in ifH abbnjviation: -aintcli.

f^itko, f^itk, d. }:fij^{^iifko possruscil of.

kani nome otir, (irni one; cf. (10, I.'}, and the i)ii;tionary.

-ptclii, -nit(dii, -tclii, -t.(di (ililir lo, ttitiiriinufi likt;

wldtko, witk, d. MliiHiif'itko (ilih: lo, rrsfnihlhif/.

tkani a lilllc, siniuivliiil.

Moro will 1»»! f'onnd (lonrornin;^ tlniw; fornm nnrlcr "A<lj»;c,tiv(!," Ixdow.

I'rmiounn All tlic nronoHvllabic. p'!rH<tnul pronounH, Hiibj<f<'tiv<! and
ol)j({c.tiv(', an; appcrnbid (!ncliti<ally to tin; verb wlii<;li tli(!y -^ttM-rw or upon
wliic.li tli(;y d<!p<;nd. Snl)jc(;tiv(; personal pronf>nnK: ni, nn /; i, ik lhi>n;
Inik, Inni, Ini, pi //'■, shr, it; iiad, nat, na ire; at, a i/r ; .nlia, pat lliri/. ()b-
j<;ctivo jMjrHonal pronouns: nihli, ni'iHli, n'sli, u'h tiir., lo mc; niiHli, ki'mIi, rn'H
thci', to thrr ; hun, In'i, pinli, pi'iHli him, her, it; lo him, lo hi.r, lo it; nalaHli in
tlin form nahli, natn, n's iis, lo us; ni/dahli in tlio form malMli i/r, to i/r ; HnaHli,
Hart them, to them; nliam, Ham of Ihrm Km;litic, pOHHOHHive pronmiiiH an; mi
thiuc, Ihji; p'na, Kl. m'na ///'v, lirra, iln ; Hliam, Ham theirs. I)«;monKtrative
ami relativfj pronouiiH ^renerally pnjserv*; tlieir accent, but amonj'' the in-
definite pronouiiH, tua .sonir, himl of, loHeH it, in compomidiiif,' wordn: nannktmi
every kind of; cf. katn anj/ one.

I'articlc.N, when monoHvllabic, are onc,liti(! nnlenn Kome particular em-
|)haHiH is laid on tluim in conmsction with the whole s(;iitence. The more
fn!(pu;nt of tlmm an;: a; aka, ak, ka; at; ha; hak; ya, yn; -la, -\(:; lish;
mat; n(;n; pil; tak, t<)k, taksli, t.(»ks; tchii, t,<;he, tsi; tchi'sh, abbr. -tch, -ts;
tcbkash; un, nti. 'rh(;ir sifrnirication and use will be indicated Ixilow.

The vrrit ij!;'\, lo he, do, s::iji, has H(!veral monosyllabic. in(le(;t<'d forms which
may beconn; enclitic, as \r\, f(fnk, {^ish, f^JHht, ami the [»artic,iple {^itkr*, which
will then usually cast, off the endirif^ -o. 'i'ln; simple gi often abbreviates
into -k, -\r: iia'stg .so he said; K-uksni toks lapik but of the Klamath Lake
men there tvere two.

IMrONOIXXJY.

243

IfiHtancoH of <!ti(;IiMiH of variouK i]<',H(.ri])i'u>m nra an follows:

Hlui(;k^;lii!ij»ku m'Mli iii / will ramovH you from yfjur poniiion.

fuiiii lifik lifitokt, rnaklakH (^i many pi-.rsom are lfu;re.

Miiaka fc.likaHJi uiU\n MJiti'lta hn also injormed his son.

p/illaiik riiiHli rohhiny ttici;; vi'iHHok huh afraid of tlif;m.

Wi-.wi'ijrii |)il fclifHlii thi; rliildriui only were in the lodye.

kii/ktHiiasli; iMJimffHlaHli lluy fled; they enslaved (-hH for HJia they).

|)f tcliiHh he also; ii/tnxHtcli some also, Ifi, 7.

K'iiii'ik-jmit(!ji the Old Man of the Aneu:nts;. SliiVk-aint,<;li Old dram.

kii'kiik tkdiii a little yrlloii; tellowish.

A l(!itii may l»f;fornf) iwi-MuU-.n on t,wf» Hyllalijos, an In On!(;k, l»y «n-
• liHiH; fill; (irHf, Ix-iri;,' fJio iiiitiiral nvvMUi, tlic hwmuA flio acconf, tlirown iijmn
flio word by tlifj oxiHtcjnco of tJio ori(jliti<; torni: ti'i't^;riipni' slia, HI, 2;
Hh/ihiaHlitala m'na, 112, 13.

QrJANTITY.

TIk! laiirriia{,'o<-!f)ar]y <liHfiri;,'iiiHlirHbf;t\vooii lonj,' and whort syllahlosor
v(.w(!Ih. Two HtaffOH may b<; i' uin^niiHJicd in short Hyllaljlos: vory nliort and
M!u»rt; two also in \<>u\<:^ oikjs: lon;^ and scrv lonj,'. TIk; iisual wiffn of
brevity, ', anri of length, - was add(;d to the vow«-ls oidv wlion tiify wcro
utt«!r(!<l v(;ry Hliort or vciry long Thus nioriosyllabic nouns onding in a
vowel pronounco this vowel v(;ry slirtrt in Ki.: kma' skullcap, trni'i', mini'
yrouse, Iba seed speeit-.s, kpe'l tail, kpa' poher, ska pestle, ska' to hlow cold f)r
strony; and alsf) in y,l'ki seed-haskel, kri'itsia duek species, ndHli<';'<lsli shell,
pod, gft't sayc hrush. Many of tlicso an; pronounced totiyer by Modocs.
Tlio vowol Ih still short, though longer than in the terms above, in Ixasli
Inlloir, shlfn to shoot, ni'ish head. As to long S3dlables, a flifference may
be ob.serv(;d betw(;en m.'intch*/ry//i'y ayo, muni yreat, Inrye f radix long in both
t<'rmsj, and their emphatic prr»riun(;iatif>n: ma'ntch qvite lony ayo, mu'ni,
mri-uni very larye, enormous. A difference exists also between tank, tankni,
and tfi'iik, ta'rikni, and between washla and wa'shla. (.'f. Homonyrny. The
fpiantity of words is often adrled in parenthesis: yutetanipka (~- ~ t _;,
tchmuksh f-), kil'mat ( ' -).

Almost any short syllable may be made long when a strong rhetoric
emphasis is laid upon it: pd's and pa'shyoot/, ct" 101, 20; guma and ga'nia

244

OltAMMAU OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

illtti

to crush with a stone. Words with long vowels are ni'l, no'l fur, feathers,
nl'lka to dawn, ma'sha to he sick, na'dsh, na'daliak one, at one time.

For tlie quantity of each word the Dictionary may be consulted.

The character of the language prompts the Indian to distinguish be-
tween long an J short syllables, and no other phonetic figure is so produc-
tive of long vowels than vocalic contraction (sy na^resis, etc.). In nAkosh dam,
the synaeresis of ua into 6 is remembered, and though the accent rests on
the first syllable, the second is pronounced long. Many syllables with e,
6, and other long vowels are not pronounced short, because the people use
the uncontracted forui besides the contracted one: geno'la and genuala,
hldkosh and hlt'kuish, no'kla (from n6ka]a), shukatonolo'tch, tchl'sh and
tchf-ish.

A vowel does not, as a general rule, alter its quantity through position,
viz., through a cluster of consonants gathering after it. The short a in
ktilpka remains short even in ktupkantko and in ktupkilpksh. But before
-dsh a vowel generally sounds longer than before -tch: tama'dsha and
tamdtcha, laka'dsha and lak.'itcha.

Nor does a vowel, generally speaking, alter its quantity through be-
coming emphasized by accentuation : in hdmkanka to speaJc, e is pronounced
as short as in hemkdnka, i in hlta as short as in hita at this spot; but becomes
long through apocope: hi'd, hi't.

Syntactic or rhetoric emphasis sometimes modifies syllabic quantity:
gen him, 1 14, 2 ; na-a'sht gi so said, 95, 21 ; sji'gs' ish! tell me! (a long), 78, 4;
lala'ki chiefs, 65, 14.

Neither quantity nor emphasis by accent is necessarily associated with
a higher pitch of the voice.

HOMONTMT. •

Homonyms are terms sounding exactly alike, but having a different
signification; paronyms are terms which seem to sound alike to inexpe-
rienced ears, but in reality differ in accentuation, quantity, or pitch of
voice when uttered by natives, and also differ in their meaning.
Some Klamath homonyms are the following :

kfsh fish-spear, kfsh sundown.

na'sh, na's species of bulrush, also: one, single; also: thus, so.

PHONOU)GY. 246

ska' pestle, ska' to bhw cold or strong.

tclil'sh settlement, lodge, tchl'sh inhabitant. ,

wAsh prairie-wolf, wAsh hole, den, excavation.

Vfika near, wfka to hlow.

Huna to stand, crowd inside, Ifunn to produce a noise.

Paronyms differing in quantity only:
klsh fish-spear, kl'sli, ki'sh a lie.
shijina to run a race, shui'na to sing.
tchish also, too, tclii'sh lodge, inhabitant.
nl, ni /, myself, nl' snowshoe.

Paronyms differing in one or more sounds of the alphabet :
giwash hluish squirrel, Gfwasli, nom. pr., Crater Mountain.
lakf chief, lAki to he stolen, gone, l<4ki forehead.
l(i'k seed, kernel, li'ik, ](5k grizzly hear.
p'hiishka to tear offhy hand, pi'ishka to cut.

shikantf^la to pile upon each other, shikantfla to show something on feet.
yulfna to menstruate, yiulfna to send over the edge.
skdtash mantle, skdtash, 8;Kuta8li hunch, string.
shul^a to tie together, shiilg^a to roar, growl.
shko'ks ghost, spirit, shkoks sheep-tick.
kii'sh ipo-root, ke'sh rattlesnake, ka'sh excrement.
k6ka, k(5ke river, stream, k6ka to hite.
ndwa to extend, v. intr., ntiwa to drive into the water.
gt'na to go away, walk, k^na it is snowing.
vudiika to strike with a stick, vut6ka to swing around, v. trans.

Some of the above terms (yulina etc., skiitasli etc.) are etymologically
identical, but, because differentiated in their meanings, they now differ in
their pronunciation. This we observe also in English : to pat and to pet,
secure and sure, loyal and legal, leal; disk, dish, desk; warrantee and guarantee;
as well as in the French: na\f and natif, Noel and natal, entier and integre.

246

GKAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE,

MORPHOLOGY.

Morphology is a part of fifraniniar wliicli gives a systematic account of
the changes experienced by its uiiitorial units or words through becoming
parts of a sentence. Morphology in its descrii)tive portion has to present
the word in its forms altered by inJfcction, as they occur in the language;
in its systematic part it has to explain the origin and function of these forms.
The phonetic changes considered under "Phonology" are largely brought
about by the changes which tlie words are undergoing through being placed
into mutual relations to each other in forming parts of a sentence. Derl-
vaiion, a process analogous to intlection in many resjiects, is another import-
ant part of linguistics to be dealt with systematically by morphology.

Languages greatly dift'er among themselves in the degree of the energy
which unites or binds together its elementary parts. Where the parts do
not unite, the position of the words in the sentence alone points out their
mutual relation, and few or no phonetic changes occur. These are the
monosyllabic languages. In the agglutinative tongues, certain syllables
which indicate relation cluster around other syllables which retain the
accent. After gathering up the other syllables to be their aitixes, and
uniting them into one body, the accented syllables gradually become
radical syllables, and phonetic laws begin to manifest themselves in the
alteration of colliding sounds, in the abbreviation of the affixes, etc. Here
the original function of the relational or affix-syllables is still recognizable
in the majority of instances, but in languages reaching a third stage, the
inflective languages, the affixes become so intimately fused with the radix,
that they serve as mere relational signs and may be considered as integral
parts of the whole word. Through this accretion, or by other causes, the
root itself becomes modified, chiefly in its vocalic part, for inflectional
purposes.

THE RADICAF. HYIJ.AHLK.

247

The structure of Klamath i'h docidcdly afrfflutiiiutivo; uovertheleHs, in
Home imrtlcularn, to bo (umHidered later, it approiicht'H the toiiffiies of the
inliectional onh r. An important characteriHtic of it, syllabic duplication,
Ih obHorved in tlie prefix- and radical syllablcH. Two other features per-
vadinjj every part of Klamath Hpeech are the protioiiiinal wyllubles used as
radicals and as affixes, and the fi{jure called uiiathc.siN. Compound words
are in fact the result of a syntactic process and will be discussed in the
►Syntax.

In subdividing ('le affixes into prefixes and suffixes accordinfj to their
locution before or after the radix, and into inflectional and derivational
affixes accordiuf^ to their functions, we obtain the following general scheme
for our morjihology :

I. — liadkal sylluhk.

1. Its structure. 2. Its origin and classification. 3. Its phonetic alter-
ations. 4. Its increase by the redujdicative process. 5. Anathesis.

II. — Radical syllable connected with affixes.

1. Inilectional affixes; suffixation. 2. Derivational affixes: A. Prefix-
ation; B. Suffixation. 3. List of ))rofixes. 4. List of infixes. 5. List of
suffixes.

III. — Inflection and derivation.

\. Verbal inflection; verbal derivation. 2. Nominal inflection; nomi-
nal derivation: «, of substantives; h, of adjectives and participles; c, of
numerals; (/, of pronouns; e, of postpositions.

IV. — Particles or words without inflection.

I.— THE KADICAL SYLLABLE.

A root, radix, o radical syllable is a sound or group of sounds pos-
sessed of an inherent signification. By the processes of inflection jind
derivation affixes cluster around the radix, which may undergo phonetic
changes; the meaning of the radix then remains either unchanged or j)asses
into another signification cognate and closely related to the original mean-
ing. Languages have been studied in which the radix is composed of two

248

GRAMMAll OF THK KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

m'^

syllables; in Klamath monosyllabism is the only form in which radicals
exist, jiiat as in the literary languages of Europe, although some Klamath
terms Heomingly attest a dissyllabic origin.

With a few ononjatopoetic exceptions, the roots are no longer trace-
able to their origin ; hence we do not know why such or such sound-groups
have been conventionally assigned certain functions in the different lan-
guages of the world. Gramnmtic affixes are roots also, whether they be
still recognizable as such or be ground down from syllables io single sounds,
mostly conaonantic, and more fragments of what they had been once.
When used as signs of relation, they belong to the class of pronominal
roots and are recognized as such with less difficulty in agglutinative than
in inflectioiuil languages.

The roots are the microcosmio colls from which the macrocosmos of
language is l)uilt up; for it residts from the above that all elements in lan-
guage are either radical syllables or fragments of such. Formation and
quality of sounds are no secrets to us, but how and why they came to be
selected for their present functions in each linguistic family is beyond our
conception. The cause why linguistic families differ among themselves in
grammar and dictionary is the disagreeing of their pronominal and notative
roots.

Root-inflection or regular alteration of the root-vowel to indicate change
of relation is most prominent in the Semitic languages and also in the
Germanic branch of tiie Indo-European family. In America only traces
of this "Ablaut" are discovered in a few languages, and what could be
considered analogous to, or resembling it, will be discussed under "Phonetic
alteration of the root." See pp. 253 et sqq.

1. PHONKTIC STRUCTURE OF THE BOOT.

Three fundamental forms are traceable in the elementary composition
of the Klamath radix; it consists —

Of one vowel:

a in dna to carry off.

i in fka to extract, fta to put on, i'wa to be full.

u in uya to give, w& to he seated, we'k arm, limb, litish long-shaped fruit
(cf. Mtish round-shaped fruit).

rUONBTIO 8TKUCTURB OF THE ROOT.

249

Of a siiifik or'ihuhle consonant followed by a vowel:

liii-, ho- in hii'nia to emit voice; ka- in kdta, ngAta to break, v. intr.; kii-
in kt'ika to bite; ktu- in kt/i-i atone rock; niu- in xi\ui\\ great, nu'nia
deep down, A diphthong appearu in tchuitchi'tili sorrel, kaukauli
brown.

Of a vowel preceded by a consonant and followed hy a consonant:

kal- in ki'ilo .sky, kAlkali round; tak- in taktAkli red, .scarlet, ta'^tgi to
bimh; tip- in tiptfpli dark-colored ; yal- in ydlyali limpid.

It is appropriate to call tliis third category of roots ending in conso-
tiants thematic roots. The terminal consonants bear great analogy to some
nominal and verbal affixes, and a number of words formed in a similar
manner can bo actually reduced to roots of the second class: vowel pre-
ceded by consonant, as laklakli .slippery, not to lak-, but to la- in lAla to be
.steep, to slope doivmvards, cf. hla-a to foal, lelddshi brood; lushlushli warm, hot,
not to lush-, but to lu- in luloks Jire, lukua to be warm, hot; pushpiishli black,
not to push-, but to pu-, po-, in po'ksh mud In the terminal consonant of
pal- in j)dlla to steal, 11a to lay down, the analogy with the suffix -la, -ala is
obvious. It is therefore highly jjrobablo that all these roots of the third
class are formed by accretion, and those containing diphthongs seem to
have been formed by a similar jjrocess.

Some radical syllables commencing with mute consonants are nasalized
occasionally, as kiUa: ngAta to break, pAtash: mpAtash milt, spleen.

There are radicals found in certain letters of the alphabet, as k, t, u,
which reduplicate the two initial syllables when ])laced in their distributive
form, and thus n)ay be suspected of being originally dissyllabic. But
neither of the two kinds of reduplication proves anything for the condition
of the radix, for all the prefixes invariably reduplicate with the root, al-
though they do in no manner belong to it. Compare, for instance :

Prefix k- in kmel^a to lay down, d. k^kmel;ta and kmokmal;^a, rad. e-.

Prefix 1- in lawdla to place upon, d. lalawala.

Prefix sh- in ska to blow stronyhj, d. shkdska, rad. ka.

Prefix u- in uldgsha to lap up, d. ula-uldgsha.

Some radical syllables, chiefly pronominal, are found to figure in two

250

IJUAMMAE OF THE KLAMATU LANGUAGK.

capacities: as roots of predicative signification, and as roots of relation
forming affixes. This is true, for instance, of i, hi on the ground, in I'tn, to
put on, i\x& to lay down into; of u, hu he, sJie, it and above, fat; in hi'ita to
run at, hiiwa to jump up in the water, uya to give a long object.

8. ORIGIN AND CLASSIFICATION 01' KOOTS.

Altliough we are precluded from unraveling the origin of the majority
of radices it is preposterous in our present state of linguistic knowledge
to derive all the radicals of a language from onomatopoetic attempts to
imitate the sounds a.\d noises heard in outdoor life, like the note of birds,
the rustling or blowing of the wind, or the roll of thunder. To ascribe a
pronominal origin to all the roots which do not represent, or do not seem
to represent, natural sounds has been a favorite theory of some scientists
who have studied languages of the so-called savages. As to the Klamath
language, the most appropriate classification of roots will distinguish f».ur
sources for their possible origin: onomatopoetic, interjectional, pronominal,
predicative.

RADICES OF ONOMATOPOETIC ORIGIN.

They have formed a large number of bird names, a few names of
other animals and objects of nature. They also occur in verbs denoting
sounds and disturbances.

Birds: aha-ash, kak, tuktukuash, tuakash or wakash, o'lash, takiiga,
ud('kash.

Other objects: hefhai, mbaubawash, biimbam, tfntan, cf. udfntgna.

Verbs: ka-ukawa, kiishkusha, tiishtusha, todshiti3'dshi, udfntgna.

RADICES OP INTERJECTIONAL ORIGIN.

a'-oho, i-uhu, ii-ohutchna, i-uhdash; hii', hii'ma; kapkablantaks,
kdmkem, kapkapagfnk i!

RADICES OF PRONOMINAL ORIGIN.

Pronominal roots originally indicate location in space, proximity, dis-
tance or motion in space and subsequently in time, then relative location,
and, finally, relation in general. Tlicy appeal-, therefore, as well in pre-

ORIGIN OF ROOTS.

251

fixes <and suffixes, pronouns and pronominal particles, as in predicative
significations, which have gradually evolved from the pronominal ones and
make up a large portion of the vocabulary. These roots, which are in fact
demonstrative pronouns and demonstrative adverbs, have in the present
stage of the language become devoid of any special significations, and this
quality eminently fits them for expressing relations between the different
parts of speech. Whenever they form derivatives, the meaning of these
radices becomes more specialized; thus hu- forms a large number of verbs
with the signification ot running, tu-, ti- verbs and nouns referring to mo-
tions of li(|uids, water, as spreading, dripping, soaking, ti-, tin- to motions
performed by a plurality of subjects. All roots consisting of one vowel
only belong here, and a number of lengthy Avords are entirely composed
of pronominal roots.

On account of the importance of this class of radicals, I subjoin speci-
mens of them and their derivatives, but do not claim any completeness for
the list:

a, ha, hd appears in particles a, at, atui; in suffix -ha; in ana, ansha.
h- connected with all the vowels forms reciprocal, reflective, causative

verbs and their derivatives.
hu, M, M, in prefix u-, suffixes -u, -ui (-uya), -wa, -uish; in pron. and
adv. hu, hut, iiun, hunk, in pron. lii'inksht, hukag; in wa,
we'k, utfsh or "iti'sli; lina, una'k, hiita, hudshna, huntchna,
hiiwa.
i, hi, hi in suffixes -i, -I'a; in hva, iwi'p^a, fta, fdslia, f-a (ya), yana, yaina,

i-u (yu), yi'ita.
k- appears in three forms: ka, ke, ku; ke being originally ki.

In, (fa in suffixes -ka, -ga, -Ip^a, -tiimpka, etc., in demonst.-relat.
pron kat tvho; interr. kanf tvho? in giit, kd-a, ka-ag, shkt'i,
katak, giiyue.
he, ge, ge, yonder, reduplicated in kek, geg, kdku, forms prefix ki-,
k-, and the verb gi; gc'na to go aivay, and its numerous deriv-
atives, as gi'kansha, gempgle, seem to point to the radix gn,
for some of them begin with ga-, ka- : gayaha, gake'mi, ga-
I'lla, ka-uloktana; in keka, tkt^ka.
hi, gu in ku and kui fur off, kuinag, ko-i, ko-idshi, skuyui.

262 GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

la, I- in suffixes -fe, -lam, -la, -ala, -l;^a, -Idmna.
ma in. prefix ni-, suffix -ma.
na, n- in the locative suffix -na; in nil, nl, nat.
p- appears in several forms: p, pa, pi, etc.

pa, in prefix p- and suffixes -p, -pa, -ap; pron. pash; particles pa,
pash, pAni, -p6li, shepdlua, p'laf, hislipldmna, pAna, pe'ntcli,
p'nAna.
pi, demonstr. and reflect, pron.; in the prefixes pe-, p'-, sp-; in the
suffixes -p6na, -tpna; in p'na, KI. m'na.
sha, sh-, s- in pron. sha theij; also of reflective function; in medial pre-
fix sh- (sha-, she-, etc.); in suffixes -sha, -asha, -ansha, etc.,
-sh, -ash, -tch; in sluipa.
t- appears in three forms: ta, ti, tu.

ta in prefix ta-, t-; in suffixes -ta, -tala, -tana; in tawi, stAwa, st.l,

stani; stii, stt'na, sti'i-ila, tapka, tapak.
ti in prefixes ti-, te-, t'- and suffix -ti; in tfna, tfla, tilaluAnsha, tfl^a,

shtflta.
tu in prefixes tu-, tush-, suffix -tu; in particles tu, tiila; in utultpa.

RADICES OF PBEDICATIVE SIONIPICATION.

This class comprehends all roots which cannot, from our present knowl-
edge of the language, be referred to one of the three categories preceding.
Their signification is more concrete and specific than that of the pronom-
inal roots ind points to some action or quality. We include here, also,
the thematic or secondary roots, as lak in lakldkli, etc. Cf p. 249.
Instances of predicative roots are as follows:
pat in patpsitli, mpiita, kta in ktd-i.

shu in shum. le in shk%, It^ltki, etc.

litch in litchlftchli, Iftchtakia. mets in metsmetsli.

The adjectives formed by iterative reduplication and by the suffix -li
probably all contain thematic roots, ultimately reducible to shorter forn)s;
cf "Phonetic structure", pp. 248 sqq , "Phonetic alteration of the root",
pp. 253 sqq.

ALTERATION OF THE ROOT.

253

A remark upon the alleged priority of the verbal over the nominal
roots may be appropriately inserted here. In many languages, especially
the monosyllabic, noun and verb do not distinguish themselves from each
other in their exterior form, and even in Klamath we find words like pjita,
petfla, ndshishlpja, which are verbs and nouns at the same time, and verbal
suffixes which are nominal suffixes also. In many other languages the dis-
tinction between the two categories is at least an imperfect one, and must
have been more so in their eariier stages of development. When the sen-
tence had reached a stage in which the predicative idea in the verb began
to distinguish cleariy between subject, object, and verb, noun and verb
commenced to assume distinctive affixes, and the position of these parts in
the sentence became more free. Noun and verb tlierefore originated simul-
taneously, not successively.

A single instance taken from the present status of the Klamath lan-
guage may give us an idea how in its eariier stages the two categories
could have differed. Ktchal;ja means to shine and to emit heat, ktchak (for
ktchalka) mother-of-pearl shell, ktchalui to he resplendent and to he hot,
ktchdlta to reverberate, ktchiilua to shine and to reflect sunrays, ktdniXxhh
sunshine and heat of sunrays, sunburn, ktchiilshkash radiance, ktcho'l star,
etc. Evidently the root, either simple or thematic, is ktchal {a short), and
the idea of heat is secondary to that of light, radiance; but nobody is able
to decide whether its original meaning was the nominal one of ray, radiance,
or the verbal one of to radiate, or of both at the same time, for both the
derivatives are equally long or short in their affixes. If in the minds of
the eariiest people who formed this language a distinction has existed be-
tween the two as a vague feeling, we can no longer follow its traces. Even
nouns, to be considered as having been substantives from a very eariy
epoch, as siw, moon, water, fire, were in some languages shown to be deriva-
tives of radicals, but not of radicals of a distinct nominal or verbal signifi-
cation.

3. PHONKTIC ALTEKATION OV THE ROOT.

Of some languages it has been sa'd that their consonants were com-
parable to the skeleton and bones of the animal organism, while their

254

GKAMMAIl OF TFIE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

vowels, jis the fluid and variable element, were likened to its soul. This
funn'shes a graphic picture of the structure observed in the Semitic family
of languages, and in a less degree applies also to the languages of the Indo-
European family. The pernnitability of consonants and vowels among
themselves in unwritten languages has been described above ( "Alveriuiting
of Sounds"), and does not, generally speaking, alter the signification of the
terms in which it is oTtserved. But the case is different with the radical
vowels of Klamath under certain conditions, for here we observe something
analagous to Semitic vocalization, when vocalic changes occur.

A few similar instances from other American lariguages are as follows:
In the Nipissing-Algonkin, / lore li'mi is rendered by m' sakiha; in four
"modes" of the verb the long vowel T\ changes into -aya-, -aia- : sayaki-
hak / who lore Jiini, sayahakiban / who did love him, sayakihak the one loved
hj) me, sayakihakin when I jiisf happen to lore him. In the same manner
verbs with the radical vowels Ti, e, i, T will alter them respectively into e,
aye, e, a. In Cha'hta we meet with vocalic changes in radical syllables
like the following : tclieto to he larr/e, tchito to he quite loif/e, tchieto to he de-
eidedlij Inrye. In othe • instances of the kind the vowel becomes nasalized.
In Creek some verbs lengthen their radical vowels almost imperceptibly
to form a preterit from the jiresent tense.

The study of alterations observed in the Klamath roots is highly
im|)ortant for illustrating the formation of the language, and also throws
light upon the radical changes occurring in the inflectional languages of the
eastern hemisphere. The vocalic changes are of greafer importance than
the consonantic, and are brought about in various ways.

VOCALIC ALTERATION OV THE RADIX.

Vocalic changes occur only in certain words of the language and with-
out any apparent tegnlantji. They are produced either by the intrusion of
another sound into the radix, or by an independent, as it were spontaneous
chan<ro. Some of these changes appear only from one dialect to the other,
while the majority occurs m words belonging to the same dialect, and then
they are always attended by a change in the signiflcation of the term.

ALTERATION OF THE ROOT.

255

1 . Change hy substitution.

The primitive vowels a, j, u are somv times substituted to each other to
indicate a change in the local or temporal relation of the words of which
they form a component part. They represent the pronominal roots:

a, hd here, on hand, hy hand; temporally: noiv, just now.

i, hf on the ground, at home, for somebod)' ; temjjorally : at the time of.

u, hii up, above, far off, on the person, in the water; temporally: in the
past, previously.

Thus the personal pronouns ni, nish, pash change to nil, nush, pish,
push and in particles and suffixes the change through all the three vowels
is sometimes observed:

-ksdksi, -kshakshi, a locative nominal suffix of the northern dialect, is
altered to -ksi'ksi in Nakosk !iks(i), nom. pr., "right where the pile-
dam is"; to -ksii'ksi in SlanKoshksu'ksi, nom. pr., ''ivhere the old
bridge once teas."
tcha now, presently, tchi'k (or tche'k) at last, finally, until; tchi'ik at last
out there.

We may also compare the changes observed in the pronominal roots
ka, ki (ke), ku ; ta, ti, tu.

Vocalic changes in predicative and ])ionominal roots are the followin<r:
kpadsha to extiiigni.^h hy hand, kpi'tchtchna, Mod. to spit, kputcha Kl.

to squirt from the mouth.
spatcha to tear asunder, spftcha to pull to the ground, extinguish the fire,

sputchta to cause somebody to part or lift the legs: to frighten. Cf

pfidsha, pitcha, puedsha.
spatadsha to stretch out, spitadsha to stretch out a part of the body. Cf

put(')ga, putova, sputuya.
pjiha to he and to mahe dry; pi'ika to mast, Jxdc.
smn'k hair on belly, snu/k hair of heard, mukash dotvn, downy feather.
li'tki evening, viz. "dpfi" ■ " \n\y\ to come down to the ground.
ska cold, adv., sgu'i.iia ,•■ ir frost forms ; cf skiikla.
tchak- ill tohaktohakii sharp, pointed; tclii;(tchiza to tickle; cf tchakela,

shtchiyakc'ka, slitchi'kt;{i8h.

26G

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

wAl;;a to he sitting, wfl^a to squat down.

t/itkta ,'o feel pain, tfka to came pain ; cf. tdkteka.

ika to remove, trans.; ef^a (for d-ika) to jmt out the head, spuksi to put out

Hie feet; shnuka to take away. Cf. nfka.
kfdslia to dive, kfdshash fin, kiidsha gudgeon.
shlfn to shoot, shlo'kla to shoot at the mark.
kiilkali round, kilxa to become humpbacked.

Cf. also Ifla with Mia, i^tchAklza with Kl. ptclifkl^a, shlAtchka with
shUtchka. Of vocalic; changes observed in suffixes the following may be
added for comparisou:

hfnua to fall on, upon, Iiinui to fall to the ground.

tchillamna to sit on, or against, tchalamnu to sit high up, above, or at a

distance.
tiitash stump of tree; tutlsh stump of tail .a limb.

sha kiukayank thei/ are sticking out, sha kiukAyunk they are sticking out
above, 134, 4.

2. Change through addition of a vowel.

When the vowel of the radical syllable is joined by another vowel
suffixed to it, the result of the combination may be either ( I ) vocalic synajre-
sis or lengthening of the vowel, when both are coalescing; or (2) a softened
vowel, Umlaut.

The intruding vowels, which become suffixed to the radical vowel,
seem to be no other but rt, /, u mentioned in the preceding article; i added
to a produces e.

Vocalic synajresis :
latcha to hmld a lodge, viz., "to intertwine", k'tcha to knit.
ana to abstract, ena to bring, carry; cf .dnslia, aniilipka.
liima to be dizzy, lemldma i whirl about.
sh.4tma to call to oneself. Mod. sluitma
nawal and nt^wal to lie upon.

Lengthening of the vowel:
j)elpela to work, pe'lpela to work for (oneself or another),
kteh'shka to push away, kteleshkilpka to push aomy forcibly.

ALTERATION OF THE BOOT.

257

Softening of the vowel :
yd-a to howl, ya'ku, ydk" to hotul while dancing.
sfci to be full, 8tAni/M//, sta'-ila to fill down into, to gather (voots, etc.).

3. Change through accretion.
Accretion takes place when the radix or basic syllable is increased by
prefix'is, suffixes, through syllabic reduplication or through the formation
of a compound word. Tiio usual consequence of accretion is tho removal
of the emphasis from the radix to another syllable, the socondarv accent
becoming often preponderant over the primary one; another consequence is
the weakening or shortening of the radical vowel. The frequent change of
u (o) to a in the radical syllable has to be ascribed to this cause,
shnuka to seize, shnc4kptiga to seize with pincers.
tchiika to expire, tch/iklC^a to lose children hy death.
k(')ka to lite, ka-uldsha to erode, gnaw.

niita to hum, trans, and iutr.; shnaiti'.mj)ka to keep up the fire, nilfwa to
blaze up, nj'itkolua, Mod , to burn in the distance, shnatkt'ilka to set on
fire, ndtspka to be charred, siindka to burn, to shine.
niika, n6ka to be, become ripe, shnfkanua to let ripen.
shlfti to shoot, shlatanfya to make ready for shooting.
tchfa to remain, sit, tchv]/ji to sit, tclieklela to sit on the side of tchAwal,
tchaggiiya to be seated upon, tchawdya (from tchfa and wafha), to
tvmiy expect.
hcma, Ka'nia to emit voice, ham^asha to call lo oneself
tc^dsha to wash, .shatas,hpapkfa to make the gesture of washing (the fa(!e).
pt'lpela to tvork, lulpalpalia to make eyes for .«(Mnebody.

This shortening or weakening also occurs in prefixes; cf shfilakla, Mod.
shelakla; shnapdmpema, Mod. shnepdmpema; and in suffixes: yutetampka
for yutatdmpka.

4. Elision of the radical voivel

Is brought about by the same causes as the change through accretion,
and hence is but another form of No. 3 :

niika to roast, bake, n^iita, n^utagia to burn at the bottom of the cooking

utensil (for nukiita, nukutagia).
17

258

GKAMAtAK OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE

Idma to reel, viz, "to move in a circular line"; l6mdna, l'm(^na, Inu'na
it thutnh'rs, Ifnii'itcli, Inifitcli mealinff stone, the motion made on it
heiny fircular.

hii'ma to emit voice, slia'linii'ilj^i i" mil toijethcr.

kill- in kiilkali round, liisli%Clul;(a, liisliklulxa "to measure all around,''
to make of the same length, uidth. Cf. Hkilulxutkisii.

5. The chan{;e of a radical vowel into a cof,mate vowel has been fully
treated in the chajjifr on "Alternation of Sounds," and requires no further
discussion. Exiunples : }oka, yii'ka ; e-una, ii'-una ; oiash, ft'lsh ; stefnash,
stainas.

COysONANTlC ALTERATION OF THE RAU.'X.

Changes occurring in the consonantic components of the radix nre
caused hy the intorchangcability of cognate consonants, cf "Alternation of
Sounds," and do not usually imply any change in the signification of the
radix. Examples: bi'muii and })unuM, di'lish and telisli.

Instances of a radical consonant becoming nasalized are pata, mpata ;
saka-a, sanka-a

A change in the signilication is, however, produced by the changing
of a guttural k, g into k: kilxantko humphaehcd person, kil;(iintko humpbacked
person, when imitated by children, etc. (radix kal- in kalkali round).

4. REDUPLICATION.

The repetition of syllables in immediate succession within one and the
same word is technically called reduplication, and forms one of the most
effective means 'or emphasizing or otherwise individualizing ideas expressed
in words, in thi same manner as the orator repeats twice or three times in
succession certain words to be emphasized above all others. Reduplication
has been recognized as an efficient grammatic figure from tlie earliest times;
in rude and illiterate tongues we see it more frequently applied than in the
refined speech of cultured nations, and in the earlier periods of European
languages much more than in their present stages of development — facts
wliich point with certainty to a high antiquity of this sjjecial mode of gram-
matic synthesis. If we except tlie monosyllabic languages, reduplication is

REDUPLICATION.

259

a feature common to all languages of the globe, although they may greatly
differ in the mode of applying it.

Thus, in the English iaxmH gewgaw, riffraff, tiptop, syllables were doubled
tor some augmentative purpose; the Sahaptin family reduplicates fur form-
ing diminutives, as xxmy\hmxyM M kussiki'issi dog. English and German
show traces of syllabic duplication to designate a preterit tense, a feature
once common to all the dialects of the Indo-European family: fell, held,
.slept, are forms of an imperfect tense which are the renuiants of ancient forms
parallel to the Goth'ia faifat, hailiald, saislep.

Some languages reduplicate their radical syllables for the purpose of
forming onomatopoetic, iterative, frequentative, or usitative verbs and nouns,
indicating gradation in the adjective and adverb, or of fornn'ng certain
derivatives; other tongues, again, indicate in this manner the ideas of sev-
eralty, plurality, totality, or collectivity, and purposely modify the redupli-
cated terms phonetically for each of the several morphologic functions to
which they may bo applied.

Syllabic duplication has exercised a thoroiigh-going influence on the
development of the Klamath language of Oregon, giving origin to delicate
and ingenious grammatic and lexical distinctions. Its workings can be
studied to more advantage in a few languages only, although linguistic
development has taken a similar turn in the Malay-Polynesian family and
in the forms of speech disseminated along the western coast of North Amer-
ica, especially in the Nahuatl and Selish stocks of languages.

The redui)licative process has originated in the idea of repetition or
iteration, applied to space, surface, intensity, time, ajul other categories.
I1«e stage immediately i)receding syllabic reduplication was that of repeat-
ing fhe entire word, as n-e see it in the Hebrew t('.b tub, ''g(.Al good," for
verg good, and in Mohave, where the adverb accompanying the adjective
is repeated to indicate gradation : valtaye great, large; valtai tahana 'larger;
valtai tahiin tahan tahana tlie largest one. Although the latter is a triplica-
tion, a twofold mention of the a.lverb is just as fitipient in Mohave, where
the elements have not yet coalesced into a single wim\ All the dlOcn.nt
and most varied shapes of reduplication of the radix cnii be brought in two
classes: ?te»rt..:^e reduplication, when uh.hI for the derivation of words; din-
trihative reduplication, when used for inflectional purposes.

260

GltAMMAlt OF THE 'vLAMATH LANGUAGE.

A. — Ti'ERATIVE REDUPMCATION.

In Kliiinatli iterative reduplication redouMes the e«/(Vc radical Hyllablo
without liny conaonantic alterations, and serveH in forming from winiple or
thematic roots various sorts of derivative terms, as onomatoi)octic, iterative,
and frequentative verbs and substantives, also adjectives descriptive of exte-
rior form, surface-(|uality, color, intennity.

This sort of reduplication differs from the distributive («) by being
derivational and not inflectional; (h) by duplicating the radix in its totality
and not partially ; (^•) by duplicating always the radix and nt)t the first
syllable only, although the radix may become reduplicated with its jn-etix,
when this prefix (H)nsists of a vowel or single consonant only No word
redujjlicates more than two of its initial syllables; words which do so
usually begin with the initials k, 1, n, t, and u {or vu, w), and some contain
an adulterine diphthong: te-ukte-uksh, kaukiiuli.

Western languages offer sundry parallels to this sort of reduplicati(»n.
It prevails in the adjectives of color in I'omo, Cal., in Olamentke and Chi'i-
mdto, dialects of Mutsun, Cal., in Cayuse and several Oregonian languages.
When applied to color, surface-quality, exterior shape, etc • this mode of
sj-nthesit' is evidently equivalent to: "red here and red there," "prickly
here and prickly there, and prickly all over."

Examples of derivatives formed in this manner could be gathered in
large numbers and from every language spoken by the Indians of the Union.
We confine ourselves to the mention of a few terms of the 'J'onto dialect,
Yuma family (Arizona), r. ost of which show a dissyllabic radix or base:
toho\ (juitar, toltolia^Mte tibitivi ^)m/;/rf/;<

solsoli to scratch midimidi drdUjhtways

ogi-ogi to yawn dubbidubbi button

topitopo circle, circuit yudiyudi blanket

wiliwiliva^w/se yudiediedui checkered

In Klamath several terms are met with which are compounded from
two words, word-stems, or roots, and of which only the second is undergoing
iierativo reduplication. The first component is very freqvently a prefix, as
sh-, U-, etc., and vocalic dissimilation is often observed here This class of

IIEDU PLICATION.

261

terms will be nioro properly Hpokon of under "Composition of Words"; it
embraces t( cms like yiipulpuk'asli, kdltchitcliikH, ulaplpa, etc.

Words formed by iterative reduplication possess, just like other terms,
a distributive form to mark severalty; they form it by nnder{^t»in<^ another
kind of reduplication to bo described below. Thus, kalkali round, becomes
kakAlkali, tiptfpli dushc titaptfpli.

Many terms fori, il by this means of synthesis have the ])ower (»f dls-
similatirig the vowel of one from that of the other syllable, as kii'kiikli f/rccii,
yellow, which may be also pronounced kil'kakli and kakiikli, while the dis-
tributive form would bo kakii'kakli or kiikakiikli. The change from the
normal vowel, which is a in this example, is more frequently heard in the
second part than in the first: taktakli ret/.- taktii'kli; ki'tchkatch //<//(' /ym//
fox, from ketchkc'tchli rouf/h. Dissimilation is a fi;,nire which was spoken of
at length on pages 234 and 235.

The following list of terms is classified after (categories of origin, and
exhibits all the various forms of iterative reduplication :

1. Onomatopoetic terms produced by imitating peculiar noises perceived on ob-

jects of nature, or the cry of some bird or other animal: kaikaya
to sob, snore, hilak brant, tuktukuash fish-hawk, wawii-usli little bell,
wekwekash magpie, yauyawa to be noisy.

2. Iterative, frequentative, usitative terms, mostly verbs:

lemldma to reel, to be dizzy, drunk; dissimilated in la'mlemsh.

muimuya, muhimuya to tremble, shiver.

pelpela to work, to busy oneself at.

p6po-i to drink, said of babies.

shidkshiaga to shake up, v. trans.

tuektueka to stare at, from tutjka to pierce.

tushtushla to shiver from cold; cf. Lat. titubare.

vitk'utka and wankwanka to nod.

wftwita to writhe, struggle.

Dissyllabic reduplication occurs in :
kokalkokdltko weak in the joints.
lotelotash greenish excretion of snakes.
nidslionfdshua to make faces, to grimace.
ulagshuldgslia to lap up, as water.

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-S)

1.0 If

I.I

1.25

,0 ilM

ii& 1 2.0

1.8

U llllll.^

^^'

Photographic

Sciences

Corporation

23 WEST MAIN STREET

»';iftSTER NY. M580

(716) 872-4503

^d>

^¥

W!^""^

r !

1^?

262

GRAM MAE OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

8. Adjectives of color. The original color adjectives terminating in -li are,
for the largest part, formed by the reduplication of a radix termi-
nating in a consonant (an exception is ka-uM-uli, Mod. ke-ukd-uli
brown). Thus we have kiikii'kli (for kak-ka'kli) green, yellow,
pushpushli black, metsmt^tsli sky-blue, purple

4. Adjectives descriptive of surface-quality, with their adverbs :

kitchkftchli rough to the touch, from k<<tcha a little.
Mklakli, hlAkhlakli smooth, polished, even.
putpiitli of level but coarse surface; adv. piitput
tatatli (for tdt-tatli) jlat, level, planed off.

5. Adjectives describing external shape, form:

kdlkali spherical, circular, cylindric.

mukmukli downy; cf mukash down, plume.

wakwAkli conical, high-pointed; cf. wakalwakdlsh, wdkwak

witchwitchli rigid, stiff.

B. — DI8TBIBUTIVE REDUPLICATION.

Characteristics and function.

The phonetic characteristics of the distributive reduplication are the
following :

It redoubles the first or the two first syllables of a term. The vowel
and all the sounds preceding it become reduplicated,- but the reduplication
does not extend beyond the vowel. In monosyllabic distributive redupli-
cation the initial syllable only is redoubled, whether it represents or includes
a prefix or not. In regular monosyllabic duplication the vowel of the sec-
ond syllable is a, if the vowel of the initial syllable is a short one.

Tills grammatic form pervades all parts of the language, for it exists
not in nouns and verbs only, but also in a large number of particles. Sub-
stantives not possessing this form are either collective terms or are prevented
by phonetic laws from duplicating. This feature, so characteristic of the
language of which we treat, expresses the idea of severalty or distribution,
and not primarily that of plurality or collectivity; this accounts for its exidt-
ence in all the abstract nouns. Wherever this form is indicating plurality

EBDUPLIOATION.

263

it does so only because the idea of severalty happens to coincide witli that
of plurality in the peculiar instances which will be specialized below.

Thus ndp means hands as well as hand, the hand, a hand, but its distrib-
utive form n^nap means each of the two hands or the hands of each person
when consideied as a separate individual. Ktcho'l signifies star, the star, a
star, the stars, constellation or constellations, but d. ktchoktchol means each
star or every star or constellation considered separatel3^ ShentSlakuish is
engagement, compact, or compacts in general, d. sheshn61akuish the compacts
made with each party. Ktckna means to cut a hole into one object and to cut
holes into many articles by one cut or turn of the instrument; d. ktektakna points
to cutting holes into different or separate objects by cuts repeated at different times
or for every object separately. Padsha i: you became blind of otie eye; d. papa-
dsha i: you are totally blind, you lost the use of each of your eyes. Lutatka
means to interpret one sentence or to serve as interpreter at one council or sitting;
but d. lultdtka to interpret repeatedly at councils or interviews, to serve as a
regular interpreter. This also applies to the nomen verbale: lutatkish, d. lulta-
tkish. A regular interpreter, lultatkish, can be spoken of as lutdtkisli also,
when he is referred to as having interpreted just at a certain day, or some
special meeting. The sentence: kani ge-u watch palhi? means either who
stole my horse f or who stole my horses? and when uaed in the latter accepta-
tion would imply that they were all stolen at once by one person; but kani
g^-u watch papalla! implies that some person stole my horses severally or
that thefts had been committed on single horses at different times, or that
the one and single horse which I possess was repeatedly abstracted. She-
ktiikta is to cut in two, d. sheshaktakta to cut the two pieces in two again, or
into smaller portions.

Inflectional reduplication.

In order to give a full illustration of that kind of reduplicat:'>n which
serves for inflectional and not for deri'/ational purposes we mention a few
instances from other American languages. Phonetically they are parallel
to the distributive form observed in Klamaih, for the radical does not re-
double beyond its vowel, but tiie grammars of these languages declare this
form to be a plural and not a distributive form, as we have it here.

!FW"m

^sm^

264

■ i

GBAMMAE OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

In the extensive Nahua family, whioh embraces Aztec, Tarahumara,
Tepeguana, Cora, Cahita, Opata, Eudeve, and Pima, we can trace it through
the nominal and verbal portions of every language, although other plural
forms occur there also. When we meet Aztec vocables like the following,
we remark that the idea of severalty is the ruling idea in at least some of the
Aztec reduplicated verbs:

intchan oyakS the^f went into their house (all having one house only);
intchatchan oyayak^ they went into their several houses (every man entering
his own).

kotona to cut, kokotona to cut in many pieces, ko'-kotona to cut many
articles in pieces.*

The dialect of Pima spoken on the Yaqui River, State of Sonora
(Pima bajo), reduplicates in the same manner, as does also the Pima alto
spoken on the Gila River, Arizona. The Nevome, a dialect of the Pima
bajo, inflects, e. g, maina: mamaina palmleaf mat, bava: bavpa clif, high
rook, tucurhu: tutcurhu owl, stoa: stostoa white.f

Plurals of nouns and verbs are formed by duplication of the radix in
some, perhaps in all, the dialects of the Shoshoni or Numa family.

This holds good also for the dialects of the Santa Barbara family, whose
tribes reside on the coast of the southern part of California. On Santa Cruz,
e. g., substantives were forming their plurals as follows: pu: pupu arm, hand,
alapami : alalapami body, tupau : tutupau bow. Duplication of the consonant
after the vowel also occurs: ulam: ululam river, wutchu: wutchwutcho doff.t

In one of the dialects of the wide-stretching Selish family, that of the
Flatheads of Idaho and Montana, we find that the reduplicated verb indicate j
severalty and not plurality. If our knowledge of the other numerous Selish
dialects was more thorough, we would probably discover there the same
fact. Rev. Gregory Mengarini gives the following instances in his "Gram-
matica Linguae Selicae:"

ieskbm I receive many things at once, ieskmkbm / receive many things at
different times.

* Quoted from H. Steinthal, Charactorlstik, page 212.

♦ Arte del idioma Pima d Nevoma, in Shea's Lingaiatio Series.

I ContribntloDS to North American Ethnology, vol. iil, pp. 560-£C6.

BBDUPLIOATION.

265

ifes* k azgam I look at all (of them) at once, ifea' az'azgam I look at each
(of them) separately.

That Selish dialect is able to reduplicate its nouns and verbs in two
different ways, thereby conveying different meanings.*

Similar forms appear in dialects of the Dakota family. In Omaha
sdbe is hlack, said of an object near by and seen distinctly, shdbS of a dis-
tant object; sdsab6, shdshabg when the black objects differ among themselves
in size or other qualities ; so also dshfde : dshidshfde red, dshiOga: dshi°d8hifiga
small, little, g^ezd striped, g^ezdza striped here and there or all over, g^ezhe
spotted, g^ehdha spotted all over.

There are examples of another sort of reduplication observed in the
languages of North America, that of duplicating the last syllable of the
word or its basis, either in part or in its whole length. In this manner are
made distributive forms of the adjectives in the various dialects of the Sahap-
tin and Maskoki families. As this feature does not occur in the Klamath
language, a simple mention of it will suffice.

Judging from the facts enumerated, it becomes quite probable that
inflectioral radical reduplication is in many other languages of the West a
mark to indicate distribution or severalty, not plurality. Closer investiga-
tion alone can give an ultimate decision concerning this obscure point in
Indian linguistics.

■ '.«
■"■J

Terms with twofold reduplication.

A closer study of the reduplicative process in Klamath reveals the fact
that several terms, especially verbs, can reduplicate in a twofold manner.
They have to be divided in two classes; the first embracing the terms of
which the reduplicated forms are identical in their origin, and phonetically
reducible upon each other; the second class embod3nng the terms of which
the reduplicated forms differ in their function and point to a different pho-
netic origin.

*ilengarini, Gramm. p. 84 : Unica res pluribns pertinons, reduplicatar tantom vocalis snbstantivi,
lion aliter ac in tertia persona plurali verbornm dictnm est. Vel agitur de rebus pluribus ad singulos
pertincutibus, tuno tantam radix etiam nomiuis daplicubitur Jasta uaturani substantivorum in plurali.

266 GRAMMAll OF TIIK KLAMATfl LANGUAGE.

Of the first cla«s wo give the following instances:
kmAka to look out, d. kdk'nika and kmak'mka.
kradl^a to lay down, d. kdknieljKa and kniL'kmaI;(a.
ktdna to sleep, d. kiikta and ktakta.
piiedsha to throw away, d. pepudsha and put'piidsha.
tmt'shka to abstract, d. tetnuislika and tinetnii'ishka.
tchlfka to pinch with nails, d. tchftchlza, Kl., and tcliitclilaka, Mod.
wd-ish productive, d. wawd-ish, Kl, and wawiiwisli, Mod.

No difference in signification is stated between the two reduplicated
forms of the ternis above given, except fin- kniaka and knn?l;ta; here kak'nika
and kdkmelza refers to a few objects only, from two to four, but the second,
more complete forms refer to many objects. The same is stated of the verbs :

Idktcha to cut, sever, d. hilaktcha and laikdtcha.

tdkua to break, d. tetakua and tetki'wa.

Here the second form is evidently derived from lakdtcha and tekewa,
verbs which through the shifting of the accent gradually became Idktcha,
tdkua. Hence the diflference in the functions of the two reduplicated forms
is a purely conventional one and not founded on etymology. Kt'kmel;(a
has originated from kmekmeljja, kmc-kmal^a by the ekthlipsis of the sound
m from the first syllable.

Other verbal forms are as follows:

kawakdga to rip up with the teeth, d. kakaukdga and kawakaukdga.

uldgsha to lap, d. ula-uldksha and ulakshuldksha.

utchdya to split (as wood, etc.), d. u-utchdya and utcha-utchdya.

With these and others formed i!i the same manner it is evident that
the first form alone is a distributive and the second an iterative verb, and
therefore a derivative of the radix or stem and not an inflectional form of it.
Numerous terms beginning with u-, vu-, exhibit both modes of duplication

The second class of terms showing a twofold reduplication are those
which possess two distributive forms, of which the second is formed from
the first one.

shiukish fiffhter, d. shishokish, l d d. shish'sh^kish.

shdlgia to put or place against, d. shashdlgia. 2d d. shash'shdlgia to quarrel,
viz., to lay to the charge of.

REDUPLICATION.

267

hlA; d. hldhla, Idla to slope downwards, 2d d. lala'la. The original mean-
ing of hlA (see Dictionary) must have been that of putting or
placing on the flank of, to the side of, or intr. to he on the slope, flank.
Cf. hlA-a, Ml'laks.

tfna once, d. tftna some time, 2d d. tftatna a few times.

shdtalkash one who stands on his head, d. shdshtalkash; 2d d. sheshdshtal-
kash funny fellow, wag.

^Ijja to lay down, e-al^a, \i'-a\x& to read, d. ii-ii'-alza.

upidga to sweep, vuhupi«iga to stir up, said of winds; d. vuhuhapi^ga

shlna, d. shfshna to enter the flesh, 2d d. shishdshna

The difference between the two distributive forms as to signification
follows from the nature itself of these forms; shiiikish is one tvko is or has
been a fighter on one occasion, shish^kish, on several occasions, or a habitual
fighter, shish'8h6kish one who fought many times or habitually on many occa-
sions. Instances like these show that the language has the power of form-
ing two (or perhaps more) distributive forms, one from the other, for every
term in the language, as it is done in Flathead-Selish. But experience
shows that the second form occurs but in a few instances in the spoken
language, and that wherever it could be formed it often becomes phoneti-
cally unwieldy, and is therefore replaced by some adjective, numeral, or
pronoun; cf. sheshdlkosh spectacles, pi. tumi sheshdlkosh. This is not a dis-
tributive but simply a plural form Cf also shiishatish, shr.shutdnkish.

There is a limited number of terms which reduplicate distributively
only after the prefix, and therefore have to be considered as compound
terms:

hiapat;i{oksh stocking, d. hiapalpatzoksh.

hiimasht thus, so, d. humdmasht, Kl.

naishlakgish beetle-species, d. naishla.shldkgish.

shekdktcha to return blows; a term which is a d. form by itself, and
assumed the above form instead of sheshkdtcha to avoid beinff
confoimded with sheshkdtcha, d. of sh^katcha to become divorced.

u'hli'itua to let reach the feet, d. ii'hlulatua.

268

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

Different modes of reduplication.

Of all words of the language not debarred from distributive reduplica-
tion through phonetic or other causes perhaps not one-third shows this fea-
ture in its regular form. Phonologic causes will account for the fact that
so many terms have deviated from the regular standard form through
elision, contraction, accent-shifting, and the like. As to the accent, it
usually remains in the distributive form as many syllables remote from the
word's end as it was in the absolute form.

There are but a limited number of terms in which the two dialects of
Klamath diflfer as to their distributive form. But many terms of both dia-
lects, owing to the fluctuating phonetics of the language, use an uncontracted
and a contracted or apocopated form for it simultaneously and without any
difference in their meaning or functions. Examples:
guka to climb, d. gfl'kaka and giig'ka.
kfdsha to dive, crawl, d. kikddsha and kfktcha.
neJta to fix on, d. ndngta and ndnta.
8hul6tish garment, d. 8hushal6tish and shushMtish.
t'shin to grow, d. t'shft'shan and tft'shan, tft'sha.
tii there, yonder, d. tiita and tfl't.

Compare also atfni long, tall, d. a-atini and a-it(ni, and its abbreviated
form Ati (in Dictionary).

It will be seen that many of these are formed from terms which even
in their absolute forms are not always pronounced in the same manner. In
the examples given below we will make it a rule to mention only the most
frequently used distributive forms.

There are many terms of which the distributive form is but rarely used,
being generally replaced by the absolute, accompanied by some term indi-
cating plurality. Instances are the distributive forms of g^na, lahlgo,
mdklaks, ndnka, tkdp, etc.

Two different modes of reduplication have to be distinguished through-
out, the monosyllabic and the dissyllabic. The latter is less frequent than
the former

Monosyllabic reduplication, on account of the intricate phonology

REDUPLICATION.

manifested by its forms, necessitates h careful and minute classification into
several categories. Terms with prefixes almost invariably belong to the
classes No. 1 and No. 2 below.

MONOSyLLABIC DISTRIBUTIVE REDUPLICATION.

1. Reduplieation in a.

The regular and most frequent form of monosyllabic distributive dupli-
cation takes place when the vowel of the first syllable is short (or was so
oiiginally), and is marked by a short in the second syllable of the redupli-
cated form. The vowel of the first syllable, provided it is short, is of no
influence; the accent usually remains on the same syllable. In case the
vowel is a diphthong, cf. Diphthongic reduplication.

hdsht;(a to pierce the nose, d. hahdshtp^a.
h^shla to appear, d. hehdshla.
il^a to lay down, d. i-dl;ua, yAl^a.
kp6k gooseberry, d. kp6kpak.
kdpkash torchlight, d. kukdpkash.
Idtgl/a to kneel down, d. ldilddgl;(a.
n^p, ne'p hand, d. ndnap.
punua to drink, d. pupdnua.
tiptfpli dmky, d titaptfpli.
tchunua to vomit, d. tchutchAnua.

2. Reduplication with syncope of a..

When the short a of the duplicated or second syllable, as described
under No. 1 above, remains unaccented, and is left standing between two
consonants, it becomes easily elided. No syllabic increase taking place,
the accent keeps the place it occupied in the absolute form.

heshemesh jewsharp, d. heh'shdmesh, instead of hehashdmesK

hoyeka to leap, d. h6hieza, instead of h6hayexa.

kdtak truly, d. kdktak, instead of kdkatak.

laldgo pine-gum, d. lal'ldgo, instead of lalaldgo.

mbfl'ka to raise dust, d. mb(i'mb;ja, instead of mh^'mbax^

270

GKAMMAU OF TIIK KIMMATII LAN(ilJA(ii;.

■

ite

nfto to suppose, d. nfnto, instead of nfirnto.
8hnik(5a to hurl, d. 8hniHlink6a, inHtoad of HhniHlinak(5a.
Htiiwu to starve, d. HhtdHlitiia, instead of HiitAslitawa.
U!>'ke fire-place, d. tO't^e, instead of tr»'taze.

Sldda to see, find, forms shlt'shla and not shldsida-a, J)ecaiiHe the miW\
-a, as a particle, does not really form a part of the verb. In shli^Hida tlie -a
is therefore the product of the reduplicating process and not the final -a of
shlda. It must be observed, however, that many verbs in a-a keep this
suffix in their distributive forms, it being secured there by the accent rest-
ing on it.

3. Reduplication without vocalic change.
The vowel of the first syllable is long through synizesis or other causes,
though it is not pronounced long in every instance. The vowel of the sec-
ond or reduplicated sylhible becomes long also, for it is the repetition of the
preceding vowel. Many terms beginning with a vowel reduplicate in this
manner, and I know of no instance of this sort of reduplication in which
the first syllable is not the radical syllable.

ilfna to take dotvn, d. i-ilfna.

fta to put on (long obj.), d. f-ita.

k^dshna to sprinkle (for ke'-idshna), d. kekj^dshna.

klfpa mink, d. kliklipa.

kA'shka (for ku-fshka) to brush, d. kukfl'shka.

kfwash ivhippoorwill, d. kikfwash.

16kanka to go astray, d lolo'kanka.

lu'sh (for h'lash, cf lushli'ishli) wild goose, d. lulosh.

mhil'. Kl. tmft' grouse, d. mhil'mhfi, Kl. tmii'tmfi.

ni'sh (from nfwa) neck, d. nfnish. '

no'kla to roast on coals, d. ncSnukla.

sho'dshna (for shu-fdshna) to carry in hand, d. shosho'dshna.

shu'dsha to build afire, d. shushu'dsha.

shutanka (for sh'hutanka) to come togetUr, d. shushutauka.

t'dpa sunfish, d. t'etc'pa.

tiSdshna to carry on head (for tu-idshna), d, tutiidshna.

w<5a, vu-iia to howl, as wolves, d. wow<5a, vu-u-iia.

UKDUl'LIOATION.

271

4. Ileduplicutiun of diphthomjU .syllables.

Sevurtil nioduH iiru ubHurvud in tlie rodiiplinition of diphtiioiigH which
ai'o very instnit'tivo for tlio Htiidy of the real iinturu and oiijriii of diphthoiifra
ill thin hiiigiiii^i). DiphtlioiigH do not occnr in prertxcH, hut when rudiipU-
catod they are ho only becaiiHe they Htiind in radical Hyllahlcs

a. Thii whole diplitliong reap{)ear8 in tiie Hectond Hyllable, but the Hec-
ond component undergoe8 a change into a, as follows :

luolc'jya to stand around, d. liielualoya.

HliuipknliHh hcad-ftatictiintf c.u.shion, d. HliniHhnapkriliHh.

Compare: kuanka to limp, d. kuakiianka.

h. The whole diphthong reappears in the Hecond syllable, but in an
unchanged fonn:

hiuhfwa to he elastic, d. hiuhiuhfwa, abbr. hihiuhfwa

tu(!ktueka to stare at, d. tuctuoktueka.

Cf. shi'ii to give in a cup, d. shiishui for Hhi'iishui.

c. The whole diphthong reappears in the second syllable, but in a ooii-
tracted form :

shuikfua to drive away from water, d. shuishukfna.
tudgga to evaporate, d. tuatfiga, instead of tuatuilga.
tueka to perforate, d. tuc'to;(a, instead of tuctufix»-

d. In the distributive form the diphthong of the absolute form is sepa-
rated into its two component parts, of which the first stands in the initial,
the second in the following syllable :

yauyawa to be noisy, d. yaycSyawa, yayiiyawa.

k/i-i, kaf white rabbit, d. kdki.

ktfukish latch, bolt, d. ktfktukish.

mewa to miaul, d. memiiwa.

p'lafwash (fray eagle, d. p'lap'liwash.

p'tewip niece, aunt, d. p'tep'tuip.

te-ini, tefni recent, d. tetfni.

tchuyesh hat, cap, d. tch6tchie8h.

tchuyomash idler, d tchutchi-6mash.

wafwash snow-goose, d. wawiwash (and wawefwash).

wiuliila to strike, d. wiwulAla.

n i»-

*«il

III

272

(JUAMMAIl OF TIIK KLAMATH LANOUAOK.

e. A similar procoHs is observed also in some diHtrilmtive forms, in
wiiich u (liplitlioiij? boginninfT with u somi-vowol (y, w) Ih roiluplicated:
yulii hm(k, d. yi'iyahi, contr. into yA-ilii.
yj'iki seed-basket, d. yi'iyaki, contr. into yd-iki
wjikiMli inside ladder, d. wi'iwakish, contr. into wi'i-uklHli.
wikAni short, d. wiwnkani, contr. into wi-ukdni.
This sort of reduplication properly belongs to No. 2 above.

iif

6. Reduplication with vowel inverted.

Tliis mode of reduplication is not frequent; it mainly occurs in terms
containing a combination of vowels wliich are not real diphthongs,
kuatchdki to bite, itch, d. kakutcJu'iki; cf. kudtcha
mbute'jjo to jump over, d. mbambute'^o, for nibumbate';^e.
pi'iodsha to cast away, d. popudsha and pui'pudsha.
pudlza to throw doun,, d peput'lza, for puepudl^a.
shewok/iga to way, d. shashewokAga, for sheahawokAga.
tiii'nia to be hungry, d. tetiii'ma, for tiiitijl'ma.
tchuafsh buzzard, d tclidtchuish, for tchutcha-ish.
Cf. shashuakfsh, 84, 1, and Dictionary.

It will be seen that this class is made up of Hoverul different modes of
forming the distributive, and that puedsha, put^l;Ka, titi'ina pronerlv belone-
to No. 46. ^ ^

6. Reduplication with elision of consonant.

Terms reduplicating in this manner do not change the position of their
accent from the absolute to the distributive form ; it remains at the same
distance from the end of the word. They drop in the first syllable their
second initial consonant; in several of them the first consonant does not
belong to the radix of the word, but is a prefix after which a vowel or o
has once been standing.

I have found this sort of reduplication only in terms beginning with
k-, p-, t-, aad tch- (ts-), followed by consonants like g, 1, m. Many terms

RBDUPLIOATION,

273

bc;,niiiiiiifir with tlio sanio groups of couBonanto reduplicHte in other ways.
Cf. LJHt of Prefixos.

kmutchAtko old, decrepit, d. kiik'intch&tko.

ktAna to sleep, d. kAktii and ktAkta.

p'k'ntaiit on Die top of, d. popldntant

tl('»xo, tOl(')z<> brain, d. tdtl^o.

tmoyt'frii to begin, d. tot'inydga.

tm6kil ;ircen lizard, d. t(it'mkil.

tiii6lo, tCiuolo, toin(Sl(t wild plum, d. t(5t'nilo.

tchga'mhi, HJigfi'iulu to form hoarfrost, d. tclmtchgAmla, ghgushgAmla.

tclini(jya to taste sour, d. tchotchni^ya.

tchl6zntko smooth, d. tchutchl(j;^atko.

7. Iiedui)lication with apocope of suffix.

In a limited number of terms tiie suffixes -na and -a after vowels are
dropped in their distributive forms. The cause of tiiis is the tendency of
pronouncing words as short as possible and hence of dropping unaccented
final vowels and syllables.

0. Verbs in -na, when this suffix is not abbreviated from -6na, -ina, as
in gasiiktchna to follow, usually drop the -na; the suffixes -mna, -pna, being
contractions from -m6na, -p6na, do not lose the -na in the duplicating
process.

gdna to go avoay, d. gAka, for gdka, g%ga.

kshdna to carry on the arms, d. kshdksha, for kshdkshana.

ktAna to sleep, d. ktAkta and kdkta.

Idna to move in a circle, d. Idla.

pAna to dive, plunge, d. pApa.

To these may be added the verbs in -n, which drop the -n (originally
-na) even in the absolute form: pAn to eat, pAt, pAtko; shlfn to shoot, shla't,
shlitko, etc. Cf. Verbal inflection.

6. Verbs in -a preceded by a vowel.

m^wa to camp out, d. m^mii, nu^'mfi; cf. mdwa to mew, d. memiiwa.

ndya, nd-i to hand over, d. ndni.

shlda to see, find, d. shldshla.
18

274

GUAMMAK OP THE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

DISSYLLABIC DISTRIBUTIVE REDUPLICATION.

The terms which duplicate two initial syllables to form a distributive
are composed with prefixes, as i- (yi-), and chiefly with u- (vu-). These
prefixes have coalesced with the radix so firmly as to become inseparable,
and are now reduplicated with it without any alteration in sound.

There are as many phonetic modes of reduplicating disayllabically as
there are of monosyllabic reduplication; to be brief, we will treat of them
as belonging to two classes only, as follows :

1. Reduplication in a.

Instances of it are :
ud^lgatko checkered, d. ude-udsUgatko.
udfta to chastise, d. udi-udata.
udshikl^a to fall while stumlling, d udshi-udshdklxa.
udiipkj:, vudiipka to tvhip, heal, udiidi,jka.
udiimtchna to swim on surface, ududdmtchna.
'ilal, viilal Cottonwood tree, d. lila-ulal.
uMplpa to flicker about, d. ula-ulAplpa.
utehfn to fish with net, d. utchi-utchAn.

2. Ail other modes of reduplication.

Gathered under one head, this list contains insta ces of the jHioneti-
cally altered modes of distributive reduplication described under "Mono-
syllabic distributive reduplication."

Reduplication with syncope of a:
uddma to cover a vase, d. udd-udiDa.
udox(itkish whip, d. udo-udx<'»tki, h.

Reduplication without vocalic change:
hihid.shnii, yil6dshna to push aioay, d. hilu-hilndshna.
yimo'shka to abstract, d. yime-ime'siika.
uyo^iitko striped, streaked, d. uyo uyojfjitko.

./#

BEDUPLICATION.

276

Reduplication of dip? thongic syllables:
uldyue to scatter, d. ula-ullwe.
iiliiwa to spear through a hole, d. ula-iilhua.
utawa to shake off, d. uta-utua.

Reduplication with apocope of suffix:
ibe'na to dig, d. ibdpa, iiipepa (for ibd-ipa).

Distributive forms in -ishap.

Contrary to the linguistic principle of reduplicating the initial syllable,
or part of it, to indicate severalty, a class of nouns comprehending terms of
relationship by consanguinity or marriage appends the terminal -ishap.
These forms, which in many instances seem to have also the function of
plurals, are formed in this manner: To the terminals -ap, -ip, of the absolute
form is substituted the uniform ending -ishap. There are even a few terms in
-sh, which through the law of analogy have adopted the above ending in
the distributive, simply because they belong to the terms of relationship, as
pa'ktish brother's child, d. pa'ktishap.

The suffix -shap is evidently a compound of the nominal ending -sh and
the suffix -p; the intervening vowel -a- seems duplicated from -i- in -ishap
and altered to -a- by dissimilation. The suffix -p points to intransferable
ownership; cf List of Suffixes.

Instances of these forms are :
nuilgap brother- and sister-in-law, d. miilgishap.
pa-flnip elder brother or sister, d. pa-anishap.
p'kfshap mother, d. p'kishishap.
pkulip grandmother etc , d. pkiilishap.
pli'igship grandfather and grandchild, d. i)lugshishap.
pshi'iship stepmother, stepchild, d. pshashishap.
t;{d-unap elder brother, d. t;{c'-unishap.

Other terms possess two distributive forms; one in -ishap, the other
being formed in the regular manner:

nii'ikokap aunt, niece etc., d. makokishai), mamkokap.
ptt'wip grandmother etc., d. ptdwishap, pteptdwip.

ill

27(> GKAMMAK OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

piishap father, A i^ti'shishap, ptiptdshap.

ptchd'kap brother-in-law etc., d. ptch^ptchaahap, ptchiiptchkap, and
others, like ptiitap, etc. Ptch6ptcliaBhap is the result of a combi-
nation of both forms of reduplication.

The ending -ni is another instance where the language reduplicates the
end and not the initial parts of a term to fortti distributive reduplication, as
in nepnfni, yanakanfni. Of. Suffix -ni.

Nomina verbalia formed by distributive reduplication.

By appending -ish to the stem or basis of a verb generally of the tran-
sitive voice, verbal nouns are formed indicative of animate beings, persons,
animals, or personified things performing the action enunciated in the verb.
When -uish is appended, the substantive noun thus formed indicates that
the subject in question has been performing the action in time past. The
forms in -ish and in -uish may undergo the process of distributive redupli-
cation, like the verb itself, and then indicate an animate being that is or
was performing the action at different times or occasions repeatedly, habit-
ually, or gradually. A few intransitive verbs like tAmgnu form similar
derivatives, but with transitive verbs this feature is much more common.

Examples:

lutAtkish one wJio interprets or expounds.

lutdtkuish former interpreter, one who was expounding.

lultatkish habitual interpreter or expounder.

lultdtkuish former habitual interpreter or one who employed himself regu-
larly in expounding.

tAmpuish one traveling (here -u- belongs to the verb itself).

tatdnmuish constant, habitual traveler; tramp; kafla^tatdmnuish mole, lit.
'■^walker in tht ground."

Many nouns of this class, called nomina agentis, or "performer's nouns,"
are found to occur In the .absolute form, as 8hnantiitchl;^i8h trapper ; but
they are used more frequently in the distributive form, and then should be

EEDUPLICATION.

277

called notnina actoris. Indeed, the larger portion occurs only in the redu-
plicated shape; thus we have:

Idldsish house-builder, architect, from Mtcha to build.
pdpish devour er, from pdn to eat; cf. m^klak8=papfsh,
papdtalish parasite, cf. patddsha to stretch the hand out.
pdpalish thief, from pAlla to steal.

p^puadshnish prodigal, spendthrift, from piiedsha to throw away.
shashapkeld-ish rhapsodist, narrator, from shdpa to narrate.
shiishatish (and shutesh) worker, maker, from shiita to make.
tetddshish launderer, laundress, from t^dsha to wash.
tetgmdshkish pilferer, from tgmdshka to abstract.

Exactly in the same manner are formed a number of substantives desig-
nating inanimate objects (or nbstractions), which are the result of reiterated
acts and appear in the distributive form. They are formed by means of the
suffix -ash, and are nomina acti:

pdpkash lumber, club, from pdka to break.
k6;(pash mind, from k6pa to think (Mod.),
shashapkgl^ash narrative, story, from shdpa to narrate.

The form of the preterit in -uish also occurs:
shutddshanuish plow's furrow ; from shutddshna to perform on one's way.

Like this word, the largest number of the nomina acti do not show the
reduplicated form of the first syllable.

Distributive reduplication also occurs in the absolute form of a few
verbs, which ai-e suggestive of collectivity, severalty, or distribution. Some
of them show phonetic irregularity in their formation.

a'-al^a, d. aa'-al^a to read, from Hxa to lay down.
leliwa to stand at the end of, from Idwa to project.
papia'na to have a picnic, from pdn to eat.
shesh^e'la to act extravagantly, from ka'la to disport oneself.
shdshatui to barter, sell, from shdtua to count.

I4»

278

GRAMMEB OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

ANATHESIS.

Another change affecting the vocalic element of the radix in verbs and
their nominal derivations occurs when the verbs pass over into their reflect-
ive and reciprocal forms, and it may be sometimes observed also in their
causative and medial derivatives. These forms are produced by prefixing
either s-, sh-, shn-, the medial prefix, or h-s-, h-sh-, h-shn-, which is the
medial prefix increased by the pronominal demonstrative particle hu abbre-
viated to /*-, and pointing to an object in close vicinity or contiguity.

The process of vocalic anathesis consists in the following: Whenever
a verb forms derivatives by means of the above compound prefix h-sh-, these
derivatives are vocalized like the distributive form of that verb; the first
syllable assumes the vocalic sound of the radix (diphthongs have their own
rules), the radical syllable assumes the vocalic sound of the second syllable
of the verb's distributive form. Many derivatives formed simply by the
medial prefix s-, sh-, shn- do not show this anathesis, but merely exhibit
the vocalization of the simple verb, as slialgia from lakia, spftcha from
pftcha, shtalaka from ttilaka, shtchii^atko from tcluika.

I. — Anathesis in terms formed hy the medial prefix s-, sh-, shn- :

keldwi to stop, d. k(ik6lui, cans, shnekelui to remove from position.

kflua to le angry, d. kfkalua, cans, shnfkalua to irritate.

\is\M\xii to dance, d. kshikshul;ija, cans. slinikshul;^a to make dance.

kt^lpka to he hot, d. kekulpka, cans, shnekalpka to heat.

koka to bite, d. kokoka, refl. shukcika to bite oneself.

ndshama-a to look on, d. ndshandshama-a, cans. shniindsh(a)ma-a to

amuse by tricks, lit: "to cause to look on."
nge'sha to shoot arrows, d. ngenge'sha, refl. slienge'sha.
pnfwa to blow, d. pnfpnu, refl. shfpnil to be full of air, cf. slifpnush.
ptchfkap sister-in-law, d. ptchfk'shap, refl. Hhiptcli;(alaltko related as

brother-in-law or sister-in-law.
te'dsha to wash, d. tetAdsha, refl. shetatcha to wash one's head.
tiipakship younger sister, d. tiitpakship, refl. shutpaksdltko related as

brother and sister.

BADIOAL SYLLABLE CONNECTED WITH AFFIXES.

279

II. — Anathesis in terms formed by the compound prefix h-s-, h-sh-, h-shn-:
hfnui to fall down, d. hihdnui, caug. hishiinui to fell.
kintclina to travel in file, d. kikdntclma, recipr. liishkantclma.
niita to hurn, d. niinata, niinta, refl. liushiidta to burn oneself.
shfuga to kill, d. shislu'ika, recipr. and refl. hishil'ka.
shlin to shoot, hit, d. shlfshlan, recipr. and refl. hfshlan.
shmo'k beard, refl. hushmu'kla to shave oneself, from an obsolete shnio'kla.
shnuka to seize, d. shnushnpfa, recipr. huslin;^a to shake hands.
spulf to lock up, d. spushpali, refl. hushpali to lock oneself in.
stinta to love, cherish, d. stistanta, recipr. and refl. hishtAnta.

II.— RADICAL SYLLABLE CONNECTED WITH AFFIXES.

In polysyllabic languages we do not often meet with radical syllables
in their original and nude shape, and forming words for themselves. When
the process of word-formation increases in energy and extent, the radix is
beset and preyed upon more and more by its affixes through shifting of
accent, vocalic and consonantic alterations, ehsion of sounds, and other
necessary concomitants of advanced agglutination. In languages where
the phonetic laws have great sway it often becomes difficult, as to certain
terms, to recognize the elements belonging to the radical syllable.

Affixes are the links of relation connecting the radical syllables of the
words which compose a sentence. They are real or altered radicals them-
selves, and when they no longer appear as roots it is because they were
phonetically disintegrated into fragments by the continual wear and tear of
the process of word-formation. Their function is to point out the various
relations of the radix to the words it is brought in contact with; thus being
exponents of relation they derive, for the largest part at least, their origin
from pronominal roots or roots of relational signification. In Klamath some
of them exist also as independent radicals, and figure as pronouns, pronom-
inal particles or conjunctions (hi, hii, ka, ka-4, etc.).

Affixes do not always express pure and simple relation, or strictly
formal conn (, ion between the various parts of the sentence, as, e. g., the
idea of possessic>n, of subject and object, of person, number, and tense; but

280

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

many of them, in American languages especially, express categories, as that
of exterior shape, dimension, and proportion of the object or subject spoken
of, of its distiMce from the speaker, or of the special mode by which an act
is performed. Such particular notions qualifying the function of the radix
are of a material or concrete import, and frequently result in polysynthesis
or triple, cuadruple, etc., compounding of the affixes. These combinations
of several affixes may contain only relational affixes of a purely grammatic
character, but in Klamath more frequently contain affixes of both classes —
the relational and the material. A few examples will illustrate this.

A word, composed of a radical and of purely formal or relational affixes
only is, e. g., shflalsht when having fallen sick. Here i- in fla to lai/ ihwn
represents the radix, sh- is the medial prefix which makes out of ila : shi'Ia
to lay oneself down, though used only in the sense of to i^; (chronically) sick.
The suffix -al-, -ala, implies the "becoming", "falling into a state or con-
dition", and is here of an inchoative signification; -sh is a suffix forming
nouns and verbals, -t the suffix of the conditional mode.

Terms composed of a radix and of material and relational affixes are as
follows :

Lupatkudla may be translated by to produce a scar, but the term has
its special use. The radix pat appears in mp.ita to heat, strike upon with a
tool, upata to wound, u'hlopatana, patpatli, etc., and the prefix lu- shows that
the blow is inflicted with a round article. Tlie suffix -ka (Iiere -k-) is that
of fiictitive verbs, -uehi adds the idaa of d)u:ihlU, d)tv:iw(wl to verbs of
motion, and thus the full import of the above verb is that of producin;i a
wound, or more frequently a scar, being forced downward or to the ground by
a round article, as a wheel.

Nt^-upka to empty into is said only of the influx of a watercourse into an
extended slieet of water, as a lake, not of the confluence of two rivers un-
less very wide. The radix of nc'-upka or m'vvapka is owa to he full, as of
water, the prefix n- is indicative of something spread out, level, or extend-
ing to the horizon, and the suflix -pka usually refers to distance.

Shlel;jtchan61atko left behind while walking. Tlie radical is here o, of
pronominal origin, which we also find in fla (c'la), d. i-Ala to lay down. With
the suffix Axa, whieli generally points to a downward motion, e- forms c'l;^a

BOOT WITH AFFIXES.

281

to deposit, to lay down. The compound prefix slil-, si- referring to garments
or other flexible articles for personal use, and t' d derivation-suflBx -tchna
(here inverted as tchan ) pointing to an act performed while marciiing,
moving, are joined to shk'lpja and make shlcl^tchna of it. To this is added
-ula, the completive suffix, which can be fitly rendered here by "altogether",
and the participial suffix of the passive -tko, so that the whole term, for
accurate roudering, necessitates a circumscriptive phrase like the following:
dropped and left behind ultoyether something garment-like while walking.

Talual^ank lying on ground face turned upward. Radix ta-, thematic root
tal-, occurring with change of vowel in tc'lish face, telshna (for tdlishna) to
behold; basis talu-, u meaning upward; -al^a, compound word-formative
suffix of a factitive nature (-ka); -auk, inflectional termination of the parti-
ciple, usually referring to the present tense.

In the examples given the affixes pointing to round articles, sheet-like
objects, distance, and downward direction are of the material order; all
others I call relational affixes. The perusal of the words in the Dictionary
affords the best method of distinguishing the two.

An affix is called a prefix when placed before the radical syllable, an
infijo when inserted into it, and a suffix when appended to it. Affixes fulfill
two purposes of grammar: that of inflection, nominal and verbal; that of
derivation or formation of derivative words. Not always can a strict line
be drawn between these two processes of forming the units of speech, and
in Klamath there are affixes which are in use in both categories. Some
pronominal roots figure at times as prefixes, at other times as suffixes, as
hi (i), hu (u), ma, p, and others, while nominal affixes like -tana are verbal
affixes also, a fact which is partly due to the imperfect distinction between
verb and noun.

But a thorough distinction between the prefixes and the suffixes of this
language lies in the circumstance that the former are used for derivation
only, while the suffixes possess either derivational or inflectional functions,
or both simultaneously. I therefore present the affixes of Klamath in two
alphabetic lists, that of the prefixes and that of the suffixes. More fticts con-
cerning them will be considered under the caption of "Verbal Inflection."

282

GUAMMAU OF TIIK KLAMATH J.ANGirACHi

LIST OF PUKFIXKS.

The function of Klunintli prefixes is to form derivatives, not inflectional
forms, fiom radicals. Prefixes are not so numerous as suffixes, nor do thoy
combine into compound prefixes so extensively as suffixes. There is no safe
instance on hand where a combination of more than three prefixes occurs.
A triple-compound is, e. g., ktchiutchatchka to trample upon, said of one sub-
ject; it statids for kshiutchatchka (ksh-, ya-, u-), cf. yushtchka to put the
foot on something. Another is shu-ishtchaktchka to turn the head for a bite
from iiishtchakta to be angry. The prefix ino-, inu- may be considered as
triple also; but such combinations are rare. Suffixes, however, are found
to combine into groups of four or five.

The remarkable fact is presented by the vocalic ]>refixes, preceded or
not by a consonant, that tliey often become the radical syllable of the word
(verb or noun). Thus in luta to he suspended, said of a round subject only
In- is as well the prefi.x (not 1- only) as the root. This may be observed
ni words beginning with a-, e-, i-, ksh-, t-, and with other prefixes.

A large number of intransitive verbs change their initial syllable or syl-
lables to indicate a change in the number of the subject, as hudshna to harry
run, speaking of one; tushtchna, speaking of two or three, tfnshna of many
subjects. The syllables undergoing the change should rather be considered
as radical syllables than as prefixes, as may be shown by the analogy of
many transitive verbs which undergo similar or still more thorough chmio-es
when passing from one number to another. " "

All the prefixes will be found classified below under the caption "Re-
capitulation of the Prefixes." The function of each prefix found in verbs
extend.-i also to the nomina verballa formed from these verbs. The cate"-o-
ries of grammar which are chiefly indicated by prefixation are the gmus
rerhl; number, form or shape, attitude and mode of motion of the verbal subject
or object.'

a^, verbal and nominal prefix referring to long and tall articles (as
poles, stick.s), also to i)erson s when considered as objects of elongated shape

M™1„ '^"'"'^'^"'y'" ♦^ ^'f-"' Territory, Modoo R<>->-ry>MoZh^^Z^,{ nm ^.■,th ^.u^svl^^of
Modoc terin,s. Many of these Iiav« bee,, iusorted ,u ox;iun,U^Ux tU« Gm... mar from thi, , . !

though oVainc,, fro.u ModocMI. u.Oori,y of t.u.nH-,.nn\.art of ..ITku;:;:^^^^^^^^^^^

LIST OF PREFIXES.

283

Liko II-, the prefix a- originally referred to one object only, plurality of
objects being oxpresHed by i-; but this now holds good for a few terms only.
It differs from tg-, tk-, now occurring only as part of a radical syllable des-
ignating immobility of one subject standing upright, by pointing to long
things which need not necessarily be in an erect position.

aggfiya to he .suspended and to hauf/ up, pi. t>f long obj. iggaya; cf. its

derivatives aifjfu-idsha etc.
aggtidsha to describe a circle, as tiie hand of a watch,
akatchga to break, as sticks, poles,
aainiamna, i'liiniadsha to speak, crif aloud on. one\s way.
ali'ihia to show, point out, as a tree.
Atpa, pi. of obj. ftpa to carnj awai/.
atchfga to wring out, tivist.

Prefix a- occurs in the following substantives:
ilmda digiiing-tool, from mda, nu'ya to dig.
adshagotkish violin, fiddle.
awalCsh thigh of a quadriqmVs hind leg.

The prefix a- also appears in ai- or ei-, a-i-, e-i-, the initial syllable of
verbs referring to a motion performed with the head. In ai-, ei-, the vowels
a-, e-, point by themselves to a long or tall object.

afka, ef^a, and aikana to stick the head out, from Ika.

aitxiimna to be or grow smalkr than, said of plants only, the tops of which

are considered as heads; from ft;tamna.
eflaka to lay the head down upon; from fla, cf. fl;ta.
eitakta to hide tJie head under, to place it between two things, as blankets etc.

e-, prefix pointing to long-shaped objects, sometimes when single, but
more frequently when in (pian titles. C'f. also ei-, ai-, under prefix a-.

elktcha to leave behind, as a rope.

i'l;(a to lay down, deposit, as a rifle.

(5mtclma to carry, as an infant tied to its board.

dpka to fetch, to bring, as arrows.

etle'xi to lay crosswise, as logs; pi. of obj. itlr'';^i. Mod.

H'^mi

284

(IKAMMAU OF TUE KLA.MATU LANCJUAOB.

!.-i|

There is difference in Hignification between ddsha to suck and fdsha to
cause to yo, t'pka to hing and fpka to lie upon, to keep, c'wa and (wa etc.
Substantives witii prefix e- are: t'lluiish backbone, epat a tall grass

h- is a prothotic sound found in many words beginning in vowels and
consonants, which is 'kcidimis and without any distinct gramuiatic functions,
except that of emphasizing. Cf hhi-a and li'i-a, hiwfdsha and iwMsha,
hutAtchkia and utatclikia. Therefore h- cannot be considered as a prefix,
unless connected with the medial prefix sh- in the form of h-sh, q. v. Cf
-h-, under "Infixes."

h-sh-, h-s; h-shn-, compound prefix serving for the derivation of
reflective, recipvocal, and causative verbs and their nominal derivatives.
Tlie intransitive verbs formed by means of this prefix are but few in number.
The derivation is performed by means of tlie vocalic anathesis described, pp.
278, 279. As stated tliere, the prefix hsh- is composed of the demonstrative
radix h in hu, pointing to contiguity, and of the medial prefix sh-, q. v.
The vowel standing after h- is that of the radical syllable, and no instance
occurs where a diphthong occupies this place. In the majority of instances
the medial form in sh , from which the other originated, is still preserved in
the language; but there are a few where the stem without prefix has sur-
vived alone. These few verbs are all of a causative signification;

hashpa to feed, Mshpkkh fodder, der. piln to eat. Cf spalala.

heshtcha to suckle, der. (5dsha to suck.

heshuampgli to restore to health, der. wempOli to recover.

hishiinui to fell, cut down, der. hi'nui to fall.

hushpdnua to give to drink, der. punua to drink.

The following verbs and nouns, classified according to the,«;eHM,v verhi to
which they belong, form an addition to the examples given above, p. 278 sq.:

CAUSATIVK verbs:

hashlA-i;(a to smoke (meat), der. shla-ika it smokes.
liash'ka to perforate the nose, ear, der. stuka to stab, pierce.
liashpankua to ford a river on horseback, der. pankiia to tvade through.

LIST OF I'UKl'IXKS. 286

hdshla to shoiv, exMnt, der. shK-a to sec.
heslul'gHha to complain, (lor. ahr<'g8ha to rejtort.
hislitadslia to brint/ up, educate, dor. t'slidi to t/row
hisliumm to apply sontj-nmllciHe, dor. «liuiiia to sing
h\x^\\n6xn to bake, cook, dor. Hhiiu;^a to parch, dry.
hushpiUchta to ncare, frighten, der. spi'itclita to scare.
huslitf^a to make dream, dor. tuiza to dream.
hushdka to drive out ofn don etc., der. Hhi'ika to drive out.

KECIPROCAL VERBS:

hdslikfl to make mutual bets, der. sliii^ to bet.
heshto'l;(a to live an man and wife, der. slietd'Ixii to cohabit
hialianikiinka to tell each other, dor. hemkf'mka to .speak.
hushtclKika to kill each other, der. tclioka to perish.
luislitfwa to prick each other, dor. tevva to drive into.
huahpantchna to walk arm in arm. der. suunshna to take along.

REFLECTIVE VERBS:

liaksligiiya to hang oneself, der. ksliaggaya to hamj up; j)reHuppoH08 a

longer form hashkshgaya.
hushkaknega to besmear oneself, der. kaknt'ga to soil.
hfl'slitka to stab ona'^elf der. sti'ika to stab; cf. haslitka.
hushtApka to prick oneself, dor. stupka to prick, puncture.
liushpilH to lock oneself up or in, der. spuH to lock tip.

i-> «y-> y- (No. 1), prefix of transitive verbs and their derivatives, re-
ferring to an act performed with or upon a plurality of persons or elon-
gated objects, or on objects referred to collectively, when not in a stand-
ing, immovably erect position; when the object stands in the singulai-, the
prefixes corresponding to i- are a-, e-, ksh-, u-, q. v. In the distributive
form this prefix often appears as i-i-, instead of showing tiie regular form
i-a-, as in i-iggaya, f-idshna.

idsha to make go, carry off; one obj., ena.

ftpa to carry, convey, take along with; one obj., atpa,

iggfiya to suspend, hang up; one obj., aggii) a, kshaggaya.

2H0

(iUAMMAIl OK TIIH KI.AMATII I,AN(MrA<JK.

idiikii, idiipkii to .ilfikt', w witli h cluh; oiio ohj., udi'ika, luli'ipka.
fyiinmti, f-utnrm to take along with; ono ohj., uyumim,
i-i'ini, yilni to (five long articlrs ; oiio ohj., I'lya, ('.-I.
iilCi'x'y to lag (rosswLsr; ono obj., otio'xi (Mod.).

Tornm in wliicli tliiH prolix rolatos indiHciiniiniitoly to onf or mang por-
m»nH or long urticloH uro tlio dorivativoH of (ka and (tpa; cf. tlio Dictionary.

«■-, //- (No. 2), looativo jirofix referring to tho gronnd, soil, Ih idctntical
witli tho locativo advorl. i, hi, and tlio HutHx -i. It ((.niposoM the HuttixoH
yan-, yii-, and appears as i-, y-, oidy in a liniitod muuher of tornis m tho
radical Hyllahlo.

ihi'na, Kl. yi'pa to dig in the ground, to mine.
fna, d. yilna downward, down; yafna, otc.

TiiiH profix roforH to tho individual or "solf " in fha to hide, secrete, con-
ceal, and to tho lodgo or homo in /wi, hfwi, iwfdsha to fetch, bring home.

illO-, inn-, triple profix conipo«ed of tho advorb ina (( on the ground,
-na domonstrativo particlo) and t\w i)rofix u-, which in ono of tho two tornil
bolow points to singular number, in tho other t.) distanco. Cf. tho prefixes
i- and yan-, which latter is tho distributive form of ina-.

inotfla to put or send below, underneath ; cf utda.
inuhuashka to keep off, prevent; cf huashka.

yan-, ga-, compound prefix indicating an act performed with tho feet,
or upon tho ground, underground or underneatii, below some object. This
profix is nothing else but tho adverb yana downward, down below, which
represents tho distributive form of fna, q. v., (composed nf f „„ the ground,
and tho demonstrative radix and case-suffix -na. Etyn'olo/yicaliv related
to ina, Vflnaare: yafna mountain (from yayana), yiya to dig, ..rateh up,
yc^-ush den of burrowing animal. Tho prefix yan-, ya-, often becomes the
radical syllable of tho verb.

yad8hai)ka to mash, mangle; cf ndshapka, tatchapka.
y.itjrh-ra to press down; cf yetsxaka.

■mm f

LIMT OF I'UKKIXKB.

287

yAiift to himl or hriuii from helow.

yiiiilmii to hi; quilt: nick, lit. "to lio «lowii": yilim, wu.

yiinkiipHliti to bar an iiulrana\ dm.

yriiitiiniv lo put down into; from yi'iiirt, ftHiiii, or (tun.

yaka'Hliii to press down with the fool.

yiiHlitdlikii to sfej> on Hoiiiutliiiig'.

Tho prefix yu-, y-, coinlMiitiM hIko with iiiititil t»-, i-, into ono diplitlioiig,
as in yi'wa lo burrow, yitclif;jiia to (squeeze down from with tlio fool, ha Home
latty matter.

yu-, a prefix anahigouH in itH functionH to ynn-, ya-, ])ointin^' to an net
porlormod in a downward direction, or upon tho frroiind, or I elow Home
object upon or by means of a long arfich; as tiio fool. It is a cotnliination of
i-, y-, with tho prefix u-, 4. v. Tho prefix yu- generally becomeH the rad-
crtl sy liable.

yiia (for yuwa) to strike the ground or water.

ynd.shliiktkal to slip with the feet.

yulali'na to fall over an edge, rim.

i-unc'ga, yunrga to be below the horizon, as sun etc.

yumadtiha to he at the lower end.

i-uta, yuta to be heavy, ponderous.

yutiilpf'li to twist, as jjaper, cloth.

y\'inhtc\\ki\ to put the foot on.

yuwet'luita to kick with both feel.

k-, gi; prefix formed from the adverb ke, ki, Mod kfe thus, so, in this
manner.

kisht'wa, gishuwa lo think so, lo he of the opinion, der. sht'wa, liowa to

believe.
kshapa, gishapa to say so, to state, to suppose, der. shapa to declare.

kl-, ke-, ge-, abbreviated k- , g-, is a prefix occurring in transitive and in-
transitive verbs and their derivatives, pointing to an act performed obliquely,

m ■ 1

288

GltAMMAU OF THIi KLAMATH LANdUAOK.

laterally, or a motion directotl sidowiso toward an object. Forms aovoral
ooinpound sulfixos; not to be confounded with ki- appearing in radical syl-
lables as gi-, gin-, ki.i-, etc.

kiapka to recline sidcwisc,- cf. fpka to He.

kiulfga, nasalized nxiulfga to fall down upon sidcivisc, to drizzle; u.

lali'ga.
kiati'ga to go in laterally.

kiuyoga to ram, hoist up ohliquchf, sidi^wise, to Vtff, above oneself.
kiukiiya to hang out side wl^e ; kdiks conjurer, cf. Dictionary, p. 135.
kiiitclma to hold up while moving, traveling,
kii'ikuga, kiandga to move, rub laterally.
kidsha to creep, crawl, swim; cf fdsha, kfdshash.
kinia'dsh ant, viz., "moving, traveling laterally."
kliltcha, gelatsa to move the hand sidewise.
knt'wa to put out obliqueli/ the fish-line; der. ndwa.
kp{-\ tail, tail-fin; der. p'laf.
klJna, gk'na to hop, walk on one leg.
knanilash small bat species ; viz., "fluttering down obliquely."

km-, a prefix resulting from the combination of the prefix k- (abbre-
viated from ki-) and ma- (abbreviated in-), the latter indicating a curvi-
linear motion or object; km- therefore refers to a lateral and curvilinear
motion or to the winding shape of an object, such as a rope, thread,
wrinkle, etc.

kmapat'hicnatko wrinkled, f'rrowcd.

kmvXX'A to lay down, said ot thread, ropes, etc

kmuyulatko shaggy.

kmuk(')ltgi to become wrinkled by wetting.

kmultkaga and kmutcho'sha to bubble iKp hi water.

ksll-, /.-.s- is the verbal gish, kisii of the verb gi to be, in the significa-
tion of being there, and as a suffix it appears, augmented with -i, as the loca-
tive sufiix -gishi, KI. -kshi, redupl. -ksaksi. The prefix kshi- is found only
in terms conveying the idea of placing, laying upon, holding, or giving.

MHT OF PKEFIXBS.

289

also in a fow intransitive verbs of a locative import. Originally it referred
to one animate being only, and still does in the majority of terms, though
ksht'na, kshawfna, and others apply to inanimate objects of long shape also.
The vowel following tlio prefix generally points to the exterior form of
the object or subject referred to, although in ,nany cases it is no longer a
I)refix, but has become a radical vowel, and .indergoes a change whenever
plurality of the verbal object or subject lias to be indicated. Many of the
transitive verbs refer to one or a collective object carried upon the arm or
arms. Not to be confounded with kish-, which forms verbs of "going" in
the singular number.

kL.iaggAya to hang somebody; cf. aggaya, iggaya, shuggdya.

kshawala to fix, tie, or dciyosit above f cf iwiila.

kshdlktcha to leave behind, quit; cf k'lktcha, shlelktcha.

kshdl;ua to lay down; cf dl^a, Ic'lka, ndlj^a, etc.

kshfkla to lay down and to lie on, in; der. fkla.

k8hful6;(a to dance; der. yul;fa.

kshuya to give, transfer; cf I'lya, liiya, ni'ya, shui.

kshutfla to lie below; cf utfla, i-utfla, gintfla.

kfc-, prefix combiuing k- (cf supra) with t-, which is indicative of
length or tallness, upright attitude, and usually refers to one person or ob-
ject only. The combination kt- therefore refers to a lateral motion observed
on one standing, long subject or object, but in some instances is so intimately
fused with the verbal radix that it becomes diificult to distinguish it from this.

ktashl;ua to press down by hand.

ktawal to strike v.non the head laterally.

ktelpja to let down, drop a long object, der. el;^a.

ktfudshna to push aside, der. hudd'^aa or viidshna.

ktiuyt'ga to 27ush open, der. uycga; cf luyega, shuydga.

ktfuloxa to make descend, der. yul;^a.

ktf wala, ktfwalpra to lift or to post upon, der. fwala.

ktuka, ktuyua to hit with the hand.

kill-, gui-, ku; gu; prefix representing the adverb kiii away from, far,
distant, on the other side, ku-, gu-, being its apocopated forms. It is prefixed

iii

290

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

to the verbs of traveling, leaving, departing, and sometimes becomes the
radical syllable. The terms derived from gcna to go present themselves for
comparison.

guhudshka and guhuAshktcha to depart, to set out from; cf. inuhuAshka.

guikaka to leave hom< , to run off.

guikinsha to start out from.

guizi, guik(dsha to cross over, to pass.

kuyantcha to fly at a great distance.

kushka, gu'shka to leave, abandon; der. fshka.

1-, prefix occurring in verbs and nouns descriptive of or referring to
a round or rounded (globular, cyJindric, disk- or bulb-shaped, annular) or
bulky exterior of an object, to an act performed with such an object, and
to circular, semicircular, or swinging motions of the person, arms, hands, or
other parts of the body. Thus this prefix is found to refer to the clouds,
the celestial bodies, rounded declivities (especially of the eartii's surface),
to fruits, berries, and bulbs, stones and dwellings (these being mostly of a
round shape); also to multitudes of animals, rings, and crowds of. people,
for a crowd generally assumes a round shape. It originally referred to
one object or subject only, and does so still in many 'nstances; it occurs in
transitive as well as in intransitive verbs with tlieir derivatives, often forms
part of the radical syllable and composes other prefixes, as l;^a-, lu-, shl-.
The manifold applications of this prefix necessitate subdivision.

(a) 1-, when referring to one round object ind forming part of a trans-
itive verb, frequently occurs accompanied by the vowel u- (refen-ing to long
articles) in the form lu-, lo-. Wiien a plurality of round objects is spoken
of, pe- often takes the place of lu-:

ludshfpa to take off from; udshfpa a long object; cf idshipa, shulshfpa.

luyega to lift or pick up; pe-uyega many round objects.

liiyanjnato hold in hand; cf pd-ukanka.

liiya to give; to pay in coin; cf p(5wi, liya, ndya.

lushiintchna to scratch a round hole.

lut;ca to take atoay, to wrench Jrom; iVt^a a long object; cf lutkish.

LIST OF PREFIXES.

291

(b)l. occurs 5n intransitive verbs and their nominal derivatives, and
then points to several, but more frequently to one subject of rounded or
bulky shape.

laggaya to be hung up, to stand on the shj; cf aggnya, iggdya
awdla to he on, to spread over the top of; cf. lawalash, nawalash, fwal
J bona to dig a round hole,- Iba seed or ffrain.
Ibuka hulb or round fruit growing on the ground.
Idukala to pick up a round object; cf. ndakal, ftkal.
lena to move in a round line, to ride on wheels; cf dna.
Ix'ia it is foggy, misty; luash fog; h'.ldam sea^son of fogs.
Iiidshna to drift, as clouds, fog; from hudshna to speed off.
uta to stick or hang on; lutish round fruit; utish ear-shaped fruit
iutfla to be underneath, to stand below; cf utfla, i-utila.

. {c)l- sometimes refers to slopes, declivities of the ground, or motions
observed, acts performed along such. The original form of the prefix ap-
pears to be in this case la-; it is the uneven or rounded irregular configura-
tion of the slope which is indicated by 1-.

h'lwa to project, as a cape, promontory; lalawash slate-rock.

lala to slope dowmvard; lalash/nw/t of animal.

hlaa to foal, breed, viz., "to come down the flank"; cf lala-ish.

lapka CO protrude, as cheekbones.

I6muna bottom, depth in the earth or wafer; cf mu'na.

(rf) 111-, lui-, lue-, le., U.. Tenns beginning with these syllables form
a d,st,nct class of intransitive verbs. They refer to a crowding together into
a bulk nng, crowd, or multitude, all of which when viewed from a distance
ook hke a cn-cular or round body, a form which is pointed at by the prefix
k The above syllables en.bodj- the radicals of the terms in question as
well as the prefix. The verbs thus formed will be n.entioned below as in-
volving the Idea of plurality, the singular being formed in various ways.
To them belong lufiamna, h'.kantatka, liutita, li.lpka, lolua, le-uptcha; only
one of these has a transitive signification, luela to kill, massacre.

■™|i''

»3 »

ii-

292

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

(e) Iza^i h^-1 '^«- '8 a radix with the prefixed 1- occurring in worfls
which indicate wave motion or articles of a wavy, striped, undulating ex-
terior. The radix ;(a-, xe-, ke- is a reflective form of ka-, ga-, ke-, ge- oc-
curring in gakua, gdnta, gcna, gewa; it points to a moving, proceeding, going
of the subject. In this connection the function of the prefix 1- approaches
closely to that of (c) above mentioned. .

l;jAn to undulate; l^ash hillow, wave.

Ikakimitko striped horizontally ; Ikelkatkftko striped vertically.

l^alxamnish long hag or sack, grain-hag.

l^et'knula to hang down from mouth in wavy lines.

l;tAwaltko provided with antlers.

Ikdpata to form surf; from l^an, q. v.

u-ldzatko flexible and long, pliant.

le-. Le is the putative negative particle not, and answers to Latin
hand and Greek yu?/, e. g. in the compound word /xTJTroTE "lest at any time."
Thus it forms not only privative nouns, but also prohibitive verbs. Under
the heading "Particles" will be given examples where le is used as a separate
word for itself, and in some of the terms below it could be written separate
also.

lewd ula to forhid, not to allow.
lehowitko slow-going; i. e. "not racing."
Idshma not to discover or find, to miss.
letalani stupid, foolish; i. e. "not straight."
letelfna to annoy, meddle with.
letumgna to he excited, half-crazed.

m-, prefix referring to a motion going on in curvilinear form or zigzag
lines along the ground. It appears chiefly before a- and e- in radical sylla-
bles of intransitive verbs and their derivatives, which refer to the unsteady,
varying directions followed by travelers, root-diggers, to the roamings of
Indian tribes on the prairie etc. Cf Suffix -ma.

niAktchna to encamp while traveling.

niak'l6;ja to encamp, to pass the night ; cf maklaks.

LIST OF PEEFIXES.

293

mAkuala to encamp in or upon (lie mountains.
nuikuna to encamp ai the foot of a mountain.
mddsha to remove, to migrate; cf. fdslia.
mewa to encamp away from home, to live on the prairie.
mt^ya to dig edible roots etc., said of one person; cf me-ish digging ground,
md-idsha etc. .

n-, prefix frequently occurring in transitive and intransitive verbs and
their nominal derivatives, and referring to sheet-like, thin, smooth, pliant,
and thread-like articles, or to objects having a level, horizontal surface, or
to acts and motions referring to the above or to some distant spot on the
line of the horizon. It composes the prefixes nu- and shn-, the latter hav-
ing causative functions.

In its various uses this prefix may be classified as follows:

(«) It is prefixed to terms descriptive of or relating to thin, sheet-like,
string-like articles, as cloth, mats, hats, ropes, handkerchiefs, paper, paper
money, soles, skins, and especially the wings and flight of birds.

nAkia to patch, mend, as garmei'ts.

ni'l, ne'l fur -skin; tiny feather of bird; from ne'l: nelfna to scalp.

ndya, ne-i to give, hand over, pay in paper money.

ndp palm of hand, hand; napgnapsh temple-hone.

ne'ds;«a to lay on top a thin article; cf ndtatka.

n6\xa. to lay down, deposit; cf li^lka, dl^a, shldlktcha.

nf long snow-shoe; buckskin sole.

ndshakweta to hang, drop down, as curtains.

na'hlish bowstring.

ndna, nfnia, nafnaya tO'flap, move the wings, to flutter.

naggfdsha to float, circle in the air; cf aggddsha.

n(^ta to fix, paste, or put on.

^ (b) n- occurs in terms referring to places of wide and level extent, as
prairies, water-sheets; to phenomena observed above the ground, as weather,

Fir

f -^

i
I

]

'.1

ik:'

fii'i'

cl*

294

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

or invisible, as sickness wafted through the air; to words, songs, and noises
traveling through the air.

na'g, Kl. ne'g, pi, ne'gsha wJio is absent, departed.

nen, particle referring to spoken words, sounds, noises.

ne'pka ki'i-i it is bad weather; ne'pka (shflalsh) to bring sickness.

ndshakwt^ta to hang, drop doivn, as curtains.

ne-iipka to run into a lake, said of rivers.

ndwa to form an extension, sheet.

nfwa to drive on level (/round or into water.

(c) nil- is prefixed to terms relating to motion in sky or air, as the flight
of meteors, the throwing of stones, the swinging of round and bulky objects,
the humming noise made by bulky insects.

nuyamna to hum, to make noise all about.
nulakiiila to cut out a hole in the ice to spear fish,
nulidsha to be tvafted dowmvard.
nut6dshna to hurl, throw away.
nutiiyamna to fly around.
nuwal;(a to take an aerial flight.

P-, proprietary prefix indicating inalienable, intransferable ownership
of an object. In the same function, but more frequently, p occurs as a
suffix, q. v, and is identical with the p in the personal pronoun of the third
person : pi, pfsh, pash, push, p'na, pat, etc. The prefix p- is found, accom-
panied with the suffix -p, chiefly in terms of relationship derived from con-
sanguinity as well as from marriage, and occin-s as such also in Sahaptin
and Wayiletpu dialects. In Klamath there are but few terms of relation-
ship which do not exhibit this prefix: makokap, tiipakship, t'shfshap (Mod.),
vunak.

ptfshap /a</<er, Kl, from t'shin to grow up.

pgfshap mother, from gi in the sense of to make, produce.

p^-ip daughter; ptiitap daughter-in-law.

pa-aliimip husband's sister and brother's wife.

pshiiship step-mother; step-children.

pkatchip female cousin and her daughter.

LIST OF PKEFIXES.

295

There are also a few terms designating classes of human beings who
are not relations :

pshe-utfwash, archaic term for people.
ptchfwip master, mistress of slave.

A prefix p- of a similar import, referring to the personality of the sub-
ject, is embodied in the following terms :

Nouns.
pshfsh nose, snout; pfsh bile; pftiu dew-claw.
]pe'tch foot; pflhap sinew.

Verbs.
ptiwa to bathe, plunge, tvash oneself; d. ^wa, tchdwa, pdna, p^nkua.
pit'na to scrape sidewise ; from dna.
put('>ya to remove sod; cf vut6ya to dig tvith a spade.
ptchfkl;ja. Mod. ptcha'hlka to stroke, pat; cf shatdlaka.
pnfwa to blow, to fill with air; cf p'nf, shfpnu.
puedsha to reject, scatter, expend; cf fdsha.

Cf the compound prefix sp-, slip-.

pe-, a prefix occurring only in transitive verbs with plural or collective
object, which is either of a round, rounded, or of a heavy, bulky form ;
sometimes the prefix also refers to sheet-like objects and to animate beings.

pd-ula to lay down, deposit; one obj., Ifkla.
pdwi, pti'wi to give, hand over, pay; one obj., luya, liii.
pe-uyega to lift, gather tip; one obj., luydga.
pe-ukanka to hold in hand; one obj., luyamna
pett^ga to tear to pieces, as cloth ; from nddga.
pek(iwa to break to irieces, smash up ; from ke'wa.

Sh-, S-. This prefix, the most frequent of all, is used in forming medial
verbs, as they may be appropriately termed after their correlatives in the
Greek language. The medial prefix sh-, s- is the remnant of a personal
pronoun of the third person, now extant only in its plural form : sha they,

29G

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANOITAOE.

iii?

shash them, to them, sham of them. Its original meaning seeina to have been
reflective, oneself, like that of Latin sui, sihi, se, because sh-, s-, places the
verb into relation with its logical or grammatical subject ; the idea expressed
by the verb may be said to revert or to be turned upon the subject of the
verb and centering in it. This medial function will appear more clearly
in the following examples, made up of transitive as well as of intransitive
verba :

shA-!shi to keep as a secret; from afshi to hide.

sxena to row a boat; from g^na to proceed.
. sheka to squeal, whine; from yeka to howl, cry.

skfntchna to crawl, creep ; from kfntchna to walk in single file.

shufna to sing solo; from wfna to sing.

ska' to blow strong, said of winds; from kA-a strongly.

spftcha to go out (fire) ; from pftcha to extinguish.

shipapglankshtant against each other; from pipghingsta on two sidei,

Some of the medial verbs now extant make us presuppose a verbal
base from which they are derived, but which exists no longer in tiie lan-
guage as a verb; cf skft'. Others have changed their prefix sh-, s- into
tch-, ts-, especially in the Modoc dialect.

In the majority of medial verbs the mode of derivation observed is that
of vocalic anathcsis, a phonetic process spoken of previously.

The medial function does not always remain such in all the verbs
formed by the medial prefix, but easily turns into («) a reflective one when
the subject of the verb is also its object : she-alza to name, call oneself; or
(6) when the object is a person or other animate being, a reciprocal verb
may result: samtchatka to understand each other; or (c) the medial verb
turns into a causative verb when the verbal act passes over entirely to the
verbal object: shkalkgla to hurt, injure, viz., "to make fall sick." A few of
these verbs are reciprocal and reflective simultaneously : shakual (from
radix gawal) to find o«ese//and to find each other.

More examples are given under "Anathesis", pp. 278, 279, from which
becomes apparent also the general conformity of the uses of this prefix with
.that of its compound h-sh. Other prefixes compounded with sh- ai-e shl-,
shn-, sp-, st-, shu-, q. v.

LIST OP PREFIXES.

297

shl-, .<??-, composed of the medial prefix sli- and the prefix 1-, refers in
nouns as well as in verbs (which are almost exclusively transitive) to objects
of a thin, flexible, or sheet-like form, as cloth, blankets, hats, and other gar-
ments or other articles serving to wrap oneself in; also to objects which
can be spread oui flat, and to baskets, because flexible. Sometimes the
Modoc dialect changes shl- into tchl-.

shldlpfa to leave behind, deposit; from ^\xa.

shk'mpgli to take home; from e'mpgli.

shltikla to lay down, to dress in; from fkla.

shlanfya to spread out for, as a skin; shlA-ish mat.

shliinkua to spread. over, across; shhinkosh bridge.

shlauki to close the door; the door of the lodge being a flap.

shlftchka to pass through a sieve; cf latcha.

shletana to be loose, not tiffht-fitting ; from fta.

shlApa to open out, to bhssom; shlapsh bud.

tchlc'yamna to hold in hand something soft, flexible. Mod.

tchk'kna to take out of. Mod. ; from Ikna.

tchlewi;ja to jAace into a basket etc.. Mod.; from iwf^a.

8hn-, sn-, a compound prefix formed of sh- and n-, which forms a
class of causative verbs and their derivatives. Cf prefix n-, nu- There
are, however, several terms not belonging here, in which the n- of the initial
shn- forms a part of the radix : shnfkanua from noka, shnayena from nt^na,
shndpka from ne'pka. Shn- is causative in :

shnambua to make explode; from mbiiwa to explode.
shnahualta to make sound, to ring; from walta to resound.
shnekelui to remove from position ; from kelewi to cease.
8hnik8hul;ta to force to dance; from kshiul6;(a to dance.
shnumpsht'ala to unite in marriage; from mbushdla to consort.
shnuntch^ola to curl; from the verb of ndshokulatko curly.
shndwedsh ivife, viz., "one made to bear offspring"; from wafshi to
generate.

298

OIIAMMAU OF TIIK KLAMATH LAN(;iJA(JK.

flp-, shp-, a coinbiiiation of tlie two prefixes hH-, s-, and p-, pointing to
aa act or motion, especially of drawing or pulling, performed ujjon an annnate
or inanimate object of long form. The original function of this prefix is
causative, but some intransitive verbs also show it. I do not refer here to
such verbs as are formed by prefixing sh- to verbs beginning with p-, as
slipAha to dry something, from piilia to he dry.

spelaktchna to cut, said of sharp blades of grass; from lilktcha.
spt'pka to imll the hoivstrinff, from ejjka.
spfdsha to dray behind; from (dsha.
spit'ga to ansist in yettiny up; cf ktiuyoga.
spfka to draw, pull out, as a rope ; from fka.
spfkanash, Kl. .spekan(')tkish seiviny needle; from spfka.
spftkala to raiae, make stand up; from ftkal.
spulhi to place inside, to lock up; cf. flhi.

spunka to let out of, to let yo; lit.: "to cause to move the legs."
spuMka to rub something ylutinous upon oneself; cf. uloka to rub toyether
long objects.

8t-, sht-, compound prefix made up of the medial sh-, «-, and ta-, ab-
breviated t-, and hence referring to one object (sometimes several) placed
in an upright or stiff, immovable position upon or within something. The
medial sh- suggests that the act is done by or for the logical or grammatic
subject of the sentence, or in its own or somebody else's interest, the verba
showing this prefix being almost exclusively transitive.

stewa to mix with, mash up; from t'wa to put upon.

stft/a to cJieat, defraud of; from ft;^a to take away from.

stiwfni to stir up, as dough ; from iwina to place inside.

stiwi;j()tkish baby-board; from iwi^a to place on, within.

8t(')p6la to peel the fiber-bark ; from upAla to dry up above.

stutila to cover with a roof on pillars ; from utfla to place underneath.

Shu-, SU-, represents the medial prefix sh-, s- united to the prefix u-,
and is found in transitive and reciprocal verbs and their nominal derivatives
as referring to an act performed on tlie body of persons or animals, and in

LIST OP PKEFIXB8.

299

a few intran«itivo verbs; cf. the simplo prefix u-, vu-, wn-. Some of the
tern.H are direi^tly derivcHl from vorl)H having the u- prefixed, as Hhi'ii to
tramfer, from 11311, I'.-i, ,',-i; Hhutflu /« hold umlvr the mm, from utfhi; shuyoka
to shave etc. [n many otlier words with initial shu-, u- belongs to the radix;
in others, as in 8h.iyii;iahv, shuktakla, 11- is the result of vocalic auuthesia.

shuftCla to gird, as a horse ; from fta.

slmh'.ta to dress oneself; shuhkish (jarment; from I'uta.

8hiu<na to carry upon a board etc.; shudntch haby-hoard; from diia.

Bhuk(jka to lite oneself; from k(')ka.

slw-iVta to throw at each other ; from vuta.

shil'pka to lie in a heap; from fpka.

shukli;(ida to compete in hopping; from kh'na.

t-, ta-, te-, prefix referring to long objects standing erect, as trees, posts,
and to standing persons. When occurring in transitive verbs, this prefix
points to acts performed with elongated objects not included under the uses
of the prefixes a-, i-, u-; for instance, to what Is performed with the arms or
hands outstretched or put forward, with a knife, etc. In intransitive verbs
t- refers to one person or animate being in an upright position, and when
combined with the radix -ka-, -ga- points to one person, etc., standing or
moving. T- is abbreviated from ta-, te-, t6-, the pronominal particle and
radix ta.

taki'ma to stand out as a circle, rim; cf gaki'ma.

tamadsha to stand at the end of a row etc.; cf lamadsha.

tfimeshka to abstract, take away; cf yimeslika.

tkAp tall grass, reed, or stalk.

tkana to stuff, as an animal; cf shnAtkuala.

tkeka to make a hole with knife or clasped hand; cf kdka.

tka-ukua to knock with the hand, fist; cf uka-ukua.

tgii-uU'Xd to arise, get up; from ga-ii'l;ja.

tgakflya to stand, remain on, upon; from gakaya.

tkewa to break a long article in two.

300

OHAMMAR OK THK KLAMATH LAN..IJA(JK,

tu-. 'I'liiH prefix in oithor (1) tlio preportitioti tu out there, out at a dis-
tance, in whi(!h chho it expro8H«H horizontal iind vortitMiI (liHtancc or ronioto-
nesH of tlio verbal act from homo or from the one Hpeaking, or m- in (2) a
compound of t-, the prefix spoken of above pointing to what in erect, and
U-, a prefix indicative of long articles or articles placed above, on the top
of (see below), on one's back. This compound prefix is in some respect
comparable to shu-, q. v.

Examples of (1):
tuk<'l;i(a to halt, stop on the icay.
tuklaktchna to stop at times on one\i way.
tuitchi'wa to hollow out hij pressure.
tuyamna to moue about with knees bent.

Examples of (2);
tudshd'sha to smear on, line upon; cf ludsho'sha, shudsho'sha.
tuila to eonvenje at the top; to stand out.
ti'idshna to cmry on the back; from ti'i fdshna.
tuftchxash choke-cherry; cf yi't8;^aka to choke.
tuiiiL^ga to caw in; cf (na, d. yana downward.
tui^a to swell up, protrude; from fka to extract.
tiilamna to carry across one^s back.
tuli'iga to smear on, line upon.

tch-, /.S-, prefix occurring in terms which refer exclusively to the mo-
tions observed in water and other liquidn, the moving or floating of objects
on or in the water, and the flow or motion of the liquids themselves. In
sound it presents some analogy with the suffixes -tcha, -dsha, -tchna, which
refer to motion in general. It should not be confounded with tch-, ts-, when
this is merely an alternation of the medial prefix sh-, as in tchgfV for ska',
q. V. Words like tchuk occur in several northwestern languages in the sense
of water; cf Chin. Jargon salt tchuk salt ivater.

tchewa to flout, said of water-birds etc.; from ewa.
tchfwa to form a body of ivater; from fwa,
tchla'l;fa to sink to the ground; from ol;^a.
tchfpka to contain a liquid; from I'pka.

UaT OF rUliFlXKS. 301

tch(')kptt, tchcitcha to drip down from; cf. tclietcliiipkHtko.
tchfyii loffii'c, prcuvHt a li(|iii(l; cf m^ya, uyii, h'lya, hIuu.
tchililla to bod wator or hi tlio water; from ilala.
tchfkamim to have the water-brash ; from fka.
tchuyamna to swim below the water's surface.

tchl- ; SCO hIiI-.

II-, VH; WU-, protix origiiiatitifr from tlio pronominal particle hu, ii,
marking extent and distance, horizontal an well as vortical, and forming
tranwitivo as well as intransitive verbs, with their derivatives.

The terms in wliich this frequent suffix is found may bo subdivided into
two classes, as follows:

(o) Prefix u- jjointing to horizontal distance, removal, separation from.
These terms generally undergo dissyllabic rodu[)lication when assuming the
distributive form.

uni'ga to lower, let down; cf fna downward.
uhaktclma to f/allop off; cf hndshna, hi'ika.
uliiyue to scatter, disperse; cf gayuo.
ulak'kanka to skate over a surface ; cf laklakli.
ut'hj'iwa to shake off, as dust,
utfla to place, be, or lie underneath ; from ita.
utdwa to shoot up perpendicularly ; from tdwi.

(i) Prefix u- referring to one or many animate and inanimate objects
of length or tallness, as poles, pieces of wood, implements, parts of the
animal body, etc., and to acts performed by or ivith them; also to persons,
because considered as objects of tallness. They reduplicate distributively
in U-U-, or as above, by means of the dissyllabic reduplication. Some of
the transitive verbs yvith prefix u-, vu-, refer to one object only, and take the
prefix i-, iy-, when a plurality of objects is alluded to. Identical with u-
are wa-, we-, wi-, q. v.

udupka, vudiipka to ivaip, beat with a stick; pi. of obj. idupka.
udshfpa to strip, pidl out; pi. of obj. idshipa; cf ludshfpa.
liyamna to hold in hand; pi. of obj. fyamna.

til

802 (5RAMMAB OF THK KLAMATH LANdlJAGl.].

utpfii to wrench off from; pi. of obj. (t;fu; cf. lutza.
uyi'ga to lift a log, beam, etc.; cf. lu^oga, ahuyega.
uliiplpa to flicker about; to shake the ears, hh dogs,
uka-ukiia to knock with a stick; cf tku-ukiia.
upatii(')tkish hammer, mallet; of mpdta.
uK';fuga to (father into a long basket; from fkuga.
luli'nt^na to bent, as with a drumstick; from tiiitaii.
uli'zatko flexible and long, pliant

wa-, we-, wi: These prefixes are reducible to the i)refix u-, and pro-
duced by it through assimilation (1) to the vowel of the syllable following
in the terms given below:

wapalash dead tree, for upalash dried on the top; cl upala, st.'.pela,

stopalsh.
wokishtchna to totter, reel; for ukisiitchna.
wishibam a reed with woolly substance; from udsln'pa.
widshikl;ca to stumble and fall; other form of udslifklp^a.

(2) In other words wa- is the result of the reduplication of the prefix
U-, hu-:

washoliil;:a for huhasholiil;ta; cf husholalza.

walp^a for vuviil;ta, vualxa; cf vul;^a.

\ya\ixish slanderer, Mod. for u'lkish; d. u-iVlkish, uwalki.sh.

KECAl'ITULATION OK THE TKEKIXES.

The following synoptic table endeavors to give a lucid classification of
the various functions in which prefixes are cmploye.l in verbs and nouns
The majority of them are found tabulated under more than one heading;
only a few occur in one function oidy.

A. — Prefixes referring to the genm verhi —

Medial verbs: sh- and li-sh-; the prefixes composed with sh-, as shI-,

shn-, sp-, 8t-, shu-.
Reflective verbs: sh-, h-sh-, shu-.
Reciprocal verbs: sh-, h-sh-.
Causative verbs: sh-, h-sh-, shn-

INFIXES.

303

Verbs that aro transitive only: i- (No. 1), kt-, 1- (No. a), pe-, shn-, aim-;

the object usually an animate being: i-, pe-, shu-, u-.
Verbs that are intransitive only: 1- (No. b).
Proprietary verbs: p-.

B. — Prefixes referring to number —

Singular number of the verbal object or subject: a-, e-, ksh-, 1-, t-, u-.
Plural number of the same: e-, i- (No. 1), pe-.

C-— Prefixes referring to form or shape of the verbal object or subject-
Round, rounded, or bulky forms: 1-, nu-, pe-.
Thin, flat, level, pliant, thread-like forms: n-, pe-.
In the shape of sheets, garments enveloping the body : shl-.
Long, elongated, tall forms: a-, e-, i-, u-.

D- — Prefixes referring to attitude, position —

Upright, erect, or immovable attitude: kt-, st-, t-, tu-.

E. — Prefixes referring to motion —

Motion through the air: n-, nu-, u-.

Motion downward: yan-, yu-, 1- (No. c).

Motion of, in, or ujjon the vater or liquids: tch-.

Motion performed obliquely, laterally: ki-, km-, kt-.

Motion performed in zigzag upon the ground: m-.

Motion performed in wave form: l;^a-.

Motion performed with the head: a- (in ai-, ei-).

Motion performed with arms, hands: shu-, t- (tk-).

Motion performed with the back: tu-; with the feet: yan-, yu-.

F. — Prefixes embodying relations expressed by adverbs —

Locative prefixes: i- (No. 2), ino-, yan-, yu-, kui-, 1- (No. c), tu-, u-

(No. a).
Modal prefixes: k- thus; le- not (some being negative verbs).

INFIXES.
Infixation of sounds into the radical syllable, producing a change in
the signification of words, is not so frequent in American as in some Cau-
casian and other Asiatic languages; although inflection of the radix may

304

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

have been efifected by infixes, all traces of this fact have afterward dis-
appeared. In the preterit of Creek verbs an infixed 'A produces a shorten-
ing of the radical vowel preceding it.

Of infixes of the Klamath language we cannot speak as a class of
affixes, as we can of its prefixes and suffixes. Thus the -u- appearing in the
diuil and the -i- of the plural form in the verbs for runninff, e. g. hi'idshna
to run (one subject), tushtchna (two to four), tfnshna (many subjects), which
form the radical vowel, are rather the result of a substitution for each other
than of infixation, and may find parallels in the chapter on "Vocalic Alter-
ation of the Root," pp. 254-257, and " Epenthesis," p. 228. The only sound
which could be regarded at times as an infix in the radix, though it is
mostly a prefix or a suffix, is 'h, when it stands for ha by hand, with hands
or extremities.

*h, an affix which emr-hatically refers to the use of one's hands, and
gives a peculiar stress to the verbs in which it occurs We find it in:

ge'hlapka to step on, ascend by using hands; gelapka to tread upon,

mount.
gu'hlf to help oneself into; gulf to enter, go into.
p'hiishka to tear off by hand; pushka to cut off with a sharp tool,
pul'hka to tear out by hand, and shupil'hlka to tear out from one's body;

pulka to tear, pluck out.
wa'htakia to disperse, put to flight by using weapons etc.; watilkia to

scare off, scatter.

We may also compare k'hiiilfi;^a with kiul6;^a, I'hi'itkala with lo'tkala,
and many other verbs. In muhimiiya to shiver, h stands infixed in the radix!
though not referring to the use of hands. Cf "Diuresis," p. 216, and "Epen-
thesis,'' p. 228.

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

In the language of the Maklaks we observe a large numeric prepon-
derance of suffixes over prefixes. Not only is the whole system of verbal
and nominal inflection carried on by suffixation, but also in derivation this
element is more powerful than prefixation. A combination of more than

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

305

two prefixes ,s rarely seen, but one of four suffixes is not uncommon, and
tl.e man.fold ways in whicli tl.ey combine into novel functions are quite
snrpnsmg. The list of suffixes, simple and con.pound, which we give
below, ,s a ready more than triple the full list of simple and compound
prefixes although the suffixes of the language are not fully enumerated
m the hst,for the good reason that they are practically inexhaustible in
the,r comb.nat,ons. Thus in regard to snffixation this upland language can
be called pohjsijnthetic in an eminent degree.

Suffix^ition prevails in the largo n.ajority of all the languages explored
and some languages are known to possess no prefixes at all. On the other
side, the Ba'ntu languages of South Africa b,flect by prefixes only The
same cause has prompted the dark races of the Ba'ntu to prefix their pro-
nommal roots to the radical syllables, which has prompted most Europeans
to place the articles the and a before and not after the noun. The power
of largely multiplying pronominal roots under the form of suffixes which
appears in many Asiatic and American tongues and also in the Basque
(Pyrenees), seems extraordinary to us, because we are accustomed to the
analytic process in tliought and speech. The Klamath Indian has no special
words corresponding to onv about, concerning, to, o„, at, in, upon, through, but
expresses all these relations just as clearly as we do bv means of case suffixes
or case-postpositions; he has not our conjunctions Me, hccause, hut, as, than
when, that, since, until, before, afier,^ but all the relational ideas suggested by
these are expressed by him just as distinctly by conjugational suffixes.

Ihe Klamath Indian employs derivation-suffixes to express the fol-
lowmg material ideas, which English can express by separate words only
comn,encing, continuing, quitting, returning from, doing habitually f.e-
quently,_or repeatedly, char.ging into, moving at a long or short distance,
movng ma z.g^ag or m a straight direction, going upward, along the
ground or downward, circling in the air, coming toward or going away Lm
seen or unseen, moving within or outside of the lodge, on or below the
water s surface ; also an infinity of other circumstantial facts, some of which
we would not observe or express at all, but which strike the mind of the
Indian more powerfully than ours.

liSs

306

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

For the study of the mechanical part of suffixation the following rules
will prove useful:

There are two classes of suffixes, inflectional and derivational. Most
suffixes belong either to one or the other of the two classes, but a few be-
long to both : -iiga, -6ta.

Inflectional suffixes always stand after the suffixes of derivation, in the
absolute as well as in the distributive form. The former are identical in
both dialects with very few exceptions (Kl. -ank. Mod. -an), but among the
latter small dialectic differences are perceptible.

There are pronominal roots which figure as prefixes as well as inflectional
and derivational suffixes; while others occur only as suffixes or component
syllables of such, or belong to one class of suffixes only. Some verbal suffixes
also figure as nominal suffixes: -I'lga, -tana, -tka, etc.

A few suffixes show a wide range in their signification and use, for their
meaning varies according to the basis to which they are appended; cf -ala,
-tka, -uga. In this respect compound suffixes vary less than simple ones.
The purport of such compound suffixes as we observe in huUadshuitiinma
to run continually hack and forth can be inquired into by looking up severally
in the list below all the suffixes following the radix hu-: -ala (-la), -tcha, -ui,
-tdmna, and then combining their significations into a whole.

Most suffixes originally were of a locative import, and the few temporal
suffixes in the language trace their origin to some locative affix. The con-
crete categories of location, position, and distance are of such paramount
importance to the conception of rude nations as are to us those of time and
causality.

The accumulation of suffixes in one word is sometimes considerable,
but never exceeds the limits of considerate measure (five suffixes), so that
the mind always remains capable of grasping the totality of some polysyn-
thetic form. Cf in the Dictionary such vocables as: liopelitchna, ka-
uloktantktiimna, klutsu(5tki8h, shuntoyakea-otkish, spungatgapfele, sputf-
dshanuish, tpugidshapglitiimna, tcliT'ltgipCle. The best method of studying
the workings of suffixation is to compare with one another the derivatives of
such roots as are most productive in derivational forms by transcribing them
from the pages of the Dictionary.

LIST OF SUFFlXliS.

307

There are some suffixes wl.ich in fact are verbs of the language closely
agglutinated to the basis of the preceding te/m, and thus form a transition
between suffixes, auxiliary verbs, and verbs forming compound verbs-
-kakua, -kakiamna, -k.^dsha, -t/.mna, -wApka. In southern languages, as
Atakapa, Kayowe, etc , this sort of grammatic combination is much more
frequent than in Klamath.

There are a large number of other compound suffixes which were not
mentioned in the following list on account of the small number of terms
known in which they occur. Such are -ini, -kieni, -mla, -tchla, etc.; but
the majority of these may be understood by analyzing tiiem into their com-
ponents and comparing them with suffixes formed in a similar way, as -ina
-Zit'a, -m'na, -tchna. ' '

-a, the most frequent of all suffixes, is appended to consonantal as well
as to vocalic stems or bases, occurs in almost every part of speech, and forms
compound suffixes. The different uses made of this ubiquitous suffix neces-
sitate subdivision.

1. Verbs in -a. A large majority of verbs shows this suffix or a spffix
composed with -a. It is in fact the particle a of the declarative mode which
sometimes appears as a word for itself Being usually unaccented when
appended to the w«)rd, it becomes so closely connected with it as to turn
into a true suffix, and in inflectional forms is often replaced by other end-
ings. With other vocalic suffixes it forms a contrast of a locative import-
hinua to fall on something; hi'nui to fall on the ground,- tchalamna to sit on
against something; tchalaraim to sit on an eminence or at a distance The
great frequency of the suffix -a is accounted for by its general, wide and
indistinct signification. We find it in transitive and intransitive verbs! and
among the latter in impersonal and attributive verbs. In most of the verbal
suffixes it occurs as the final sound, alternates at times with the suffix -ha, as
in ma, te'lha to look upon, to resemble; sometimes assumes tlie accent (gu'kd,
etc.), and in the verb hhV seems even to form a part of the radix This is
done, however, to distinguish it from hla-a, q. v. Free from all connection
with other suffixes, -a does not occur frequently except in verbs with itera-
tive reduplication. We find it in:

kfla to be in a hurrg, to be excited.
It6ka to make a round dot; subst. Itok.

308 GllAMMAK OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

mdha to menstruate ; cf. miiksli babe.

pdta. pdt'a to disrupt something; cf. lepdta to indent.

skfa to fizzle; cf. kfii anus.

8k6a it is springtime ; also subst.

tila to make a noise, as by stau n ■ -t'/ the teet; cf. tfltila

Examples of verbs formed

hiuhfwa to be elastic, soft.
yalyala to be limpid, clear.
ka-ukAwa to rattle.
mtilmula to lower the eyebrows.

.erative rodupliration :

pukpuka to crack uilh the teeth.
rthiakshiaga to balance on the arms,
sliukshuka to shake one's head.
tfltila to make a noise, as by rapping.

2. Nouns in -a. Substantive nouns in -a exist in considerable numbers.
Some of them are abbreviations from -ap, -ash, q. v., while others, and the
larger part of them, have been verbs in -a or are still so, having without
any phonetic change assumed the function of a noun, the distinction be-
tween verb and noun being less marked in most Indian languages than in
our own. The examples below contain substantives partly formed with
compound suffixes:

kfa lizard, and kuds,ha field-rat ; cf kfdsha to creep, crawl.

ndka cinnamon bear.

pala, ps'i'hla wicker plate or paddle, from pala to dry.

pata summer season; cf paha to be dry.

klfpa mink; kglayua, species of long-tailed mouse.

pii'ka grandfather'' s brother, for pa'kap.

skua and 8k6 spring season.

shtfa pitch, resin, and tfa secd-paddlc.

safga grassy plain, prairie.

\Lh\)id\a. fifth finger, a.r\A. to go or hide behind.

nkfka dust, atoms, and to be full of dust.

wipka overshoe made of straw.

weke'ta and wekdtash green frog.

ktushka slice, clipping, and to cut off", slice off.

mbuka and mbukash earth crumbling into dust.

LIST OK SUFFIXES.

809

Also a large number of botanic terms, especially food-plants, as:
k.4Hhraa, klana, klapa, Tb/i, tchud, tsunfka, etc.

3. Participles with -a oxytonized (-a') are abbreviations from -Atko, -atko.
Examples to be found in the Texts and Dictionary are n;tit8A(tko) atrophied,
pahd dried up, kewd broken, fractured.

4. A number of adverbs also end in -a, most of which are or have been
formerly verbs:

kd-a very, very much; cf skd.

k(^-una (and kd-uni) slowly, loosely, lightly.

kudta tightly; also adj. hard, tight.

nlshta all night through.

skA, shkii coldly; strongly, and to blow cold, strong.

std, shtd to repletion; entirely, and to be full.

wiifta all day long, and to pass one day.

0{ postpositions ending in -ta the majority are abbreviations from -tana
or -tala.

An inflectional suffix -a occurs in the oblique cases of nouns in -a, as
p'gfshap mother, p'gfsha ^obj. case). Cf. " Nominal Inflection."

. -a', see -a No. 3, -tko.

-a'-a, a suffix which is the combination of the last vowel of the base
with the sui V -rt preceding, analogous to -da, -fa, -ua. The accent always
rests on the penultima, a rule from which the verb ndshdma-a and its medial
form shndndshma-a form perhaps the only exceptions. Sha-apd-a to dare,
provoke, is formed by vocalic diaeresis from shdpa to speak, tell. The word
shukekd-ash parents, in KI. shukfkash, presupnoses an obsolete verb shuke-
kd-a. Examples:

hld-a to lay eggs, to bear young.

kupkupd-a to knock at something hollow; cf. kupkupli concave.

yd-a to scream, vociferate; Mod. kayd-a to cry aloud.

shalkid-a to put on airs, to swagger.

shapkud-a, Kl. shdpkua to strut about.

310

(JHAMMAU OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

stinii-a to hiiild a home, or willow-lodge.
sakd-a to he raw; to eat raw.

-ftga, -ak, -ga, -ag, -ha, -k. This nominal suffix is formed by the par-
ticle ak ''only, just only, but," and in tlio form -figa by the particles «k a,
of the same signitication. Words showing this suffix are diminutives, and,
although the majority are substantives, a few adjectives and pronouns form
dimiiuitives by means of the same suffix.

1.- Substantives in -tlga. Substantives form their diminutives either by
appending -flga in full or by syncope of the short ftof -flga into: -ga, -ka, -g,
-k. Nouns composed of two or more syllables and ending in -sh in the
subjective case, drop that terminal to assume -aga instead, which then under-
goes all the phonetic changes produced by the collision of vocalic and con-
sonantal sounds. The diminutive function results from the signification
''just only" of the particle ak: pe'tcji foot, pc'tchaga "just afoot only", little
foot. The language forms no augmentative nouns like Italian, only dimin-
utives. In many languages the diminutives assume the signification ot
endearment or praise, especially in the terms of relationship; in Klamath
nothing of the kind is perceptible, except in the pronouns mentioned below
and perhaps in the terms with double diminutive endiug.

ankuaga little stick or t*-ee, from Anku stick, tree.

liilpaga, lulpag little eye, from lulp eye.

kiipka small pine tree, from tkap stalk.

ndshi'luaga J/OMW// /t'/Ha/e (animal), from ndshflo.

tAldshiag little reed-arrow, from taldshi reed-arrow.

ntdyaga little bow, from nte-ish, nte'sh bow.

wt'-aga, we'ka little child, from wuash offspring,

awaloka little island, from Awaluash island.

shaplka small seed-paddle, from shaplash paddle.

nutak glyceria grass seed, from nut (verb: niita to crack in the fire).

kilidshfga little duck, from kWidshiw&sli long-necked duck.

shikenitgfka little pistol, from shikenftgish pistol.

spukliga little sweat-lodge, from spi'iklish sudatory.

LIST OF SUFFIXES. 31 j

kftchka, kftcliga small Jin, fronj kfdslmsli fin-
shupli'ign little play-hall, from shiipluasli ball.

A few diminutives accentuate the penultima, though they may empha-
size one of the syllables preceding it as well :

leledshiaga and lelt5dshiak verif young cub, puppy.
nepAga and ndpaga, nepag little hand, paw.

nushaltki'iga and nushAltkaga headwaters of river, from nushdltko spring-
ing from.

The diminutive Shastidga, Shastfka, SAstiak, signifies a little person
of the Shasti tribe or a half-Shasti, one of the parents being a non-Shasti.

Diminutives in which the ending -nga occurs twice are the pronouns
huktakaga (from h.iktak) and viinakaga, unakak little son or offspring, from
vi'mak.

^ 2. Among the pronouns and pronominal adjectives susceptible of this
ending we mention :

huktag and huktakaga this little one.
n(?kag the little absent one, from ndg absent.
tankak a few only, from tdnk so many, so much.
tiimiaga few, not many, from tumi many.

Adverbs often assume this syllable, but then ak is no longer to be con-
sidered as a suffix, except perhaps in ma'ntchaga a while ago; it is the par-
ticle ak, ak a, just only, and the transitory stage from this signification to
that of a diminutive is often plainly perceptible. Examples : kf i:tak, hipiak,
ndnak, panak, nishta'k, palak (Mod. pdlak), pdlakak, psfnak, tina'k, tchi'issaki
wigA-ak.

The adjectives kdliak deprived of pdniak undressed, also contain this
suffixed particle.

-Agra. The verbal suffixes -Sga and -}'iga, although of similar orir^fn,
have to be distinguished from each other. The first contains the factitive
suffix -ka, -ga appended to verbal stems ending in short, unaccentf d -a,
while in the latter suffix, -liga, this same factitive terminal is appended to

312

GUAMMAU OF THE KLAMATH LANOtJAGB.

verbal stemH accented upon the ultima. The sij,nuru'ati()n of both suffixes
is factitive; cf. ka, -ga. In tlio sanio niannor wo observe verbs formed by
the surtixes -ahi and -ahi, -iga and -fga, -uga and -I'lga.

The verbs in -ftga are intransitives, those in -I'lga transitives, as will
appear from the lists below. S( 'o of them show the compound suffix
-t^jaga, -tkaga, the -t^- of which marks repetition or return; and -ftga seems
to occur only as the final p'>rt of compound suffixes.

galampaga to walk behind, to folloio in a file.
kmiilt;cagu to huhtile up in water.
ki't;jaga to he<jin to (/row aijain ; cf kt'dsha.
ntult^aga to run down from its spring.
ntuptchmaga to form bubbles in water.

-a'sa. For the origin of this verbal factitive suffix, see -flga. It occurs
in transitive verbs only and always forms a comjjound with other suffixes,
as -tch-, -ix; etc. Alternates at times with -uka; cf. -iga, -ka, -uga.

hakshkiiga to carry about an infant on the breast; cf hakshdktchui, ksht'na.

kuatchaga and kuatchsikr,, to hite into; from kuatcha.

sh^uluuga to punch with a jtole, to run a stick into.

8hkintcliis]i;ji'iga to shed the skin, said of amphibians.

shnia'htchf'iga to project one's shadow while moving.

shvuyushaga to remember, stitdi/ at.

tchukt;i:aga to try, attempt repeatedly.

-a'i, see aya.

-a'ya, -«'/, verbal suffix composed of the particle i (hf) on the ground,
joined to -a (emphasized), which here stands in the sense of oh, upon some-
thing. From this combination results the function of -aya as that of doing
or being upon, on something, and the secondary function of doing or being
in the tvoods, thickets, recesses, in the timber, or in marshes, upon cliffs. The
locality is generally added to the verb in the locative case in -tat, -at:
tchfkass iinkutat tchaggaya the bird sits upon the tree. The majority of the
verbs in -aya are intransitive and the few transitives seem to have originated
from intranaitives. When the terminal -j'lya becomes abbreviated into -ai

LIHT OF HUKMXUS.

813

the accent HometinicH recodos upon a pretioding syllable, nn in golki'iya,
golkiii, gc'Ikai to erect a phitjbnn upon a scafold. Substantives liko tcluitchltti
Jire-Jii/, tcliiiHJikai wco,scl, neem to embody the same suffix, I'lya. Kxainplos:

kHliagfri'iya, fggaya, li'iggaya to hunt/ down from something, and to lumy

up, suspend on something,
ktchikfiya to rliinh, creep, crawl on, upon, aiiu to creep upon a tree, or

throufih the timber.
huka}-a, gakaya to run, to go into the woods.
tgakiiya, liuki'iya to stand or remain on ; to stay in the woods.
sluialaya to be idle; cf. wi'il;^a to sit waitiny.

-ak, see -tlga.

•■akia, see gien, -tki.

-akie'a, see -zi^'a.

-akla, see -kja.

-akta, see -ta.

-a;(la, see -;(it'a,

-azie'a, see -x\*ia.

-al, see -ilia.

-ala, verbal suffix related to -«la and composed of the same elements,
but diffisring from it by the location of the emphasized syllable. The verbs
composed with both terminals are almost exclusively of a transitive nature,
and the verbs in -fila and in -ala are in part verba denominativa, but more
generally derivatives of other verbs. The suffix -ala composes many other
suffixes, as -al^a, -alsha, -alslina, -alsh, etc. The origin of this suffix seems
to have been the same as that of the prefix ;- No. 2, pointing to a downward
motion along something, which is also embodied in the words lash, hla', hlala,
q. v., the rr . ? of which are made up by the sound /. Some of their num-
ber can geminate the / of the suffix, and they do so especially in song lines:
shuinalla, genalla. Cf -altko, -c'la, -ila.

Derivatives from other veibs:
spalala to feed the youny ; for spanala; cf pdn to eat.

'-'^tmtt

» I 'f

314 UKAMMAU OV TIIK KLAMATH LANdHAUK.

■talulii to Jill, fill up; for Htnmila ; cf. stiinl full.

Blmiiiiilu to accompany in .sinyiny ; cf. sluifrm to siny.

ndokala to he kinky, curly.

geiiala to start of ami to approach; from gL^im to walk.

'vanlilala (and washlala) to hunt yrouml-squirrds, from subst. w.'.shla.

yai.;:alala (and ya.i;KaIala) to hunt bald eayks, from aubst. yau;tal.

shno-uyala to destroy almost.

shiei'ila to perceive, look at; from shk'a to see.

^ -ala, -«a, -«/, -la. This verbal suffix is of great frequency and variou«
import. It also forma quite a number of compound suffixea. The similarity
of origin with -ala and other analogies were pointed out when speakino- of
that suffix. The circumstance that the accent rests upon the base of "the
word, and not on the suffix, causes a weakem-ng and falling off of vocalic
parts of the suffix, thus -ftla changes into -da, -'la, -al, and into -la, which
18 more frequent than the other forms. Many of these are denominative
verbs. It will be best to divide these verbs into intransitives and transitivea
and to subdivide the latter into verba formed («) from aubstantives in -sh,
(i) from substantives having other endings, (c-) from verba.

1. Intransitive verba in -ftla etc., formed from other verbs apparently.

shdkatla to come up the road or trail.
tchfkla to sit on, upon, within.
skutchala to dress in a mantle, blanket.
pAkla to bark at.
muluala to rot, to become rotten.
apuno'kla it is yettiny late at niyht.

2. Transitive verbs in -ala etc.

(a) Formed from substantives having the uaual suffix of substantives,
-ah (-ash, -ish, etc.); therefore these verba all end in -ahla or -shala. They
indicate that the object represented in the noun, of which they are deriva-
tives, is collected, manufactured, made into something or turned to account.

>MM

LIST OF SUl'l'IXKa.

ni5

A spenidl class of tlioso is forni«(l l)y the verbs referring to the harvoating
of food-articles and crops.

itfslila to use for vmbro'ukrinfi ; from ftish, fta.
Ifl'^alilu to capture in war, to enslave; fron» li'igsli.
BhliicBlilii to dill a well; wu'shla to dit/ a hole.
Bpuklishlu to erect a stventlodi/e; from spi'iklish.
luldeiiuislilu to build a winter-lodge; d. liildanmlukHli.
Hhliiukrwhla to construct a bridge, bridges; from shlunkosh.
witcliulaHlila to make a witchdlash-net.
tclmiishla to make a shirt, and to wear one.
vvt)kiiHlila, wo'ksla to collect pond-lily seed; from wukash
kCdiidalila to collect the kdddsh-berry crop.

(b) Formed from substantives ending in another suffix than -sh ; some
of their number are diminutives in -aga, -ak.

unakala and unakiikala to give birth to a son; from vi'mak, linakak.

peyahi to give birth to a daughter; from pi'-ip.

we'kala to bear offspring; from weka, dim. of wc'ash,

nteydkahi to make a Utile bow ,- from nteyaga.

na-fla for iia fala to make a ndi-baskct.

h'lkiala to take as a husband; from hikf.

shnawcidshala, snawedshla to take as a wife; from shndwedah,

ndakal, /tkal to pick up, find something long; of Idiikala.

patkal to rise from sleep.

Bht'vvala to aver, state; cf shdwa to be of opinion.

shiikela to mix into, said of liquids.

shalakla to cut or slash oneself; d. l.iktcha.

shaktukla to wound by a single cut.

wt^pla to tie with straps etc.

pakla to eat upon, on something; from pdka to feed on.

-aininna, see -lamna.

316

GUAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

-alpka, the combination of the suffixes -ala and the iterative -pica.
This suffix appears in connection with the terms of relationship, and then
signifies to call somebody father, sister, etc., or to call the father, sister, etc., by
his or her name: p'tfshal'pka, tupakshalpka. Usually -al- in -alpka is not
emphasized, and the verbs are all transitives.

p'tfshalpka, xMod. t'shfshalpka, to call somebody father.

pdyalpki to call somebody daughter; of pdyala to hear a daughter.

pshdyalpka to call somebody uncle.

pshi'ikalpka to call a person maternal aunt.

pkumalpka to call a person paternal grandmother.

vunaki'ilpka to call somebody son, child; of. viinakala to hear a son.

-alpkash, see -altko.

-alsha, -allcha, verbal suffix produced by combination of the suffixes
-ala, -sh and -a, q. v. Like the verbs in -sha the large majority of the
verbs in -alsha are transitive; they are formed from the verbal in -sh, which
I call the verbal indefinite, by the addition of the declarative and verbifying
suffix -a. The derivation is as follows: W(5kash pond lily seed; wdksala to
gather pond-lily seed ; wokashalsh, contr. w(5ksulsh, 7//e act of gathering pond-
lily seed; woksalsha to be in the act of gathering pond-Hly seed, to gather that
seed /or a time. The verbal in -sh represents the act or state expressed by
its verb as a lasting one, and therefore easily assumes the function of a sub-
stantive. Several of the verbs in -alsha possess another form in -altcha,
which I regard as a phonetic corruption. The verbs in -alsha have the
accent upon the word-stem or at least before the ending, and many of them
refer to the hunts of game or to the annual gathering of crops, without
being real usitative verbs for all that. n.',tkal«i,u to rise up suddenly, is an
example of an intransitive verb having this suffix; another is: tchala'lsha
(for tchiala-alsha) to stay at home.

shutualsha to throw at each repeatedly; from shu-uta.
shakalsha to play the four-stick game; from shak'la.
plafwashalsha and plafwashaltcha to be on a bald-eagle hunt.
wAshlalsha to be on a chipmunk hunt; from washlala.
st6pa.\iiha to peel off the fiber-bark or St ipalsh.

LIST OF SUFFIXES. 317

ktt^Iualsha to gather pine-nuts for a time.
kcilalsha to he in the act of gathering the kb'l-hulh.
nuiyalsha to gather tule-stalks in season; cf. niil-i, niAyala.

-alshna- This suffix, not of frequent occurrence, is -alslia increased
by the suffix -na, q. v.

hutkalshna to get up precipitately.
-alta, see -ta.

-altko, in the oblique cases -Alpkash, -dlpkam, etc., is the form of the
past participle of verbs in -ala, transitive as well as intransitive. When
derived from transitive verbs, the form in -altko, which in the northern dialect
is rarely accentuated on the penult in the subjective case, has as well an
active as a passive function, thougli of these two generally one prevails.

No special mention would be made of these participles as regular
inflectional forms if they did not at times pass into the condition of verbal
adjectives. This is the case when the parent verb is no longer in use or
when the signification of the form in -altko shows an alteration from the
form of the verb. Many of the " comprehensive " terms of relationship
through blood and marriage belong here. Cf. -tko, -antko.

shdtze-unaltko related as brothers; cf t;{t'-uiuip elder brother.
shaptAlaltko related as sisters or female cousins; cf p'talip.
Uill^ltko provided with eyes; from a supposed lulpala to obtain eyes.
shunufshaltko possessed of; cf shunuish property.
o'lsh^JtVo grav haired; from ()lshala to resemble the olash-dove.
petchAkaltko having little feet; from a supposed petclu'ikala.
shmokaltko wearing a beard ; from a supposed shm^kala.
tchuyesliAltko ivearing a hat, cap; cf tchuyesh hat, cap.

-v^ltcha, see -alsha.

-am, -lam, the suffix of the possessive case in the absolute and distrib-
utive form; -lam is placed after the vowels -a and -e of the nominal base,
-am after consonants and the vowels -i, -o, -u, which in that case are con-
sidered as consonants (y, w). Both suffixes are pronounced very short,

it •
J »

318

GKAMMAK OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAUH.

almost like em, -'m, -l6m, -I'm. The origin of this suffix will be shown
under the heading of "Substantive."

This possessive case form becomes in many nouns a subjective case,
undergoing an inflection similar to that of the real subjective case. We
subdivide these as follows:

I.— Names of plants, especially fruit-hearing trees, shrubs, or herbs. The
possessive suffix composes the majority of vegetals furnishing berries, nuts,
and soft fruits to the list of Indian provisions, and a few only, like the serv-
iceberry bush, tchakAga, have other endings. The pine-tree, ko'sh, fur-
nishes only the resinous, ill-tasting pine-nut, and does not show the possessive
form, but some of the seed-grasses, as tchfpsham, exhibit it. Many of the
plant names in -am exist in the distributive form. Besides the form in -am
exists the other form in the subjective case, to designate the fruit, nut, or
berry of the plant. The plant-name is the fruit-name placed in the pos-
sessive case, and the term .-Inkii tree, stem, or tchelash stalk, has to be supplied:
kp6k .gooseberry, kp6kam (j'lnko) gooseberry bush. Bulb plants, weeds, and
low stalks with flowers often have the same name as their fruits, standing in
the subjective case, lik ; ko'l, w6kash, k'hiash, though even in moss-names
the possessive case occurs, presumably through the law of linguistic analogy.
The generic terms fwam berry, ld-usham,d leld-usham flower, and some terms
referring to animal food: kAwam eel spring, nuksara dried fish, also take this
suffix.

hiitchnam white-oak tree; hiidsha acorn.
aplsam apple tree; ii'i)ulsh, ii'pul apple.
lulufluisham gooseberry bush; luihiish, species of gooseberry.
tuftch;tsam choke-cherry tree; tuftch;^ash choke-cherry.
fpshunalam swamp dogberry bush; ipshuna blue swamp dogberry.
pfi'shzam bough of conifertc; pil'shak little whorl.
kiipiunksham the grass producing the kdpiunks-seed.
Add to these padshAyam, panam (and pan), pAtchnam, skAwanksham,
shldshlaptcham, shud-usham, tutankshara.

II.— A few nouns indicating seasons of the year and phenomena of nature
also show the terminal -am, -lam. T^Alam tvest wind is an abbreviation of
t^jAlamni (shldwish) and does not belong here.

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

319

luldani winter-tjine; cf. \uash fog, mist.
sha'hlani, slialam autumn.
y}il;fani tempest, storm.

III.— Of manufactured articles showing this suffix I have met the fol-
lowing:

kftchkam handkerchief tchfi'ksham or tchfi'kshtim coffce-jwt, lani=pimu-
isham glass bottle.

-amna, -dmna. This verbal suffix, the final portion of which, -m'na,
is a phonetic alteration of -mana, -aniana, which is composed of -a, tlie com-
njon ending of verbs, -ma and -na, two suffixes marking direction and dis-
tance, q V. The idea conveyed by -anma, -am'na is that of being or coming
around, upon, on or above, near somebody or something, p-d that of surround-
ing, of covering. It forms transitive and intransitive verbs from other verbs,
not from nouns, and has to be kept distinct from the suffix -lamna, -dlamna!
Cf the suffixes -ma and -na.

tchf lamna to be crowded together, around; cf. tchflla.

gatpamna to approach near, to come to the lodge.

tchiiyamna to sivim about.

tuyamna to swim around below the water's surface.

nutiiyamna to hum, buzz, whirl around buzzing.

ni'iyamna to whirl around, to skip about

skayanma to hold, carry about oneself in a basket.

liukiamna to go around, to surround; cf liuka-a to collect.

stunkiamna to go around, v. intr ; to encompass, v. trans.

shleyamna, li'iyamna to hold, carry in the arms, hands.

Cf also f-amna, kshuyamna, shfamna, tc'.-'amna, I'lyamna. In the verbs
ending in -kiamna the syllable -ki- belongs to the stem of the word: sliuha-
kiamna to dodge around (stem: huka or hiikia), shatalkiannia to look around
(cf tdla, tdlish); compare also shashknakiamnisli mitten. Mod.

-ainpka is the suffix -pka appended to verbs of motion terminating
in -na, -ftna, -Cna, by the same phonetic assimilation as observed in gempele,
as formed from gc^napele, g^n'pOle. The forms in -ampka imply remotenesi
from the one who speaks or is supposed to speak c»r relate, t.nd the}- often

320

GKAMMAR OF THE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

combine therewith tlie idea of being unseen by him. They are transitive
as well as intransitive verbs. Not to be confounded with the suffix -tdmpka.
Cf -iipka.

hutampka (for hutAnjIpka) to run into distance; der. huta to rmh upon.
ne-uhiktampka to punish tcitJiout being present ; ne-ul.ikta to punish.
tinshi'impka to run away unseen by the speaker; tfnshna to run away.
gaya-idsh.^inipka to pass injront of into distance.
shualaliampka to administer, 2>rovide for.
steyak'kjiini)ka to listen outside of a lodge, building,
shnuitj'impka to keep up afire away from people; cf. niita to hum.

-anka, -mka is a frequent suffix, composed of -ank, the ending of the
present participle, and the • a of the declarative mode. Thus it verbifies the
act or state expressed by the participle, and expresses its duration. This
may best appear from the following instances:

k6kanka to masticate; der. koka to bite.

hushkanka to reflect, think over; hushka to think.

shnikanuanka to make pauses in gatherimj crops; shnfkanua to let ripen.

ndewanka to fall when sitting or standing; ndewa to topple over.

stillitfinka to report, bring news; stflta to announce.

shakpat'tanka to compress or pin together.

shulftanka to move an object down and up.

spukanka to move the feet quickly; spuka to put out the feet.

spunkanka to take as one's companion; spiinka to let go.

-ansha. Like the verbs in -alsha, -ampka, -anka, -antko, etc., those
in -an.sha are the result of a verbifying process to which an inflectional form
is subjected. Here the verbal indefinite in -sh of verbs ending in -na, -ana,
-C'na becomes verbified by the apposition of -a, and -ansha conveys the idea
of locomotion away from somebody or something, of starting out info distance,
and sometimes that of passing through or out of The word-accent sometimes
passes upon the suffix itself (-ansha), and -ansha is preferable to the form
-antcha, -andsha, which is sometimes used instead of it. Gt'kansha to start
from is therefore derived from gdknash the act of starting from, this from
gekna. Geknasli, by becoming lengthened into gcknasha, inverts n and a

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

321

intransitive. Cf.
' hit, or sJioot aside

and becomes gdkansha. The majority of these verbs a
-insha. -anslia re-enforced by -na occurs in yiitlanshna
of the mark.

hiikansha, tushkansha, tfnkansha to run out of.

hufzansha to run along a river, ahng its current.

gatpansha to come near some place.

kokarisha, k6kantcha to climb up to a distance.

kiluAnsha to hurry away.

hukit'tansha to pass quickly by somebody.

ksh^kansha tojty or soar up.

ktchfkansha to a awl through a hole.

shletansha to go to see, to visit somebody.

nfk'kansha to put the arm out of or through an orifice.

tilankansha to roll something away.

-anshna, see -ansha.

-antko, -dntko forms participles and verbal adjectives from verbs in
-na .&v , . :„ the .same manner as -altko from verbs in -ala, -la. Analogous

and -n,. The suffix -antko forn.s its oblique cases: -A.npkash, -ampkan,, etc- •
It conveys a passive and so.netimes a medial signification In some of the

kdwantko the -n- seems to be the product of a nasalizing process only.
kintchantkoi,«5s«We, pervious; kfntchna to march in a file
kilkantko humpback,- cf kfl;ta to become humpbacked.
shuh'itantko dressed, clad; shulotana to dress oneself
tilhuantko submerged; tflhua to overflow.
kdwantko ijoo/-, indigent; Uwa to be poor.
-ap, see -p.

-a'pka, -apka. The suffix -pka forms verbs in -Apka from verbs in -a in
the same manner as it forms derivatives in -u'pka, -o'pka from verbs in -wa
-ua or derivatives in -an.pka from verbs in -na, -r ,a. Verbs in -apka de-
scnbe an acfon performed or state undergone at a di. n. . ft-on, the person
speakmg or supposed to speak or relate, and are intransit^-e as well as trans-

322

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

itive; other verbs in -dpka are usitatives or iteratives. From the verbs in
-pka they differ only by the presence of the basal -a.

I- — Verbs expressing distance from the one speaking:

(a) Distant, when lying on the ground or within reach.

ili'ipka to charge, load by placing the load on the bottom (of boat),
kfapka to recline ddcwise.
shnukpilpka to hold dotvn on the ground.
tchi/ipka, wawilpka to sit on the ground.

(b) At a distance from the one speaking, but still visible :
geldpka to climb into, step upon at a distance.

telhfipka to survey, overlook, as a country,
tinok'napka to set, said of celestial bodies.

prevent contact:
kljimtchapka to keep the eyelids closed.
shatasht^jApka to seize an object with the hand so that the fingers do not

touch the thumb in grasping.
shmuktchApka to pout the lips.

{d) At a distance out of sight:
k'lewidshapka to leave behind in the lodge,
kpudshapka to pursue an object out of sight.

II. — Iterative verbs are as follows :
shkanakapka to assail repeatedly.
shuktiipka to strike oneself repeatedly.
vutik/ipka to draiv the tongue in and out.

-as, see -ash.

-ash, -as, -sh. The most frequently occurring nominal suffixes are
-ash, -ish, -ush, all formed by the connection of the vocalic stem-endings of
verbs with the noun-making suffix -sh, -s. All of them differ in their func-
tions, and it is therefore preferable to treat of them in separate articles. The
suffix -ash is pre-eminently a snffix for names of inanimate objects, while -ish

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

323

h the suffix for,ning names of animate beings chiefly. The diflference is best
shown by examples:

shashapkeleash stori/, narrative, myth.

shashapkele-ish narrator, story-teller.

shk^aluash upper eyelid, or "cover" moving by itself.

shl<?lalui8h cream of milk, or "cover" to be removed by hand; the real
meaning of shk'laluish being cover.

tchi'sh (from tchfash) settlement; tchl'sh (from tchf-ish) settler.

The vowel -a- in -ash is often elided by syncope/especially when pre-
ceded by a consonant, or suffers contraction, as -A-ash into -ash.

As an inflectional terminal, -ash forms the objective case in the adjective
and .Uso m the majority of names of animate beings in the absolute as well as
m d.e distributive form. In the numerals, -ash has the function of a locative
suffix; ct. "Numerals."

It also forms the verbal indefinite of the verbs in -a .- «hiy I'lta to exchange,
t^arier-U^A i shana-uli shiyutashf /o,- what will you barter this? The verbal
signification is still perceptible in the nouns k.'.-i pilu^-.^asli onion, viz., "bad
smeller", and in ko-i tumenash noise, viz, "disagreeable hearing".

_ 1. Denominative nouns in -ash. I mention a few instances in which the
primitive term is still in use at the same time with the derivative, so that
there cannot be any reasonable doubt of a derivation having occurred:

kiifla earth, ground; kaflash mud, dirt, semen.

^o'k kernel, seed ; h\kas\\ fish-roe.

muksh down; mukasli owl, 'downy bird."

miilu, something ro«m; molash/jWe^jw.

shT'l cloth, tissue; shflash tent.

t(')ke horn, prony ; t6ksh navel ; fish-bladder.

pceta:

2. To the above may be added a few nouns formed through onoma.o-

ti'iktuk (cry of hawk), tnktnkwa>ih fish-haivk.
wii'k (note of duck), wii'kash, a duck species,
wdkat (cry of frog), wdketash green frog

3. Nomina verbalia concreia or substantives in -ash, formed from transi-

324

ORAMMAU OF TUE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

r-^

tive or intransitive verbs in -a and designating inanimate, things of a concrete
signification, among wliich are included all animals of a lower order. By
syncope or elision -ash may dwindle down to -'«A, -'*■, or may be pronounced
-ish incorrectly. In many instances tho verb from which the nouns in -ash
are derived has become obsolete, as in yapal[)uk'a8h tvhitish butterfly. Some
of these nouns in -ash are of an active or instrumental, like sluipash, others,
as tutiish, of a passive signification. 'Y\\\h is easily explained by the fact that
the transitive verbs of this upland tongue undergo no change in their form
when passing from the active to the passive voice.

hashuRsh veyetahle, maize; from hilshua to plant, sow.
Itt6dshash rain; from kt<5dsha it rains.
lAlash side of animal; from lala to slope down.
Ic'wash play-ball, globe; from li'wa to play.
shApash sun, moon, clock; from sh/ipa to indicate.
* shetaluash ylass, mirror; from shi'talua to reflect.
8hlitchf;(ash comb; from shlftch'ka to sift.
tfnuash drowning-place ; from tfnua to fall into water.
tiitash trunk of tree; from tuta to remove.

Some of the nouns mentioned under -a have lost their -sh: 8k6a for
8k6'h8, nkfka for nkfkash, mbi'ika for mbukash, weketa fir wekotash, both
forms now existing simultaneously; probably also jiata summer heat, pa'hla
tray, dish, pAla liver.

4. Nomina verbalia abstracta, or substantives in -ash, formed from verbs
in -a (mainly transitives) and designating abstractions. Their signification
approaches very nearly that of a verbal indefinite in -ash.

hushkanksh thought, mind; from hushkanka to think.

kpapshash seme of taste; from kpapsha to taste.

k6;tpash (Mod.) thought, mind; from ki'.^pa, d of kopa to think

sha-fshash a secret; from sh.i-ishi (here from sha-isha) to hush up?

shosliash name, price; from sht'sha to name, call.

' There are a few nonina acloria and other iioudb in -ash (Bhort a) which I presume have all origi-
nated from -a-i»h, and formerly hud tlieiro long (-ash): kii-ikaNli one who nets ttrangely, from kij-ika;
8lieHh;feil(i-n8h misy fellow, from sheshr.Ma ; utilssusiinsh clown, jenler; prtimmkash hairy on body, absol.
form p^mhash not being in use.

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

325

-ash. This nominal suffix is tlie result orf a contraction either of -A-ash
or of A-ish :

(a) Contracted from -li-ash, and therefore pointinpf to some object of
the inanimate class; cf. -ash:

stina'sh ivillow-lodge ; Mod. lochfe, from stina-a.
p/ilash, p/ilaash /owr; from p/ila.

(i) Contracted from -A-ish, and therefore pointing to a mmen actoris:
sheshtalkash wag, funny fellow.
uli'iktchnash one whose head is not flattened.

-atch, a nominal suffix which is a corruption of -6tki8h, the instru-
mental suffix, as in —

shiimaluatch, from shumalu/jtkish implement for writing, painting or

drawing; from shumalua.
IgmAtch mealing-stone, prob. for lamiitkish.

-a, see -e.

-a^a see -4ga.

-aizi, see -xiia.

■•am, see -m.

-bli, see -p6lf.

-dsll, see -tch.

-dslia, see -tcha.

-dshlia, see -tchna.

-e. The terminal -e occurring in verbs is but a part of a suffix, as -txe,
-ue, and in every instance alternates with -i; therefore it does not require to
be treated separately. Verbs belonging here are hulhe, gayue, gut^e, ski'iyue.

Of the substantives in -e some are derived from verbs. In a few" the
ending also alternates with i, as in tchc^kele blood, t6ke horn, Iftke evening,
knd-udshe coarse bark of tree. In others -e alternates with -6 and -a:

kilwe eel, lamprey-eel; poss. case, kawam.

-III

326

GRAMMAR OF TFE KLAMATH LANOUAGK.

k6ye, k6-i lobster, crab.

ki'mimo, kuiiitnC cave, cavern.

shkiile, ski'ilii, Mod tH^ulo lark; poss. skiiliilam.

tiAe, ti'ilf' little lake, pond.

-6, see -e.

-e'a, verbal suffix related to -fa. It refers to acts performed with or on
one's own body or that of another person, and generally is found with in-
transitive verbs only. It sometimes alternates with -fa, fya, which is a more
frequent suffix; but when -ia is the original form it does not frequently al-
ternate with -ea. Thus, Kl. and Mod., shashapkelfa to recount stories to some-
body is in Modoc shapke-fa and shapkt'a.

kedshamkedshalkea to wheel around on one's feet.

palaloa to pull out by the roots.

shakatpampek'a to have a horse ov foot race.

shetalpft'a and shutapkt'a to stand on one's head.

tilampudshoa to roll oneself about.

tilanshnoa to contort, turn about one's limbs.

tchikualxulc'a to turn somersaults.

-e'ga, -d'ga, -iega, a suffix forming mchoative or inceptive verbs, and
identical in its function with -tampka, but more frequently occurring in
Klamath Lake than in Modoc, where -tampka preponderates. There are
verbs which assume both endings indiscriminately, as —

ktudshic^ga and ktudshtanipka it begins to rain.

tchutchjiyc'ga aiid tchutchii-itjimpka it begins to melt (as ice).

After the consonants I, tch, dsh, and after all the vowels, -t^ga appears
in the form -iega, -iii'ga, -ydga, which is perhaps the original shape of this
suffix. Like the Latin verbs in -are and the Greek verbs in -dv, -etv,
which once were inchoatives also, the verbs in -dga have dropped the func-
tion of inchoatives to express the act or state «7s(7/' indicated by the base of
the verb. The suffix forms verbs from other verbs only, not from nouns,
and they are transitives as well as intransitives.

(a) Verbs of inchoative import in -dga, -idga:
i-undga to become dark ai night.

LIST OF aUFPlXKS.

327

tini%u, tiiuiii'ga to set, 8»iid of celestiiil bodies,
guti'gii tu penetrate, lit. "to begin to enter"; of giita.
guhit'ga to begin to swell up; cf. guhia.
shakaliii'ga to commence gambli ng ; cf. shdkla.
8hutoy(5ga to make, create first ; cf. shi'ita.
liwaydga to begin to lij't; to lift at one end.
luyega to anccnd, aaid of fog, (-louds, etc.
shuyega to start a song ; cf shufnu.
tmuyc'ga to begin at one end.

(6) Verbs in -dga, -it'ga, no longer inchoative :

huwalidga to run uphill; cf. huwala to run upward.

shlatchidga to splash.

tpualiega to driv. up to the top.

witcliuydga to blow something up.

kshawalit'ga to transport, carry uphill.

ndiunt'ga to fall, roll into.

tchiega to flood, overflow.

spiega to assist in geiting up, rising.

(c) A number of verbs belong to neither of the two categories above,
but are applicative verbs in -ga, -ka, with accentuated -e- before it, which
l)oint8 to an act or state of the subject's own body.

kiuyega to hold over somebody obliquely; cf. uydga.
ktchiega to help oneself up by using the arms
ktutt'ga to sink down in water, sand, mud.
tindga to snort.

The verbs ktetdga, powetdga are derivatives of tdga, and hence do not
properly belong here.

-e'-lzi, see -zida.

-eka, see -ka.

-&xi, see -ixl

-e'la, an imf-equent verbal sufBx, pointing to superposition or to a
raising up above other objects.

828

(lUAMMAU OF TlIK KIMMATII LANOlJAdB.

shikiiiitrla to lay one thing upon another; of. shikantfla.
tcliekli'lu to sit down on the side, edge of.
vutukftyt'la to throw up a long object.

-ftla, see -ftla.

-eitko, a Modoc form occiirrinf? in a few words and in every respect
parallel to Kl. -altko. 'Vha Modoc dialect shows a tendency to siibstituto
sometiniGH e for a in radical as well as in derivational syllables, when the}'
stand between conHonants, ns in sliotinu for shAtma, nt'shki for nAshki, nit'tkln
for miitkla, uk'plpa for ulaplpa. Of -altko,

weweshii'ltko, Kl. weweshi'iltko having offspring.

-e'lia, -iena, two verbal suffixes closely connected in their origin and
functions. The former, -cna, is also pronounced -ji'na, -lu'na, and refeis to
an act performed or state undergone tvithin, inside of something, while the
latter, -idna, also pronounced -yi-na, -iii'na, -yii'na, -hit'na, -hiji'na, refers to
an act performed inside the lodge or house, indoors. The -i- composing this
suffix is the particle I, h(, which means (1) on the ground and (2) in the
lodge ; for the suffix -t'na, see -na, its component.

(a) Verbs in -dna:

shleydna to line a garment enveloping the body; cf. shldya.

neyena to place a lining into, as into a hat; cf ni'ya.

shikpualhdna to roll in the mouth an object not protruding from it; Kl.

shikpualk/ina.
kuloyt'na to stir up a liquid in a vase.

(b) Verbs in -it'na:

goydna, pi ginhii'na to go into, intrude into the lodge.
huihii'na to run around within a building.
kiwalhiena to cohabit indoors.
luyji'na to go in a circle inside a wigwam,
payii'na, d. papiJi'na to go around eating indoors.
shnaydna to fly, flutter around, as a captive bird.

-e'nash, see -ni.

LIST OP HnFFfXRS.

329

-esll, tho result of a contrnctinn from -A-ish and -d-isli ; forms con-
crete nnd abHtract nouns from verbs, aH follows :

sliutosh mnkrr, rrentor ; from Hbuti-isb, Hhutii'-iHli.

ngr/sli for ngc-inb, nkt'wisli arrow, missile, from nkt5wa to break.

tikr-nh (Mod.) aif/iltarrous soil.

t(!liikr'Hli land ovvrflotvcd; cf idxixx to he overflowed.

Hblum di'imtdsli urass filling gaps in the lodge- walls.

lotesli, piece oi' matting; from liita to hang down.

-fish, see -asli, -ish.
-O'ttl, see -wi'ta.
-g, see -ilga, -k.
-ga, see -ftga, -ka.
-g-akla'miia, see -kaklumna.
-gra'llka, see -kfinka.
-gl, see -ki, -Iki.
-{JTgri'dsha, see -kfdsha.
-grgl'ma, see -ki'ma.
-grl'ankl, see -gien.

-g^ien, -akia, -kia, a terminal appearing under many various forms and
representing in fact not a suffix, but an agglutinated pronoun gfanki for
oneself, in one's own interest. Tliis pronoun originated from the participle
gfank of gi to do, perform, act, and the particle i, having reflective signiiica-
tion, appearing also in suffixes like -fa; thus it really means "doing for one-
self." The more frequent abbreviations of -gfanki, -gianggin, are -gink,
-kink, -ginggi, -kinki, -gin, -kin, and when fully reduced to tho shape of a
verbal suffix combined with the verbal ending -a: -akia, -agia, ilki, -agi, etc.
Appended to verbs in -ala, -la this suffix appears as -Iki, -Igi, q. v.

330

(lltAMMAlt OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

(1) The suffix is appended to the en.phatic form of personal pronouns
in both dialects :

nu /, ni'itak mifself, nutagiAnggi for myself.

at ye, a'tak yourselves, a'takianki for yourselves.

And also appears in certain adjectives :

tfdshi yood, tidshkiAnki careful, viz., "acting well for oneself."

(2) In verbs the suffix mostly appears in the form -agia, -akia, -agi, etc :
shiulagia and shiulagien to rolled for oneself; Mod. shi^lagianki, con-
tracted into shiu'lki, shi6'l;(i.

shnokakia to detest, hate.
hashashm'ikia to converse with.
siilakia to miss from one's company.

(3) In a series of verbs in -kia, -yia the function of the suffix is simply
that ol a factitive -kn, -ga, with the particle -i- inserted. This particle gives
It the locative meaning r . in place or at that place, on the spot.

li'ikia, shhlkia to lay, spread against a wall etc..
n^utagia to hum at the bottom of a cooking-vase,
shnuikia to build a fire on the spot.
shuiziii to carry on one's shoulder.
tchakia to put into the mouth.

-gfill, see -gien.

-gisll, see -kish.

-g-sh, see -kish, -ksh.

-gllisll, see -kuish.

-ll-, see Infixes.

-ha, verbal suffix forming intransitive and transitive verbs from verbal
roots or bases. In some instances the -h- nuiy be an epenthetic sound, as
in paha to exsiccate, for pA-a; but in the majority of verbs the suffix points
to an act etc. being done upon, on the top o/ something, a.id -h- can be thrown
out, especially when standing after a consonant. This terminal is especially

LIST OF 8UFl<'JXi:d.

331

frequent after 1- and t-, and seems to be a contraction of -hia, -a being the
declarative, verbifying suffix, and hi the particle hi, i, "on the ground."

tdlha, tdla to look upon, to overlook.

fiha, fla to lay down upon; d. ilhi to carry inside.

skulha to lie on the top of; cf skul^a to be prostrate, to sleep.

stflha to put a Htring, rope, belt, etc. on oneself.

tchfaha to heat over the fire (liquids only).

shatnalha to heat the cookiny-stones for baking.

kliiliui, kliila hail is falling.

n^t'lia, neta to place, put something sheet-like upon.

shlot'ha to cover with, said f mantles etc.

-hi, suffix forming transitive and intransitive verbs from verbal stems.
it has the same origin as the suffix -i, and often alternates with it by losing
-h-, but is not quite identical with it. The function of -hi may be specified
as pointing to an act or motion toivard or into the lodge, dwelling, house of
somebody or of oneself, that of homeward; the location upon the ground
indicated by the particle hi, i being also the floor of the Indian lodge. This
suffix often becomes emphasized, and is chiefly appended to verbal stems in
-1, -t, like the suffix -ha. Cf -i.

spulhi, spuli to lock up, said of one person; cf ilhi.
telhi to look or peep into a lodge, a house, etc.
gulhi, gulf, plur. kflhi to enter, pass into, go into.
hiillii, hulhe to run, rush into, inside of the lodge,
etflhi to report, announce at one's house,
pudlhi to throw down into the lodge,
skflhi to crawl into a hole, den.

-hlU'lia, -hiena, see -dna.

-huya, see -uya.

-1, -i, a sufTix frequently found in verbs a.s well as in nouns and adverbs
Its function is not well defined or circumscribed, but may be generally de-
scribed as localizing or locative. When ajjpended to nouns it is simply the
particle i, hi; cf. hf in Dictionary; when suffixed to verbs it is derived from

382

GBAMMAIi OF THE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

P I

it. The original function of -i, however, is not always apparent in the
derivatives given below, for many of them refer, for instance, to the human
or animal body. Cf suffix -hi.

1. Locative suffix -i occurs chiefly ir. iopographic terms and local names,
and forms the locative case of substantives designating settlements, islands,
rocks, rivers, brooks, islands; also composes locative case-postpositions, al
-kshi, -ksaksi. and many particles. Appended to the nominal forms of the
verbs it assumes temporal function ; cf 29, 1 9. 20. Examples: tchl'shi in the
camp; st^kishi where the door is; Mbakualshi, Ndwapkshi, etc.

2 Substantives in -i. Some are derived from verbs or are verbs made
into nouns. They form the oblique cases in -am, at, or -tat, etc. Those
in which -i alternates with -e were mentioned under suffix -e. Several of
their number are terms for parts of the animal body; others are animal and
plant names.

(a) Parts of the animal body: \&kl forehead, WpaUi hip, tch'A'-i posteriors,
toki, Mod. ts6nki, tson^i horn.

(b) Names of animals: mii-i woodchuck, shud-i white-tailed deer.

(c) Names of plants: kla'pi, species of rush, pii'ni, species of tall ffrass,
lulsi, species of Sagittaria, wid.hfpi Mod. for widshfbam Kl, species o{ lacus-
trine reed, ma-i bulrush.

(d) Other nouns: ktA-i rock, stone, vumf cache, kla'pki red paint, tchdyi
tomtom of vase, mAllui rahbit-net, kukui brother of grandparent, m6mi key-hole.

3. Adjectives in -i are:

tchmuyuksi unkempt, pumuksi having frizzy, crisped hair.

Pronouns in -i are:
hunf and hukf he by himself she by herself

4. Adverbs in -i are not frequent, but show throughout a signification
which was originally locative:

atf, kii, A-ati distantly, far off; high up.
k«i-i atvayfrom, on the other side.
kii-i, k6-i badly, mischievously.

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

ptHui down, down in, further away; cf. tiipglui.
pld-i up, high up, above, on high.

333

5. The verbal suffix -i in some instances alternates with -e, q. v., forms
transitive and intransitive verbs from other verbs, and also occurs in several
compound suffixes, as -Igi, -61i (-vili, -61e), -p6lf (-p'lf), -ui (-wi), etc. We
have to distinguish between —

(a) The -i equivalent to -hi, as in gulf etc.; cf. -hi.

(b) The -i as an abbreviation of -ya, -fya, as in ge'lkai for gelksiya, nt^-i
for ne'ya, shui for shiiya; cf. -aya, -ya.

afshi to secrete; refl. shd-ishi to keep as a secret.

ilwfsi to digest food.

kafli to gird oneself.

kuatchfiki to bite in the hair.

pui to cut in fringes, to fringe.

tchulf and tchulfa to put a shirt on.

A few verbs are inflected simultaneously in -a and in -i, there being a
shade of difference in the signification of the two: hfnua to fall upon some-
thing, hfnui to fall on the ground, soil; gcq^alka and gc^l^algi, vulfna and vulfni,
p(?ksha and pt^kshi, q. v.

Other verbs change their -a to -i in some of the verbals, as ni'ita to burn,
nutl'sh the burning, nuti'sht having been burnt; ma'sha to be sick, etc.

-i'a, -iga, a verbal suffix not to be confounded with -ia, because always
accentuated upon the -i-, which is the particle * used in a personal sense:
for somebody, or in the interest of somebody. It is confined to transitive verbs
only, and alternates with -t^a only when that suffix is appended exception-
ally to transitive verbs. The "somebody" or indirect object pointed at by
-ir is not always made mention of in the senteTice in whicli the verb is used.

elktchnfa to lay down for somebody on one's way; cf t'lktcha.

kinshipkfa to beckon somebody to come; kinshfpka to point at.

nutuyakia to throw for and toward somebody.

334

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGTIAGR

sbapfa, shapfya to inform somebody of; sliapa to tell, aj>prise.

slilanfya to si)read out for somebody.

ahnukfa to seize for somebody; shni'ika to seke.

sliuiiifa, dissim. shuim'a to siuf/for somebody; shufna to sing.

sliiitfa, sluitfya to make for some one; shuta to make.

vutikapkia to stick out the tongue at somebody; cf. vutikApka.

A special class of verbs in -fa are those pointing to doing something in
sight of another to deceive or fooi him, or to indicate an act by gesture.

shakemfa to play treacherously or deceptively; cf shakCma to play.

shatashpapkfa to make the gesture of washing one's face; cf tt'dsha to wash.

shelaktchfa/o indicate throat-cutting by gesture; cf laktcha to cut the throat.

-la, -ya (No. 1), verbal suffix, unaccented, but of the same origin as the
accented -fa, -fya Among the great variety of verbs exhibiting this suffix
the only characteristic which they have in common is that they refer to the
subjec; of tlie verb. These verbs are ti-ansitive as well as intransitive and
are derived from other verbs. One of them, tch(l;Kia, means to place upon the
ground; the adverbial idea upon the ground being expresse(^ by the i of the
radix, and not by the -i- in the suffix -ia.

(«) Intransitives in -ia, -ya:

kimalia to feel pain, to smart.

mahia and smahia to cast a shadow.

mc'kia to he or become a dotard.

nfnia to flap tJie wings.

shlamia to be a mourner.

smukia to take a mouthful.

shnc^ya, tchnc'ya to run straight out.

tcluiya to melt; cf tchcikpa, tchutchdya.

(b) Transitivcs in -ia, -ya:

ahihia, ■.;' \y», to point out, to show.

fliia to pick out, choose, select.

Iguya to pick berries, to shuck-

ndsakia to close up, as an opening.

shatchl;)j}unia to paint one's face or body white.

LIST OF SUFFIXES. 335

tkiiya to rub sUghthj with fingers.

tchilt'ya to (jive, hand over sometlung liquid or soft.

utiltchkia to place a cover upon.

-la (No. 2), a nominal, unaccented suffix which seems to form diminu-
tives and to be an abbreviation of -iaga, -iag, -iak, though only a small
number of bird-names proves its existence.

kuitchia, kuitsia, probably species of grehe.
titi'ikia swallow; Mod. for tftak Kl.
tiiitia young duck.

-lA'na, see -(5na.

-le'gra. see -t'ga,.
-ie'na, see dna.

-i'gra, -tka. llie verbs in -fga, -fka stand in the same relation to those
in -iga, -Ika as the verbs in aga, -uga to those in -ftga, -uga; cf. suffix -aga.
The suffixes -fga, -fga are combinations of the factitive -ga, -ka with -i-,
which is either (1) the locative or (2) the personal particle i, refle.'ting upon
the subject of the verb. In sheshatufka the -f- belongs to a sufTix now form-
ing part of the word-stem; -ka is the real derivational suffix. The verbs in
-fga are formed from other verbs and are transitives as well as intransitives;
cf. -Ifga.

-i- personal:
shawfga to be irate, in a wrath.
shiukfga to kill, as birds etc.; cf shiukfa to kill for somebody.

-i- locative:

Ishiklakufga to frame a shed, lodge by means of rods etc.
shluyakfga to whistle, as a tune,
spatchiga to twist; to ring a door-bell.

-iga, -ika. p^or the origin of the unaccented suffix -iga, see -fga. It
forms transitives and intransitives, often forms compounds with other suf-

386

GRAMMAK OF lUE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

fixes, cf. uhnakptiga; and -ga, -ka gives a factitive signification to the verbs
composed with it.

&n\ga, dnlka to advise one to help oneself to; cf. Ana.

kddshika to tire out, to become tired; cf. kddsha to be unable.

shfnshixa to crowd each other.

skii'-ika to walk backward.

shnukptiga to 'seize with tongs.

utchii-ika to grasp by the handle or long end.

wfdshika to be stingy, avaricious.

-i'ya, see -da, -fa.

-Izi, -e'y i, a compound verbal suffix conveying the idea of local super-
position, location above, and answering to our over, above, on, or over the top
of, resting or iv<uaining above somebody or something, or moving over the
top of some object. The suffix has the penult long through accentuation
and forms transitive and intransitive verbs from other verbs.

etle';ji to lay across and on top of another long object.

heshlf^ji to put or tvear a garment over or on one's shoulders.

huyfki to jump out tipon the shore from the water.

ipene'zi to lay on the top of a receptacle already /Wed

ktiwf;ji to lift or post up above, on the top of

'mbutdpje (for himbutd^e) to jump over a log (hfmboks).

ngangatf^i to play leap-frog.

shiwfzi to increase, become stronger, as winds.

spi';ji to pull, draw out upon something.

telf^i, lukantf;^i to look over something.

xmixi to rise (sun, moon); to go uphill.

winf;ui, Mod. vui;^in to surpass, excel.

-izie'a, see -^ida.
-izia, see -zida.

-i'na, a suffix of transitive and intransitive verbs implying departure,
se|)aration, or removal of the verbal subject or object from the one speak-
ing or from the indirect object. It is a compound of -.a, q. v., and the par-

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

887

ticlo .In on the ground, and points therefore to a motion either along the
ground or downward to the ground. The suffix is frequently used to form
denvatives fron. verbs in -la ( ala) and in -li. -If, although to establish a
suffix -Ifna would hardly be justifiable. Cf. -wfna.

iwfna to place, put down into; cf. fwa,

yiullna to send over the edge, push off from.

kitufna to pour down on, into; cf. kftua to pour on.

nde-ulfna to fall down from ; cf. ndt'-uli.

nelina to scalp, flay; from nl'l, ne'l/«r, animal skin.

nge-ishlfna to make arrows from; ngd-ishla to make arrows.

tpuUna to drive off, oust from; tpulf to drive out.

tulfna to leave behind many objects; cf. tiilha.

vutokelfna to fall down from when hurt, shot, or drunk.

-illHha, a suffix verbifying the verbal indefinite in -sh of verbs in -ina,
-fna exactly in the same manner as -ansha does the verbal of verbs in -na'
-ana, -6na. The functions of both suffixes are the same, except that -insha
gives .ne additional idea of starting away from the water, or prairies, open
places.

guikinsha to start away from water etc.
huikfnsha to run away from the river etc.
hushlfnsha, tilfndsha to leave at home, in the camp.

-ip, see -p.

-i'pa suffix occurring mainly in transitive verbs. It is composed of the
suffix -i as found in the verbs in -fa, and of the verbal suffix -pa intimating
a motion toward the verbal subject. The function of -fpa is to show removal
from somebody or some place toward the one speaking or acting, or sup-
posed to do so.

gahfpa, ga-fpa to catch breath with a grunt.

pudshfpa to pull out.

shulshfpa to take off, as a ring, from one's own finger.

udshfpa, idshfpa, ludshipa to strip, take off from; cf fdsha.

838

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATU LANOUAGK.

-Ipka, -ipka, a siittix diiefly found in intransitive verbs; it conveys
tlie idea of approaching, coming toward, nearing the verbal object, often
the one who speaks or is supposed to speak. It mixy refer to acts or proc-
esses performed at a distance, in close contiguity or vicinity, or on some
person's body. Sometimes, however, the ending -ipka is the result of a
contraction, and then -pka is the 8uffi.x, not -ipka; cf gaka-ipka from gaka-
yipka (Dictionary, p. 33), and shne-fpka to kinik a camp-fire, habitually, which
presupposes a verb sluR'ya. Cf. -pka.

Tiie forms -fpkam, -ip;ueni, etc. and -(pkash, -fp^ash are sometimes
oblique cases of the participles or verbal adjectives of verbs in -i, some-
times of verbs in -a. Cf. -tko, which is the form of their subjective case.

hantchipka to suck out of a person's body.
huntchf[)ka to fly toward.
kfdshipka to have the waterbrash.
liiyipka to take aim at somebody,
paklufpka to bark, honi at from a distance,
shikiidshipka to lean on a support.
tilo'dshipka to see somebody approaching

tfnshipka to rise; said of sun, moon, because they seem to come nearer
after rising; cf. tfnshna.

-ish, -w, -sh. The real function of the suffix -ish, abbreviated -sh,
has been pointed out under the heading of -ash as that of f. nning active or
animate nouns from verbs. This suffix is appended directly to the verbal
basis of verbs in -a, and usually remains unaccented. When the suffix is
accented, -fsh has the vowel long, and in the two following instances at least
is the result of a contraction from -ia«h; it therefore belongs to -ash and not
to -ish:

gukl'sh act of climbing; from gukf to climb up.
nutl'sh, nutish conflagration ; cf ni'ita to hum.
A shortened pronunciation of -ish is that of -fish.

The suffix -ish produces nominal forms whicli may, according to their
signification, be classified as follows:

LIST OF SUFFJXES.

339

1. Verbals descriptive of quality, which are either verbal adjectives or
adjectives, formed from attributive verbs:

pAkish eatable, servkeable as food; from pAka to feed on.
8hiU);cish raw, uncooked; from shanki to be raw.
shk6ntchish pole-Hcckcd; from sk/.Titchna to stick the head out.
vushish coward; from viislia to he afraid.
wawfshish productive of offsprinu; from wafshi to generate.
To these may bo added the adjectives ske'tish left, left-sided; stelapkish
right, right-sided; vuitchfkish, contracted: vi'.ltchiksh dolichoaphalic.

2. Substantive nouns, or names of inanimate objects, which are (1) either
produced by the action of the verb from which they are derived (noniina
actt), or (2) servo as instrument, tool, or n.eans to the one performing the
action of that verb.

huki'sh breath, spirit; from hiika to breathe.

kadish belt, girdle; from kai'li to gird oneself

kflkish hump, giljbositg; from kflka to become humpbacked

l6mt?-ish thunder; from Ifimena it thunders.

liitish round fruit, berry; from liita to hang down.

shk'wish wind, blast; from shlcwi to blow, v. intr.

spuklish sweat-lodge; from spukli to perspire.

shul(')tish garment; from shulota to dress oneself

Since the main function of -ish is an active and personal one, the above
nouns can be regarded as things personified and acting. Indeed in English
we can fitly render kaflish by -girder;^ lutfsh by -hanger-down;^ shlcHvish
by ''blower," and spuklish by ''sweater."

3. Substantives in -ish, called nomina actoris. These nouns desi-^nato
animate beings which perform the act described by the verb more than once
constantly, repeatedly, or habitually. When they are frequentative or usita-
tive nouns they generally stand in the distributive or reduplicated form.

bunuish drinker, bubanuish drunkard; from bunua to drink.

ndiindinkh jnattkr ; from ndona to prattle, speak.

iiti"W?^-^

340

OHAMMAK OK THE KLAMATU LANdUAOK.

pepuildshnish iiMmlfliri/}; from ptK-dslia to throw nimtj.
slit'sliafui.-ii scorc-lr-f.) ,• from Hlu'shatui to .sell.
nhcHhU'Ak'Mh prostitute ,- fri.!:> sliotolxu to consort.
n\i\shnk\tih fighter, bully ; from ahii'ika to beat, whii>.

Besides those are several tonus of zoology in isli, tlio roots of wliich
Inive become obsolete, viz: kd-ish ni'th nak\, iiislitish sucker fish, tcliashish
skunk, tchdlish hedfiehoii, add others.

4. A few alistract nouns end in -ish: hishli'isliii«li «;«/•«///<, from lushli'iahli
warm.

-Ita, see -ta.

-i'ta, accented verbal snftix occurring chiefly in intransitive verbs, and
indicating location away froiu or a motion toward the outside. Tliat func-
tion of its component -ta which indicates distance is perceptible in it

gunfta to ffo or be hei/ond, on the other side of.

kftita to iiurst, explode.

kshfta to escape by running etc. (Mod.).

nitfta to be open, sore, as from a wound.

shnekshfta to save, deliver out of.

tgatlta, tgutfta to stand outdoors,

-ya, see -aya, -ia, -fa.
-ye'ga, see -dga.
-ye'na, see -dna.

-yua. The verbs in -yua are derived from fransitive verbs in -ka,
-ga (-uka), and are used when the action refers to a few objects only. In
the Dictionary a reciprocal function was given to some of them, but this
appears to bo secondary to that of a few.

idiiyua to give kicks to a few; from idnka to kick.

ko-uyua to bite a few, or each other.

ktuyua to hit a few, to hit each other; from ktuka to strike.

stuynsi to stab a few ; ivom stnka, to stab.

udiiyua to whip a few or each other; from \iiduka to brat

LIST OF SUFFIX K8.

341

-k, -Z, -n- Whei»«v<'r gutturnls appear aa fiiuil Bounds of a word, this
i'h very often due to the droppiiicr „f a vowol-Hound at tlu' end of the word
or to the traiisposition of Hoimd within the final 8yllal)le. Tlie various in-
Htancos wliere gutturals figure as fiiuil sounds may be classified as follows:

1. Verbal forms soniotinies drop the doclarative -a, as in gankank,
huslitso';^, shfug, especially in the Klamath Lake dialect.

2. The partictph of the present has the terminal -ank, -ink, -link in the
Klaiiiatli Lake dialect.

:{. Transposition from -ka, -xii, as in tapa;^ W, for t/ij)ka; verb tapka
to stand out, projed.

4. The gutturals are final sounds of a thematic root, as in laklak, adverb
of lakliikli smooth, level.

5. The diminutive nominal suffix -I'lga, -ak, -ag in an abbreviated form.
Instances of this will be seen under -ftga; but we can add ktchftchok little
bat, for ktchftchoaga.

(!. Sometimes the demonstrative pronoun ktl is abbreviated into -k, as
in ik thou, or the verb gi to be, to do, to say into the same sound; of. lapik
there ivere two (of them), ki'itak to tell the truth, etc.

7. Substantives in which the final -k could possibly represent a real
deri- ational or formative suffir ai"e the following:

ktchAk mother-of-pearl shell (nhhre- ne'k, m'g, plur. ne'gsha absent; cf.

viated from ktchiilka). • nfwa, nfukla.

ktchik oar, paddle. stamk tvasp.

kil'k penis ; from keka to pierce. tapsiiGk brain, Kl.

lak hair on head; cf lala.
l;Ui'ik canoe-pole.
Ink grizzly bear,
mi^nkflij.

mulk worm, ma(///ot; cf. mulU rotten
wood

tok, species of plant.
tsuiik, species of plant.
tsi'ik, sj)ecies of grass.
wii'k, wok arm, limb of tree; from w&
to be productive (cf weka child, off-

spring).

-ka, -xa, verbal suffix occurring sometimes also in the shape of -6ka,
-ga. Like -aga and -aga it forms factitive verbs, this term to be taken m its

848

OUAMMAlt OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAOB.

widest, most general Hense, and not to be limited to transitive verbs. From
the otlior verbal factitive surtixes -aga, -I'lKa, the suffix -ka differs only by
having no vowel or syllable between it and the radix; -ka maiidy occurs
in short verbs of two or three syllables and forms usually verbs from other
verbs, rarely from nouns or particles. The power of the suffix ka can best
be defined as directing the action expressed by its radix to a certain object,
or as specializing the action or state. Verbs like those are called by Span-
ish grannnarians rtrlmi apl'-cativos. The origin of our suffix lies in the pro-
nominal radix k-, which appears as kn, kl and ku, some of its derivtives
having been enumerated on page 251.

g«Jka to set out from one's lodge etc.

fshka to extract; cf fdsha to cause to go.

kddshka to remove out of, v. trans.; from kt'dsha.

kilka to became humpharked ; from radix of kiilkali round.

kui;ifa to reco//nize; from kui far of.

li'ipka and tapka to project, as cheekbones.

ni'lka the day dawns; cf nilfwa.

ni\xx& to drive out of an inclosui-e; cf. nfwa.

n/(imka nish it aches, hurts me.

pii'ka to dry out, to make dry, as the throat (Mod.).

pi'ika to roast; cf. pj'iha to dry.

shflftka, shfl^a to fall sick; from shila to he sick.

shlaka to watch, keep guard; cf shU'a to see.

shndkii to burn through; ci nutii to burn.

spuka to put the feet out; cf (ka to put out.

stApka to pound, mash up; from stap stone implement.

sti'ika to shout through the hands ; from sti'i passage.

tllxa to drizzle down; from tila to overflow.

-kakia'miia. Words showing this terminal should be called com-
pound words, for -kakiAnma is not properly a suffix, but a verb, and the first
component is a verbal base or a particle. Only when these compounds are
not used as verbs, but as particles, may -kakiamna be regarded as a suffix.
As a verb, kakiamna, gakiamna means to go around, to encircle, surround (see

LiaT OF hi;ffixk8.

348

Dictionary, p. .33); hence in the words bolow it hiw tiie nense of movim/,
Imirliny, or ijoiuf/ around an object or objoctH, and occurH in transitive and
intranHitive verbs.

ginkukii'iinna (I) to encircle as n hollow hody ; (2) poHtp. all .„.und.

i-ukakiiiinnR, adv. and post])., nrmind, (dwut, in Uui vicinity,

ipckakiiinma to din "'/"''" !l'>i>i!) <dl around.

kuakikakiiimna to ijo around iiero and tiiere while eating, munching.

ntultakukianniii to Jtow around.

Bhalkakiamna to go or climb around an object.

shataHlikakii'inina to pasn around while touching, grasping.

-ka'klia, verbal suffix appended to verbs of motion. It indicates a
movement or swayinjr back and forth, to and fro, and is nothing else but
the verb gakua, kakua to cross over, appended in sutfix form to verbal bases.

iiutnkakua to swing to and fro, referring to the heavy disk on the pen-
duhim.

Btflkakna to send somebody forth and back, e. g., as messenger; of std-
kakuish, Dictionary.

vutokakua to swing to and fro, referring to the long shape of a pendu-
lum, stick etc.

-kaill, -gani is a terminal appended to some adjectives, referring to
an indefinite, uncounted number of objects, and differing from -kni. -kani
is not always a suffix, but sometimes it is the adjectival suffix -ni appended
to bases ending in -ka; therefore the adjectives in -kani are found variously
accented. I'lie adjective yanakani, e. g., some one below, forms a plural
yanakanfni. Others belonging here are kitchkiini (from kftchka), ndsht'-
kaiii, txalampankani, tiimikaui, etc., and some of the numerals. Cf. Dic-
tionary, pp. 116. 117.

-ka'Ilka, or -gdnha is a formative suffix found only in intransitive
verbs or transitive objectless verbs. It points to an act or status undergone
vviiile walking or moving, and thus forms a class of ambulative verbs implying
a single act, or the repetition, contiimance, and steady succession of acts per-
formed while in motion. These verbs describe the various modes of walk-

844

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE,

ing, running, traveling, rolling, etc.; -kAnka is the verbified participle -kank
of tlie verbs in -ka, -ga, q. v.

gdnkanka to be on a hunt; cf. gc'na to go.
killikiinka to speed off; from nkfla to be in a hurry.
16kanka to go astray; cf li'ia to drift about.
ndakalkanka to pick up while walking.
sha-ulankanka to follow constantly.
shniulatchganka to glance off while in motion,
shipalkdnka to go about stinking; from pflui to smell
tilankiinka to move onward by rolling oneself.
vu8h6kanka to go about while afraid of; cf vushish terrified.

-kl, -gi. This is the verb gJ used in its various acceptations of to be,
exist; to do, perform, and closely connected with an adverb or noun preced-
ing it. In most of these words gi could be written as a separate word.
(1) gi ^0 be, exist, occurs in:

kii'gi, kiifki to disappear, be absent; from Hi not.

laki it is stolen, gone, missing; from le, liA, gi.

lushliishki to feel warm; from Mshlush.

p'laiki or p'laf gi to be at the culmination point.

sha'tki to be tired, exhausted.

stAgi to fill, to make full; from sta, adv.

Perhaps ka'ltgi and ta'^tgi belong here also.

(2) gi to do, perform, occurs in : . "

nga'sgi to have the diarrhea; from ngash belly.

nkdkgi to give birth to; from nkak top of head.

It also forms the substantive p'gfshap mother, which I take to have the
literal meaning of "generator."

-ke'dsha, see -kfdsha.
-kla'inim, see -amna.

-ki'dsha, -ke'dsha, or -ggidsha, suffix found only in intransitive verbs
and the causatives formed from them. It indicates a special circular motion.

LIST OF SUFF/XES.

345

tli.^'.t of veering or revolving around a real or assumed center, as we observe
it in the motion of eddies, wheels, sKrigs, or the circling of the birds of prey.
The syllable ki- in -kfdsha appears as a radical syllable in aggddsha and
some other verbs, and in an iterated form in kedshamkedshalkt^a. As fur
its etymology, it represents the verb kfdsha to crawl, as snakes, lizards, to
swim like fish. This verb really means to move sidewise; it is coniposed
of the prefix ki- and the verb fdsha. From a large number of verbs in
-kfdsha we select:

kiuggfdsha to describe circles, to cause to fv/^n.

ktiwalkfdsha v. intr. to veer around; v. trans, to make revolve.

muigfdsha to form eddy.

nakfdsha, naggfdsha to circk, float in the air.

niulgfdsha to whirl around.

shtchukalkfdslra to form a bend or bends turns.

talkfdsha to rotate, gyrate.

tunkidsha to form a circle, as the rings in tree-trunks.

tchishgfdsha to form a tohirlpool, vortex.

wakfdsha to make a complete revolution.

-kie'a, see -x'lda.

-kl'ina, or -ke'ma -ggi'ma forms intransitive verbs only, and points
to something going around oi encircling some round object in a level plane,
as a rim encircles a basket, vase, etc. The syllable ki-, which expresses the
idea of the circle, is the same as in the suffix -kfdsha. In some instances
the verbal suffix -ki'ma also serves for the nominal form, or the word may
be used as a postposition. Cf the suffix -ma.

aggl'ma to encircle, as inanimate things,
gaki'ma, plur. ginki'ma to move around in a circle.
taki'ma to form a ring, to stand in a circle.

tunki'ma (I) to follow the edge, as of a plate, book; (2) postposition,
all around, e. g., along the line of the horizon.

In compound suffixes -kl'ma also occurs in the words l^akl'mitko hav-
ing wavy line.% ktakimula to cut off a round portion. A suffix -ke'mi appears
in gake'mi to describe a turn or bend.

Mli

346

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

-kish, -gish, or, in contracted form, -ksh, -gsh, -ks, is a nominal suffix
torming substantives and adjectives from nouns and from verbs. It is com-
posed of the radix ki, yi of the verb gi to he, exist, and to make, do, perform
and the nominal suffix -sh, -s, and has to be carefully distinguished from an-
other suffix -ksh, -gsh which forms substantives also, but has a different
origin. Cf -kish No. 4 and -ksh. Our suffix -kish appears in the following
functions:

(1) -kish, -gish, in the sense of dwelling at, living in, existing in, is the
verbal indefinite of gi to exist, live. It forms some adjectives and names of
tribes or mmtna gentUicia. In the latter the oblique cases are formed from
-kish, but in the subjective case -kish is usually superseded by -kni. Chiefly
refers to animate beings.

.-iratchiksh old, ancient; inverted from ma'ntch=gi8h.
p'lafkish living above; for the more frequent p'lafkni.
shkfshgish tiunUchug ; lit. "living in the dung."

M6atokgi8h, contr. xMo'dokish inhabitant ' of Modoc Lake, and Modoc
Indian.

Nushaltkagakish dweller at the head-waters (of Lost River).

_ (2) -kLsh, when derived from gi to exist and referring to inanimate
things, IS found in substantives descriptive of the place, area, or locality
where an act is performed or a state undergone. The case-postposition
-kshi, Mod. -gishi, lit. "where it exists, lives", is one of the oblique cases of
-kish. Cf kuish,

Afshishamksh, for AfsliLsham kfsh lodge of Aishish, 96, 23; cf 122 16

hashuakish vegeM,le garden; lit. "sowing place", from hashuA-a.

hunkish slaughtering place; from It'iela to kill.

otflks dam below ivater; from utfla to lie hdow.

palkish dry river bed; from pala to dry up.

pankoksh for pAnkuakish ford; from pdnkua io wade through.

^i6k\s\i gate ; Lorn atii passage.

shudshgish fireplace; from shudsha to build a fire.

shumalkish mouth of river; from shiimalka to empty itself

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

347

(3) -kish when derived from gt, in the sense of to make, do, perform,
forms nouns which indicate that the action of the verb is done by means of
them; that they serve to fulfill the purpose expressed by the verb, though
not being exactly tools or instruments in our sense of the terms. The suffix
fo.- these is -o'tkish, which is a compound of -kish. In some instances -kish
can be rendered by "maker."

buno'kish beverage; lit. "drinking object."

fmnaksh, for i-amnakish neckw-ar ; lit. "thing for wear."

hashpkish/o(^(?cr; lit. " feeding-thing-for."

\6\6k»gh\\ gun, rifle; lit. "fire-maker."

niS-u\»kgh\\ council-meeting ; lit. "decree-maker."

shfpkgish nose-ring; lit. "used for wearing."

ska'kish heirloom ; lit. " thing placed apart."

s^olakgish Kl., sp^ulkish Mod., Indianbed; lit. "thing to lie down upon."

tchunukish vomitive ; lit. " vomit-causer."

(4) There is a number of substantives in -ksh, the origin of which is
not exactly known. In shayuaksh, waltkish, widshikish the ending is not
-kish but -ish, and tiipaks younger sister is abbreviated from tiipakship. The
following may possibly owe their ending to a transposition of sounds:

hfm poks /a/?ett tree, log; cf. hfnui.

knuks thread, string.

tchule'ks meat, flesh; cf. tchilala.

-kla, -akla. This verbal suffix is a combination of -ka, -ga which forn>s
factitive verbs, and -flla, the meaning of which is very indefinite now, though
originally it must have pointed to a downward motion along the body or
other object. Most verbs in -kla are transit! ves and have the emphasis on
the antepenultima.

dmtakla (for omtkala) to carry a baby on one's hack.
hashuiikla to stay in company of.
nflakla (for nilka-ala) to appear, said of daylight,
nfukla to confer through another; from neya to give.

411

mmi ^ir>

348

GHAMMAU OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

shftuakia to tvrestle with.

shlukutakla, spukutakla, stfntakala to carry a child on the back, not tied
to the baby-board.

-kill, nominal suffix forming adjectives and tribal names from nouns
indicative of places, regions, localities, rivers etc., and from adverbs of loc-
ative signification. The suffix can be circumscribed by "living or staying
tiiere, inhabiting that locality, to be found in that locality", and from thi"^
is derived the secondary function of "proceeding, coming, arriving from
there, being a native of tliat spot or country", which we also find in the
Latin ending -anus, the Greek -/of, the German -er. -kni is appended more
frequently to the case-suffixes and case-postpositions of nouns than to their
subjective case, and when the adjectives in -kni occur in their oblique cases
-kni is superseded by the oblique cases of -kish. Tribal names, names in-
dicating citizenship, nomina f/entiUcia, are adjectives in all languages, and so
are they here. A subdivision of the nouns in -kni are thore in -Ikni, q. v.
(1) Formed from nouns and particles:

atikni stranger, alien, foreujner.

giti'ikni cominr/ from, native of a place.

yAnakni inhdnting lowlands or the lower course of a river.

kokagtiilkni coming toward, from, or across the stream.

nclkiuh^enkni living near the dam, luikrish.

tapitankni staging in the rear of

tiigshtakni (for tugsiitalakni or tugshtatkni) coming from or native of the
other side.

Also in three numerals of the cardinal and adverbial series; cf. Nu-
merals.

(2) Formed from local names:
K-iikshikni Indian (or settler) living on Upper Klamath Lake.
Kumbatkni person living in or near the rockg caves.
Lokuashtkni Warm Spring Indian; lit. "Indian of the Hot Springs."
M()atokni (for M.'.atok-kni) Indian living on Moatok Lake: Modoc Indian.
Oreginkni inhabitant qf Oregon State.
Plaikni highlander; uplmttir on Sprague River,
'i'chrtkii nkiii Indian of the servir, -berry tract, for Tchak;Ke'nikni,

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

349

-ks, soe -kisli, ksh.

-ksh, -k., -ffsh, with vowel preceding. A number of words, chiefly
substantives, exhibit this teriiiinal on account of a transposition of soundn,
by whicli the vowel coming after the guttural was placed before this sound.
All of tiiem are derivatives of factitive verbs in -ka, -ga, chi«ay intransitives.
Not to be confounded with - kish, -ksh.

gutaksh (for gutkash) minnow; from guta to adhere.

katagsh (for katkash) chill and adj. cold; katka to be cold.

kulpoksh boilinff heat, and adj hot; kt'lpka to be hot.

m(5poks (for mcpkash) companif; mt'pka to live together.

ahlji'yaks (for shlii-ikash) smoke; shlii'-ika it smokes.

shakpaksh (for shakpkash) plait of males; shakpka to braid one's hair.

-k^' see -ash, -kish.

-kshka, -ksga, verbal suffix composed of the verbal factitive suffix
-ka, -ga appended to the verbal indeHnite suffix -kish, -gish, -ksh It can
be rendered by to come near, to attempt, to do utmost, forms transitive verbs
only, and is of rather frequent occurrence. In its function it approximates
-uya, -huya, q. v.

t'l^akshka to attempt to give a name ; from (il;^ a.

hishlakshka to come near killing each other; from hfshlan.

ktoktakska to crop the hair; cf. ktoktcha.

kuakakshka to tear off only a piece with the U-eth.

shlikska to come near hitting, shooting; from shUn to shoot.

-kta, suffiy Orniing chiefly transitive verbs, compounded of the facti-
tive suffix -aga and -ta, whicli forms api)licative verba and usually refers to
persoTis or long objects standing upright. All tlie verbs in -kta had better
be considered under -ta; some of them are nsliiikta if is sticking, .shitcliakta
fo quarrel, slmuyakta to singe, etc. The verb shnahualpakta to raise an echo
is ; ivorted from shnahualpka-ta.

-klie'la, a suffix forming transitive and intransitive verbs of motion,
vvitij the idea of a downward motion in an obliqiif dinrllmi, in direct contrast
with the verbs in -wala, q. v. The suffix contains the adverb kui or ku, which

^^:

350

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

implies distance, and the verbs in -knela mainly refer to falling or moving
down hill or down stairs. ,

gekuela to go downhill, to descend.
ktekudla to slide downhill.
ktiuku(?la to hick downhill or downstairs.
makudla to encamp on the hill-slope.
nde-ukut^la to fall or roll dotonhill.
shektakut?la to play at sliding downhill.
wetkuola to flow, nm, drip down.

-kllish, -guish, tlie preterital form of the nominal suffix -kish No. 2,
describing place, locality.

mAkhkmsh former camping-place ; from maklak-kuish.

palkuish ancient river-bed; from pala to dry up.

pukuish, abbr. from pukguish former roasting-place ; from piika to roast.

-^'ie'a, -Idea, is the verbal suffix -ixi, -e'^i preceded by one of the vowels
-a- or i- and amplified by the additional suffix -da, -fa. This compound
suffix therefore appears in the forms: -a^ida, -akida, -a;^ia, -a^ia, and -i;fida,
-hvA, -e-i^i, -Ux\ and others; it forms transitive and intransitive verbs, and
points to an act performed on, over, or on the top of refers to a location \hove
another, to a pre-eminence or surpassing in height, position, or other quality.
It also forms the substantive shuntoyakea-o'tkish play-hall.

ktiwio;tfa to post upon, lift, upon something.

ngankatf;^ i (for ngankati,-^ida) to play leap-frog.

shampati^ida to jump over logs.

sheatataliif;iji to tilt or ride at seesaw.

»' -sklip^ida to hop on one foot.

shuk]i;fida to compete, rival in hopping.

slmteWxia to carry on one's shoulder.

shutuyakida to throw at, upon, on the top of

winfa;jia Mod. for w'mixi Kl. to surpass, excel.

-1, suffix found in substantives, especially names of animals; it is prob-
ably the remnant of t longer suffix (-ala, -ala), when it does not form part

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

351

of the root, as in spal ocher, from pala to become dry. We find it as
fouows :

yau;^al white-headed eagle, • cf yauyAwa, yii'ka.
kiitchkal tobacco, lit. 'mixture", from katchaga to mix.
kpdl tail; cf kpA poker.
ske'l mink, Mod. tchkdl ; probably from skflhi to creep into.

Otlier nouns are: k6-il mountain sheep, yamal or kumal pelican, napal
effff, ngn'l jackass-rabbit, taplal loon, tmokil yreen lizard, tclmipal shoulder.

-la, see -&la.

-la'la, suffix forming transitive as well as intransitive verbs, referring
to an act performed at, in, or near the fire. The word lulukshtat in, at the
fire, may be added or omitted, but originally the verbs in -lala referred
to other things also besides fire, and seem to have implied nearness, close
contact only.

galdla to reach the camp-fire, or place in which to pass the night.

hulala to run into the fire.

ilfila to set to the fire, as meat.

kshalala to lie near the fire, or to place near it.

ktululi'ila to push into the fire.

nutolala to throw into the fire.

tchiliila to boil tvarer, or in the water.

wiulAla to strike a hUwj into the fire.

-lali'na, compound verbal suffix implying contiguity or contact and,
as the particle -i- indicates, referring also to a motion dowmvard or on the
ground (hi, \).

galalfna to walk on the water^s edge.

yulalfna to fall over an edge, said of water; to form a beach; also post-
position : along the brink of.

-lalo'na or -lalma, a suffix combined from -lala and -6na, -una which
implies contact or close contiguity, and by the particle -u- refers either to

■-»!»

&' »' ■'

352

GUAMMAK OF TUB KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

distance or elevation above the surface. This suffix, like -hlla, is generally
prece<led by a vowel, and forms transitive and intransitive verbs.

ayulal(5na to drif by the fin; cf awiila.

ilal(')r.i, to have .something around the fire; cf ilAla.

yulal(')na to move forth and tmk, to rub.

kshelaluna to stand along the shore, said of plants.

ktchi'hlaluna to creep around, or totvard.

'mpetlalona to float on the ivater's surface.

shekelal('>na to cover up, fill in, as a hole.

shektliilona to skate.

tilalhaluna to roll soniething over and over.

udumlalona to swim away on the water's surface.

-lam, see -am.

-lailllia, -Idmna, -dlamna, a suffix composed of -Ala and -amna, whidi
form? almost exclusively transitive verbs. It conveys the Idea that the
action of the verb Is performed upon o*- more especially across, all over one's
or another's back. A distinction is made between tiilamna to carry about across
one's back and tudshna to carry on one's back.

aislu'lam'na to secrete about one's back or body.

galam'na to follow behind another.

hashupat'lamna to strap, tie to one's back.

hishpliimna to lead, drag, tow by means of a rope slung over the back.

plligalamna to smear on somebody's back.

sht'polamna to carry on one's back.

shialamna to rub, smear on one's back.

shna-i^liimna to spit all over another's back.

tchalamna to sit tvith the back against something; cf. tchia to sit.

-Iga, see -\xsL.

-Igi, see -Iki.

-li. Together with -ni, -H is the most frequent suffix employed in
forming adjectives. Eut while -nl is appended to the simple root or stem,

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

353

- MS affixed to adjecfveH formed al.no.st exclusively by iterative reduplica-
tion of the root winch invariably ends in a consonant (exception, see p.
262) rh.8 consonant has coalesced with -^ of the suffix in pAIpali white,
wluch thus stands for prUpal-li. The adjectives in -li describe color, sur-
face-quahty ten.perature, or external shape, and the word, when the -li
.s retrend.ed from it, is an adverb. Many color adjectives exist showing
other suffixes, but those in -li are the true and original color adjectives
I he accent usimlly rests on the penult, though it often recedes to the ante-

A .u I n ""'""'''"' '"'"^"'"^ ^^ ^J"*=^'^«« ''^ -1' given on p. 262
we add the following: *

litchlftchli strong, robust, poiverful

lushlushli tvarm (of animal heat).

nijikmii'kli f/rni/.

patpatli smooth, even, level

taktakli, taktii'kli red, scarlet, crimson.

taltali (for tfiltal-li) running straight.

-ll'gra, -lika, verbal suffix forming intransitive verbs, some of which
have passed ,nto the condi.ior. of transitives. This ternu-nal is a compound
of three suffixes: -ala, the locative -i-, and the factitive -ga, -ka, it forms
verbs po.ntmg to a rem<uning on, upon, or riear, especially near the water, on
the beach or shore ; or to an act or notion performed on, upon, or near some-
tlung, especially near, on the brink of the water.

kiulfga, nziulfga to drip or drizzle down, to fall upon.

lahfc;a to stick upon; to he, remain on; to he on the water's edge.

pitlfga to smear, daub on, as pitch.

shatelfka to stick up on one's forehead; cf taika.

tahga to he in contact with ; to he tear the water.

tgalfga, liulfga to stand at the water's edge.

tchalfga, wawali'ga to sit near, at the water, river.

■li'na. see -fna.

-Ika, see -\xa.
23

mi I

354

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LAN(lUA(iI<J,

-Ikl-, -Iffl, verbal Hiiflix compoHed of -alii, -la, and tlio ahl)reviatc'd
-gien. -{fiiingfifi, -kianki for oneself. Verbs Hbowiiig a vowel bef'oro -gioii
were spoken of above, cf. -gien; Home of the verlis belonging hero are as
follows :

galtchudki to go and meet Homeb<»dy.

gul;ualgl to reach the ground when descending, climbing.

gdjji t) pass through oneself.

hushto'lki to heap up, accumulate for oneself.

kltikalgi to haul, fetch, come for something.

shio'lki, shiu'lki, shio'l^i to gather, contracted from sliiulagien.

-Izft) -f^^y -hiC' or -l/^ka, -dlyji is a frequent snftix of verba, transitive as
well as intransitive, tiie former being cbiofly of the objoctlesn class. Many
of them Imvo to be considered as verbs in -ka, -ga, which suffix is appended
to verbs or stems in -ala, -al, -ala; others are in fact verbs in -ualxa, (j. v.
In gatiindpfa to go around something, -1/a stands for -nxa (gatj'imna-ka). The
form -l;ja is more frequent than -Ika and the others above mentioned. The
rather indefinite function of this suffix is to direct the action of the verbal
basis upon a distinct object uj)on the same ground or level, a downward mo-
tion being implied in many instances.

dlp^a, nel;ca etc. to lag down upon, to deposit.

gilx^ to jJJtss over a spot while stepping oh it.

giitalza to pass into, to enter ; cf. guta.

yv\x^ to strike, come down, said of missiles.

kftleka to pour down, a-i rain; cf kitfta.

kpul;(a to drive off; cf puelp^a to throw dotvn.

maklCX'T' fo strike camp for the night.

nibutl;ua to jump or leap down.

ptchiklpfa to caress hy patting.

shemtchal;ja to find out, discover.

shnali'lga to blow noisily against, upon, above, said of the winA

stipale^'i to turn iipside down.

ud8hfkl;ua to fall when stumbling.

IJST OP SUFFIXES.

355

-iHh, -k forms nomina verbalia by means of the ur.i versal nominal huIHx
■sh, .,, from verbs i„ -ftia, -la. which have partially become obsolete. The
wprds belonffuiff here may be classed as well under -sh as under -hdi.

kakiio'lsh parfUah, skin-armor.

luatpishlalsh ,Ualh.kmenl; from luatpishlala U> mouru over

Hhuwalsh nrrow-hvml; from sha-ula to place at the end qf.

sluqi.ialsh warfare, war; from shdllual to make war.

shuii'kalsh sleeve.

tupalsh persimmon; cf. tupesh dotiijh, soft substance.

-m. Substa.,tives in -m preceded by a vowel other than a, it (-am
-lam, -am) are not frequent and seemingly all n.ono.syllabic. This sntHx
8een,H to be the re.nnant of a longer one, a,.d in the case of Uun is a nos-
8ess,ve cas<, (for Iguan,). We add two tern.s in -Jim with difficult etymology.

kiii'my?*A; cf kfdsha to swim, kii'mat hack.

Igum coal, burnt wood; from Igi'i hlnck paint.

pum heaver

npnm female of the ska' -bird.

sh.'m,, su,n mouth; cf. sf mouth, tooth in Californian languages
witii'm black bear.

-ma, suffix occurring frequently in transitive at,d intransitive verbs
and pomtmg either (1) to an act performed or state undergone up.n the
ground or on a level plane, as lying abc:.;, spreading around; or (2) to a
curmhnear^ motion made upon the ground, on the bodv or son>e other
object, or u. the air. This suffix forms many compound s'uffixes, as -ki'ma
-n,aga, -mu shka, -n.'.wa, -n^r-ni, -m.'a, -mla, -m'na, etc. Ma also occurs in
substantives, as m kashma (a plant-species); with -i- inserted in shatchlzAnna
to patnt oneself ivhite.

(I) dma to hand over, as a babe tied to the board,
ke'ltama to let fall, drop upon the ground,
ktuyuma to cut into many pieces.
kuyuma to he muddy.
l(?shma not to discover on the spot where sought for.

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-S)

f/u

1.0 [fi

I.I

11.25

lllliM

2.2

^28

14 llllli.6

;^;>

'^-''C"'^

.m.

LIUIU^Cl(JillC

Sciences
Corporation

33 WEST MAIN STREET

WEBSTER, NY. 14580

(716) 872-4503

/■X

856

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

\ ■ i'i

skdpina to vanquish, conquer.

tchuy6ma to he idle, to lounge about.

uddma, vudama to cover with something thin.

(2) gdma to grind, to crmh, to mash fine.
shil-utama to wrap around oneself.
shuadshamtchma to ivag the tail.
shutel^ma to smear upon one's body.
tchatchakma it is hazg weather. Mod.
tch^raa to fracture, break, as a limb,
tchfptchima to dri:zle down in atoms,
wapfl'ma to wrap, tie, wind around an object.

-lU'na, -mna or -m^na, with another vowel than a- preceding, has
been analyzed under -amna, q. v , and like this, points to the act of coming
or being around, upon, above, of surrounding etc. Cf. also -lamna ; tiieir dis-
tributive form, see p. 273.

hishplS,'mna to drag by means of a string over the shoulder; refl. of

shepolamna.
kpiiyumna to revolm in the mouth, to masticate.

-m^lli, -nCni, suffix composed of -ma and -na, the locative suffi.x -i
being substituted to the -a of -na; -m6ni expresses a winding around some-
thing, and is also met with in the substantive kein'ni vine, creeping plant.

gamgni to wind around, climb by going around, to dodge.
ham^ni to attempt, to try; lit. "to try around."
hunumgni to fly up by turns, ko'shtat upon a pine tree.

The same suffix also composes the verb hushamnitiimna to shrug the
shoulders continually.

-mtch, -mtcha, -mtchi, see -ptchi.

-11 is a suffix occurring in a restricted number of verbs and nouns, all
short and mostly monosyllabic. This suffix -n is preceded by a vowel, and
is probably in most instances the rest of an apocopated -na, ana, -ina etc.

LIST OP SUFFIXES.

357

Nd.in three is abbreviated from ndAni; te'-in recently, from td-ini new, recent;
tapftan, wigAtan and other postpositions in -tan stand for tapftana, wigdtana.
1. Verbs in -« are chiefly intransitives, and lose this suffix in several of
their inflectional forms, like the verbs in -na; cf pA-uk /or eating (from pAn),
shla't! shoot ye! from shifn, a't. See Paradigm below.

ktchdn to masticate.
kApen to cool down.
IzAn to form waves.
pun to eat, feed upon.
p'Ifn to become fat.

shlfn to shoot, wound.

t'shfn to grow up.

ukfdshlin, v. intr. to blow, pass, or

waft through.
vulAn to watch fish at ice-holes,
we'n to freeze.

shnfpglan to make fat.

2. Substantives in -«. A few of the nouns below appear to be parti-
cipial forms, but of the majority the derivation is unknown.

ka'n urine-bladder. tfntan bell, from udfntgna.

ka'nkan, k«?nf kan gray squirrel. vii'n elk, from vu-ik to halloo; lit.

kshiin hay, from kshena.
kAkan a bird-species.
pshfn night-time.

"hallooing (deer)."
wan yelbw or red fox.

-na, a suffix of a more abstract nature than most others in Klamath,
forms nouns and verbs, and as a verbal suffix is very frequent. It is derived
from the same radix as the prefix n-, the verbs n^ya, ndwa, nain^ya etc., all
of which refer to something thin, sheet or string like, or to something ex-
tending along the ground into distance as far as the horizon.

1. -na as a case-suffix expresses direction, and is called by me the suffix
of the transitional case: to, toward, in Die direction of Cf Inflection of
the Substantive. It also serves as a suffix to particles : fna, yAna, miina
tiina, etc. '

2. -na as a nominal suffix is related to the adjectival -ni, and occurs in
the following substantives, some of which have probably been verbs at first:

kldna, species of a root or tuber.

yafna mountain, yaina-aga hill; cf yAna.

I&S;

868

GRAMMAB OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

IStniina ground, bottom, depth.
tchudkSna cotton-tail rabbit.
wakshria moccasin.

3. -na as a verbal suffix is appended only to transitive and intransi-
tive veibs describing or considered to describe motion, and there are many-
instances where the simple form p,nd the form in -na occur simultaneously.
Verbs of motion in which -na is found are those of taking, throwing, giving,
conferring, walking, flying, traveling by water or land, etc., and also those
expressing motion of the air produced by sound, as calling, liearing, thun-
dering. This suffix also composes a large number of other suffixes, as
-kna, -t<ana (-tna), -tchna.

In many instances the function of -na is to point to a distance, or to a
short distance, away from the subject of the sentence or from the one speak-
ing. This will appear from the following examples:

herata to call somebody, h(?mtana to call somebody to come.

hiita to rush at, hiitna to rush some distance at somebody.

kputcha to expel, oust, kpiitchna to spurt from mouth.

ywa to play, lt?-una to play at soms distance.

ki^dsha to grow, kddshna to grow on, to continue to grow.

k'leka to die, expire, k'l»5kna to he moribund.

nde-uli to fall or roll on tlic ground, nde-ulina to fall, roll a short distance.

wdlka to produce a blaze, wdlkana to blaze up.

There are many other parallel forms of this sort to be found in the
Dictionary :

hunta and hiintna to fly. vut6dsha and vutc'idshna to reject.

ika and Ikna to extract. wfudsha and wfudshna to beat.

Ifwa and Ifuna to assemble.

Other verbs in -na occur only in the suffixed form, because with them
the object of the verbal motion is always removed at some distance, large
or small, from its subject, or the subject is supposed to be in progress from
place to place, as in l6mdna it thunders.

genana to travel uninterruptedly.

huntchna to fly or soar in a straight line.

LIST OF SUFFIXES. 359

yrisliakna to use the index-finger (yushzish).
kuenu to make or leave footprints.
Ipfiiwana to move the fingers, toes.
pana to plunge under the water.
shewdna to give, hand over,
a^ihhna to put fingers forward ,- cf. spdluish.
8tut;ifna to emit sound or voice, stiitp^ish.
wak^na to change the voice at maturity.

Many verbs in -na lose this suffix in the distributive form ; cf. p. 273.

-nl, nominal suffix related to -na, and especially frequent in adjectives
and numerals.

1. Among adjectives those in -ni ar? among the most frequent, and de-
scribe qualities of an abstract or imnmterial sort, while those in -li are of
the concrete order. This suffix is almost invariably preceded by a vowel,
and in the oblique cases changes to or adds -^nash, -a'nash, -yii'nash etc., as
will be seen in the c^ apter "Adjective." When the suffix -ni is retrenched,
the stem or radix remaining is usually, not always, the adverb. Cf. Suffix
-tani.

kd-uni slow, easy; adv. kd-una and kd-uni.

kinkani/ew, scarce; adv. kinka, ginka.

komil'shni runaway, wild.

letalani mischievous, vicious; cf tdla straight.

lupfni y?rs^ in rank or age; adv. lupf.

miini great, large, bulky; adv. mii'.

stani full, replete of; adv. stA.

tapfni coming next, subsequent; adv. tapi.

2. Certain substantives can be transformed into a sort of adjectives by
the affixation of -ni, in the distributive form -nfni, with the definition of:
''all that sort of, all that refers to or is connected with him, her, it, them." Thus
wewanuish women forms wt^wansni women and all, women and their families;
niAklaksni Indians and all connected with them. Tataksni children occurs in

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

that form only; obj. case tatdkiash. The adjective ydnakani hwer forms a
distributive yanakanfni. Example:

ndpni nd shlfn / was shot in tlte hand.

nepnfni nu shlin / was shot in my hand or hands at more than one spot.
nepnfni nd shlfshlaa / was shot in my hand or hands at different places by
several shots.

3. In the nutnerals there is a series in -ni corresponding to our adverbial
numerals, and another giving the series of cardinals in the non-apocopated
form. Ex. viinepni five and five times. More about this see under "Nu-
merals" and suffix -kni.

-nl'ill, see -ni.

-nsh, -ntch, see -tch.

-O, see -u.

-Odshlia, see -utchp*.

-Ol'zl, -uixi, a compound suffix approaching nearest in signification
and origin to -wi;ca, q. v.; but it differs from it by pointing to something
being turned up or inside out. The particles composing this suffix, even the
final -i, are all of a locative character. Cf. -Ixl

nd8hind8hof;fi to turn up, as a hat's brim.

plet6-ixi to purse up the lips.

tchlit6izi to turn inside out, as sleeves, the eyelid etc.

-ok, see -liga.

-O'la, -ula, originally -liala, -wdla, a verbal suffix emphasized upon
the penult, which is long by contraction of the u-, hu-, pointing to distance,
with a- of the suffix -ala. It can be appended to the majority of verbs in
Klamath, and generally points to discontinuance. No verbs in -61a, except
perhaps kap61a to doff one's coat, are verba denominativa.

(1) -ola, -ula implies cessation or termination of the act, condition, or
state expressed by the verbal basis. Tliey are so easily formed that dic-
tionaries need not mention all of them.

LIST OP SUPF'IXBS.

361

biinua to drink, bundin to cease, stop drinking.
hushiikia to lock, hushaki^la to unlock.
kto'dsha it rains, ktod8hi61a the rain is over.
wftcha to blow, witch61a to cease blowing.

(2) -dla often imparts to the verb the idea of taking oflF, depriving, de-
parture or abandonment; and in consequence these derivatives often mean
just the contrary of the simple verbs. Thus -61a often corresponds to our
MM- in unyoke, to dis- in dismount, or to the particle o^.

gel61a to dismount from horse, wason etc.
ill61a to take off a load, to unload.
ktchikayula to cotne out of the woods.
shatakndla to remove from the mouth.
tchel('>;a, Kl ktchel61a to husk, to peel.
wit;if n61a to blow out from mouth.

(3) A third class of verbs in -dla embodies the notion: on the surface,
on top of and will be discussed under -wala, q. v., of which -61a is the con-
tracted form.

-O'U, -die, -uli, a verbal suffix formed like -61a, with the penult long and
with substitution of the locative -i (-hi) to the ground for -a. It occurs only
in verbs of motion and imparts to them the idea of downward, downhill. Thus
kuk61e to undress possesses the literal meaning "to let the k(i'k8=gown fall
to the ground."

histanuli to cause to go down.

nd<5-uli, wet61i to fall, slide down on the ground.

shanaho'li to wish, desire, want.

shutdli (and shutiila) to unloose, to unfetter.

tel61i, teliili to look down upon.

tin61i, tiniile to run or go downward.

tp^kule to stoop, to bend one's body.

-opka, -upka, verbal suffix, in which the long vowel 0, u is the result
of a synizesis of ««-, wa-. This long vowel is sometimes accented, sometimes
not; the verbs from which the derivatives in -opka are formed are of a dif-

362

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

ferent character, and so the sufHx itself of the derivatives assumes different
meanings.

1. Desiderative verbs in -opka formed from the original form of the future
tense, -u^pka:

pano'pka nflsh / want to eat; from pAn to eat.

shla'popka to observe, lit. "to want to see"; from shlda to see.

2. Derivatives in -opka pointing to distance or height above the ground;
derived from verbs in -ua, -wa or from nouns in -o, -u .•

kapo'pka to put another's (absent) coat on; from kdpo.
Kupka to sit in a circle or crowd; from Ifwa.
n<5-upka to di.srharge itself into a lake; from n^wa.
shnekiipka to be lit up above; from shn^ka.

3. Usitative and iterative verbs in -opka, -upka have their -o-, -u- short;
see -pka.

-Osh, -ush (vowel long), a nominal suffix formed by synizesis from
-uash, -wash. It forms derivatives of verbs in -ua, -wa, which are either
adjectives or substantives In ht^shkush game-stake, u is short, because de-
rived from ht'shku to bet.

heshtchilsh decoy, snare.
kilosh, nkflus angry, audacious ; subst. fighter.
lald-ush and lain wash slate-rock.
Idlosh for lel^wash, d. of lewasli ball, globe.
Ik61k6sh, Mod. hlekohldkosh flank of quadrupeds.
ndkosh, nakush dam; from ndkua.
nta.-vChtmh pulsation of heart; from nta-u'htua.
skaukush, ska-ukosh species of woodpecker.

ukaiikosh moon in all phases; for uka-ukawash, this from ukdwa to break
into pieces.

-O'ta, see -uta.

-O'tkish, -utkish, nominal suffix extensively used in nouns, with penult
long, and in the conversational style often contracted into -o'tch, -u'tch.

' «!

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

363

-atch Tliis suffix is a compound of the durative suffix -I'lta, -6ta and of
-kisli, -gish, q. v. (-otch occurs also as a contraction of -uish.)

1. In personal names, -6tkish forms nomina adoris, describing the ha-
bitual employment or every-day occupation of persons. The component
-kish can be rendered here by maker, from gi to do, perform.

8hakl6tkish player, gamester, gambler.

shashp^citkish beggar.

shiltecStkish player in a throwing game.

2. In names of inanimate things, -^tkish forms nomina insfrumenti de-
scriptive of tools, instruments, as things used repeatedly, habitually, cus-
tomarily. The component -kish is here -kish No. 3, q. v.

hu8hmokl(')tki8h razor; beard-pincers.
kshuli'itkish, Kl. mulin6tki8h scythe.
pienutkish, contr. pieniiatch scraping-paddle.
shumal^tkish, contr. shiimaluatch pen, pencil etc.
shutoydtkish, Kl. sputoycStkish plow.

-Otch, see -6tkish, -uish.

-p, a suffix marking inalienable property, which now occurs in sub-
stantives only, but at an early period of the language may have been a
possessive pronoun, his, her, its, llieirs, or somebody's, for it is evidently related
to pi, p'na, p'nalam, pat, pish, pash, and to the prefix p-.

1. Terms of relationship in -p, usually -ap, -ip. They mark relationship
by kin and by marriage; and here we find also the prefix p- in extensive use
in the ascending and in the descending line. In the oblique cases and in
forming compounds and derivatives the terms in -ap, -ip lose these terminals:
ptfsh=lfllsh deceased father, for pt(shap=luli8h; shiptchzalaltko related to each
other as brothers- or sisters-in-law, from ptchfkap sister-in-law. Distributive
plurals are formed from -p by substituting -ishap to it, and a few of these
terms possess another distributive form created by reduplication :

mak^kap, d. makdkishap and mamk/Aap sister's son or daughter, said

by aunt,
pgfshap, d. pgfshishap mother,- pgish lulatko bereaved of the mother.

WB '

' f I

■ t

364

GttAMMAH OF THK KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

ptAlip, d. ptillishjip elder sister; said by younger Hister.
ptdwip, d. ptdwislmp and ptopt(!'wip snu's son or ilaiu/hter, said by grand-
mother; and (frandmother, said by son's son or daughter,
skuksap mother whose children are all alirr.
tiipakship, abbr. tiipaksh, d. tutpaksh younger sister. Cf. p. 275.

2. There are a few other generic terms in -p in use to designate persons
as "belonging to somebody":

ptchfwip master, mistress of slave.

shftchlip yhcm// from shftchhi to associate with.

S. Some parts or limbs of the body, liuman or animal, show this propri-
etary suffix -p; here it is not dropped from the words when oblique cases
or compounds are formed : liilp eye; ndp hand, cf neya to yive; pflhap sinew,
ligament; shuakAp omoplate; also ki'ip in kapki'ipo wristbone; t^cip in t;^6po
thumb.

4. Other terms in -p, some probably formed through apocope, are as
follows: k'p bran; pii'p marten; szl'p a bird-species; stAp stone implement;
tkAvt plant with upright stalk; cf. t^^po thumb.

-pa, verbal suffix pointing to an act directed toward the subject of the
verb. It is related to the pronoun of the third person pi, pish, pat. Other
suffixes are composed with it, as -ipa and -tpa, q. v.; in the latter the above
function of -pa becomes still more apparent.

hl6pa to lap, draw into the mouth.

ktdtspa to tear or cut particles from the rim.

ndupa to smell something; to be rotten.

shniikpa to take to oneself; cf. shnuka to seize.

tch6kpa to drip down, said of water, snow, ice.

The meaning toward oneself is not so plainly marked in verbs like
kshdpa, ntuptpa, ndshfptchpa, shdpa, shninshaptchpa and udiipkpa; cf. -tpa.
In hdshpa to feed, -pa, from pdn to eat, represents the radix.

-pali, see -p6li.

-pa'ta, verbal suffix marking contact and occurring in the verbs of
touching, reaching up to, pushing etc. Being composed with the stiffix -ta,

LIST OP BUFFI XR8,

365

q. v., it refers to long objecta, as cnnoes, poles, iwrsons, hands, etc., these
beinj,' either the olijocts touched or the objects through which other objects
are touched, pushed etc.

kiipatii to touch ; skapiita to touch oneself.

kiupjita, 8;caprita to land, itisembark.

kshapata to lean against.

Ikapilta, ndakalpata to make surf.

stapdta to stand against something.

tapAta fo hold something by means of an intervening substance.

tchapi'ita to reach the shore, Mod.

-patch, see -ptchi.

-pell', -p'le, or -pH, -bli, various forms of one and the same verbal suffix,
whose original a re appears after/) in several inflectional forms: suko'lkipa-
luk in order to re-assemble. This suffix n)ark8 return, repetition, re-instatement
in all kinds of verbs, and can often be rendered by the English preposition
re-; its primary meaning was that of replacing into the former condition or
location. When appended to verbs in -na, -p6li becomes -mpfili by assimi-
lation : wdmpeli to recover one's health.

1. Verbs in -2)Sli denoting motion in zigzag lines or voltas, thus impress-
ing one's vision with the idea of return to an earlier position or place :

gutilapkApgli to make turns while descending.

hulipgli to run into or through a tortuous road or valley, canon.

huf^ipele to run, jump out of again.

Iu')p6li- in h6p6litchna to dodge.

yutAlpgli to twist, as paper, cloth etc.

2. Verbs in -pSli denoting re-instatement often express the ideaof taking
or going home, doing a thing again etc. :

dmpgli to take or bring home ; from t^na to bring.
gdmpgle to return home, to one's camp ; from gi'na to go.
gutgapgli to climb down; from guka to climb up.

• !

30(5 (JUAMMAU OF TIIK KLAMATH LAN(JUAGB.

haHhpi'izpfili to roA oneself drfi; from HpiiJm.

kiHbli to retire to the. (kn; from kfllii to enter.

kiikpfili U) put on the ktiks-f/own, m dono every morning.

na'hHpOli to strinc) the how, oven when not strung before.

n«5pftli to turn over, upside down.

waltJikpeli to debate, to talk over and over.

-l>ka. The verbs in -pkiv preceded by a consonant, a few verbs in
-fpka, and those ending in -opka, -upka (o and u short) wlien i, o, u belong
. to the stem of the word, are :

(I) Iterative verbs, and have the penuUimate accented. They are
formed fronj transitive as well as from intransitive verbs, and some of their
number are usitative^, indicating habitual practice. A compound suffix
-ampka is made from verbs in -ana, -ana; -j'lnkpka is made from verbs in
-anka; another, -alpka, q. v , from verbs in -Ala, and here the accent some-
times recedes further. The suffixes -alpka, -,'ipka, -fpka, -opka, -uApka
were spoken of separately.

ktupka to strike repeatedly with clasped hand.

Idklokpka to whisper.

makpka to encamp many niyhts away from home.

sha-amokpka to call somebody of one's kin.

shahuAlpka to send the echo back, to form echo.

shii'tupka to consort tvith, cohabit.

shuktiipka to push repeatedly.

vudiipka, udupka to strike repeatedly with a stick etc.

wiitchpka to win all the stakes.

(2) Other verbs in -pka, with consonant preceding, point to distance,
and belong to the class of -Apka, -fpka, q. v. For instance: skulpka,
shuflpka, telitAnkpka, telshAkpka, tiipka.

-p'l, -p% see p6li.

-p'na, -p^a, -pna, suffix appended to verbs of motion and marking
contact, approach or going past, passing beyond some object; is composed

LIST OK 8UFF1XK8.

367

tl»« tw.) Hulfixos -pa and -na. TIumi- <liHtril)utivo form in mado after tbo lulo
pointed out p. 273. Cf. -na.

Kiitpna to go, come mar; giitpimnk itnssinij hy.
luitiipfina to run near, to rush past. '

kinyiUp'iia to form an ant/lr; alno Hiibst. angle.
ktiitpna to bring near or to somebody.

-ptchl, -tchi, -tch, -mtehi, -mtch in a nominal Hiiffix forminjr adjectivos
from HiihHtantives, pronounH, and adjectives, with tlie Hi^rnitication of /Mr, look-
ing like, resembling. Thi« huIKx of comparison forms adjecti ves of a concrete,
palpable signification, while those formed with shftko, Mod. shutka, nreof ati
abstract meaning. Through phonetic fusion of the word and the suHix the
labial of the latter is often altered and the last vowel dropped, and ui the
oblique cases we have -ptcha, -tcha, -mtcha; in shfpatch adapted to, inversion
takes place for shf ptchi. Ptchi seems to have been once a term for body or
.face; it shows the prefix p- and seems related to pshfsh nose, pfchakixa to
pat, caress. Some nouns in -sh lose, some preserve this suffix, when they
assume the suffix -ptchi.

1. Derived from pronouns and adjectives:
haktchamptchi one who looks or behaves that way.
hiimtchi such-like, one of that kind; for lul'n=ptchi.
k^-idshiptchi ungainly, hateful.

shuhiinkptchi similar to, of same shape.
tfdshiptchi pretty good, laudable.
wakaptchi how shaped, how formed.

2. Derived from substantives :
Afshishtchi Aishish-like, beautiful.
ydmnashptchi bead-like, of blue color.
krt-eptchi toad-like, looking like a toad.

tulaluptchi light green, looking like a swamp-grass mantle.
vunshAkaptchi long and hollow-shaped, lit. "small-canoe-like."

-sh, -s, is the regular and most common nominal suffix, the substantive-
forming suffix par excellence. Through it a large number of roots and bases

368

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

aar.ume nominal functions. It occurs in the great majority of substantives
in their subjective case, forms the objective cases of the generic terms for
persons and proper names of persons, of the names for the higher animals,
of adjectives, numerals, and pronoun ., and composes several of the verbals.
In all these forms it is preceded by a vowel, generally a, though this is
frequently elided. It composes the majority of Jie nominal suffixes, as
-ash, -ish, -kish, -Ish, -6'sh, -6tkish, -uash, -uish, etc. The final -s is more
archaic than -sh, and is chiefly used in the conversational form of language.

1. The verbal indefinite and verbal conditional are formed by adding -sk,
-sht to the full form of the verb, though phonetic laws sometimes effect
changes and inveraions of sounds.

kA-ika to act "xtravaganily ; ka-ikash "the extravagant acting"; also,

"one who acts extravagantly."
shdllual to make war; ge-u shdllualsh "the making war of mine", mi)

warfare.

Only the syntax can convey a full understanding of all the meanings
of these and oil-^r verbals. Cf -ash (Note).

2. Adjectives in -sh, -s are those in -ish, a few in -ash (p6pamkash liairy),
the numeral na'dsii, then kelpoksh hot, katagsh cold.

3. Substantives in -sh, -s. Terms where this suffix is joined to the radix
without any intervening sound, or where the quantity of the radical syllable
points to a contraction of some kind, are mostly monosylkbles.

(a.) Parts of the human and animal bodij:
k6Iansh knee, nfsh neck, nkash belly, nil'sh head, pfsh gall, pshi'sl; nose.

(b.) Other objects of a concrete signification :
^-ush lake (from owa), hdshkush game-stake, ko'sh pint tree, kulsh hadger,

la'sh wing, lo's a goose-species, we'sh ice (from wdn).

In a few terms -sh alternates with -tch, as in kf-insh, kf-intch tfcllow
jacket-wasp; b-t this change has to be ascribed to phonetic corruption; cf
suffix -tcL.

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

369

-sa, see -sha.

-Sha, -sa, a suffix forming almost exclusively transitive verbs from
other verbs. They refer to acts performed with one's own body or upon
ones own body, or parts of it, some of them being iteratives, as kpudsho'-
sha u.dg8a. Some analogy exists between the suffix -sha and the medial
prefix sh-, and m a number of terms both affixes are found simultaneously •
-Sha IS some-imes heard as -tcha through faulty pronunciation.

gdnasha to follow or to go pell-mell ; cf g^na.

ham6asha to shout at somebody.

hushAsha to threaten with a blow.

kpApsa to taste, degustate.

kpudsho'sha to suck at.

ndflsha to knock, produce a thud.

shatz^sha to put paint on body, face.
^ shdgsha to inform, report, apprise; cf sh(^ka
* shldpgsha (and tchldpeshi, tchldpshi) to cover with ashes.
uldgsa to lick, lap, lap up.

A few intransitive verbs in -sha are as follows :
kmutcho'sha to bubble up in water.
shiiisha to become lean, tneager.

-Shka, -ska, suffix forming transitive and a very limited number of
ntransitivo verbs from other ve'-bs by imparting to tiiem the idea of de-
parture, separation, divergence, or removal. When removal is expressed
It IS usually a sudden removal by the hand.

guhudshka to depart, leave, quit; of giishka

hushka to run or swim away.

inuhuashka to prevent, keep away from.

ktiishka to cut out from, to cut through.

ntchama'shka to ivipe off.

skfnuashka ,<o creep away from.

szowdshka co keep away from the shore.

shuihUshka to shake off from one's body.
24 -^

$■-''> it

370

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE,

-Sza. This verbal suffix, sometimes pronounced -shxa, is usually ap-
pended to verbs ending in -na, -ta, -dsha or -tcha, and tlierefore has a con-
sonant before it (excepted t(')sza, tusxa to shove, introduce into) which is pre-
ceded by a short vowel. This suffix conveys the idea either (1) of close
proximity, and then answers to our near to, through, between; or (2) that of
superposition, and then corresponds to over, upon, on the top of. Cf -tchka.

(1.) hutamsza to run, rush, jump between; from hutna.
i-utdms^a to be among, bettveen; postpos. between.
ntilltchzantcha to flow ihrough or between,
tiihxa to see, look through a tube,
tgfts^a to stand near or between.

(2.) hfns/a to fall upon or near something.

ids^a to deposit long objects on the top of; from fta.

shlt'ds;^a to spread a sheet-like object over; from shldta.

tilans^a to roll upon or to move the hand over something. ,

"ShlR. The verbs ending in -shla are, ihe majority of them at least,
derived from nouns in -sh, and therefore belong to the verbs in -la, -fila, q. v.
Of these verba denominativa we have given examples under -ala No. 2, p. bl.'i.

-t frequently terminates words, especially when preceded by a vowel.
Final -t is an inflectional ending or part of such, and often appears in an
apocopated form in the following two kinds of suffixes:

1. Verbal conditional mode in -t: shnukat, from shnuka to grasp; pat,
from pan (for panat) to eat; fdshant, from idshna to carry off etc. Cf Verbal
Inflection.

2. Suffix -t, aj^ocopated from -tat, -ta, -ti, -tu, is frequently met with,
especially in the oblique cases of adjectives, numerals, and of pre and post
positions; cf. Nominal Inflection and suffix -ta.

kailant, kiiflat for kiiilant", kiiflatat on or in the ground.

h'lpkshapt for liipkshapta(ni) seven.

nagshtant, tiigshtant for luigshtanta, tiigslitanta.

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

371

3. -t appears as a derivational suffix in a few substantives, though in
monosyllables we are uncertain whether it forms part of the radix or not
(kii't, tilt):

gilit, kilft hole, fissure, anus.
kgnawat horse-sorrel.
kna't rocky, dry land.
ka't, sort oi flour.

ndwisht remains.

Sa't, Sha't Snake Indian.

tiit, d. tiitat tooth.

tchku't, species of hitter cabbage.

Tlie points of the compass, as yaraat north, liipit, miiat, t^Alamt are
abbreviated forms from ydmatala etc.

4. There are a few particles ending in -t, as—

at. At at the time, then; gdnt thereabout; humasht thus; mb.'ishant to mor-
row; pa'dshit today; pa'ktgisht ajler daylight; pshe'ksht, pshfksht
(and pshe'ksh) at noon-time.

The two last-mentioned cleariy bear the stamp of verbal inflectional
forms. Cf also the postpositions ending in -ant.

-ta, a suffix chiefly occurring in transitive verbs, also in a few nouns
which probably were verbs before. Tl,e function of -ta is that of forming
applicative verbs analogous to -ka, but diff-ering from this by referring more
exclusively, like the prefix ta-, to persons and to erect objects of an elon-
gated form. Originally, ta is a radix of demonstrative signification, which
still appears in tata at that time, tank tJien, and in pronouns -t refers to ani-
mates and inanimates as being at a distance: hii't, hil'kt, lu'ikta, hiVnkt, etc.
There are, however, some verbs in which a reference to tall, erect, or dis-
tant things as direct or indirect objects are no longer to be detected Com-
poses sever,-^l suffixes, as -alta, -ita, -tchta and -kta (from verbs in -dga), and
others, all of which we treat here under the one heading of -ta.

1. Verbs in ta; a person is the direct or indirect object:

hdmta to speak, fell to; from ha'ma to emit sound

hishkfta to give a false report to; from kfya to lie.

yiita to shoot at (plurality of objects).

match^ta to listen attentively to.

shea^ta to pay of, distribute to; cf slu^tu to count

Ilr

372" GBAMMAB OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

skijkta to reward, repay to.

shli^ta to show, exhibit to; from shlda to see.

tchfmta to have eruptions on skin.

wdtanta to laugh at, deride; from wdta to laugh.

2. Verbs in -ta; the direct or indirect object is inanimate and standing
upright. Some verbs refer equally to persons and things, as g^miA, giita,
huta, niita:

hiita to run, rush up to.

kd-ishta to shut the door-flap or door.

rapilkta to break upon, on something.

nuta to burn, v. intr., originally referring to long objects, sticks, etc.

pdlta to put the tongue out.

petchta to touch with tJiefeet; p6tc}ifoot.

shldkta to saw a log crosswise.

shhipshta to close, clinch the hand.

shmukillta to wet, moisten (persons or things).

shnikfta to lose, let fall, as from one's pocket.

wuki'tchta to strike the flint for sparks.

3. Verbs in -ta, in which a reference to persons or long objects is no
longer traceable with distinctness:

shiitakta to make a screen of sticks for camp fire.

shiita to make, produce, create.

wafta, waita to lie over one dag and one night.

4. Nouns in -ta of uncertain origin:

kiilta otter; cf kil'lsh badger, gulf to creep into.
B&kta peg, awl, nail.

-ta'ki-, -tdkia, see -tki No. 2.
-ta'kna, see -tka No. 5.

-tRknu'la', contr. -tknula, -txnola, is a compound verbal suffix, the
elements of which are -tka No. 5 (q. v.), -n- (or suffix -na) and -lila, -61a. It
expresses removal from the mouth.

LIST OP SUFFIXES.

373

l;uet'kni'ila to hang down from the mouth.
shatakniila to remove from one's mouth.
shlewitakniila to blow breath from one^s mouth.
tilutakruila to see somebody spitting, removing from mouth.
witzn6Ia (for wit'takniila) to blow out from mouth.

-ta'ktana, see -tka No. 6.

-ta'kua, see -tka No. 5.

-ta'inna, -tamna, suffix forming iterative verbs, transitive and intrans-
itive, which imply not repetition only, but also continuance, persistence, and
steadiness of action. This suffix differs from -alsha, -ftla (-la; cf -shla), which
form similar verbs, and from -kanka, which is appended exclusively to verbs
of locomotion, as going, coming etc., by marking acts performed steadily,
successively, or repeatedly, while locomotion of the subject is not necessa-
rily implied. In verbal form -tdrana reappears in the verb tdrngnfi to travel,
in which -«J points to distance.

hiihil' tamna to continue slwuting hdhd.

hushtrktamna to dream every night ; from hushtf;Ka.

shetaltdtamna to look down steadily ,- from shetaltfla.

shUtamna to hit every time,- from shlfn.

shuetchantiimna to go gatnbling every time ; from shudtchna.

tdshnnikmnn to look at persistently ; from tt'lshna.

-ta'mpka, verbal suffix involving the idea of beginning or com-
mencement, and forming inceptive or inchoative verbs. It differs from -dga,
-iuga, -ii'ga by being more frequently appended to transitive than to intran-
sitive verbs, and by being used oftener by Modocs than by Klamath Lakes,
who prefer -c'ga. Some verbs show both endings, while others, like shuim-
l)atampka to lean on the back of chair, are in foct not verbs in -timpka, but in
-ampka, q. v.; compare shuimpata to recline.

hemkanktdmpka to commence talking, discussing.

yuteti'impka to begin shooting.

patampka to commence eating.

shuktdmpka to begin <'• f.ght.

tchutche-itdmpka (and tchutcheyt'ga) to begin to melt.

'4 I

1^1

n I

: . p

374

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

-tana, pronounced at times -tna, -tdnna, is a compound suffix used
for inflection in nouns and postpositions and for derivation in verbs. In
both it signifies alongsidr of, on the side of, hy, beside, along, and is a compound
of -ta and -na, q. v. Generally the accent does not rest upon it.

1. Verbhl suffix -tana, forming transitive and intransitive verbs from
other verbs:

hes^dtana to become riisty the whole length,
hlihintana to roll toward, to the side of.
p(51zatana to lick from end to end.
piupiutana to pick all along a tree etc.
shikdntana to .show something on one's body, side.
shok6tana to bite onus tongue, lip etc.
ulokdtana to rub up and down.

2. Nominal suffix -tana; forms a case-postposition, though not every
noun can take it. Cf Inflection of Substantive, Adjective, Pronoun; also
the chapter on Postpositions, where this suffix is in extensive use.

-taill, a suffix of adjectives, which is formed from -tana, a case-post-
position, q. v. It occurs in a few adjectives only; in the numerals for six,
seven, eight it is abbreviated from -tankni.

kanftani being on the outside of; adv. kanftana.
h'lpkshaptani seven.

nagshtani what is on one side only ; one of two.
p'laftani who, what is above, on high; adv. p'laftana.

-ta'niia, see -tana.

-tgi, see -tki.

-ti, a verbal and nominal suffix with an originally locative significa-
tion, the ending -i pointing to something lying upon, on some object, or
upon the ground. In nouns, -ti is either inflectional or derivational.

1. Nominal inflectional suffix -ti serves as a case-suffix in generic terms
for animate and inanimate objects (partitive case), and in the inflection of
the verbal indefinite. Details will be found below.

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

375

2. Nominal derivational suffix -ti. When used as a derivational suffix -ti
indicates substance, quality, material, or locality ; this also ' jlongs to its
functions when a case-suffix, and make of it a genetive (yevtHiy) suffix. In
the oblique cases the case-terminals are then appended to the subjective
case in -ti.

kjlf lanti ground-snake ; from kiifla ground.

pok6ti kettle-metal, sheet-iron; from p(')ko bucket.

Wi'iti thorn, spine; straight knife; from wa to grow upon.

watiti metal ; lit. "knife-substance."

wfkam=wAti, abbr. wfkamua glass.

3. Verbal derivational suffix -ti; it is apocopated sometimes from -tia;
cf. kpdtia to poke in the fire.

yankiipshti and yankapshtia to place into an opening.
kmakapshti to put a stick into an orifice.
nda-iti (and ndaftia) nilsh / feel cold.

-ti'la, compound verbal suffix occurring chiefly in intransitive verbs,
and involving the idea of under, beneath, below. The verbs in -tfla express a
staying, remaining below or under, or a placing or an act performed below,
underneath, while those in -kudla point to a downward motion. Several of
the intransitive verbs in -tfla are used also as postpositions. The verb
l)etfla to act as midwife contains the base pet'a to disrupt, with a suffix -ila.

gutfla to go underneath, to take shelter.

i-utfla, yutfla to be or lie underneath; also postposition.

kshutfla to exist below, to lie in the shadow of.

liutfla to be croioded underneath.

puetfla to put, throiv under something.

shikantila to show something on one^sfeet, as moccasins etc.

witfla to bloiv underneath.

-tl'ta, verbal suffix referring to an act performed outside of a house,
lodge, indosure etc. This suffix seems to occur in intransitive verbs only,
gatfta to walk along the outside of the lodge.
liutfta to crowd, to gather up outside of.
s;ifult(ta to lie down, to sleep outside the lodge.

I 1

376

GRAMMAU OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

94? M

-tl'taiia, verbal suffix differing from -tfta only by the circumstance
that the act is performed at a short distance (-na) outside of the lodge,
inclosure etc. It is sometimes contracted into -tftna. Hero and in the
foregoing suffixes the locative function of -ti is clearly shown.

gatftana, kishtftana to walk around the lodge etc.

liutftana, or liutftna to crowd outdoors at a short distance; plural form of
tgatftana, or tgatftna to stand (as above). ,

-tka, nominal and verbal suffix having various functions.

1. Nominal inflectional suffix -tka; forms the instrumental case in sub-
stantives and adjectives, sometimes assuming a temporal meaning. Com-
bined with -sh to -shtka it forms the verbal desiderative, q. v.

2. Verbal inflectional suffix -tka sometimes stands for the -tki of tiie
verbal intentional on account of neglectful pronunciation. Modoc often
uses -tka and -tku for the participial ending -tko, q. v.

3. Verbal derivational suffix -tka most frequently expresses a return from,
or an act of locomotion repeated in a direction opposite to the act preceding
it. When standing in the participial form of -tkank. Mod. -tkan, it therefore
often corresponds to our pluperfect tense.

gankdnktka to return from hunting; gankanktkank after having hunted;

lit. " after having returned from the hunt."
ftka, liit^a, ut^a to take hack, tvrench off from.
yumt'iltka to return from the berry-harvest.
lulukshdltka to return from cremating.
shitchAtka to fly back.
tamgniitka to return from a place visited, from travel.

4. Verbal derivational suffix -tka sometimes adds to the radical verb the
idea of ahove, over somebody or something.

ftatka to hold long-shaped objects above.

Idtatka to hold round things ; netatka flat things ; shldtatka slieet-like

things above an object etc.
stutka to he standing (animals).

LIST OP SUPFIXKS.

37t

5. Verbal derivational suffix -tka, -tk, often inverted as -tak, m found in
verbs which express a passing into or from one's mouth. It ciiiefly uppears
in compound suffixes, as -tAkna, -tilittana, -takua, and in -takniila (separate
item above); it excludes the acts of eating and sucking.

dmbutka to be thirsty.

hdntakua to stand open contini*ally ,- Lat. hiare.

pniutiiktana to blow into a tube, hollow hod;/.

til6takna to see somebody putting (food) into his mouth.

G. Some other verbs in -tka do not properly belong here, being deriva-
tives of verbs in -ta through suffix -ka, -ga; matchdtka, tgiitka, wiilika. In
hdshtka to pierce one's nose, -tka contains the radix.

-tkl, a verbal suffix somewhat analogous to -tka, q. v., although the
final -i gives to it a locative signification, which is recognizable in the
majority of the verbs.

1. Verbal inflectional suffix -tki, usually followed by the causal verbal
gluga, gfug in order to do, and called by me verbal intentional. Sentences
dependent on certain verbs on Klamath are always expressed by this verbal:
kA-i wd-ula gulitki hit gf ug / do not allow anybody to enter here.

2. Verbal derivational suffix -tki, also pronounced -tgi, -t^i, -txe, -taki,
-takia, refer to a motion onward, or a going to the place of the first start
(like -tka); but the final -i points to the ground, earth' or soil as the place
toward which the motion is made, which implies the idea of downward, down.

ho't^e, hiit^i to run downhill; to rush down.

huntakia to rush, pounce, fly down upon.

lutki to go downward, as fog, clouds.

kmuko'ltgi to tvither, fade, become decrepit.

ndf-ut;fe to fall down; also other verbs of falling, rolling.

ndshdtchtjji and ntiiltki to form a waterfall.

tflant^e, v. intr., to roll down.

978

CJRAMMAR OP THR KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

mn^A

% t^^m.

3. Verbal ilerivational suffix -Iki, also pronounced variously like No. 2,
forms verbs which mark an effect or return upon somebody or upon 0Hei,e(/\
a reversal upon one's own hodjf, tiiis being here indi(!ated by -»•

ka'ltki to become round, hard, dry, strong; from kalkali round.

lO'ltki to look or to peep at.

kiiktakia, ku'^tgi to covet, to be enamored qf.

Iftchtakia to try hard, to endeavor; from litchlftcldi powerful.

ta'ztgi to become red, to blush; from taktj'ikli red.

tchAmptki, Mod. tcliamptakia to be frightened.

-tknl is a suffix of adjectives, in which the ending -kni, q. v., is ap-
pended to one of the locative cases (-tat, -ti) of substantives, adjectives, or
pronouns. Hence the nouns in -tkni form but a subdivision of the ones in
-kni. Besides Kumbatkni (from kumme cave, locat. kummCtat or kumbat)
and Lokuashtkni mentioned there, we have:

go'tknicoming from out there, from abroad.
hataktkni coming from that place.
nakantkni coming from the places all around.
SkUchueshtkni name of a tribe in northwestern Oregon.
Tda;ftkni Indian from Tygh Creek.

-tkO, -tk, in Modoc -tko, -tku, -tka, -tk, in the oblique cases -pkash,
-pkam etc. in both dialects, is a suffix forming the participles of verbs,
mostly indicating the preterit tense. Verbs in -ftla fonn their participles in'
-altko; those in -na, -antko (q. v.) This suffix is susceptible of inflection just
like nouns, and corresponds in many respects to the Old English i)refix y- in
yclad, yclept, which is the German ge- in gekleidd, gefanyen, gescheidt. When
derived of transitive verbs, the participles in -tko are either of active or of
passive signification, sometimes both. Some are derived from impersonal
verbs, and of others the parent verb has become obsolete or never had any
existence. Many terms in -tko have become verbal adjectives, or substan-
tives either of a concrete or abstract signification. In the conversational
language -tko is often thrown off: paha for pahiUko dried, 74, Cu

LIST OP SUFFIXES.

379

1. Participles in -tko of active and preterital signification are not frequent
They are Bonietimes connected with personal pronouns:

hemkunlcAtko one who has iklivered a speech.

nd kti'kotko (^fter I had tried.

shana-ulitko having wished for 186; 56.

2 Participles in -tko of a passive and preterital function. These are
the reo.1 participles in -tko, and a reference to the present tense is rather
exceptional.

idukAtko one who was or is kicked.
kutdlitko one whose pimples were squeezed out.
pdtko eaten up, consumed.
shniikatko seized, grasped, apprehended.

3. Participles in -tko formed from intransitive and attributive verbs;
many of them are verbal adjectives, and in English have to be rendered
by adjectives. Cf Texts, page 110, 1.

giitzitko one who has climbed down from.

hiuhiuwdtko marshy; from hiuhfwa to he elastic.

k'lckatko dead, deceased.

nkfllitko brave, robust, impetuous.

p'lftko fat, fattened, well-fed.

shftko, Mod. shi'itka alike to; from shf-iha to agree.

tchfpkatko contained in a pail, vase.

We may add here, as formed from an impersonal verb:
g4]xathi,accustomed; from kdl^a nish lam in the habit of

4. Adjectives in -tko, derived from nouns and signifying "provided
with, wearing, having on oneself, making use of," are the result of a con-
traction with gftko having. From this we may except liilpatko provided
with, using one's eyes, which seems contracted from liilpaltko. The accent
rests either on the penult or on the antepenult.

kapiitko wearing a coat, for kApo gftko.
kokatko clad in a gown, for ku'ks gftko.

'880

(JUAMMAU OF TIIK KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

ffft

■hnawukitko wearitif/ a necklace, Hlimiwa'kish.
tAldshitko provided with rred-arrow.s, ti'ildhhi.
tchuyt'tko wenrinif a hat or hrad-cover, tchuyesh.
wrtlz»U(likatko poorly dressed; from walzAtchnga, q. v,

5. SubHtautivGH in -tko, which formerly were adjectivcH or participles,
and have gradually developed into coiUTete or abstrnct nubstantives with-
out assuming the nominal suffix -sli, -s. Among their number we have:

p'Htko fat, grease.

8heggAt;(atko interdigital membrane.
shenn'tatko confluence.
sheshalzakdnatko tvoven tissue.

kniiklitko shor»-line.
kbiklitko ivound, gash.
mulnuilatko quagmire.
nkfllitko power, force, energy.
pfltpantko fat of deer.

• -tkliu'la, see -takniila.

-tkll, see -tko.

-tzl, see -tki.

-tzllO'la, see -takniila.

>tna, see -tana.

-tpa, a combination of the two verbal suffixes -ta and -pa, which im-
plies motion toward some object standing erect (-ta), men or people being
generally understood. Forms transitive as well as intransitive verbs; cf. -pa.

giitpa to come, march toward.

husiicStpa (for hush'hotpa) to ride up to.

hiitpa, hutpa to run up to the one speaking.

kshftpa to crawl toward.

shldltpa to surrender to somebody for use.

spiintpa to bring, accompany homeward.

til6tpa to see somebody coming.

-tch, -dsh, nominal suffix rarely found in adjectives (tchmA'tch lean,
meager), but oftcaer in substantives, and preceded by a vowel. When pre-
ceded by n- it a'^ornatep, with -sh (-ntcli, -nsh), and is identical in function
with -sh, -8. It km on^jinatel in several of the terms below from the verbal

LIST 01'' SUFFIX H8.

381

suffix tcha, -dHliH. Tho suffix -r.'toh, -fl'tcli, Homotiines -atcli, u a contrac-
tion of -o'tkish, (J. V.

yi'mtcli, HpocioH of root or bulb.

kfatlHli i/olk of fffff.

kf-iiitch, k(-iuHli i/fiUoW'jacket wasp; from kfntclma.

kinuVdHli, kinuUcli ant; lit. "uidewise-jfoer."

Izawawintch finger, toe.

mbi'iitcli sinew, ligament, tendon.

nHlift'dHh shell, pod, outside bark.

pil watch, pAwash tongue; from pAwa to eati})

pulzuantiih eatable chrgsalid.

8gutch father of a first child.

Hhudntcli baby-board Kl. ; babg Mod.

Verbs in -tcha, -dslia Honietimes lose their final -a by rapid or negligent
pronunciation, like some other suffixes.

-tell, see -ptchi

-tcha, -dsha, also pronounced -tsa, -dsa; two verbal suffixes identical
in their functions, and differing only in this, that -dsha usually follows after
syllables long by themselves or pronounced long by reason of the accent
being laid on them, while -tcha is suffixed to short syllables. We find them
forming transitive as well as intransitive verbs, and implying motion at a
distance, or away from the real or supposed speaker. They enter into the
composition of many other suffixes. According to their signification they
may be subdivided into three groups:

(a) With the meaning of "in the course of events, as a part of other
acts."

(b) With the meaning of "to go to, to be on the way to."

Examples:
(a) ktandsha to fall asleep; from ktAna to sleep.
ka-uldsha to gnaw through; cf. koka to bite.
vuiodsha to split, chop.

382

GUAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE,

(b) liaftchantcha to set ut for a hunt; from liaitchna to pursue,.
iwidsha fo go and haul; from I'wi, hlwi to haul home.
kuiuLiktclia to go to dance; from k8liiule;^a to dance.
shlO'dsha to visit, to go Ic see; from shUa to see.
shualko'Itcha to go and cool oneself off.

(c) dlktcha, ndlktcha etc. t-o leave behind when departing.
ktchikaj'ultcha to crawl, creep out of woods etc.
ktcliitfltcha to crawl to or in the distance.
k'lev.'fdsha to quit, leave; from k'lewi to stop, cease.
sfi-atcha to dance a scalp-dance.

ahuwAlktcha to fly after something ; front shuwal;ta to fly.

-tcha, see -ptchi, -sba.
-tclli, see -ptchi.

-tchka, verbal suffix composed of -tcha in its various acceptations
and of tlie factitive -ka, -ga, -^a. The forms -tchka, -tcli;ja occur after con-
sonants and short vowels The suffix forms transitive and intransitive verbs
from verbal bases. For -d8;fa, see -s^a.

1. Suffix -tchka referring to an act performed above, on the top 0/ some-
thing, when this act is done in the sequel of other acts, or as a part of such:

hashkatchka to stick upon oneself, as feathers,
ydshtchka to step on.
yushtchka to put the foot on.
ktchiutchAtchk'-. to trample on, upoi, Mod.

2. Suffix -tchka marking repetition o^ an act usually performed in the
distance:

mpatchftchka to crackle, said of burning wood,
shnumatchka to annoy, tease; from mi'itchka.
shui'shtchaktchka to bend, turn the head for a bite.
utchkatchka to iveave a pole repeatedly in one direction.

-tcliua, -dshna are suffixes differing merely in phonetics, as -tcha does
from -dsha, q. v., and not in their meanings. They form transitive and in-
transitive verbs from verbs, not from nouns, and represent a combination

LIST OK SUFFfXKS.

383

of tlie verbal suffixes tcha and -na, q. v.; they are also pronounced, by
Iternation of sounds, -tsna, -dsna, and some of these verbs simultaneously
exhibii a form -Ina, -Ana:

gasiiktsina and gasluiktchna to march behind, to pursue.
maktsina and maktclina to encamp while traveling.
tchaluftchana and tchaluftchna to go to somebody's house, lodge.

The funciion of tlic suffix -tchna may be stated as either referring:
(a) To an act performed at a distance (which is expressed by -tch-,

-dsh-), or while going, walking, traveling, moving; the suffix also implies a

motion of the verlml subject away from (not toward) the one speaking, or

from the verbal object; or referring:

{h) To an act performed or a state undergone in continuity, whether

moving, walking or not; whenever motion is implied, it is motion away from

the one speaking or from the object of the verb.

Examples of (a);
agga-idshna to hang up ivhile going; from aggaya U suspend.
gulatchna to recede into on being reached; cf. guli to enter.
kftitchna to spill ivhile going, walking on.
kputchna to spurt from mouth; cf kpiidsha to epcj)el.
shnigo'tchna to send by mail, as letters,
shnindiidshna to lose, as from one's pocket,
spidshudshna to uncoil a string fastened at one end; cf. spfdsha to drag

behind oneself.
stilantchna to let go, run, drop along something,
shuptchna to travel, said of a loaded wagon etc.
vutudshna to throw away from oneself.

Examples of (6) .-
h6ntchna to fly in a continuous straight line.
ktulodshna to push away continually or repeatedly,
niudshna to drive (cattle) info a prairie etc.
ntultchna to run continuously, said of water.
6-idshna to advance in front file or line.

384

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

1^
'1

shiktii'dshna to push oneself.

stfntchna to go with an object from place to place.

wfudshna to inflict blows in continuous succession.

-tchta, see -ta.

-U, -0, verbal and nominal suffix occurring mainly in dissyllabic and
otlier short words, the pronominal radix -u (hu) in this suffix pointing either
to distance or to elevation above the soil.

1. Verbal derivational suffix -u. Some verbs have a form in -a and
another in -«; the former expressing an act performed close by or upon the
ground, the latter an act in the distance or above:

tamgnfi to march, travel; suffix -tamna, which forms continuative verbs.

tchflamna to be crowded together.

tchflamnu to be crowded high up, or far away.

2. Verbal derivational suffix -«, apocopated from -ua, -wa, q. v.
kp^to to taste, to sip.

kji'ko, kt^ku to try, to endeavor.

m^mu for mdmua, d. of m^wa to camp away from home.

nftu to guess, conjecture.

sht^to and sha'tua to enumerate, count.

b\u6 to bet; hdshkfl to make mutual bets.

shfpnu to blow something up; from pnfwa to blow.

shpdtu to fortify oneself, for shpa-utua "to plunge into the water."

tchltu {I) to be sterile; (2) childless woman.

3. Substantives in -«, -o. These are generally names of objects of
nature possessed of a tall, long form, as trees, plants, weeds, many of the
smaller animals, also some inanimate things and parts of the human and
animal body.

(a) Plants, weeds etc. :
dnku tree, stick, piece of wood.
kill' species of root.
kta'Iu pine-nut.

ktsdamu, species of aquatic grass.
tch/ikclu greasewood.
wdko white-pine tree.

385

ndshflu and nkulu female animal.
p6ko bucket, vase, cup.
stii'yu wood-rat.
tchpfnd burial-ground.

LIST OF SUFFIXES.
(6) Animals, inanimate objects:

ynh6 buffalo. „,hil', KI. trail' grouse.

kafliu skin-robe, fur-dress.

kiilo sky.

kuktu dragon-fly.

ktchfdshu bat.

mdniaktsu, species of duck.

kapkapo wristbone. p'ln fat, grease.

'''" «"«*• tl,')zo brain, Mod.

^^^'^ ^«*'^- tz6po thumb.

ngdnu lower belly. viishu chest.

-Ua, -wa, compound verbal suffix of frequent occurrence. As may be
inferred from the first component, which is the particle hu, u, the verbs in
-ua relate to acts done at ,., distance or at an elevation above the ground
Many nouns m -u, -o express portions of the animal and human body and
m the same manner some verbs in -ua refer to acts or conditions of the
whole body or parts of it, especially to motions performed in the water
The verbs formed by means of suffix -ui, -wi present many analogies.

1. Suffix -ua, indicative of distance:

161 ua to sleep outdoors.

mciwa to camp away from home, to live in the prairie.

nf wa to drive upon level ground.

ni'iyua to shine from a di^stance.

shnAtkolua to build afire away from the camp.

tpc'wa to give orders to.

2. Suffix -ua, indicative of elevation above the gi-ound:
hfnua to fall upon something, as trees, logs,
mbawa to burst, explode.

nilfwa to blaze up, to burst into a light.
25

■AX

38G

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATB LANGUAGE.

3. Suffix -Ma, referring to acts performed 6y means of or upon the human
body or parts of it; inchides transit? ve and intransitive verbs:

antchfhin to press forward, to crowd on.
hldkua to drink out of the hand; to lap.
kitt^wa to squeeze down, as with the finger.
Idukua to hug, caress; cf ahiildakua.
mulua to prepare oneself, make ready.
nddwa to laugh demoniacally.
ntA-u'htua to pulsate, said of heart
punua to drink.

shApkua to put red paint on one^s face.
skiiyAdshua to yawn.
shuatAwa fo stretch oneself.
shiimalua tb wear a necklace of bird-bills.
tdkua to apply a gag.

4. Suffix -ua, referring to motions performed in the water by animate
beings; here the particle -u- means up to, pointing to the water reaching up
to a certain level on the body.

hiiwa, h6-a to leap into water.

yAtchua to step into water, dip the feet; from tchdwa, q. v.

kflhua to reach up to on the body.

ktulua to ri^sh under water.

k(^lua to bathe in hot water.

niwa to drive into tlui water.

pankua to wade through; cf. hashpankua.

shninduwa to dip, douse, let fall into the water.

tchel(5wa to produce ripples, waves.

udiimkua to cross by swimming.

-ual, -udla, see wAla.

-ualza, verbal suffix indicative of a continuous upward motion,
the "upward" being expressed by tlie particle -u-; in some verbs, as in
shlatchuiilza, distance may bo expressed by it. This suffix is a compound

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

387

of -wAla, and the verbs in -mlxa are originally transitives and factitives of
those m -wala, q. v.

kfnual^ja to f/o uphill in a file or otherwise.

miilkualpca to send up smoke.

nikuiilka to extend one arm, hand.

8h]{ltchiia];fa to splash up, or out.

muaha, and telfkualza to turn the face upward; cf. tdlish far^.

-Uash, see -wash.

-ugr,

see -uga.

-Ugra, -uka, -oga, -oka, a suffix forming transitive and intransitive
verbs, generally accented upon the penultima, and either derivational or
mflectional When derivational, this suffix implies the idea of within, inside;
or that of upon, on the surface of; or that of aivay from; when inflectional,
It points to the cause or reason of an act or condition, and therefore implies
causality. There are, however, many verbs in -I'.ga which properly belong
under -ka, -ga, the syllable -u belonging not to the suffix but to the basis of
the word: shud-uka to squeal, 8ha'hm6ka to call out, assemble, and others
On the difference between -I'lga and -uga, cf. suffix -aga.

1. Suffix -uga, corresponding to our inside, within, indoors.

fkuga to place inside of to load, as a gun etc.

kshfkoga to put or place into.

shluyiiga to whistle; lit. "to blow inside."

skul;u6ka to lie down, sleep indoors.

tg^Zuga to stand indoors.

tchiz6ga to live or stag ivithin, indoors.

uld^uga to gather or place into a long vase.

2. Suffix -uga, pointing to an act performed upon or on the surface of an
object; or to the removal of an object from the surface of Cf the suffix -iga.

nutchuka to burn, singe o^ somebody's hair.
put6ga to tear out, pull out; cf shupt^ga.

1»

.1 JjS

Win** "Hi

'tm-m

388 GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

8liijiaf;i;ug!i to sliieUl, cover oneself.
aliii'iliikn (a fan somebody,
shnu^'oka to cause to burn off, to singe off.
shnulcika to snap at; to scold somebody,
shudslioka to wash one's body or part of it.
shuyuka to clip one's hair; cf. ktuyuga.
shupeluka to lay on, heap upon.
teluga, teli'ika to assail, pounce upon.
tuliiga to smear on, to line upon.

3. Suffix -w/a, forming the verbal causative in the inflection of all verbs;
cf. below. It is often pronounced -uk, -ok, -ug, -og, and then the accent
recedes toward the initial syllable:

kAk txiit;;uk lui'ma the raven cries for the purpose of presaging.
kt;lpkug i'lmbu wakwaka water vaporises by heat.

-ui, -wi, suffix forming transitive and intransitive verbs from verbal
bases, and implying tnotion toivard an object. Its component -u- points to
distance in space, to altitude etc. ; while -i, which represents the pronominal
radix i, hi, refers to the soil or ground, to the house, home, or lodge, the
floor of which is the ground itself, or to the person speaking. It is analo-
gous in many points to -ua, q. v.

1. Suffix -ui, implying motion toivard the ground, or over, along the
ground, or toward the home or lodge.

giiktchui to go into the rods or woods.

hi'nui to fall to the ground.

hf wi to haul or fetch home.

ski'iyui to send out, dispatch ; from kiii far off.

shh'wi the wind blows. .

tt'wi to shoot at with arrow, gun etc.

tilalhalui to roll something long.

uli'iyui to bend downward, as trees in the wind.

wawfwi to lean over head forward.

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

389

2. Suffix -ui, implying motion toward a person, generally toward tlie
one speaking.

giUdshui to approach .omebody or one's lodge,
pt'kalui to be an accomplice.
shahamui to call somebody to come.
sht'shatui to sell; from shesha to value, prigs.
shtclifkui to drag after oneself.
shuiinui to he in love with, to covet.-
t^shui to touch; to attack with weapons.
ttiwi to bewitch by magic spell.

3. Suffix -ui, in the adverbs dtui now, gdtui over yonder, is simply a
combination of the two well-known particles u and i with the particles at,
gdt, ge't, q. V. Cf. also tchiii, tchiiyunk.

-ll'izi, see -oixl

-ui'lia, see -wina.

-llish, compound suffix simultaneously verbal and nominal, and
always pointing to something performed or achieved in the past. The fir.st
comdonent -u- is the particle u, hu, which refers here to distance also, but to
distance in time; the second component -ish forms nomina acti, sometimes
nomina instrumenti (cf. -ish No. 2). Though often pronounced -wish, -uish
is distinctly dissyllabic in its origin.

1. Verbal inflectional suffix -uish forms the verbal preterit, which is not
inflected for case: ht^mkankuish the act of having spoken; from homkanka to
speak. Cf. Verbal Inflection.

2. Nominal derivational suffix -uish, sometimes contracted to -otch, forms
nomina acti, some of which possess parallel forms in -ish, as palkuish and
p.ilkish, q. v. The nouns in -uish all designate inanimate things, inflect for
case, and the -u- of some of their number can be rendered by imvious,
former, early. This does not always imply that the object mentioned does
not exist any longer.

gutdkuish aperture, passage-ivay.
hdmkankuish speech delivered in the past.

9 '4\

890

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANOUAGK.

mbAkuiali broken piece ; from mbAka to smash.
mulfnuish stub, stubble; from mulfna to mow.
8ha'limAl;Kui8li, contr. 8lia'hmiil;icr)tch beyinning of autumn.
sluiktakluiflh scar; from shilktakla to wound by cutting.
ic\yvi\6\\x\»\i peeling ; from tchel61a /o j;ee/.
wetdkuish earth caved in; cf wet61a.

3. There is a limited number of nouns in -uish in which the -u- has no
temporal function, but signifies above, on upper part of the animal or human
body. Some are derived from verbs in -ua or -ui:

lAktchuish, contr. Idktchush adhering-place ; from lAktchui.

shakpAklaluish and sht^laluish pMt of males on temple bone, Mod.

shukatuish nape-plait.

wakAluish, apher. kdluish leg below knee; shin-bone.

wAmglhuish, kshdluish, t^lhuish iind shuAmshtchakluish mane of horse.

To these we may add shlc^laluish cream of milk.

-Uya, -huya, verbal suffix of a minuitive function, and not always
accented. It is the particle huya near, close to, agglutinated to verbs, and
etymologically connected with wfka, wigdta low, near the ground, the origi-
nal nieaftiing of the particle beii.^ shown in ti'iya to stand below the level of.
Huya may stand also as a separate word in tlie sentence; as a suffix, it refers
to space, time, and to degrees of intensity. In shahamuya, -liya stands for
-wi, -ui, and nAnuya is derived from nanui, q. v.

1. Suffix -uya, indicative of limited space: near, near by, close, closely.
geluipkuya to approach close to.

kshdluya to lie close to the camp-fire.
teluak'huya to pursue closely.

2. Suffix -uya, referring to a limited lapse of time: for a while, for a
time, not very long.

keko-uya to attempt for a short while.
shenotank'huya to skirmish for a while.
shkuyushkuya to part one from the other temporarily.
tchutanhuya to treat for some time.

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

391

3. Suffix -uya, indicative of a smaller degree of intensity or stress:
sotneivhat, partially, not seriously. In a few verbs it may be replaced by
-kshka (q. v.).

dlkiiya, dlk'lmya Mod., to attempt to give a name; for Kl. dl;^ak8hka.

'mutchiiya to try to imitate one's parents (kmutchish, "elders").

nge'she-uya to wound hut not to kill.

Bhiukiiya to have a small fight, scuffle.

slilfuya to inflict a shot wound not fatal; from shlfn.

shluihuya to trot on horseback

-U'la, see -61a.

-ll'li, see -61i.

-Iipka, see -pka.

-apka, see -opka.

-ftsh (vowel long); see -osh.

-ll'ta, -Ota, verbal suffix of a durative meaning, and almost always
emphasized on the penult. It is either inflectional or derivational, and
composes the suffix -6tki8h and others; it forms transitive and intransitive
verbs from verbal, not from nominal, bases. The form -lita is more frequent
than -6ta.

1. Inflectional suffix -uta corresponds to our during, pending, while,
whilst, soi.ietimes to after, and forms the verbal durative, which undergoes
no inflection.

gukeniita while climhing; sta-6ta while fasting, starving.

2. Durative verbs in -lita. They indicate that an act or condition lasts
during a certain time, or that it lasts while something else is performed or
occurring.

ilz^ta to bury along with.

shnigota to send by mail.

shkiiita to owe a debt.

tchuta to treat for sickness; contr. from tchi-iita.

win6ta to accompany in singing.

fiH-

892

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

3. Usitative verbs in -lita, descriptive of personal habits, of customs,
occupations, as —

ledshnuta to he in the hoilnt of knitting.

pashl'ttii to be a cook; to cook for a time.

shiyiita, sheniiita, liesheli^ta to follow the bartering trade.

4. Instrumental verbs in -uta. They refer to the use of a certain article,
tool, instrument for accomplishing an act. The suffix -6tki8h is a compound
of the ending -uta when used as an instrumental suffix.

yuwetuta to kick with both feet.

kawuta to catch, get hold of what is thrown.

spukliiita to use during or for the sweating process.

8tina-6ta to build lodges with.

shuliSta to dress oneself with.

vukiita to scrape by means of.

-U'tkish, see -6tki8h.

-tl'tcll, see -6tkish.

-Utchlia, -odshna, a combination of the verbal suffix -tchna, q. v.,
with the particle and suffix -u, -o (in -ua, -wa etc.), which points to a motion
away from, performed either in the distance or at an elevation above the
ground. The verbs in -utchna have all been entered under -tchna.

-wa, see -ua.

-wal, see -wAla.

-wa'la, -mla, a compound verbal suffix which, after vowels, often
contracts into -6'la or -u'la (with long o, «), and is usually accented on the
penultima. When the accent recedes, it often abbreviates into -wal, -ual.
This suffix points to a position or motion at the head or end of, above, or upon
an object, and is composed of the pronominal particle u, hu up there and the
suffix -ala. It composes other suffixes, as -ual^a, -waliega etc., and appears
as a radical syllable in willish rock or cliff standing upright. It forms transi-
tive as wel? as intransitive verbs.

hashatuala, hashtual to place upright upon somebody's head.

hashlwdla to place a blanket or slieet over one's head.

LIST OF SUFFIXES.

393

hiinula to fly on tlie top of.

huwiUa (in liuwalic'gu) to run, rush uphill.

kHhawuIu tu tic to the top of a pole standing upright.

ktilwal to full and to strike on the top of the head.

ktiwala, ktfwal (and ktiwfil;^aj to lift, pout upon, above.

mi'ikuala to eneamp upon or in the mountains.

Bluunpatuf'ila to nail or fasten one object to another to make it longer.

ehnpatcliui'ila to jmt one foot before the other.

stc'-tila to put one cover or sheet over another.

tga-ula, tka-(')la to stand upon the top of.

-walle'ga, see -wi'ila and -dga.

-WJl'l^a, see -ual;^a.

-wash, uash, nominal suffix of various functions.

1. Tribal names in -wash, calling the Itidian ti-ibes after their residence,
country, or point of compass. Here -wash is derived from the verb vvjl to
live, to exist, stay, remain, a plural verb always accompanied by the locality
or medium where the subjects are staying: kiii'm amputat wa flsh live in the
water. The nouns in -wash are adjectives and synonyms of those in -kni,
which are adjectives also; in some of these names the Klamath Lake dialect
prefers -kni.

l^-nkshiwash Indian liviuy on Klamath Marsh.
Kiimbatuash Kiimbatuash Indian on Modoc Lake; Kl. Ki'uiibatkni.
M(')atnash Pit Itiver Indian; lit. "southern dweller."
Walamswash Rogue River Valley Indian ; cf. walish.

2. To these may be added the following ^fCHer/c nouns, in some of which
the -wash is derived from wa to stay:

katogfwash (1) hill-spur; (2) Sacramento Valley Indian.

kilfwash red-headed woodpecker.

p'lafwash gray eagle; lit. "living on high."

pshe-utfwfish human beings (archaic term).

tef niwash young ivoman ; from tefni young.

894

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LAN(!UA(JK.

t",.** ^i

3. NounH, ndjuctiveH m woll na HubHtantivoH, ilorivud not fruin waHh
dweller, but fVoiu verbH in -wa, -ua. !domu of theHe are being uned an iianiua
for pei'Hona. .

gukfvvaHli one who fines up hill.
liuHhU'waHb portruif; in KI. hiiHhU'tiHh.
HkakavvnHb '«>«//, rnw-hotied. •

HhK'laluash upper eifelid; lit. "the coverer."
vuipeHwnHb, species of yores/ bird; lit. "the flutterer."

4. To these add the confrncted form of wash (-ush, -osh), of which I
gave numerous instances under osh, q. v.

-weia, see -kuela.

-We'ta, -ueta, verbal snftix occurring in intransitive verbs, and point-
ing to motions observed upon straight, long, or elongated articles, as the
arms, a swing etc.; the long shape of these is indicated by -ta.

kniHa (for kuwtHa) to make siiftis, to beckon,

kiwewc'ta to ride upon a swinr/, Mod.

ndshakweta to drop down, be suspended, as wax, curtains.

s^fnueta to ride on a swing.

shulakucta, shulakuaweta to ride upon a swing.

-wi, see -ui.

-wltt, suffix of uncertain origin, occurring in a few verbs only and
probably connected with -ui, -wi, q. v. It points to the idea of uniting,
gathering.

galdshiiwia to come close to, approach.

skfwia to let the hair hang down.

skiitawia to tie, fasten together; from spjuta.

"Wl'zai -wixa, suffix of intransitive and transitive verbs, composed of
the locative u-, the locative -i-, and the verbal factitive suffix -ga, -ka. The
import of this suffix is that of being within, in'<idc of a receptacle or vase.

UEOAl'lTULATlOiJ OF SUFFIXES.

895

which, aH the pniticlo -u indicnteH, in standing or erect. Cf. -{x\, -of^i. This
suffix appeuFM uIho in thu Hubstmitivo 8tiwix«')tki8h baby board, KI.

iwl;jH and ivvf^i to fill up, m mck«; cf. fwu.

ni'liiiwizH, milwixa fo put a Utile of Honietliing into a vase.

tkivvf^a, hiilu(;(a to stand within, uh in a pit.

tchiw(;(a to fill a vase about half up

tchh'wixa to place Honiothing flexible or soft into a vaae.

-Wl'lia, -Mt'wa, a verbal suffix, conipoHod of -wi, -ui and the Huffix of
motion -na. It points to a motion at short distance toward or i\\m\^ the
ground, and occurs in transitive as well as in intransitive verbs. Iwfna to
place inside and its derivatives (kshawfna etc.) have to be classed with verba
in -hia.

gawfna to join, rejoin ; to meet again.

kinufna to go single file, or //* zigzag line.

shivvfna to move or stir about.

shuaw{iui to look over, to examine.

tcluiwfna to live among, to mix with ; from tchfa.

u'hhitufna to trail on the ground while ivulking.

-wish, see -uish.

HECAPITULATION OF THE SUFFIXES.

The hirge number of simple and compound suffixes of the Klamath
language requires ii broad and comprehensive classification of them. It
will be best to subdivide them into inflectional and derivational suffixes and
to make two classes of each— verbal suffixes and nominal suffixes.

A. — Inflectional suffixes.
Verbal suffixes.

Mode in verbs: -a, -t (-at).

Tense in verbs: -ulank, -ut'ipka.

Suffixes forming verbals: -emi, -i, -ola, -sh, -sht, -ti, tka, -tki, -liga

(-uk, -ok).
Suffixes forming participles: -n (-an), -nk (-ank) ; and -tko (-tku, -tk).

396

GUAMMAK OF TUE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

Nominal suffixes.

Case-suffixes: -am (-lam), -ant, -asli, -emi, -;feni, -na, -sh, -tat, -ti, -tka.
Case-postpositions: -i, -ksiii (-gislii), -ksaksi, -tala, -tuna.
Tense in noun: -u-.

B. — Derivational suffi'xes.
Verbal suffixes.

Gkammatic classipication. — Considered from a purely granimatic point
of view, a part of the suffixes may be subdivided as follows:

Suffixes which are verbal and nominal sinuiltaneously : -a, -ftga, -i, -tana.

Suffixes made from verbs; they become agglutinated to the other com-
ponent part of the compound verb, and some change their last
sound: -kakiamna, -kakua, -ki (-gi), -kfdsha, -tamna.

Suffixes stating the number of the object: -ta, -yua.

Suffixes forming denominative verbs: -ilia, -Ala, -alsha, -shla.

Suffixes used for verbifying various nominal forms of the verb: -alsha,
-anka, -anslia, -insha, -kanka.

Suffixes forming factitive verbs: -figa, -aga, -ilia, -dla, -I'ga, -fga, -ka,
-tka No. G.

Functional classification. — For this mode of classifying the verbal
suffixes of derivation, their material functions have to be considered mainly
under the categories of mode of action, motion, or rest. These categoiies
are visible, and therefore of more importance to the Indian than tense and
mode. They also form a contrast to the form categories expressed by the
prefixes of the language. We present the following list of them, while
recalling the fact that many suffixes are used in more than one function,
and therefore may occur in moi-e than one place below:

1. Si(ffl\t(S (lescrihiug motion.
a. Motion in a direct line, or motion to a short distance: -n, -na, -tclia,

-tchna, -wi'na.
h. Motion toward the ground, soil: -hi (-i), -fpa, -ui.
c. Motion toward some other object, or toward the subject of the verb :

-hi (-1), -la, -I'pa, -ipka, -pa, ta, -tpa, -ui, -uya, -wi'a.

RECAPITULATION OF SUFFIXES.

397

d. Motion away from, or separation: -ansha, -fna, -fpa, -fta, -lui, -61a,

-slika, -tcha, -tclma, -ntchna.

e. Motion upward, or above something: -f;^i, -laliMia, -ual/a, -wala.

/ Motion in a level plane: -fna, -lali'na, -l^a, -nia, -na, -tchna, -iii, -wina.

g. Circular motion: -ona (indoor), -kfdsha, -kVma, -ti'tnrui (outdoor).

h. Motion of going around some object: -anina, -kakianuia, -mCnf.

i. Serpentine or winding motion: -ki'dslia, -ma, -meni.

j. Swaying, vibratory motion : -kakua, -wi'ta.

h. Motion downward : -fna, -kni'la, -lalfna, -l^a, -oli, -tki (cf. also h).

I. Motion in the water: -ua.

2. Suffixes descriptive ofstai/inff or resting.

a. Staying indoors, within a lodge, or other limited space: -ilya, -t'la, -t'na,

-uga, -wf;!;a.
h. Staying outdoors, outside of certain limits: -fta.

c. Staying upon, on the top or surface of: -amna, -ha, -i, -f;^i, -;^ioa, -lalona,

-liga, -m'na, -;va, -wala.

d. Staying around, about something: -annia, -Ifga, -m'na, -ua.

e. Staying below, underneath: -tfla, -tka.
/ Staying between : -s;^a.

g. Staying away from, at a distance : -fta.

h. Staying in the woods, cliffs, marshes : -aya, -ui.

i. Staying in the water: -ua.

j. Staying around, near the water : -Ifga.

3. Suffixes describing the mutual position of two objects to each otlier in
space, when in motion or at rest.

rt. Close contact: -lalona, -pata, -s;^a, -tana.

b. Nearness, proximity: -amna, -lala, -Ifga, -m'na, -p'na, -s;^a.

c. Distance, so as to be visible or not visilde: -ampka, -apka, -fpka, -opka,

-tcha, -tchka, -tchna, -u, -ua, -wala.

4. Suffixe.i describing acts performed by atiinatc beings or by parts of
their bodies.

rt. Frecpientative suffixes: -anka, -pcli, -tchna.
h. Iterative suffixes: -kanka, -pcli, -tannia, -tchka.

398

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

c. Usitative suffixes: -Jlla, -alsha, -opka, -pCH, -pka, -lita.

d. Act performed while moving, going: -kakiamna, -kAnka, -kfdsha,

-ts'imna.

e. Act performed on the outside of: -tfta.

/' Act performed on the inside of: -dna (-iena), -I'iga.
g. Act performed on the top, surface of: -ha, -f;^i, -x\ia, -s^a, -tchka, -I'lga.
h. Act performed below, underneath : -tlla.
i. Act performed with a tool, instrument: -uta.
,;. Act performed with or on one's body: -t'a, -ua
k. Act performed with the mouth : -takna, -taknula, -taktana, -takua.
/. Act performed with the back: -larana.
m. Act performed near or in the fire: -lula.
w. Act of removal from : -fta, -61a, -shka, -I'lga.
0. Act indi(vated by gesture : -fa.

p. Act performed in somebody's int.. est: -da, -gien, -la.
q. Act of calling by name : -alpka.
r. Suffix of desiderative verbs : -opka.
s. Acts con.sidered in regard to degree of accomplishment :

rtrt. Inchoative suffixes: -i\ga, -Ala, -t'ga, -tampka.

bb. Continuative suffixes: -kiinka, -tanma, -tchna, -uya.

cc. Act accomplished only in part: -kshka, -uya.

dd Completive suffix: -61a.

ee. Durative suffixes: -anka, -I'lta.

Nominal suffixes will be discussed in separate sections on derivation,
under "Substantive", "Adjective", and "Numeral", q. v.

III.— INFLECTION.

The process of thinking is the application of the rational principles of
logic in considering concrete or abstract matters. Logic is a principle pre-
siding also over the formation of language, but it is not the only principle.
If language embodied nothing else but logic expressed by sound, then all
languages would be embodiments of the same logical or metaphysical prin-
ciples; or, in other .vords, all languages and dialects would agree in their

INFLECTION AND DERIVATION.

399

morphology, or, at least, in their syntax. (Changes in language through his-
toric development would then be excluded; there would be no distinction
between languages poor and rich in affixes, or between the various kinds
of verbs which now differ so much morphologically.

In language as a product of nature, we can distinguish the efl'ects of
physical (phonetic) laws and of psj^chological principles; what is created
or formed by these is finally subjected to rational logic, or the principles
of reasoning, by which grammatic categories are established. The degree
in which human intellect succeeds in molding the sound-groups, words,
or conventional signs of language to suit requirements, differs with every
people inhabiting the globe, and also with every successive period of the
development of its language. Thus we have, outside of the logical or rea-
soning principle, other principles in language, all of which we may compre-
hend under the name conventional.

The logical principles at work in forming languages are clearly put in
evidence in the various degrees in which we see the various parts of speech
differentiated among themselves. The more precisely the subject is made
distinct from the predicate or from the attribute morphologically, the better
we can at once recognize each of them, and also the object, by the gram-
matic form or position in the sentence. The most highly organized of all,
the Aryan family of languages, clearly distinguishes not only the verb
from the noun and the substantive from the adjective, but also the different
uses of the noun by suffixes indicating number and case. In the inflection
of its words, affixes of a relational import are prevailingly employed, while
the agglutinative languages use both, relational and material, almost indis-
criminately, and by many of them the inflections are overloaded with addi-
tions of a concrete, material nature, which by other languages are relegated
to separate parts of speech. Exactly the same may be said of the mode of
deriving words from other words; in some languages this mode is a simple
and sober one, in others it is cumulative, holophrastic, and so polysynthetic
as to obscure the sense.

In the following pages I intend to show the method which the Klamath
language of Oregon has followed in its morphologic aspects As to gram-
matic terminology, many new terms had to be invented to do justice to the

400

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

peculiar laws governing this liinguage and its idiomatic features. Connois-
seurs will readily acknowledge that for certain forms in American languages,
espociially the verbals, it is exceedingly difficult to invent new terms satis-
factory in every respect. Tlie best method would be to establish teinis
taken from the language itself

The noun-verb, which I call verb for the sake of brevity, has the most
varied inflection of all the parts of Klamath speecli, combining nominal
with verbal forms. A sketch of the verb will, tliorefore, most appropriately
stand at the head of the inflectional section of Klamath morphology.

THE VERB.

Structuie of the verb.

The verb is a word of the language which predicatively announces an
act performed or a state «>r condition undergone by its subject. It is com-
posed of a basis or stem, and of one or several affixes. The naked basis by
itself possesses no distinct nominal or verbal character; the affixes <rener-
ally determine its (juality as noun or verb in the sentence. Bases or stems
are composed of a radical syllable and of affixes, mainly of a pronominal
origin, which are intended to form derivatives from the radix. The final
syllable or syllables of the verb are made up of inflectional affixes. The
radix and its qualities and changes are described at length on page 247 sq.
Examples of the mode of connecting affixes with the radix are given under
each of the prefixes and suffixes, and also page 280 sq.

Some verbs, formed without any suffix of derivation, will be found
tuider suffix -a; the larger part of them siiow thematic roots.

In Klamath, no formal or phonetic distinction is made between the in-
flection of transitive and of intransitive verbs. Not only is the passive voice
like the active, but in the noun the direct object has the same suffix as the
indirect object, viz., -ash.

The root, connected with its affixes of derivation, constitutes the simple
form of the verb; to this are appended the inflectional .suffixes to form
tenses, modes, verbals, etc. The simple form of the verb terminates more
freipiently in consonants than in vowels. The enormous majority of all

THE VERB. INFLECTION.

401

verbs end in the inflective ending -a, which I call the suffix of the declara-
tive mode; it is the universal verbiHer, and most verbs of the Dictionary
appear with it. This -a is dropped in a few verbs only, which terminate in
-la (iila) and in -na, and even of these the large majority preserve the full
endings -la and -na. A limited number : verbs end in -i (-e) and -u (-o),
which are derivational affixes; some of the.se were shortened from ia. -ua,'
and some are emphasized upon the last syllable.*

From all these various phonetic processes result five varieties of inflec-
tion in the Klamath verb, which diff^er little from each other. From the
final sound of the verb, I have named them as follows:

1. The A-inflection.

2. The U-inflection.

3. The I-inflection.

4. The L-inflection.

5. The N-inflection.

By appending a nominal ending to the simple form of the verb nomina
verbalia are formed. Cf "Substantive."

INFLECTION OF THE VERB.

Compared with the lengthy paradigms of other North American lan-
guages, especially of those spoken east of the Mississippi River, the inflec-
tion of the Klamath verb is very simple and poor in forms. It has no
special form for the passive and impersonal voice, does not possess the
category of number except in intransitive verbs, and (ifew transitives, has
no real personal inflection, possesses two tenses only, and a quite limited
number of modes. It incorporates neither the pronominal nor the nominal
object into the verb.

The conjugation of the finite verb, viz., the verb connected with a pro-
nominal or nominal subject, is brought about by a personal pronoun stand-
ing usually before the verb and separated from it. The two participles can
also become connected with separate personal pronouns, but when the verb
appears as a verbal it connects itself with possessive pronouns. Participles

Of T '^"^^TT^ir.'"^ T" *'"' '"'"'' -" '""""""^ (l«ciau„n«T,ra ..o,uin,mn. narrative «ro fr^qnen*;
Cf. Texts 70, b; 78, , ■ VH, 3. It frequently fall-s ..If in tlie infl. suffix -uga, -oka: -ug, -uk, -ok, etc.
26

402

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATU LANGUAGK.

and verbals, again, connect with the auxiliary verb gi to be, to cxht, and thud
form a ([uite extensive array of forms constituting a perii)hra8tic conjuga-
tion. Finally, the large majority of verbs possess a distributive form, the
use and meaning of which differs essentially from that of the absolute form.
The same tenses, modes, and verbals exist her«^, ' • v <t foiUitu by the same
phonetic processes as in the absolute form.

TENSE INFLECTION.

Tense, as a distinct grammatic form, is very litti'^ developed in Klamath.
Here, as well as in many other languages, there are only two tense-forms,
one for the completed and the other for the incompleted act or state expressed
by the verb; and in Klamath both forms, whether appearing in the verb or
in some substantives (cf. -uish, suffix), originally had a locative character
now pointing to distance in time only.

The tense of the completed action usually terminates in -a, and stands
for the present as well as for the past or preterit of other languages. I call
it the PRESENT TKNSE in the following pages, and in the Sioux-Dakota, where
it also occurs, the granunarian Stephen R. Riogs has named it aoriM, which
means unUmitcd, indefinite in regard to time. When the Klamath Lake or
Modoc Indian places no temporal adverb before or after the verb to specify
the time of the act or state, it is supposed to occur at the present time, or
at the time being; when he adds to it hu'nk, unk, bun, in Modoc hii, the
act«is placed in the past tense, and the verb may then be called a preterit.
This particle may also be replaced by some other tenqjoral adverb, or the
context may unmistakably point to an act performed in the prst, and then
no temporal particle is needed. The language possesses a large number of
these particles to express the distance in time, corresponding to our to-day,
now, recently, a while ago, years ago, etc. To the verb in the present tense the
Northern dialect sometimes prefixes the particle: a, now, which can be identi-
fied with ha at hand, in hand; whereas hunk, though intranslatable, corre-
sponds best to yonder, then, and is often coalescing with tchui then: tchiiyuk,
tchiiyunk for tchui hilk, tchui hunk. This particle hunk, unk has to be
kept clearly distinct from the pronoun demonstrative hunk, bun, huk, and
also from iln, una (for lin ha), also a tempor i! particle, "sometime fron)

INFLECTION FOlt TENSE.

403

now , which we often meet after verbs in the present and the future tense-
form. HAnk, h,1n has entirely lost its former nature of an objective pro-
noun that, for it connects itself with intransitive as well as with transitive
verbs:

nft tia'ma, nil a tia'ma I am hungry.
nfl hilnk tiii'ma I was hungry.
i a shuiiktcha you are iveeping.
i unk shuiiktcha you were iveeping.
nat shlda, nad a ahlii'a tve see.
nat hftiik shlea hunk, tve saw him.

_ The tense-form of the uncompleted act or state terminates in -uApka
m rare instances contracted into -opka, -upka (which is a homonymous
suffix d,st.nctly differing), and is called by me the future tense. Its func-
tions are not always strictly temporal, for ml genuapka may stand for /
shall go, I wdl go, I have to go, I must go, I could go. If a verb in the future
tense stands in a principal clause preceded by an incident clause, the future
act IS expressed, though more in Modoc than in Klamath Lake, bv the pres-
ent tense followed by tak, takah.* H.lnk, lulk may also accompany the
future tense, as it does the conditional mode, but then it points to distance
in future, and not in the past. Cf 10.^ 8. Tchek, tchcl often precedes the
future tense, frequently only for the purpose of emphasis; iln, una does so
too, but more in Modoc than in Klamath Lake. The future in -uupka is
inflected through all -rbals like the present form; and, as far as form is
concerned, can be considered as a derivative of it. Its ending is composed
of the verb wa to live, exist, grow, sit, and of the distancial suffix -pka Cf
the suffixes Apka, -pka.

The Klamath language has no means of distinguishing clearly between
the senses called in Greek Aorist and Perfect, or between the French Passe
defini and Passd inddfini, nor can it express the Second Future by a separate
form The Latin and Greek Imperfect, when referring to lengtli of time or
to the continuance of an action or state while another act is performed can
often be e xpressed witli^ accuracy by the^ffixes -kanka, -t^imna, -uta. ' The

* Examples will be fouud iu the SyutaiL ~~ ~~

404

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

pHrticipial ending -(')]ank, -ulank corresponds pretty closely to onr phijierfec
tense when introduced by the particle after: pa-ulank ofttr harhif/ ciitcn;
from i)a-(')la to quit eativf/, j)iin to eat. In the verbs of nuiviiig, going, tiav-
eling, a circumscriptive form for this same tense exists in the sufllix -tka :
gankanktkank ([fler ret urni)i(/ from the chase, after havhif/ hinted; from gank-
aiiktka to return from huntinff, gankanka to hunt. But the i)a8t-pre8ent tense
is used just as often to express the pluperfect, e. g., spunfn 1 had yiven, 20,
18. For other means to express that tense, cf Syntax.

A list of sentences embodying the circumscriptive temporal inflection
of the verb runs as follows:

nA pan, nu a pan / am eating.

at a ml pan / am eating now, or was, had Ijcen eating at the time.

nA a hu'nk pan / did eat, I ate, I have eaten.

\\la a ml pan / ate recently, a few dags ago, this week (Mod.), sometime

ago (Kl.).
A'na nu pun / ate a white ago.
ma'ntchaga nu pan / ate a good while ago.
ma'ntch a ml i)iin I ate several months ago, or last gear, long ago.
tank, ma'ntchtoks, nfatoks ma'ntch ml pan / ate at a remote period. .
ml pa-uiipka, ml a pa-uapka / shall or will eat or have to eat.
nA a An pa-uapka / shall eat bg and hg.
tche'k nA a pa-uapka / s/m// eat after a while.
nu a pan tak, pantak / shall then eat (Mod.).

MODAL INFLECTION.

In contradistinction to the " Nominal forms of the verb", the infini-
tive, verbals, and participles, I call modes only the inflected forms of the
finite verb. Modes are not inflected here in the same manner as in European
languages for person and number; but, like the tenses and verbals, they
assume the reduplicated or distributive form. Only one of the verbal forms,
the verbal indefinite, can take one of the modal forms (-t) observed in the
finite verb.

Three modes exist in this language: (1) the declarative mode; (2) the
conditional mode; (3) the imperative mode.

THE MODES OF THE VERB.

406

1. The dedaiative mode ia tlie Himple fortjj of the verb ; it usually ternii-
nates in the declarative partide a, wliic^li mow becomes an inflectional suttix.
In the future tense, this mode terminates in -uapka. Its functions nearly
correspond with those of our indicative mode.

2. The condifiomi mode appends -t to the simple form of the verbs follow-
ing the A- inflection, and -at to those following the U-, I-, L- and N- inflec
tion. Some verbs in -na will syncopate the vowel l)etween n- and -t, as
shuhia to sin//, pi shufnt he maij sin/f, for shuituit. Sometimes tiie ending -t
becomes nasalized, as in k(')kant hilk, for k(')kat he may bite. One of the
nominal forms of the verb, the verbal indefinite, forms a conditional by
suffixing -t (not -at) to suffix -sh: k'lcka to die, k'leksh the act of dybin,
k'k'ksht/or haiuufi died, after dyinij, when dijint/.

This mode wholly differs from our subjunctives or optatives; it expresses
by one term II whole conditional sentence, which we would introduce by such
conjunctions as when, if after, on account of for The suffix -t is nothing
but the abbreviated: at, now, then, at the time heiny; and if it had to be para-
l)hrased, -t as a suffix would correspond to " under these circumstances."
The whole of lis functions will be developed in the Syntax. The same par-
ticde is sometimes appended to other words than verbs,^ exactly in the same
manner as we see it done in the conditional mode : kako belat nothim) but
bones now: 101, 10, which stands for kako pil at.

The future in uapka has no conditional mode, for here the declarative
mode itself is often employed in that sense. Readers should take care not
to confound the conditional mode with the second person of the plural in
the imperative : li'ielat may kill, and li'ielat ! kill ye !

3. The imperative mode, or mode of compulsion, appears in two form.s —
the imperative proper and the exhortative mode.

a. The imperative proper, jussive, or mode of behest, command, is formed
of the simple form of the verb, or base, increased in the singular by i, i, ik!
thou! and in the plural by at! ye! These personal pronouns of the second
person are loosely connected with tlie verb, and may stand before or after it;
they never form a part of the verb itself, and are often pronounced separately.

Ill

ft-.;;-.

406

GKAMMAK OF TIIK KLAMATH LANOUAOE.

The verb can even j)re8erve its usual ending in -a, when the pronoun stands
before it. Examples :

sliApa to say:

shAp'i ! sh/ipi ! sh/ipa ik ! say thou ! suy !
sh^p'at ! shflpat 1 say ye !

shnuka to holdfast:

ishnukil i-tshnukil shni'iki ! t shnuka ! shnuka i ! hold thou fast t
atshniikat! shnukut! at shnuka ! hold ye tight!

shufna to sing :

shufn i ! shufni ! i shufn ! sing !

shuln' at ! shufnat ! at shufn ! sing ye! .

Sometimes, by addressing one representative person, as a chief, a whole
multitude is addressed sinuiltaneously ; then i, (k, fke, fki thou may be used
instead of at, a ye : i shuin ! sing ye ! C'f. DO, 12-14.

h. Tho exhortative form in -tki, tgi is identical in form with the verbal
intentional to be considered below ; it puts the command in a mild, affable
form, and sometimes stands for the imperative proper, and so does the future
in -uj'ipka. The exhortative often nasalizes tiie final -t, and throws off the
-ki, -gi for the sake of brevity, as huliatchantki they should run on, 54, 8,
or huhatchant. Cf 40, 4. In this mode -tki is contracted from -tko gi and
a finite verb of command, desire etc. is omitted : shana-uli ml huhatchantko
gl / want (them) to he running on. The exhortative goes through all three
persons of the singular and jdural, and in the first and third persons may
be rendered by hiidshantki nii let me run, hi'idshantki huk let him, her run.
The future in -uapka has no exhortative form, because that function is
embodied in its declarative mode.

The three modes just discussed are also reproduced in what I call the
periphrastic conjugation with the auxiliary gi to be.

A potential mode is formed by adding the particle ak, Ak a, ka to the
finite verb — a process which properly belongs to the Syntax.

THE PAKTICIPLK8.

NOMINAL FOKMH OK THK VKRB.

407

What I cull the rioiniiial tbrms of the verb are all inflected for Heveralty,
but not all for case. Thoy are : («) participle ; (h) verbals. Two of Oie
latter can form a periphrastic conjiigation with the auxiliary verb gi, also
both participles.

a. Participles.

The languu^ro forms two pa'-ticiples, which in their functions correspond
somewhat to our participles in -iuff and -eii, -t. They occur in every verb,
and end in —

(1) -n (Mod.), -nk (Kl.).

(2) -tko, -tk (Kl.), -tko, -tku, -tka, -tk (Mod.).

1. The participle in -n, -nk I call, for short, the participle of the present,
althoufrh it is indefinite in regard to tense and only applies to the time
referred to by the Unite verb of the sentence or clause to which it belongs.
TIius it may be said to refer to the time hcin,,. When appended to verbs in
-a, till' suffix is -jvn, -atik; to verbs in -u, either -un, -unk, or -uan, -uank.
The other three inflections in -i, -1, -n run as follows:

gi to he, exist, Mod. gian, Kl. gi'ank.

ftkal to pick up. Mod. ftk(a)Ian, Kl. ftklank.

shlfn to shoot, Mod. shlkn, Kl shlfank.

The participial suffix -n, as it appears in Modoc, is more archaic than
the -nk of Klamatli Lake, in which the -k is probably the agglutinated verb
gi to be. Hnt even in Klamath Lake the -n form occurs frequently enough :

tchakayan stalling in the bush, 24, \. Gf. 23, 21.

taluiilxan Ii/iny on his back, 24, 14.

shulatchtilan tcl ■ i/a to be on one^s knees.

Palan I^:-ush Dri/ Lake, and other local names of both dialects.

This participle is not susceptible of inflection, except through redupli-
cation. The phonetic irregularities occurring in the participle of the verbs
in -n, -na will be considered under the heading of the N-inflection.

408

OUAMMAU OF TllK KhAMATH LANOUAiSK.

Wlien joined to tho poi-Honnl pronoutiH nu T, t thou otc, i\m participle
al«() forms ii Hort of u fiiiito vorb, wliicli occiirw but Holdoin in our Tcxtn,
aud luiH to bo considfrt'd uh a tmfnt'nc form. Cf. kiuliiiyiiult is in the habit
ofstiikinff out oliliqucly, 71,2; also 87, 2, *. In some instances this form in
-ank may be an abbreviation of the Verbal suflix anka, (| v.

2. The participle in -tko, abbr -tk, in Modoc -tko, -tku, -tka, -tk, is not
HO inditlerunt in rofjard to tense as that in -n, -nk, for it refers uiaiidy to
the pant. Throu^rji its inHection and position in the sentence it is invested
witli the (jualitios of an adjective noun, and as such it describes quality,
ownership etc. ac(piired in the past. When formed from transitive verbs,
it usually assumes passire functions, thouffh there are luaiiy exce|)tions to
this. The concrete and abstract nouns, verbal adjectives, and otlu-r words
formed by -tko have all been considered under SufHx -tko, q. v.

There are many instances when participles in -tko refer not to the past,
but to other tenses, especially the present.

Instances where intransitive verbs have formed participles in -tko are:
gftko been, or possessed of ; gc'ntko harintf walked, 12/), 1 ; tsuxat;(ant(-ko),
17!>, <) and Note; snawed.sh wcnuitk a widow, 82, f) ; sliashamoks lolatko
who have lont relatires, 82, 5 and Note ; j^uli'tko harint/ crept into, etc.

In the conversational form of languajje, the ending -tko is sometimes
cut oflF, and what remains is the verb with the last syllable emphasized:
kewA for kewatko broken, paha for pahatko dried, k'leka for k'lekatko
deceased.

The auxiliary gi to Ite connects itself in all its forms with the participle
in -tko: nA lolatko gi I am a belierer, 44, 22; vvil'tko gU\g for bein/f frozen.

This participle is formed \:y appending -tko, -tk, in the oblique cases
-pkash, -pkam etc., to the full, suffixed form of the verb, as mbdkatko, d.
nd)ambakatko broken down, from mbaka to break down. Verbs ending in
-ala, -la, -ana, -nsi, however, elide a after -1 and -n into -altko, -ai\tko ; for
which process cf. List of Suffixes. The suffix -tko inflects for case and
severalty just like any otlier adjective, and a full paradigm will be given
below. The various forms in that paradigm can be well understood only
after a thorough study of the nominal inflection.

TIIH INFINITIVI'J,
b. Vrrhals.

409

For wniit of u l)Ottor term, the niiiiie rrrhal Ih iiHod lioni to comprohend
a second cIuhh of iiomiiml f(».-iaH of the Khuiijith verb, contuiriing: (1) the
iiifiiiitivo, (2) tlie vorbiil iiideHiiito with its cHHo-iiitiortioii, (.'{) the verbal
coiiditioiiiil, (4) the verbal preterit, ('») the V('rl)iil (causative, (d) the verbal
diirative, (7) the verbal iiiteiitioiial. The verbal foriim eorrespoiidiiic. to
thoHe in KnH:liHh are the iiiJinitive and the participloH in -/«// and -ed, 4
when connected with various conjunctions and prepositions. In Latin they
correspond to tlie infinitive, the f,'ernnd, jrerundivuni, supinuni, and to some
of the participles. The Kn}j[lish infinitive is expressed by the simple form
of the verb in -a ; sometimes and more frequently by the verbal indefinite
and other verbals. No verbal, except the verbal in -sh, has any nominal
inflection ; when verbs in -tki, -uta, -uga, -oqa are inflected, they are real
verbs, and not verbals.

1. The injinitive

Is formed of the simple form of the verb, with the declarative -a
usually sufli.<ed. It resembles in its function the English infinitive, but
differs from it by its rare occurrence in the spoken language. Still, in
(pioting a verb fc itself or for insertion in a vocabulary, the Indian always
uses this granunatic form. The Latin and German infinitive is originally
a daiire of an inflected verbal, but in Klamath this form shows no inflection
except for severalty. The following examples may give an idea of its
functions :

sha't'la kayaktcha he cmplo/jcd to pursue (thoin), 44, 2.

sha gen' a mat shliia theij then went to see, as reported.

kAk' (in ftklan tj)i'wa shewana patgiuga he told (her) to pick up bones and

to give them (to others) to cat.
ku-isht'wank shlii'pCle rejoieiuf/ to meet (him) affuin, 96, 5.
nia'shishtat sh(-usha shiitelakish salve to rub on sores.
tfdslii hiik (for hii gi) tiimenank if I hear (them) to be f/ood, 08, 9.
Bhahami'iyank shnuntatka sending for somebody to act as interpreter,

66, 15.
hil lahiki lu'mkank kshaggaya the judges ordered to hang them, 44, 6.

"^ .

■'*>.,

410

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

It has long been disputed whether Indian languages have a real infinitive,
and therefore I have given a number of passages referring to the question.
Some of these infinitives could be explained by the principle of co-ordina-
tion of sentences, others by ai)heresi8 of -tki, as in the first santence:
ki'iyaktcha for kayaktchdtki, because the verbs embodying an order, mes-
sage, announcement usually have the verbal in -tki or -sh after them.* But,
nevertheless, the for;.j exists as a verbal distinct from all other verbals.

2. The verbal indefinite.

This verbal ends in -sh, -s, and is the only verbal undergoing inflection
for case in the absolute and distributive form Like the other verbals, it is
dependent on some finite verb (predicative personal verb), and the sentence
in which it is embodied would be expressed in English by an incident
clause. The verb on which verbals depend is either gi to be or some other
temporally inflected verb; if it is gi, this gi is often suppressed for

brevity.

When the logical subject of the verbal indefinite of a transitive verb
is a noun, it sometimes stands in the possessive case in -am; if a pronoun,
it is expressed by the possessive and not by the personal pronoun. Thus
we have to say: maklaksam shishukasr-h the fight of the Indians, gd-u gd-ish
my departure; lit. "the warring performed by the Indians", "the going
away by me." These verbals indefinite have hence to be understood in a
passive sense, and the same holds good of the preterit verbal in -uish, which
does not inflect for case unless it turns into a subatantive noun.

But when the subject stands in the subjective case and the pronoun in
the personal form, the transitive verb is in the active voice, and has to be
translated as such. Examples of both constructions will be found below.

There are two verbals indefinite: (1) one in -ash, referring to the act
expressed by the verb, the action in abstracto in present or past; (2) an-
other in -ish, referring to a person as grammatic or logical subject of the
act expressed by the verb in the present or past. On account of rapid pro-
nunciation, slurring over, or syncope of the vowels -a- or -i-, both verbals
often become indistinguishable, and are easily confounded. Many verbs

• Cf. what is said under " Verbal lutcntional," p. 416.

THE VERB4^L INDEFINITE.

411

have only one of the two forms, especially those ending in -i. Thus we
have-

shlda to see, to he seen; shldash, contr. shle'sh, sle's the act 0/ seeing, hav-
ing seen, being seen, vision, the ''looks of something"; d shleshlash the act of
seeing each object; shle-ish, contr. shle'sh one ivho sees or has seen, is seen; d,
shleshla-ish each of those seeing or having seen, being seen.

kt'dslia to sprout, kedshash tJie fact or act of sprouting, present or past ;
d. kdktchash (of each plant); ke'dshish the sj)routing of it, the having sprouted,
d. kt^chish (of each plant).

Tiiese two endings, -ash and -ish, occur again in the nominal derivatives
from verbs or nomim verbalia, and are discussed at length in tiie list of suf-
fixes. The verbs in -n usually drop the -n in forming them: pAn to eat,
pdsh, pa'sh for pa-ash and for pji-ish.

The mode of rendering these verbals in J^nglish is very different, and
generally a dependent clause has to be formed. We thus obtain two par-
allel inflections of the two verbals indefinite:

(1) shleash the act of seeing, having seen, being seen, having been seen.
shli'asham the seeing by others than the subject of the sentence,
shk'ashti for seeing, on account of seeing, being seen.
shleasiie'mi, shleashii'm at the time of seeing, being seen.
shk'aslii ivhilc, when seeing, being seen at a certain spot,
shlcashtka going to see, on the point of seeing, being seen.

(2) shld-ish one who sees, saw, is seen, or has been seen.

shle-isham others seeing, -v being seen by others than the subject of the

sentence,
shli'-ishti for, on account of one seeing, being seen.
shle-ishe'mi at the time of seeing, being seen.
shie-ishi whih; when one is seeing, being seen at a certain spot,
shlt'-ishtka one going to see, or on the point of being seen.

The above paradigm, compared with that of a substantive, shows that
the objective and several of the locative cases are not represented, and that
the idea of time is prevailing.

412

OKAMMAU OF Tllli: KLAMATH LANGUAOK.

■'«ti

It will be seen that these two pamllel inflections of the verbal (-ash, -ish)
coincide almost entirely as to their function or signification in the oblique
cases, and materially differ only in the subjective case. At any rate, the
difference in the oblique cases is too sli<j;iit to be kept up by the natives,
and thus they use only one form for the oblitjue cases, which is formed
either from -ash or from -ish, but more coumionly from the latter. When
the suffixes are appended to vowels contraction usually takes place, as slile'sh
for shk'-ash and for shU'-ish.

Subjoined are a few examples of verbs standing in the suJ)jectii>e case
of the verbal indefinite: («) intransitive verbs, then (h) transitive verbs, in
the active and passive voice.

(a) maklaks U'witchta kc-ish, or ge'sh, the Indians refused to go, 34, 9; 36,
14. Of. Kif), 9.

kiuks kii-i shana-uli gi'mpelisb. the conjurer did not want to return, 34, 8,

tunepni nutfsh havin;) kindled fire five times, 70, 3.

kii'shgug gu'tgapC'lish for being unalla to climb back, 95, 6.

sha nanuk slnlku'lki-uapk kshi'ul;^ish they will all assemble to dance,
140,3.

(ft) nu k'k'wi shishu'kash, shu-utank(a)sh shana-uli I quit fighting (and)

wish to park 11, 14, 1. 2.
nii'paks nil shatashtatpft'sh the disease I am removing from my mouth,

153; 4.
Mo'dokni ktaktanapatko shftko shlu-ish ^//e Modocs look sleepy; lit. "the

Modocs sleepy-alike to be seen", 91, 7. Cf 73, (j.
piVks unions shitko shleash camass is like onions to look at, 148, 13. Cf.

113, 17.
snawedsh kiuksam sfuks (for shiukish) the woman killed by the conjurer,

69, 2.
wiuliigalam shapfyash upon the message sent by the antelopes, 122, 10.
wiiidsish k'liika the beaten one died; lit. "he died after having been

beaten", 134, 10.
ku-i huki' tsutish gi'ntak gi in spite of being doctored she gets ivorse, 68, 7.
ndani Boshtin lakiam ne-ulki'ash three contracts having been made by the

American Government, 36, 14.

THE VERBAL INDEFINITE.

413

E-ukshikfsliam ktchfnksh tCmi^shkash the rails having been ahsUaded by

the Lake Indians, 35, 10.
mi hu gt'-u stfntish you are ikar to me,- lit. "yours ia the being loved

by me."

A combination of two of these verbals in one sentence is found in: aha
nen mjishisli glsh shapa they say he has become or is diseased, 140, [k

The verbal indefinite in -sham represents the possessive case But the
-am is not simply appended to the -sh of the verbal; it is a combination
of the pronoun sham, sam of them, and the verbal indefinite. This will be
shown more at length in the Syntax, and I consider it sufficient to give
here one example to show that the subject referred to by sham (-am) always
stands in the plural number and differs from the subject of the i .in sen-
tence: P'laiwash shh^a spri'nsham (for spunfsh sham) tupakshash m'na the
Eagle saw that they had kidnapped his younger sister; lit. "the Eagle saw the
act of theirs to kidnap his younger sister."

'V\\Q verbal indefinite in -shti, -sti is not often used, but is originally of a
locative import, and hence can be used in an additive function. Cf Syntax.
It is used in a causative sense in the following sentence taken from a Modoc
text: vud()pka sha u'nk Kc'tnushash nanuk Ank tchulish Afshisham tutashti
they beat KPmush for having taken away all the shirts belonging to Aishish.

'Vhe verbal indefinite in -sh'e'mi, -'jhdm is purely temporal; will be dis-
cussed in Syntax.

The verbal indefinite in -shi, -si is temporal and local simultaneously ; will
be dis(^ussed in Syntax.

The verbal desidcrative in -shtka (or -shtkak) expresses a tendency to-
ward, a wishing for, a "going to be", a "being on the ,oint of" the act or
state embodied in the verb, and occurs in intransitive as well as transitive
verbs. Grammatically speaking, it is the instrumental case of the verbal
indefinite. It is generally connected with the auxiliary gi to be, exist; gi
either stands separately after it, or becomes affixed to it in the shape of -k,
or is omitted altogether. Thus we can say: ml a punuashtka gi / want to
drink, or nA a punuashtkak, or nu a punuaslitka, all of these forms being
equivalent to : nfl a piinuash shanaholi. The verb gi is necessary to com-

5 =

414

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

plete the sense of the verbal; and when gi or inflectional forms of it are

omitted, this has to be considered as an irregularity.

To the examples to be found in Syntax, I add here:

Wakaf hilap shapash a hiln shneki'ipkashtkak i? why do you want to have

two moons goiny to shine up there (simultaneously)! 105, 10; from shnt'ka

to be lit up, to shine; shnekupka to shine from a distance, or from above, up there,

3. The verbal conditional.

The verbal conditional in -sht is formed from the verbal indefinite by
appending the suffix -t, which is also the mark of the conditional mode in
the finite verb. Its function is to indicate the condition or supposition under
which the action or state expressed by the finite verb of the sentence may
become a reality. In most instances we have to express it by a clause de-
pendent on the principal clause, and its subject has to stand in the objective
case, whether it be a noun or a pronoun. Though in its temporal function
it is indefinite like the verbal in -sh, -s, it refers more frequently to the past
than to any other tense. Unlike the two forms of the indefinite in -ash and
in -ish, there seems to be one form only for each verb, either the one in -asht,
or that in -isht. The subject of the verbal conditional is always another
than that of the principal clause; and this verbal, if not always strictly
condition^,., sometimes expresses possibility, supposition, conjecture. More
concerning it will be found in Syntax.

This verbal is formed:
pattldsha to strain, stretch out; patadshasht, d. psvptadshasht for having

stretched out; when, after ^ on account of having strained, stretched out.
shapfya to tell somebody; mish shapfyasht because, after you said or told;

mish shashapfyasht on account of your saying or telling at various

times or sundry places.
tchiika to perish; tchu;(asht, d. tchutcho^asht when, after perishing.

4. The verbal preterit.

This verbal is constructed from the simple form of the verb by append-
ing -uish. It is not susceptible of inflection like the verbal indefinite, or
like the substantives in -uish, but always refers to acts performed or states

VAiaOUS VERBALS.

415

undergone in the past or preterit tense. According to the contents of the
s(3ntence, it may stand for our phiperfect, and in English rendering has, in
most cases, to be expressed by a dependent clause. It forms no conditional
verbal in -uisht, because the form in -sht is most frequently toi.tid to express
a preterit tense, which makes a form in -uisht unnecessary. Examples :

gena to go away; g(5nuish the having gone, retreated; after going.

Umkavk^ to speak; gd-u hdmkankuish, d. hehamkankuish, "my having
spoken", the fact of my speech or speeches having been delivered.

shnilpka to flatten; shnapkuish the former flattening process, the past act
of flattening; d. shnush'npkuish each of the above acts.

5. The verbal causative.

The primary function of the suffix -(5ga, -I'.ga, -ok, -uk is a causative
one, being appended to the simple form of the verb to state the physical
cause or the reason why the act or state expressed by the finite verb of the
sentence is, has been, or will be performed. Modocs prefer the full forms
-6gn, -uga; Klamat' ^nke Indians, -ok, -uk (with accent receding). Forms
in oga etc. are not periphrastically conjugable with gi to be, nor do they
show any inflectional change. In English, this verbal has to be often cir-
cumscribed by a sentence; its subject is the same as that of the principal
clause.

shapa to declare, tell; shapoga, shapuk for the purpose of telling; d.
shashpoga.

shlt'wi to blow, as winds; shle-uyuk because the wind blows or blew; d.
shleshluyuk because every one of the winds blew, or because the wind
bkw at different times.

wenoya to be or become a widow; wen6yuk on account of having become a
widotv.

A secondary function of -6ga is that of forming a verbal with a temporal
signification, resulting from the causative one and expressed by our con-
junction when:

niika to be ripe; nukuk when ripe; lit. "because ripened."
tfinignu to travel, march; tamfinug i when you go or travel.

■ 'IS;)

416

GKAMMAK OF TUfc) KLAMATH LANGUAOli).

Readers should take care not to confound the verbal -»jga, -I'iga with
di^rivative verbs formed by the homonymous suffix -oga, implying the idea
of location hmdc, within, and other meanings ; nor with the enclitic pronoun
hilk, lik this one, he, she, or the adverb huk (for hiink) which points to the
past tense, as in lewatkuk after playing, 109, 15, for Icwatko liAk. In some
instances huk, uk even stands for ak, hak only, but; cf. 8J, 1, and Note.

6. The verbal durative.

It is formed by appending -lita, -6ta to the simple form of the verb, a
suffix which corresponds to our while, whilst; or, if the verbal is rendered
by a noun or participle, to our durim/, pendvif/. So this verbal intimates
that the action or state which they express lasted during the time of the
act expressed by the finite verb of the sentence. When the act or state
expressed by the verbal continues longer than that of the main verb, the
stiffix -uta, -uta corresponds to our after. This suffix is neither coiijugablo
with gi to he, nor susceptible of inHection ; it has therefore to be kept dis-
tinct from -uta forming derivative verbs as we find them in 35, 4. 83, 2.
185 ; 43. Cf List of Suffixes, under -uta.

gena to fjo, walk; genuta while walking.
gukna to climb; gukCiu'ita while climhing up, 95, 3.
gull to creep into; kule-(')ta while creejunt/ into.
homkanka to speak; hemkankota daring (his) speech.
stAwa to starve, fast; sta-«)ta while fasting.

7. The verbal intentional.

This verbal ends in -tki, -tgi, which is sometimes mispronounced -tka,
-tga, and gives the purpose, aim, or intention by which the action of the
finite verb, from which the verbal depends, is performed. Thus it answers
to our iu order to, for the purpose of, and in its form does not diflPer from
the exiiortative form of the imperative mode. More frequently than Modoc
does the Klamath Lake dialect connect it with forms of gi to be, especially
with its causative form giuga, gfug. In this connection the infinitive is
often substituted for the form in -tki. In a few instances -tki is found to

THE VERB WITH PRONOUNS.

417

8taiul for -tko g}; for instance: tcluTks nu gatpiintki I shall come very soon;
tlien, of course, it is not the verbal intentional.

liiela to kill; huHtki, lucqtki gfug, and l.'.ela gfug in order to kill.

tchutna to f,o and treat; tchutantki gfug /or the purpose of treating, doc-
toring, for medical treatment, 65, 18.

gt<-upka to ascend; ge-upkAtki gfug on account o/ (their) ascent, 105, 2.

It is important to observe that the combination -tki gfug is often con-
tracted into -tkiuga, -tgfug; ludltki gii'.ga becomes ludltkiug; mevAtki gfug-
meftgiug, patki gii'iga: pAtgiug.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS CONNECTED WITH THE VERB.
The personal pronoun, whether used as subject or object of a verb is
not incorporated into the hody of the verb. At the choice of the one speaking
these pronouns n,ay be placed before or after the finite verb, separated or
not separated from it by particles or other words intervening. Most pro-
nouns, especially when monosyllabic, are accentless, and therefore either
proclitic or enclitic ; but, in spite of such deceptive appearances, the hod,, of
the verb does not incorporate these pronouns within itself, and a genuine
verbal inflection for person does not exist. This analytic feature greatly
fac.htates the acquisition of the Klamath language, and distinguishes it
clearly from many other languages of North America.

The subject-pronoun.
The subject-pronoun can eitlier precede the absolute form of the verb
which generally terminates in -a, or follow it, and in both instances the
declarative particle a, though it is in the verb already, may be inserted
between pronoun and verb. When the pronoun follows the verb, and the
verb stands in the present tense, the particle a is generally inserted between
them ; but when a preterit tense is intended, it is usually replaced by h>ln
hrtnk, hfi'nk, nnk. Thus we obtain four modes of conjugating the subject-
pronoun with the absolute form of the verb. A fifth one is added to these
which is produced by omission of the particle a, retrograding of the accent,'
syncope, apocope, or other phonetic causes, and extends over the plural and
first person of singular only. Except in the first person of the singular,

418

GUAMMAU OF TUli KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

''Mi

*" t

tliis fiftli mode occurs vcri/ rarely. In all these five series fdsba may be
accentuated also on the ultima: idslu'i. Tlie intercalation of the declarative
particle a is more fre(iiient in the northern than in the Modoc dialect.

The series of subject-pronouns will be fully discussed under "Pro-
nouns." The first persons are ml, o^, and nat; the second, i, at; but for the
third persons, various pronouns are in use which in reality are demonstrative
pronouns {ska excepted), expressing the degrees of distance from the speaker
at which the objects spoken of are supposed to stand. For the third person
singular, I have selected for the paradigm pi, pi, which points to a he, she,
or it at some distance. No inclusive and exclusive forms for we are in exist-
ence, nor is there a dxuil for any of the pronouns.

The above will give us the following paradigm for the past-present
declarative form of idsha to remove:

ANALYTIC FORMS.

SYNTHETIC FORM.

I remote

lift filNba

iii\ a fdsha

fdsba lift

fdsha a iift

fdghan

thou remoreal

i, 1 iil.sliu

1 a idslia

fdsha 1

filsha a 1

he, she, it remocea

pi i'iIhIiii

l>i a I'dslia

fdslia |ii

fdsha a pi

we renwre

iit'ul filHka

nat n idHbii.

fdslia iiilt

fdsiia a mit

fdshna

ye remove

At itlsha

at a idsha

idsha at

fd>ha a at

fdahat

they remove

sha idslia

aha a fdsha

fdsba sba

fdsha a sha

fdsbasbifdsbatcb

The distributive form i-idsha, f-idsha to remove )iian,i/ objects individu-
ally, severally, or at different times follows the same paradigm:

nil f-idsha ml a i-idsha f-idsha nu f-idsha a ml f-idshan etc.

The same may be said of the conditional in -t, as far as the four ana-
lytic series are concerned. For phonetic causes, the synthetic series is not
in use in this mode, and in the declarative mode it is used only in rapid
conversational speech.

In the second and fourth analytic form, tlie declarative particle a is
often replaced by a more emphatic one, like a-i, ha-i, hai, haftch. Like a,
these are also particles of actuality, and moreover show that the act is or
was j)erformed in the presence of the speaker, or of the one spoken to.

The imperative observes another method in forming its two jjcrsons, as
shown above; tiie exhortative shows the unif<irin ending -tki.

VERBAL INFLECTION.

419

The objcd-pronoun.

The same freedom used in placing the subject-pronoun before or after
the verb exists concerning the object-pronoun, and in combining tlie object-
pronoun with the subject-pronoun, or separating both by interposing^ the
verb or gther terms. Here a good deal depends on the importance of\oth
as parts of the sentence.

The object-pronoun of the direct object is identical with that of the
indirect object, and often becomes syncopated, or otherwise shortened, in
rapid speech. If both pronouns are placed after the verb, they often com-
bine into a synthetic phrase, and the object-pronoun of the second person
then precedes, invariably, the subject-pronoun of the first.

Paradigms of these pronominal combinations will be found under
"Pronouns."

In reflective and reciprocal verbs, the object-pronoun is expressed syn-
thetically by the prefix h-sh of the verb. See "Voices of the Verb."

VERBAL INFLECTION TO MARK SEVERALTY.
To the observing mind of the primeval Klamath Indian the fact that
sundry things were done repeatedly, at different times, or that the same thing
was done severally by distinct persons, appeared nuich more important than
the pure idea of plurality, as we have it in our language. This category
of severalty impressed itself on his mind so forcibly that he rendered^and
symbolized it in a very appropriate manner by means of the distributive
reduplication of the first syllable. As will be seen by referring to the
chapter on Reduplication, this granmiatic feature is made thoroughly dis-
tinct, as far as phonetics are concerned, from the iterative reduplication,
which serves for word-formative or derivational purposes only.

From what is said in the chapter referred to, the grammatic impor-
tance of the distributive reduplication may be studied in all its details. It
extends over all parts of speech— not only over the finite verb, but also over
all temporal, modal, participial forms of the verb— over all the verbals and
voices of the verb and their derivatives. All its various functions are re-
lated to each other, whatsoever may be the form we may select in translat-
ing them into English or other languages.

420

OKAMMAll OF TUB KLAMATH LANOUAOB.

Only a few verbs and nonnH are exenipte'l from rodupllcatiiifr, niid tliey
are so from j/urely phonetic cauHos. It i.s caHv to understand that words
hke sliniksliokshuka to smrll around can not reduphcate, on account of their
unwieUlinesH appearing oven in tlie absohite form; and tlie deHcate Heiise for
hufruistic propribties of the Klamath Indians refrains from phonetic inipos-
sihilities, as well as that of other nations. Cf also what ia said on page 267.
With such terms, severalty has to bo indicated by a circumscriptive sentence,
or by tumi mani/, turn much, niiimk all, tn'inukash everywhere, etc.

'■''■^■

THE VOICES OF TUE VHUB.

While the modern languages of Europe choose the analytic method
for expressing such voices of the verb, or (jeuera verhi, as tho passive, causa-
tive, reciprocal, and reflective forms, the chissic languages of antiquity, the
Semitic dialects, and a large number of the American languages prefer to
express them in one word. The single and comprehensive terms which they
use are derivatives of the active form of the transitive verb; some languages
add to this a medial form, purporting that an act i.s done with reference to
or in the interest of the verbal subject. All these comprehensive forms are
true expressions of the incorporating principle inmite to those languages.

For deriving the voices, the Klamath language uses prefixes, either
sounds or wiiole syllables. They are placed before the active verb, or be-
fore the intransitive verb, wherever it can form derivatives of this kind
(causative and medial verbs). This change is attended with vocalic ana-
thesis (q. V.) in some of the voices. Every one of these derivatives is
inflected like the primari/ verb from which it is derived, though there may
occur a diflference in the accentuation of the two. We have seen that
prefixes form derivatives oidy, not forms of verbal inflection.

Here the inflection of the transitive verb di>es not diff'er from that of
the intransitive, as it does in so many other languages, and it is only on
account of the peculiar formation of duals and plurals that I made a sep-
arate voice of tlie intransitive verb. The passive form is identical with the
active form. In many instances the same verbal derivative serves as a re-
flective and reciprocal \erb, and causative verbs show the same jirefix, h sh-.
These three usually diff'er from the medial foru), a voice which is charactei

ACTIVE AND PASaiVK VOICK.

421

istic for tliiH iipliiiid liuij^imge. The ItiipcrHonal verl) is iiHimlly without pre-
fix, uiid iufloctH like the other voiccH; some of their miinber also occur in
the active form.

We reserve to the verb gi t<i he, ciist, which tinswerH to our verb to he
when used in periphrastic conju^fation, tlu? hist jjlace in tiiis chapter, and
enumerate the ri</ht voices of verbs in the foll-iwiiiff order:

1. Active voice. 6. Causative voice.

2. Passive voice. 7. Intransitive voice.

3. Reflective voice. 8. Impersonal voice.

4. iNfedial voice.

T). Reciprocal voice. .9. The verb gl.

1. The active mice.

Transitive verbs, in their active voice, have with them a dire(!t object
or complement, either animate or inanimate, upon which the act pert'ormed
by the subject of the verb is directed. There are, however, many object-
less verbs, which do not require constant mention of their object in di.stinct
words, e g., to lidr, to pay ; here the adding of to ride a horse, to pay moneij,
is unnecessary in most cases. Hut with others the sentence becomes defect-
ive if the object is not named, as with to smash, to throw, to jircss. The direct
ol)ject stands in the olyective case, whether nominal or pronominal: nu a
shuli')tish shmukiitana / am wcttiiuf a fiarment. A number of verbs can add
an indirect object to the direct object, the objective case in -sh being the
same for both: knuks ish bun m'-i ! hand over that string to me! In this
volume the objectless and the objective active verb are both classed as
transitive verbs. The natural po.sition of the object is after the subject
and before the verb, which, in declarative and interrogative claujes, usually
concludes the sentence.

2. The passive voice.

Active verbs turn into passives when the sentence is reversed so tha
the direct object of the active verb becomes ilie subject, and the former
subject, losing the quality of gramnjatic subject, becomes its logical subject,
and is pointed out as such by some preposition. Thus the sentence : Tftak

422

OUAMMAU OF TUK KLAMATH LANCJUAOK.

li'ikftHli hIiKii Titak shot a ()rizj!ly hear, becoinoH, whoii turned into a paHBive
Heiitoncc, Ii'ik hIiWii 'ritiikiiin a (jrizzbi bear was shot hy Tituk.

Tlio Kiifrlisli Iuiif,'iiii<,'«> iiSMiilly irsortH to tlio auxiliary verb to he when
oxproHHiMf,' paHrtivity, but in Klaniatli th« active verb reniuinH unciianged.
The Hanio {(ranitnatic form oxiHtH for the active and for the pas«ivo voice;
when no h)gical Hubject \«, added, it iH inipoHwible but for the context to find
out which voice whh intended, ('f the foUowing oxanipIcH:

niaklaks K-ukak fdsha the Indians hrouf/ht or were brought to Fort

Klamath.
nii'iklaks ngr-'MJitka Hhiuka an Indian killed (somebody) or was killed by

an arrow.

'V\\ii ditierent modes of expressing the logical subject of the passive
verb will be discussed in Syntax, and it may be added now that the transi-
tive verb is not very often used in a j)assive sense.

Another mode of expressing passivity is to connect the past portieiple
in -tko with the auxiliary gi, and to inflect both through all tenses, modes,
and verbals of the latter :

ktuka to strike with fist:
ml a ktukatko gl / am struck.
nil a ktukatko gf-uapk / shall be struck.

koka to bite:
nil a kokaiko gi / am bitten.
i a kokatko gl't you may yet bitten.
k<')katko gfuga in order to be bitten.

In forms where gt is found, and not an inflectional form of it, as gi't,
gftki, gfug, gi'sh, gl'sht, this auxiliary is frecpiently dropped: ml k(>katko /
am bitten.

There are some verbs in the language which can not be used in anotlier
but a passive signification, o. g. : shalxita to be bewitched, to lie sick under the
tamunuash-spell, from shfla to be chronically sick; but it is more logical to
consider verbs like these as intransitives.

Ulil'LliCTlVl-: AND MEDIAL VOICE.

423

H. The rt'JivitUe voice.

In rofloctivo verlw, tliu direct object i« iiIho tho Hul)joct of tlio verl'. To
exproHH tliiH relation thu Kii^lisli laii^uit^u Idih iio iiieunH hut tliiit ot'iiddiiig
mysflf, himseff, onenflf, etc. ; but in Klanmtli i)rcfixati(»u of hh- or of li-sli in
reHortod to, ho that tho roHective voice \n foruied synthetically. If peculiar
HtresH is laid upon tiie tniisclj', 'nmsclf, nutak, p(tuk etc. may he added.
Some gramnuirians call themi verha pronominal verbs. 'I'he function of the
prefix sh- a« a reHective pronoun is to form reflective verbs with a direct
object (reflective verbs properly so-called), and other reflective verl)H with
an indirect object (medial verbs). The latter are now formed exclusively
by this prefix, while the former show sh- and its compound h-sh-. Tho
pronoun sha tlieif, now used in the plural only, j^avo orijrin to this prefix,
for it must have once signified oneself ami themselves. Kxamples:

shalaktcha to cut one's throat; from laktchn to cut another's throat.

shatalaka to rub oneself; from tali'ika to rub.

8hupt6ga (li'ik) to pull out one's hair; from put6ga to tear out.

And several others mentioned on page 278.

The compound prefix h-sh- also forms reflective verbs, and some of
these are reciprocal at the same time, like histanta. Besides the verbs
given on page 27!) we mention:

histanta to love oneself; from stfnta to love.
hfshlan to shoot oneself; from slili'n to shoot.
hushtXH to perforate one's nose- wall ; from shtiika to pierce.

4. The medial voice.

Transitive and intransitive verbs assume the form of what I call the
medial voice by prefixing sh-, s- when the act embodied in the verb is done
upon or for the subject by or in reference to this same subject of tho verb.
It is in fact a reflective verb, but a special kind of it. To the reflective
verb proper the verbal subject serves as a direct object, and therefore only
transitive verbs can give origin to this verb ; but to the medial verb the
verbal subject serves as an indirect object, hence this verb may originate
from intransitive as well as from transitive verbs. The medial verbs of

■'^t««/'5i

424

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATII LANGUAGE.

Klamath may be most fitly compared in their functions, not in their exter-
nal form, with the media of Greek ; those which are formed froui intransitive
verbs correspond exactly to the French s'ew aller, se mourir, and to the Span-
ish irsc, morirse.

a. Medial verbs derived from transitives:

shakfha to miss the mark while shooliny ; from kaf'hha to miss the aim.
shiilamna to carry on the back; radix a- in Ana to carry off.
shcilgia to place, deposit against for oneself; from lakia to place against.
shi'imCni (for sh'hiimCni) to claim for oneself; from h/imfni to desire.
shAmpatuala to nail, fasten one object to another to make it longer; from

mpata to pin fast to.
shikfta to make a false report; from kfya to tell a lie.
shldnkua to sjnead out over the water; from nakua to dam up.
shuyt'ga to lift up for oneself; from uyc'ga to lift a long object.

b. Medial verbs derived from intransitives:
shaktfla to take under the arm; from gutila to go below.

shalaggaya to ascend, climb up (spiders); front higgaya to hang down from.
shalala to scratch, rub one's sides; from lala to slope downward.
shahlma to call saucy names; from lama to be wild, bewildered.
sheti'ilpeli to look back at; from tt'lha, tola to look upon, on.
stunka to 2)ass, run through, as ropes; from tunka to come out.

A special kind of verbs, which should be classed with the medial verbs,
are those in which a coiisonautic or vocalic change indicates some relation
to the subject itself Not many instances of this are on hand, but we may
mention :

kil/antko humpback, when imitated by children etc.; from kilxa (not

kil;{a) to become humpbacked.
pji'dsha to simulate sickness; cf. pa'dsha to become (/n/ (originally), to fall

sick; to become blind,
pe'lpela to work for one's own or somebody's benefit; from pi'lpela totcork.
iX^'lxatorise upon one's feet (emphatic; ii is long); ig<^\xi\. to stand up.

RECIPROCAL VOICE,

42a

5. The reciprocal voice.
Verbs expressing a mutual act, done by each to the other, are called
reciprocal verbs, and presuppose a double subject, which is usually ex-
pressed by pronouns. Either these pronouns are added to the verb as
separate words,* or they are represented by some affix appended to or in-
corporated into the verb. In the language of the Maklaks this latter syn-
thetic mode is alone in use, and reciprocal verbs are able to form noniiuiil
derivatives also. Like the reflective voice, the reciprocal voice is formed
by the medial prefix sh- or its compound h-sh-, and attended by vocalic
anathesis:

(a) Reciprocal verbs with prefix sh-. This form of the voice is not so
frequent as the one to be given under (c).

shakfha to miss each other; from kafhha to miss the aim.
shatcishta to touch each other; from tashta to touch hij hand.
shetui to fire at each other; from tc'wi to shoot.
8hen<")'l;ija to compact, ar/rec; from nt'-ul^a to arrange.

(b) Reciprocal verbs with prefix sh-, formed by the distributive form of
medial verbs. I'his mode of deriving reciprocal verbs is only accidental.

shashalgia to quarrel; from shiilgia to lay something af/ttitist.
shashtashta to touch each other; from tashta to touch by hand.

(c) Reciprocal verbs tvith prefix h-sh-. Some verbs formed in this man-
ner are simultaneously reflective and reciprocal, and the original active
form of others no longer exists in the language.

heshamkanka to tell, order each other; from hemkanka to speak.
hushutanka to meet each other secretly; from hutanka to run up.
hushpantchna to walk arm in arm; from spunshna to take along.
hushtfwa to scratch, stab each other; from towi to pierce, stab.
hushtch6ka to kill each other; from tchuka to perish.
And many others on page 279.

{d) Reciprocal verbs in -yua. Modoc verbs of this terminal have been
discussed under Suffix -yua.

• Sometimes Hccoinpmiied by prepositions, as inter in Latin, entre iu French.

426

GltAMMAK OF THE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

'^Wsr. '3'j

6. T^e camative voice.

This is a form of verbal derivation which adds to the transitive or in^
transitive verb the idea of prompting, causing, or compelling to perforin
the act or enter the state or condition expressed bv the original verb. The
Klamath language forms them by means of vocalic anathesis, and by prefix-
ing sh- or compounds of it: shn-, sp-, st-, h-sh-. In the Germanic languages,
causative verbs are frequently formed also by a vocalic change, here called
"Umlaut"; so we have in English to drench, to felt, to raise derived from to
drink, to fall, to rise.

a. Causative verbs formed by the medial prefix sh-:
shkalkela to hurt, injure; from kalkfla to fall sick.
shnc'l^a t^) set on fire; from nelka to be burnt up.
shut'nka to kill, slay, plur. of obj. (Mod.); from wdnka to die.
shuka to drive out from; from huka to run at.

h. Causative verbs formed by compound prefixes of sh-:
shnahualta to cause to sound, to rim/; from walta to sound.
shnekshita to save, deliver; from kshfta to escape (Mod.),
shnfkanua to let ripen; from noka, ni'ika to ripen.
spfdsha to drag behind; from (dsliu to carry along.
spfka to draw, pull out; from fka to remove from.
st6p6la to peel the bark off, lit. "to make dry above"; from u- above, pAla

to dry up.
hashtiiwa to starve out; from stawa to be famished.
heshla to exhibit, show; from shli'a to see.
hushn(');ua to bake, cook; from shniipra to parch.

More examples will be found under "Anathesis", pages 278. 279, and
List of Prefixes.

7. The intransitive voice.

Verbs which caimot take a direct object or complement, and therefore are
not susceptible of being used in a passive sense, are called intransitive In
this language they are inflected in the same manner as transitive and other
verbs as to tense and mode, and some can assume a causative and a medial

ATTRIBUTIVE VERB.

427

voice. There are a number of verbs which are transitives and intransitives
at the same time, as k'lekahi to lose children and to he at the point of death.

Tlie distributive form of intransitive verbs may refer to severalty or
repetition of the act, state, or quality expressed by the verb, but it does also,
and much more frequently, refer to verbal acts performed or states under-
gone by a plurality of subjects, and in this latter case it corresponds to the
plural of the English verb.

A special class among the intransitive verbs is the attributive verbs
which indicate some .juality or attribute of the subject, and in the languages
of modern Europe are generally circumscribed by the substantive verb to
be, accompanied by an adjective noun. In a large number of agglutinative
languages attributive verbs are a prominent feature, since they make a
predicative verb of what we consider to be simply an adjective or attribute
joined to th- verb to he, and express by a single term what we can render
only by a combination of two or three words. What we call an adjective
is, in those languages, a verbal or participle of that attributive verb. So, in
the Creek, the grass is green, pahit lanis, is, literally, "the grass greens", or
"the grass is greeninor"; while green grass is pahi lani, which comes nearest
to a term like "grass greened," or "grass greening." Here the adjective,
whether used predicatively or attributively, is always a form of a verb; but
in Klamath there are true adjectives, recognizable by their endings (-kni, -H,
-ni, -ptchi, etc.), and liable to become connected with the verb gi; and,
besides, there are attributive verbs of the sort just pointed out by an example
from the Creek language. These attributive verbs appear in a verbal finite
form when used predicatively, and in the participial form in -tko when
employed attributively.

The two classes of the intransitive verb present themselves in the fol-
lowing manner:

A. — The Hon-attrihutive intransitive verb describes an act performed by
an animate subject, or a state undergone by, a quality belonging to an ani-
mate or inanimate subject. If connected with an object, this object is al-
ways an indirect one.

kc'dsha, d. kt'k'tcha to grow (plants),
k'lc'ka to reach, to turn into; to die.

428

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

n6ka, d. n6nukca to ripen, mature.
tiii'ma, d. tetiii'ma to feel hunfjry.

B. — The attributive or qualitative intransitive verb of the Klamath lan-
guage corresponds to the English adjective connected with the verb to be,
though it can be rendered in other ways. Some of this class even combine
a transitive with an intransitive signification, as ginka to be hollow and to
perforate something. Examples:

tchAki ma'sha the boy is sick.

nia'shitko tchilki the, a sick boy.

tchdki mania'sha the boys are sick; boys are sick,

mama'shitko tchaki sick boys.

kta-i yuta the, a stone is heavy.

ytitantko kta-i a heavy stone.

kt'lpka ilmbu the tvater is hot, boiling.

i'l-ambu kekalpka imters are hot, boiling.

Adjectives, accompanied by the verb gi, can drop this verb whenever
no doubt can arise through its absence about their meaning ; in that case
the adjective is predicative, JMS< like the attributive verb. Ko-idshi wasli
the mischl vous prairie-tvolf ; wash k6-idshi gi, or wash ko-idshi the prairie-
wolf is mischievous

When indicative of location or position, attributive verbs can fulfill
the office of postpositions . i-utfla to be, to lie under; Mod. yutflan ; postp.
behw, underneath.

The subjoined small list of attributive verbs goes to show that many of
their number have other significations besides, which are sometimes transi-
tive and more original.

gfmpka, gfnuala, gfnsp^a to be empty, vacant, hollow.
guhua, guhi'i ^ '>e swollen and to swell up.
kuiinka to be lu ..; kuaiikatko lame, halting.
kfla, n^flla to be angry, strong, and to make haste.
ma'sha to be sick, smarting, and to taste like.
ndsh(5ka to be deaf and not to understand.
n6ka to he ripe, to ripen, and to cook, boil, stciv.

IMPEltSONAL VERB. 429

pdla to he dry, and to dry up.

shfpnu to be full of air, tvind, and to be hauyhty.

akiiya to be crooked, humpbacked, and to mash, bray.

8. The impersonal voice.

Impersonal verbs have for a formal subject the indefinite, neuter pro-
noun it, for which no equivalent exists in Klamath. Here the impersonal
verb is, therefore, expressed by the simple form of the verb, whicii inflects
for terse, mode, verbals, and severalty. l"'here are two distinct series of
impersonal verbs— such as take no direct object, and such as possess a
direct or indirect personal object.

A.— Objectless impersonal verbs chiefly refer to phenomena of nature, to
the changes in the atmosphere, of the seasons etc.

ydwa the north wind is blowing; lit. "it is howling."

l6mdna it is thundering; lit. "it is rolling."

Ilia it is fogqy, misty, hazy.

miia the wind blows from the south (miiat)

palsha, tgfwa it is sultry weather.

pdta it is summer, it is hot oeather.

sha'hlmalza the fall of the year is at hand.

shgii'mla. Mod. tehgil'mna it is freezing, frost is forming.

skcSa it is spring-time; lit. "it is sprouting."

•ehvil'ntka, Mod. tchvuntka hoar-frost is forming

we'n ice is forming, it is freeing or frozen.

The following objectless verbs are compounds of gi to be, exist, and do
not indicate natural phenomena. They may connect with an indirect per-
sonal object :

ke'gi, kii'gi there is nothing, it disappears, it is scarce (Mod. kii'gi and

kii'ka).
Mki (for le hA gi) it is gone, it is missing.

B.— Impersonal verbs tvith personal object chiefly describe bodily sen-
sations of temperature, hunger or thirst, health or infirmity, and a few also
refer to mental or moral qualities. A few also simultaneously appear as

430

GBAMMAU OF TUli KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

^».
'"»»■

•'1

^ ^

intransitives, with the personal pronoun in the subjective case, especially in
Modoc, while the majority have the personal pronoun or noun preceding
or following them in the objective case.

Ambutka nft, i ; i'lmbutka n'sh, m'sh / am, thou art thirsty.
hiishlta nfl ; hiishlta n'sh / am in good health.
ka'dshika nu ; ka'dshika nisli I feel tired.
ma'sha nii ; ma'sha nilsh, n'sh I am sick.
tiii'ma nfi ; tiil'ma n'sh / am hungry.

Other verbs seem entirely confined to the impersonal form :
guhud niah, mish / am, thou art sivollen.
kol^a a nush, kol^a ansh I am in the habit of.
katka nfish, katf;:anH / am, cold.
lushlushki nish i feel warm.
n^amka nish it aches, harts me.
ndii-iti an's my hainl'i or feet are cold.
ndshoka mish thou art deaf
pano'pka nu.jh / am hungry; lit. "I want to eat."
pii'ka nish, pii'kansh / atn thirsty; lit. "it makes me dry."
pupa niish, piipans I bleed from the nose.
taps^oya an's my fingers are numb from cold.
tchJikelila an's / bleed (elsewhere than from the nose).

Compare also the following sentences :

ku'i an'sh hushlta pafshuk sultriness oppresses me.

ka'gi a n'sh tcho'ksh / am lame in one kg; lit. "to me a leg is deficient."

9. The verb gi to be.

The Klamath verb gi corresponds in a certain measure to our substan-
tive verb to be, but besides this it is used in a much wider signification. It
unites the functions of an intransitive to those of a transitive and substantive
verb, forms with some verbs what I call "periphrastic conjugation," and in
its various forms also enters as a component into the forn>ntH)i! of words.
This verb gi is, in fact, the demonstrative pronoun ge, ke this one, thi^ here

THE VERB Gl.

431

in a verbified shape; and, having assumed the verbal form, it came to signify
to he here, to be at this or that place, to he at this time or at such a time.

Tims the oriffinal verbal signification of gi is that of accidental exist-
ence— ^o exist, not by nature, but bi/ chance: to happen to })c. In this function
it is comparable to the Spanish verb estar, to be acciilvutalln'; but it soon
assumed also the function of designating real, essential existence, like the
Spanish verb ser: to he hy nature, to he essentially, in reality, and not by chance
or accident. Outside of these, the verb gi has taken other significations—
to become, to have, possess, to do and to w^— all of whicli will be treated in
their respective okder Gi is often abbreviated into -g, -k, and its shorter
forms are used enclitically.

I have elsewhere discussed this verb at length,* and have here extracted
some of the examples given there. More examples will be found in the
Dictionary, pages 44. 45.

Presented in their order of grammatic evolution, the six different func-
tions of gi are as follows:

(rt) To be here, to be at this or that place, to he at such a time, then. In
this function, gi points to casual o: accidental existence, occurrence by
chance, and, like the pronoun ge, generally implies close proximity to the
grammatic or logical subject of the sentence. It comes nearest to our verb
to exist. Examples:

kani gl he, she, it is outside, outdoors.

lapi gi there are two (of them).

tfdsh gi to feel well; ku-i gi to feel unioell

ki'immCtat giank staying in the rocks.

gfti shuyoakeks gi-uapka here shall he a kapiny-place, 142, 8.

To this definition must be traced the gi composing some of the attrib-
utive and impersonal verbs above mentioned, as kji'gi, laki, lushlu.shgi,
p'lafki, sha'tki, etc.

(/>) To become, to begin to be. This definition appears, e. g., in the fol-
lowing example: ka-i ni a kukamtchish gf-uapk / would never become old,
64, 13.

•"On the Substantive Verb in some North American LangnnRCH;" Proceedings of the XVIthAamial
Session of the American Philological Association, July, 1884, pages ■46-^3.

432

(JUAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAdK.

(c) To he really, essentially, Intrinsically ; to exist hy its own nature. In
this definition gi represents the substantive verbs to he of English, etre of
French, sein of German, and, as an auxihary verb, is oniployed in conjugat-
ing verbs periphrastically through their verbals (in -tki, -shtka) and their
participles.

nutiikam liik killkali gl the seed of the nutak-plant is round.
i a tiila gi you are right.
i a ku-i gi you are wrong.

It appears as an auxiliary verb:

p'lafkishtka gi shappash the sun tvas near the noon-point.
ni nanukash shlii'sh ki I can see everywhere, 22, 17.

(d) To he possessed by, to belong to, to be provided, endotved with. When
used in this sense, gi takes the owner or proprietor in the possessive case
(to be somebody's), and the object possessed in the subjective case. If the
owner is expressed by a possessive pronoun, this pronoun stands in the
subjective case. Gi appears very frequently in the participle of the past:
gftko possessed of, with the object in the objective case.

tiinna i wewt'ash gftk? hotv many children have youf

kiinam kek f-amnash gif whose beads are these?

kanam ge latchash gif who owns this lodge f

tuni'pni gc-u wc'lvvash gi I have Jive water-springs, 157 ; 46.

k('>kuapkash lulp gftko having swollen eyes.

kailiilapsh gftko dressed in leggings.

tiima tua gi'tkuapka i you will possess many things, 182 ; 7.

(e) To do, to act, to perform. Here the verb gi becomes a transitive
verb, though there are no examples on ban ' of its being used in a passive
sense also. Evolved from gi, signification (a) of casual existence: to be at
something.

tfdsh gi to do right, to act well.
kii-i gi to act wickedly, to do evil, to be obnoxious.
wuk i gdn gitkl what are you doing here?
humasht gfulank after having acted thus.

INFLECTION FOB NUMBER.

433

'«■),

tud i wi'ik gf-uapkug tdbl shanalioli ? what do you want to do with the tabk ,
Gi to act also compoaes some verba dcnotnlnativa, as nka'kgi, nkasl
mentioned above.

(/) To say, to speak. Gi is used in this sense (instead of hc<mkanka)
only when the spoken words are quoted either verbatim or in part. This
use of gi has evolved from gi to do, to art, viz., " to do by words", and in
French we often hear il fit instead of // dit.

na-asht gi, na'shtk, na'shtg so I say, said ; so he said etc.
tsf sha hiln gi so they said; hataktk there he said.
nft gftki gi / say they must become.

INFLECTION FOR NUMBER.
There are some grammatic categories whicli have remained in a state
of rudimentary development in the mind oS' the Maklaks Indian, and seem
to have been too abstract for him. Among these i& the category of numbei ,
or what we call, granuuatically, the sinf/ular, dual, and plural; for tliose do
not exist here in the sense expressed in European tongues. As to verbal
inflection, this would necessitate the incorporation of the pronoun into the
body of the verb, or of particles marking plurality. This we observe in
many American languages, but not in Klamath, where only a faint com-
mencement was made toward incorporating personal pronouns into the
verb. But this language uses several other means to express nuu»ber in a
more indirect manner. One of these is the use of a different radix when
the subject or object changes from the singular to the dual or plural ; but
this is not verbal inflection for number, for the term inflection implies rule
and regularity extending over all verbs, whereas here the choice of the radix
is sometimes arbitrary. Such a change in the radix always implies also a
change in signification, Iiowever small; and if this ciiange is no longer per-
ceptible, it was so in the earlier history of the language. Moreover, the
assumed term for dual does not mean here two subjects only, as with us.

At an early period the genius of this upland tongue seems to have left
unnoticed ths expression of nu iib.'r in verbs, as well as in nouns, and found
no more necessity to define it than to define sex. Only a little more atten-
tion was paid to the categories of mode and tense, for what was done in all
28

i'jf^'

484

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANdUAOE.

those belongs to later period vt' ling-itistic (levolopiueiit. ('oiicrete ciitcgo-
ries iiloiie were tlien ivc''<'>ii!it'>»' <'' Importance, for nil reliifions hearing iipou
locality, flistanee, and individuHlity or severalty are diHtinguished with aii-
perioi- accuracy, and oven tense is inarkeci hy means of partici J which were
originally locative. Nowhere is the female sex made distinct from the male
hy linguistic forms, although several Columbian and Oregonian languages
exhibit this distinction, sonie in tl'.a pr<)',ouii .i.ly, as the Atfalati, of tlio
Kalapuya stock, some in the verl) also, as the Chinook.

In order to make our subject-matter clear, 1 have divided this chapter
into two parts:

I. Number in the transitive vorb.

II. Number in the intransitive verb.

I. — THE CATKGORY OK NUMBER IN THE TRANSITiVE VKRB.

In the languages of Aryan and Semitic stock, all verbs are governed
exclusively by their grannnatic subject. But it is different in the agglu-
tinative languages. Here the intransitive verb is governed by its subject,
this being the grannnatic and logical subject of the sentence; but the tran-
sitive verb, or rather noun-verb, is governed for number by its direct object,
and not by its subject. The subject remains in its quality as granumitic
subject, but the grammatic ol)j«ct becomes the logical subject of the sen-
tence, and as such it rules the noun-verb.* P]xainple :

Lelekash watch shiuga LvMash killed a horse.

LeU'kash tuma watch luela Lelekash killed many horses.

In a few transitive verbs a distinction is made in the number or quality
of the verbal object, one form being employed when a few oidy are con-
cerned, and another when many objects are acted upon.

When the direct object of a transitive verb is plural, it will be expressed
in the verb under certain circumstances When the subject of this verb is
plural, the verb is usually not affected by it. If the plurality of tjie^object

« Soinetbing tliat slightly reminds us of lliis structure is found in the comimnnd transitive v.rb
(not Ihf Hlinple) ..f Roin,>ncr, Inngnag.iR, which varies tho parliciple when tim ohject pnetdes it in the
s..ntence. Thus in French : " les hirondelles .,ue j'ai r«<;» .<tai.M,t pciclK-es." compared to " j'ai f« dcs
hirondcllcB p.'rch<!cs" ; derived from Low Latin: habeo fisa<, iifi«l hahco ii««m.

NUMHKR IN TRANSITIVK VBKB8.

435

is iruli(!atod tlimufrh the vorb, the object itself is not required in all instances
to bear the murk of |)lurality. It<'rative reduplication of tlie verb may also
at times imply a jdurality of tlie object, though it is only ijitended to'mark
frequency or repetition of an act. More about all this will be seen in the
Syntax.

Plurality of the direct object evidences itself in the transitive verb : (1)
by distributives reduplication ; (2) l)y change of prefix ; (3) by change of the
radical syllable; (4) by change of suffix.

I. Distrihiifirr mluplicatmi is the means most frequently resorted to
for the purpose, but only when the action of the verb is ropoatod or per-
fornuid specially for every one of the objects. There must be action in
severalty by one and the same individual, or one act performed by each
individual separately upon the objects or each object; whereas the absolute
form will be used when the act is performed by one or more subjects, col-
ledively or at once upon the object, or objects.

1 a c'l^a sheshash you (five a name.

1 a ekXxA slieshash you t/ive different names to one or various objects.

skutash sha waldsha they spread a blanket over.

skutash sha wawdldsha they spread blankets over different objects.

2. Chanye of prefix is observed in certain transitive verbs when there is
a change fror a single direct object of a certain exterior or shape, a.'i rouml,
long, flat, to a jjlurality of direct objects. Here the signification of the verb
lies more in the radical and in the suffix than in the prefix, and each of these
verbs has also its distributive form.

As may be inferred from the List of Prefixes, a- refers to one long object;
ksh-, ks- to one long object, to a bunch of long articles, or to one animate
object that can be carried on the arm or arms; sp-, see "List of Prefixes"-
t-, ta-, te- points to one long or animate object standing upright ; u- to a
lono object direct or indirect. All these prefixes are gc^nerally changed to i-,
iy-> y-) yi- when the object of the verb is placed in the plural number. To
the examples mentioned in the "List of Prefixes" we add the following:

dtpa to carry, to bring; pi. of obj. ftpa.

kshalnla to place near the fire; pi. ilala (also intrans.).

■4l

486

(lUAMMAK OF TUE KLAMATU LANOUAOK.

kHhi'iwala to fix or tic on the lop of; pi. of obj. fwiilu, ilmi'ilo.

kshi'nipf'li to cnirif hack, Imii// home; pi. ('mpOli.

kHlifwi;(a to /ml, plarr into ; pi. hvixii.

kslu'iyHmiiii and uyaiinia lo tnkc aloriff; pi (-ainna.

kHliiiyt'ga anil uyt'<,'a to lijl up, raise; pi. iyc'ga.

Hpi'ilhi to jilaa' insitli', lock up; pi. (llii.

tnu'slika, tfMm'.siifra to nli.strart ; pi. yiini'slika.

uduka to heat with a utirk; a tow objt'cts, icluyua; many, iduka.

udMlilpa to lake off' from, strip; pi idslifpa.

uyi'<?a to lij} itp a lon-f object; a few, yaiiii'fjfa ; many, iyc'ga.

Tlio VL'fbs with 1- or lu- protixed, reterring to one object of round,
rounded, or bulky exterior, exchange this prefix for p-, pe-, or po-u- when
more than one ol)ject is spoken of, sometimes with alteration of the sullix
also. Ill the examples below the prefix syllable also serves as radical syl-
lable.

likla to deposit; pi. pe-ula.

lliya, llii to (jive, hand over; pi. pc'wi, pii'wi.

luyega to lift, (jatlicr up ; pi. pe-uyega.

The verbs kewa, ukewa to break to pieces also use the prefix pe- (peki'wa)
when a plurality of objects is spoken of.

Verbs with prefix shu-, when referring to the drivitiff of many objects,
as horses, cows etc., assume the prefix n- ; when only a few olyects are con-
cerned, the prefix tp- is used, at least in the Modoc dialect.

shu'd.shna to drive off, chase; a few, tpiidshna ; many, niudslma.

shukidslia to drive in a circle; tpukidsha; uiukidsha.

shiili to drive into; tptili, Kl. kpiili ; n(-uli.

shuf-uza to drive out of an inelosure ; nf-u^a.

shiiwa (for shiiiwa) to drive into water; tpewa, tpua ; nfwa.

3. CItanyc of the radical syllable is resorted to only in verbs of a certain
class, like those of giving, breaking, cutting, killing, digging, etc. This
granuuatic process stands outside the limits of any law or rule, and a slight
difference of signification can usiuilly be discovered through careful analysis

NUMHKH IN TUAN81TIVK VKUB8.

487

of tlu) toriiiH iimxl for onu (»l)ject uml for timny. TIu'h foutiire \n eommoii to
iimny North Amuriciui liuigiiutroB of tho WcHt, eHpociully for tho intnuisitivo
vurl). (Jf tho Liitin verlw fern; hilar iirul tho Eiifrlish to he in regiird
their teiiHOH.

ki'wu to hreali, smash ; pi. np'itu, iiguhlsha.

kshuyii to tiausfrr ii hjiijr op aniiiiiito ohjuct ; pi. Hhewi'mii.

iit'yii, lu'-i to n'u'f Olio thill object; pi. sliuvvi'mii.

slu'xkimkii to take alimt/ ; pi. fiuiie;>ii or i-mnnii.

Hhii'igii lo kill; pi. hielii, Mod. li'iulii, «liii('iika (li'ielu "to luy low a crowd"').

Bhlfn to shoot, wound; pi. yi'ita, i-o'ta.

spuid to tmnsfer one porson ; pi. shewana.

ivwix to run one post info the uronnd ; two posts, Htal^a ; mmiji posts,

totalpfa.
uh'itti to rlto/i, split; ])1, uh'idsha, viilodsha; ugi'iltcha.

4. Chanf/r of suffix, to indicato tho c.haiigo from ono to two or more
objects, occurs chiefly in such verbs as adopt the eiidiii<.- -yua to point out
that the action of the verb extends over a few objects only.

kti'ika to strike hy hand; a few, kti'iyua.

stuka to stab, wound, eut; a few, stuyua.

Bliuka to drive out; a few, shi'iyua.

shi'ikanka /o )•»«, «/fcr; a few, tpuyamna.

Tho verb int'ya to dig roots differs entirely from the above by forming
sta-ila "to fill up (the root-basket)" when many subjects, not objects, are
referred to. It can be considered as an intransitive verb.

II. — THE CATEGORY OF NUMBER IN THE INTRANSITIVE VERIJ.

The four modes observed in forming this category in transitive verbs
also occur in the inti-ansitive verb when there is a change from one to manij
subjects, though with some restrictions. A large number of verbs substitute
one radical syllable for another,. with or without change of the formative
suffix. Most of these verbs possess three numbers, instead of two, like a
majority of the others. Of these three numbers,

The singular is used when the verb has one subject ;

438

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

TJie dual is used when the verb has two, three, sometimes four subjects;

The pliiml is in use when the verb has over three or four, or a multitude
of subjects.

Per'iaps the term dual is not quite appropriately selected for a gram-
matic number which points to very Jiw; but in the majority of cases when
this form is employed two subjects only are meant. Those wishing to con-
vey the idea that not more than two are meant, have to add to the subject
the numeral lapi, lap two, or lapiak two only, or lapnk both.

1. Distributive reduplication is the means to show plurality in the ma-
jority of intransitive verbs. It is used wherever more than one subject
governs the verb, and thus exactly corresponds to the plural of verbs in
European languages.

tfdsh nil tchia 7 live contented; ti'dsh nat tchitchia we live contented.
shiwaga a ktana the (jirl is sleepimj ; shiwaga or shishuaga a ktakta the
tjirls are sleepiny.

2. Chanye of prefix only is chiefly resorted to in verbs which are trans-
itives and intransitives simultaneously:

kshali'ila to be or lie near the fire; pi. ilala.
kshikla to he or lie within; pi. fkla.
kshuti'la to he or lie underneath ; pi. i-utfla.

3. Chanye of radical syllable without change of suffix occurs extensively
in verbs embodying the idea.s of standing, sitting, lying, running, and leap-
ing, falling and rolling down, hiding, going, coming. A majority of these
verbs have three numbers— singular, dual, and plural — each one marked by
a special radix, mostly formed from pronominal roots, which are distinctly
recognizable as such, and also enter into the formation of prefixes. In some
of the verbs the two dialects differ considerably in the formation of tl'eir
duals and plurals. The neiv terms introduced in the list below, which are
not found in the Dictionary, are all taken from the Modoc dialect, and most
of them are intelligible to the Klamath Lake Indians as well, and used by
them. It will be seen that the distributive form of some verb representing
one of the three numbers is sometimes used as the dual or plural of that
verb. The radix hu-, which forms the largest number of verbs in this list

NUMBER IN INTKANSITIVE VERBS.

439

(cf. Dictionary;, iind tn- (in the dual form tnsli-), are pronominal roots point
ing to distance; the radix tin- occurs also in words referring- to one subject
oidy: tfnuash, tinkm'Ia, tinijla etc The radix In-, liii-, and liu- is derived
from li'wa to form a cluster, crowd, and the prefix 1- points to the circumfer-
ence of a standing, sitting, or lying crowd or multitude, as it does also in
klusli-, found in some of the plural verbs. These latter refer to aggregation
or gathering in a row, line, or fil<\ vvhich is indicated by prefix k- pointing
to lateral action. In the verbs of standing, t- points to persons in an erect
position; in those of .sv7^i«//, tcha-, tch- embodies tchia to sit, wa- to sit or rxist
in a certain place or medium. The radical kish- differs, from ksh-, which also
ai)pear8 in some dual verbs as kshu-, and are probably used as plural verbs
also. Verbs with the radix ga- are extensively used as duals for the verbs
of the radix hu-, of which the regular dual form begins with tusli-. But
th(>re is a difference in signification betwi^en the two, for the verbs in Inl-
and lush- refer to the quicker motion of ntimiiiy, while ga- points only to
walking, fjoim/. R^xamples:

Verbs of fjointf, walking, coming:

gakl'ma to (jo around; du. gag'ki'ma, pi. ginkinia. ginkdma.

galala to reach a place; <'u. gakahila, jil. kilala.

giilampaga to f/o behind; [)1. kinlampaga (Mod.).

gt'na to (JO away, depart; du. gcka, pi. (Mod.) tchena (in Kl. gc'na foi- all).

gt'pka >o come toward; du. gegapka, pi (Mod.) tchopka,

ge'wa to go into water; du. gckwa, gc'ku, pi. tchi'wa.

goyena, (Mod.) kishii'na to walk around indoors; du. (Mod.") goydna, pi,

lukanhic'na.
guihi, giVhli, gull to go into, enter; pi. ki'llii.
kishgii'iladshna to disappear hg going out; du gakiuladshna, pi. kingi-

iiladshna.
kishtftana to walk along the lodge on its oidside; du.gutftana, pl.lukantitana.
teli'^i to go up, to ascend; pi. lukanf;^!.

Verbs of running, leaping, flying:

hufkinsha to run away from ; du. tushfkinsha, pi. tinfkinsha.
huyji-edsha to run past ; pi. gaya-idsha.

440

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

«t«

huyiki to run out from water ; du. tuslifki, pi. tutashiki.

hiikiimpgli to run, leap out again ; du. tii'shkampgle, pi. tfnkampgle.

hulala to rush, run into fire ; du. tushliila, pi. tilala

luVnua to flif into the water ; du. tusluia, pi. tfnna,

luititgula to run away from under; du. tushtitgi'ila, pi. tintitgula.

hi'iwa to run, leap into water ; du, ttishua, pi. tfnwa.

Verhs of fallinq, rolling down:

ude-ulfna to fall down, as from a wagon ; du wet6lfna, pi. helfna.

ndf-ule to fall or roll down ; du. wetole. pi. liiitole and lie-ule.

nd{ \\\x'A to fall or roll down from.; du. weti'l^a, j)l. hdl;^a.

ndi-ut;t'e to fall or topple over, du. wetutpfe, vvet'tze, pL ht't^e.

ndfwa to fall into the water ; du. wt'twa, pi lu'wa.

ndiwanka to fall or roll from a standing or sitting attitude; du. wetwanka,

pi, ht'wanka, kh'ishwanka, or hewankan klushtclma,
tilantj^e to roll down; pi. lifhakt^e.

Verbs of Iging, sleeping :

khlu'kla to lie in bed, on the ground; du. kslntila, pi. liikla, ikla.
ki;hiU'Ii/a to lie on, upon something; pi. liutcli;(a.
puka to lie on the ground; du. yanipka, pi. wc'tpka.
8;f(»!;foka to lie, sleep indoors; du. klusli^oka, pi lul^uka
s^ultita to lie, sleep outdoors; du. ksliuitfta, pi. lutita.

Verbs of hiding:

huyalia to go and hide; pi. gayaha.
shuilpka to hide behind; pi. wiwauipka.

Verbs of standing:

tgatita to stand outdoors; du luati'ta, pi. lualutfta.

tgt'l;ja to stand, stop short; pi. luelualza, (Mod.) lualo'lza.

tg'xXogA to stand indoors; du. \u\x6gi\, pi. luilu;Kuga.

tgutga to stand; du. ICvuatka, pi. liikantatka.

tkiyvlxfi to stand inside of; du. liu;f(')ga, pi. luilu-fza.
Verbs of staying, sifting :

tcliala'Isha to stag at home; du. wawala'lslia, pi. liula'Isha.

tchiilanma to sit on or against; du. wawalamna, pi. liulamna.

PARADIGM OF THE INFLECTED VERB. 441

tshalfga to sit on tlm edge of; du. wawalfj^a, pi. liulfga.
tchfa to Hue, staif; du. and pi. wa to live in a certain medium,
tchi'pka to live, with others; du. wawapka, pi. liupka.
tchutila to sit or he underneath; du. wawatHa, pi. liutfla.

4. Change of the radix and suffix occurs but in a few verbs, of which
has already been mentioned tkiwf^ii (see its dual).

k'ldka to die (not in the other definitions of this verb); pi. kalfna, li'ili ;

(Mod.) kalfna, wdnka.
slnl'lpka to lie. on something, or in hed; pi. lolua, lolumi.
tchawfna to live, dwell amony ; pi. shi'ikla.

VOCALIC AND CONSONANTIC INFLECTION. PARADIGMS.

The evidence contained in the previous pages suffices to show that
there is no external distinction perceptible between the inflection of the
active, passive, or intransitive and other voices of the verb, their modes
and tenses Still we observe some few inflectional dirt'erences, all of which
are of a phonetic origin, and are caused by ^uch figures as ellipsis, syncope,
or synizesis. These are always observed upon the point of contact of the
basis with the inflectional suffixes, and depend on the question wiiether the
verb ends in a consonant or in a vowel, and on tlie (juality of that terminal
sound. This gives us two difierent kinds of inflection —

1. Verbs ending in vowels: Vocalic inflection.

2. Verbs ending in consonants: Comonantic inflection.

The vocalic inflection appends the bare inflection-endings to the verbal
ending -a, -u (or -o), -i (or -e). Thus the participle in -tko is formed for
hi'mkanka, hemkankatko; for tamenu, tamenutko; for guli, gulitko. Verbs
in -a, in which this -a is preceded by a vowel, present some alterations, and
synizesis often takes place. Some of the verbs in -na will lose the conso-
nant -n. We thus obtain three vocalic inflections:

1. Inflection of the verbs in -a, or A-inflecfion.

2. Inflection of the verbs in -u (or -o): U-in flection.

3. Inflection of the verbs in -i (or -e): [-inflection.

442

UUAMMAU OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

The eonsonantic inflection appends the bare inflectional suffix to the basis
by placing -a- between tlie two, tliough there are exceptions to this. Among
the consonants there are two only that can terminate a verb. -1 and -n.
While the former often elide the vowel before the -1, those in -n (and -na)
frequently transpose it by metathesis, so that -na becomes -an. Hence we
have two eonsonantic inflections:

4. Inflection of the verbs in -1, or L-inflecHon.

5. Inflection of the verbs in -n, or N-inflection.

More special points on the phonetic side of these five modes of inflec-
tion will be given below.

PARADIGMS OF VERBS.

The substantive and auxiliary verb gi to he, to exist, which by itself
belongs to the I-inflection, being of frequent occurrence and a factor in the
j)eriphra8tic conjugation of every verb, I prefix a succinct paradigm of it
to those o. the other verbs. The form gi is more frequent than ki or x^-
The abbreviations of gi will be found in the Dictionary.

The verh gi to exist, to become, to he, to have, to do, to say.

Declarative mode.
Present tense: ml a gi, ki / am, I exist.
Preterit: nil hilnk gi I tvas, I have been.
Future: nfl a gi-uapk / shall he, exist.

Conditional mode.
Present tense: ml a gl't, git / would be, may be.

Imperative mode.
1 gi ! 6e thou! gi at ! be ye!

Participles.
Present tense: gfank, gfnk, kink, Mod. gfan, gin, kin being, existing;

having been.
Preterit: gftko been; dom etc.; oblique casc^: gipkash etc.
Pluperfect: gfulank after having been, done etc.

Verbals.
Infinitive: gt to he, to exist etc.

PARADIGM OF Gt.

443

Indefinite: gfsh, ki'sh the fact ofhebuj, existence; inflected : gfsliam, gfslii,
gfshtka, etc., the latter being the dosiderative verbal, on the point
of hccominff, being; also gfshtka gi, gislitka gfug.

Conditional: gishc, kisht on account of being, for having been.

Preterit: gf-iiish, gfwish "^/<e having been."

Causative: giuga, gfug for being, because (he, it) is, was.

Durative: giuta while being (rare).

Intentional: gftki in order to be, become, ejust; periphrastically : gftki gi,
gftki gfug, gftkiug.

The verbah of the future tense are as follows:
Infinitive : gi-uapka.
Indefinite: gi-uapkash, gf-uapksh the fact of ^\qoing to be"; inflected:

gi-uapkshi, gi uapkshtka (gfug) etc.
Conditiona' gi-uapkasht for becoming at a future time.
Causative: gi uapkuga, gi-uapkug because (he, it) is going to be.
The preterit, durative, and intentional verbals do not ex'st in this tense;
instead of the latter, gftki, gftki gi is used.

PABADIGM OF THE AINFLBCTION.

This paradigm being typical for all the various inflectional forms of
the Klanuith verb, I present it in all its details, and shall often refer to it in
treating of the other inflections, which are to a great extent reproductions
of it Some verbs in -na follow the N-inflection. Mr.ny forms of the para-
digm, • specially of the distributive, are not in use on account of their length
and unwieldiness, but for the sake of completeness all of them had to be
presented.

The transitive verb ktuka to strike or hit ivith the hand, to strike with the
fist or clenched hand, wliich was selected to serve as a paradigm, becomes in
its distributive form kti'iktka or ktuktga to strike, hit ivith the hand each object
separatrlii, the full form ktuktaka being syncopated into ktuktka. For the
sakf (1 'v,,.ujty, the addition "with the hand" is omitted. When pe'tchtkn,
the iasttranental case of pe'tch foot (distr pcpatch) is added to ktuka, it
means to kick. The paradigm of ktuka combines throughmd llie above active

444

GRAMMAR OF TBK KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

signification with the passive one of to he struck, hit tvith the hand, though
for want of apace tlie latter was inserted in a few })laces only. The form
kti'ikan, kti'iktjcan shows the synthetic modus of connecting the subject-
pronoun with the verb.

ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICE OP KTl^KA.

Declarative mode.

Present tense, absolute form :

(Personal pronouns connected analytically and synthetically.)
lam striking or struck nd kti'ika, ml a ktuka, kti'ika nA, ktuka a nA, ktukan.
thou art striking i, ik ktuka, i a ktiika, ktuka i, ktuka a i.
he, she, it is str'Hni/ pi ktuka, pi a ktuka, ktuka pi, ktuka a pi.
we are striking hat, nad ktuka, nat a ktuka, ktuka nat, ktuka a nat, kti'ikna.
ye are striking at k.uka, at a ktuka, ktuka -\t, ktuka a at, ktukat.
they are striking sha kf ik :>, sha a ktiika, ktiika sha, ktiika a sha, ktiikash or

ktiikatch.

Present tense, distributive form:

/ am striking or I struck severally or each ml ktiiktka, nfi a ktiiktka, ktiiktka

ml, kt'iktka a nil, ktiiktkan.
thou art striking severally i, Ik ktiiktka, i a ktiiktka. ktiiktka i, ktiiktka a t.
he, she, it is striking each pi ktiiktka, pi a ktiiktka, ktiiktka ]», ktiiktka a pi.
we are striking each nat ktiiktka, nat a ktiiktka, ktiiktka nad, ktiiktka a nad,

ktiiktkna.

ye are striking enrh at ktiiktka, at a ktiiktka, ktiiktka fit, ktiiktka a at,

ktiiktkat.
Ihey arc striking each sha, pat ktiiktka, sha a ktiiktka, ktiiktka sha, ktiiktka a

.sha, ktiiktkafeh or ktiiktkatch.

Present .,ense, usitative form :
I strike habitually ml ktiikank, ml a ktiikank (as above); Mod. nfi ktukan.
/ strike each habitually nu ktuktkank, ml a ktil'ktkank, etc.

Present tense, simultaneous or immediate form:
lam striking just now ml ktuka, ml a ktuka, etc. (as above).
/ am striking each just now ml ktiiktka, ml a ktiiktka, etc.

PARADIGM OF KT0KA.

445

Preterit tense, absolute form :

(h., abbreviiition of hA, hiln, hilnk.)
/ struck, :.ave struck iiA lulnk ktuka, nd a hftn ktiika, ktiikan Mn.

Preterit tense, distributive form :
/ struck, have struck severally c. each nfl lulnk ktuktka, ml a h. ktuktka,
ktiiktkan Inln.

Other particles than hfl, hiln, hunk may be inserted to point with accu-
racy to the time of the act

Future tense, absolute form :
/ shall strike nfl ktukuapka or nil ktukuapk ; nft a ktukuapka, ktukuapka
n(i, ktukuapka a nil, ktukuapkan.

Future tense, distributive form :
/ shall strike severally or em-h of them nil ktuktkuapka or nil ktuktkuapk, n(i
a ktuktkuapka. ktuktkuapka nil, ktuktkuapka a nil, kti'iktkuapkan.

Conditional mode.

Present tense, absolute form :
I may strike, I may have struck ml ktukat, nfl a ktiikat, ktukat ml, ktukat a
ml, ktukatn'.

Present tense, distributive form :
/ may strike, I may have struck severally, or each of them nu ktuktkat, nQ a
ktil'ktkat, ktuktkat ni-, ktuktkat a ml, ktuktkatn'.

fmperative mode.

(«) Imperative proper.

Present tense, absolute form :
strike thou.' kti'ik' i ! ktuki ! i ktuka ! i ktuki ! i-i ktuki !
strike ye! ktuk' at ! ktukat! at ktuka ! at ktukat ! a-at ktukat!

Present tense, distributive form :
strike thou severally! ktuktk' i ! ktiiktki ! i ktuktka! i kti'iktki ! i-i ktiiktki !
strike ye severally! ktuktk' at! ktuktkat! at ktuktka! at ktuktkat! a-at

ktuktkat !

\Tt

•"_ <»:<!

446

OBAMMAU OF TIJE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

(6) Exhortiitive.

Present tense, absolute form :
I ought to strike nil ktuktki or ktiiktki nA, abbreviated also Into: nii ktukat,

nA ktuknnt, kti'ikant nft.
thou ouf/htest to su 'M i ktuktki or kti'iktki 1, etc.
he, she ought to strike pi ktuktki or ktuktki pi, hilk.
we ought to strike nad ktuktki or ktuktpi nud.
ye ought to strike at ktuktki or kti'iktgi at.
theg ought to strike pat ktuktki or ktuktgi pat.

Present tense, distributive form :
/ o'lght to strike severally nu ktuktktgi or ktuktktki nft, abbreviated also into:

nil kluktkat, nil ktuktkant, ktuktkant a nil.
thtu hughtest to strike severallg i ktuktktki etc. (as above).
he, she ought to strike severoUg pi ktuktktki etc.
w ■ ought to strike severally nad kti'iktktgi etc.
ye ought to strike severally at ktuktktgi etc.
they ought to strike severally pat ktuktktki etc.

(«) Imperative proper.
Future tense, absolute form :
thou shall strike! ktukuapk' i ! i ktukuapk ! i-t ktukuapk!
ye shall strike! ktukuapk' at! at ktukuapk!

Future tense, distributive form :
thou shall strike severally! ktuktkuapk' i ! i-i ktuktkuapk !
ye shall strike severally! ktuktkuapk' at ! at ktuktkuapk !

(b) Exhorlative.

The future tense .shows no exhortative form, but its declarative mode
may be used in that function.

Participles

Present tense, absolute form :
striking, having struck, being struck ktiikank and ktiikan, Mod. ktiikan.

Present tense, distributive form :
striking, being struck severally ktuktkank, kti'iktkan. Mod. kti'iktkan.

PAHADIGM OF KTOKA.

447

Future tense, iibsolute form :
going to strike ktukuapkank, ktukui'ipkan, Mod. ktukuilpkan.

Future tense, distributive form ;
going to strike severally ktuktkuiipkank, ktuktkuapkan, Mod. ktuktkuApkan.

Preterit tense, absolute form :
having struck; transitive verbs mostly used passively: struck, hit, having

been strnek.
ktukatko the one struck; pi. the ones struck.
ktukiipkash the one struck and to the one struck.
ktukiipkam of the one struck.
ktukapkamti about or on the one struck.

ktukapkatat, contr. ktnkapkat in, on, upon the struck one (inanimate),
ktukiipiiamkshixd'ni toward or at the lodge of the one struck.
ktukapkamkslii where the one struck lives.
ktukapkamksiiksi right where the one struck is.
ktukapkashtiila toward the one struck.

Preterit tense, distributive form :
having struck severally; more frequently having been struck severally, or hit

singly, but at different times or by different individuals:
ktuktkatko the one struck ; pi. the ones struck severally.
ktuktkapkash the one struck, or to the one struck s.
ktuktki'ipkam of the one struck s.
ktuktkiipkamti about or on the one struck s.

ktuktki'ipkatal, contr. ktuktknpkat in, on, upon the one struck s. (inanimate).
ktuktkai)kamkshi;(e'ni toward or at the lodge of the one struck s.
ktuktkapkiimkshi where the one s. struck lives.
ktuktkapkaniksaksi right where the s. struck one is.
ktuktkapkashtala toward the ones struck severally.*

Pluperfect tense, absolute form :
qfter having struck {anA passive), ktiikalank, ktuki'ilank, ktuktTlan, ktukiilan,
Mod ktuk«')lan, ktakulati.

* ktnk(ilko uiiil IIh il. furiii nrn also iDflevlcd witli IIim auxiliary vcrli g1; c(. below.

448

G AMMAU OF TUB KLAMATH LANOUAOE.

Plu»)erlect tense, distributive form:
a/ley haviuf/ struck severally ktuktk(Slank, ktuktkiilank, Mod. ktuktkcilan,
ktuktkulan.

The form -(')lank, -ulank with its proper meaning — "ceasing, or having
ceased" — is of more frequent use than the form -tkank, Mod. -tkan; cf.
Suffix -tka.

Verbals.
Infinitive, absohite form :
to strike, to be struck or hit ktuka.

Infinitive, distributive form :
to strike, to be struck or hit severally ktiiktka.

Ver'jal indefinite (past-present) in -ash, absolute formi:
the act of striking ktukash, syncop. ktiiksh, ktuks.
the fathe/s striking p'tfsham ktukash.
my striking ge-u ktukash, or kti'iksh kd-u.
thy striking mi ktukash, or ktuks mi.
his, her, its striking ktukash m'na, p'na.
our striki. g nalam ktukash, ktiiksh.
your striking malam ktukash.
their striking m'nahim, p'nalam ktukash.
the striking by others tlian tlie grammatic subject of the sentence: ktukasham,

syncop, ktuksham.
for, on account of, attor.t striking ktukashti, ktiikshti.
at the tin • of striking ktukshe'mi, kti'iksliiim.
tvhile, when striking ktukashi, ktukshi.
going to, on the point of striking ktu'<ashtka, ktukashtka g{.

Verbal indefinite in -ash, distributive form :
the act or acts of striking severally ktuktkash, syncop. ktuktksh.
the fathcr''s striking sev. p'tfsham ktuktkash.
my striking s ge-u ktuktkash. ktuktk'sh kd-u.
thy striking s. mi ktuktkash.
his, her, its striking s. m'na, p'na ktuktkash.
our striking s nalam ktuktkash.

PARADIGM OF KTCKA.

449

your striking s. tnillani kti'iktkaHli.

their strikiwf s in'miliiin, p'nalam ktukikash.

the striking severally by others than the grammatic subject of the Hcntonce :

ktuktkaBham.
for, on account of, about striking s. ktiiktkashti.
at the time of striking s. ktukikashCmi, ktuktkashiim.
11 lie, when striking s. kti'iktkaHhi.
going to, on the point of striking s. ktiiktkashtka, ktuktkashtka gl.

Verbal indefinite (past-present) in -ish, absolute form:

(The syncopated forms are identical with those of the verbal in
-ash.)
one who strikes or is struck kti'ikish, syncop. ktuksh, ktuks,
others striking than the subject of the sentence : ktiikisham.
for, on account of, about one striking kti'ikishti.
at the time of one striking ktukislul'mi.
while, when one is striking kti'ikishi.
one going to strike ktukishtka, ktukishtka gi.

Verbal indefinite in -ish, distributive form :
one who strikes severally ktuktkish, syncop. ktuktksh.
others striking s. than the subject of the sentence : ktuktkiaham.
for, on account of striking s. ktiiktkishti.
at the time of one striking s. ktuktkishe'mi.
while, when one is striking s. ktuktkiahi.
one going to strike s. ktiiktkishtka, ktuktkishtka gi.

Verbal conditional in -sht, absolute form :

when, after, on account of striking, having or being struck ktukasht, sync, ktiiksht.
tvhcn the chief has struck lakiasli ktukasht.
when, after I hare struck nush (nish) ktukasht, kti'iksht,
ichen thou hast strtick mish ktukasht.
when he, she, it has struck pish ktukasht.
when ive have struck nalash (na'lsh, na'sii) ktukasht.
when ye have struck nuilash (ma'lsh) ktukasht.
when they have struck shash ktukasht.
29

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-S)

/^.

{./

r> m

%^ . c*^

■^

'£<?

1.0

I.I

1.25

"SUM 12.5

u: K 122

f us llio

il 1116

Oy^y

Photographic

Sciences
Corporation

23 WE$T MAIN STREET

WIrSSTER, N.Y. 14S80

(716) 872-4503

^v^

ri:^^

1^ <.v

f/^

' f.

450

GRAMMAE OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

«i'j
;'«»»

Verbal conditional in -sht, distributive form :
when, after, on account of striking, having or heing struck severally ktuktkasht.
when the chief has struck s. lakiash ktuktkasht.
ivhen, after I have struck s. nush (nish) ktuktkasht.
when thou hast struck s. mish ktuktkasht.
tclien he, slie, it has struck s. pish ktuktkasht.
tvhen we have struck s. ndlash (naish) ktiiktkasht.
when ye have struck s. mdlash (ma'lshj ktdktkasht.
when they have struck s. shash ktuktkasht.

Verbal preterit in -uish, absolute form :
the fact of having struck, the past act of striking or being struck ktiikuish.

Verbal preterit in -uish, distributive form :
the fact of having struck severally; the past act or acts of striking severally
ktuktkuish.

Verbal causative in -6ga, -uk, absolute form :
for striking in order to strike, because striking ktukuga, ktukug, ktiikok,
ktukog, ktuk6ga, ktiikuk. Future tense : ktukuapkiiga, etc.

Verbal causative in -oga, -uk, distributive form :
for striking, in order to strike, because striking severally ktuktkiiga, ktuktkuk,
ktiiktkug, ktuktk6ga, ktuktkog, ktiiktkok. Future : ktuktakuapkiiga.

For forms like gftkiug, meftgiug, see Verbal intentional.
Verbal durative in -lita, absolute form :
while striking ktukuta, ktuk6ta.

Verbal durative in -uta, distributive form :
while striking severally ktuktkuta, ktuktk6ta.

Verbal intentional in -tki, absolute form :

in order to strike, for the purpose of striking ktiiktki, ktuktgi ; when pro-
nounced indifferently, ktiiklka, ktuktk.

Verbal intentional in -tki, distributive form :

in order to strike severally ktuktuktki, ktuktaktgi.

■'■i ' I P.

PARADIGM OF KTtJKA.

451

The absolute as well as the distributive form undergoes periphrastic
conjugation through the addition of the auxiliary gi in all its inflectional
forms : gl, giuga, gfank, giula, gish, glsht, etc.

in order to strike ktuktki gt, d. ktuktdktki gi.

in order to strike ktuktki gfug, d. ktuktAktki gfug ; in the contracted form,
ktuktgiiiga, ktuktgiug etc.

THE PASSIVE VOICE.

Although the passive voice is in form identical throughout with the
active voice of the transitive verb, there is a periphrastic conjugation which
has exclusively a passive signification. It is the participle in -tko connected
with the auxiliary gi. Thus we have nii a ktiikatko gi / am struck; literally,
"I am the struck or hit one"; "I am the one who was struck." The
striking subject, whenever mentioned, is added in the possessive case, as
with all other passive forms : i a kilo'sham ktiikatko gi thou art or hast
been struck by an angry ^person), or is expressed by a possessive pronoun.
The paradigm for the past-present tense is as follows :

ni\ a ktiikatko gi / am struck.

1 a ktiikatko gi thou art struck.

pi a ktiikatko gi he, she, it is struck.

nad a kti'ikatko gi we are struck.

at a ktiikatko gi ye are struck.

sha, pat a ktiikatko gi f]iey are struck.

Thus the periphrastic conjugation goes on through the distributive
form, ktuktkatko, and through all the tenses, modes, participles, and verbals
of gi (gi't, gfank, giug etc.) :

nfl a hunk ktuktkatko gi I ivas struck at different times.
pi a ktiiktttko gf-uapk hr will be struck.
ktiikatko gi'sht on account of being struck.

-The medial, reflective, reciprocal, causative voices are inflected just like
the active voice.

452

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

«::

i»J(»»

THE INTKAN8ITIVE VOICE.

Its inflection differs from that of the active voice only by the fact that
the subject standing in the singular number governs the absolute form of
the verb, the subject in the plural the distributive form, which performs the
same function here as the plural of our verbs. Of course this applies only
to verbs on which the dual and plural are not formed by a radical syllable
differing from that of the singular, as in Imwa, tiishua, tfnua. It is sufficient
to give the present tense of one intransitive verb as an example :

I sit in a circle n<i a Uupka Hupka nil

t a Hupka Ifupka t

pi a Ifupka Ifupka pi

we sit in a circle nad a Iflupka lilupka nad

at a Iflupka Iflupka at

sha a Iflupka Iflupka sha

Ifupkan

Iflupkna
Iflupkat
Iflupkash

THE IMPERSONAL VOICE.

The impersonal verbs, as seen above, are either verbs with personal
object or objectless verbs. It will suffice to show the inflection of the
former only, since it is identical with that of the latter with the object
omitted. The object, if a personal pronoun, is usually placed after the verb.
I have selected the verb tiii'ma nush / feel hungry, which shows only one
irregularity, that of forming its distributive as tetiii'nia instead of tita-ii'ma.
The plural is formed as in the intransitive verbs, and although the distribu-
tive form is more expressive tiii'ma nalasli, malash, sliash may be used also.

Paradigm of tia'ma k(jrh / feel hungry.

Declarative mode.
Present tense :

7 a>»/j?<«/jrr^; tiii'ma nilsh, nish niish a tiii'ma tiii'mansh

tiii'ma mish mish a tiii'ma tiii'mamsh

tiii'ma pish, hunkgsh

we are hungry: tetiii'ma and tia'ma nalash,

na'lsh, na'sh

tetiii'ma ma'lash, ma'lsh

tetiii'ma shash

niish a tiii'ma
mish a tiii'ma
pish a tiii'ma
na'lsh a tetiii'ma,

tiii'ma,
ma'lsh a tetiii'ma
shiish a tetiii'ma

;f;? : '<"

THE U INFLECTION. 453

I'reterit tense:
/ was, have been Iitoiffry tiii'nia iiAsli liAnk ; tiii'munsli hAn.
we were, have been hunfjri/ tetiii'iiia, tiii'ina nu'lsli hiink.

Future tense :
I shall be hungry tiamnapka nilsli.
I shall be hungry tiii'nia tak nfish (Mod.).
we shall he hungry tetianiuapka, tiiiniuj'ipka nalash.
we shall be hungry tetiii'ma tak, tiii'nia tak luilaah (Mod.).

Conditional mode.
I may be hungry tiii'mat nA'sh.
we may be hungry tetiii'mat, tiii'mat nAlasli.

Imperative and exhortative mode (wanting).
Participles and Verbals (used in the senso of an active verb),
tiii'mantko, tetiii'niantko hungry or hungering, 90, 12.
tiii'mash, tetiii'niasli the condition of being hungry.
tiii'maaht, tetiii'masht having been hungry etc.
tiii'muk, tetiii'miik /or />(.«(/ hungry, 9.''), 18.

A few verbs in -a, b"ke nia'slia to be sick, are using forms derived from
verbs in -i. Cf. the "I-inliection."

THE U-INFLECTION.

The vowel -u, which terminates these verbs, alternates in almost every
instance with -0; and there are two classes of these verba: (I) such as
show -u, -o as a constant terminal vowel; (2) verbs in -ua, -wa, which
occasionally suppress tlie final -a, though it re-appears in some forms of con-
jugation. The first class shows but a small number of verbs, but there are
several verbs which are apt to .uibstitute -u (and -i) for -a whenever tlie
meaning of the vei'b is required to undergo alteration: gatpna to arrive;
gAtpnu to arrive at a distant place. Cf. Suffix -u.

Verbs following the U-inflection add the usual inflectional suffixes, as
-ilga, -(5ta, -tki, -tko, -ash, -ank, -an, -uisli to the verbal stem, which ends in
-u, -o. When the suffix begins with a vowel, this vowel forms synizesis

4o4

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

with the u foregoing in the No 1 class of verbs ; but in the No. 2 class it is
optional fi.r the speaker to contract the two vowels or to pronounce them
separately.

Class No. 1: gAtpnil to arrive out there: gatpnAnk for gatpnuank .
tAmenil to travel; tamen6tka to return from travel; t.4nienug for tam6nu-ugi
verbal causative.

Class No. 2: nii^muatko or mi'mutko camped in the prairie; ht'shkuank
or ht'shkunk bettinff with each other; shii'tuank or sii'tunk counting.

A full paradigm seems unnecessary.

THE I-INFLECTION.

There are several classes of verbs following the inflection in -i or -e:
(1) verbs having no other suffix but -i, -e, which is the suffixed pronominal
particle hf, hi ; (2) verbs ending in the compound suffix -ia. -ea (not the
emphasized -I'a, -fya, -ca), of which the final -a is sometimes suppressed in
the absolute form to re-appear in other forms of inflection ; cf. alahi and
alahia, spukli and spuklia; (3) verbs in -i, which have a parallel form in
-a, as kiiki and kiika ; (4) verbs in -a, of which souie inflectional forms
show -i, -e, where -a is expected.

The verbs in -i subjoin to themselves tlie inflectional endings in the
usual way; and when the suffixes begin with a vowel, synizesis takes place
but exceptionally, as in gl'nk, gi'n for gfank, gi'an existin;). The -i is elided,
however, in the verbs ending in -uH (-oli) and in -p6l( (-p'K, -plf), as follows:

gatpampeli to return home; gatpampalank, not gatpamp6liank.
wet61i to fall down ; wet61ank, not wetoliank or wetcSlink.

Of classes 3 and 4 the following instances may suffice :
ma'sha to he sick; mashitko, mashetko sick, suffering.
ni'ita, V. intr. to hum; nuti'sh the fact of burning.
shnuta to dry hy the fire; shnutetko parched, dried.
spekpela to squint; spekpelftko squinting.

shnawakftko wearing a necklace, from shnawilka, has to be explained as
a contraction of its longer form, shnawAkash gftko.

THE L INFLECTION.

455

THE L-INKLECTION. PAWAniGM.

The verbs following this inflection terminate in -al or -la, and were
originally verbs in -ftla (not -dla). Their paradigm differs from that of the
verbs in -a only by the occasional dropping of the short a before or after
the 1, which dropping is caused by the shifting of the accent, and this by
the length or bulk of the suffix appended. The verbs in -al inflect as follows:
Declarative mode.
nfi a pdtkal / rise from bed or sleep.
nvL a papAtkal / rise at different times.
nd patkaluapka, Mod. n(i pAtkal tak / shall rise.

Conditional mode.
nil pdtklat (for ptitkAlat) 1 may rise.

Imperative mode.
pdtkal i ! arouse! patklat ! arouse ye! get up t

Participles.
pdtklank rising; paklatko risen.

Verbals.
pdtkalsh ge-u my rising; niish pdtkalsht after I had risen; patkaluish
g^-u my previous rising; patkfth'iga, patkeluk, patkluk in order to
rise; patkaluta while rising; patkaltgi for the purpose of rising;
pdtkalshtka on the point of rising.

The distributive form is inflected in the same manner.

The verbs in -la, -shla re-instate the short a before -1 when suffixes
beginning with a consonant are appended, vocalic suffixes producing no
change from the paradigm of the verbs in -a. Example: spuklishla to erect
a sweat-lodge.

Participles.
spuklishdltko a stveat-lodge having been erected.

• Verbals.
spuklishalsh, spuklishalsht, spuklishdltki, spuklishAlshtka.

THE N-INFLECTION. PARADIGM.

This mode of inflection embodies the verbs in -n and those in -na (for-
merly -ana); the same phonetic laws control it as the previous inflection.

I 1

45t;

GBAMMAU OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

(BBC* #1

The only difference from this lies in the circumstance that in some verbs in
-n, -na the n is decidiioiiH, while in othera it maintains itself through all the
verbal forms. To these latter belong tliose verbs which have a simple form
besides the form in -na: hudsha to run, hudshna to run to some distance; gi'ika
to climb, gukna to climb some way up, etc.; also the verbs originally ending in
-Ina, as gasaktchna to follow.

1. The verbs in -n. They are very limited in number and terminate
in -an or -in (utchfn tofsh with net, and others on page <5."i7); they preserve
the -n in the declarative mode of the absolute and distributive form, present
tense, but drop it in the future tense, the conditional mode, the participles
and verbals of both forms.

We subjoin the paradigm of pAn to eat, d. papan to eat at different times
or to eat various kinds of food, as characteristic of this class of the N-inflection :

Declarative mode.
nil a pAn / eat; nil a ptipan.

nfi a lulnk piln / ate, have eaten; nfi a h<\nk pdpan.
nft a pa-uapka / shall eat; n(i a papa-uapka.

Conditional mode,
n^ a pa't, pat ; nd a pdpat.

Imperative mode.
pdn i ! pan at ! d. pApan i ! pdpan at !

Participles.
pA-ank, pa'nk Kl., pA-an, pa'n Mod.; d. papank, papan.
pdtko eaten, consumed; d. pa2)atko.

Verbals.
pa'sh, pash; d. pApash.
pa'sht; d. papasht.
pa-uish ; d. papsVuish.

pa-uk, pa-uga ; d. pap'uk, pap'uga, papiiga.
pa-6ta, pa-uta; d. pap'ota, pap'uta, pap6ta.
pAtki, pAtgi ; d. papatki, papAtgi.
pa'shtka ; d. pApashtka, papashtga gi.

TIIK NINFLECTION.

457

2 The verbs in -na with deciduous suffix retain the -n in the absolute,
but drop it in tliu distributive form. Except for tliis sniull difference, their
inflection is rejfuliir, iind followH the A-inflection.

ktj'ina to sleep; d. Ictukta and kakta.
kshena to carry on the arm; d. k8hi'k.slia.
8;i{t'na to row, paddle; d Hxi's^a.
wfna, shufna to sing; d. wfwa, shufshua.

Even in the derivatives of the verb shufna the dropping of the -n
occurs: shuinala to simj repeatedly; d. slniishuahi.

Tlio inflection of the verbs retaining tlie -na, -n throughout does not
differ from that of the verbs in -la, but for the change of this consonant.
A few verbs show both forms, e. g., kk'na to hop on one ley; d. klt'kla and
kleklana.

3. Derivatives of verbs in -na, which are formed by means of suffixes
beginning with -p, as -pka, -pcli, and also the oblique cases of the past
participle of verbs, which retain their -na, change n into m before the -p
following:

gt'na logo: gdmpka, gempCle, gempkash (for gonapkash).
hutna to run some distance: hutampka, hi'itampCle.
stfltchna to report: stfltchampeli, stiltchampkam etc.

This nasalization is also observed in the inchoative verbal suffix -ts'impka
and in the oblique cases of many participles in -ntko, -antko, which cannot
be derived from any existing verb ending in -na. Thus we have tfn;(;antko
obtaining by chance, obj. case tin^ampkash; tilhuiintko flooded, oljj. case
tilhuampkash (with others to be found under suffix -antko), although there
are no verbs tinp^na, tilhuana, but only tin^a, tilhua. Facts like these have
to be ascribed to a certain tendency prevailing in the language to nasalize
explosive sounds, surd and sonant, especially when they stand at the end
of words.

PARTICLES USED AS VEUBS.

In the previous pages I had no opportunity of mentioning an extraor-
dinary method of forming verbs observed in the Klaniath language— that of
using particles as verbs. Particles used in this way are not susceptible of

458

OFtAMMAR OF TIIK KLAMATH LAN(MJA()K.

inflection, and puiticiimtn of tlio natnio of tim voil) on.y throngli tiioir con-
nection witlj personal prononns. We are almost compelled to aHHume ellip-
hIh of jf r or some otl.er verb ; btit if wo do so, why are not many other par-
ticles used in the same way f 'I'lK^se jjarticles are as follows :

giUak, pil'tak, at kii'tak .so far, rHout/h, in Modoc kanktak; used as a
verb in the sense of to utop, ccasr, quit. 'Vm\ nat at gii'tak njhr this wn ceased
(fij^htiiif?), 24, ;J ; tchfn at nat at fjii'tak ndi'ini tamenotk .sy> /, ivlien we quit
(fiffhtinjr) I had returned (from there) three times, 2''-. j. kanktak shi'ipfde
kteti'g' i ! stop cuttinff Itread! df kanktak gi'n wawalkan sittinu down quietly,
34, 13; lit. "doing just so much as sitting."

h(-itok l^(>WH,ontheuround{m\\^\\ni\ii)•, verbified into: to sit or lie down.
In 34, 11, hi-itok at corresponds to the Knglish "down with ye and be still !"

k a t a k , d. kiiktak truly ; katak and ki'itak gi to tell the truth. At kaktak
pfla! tell ye nothiin/ Imt the truth! The Modocs have kana, katchi'm, and
kana tchek for truly, certainly, surely.

1 e w a k , le wak ka-a, lii' uk ga-i'i to he undecided, irresolute about some-
thing ; tsui nat h' wak ka-a, or tsui lii a nat wak ka-a then we were quite
undecided what to do, 21, 18 ; lii nat wak galdsawia-a ! we do not know whether
we should approach or not! 2i, 2 ; K' hai ni^ mish nen u'k ! / do not know how
to call you! (Mod.) where nen stands for to call and iVk for wak. The
Modocs also say: ka-i wak, ka-i uk ga-a, or simply uk ga-a, wak ka-a.
These particles are placed in connection with a verb (nc'-iil;Ka) in 22,
12; 65, 1, 2.

nen, oral particle referring to what is or was said or heard, is some-
times used instead of shcshatko thus named, or sla'sha, c'l;^a to give name:
nen Ai'shish tche ha I shall I call you Aishishf nt'nt nt'nt (for ne-a dt) !
call me thus! right so! (Mod.)

IV.— DERIVATION.

Although the Klamath language can be considered to be built up rather
upon analytic than upon synthetic principles, there are two departments in

VKUIIAL DKUIVATION.

459

it in whicli it iH not only Hynt,lioti<s I»ut polyrtynthotic— tlio inflection of tlio
noun and the ilorivation of vorlw l)y piofixoH and Hnflixcm.

Tho j^n^at coni|il()xify iKircoptiblo in tlu) dcrivntion of vorlm and vorbal
notniH in Hnfliciontly appaiviit fron« tlio lonjr liHtH which I liavc (hnotud to
prefixation and snllixation, to hotli liindH of rcchjpncation, to vocalic mwith-
ohIh, and other (u.ntrivanccH for verh-dcrivirifr. It would ho iihoIchh to ropoat
this hero; and all I can do \h to >,'iv() Home {roncral points of vicnv upon tho
synthotic powern of the langiiafro, and to rcfc^r rcadcrH to the dc-rivation of
the HiihHtantive, adje(rtive, and ininieral nonn, where cognate niattern are
spoken of.

In our Klamath Lake and Modoc toxtH short words are the rule and
polysynthetic words the exception. Mut the ukm-o fact that these can occur
forces UH to consider them, and to acuumnt for the laws presiding over their
formation. Prefixes aggregate only to the luunher of three, and sullixes to
the number of five, thougli this number of derivational sufKxes may be
increased by inflectional suttixes. IVetixes either indicate the voice of the
verb, or the nund)er or external shajjc of tho verbal object or subject. Suf-
fixes are either of a material or a relational character, as pointed out on
page 280. Th<».se of a material function chiefly point to location or different
modes of motion, and are nuu'h more niunerous and poly.synthetic than the
relational ones; their great nundier being largely duo to the circumstance
that what we express analytically by certain adverbs and prepositions these
natives express synthetically by suftixation to the verbal base. In the in-
flection of verba suffix(is only, no prefixes, are employed.

Verbal derivatives are formed from all the four species of roots dis-
cussed on page 'iaO sqq.— onomatopoetic, interjectional, pronominal, and
predicative, although tho two first-named occur in very few verbs only.
In some verbs it is diflficidt to distinguish between the sounds forming the
prefix and those constituting the radix, as may bo gathered from the List
of Prefixes, under e-, i-, yan-, yu-, ma-, and others.

In intransitive verbs we moot initial syllables, like lui-, tush-, tin-, he-,
we-, klush-, kish-, lu-, luk-, which cannot be considered as prefixes, but must
be taken for roots employed to distinguish number. The signification of the
vui^s formed by these often differs somewhat from that of parallel verbs

460

OttAMMAH OF THK KLAMATH LANdUAUK.

formed with roots pointing to another number of the verb. ThuH wi-nkn,
e. g., when npplied to more thsin one subject, menuH to die, like k'h'ku (uned
for one Hubjecit), but its real meaning is to stretch tlir Ici/s.

A few HurtixeH, like -nga, -tka, -uta, are uh.mI for lioth derivational and
inflectional purposes, but these may be easily di.stin;,niiHlied from each other,
as the former necessarily prvccde the latter. Moth kinds of atlixes may be
studied in their variety of combinaticm from the Dictionary, and in their
simpler forms and true functions from the " Recapitulations" contained on
pages 302 and 3();J (Prefixes), and pages .'JUA-.'JilH (Suffixes).

Nothing can give a better idea of the Indians' vivid and natural manner
of considering objects or phenomciui of nature and acts of man than the
study of these affixes and their combinations. A motion performed in a
straight line is referred to difierently from another done in a zigzag, curvi-
linear, or interrupted line, or from a motion performed sidewise or oblicjuely
or at a distance from the one si'eaking, cir'-umstances which it would sel-
dom occur to us to express in European hingiuiges. A largo number of
instances could be adduced to show the pictorial tendency of the language
in expres.sing form or appearance, the conditions under which an act is per-
formed, etc The description of the exterior of the verbal subject or object
is an especially graphic and interesting feature, and as this feature has been
dwelt upon at length in the chapter on Prefixes, it will suffice to give some
examples taken from the northern dialect :

na'sh ml mish nc-i tdla I pay you one dollar (in the form of one note).

nfi mish papkash uya I yire you a club.

Idwash nA luya hiVnkiCsh I yire him a play-hall.

ti'nna nrt mish anku yani I yive you many sticks or clubs.

la'p Ic'waah ml mish pewi I yivc you two play-balls.

Wiitsag nfi kshuya ma'lsh I yive a doy to you.

lil'gs ml hunk spunf liA'nkiash I gave or transferred a slave to him.

dmpli t tchfya nish you give me water.

tchule'ks nA tchik^ya hft'nksh / give him meat.

Iwam nil skf'iya mish / give you whortleberries in a basket.

pAla-ash nfi shi'ii mdlsh / give you bread on a plate.

TIIK aunSTANTIVH NOUN.

461

Hhowaiui u{\ ma'lsli tal.i, waJmig, Wgn, a,,,,,,-,, tcliulr.'kH, (warn, palu-ash
Iffiie you money, thys, .slaves, sereml caps w puils of water, several
pieces of meat, a (nmntity o( herries, bread.

Form or oxtcHor In dcmcribed not only in tlio veil), Ixit in the noun
also in the Henteneen foUowinjT :

hitfHii nA h'it;ifa I pick a berry, round fruit.
ntfHli nrt I'ltxii I pick a lony-.shaped fruit.
h'lasli hi3ii'fra the foy lijts.
hianh ludMlnia the foy is nioriny.

THE SUBSTANTIVP].

The snbHtantive i)elong8 to that diviHion of speech vvhicli we call the
noun, and is the most important representatl-.e of it. Outside of the .sub-
8t<intive noun, the otiier nominal forms are the adjective noun, which in the
Klamath lanjrua<re also embodies tlie indeHm'te verbal in -,sl> and the past
participle in -tko, the numeral noun, and the pronoun. A few postpositions
are also formed by means of nominal cases. The Klamath verb, which is
a noun-verb, partakes more of the quality of a noun than the noun does of
the nature (.f the verb. In fact, oidy a limited Tiundjer of Klamath sub-
stantives (no adjectives) can assume a temporal character throu<rh the suffix
-uish; these are all derivatives of veros, uomina vcrhaliu, and we are free to
consider them as verbal forms or as nouns, though, in English, substantives
will render their meaninfr more accurately than any verbal form. In the
substantive of the Algonkin languages the verb-character is more apparent.

The granunatic categories which we distinguish in the Klamath noun
are case, gender, and number (in the form of severalty). liut gender be-
comes apparent only in the substantive and a few pronouns; severalty is
not distinguished in a portion of the pronouns and substantives. Case
alone appears in all the four species of the noun.

In regard to the classification of the various kinds of substantives, I
intend to use the same terms as the English grammarians. Substantives
are either concrete or abstract; the concrete are cither generic or specific.

<^m\

;

GBAMMAU OF TUK KLAMATH LANiUrACiB.

Proper names and names of species will be included in the specific class;
collective nouns mainly belong' to tlie clasd of generic terms.

As regards derivation, a majority <>f the substantives are derived from
the same bases which form verbs, by means of the universal nonn-making
suffix -sh (-ash, -ish etc). The prefixes occurring in substantives are iden-
tical with those occurring in the verl).

I shall consider the morphology of the substantive under the following
heading's: (1) (render; (2) Absolute and distributive form; (3) Inflection
for case; (4) Derivation.

I. ANIMATE AND 1NAN?MATE GENDER.

Tho lani'-uage mr.kes a general distinction between what I call animate
beings and inanimate objects of nstture. but does not draw the limit between
the two with accuracy. Both classes show tlie same affixes in the subjective
and in most of the other cases, and reseml)le each otlier largely, the main
point of distiiiction being in tho objective case. To turm thi.-, case, tlir mii-
mal'.' (fender appcnih -ash to the sidtjectire case, while the iu(inhi!(ife /onus it like
the SHhjectire case. Othe: points of distinction are that the animate geirU'r
lar'^-s the suffix -tat, -at as a locatire suffix, and seldom uses the suflix -tka.

Tlie animate (jender is made up, grannnatically speaking, of tho follow-
ino classes of substantive nouns: (leneric terms for and proper names of m(!n
and women, 'juadrupeds, the genii and miraculous beings of Indian mythol-
ogv, and many inanimate objects when mentioned in mythic tales. Terms
of relationship <.nding in -p do not assume the mark of the objective case.

The inanimate ifewlcr includes the gentjric and specific names for birds,
fishes, and the lower animals; for all plants, as trees, weeds, bulbs, etc.; for
the objects of i-iorganic nature ; for the portions and limbs of the human
and animal body; as well as all collective nouns, whether applied to inani-
mate objects or not, and the abstract nomis.

Wlier adjectives, numerals, or participles are joinod to substantives to
qualify them, their ending -sh remains the same in the objective case, whether
the noun they (pialify represents an animate or an inanimate object.

Some exceptions to the above rules occur, to be mentioned under the
case-ending -ash, which are not easily accounted for. The more general

ABSOLUTE AND DISTRIBUTIVE FOHM.

403

use of the suffix -ash in the mythic stories may be explained by a sort of
personification, or, in poetry, by the refiuirement of the rhytlmi. Ph'i forms
phi in tlie objective case when it sifrnifios./«/,,^,r«.«.; but used as the proper
name of a person, i^ forms I'hiash; shh'.a h,n.v, thou-h a .,ua(h-.,ped, has no
form shhksh, neither has yuhu buffalo: hil tmn yuhu huil.'.lisli g\ hi killed
many buffaloes, though both belong to the category of cjuadrupeds, which is
inflected Hke that of persons. Here the reason may be tiiat these nouns
were made from finite verbs without change or suffixation, and finite verbs
being unable to take nominal endings, these substantives remained as they
were.

The inflection of the Klamath verb contjiins no forms relating either to
animate or inanimate objects or subjects by making distinctions between
the two, as we see it done in Nahuatl by the objective incorporated parti-
cles te-, tla-, tetla-. The prefixes relating to shape, as ksh-, i-, ta- (t-), u-
and others, refer to one or several long objects or subjects without discrim-
inating between animate and inanimate.

I have called the two genders by the names animate and inanimate,
but leave it to others to invent more appropriate designations, if any can
be found, as "noble and ignoble", "personal and impersonal", etc.

Neither the Klamath pronoun nor the verb or substantive distinguishes
between the male and female sex by grammatic forms. Klamath does not
belong to the sex-denoting languages, and, indeed, the class is rathei- small
upon the Western Continent. Wherever a distinction of this sort is made
in tVr bstantive, it is made by agglutinating some sexual distinction (cf
9£, to the noun, as is done in some Tinnc and Maya languages and
in I „e Toniea. The Carib alone seems to have a real sufiix for the fem-
inine.

t '1

11. ABSOLUTE AND DISTRIBUTIVK FORM.

Like t!ie su.bstantive of many other agglutinative languages, the Kla-
matl; substantive possesses no special forms to indicate lunnb-^r, either for
the singular or dual and plura', and the plural number recjuires to be pointed
out by hj^ecial words, as pronouns, adjectives, or numoial adjectives. When
tho substantive is the subject of an intransitive verb, its dual and plural

li-

464

GRAMMAK OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

number can be declared by the distributive form of the verb. The same
may be done when it is the object of a transitive verb, in case each one of
the objects is acted upon separately.

With a few exceptions, to be pointed out below, the distributive form
of substantives marks severalty, not plurality, as shown by several instances
on page 262 sq. It follows from this that the absolute form of the sub-
stantive points to the singular no more than to the dual or plural, and that
the distributive stands also either for the singular or for the dual or plural.
Thus tut is one tooth or many teeth, d. tutat each of the single teeth or each col-
lection of teeth ; pt'tch the foot, a foot, one foot, or the feet, fiet, many feet, d.
pc'patch each foot, each pair of feet, each pair or lot of pairs, or lot of feet;
tapax leaf or leaves, d. tiitpax each leaf, every leaf for itself, each lot of leaves.

Connected with this is another peculiarity of the language — the lack of
any term that could be construed as representing our definite and indefinite
article. Only the run of the sentence can teach us whether a tooth or the
tooth, whether squirrel or the or a squirrel is meant, but usually there is no
doubt about this matter. Thus the ver}- use of the distributive form points
to certain objects .held in view or mentioned in the context, and suggests
the use of our tJie; demonstrative pronouns and particles also point to defi-
nite objects. The numeral na'dsh, na'sh means one, d. nanash every single
one, and sometimes corresponds to our indefinite article. If (piantity or
number has to be specified, a numeral or adjective will .serve the [)urpose.
Thus duality is indicated by lapi, la'p two, lapuk both; plurality by any
numeral above two, or by tuuii many, tumiaga a few only, nanuk all, every
one, nanka some, a few.

Among the almost countless number of substantives in the language,
there is a class which does not reduplicate at all, another tiiai appears only
in the distributive form, another embodying tiie names of relationship, etc.
All these special classes wii. be discusse<l hereafter.

We can distinguish the following difi"erent modes of reduplication in
substantives:

1. The regular form occurs in substantives of an abstract as well as of
a concrete signification: anku tree, d. a-anku; bunuish drinker, d. bubanuish;
kfsh untruth, lie, d. kfkish.

USE OF THE DISTRIBUTIVE FORM.

465

2. Substantives occurring in the distributive form alone are few in num-
ber and unite both functions-that of a real phiral and that of indicating
severalty.

lulp, contr. for li'ilap eyes; na'sh Mlp one eye, though Mlp is used for one

eye also.
niJi'miikli, generic term for wild ducks and geese.
miimuatch ears, both ears, the hearing apparatus; nd-ighstani or na'sh

miimuatch one ear (Mod.).
tataksni, obj. case tatakiash children; wdash one child.
wdwanuish, contr. wewansh ivomen; snawedsh one woman.

3. Substantives which occur in both forms and in the distributive may
be used as well as real plurals for all forms marking severalty. This class
is composed of such terms for persons as most frequently occur in conver-
sational language.

hfhashuaks men, husbands, and each man or husband.

laldki chiefs of a tribe, and each chief.

shaslulmoks relatives and each relative.

shishuaga girls and each girl.

titsga-aga old parents and each old parent.

wt^vanui8ll women and each woman.

4. Substantives occurring in one form only, either the absolute, or the dis-
tributive form. Some lack the latter form for several causes, chief of which
is the difficulty or impossibility of pronouncing a reduplication of the initial
syllable, or the iteration of which would be repugnant to the native ear
Many of these nouns are the products of iterative reduplication. Thus we
have: }vha-ash species of crows, l;tel/atilnash harness, nanashgish butcher,
nkankatuish fetlocks, siitchishtchaggedshnish trotting-horse, shtoshtcStish go-
pher, vushu chest, watch horse. Witii these and many other terms severalty
has to be indicated by an adjective or numeral serving as an attribute, or
by the verb of the sentence, plurality by adjectives like tiimi many, etc.

Collective nouns, generally speaking, do not reduplicate distributively,
but prefer syntactic means to express severalty and large number. There
are, however, some whicli do so reduplicate, and in fact there is no stria-

406

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

gent reason why they should not. Terms adopted from foreign languages
make no exception. Kiii'm fish rarely takes the d. form kdkiiim, and such
terms as ko'l, a species of hulh, f warn berry, shmAyam hristU rarely use their
distributive form as collectives. To this series belong terms like kshuksh-
id^ash grease of animals, Ink seed and marrow, kClA-ush sand, Id^ash roe,
mushmush cattle, pala-ash ^owr (pdla-ash Ifklatko loaf of bread), shclpgle /oMr,
shiigga-i sugar, tchfkgmen nietal, iron, copper etc., we'sh ice.

Some nouns indicating a homogeneous solid or liquid mass, like Ampu
water, ke'sh snow, shtfe pitch, resin form a-/imbu, kt'kesh, shtfshtie.

4. The terms of relationship in -p (-ap, -ip) for the larger part redupli-
cate only the suffix into -ishap to indicate severalty; only a few of them
show both modes of reduplication. The whole process is spoken of at
length on pp. 275. 276.

5. Nouns adopted from foreign languages. No rule can be established
determining which of these will reduplicate and which will not, although the
Klamath language has a considerable faculty of transforming foreign terms
according to its own phonetic rules and forming derivatives from them.
Terms exhibiting the distributive reduplication are the following: Adak salt,
d. j'l-adak; etchmuna jpMr/j/e saluon, d. i-atchmi'ma; ipshiina sivamp-dogberry,
d. i-apshiina (all from the Shasti language); B(')stin American, d. Bob^stin;
kApo coat, dress, d. kakpo; inftash leggings, d. rafmdash; stfkshui shoe, boot,
d. stfshakshui ; tala dollar, money, d. tatAla.

in. INFLECTION FOR CASE.

Klamath may be counted among the languages of America which have
reached the most extensive development in regard to case-inflection. Many
relations of the noun, expressed in other languages through the verb, are
rendered here by a supply of nominal cases, and thereby a thorough-going
differentiation is brought about between the noun and the verb. Like
the Basque language, Klamath possesses the faculty of forming compound
or polysynthetic suffixes in its inflection. This profusion of cases forms a
striking contrast to the entire lack of case-inflection observed in many of
the agglutinative families, especially when we consider the circumstance
that every noun has a double inflection on account of being inflected also

INFLECTION FOR CASE.

467

distributively. The inflection of the adjective and numeral adjective is not
quite so nch in forms as that of the substantive.

CASE-SUFFIXES AND CASE-POSTPOSITIONS.

The numerous forms of nominal inflection, called cases by gramma-
rians, may be divided into two categories: («) the purely grammatic cases,
expressing mere relation of one noun to another, and being only three in
number, the subjective, direct-objective, and possessive case; (6) all the other
cases, as instrumental, inessive, adessivo. They are either locatives or take
their origin in some locative relation of the noun to the verb.

But this purely logical division of cases does not always work well
when practically applied to existing languages. It cannot be rigidly ap-
plied in a grammar of the Klamath language, for here the case of the
direct object is also that of the indirect object, and the possessive case is
also that which corresponds to the Latin ablative when connected with a,
ab and a verb in the passive voice.

It is best to divide the cases of Klamath inflection into cases formed
by case-suffixes and cases formed by case-postpositions. The former I call,
for convenience, sufiix-cases, the latter postposition-cases.

Suffix-cases are formed by nominal inflectional suffixes having no inde-
pendent meaning for themselves as words. They are usually unaccented,
and only two of them are dissyllabic in their unahrulffed form. Besides
the subjective case, which is not always made distinct by a suffix, there are
the cases in -ash, -am (-lam), -ti, -tka, -tat, -zeni, -na, -emi.

Postposition-cases are formed by means of particles having an inde-
pendent signification for themselves as words of the language, but when
connected with a noun are never placed before it. They are°all of a loca-
tive import, and frequently take the accent. Their list is: -i, kshi, -ksaksi,
-tala, -tana.

The function of some of the case-suffixes is of a very general nature,
and should be illustrated by a large array of (piotations to bo made clear!
No noun of both dialects will be found which is in possession of all the
case-suffixes and case-poatpositiom, und of the fourteen found in the para-
digms hardly ten can be said to bb ir. constant use. Temporal suffixes, for

468

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

example, can bo affixed to some of the abstiact snljstaiitivea only; i- and
-na are of rare occurrence, -tka, -ksakai etc. will be found chiefly in sub-
8tantiv(>H of the inanimate gend'i".

Klamath shows a lar<fe number of other postpositions than case-postpo-
aitions, mainly of a locative signification, which are connected with substan-
tives. They differ from the case-postpositions, because (1) they keep their
accentuation and thus appear as independent words, and (2) they can be
placed, at the speaker's option, before or after the noun they govern. Tkey
never coalesce into one word with the noun.

The only direct case, or casus rectus, is the subjective case, otherwise
named "nominative"; all others are oblique cases. A vocative case cannot
be said to exist, and the subjective case intonated on the last syllable will
answer for it, especially when followed by the interjection e: tidsf muka'kl
or tidsi muka'k o! that nice baby!

Many words taken from English or other languages foreign to Klamath
inflect like those of Klamath origin for case and for severalty: Boshtin,
ipshuna, lam, mftash, sho'p, ta-uni.

Up to this point we have considered only the simple form of nominal
inflection, by which a case is formed by one suffix or postposition only;
but Klamath also possesses a composite inflection of the absolute and dis-
tributive noun, since some of the cases can assume the functions of the
subjective case and form inflections for themselves by means of other case-
suffixes and case-jjostpoaitions. These polysynthetic nominal forms do not
exceed the number of three suffixes or postpositions, and thus the inflections
may be classified as binary and ternary one^. The caae-suffixes capable of
forming new aubatantives in this way are: -ash, -am, -ti, -emi; and the
case-postpositions, -i, -kshi, -ksaksi. The suffixes which each of these can
append, and a further discussion of the composite case-inflection, will be
found below.

FORMATION OF THE CASES.

According to the nature of the final sound of the substantive to which
the caae-endings are joined, all modes of inflection may be divided into
two classes, which, however, do not largely differ among themselves: (I)
Consonantal inflection, and (2) Vocalic inflection.

FOKMATION OF THE CASES.

469

A majority of all the Klamath substantives preserve throughout their
case-inflection the final sound which they possess in the subjective case.
Those which do not conform to this rule are some nouns in -sh (-s) and -p
(-ap, -ip); they drop this final consonant, or place a vowel between the
ending and the case-suffix. Substantives ending in -u (-o) and in -i (-e)
frequently insert the semivocalic w or y l)etweeu the two. Substantives
whose subjective case ends in -am, -lam have this ending unchanged through
all cases, except those mentioned on page 476.

Instances of these changes are as follows;

p^-ip daughter, obj. pdya, poss. pdyalam.

p'tfshap /ff//f/r, obj. p'tfsha.

ddshash milk, breast, poss. t'dsham.

lAtchash lodqe, house, poss. latcham, cf. 77, 4; loc. latchashtat, 83, 3.

pafshash cloud, poss. pafsham.

tdpakship younger sister, obj, tupakshash, poss. ti'ipaksham.

tchAshish skunk, poss. tchAsham.

ki'do, bilu clear sky, loc. kalowat and kalowashtat.

kta-i stone, rock, instr. ktayptka and kta-itka.

kdko hone, instr. kakowatka.

It^puinsh (for l(5puinash) //v/j«()r-2)rtM ; instr. It'puinatka.

n(5p hand, instr. nc^patka (as if from nopa or nepash).

pi'tch foot, instr. pt^tclitka and petsatka.

shu'p, sho'p soap, instr. shupatka.

In the possessive case, the nouns terminating in -a, -ii, -e assume the
suffix -lam instead of -am, while the others, following either the vocalic or
coiisonantic inflection, take -am. Thus all the diminutives in -aga, -ak, -ka,
-k show -lam in their possessive case, and this is even found exceptionally
in kaiVin feather-mantle, far-dress, poss. kailiulam. Thus we inflect:

ko-e, k^-a toad, poss. k<5alam.
skule, skulil lark, poss. skulelam.
tj'da dollar, money, poss. tiilalam.
watclu'iga, watchag dog, poss. watchagalam.

470

GBAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

■^ I::

Nouns in -wash, -watch show in their oblique cases a synizcsis of the
-wa into -6, -u aside of the reguhir form:

pAwatch tongue, poss. pdwatchani and pil-utcham.
wafwash white goose, poss. waiwashani and wayo'sham.

Abbreviations of case-suffixes and of case-postpositions are very fre-
quent, especially in rapid conversation. Thus we observe -tk, -t for -tka,
-ta, -at, -t for -tat, -a for -am, -iim for -e'mi, -ii'mi, -pfiin for -zeni, -tal, -ta for
-tala, -tan, -ta for -tana. In the inflection of the adjective the deterioration
of the endings has progressed still further, and in the composite nominal
inflection as far as in tlie simple case-declension.

Suffixes occurring only in the inflection of topographic terms and
proper names of localities are -i, -na.

LIST OP NOMINAL CASES.

Before entering into details concerning each of the suffix- and postposi-
tion-cases, I give a list of all the fourteen case-endings, reserving their
abbreviations for their special headings. All the cases of a locative char-
acter or origin follow each other in immediate succession. Some of these,
even of the monosyllabic ones, are composite, the second pronominal ele-
ment being formed by the demonstrative radicals -i, -la, -aa.

I. — Suffix-cases.

subjective: (-sh, -s). locative: -tat.

objective: -ash. illative: -z^ni.

possessive: -am. transitional: -na.

partitive: -ti. temporal: -e'mi.
instrumental: -tka.

II. — Postposition-cases.

inessive: -i.

adessive: -kshi. Mod -gislii.

emphatic adessive: ksaksi.

directive: -tala.
juxtapositive: -tana

There is probably no substantive in the language which forms more
than ten or eleven cases. Thus nouns designating persons, animals, oi

THE OBJEOTIVE CASE.

471

plants cannot form the transitional and the temporal cases, and the loca-
tive, instrumental and adessive are wanting with many of them also.

1. The subjective case.

The subjective and only direct case most frecjuently terminates in -sh,
-8, the universal noun-making suffix, which we have found to occur also in
the nominal forms of the verb. The vowel usually preceding it has fre-
quently been elided, as in terminals like -ksh, -Ish, -ntch, and others. The
identity of this most frequent of all nominal suffixes with that of the verbal
indefinite conclusively proves that the majority of all 8ub8ta^tives are but
the nominal expression of the verbalidea that they are either nomina actoris
and agentis, or nomina actionis and acti. Cf. Suffixes, pages 323, 339, 362, 368.

But there are many other suffixes than -sh capable of terminating sub-
stantives, for almost every sound which can close a word can also terminate
a noun in its subjective case. We have seen that the nouns in -p and a few
of those in sh drop these endings when they become inflected; a few nouns,
as pdta, mpatash milt, show two forms, the one with and the other without
the -sh. All this testifies to their immediate derivation from verbs. These
same suffixes are also dropped before certain affixes of an adnominal or
participial nature agglutinated to them, e. g.:

shiiks crane, Shuk=amtch Old Crane of mythic fame,
p'tfshap fatlier, p'tlshJulsh deceased father.

2. Objective case in -ash.

The direct object or complement of the verb, as well as its indirect object,
is expressed by the objective case in -ash, abbr. -Ish, -6sh, -'sh This case
therefore corresponds to the accusative and to the dative case of the classic
languages, sometimes to others of their cases besides. In its origin it is
nearly identical with the suffix of the subjective case -sh (-s), and in this
regard we may recall the fact that some of the Romanic languages have
formed their subjective case from the Latin accusative: homem (Portu-
guese) from hominem man, rien (French) from rem thing; in German we
have Namen, Samen, together with Name, Same, the former representing
in fact an objective case. In the Klamath a remnant of this sort is found in

:.i^

472

GRAMMAR OF TUK KLAMATH LANdUAdB.

^Y!*-y '•' .

the circumstance that the southern dialect has hfshuakshaHh man, hmhnnd,
8nawi!d»ha8h wife in the subjective and ohjoctivo cases, while the noitliorn
or Klamath Lake dialect oftenor shows hfshuaksh' and sni'iwedsli, ajjpend-
ing the -ash in the objective case only. 'Hw. Hamo can be said of the two
verbs to marry, which are derived from these terms.

But -ash, as pointed out above, forms the objective case of such sub-
stantives oidy as designate persons and quadrupeds, and in rapid conversa-
tion or narrative is sometimes dropped oven in those; cf. watch for watchash
horse, 127, 9; hfhassuaksh Mciatuash, for hfhassuakshash Moatuashash I'll
River men, ■?.(), 2. The objective case is identical with the subjective case in
collective and in abstract terms, and in the names for birds, amphibians, fish,
and the animals inferior to these ; in the names for plants and their organs,
for inanimate things, for limbs of the body, human or animal. Nevertheless
frequent exceptions to the ride here established may be met with in the more
archaic form of speech noticed in mythic stories and in song-lines, in which
the rhythm of the verse at times produces them. The form tcldpshash in
146, 3 (instead of tch(pash) is exceptional.

Diminutive nouns of the animate class, except when designating per-
sons, do not append -ash in the objective case, whether mentioned in archaic
texts or not,^ nor do the terms for relationship ending in -p (-ap, -ip;. As
instances we niention only mantchakash old man, nuikaksh (also mukak)
habe, to which may be added : watchagash doff.

Tupakship younner sister forms tupakshash, because it is usually abbre-
viated to tnpaksh in the subjective case. The regular form for tiiese nouns
in -p is: p'gfshap mother, p'gislia (obj ) the mother and to the mother. Washla
chipmunk does not change in the objective case, though we would expect
wiishlash, 110, 8. 9.

Examples op direct oiuect expressed by -ash or its abbreviations:
a. Persons and quadrupeds:
Tftak maklakshash ktupka Titak slapped an Indian.
mu'tchga nil hun hislmakshash / hate that man.

' Cf. Note to Texts, p. iW, 7, ami Texts 90, 7. 10.

" Hence the genius of the language considers them as of the inanimate order.

THE OBJECTIVE CASE.

473

nJl'Hh n! Ii'ifrshla HiidwiidHli I mpfuml one female, 20, 1; cf. &5, 8.
wilwnnuiHh hiixmm K'niuk.'iintcl.mh the tvives did not ncognvc Kmu-

kamteh, df), 10, and Note,
tclu'wnsli idiipka he kicked an antelope, Wi, 7.
Shu'kamtch Sln'isliapumtcluwh shiiiridil'wa ilnibutat Old Crane doused

Old Orizzhf in the water, ri.'J, 3. 4.
hJi' tchilloy.'iga Id'k shiiika finika tiislatch if a young man killed a grizzly

hear or a cougar, 90, 19.

h. Objects of the inanimate order:
nep liuahnza to shake hands.

kiil'm ftkal, ynliu li'iela to scoop up fish, to kill buffaloes. ^

wiidiVpka Shri'kHliam tcluVkHli she struck Crane's leg, 123, 2.
pi link shnoka yi'ikiak he caught a mocking-bird.

sliiiepG'nipennik vunaka ni'na in order to beguile his son, 94, 10; cf. 95, 8.
Afaliisliam slmlotish shni'ika he took away AishisKs garments, 95, 7,
sliufna sha tuti'ks m'nalani they sang their dream-songs, 65, 20.
wc'waniiialj ml'tak Htii'-ila the ivomen gather nutak-seed, 148, fi.
tclifkCmennip/iniptish blacksmith, lit. "iron-beafbr."
nft'sli tilansneasli, species of owl, lit. "twisting tlie head."

c. Objects of the inanimate gender when occurring in songs and
mythic stories:

nd-ul^a paplishash gi'tki gfug he caused a dam to come into existence, 94, 5.

kiidash shiitulan after creating the earth, 125, 1.

koshash k/i-a nu \m\\m\\nn\vA I am i)eckiug hard along the pine-tree, 162; 2.

shU'wishash nil tilutakni'ila breath I am emitting, 157; 45.

liVhiksash nfl shkutiya I torap flames around me, 154; 8.

Examples op indirect oiuect e::preased by -ash or its abbreviations:
a. Persons and quadriii)eds:
shApi mi lakiash! tell your general! 40, 3.
E-ukshiki'sbash pf'lpeliasii ka-i sliana-uli he did not want to work for the

Klamath Lake Indians, 35, 18; cf. 35, 11.
BcSshMnash sbi'tko tchi'a to live afier American customs.

'Bi4»iB *

474 ORAMMAB OF TUB KLAMATH LANOUAOB.

tclioldya ml liAn inantc^liakiwh shiipfile / give bread to this old man.

Hlui|)(ya m'lia p'frislia hIw said to her mother.

nil a wiitcliasli uinbii luiMlipaiuta I (five water to the home to drink.

Jta-i kaiHiiiiAli'at lil'lxwjf»'i fhiy would not uncover (the lodge) for the hear-
cuhH, 120, 17.

Md'dokisliasli ktclidiksli papiilla they stole the rails from the Modoc In-
dians, 35, 21.

b. Objects of the inanimate order:

pAflraah ki'dsha aitzamCnasIi ko'l the pdwash-root grows smaller than Ml,

148, 7.
stfya nxi'-ullga laki pitch trickled down on the forehead, 97, 1.
nii'pokH ai nil tashuhl'hi I pass my hand over the disease, ir)5, 21.
spulhi lapni illolasli to imprison for (wo gears.
tiinopni wafta.sh wi')ksal8ha theg gather lily-seed for five days, 74, 7.
Awahioa uha skt'iin they row over to the island, 74, 14.
a n'sh p'hifwash alitflta he sent me after the eagles, 101, 16.

c. Objects of the inanimate gender when occurring in songs and

mythic stories:
hflk lall'ga Tilhil'sliaah it remained sticking upon Mudhen, 97, 1,
pi tiiphdash tpil'wa he gave orders to the loon, 132, 2.
y^nash a-i ni ahlewish wfUi /, the wind, am singing about the yin-fish,

lfi.5; 6.
mo-6we ktchfdahuash hfl'tnan the mole leaping upon the bat, 127, 5.
Tciiiikaksh mbil'shaksh yfyu;^^^'^ h'llpat to Blackbird they pushed arrow-

Jieads into the eyes, 113, 16. Cf. 114, 9. 122, 9.

3 Possessive case in -am, lam.

This suffix is always pronounced short (-slm, -Inm), and it takes 'ri';
accent in composite cases only. In Modoc it is often pronounced -Cm, -l6m,
or still shorter, -'m, -I'm. The longer form, -lam, is the original one, but
occurs only in nouns terminating in -a, -ii, -e, though there are a few in-
stances of other vocalie suffixes taking -lam also: kafliu, poss. kafliulam
feather mantle, as if deriv. •! iro*a a torm kafliwa. . The suffix was originally

TIIK I'OaSESSIVR (;A8B.

475

locative, iih may be inforrod from its bein<^ ntlatod to tho Hiiftixos -ala ami
-lamna, q. v., and from the Hyntnctio use often made of it, wliicii j)roveH
that (itioul if, around it wan itn orijrinal moiiniiifr. When the Indiaim 8|)eak
rapidly thoy often drop the -m <.f -am; wi'isha wt^ka the i/o,inff of the coyote,
kd'lta wuaH the otter's offsprimi, nl'l weksa the down of the mallard duck}
Whoa words in -am become independent nonns, with -am in the snbjeotive
case, t'liiH -am also drops the -m in some instanceH: h;^ (ha a bird species,
vvid8li(i)a lacustrine reed, for s^fpam, widshfpam (in Modoc also widshfpi).

Among the substantives which show an elliptic form, besides the full
one, we mention:

klfpa mink, poss. klfpalam, more frequently klfpam, 177, 13,

ko'hix fish-otter, poss. kd'ltalam and ko'ltam.

watchaga do<j, poss. watchajralam and watchilgam,
Cf. also wi'iwa tutuksh ear-wax, instead of wawakasham tutiiksh.

A curious fact worth noticing ia that tlie M<')lale language of northern
Oregon marks the possessive case by the same sufli.\, -am, and so does also
the Pit River language of northeastern California. The possessive suffix
-nmi, -mi of several Sahaptin dialects of the middle course of Columbia
River seems related to it. The Maidu dialects of the Sacramento Valley
mark this case by the suffix -ki.

1. The possessive case in -am, -lam corresponds to several of our
English case-prepositions Usually it has to be rendered by our of of the
genitive (or, better, yenetim) case [7 jncoai? yeviKtf], and then forms a pos-
sessive case corresponding to the Saxon case, -'«, in the father's work, the
mother's care, which is sometimes turned into an adjective. Examples :

k(')kelam piUkuish former bed of the river.

niaklaksam wdkshna Indian moccasins.

ti'ilalam wu^foksh money-purse.

Pampiam, Li'itsam pi'-ip the daughter of Pdmpi, Ldtchash, 77, 1. 4.

tchewam (or tcht'-uti) toke the antelope's horn

From these examples it wilV be gathered that when a substantive in
the possessive case qualifies another substantive attrii)utively, it is placed

' See Note to TexU, 168; 41.

4VC

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

before the noun qualified. But since the position of words is rather free in
Klamath, anteposition of the possessive is usually but not universally ob-
served. Cf. ni'I WL'ksa (above), tchfUliks skulelam the yomg of a lark, 100,
8; cf. 100, 5. 9. 18.

2. The case in -am, -lam corresponds to our for, to the benefit of, and is
then intended as a dativus eommodi, answering sometimes to a possessive,
sometimes to a dative case.

Skji'lam i'-amnash wewiUna beads were left over to Marten, 111, 2, 3.
ka'kitak kshiin wiisiimusham there will be no grass for the cattle.

3. When connected with a passive verb, frequently represented by the
participle in -tko, it corresponds to our by, through. Several examples of
-am connected with passive verbs are given under Passive voice, pp. 421,
422, 451; many others are found in the "Texts", e. g., 35, 10 17; 36, 12.
15. An instance is also contained in the proper name of Scarface Charley:
Tch(ktchikam=LupatkuelAtko, lit. "scarred by wagon wheels."

The possessive case of substantives often becomes a subjective case —
that is, a noun independent of others and capable of forming an inflection
of composite cases. These have been full}- trer.ted under tJie heading of
Suffix -am. The case-endings which they can take are -ti (-at), -tka, -tat,
-pfe'ni, -kshi Among the nouns which assume this suffix to form composite
inflections are: terms (a) for fruit-bearing trees and shrubs, sometimes of
other plants ^Iso and of their parts ; cf pri'sh;^am. Here the possessive
case must be considered as an elliptic form, aused by the omission of
anku, tclu'lash, tkap, or some otiier noun desigi.ating a plant. Plants bear-
ing no eatable fruit or bulb usually do not siiow this terminal, {b) for
natural phenomena, the seasons ; (c) for a few articles of manufacture.

4. Partitive case in -ti.

This suffix boars many analogies to -am r.nd -tat, and has several syn-
tactic functions ; from one of the more important of these 1 have called it
the 8uffi,.ic of the partitive case. It is but another form of the prefix ta- (in
-tat;, and originally both referred to objects standing erect, as men, animals,
trees, etc., the suffixed -i pointing to location on, upon something. Nouns

THE PARTITIVE OASE.

477

in the -ti case usually precede the substantive which they qualify. By
rapid or neglectful pronunciation, -ti often becomes -'t, -ilt: tatakianiti and
tatiikiani't, tatiUrianiilt about children, padshayamat made of the mamanita
bush.

The various uses of this suffix are :

1. It refers to a location on, upon, at; a sticking upon, resting on or
against, a r(innection with, a belonging to. It is often used interchangeably
with the case in -am, -lam; but the difference is this, that -ti points to some-
thing sticking or sitting upon an object, but not necessarily connected with
it, -am to an object essentiaUii belonging to some other object, or considered
as a product of it.

ankuti or ankuam tchfkass the bird of the forest.

yafiiati or yafnalam tiggaga mountain quail.

yiikiti stflash baskd-strinfj.

yAkiti wokash stani (gi) lily-seed fill the basket.

Ixalxamnfshti lulinash pond-lily seed put in long sacks.

nanuktua shtinashtl palla to steal everi/thint/ in the house,

shafgati, d. shashiagati shlapsh flouer on the prairie.

2. It refers to the substance or material of which an object is made or
manufactured, and thus represents a real genctivc case, exactly correspond-
ing to tVench de hois, de fer, d'or, etc.

pdpkashti box shutank theij make a coffin of lumber, 87, 2.
t(Skiti mfdsho horn-spoon, horn-ladle.

On account of this "genetive" function, the -ti case may also be used
adjectively, as in : p«')ksliti, tupcshti, wi?ich correspond to our turbid, muddij;
ampu tupi'shti muddy ivatcr. Either -ti or -Ut figures also as -t in the
adjectival suffix -tkni, q. v.

When used in this acceptation, substantives in the -ti case can become
subjective cases and form inflected nouns. Tiius wati thorn, spine, from wa
to grow upon, also means kmfr, and from this significatio?i watiti, or "knife-
material," has finally come to signify iron, steel, metallic substance, wire, mrtal.^

' Of. kiikii'kli wfttiti "yellow motal ": fioUl, copper; piilpur watiti " white metal ": eiU-er, silver-
plated ware.

■»

3i:

478

GRAMMAR OF TBB KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

P6ko bucket has likewise formed p6koti hucket-tnetal, tinned sheet-iron; dnku
tree, ankuti wood-substance.

3. In the phrases and sentences following, a purely partitive function
Is found inherent to the case in -ti :

ndsh(kl;{a Amputi a drop of water.
ka-i gitanish ainputi bunui ! do not drink of this water!
naiam at hiln kiiilati ktchfnksh papalla i/e have abstracted rails upon our
land, 35, 10.

hl'k shewana shaplashti stayanti to (five away seeds from a full seed-paddle.
kudshfi shliushlfwa kii'lanti the mole throws up earth; lit. "some of the
earth."

4. This case-suffix has an additive function in the following instances :

ke'ktoks topfni kiii'm gt^-u shnukshtf gi this is tlie second fish I caught.
snAwedshga gful^a leluidshishti a girl born after the father's death.

Although these are instances of verbals, they may illustrate the use
which is made of this suffix in substantives also. Cf the numeral tiinepanti
in lil, 1, and Note to it, p. 116.

5. The suffix -ti may also correspond to our preposition about, concern-
ing, on account of and then assumes a causal function in verbals as well as
in substantives. It is then often replaced by -tat, q. v.

Shashtiamti hudsha shashalkia thry quarreled about a Shasti Indian.
welekshti i hdmkanka you speak about an old tcomnn.

6. We find it occurring in some local names of the Klamath country, as
in Ki'-uti, Kta-iti, Luyiinshti, Shuawati, Si'imde (Siimti), perhaps also' in
Kiimbat, Tuilkat, and some others. A purely locative signification is prob-
ably not the only one inherent in these names.

5. Instrumental ease in -tka.

This case-suffix appears in several forms, as -tka (the most common),
-tga, -tk, -atka, -Atka, -at, and when nasalized, as -ntka : tumi many, tum-
Antka through or by the many. In the " List of Suffixes " -tka also appears
as a terminal forming verbs.

THE INSTRUMENTAL CASE.

479

1. The primary function of -tka, which is also the most characteristic
and most frequently occurring, is that of forming an instrumental case, thus
corresponding to with, hy means of, hy the aid or help of, through All the
other functions of -tka are reducible to the idea of instrumentality. Its use
is almost entirely restricted to nouns of the inanimate order.

pakshtga lakpeks shuyc^ga he lifted ashes with (his) pipe, 14, 6.
shikenfkishtka yutetampka they began to fire with pistols, 14, 6.
watchatka (and watchat) husho'tchna to ride on horseback.
kak6atk saktatk skii'ntsna to sew with a bone-awl.

Connected with a passive verb, it stands for -am in :

tumantka shute-uapka laki the chief shall he elected by the many, hy the
majority, 90, 3.

2. A locative meaning, resulting from the instrumental one, appears in
sentences like the following :

niishtga tiipka to stand on, upon one's head.
gatcheshtka gena to pass through the brushwood.
shtutka watch niukna to drive horses on the road.
nu g(5na dmputka / go into or through the water.

3. A temporal function corresponding to that of the case-suffix -e'mi,
which is more of a verbal character and is chiefly appended to verbals,
appears in the following nominal forms:

yAmashtka while the north wind blows, 155 ; 16. 24.
gel61a sha shewat^astka they dismounted at noon, 19, 10.
gaptsatka, t;;f()powatka in May, June (and in the other month-names),
74, 1. 6.

6. Locative case in -tat.

We begin the long series of locative case-endings with that which has
the most comprehensive bearings, and is also the most frequent. Tlie suffix
-tat is an abbreviation of tata ivhere, there, and this is a reduplication of the
pronominal radix ta, as til't, tiita is of tii ; cf. ti'ita, ti'i in Dictionary, It also
appears in the form of -ta, -t, -at, -ut, or is suppressed altogether, as in

480

GRAMMAR OF TEE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

kjifla, for kiiflatat upon the ground, earth. When -tat appears as -ta, it is not
always easily distinguished from the abbreviated -tala, -tana ; when as -at,
it will be remembered that -ti and -tka, -atka abbreviate in the same manner.
The form -ut may be a transposition of -tii, or an abbreviation of -utat ; in
each case the -u- marks either distance from the speaker or height above
the ground. Some subjective cases are formed by -tat, -at, especially in
local names and in such terms as kil'mat back. The sound -t in the adjec-
tival suffix -tkni is, as remarked previously, a remnant either of the case-
suffix -ti or of -tat. As will be gathered from the List of Prefixes and
Suffixes, the t- in -tat orifiinally referred to something standing erect, either
animate or inanimate ; but -tat is now referring almost exclusively to things
of the inanimate world, and rarely to persons. In the nasalized form of
-ant, -nt it appears in adjectives, pronouns, postpositions, and adverbs.

The functions to wiiich this suffix may be applied are quite varied and
numerous.

1. It marks a stay tvithin, a resting inside of, or on, upon, hy something ;
it implies no motion, and corresponds exactly to the Latin in with the
ablative case.

,s, ;■■•, i <

pdgashtat muik wa rvorms live in wet ground.

welwashtat ml tchalika / sit here by the water-spring, 1 73 ; 5.

ktayat gftko staging in the rocks

kii'sh mc^ya sh.aigatat theg dug ipo-bulbs on the prairie, 109, 1.

kaluashtat ml tchutchua / am croaking up in the sky, 162 ; 4.

kladshat tchd-u gshfkla an antelope lay in the clearing, 126, 6.

sut'-ushtat takelt'as gi there is cork on the fish-line.

pakshtat tulfsh stem of tobacco -jupe, lit. "handle in the pipe."

We observe it also in postpositions, like gimitant on this side of guni-
kshtant on the opposite side of.

In several proper names of localities -tat has assumed the function of
a subjective case:

E-Hshtat Tule or Modoc Lake.

K(')ketat Lost River; any large water-course.

THE LOCATIVE CASE.

481

The form -ut we find in :

m'lpfit p'gfshap kikanndga the mother applies ^the hands) to the eyes, 91, 6.

pAnflt a wdkinsh kddsha red paint grows on the pan-tree, 150, 6.

2. The suffix -tat marks a motion into, toward or upon, on some object,
and then corresponds best to the Latin in with the accusative case. We see
it frequently connected with all verbs referring to locomotion : going, push-
ing, driving, and also regularly witli the verbs of paying, selling, trading.

mo-6we wa'shtat hulhe the mole ran into (its) den, 127 5.

ktdyatat {or ktayat) tpuH he drove (them) into the rocks.

wAtch ktchfnkshtat nfdle he drove the horses into a corral, 127, 9.

ga'mpgle Idtsashtat he returns to his lodge, 83, 3.

wet61i lali'shtat nad tve slid down the slope, 21, 15.

kafla (for kafJatat) kiwalapata to push sidewise over the ground, 190, 11.

tchplnd'tat ftpa they bring (the corpse) to the burying-ground, 85, 4.

skiuMkshtat shewAn' i ! pay tvhat you owe! lit. "pay into, upon (your)
debt !"

tdnk 1 wAtchtat pa'wi ? how much did you pay for the horses?
sdsatui tchfl'k watchat they sold them out therefor horses, 20, 19.
nii wdtch spunf kftchakluk talatat / gave a horse to repay the money I
owed.

In the passage 60, 11 we find snawli'dshash where we would expect t
skfl'ktanuapk snawa'dshtat you can give in payment for a wife. C£ page 482,

3. Our suffix further stands to mark a motion out of or from an object,
a driving or going, moving, throwing away from, a falling, rolling or drip^
ping down from.

td'shkansha kumgtat (two) ran out of the cave, 122, 4.

kiiflatat gatpampgle he returned down upon the ground, 101, 20.

shuhii'lulea latchashtat to jump down from the lodge, 118, 10.

shlftchgapgle ko'shtat to unhitch from a pine-tree.

puiikAmpgle ladsh(5shtat lie threw (them) out of the hilge again, 109, 9.

dmpu a tfl^a latchashtat water drips from the house.

tchdkeli ntil'lsna psi'shtat blood flows from the nose.

wCi't^i hu'k ko'shtat he fell down from tlie pine-tree.
31

482

GRAMMAR OF TUK KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

!;.r

... «■»

■.V

ill

»!^'m

CU3i

Very frequently the direction of the act from, out of, away from is
expressed by the verb itself and its suffix, and in that case other cases than
the locative in -tat may be joined to the verb as well. Cf. huikfnsha to run
away from, ktul6dshna to push, force away. The same applies to the func-
tion through, across. (No. 4.)

4 The suffix -tat may be used also to express a passing through, a going
across or through the midst of. In this function it approaches nearest to the
one mentioned as No. 2, of going or moving into.

ti'nua wdshtat to fall through the ice.

woshtat yikashla to spear through an ice-hole.

k(')ketat gakua to cross or ford a river.

shiipash nil luashtat shlc'a / see the moon through a fog.

5. There are a few instances where -tat is used in a temporal sense.
In these we find -tat appended to derivative nouns, in v/hich the former
concrete signification is still apparent as well as the abstract one. The
few examples are as follows:

guixak8hii'migshta(t) at the home-leaving season, 148, 19.
smauyoleshtat tvhen the rain is over.
tinoluldshtat at sunset.

6. The suffix -tat occurs also in the sense of our preposition about,
coneerning, on account of. In this acceptation it is entirely like -ti, No. f),
and can alternate with it.

g(?nta kiiilatat shashapkelia to narrate myths ahotit this tvorld, cf. 94, 2.
kil-i i giti'i spil'kle-uapk snawudshtat, hishuakshtat, woashtat you shall
not sweat there (in mourning) for a wife, husband, or child, 142, 16.

7. Illative case in -xeni.

The suffix of this case is -^eni, which frequently becomes abbreviated
into -zene, -^iin, -prt'n, -kiin, and usually has the accent upon the syllable
-Xii. This conq)Osite suffix contains gt'n, gin, or kdn, a demonstrative pro-
noun and adverb, referring to objects in close proximity to the speaker, the
pronoun referring to inanimate things in preference to animate beings, and
the particle i, hi here, right here, here on the ground, or in the lodge. The

THE ILLATIVP] CASE.

483

initial g of tlie suffix was changed into ^ or k for the parpose of referring
the noun, to which -zeni is appended, to tliat suffix more closely than the
mere g (in gen) could do it. The suffix also shows analogy with the verb
gena to go away, start, because -zeni and gc^na are both formed from the
same basis, ge, ke.

The suffix marks as well (1) a motion or direction toward an object or
into a place or country, as (2) a stay or rest at or in a place, region, country.
It is more frequently used in the former sense, and hence I have called the
case the iUatm' case. It differs from -kshi, -ksi by being connected much
more frequently with inanimate objects, while -kshi. Mod. -gislii, is appended
as a rule to nouns of the animate class: at the home of, or in the habitations
of men.

(1) Suffix -ze'ni, -ziin employed in the sense of to, toward, into:
nat Shastzeni gena we went to the Shasti country.

shidshna tinolishzi'ni, tinozishzoni he removed them to the west, to the east

side of, 39, 17.
shiulkishp^e'ni fdshna to remove somebody to the reservation.
na ne-ulakgish;fe'ni gatpa we went to the rouncil-ffround, 33, 5.
sa safkJin (for saiga^e'ni) gdna fheij went to the field, 107, 2.

(2) This suffix marks stay, rest, sojourning, or location at some place,
in a tract or country:

kl(<widshnank weweash tchi'shzoni feavinff her children in the lodge, 1 18, 3.
awaluash;ije'ni on, upon, at the island.

It also enters into the composition of the adjectives nakush;(enkni living
near a log-dam, 132, 6; Tchakxe'nkni, etc.

The suffix forms a large number of local names, wliich assume the
function of subjective cases, and thus form composite inflections. Thus we
have Kawamze'ni Eel Spring, Lalawashzeni at the Slate Rock, Sh;ist;^(-ni the
Shasti amntry, IVhakzo'ni at the Service-berry Grove, Saikiin Thompson's
Marsh, Wapta8h;fe'ni Pond Outlet.

(3) An instance of a temporal function of -xmi is found in the song-
line: i-uneks;^0'ni a yuli'na q/ler sunset, 182, 2.

484

C«3i

GRAMMAR OF TUB KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

8. Transitional case in -na.

This locative case-suffix occurs but in nouns of the inanimate order,
as in the parts of the human or animal body, in terms of topography, in
local names, and in a number of particles. It corresponds to our to, toward,
into, in, and is of the same origin us the verbal suffix -na, which is found in
verbs of motion, and points to short distances reached in succession, or to
spots reached on the passage to other places. It enters into the composi-
tion of composite case-suffixes, as -tana, -ksaksfna, and then is often short-
ened to -n. It also stands in the subjective case of a few nouns, as Ifimuna
bottom etc. Cf. List of Suffixes, under -na.

kaftoks nish tiV-una Lgmaikshfna, M-i Yainakshfna kayaktgi shdpi!

tell them not to pursue me around Shasta Butte (nor) toward Ydneks!

40, 3. 4.
kadsflksaksfna lii'kshktsa ga'-ish hfl'k right upon his chin that ball took the

skin off, 30, 5.
nzak-ksaksfna sli'ksga they came near wounding him on the skull, 21, 17.
nzashksaksfna shlfn he was shot in the bowels.
kidsa dmbutat Igmundna to dive to the water's bottom.

The suffix -na occurs, e. g., in the particles: hdtaktna hj that spot, mi'ma
down below, p'laina upward, tuna, ti'i-una around, tudna, tuan Mod., at all times,
tfna once, t^Alamna to the west.

9. Temporal case in -Smi.

The suffix -emi, -ami, -hiimi, abhr. -em, -iim, is usually emphasized,
when the final -i is not retrenched, upon the penult. Like the final -i which
composes it, it has temporal functions only, and can best be rendered at the
time of, during. We find it appended chiefly to nouns indicative of time
and seasons of the year; also to indefinite verbals pointing to acts oi per-
formances belonging to certain periods of the year only. While the tem-
poral suffix -i appended to verbals refers to incidents occupying a short
lapse in time only, -emi points to periods, epochs of some length, seasons,

THE 1NE8SIVE CASE.

485

etc. This suffix can also stand as a subjective case in the sentence and
foroi a composite inflection, as appears from the following instances:

Atu lulalkshe'mi gi notv it is time to f/o to bed.

guizaksho'migshta at the home-leaving season, at exodm-time, 148, 19.
This temporal suffix is observed in:

i-uma'mi, f-umiim in the whortleberry season; from fwam whortleberry.

kishe'mi, kfssiim at sunset.

kshuno'mi in the haying season.

kolalshe'mi, vuksalsho'mi in the kol, in the pond-lily season.

mehijishf-'mi, contr. mt'ssiim in the trout-fishing season.

shishukt le'mi during the fight, battle, war.

sko-emi and ski'hshemi in spring-time.

tj'mkt gatpanuapkshe'mi at a future time.

temololii'mi after the wild-plum season; from temol61a to finish collecting
wild plums.

tsials-hii'mi at salmon-time, 16, 16 ; from tchidlash salmon.
10. Inessive case in -i.

As the first of the five postposition-cases, I have placed the one formed
of the pronominal element i, hi, which has been discussed several times
before. It occurs in nominal inflection as a case-terminal by itself, and
also entt^is into the composition of several others, as -ti, -^Cni, -emi, -kshi,
-ksak^si; besides this it forms verbal suffixes mentioned in List of Suffixes*
"■'•"^ its primary signification upon the ground have developed those of
me, in the lodge, for one's or another's benefit or disadvantage, and
the . l one when, at the time when. In rare instances -i alternates

with

1. Used in a locative sense, -i means inside of in, tvithin, at, when ap-
pended to substantives designating cavities or hollows (the floor of the
Indian lodge often forms a cavity), inclosures, and also to names of locali-
ties. It is found suffixed to inanimate nouns only, and to the pronouns
giini, hunf, hukf.

stt^kishi at the door, entrance.
tchl'shi inside the lodge, habitation.

cu^i

486 OliAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

wAshi in the hole, cavity, den, lodge.

Yi'iiHiii (for Yt'unaah-i) at the North Wind's lodge, home.

Yftukelam Li'ishi at the Eagle's Nest.

LgiimA-uslii at Coal Lake.

Wulamsi at Rogue River Butte.

Witiimiiintchi where the old Black Bear was.

A-ushnii, an island in Upper Klamath Lake, is also pronounced
A-ushnu"; cf Sumdo for Slu'imti, Si'imti, in Dictionary,

2. Used in a temporal sense, -i occurs only when appended to the
verbal indefinite, and will be discussed in the Syntax under the heading of
iho Verbal indefinite in -shi. Shewatxu'lsi in the afternoon shows the -i
appended to a nomen vcrhalc also. The suffix -i in Ift^i, Ht^e in the evening
has to be regarded as a locative, not as a temporal suffix, since Ht^i is
originally a verb to hang down to the ground, earth, or horizon, which refers
to the sun. It is comparable in every way to hfnui, nde-uli etc.

11. Adessive case in -kshi.

The terminal -kshi, -ksi marks the residing, staying, or presence at
some spot or locality, is appended to substantives of the animate and inan-
imate gender, and occurs in the simple as well as in the composite case-
inflection. In the latter we usually find it appended to nouns designating
peraons or personified beings.

This case-postposition is a compound of kish, gish, ksh home, residence
(cf. Afshishamksh AishisKs lodge, 96, 23) and the postposition -i. This
word kish is also the verbal indefinite of gi to exist, to he,^ and we also find
it, though in various functions, as a nominal derivational suffix. In Kla-
math -kshi appears in various forms, mostly unaccented: -kshi, -gshi, -ksh,
-gsh, -ksi, -ks, -gs; in Modoc as -kfshi, -gishi, -ksi, -gshi, -gsi.

This case-postposition frequently assumes the function of the sub-
jective case, in local names especially, and with the adnominal suffix -kni
appended forms tribal names or nomina gentilitia: fi-ukshikni mAklaks Kla-
math Lake Indian, and others. It is found to fulfill two functions only— that

' Compare the Modoc phrase: hiJtokt ulsU a glahi tohen I am there or while I loaa there, 22, 2. 3.

THE ADESSIVE OASB.

487

of marking (1) a rest or stai/ at some place, and (2) a motion toward an ub-
ject. Tljia latter function is not real, only apparent. Cf also -ksakm.

(1) -kslii marks rest, existence, sojourning, dwelling, living at a certain
spot, locality, in some district or tract of land. When appended to a per-
son's proper name, or to a generic term for person or man, it points to
the lodge, house, or dwelling of; it is then appended to the possessive case
in -am, -lam, and closely corresponds to the P>ench preposition chcz, which
also represents a word for house, home, residence (casa).

CAmbiamgshi in General Canhy's tent, 3J), 11 ; cf 38, (i, 7 ; 41, 8.
K'laushdlpkash Yaina-Agagishi shell ual tliri/ fouf/ht upon the Sand-cov-

eredllill, 43, 12 (Mod.),
ko'shkshi by or close to the pine tree.
ktafkshi, ktafks by the rock, at the rock-ledge.
h'lkiamkshi at, in the chiefs lodyc.
ne-uljikshgishi hushtanka he met them upon the council-ffround. Mod.

(contr. from ne-ulAkgish-gi'shi ; cf Dictionary, page 239); 33, 2.
wats^igaksi where the dog lives.
weldkamksh at the old woman's lodge.

Names of localities formed by -kshi :

E-uksi the country east of Upper Klamath Lake; Yafnakshi Ydncks; Mclaf-
ksi Mount Pitt; Moatuashamkshfni koke Pit Him- in California ; Nil'wapkshi
Goose Lake, Wuksalksh Pond-lily place; also the two mjtiiical places Afshish-
amksh and Lgrad-ishamksh, in the form of a .subjective case.

(2) -kshi apparently marks in some passages a motion toward, in the
direction of, a going or coming to an object, as if standing for -tala. But
in the mind of the Indian -kshi indicates not motion, but rest only, and a
sentence like shuldshamkshi gatpa he came to the soldiers camp, 40, 12 (cf 40,
22) must be interpreted as "he went to the place where the soldiers' camp
or home is or was." Other instances are:

shashotankiahdmgsht gatpampglan having returned to the Peace Com-
missioners' tent, 40, G.
maklakshi'imkshi gatpantki to come to the Indian camp, 40, 23.

488

ORAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANQUAOB.

it;

A parallel to tluB grammatic Htructure are the Latin verbs of placement
(ponere, collocare etc.), which are conHtrued with in and the ablative case,
although they are verbs indicating motion.

12. Emphatic adessive case in -ksakai.

This case-postposition is the result of a reduplication of the foregoing
terminal -kshi, with a change of vowel. It corresponds to the English riyht
there, just where, and usually refers to a spot more limited in extent than
-kshi. It does not refer to the residence of persons, for lakiiiinkshi means
in or at the chip's lodge, but lakiamksi'iksi just where the chief sits or stands,
sat or stood. Used as a subjective case it may append postpositions, though
we have only the instance of the case-suffix -nn. The accent usually rests
upon the ty liable -ksa-. The terminal -ksaksi appears chiefly in coimection
with parts of the animal body, terms of topography, local names, and other
narrowly circumscribed areas. While -ksaksi, -kshakshi, -ksaks seems con-
fined to the northern or Klamath Lake dialect, the form -ksfksi, -kshfksh,
occurring in local names, appears in the Modoc dialect as -kshi glshl in the
same function. Another form with -u- in the first syllable embodies a tem-
poral relation to the past ; cf. Grammar, p. 256.

Instances of the -a- form :

ktalksaksi, ko'shksaks right by the rock, pine.

nt tchi'wishksaksi p'l^ntant gi / was above their .former camping-
place, 22, 1.

keU-ush ish Iktchi e-ushksJikshi ! get me some satid at the lake!

sa shniksho'lza maklaksksAksi they made them dance in the presence of the
Indians, 20, 10; cf. 20, 11. Cf. also 21, 17 ; 30, 5.

Awalok/iksaksi at the Little Island.

KokAksakshi, Kokii'ksaks at Little River, 19, 7 ; 20, 13.

Tchpimiksakshi at the Burial Ground.

■Wel«5kag=Kn(\klek8Aksi at the Stooping Old Woman.

Instances of the -i- form :

Yalnak8hi=gi8hi' at Ydneks, Mod., 36, 9.
Kawamkshiksh at the Eel Fishery.

THE DIRECTIVE CASE.

Nak/mkHiliH at the Dam or Hirer Harraf/e.
VuIAlkshiglBhl' at Cottonwood Creek, Mod., 38, 6. 7.

Instance of the -u- form :
SlankoshksA'ksi at the Old-Bridge site.

489

13. Directive case in -tola.

ThfB cftse-poatposition, abbr. -tnl, -ta, Ih a combination of the two pro-
nominal elements, ta and la, which wo find to be the components of a large
number of affixes. It is most generally connected with verbs of motion,
and corresponds to our to, toward; the name directive, which I have applied
to it, referring only to direction in space. It is connected with the names
of the cardinal points of the horizon, and also with names of tall or large-
sized objects, and the original use made of this particle seems to have been
that of pointing to objects visible at long distances. Herein it differs from
-Xe'ni and -kshi, which refer more frequently to objects upon the ground.
It also forms adverbs and postpositions. Nouns inflected with it may be
used as subjective cases, especially when they become the names of dis-
tricts or countries, and then they can form derivatives. TAla, in the d. form
tatAla, also occurs as a word for itself: right ahead, straight out, and, correctly.
A derivative of it, tiilaak, d. tat/ilak, has the same adverbial signification. The
adjective p'laitalantni is formed from the locative caseof p'laftala upivard, sky-
ward. The substantives niiiat south and yuwat east are originally abbrevia-
tions from muatala and ydwatala.

Amputala kayAhia to cut off from water; ellipsis for "to preclude from

going to the water", 42, 20.
£-ukshitala toward the Klamath Lake settlements.
\\k{aki&\a. toward that spot ; tiishtala? imvhat direction?
ydmatala northward; contr. from yiiraat-tala.
ktaftala wiga g4na sha they went a short rvay into the rocks.
laUlashtala on, through both flanks, 156, 32.
lupftala eastward; cf. lupitalAni eastern.
tzAlamtala westward; the west portion of Oregon.

490

OKAMMAB OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

14. Juxtajwsitive case in -tana.

This terminal is frequently abbreviated into -tan, -ta, and occurs more
in pronouns, postpositions etc. than in substantives, being also a verbal
suffix. It is a combination of the pronominal roots ta and na, both being
short syllables; -tana generally remains unaccented, and has to be rendered
by alon/j, alongside, on the side or sides of, Iwside, by. Instead of classing
-tana as a case-suffix, since it does not occur as a separate word, I have set
it down as a case-postposition on account of its great analogy with -tala.
As a subjective case it occurs in mu'ntana dratvers.

ge'kshtana, abbr. ge'kshta on this side or part.

gunitana, abbr. giinitan, gilnfta on the opposite side.

ktaftana on the side of the stone, rock.

m'nalamtana hitchash close to their lodges, 90, 9.

Nii'wapksh y.imakstan along the north bank of Goose Lake, 31, 7 and Note.

pipr'lantana//o«( opposite sides, on two sides.

washitana beside the den, by the excavation.

COMPOSITE NOMINAL INFLECTION.

Many of the agglutinative languages possess the faculty of forming
composite cases by using oblique cases as subjective cases and appending
to them the otlier case-suffixes. Transformed in this manner, these new-
formed substantives can be inflected like other noups. The Klamath lan-
guage is able to form composite inflections of this kind, in other nouns as
well as in the substantive; but here and there this sort of inflection does not
go through all cases, but is rather incomplete. Some of these binary case-
compounds can be used again as subjective cases, and in this quality they
may form ternary compounds, which of course do not occur very fre-
quently, but follow entirely the laws of this language, 'i'his polysyn-
thetism in case-suffixes seems quite extraordinary to those accustomed to
languages with simple case-suffixes, but it is in no way stranger than the
polysynthetism of the verbal derivational prefixes and suffixes. Instances
of a quaternary case-compound I have not met with.

COMPOSITE INFLECTION.

491

The case-endings traceable in the binary composite nominal inflection
are as follows :

The objective animate case in -ash (not to be confounded with the
derivational suffix -ash) connects with -tala: tuhushashtala toivard the coot;
rarely, if ever, with -tka.

The possessive case in -am, -lam most frequently of all turns into a
subjective case, and connects itself with more case-endings than others.
The possessive ending is supplanted by -ti, for -am could not stand twice
in the same noun. When used of persons and things, -am becomes con-
nected with all the purely locative case-endings except -i.
The partitive case in -ti connects itself with -am, -tka.
The temporal case in -emi connects itself with -kshi.
The inessive case in -i connects itself with -tala, -tana.
The adessive case in -kshi is found connected with -tat, -^eni, -na,
-tala, -tana.

The emphatic adessive case in -ksaksi may append the suffix -na.
The locative cases in -^fni, -tala, -tana do not append any nominal
endings, except derivational suffixes, whenever they form adjectives: na-
koshze'nkni staying near a river-dam; tutashtalikshfni one going everywhere.
Specimens of the binary composite declensions will be presented among
the inflectional substantive paradigms.

A few instances of the ternary composite declension are as follows:
k'mutchapkamkshipje'ni at, toward the old mail's lodge.
guixakshii'migshta (for -tat) at the time of the annual exodus, 148, 19.
Shastiamkshti'ila toward a Shasti India, i\i lodge.
p'ldntant tchiwi'shksaksam above their former camping-place ; perhaps

for -ksaksi sham ; cf , 22, 1.
wewalekshamk8h;ijG'ni where the old squaws live.

PARADIGMS.

CONSONANTAL INFLECTION OF SUBSTANTIVE.

Absolute form. Distrihufive form.

Subjective case: pshfsh, psi's nose. pshi'pshash eac/( »<ose.

492

GEAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

Objective case:
Possessive case:
Partitive case:
Instrumental case:
Locative case:
Illative case:
Transitional case:
Temporal case:
Inessive case:
Adessive case:
Emphatic adessive

case:
Directive case:
Juxtapositive case:

wele^kash old squaw.

welekshash

welt'ksham
welt'kshamti )
welekshti )

pshi'sh nose. pshfpshash

pshfshara of the nose. pshfpshasham

pshishti about the nose. pshfpshashti

pshfshtka by, through the nose. pshfpshashtka

pshfshtat w, on, upon, from the nose, pshfpshashtat

pshishze'ni at, toward the nose. pshipshashze'ni

pshfshi (?^ at the nose.

p8hfpshashi(?)

pshishkshilkshi just at the nose. pshipshashksAksi

wel(!kshtka

weleks/e'ni

weldksamkslii

wek^ksksaksi

wele'kshashtala

welt'kshtala

weldkshtana

we'waleksh

wewalekshash

wewalc'ksham

pshishtala toward the nose.
pshishtilna alon<f the nose.

Absolute form.

tiihush mudhen, coot.
tuhiish )
tiihubhash )
tuhusham

tuhushti

tiihushtat
tiihuslitka
tuhushxeni
tiihushamksi
tuhushksaksi
tuhuslijishtala )
tdhushtala )
tiihushtana

Distributive form.

tdt'hush
(not in use.)

pshipshashtAla
pshipshashtana

shdplash seed-paddle.
shdplash

( shdplashti (used also for
( poss. and loc.)

shdplashtka

shaplashksdksi

shilplashtala

shdplaslitana

shAshaplash, sdssaplash
shiishaplash

PAEADIGMS OP SUBSTANTIVES.

493

wewaldkshti )
wewaltJkshamti )

\ sAssaplashti (used also for
[ poss. and loc.)

wewaldkshtka

wewalek8h;Ke'ni'

wewalekshamksh;^

wewaldksamkshi

wewaleksksdksi

wewaldkshtala

e'nP )

sassapldshtka

Absolute form.

wa'sh, wdsh excavation, shdllualsh war.

wdsh

wAsham

wdshti

wdshtat

wdshtka

wdshna (?)
wa8h;^e'ni

shdilualsh

shdilualsham

shdllualshti

shdllualshtat
shdllualshtka

sassaplashksdksi
sassapldshtala

wdtch horse.

wAtch

w/itcham

wAtchti
( wAtchtat
( wiitchat
( wAtchatka
( wdtchetka

wAshi

washksdksi

wdshitala
wAshitana

wAwash

wAwJlsh

wAwasham

wAvvashti

wAwashtat

8hellualsh;(e'ni
shell ualslie'mi

shellualshgfshi (Mod.) )
shellualshksdksi (Kl.) r'"'"'^^'^^''

wAtchtala

wdtcbtana

Distributive form.

shdshalualsh

shdshftlualsh

slK^shalualsham

shdshalualsjiti

shdshalualshat

wawatch

(inflected like the abso-
lute form, but rarely-
used.)

' At tho place where they became old squaws or women. «At the place where the old squaws live.

494

wawushtka
wj'iwashna (?)
wawash^e'rii
wAwashi

wawashksdksi

wawashitala

tut tooth.

tut

ti'itam

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE,
sht'shalualshtka

slieshalualsh/e'ni

slieshalualsbgfshi (Mod.)
slieshalualshksaksi (Kl.)

ti'itatat )
ti'itat )
tutatka

tutksaksi
tut'tala

tiitat
tutat
tutatam

ti'itatat
ti'itat'tka

tutatksjiksi
tiitat'tala

lak hair.
I4k

(lAkam)
Idkti

Idktat

Idkitka

l.^-k'ksaksi
Idktala

Absolute form.

nijp hand.
ndp
ndpam
nt'pti

ndptat

nt'patka

ptewip soil's child.
ptdwa
ptewam
pt(5wa

ni'pksaksi

ni'ptala

m'ptana

ptt'wa

pt(}\vam;^e'ni

ptewainkshi

pte-uksiiksi

ptewamtala

Distributive form

lalak nt'nap

(not in use.) nt'nap

nc'napam

nenapti

ndnaptat

nenapatka

ptt'wisliap and pteptt^vip
ptt'wisha pteptt'wa

pti'wisliam ])teptcwam

ptt'vvislia pteptowa

ptowisha pteptewa

ptewisham;((i'ni pteptewam;^e'ni

ptewisluimkslii pteptewamkslii

nenapksaksi ptewisliksaksi ptepteuksaksi
nc'naptala ptdwishamtala pteptt^vauitala
nenaptana

PAKADIGMS OF SUBSTANTIVES.

495

ambu, amputate
ainbu
ampuam
simputi

ainbu tat

VOCALIC INFL

r. ks'iko bone.
Mko
ksikowam
ks'iko-uti

ksikowatat
ksikowatka

ECTION OF 8UHSTAN'

bsolute form.

kti'i-i, ktaf rock, s
kti'i-i
kts'iysim
ktsi-iti, ktafti
kts'iyatat \
ktsi-itat V
ktilyat /
ktiiyatksi )
ktii-itka )
kta-ix5'ni

rivEs.

tone. ^yi»t\ShastlIncUan
Slisistiash
Sliiistiam
Shsishtiamti

ninbutka
ampu;ce'ni

Shdstitka

Sha8lit;(e'ni*
Shashtiamksi

anipuksaksi

ambutala

Amhutanst.

ks'ikoksaksi
kdkotala

ktsi-iksaksi

ktaftala

ktaftana

tributive form.

ktAkti
ktsikti
ktilktiam

Shastiashtsila

a-ampu

il-ampu

a-anipuam

a-aniputi

{'i-ambutat

si-ambutka

a-ampu^e'ni

a-ampuks$iksi

a-s'inibutala

Dis

kiikgo

ksikgo

kakgowam

k,4kgo-uti

ki'ikgovvatat

kakgowatka

tiimi Sh,4sti
(plural) etc.

ktaktitat

ktsiktiatka

ktakti;((i'ni

ktaktikss'iksi

ktiiktitala

ks'ikgoksaksi
kiikgotala

skule, skiila lark.

Absolute form.

1 .. n ,-, { watchi'iga )
ksiila earth. { , ; <■ (^oq.
( watchjika )

tfa large seed-paddle.

^aH

fmm

'Signitics "toward the Shasti country", or, when used as a subjective case, it means "the
country of the Shasti."

496

skule
Hkiilelam

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

tfa

skuletat

skuletka
8kiile;ce'ni

skuleksi'iksi
ski'iletala

kiida
ktiflash
kaflalam
kHflanti )
kiiflati )
kiiflatat ^
kailant >
kiiilat )

kaila;fe'ni

kiiflaksi

kiiilaksdksi

kiiflatala

kiiilatana

watchsiga )
wdtchagsh )
watch/igalam tfalam

watchdg'ti

tfati

watchAgatat i* > '

tfatka

watchag^Ze'ni

watclidgksaksi tiaksdksi
watchAgtala tfatala
tfatana

Distributive form.

skusk'le, shkiishkela kakJifla
skusk'le ^'■^"^y "^'•^•)

skusk'lelam

skusk'letat

ski'isk'letka

sku»k'le;^e'ni

skusk'leksAkai

skusk'letala

wa-utchdga
wa-utchaga )
wd-utchagsh )
wa-utchAgalam
wa-utchag'ti
wa-utclulgatat

tfta
(not used.)

wa-utchag%e'ni

wa-utchagksAksi

wa-utchdgtala

IV. DERIVATION.

There is considerable analogy between the derivation of the substan-
tive and that of the verb, although that of the latter is more complex. In-
deed, the most frequent of the substantive-forming suffixes are also found
in the nominal forms of the verb, like -ash, -ish, the preterital formative
-uish, and various forms of the verb gi : -kish (-gish, -ksh etc.). Four
principal modes of forming the substantive may be set down, as follows:

DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 497

1. Derivation from a verb witli all its prefixes and derivational suffixes,
adding to It only a substantive forming suffix. Ex.: hltchash and latcl.aksh
from lAtcha.

2. Dmvationfrom a noun through addition of a substantive-forming
suffix. Ex.: kiiflasli from kiifla.

3. Derivation from a radical v/IMle, or a thematic radical, througli addi-
tion of a formative suffix which is not of an exclusively nominal nature.
Ex.: vun from wiia, viia.

4. A verb becomes a substantive without any other change save that of
assuming case-suffixes. Ex. : vumi.

Of these different modes of derivation, the first is the one which forms
nomma verbalia, the origin of which need not be discussed here at length,
as It would be a mere repetition of the derivation of verbs. Some of "the
lonffest substantives belong to this class, as hishtilankanke-rytkish hoop as a
plaything ; shuashulaliampkish watchman. The verbs to which these nouns
belong are either traceable in the language as spoken at present, or, if they
have disappeared from it, they can be reconstructed without difficulty • but
while doing so, students should always recall what is said on page 253 of
this Grammar concerning the formation of verbs and nouns.

The second mode is of less frequent occurrence in Klamath, or in any
other language, than the first. We may classify under this heading the sub-
stantives formed by secondary inflection, as watiti metal, from wati knife-
blade; all the names of plants and trees in -am, -lam, the diminutives in
-aga, -ak, -ga etc ; also a number of tribal and local names.

The most primitive substantives, as far as their form is concerned, are
th.)se formed by mode No. 3, and, but for their case-suffixes, many of them
could not bo discerned from verb.s or other words by their exterior shape.
We find among them many nouns that end in -k, -1, -t, or in vowels, -a, -ii
(-e), -i, -u, for which instances can be seen in our List of Suffixes. They
are all of a concrete signification, a circumstance which testifies to their
antiquity. We may classify under this heading also the nouns formed by
abbreviation of some verbal basis, unless we choose to make a special class
of these. Ex. : kii'k male organ, from ki'ka ; ktchak mother of pearl shell, from
ktchalk, ktchal^a; shk6 gray hawk, from skc'dshatko; ske'l marten, from

1»

498

GRAMMAR OP TOE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

skt-lza to become dusky; HlilC'dsli irild hemp, from 8hldd8;ta; stilp /*«<-«/©««,
from sti'ipkii; tchuk service tree, from tclinggi'iya.

Tlio substantives formed according to mode No. 4, which cannot prop-
erly be called derivation, owe their existence to an apocope mainly due to
careless pronunciation, and they have a parallel in the particles which are
used as verbs, page 457. In many instances the form in -sh exists simul-
taneously with the abbreviated form. Examples are as follows : gfnshka
slo}}e, (I'hka scraper of stone, iwala top or end, (sha funcr(d, kinyatp'na an(/le,
corner, nt'wisht remains, pala and palash liver, pata dry season (patash is
spleen, milt), ak6, sk6a. and sko'sh sjmnff "'■ason, vumf and vumfsli cache.

DISTINCTION BETWEEN ABSTRACT AND CONCUETE NOUNS.

All substantives are either abstract or concrete in their signification,
and abstract nouns are all derived from concrete terms of verbal or nominal
origin. No language is devoid of abstract nouns, but in the languages of
primitive nations there is a perce|)tible scarcity of them when compared
with their plenty in languages of mentally-developed populations. Many
primitive peoples prefer to express abstractions by the verb and adjective
rather than by the substantive ; in the lexical and morphological portion of
their grammar the tendency toward specializing prevails over that of using
purely abstract forms. Our intention is to speak with precision, that of the
Indian to speak graphically; the Indian individualizes, while avo classify; he
often expresses by circumlocution an abstraction which we express by one
single term. liut the power of abstraction varies greatly in degree among
the different tribes or nations of uncivilized races in both hemispheres.

1. Abstract substantives.

What is said above is well exemplified by some characteristics of the
Klamatli language of Oregon. The idea contained in many of our more
abstract substantives cannot be expressed substantively, but can be expressed
by verbs, adjectives, or adverbs. That language possesses no terms for time,
hope, health, haste, friendship, justice, thanks, thankfulness, greediness, vindic-
tiveness, vision, feclinq, intellect, sense, learning, manner. Tiiese are, however,
rendered with accuracy by some finite verb, or an adjective or adverb, so

499

AHSTUAGT NOUNS.

that no doubt can urlse about their .orrcct rendering. Tl.us fhne m expressed
Mui.l.ctly by kl.'kuga n.l f ha>r no tmr, and a ho.st of other oxpre8«ions to
be found n. the Enj^lish-Klanrntb part of the Dictionary; health is expressed
l)y tfdsh nu hushlta / an, in fjood health; haste by hurried, hurriedly or
to be tn a hurry. The sensitive, n.oral faculties or feehngs of man are all
expressed by stc/nash heart, his perceptive and it.telloctual powers by hush-
kanksh thouyhf, mind, or l,y tfdsh shepelpehUko, shayuaksh sa„aeious For
soul and life there is but one term here and in many other Indian tongues-
breath (hukish) like Latin npiritus, from spirarc "to breathe." Friendship
would be expressed by to be friendly, to be or beeome friends. Absence and
presence are rendered by the pronouns kcqiak or ne'g, Mod. na'g, absent
kc^ku the one standiny before me or >/ou, laki to be gone, etc. Our idea of sub-
stance can be expressed by tua something, by the verbs gi, wA to exist, or by
special terms for ea<;h substance, as enumerated in Dictionary, page 671
Color has to be replaced by tlie adjectival name of the color referred to as
the language has no other substantive but slna^uash, which means dye-
stuff', coloring matter.

The abstractions which this language can readily express are mainly
of that kind which we ^all sensations, and form the nearest approach to
concrete terms. Thus we have:

hashtaksh perforation.
kpjipshash taMe (of tongue),
ktchalshkash splendor.
lushlushlish tvarmth.
ndotchkish blushing, shame.
netn61;^ish government.
ne-ulaksh latv, rule, sway.

shalatchgudlash yMwc//o«.
shen()lakuish jnomise.
tiimCnash noise.
tiii'mish hunger.
tchnnl'ksh obscurity.
t;^ut;^ash ill-omen,
wetish laughter.

Many English abstract terms have to be expressed in Klamath by adjec-
tives or verbal adjectives, which then assume the function of substantives:
afshishtchi beautiful and personal beauty.
yamkamptch lazy and laziness.
katagsh cold, chilly, and low temperature, frost.
kclpoksh hot and heat, fever.

500

GRAMMAU OF TUK KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

»«

^^■■»i »

HtchHtchli powerful and ^wwc/-, strength.
nkfllitko powerful, strong and /wwcr, strenijth.

It appears from what precodoa that vvhorevor ah-stract tonus arc ren-
dered ill substantive form, as nomina actionis, they are formed by the ending
-sh, -s; when rendered in adjectival form, either by the terminals -li, -tko,
or by -ptchi and its abbreviations.

2. Concrete substantives.

Generic nouns, or nomina appellativa, is the name given to substantivea
comprehending all the species or kinds of one class or family of animate
or inanimate objects. In regard to their origin, wo can establish two sorts
of generic nouns: One class, generally traceable to a verbal origin, became
restricted from a more comproheusivo to a more specific meaning, like
English bird, which originally meant brood, the young of any animal; the
second class includes terms which formerly stood for certain definite objects
or natural species, but afterward advanced to a wider signification, like
English butterjlif. In Klanuvtii, nouns of this second class are more frequent.

hfshuaksh, in Mod. hisluuUchzash husband, then mate, man; originally

"one who associates, consorts with."
iwam berrif, juice-bcrrif ; originally "whortloberry."
ktchak wmriwe and fresh-water shell; originally "niother-of-pearl shell."
stina'sh lodge, house ; originally lodge made of bent willow-rods, which

sisrnilication it retains in the northern dialect.
wdmGnaksh snake in Kl., really applies only to the black spotted snake,

the most frequent snake-species in certain localities.
Avelt'kash female, woman in Mod.; originally "old woman."
wfshink, often used in Kl. for snake; real signification "garter-snake."

It is a consequence of the specifying tendency of the Klamath language
that many generic terms occurring in European languages find no equiva-
lents in it. There is, e. g., no generic term for fox, squirrel, butterfly, and
frog, but each species has its own name. For bird a distinction is made
between forest-birds, tchfkass, and aquatic birds, mii'makli, which are called
after their color mixed from blue and gray ; but kiii'm is a truly generic

NAMES OF PHUSONS.

501

term for fish. No real term oxiHta for animal, quadruped, mid plant Trees
are called Arikii by ModocH and Klamath Lakes, ko'sh by Klamath Lakes
(really "pitch pine"); shrubs aro liiikii alao; weeds, and other plants growing
near the soil, tclunash, "stalk"; all the grasses tclu'lash, and kslnl'n "what
18 carried on the arms." Various tern)s are used to describe fruits by their
form: fwam, Ibi'ika, h'ltiiih, utish, etc. Generic terms exist for mountain,
river, and plain, but none for our term valley. CJf. also the Table on page
UF) (Texts).

The collective nouns of this language prtsent nothing of special interest,
neither are they formed by any special mode of derivation, except those
exhibiting the adjectival suftix -ni: "referring to", or "all t!iat kind of",
mentioned elsewhere. This suftix reduplicates as -jiini, and is a specimen
of the brevity of expression so often met with in this language.

Diminutive nouns are derived from other nouns by the speci.il suffix
-aga, which appears under varying forma, and in a restricted number of
substantives is found duplicated: vunakaga little son;^ -ia is possibly an-
other diminutive suffix. No special suffix forms exist f t the fonnation of
augmentative, intensive, or enhancivc substantives.

3. The names of persons and personified beings.

These are not aex-denoting, and if Hex must be pointed out, it is done
by adding the terms for man, hog, woman, girl, etc. Neither is the gender
marked in the pronoun by special pronouns, and Klamath has this feature
in common with many other North American languages. In regard to deri-
vation several classes may be distinguished, some of which possess special
suffixes.

a. Substantives naming a person as engaged in some act at the time
being: nomina agentis. Derived from verbs by means of -sh, sometimes by
-ank, -an, and standing in the absolute, unreduplicated form.

h. Substantives naming a person represented as the performer of an
action, generally of a repeated oi- habitual action: nomina actoris. Derived
from verbs by -ash, -ish, -otkish. Nomina agentis, when changing from the
absolute to the distributive or reduplicated form, become nomina actoris.

' other instances of substantives with duplicate diminutive endings are patshkaga Httte cloud,
an nkasbkiiiga belli/, if this stands for nkasbka-dga, transformed by vocalic dissimilation.

502

ORAMMAU OF THE KLAMATU LANOIJAOB.

c. Subatantlves indicative of provonienco, nativity, tribal doHcont, or
origin of pornons or porHoniiiod boings: mmina yfntilUla. Tlioy aro origi-
nally and simultanoonsly adjectives, with the ondingH -kiHli, -kni, and
-wash.

d. SubstantivoH expressing tlio degrees of relationsliip by blood or
marriage, in the descending and in tlie ascending line: nominn affinUut'is
Formed by tie prefix p- an<l by the sufHx -p (-ap, -ip), a few l)y -sli; they
exhibit two modes of forming the distributive or plural number. They aro
in fact verbs, and this explains it why in some of the oblique cases they are
not inflected ; only the subjective, the possessive and the postpositional cases
have the case-suffixes of substantives.

e. Proper names of person.s, male and female: nominn propria. No
Bpecial mode of derivation exi.sts for deriving these names froni their pa-
rents' or some other appellation, tliongh the name of the fatiier is placed
after that of the child (e. g., Wawaliks Sknftitko) in exceptional cases.
Mixed-blood descent is indicated by t;^alanini hulj\ or by the suffix -aga.
Steamboat Frank was called so after his mother, and the children usually
get no names before they are able to speak. Many male Iiulians have
more than one name — one given in early years, the others referring to their
occupation or to some other circum.stance. The pcisonal mimes of the two
tribes often depict the bodily qualities of their owners very drastically, and
would make an interesting subject for a separate treatise. Some of them
are diminutives, otiiers binary and ternary compounds or embodying whole
phrases, and a few are borrowed from languages foreign to Klamath.

4. The names of animals.

Though often difficult to trace to their true origin, these are frequently
nominn agcntis, as ndnkisli, a species of hnivk, from nduka to hit; or they
are nominn actor'is, and then are often formed by distributive reduplication, as
munAna^tatamnuish a mole-species, from tamCml. The numerous unomato-
potlic forms which occur in so many liird-names, as tuktukuash, waiwash,
may be classed as nomina uctoris also. Butterflies are mostly called by
reduplicative names, as kcpkap, walwih'kash, wekwak, from the motion or
position of their wings, and it will be observed that in the majority of Ian-

NAMES OF ANIMALS.

503

gimjjos the names for these insects nre formed by reduplication. Names of
some burrowing aniniulH are formed with initial mu- (cf. nu'ina ikvp down):
nii'ii woodchuck, nii'ikuaga Jirld-mousc, mrt-j'ie mole, miViik generic term for
mice and the other smallest (luadrujiods. The sulHx -agn, -ak designates
the young of animals, but often apijlies to specific animals on account of
their diminutive size: washla-i'iga, walxatchaga, watc^hiigii, etc.

M<de animals are distinguished from female animals by a separate term
indicating their sex, which is placed before or after the animal's name, and
honce must be regarded as an attribute, not as an adjective Male is lak(;
male dixj, lakf watsaga; male do;/ pup, It'ikiag watsnga; male horse, lakf wats;
male deer, lakf wChle; younji male deer, lakiaga wfhle or wCiilag hiking; male
eayle, lakf yai'i^al. For the female two ttu-ms are in use, one of which, ndsflo,
is applied to the domesticated quadi'upeds oidy : female horse, or mare, ndsflo
Wilts; female dof/, ndsflo watsag; female puppy, ndsfluag wiitsag. Tiio fol-
lowing are either names of birds or of wild (piadrupeds: female eat, ngulo,
ki'ilo pushish; female deer, ngulo wChle; femnie eayle, ki'ilo yiinxn\; female hluek
hear, witii'm kulo; her young, witil'm kuliiak; shai^fsh gulu (cf. 163; Ki);
female lizard, kia kulu; the female kdls-hird, kalsam kulo; female wolf kii -
utchish gulu. Wo also find, in lGi$, !): ku-e welt'kash the old female frog or
toad, and tikaga for the nia^i' of the mountain quail, q. v.

There are very few animals whose males have a name difl'enng from
the females. The fenuile of the v\\Vi-hawk is called spiVm, and the term
Shasliapsh, Shashapamtch applies chiefly to the female Grizzly Bear with
her two young in mythologic stories, and not to the male. Compare, also,
the terms for ox, steer, cow.

The terms young, euh, pup, brood are rendered either by wi'ash offspring,
wi'ka (for wt'-aga) little offspring, or by appending the diminutive suffix -aga
(-ak, -ka etc.) to the name of the animal. In a few instances the young
has another name than the parent animal: colt is tp^a-ush, not watchaga, for
this means dog; wf'hlaga stands for young antelope, instead of tchcwaga, and
in fact means young deer, young fawn; cf. wf'hla m Dictionary, page 485.
Tiiwalsh young quadruped refers to certain animals only: viinani tawalsh elk
one year old. When tiie offspring of animals is referred to Avhose names end
in -aga (cf. above, this page), an adjective for little (ndshukani, kitclik&ni) is

504

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

placed before the name. Leledahi and its diminutive leledshiaga refer to
the young of mammals only. Cf. lilhanksh, in Dictionary.

To the names of personified animals, occurring in the mythic stories of
the two tribes, is appended the adjective amtchiksh, abbr. -anitch, -amts, old,
ancient, bygone. In the conjurer's song-lines, in which the same animals are
frequently mentioned, I have not met with this adjective.

Certain animals are known to these Indians under two or several
names; one of them is the usual one, the others are mere predicates or
epithets referring to individual peculiarities of tlie species. This sort of
polyonymy recalls the fifteen names for the elephant and the twenty appel-
lations for the siw formerly in use in Sanskrit literature; also familiar terras
of European languages, like Master Bruin for bear, Beginhart, renard for
fox, Jsengrim for wolf, Baminagrobis (French) for cat, etc. Terms of this
description, which I have found to exist in Klamath, are all more or less
mythological, as follows:

\{\\ grizzly hear : ShAshaph, Shashapamtch, Liikamtch; lukaga ^m^Z^

hmr cuh: shashapka.
wanaka Utile silver fox: mbaubavvash (the "howler"), kenkatflatuash,

kenkapshlii'li, ndundotatuash.
tiggi'iga quail: takaga.
yau^id white-headed eagle: shkil'shki.

With these we may fitly compare pshe-utiwash, the archaic term for
niAklaks people, human beings, which occurs in mythic stories only.

5. The names of plants.

Trees, shrubs, grasses, and all vegetal growths bearing edible fruit or
berries, are very generally named after their products, and the names are
derived from them through the suflix of the possessive case: -am, -lam.
The noun to be supplied after this suffix, to make the phrase complete,
iinku, tkdp, tchclash, is, except in a few cases, elliptically omitted, so :
kp^kam gooseberry bush, for kpokam anku, kp(>k being the gooseberry
Even the white oak, hudshnam, is called after its acorn, hudsha.

INANIMATE OBJECTS.

505

Terms deviating from this rule are, e. g., ko'ali piich-pine tree, which is
not named after its fruit, ktti'lo pine-nut, though this is eaten by the Indians.
W6kash, nu't, niVtak, designate the plants as well as their seed. Wele'li
harherry bush does not show the ending -am. Edible bulbs, roots, etc., gen-
erally exhibit some other ending than -am, -lam, and even -ash, -ish is not
very common among them. Cf Texts, pp. 146-149.

Among the terms in -am, fwam designates the whorfklmry as well as
the bush upon which it grows, and le-usham, distr. lele-ushain, does not
designate a plant, but a flower, blossom. ■

Vegetal growths not producing edible fruits, berries, or seeds have
names formed by a great variety of suffixes from nouns or verbs ; cf. gi'ilk-
maks, kenAwat, newal, skawanksh, shle'dsh, vulalksh, etc.

6. The names of wanimate objects.

These are difficult to classify as to their derivation, on account of the
large number of affixes occurring in their formation. Therefore the list
below attempts to give only indications for the classification of some of
their number.

a. Nouns expressing the name of the material or substance from which
an object is manufactured, or of which it consists, are often formed by the
partitive suffix -ti, q. v.

b. Nouns indicating the tool or instrument by which something is man-
ufactured or performed are formed by appending -o'tkish (-I'ltkish, -u'tch)
or -kish, q. v.

c. Parts of the human and animal body are formed chiefly by means
of the suffixes -ash (-atcli), -p, -u (-o).

d. Topographic nouns — viz., terms for rivers, hills, prairies, woods, dis-
tricts, sites, lakes, settlements, towns, etc. — are formed by -sli (-ash, -ish)
and -kish, -l;jish ; proper names of places, sites, iiills, etc., by -kslii, -;^r/ni,
-na, -i and otlier suffixes. Yain- mountain is an instance of a noun origin-
ally formed by the suffix -na, and inflected through all cases.

THE ADJECTIVE.

The attributive relation in the sentence is indicated by the adjective
more than by any other part of man's speech. Ailjcictives may be divided

506

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

into numeral, indefinite or pronominal, verbal adjectives, and into adjec-
tives designating quality. Only the two latter classes will be considered
under this head; the indefinite will be treated under " Pronoun", and the
numeral adjective under a separata heading, since numerals are used not
only as adjectives, but also as adverbs.

Adjectives qualify substantives in a similar manner as adverbs qualify
verbs. In the language of which wo treat the adjectival infiection is not
so multiform and elaborate as that of the substantive noun, though this does
not impair the clearness of sentences. The suffixes -na, -i, -e'mi do not
appear in the inflection of the adjective, and it also lacks special grammatic
forms to indicate gradation.

I. GENDER.

Gender, animate and inanimate, is not distinguished in the adjective,
for its principal distinctive mark, the objectis'e case, does not differ in its
suiHx -sh, as the following sentences will show :

muniiih wiislunilsh shiuga slia theij kill a large ox; d. 42, 2; 112, 21.
atfnsh ko'sh guka hiik he climhed a ta'l pine tree.

watsag mii'mCnish wawakash ^^kk fox-hound, lit. "dog having long ears."
yananish pil ma-i pan they cat only the lower (pai-t of the) tule reed.
palpalish (or pj'ilpalsh") shlapsh gi'tko haviwf a white flower.
litchli'tchlish stefnash gitko strony-heartcd.

If a distinction was made between the two genders, the above adjec-
tives would, except in the first example, appear with the suffix -ni, -li. But
another suffix, appearing in this and in other cases, is -a: tuma tua gitko
possessiny many thinys. It will be considered further on.

IL ABSOLUTE AND DISTRIBUTIVE FORM.

The distributive form derives itself in the same manner from the abso-
lute as in the substantive and the verb. It is applied in the same maimer
and inflected by the same case-suffixes and case-postpositions as the abso-
lute is, under stated restrictions. Whenever reduplication occurs, it may
occur in the noun and in the adjective, or only in one of the two; in the
latter case, it is usually the adjective which assumes the distributive form.

INFLECTION OF ADJECTIVES.

507

Even among the enclitic, unaccented adjectives there are some that will
aasume the distributive form; they resume their accentuation whenever
they become joined to a noun showing this grammatic form.

hl'k pfipashpiish=tkani (gi) the seeds are blackish, 146, 3.

keladsh raiimiitchmii'tchli lalkaya the kelddsh-herries grow blue, 146, 9.

III. INFLECTION FOR CASE.

The adjective inflects for case in a shape not very different from tiiat
of the substantive, and in both we find forms of tlie simple and of the coni-
posite declension. Some of the cases do not occur in every substantive,
and still less so in every adjective; the paradigms will clearly show this.
The linguistic principle effecting alterations like these is that of affijliitlnation

Klamath has a double inflection of the adjectives in -ni, which may be
compared in some respects to the one observed in German. Of this double
inflection the shorter one is an abbreviation of the longer, showing the syl-
lable -an- or -en- before the case-suffix, and both are used almost indiscrim-
inately, although the longer one is more expressive. Tiie adjective, when
used predicatively, does not differ from the one used attributively, except
sometimes by the position in the sentence, and in our texts the use of the
adjective in either quality is rather frequent. The following examjjles will
show the position of adjectives used predkativehi :

p'gi'shap t'shfshai) ketchkanienash o' gisht wongga (Mod.) mother (and)

father died when he was young, 5."), 20.
na'sh shul'sh sayuaks hu'mtclia kalak a song having pointed him out as

relapsed; lit. "one song having discovered that he is of the kind

called relapsed", 72, ;].
yAmnasiiptchi hVloks .Vishisham, Wanakalam kiikii'kli liVloTis the /re of

Aishish was pnrpk-lilne, that of Silrer Fox was yellow, 9!), 3.
h'lp shulshesh nnVmeni, s;jutash tchish lapi ndshekiine of gaming sticks

there are two thick ones, tf skin-covered sticks two slender ones, 79, 2.

Not in every instance does the principle of agglutination unite the
adjective clo.ser to the substantive than the Knglisli lanmiago does; but

508

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

«-i -i f-.

when this occurs one or the other loses its case-sign, and in a few instances
both will lose theirs.

A. — Both nouns retain their suffixes in the following instances :

K'la-ushiilpkash Yaina-i'iga giahi at the Sand-covered Hill, 43, 12; cf. I'^G, 4.

kcdsha ntchc'liayiint kshu'nat it grows on small grasses, 148, 5.

h'lk shewiina shiiplashti stayanti to give away seeds from a full seed-
paddle.

nulidshii ko-idsluintala kiiilatala kii-ilpukshtala / am descending to the
tvretched, the hurning land, 113 ; 2.

ndanno'ntch wc'wanshish yamnash shi'wana to three (of his) wives he
gave necklaces, 96, 9.

ka-i gitanlsh aniputi bunui! do not drink of thvi water f

pii'ka a sha ktayatat kt'lpokshtat they roast them with heated stones,
148, 16. 17. Gf i'O, 18.

B. — The preceding term, which is usually the adjective, retains the
suffix, while the term standing last loses or abbreviates it:
tidshantala l<iiila into a good country, 39, 2. 40, 15.
sketigshta vushiJ shlin hs shot (him) in the left breast, 42, 10.
kil-i pupashpil'shlish gushu li'iela they do not kill black hogs, 128, 2.

C. — The term standing second retains its case-mark, while the one
standing first loses or abbreviates it through attraction:

gc-upgan mu'ni e ushtat running into the great lake, viz., "the sea",
127, 14.

kfnkan' smd'k gi'tk they hare a spare heard, 90, 5; cf. 90. 17.

iinipni waftash during four days, 75, 14; cf 88, 4.

genta kiiflatat about this ivorld, 94, 2.

piilpal tclul'leksh gi'tko ^jer^^ow having a tvhitc skin. 55, 4.

palpali watsiitka upon a white horse, 183; 22.

muni lakiaah neiisht gi to agree with the great ruler, 40, 9.

Truncated case-endings occur more frequently in the adjective than in
the subst intive. This abbreviated form is a consequence of agglutination
to otlun* terms to which they become intimately joined, and adjectives show-
ing this form may be joined to siibstantives with an apocopated form or witii
a full form. Substantivi^s joined to adjectives or numerals do not always

INFLECTION OF ADJECTIVES.

509

show the same case-suffixes as these, so that, e. g., -tala in the noun need not
correspond to -tala in the adjective, but just as well to -sh, -nt, -a. The most
frequent of these adnominal suffix-abbreviations are -a (-ft) and -nt (-nta, -ta).

-a (pronounced short) occurs in some oblique cases of the adjectives in
-ptchi, -ratchi, -tchi, in some adjectives like tfdshi (jood, ku-idshi had, and in
the numerals. We have also found this terminal in the substantives ending
in -p (-ap, -ip).

-nt, case-suffix abbreviated from -tat, -ta, the locative case terminal,
and subsequently nasalized. The same nasalizing process is observed in
-ntka for -tka, and in -nti for -ti. It is frequently used as an adjectival suffix
whenever the substantive belonging to ii stands in one of the locative cases.
It also appears as -anta, -ant, -ta, the latter occurring oftener in the south-
ern than in the northern dialect.

The inflection of the adjective is eff'ected by am-sKffi.rcfi only. When
in the composite inflection a substantive assunies a case-suffix to which a
case-postposition is added, its adjective-attribute shows the same case- suffix
without any case-postposit' • sometimes another; cf Numeral.

atiyii'nam wek'kshamkshi at the tall old squaw's lodge.

atiya'n'sh wek%shashtala toward the tall old squaw.

To render the study of these correspondencies between the inflected
adjective, numeral and substantive easier, I have laid them down in tabular
form as follows, in the order of their frequency:

Terminals of substantive : Terminals of adjective :

correspond to :

-ash and obj. case without suffix -sh (-ash, -ish), -it, -anta, -ant, ta.

-am (-lam) -am (-lam), -nti.

-ti. -^^ . -nta (-nt), -ntka, -nti, -sh (-ash, -ish).

-tat. -at -nta (-ant, -nt), -ntka, -tat, -sh.

-tka, -tk -ntka, -ntk, -tk.

-Zeni, -amxeni -sh, -nt, -ft-, am (-lam).

-«'mi -ntka, -ntk, -tk.

-amkshi -am (-lam), -a.

-ksaksi -sh, -nt, -a.

-tala -sh, -nt, -a.

«i|!»

»" /;, .*

.,!

510

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

Some rules bearing upon the mechanical part of the adjectival declen-
sion are as follows:

1. Adjectives, numerals, and indefinite pronouns in -ni show a double
inflection; one of these inserts the syllable -(in-, -en- between the stem and
the case-suffixes, while the other inflects the word without this insertion,
pjxamplea of this are:

ketchkiini smull, ijounr/ ; obj. ketchkanit'nash and kc'tchkan'sh.

lapukni (abbr. lupuk) both; obj. lapukcnash and hipuksh.

muni lar/je, great; obj. muyii'nash (for municnash), munisii, muatcli.

ndiini, ndanni three; obj. ndannc'nash and ndanash.

nanuk (for nanukni) all, tvhole; obj. nanukt'nash and nanuk.

tunepni y?re; obj. tunepa'nash and tunipa.

The longer form may stand without any substantive accompanying it;
cf hunkiash tunepil'nash five of them, 44, 2. The short form exists beside
tlie longer one, and has apparently been formed from the latter by con-
traction. The word ati'ni long, tall forms atidnash and ati}'ena8h, the -//-
being inserted only for euphony, and so with others ending in -ini.

2. Adjectives in -kni usually drop the -n- in the oblique cases. These
are formed as if the adjective ended in -gish, -kish, and this suffix also
appears in the subjective case of many of their number.

E-ukshikni, obj. case E-ukshikishash.

Md'dokni and Mo'dokish, poss. case Modokfsham.

Walamskni and Walamskish, obj. case Walamskishash.

3. Verbal adjectives (and participles) in -tko, -ntko. For the formation
of their oblique cases, cf -tko in "List of Suffixes" and "Verbal Inflection."

Before we pass over to the paradigms, it will be of use to observe a few
other examples, largely taken from our Texts, to illustrate further the work-
ing of the rules established upon the preceding pages, under A, B, C. They
are arranged after the cases observed in the substantive, commencin"- witli
the objective casa, and include adjectives and pronouns.

kJi'liant washash in the absence of the prairie-wolf, 105, 3.

niu uki'llipsh (for nki'Uipkash) ti'wtsh the qnickhf -rushing waters, 94, 6.

gc'mptcha maklakshasli ^c/'aows of that description; cf 186; 54.

PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES.

511

kcVidsha sku'ksh a wlcJicd fijurlt, 127, 13.

palpiilish shil k'hi'ult'xaii hoisUiifj a white Jla/f, 14, 2.

ti'iina namiktuan <rislialtko rich in all kinds of propcrli/.

liwatkal .slmi'ilashtat hunkant they raised him up in that nest, 101, 13.

keliiinta ke-ishtat when no snow was lying on thef/round, ;]7, 21 ; cf. 41, 10.

wf-ukayant kiiludshamat on the low kelddsh-hushes, 146, 8.

taktaklanta kiiflatat upon level (/round, 43, 29.

nayaut waitaslitat on one and the same day; cf. bii, 7.

gdntka li'ildani this winter; geni!--a pata this summer.

gaptchetka t;ijalampani about the middle of May, 36, 7.

gdntka skoslu/mi during this spring.

na'dsliasli slielliialshgishi on one of the battle-fields, .56, 6.

CONJUGATIONAL PARADIGMS.

As I have remarked previously, both nouns, the adjective and the sub-
stantive, may be inflected, or only one of the two. In the latter case, the
endings -li, -ni may remain throughout unchanged: -ptchi, -dshi usually
change into -ptcha, -tcha, -dsha in the oblique cases, and when used dis-
tributively both may be reduplicated or one may remain in the absolute
state. Paradigms of both kinds of inflection are presented below.

Objective cases of adjectives in -li, -ni may be syncopated into -I'sh,
-Ish, -n'sh, -ns, just as it is done in the substantive.

Following are completely-inflected paradigms of adjectives:

Adjective in -li.
Absolute form. Distributive form.

taktakli shlapsh red flower or flowers, tataktakli shlashlapsh each red flower.

taktaklish shlapsh
taktakliam shhipsham
taktaklanti shlapshti
taktaklantk shlapshtka
taktaklant shlapshtat
taktaklish 8hlapsh;^e'ni
taktaklant shlapshksaksi
taktaklish shlapshtala

tataktaklish shlashlapsh
tatakt.ikliam shhishlapsham
tataktiiklanti shlashlapshti
tataktaklantk shliishlapshtka
tataktaklant shlashlapshtat
tataktaklish shlashlapsh;fe'ni
tataktaklant shlashapshksaksi
tataktaklish shlashlapshtala
{or tataktaklant shlashlapshtala)

512

GKAMMAK OF TUE KLAMATB LANGUAUE.

M**'^! t

Absolute form.

atfni kn'ah tall pine tree.
ati-iiirsh, atfiiisli, atl'tisli ko'sh
atiyii'iuiin, atiriiam ko'sham
atiyanti ko'shti
ativantka kd'shtka
atiyant ko'shtat
.atl'nsh koshzr/ni
ati'nsh kosliksaksi
ati'iish ko'shtala

Adjectives in -ni.

Distributive form.
a-atfni ko'sh each tall pine tree.
a-at(i>i::;ii, a-atfnsh ko'sh
a-atiyii'nani kd'sham
a-at(yaiiti ko'shti
a-atfyantka ko'shtka
a-atfyant ko'shtat
a-at(nsh koshpjO'ni
a-atfnsh koshlisaksi

a-atfnsh ko'shtala

The distributive form of the adjective is liere conjugated with the absolute
(»f the substantive.

The cases omitted in the following paradigm are the locative in -tat, -at,
which does not occur in names of persons except when used instead of -ti ;
and -ksaksi, which in personal names must he affixed to other case-endings.

Absolute form.

nn'nii lakf f/reat chief, head chief.
muyii'nash, mi'mish lakiash
nniyii'nam lakiam
niuyil'nam h'lkiamti
muya'ntka lakitka

Distributive form.

mi'inu^ni lal.iki cachffreat chief
nu'iniiiin'sh, mumOnish lalakiash
nuuniii'nani lalakiam
mumiil'nani lalakiamti
niuniiii'ntka lalakitka

niuyii'nam lakiamze'ni
muyi.i'nam liikiamkshi

nuiniiii'nam lalakiam;j5'ni
muniiii'nam lalakiamkshi

muya'n'sh, -aiinish lakiashtiila mumiiin'sh lalakiashtAla

INFLECTION OF tklshi GOOD, AND OF ku-idsU BAD.

Absolute form. Distributive form.

tfdshi pgfshap good mother. tfdshi or titi'idshi pgfshishap each good

mother.

ADJliCTlVAJ. PAUAJ>1(}M8.

513

Absolute form.

tfdshit pgfHhii
tfdHlia pgfsham
tfdHha pgfslia
tfdHlm pgfulia
tfdslia pgishamzo'ni
tfdHlia pgfsliamkslii
tfdslia pgiHhaniksf'iksi
tfd8ha(iit) pgfshatala

Distributive form.

tldshft pgfshiHlia
tfdslia pgfshisliam
tfdslia pgfshiHlia
tfdsha pgfHhisha
tfdsha pgiHliishainxd'ni
tfdalia pgishislianikshi
tfdslia pgiahislianiksjikHi
tfdslia(nt) pgisliishatAla

The absolute or distributive form in the adjective and the distributive form
in the substantive; cf. 107, 8. 10. U with 107, 7:

Absolute form.
kii-idshi watsAga vicious dog.

ku-idsha watsAgash and watsdga
ku-idshii'nam and ki'i-idshani watsa-

galam
kii-idsha vvatsAgti
ku-idshiintka watsajratka
kii-idshtat {and ku-idsha) watstiga-

tat, w^atstigat
kii-idsha watsag;^e'ni
kii-idsha watsiigaksi
kii-idsha watsagksaksi
kii-idshant vvatsagtdla

Distributive form.

ku-idshi wa-utsag each vicious doff {or

kukidslii wa-utsaga).
ku-idsha wa-utsagash and wa-utchiijra
ku-idshii'nam w.a-utchagalam

kii-idsha wa-utsagti
ku-idshiintka wa-utsagatka
kii-id.ditat, kii-idsha wa-utsagatat, wa-

utsagat
ku-idsha wa-utsagzt^ni
ku-idsha wa-utchagaksi
ku-idsha wa-utchagksaksi
kii-idshant wa-utchagtala

Tlie second cohimn contains the absolute form in the adjective and the
distributive form in the substantive.

Altliough the suffix -dshi in these two adjectives is not identical with
the suffix -ptchi, -mtchi, -tchi, the adjectives and pronouns with this ending
are inflected exactly in the same manner, and thus no new paradigm is
required.

-TsTf S

GEAMMAll OF THK KL^iMATU LANGUAGE.

« A^i t > 4

Adjective in -an.
Absolute form.

ki'Ipfiksh dmbii hot, tmUkifj water. kelpakshxd'ni Ambii, or kdlpaksh

juiibuxe'iii
kj?lpak« ninbukHiiksi, or Ambu kdlp-

kaksnkHi
ki'lpak8htal(R) dinbutal

kt'lpakHbiisli, kt'Ipokshash arnbii
ki'lpkapkam ambuain
kc'lpukHliti I'lmbuti or kvi\\m
ki'lpakahtka ambutka or /inibu
kc'lpakstat or Wlpokali Ambutat

It will be seen that some of the above forms are derived from kdlpkatko,
and not from kdlpaksh, kdlpAks.

Distributive form.

Kekiilpakah, keWlpoks is not in frequent use, the language preferring
to substitute for it kekalpkatko, the participle of kdlpka. For its inflection
see Participles, and -tko in List of Suffixes.

Adjective in -a.

Absolute form. Distributive form.

kudta ktA-i, ki&i hard rock, liard stones, kakudta ktaf each hard rock,

kakuata ktaf
kakuAtanti ktiiyam
kakuAtanti ktafti
kakuatantka ktAyatka

kudta ktai
kuatanti ktayam
kudtanti ktafti
kudtantk ktayatka
kudtant ktaftat, ktdyat
kudtant ktai;(5'ni
kuatani ktafkshakshi
kudtant ktaftala

kakudtant ktaftat
kakudtant ktai;uo'ni
kakudtant ktafksaksi
kakudtant ktaitala

The conclusions to be drawn from these various conjugational speci-
mens are that some case-suffixes of the substantive (-na, -G'mi) and all the
case-postpositions, -tala excepted, are not employed in the inflection of the
adjective, but that others are substituted for them; that the language rather
seeks differentiation than similarity in the endings of both, and that the

STttUCTirUK OF THK ADJECTIVE.

515

inflection of tho adjective is rather a matter of convenience tl.an a process
following Htrict rules or observing regularity. It adaptn itself .nu.h nmre
to the sense of tho sentence or phrase than to the exigencies of granunati.-
rule, and diligently evades combinations obstructing rapid enunciation or
injurious to euphony.

IV. RADICAL STRUCTURE. DERIVATION.

In regard to the structure of their radices, tho adjectives subdivide
themselves iuto two classes easily distinguishable from (,ach othe- Class
A embodies all adjectives with a simple, mostly monosyllabic radix, while
Class B comprehends all the adjectives formed by iterative reduplication
and the suffix -li. Both ctlasses possess a distributive form derived from tho
absolute by what I call distributive reduplication.

The adjectives of Class A with a simple radix, as tfdshi good, ^ikmfull,
kiMpoksh hoiling, hot, take every ending occurring in adjectives save -li!
The sound preceding the derivational suffix is usually a vowel, which Kr„„e-
times is elided; diminutives take tho ending -aga (-ak, -ka, -ga). Their
function is to express qualities inferred from observation and of an abstract
and immaterial order.

The adjectives of Class B with a radix formed by iteration of the whole
radical syllable are very numerous, and end in -li without exception. The
sound preceding the suffix -li is usually consonantic, and then the radix
belongs to the class which I call thematic roots. In palpali ivhite this sound
has coalesced with tho suffix, the original form being palpal-li. The func-
tion of this class is to express qualities perceived on objects of nature by
the sense ot vision (colored, striped, angular, in motion, etc.), by that of
touch (smooth, rough, furry, level, etc.), oi sniell and taste; thus their signi-
fication is always of a material, concrete nature. The diminutives of this
class append -aga and -tk;tni to tlie radical instead of -li:

lUshlusliAga a little warm.

ketchdga rather small; from ketchkani small.

li'ik pflpashpushtkani each seed is a little hlarl;, blackish, UC, 3.

kaka'ktkani tchlkass a yellowish bird, 180; 8.

y. Is

••1

*«.,,•»,,

516

(HtAMMAIt Ol? Till.; KLAMATH LANdUAdK.

Soino of tho luljoctivcH in -li can drop this Humx. 'I'l.o romainliijf
radix tlion Hervos for fonning coinpouiul words, or it roprosoiitH tho adverb
corre8i)onding to tho adjov^tive:

inetHiiiotH^sawalH (for inotHim^tMli Hh/iwalsh) obsidian arrow-head! lit.

"dark-bluo arrow-tip."
puMhpiish Ilk Hhlo'sli (uk for huk) it is blavk lo look at, U, 6.

Tho radix of tho adjoctivoH of Class B is, in some iiiHtaiicos, found to
occur in its simple, unreduplicated form, especially in (-(mipound substan-
tivos and in verbs. Analogous to this is tho fact that tho adjectives of color
in the Sahaptin dialects occur regularly in both forms, tho simple and tho
duplex, as in tho Warm Spring dialect lii'mt and lii'mtliimt for yellow. In
Klamath wo have:

kaUkma half-spheriad skull-cap, for kalkali kniil.

Ktchtakia to tri/ hard, contains litchlftchli stron//.

pil'ztgi to dawn, lit "to turn gray", contains piikpii'kli f,rn,,.

Push-kfu ''Black-Vosteriors'\ nom. pr. ma.sc., for Pushpiishli kfu.

iii'xM to become red, to blush, contains taktiiklt red.

This is observed in some other verbs in -tki, .tx,\, and is true even of
some adjectives of Class H, which revert to their adverbial form without
losing their adnominal signification: nuVlakf headchicf, kJtcha laki suhchicf.

The following table will show tho granmiatic relation in which almost
all the adjectives in -li, and a large number of those in -ni, -kni, -kani etc.,
stand to their corresponding adverbs. Verbal adjectives in -tko, -ntko of
course do not form adverbs. P:xamj)les :

Iftchlitch strottfihj, forcibly; litchlitchli valorous, powerful
kt'tchketch rouyhly,- ketchkctchli rouyh to the touch.
rail strongly, much, a great deal; muni large, great,
atifar, high up; atini tall, distant; atikni stranger.
ma'ntch long ago; mri'ntchni belonging to the past.
tank then, at that time; tAnkni belonging to that period.
ti'i over there; tiikni coming from there.
g'it& here; ghiikni coming from here, there.

lit.

DERIVATION OF TUE ADJIWnVE. 617

V6-i badly, wrotujhj; k()-iilHlil had, tvrvkhnl, wicked.
kiHclm rt little, somewhat; ketchkuiii hdkiU, little, young.

DKRIVATION OK AIUKCTIVKH.

The more important points on thiH Hubjoct having been provioimly
stated, Hliort reforencos to tlieso are all that aro now needed for our purpoHO.

Adjectives are derived from radicals and bases by sufflxation exclusively.
There exists no prefix especially devoted to the formation of these nouns.

As to their derivation from the different parts of speech, the adjectives
may be classed as taking the following suffixes :

Adjectives of an adverbial, etc. origin : -ni, -kni (sometimes, as in
numerals, abbreviated into -ni).

Adjectives of a verbal origin and nature, verbal adjectives, etc: -tko, -a.

Adjectives of a substantive origin: -sh (-ish, -ksh, -gs), -ni, -kni, -aga,
-ptchi (-mtchi, -tchi).

Adjectives of pronominal origin: -kani, -kni, -kianki, -ptchi.

Adjectives derived from other adjectives: -ptchi.

Adjectives proper: -li, -i.

With respect to their signification, the formative endings of adjectives
may be subdivided in sufKxes conveying a ctmcrete, material meaning (-li);
an abstract meaning (-ni, -kianki, -kani); wiiilo all the others, even -ni
sometimes, form adjectives belonging to both classes.

In the enumeration of adjectival suffixes here following, it will be appro-
priate to distinguish between those ending in -i and those showing other
terminal sounds. While the former are of the more genuine adjectival
type, the latter are in fact substantives. Compound suftixes are not infre-
quent, and are often formed from oblicjue cases of a noun.

- a, an exceptional suffix, occurring in wika (for wikani) loiv, in kuiita
hard, which are in fact an adverb and verb.

-aga, -ak forms diminutives like tumis'iga a few, and is mentioned in
List of Suffixes. Some of the adjectives in -ak are formed by ak only,
but, and are not really diminutive adjectives : kc'litik dejtrived of, pdniak
unclothed, tdnkak a few only.

518

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

••M

n^*. ..,,

- i appears separately as a suffix only in a few adjectives, as kii-idshi
had, tidslii good, tumi many. Ati is abbreviated from atfni, like wt?nni from
weunfni.

-kani appears in a few adjectives only, as yunakani, ketclikiini, ntchd-
kani, t;jjilampankani ; in the following it points to an uncounted, undeter-
mined number or quality, and is equivalent to our some: tiimikani mAklaks
a number of persons, some people ; kinkankani a few. It also forms the suffix
-tkani, q. v. Cf page 343.

-kianki, -gianggin ; "for oneself", in List of Suffixes.

-kni forms adjectives marking provenience or origin from, and hence
frequently occurs in tribal names. In obli(iue cases the -n- is usually
dropped after the k- : yamakni northern, obj. case : yamakfshash, for the
oblique cases are formed from a suffix -kish. The suffix is a contraction of
-kani, although it differs now greatly from it in its function. Adjectives in
-kni have often to be rendered in English by the corresponding adverb :

tu'kni p'lii'ntankni sa shlfn they shot from above in the distance, 23, 21.
hunkeliiniskni lugs guikaga the slave ran away from this man's house.

Several adjectives in -kni are derived from the oblique, especially loc-
ative cases of substantives and pronouns, and from adverbs or postpositions :
k6kagtalkni, Lokuashtkni, Shikueshtkni, nakush;(e'nkni, p'laitaldntni (for
p'laitaliintkni ?), 173; 1.

- 1 i forms concrete adjectives descriptive of surface-quality, or of inten-
sity of motion. Tiieir radical structure and the affinity of -li with -ilia (-la)
find the prefix 1- have been hinted at elsewhere. This suffix forms no com-
Ijound suffixes.

- n i forms adjectives, most of which are of an abstract or immaterial
import ; it also forms compound adjectival suffixes, often having an adverbial
signification when translated into English. The ending may be preceded
by a vowel, as in atfni tail, kd-uni slotv, tze-uni first, or by a consonant, as
in tunopni/fc'c and the other numerals, t>:alamni middle, konul'.s]mi wild, etc.
The insertion of -iin-, -en- in the oblique cases, and the forming of collect-
ive nouns by appending -ni, distr. -nini, was mentioned above. Suffixes

SUFFIXES OF ADJECTIVES.

519

composed with -ni are found in shuidsliashksaksfni, tutaslitalfksini, vusho-
ksdksini, yAntani, tatzi5lampiinkani.

The suffix -ni, used in an adverbial sense, occurs in the adverbial
numerals: lApni twice; in tchiishni always, tumCni often, and is not inflected
then, as may be seen 1 12, 7. 10, where we find ksUni to time inside the
kaydta; if it was inflected as an adjective, we would expect kiitniash, or
kaydtniash.

-ptchi, abbr. -tchi, -tch, -mtchi, -mtch, marks likeness to, similarity
in appearance, and is comparable to our suffix -like, -hj. It forms adjectives
from substantives, adjectives, pronouns and adverbs.

•sh, -s composes adjectives having the nature of substantives, some of
them referring to temperature : kc'lpaksli hot and In at, katags cold, etc. They
appear either with the suffix -ish, -Csh, or with -kish, -gish, -ksh, -gs ; cf List
of Suffixes.

-tkani. Mentioned under -kani and elsewhere.

-tko (-tk, -Itko, -ntko) forms verbal adjectives, as spiigatko gray-coiored,
nklllitko strong, forcible, etc.

To the above list we add a few adjectives of a rather general significa-
tion. Many of them become so closely agglutinated to tiie substantive to
which they belong as to lose their accent, and the siiorter ones of them are
postpositive, whereas the common adjective lias its regular position in the
sentence before the noun qualified. The distributive form, which a few of
them have, is scarcely ever used.

Amtchiksh abbr. -anitch, old, is transposed from ma'ntch gi'sh,
ma'ntch; the definitions may be gathered from the Dictionary, page 21.
When -amtch refers to ancestral belief, it is a])pended to all mythic beings
of the Indian religion, as in Shukamtch Old Heron. It may refer also to
old people, and then shows a derisive iidinixturo incident to old age, like
the Itali.an suffixes -accio, -uccio : Wi'ikenamtch, noni. pr.. Old Fellow
changing his voice. In the sense of used np, or good for nothing, it is said
of articles of household or daily use, as In shd'pamtch bad, miserable soap.
Nouns ending in -sh, -s lose this suffix before -amtch.

520

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANOUAOE.

II i

■5 ' .;,xs*

gitko, abbr. gitk, leing, existing, doing, but much more frequently ^os-
sessed of, having, and then construed with tlie objective case of the object
possessed. This term is treated more in full elsewhere, but it may be
remarked th.at through attraction it often changes into the participle in -tko
of another verb ; cf klana palpalish shlapshaltko the khina has a white, flower,
146, 14, when the correct expression would be: klana p.'ilpalish shlaps'i
gftko.

ydlanh alike to, similar to; partic. of yj'ilha to lag upon, viz., "to make
congruent": Boshtin y^lank ajtcr the fashion of the Americans, 59, 20.

-pani is an enclitic adverb, up to, reaching as far as (pani in Diction-
ary), which occurs in some adjectives, as t;^alampani half, middle, lit. " up
to the middle", and with -kani forms -pankaui, -pankni : t^jilampankani
forming one-half

shitko. Mod. shutka, distr. shishdtko, shushdtka; enclitic: shitk, sitk
comparable with, looking like; cf List of Suffixes. Differs from -ptchi by
giving comparisons of a more reflected, abstract nature. Modocs usually
construe it with the objective, Klamath Lake Indians with the possessive
case.

-tud, enclit. -tua, refers chiefly to inanimate objects: a thing, something,
some kind of; obj. case tualash ; poss. tu;'ilam. Lakf tuma tui'i gitk a rich
man, lit. "a chief many things possessed of"; nanuktua everything.

V. GRADATION.

Tlie Klamatli of Oregon belongs to those languages which resort to
circumscriptive methods for expressing gradation; for it does not possess
any suffixes to express with exactness our particles more, the most, less, or
our suffixes -er, -est. Hence this subject belongs more to syntax than to
morphology; but we shall see that the means of expressing gradation by
particles are not entirely wanting.

Comparatives are expressed as follows: "This boy surpasses his brother
in strength", or "this boy is strong; his brother is not"; "this boy is strong;
his brother is weak."

MODES OF GRADATION.

521

Superlatives. For the sentence, "my child is tlie oldest of these chil-
dren", they will say "my child is old; the others are not"; or "my child
surpasses the others in age."

Mhmitivcs are rendered: "The elk exceeds the deer in size"; or "the
elk is large, the deer is small." All this instead of our "the deer is less in
size than the elk."

The ideas of excelUng over, surpassing, exceeding can he renderea by
several verbs differing from each other in their radicals and prefixes accord-
ing to the form and number of the subjects and objects compared. For
the selection of these, the Dictionary may be consulted. Kshui;(i, partic.
kshuf^itko to surpass (one animate subject), luixitko (round subject), uyti-
jjitko (tall subjects), wini^i, Mod. viii^i, partic. wini^itko. Mod. vuf;{itko, are
the most common terms employed to indicate gradation. When speaking
of bodily size or strength, terms designating these qualities are generally
omitted, but when objects are compared for other qualities, this quality is
added to the verb, generally in the form of an adjective. The objects
compared to the subject of the sentence generally appear in the objective
case.

ko'sh miini uyc'^itk k.4pka the pitch-pine is taller than the kupka-pinc

(uyt'xitko Hterally means "lifted up", "raised"),
gcku a ku'sh ka-i wini;fitk hiVnu tim pine tree is smaller than that one;

lit. "this pine tree not surpassing-is that."
gd-u a kitchkiini ii'puls, mitoks muni ing apple is smaller than yours;

lit. "mine is small apple, yours-but large."
pawash a ki'dsha aitxamenash ko'l the puwash-root grows to less height

than ko'l, 148, 7.
luf^itko ki'ipiunksam Ink tchfpshash the seed of the kdpiuuks-plant is

larger than that of the tchipash (1-, prefix of lui;Kitko, points to the

round shape of the seed), 14fi, 3.
1 a n'sh wiin'xi you are taller than I; lit. "you surpass me."
watch kshuixftk t;ijfi-ushash the horse is larger than the colt; lit. "horse

is conquering colt."
nfl a tiima gitk win{;{i mish I have more than you; lit. "I mucli-having

exceed you."

Ifi

522

*«•-

>1,

.! 1

ORAMMAB OF TAB KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

nanku ptipashpushli nulkluks, n,'inkatoks ku-i some Indians look darker
than others; lit. "some dusky Indians, some not."

l.ilt a l.fshuaksh atfni, n,ln«ken'sl. l.ak nalsh winf^i (his man is (he tallest
of Hs; lit. "this man is tall, all of us just he surpasses."

When an adjective is enhanced by our verj,, qui(e, strongly, exceedingl,,,
tins gradation is rendered in Khunath by mu, nul prefixed, or by toks, ka
ka-a, ga-a, ka-a prefixed or suffixed, sometimes pn.clitic and enclitic; taks'
toks refers to something mentioned previously. '

mil nkfllitko verii rash, stroii//.

ka-H ku-idshi very bad or mischievous, loalhsomr

ga atfni very (all.

tfdshi tok.sh, fi'dshi ka-A vet y good, quite good.

ka-a kitchkani, nnl kotchkani very small or young.

Outside of these syntactic means of gradation the langm.ge knows of
some particles producing the san.e effect: but their use is rather limited
and tins seems to show that their function is not exactly the same

F<>r the minuiti ve no particle exists, but comparatives may be expressed
by s,,fhxn,g the enclitic ak only, hn( to the adjective. It becomes so closely
fused to ,t tiiat even -ase-sufHxes are placed after it. The signification only,
jus(, nodnng hut enables this particle to express also the enhancive particle
very, tjuile, greatly: '

kitchkani small, kitchk^tniak very small, H-i kitchk.ini not so very small
not so small. '

shkafni strong, shkafniak s(ronger, very s(rong ; obj. case shkafniaksh.

To express a superladve, one of the vowels of the adjective is protracted
to a length winch is thought to meet the case in question. Mu'ni is larae
mn-nm pretty large, mu-Oni ..,-, /..,/., and mu-u-u-uni colossal; tnmi .a^y,'
tum.-w a large number of. T N very eflFective grammatic feature is ob'
served m the majority of Amei . .an languages.

effec.'" "'^' ^'^«^^^^f f-^' -P^^J'i. -tcln when appended to some adjectives
ejects gradation : tf sin good, dear; tidshitchi ,,..,,..,, or the dearest; atfni
tall; atfmtchi (or -tcha) ,1 tchaki that hoy is very tall.

TUB NUMEltAL SERIES.

523

Tlie particle -la, -Id expresses our superlative, but only in adjectives
referring to certain objects extending in length, as plants, trees etc. :
kitchganlii the smallest (of them).

THE NUMERAL.
The numeral is either a numeral adjective or a numeral adverb.
While in the Klamath language the latter is of two kinds, one in -ni and
the other in -ash, the numeral adjective, wlieii in its complete form, shows
but the ending -ni, though an apocopated form exists for all tlie numerals.
A distributive form exists for all the four forms just described. Tlie nu-
meral adjective answers to our cardinal numeral; an ordinal numeral cor-
responding to our numeral in -th, as fifth, ninth, does not exist in Klamath,
but has to be rendered in a circuunlocutory manner by some term of tluj
four numeral series existing. An ordinal series is represented in tlie Mas-
koki, Algonkin,* Irojpiois, and Dakota dialects, but in the Pacific coast
languages it is not universally met with. A distributive series, as we find
it in Latin, is rarely nut with in tlio languages of the Eastern hemisphere,
but in America is not infrequent; and we find it also among the languages
which make an extensive use of syllabic re^luplication. As ati appendix to
the numerals we may consider the classifiers, which consist of verbal forms
or particles, and are appended to the numeral to indicate the shape or exte-
rior of the objects counted. They seem to belong almost exclusi.vely to
illiterate languages, and according to what G. Gibbs and IL de Cliarencey
have written upon the subject, occur in the Polynesian languages, in the
Selish and Nahua dialects, and attain their most extensive development in
the Maya dialects. Multiplicative numerals generally coincide with the
adverbial numeral expressing times, and so do they in the Klamatli lan-
guage; other modes of expressing them to be described below.

I. THE NUMEU.\L SERIES.

The first table contains the series of the first ten numerals in their
complete form ending in -ni, which expresses the cardinals when inflected

* The ShilwaiH) liiiij^imge, Al>;oiikiii family, fnriiis its cir(liii;iln Uy iiiclixini; nmwi- mid siifflxiiij;
•sone, -tlieiie to tli« cardinal iniiiieral. TIhih iiiHatlmt seren forms iiiawiniHuatlit^iK; avfiiiili. The aufUx
cau aUo be dropped, and then we liavii iiiawiuiNumhiii mreiilh.

■U

1^4

524

GRAMMAR OF TEIB KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

feist* ^'.

like an adjective, and the adverbial series when not inflected. Tt can also
be used to express our ordinals, and instances of this me are mentioned
below, the numeral then being inflected like an adjective, and consequently
placed before the noun which it qualifies.

Tlie short or apocopated forni of the numeral without the -nl represents
the cardinal only. It mostly serves for counting, for rapid figuring, and
for forming compound numerals above ten, and is represented in the second
table. The distributive form in both tables corresponds to our seven to each,
or seven times for each, and embodies the idea of severalty or apportionment.

EXPLICIT FORMS OK TIIK NUMERALS UP TO TEN.

Absolute form.
na-igshtani. Mod. na'gshtani
na'dsh, na'sh, nfi's
la'peni, la'p'ni, la'pi
ndanni, ndani
vunepni, wi'mipni
tunepni

nadslikshaptiinkni
lapksliaptankni
ndankshaptankni
nrulshsko'kiii (Klamath Lake)
shkt'kishkni (Modoc)
ta-unepni, tt'-unepni

one-half,
one (once, tfna).
t/vo, twice,
three, thrice,
four, four times,
five, five times,
six, six times,
seven, seven times,
eight, cif/ht times,
nine, nine times,
nine, nine times,
ten, ten times.

Distributive form.

njinigshtani

n.dnash

la'lap'ni, h'llapi

ndcindani

vu-unepni

tut6nepni

nanashkshaptankni

lalapkshaptankni

ndandankshapt/inkni

nanadshske'kni

8;(esz^^kishkni

tetunepni

APOCOPATED FORMS OF THE NUMERALS UP TO TEN.

na-igshta, Modoc na'gshta one-half.

na'sh, nas one.

I3.'p two.

ndi'in three.

vunep, u'nip four.

tiinep, ti'inip five.

nadshkshapta, na'sksapt six.

lapkshapta, lapksapt seven.

ndankshapta, ndanksapt einht.

nan'gshta

ndnash

lalap

ndandan

vii-unep, u-unip

ti'itfinep

nAnashksapt

lalapksapt

nd.^indanksapt

THE NUMERAL SERIES.

525

na'dshskoksh, nri'8;^ilk8 (Klamath Lake) nine.
slike'kisli, sko'ks (Modoc) nine.

tA-unep, tij-unip ten.

nAnadspfoksh
HZeszt'kish
teti'inep, tetiinip

THE NUMERAL SERIES FROM ELEVEN UPWARD.

Indians speaking the hinguage correctly never omit adding a classifier
to the units of the compound numeral. I have tlierofore added to each
decad a different classifier, thus giving successively the whole series of
classifiers in use, with their distributive forms. The classifiers and the
special uses made of them will he explained below. To show the different
ways of pronouncing each numeral I have varied their mode of spelling:

11 ta-unepanta na'dsh Kkla; d, lilukla

12 ta-unepanta lap pd-ula; d. pcpula

13 ta-unepanta ndan pd-ula

14 ta-unepanta viinep pd-ula

15 ta-unepanta tunep pd-ula

16 ta-unepanta ns'idslikshapt pd-ula

17 ta-unepiinta lapkshapt pd-ula

18 ta-unepdnta no.inkshapt pd-ula

19 ta-unepanta na'd8hs;^eks pd-ida

20 la'pdni ta-unep; d. lalap t;i-unep

21 lap'ni ta-unepanta na'dsh li'klatko; d. lilaklatko

22 la' p'ni ta-unepanta la'p pd-ulatko; d. pepiilatko

23 la'pni ta-unepanta ndan pd-ulatko

24 la'pni ta-unepanta viinej) pd-ulatko

25 la'pni ta-unepAnta tiinep pd-ulatko

26 la'pni ta-unepanta na'shkshapt pd-ulatko

27 la'pni ta-unepanta la'pksapt pd-ulatko

28 la'pni ta-unepanta ndiinksapt pd-ulatko

29 la'pni ta-unepanta na'ds^eks pd-ulatko

30 ndi'ini ta-unep; d. ndandan ta-unep

31 ndani ta-unepAnta na'sh kshfkla; d. ksiksakla

32 ndAni ta unepAnta lap Ikla; d. i-dkla

33 ndani ta-unepanta ndan Ikla

IttK

Wi"-'*'

526

39
40
41
42
47

r)0

OUAMMAU OF TFIK KLAMATFf LANdUAOItJ.

(It)

62
70
71
72
80
81
82
iiO
f)l
92
100
101
200
300
400
434
1000
1889

nduiii ta-unepdnta nri'(l8;Kok8 fkla

vundpni ta-unep; d. vu-uiu'pni ta-unop

vundpni ta-unopunta nri'dali ksliiklatko; d. ksiksaklatko

vum'pni ta-imopiinta lap iklatko; d. i-j'iklatko

vunepni ta-unepanta lapgsapt fklatko

tunepni ta-unep; d. ti'itc-inepni ta-unep

tunepni ta-unepanta nadsli ni'kla; d. nenakla

tunepni ta-unepanta lap nfkla

nadslikshaptankni ta-unep; d. nauadshaptankni ta-unop

nadshksaptankni ta-unepAnta na'dsli neklafko; d. nonaklatko

nadshksaptankni ta-unepanta lap nfklatko

lapksliaptankni ta-unep; d. lalapksaptankni ta-unep

lapksaptankni ta-unepanta na'dsh shk^kla; d. shleshlakla

lapksaptankni ta-unepanta la'p slilekla

ndanksaptankni ta-unej); d. ndandanksaptankni t»i-unep

ndanksaptankni ta-unepanta na'sh shh^klatko; d. shleshlaklatko

ndanksaptankni ta unepanta lap shlcklatko
nadshskd'ksni ta-unep; d. nanads;^(-'ksni ta-unep
nadsze'ksni ta-unepanta na'sh yala or yalatko, i-.41atko
nadspje'ksni ta-unepdnta lap yala
ta-undpni ta-unep; hundred; tina hundred
ta-unt'pni ta-unop (pen) na'sh kshfkia
lapCni ta-unepni ta-unep,- liip'ni hundred
ndiini ta-unc'pni ta-unep
vunepni ta-unc'pni ta-unep

vun.'pni ta-unepni ta-unep (pen) ndani ta-unep (pji'n) vi'mep pd-ula
ta-unepni ta-unc'pni ta-unep; ti'na toi'usan

tfna toi'isan pen ndankshaptankni hundred pen udankshaptankni ta-
unep pii'n na'd8;^ek8 pe-ulatko

Concernir.^. the mechanical side of the three series just enumerated, a
few remarks are necessary.

In the first series, the -nkni of sir, seven, eiyht is often abbreviated into
-ni: lapkshaptdnkni into lapkshdptani; cf 44, 6. La'pi is the original form

THK NUMERAL SICRIIOS.

^f the mitnoral for two, and

In the list of the

ipCni means twicr; d. the I)i

numomlH above ten, the end

a locative case, nasalized from wl

■atat, or -ata, -at; and

lat

iiiff -anta, -ant in ta-

527

Jtionary, page 181.

ta-

would ap])ear in a siilwtant

unepf'mta

unepanta has to bo interpreted

ive as
form, correspondi,,,, „to,,1v ,„ ,„ L , T "" ''"""l""i™

Hon., .hough ,•„ „ di.>,-ib.„iv„ ir ; 1 '"' " °"" "'" "'"'° '"■'"■

whole ..umhor ,, .p„k„„ „f di..rib„.!voiy. -n v| 1 r ""'™'; "

- ^h M, no. by n,u„d„„u .e.^,p;:;'r,:'::::;i:i ;:- -'-

ri,e .a„,o pnncpio of inco,i,o,.a.ion of «veml .or,,.., .vh M, „™ in,!-

nist numeral ot tlio number n nueation Tl.« „,i i-^-

t.i-unep, ?/ this 18 abbreviated from ta-unenn.-V 1,„f t ,- V "^"^

un.a„.„.„«„,,y „,,,,..„„,,,„,, „,,;;;:x:^,::^

m,meml, above one hundred, only .l,e uni.. are infleCe.l bv c«,e no Z

-and I. ,.,u,.,p, .,„ ,.„„; „::;,::r L!.'::,;: --try-
pan, pen or no.. ,.-ony.«,„ „ay ,h„» be expressed in differen. wa,"

vune'pni ta-unepj'mta ndan pd-ula
vuni<pni ta-unepni pen ndan pj-ula
iidan pen vunrpni ta-unep pe-ula
ndan vundpni ta-unep pi^-ula

The fraction onc-Mf, n^^-igshtani, na'gshta, is usually placed after the
ch^sitW: ta-unep.nta Mp p.-„Ia n.gshta t.la n^ p..i //aUl t.e:!2^s

t !

Pi*,;

fi28

ORAMMAH OF TIIK KLAMATH LAN<iUA(Ui).

CU.1l

II. INFLECTION FOIl 0A8E.

Liko tho adjertlvo in -«*, tl..> ..inu-n.) . ijoctivo possoHHos a long form
in -«'«-, -m- mul u shorter i.m^ Tlu, !.,„g(,r form appoars only in a fow
cu8o«, liowovor, and instancos will bo givon oclow.

The numeral may be used attribufivoly. atul then UHually precedes tho
nonn which it (pialiaes; or it may bo UHod predicativoly, and thou its posi-
tion in tho sontenco is moro free. In Ijoth instances tho numeral is inflected
by case, liko tho adjective, but may at any tu.io exchanfro its suffix with
tho uniform ending -A, which occurs in so many adjectives and pronouns
in their oblicpio cases, and in rapid speech is dropped altofretlier. Only
case-suffixes— and of case-postpositions only -tala and tho inessivo -i (in nii-i
on OHO side) — are oniployed in its inflection.

Tho noiui tataksni in tho paradigm following means cMldmi, and occurs
in tho distributive form only, though in the sense of a true plural:

ndi'ini. ndanni tatuksni three children (snbj.).

ndanni'nash, ndanna tat/ikiush three children (<ibj.).

ndamiL^nam tatf'ikiam of three children.

ndiinnantka tjitakiamti or tatukiamat aboid three children.

ndiinnantku tatakiaslitka hi/ means of three children.

iidamia tatakiam;i;o'ni, tatakianikshp^r-'ni where three children arc.

ndanna tatakiamkshi where three children lire.

udiinna tatakiamkshtala, abbr. tatakiamshtala toward the place where
three children live.

Another paradigm contains a combination with a substantive, in which
the possessive case is iuipossible or unusual, and is therefore replaced by
the partitive case :

tc-unipni shishflaga ten shreds. tr-unipantk shishflagtat

te-unipc^nash, td-unip 8hishilag(a) t.-unipant(a) sln'shilagksaksi

te-unipanti shishilagti tt'-unipant shishilagtala
t(5-unipantk(a) shishilagjitka

The case-ending -tka, -ntka, -ntk frequently becomes connected with
substantives standing in the locative case.

INFLi:(JTH)N FOK CASE.

529

Other examples of inflection :

tfl'nipnish wewan's t^hk Afslnwi, Akhish had Jive wives, 99, 9.
lulunne'ntcli m!wansl.}8l, to three (of l,i«) wives, 9C, 9.
na te-unip vvilli'Hl.ik ml' xa I have filled ten snrks, 74, 12.
Upni t;i-unepanta pii'a tunep pe-ula ni «a'tu / have counted twent,,-
five, 70, 8.

wA'la m IiA'nkiast tiVnipans they asked those five (men). 17 C- cf 17
13; 44,2. y> > , ■ ,

tfl'nipn; hak makloka Nflaksknt five (men) only from Niluk.hi tore
encamped, 17, 2,

The numeral one, na'dsh (radix ««-). sl'ows a largo number of different
forms, which necessitate a special paradigm. IJesi.les the meaning one it
also signifies other, another, somebody, and then usually has the longer form
nayentch : " '

subj. na'dsh, na'sh, nils one ; nayents another.

obj. na'dsh, na'sh, 72, 3; nayil'nash, n/iyen'sh, na-iint-s, nayiins, 72, 1.

poss. na'dsham ; nayt'nam, na-ji'nam.

partit. nd-iti.

instrum. ndyantka, na-jiiit, nayant, 6G, 10; na-ent, 06, 2.

locat. nayantat(?) nayant, na-jint.

illat. na-it;^e'ni on one end; on the other side (for na-iti-zo'ni).

iness. na-i on one side (in na-igshta half, na-iti etc.).

direct, na'dshtala, iia-itala (cf na-ital tolshna).

From la'pi two, many cases of which were givon in the Dictionary, is
formed lapukni, abbr. lApuk both, which is inflected like other numerals.'

For the numerals from eleven to nineteen a shorter form exists besides
the four ferns mentioned above ; it consists in omitting the number ten,
and the classifier appears to be sufficient proof that the number spoken of
is above ten, for numerals below ten never assume classifiers. Thus we
have :

12 lap pd-ula, instead of: ta-unepanta hip pd-ula; cf. 40, 1,

18 ndankshapt yala, instead of: ta-unep pen ndanksapt yala.
34

530

UUAMMAK OF TIIK KF.AMATII LANGUAGE.

'-«i

C-*

WluU wo nill an ordhinl iininonil ia roiulcrod in Kliimath by the iidjec-
tival, iiiHcotod foiiu of th*; miniorul in -ni. The chief imo inudo of thin
iiunioral in -ni is that of a (lardinal, and th()n},di it is t-xcoptionally uhimI hh
an ordinal, it Ih not probable that the Indian considers it in these instances
as an ordinal in our sense of the term. If his mind was snscoptiblo for snch
a catejrory of the mnneral, ho would probably have established u special
f^nunmatic ending for it. Kxanjples :

ishnnia a sha hilnk ndaiuint (or ndani) wuftashtat thcifhurird liimon the

third (lui/.
lapkshaptj'inkiant wuftashtat },''u(kaka he started on the seventh dai/.

The only ordinals existing in the language are fulfilling other functions
besides. They are: lupfni i'ovjirst, tapfni (topfni) for second (in rank, order,
time, etc.); tpfiilamni : the scrnnd of three, or the middle one; t;(c-u : the
first in ago, the oldest; diniin. t;;ewiiga; t^e-u a huk i)e'p tunia wewcash
gftko hrr fn-<t dniit/hfer has maiiij ehildrcn.

lupfni kiii'm g('-u shnuksh the first fish that J cauffht.

tapfni kiii'm go-u shnilkshti gi it is the second fish that I caught.

THE ADVEKHIAL NUMERAL.

When numerals are serving to ([ualify an act or state expressed hy a
verb, not being joined to a substuntive or other noun, they assume the
adverbial endings of -ni, -tka, -ash, or the ubiipiitous adjectival ending -a.

The most frequently used of these sufHxes is the terminal -ni, when
indeclinable. We have seen it u.sed in the general list of numerals as
composing the tens (decades), hundreds, etc , in the form of multiplicative
numerals: vunt'pni ta-unep >>7//, lit. "four times ten." It clo.sely corre-
sponds to our times, and to the Latin -ies in deeies, etc. It is especially fre-
quent when used with verbs referring to sections of time, as wafta to pass a
night and a dag, etc.

tunepni sa-atsa sa nfshta theg danced the milp-dance during five whole

nights; lit. "five times they scalp-danced all night long", 16, 11.
hftk nda'ni kt'ko-uya three times he attempted, f}f}, 10.

THK ADVIOItlWAL NILMKUAL.

531

n.i«l.kslm,)tunk,utokH uu UnnOun'tka I hn,r been there as ojtrn us (-tokH)
six times. '

ndaui u ,Ml Hl.u.witka cVukutat gn, vvuiUhI. three times I tvent Jishuu, to
the pond to-dui/.

Ujl^ni. nduni wiiiti;i.u,k nj^er three da,s, vi. , .Mayl,., over throo tin.CH."

tutOiH.pni waitulai. (Mo.l.) <iflcrftve da>,s ,« ever,, instanee, Hf,, 1.

_^ The only „,„ueral dirto.i,.,. In itn root tVon, the corrcponding cardinal

(na dHl.) ,H tina onee, tfnak (for tfna ak) onl„ onec: d. tftna and t/tatna o„

t«v „..„,.:.., ,>,.«,,//,, «... ,,„, „,,,, ,, „„ „j„^„^,, j,,,,,.^^, ^^^^^^^

I nm k slunwatcl.na to swallow at one >julp; tf.ni nnndO kfnlan « //«/« over one

WCCK*

Adverbial nun.eraln exprenmng inntrumentality show the inHtrun.ental
ca«o -tka, -ntka, -ntk. which in the nu.neral u^tjectice in often found to occur
m a temporal and locative function.

lapantka hiV shlin he was shot twice, lit. "hy two Cshot«) "
h.Vk ni'«h lapukantka .shlatampk the), drew their bows at me both Hinu.l
taneoutsly, 2'A, 17.

The HU«i.x -ash of the objective case is used in adver),ial nun.erals to
express the locative idea: at so many spots, ptaees; n/,dshash or nadshashak
at, to another plaee; lapash, ndanash at, to a .rcond, third place.- cf nanuk.sh
atanyplaee, everywhere. The san.e form is also en,plo^•ed in a spec-ial kind
of .nult,pl,cat.ves, to which is added some term pointing to repetition, as
foldnig, bemg together, etc.

la'psh, lapash pakalaksh twofold.
ndanash, ndri'nsh pakalaksh threefold.
viinipsh pakalaksh /oM>yoW.

_ A parallel to this is forn.ed by the following phrase, in which the abbre-
viated numeral is used :

hip shantchaktantko twofold, lit. "two growing together"
ndiln shantchakt.4ntk(, threefold, lit. "three growii^g together."
The term pair is rendered by lalapi eaeh two; bunch by nanash s/o'-
s^jatch "united, bound into one." Lapiak means two only; tunepautak or

■•■'ad

■4»

■■-I

«^»«s

532

GUAMMAU OF THK KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

tunepAntok _five only ; liipok, bipuk hoth lias, in the objective case, lapuka-
yji'naah ; lapii'yala, lapeala to henr twins, lapii'yalsh twins.

When cases of the numeral inflection appear abbreviated, in the form
of the short -a in adverbial phrases, tins mainly occurs when aritlnnetic
fractions have to be expressed, and a term indicating separation, division,
etc., is subjoined to the numeral, as follows:

ndiina slR'ktat;(atko oiw-thinl part.
vunfpa alu'ktatp^atk one-fourth j)arL
lapi tiinipa slK'ktat;c'itko two-jijlhs.
tjl-ur.,3pa 8lu'ktat;{atk one-tenth.
nads^eks tii-unepa shektatp^atk ninc-tentlis.

But there are also other ways to express fractions :

nfi-igshtani kti'ishkuish one-half, lit. "one-half slice."

If'ipeni ta-unepanta ndan tala pc-ula pen nagshta twenty three dollars and

a half.
vunipashat shaktpakt;{;itko cut in four quarters (as an apple), Mod.

The fraction eleven-fourteenths was rendered in the southern dialect in
the following clumsy manner : vunip pe-ulatko nanuk nil shn(')katko, ndan
ki'i-i shnuka; lit. "having taken all fourteen, I do not take three."

Cf also viinip kikanyatpatko /owr-comeref?, Mod.

IlL NUMERAL CLASSIFIERS.

The custom of appending classifj'ing term.s of various descriptions to
simple and compound numerals is often met with in foreign languages.
The six classifiers of the Aztec language describe the exterior of the objects
mentioned or counted^ as -tetl is appended to round, -pantli to lo)i(/ articles,
etc. In other languages, as in the Penobscot of Maine, the various termina-
tions of the numeral adjective act as a sort of classifiers. Among the Maya
languages, the Kidu' seems to be the most productive in attributes of this
kind, and they are not at all limited to numerals.* Other languages ex-

" r.KOitOK ttinils, Instructions for rt'scnrcli rclativo to the otlinnlojjy and pliilology of Anieri a,
pages 40 sipj. (Siuithsoniau Misccll. Coll., vol.7, Irtli:!). 11. i>i: CiiakT':ncky, I'fs cxpli^llvbH imnK^rales
dans li's (lirtlccti's (U> lii fainilN' Miiva-QniclK^, in "l{t^vn«d« LinKiiisticino," 1)^80, pages HIW-IiSG. TllB
samf:, Dii systt'^iiie do nnm^ratiuu chtiz les {leuples do la faniillu Maya-Qiiichd, iti Le Musdon, Loavain,
im-i, vol. 1, No. a. 8^.

NUMERAL CLASS1F1ER8.

533

elude tliem altogether from the numeral, but add them to certain substan-
tives. But all of this largely differs from the mode in vvliich classifiers are
applied in the Klamath of Oregon, which is probably unique.

In this language the classifiers are applied to numerals only. They are
not suffixed adjectives or particles, as elsewhere, but vnhs or their past parti-
ciplcs, descriptive of form, siiajje, or exterior of the objects mentioned, and in-
variably standing after tiie numeral, usually also after the name of tiie object.
They are appended only to the mmerah ahovc km, and not to the dkcvijIc mun-
hers, or nmnhers. divmhie by ten This gives tlie clue to their f.rigin and use.
These suffixations are intended to classify only the unit or -.inits after the
decade, and not the decade itself. Indeed, the unit following immediately
the decade in counting, as 11, 31, 71, 151, is in some instances (pialified by
other classifiers than tlie units between 2 and 9, as 32 to 3;), 72 to 7!i, etc ,
because the former can be applied to single object.-, oid)-, whereas tlse latter
refer to a plurality of objects. When I say: lap'ni ta-unepanta na'sh lutfsh
Hkla twenty-one berries, this literally means, "upon tiie twenty berries one
I lay (or you lay) on the top"; and when saying: liipr-ni ta-unepanta
na'dshkshapta lutfsli [w-uifi twenty-six berries, I suggest by it "upon twice
ten berries six I put (or he, she puts) on the top or lay down"; or "after
twice ten berries six I lay down." Li'kla and pi'-uhi botli refer to round-
shaped articles only: but the twenty berries previously counted are not
referred to by the classifier, only the units mentioned witli the nmnber,
'J'he classifying verb may be rendered by the indefinite term eounted, num-
bered; before it, some subject-pronoun, as /, you, he, she, is elHptically omit-
ted, but not before its participles liklatko, pt'-ulatko.

The verbs serving as classifiers differ according to the shape of the
counted objects, but all agree as to their connnon signification of deposit-
ing, placing on the top of. The simple verbal form, absolute or distribu-
tive, is employed when the sjieaker or otiier jierson is just engaged in
counting tlie articles; the past participle laid down in its direct or oblique
cases, absolute or distributive forms, is used when the articles were
counted previously and a statement of their number is made. A majority
of the classifiers are formed from tlie verb fkla by means of various con-
sonantal prefixes.

534

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

.'.-Is

■■a
■:»

. -3

The fact that the units from one to nine are not accompanied by these
terms must be explained by some peculiarity of the aboriginal mode of
counting. We may assume, from the original meaning of these verbs, that
the first ten objects counted, as fish, baskets, bulbs, arrows, etc., were de-
posited on the ground in a file or row, or aside of each other, and that with
the eleventh a new file was commenced, or when the articles were of the
proper shape they were piled on the top of the first ten articles.

These classifiers, which to us appear to be an unnecessary and bur-
densome addition to human speech, are not always applied correctly by the
Indians, and are frequently omitted by them. Tlius pe-ulapkash is omitted
in 54, 13; ksliiklapkash incorrectly put in 5;>, 11, instead of i)e-uliipkash.
Pt'-ulatko is unnecessary in 90, 2, but should stand instead of pe-ula in 90, 3.

Likla, part, liklatko, with their distributive forms, as seen in our
numeral series, are appended to numerals above ten embodying the single
unit after the decade, as 21, 91, 241, etc, and mentioning articles of a cir-
cular, globular, annulai- shape, or objects of a bulky, heavy-looking form.
The prefix 1- referring to rounded things only, the meaning of Hkla is "to
lay down one rounded thing" We find it used of beans, seeds, fruits, ber-
ries, balls, eggs, coins, thimbles, bottles, knives, watches, rocks, stones,
boxes, wigwams, Jind similar objects

Ve-ul a, part, pe-ulatko, with their distributive forms, are appended to
numerals over ten made up of more than one unit after the decad, as 22-29,
92-99, etc., and mentioning articles of the same desci-iption as given under
Hkla, and in addition to these, persons, animals, and divisions of time.
IV-ula is derived from pc'wi "to give or bestow many rounded objects" bv
means of the completive forujative suffix -(')!a, -ula.

Kshikla or ksi'kla, part, ksliiklatko, with their distributive forms, are
appended to numerals over ten embodying a single unit only after the
decade, as 31, 81, 441, etc., and mentioning a person, an animal or a long
object. Kshfkla is another derivative of the verb ikla, "to lay ('own one
single animate being or a long object."

Ikla, part, fklatko, with their distributive forms, are placed after
numerals made up of two or more units after the decade, as 32-39, 42-49,
and mentioning a plurality of Inanimate objects of a tall, lengthy, or elon-

ORIGIN OF THE NUMERALS.

535

gated shapo, as sticks, logs, trees, poles, boards, fence-rails, rifles and piste's,
boots, lead-pencils, etc. The verb properly means, "to lay down or deposit
many tall, inanimate objects."

Nekla or nikla, part, m'klatko, with their distributive forms, are ap-
pended to numerals made up of units from one to nine after the decade, and
introducing objects of a thin, filiform, smooth, and level snrfiice or texture, as
sheets of clotli or paper, kerchiefs, shirts, mats, and other tissues, excluding
blankets, also ropes and strings. The verb shukla, which we would expect
to introduce single units after the decade, is not in use for this purpose.

Shlekla, part, shleklatko, with their distributive forms, is found ap-
pended to numerals made up of units from one to nine after the decade, and
referring to blankets, bedcloth, skins, and otiier large articles of dress serving
to envelope the whole body or parts of it.

Ydla, ycilha, yela, part, yalatko, yelatko, with their distributive forms,
are appended to numerals made up of units from one to nine, descriptive of
long, tall, inanimate objects, and therefore analogous to ikla in their use.
For single units, neither fla, which is the absolute form of the distril)utive
i-ala, yala, yela, nor another form kshc'la, is actually used. Examples :

wewi'inuish tatoksni na'sh taunep kshikla shut'nka thei/ killed eleven
women and children, 37, If)

tunepni ta-unepunta na'sh maklaksliash kshiklapkash i'-amnatko com-
manding fifty- one Indians.

ta-unepanta tiinep pe-uhipkash Modokishash hn shlca he found (there)
fifteen Modoc Indians.

Tchima'ntko lapgni ta-unepanta lap pe-ula illo'latko gi Steamboat Frank
(then) was twenty-two years old, hb, 8; cf lit and the ])assages in
Dictioiuiry, pages 264, 265.

tinA hundred pen lap p(i-ula latchash (there arc) one hundred and two
lodges, 90, 3.

ORIGIN OF THE NUMERALS.

The quinary system is the most frequent of all the systems occurring
in the numerals of American languages; its origin lies in counting objects
by means of the fingers of both hands. When counting on their fingers,

536

GRAMMA 1{ OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

\^f

Indians always begin with the smallest finger of the right or left hand
counting the fingers with the hand left free; after counting the thumb, they
continue with the thumb of the other hand, and proceeding further, bend
over the fingers of this other hand as soon as counted. That Klan.ath
numerals have the quinary counting system for their basis is apparent from
the repetition of the three first numerals in the terms for six, seven, and
eight, whde nine is formed diff'erently.

One and hvo are etymologically related to the corresponding numerals
m Sahaptni and Cayuse .lialects, and all must have a common ori^nn
Lup,, lap two is but another form of nt^p hmd, which appears also in the
numerals vuuep /.„;• and tunep five, which are compounds of ndp and the
prefixed particles u- and tu-. Thus/.«r means "hand up", and/., "hand
away", indicating the completion of the count on the four long fino-ers
KsliApta IS abbreviated from kshapata to Lend haekward, to lean, recUne upon ■
as the component of numerals, it indicates the bending over of the di^^its
named, as ndan=kshapta for nda.; ml kshapAta, "three I have bent ovlr"
on d>e second hand. Nadsh^s^c^kish nine is in Modoc al,breviated into
skcKish, which signifies "left over", one digit only being left over to con,-
plete the ten; cf skii'kish, in the Dictionary. Tc^-unep ten, the original form
of winch appears to be t,'i-unep, is probably a dissimilated repetition of
tunep five.

If the origin of the Klamath numerals is thus correctly traced, their
inventors must have counted only the four long fingers without the thumb,
and five was counted while saying hand awa,,! hand of! The "four" or
hand high! hand up! intimates that the hand was held up high after count-
ing us four digits; and some term expressing this gesture was in the case of
mne substituted by "one left over", skc<kish, which means to say, "only one
18 left until all fingers are counted."

THf] PRONOUN.

The pronominal roots, which, as we have seen in the preceding chap-

ters, form a large number of verbal and nominal affixes, become of still

greater importance in the subsequent chapters of the Grammar The task

winch these roots have to fulfill in the organism of language is to provide it

DEMONSTRATIVK IMt JNOIJN,

537

with relational .affixes, and with •words expressing relation, as conjunctions,
postpositions, and adverbs. As to the pronouns, the}' are all derived from
this kind of roots, if we excv.pt a few so-called "indefinite pronouns", as
tumi mani/, nanuk all. Originally, all true pronominal roots were of a
demonstrative or deictic signification, whatever their signification may Le
at the present time. I shall therefore treat of them before I treat of the
other pronouns.

Tlie class of pronouns in which the pronominal rr.dix has not altered,
or has but slightly altered, its demonstrative power is the drmonntnilire
pronoun. Interroffutirc pronouns, formed from the deictic roots ka and ta,
differ from the relative pronoun in their suffixes only, and form the inter-
mediate link between the demonstrative and the relativi pronoun, wliicl;,
as it appears in this language, is simultaneously a demonstrative-relative.
'Wa demonstrative, interrogative, and relative pronouns referring to animate
beings often differ from ., se referring to inanimate things. Tlie inilejiuite
pronoun is half pronoun, half adjective, and most pronouns of this class are
derived from pronominal roots. Tlio personal jironoun contains a demon-
strative radix applied to persons si)ocially, and the possessive, reflective, and
reciprocal pronouns are derivatives of the pivsonal pronoun. This and some
of the demonstrative pronouns do not reduplicate distributively, as the
other pronouns do, but form real plurals like these.

I. DKMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN.

Indians and other illiterate ))ooples point out with graphic accuracy
the degree of proximity or distance in space separating the speaker from
the one apoken of or spoken to by hieans of their demonstrative pronouns or
jiarticles, by the third person e^" ulio personal pronoun, and by some verbal
forms. This well-known fact is stated here once for all ; it is one of the
more prominent peculiarities of our upland language also.

The roots which form demonstrative pronouns in Klamath are pi, hu, ku
(gu), ka (ga), a!ul ke (ge). Ke marks dose proximity, and reappears in
kt'-u, ge-u mine, mil ; hu marks distance within sight and beyond sight; ku
distance bey- u(v 3,;rht or far oft"; while ka forms a Transition from the demon-
strative to the ill iefinito pronoun, and also gives origin tu interrogative
pronouns. Pi, pi. piit, sha will be spoken of under Personal Pronoun.

538

GRAMAfAR OF TIIK KLAMATH LANGITAOB.

(:.. r-»«a»

■•¥

Ct««

Thi demonstrative pronouns formed from the roots ne and ta may as well
be considered us indefinite pronouns.

The suffixes appended to the above radices mark tlie degree of distance,
and in many instances distinguisli the animate from the inanimate gender'
wliicli in the following list are presented in separate colum.is. Two other
pronouns pi and sha were added tor comparison, pi being used (in the
northern dialect chiefly) for persons and animals standing in the singular,
pat for the same in the j)lural number, sha for persons only.

List of (kmo)istrative pronouns in the subjective case.

Inanimate.

ihit (so near an to be touched )
this (cloao by, "right liere")

Jnimale.
ke'ku

ki^k ; g«Vk hftuk j ge, kg, pi. ko'kshtt

kiVku

geu ; gu, k« ; gdu hOuk

K^tnii, gdnn
hA'nu

hi'in, huiin, hftiik
hftii, hftt, hrinii, g*!)!
hft'nkt

this (staniliiig, being before yoii) hft't, pi. hft'.lshft

thie (present, visible, within sight) hft'nk, pi hiidsha, sha

that (visible, though ilistant) hft't, pi. hiV.lsha; guiii; sha

llml (absent) h.lkt, pi. huktsha ; pi, pi. pr.t, sha

<;i«t (absent, departed) nS'g. p! nO'gsha; Mo,i, nag, pi. na'gsha

«a« (beyond sight) hfl'k.n k, bft'kta, pi. Laksha; hft'nkt, pi. hftk, ft'k, hft'kta

hft'iiktsliii ; guni ; 1 1, pi. pat, sha

Where the Klamath Lake dialect has hil'k, hilnk, hu't in the singular,
the Modoc dialect ordinarily uses hil instead. The suffix -ta, abbr. -t, refers
not ordy to persons, but also to inanimate things standing upright, while
inanimate objects seen upon the ground are indicated by the tnmsitional
particle -n (-na, -nu), forming no plural.

Some of these pronouns are easily confounded with demonstrative
adverbs of local or temporal import, as both are pronounced alike (hn,
link, hunk, etc.).

Demonstrative pronouns do not form all the cases of the nominal par-
adigm. I therefore present here all the forms heard from the natives
speaking both dialects, and beg to observe that all these forms also corre-
spond t( our i)ersonal pronouns he, she, and, when imper.sonal, to it.

k (-, g(- this here; Latin : hicce, hocce; poss. kelam, krlem ; dir. gt'tala.
k e' k, gil'g, ge'k, gii'g this, is the above ke in the reduplicated form,
the second vowel being apocopated; Lat. hie, hoc; Gr. ovtooI
Obj. ease ke'kish, gekish, ge'ksh ; poss. kekclam, kc^kelem. PI.
kr''ksha, g«-'ksha; poss, kt'kf'lam.sham, abbr. into sham.

DEMONSTKATIVK PRONOUN.

539

ge n, genu this thing; loc. gi'nta (for gi'ntut) ; instr. gc'ntka.

h u' nk, hCi, Mod. lul, hu-ii, u, o this one; c»bj. case hunki'sli, liuiikiHli,
hiVnksli, iiiVnk 24, 5 ; poss. hunkclam, hunkiani ; partit. hunkanti ;
loc. hunta, liu'nkant ; instr. hn'nkantka. Hunk may Ijecome ab-
breviated into link, liak : tula hi'h with him, with her. PI. of per-
sons: hudsha (preferable to liu'nkslia), sha; obj. hunkiash, abbr.
bu'nksli, liu'nk; poss. hu'nkClamslian), luVnkianisham; abbr. into
sham, 108, 4. 122, 17. 132, 5. Hunk occurs but seldom in the
subjective case ; hii'nkt forms obj. hu'nktia.sh in a Modoc te.xt.

h iV t that, Mod. hfl, anim. and inan.; Lat. iste; pi. of persons: hutslia,
hudsha.

h iV k. Mod. luV that; iness. : hukf h/ or within him; pi. hft'ksha. Cf.
Dictionary, page 74.

hu'ksiit, o'ksht that absent, far off, or deceased one, 192; 7. obj. liu'nksht.

h u' k t that absent one, anim. and inan. ; obj. of sg. and pi. hu'nkt ; pi. of
persons hu'ktsha.

h A' n this thimi (visible), also referring to persons ; hum', hunitak in his
or her own mind; instr. huntkayb/ this; loc. hiinta thus (conj.).

g II n f, guni, kone the one over there (visible); also adverb. Forms par-
ticles like gunfgshtant, gunitana etc., and is derived from radix
ku- in kui, guhuashka etc. Cf List of Prefixes, page 289.

The following demonstrative pronouns show no inflection for case :

g e' t, kti't. Mod. kunk, abbr. ka, so great, so large, and .so much, so mang.
The cases formed from it lust their pronominal signification and
become adverbs : gt'tant to the Oftposite side; getxt'ni at this end, etc.

kanni, gunni, abbr. kan, so many, so much; used when pointing at
objects or counting them on the fingers. From this is formed the
above kank .so much: contr. from kanni ke (as k.int is from kanni
at) and correlative to tank.

ta n n i, abbr. tan, d. tatanni, .so mang, so much; ka tanni so long. Cor-
relative to kanni, and more frequently used interrogatively.

t a n k, d. tatank, so mang, so much ; contr. from tanni ke. More fre-
(juently used as interrogative pronoun and as adverb : tank and
tank.

640

GllAMMAR OF THM KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

■■<•<

'•1

Diminutives are formed from the above (lemoiistratlve pronoiuiH us fol-
lows: hiiktajra this little one; pi. Inikshatasra ; doul)le diminutave, luiktakag;
J)], hiiksliatakafra ; iio'g that one absent, nekaga, nil'kag, and others under

Saftix -i1ga No. 2

1 1. 'NTERROGATIVB PRONOUN.

Interrogative pronouns are derived from the demonstrative roots ka
and ta, tii, which also form the interrogative particles or adverbs. There is
a distributive form f(M- all the interrogative pronouns, except for tua.

K a n f or kani f who f which person f is more properly applied to i)er-
sons (and animals) than to inanimate things, though it can be used for th^ e
also: which thiuf; f Kaka? is the distributive form; and kdni also figures as
pronoim indefinite.

ki'ini liilt gi ? who is he ? tvho is she f

kani lakf ! tvhat (sort of a) husband! 186; 55.

kani i'lnku shlii'a i ? which tree do you see ?

Not to be confounded with the adjective k.4ni, kanf being outside, one
who is outdoors The pronoun kanf is inflected as follows :

Absolute.
kani ? kanf I who ^ which f
kanash, kan'sh, kansh, kants? whom? to whom? inan. kani? kanf? what?

which ? to tvhich ?
kfUam ? Mod. kunam ? whose ? of which ?
killamkshi ? at or to whose house f
kalamkshxe'ni ? kalamkshtala ? etc.

Distributive.
kakal who? which persons or things ?
kakiash ? whom ? which persons or things f
kakiam? whose? of ichich things f
kakiamkshi ? at whose houses ?
kakiamksh;{e'ni ? kakiamkshtdla ? etc.

t u A ? which ? what thing ? is an indefinite pronoun as well as an inter-
ergative, and has to be considered as a derivative of tii out there, pointino-

4i^

KELATIVK I'UONOUN.

541

to a distance. Its real moaniiif* is: what kind or sort off and so it liiis
passed into the function of a substantive : thinr/, article, object, as in tunii tua
mani/ things. Cf Dictionary, page 415. It is inflected, like the pronoun
tua, as follows :

tua ? end. tua I which thing f tohat sort off
tudlash ? which f

tualani ? of which f and forms the particles ;
tuankshi ? at which place f tuatalat whyf

This pronoun often appears in an enclitic and proclitic form. Tua kt,
contr. tui'ik ? what is it? occurs in : tua ki nil kogal what is it I suck out f
U)b; 17 ; cf. 153; 4. 159; 58. Compare also the Klamath Lake and Modoc
songs 154 ; 13. 150 ; 35. 158 ; 56. 173 ; 3. 174 ; 8., and the instances given in
the Dictionary. Sometimes it is used of animate beings.

t a n n i, abbr. tan, tan, d. tatanni, how much f how manjj f to what amount f
in Lat. quot. Tliis pronoun is not inflected, and, when in the full form, is
always pronounced with two n. Tanni mi watch gi I how many horses have
yovf lit. "how many horses are yours"? tan a i wewcash gitk ? how many
children have you f Cf. Dictionary, page 389.

t a n k, abbr. tan, abbr. from tanni ke ; d. tatank, is used interrogatively
in the same function as tanni, q. v.

wak, wak, d. wawak, is in fact a particle: how f but in many instances
has to be rendered in English by an interrogative pronoun : what f E. g.
in: wak ma? what do you say f the literal rendering of whicii is : "how do
I hear"?

HI. BELATIVE PKONOUN.

The relative pronoun k a t, proclit. kat, is of the same origin as the inter-
rogative pronoun kani ? tvho f Kat is not only a relative pronoun, but
simultaneously a demonstrative-relative pronoun, corresponding to (7 quale.,
leqiiel in Italian and French, the real meaning of which is that who, that which,
the one which. The demonstrative pronoun hfl'k, liiVnk, liim, etc, winch
should always accompany kat to make the phrase or mitiUtiice complete, is
nry found witli it (tvery time, though we Jiieet with it in 97, 1: kat liAk
hu't tohui lah'ga Tdhil'shash which thing then remained sticking upon Mudhen;

642

ORAM AU OF TIIK KLAMATH LANnUAlUi.

. -Mi

-at

'^
|^.«

lit. "that tliinjr which tluMi romaiiUMl", otc. Tho Lonl's Pniyer, in 139, 1,
hu8 k.'.t only: N.'ilam p't^shup, kut pluf tchhi Our Father who lives on Lll
Cf. jilHofi], 12. 17.

Tho i-uhitivo pronoun ih Honietinit's abhreviatod into kii, g,i.

Tho distributive form, kakat, inflectH almost like that of kiiiii ! tcho ?

A bsolit/e.
kilt, kat who, what, which; that who, the one which.
kantaua, kandan, kanda (kant, G.^,, 18) whom, to tvhom; tvhich, to which.
knhim whose, of tvhich, (;8, 0.
kahiinkslu at whose house; kahimkshtala etc.

Distributive,
kakat, abbr. kAk, those who; each of tvhom or which.
kakiash (objective case).
kaklam (possessive case),
kfikiamkshi etc.

Where it is feasib.o to avoid incident clansos, the Luiffnago likes to
replace them by verbals or participiiJ constructions, and this iccounts for
the scarcity of the relative pronoun. A stu.lent of the language may stay
many weeks among the natives before he becomes aware of its existence.

InVksa, kiik (for kakat) at tini';^! tsu those who had just yone up the hill,
2;{, 13.

nc-uleka nu hunkianht kakat huk sis.s(')ka I imnish those who have emiaijed

inajiifht, 61, 18.
watsag huk k'leka kandan kpe'l ktakicihi in'i the doij is dead whose tad I

cut ojf ; lit. "to whom I cut the tail oflf"."
huk mat mbushohi, kalamkshi tak ,iu tank niak'lC'za the man at whose

house I stopped is married, they say.
kandan hu'nk shli'n the one tvhom I had shot, 23, 20.
kiinda nat hu'nk ii'na the one whom tve hrouyht, 24, 9. '

IV. INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
Adjectives, the signification of which is so generic and indistinct that
they can replace substantives, are called by the above term. Most of them
undergo inflection.

INUKl'INITI-: rUONOUN.

543

p5' t, prjit, kiit so much, that much, Mod. kmik ; miiy lie flasHcd iih wull
t\nwufr tlio (loiiioiiMtrutivo pmiKuiiiH, with tiink, ti'tiini otc. ; giit i ii's skiVk-
tiiMuiipk so miiih f/oti will haw to pay me, (iO, 10.

h I'lknk, lii'mkiik, hutak, pi. lu'iksliiik, the same, the. identical one. In-
flected like the 8iin|)Io pronouns; lu'ikak lii.shuak»li the same man. Same is,
liowov(^r, exprosMod in many other ways, for whidi cf. Dictionary, |)ago (546.

k a II :omr.h(Hlif, some one. Is used in counting, and often a(!conipa-
nied by gestures. Abbreviated in ka, ga, and figuring also as an interrog-
ative pronoun (kanf).

nil un ka-i kanaah shapftak / .shall not divulge it to anyhodif, 40, H ; cf.

40, 11.
ntchiilkni kani a i/oun/j man; lit. "somebody young."

k I'l n k, abbr. ka, ga, so many, so much, that much ; a contraction of kanni
ke, and serving as correlative to tank, q. v. For e.xamjjles, see Dictionary,
page 117. Kank is also used as adverb. Ka tani so far, that much; ka tani
ak, Mod., only so far ; that is the end. Not inflected.

k a n k t a k, the empliatic form of kank, adj. and adv. It also stands
for enouyh, and serves as an exclamation; cf Dictionary, page 117. More
frequent in Modoc than in the northern dialect.

k a n n i, ganni, abbr. kan, so many, such a number of; used, e. g., when
pointing at objects or (counting them; the correlative to tanni.

k a - i t u a (1) nothiny, (2) nobody; see under tuf'i.

n A y e nt c h other, the other, another one, next. Cf na'dsh, in Numerals.

n a n n k (1 ) all, every one of, Lat. omnis; (2) total, t.atre, whole, the whole
of, Lat. lotus. Abbreviated from nanukni, and inflected regularly like the
numerals in -ni, though without distributive form. Some of the ca.ses have
adjectival, some adverbial signification, while others combine both.

nanuk all, whole.

nanukt'nash, nanukiin'sh ; inan. nanuk (obj. case); nanukasli, adv.,

everyiohere.
nanukcnam of all^ of the tvhole.
nanukanti, adj. ; and when adv : everytvhere.
nanukant (for nanukatat), adj.; abbr. nakanta, ndkant

^;j

'<?!

c*l

<9^

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)

i.O

150 ™^

2.5

I.I

IL25 III 1.4

I ZO

1.6

Fho

:/.

€^

f/O

<,1>-

<?!

Sciences
Corpomtiun

23 WEST MAIN STREET

WEBSTER, N.Y. 14Sr,0

(716) 8/2-4503

%'■

644 GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

nunukAntka, adj. and adv.; abbr. ndkantka.
nanukdnainkshi at everybody's house.

n il n u k t u a every kind of thing; obj. nanuktualash etc.; see under tuA.

p A n a n i, d. papAnani, as long as, to the length of.

p i I a, d pi'pil, alone, none but; see tdla.

t A 1 a, d. tatAla, in the sense of abne, none but, may be appended to
any pronoun and also to substantives. Being in reality an adverb, it under-
goes no inflection, but the noun or pronoun connected with it is inflected
Cf. Dictionary, page 385, under No. 3. The Klamath Lake Indians use
more frequently pfla, pfl, d. pfpil, in this function, and with them it also
means bare. Cf. Dictionary, page 266. G(<tak is used in the sense of alone
in 97, 1. 2.

t A n i a n i, d. tataniani, as large in size, so large.

t a n k, d. tiitank, so many, so muck; not inflected for case, because it is
in fact a particle. Cf. k/mk. Tankni in an adverbial signification, cf. 43, 4

tankak a few, some, not many; emphatically tJinkaknk.

tAnni, d. tatunni, abbr. tan, tutiin, so many, so much; correlative to
kdnni.

t u A, enclit. tua something, some article or object, is inflected in the same
manner as when used as an interrogative pronoun. As an indefinite pro-
noun, it is used also in a personal sense: somebody, some people; e. g., kA-i
tuAlam shldkish / am controlled by nobody; cf Note to 192; 8, and the pas-
sages in the Dictionary, page 415, and Texts, 112, 1. 2. 5. 7. 8. 12. 16.
Compounds of tua are :

kA-itua (1) nothing, (2) nobody; poss. ka-ituAlam etc ; here the two com-
ponents may also be found separated by other words: kA-i nAlsh
i tua shutL^ki kii-idsha let us do nothing wicked, 139, 6 ; kA-i shash
tuA none of them, 20, 7.
nAnuktua (1) every kind of thing, (2) everything Inflected like tuA.
t u m i many, much, has no distributive form, but a diminutive : tunn'Aga
few, a little of The locative case is tumianta, the instrumental tumiAntka,
tumantka, the other oblique cases tiima. Before m and some other conso-
nants the final -i of ti'mii is dropped: tum ModoknJ gAtpa many Modoca

PERSONAL PRONOUN.

545

arrived,^ 13, 14. Ti'imi also means sufficient, enough of, and too many, too
much; it forms the adverbs tum and tiimgni, q. v,
t u m i d g a a few; see tiimi.

V. PERSONAL PRONOUN.

We now pass over to another series of pronouns, called personal, and
representing other pronominal roots than the ones heretofore considered.
The three persons are, in the subjective case, all represented by monosyllabic
terms, and in the plural the terminal -t may represent the affix -ta, often
used for persons. No distributive form exists here; the case-endings are
the same as those in the adjective. The personal pronouns exist in a full,
in an abbreviated, and in an emphatic form, to be discussed separately!
The pronouns of the third person are used as demonstrative and as personal
pronouns. The synopsis of the personal pronouns in their subjective cases
is as follows :

First person, singular, nfl, ni /; plural, na't, nad we.
Second person, singular, i, ik thou; plural, nt, a ye.
Third person, singular, pi lie, she; plural, pat, sha they.

In regard to inflectional forms, the Modoc dialect sometimes differs
from the other, as will be seen by this table :

INFLECTION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

Singular.
. nu, nfl, nA-fl ; ni, ni I.

nush, nish, n's, ish me, to me.

niishtala, nusht/ila toward me.

niishamkshi at my liome or lodge.

nti»hx^'n\, toward me.

i, i, i-i, ik, ike thou.

mish, mish, m'sh thee, to thee.

mfshtala, mishtAla toward thee.

mfshapikshi at thy home,
35

546

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

3. pi, pi he, she, it (absent or invisible, unseen).

pish, pfish ; pash him, her, it; to him, to her, to it; for him, etc.
p'nd Mod., m'nd Kl., of him, of her, of it; his, hers, its.
p'ndtant, p'nata, p'nat Mod.; m'nAtant Kl., on, upon him, her, it
panf, nianf, ni'nf on him, on her, on it; by himself, etc.
p'ndlamkshi Mod.; m'n^lanikshi Kl., at his, her hottse.
(For hfl, h(ik, hft'nk, see Demonstrative Pronoun.)

Plural.

1. na't, nad, nat, na we.

naiash, na'lsh, na'sb, in Mod. also na'l, nal us, to U8.
ndlam of us; n^lamtant on, upon us.
ndlamkshi at our house, lodge, home.
ndlshtala toward us.

2. at, at, a ye.

mdlash, ma'lsh, in Mod. also ma'l you, to you.

uidlam of you.

mdlamksbi at your lodge, home.

ludlshtala toward you.
3a. pat, pdt, pat they.

p'ndlash, p'ndlsh, p'na'sh, pa'ntch, pash, posh. Mod. ; m'ndlash, m'ndlsh,
pa'ntch, pash, KL, them, to them.

p'ndlam Mod., m'ndlam Kl., of tliem, theirs; rarely abbreviated into
p'na, Kl. ni'na.

p'ndtant, Kl. m'natant, on, upon them.

p'ndlamkshi, Kl. m'nalaniksi, at their houses, homes.

p'ndlshtala, Kl. m'ndlshtala, toward them.
36. sha, sa they (animate, present or absent).

shash, sas them, to them.

sham, sam of them, about them, by them.

Sha forma compounds with many demonstrative pronouns, by which
they are turned into plurals, as luiiiktsha, ke'ksha etc.

In perusing this list of inflections, we find that a considerable number
of case-suffixes and case-postpositions met with in the substantive and adjec-

PERSONAL PKONOUN.

547

tivo aro not represented here, but that the existing ones coincide witli those
inflecting other nouns.

Tlie pronouns of tlie singular all end in -i, and ni has a parallel form
ml; in the plural all end in -at, with long a ; the plural objective case ends
in -lash, the possessive in -lam, though sha they, whicii is not represented
in the singular, and probably was once a reflective pronoun, forms an
exceplion.

A majority of the monosyllabic pronouns is unaccented, and therefore
used proclitically and enclitically. Subject-pronouns are often placed twice
in the same sentence, another term intervening.

Nil, ni of the first person is etymologically related to nat wc, and pt he,
she to pat tJuiy; the oblique cases in the second person make it probable that
tiie original forms of t and at were mt and mat, and that they took their
present forms to distinguish them from mi thine and the particle mat, ma.
Apparently, no difference exists between nil and ni I; but the objective
case nfish, nish abbreviates in isii jnly, not in ilsh, and the emphatic forms
ni'itoks, nutak, nfl tdla are much more frequent than nftoks, nftak, ni tAla.
In a few instances we find nfi used for the plural we, for we includes also
the first person of the singular :

Mpi ai nil witii'mak here we are two young black bears, 177 ; 2.
1dpi ai ni gl'wash here we are two squirrels, 177 ; 14.

I thou appears sometimes in a compound emphatic form : ik, ike. Mod,
fki, e'ki, the second part being the demonstrative pronoun ke, ke, ge, gi this
one, or the. demonstrative adverb ke, ki right here. This compound form is
chiefly used in imperative and interrogative sentences. I and ik, ike are
often used for the plural at ye, because when in a meeting one is addressed,
the others are addressed also. Examples :

1 lapuk both of you, 60, 6.

gdpke i tul' ish husho'kank ik a watchatka ! come and ride with me on

horseback!
na's pen Id'ktch' ik shAnkisbpakfsh ! bring me one inore watermelon!
wdk lish i'k l.')li a nen Tet6matchishash ? tvhy, then, do ye believe what

TetSmdtchish says? 64, 10. Cf ibid., 11. 15. 59, 7.

548

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

INFLECTION OP THE ABBREVIATED PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

The position of the full-tonod, vocalic personal pronouns in the sen-
tence is before as well as after the verb, but the position of the abbreviated
personal pronouns is usually, though not necessarily, after it. These become
enclitic or proclitic syllables, and are pronounced so rapidly that, after losing
the worJ.-accent, ma'.iy of them also lose the vowel through syncope or apo-
cope. Subject-pronouns suffer abbreviation as well as object-pronouns and
dissyllabic forms. A single instance of aphseresis is observed in ish for nish
me, to me. Pronouns of the second person stand before those of the first
when one of them or both are abbreviated.

a- before a pronoun is the declarative particle a. Initial i-, as in insh for
nish, results from vocalic metathesis. The abbreviated subject-pronoun -n
can disappear altogether.

Compare with all this our conjugational specimens given above (pages
240-243, 418), in which the abbreviated pronouns are seen united almost
into one word with the verb. No real incorporation of the pronouns into the
verb takes place, however, for the same pronouns can in every instance be
pronounced separately and with their full accentuation.

nfi, ni: n, -n, an.

nish: ish, ansh, insh, n's, ns, -sh.

nilsh: n'sh, ansh, n's, ns, -sh.

mish: m'sh, m's, msh, ms.

p'nd: p'na, m'na.

p'nAtant: p'natd, p'nat; m'ndtant: m'nat

nat: na, -nt, niit.

na'lash : nil'lsh, nilsh, natch, na'ts, nads, nas ; Mod. na'l, n&\.

radlash : ma'lsh ; Mod. ma'l, mal.

p'nAlash: p'na'sh, pa'ntch; m'ndlash: m'nalsh.

sha, sa: -sh, -s, -tch.

Instances of the above abbreviations appear in the following sen-
tences:

lAp sfl'ndin lapukAyans ilh{ I hck both ujifor two tveeks, 61, 19.

POSSESSIVE PRONOUN.

549

kd-i tchin wdk o'skank I do not think much about it, 65, 1.

shntikelui uApkan / will remove (him) /row office, 59, 18.

tchfn na'sh shdppash spulht I lock him up for one month (tchfn, for

tchui nl; 61, 10.
nt na'-ul;fan I command, T order.
hunkavitf ms ni shetchdktaniiapk / shall get angry with you (nis) m that

account, 58, 15.
tsflshnl' va'sli nt skuyfl'shkuapk / shall separate you forever (from her),

60, 20.
na-ulakuapkA m's ni I shall punish you, 59, 3. 4.
ta'nep 1' n's tdla skli'ktanuapk you must pay me five dollars, 60, 8.
1 insh f;uak ! you tvin me! sa shewana'sli they gave me.
dnibush tchfktcht ! go and fetch water for me! (for dmbu Ish.)
tdla ish viil^i ! lend me money!
I'sh shla't I shoot at me! 41, 5.

kd-i Mk wdtch spunf-uapka m'sh she need not give a horse to you, 60, 15.
ilU-uapka m's I will have you imprisoned, 59, 7.
shfuktak mish na Hn ! then we shall kill you! 41, 3.
shddshank d nflt shne'pka tve have afire near the lodge.
nat kd-i kdktant we did not sleep, 31,8.9.
na'sh na'ds B(5shtin tfl'la an American was tvith us, 19, 7.
na'sh se'gsa sa they commanded us, 20, 9.

t'shfshap nal shgiiyuen (Mod.) the father has sent us, 40, 15 ; cf 41, 3.
mal shutdnktgi in order to treat with you, 40, 15 ; cf. 41, 5.
gepgapSlfssa and gdpgaplish, for gepgapgli sha, they returned home.
tsiii gdna, til' pe'n mdkl6;jash then they proceeded, and encamped again

(for: rndklg^a sha), 19, 10.

VI. POSSESSIVE PRONOUN.

This pronoun has not assumed the form or suffix of an adjective, but
it is simply the possessive case of the personal pronoun corresponding, with
the exception of the two first persons of the singular. It inflects through u,
few cases only, the locative among them When used attributively, like'
our my, thy, its natural position in the sentence is before the noun qualified,

'^ Ml

i'di

lis

i
i

550

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

like that of the possessive case and the adjective. When used predicatively,
like our mine, thine, its position is more free, and it may occupy the place
in the sentence which emphasis may assign to it.

The list of these pronouns is as follows :
pfd-u, kd-u my, mine; loc. gtj-utant; instr. g(5-utantka.
mi, mi thif, thine; loc. mftant; instr. mitantka; me for mt, cf. 142, 7.
hunkdam, abbr. hiinkiam, his, her (hers), its, when present or visible.
m'na, ra'nA, Mod. p'na, his, her {hers), its, when absent ; loc. m'ndtant,

119, 11 ; pe'na, Mod., his, its own.
nalam our, ours.
malam your, yours.
hunkelamsham, abbr. hiinkiamsham, hunkimsham, their, theirs, when

present, visible,
m' nalam, Mod. p'nillam, their, theirs, when absent; m'na stands for

m'mllam in 29, 16. 101, 8.
sham, sam their, theirs, absent or present ; to be regarded here as an

abbreviation of hiinkelamsham : p'tfssap sam their father, 101, 11.

It sometimes stands for m'nalam, p'nAlam ; cf. 1U7, 13. 108, 4.

Some instances are found in the Texts, where the possessive pronoun,
thoUjjh used attributively, occupies the place nfhr its noun, instead of pre-
ceding it : i'xaks mi thy gain, 59, 22 ; shoshatuish m'na his marriage fee, 58,
16. Cf. also 54, 4. 59, 12. 94, b. 10. 109, 3.

VII. REFLECTIVE PRONOUN.

When the act of the transitive verb has for its object the subject of the
verb, this is expressed by a reflective verb. The object of the reflective
verb is either a pronoun standing separately for itself, called reflective pro-
noun, or it is expressed synthetically in the verb itself by means of a prefix
or suffix. This synthetic mode of forming reflective verbs has been discussed
previously (cf Prefixes h-sh-, sh-); but in Klamath another mode is in use,
which applies only when the pronominal object is the indirect object of any
active verb. Gfank, gink takes the locative case-suffix -i, which also occurs
in tlie pronouns hunf, hukf, pani, and forms the following series of pronouns,

REFLECTIVE PRONOUN.

551

when appended to the emphatic pronoun in -tak in tho sense oi for oneself,
in the interest of me, him, etc. Cf. Emphatic Pronoun, pages 552, 553.

First person, singular,
Second person, singular.
Third person, singular.
First person, plural,
Second person, plural.
Third person, plural,

nutagianki, niitagink (for ni'itak glAnki)
(tiigianki, ftukink, itagfnggi
pftagiank, pUagingg
natakiank, nataginggi
dtakiank, utakinggat
pA;takink ; liAkshagianggi

This ending is also found appended to the oblique cases of the same
pronouns; its origin is explained under Suffix -gien, q. v.

In the third persons of the singular and plural, the change of k and k
in hiinkelam his, )ier, hunkish him, her, hunkiash them, renders these pro-
nouns reflective The diff^erent cases of pi, pat, slia they can serve as
reflective pronouns without undergoing any change or suffixation; this is the
case with pish, pash, piish, po'sh, p'na, p'nalam; m'na, m'nalani; shash, sham.
Thus we have: Afshish turaCna shtiVtzishalsht pish h\i\uka Aishish heard
that his wives had wept for him in mourning. Cf also, in Modoc war, pi 38,
10; pil'sh 36, 16. 16; pish 36, 16; pWihlm 38, 17, etc.; in the northern dia-
lect, pi'sh 71, 2. The change from k to k, as observed in verbs, h.is been
refeiTed to previously (pages 292. 424), but even in substantives it is some-
times observed. When these natives speak of other Indians than themselves,
they pronounce: mdklaks Indian; but when of themselves, niaklaks.

The most frequent way of expressing the reflective pronoun is that of
appending -tak, -tok to the personal pronoun :

kitita pitdk nkdsh her (the female wolf's) helly hurst, 105, 16.
shlabi')pk hil'nitak he himself perceived; lit. "he observed in his own

mind", 108, 5.
dnku pitdk (for plshttik) vulddshan gi he is splitting wood for himself
tchdshSsh nanuk watch tchlri'l^a, pitakmani the skunk drowned all the

horses, itself also, 127, 12.
mulfnank itagianggi ! cut some hay for yourself I
n&tak shidlagien, shiulagin or shiiila gianggin ive collect for ourselves.
ndtak hi'shlan we shot people of our own party, 24, 4.

552

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

VIIL BEGIPROCAL PRONOUN.

This class of pronouns is not represented by special forms, and the
relation of reciprocity can be expresHed only by uioans of the medial pre-
fix sh- or its compound, h-sh-, although sh ish, sham is sometimes used as a
reciprocal pronoun; cf 58, 10. 13. fil, 14, and Note. There exists an adverb,
or adverbial phrase, referring to reciprocity : shipapfiliinkshtant af/ainst each
other, amoHtf each other. Personal and emphatic pronouns are often added
to reciprocal verbs to complete the setise ' _, hiiowing in which of the three
persons the object stands, as we saw it done also in the case of the reflect-
ive pronouns.

shishuka posh ka-j'i they fitfht hard amonrf themselveSf Mod.
pi'itak huhashtdpkuak stabbing each other thctmelves, 114, 3.
pa't hiishtaltal they disputed amonr/ themselves, 1 04, 3.
go'k shash shfushuak pepewa tlwse girls wasluid each other.

IX. EMPHATIC PRONOUN.

When the run of the sentence causes the speaker to lay emphasis upon
pronouns, this is usually done by subjoining t a k, tok to it ; or when a
close connection exists with preceding words or statements, t a k s, taksh,
or toks. This chiefly applies to pronouns contained in adversative sen-
tences: hiitak, hutoks hut he; he however, and other terms expressing con-
trast. Cf. kdnktak, tanktak.

Placed after the possessive pronoun, tak, tok means omc's own : gi^-utak
tchuyt^sh hun gt this is my own hat; p'natak kiiilatat tchfa to live in one's oun
country, 39, 7 ; pftak (for p(shtak) shf-ita to daub one's own body over. For
the third person Modocs possess a special form of p'nA : h(i pe'na she'slmsh
shiimaluash that lie had written his own name, 34, 6 ; cf. pdniak, in Dictionary.
Another Modoc form is pitakminf, of a reflective signification.

Personal pronouns having this particle suffixed may be rendered in
English in different ways, according to the sense. Thus ni'itak, niVtoks is
myself, none but me; I, however, I at least, etc. Ex.: k&-\ hiink, nutoks wAsh
shlfn not he, but I, shot tlie prairie-wolf. In most instances, however, nutoks
stands for myself, ftak, f-itok for thyself, and so the others: pftak, natak

THE POSTPOSITION,

553

(for niU tak), u'tak (for a't tiik), pjUak (for put tak). This particle is also
appondod cMnpliatically to some othor proiioium, as kanltak f kruiitoks f who
thenf kw'tok, kd lisli tok shu certainly, 189 ; 7. An uiuphatic form is also
{kg, t^ki for thou; lit. "thou hero."

Another series of einphiitic pronouns is formed by the sufKxed particle
til 1 a, abbr. tal, tal, which expresses atnazoinent, surprise, and is not always
translatable in Knglish. Thus we find: tuatalal what then? what after all f
158; 56. 173; 3; which kind thenf 112, 2. 5. 12; ka tal (for kanf tala) t who
thenf HO; 7. Appended to an adverb, it occurs in 110, 10; luV-Atak tala!
none hut he, or it was himself f 173; 3. When tala follows personal and
possessive pronouns, it means alone: ml tala / alone; gv-\i tala p'tl'shap .yo«r
father alone; mftala stefnash onli/ ifour heart. This definition "alone" is only
a specific application of the more general function of this particle : but, onli/,
solely.

THE POSTPOSITION.

The postpositions corre.spond, in regard to their signification, to the
prepositions of Germanic languages, the separable as well as the insepa-
rable, but differ from these as to their position in the sentence. They are
usually placed after, and not before, the noun they govern ; hence their
name. Their natural position is after their complement, although it is
neither incorrect nor unfrequent to place them before it, here as well as in
other languages of America. The cause of this is that many of them are in
reality verbs, or derived from verbs, the usual position of which is at the end
of the sentence, unless for reasons of rhetoric another position be assigned to
them. Through the law of analogy, the other postpositions which are not of
verbal descent have assumed the same subsequent position, a circumstance
justifying tlte appellation oi postposition given to these parts of Indian speech
in preference to that of preposition.

Although the derivation of some postpositions is uncertain, many are
undoubtedly derived from pronominal roots and formed through nominal
case-endings. Their number is considerable, and this has prompted me to
place the chapter on "Postpositions" just after that on "Pronouns." It is
cl "efly this class of postpositions which is as frequently found standing
before its complement as after it, especially when their length does not

iWi

f ft*

■ \

I 1

554

U11A.MMAU OF THB KLAMATU LANUUAUB.

exceed tho moasuro of two gyllables. Many of the vorbs which figure as
postpositions are built up of pronominal roots, na ginhii'na, i-ukakiainna.

Tlioso of our prepositions which are of an abstract nature, as about, in
I)eha(fof,/or, ronternini/, etc., are expressed in Klamath by inflectional suf-
fixes appended to the verb or noun, and all tho postpositions we meet are
of a concrete, locative signification. Kven the few temporal postpositions
are locative at the same time. In their purely locative aspect, postposi-
tions bear the strongest analogy with the case-postpositions -i, -kshi,
-ksaksi, -tala, -tana; -tana, abbr. -tan, -ta, in their most common affix; -ksh-
18 another, and in fact the use of postpositions is nothing else but a further
extension of the nominal inflection. In gunfgshtant beyond, e. g., the pro-
noun gunf is inflected just like a noun by the postpositions -kshi, -tana,
-tat or -ti. Muatfta southward of is composed of muat south, -ti suffix of
partitive case, -tala, -ta toward, and these inflectional terms of the secondary
or ternary stage mostly occur in an apocopated form.

The nominal complements connected with the postpositions derived
from verba stand in the same case which they would occupy if these post-
positions wore verbs governing nouns — either in the objective case, which
in inanimate nouns cannot bo distinguished from the subjective, or in the
locative case (-tat, -at) if rest, and not motion, has to be exprossod. Modocs
frequently use the terminal -an of the present participle where Klamath Lake
has -a. The majority of the postpositions assumes distributive reduplication.

Adverb postpositions are those postpositions which are sometimes used
adverbially without a complement, as ginhicna, kufta, pt'lui, etc.

In the following list of postpositions I have marked those terms which
appear as verbs and postpositions at tho same time. For a better study of
each of the postpositions, readers will do well to consult the Dictionary.

LIST OP THE PRINCIPAL P0STP08ITI0N8.

ginAgshtant, gins'ikshta and ginatant, gins'ita this side of, on this side, in
front of: ginatan ko'sh in front of the inne tree; correlative to gunf-
gshtant.

ginhidna, d. gigganhi(?na inside of, within; said of a plurality of subjects;
also verb and adverb.

LIST OF POSTPOSITIONS.

555

grnksikiAmnotMll around, wlion tho Hurnmnding ho«ly ih linllow, splior-

ical ; (iIho verb
giiliauk, Mod. gii'ilrtii, past, after; a temporal poBtposition, derived from

giula to hi' om-y past. i'f. the naiiius of tlio wook-dayH.
gunfgHlitant, guiifkHhta ; aim) guiiitaiia, |,niiiitan, kunftan, gunl'ta on the

other side of, opposite to; gunl'ta mlsh beyond you, your hous., 183;

17 ; coiTolatlve to giiiAgHhtaiit.
hintfla, d. hihantna, underneath, under, below ; said of one Hubject that

has fallen under Honiething; also verb
inotfla underneath, under; lit. "placed underneath"; also verb,
i-ukakiamna around, in the neighborhood of,
i-ukuk and i-ukukag inside of, within; Haid of lodges, etc.
i-utdmsxa and met'tAms^a among, amid, between; the latter ■ forring to

something excavated ; also used as verbs,
(wahak, (wa-ak in the midst of water. Mod.
iwutit farther off than, beyond.
yamat(tana northward of.
yuhit'na inside of, within; also verb.

yulalfna alonf/side of, along the brink of, as of rivers ; also verb,
yutlla, i-ut(lan under, underneath; lit. "placed underneath"; used when

speaking of long objects ; also verb,
kanftant, kanfta, kdntan outside of.
ki'ii and kuitit on this side of, as of a river, hill, ridge,
ki'iitana, kuita in the rear of, back of.
liipia and lupftana, lupftan (1) in front of, before, this side of; (2) earlier,

sooner than.
Mpian on the east side of, eastward of.

lutfla inside of, within, speaking of round objects ; also verb,
muatftala, niuat(t.a southward, to the south of.
pdni, panf, d. papani, as far a.s, reaching up to.
pdt to or of the size of: t;(6po piit as thick as the thumb,

pdlui down below; farther off than.

pipClangshta and pip6lantana on both or two sides of, from opposite sides.

p'laftana, p'lafta above, higher than.

^ . «■ vT.

1
I

556 GRAMMAB OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

p'le'ntant, pla'ntan on the upper side or top o/some object.

tAlaak directly toward; t/ilaak nata toward us, 29, 15 ; also adverb and

adjective
tapf, tapiak later than, post''rior to.
tapft^na, tapfta. topfta after, hehind, in the rear of.
tzalani, Kl. tiitxPlam in the midst of; betwe'-n, among, when all are on the

same level,
t^alamtana through fhe midst of; to the west of. The latter may be ex-
pressed also by t^almakatant and tpjalanitftala.
til'gshtanta, tugshtji on the opposite side of, across, beyond; chiefly refers

to rivers, waters,
tula, tula, t(')la tvith. in company of, along with ; tula'k (emphatic) ; ka-i

tula without; tul' ish with rue. The verb is tiilha or tiila to form a

pc-rtg or swarm.
tuna, tu-una, d. ti'itana, around; the d. form also means beyond, on the

other side of, and is chiefly used of mountains.
tunkJ'ma ail around, when following the line of the horizon; also

verb,
tche'k, tsfk until, till; pftchash tchb'k until the fire umii out.
tchutila, tsutda under, hdow; refers to one subjeit sitting or lying below,

utfla referring to one long subject; both are used as verbs abo.
welitaua, weUtan at a distance from, away from.
wigAtana, wikata close to, aside of; wiggata kiim6tat near the cave.

THE CONJUNCTION.

Conjunctions, or conjunctive particles, are links necessary to bring
about certain sequential or logical relations in human speech by establish-
ing a connection between single terms, phrases, or whole sentences. The
true fuiiction of these particles can in every language be understood only
after a thorough study of its syntax. They are the most fanciful and arbi-
trary, often in translatable, parts of human speech, and the literary culture
of a to-^gue largely depends on tliei; development and judicious use. The
claodic languages of antiquity and the modern languages of Europe would

THE CONJUNCTION.

557,

never have attained their ascendency in the oratorical, historical, and di-
dactic prose style without their abundf nt and most expressive assortment
of conjunctions.

We distinguish two principal relations in connecting together words or
sentences— the co-ordinative and the adversative. Languages of primitive
culture possess as many of the latter as of the former, because they feel the
same neea for them. Klamath can enumerate but very few conjunctions con-
necting co-ordinate parts of speech, either nouns or verb^, to each other:
dmka, pen, tchi'sh, tchkash; but the number of conjunctions co-ordinating
co-ordinate and adversative sentences is much larger. Being a synthetic lan-
guage, Klamath expresses many causal, temporal, and modal relations by
participles and verbals which we would express analytically by distinct
sentences introduced by a conjunction. This is not a deficiency in the
language, and moreover it is largely counterbalanced by a wealth of con-
junctions introducing .subordinate clauses to the principal sentence.

All modes are expressed by conjunctions, as ak, am, ya, and even the
-at, -t of the conditional mode is the conjunction at, at tlie time heing, agglu-
tinated to the verbal stem. Our and has no exact equivalent, but is ren-
dered by aho or again; our then (temporal) by afterward, subsequently, the
particle tchui corresponding accurately to the French puis, from Latin postca.
No Klamath term corresponds exactly to our that, though, although, but the
language has two distinct "oral particles" to render our as reported, as I
h'or or heard, as they say or allege.

All true conjunctions are formed from pronominal roots, and though
they Jo not reduplicate dis*^ributively, the majority of them appears under
two forms — the simple conjunction and the conjunction with suffix -sh (-s,
-ds, -dsh, -tch, -ts). This suffixed sound is nothing else but a remnant of
tne conjunction tchi'sh, tsfs also, too. So we have Lfluts for Li'lu tchfsh,
Lilv also; nuds or nil tchish I also; nats for nat tchfsh toe also 29, 18; hii i
k(-uapkats also if you should tell lies; tche'ks for tclie'k tchish and then. In
moat instances the additional idea of ako, too, and disappears, and what
remains of it is that this enlarged particle poi.its tr> a closer connection with
the foregoing than does the conjunction without the suffix. This suffix also
appears v» ith other particles.

it -«

\r;

558

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

Many of the conjunctions are unaccented, and these may be used pro-
clitically as well as enclitically. Some conjunctions also have adverbial
functions.

Details of the functional peculiarities of the conjunctions are reserved
for the Syntax. The alphabetic list now following only quotes the principal
conjunctions and their suffixed forms, without mentioning all of the com-
pound ones, as dtfinen just now, as alleged, and readers are referred to the
examples given in the Dictionary.

LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL CONJUNCTIONS.

a, the declarative particle.

a, -a; see ha.

a, abbr from at, q. v.

ak, dk a, aka, ka, kam, ak ya, suppositive and potential, optative par-
ticles: "perhaps, possibly, likely."

ak appended to verbals in -slit and other verbal forms; e. g., pa'ksht
ak as soon as or after it is dried.

am; see kam, iitch.

Ampka, dmka (1) or; the Latin vel; (2) lest, unless, or else.

at, abbr a, a, at the time; now, just now, then, at that time. Coalesces
with some words and grammatic forms, as in bfilat for pila at,
ill61at for ilWla at, gu'tzitkt for giitxitko at, 112, 9 Composes.-
at a, atgnen, Atch, Atui.

dtui, Kl. at yu, atiu, adverb, interjection, and conjunction, just now,
just then. Cf. gt^tui as to the ending.

gfntak, generally postpositive, thereujwn, hereafter; though, in sjute of.

ha, ha, a, -A, interrogative particle, mostly postpositive ; la'k, Mod. for
le hk ak ? is it perhaps so f

hai, a-i, a-f; in Mod. also kaf, zhi, with suffix: haftch apparently, evi-
denth', as you see, as I sec or hear, of course. Cf. Dictionary.

hii, hii', he if, when, supposing that; enlarged : hii'tch, hii'ts. Its correla-

tive is tchii', tclii^ : hii tcha, if.

. then.

Inimasht, d. humdmasht, adverb and conjunction, so, thus; hiimasht
gfug Iience, on that account, therefore; hiimasht shahunk gfug for
the same reason, and other combinations. Cf Dictionary

LIST OF CONJUNCTIONS.

559

hiinkanti, hunkantchii', hiintala therefore, for tliat reason.

ya, yd, f-a indeed, surely, really.

kam (from ak, am) adverb and conjunction, expressive of desire, hope,

probability ; cf. our adverb fain.
kdyutch, kAyudsli, Mod. kA-iu, adverb and conjunction: before, prior to.
kk-i not, the usual negative particle, is sometimes used as a conjunction,

and may even stand at the end of a sentence,
k'ldwiank, partic. of k'lewi, is used in the sense of subsequently
lish is used as a particle of asseveration and interrogation, answering

to our "is it not sol" It is derived from le, le, the putative adverb

not, being its enlarged form,
lupiak before, prior to, earlier than.
mat, apoc. ma, it is said, as they say or alleye, as reported; refers to facts

or deeds spoken of Tua ma! tchat is itf Mat mostly stands

after the first word of the sentence,
nd-asht, na'sht, nash, nas, Mod. nd-asht, thus, so, as follows; when some-
body's words are mentioned verbally; often used as adverb,
nen, abbr. ne, ne, -n, oral particle : as you say, as they say, report, allege,

as I hear; used when people make mention of something said,

spoken, or heard. Tua nen? what did you sayf ndnt thus notv;

it is right so. Mod.
pa, pA, suffixed : pash, intranslatable particle, referring to the subject of

the sentence. Pa ak, abbr. pA, / do not know.
pan, pen, pe'n again, hereupon, subsequently ; at piin after this, now, and;

ka-i pen no longer, no more; tchui pen Jiereupon; and in numerals.

Pan is also adverb.
8huhank=sh{tko at the time when; c£ 109, 12.
ti»dsh, ta'dsh, tads, the enlarged form of the adverb tat, is marking an

unexpected contrast : but, however, though Not used at the head

of a sentence,
tak, tAk, tok, tdk, suffixed taks, toksh, tdTcsh, a frequent emphatic,

adversative, and disjunctive particle, appended to all parts of

speech; answers best to however, but, though, and in Modoc forms

a future tense Cf Emphatic Pronouns.

560

GRAMMAB OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

tam, tAm, interrogative particle, answering to Latin num, an and to the
French est-ce que f

tatni'i, suffixed tamudsh, (1) interrogative particle; (2) disjunctive con-
junction, whether, whether or not.

tdnkt (ifler this, afterward.

tche'k, apoc. tchd, tcha ; enlarged forms tchiitch, tcheks, tchkdsh then,
qfler, at last, since then. Tchii serves as a correlative particle to
ha if, q. v. Cf li'ntchek, under An.

tchf, tsi so, thus, in this manner; sometimes used as conjunction, like
gii-asht, hi'nnasht, na-asht. A compound is tchf hilnk, tchfyunk.

tchish, apoc. -tch, -ts, -sh, postpositive conjunction and the suffixed
form of tchf, also, too, and.

tchkash, suffixed form of tche'k and syncopated from tch^kash, tche'k a
tchtsh, also, finally, too, besides. Postpositive like tche'ksh, tche'ks,
which is the Modoc form.

tchui, tsiii after that, then, subsequently. Very frequent in historic and
other narratives, and forming many compounds: tchiiyuk, tchii-
yunk, tchui pan, at tchui.

Atch, Ms, suffixed form of u, hil, ifov if not, tchether. Appears in com-
pounds only, as kayutch, tamildsli, or when found standing by
itself it is interjectional.

An, temporal particle, usually added in Modoc to hii if, lish, and other
conjunctions for enhancive purposes, and not easily translatable.
Its compound untchek, qfler a while, sometimes figures as a con-
junction.

wak, wak, ilk how, how then, why, is also used as interrogative particle
and conjunction. Wakai? why not f

THE ADVERB.

This part of speech stands in the same relation to the verb as the adjec-
tive or "adnominal" stands to the noun ; it qualifies and specializes the act
expressed by the verb in regard to various categories, as degree, quantity,
space, time, or quality (modality). Its natural position in the sentence is
l)efore the verb, just as that of the adjective, when used attributively, is
before the noun.

.TOE ADVERB.

561

Adverbs show no inflection, if we except tlie distributive form, which
occurs in some of their number. The gradation of adverbs is more imper-
fect than that of adjectives.

As to derivation, one portion of adverbs is formed of pronominal roots,
whicli affix different formative suffixes to tliemselves, cases of the nominal
inflection used in a temporal sense, adje<!tival suffixes like -ni, etc., or appear
in the apocopated form of certain adjectives- ati high, far, wt'nni stranr/e and
stranr/dij; wfka low. Another portion of adverbs is deri ved from predicative
radices. Many of these are forming adjectives also ; the adverb tlien repre-
B-.M.ts the radix without the adjectival ending. Others are verbs, with the
suffix a, appearing as adverbs.

Some adverbs are at the same time postpositions and conjunctions, and
in a few cases it is even difficult to decide to which one of tliese three forms
of speech a certain particle belongs.

A (jradation is effected for the comparative and minuitive by syntactic
means, viz., by placing two sentences in opposition to eacli otiier, just as it
is done with the adjective. Disjunctive conjunctions are not always used
for this purpose, and such terms as "more" or "less" do not exist. Another
mode to effect gradation is to affix -ak to the adverb, a particle which serves
for many other uses beside :

M6atuash Mpiak Modokfshash kddshika tJie Pit River Indians became
exhausted sooner than the Modocs.

ra'na u'nakag mil'ak t'shl'sht /or the time when his little son loould grow
taller, 109, 13.

The object compared stands in the objective case in the first example,
and in the gradation of the adjective we obse-ve the same thing.

Enhancive particles, like ka-a very, mil and tum much, largely, joined
to an adverb will place it into what we call superlative.

The distributive form, which some of the adverbs possess, and wbidi is
rather infrequent with some others, is formed in the sann manner as in the
verb and noun, as will appear from tlie following instances:

Modokni lakf Iftchlitch shullual tlie Modoc chiej fought bravely

Mddokni Hlatchiitoii shc'llual ndnuk of tJie Modocs every man /ought

bravely
36

562 GRAMMAU OF TUE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

tAla h^mkank' i! tell the truth!

tatala hemkank' i! tell the truth in every instance!

ka-i ptjlak hem^x' i! <io not speak fast! (when you meet me once).

kA-i pdp'lak heniez' i! do not speak fast! (every time you meet me, or

each time you converse),
ma'ntchak gitk after a while.
mamantchak gitk aflcr a while (severally speaking).

LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL ADVERBS.

The following list of the more frequently occurring adverbs will ex-
hibit to the best advantage the modes of adverbial derivation. Some of
them are used in very different acceptations. The numerals have branched
out into two adverbial series, one in -ash, the other in -ni: ndanash to or at
a third place, and ndani three times; cf pages 530 to 532.

Temporal adverbs have all evolved from locative adverbs, and hence
often retain both significations; all the so-called "seasons" of the Indian year
ending in -e'mi, -ii'mi, as mehiashii'mi in the trout season, may be joined to
the list below. Many of the adverbs of modality arc formed by iterative
reduplication, of which only a few examples are given below; other adverbs
possess a correlative belonging to the same subdivision. Cf page 262, and
suffix -li, pages 352, 515-517.

Adverbs of quantity and degree.

ga'tak, kdtak, Mod. kanktak so much, enough.

ka, d. kAk, so, thus; derived from the relative pronominal radix, ana

forming gA-asht, ka-a, kanktak, ka tainani, etc
ka-A, ka-a, ka, ga much, largely, very.
k(5tcha, ga'dsa, kc^dsa a little, a trifle, not much; ketsagak very little

only.
nifl, d. m<i'm, much, largely; the adverb of miini great.
tii'm much, a great deal; the adverb of ti'imi, many.
tchiUchui a great deal; tiim tchatchui too muck
wiga, vvika not much, a little.

LIST OF ADVERBS.

563

Adverbs of space.

This class of adverbs is very numerous and multiform, almost all the
pronominal radices having contributed to the list. Some of those which
frequently occur are as follows:

atf, d. &-a.ti, far, far off, afar, distantly; Ugh up.

gen, gin here, rigid hire; genu, giua tliere now, right here.

gotui at a short distance out.

gi'nt, gc^nt, genta thereabout, around there, over there.

gfta near by, close to this place.

gftak right there, close by.

gitala, gdtal in that direction, furtlier off Its correlative is tushtala.

gf tata just here, at this very spot.

gunfgshtant (also postp.) on the opposite side.

h&, A on tlie person, on oneself in one's hand, by hand, at hand; forms

compounds, as gena, tulA etc.
hiitak, hiitok here, on this spot, over yonder.
hatakt, hatokt over there (when out of sight),
lu'itaktana by that spot, through that locality.
hataktok right there, at the same spot..
hatkak, liAtkok on this very spot or place.
hi, i on the ground, toward liome, at home, at one's camp, close by.
hiti'i, abbr. hi'd right here, close by.
hftkshi at this place; from this point.
hu, hil(Mod.hil, il) there, here; referring to places visible and distant or

above ground, but chiefly appearing as an affix,
hi'iya near by, in close vicinity.

i'wa outside of camp, in the mountains or hills; i wak, fwag a short dis-
tance from home or camp.
yamatala northward.

yana, )/dna down hill, downward, down stairs.
yi'inta (for yt'intala) downward.
yA-uka with'm that place, house, lodge (Mod.),
kanf outside, outdoors, without

,1!

!|.

564 OBAMMAU OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

ke, ki, kie right Jiere, here; more in use among Modocs.

kone, kunf, gunf over yonder.

kiii awai/ //-o/b, at a distance ; kiiita in the rear.

kuinag atvai/from town, village, or houses.

lupf, d. lulpf, firstly (of local precedence).

liipitala eastward.

nuiatala southward.

miina down below, on the bottom; mi'ma tfl, or tA muna, deep down.

nAnukash everywhere.

na'shash to anotlier place ; cf. Numerals.

sh^tatzak half-way up.

-tak, -tokj particle, suffixed to many local adverbs for emphasis.

tAlaak in a straight direction.

tapf, d. tAtpi, lastly, coming last (in space).

tAta, abbr. tAt, tat, where, at which place; also interrogative: where?
wlierctof tAta-i? tvlieref ka-i fcit nowhere.

ta'tak right there; correlative to gftak, g(5tak.

ta'taktak right at tlie spot where.

txalampani half ways; is adjective as well as adverb.

t^Alamtala westward; tAlaat t;ualamtftal due west.

tfl, ti'i, d. tiita, tut, far off, up tJiere; refers to a great distance, to
objects witl'.in or out of sight on the ground or high above
ground.

tuAnkshi at which spot, where; sotnewliere; also interrogative.

tiiksh from that locality.

tiila, tula'k togetlier; is used adverbially and as a conjunction.

tiish, d. tdtash, somewhere in the distance, far out; inteiTog. at which
(distant) place? enlarged from tii.

tiishak at sotne other place.

tiishtala toward or at that (distant) place, spot. Cf. gitAla.
wfga, wikA, d. wf-uka, near the ground, close to, near by, nigh; not exten-
sively,
vfigii-ak not far from.
wigAtak at the same place ; together, unitedly.

TEMPOUAL ADVERBS.

565

Temporal adverbs.

at, a, a (also conj.) at the time,- now, tlien; at a just now; dtiitu already.

gtitak, kti'tak, Mod. kdnktak, finally, at last.

hiiya, liya/or a while, duriny a short time.

hunk, hflnk, fink, a particle expressing distance, and when temporal

the past tense, though this is not unexceptional. The Modocs

often replace it by hO ; no word of English corresponds exactly

to it. Cf. Verbal Inflection, pages 402-404.
ye, yi now, presently; firstly; Mod.
yuneks^e'ni between sunset and dusk.
kd-ag, ga-ag, gahak long ago, many years ago.
kdyutch, Mod. kdyu, ka-iu (also conj.), not yet, not now; never, at no

time, not at all; kayak not yet; never.
kisho'mi, kfsstim, d. kikshe'mi, at sundown.
liildani in the cold season, in winter time.
lit;ci, lit;ue in the evening.
lupf, d. liilpi, at first, firstly.
lupftaua, d. lulpftana, /or the first time.
ma'ntch, d ma'mantch, during a long time; refers to past and future.

Dim. ina'ntchak, d. mania'ntchak,/or a short while, Kl.; quite a while

ago. Mod.
mbushant, d. mbumbiishant, on the next morning; next day, to-morrow, Kl.
mfinfk, d. ninfmnak, for a short time.

ndyantka shappgsh next month; nd-iintka shko'shtka next spring.
nfa, d. nfnia, lately, recently; a short or long time ago; nfa sunde last week.
nfnk next day, Mod.

nfshta all night through; at night-time; nfshtak in the same night.
pii'dshit, pddshit or pddshit wafta to-day; at the time.
pdta in the warm season, in summer time.

pen, pt^n, pan, pen a (also conj.) agTin, once more, a second time, repeatedly.
pshd, d. pshdpsha, in tJte day-time.
pshfkst, d. psf psaksht, «< noon.
pshln at night; pshluak during the same night; pshfu=tdt;t6lam at midnight;

ndnuk pshin every night.

566 GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUA(JE.

tdnk, d. tAtank, at that time, then; long ago; tdnk na'sli shAppCsh last
month; ti'inkak a short while ago; ti'mkt at that time; tAukt at on a
sudden, at once; tAnktak i;re% soon, shortlg afterward ; formerly.

tap(, d. tatpi (also conj.),/or the last time; at last; suhseqmntbj, afterward;
tapf tita, tapf tftna a short time afterward; tiiu'i tapi/or the last time.

tatd, d. tat/ital (1) interrogative, whcnf at which time or period? tat/i
mantch? how long ago? (2) tchen, that time when; kA-i tatd never;
tAtatak at the time when, just when.

tfna, d. tftna and tftatna, once, one time, a single time; at a time; tftim
sometime; tftatna a few times, not often; tfnatoks some other time;
tina'k at once; simttltaneouslg.

tu&na, tui'm, Mod., always, at all times.

t^'m frequently ; for a long time; a long while.

tiim^ni often, frequently; the adverb of tunii many.

tush gtsh that time, then; when? what time?

tchA, tsi'i instantly, just now; tcha-u at the present moment.

tch^, d. tchetche, then, at that time; points to the future; tchd-etak at
length, finally; in time.

tchek, abbr. tche, finally, at last, in future; is adverb, postposition, and
conjunction; tchoksli, tchi'g, same meaning; tclie'kshi after a while.

tchushak, tsiissak always, constantly, ever ; tchushniak forever, unceas-
ingly.

fin, fi'n then, sometime; I'ma, unA in the past, some time ago; yesterday;
unA pshfn last night; una gfn long ago; unak early in the morning;
I'mtchek, undse'k, abbr. undsli', some time from now,; linash to-
morrow (Mod.).

waftash, waftan, wafta all day long, the whole day; waitohmk, Mod.
wait(Slan, yesterday; lit. "having passed one day"; hunkantka
waftashtka on the same day.

we, u-e, wii' for some time, for a while; still, even now.

wigApani for a short while.

Adverbs of quality or modality.
ak, hak, or when suffixed -ak, -ag, only, just only, merely, solely.

Wbauii

■mB

ADVERBS OP QUALITY.

567

gd-asht, kd-nsht, kd-aHli thits, so, in this manner.

hunmHht, d. Ininii'imasht, thus, so, in this wai/; IiiimnHht glMk, In'imaslit
gisht in that manner; adiny this ways IniinaalitHk vqmUy, in the
same manner.

hiimtsantka in the same way, eqiiaUy; cf. Dictionary, page r)54,

hun.'ishak yroundlessly, in vain; falsely ; yratiiitously; accidentally, fortu-
itously; unawares; nil'nsak (for iidyentch ak) has the same
meaning.

i, i i, yes, yea, certainly.

ki'itak, Mod. katchan, truly, surely, certainly.

kd-una and kd-uni, d. kekuni slowly, gently, loosely.

ki, ke, Mod. kie, .to, thus; wlien words are quoted Aerhatini.

kii-i not; no.

ku-i, kci-i badly, wickedly, mischievously.

-Ill, enhancive particle, suffixed : very, greatly.

lO, le not, in a putative sense.

Iftchlitch strongly, forcibly, powerfully ; adverb of Htchlftchli.

nii-asht, na'sht, nas thus, so; refcs only to sounds and spoken words.

nadsha'shak at once, in one batch; also locative and temporal adverb.

nkfllank, kfllan, iikfla, ki'l, d. nkfnkal, kfkal, rashly, quickly, strongly;
forcibly; aloud.

pdlak, Mod. ptHak, d. pdp'lak, pdp'lak, fast, quickly, hurriedly; pdlakak,

Mod- pdlakag, fast.
pAtpat, d. papa'tpat, smoothly, Mod.; adverb of patpdtli.
pfla, pfl, d. pfpil, only, merely, solely; pila'k solely
ska, d- aki'iska, strongly, coldly; also verb. Cf. the adjective shkafni.
tala, d. tatiila, correctly; none but, only; talaak rightly, truly.
tfdsh, d tftadsh, well, nicely, adequately; tfdsh ^i to be friendly; adverb

of tfdshi.
tchf so, thus, in this way; tchfk (from tch( gi), same signification,
wdk? Mod. wak, ilk, A'k? tvhyf wherefore? somehow; wdk gi? howf

wakafi tehy? wak a giiiga! of course, certainly! wdkaktoksh in the

same manner as; wdk gisht? in which manner? dk wep? how thenf .

Mod.

5G8

(IKAMMAK OF THR KLAMATH LANtJUAllM.

THE INTERJECTION.

TluH p.laH8 of words is compoHed of exclaniatioiiH roHulting from wilfol
or unwilful outburHtH of fooliiij^, niul iiiiiy norve to oxprosH HHHcnt, wclcotiiu,
wondermont, Hurpriwo and joy, or terror, troublo, puiii, diHtroHH and diHap-
proval. Tho two kiiidrt of InturjoctioiiH can bo easily diHtinguiHliud from
eacli other: One of thvm consiHts of organie words of the hingiiage, either of
single terms, iriflocted or not, or of phrases and oven sentences; the other
is formed by inartlcidate, natural sounds, reprosonting tho crude utterances
of certain pliysical or mental feelings. Kxcdamations of this sort do not
form organic parts of the language and are not inflected, lience are no
words in the strict sense of tho term.

A. — INTERJECTIONAL WORDS AND PIIRA8K8.

As to their origin, the interjections of this class are of tlie most various
description. Adverbs nud verbs are mainly used for the i)urpose, often
with an altered signification.

Atui! vow! at once! found in Modoc imperative sentences.

gt-tak! gii'tak ! Mod. kanktak ! shp! quit! that s enough! that will do!

gfn ! pi. gfnkat! do it! go on! hum/ up!

hiigg'i ! hi'ika! pi. haggat ! Mod. haggai el la! look here! behold! hnkd

yopa'k! let me eat first ! Mod.
batata! implies menace, threats, like tho Vergilian quos ego!
hi! h(-i ! hf-itok! down on the ground! sit down!
huya! hu-(ya! don't go! stay where gou are !
liiimasht! thaVs right!
bunamasht! is that sof indeed? Mod.

kiilTish ! abbr. ka'sh ! exclamation heard from old Modoc men.
kiiflash stani ! the most opprobrious epithet in the norther. Hahn'.t.
kapki'iblantaks ! Mod. kapkapagink i! pi. kakapkagfnk ail iiush tip!

silence ! stop talking about this !
kuftak! get away! go back! away from here!
kc-asb, kii'-ash! bad thing! a term used in speaking to children, derived

front k:'"I badly, and forming the verb kil-asht/unna, q. v.

INTKHJKOTION.

569

K'kil l,-g(! |,I. K^kat! quitf slop! cease! don't!

m'lit (for iK^n at)! ho it is! that is ri,,ht! iu<nt iK^nt! riqht! riohf! Mod.

(»kuilajfdn, .1. ok;i-ilag.-u! Kl. wak haf la gC,.! mtaiHh,! of nm-sr!

pA-ak, al)l)r pal / do not know!

■k6! (1 HkiiHk.i! come up! uHod when thinking over Hon.otlm.o „„t

ronioinbeiod iinniodiatoly.
Atch.udnf nevrr mind! don't mrr [f! used when worry inK ommolf about

Honiothing; A'tch git jrf ! Ivt no! quit! stop!
tchawaf! well, then! for tch/iii haf noiv t/irn; tvUwnl na! let us do it

now! Mod.
waktchf huk! how curiom! (w.lktdii for wakaptchi, (j. v.), 24, 18.
wtikc'anhna! wAk yanhiia ! / will he sick i/' I don't!

D.— INTER.IECTI0N8 OF AN INOROANIO NATURE.

Ejaculations of this sort (h) not form organic parts of the sentonco, and,
being no words, are excluded from the morphologic part of the grammar.'
They are the true, goiniino interjections, ami are nearest related to^whut we
call a root, in its abstract, naked form. Indeed, some of these interjc^ctions
lu-e forming words or derivatives in every language; for Klamath, some are
mentioned below and on page 2.'-,(). In their origin, these derivatives c(mio
nearest to the derivatives of onomapootic roots, as names of animals, es,«,-
cially birds, as quoted pages 2.^)0, .323. Some inteijections are f..rmed by
iterative reduplication, which appears hero as an onnmiitopoetic element.
War and dance songs are largely made up of unmennir.g syllables and terms
which resemble interjections of this sort Repetitions of this same character
also occur in such forms as tunil-i-i tut niani/, mamj teetli, which stands for a
superlative of tumi wa»^»,.and strongly reminds .is of the Semitic t6l)tob
venj ffood, fi-om t(')b f/ood.

ans'ma! anami! expression of bodily pain or distress; from this the

verb anaiiA a to rnj unand.
ii'-oho, f-uhu, i-uhuhu, war cry or yell comparable to the Greek dXaXd,

eXsXev, and forming a verb like this: ii-ohodiutchna to admnce

while crying a! -oho.

* Cf. Uriulation of lliu Adjcclivf, iuikb ."iia.

670 ^TRAMMAli OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

§1 e-el l! an exclamation, torming a sort of vocative: tchdkan' e a kgld-
ush! the sand here is ao fine! cf. h/iggai c, Mod., und page 468.

hii! hiihiil The syllable Iiii imitates sounds uttered by men and ani-
mals. Derivatives : liji'ma, liaii'6asba, hahii'tamna, etc.

hd-i! bti-e! look here!

kt^mkem! ydm^em! kt;mkemtt;,k ! silerce! hush up!

o! 6! marks surprise, and is often pronounced with inspiration of
breath.

tiitutu! utntutii! implies fright, dismay, pain.

•Id-

,ni-

SY2JTAX.

671

SYNTAX.

The syntax* of a lang-iiage deals with that part of its grammar which
gives a systematic account of the structure of the sentence and its portions,
selects the existing grammatic forms, and assigns to them their proper pla.el
in the composition of the sentence.

Thus the grammatic forms presented by morphology, and the lexical
treasure of a language furnished by the dictionary are but the raw material
with which seaunces are composed conformably to the laws of syntax. The
words found there become true words only when they become constituents
of the sentence; and, to reach their full effect, words and sentences have to
be placed in such adequate logical relation to each other as expresses best
the meaning of the speaker or writer.

No sentence can be considered complete in which three elements of
speech— subject, predicate, and copula (or substantive verb)— are not
expressed or implied. This is true of all languages, although the means
for expressing the three elements may widely differ, since the predicate and
the copula are frequently embodied in one and the same word.

The simple sentence, comp(ised by the above-mentioned three parts
only, becomes enlarged— the transitive verb by the direct and indirect; the
intransitive verb by the indirect object or complement ; and both may
become qualified by adverbs (or adverbial attributes). Then the subject
and the objects are quali.led by attributes of various kinds, which may
even appear under the form of u .yho'.e sentence. Based upon these funda-
mental categories of speech, the whole syntactic material divides itself into
the following chapters :

The predicative relation.
The objective relation.
The attributive relation.

order."

•The proper signiacatioii of tlio Greek term ayntaxis is tliat of " arrangemflnt ", "potting In

lif

11,

! 1

^■-9

\ ^^"S

'- if

Ht.^

■ 'J

;|*«"

.:i^

n fj

.f^

■'^

v..
'ii

672

GEAMMAE OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

Besides this, syntax deals (1) witli the various forms under which sen-
tences may be addressed to others in the simple sentence — the declarative
form, the negative form, the interrogative form; (2) with the compound
sentence, and its subdivision into a co-ordinate and a subordinate sentence.

THE VERB A NOUN VEEB.

Comparative researches embracing languages outside the pale of the
Aryan and Semitic families have disclosed the fact that they do not possess
a true verb, as we have, but use terms of a nominal function in its stead,
which may be best compared to our abstract nouns, to nouns formed of
verbs, and to participles. This morphologic quality of the verb influences
not only tiie inflectional forms of this part of speech, but also the laws of
syntax; and investigators of a hitherto unknown language have to consider
as one of their most important grammatic tasks to ascertain the origin and
true character of its verb.

What makes of the Aryan and Semitic verb a true verb is the thorough
and intimate comiection of a radix, assumed to be predicative, with certain
affixes representing number, tense, mode, voice, and especially with affixes
representing person. This is so because, in the inflective languages, the
finite verb is controlled and determined in every instance by the subject of
the sentence (pronominal subjects appearing as personal affixes) ; whereas,
in the so-called agglutinative languages, the finite verb is partly controlk^d
by another agent than the subject. The powerful agency which has fused
all the above category-signs into tvords, and has even influenced the vocalic
part of the radix, is met with only in the two linguistic families above men-
tioned ; for agglutinative languages, which constitute the great majority of
all tongues, do not show in their verb the same assertive and predicative
power.

That the Klamath verb is a verb of the agglutinative class will suffi-
ciently appear from the data contained in this Granmiar. Ihit the question
how far this verb has developed in the way of approaching the standard of
a truly assertive verb may be considered under two aspects: (1) What are
the properties which assimilate it to that standard! And (2) by what pecu-
liarities are we compelled to class it among the verbs constituting a nominal

THE VEliB A NOUN- VERB.

573

expression? It should be remembered here that, at the eariiest period of
its existence, language possessed neither nouns nor verbs, but that these
distinctions arose only gradually. Whenever the aborigin-;' mind wanted
to give a nominal character to a radix, it affixed certain pronominal roots
to it, considered to signify number, location, sex, etc.; when a radix had to
receive a verbal or assertive meaning, pronominal affixes, pointing to tense,
mode, person, form, location, and other categories, were placed before or
after it * But in thus establishing relation, every nation or tribe followed
different methods ; and thus originated, not the genealogical differences of
languages, but the difference of tlieir grammatic structure. Different meth-
ods were followed because each nation was in the habit of viewing things
from different logical or conventional aspects.

The Klamath verb approaches the predicative Aryan and Semitic verb
in the following features:

a. In what we call the finite forms, the verb is connected with a per-
sonal pronoun, figuring as the grammatic subject of the sentence, and not
with a possessive pronoun, as found in the Algonkin dialects and many
other American and foreign languages, in the place of a subject, which is
there only the logical, not the grammatic, subject of the sentence. This
latter stage is represented in Klamath by some of the verbals, but these are
pure npminal forms, and do not exhibit such forms as correspond to our
finite verb.

h. The majority of the verbal inflectional affixes differ from those used
in inflecting the noun. The process of incorporating pronominal objects
into the verb is here in the same stage as in some modern languages of
Europe, viz., only in its beginning.

c. Klamath clearly distinguishes between tlie subjective and the objec-
tive case in the ailjective, the past participle, tiie pronoun, and the substan-
tive of the animate order, the objective case standing for the direct as well
as the indirect object. The objective case is formed by the suffix -sh, -s
with a vowel preceding, but the usual suffix of tlie subjective case in sub-
stantives is -sh, -s also.

* For further discuusiou of tliis topic, cf. page 853 of tUio Grammar.

J 1

574

GKAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

On the other side, the Klamath verb differs from the true predicative
verb, and rangestitself among the noun-verbs of agglutinative languages by
the following characteristic features:

a. The transitive verb is controlled and modified by its object (espe-
cially its direct object), and not by its subject. This becomes chiefly appar-
ent by the way in which the distributive form of the verb is applied. In
many intransitive verbs, this form connects itself witii subjects standing in
the plural number; but, from the study of Morphology, it becomes evident
that the true cause of the reduplicative process in this instance lies in the
repetition or severalty of an act or state, and not in the grammatic number
of the subject.

b. The verb possesses no personal inflection, if we except the rudiment-
ary agglutination to it of some personal pronouns. It has no real personal
pronoun of the third person. It has a grammatic form for two tenses only,
and the modal inflection is rudimentary also. As to number, a sort of
prefix-inflection is perceptible in a long series of verbs, which tends to
prove their nominal nature. That part of the verbal inflection, which is
developed more extensively than all the others, is made up by the verbals,
which, by themselves, are nominal forms.

c. Several suffixes, inflectional and derivational, serve for the inflection
and derivation of the noun, as well as for that of the verb. The fact that
certain nouns can become preterital by inserting -u-, shows better than
anything else can, the imperfect differentiation between the noun and
the verb.

d. For the passive voice, the same form is used as for the active voice;
silica is to see and to be seen.

(',. Some verbs are used as nouns without change — that is, without as-
suming the derivational suffix -sh, -s of sub.stantives. But the existence of
the binary and ternary case-inflection shows that the inflectional, polysyn-
thelic power of the noun, theoretically, almost equals the power of affixation
in the verb. The mere possibility of a binary and ternary case-inflection
proves that some of the Klamath case-signs are of the material kind of
affixes, and not of the relational kind, which are not susceptible of any fur-
ther affixation to themselves. The inflective languages have relational case-

\\\

THE VERB Gl.

575

signs only, and therefore binary and ternary noun-inflection is unknown
an)ong them.

From all that has been stated heretofore, the conclusion is fully justi-
fiable that the Klamath verb is not a true verb, but a noun-verb, on account
of its imperfect differentiation between noun and verb. The lack of inti-
mate connection between the subject-pronoun and the identity of the active
and passive form also show its true nature. It expresses the verbal act or
state in its abstract, impersonal, and indefinite form, and, with the particle of
actuality -a appended, comes nearest to our infinitive. Thus i ydkua anku
thou hreakest a stick could be transcribed in the most literal manner by
•^thou-to break-stick", or in German, "du-brechen-Stock." Whether transi-
tive verbs are used actively or-passively must be ascertained from the con-
text,* for the verbal term in this instance contains nothing but the abstract
idea of "break."

THE SUBSTANTIVE VERB Gl.

The inquiry whether a language possesses a substantive verb to be or
not, is closely related to the one treated in the previous chapter. Languages
lacking the verb to be employ, instead of it, other verbs of a more material
signification, use more auxiliary verbs or even particles, overloading the
grammar with forms; or use attributive verbs— a clumsy expedient, which is
attained only by verbifying the substantive, adjective, pronoun, and even
particles. By all this, nothing more is attained than what we reacli by using
our short verb to be. The existence of this verb testifies, not only to a con-
siderable power of abstraction and reflection on matters of language, but is
generally associated with a tendency of the language to become analytic,
an d to divest itself of the embarrassing wealth of synthetic forms.

MO, , JJ V '""''7,' *PP'-''"'='' ♦" «■ ^"l- in th« condition, which I wa8 »ble tiTfind, is contah;;;!];^!^
M(*L .ER, Novara.lle,se Un9u,.li.cl,e,- TMI, 1867, page a47 8^., whore the unthor speaksof lanKoaJes of
southern Austral,.. I subjoi,, a„ extract i„ the words a« nned by Professor MO,. Jr: "In a» tr is I. "n
S,,rachen w.rd d.cselbe Form activ und passiv gebrancht, die let^tere jedoch n.it Objcctivpro I „

iL «^?rtl N *' <l«'"nach e,„ abstractos No.uen, ..r,p..rMi„li..h 7.n fassen ,.nd erst dann L-

sPrl.ch auf das Non.en be.ogen. D>e Handlnng tritt abstract, nnpersiinlich ein ..ud wird erst da niit
f'T ^."'''r* ""-Object in Verblndung geset.t: 'das Schlagc, tiat ein nnd icb vollHihrte es • s"b!
jec „«d Prad.cat s.nd nur ai.sserlich auf einander be^ogon ; das Pronomen, das das Verbum begleitet
1st iDdess stets em rein subjectives." ""Bieiwi,

I •

^:i

■- ■ i

576

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

Klamath is among the languages possessed of a true substantive-verb,
the inflection of which is well-nigh as complete as that of any other noun-
verb pertaining to this language. Its presence accounts for the relative
scarcity of attributive verbs, like kt'lpka to he hot, nia'sha and shila to he sick,
shualka to he warm, tchkuwa to he cold. It is the only auxiliary verb of the
language in forming periphrastic and other conjugational forms (cf -uapka
of the future tense). But besides the abstract signification of to he, the verb
gi has other meanings of a more concrete nature— /« hecoine; to helon<j to; to
do, perform; to srt,y— all of which, together with the origin of gi, have been
discussed at length in a chapter of Morphology. Here we are concerned
only in the signification to he, though the earlier meaning of a casual, acci-
dental existence is still as frequently im])lied by it as that of real, essentia
existence. The various definitions are exemi)lified at length in the Dic-
tionary and Morphology. In periphrastic conjugation, gi is the real sub-
stantive verb ; in other connections, it is sometimes replaced by tchfa to sit,
stay, live, dwell, in sentences like the following:

pi a tchfa tchfshxeni he is at home.

nalam p'tishap, kat p'lal tchfa our Father, toho is above, 139, 1.

In short sentences, rapidly spoken, it is often omitted by ellipse:

kAlam hut «niik? tvhose hoy is thisf
kalam i-utfla? whose is that thing below f
kiilam gctant! whose is the thing on this side?
kalam go p'k'ntani whose is the thing here on the top?
kaknegatko mi shulotish your dress is dirty.

Further instances of the various uses of the verb gi, not previously
mentioned, are as follows:

(I) gi to ?>e, of casual existence; the Spanish estar:
hiit snawedsh kiii gi k'lekeiiapkuk that woman is so sick that she will die.
Ivukskni toks lapl'k (for lri'j)i gi) but of the Lake men, there were two.
hftak a ki'knish gi ati here heavy snotvs have fallen.
hii k(')-idshi wawiikish gi when the ears are misshaped, 91, 8.
tii kiitan hf ki! over there at the lodge she is, I suppose. Mod.

THE VERB Gl.

677

(2) gi io become, to begin to be, to turn into:

at( ha'k luldum gi't! that winter would become too long, 105, 9.

nfl gdmptcha pshe-utfwashash gftki gi I clcdare (nil gi) the human beings

must become so, 103, 11. 12.
Modokfshash «'B,',8htin gfuapk" ksh.lpa they declared the Modocs wanted

to become Americans.

(3) gi to be, of real existence; the Spanish ser:
tAtkni i gi? tvhere are you from f

kanf gi! wlw is itf who is hef

muni nfl lakf gi lam a powerful ruler, 102; 8.

tupaksh tAksh 1 On gc'-ii gi! you certainly are my sister f

The three syntactic relations of human speech manifest themselves, in
analogous shape, in the simple and in the compoimd sentence. These rela-
tions are the predicative, the objective, and the attributive relation. They will
be treated in the same order as now mentioned.

THE PREDICATIVE RELATION.

It is the relation existing between subject and verb, or, to use a term
more adapted to the Klamath language, the relation between subject and
noun-verb. It includes the whole syntax of tiie verb, excepting only the
relation of the verb to its object and (adverbial) attribute. When the pred-
icate is not a noun-verb, but a noun (substantive, adjective, pronoun), this
noun connects itself with the subject either by the verb gi to be or some
other term replacing it, as shc^sha to name, call, k'k^ka to become, turn into,
73, 6, etc. Concerning appositions, cf "Attributive Relation."

The adjectives in -ni, -kni often express relations which, in English,
are rendered by a prepositional or adverbial phrase, and have to be consid-
ered as adverbs; e.g.: Kafmora yamakni gi Kaimom is from the north; p'lai-
tAlkni tchushnini tchfa God lives forever.

A nominal predicate always agrees with its subject in case, but not
always in luimber.

i i

if-

4 ::

^itr***'

i;i

««<*

i«><l

&:)

it
[l

3 I'

•I l

578

GRAMMAR OF TUB KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

THE SUBJECT OF THE VERB.
The subject of the noun-verb, or, iib I will henceforth call it for con-
venience, of the verb, stands in the subjective case, whether it appears as
Bubstftntive, adjective, participle, or pronoun. This, of course, applies only
to the subject of the finite verb; the subject of verl)als, as the verbal defi-
nite and indefinite, follows other rules to be mentioned below. When the
subject is a personal pronoun, it is often repeated and, curiously enough,
without any special emphasis being attached to it:

tids taks mi'sh ni kuizi'i n\'s ni T know you pretty well, 65, 10.
tAnkt ni snii'kfilui-uapka ni then I shall remove (him), f);), 17.
Especially in songs subject-pronouns are scattered in profusion; cf.
pages 176-178 and first Note. Just as frequently, a personal pronoun is
omitted altogether whenever it can be readily supplied from the context.
So, in 30, 7, nat wc is omitted before ga-il'l^a. because it stands in the sen-
tence preceding it; cf also at ye before pA-uapk, in 70, 4.

When a transitive verb is used passively, the grammatic subject stands
in the subjective, and the person or thing by which the act is performed in
the possessive case, which often figures as the logical subject;* or it iu
expressed by a possessive pronoun.

That an oblique case can figure as the subject of the sentence, as in
Sahaptin dialects, of this we have an instance for an intransitive verb in
the incantation 158; 48: kiUlanti nfl shilshila, which is interpreted by the
Indiana themselves as: "I, the earth, am resounding like thunder within
(-nti) myself" An oblique case thus figures as tiie verbal subject. This
recalls the circumstance that, from certain case-forms, as yamat north,
ka'mat back, le-usham flower, new substantives originate with the above as
their subjective cases.

The plural number of the subject of the sentence may be indicated in
the following different ways:

a. Plurality is indicated analytically by adding to the noun a numeral
or an indefinite pronoun, like kfnka, tumiAga a few, nAnka sotne, nAnuk all,
tumi many. ^

"From HoK. Halb's Notes on the ATfj-Z'erc^ Language and PaNdosy's Yakama arnmmar, we
gather that in some Sahaptin dialects the subjective case is supplanted by the possessive, even when
the verb is used in the active sense.

PERSONAL INFLECTION.

679

b. Plurality is shown by the noun being a collective, or one of the sub-
stantives designating persons, whicli possess a form for the real plural.

c. The large majority of substantives having no real plural, their plu-
rality is indicated in the intransitive verbs connected with them by the
distributive form of the verb, and in a few transitive verbs, like stA-ila,
luela, by a special form which has also a distributive function.

d. When there are but two, three, or, at the utmost, four subjects to
certain intransitive verbs, the dual form of the latter will be used. Cf
Verbal Inflection, pages 437-441.

PERSONAL INFLEOTION.

In his choice between the analytic and one of the synthetic forms
combining the subject and object pronoun into one word with the verb, the
speaker is guided entirely by the impulse of the moment. If ho intends to
lay any stress on the personal pronoun, he will place it at the head of the
sentence, or at least before the verb, which usually stands at tlie end, or he
repeats the pronoun. Tiie synthetic forn) of the subject-pronoun is less
frequent than the other, and not every person has a form for it. In the
second person of the plural it might be confounded witli the imperative,
and hence it is more frequently used only in the first singular and plural
and in the third plural. Object-pronouns, like mish thee, to thee, are placed
between the verb and the subject-pronoun :

shli-uapkamsha they will shoot you (for mish sha).
ne-ulakuapkdmshni I shall punish you.

A list of all the possible syntheses of personal pronouns is presented
above (pages 548. .549).

TENSE-FORMS OF THE VERB.

There are only two tense-forms of the verb— the simple verb-form,
generally ending in -a, and the form of the incompleted act, with suffix
-uapka. Nevertheless all tenses of the English verb can be expressed with
accuracy by these two forms, when supplemented or not by temporal par-
ticles, and by the substantive verb gi in its various inflectional forms. To

; i U

580

ailAMMAU OPTHK KLAMATH LAN(JUA(JH.

what oxtoiit tho ciitepory of tonHO pormoatos otlxM- iuoiIoh than tlio drrlara-
tiir, to wliii'li tlio pioHont »>hapt(»r cliiolly n»l'oi«, will bo soon in tlio ohaptor
of •'The Modes of tlio Voih."

THE KORMS OF THK PRKSKNT TKN8E.

Klamath (liHtiiijruishos ihnu^ variotiiw of tho /»»•<■«■»*< toimo by Hoparato
forms in tho (loclanitiv<» mode. Tht^ othor modiw aro ropnmontod by a con-
ditional, two impoi-ativtm, a participh', and mnno v^rbalH.

A. Tho f)nrc pirsrnf ti'tt.'^i', as containod in sont^nctm liko wr are ivalkinif,

it is miiiitt;i, is oxprossod by tho nndo form of tho vorb. This forn> is, in tho
northern ilialoot, nsually procodod or followod by tho dotdaralivo particio a,
whi(>h hero sorvos also to indicato tho tonso. iModocs jronorally omit thirt
particio, bnt in both dialocts othor partiolos oan supplant it to point t(. tho
prosont tonso. Connoetod with hil {/; when, this tonso also forms conditioinil
sontoncos, and ofton staiuls whore Knropoan lanj,niaKiw uso thoir conjinictive
mode. Kxamploa:

ko a shudsha I'lnkn he is Imniiwj wood.

kiMpka a I'imbii the wattr is hot.

tAm nAsli i lola? do tjoii helierc met

at wawapka wo iheij are still sittiHf/ (there).

Rt a pan pi'ila-ash ye are eating bread.

n.— The iisitativc form of the prostMit tonso, dosoribin}? habit, ctiHtom, or
practice, conatantl y observed, oxprossos it in a prosontial form by appondiiiff
to tho verb -nk (-ank, -ink etc.) in Kl, -n (-an, -in etc) in Modoc. In form
it coincides with the participle of the present, but boinjr connected with tho
personal pronouns, it serves the purpose and has tho function of a finite
verb. It occurs when habits and customs of individuals aiul tribes are
sketched, thiuigh the naked verl) appears in this function just as frocpiently :
ilx»')ta, (Iktcha, 87, 4, 6; shudsha, 'JO, !). On the origin of tho sufHx -nk, -n,
see Participles.

mi'iklaks kfnknynnk flags the people stiek ont flags ohliqueh/, 134, 3. 4.

p.4pkashti shft'tank box 'heij make a eoffin of lumhcr, 87, 2.

aha shipatxAkank theij were repeatedlif eclipsing each other, 105, 2.
liishnank aha shno'lakshtat theg roast it in the fire-place, \r>(), 7.

KOKMH OK TIM'} I'UKHKNT TKNHK

581

vrtiilp HlmlHli.^Hliliuik Mry phji (hr slick-finrnv with four sticks, 70, 2.
tiitni'idMiiiik trwiiH thrjifaslni llic uii on thv how, Hit, 2'2.
iiiVmIi knflalukH frli|)i'iimiliiiik tliri/ hiirif ul our p/itir onlji, HH, 1.
tMi'ii iiiiinlMiik niliiiHii'liuik or inlmHii'liiu gi nnd he lirrd for a ivliitt; with
(lior), 77, 2.

TluH Hiiino t((iiH()-f(triii ill -iik, -ii ((cciirn HoinotitiioH in Hoiitoncum wliicJi
coMtiiiii III) iiMiliitlvo vorl); Mtill, u linito voi:. Ih (.xpioMHo.! hy it, uimI tlio nm-
toiici) in oftoii of ail iiii|M)riitivo or juhhIvo clnmictdr:

tclii'ilnkHli IhIi tc.liili'yiiiikl ////v ww a piece, of mcnl!

iiftMli liiil trIilKtyiiiik I! (live iiic somclliintf (Molt or (Inxihio)!

knft'kMli IhIi lu^yiiiik! t/ivc. me Homit IhrcaU!

Oflior iiiHtiuuiOH will ho foiiiid iiiidor IWticiploH ; hoo bolovv.

(!,— Tlio simultaneous toiiHo-forin \n onipjoyod to mIk.w that an act wan
IMtrforiiiod or a Htiito ()xiHt«d.//<.v< then, riff/it llicn nnd there, at the time n-forrod
to, oithor HiiiiiiltaiiooiiHly with anothor act fir Htato iiioiitioiiod, or foHowiii;,'
thiH act ill iiniiKidiato HiiccoHHioii. It is iiiarkod hy |»la(Miifr tho umphaHiH
upon tlio laHtHyilahhiof tho vori); th(f vorh \h thon froqintnfly accompaniod
l>y partichm Hpocifyinfr tho tiiiio. VVhothor, in oxytoniziiifr thoHo vorhH, tho
dochirativo partichi hii, a has coahmcod with thc^ torrriinal -a or not (hipondn
on tho contciiitH of tho pliraHO or Hontonco; cf. Noto to h\, 'J. This accont-
uation m not poculiar to utiy tonso, and may ho also duo to othor cauHOH to
1)0 Hpcciliod holow.

a. Following aro Homo iiiHtancoH which refor to a present tonno:

tHi'ii link k'loka tawi'nh then the. f)ewitched one dies, r,2, '.i; cf. (16, 1.

kt-l-i'i H lion she lies when sai/intf this, G 1, 4.

pitchka a li'ilokn the fire is out, or has ifone out.

Haka a pd'kn then they eat cnmnss raw, 74, r».

ki'i-i Hjidnf vuHliuk they do not yivc (hor), twinfi afraid (of him), 93, 1.

Tho clasH of verbs mentioned on pa<re 2.'}!> often or iiHually bearH the
accent on tho hwt Hyllablo, bocatiHo thoy HuggoHt an immodiato or simulta-
noouH act.

582

OBAMMAR OP THE KLAMATU LANOUAOK.

h. In the following inHtanccH oxytonizod verbs refer to acta performed
simultanoouHly with otherH in the hiHtoric ^ast, or at another time bygone:

Ici'lilkH Hhlilf'i thrij then perceived the dust, 29, 7; cf 65, 9.

tsiii nat wawi'ipk k'aiakkii nut then we sat down and locre on the lookout,

29, 13.
tsf hii'inkank shapi'ik so she. said when spenkinp tihout it, (55, 13.
wudoka lmHhtH(')xa hIui theif struck and killed him right then and there,

fi!», 1.
lupl' lulnk shpunkiinka, tcha'i lakiala Jirst she kept, then married him,

55, 18.
tchnlhiula tch'A'nk, gnki'i at he took of his shirt, then climhed up, Mod.
a'tunk at{ kedHlu'i 'apiUa kalo when it had tjroion hi<fh, it touched the sky.

Mod.

In several instances the possibility exists, however, that this oxyton-
ized verb is but an apocopated participle in -tko (cf. pahA dried, 74, (»;
n^itsd atrophied etc.), or that an enclitic term following has attracted the
accent to the last syllable. Cf what is said on Endisis, pages 240-243,
and guhua nish / am swollen, 138, 3; k'leka taks nA but I am di/in(f, 138, 6;
k'lilkuish gfnt niish (0er I have died, 64, 15; Una nat we took ivith m, 31, 6;
tawf sluiah he bewitches them, 62, 3.

THE PRETERIT TENSES.

All our preterits, as the past, perfect, and pluperfect tense, are ren-
dered by the simple noun-verb, and can be distinguished from the present
only through the syntactic connection or by the addition of temporal ad-
verbs. These latter being frequently omitted, the run of the sentence is
often the only point by which tense can be discerned. In the other modes
the preterit is represented by the verbals and a participle.

A. — Past and perfect. These two tenses of the English grammar are
not distinguished from each other in Klamath. Transitive and intransitive
verbs may or may not assume, either before or after the verb, the adverbs

PAST AND PLUl'EUFECT TENSE.

688

hak, hflnk, lirtn, iirul Iifl, (loHigtiRting tlio past tense. ThoHO adverbs nre
locative and tomporal HimultanoonHlv*, their use implying tlio idou that
what iH performed in placoH locally diHtant iH temporally diHtant also whon-
ever it comes to bo npoken of. Therefore their uho is not strictly limited
to the past, but applies also to other relations distant in time; cf. 105, 8.

liA'k refers to acts performed in presence or absence of the one sjjeak-
ing or supposed to speak.

hrtnk refers to acts performed or states undergone near to or far away
from the one speaking.

hftn refers to acts performed on inanimate things, present or visible.
It also refers to thoughts and abstract ideas.

liA in Modoc stands for all the three above-mimed [)article8 of the Kla-
math Lake dialect, which appear in Modoc also, and in the same func-
tions.

The above-named particles are often connected with or replaced by
other adverbs, as tcbui, nfa, una, tak, toksli. With tchi'ii, they form com-
pounds, like tchuyuk (tchi'ii hilk), tchil'yunk (Kl.), tch'hfl'nk, tchA'nk
(Mod.), and others. Cf. pages 402-404.

tj'im haitch fnsh hAnk l(')la tchi'ii? did you believe me flienf

ndani waitiilan nfa mi suentch kAyeke i/our b(d)y died three days ago,

Mod.
ni'ishtoks mi'iklaks shlt^a peoj)le have seen me, Mod.
pa-ula toks nd pii'dshit / ate just now, Mod.
una nil pA-ula / ate some time ago.
1 nflsh tiila liAnk wuduka hilnksh you and I struck him.
1 unk (for hiink) ha' ma you were shouting.

B.— Pluperfect tense. This tense points to the priority of one act to
another connected with it syntactically in the same sentence. Although
the Klamath has no special form to express tin's tense, it is clearly pointed
out by the logical connection, or by particles, grammatic and derivational
forms of the language, in many different ways.

• Local adverbs and otUer paniclea often assume temporal siguificationg. Cf. the adverb alvayn
the Qerrnan Aitu/i^.

Ma*

r '51

(" 'a

^ .

:.4,

- -m

^ :

, i:

j..^

■^.

■

■ \

' i

584

GBAMMAU OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

(1) Two or more co-ordinate sentences contain each a verb in the past
tense, one of which the English language would render by the pluperfect
tense:

siimtsiilxa hiVk a g(5n tawi ; td' tawipk tankt tawi'pk she discov-
ered that he had bewitched that man; that he had hctvitched him out
thete; that lie had bewitched him at that lime, 64, 2. 3.

tsiii hil'k na's hukayapk ma'ns i-ii'ta tliMti the one who had retired to the
woods shot for a lorn/ time, 23, 2 1 .

n^-iins shli'n wii'k he had shot another man in the arm, 24, 1. Cf. stfltchna,
43. 22; spunl, 20, 18.

(2) The verb expressing the act previously accomplished stands m tne
presential tense-form, and is connected with the other past tense by means
of the particle at, then to be rendered by after, though its original meaning
is now, now that.

lalii;(i shuggi'ilaggi at, Tchmd'tch hiimeze ^er the "chiefs" had assem-
bled. Riddle said, 41, 20.

hii'yuka sha liil'nk kta-i at, tchi'ii sha nu'iklaks puelhi' after they had
heated the stones, they threw the people into (the bucket), 112, 21.

kayuds huk k'lii'kat (for k'luka at) he had not died yet, 24, 6.

The conjunction at may be accompanied or even supplanted by otlier
temporal particles, as tclu'ii, tch'hiVnk, dtch'unk (for at tchiii hu'nk, Mod.),
tchiiyunk, hil tankt, (Mod.) etc.

(3) The verb containing the act performed previously to another act
may be expressed by one of the verbals. In this case, there is only one
finite verb in the sentence, for all the verbals represent nominal forms.
The verbals are those in -sh, with their case-forms (-sham etc.), in -uish and
in -sht.

ef^ishtok MiVsliash k'ldka Tchdshgayak hut after (or while) Southvind

had put his head out. Little Weasel died. 111, 9.
ill gdna M(')atuash k'liiwfsham at away tvent the Pit River Indians, now

that (firing) had ceased, 20, 5.

,f ■

PLUPERFECT TENSE.

585

Kgmft'sh i-a'sh tiidsliampOli slul'dahcan gankanktchuish KP.mukdmkh

carried tvillows on his hack to build a fire after (Aishish) had gone

hunting, Mod.
n^kslit-ak sha ktai i'^akpSle afier stewing, they took out the stones again,

113,2; cf. 113, 9.
Afshish shataldi'ldamna ati at kedshtsht Aishish looked down constantly

till after it (the little pine tree) had grown tall, 95, 3. 4.
Kemu'sh kshc'lui fl'nk mc'-itkasht hu'nk we-ulii'kash K'lnnkdmtch lag

down close to the fire after the wives (of Afshish) had gone to dig roots,

Mod.

(4) Pluperfects may also be rendered by participial forms, the present
participle being more frequently used for this purpose than the past participle.

(a) Present participle in -nk, Mod. -n:

ki'iyak wempglank k'leka having never fully recovered he died, G5, 20.

Skelamtch shanatchvu'lank nel;ja m'na tchuyesh Old Marten, after tak-
ing off his hat, laid it down, 112, 18; cf. 112, 13.

gAtpamnau kiiilatat wawdl^a having arrived on the ground, they sit down,
85, 2. Mod.

tchi'sh shnel^an shemcishla having burnt down the lodge, they remove else-
where, 85, 13. Mod.

This construction is quite analogous to the use made in English of the
participle in -ing; in French of the participle in -ant.

(b) Past participle in -tko:

hekshatlekftko k'lexiipkash wfitch gc'na the horse tvalks carrying the
body; lit. "ha"ing been made to carry the body transversely",
85, 4.

gt'l;falgitk hil'kanshampgle having climhed down he hurried out again,
112, 11.

(5) The most expressive way of rendering the English pluperfect is
the use of the completive form in -61a, -ula, which the majority of verbs
can assume. Generally the participle in -olank or one of the verbals serves
the purpose, and at times the participle present of tliose verbs of motion
which can assume the suffix -tka (-tkank, Mod. -tkan) is used instead Cf.

586

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

. 1

Tiist of SuflSxes, -61a, -tka. A temporal conjunction, like at, tchiii etc , often
accompanies these forms

L4p6ni wait/jlank, illol61ank after two days, years had elapsed, Kl.

at nat neli'niilank at gempCle after having scalped him (lit. "having fin-
ished scalping"), we returned home, .'30, 20.

tchui sha lu'lal;(a pa-iilank and havin;/ done eating they went to bed, 113, 11.

kshatgatnil'lank shfuga snawedsh having drawn out the woman lie killed
Iter, 111, 17.

shii-fitankfi'lash tche'k qfter having concluded peace, 39, 13.

THE FUTURE TENSES.

The future marks an act or state not yet begun, or only intended, or
an act or state begun but not yet completed. It is expressed by the suffix
-uapka, a compound of the verb wA to stay within, to exist, live, and the dis-
tancial suffix -pka (cf Suffixes, -apKa, -pkaj. which has assumed here a tem-
poral function.* In the northern dialect, -uapka is the most frequent mode
of expressing the future tenses in principal and in incident clauses, whereas
the southern or Modoc dialect is apt to substitute for it the nude verbal
stem with -tak, -tok (not -taksh, -toks) appended. This is done, o. g., when
one sentence is subordinated to another, the particle then appearing in one
of the two or in both, often accompanied by un, iln. Instances of -tak to
indicate the future tense are not frequent in the northern dialect; k'lilki'itak
ni / might die, 129, 4, is the conditional mode, and could be spelled k'liik.'it ak.

Verbs with the suffix -uapka assume various modal functions, to be
sketched below. This tense forms no conditional in -t, but otherwise pos-
sesses all the grammatic forms of the simple verb in -a, -i etc., and can
almost be regarded as forming an independent verb for itself.

Verbs in the -uapka fi>rm are put to many different uses, all of which
have this in conunon, that they point to an act or state not yet begun or
completed. The scarcity of temporal forms in Klamath has accumulated a t
many functions upon this suffix, that adverbs and conjunctions nuist son.e
times be employed as helps to distinguish one from another.

* The same suffix, -iiaiika, appears also in a coutractcd form as upka, -npka, forming deaideratite
verbs. Mentioned under Suffix -upka, q. v.

FUTURE TENSES.

587

The various future tenses designated by -uapka and -tak are as follows:
A. — The future sinqjle, pointing to the occurrence of an act at a future
epoch more or less remote. Temporal particles serve often to specify the
time, tchek being one of the most frequent among them; cf 59, 17.

medshampCli-uapk nil I shall remove to the former place again.

nad ke'ksh vutukuapka tve tvill duh him.

undsJi' ni ni^-ulakuapk some time hence f shall arraign (her), 6.5, 1.

t.4nkt ni shii'gsuapk this time I tvill speak out my mind, fi."), 3; cf 59, 17.

kawaliJi'kuapk sil'-ug helieving they would ascend, 29, 15.

mish nil shpulAktak I shall lock you up, 36, 3. Mod.

tfdsh hilnk gi'uapk he tvill act rightly, 59, 21; cf 22.

wAkak hilnk tchfuapk? hotv tvill they live? 105, 8.

Tlie particle hilnk, usually met with some preterit tense, accompanies
the future in the two last examples.

B. — The anterior future, Lat fuiurum exacium, indicates the completion
of an action or state before another will take place at a time to come.

tua ni shutjl'-uapk shiugokl ivhat would I have profited if I had killed

him? 64, 12; cf 13.
ha i mbusealp'luapk, spillhi-uapkd m'sh ni if you live with her again, I

shall imprison you, 60, 21.
hii i pi'iltak (for palla tak), spiilhitak sha nush fin if you steal, they will

lock you up. Mod.; cf 39, 21.

C. — The form -uapka also serves to designate acts or states which had
to be performed or undergone at a time known to be past when made men-
tion of We circumscribe this by had to he done, had to occur, was or were
to do, etc.

tsiii tchl'k sa wtiltakuapk and afterivard they ivere to deliberate (again),

65, 15.
hi'-itak tchui tchi'-uapk here he ivas going to stay, 95, 6.
huk kti'meti kektchanuiipka tficy were to be tvithdrawn from the cave,

42, 21. Mod.

588

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

hushtankuiipka mbu'sliiin tlmj were to meet the next day, 41, 12. Mod.
gatpainpCli-uapka sha at they had almost reached their home, Mod.

D. — This suffix lias also a sort of usitative function in describing acts
habitually done, under certain conditions or at certain seasons of the year,
and therefore prospectively to be ijerformed also in future times under like
conditions. In this sense, the future is used in many other languages also.

nad gita pit'nuapk pc')l6kuantch, ktiilovvalshuapka we shall there scrape

up chrysalids, gather pine-nuts, 75, iJ; cf. 12.
nash sapash gL'pga[)eliuapk, tsialsh kawi tchish t'pkuapk in one month

they will or tvotild return; salmon and lamprey-eels they tvill bring,

93, 4 ; cf 3.

E- — The future in -uapka is used to express the idea of compulsion
by force, by nature, or by imperative command of others. Cf "Methods
to express compulsion" (below).

F. — The future in -uapka is used in its verbals, or connected with vari-
ous particles, to express the ideas of possibility and volition. Cf. "Modes
of the Verb." When connected with hii if, or other conditional particles,
it forms conditional sentences.

MODES OF THE VERB.

Of the three modes of the finite noun-verb — the declarative, the con-
ditional, and the imperative— only the first and last show the begiimings
of an incorporation of the personal pronoun. The conjunctive, optative,
and potential of other languages are here expressed analytically by par-
ticles added to the two first-mentioned modes, and these are spoken of
under separate headings.

THE DECLARATIVE MODE.

It corresponds very closely to the indicative of European languages,
and has been treated of at length under "Tense Forms", pages 579 sqq. It
is used in the style of historic narrative, in queries and replies, in affirma-
tive, negative, and interrogative sentences, in conditional sentences when
formed, e. g., with hii if, and often serves where we would use the con-
junctive or another mode.

CONDITIONAL MODE.

589

THE CONDITIONAL, MODE.

Verbs in the conditional mode introduce an act performed or a status
undergone under a certain condition, which is either enunciated by a sep-
arate, often incident or participial clause, or silently understood and ad-
mitted. The origin of the suffix -t, from : at now, then, at the time, readily
suggests Jill the uses to whicli this nioUe can be put. The hearer is notified
by it that audi an act took place "under such temporal conditions", or
"under these circumstances."

The various uses to which the conditional mode is put will appear
more clearly by distinguishing those instances which connect a conditional
sentence with it from those which present that mode standing alone for
itself The verbal conditional will be considered separately.

A. — The conditional mode, when accompanied by a verbal or a condi-
tional sentence, is often connected with the potential particle ak or its com-
binations. The idea of possibility thus becomes more apparent. By a sort
of syntactic attraction, both correlative sentences sometimes place their verb
in the, conditional mode.

k'lakat n' ii'nk shla-6k 1 may die for having seen (the spirit), 129, 5; of.

130, 3.
hissunuk tchJitch ni'sh ka-i siii'gat ivhen songs are applied as medicine,

then it may possibly not kill me, 129, 5.
ha nen wa'g'n kii'git, enank i'lktcha ivhcn no tvagon is at hand they carry

him out for burial, 87, 5.
ahle-iita nu mish shewant a wJien I find it I will give it to you.
. hii nil nen h6tchant, shift nish a nen if I had run away they would have

shot me, they said.
ni ka-i spiilhit s;ijokti'sht nish / do not imprison him provided he has

paid me, 62, 5.
8ta-6tank kaftua pAt tohile fasting he would eat nothing, 83, 2.

Also the passages 105, 8. 9; 147, 13.

B. — The conditional mode, when standing alone for itself, generally
corresponds to the English verb accompanied by the auxiliaries would, may.

590

GUAMMAK OF TUE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

might. The other sentence needed for completing the sense is here sup-
pressed, and its contents have to bo supplied by the hearer. The particles
ak, kam, etc., added to the form in -t, give it the character of a special rela-
tion, as that of volition, possibility, etc.

pi ak shufnt (for shufnat) he can sing^ ;'r»'>ly "if he wants to sing."

hA'nk ak taksh iln nil shleat I can se ■• tpply "if I choose."

nd' kam hi'tksh telullt I wish to look don rom there. 192; 4.

kA-itat sa nelll'nat, hu'shtchok'huya hak sa tJiey would never scalp (ene-
mies), they only killeJ a few (of thoni), 19, 4.

gfta tchfpash ka-i tii'm kcdshant not much tchipash-grass will grow here-
about, 149, 10.

w6k8lat, w('>kash shutii'shlat, awo'lat, peksat shiulfna they may collect,
grind, and cook the pond-lily seed, and rub it fine upon the metate;
supply 'whenever they camp out there", 74, 7-9; cf 15.

tuA kam a nii kft shashapkeat / do not know what story I am going to tell
you, Mod.

kA-i hunk shlii-at hu'nkesh kiJi'mat 8k(Skshash I may possibly not see
the dead man's spirit in the fish, 129, 7; cf 1. Cf also 120, 17.

hu'nk M-i mat pi'sh siiikat / did not kill him, as alleged, 64, 6; ka-i nii
hu'nk siiigat / have not killed him, 64, 11.

It has been stated above that conditional sentences, when introduced
by particles, like hii, tchii, at, taksh, are just as often expressed by means
of the declarative mode of the present and of the future. The "Legal
Customs", pages 58-62, afford many instances; cf also 38, 20; 66, 6. 7;
113, 17.

THE IMPERATIVE MODE.

This mode fulfills the same office in Klamath as in English, though it
differs from it by being generally accompanied by a pe*'sonal pronoun,
except in the third persons. In such sentences as vul;^' ish tala! lend me
money! the pronoun i thou has coalesced with the i- of nish, apheretically
Ish me, to me. This sentence may be expressed also by: tala ish viilxi !

In the chapter on "Modal Inflection", morphological part, the uses of
the two forms of the imperative — the imperative i)roper and the exhortative

IMPERATIVE MODE.

59 f

form— liave been discussed, though it will be appropriato to add a few more
syntactic exaitiples here for ilhustration. The future in -uapka, which has
no exiiortativo fonu, is souietinies supplanting the imperative under certain
conditions. Wo also find the participle in -nk, -n replacing the imperative,
but rather unfroqiiently; cf " Usitative tense-form," page 581, and below.

gen' i ! go thou! s/utk' ish! cross me over!

spi'pfi a na ! now let us pull! gena-atak na ! let us go there!

nanuk tfds wawalxat ! all of you stand up straight! 90, 14.

ktiwalp^iit na entch tchkash! post ye up anotJier man besides! 22, 15.

ka'hliintak iwi tin ! Je< us enter now! Mod.

i sluitc'tki ! /(■/ tliou perform! 139, 6.

u'ts gint, shh'tki nilsh! never mind, let them fire at me! 22, 10.

kai i tc'ltkitak ! you must not look downward! Mod.

tchelpjan! sit down! nush tchik'yan i gi ! give it to me! Mod.

tchi'ilek-s ish tduleyank i ! give me some meat! Kl.

luinkd'ktki kiidshikulaktki ! take a steam-hath and take a rest! Mod.

pa'h gopkan tchfmi ! come and eat right here!

kflyak kilhuan! do not get angry ! Mod.

Many imperative locutions suppress their verb, which, of course, can
be replaced without difficulty by the hearers; cf page 568, and:
hi-itokiit! sit down! down!

pelak tchi'mi! here! quick! pelak kuni ! ovcrthere, quick! huya! don'tgo!
ka-i ta ! do not! hold on! ka-i tche'k i ! do not (shoot) ! Mod.

THE PARTICIPIAL FORMS.

The two forms of Klamath now to be spoken of correspond in almost
every particular to tlie participles of the European languages, and I have
therefore not hesitated to call them by this name. Participles and verbals
afford excellent means to build up periods, in the most breviloquent and
expressive manner, by subordinating certain acts or facts to the main verb
and incorporating all into one sentence. What the Klamath and the classic
languages of antiquity express by a participle or verbal, modern languages
will often resolve into an incident clause, or into a principal clause, correl-

602

OllAMMAU OF TUE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

ative to the main verb; but to turn the sentence into a nominal form of the
verb often lias the great advantage of brevity and vigor over the analytic
wording of it.

1. Tl\e participle in -nk, -n temporally expresses the past and present,
soniotimes the pluperfect, though I evil it the present partieiple for the sake
of brevity. Its subject is mostly identical witii that of the main verb, and
whenever it fultills the function of an adjective its natural position is before
that verb. Like the English participle in -in(f, it frequently stands where
the Latin would use its gerund-form in -ndo; cf shulatchti'lan tcht'lza to be
on one's knees, in Morphology, page 407 ; and this also has to be placed
before the verb of the sentence,

Tiie structure of this participle as a part of the sentence presents no
difficulties, and we therefore give only a few instances of its use:

k{l'8l\ga tcha, p'lil' i'tchuank-. l6'vuta they combed, oiled, and dressed

him, 95, 17.
Tchika shlaa Afshishash huyc'gank, hu'tan ku-ishuwank shlii'p(5le Trhika

saw Aishish sitting far off, jumped up, beiuf] (flad to find him ayain,

96, 5. Here huyegapkash seems preferable to huyi'gank.
ftpampGlank yamnash shash shewana brimjiny the heads home he yave

them to them, 90, 8.
hu'ktag hfdlatchi'iyank pakak«'ilank piiksli uutolala h'llukshtat the little

one ran back and forth, and, jerkiny off the pipe, swuny it into th:.firc,

96, 16.
g6knan Mii-ukV. yo out and close the door ! }lod.

Instances of its use may be found on almost every page of the Texts.
Compare, e. g., the passages 22, 16; 34, 13; 42, 7; 71, 7; 109, 4.

The use of this participle as a usitative ami imperative form has been
alluded to severally; cf. pages 580, 581. A similar form is produced when
the finite verb of a sentence is supplanted by the present participle, as in :

tchl aha lu'itokt gelo'lank shewat^astka thus they dismounted there at
noon-time, 19, 10.

USES OF PAUTICIPLBS.

593

na'dshak hAk Inshiu'ikshlauk rv'inukiimtchaali onhf one consorted (at tlmt

time) ivHh Kmi'tkamtch, iff), 1 1.
mo-6wo Inlnk hiltiipGnan a mole ran punt Mm, 127, 1.

2. Tiio participle in -fko and the morpholocry of its HufRx has boon pro-
viouHly doHcribed (pages 378 sqq., 408, 447, 451), and it remains now to
exemplify its syntactic uses more extensively. I call it past participle, from
its prevailing application to past facts or conditions, but it may designate
the present tense also whenever it forms verbal adjectives or is used in a
possessive sense. In its origin, it is neither active nor passive exclusively,
and when forming derivatives from intransitive verbs it is neither the one
nor the other. In its nominal inflection, wo find not only the simple case-
forms, but those of the secondary nominal inflection as well, and it is
attributively and predicatively conjugated with the noun it cpialifies.

With the auxiliary verb gi, in all its various verbal forms, the participle
in -tko forms a periphrastic conjugation, and this is especially the case
whenever the participle is used passively or is formed from an intransitive
verb. The gi then assumes, so to say, a demonstrative function. Thus
d-ush wetko gi means the lake is frozen, as you and everybody can see, the
result bein- visible to all; but c-ush wctko would simply mention the' fact
that the lake is frozen. Even when gt is suppressed, the form in -tko is to
be regarded as a finite verb, like the usitative form of -nk. Examples:

kt'-isham i k^gatko i/ou have been bitten by a rattlesnake.
tchl'sh ki'i-i wetk the place in the lodge did not freeze. 111, 21.

^ Whenever -tko is construed with gi in t!ie sense of the passive voice,
and the logical subject of the periphrastic form is mentioned, this subject
is placed in the jjossessive case in -am (-lam), or, if pronominal, it is i itro-
duced as a possessive pronoun. Possessive particii)les ending in -altko,
-tko must be considered as circumscribing the participle gitko possessed of,
and are construed like this, the object possessed or worn being then con-
tained in the word itself Steinshaltko, "having a heart", is equivalent to
stefnash gitko ; and miV steinshaltko equivalent to mu'nish stefnash gi'tko

magnanimous; lit. "having a great heart." In wewi^kalam sha taldshitko
38

594

(IIIAMMAU OF TlIK KLAMATH liANUUAClK.

tJicif, armed with the Uttlr arrows of the children, 123, 6, ti'ildshitko standH for
ti'ililshi j^ftko, "arrows liaving."

a. Instances of the active siqnification of-tko.
ktclii'dahr) akiilaps aliiiltfliitko a bat holdin/f a decoy-mask under ife wing;

lit. "liaviii}^ placed a decoy-niask etc." 127, 1.
hashtchi'iktclniitk carry intf (an object) in his dress, 111, 13.
hii 111 shufshaltk (gl) if I recur to mayic songs, liJO, 3.
til'ma wash Hhli'a kaliiillxapkasli he saw many coyotes dancing, 128, 8.
lilp'ni ta-unepiinta illolatko twenty years old; lit. "having completed

twenty years", 55, 20.
kesliga ki'i-i nil kii'kotko / did not succeed when I tried.
tatzC'hunpani gilggutk having crossed (the river) halfway, 123, 2.

b. Instances of the active possessive signification of-tko.

While referring to the syntactic examples to be given under "Methods
to express possession," cj. v., I anticipate here a few sentences relating to
possession, in which the object possessed is more distinctiy determined :
txt5-u pu-ip kinkanish wewor.hcltko the elder daughter has (but) a few

children; of. 85, 10.
nutoks shk'a ge-u hilpatko (for lulpaltko) or nutak shldpapka gd-utan-

tkak lulpaltko / saw it with my own eyes (stands for gd-utantka

gi lulpaltko).
tcluiydtk Yamshani nush dressed with the head of South Wind serving as

11 hat, 111, ID.
klana palpalish shlapshaltko the kldna-plant has a white flower (for pdl-

palish shlaps gftko), HU, 14. •

mbushakshaltko imse^sed of obsidian took.
tii'ma watchaltko owning many horses, 127, 9.

c. Instances of passive function of -tko.
kedsha hemkankatko when spceclics had been made for a short while 34,

16; cf. 44, 5 and Note.
mish gc'-u skutash skutiipkash you, wrapped up in my own garment, 126,

12; cf. 125, 2.

USES OP PARTICIPLES.

096

kimri'dHlmm pdtko tooth-achm/ ; lit. "eaton by tlic ant."

wdkash iiggaipksli the bone-awl which was stuck into (tho coiling), 120, 22.

tchfktcliikam luimtkiiolutko scanrd hy a wagon.

sawalktko hai'inf/ been given presents, ISfJ 7.

d. Instances of participles in -tko derived from intransitive verbs.
Many of thorn can be (listinguiHliod only with (lifficulty from tho verbal
mljoctivoH of tho Hanio torn.inal. Sour, have ovon turnod into aubstantivcH
Hl..stra..t as v.oll m concreto: k'lckatko corpse, i-utantko heavg load; strength,
k niiitchatko old man. Cf. Suffix -tko, No. f).

shloa wawakayapka-sh Ignxcs sifting upon (trees), 125, 2.

kikiiskankatk having walked about, 24, 20,

("nil) hatokt gatpantk / was going there, 140, G.

p'gi'sh h'llatko, shaslii'iniok-s lolatko bereaved of mother, relatives; lit. "tho

mother, the relatives having died."
gful;fa, for giul^atko, born; cf. leluidshisl., in Dictionary.

e. Instances of verbal adjretiv' s formed by -tko, -tk.
These words aro often the participles of attributive verbs, q. v. Add
to these all the comprehensive terms of relationship in -altko, as shaptd-
laltko etc.

sa-ulankankatk (his)yo//ower5, 100, 17.

ku'mme lahu'ishaltko the hard-rock cave, 42, If).

tsm»")'k pi'luitk smelling after rotten fish, 146, 7.

homkanks tumOnatk they were acquainted tvith the language, 23, 3.

wika tt'lantko s/w>•^/rtce(/, 190; 14.

Others are: k8hni;fitko, lui;ijitko, winf;^itko superior to, surpassing; ma'
shetko, mashitk tasting like; shawfgatko irritable; tishflatko crooked; tish-
Zalkuleatko plicated; uld;^atko flexibh.

TH^ NOMINAL FORMS CALLED V ERBALS.

The various nominal forms of tho verb, called verbals, are a peculiar
feature of Indian languages, and since sonie of th.om differ in their uses
from all we know in European languages, their correct use is not an easy

^^^

&i.\

!..;,! ■

ij-

I i

686

OUAMMAU OF THi; KI.AMATII liANdUAClK.

matter to iicquiro. Tlioir function ih to oxproHs more conciHoly wliat we
convoy by our piirticiplo in -/«//, pwodcd by sonio piirticlo {/or, while, etc.),
or by iiu'idont cIhuhcs ol" lui iidvcrbiiil, coiulitiomil, or other nature. In his
use of the verbals, the Intlian is guided not only by the matter ho intondH
to oxpress, but ho will chooso one vorl)al when tlio subject of the noun-
vorb is identical with that of the verbals, and another when it differs from
this. The corresponding chapters in Morpludogy will explain nniny facts
concerning the syntax of the verbals, but the examples to bo now given
nre intended as additional contributions to teach their correct use. The
intinitive mode is here regarded as one of the verbals, and all the verbals
intlocted by case are lutre treated in ono single (chapter, with subdivisiona,
just as they wore in Morphology.

1. The infinitive.

Concorning this form, I have nothing to add to tho statements maae in
Morphology. It occurs but rarely, and shows no inHection save that for
severalty. Cf pages 409, 410.

2. The irrhal indefinite.

A. — Tho sunjECTiVE case of the verbal indefinite ends in -sh, -s (-ash,
-ish), atul possesses no exact etpiivalent in tho English language, though
wo may define it as occupying a middle positi«, ' between the verb and tho
noun. Sometimes its function is that of an abstract substantive; sometimes
it is predicative, though in most instances the English participle in -ing
corresponds best to it. Tiil'mish gc'-u, "my being hungry", expresses the
same idea -A^my hunger; hemi^ish m'na, "his speaking o/' saying", is nearly
identical with his speech.

The rules of its structure, whether used actively or passively, having
been illustrated previously (pages 323, 338, 3G8, 410-413), wo proceed to
state under which circumstances this verbal is used.

a. The verbal indefinite may stand in its subjective, uninflected, case
as the subject of a sentence, governing a verb, but not being governed by
any verb whatever — or, as forming u phrase, which has to be rendered by a
subordinate clause in English.

VKRBAL INDKI'INITB.

597

tuA Hhh rat iM-lpolwIi ffl giti'iki! tvhat is your hmini'SH heref lit. "what

your workiiijf in lioro"f
gi'-u gi'iikiik liA'k liVgH h|)uii1'h1i the slave transferred (hpuhI'hIi) bt/ me

(i^v-u) ran ainii/, 20, 17.
kunf gi'u gc'-ii kiipa k('.-i Hliiit»'pkii HliloIztclianoliHli gc'-u ? who sjmilnl

mil coat which Itrft behind f lit. "the oiio (li(»pporl bohiiid by iiio"f
kt'dHhii kiipkii koki'Hh }rt'-u fhr pine tree f/rrtv tvhitr I climtied it, 101, 10 ;

kukuish jrc'-u would Hif,niify iiftir I had climbed it; lit. "the one

cliinb(Ml by inc beforo."
riiit k)i-i kiikiio iHh Hlr-ipfdn no-uzalp'^Hh (,'(ntiik l.ikiani lee did not return

the parjirsht's, thnui/h the (hie/ ordered us repeiilcdtif (to do ho), 21,6;

lit. "though wo wore the ropejitedly ordered ones by the chief."

h. When the verbs of teUing, thinkimj, wishini/, conceding, uud refusing
require in Knglish a .sentence to express their object or complement — which
is usually introduced by the particle that—i\m objective sentence, when not
containing the idea of a command, piu-pose, or pla?i, and havin<r the same
subject as the main verb, is expressed by the verbal indefinite. Verbs which
are construed in this maruier are shapa, sliapfya, hemL';^e, hdmta to say, to
tell, and other derivatives of hii'ma; lu'wa, slu'wa, hu'shka, hiVshkanka
(Mod. kupa), tu suppose, reflect, think; humeni, shameni, shanaholi to wish,
desire, want; shayuakta to know, tnmcna to hear, hesliegsha to complain, villa
to inquire. Cf. Verbal conditional, No. c.

kanl' shapfya, ma'lash na'lilm shuenkuiipkash ? tvho says that we intend
to kill you? 40, 18. Cf afj, 10.

kA-i nd An kanash shapftak tua mi shapfyash / shall divulge to nobody
tvhat you tell me; lit. "what was told by you", 40, 11.

gitd nil gi'itpa kiiila shc'shatuish hamenii'iga wanting to sell lands, I came
to this place.

t4tank itdk shewanash ham'nian ish, shpunkAnktak nil wiishmush / will
sell you the cow for what you like to give me. Mod.

ndl-ul6zApkash muklaks shanu-uli nelinash after he fell, the Indians at-
tempted to scalp him, 42, 15. Cf 35, 11. 18; 36, 10; 42, 19.

■■1 ■

598

GRAMMAR OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

Tchmfl'tcham tdlaak slilepakii.'ipkasli shayudkta he knew that hj Frank
Riddle lie wotdd he protected with Jiniiness, 36, 12. 15.

lakf hesWgsha E-uksliikfshflm ktclii'iiksli pen pAllash the chief com-
plained that the Klamath Luke Indians hail again stolen tlieir rails,
35, 17.

liJwitchta Canby wjitch shewan.dpgHsh Ca)d)y refused to return the horses,
39,12. rif. 24, 16; 3G, 13. 14.

sha'walsh tiimgna (n(l) I heard that he his slandered, 185 ; 38.

c. Another series of verbs requiring the verbal indefinite to express
their syntactic object or complement are those expressing inability, stoppu<je,
termination, exhaustion, dread, and also those indicating habit or custom. We
find, e. g., the following verbs construed with this verbal : kt'shka and
tchiina to he unahk; kelewi to cease, stop; vuna, vi'inha to finish, terminate;
kddshika to he tired, exhausted; yayaki to he afraid of; ndtu to have the prac-
tice of; kdl%a niish / am accustomed to.

kdshka nu ko'sh hishiiktgish I am unable to shake the pine tree; of. 42, 6.
kcshguga idshi'sh being unable to remove them, 38, 1.
k'lewi-uapka nat shellualsh ive will quit fighting.
vi'in'a an ge-u steginsh k'dshish / have finished knitting my stocking.
nu kddshika hdmkanksh I am tired of talking, 42, 3.
nu yA'ya'ki gukish / dread to climb up.
netu an ledshish steginsh / am practiced in knitting stockings.
kc'l;ja a n'gh unak ge-u patkalsh / am wont to rise early; lit. "rising
early by me is habitual with me."

B.-—The VERBAL INDEFINITE in -SHAM contains the possessive pronoun
sham, which is here so closely agglutinated to the verbal indefinite that
the -sh, -s of one of the two has disappeared. Sham may be either the
possessive case of sha they, or an abbreviation of hu'nkelamshani, Iiu'ksliam,
hu'nktsham, ke'ksham, or of any of the pronouns forming their plural by
means of final sha they. That sham is really a word separate from the ver-
bal indefinite preceding it is proved by the passage 23, 9: ka-i sam wil'walsh
sblfn I shot (her) because they tvould not allow (her to me), which is equiva-
lent to kd-i wii'walsham (for wewa-ulash sham, d. form of wtS-ulash, from

VERBAL INDEt'INlTE.

599

wd-ula to allow) shlfn. The logical subject contained in sham of them, their,
theirs differs from the subject of the verbal indefinite, and also from the
grammatic subject of the finite verb, on which the latter depends ; and when
the verbal indefinite is made from a transitive verb it has often to be taken
in the passive sense, for the possessive case is the case expressing the logi-
cal subject of a passive verb.

But intransitive verbs are also construed in this manner, and transitive
verbs may retain their active function, as appears from the passage quoted
on page 413. That the form in -sham always indicates a plural subject is
made apparent by the signification of the pronoun itself. This difficult
matter will appear more lucid through the following examples:

td' gdna M6atuash k'lewisham at the Pit Biver Indians went away wJien
(the Lake men) had ceased (fighting), 20, 5. Here the intransitive
k'lewish (the stoppage, the "act of ceasing") has for its subject
the Lake men, not the Pit River Indians, and this subject is re-
ferred to by -sham their, of them: "after the ceasing by them."

The following examples all contain transitive verbs:

kdhaha shlfsham he ached because they had ivounded (him), 22, 11; lit.

"he ached, being wounded by them."
liiks t'slifn spil'ntpisham a slave grew up after they had brought (him

there), 16, 14; lit. "grew up, carried off (or brought) by them" —

spfi'ntpish sham,
ndniva gaggiaha peno'dsasam some hid before their imrstiers, 17, 14: lit.

"hid, being followed by them" — by others than the subject of the

sentence,
wt'tta kilbatpfo'lsham he laughed when they uncovered (him), 24, 14; lit.

"he laughed, being uncovered by them."

C — The VEBBAL INDEFINITE in -SHTi, -8TI is of rare occurrence, and the
syntactic instance given, page 413, of its causative function shows that the
-ti found there really means about, concerning, a function which it shows
sometimes when appended to nouns. In the verbal, the additive signification
is more frequent, and examples nu}- be found on page 478. In the example

.* ?l

<
a

600

GKAMMAlt OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

quoted, page 413, the verbal in -ti does not refer to the subject of the main
sentence, but to its object.

D. — The VERBAL INDEFINITE ill -shE'mi, -SHAM is used just like an ad-
verb, and since no subject is mentioned with it, it refers to the subject of the
sentence. It points to things done during periods of time having a certain
length, and the same suffix, -emi, is frequently found appended to substan-
tives. It occurs in passages like 55,, 8. 19; 56, 1. and, from 148, 19 we
gather the information that it is capable of (combining with other case-end-
ings into a ternary case-inflection.

E. — The VERBAL INDEFINITE in -siii, -SI is remarkable for combining a
temporal with a locative function, and for placing its nominal or pronominal
subject, which dijff^i'rs from that of the maiii sentence, into the objective case.
It refers to a distinct place or spot where, and to a certain moment when
something occurred, and not to a longer lapse of time, like -she'mi.

ni liA'tpa hfhassuaksas hc4,tokt liuku-isi (for liukayasht) iy running I

reached the men while they locre (/athered there, 22, 4.
tsi'ii hutapgno'lshi n's nayens shli'n pii'n nil'sh then, after I had arrived

there running, anothi r (man) was shot in the Imid, 22, 1 1 ; n's (for

nish me) being the subject of hutapCno'lshi.
nats a gt^pksi (for nalash a gi'pkash i) at shlii'pka Sa'tas ivhen ive arrived,

they (the soldiers) saw the Snake Indians, 29, 19; cf. Note.
siin6tanksi nat sash gatpa while they fought, tvc reached (them), 29, 20.
Sa't huk tc'wi gatpankshkshi (for gatpankshkasii i) hu'nk wats the

Snakes fired at him ivhen he had almost reached the horse, 30, 4. 5,

and Note,
nat guhi'ishktcha shewat;(ii'lsi we started in the afternoon, 24, 6, and

Note.

F. — The VERBAL INDEFINITE in -SHTKA, -sTKA, wliicli I call verhul desid-
erative from one of the uses to which it is applied, connects itself with all
the inflectional forms of gi to he, but is found almost as often without these,
and then has to be considered as incomplete, as stated pages 413 sq. But
when the form -shtkak occurs, the form is complete, for the final -k represents
the abbreviated -gi. Whenever this instrumental case -tka is appended to

VlillBAL INDEFINITE,

601

the verbal indefinite of transitive verbs, it expresses a desire, a wisJiinff or
cmvim/for, a temlency loivard, an attempt; but when appended to the verbal
of intransitives, it has to be rendered by being on the point of, goimj to he.

Concerning their syntactic use, we liave to distinguish whether verl)als
in -shtka are used like finite verbs, independent of any other verb, or are
governed by another verb.

1. When used indcpcndenlln of any other verb, this verbal is not in-
flected, except through the auxiliary gi to be, and is hence to be compared
to the usitative form in -nk, -n (-ank, -an) referred to pages 408. 580 sq.
Tiie subject noun or pronoun joined to it and the substantive verb gi,
whether added or left out elliptically, gives it the predicative power of a
finite verb.

nanka A'-ukskni lilgsalshtkak, nanxa sfukshtkak some Klam-fli Lake men
wanted to make a slave of him, others to kill (liim), 24, 16; cf. 17.

shnu'kshtkan na'sh siwak hil'nk / ivant to seize this one girl, 23, 8.

na'sh shnuktsastkak hii'iik watch one (man) attempted to seize that horse,
30, 2.

tsui sa sakatpampelt'astka gi then they desired to have a horse-race, 20 14.
hii hil't mish piin shli'shtka gi'uapk // he should attempt to shoot at you
again, 110, 4.

2. "When governed by another verb standing in the same sentence, the
subject of the verbal desiderative is also that of the finite verb governino- it,
as appears from the following:

kek6-uya shiillkishxe'ni geshtga giil'ga he attempted repeatedly to go to

the reservation, 65, 11.
nanka ka-i shcwanat pash shi'ukshtka giug others gave (him) no victuals

desirous of starving (him) to death, 6G, 10. i:
hulladsluii woka K'mukamtchash pa'ksh pakakuleshtka the little boy ran

toward K'miikamtch, desirous of jerking off (from his neck) the toljacco-

pipe, !(0, 14.

There are a few forms of tlie verbal indefinite in our Texts which in-
dicate the existence of other case forms of this verbal than are mentioned

I'-

I h

•III

C02

GKAM3IA11 OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

above. Thus I may refer to the objective case of the distributive verbal
of shemtchal^a to discover, find out, in 65, 3: la n! v^^ak nii'-ulaktanuapk
sheshaintsal^fshasJi hil'nk / do not know how to proceed against (her), who has
(or for having) discovered every part of it. Another passage contains the
emphatic adessive case-suffix appended to the verbal of spuka to he prostrate:
spfi'ksksaksi where the (man) lay extended, 24, 19. An uncommon peri-
phrastic form is .also kedshnutash kin / was growing all the ivhile, taken from
a Modoc text. As soon as more parallel forms are gathered, it will be
possible to investigate all the uses to which these new forms are put.

3. The verbal conditional in -sht.

This verbal ending in -sht, -st undergoes no inflectional change, and in
the majority of instances lias to be rendered in English by a clause depend-
ent of the main sentence. It enunciates the cause, condition, circumstance,
or time of the act or state which is mentioned in the principal clause; its
subject necessarily differs from that of the finite verb of the principal sentence.
Whenever the noun or pronoun of the verbal conditional is mentioned,
which is done in the majority of instances, it is preceding or following the
verbal in tiie objective case, as it does with the verbal indefinite in -shi, q. v.
Since cause or condition for an act or state necessarily precedes in time the
act or state itself, our verbal differs in its temporal relation from the sub-
jective case of the verbal indefinite by referring more frequently to the past.
There are sentences in wliich we have to render it by the English past,
the perfect, the pluperfectj and otiiers where the English present and even
the future is in place.

a. Verbal in -sht in a causative function. One of tlie more frequent uses
made of this verbal is to express causality or condition for the performance
of an act, and, as the ending -t shows, the conditional fnnction gave to this
form its origin. The difference between it and the suffix -oga, -ok, -uk,
when indicative of cause, lies in the subject of the two — when the finite
verb and the verbal have the same subject, -uga is the form to bo used;
when both differ in their subjects, the verbal in -slit has to step in.

VERBAL CONDITIONAL.

603

From the large number of instances which could be extracted from our
Texts, I select what follows:

tsTi'ks kd-usht tchekele kfuks (tkal when a leg is fractured, the conjurer
dratvs the (infected) blood out, 71,8.

nde'-ulzan shUi-ank liA'nkt layfpakst (for layfpkast) / let mi/self dotvn,
perceivimj that he had (his gun) pointed at me, 30, 13.

sawfka watch ni'na mba-utisht he became angry because his horse had
been shot, 1 9, 9.

ki'i-i gd-isht, tpudshi'mtak ! if they do not go, expel (them)! 37, 2.

hushts(')xa sha kiuksas k'k'kslit hu'nk snawt'dsliash they killed the con-
jurer, since this woman had died (bewitched by him), 69, 1.

shawigank k'lepgi' kekewt'laksht shash hemt';^e angered at their having
toasted red paint she said, 121, 2.

shapfya ka-i tchu'leksh patki, shpaiitish itampkash gi'sht he told (them)
not to eat of the meat, poison having been j)ut on it, 13, 17.

The following examples refer to causalities and conditions of the main
act, which can „.. xulalled in the future only:

Skelamtch nteyakalfya, m'na unakag mil'ak t'shi'.sht Old Wea'cl made

little bows for the time tvhen his boy ivould have groivn taller, 109, 13.
M(5atuash m'luV ki'i-i li'iela sk(j tchiiilasli tchuka k'le-ugtki-uapkasht the

Pit River Indians do not kill the grouse in spring, unless the salmon

tvould cease to come up stream, 135, 3.
pfi'tank nalsh k'lekuapksht (our mother forbid us to dive in the

water) lest we might smother and die, 120, 6; cf. 120, 2. 4.

More instances may be found in Texts 13, 4. 7; 55, 17. 120, 17.

b. Verbal in -sht in a circumstantial function. This verbal is often em-
ployed in sentences not purely causative or conditional, nor strictly tem-
poral, the act expressed by the main verb showing a connection with that
of the verbal, wiiicli recalls a very distant causal nexus, and as to time
generally precedes tlie latter. The term "circi'mstar.ial function" will
hence be found acceptable.

G04

'GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

p'laitalkni nd'sh shlii'popk hii'mkankst God observes me as I speak, 64, 12.
Agency tchi'ii gi'pksht tapi' ti'ta shash, ktiugfulank k/i-ishtish they hav-
ing a while after gone to the Agency he kicked the door open, 6G, 12.
ndiuli'iksht ni'sli fln tiVmi ginti'ltak after I have fallen, many will lie under

(me), 40, 5.
Aishisli shataldi'ldamna gukCna'ta, atf at kiliMiisht Aishish, tvhile climb-
ing up (the kapka-tree), steadily looked down until it had grown high,

95, 3. 4.
sha kil-i slii'ktgisht tvVshkansha kA'mfitat as she did not stir, they two ran

out of the cave, 122, 4.
hVluksh shpftcht (Mod. for sphchaslit) when the fire has gone out, 85, 10.
Afshish pa'ksh ke-uliilapka nadshpakslit Aishish pushed the tobacco-pipe

into the fire until it was burnt, 96, 17.
t<i' sal^i'ta snawt'dsli ge-u shillalsht over there my wife lies bewitched,

having fallen sick, 68, 1. 2; cf. 9.
kelekApkash itpand'pkasht (for itpanuapkasht) until the corpse is

brought; lit. "will be brought", 85, 3.
ndd pil'ktgist gakiamna when it dawned, tve surrounded (them), 21, 14.

We may classify under this heading such adverbial locutions as humasht
thus; humasht g\^\\i in this manner, hence, therefore; lit. "having done so";
wiikgisht? whyf lit. "how acting"? "how having been"! psheksht (for pshe
gisht) at noon-time, etc.

c. Verbal in -sht in a temporal function. A purely temporal use of this
verljal is not observed so frequently in our Texts as other uses, but the fol-
lowing examples suffice to prove it: .

ketchkanidnash o' gisht wt'ngga they (his parents) died when he was an
infant, 56, 21. Cf 55, 7. 56, 2.

K-ukshikni tutent'pni wait(')lan kek'ksht vflmi' the Klamath Lake Indians
bury on the fifth day after death, 85, 1.

kflyutch tua kii'sh me-isht, (she filled her basket) before (She-
Grizzly) had dug any ipo-bulbs, 118, 4. 5.

tut nanuk ni'kualksht the teeth having all fallen, 80, 2.

kAyu ktotchasht nu shtflta hn'nksh before it rained I sent him away.

VERBAL rUETEIlIT.

605

d. Verbal in -sU after certain verbs. Sentences expressing the direct
object of tlie verba of kuptvintf, bdievm/, hearing, speaking, inquiring, and
others mentioned on page 5!)7, are rendered by the verbal indefinite in -sh;
l)nt when they refer to causes, conditions, or circumstances of the act, and
especially when their subject differs from that of the main verb, the verbal
in -sht is employed, and the verbal in -tki, -tgi, if a purpose or order, com-
mand is mentioned.

Ifl'la washam pakluipkash k'li'kuapksht tchek they believe that tvhen the
coi/ote howls they (other Indians than tliemselves) will die, 133, 2.

tsf n sayuakta ti'na Mc'jatuashash sellualst (shash) thus I know that they
(the Lake people) have once fought the Pit Bivcr Indians, 20, 21.

tiimi hii'nk shdyuakta hil'masht gisht tchutl'sht many know it, that (the
conjurer) has cured (patients) in this manner, 73, 8.

shemtchiilza hu'nk, tawi'sht Dr. Johnash k'lekc^pkash she discovered that
Dr. John had bewitched the deceased (man), 66, 1.

Afshish ti'imgna shtut;ijishalsht pish hlihika Aishish heard that his wives
had tveptfor him in mourning. Mod.; cf 3d, 20.

vii'la: "tam tatakiash shle'sht"! she asked tvhethcr he had seen the chil-
dren, 122, 18 (indirect question).

ni'sh 8a liiwii'-illa hu'kuapksht they did not allow me to run across, 22, 5.

4. The verbal preterit in -uish.

This verbal shows, in its function, considerable analogy with abstract
substantives and the nouns in -uish in general, but differs from them by its
lack of case-inflection. It refers tc acts or states belonging to the past, and
the subordinate clauses by which we express its bearings have to be worded
in our past or pluperfect tense; discontinuation of the verbal act is not
always implied by its use. When the gra:mmatic subject of the verbal is
expressed by a substantive or personal pronoun, it stands in the objective
or possessive case: if by a possessive pronoun, in the objective case. It
sometimes differs from the subject of the finite verb in the sentence.

1. Wlien the object or complement of the verbs of telling, announcing,
thinking, replying, hearing, and others enumerated on page 597, consists in a

1 !

■ft;'

-1 r

606

QRAMMAU OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

clause belonging to the past tense, this clause is expressed by the verbal in
-uisli, then often equivalent to one of our substantives.

mAklaksh kA-i k<')pa tft'sh p'ndlftni ki'i-i gfwisli the Indians did not think

that theif did wrong then, 38, 1 7, Mod.
at gatpanipdan shapfya (sha) niiiklaksam hemki'inkuish after they had

returned, they reported what had been said by the Indians, 40, 6.
Dr. Thomas shapfya p'ni'i shenolakui.sh Dr. Thomas informed (him) what

he had agreed upon, or of his compact, 41, 13.

2. When the verbal in -uish does not form the object or complement
of the finite verb in the sentence, it may stand as introducing a causal,
temporal, or oiiier circumstance belonging to the statement, and has usually
to be rendei'ed in English by an incident clause, not by a substantive. In
many instances, this incident clause contains a pluperfect, and the verbal is
accompanied by : at or some other temporal particle.

tapftan gakiuluish at, ham6asha luYnk after they had gone (underground),
she called (the children). Mod.

hiimasht-ak i tsukuapk kliikui'sh glut nu'sh you shall perish in the same
manner as I have perished, 64, lu.

shi!iina sha k'lekuish tutfks m'nalam when he had expired, they sang tchat
each had dreamed, 6.5, 20.

klekuish at, snawedsh gi ivhen he had died, the woman said.

tilnkt shfiidsham gc'nuish maklak.s shuenka hii'nk finally, after the sol-
diers had retreated, the Indians killed the (wounded) ones, 38, 2.

killflga k(')ltam genuish after the otter has left, dust is rising, 166; 24.

wi'wal'hag ktanhuish shutuyakit'a ankutka the young antelopes bombarded
(her) with sticks, after she had fallen asleep, 122, 3.

li'nagin shasli gonuish hfi'ksha gatpa long after their departure (from the
cave), they reached (Old Crane's home), 122, 16.

5. The verbal caitsadve in -uga.

The suffix -uga, -oga is one of factitive verbs, and implies localization
(1) within, or (2) on the surface of some object. But when -viga is used for
inflectional purposes, its function becomes an abstract one. It assumes the

VEUIJ.VL CAUSATIVE.

607

power of designating either the came of an act or state — a function probably
originating from the one given above, "on the surface of"; or it may des-
ignate a temporal relation to the verb of the sentence — a function proceeding
from the original locative signification within, imiilc* The causative func-
tion of -I'lga largely prevails in frequency over the tomporal one, wliicli we
have to indicate by when in rendering the verbal by a subordinate clause.
The grammatic subject of the verbal is the same as that of the governing
verb; if the subjects of both were not identical, the verbal conditional would
stand instead. Cf. page 415.

1. The verbal in -tiya designates the natural or logical cause of tiie act
or state pointed out by the finite verb of the sentence. In English it has
to be rendered by /;/-, to, in order to, because of, on account of, or other par-
ticles of the same import.

shapfya tua gatpamnoka he told what lie had come for, 34, 1.

gdna sha mbushant mu-idshuk ka'sh next day they went to dig ipo-bulbs,

118, 6.
nad gelo'la pa-uk ive dismounted for repast, l!), 7.
tchilii'l;(a sha tchiilGks mbushant tcho'k pa-uapkuk tliey saved the meat

in order to eat it next morning, 119, 16.
n<i gonuapk ne'gsh ma'lam p'gfsha haitchnuk / shall start to search for

your absent mother, 119, 19; cf. 122, 17.
weka ku-isht'-uk hAlladshuiti'mma p'luksha ni'na the little boy, being full

<f joy, ran up to his grandfather and back again, 9G, 13.
tatktish fshkuk kiuks haushiia ma'shish in order to extract the disease, the

conjurer sucks at the patient, 71, 5. 6.
tunip ]mshts(');ij sheno'tankok they killed fire men when fighting.
nfshta hii'ma mu'kasli iyS\!ty,vk when the otvl predicts (misfortune), it hoots

all night long, 88, 6.

Compare also the passages 77, 3; 122, 5. 10; 123, 3; 136, 1. The
connection of this verbal with sG'gsa, in 20, 9, is rather unconmion

2. The verbal in -liga points to the time or epoch of the act or state
mentioned by the finite verb of the sentence. In some instances, the causal

* We have a parallel to this iu the Creek language, where -(}fa, -dfan moanB viithin, inside of,
when appended to nouoH; while, during, when suffixed to verbs.

608

(iUAMMAU OF TIIK KLAMATJI LANtJUAOj!;.

if .

•tl 11

•4 m

Ji -!'

relation is still apparent, together with thd temporal one, while in otherH tho
relation is ;v purely temporal one. Cf. the verbal in -Hlie'mi.

tiVm watch (tpa wa liA'nk lu'gs sesatiit'tknk thctf brought home manif horses

when returnuKj from the sale of shires, 20, 111.
sha-amoJ'^sh hadaktna geno'ga kta-i uutolfi'ktcha when a relative passes

that spot, he throws a stone upon it, Sf), If),
ht'mkankatchna gcnuk she said repeatedly while walkint/, 121, 19.
mbawa stefnaah nft'dshnuk (one) heart exploded while Jli/iiifj off, 114, 4.
wewanuish tchl'mma-uk tinkanka women, when plai/in;/ the telimmd-ash

game, run bach and forth, 80, 7. Ct'. also 105, lU.

6. The verbal durative in -uta.

This terminal is forming, when derivational, durative, usitative, and
instrumental verbs, but when inflectional it t'ultillH one fiuiction only, and
remains unchanged. This function is to express an act or condition which
lasted or occurred while the act of the finite verb by which the verbal is
governed took place. Thus the ending -uta corresponds to our while, or,
when nouns are xised to render it, to our durin//, peiiding. The subject of
the ma;u verb has to be identical witii that of the verbal.

tcliaki hunk simaktchota pan the lioi/ ericd and ate at the same time.
shle-uta nn mish showant a when I Jind it I will yire it to you.
ku'tagsh stu'kapksh gc'ilaliniHa (him) who was giyyiny minnows while

skirting the water, 122, (i.
shlii-otak (for shlii-ota ak) A-ukskfsas ti'nsna at the mere sight of the

Klamath Lak.t Indians they Jled, 1 f), ;$.
yamatalri gonuta shushti'dshna during his journey to the north he created

them, 103, 3.
genuta shuaktcha Shashapamtch Old Grizzly wept while walking, 121, 18.

Different forms of the durative verbs express exactly the same thing as
the verbal durative does, but have to be kept asunder grammatically, bo-
cause tlve former inflect, while the latter do not. Even the present partici-
ples in -nk, -n have to bo distinguished from the verb.al, though the Modocs
use -utan and Klanuith Lakes -I'llank as frequently as -uta, and in the sf ne

VERBAL INTKNTIONAL.

609

sense * Inflected forms of -uta mostly belong to instrumental, not to dura-
tivo verbs.

Tftak kishknnk.itank shluyakf-fi TiUik whistlrs while ivalkin;, about.
ka'lsh kule.)tauk ki' nak (m jrj' the badger, while entering (his den), makes
nak, nak, 185; 43. Cf. «3, 2.

7. The verbal intentional in -tki.
Identical in form, and almost alike in its purport with the exhortative
form of the imperative mode, is the verbal in -tki, -tgi. Unlike other ver-
bals, its subject is either that of the finite verb of the sentence, or ditters from
it, and in the latter case the subject of the verbal, whether nominal or pro-
nominal, stands in the objective case. The function of the verbal in -tki is
to indicate purpose, intention, order, or command. Whenever the verbs, which
usually connect themselves with the verbal indefinite to e.xpress their gram-
matic or syntactic direct object (page .5!)7) introduce a statement expressing
the intention or command of somebody, they are followed by this verbal.
'H.erefore it is but natural that verbs sug-esting a command'or iiijmwtion,
as shAtela, ni^-ul;fa, tpewa, are accompanied by this verbal in the majority
of instances. The verbal is in many instances followed by some inflec-
tional form of the auxiliary verb gi, especially by giuga, abbr. gfug Cf.
also what is said in Morphology, pages 416, 417.

a. Examples in which the subject of the finite verb is the same as that
of the verbal:

I'wam luitki n's Idwitchta ii they refused to give me tvhortkberries, 75, 10.

gatpa na tchek.^di vudsho^alkitki we came here to wipe off the blood, 40, 16.

nal shguyuen mill shutiinktgi he sent iis to conclude peace with you, 40, 15,

ka-i ml shanahule nilsh sha-ukaktantgi J rfo not wish to be blamed.

h. Examples in which the subject of the finite verb differs from that of
the verbal. Tiie subject of the verbal is sometimes mentioned; at other
times, not:

ka-i tclulieksh patki shapiya he told (them) not to eat any meat, 13, 17.
alAhia K'miik;'imts kokantki ^mg Kmiikamtch showed (him) the pine tree
(he had) to climb, 100, 6.

• Mention was made of them iu this connection on page 41ti.

^B^^WP

610 OUAMMAU OF TIIK KLAMATH LANOUAOR.

kA-i wt^-ula jruHtki hit <,'fiij,' I <'« «»' «'^"«' ("nyl^oily) ^^ ^'*^^^'
p'gfslmp nalain ka-i shiuiuhulo lu'ilsh Hliiilullulratki gdig our mother does

not leant us to jump dou-n (from tho hn\<i;()), l-*(), 1.
lakf ki'i-i Khanii-nli k(-ukHliAsh snawt'dMluwh sliiukatgi the chief did not

desire that the eonjurer should kill {t\m) woman, 41, fi.
lakf kA-i E-ukshikf.sliasli ti^'wa tala showaiiutki the agent did not order

the Klamath Lake men to paif monei/, S't, 13.
shdtC'la 8naw('(lHliasli lutatkatki pfsh he hired a woman to interpret for

him, l.'(, 11.
Kmukamtch lu'-ulxa paplishash gftki gfug Kmukamteh resolved that a

dam should come into existenee, !t4, f).
Skii'lanitch whtulf ta'pia in'na (ktchatki gdig kmiV Old Weasel told his

younger brother to obtain skull-eaps, 10!), 2. 3.
p'ni'i muklaksliasli hi'iishga ku-i nanuk slu'ildshash shuc'nktgi he enjoined

his men not to kill all the soldiers, .')6, (J. 7.
hAn ml shutc'-uapk snawrdshash kil'sh meftgiug 1 shall create woman to

dig the ipo-bulb.

RECAPITULATION OF TIIK VERBALS.

Of all tho morphologic forms of tho Klamath vorb, and tho verb of
many other Indian langu-ges, the verbals show the greatest difference when
compared with tlie parallel forms in the modern literary tongues of Europe.
Only by grasping the real meaning of tho verbals can wo expect to come to
a full comprehension of tho Klamath noun-verb. There are several other
categories which the genius of that upland language has incorporated into
the verb almost as constantly and regularly as the categories expressed by
the verbals— e. g., that of completion (-ola), repetition (-pf'li), motion toward
(-ipka), motion away from (-apka). But since these suffixes are forming
verbs with an inflection separate from that of tho simple verb, these verbs
have to be considered as derivational, not as inflectional forms, and find
their proper place in the List of Suffixes. Tho verbals of Klamath are few
in number and remarkal)ly well-delined in their functions, easy to handle
on account of their lack of inflection and their laconic brevity. If we count
the six case-inflections of the verbal in -sli as separate verbals, the whole

VERBALU UKCAIMTDLATBD.

numbor of verb.ilH amountH to twelve. Tho vorbaln of tlio majority of hucIi
tmiiHitivo verbs as can asHutno a direct object may be UHod in a paHsive Bonso
also.

The verbal in -hIi, -s is tho only Klamath verbal Hnscoptiblo of inflec-
tion. Whenever tho fonnH in -uirth hIiow marks of iiiHection, they are .snb-
stantivoH, and not verbals; when tho foinis in -iifya, -uta are inflected, they
are verbs, and not verbals. The case-forms of the verbals in -sh are not
inflexible; -sho'mi, when it turns into a subjective case, cannot any longer
be considered as a verbal.

Tho verbals which are poriphrastically conjugablo by means of the
substantive verb gi to be and its various inflectional forms, are those in -sh,
-ahtka, -tki.

The subject of the verbal has to be identical with the subject of the
finite verb of the sentence in the case of -sh, -she'mi, -shtka, -.'iga, -I'lta. It
has to diff-er from it in the case of -sham, -shi, -sht. The subjects of both
may difler or not differ in the case of -shti, -tki. Whenever the subjects of
both differ, the subject of the verbal stands in the objective case, whether
nominal or represented by a personal pronoun. When the verbal -sh is
used in a passive sense, its nominal subject stands in the possessive case,
its pronominal subject in the jiossessivo form of the pronoun.

Causality is expressed by the verbal in -liga; occasionally by those in
-sht, -shti, -tki.

Duration is expressed by the verbals in -uta and -she'mi; sometimes
by those in -sh and -uga.

Tense is expressed by various verbals— the present by -sh, -she'mi,
shtka; the past by -uish, -sht; the pluperfect by -sh, -sht; the future in
some instances by -tki. But this does not exclude that these verbals may
be used to mark other tenses besides the ones specialized here.

THE DISTRIBUTIVE FORM.

In the earlier periods of the Klamath ia.iguage the category of number
in the noun and noun-verb did not appear to the natives as being of much
importance. This is proved by the fact that there are different ways to
express number, and in the noun-verb all seem to be of recent origin, with

'•f

612

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE,

•*»

the exception of that by which a change of radix is brought about in the
intransitive verb. Had number been of great value to the natlv^e mind, it
would have been expressed by the same granunatic form throughout. This
was done, however, concerning the category of severalty, for which only
one form exists, though this one form is applied in many different ways.
This feature is the distributive syllabic reduplication; it pervades the whole
language, down to the postposition and some adverbial particles. The same
grammatic form which in Pima, Opata, and other Nahua languages expresses
a plural, reappears here, in the Selish and Malayo-Polynesian dialects, as
pointing to severalty or distribution, sometimes involving the idea of cus-
tom, frequency, repetition, or that of a gradual process. In the verbs of
the Aryan family, it once fulfilled the function of marking a preterit tense.
Whenever we see intransitive and objective-transitive verbs used in the
distributive form, we naturally expect that the subjects of the former and
the direct objects of the latter should assume the same form. But the Indian
does not always apply our Aryan ideas of syntactic congruence to his own
speech; his syntactic views are rather of the incorporative order, and what
is expressed by one part of a sentence applies to the whole sentence, for it
is needless to repeal a grammatic fact previously stated. Thus the idea of
severalty, and also that of plurality, when pointed out by the verb, will
hold good for the governing or governed noun also, and needs no repetition.
When adjectives are joined attributively to substantives or pronouns, the
same incorporative principle applies to the case-forms and the distributive
forms, as shown in Morphology. But there are some other reasons of a
more stringent nature which, at times, prevent the use of the distributive
forms in one of the syntactic components. They are as follows:

When the verb of the sentence is an intr.msitive verb, showing the dis-
tributive form, its subject will usually show the same form when animate,
and the absolute form when inanimate; but when ^he verb is transitive and
shows the distributive form, the object will stand in the absolute form if
only one object has been acted upon, or if the object is a collective noun,
and in the distributive if each object has been acted upon separately.
But when there are many subjects acting all at once, we have to expect the
subject either in the plural or in the distributive form and the verb in the

USE OF DISTRIBUTIVE FORM.

6l3

absolute form, and this would agree with the real function of the distribu-
tive form, as developed on previous pages of this Grammar.

Sometimes the distributive form, in the noun or in the verb, is a pho-
netic impossibility, and then some analytic means liave to be employed.
Personal and some other pronouns do not possess the distril)utive form.

Thus we obtain three possibilities for the use of the distributive form
in the sentence:

1. The verb alone assumes it.

2. The subject or object alone assumes it.

3. Both verb and noun assume it.

While the two first modes of construction are frequently met with, the
third one is decidedly the most unfrcHiiient of all. Syntactic instances for
all three are as follows:

1. Distributive reduplication applied to the object or subject alone:

wfwalag vii'la shaslu'ishapkash the young antelopes ashed the bear cubs,

119, 23.
kd-i hunk viisa tumd maklaks kakakn61atk gfug each being armed with

parfleshes, they ivere not afraid of many wen (attacking them), 17, 4.
tatAla hdmkank i! tell the truth in every instance!
tanna i wewdash gitk! how many children have youf
nga'-isa sha wcValiiks pfla they shot the old women only, 28, 3.
lelah6witko watch wu;^6yi he traded slow horses, 189; 8.

2. Distributice reduplication applied only to the verb:

ti'imi shtina'sh nenalxa many houses were burnt, Mod.

kiikii'gi a n'sh tchO'ks / am lame in both leys.

tsiii ni shlfn iuVnk, kat hiik yu'ta then I wounded the one who tvas shoot-
ing continually, 23, 1.

suashuala Sa't hunk kta-i the Snake Indians piled up stones, 30, 9.

wakaitch gfug nii'g til'm haktcli shiip6sh shushAta? why did the absent
(mother) mahe so many moons f 105, 7.

Kii'kakilsh ydmatalil geniita shilshtt'd.shna he created the bearded men at
different times {or places) when he had gone north, 103, 2.

614

GRAMMAB OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

|sai

ndkushzenkni ahti'ya shishi'dsha each of the men living at the dam put

pitch on his, head, 1 32, G.
M(iatuash iWhonu'itchna (for =hulnitclina) the Pit River Indians raised

their war-cry while running, 23, 15.

3. Distributive reduplication observed in ilie noun and verb:
kek wa-utchaga titadshi gi these dogs are faithful.
gek shash shfuslmak a pep^wa these girls tcash each other.
sa luVnk lu'luags wJi'k slmushnezf^nk shniksbulza seizing the captives hy

the arms, they made them dance, IG, 12.
wfwalag tu'shkampCle the young deer were running out again, 120, 12. 15.
tchitchdluish kiiitala young fellows are walking about, 18G; 52.
at gakiAmna slilishloWlan then they surrounded (her), eachjcocking his gun

41, 3, Mod.

METHODS OF EXPRESSING POSSESSIDN.

There is no exact equivalent in this language for our verbs to possess,
to oivn, to have ; and with the verb gi, which is chiefly used to express pos-
session, the logical subject is not identical with the grammatic subject. The
different methods in use to express this idea are the following:

1. The substantive verb gi to be, when not occurring in its participial
form, gftko, requires the possessor to stand in the possessive case of a noun,
or, if expressed by a pronoun, a possessive pronoun fulfills this function.
The object possessed then figures as the grammatic subject of the finite
verb gi, and the sentence becomes equivalent to our to be somebody's. The
verb gi, or inflectional forms of it, are often dropped altogether:

kalam ge latchash? or kalam ge latchash gif who otvns this lodge? Kl.
kakiam gek shulotish? tvhose (pi.) are these garments f
tiimi malam maklaksam luldAmalaksh gi your tribe has many winter-lodges.
ude-udiilkatko ke-u wakish gi / have a streaked roof-ladder; lit. "my

inside roof-ladder is speckled", 175; 14.

And other examples on page 432.

2. But whenever the participle gitko, abbr. gitk, having, possessed of is
employed instead of one of the finite forms of gi, the grammatical subject

POSSESSION.

615

becomes also the logical subject, and the object possessed stands in the ob-
jective case. The sentence is complete only when gt is or are is added to
gitko; gt is not possessive in that case, but it represents the substantive
verb, and is frequently dropped or coalesces with the gftko preceding into
one word.

kck wAtsag mumCnish wawiikash gftko tJiis dog has long ears.

tiima ni'l gftk n.'ilam shi'p our sheep carry much wool.

wakwakli nil'sh gftko conical-headed.

ki'i-i ml shantihuli snavvedshash kokuapkash liVlp gfpkash / do not ivant

a ivife having swollen eyes, 186; 54.
(i) tiima tua gftkuapka (for gftko gf-uajika) you ivill he possessed of much

property, 182; 7.
(sha) kink.-in' smo'k gi'tk, atfnsh lak gi'tko they have a spare beard; they
wear the hair long, 90, 5. 6.

3. The idea of possession is intimately connected with that of wearing,
using, being provided with, or carrying an object, when the participial suffix
-tko, abbr. -tk, is appended to the object worn, used, or carried. This ap-
plies to parts of the human or animal body, to the organs of trees or other
plants, to manufactured articles, tools, and garments, as hats or coats, or
to domestic animals. More stress is laid on the use of these articles than
on their possession. Some of these forms in -tko are derived from a corre-
sponding verb, as kiikatko, from ki'ika to tvear a gown, but the majority are
the product of the suffixation of gftko to the noun of which they appear to
be the derivatives, and of a subsequent contraction. But as to taldshitko
j)rovided ivith small arrotvs, for instance, it would be out of place to suppose
that there ever was a verb taldsha to provide with arrotvs; the word is a
contraction of taldshi gftko "arrows having." More will* be found in List
of Suffixes, under -tko. No. 4.

kill' wash shkutatk dressed in a woodpecker mantle, 189; 6.

pi a wawakshnatk he has moccasins on.

tse-usam tsu)-iitk (hut gi) he wears a hat adorned with the feathers of the

yellow-hammer, 181; 1.
tidsha kokatk i 8hi%a you believe that you are dressed nicely, 189; 5.
wikatelantko having a short face, 190; 14.

"I .! *
-it

■i

616

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

4. Possession is also expressed by the suffix -altko, in the oblique cases
-i'llpkash, -ulpkam, under similar conditions as in case No. 3. Being deriv-
atives of real or supposed inchoative verbs in -ala, the forms in -altko do
not exactly refer to dress or wear, but to possession acquired by purchase
or otherwise, or increasing steadily, or property becoming accessible grad-
ually. The possession of mental and moral qualities is also expressed by
this verbal form. The verb gi, in its various inflectional forms, may be
added to it, but is generally omitted. Cf -altko, page 517; also page 594.

nA a tchuydshaltko (gi) / own a hat.

nCi a loloksgfshaltk I possess, cany a r>tn.

i a watchiikaltko you have a dog.

pat a wii-utchaltko (gi) they oivn horses.

hu lish snawedshash vunfpa wewesheltko (Kl. weweshaltko) this woman

has four children, Mod.
hii talaltko, ^chek ak nil tA-uni g4nt if I had money, I would go to the city.
hislmaksh hun mil talaltko this man is wealthy, Kl.
fi-ukshJkni litchlitchlish stefnshaltko ^/ie Klamath Lake people are brave;

equivalent to: E-ukshikni litchlitchlish stefnash gftko, "strong

hearts are having."

5. Among other terms sometimes resorted to to express ownership,* we
quote the following, and add their real signification: kt^liak not having, not
possessed of with the object in the objective case; shunuislu'iltko, shdtalu-
atko having property ; hashtalti'impka to manage one's property, to lord it over.

METHODS OF EXPRESSING COMPULSION.

According to the degree of compulsion which is brought to bear upon
somebody, different modes of expression will be used. If the impulse is
a more inducement ,. Ivice, or suggestion, the exhortative mode in -tki is
employed:

tche'kslg nil gatpantki let me go there after a while.

• other ways of exprossiiij? awnereliip or possession in various North American languuKes are
referred to in "American Anthropologist" of lri88, page U40.

COMPULSION.

617

kaftoks ni'sh tii-una Lgmuikshfna kdyaktgl (h(\) he ought not to pursue
me around Shasta Butte, 40, 4; cf. 54, 8.

kA-i nt'ilsh i tua shutetki kii-idslja let thou do us nothing ivicked, 139, G.

A more forcible mode of compulsion is expressed by the imperative
proper, or jussive mode. A form for it exists in both tenses— in the past-
present and in the future— and the former is of a more commanding and
purely mandatory character than the second, because it insists upon the
command being carried out at once. Often it becomes difficult to distin-
guish the declarative mode from the imperative of both tenses.

luelat hu'nksh lii't! hill ye this fellow on the spot! 190; 15.

ki'i-i nalash ko-i sluitii do not make us wicked, 139, 11.

tchdl;^' fit am i kii'dshikuk ije ought to sit down, because ye are tired.

tuni'pni i spukle-uapka ^<;e days you shall sweat, 142, 13.

tchussak at katak gf-uapk ye shall altvays speak the truth.

kflank ilt shuinuapk! ye must .sing loud!

The declarative mode of the future tense is used extensively, instead of
the imperative, to express regulations of law, practice, conunands of chiefs
or other people in authority, strong suggestive hints to compel people to
act in a certain sense, and the necessities of natural laws. The "Legal
Customs", pages 58-02 and Notes, furnish a large number of instances to
show how the future tense is employed in law regulations. This form thus
corresponds to our terms / must, I ought to, I have to, I am obliged.

ka-i i watsam tchi'kluapk wiinniki'sham do not ride the horse of another

man, 58, 11.
H-i 1 lap snavvii'daaluapk you shall not marry ttvo wives, GO, 17.
ki'i-i i shH-uapk shash douH shoot each other, 58, 10.
tumiintka shute-uapka laki the chief must be elected by the majority, 90, 3.
I n's shatuAyuapka you must help me, 75, 14.
nanuk mdklaks k'lekuapka every person must die.

POTENTIALITY, POSSIBILITY, VOLITION.
The first of these abstract terms describes the power or ability to
perform an act, or to bring on certain events or conditions: whs reas the
second points to chance, casual occurrence, or to actions that might be per-

, ;« 3 'i

0«

U i

618

GRAMMAR OF TFIE KLAMATH LANOUAOi:.

formed, or not performed, according to somebody's arbitrary choice. All
this we express by the so-called auxiliary verbs / can, I could, I may, I
niif/hf, I hope, I expect, may he, and by the particles perhaps, possibly, proha-
hly, likely. The Klamath language possesses none of these verbs, nor any
particles corresponding exactly to the English particles mentioned. Nev-
ertheless all the a1)ove ideas can bo expressed with accuracy in Klamath,
either by verbs differing somewhat in their function, or by the particle ak,
which, combined with other particles, appears as ak a, aka, aka, ka, kam
(for ak am), Wi'ik ak; their connection Avith the conditional mode in -t,
whenever it occurs, also expresses possibility. Ak is nothing else but the
enclitic particle ak, which means only, but, just, and also appears as dimin-
utive suffix; but here it appears in a somewhat different function. The
conditional mode is sufficient to express possibility and potentiality by itself
alone, without any portifle.

A. — Potentiality. Whenever/ can is used in the potential sense of /
am able in body or mind — I have the faculty to perform a thing — it is ex-
pressed by the conditional mode, by ak, ka, or by the verbal indefinite.
In the latter case, "I can ride", "I can make arrows", becomes wholly-
equivalent to "I a.ii a rider", "1 am an arrow-maker"; and when the sen-
tence is negatived ka-i is added to it. The ak may be dropped if the verb
stands in the conditional mode.

pf ak shufnt hr, she can siny; he, she is able to siny.

pf ak kii-i shuint he, she cannot, is unable to siny.

ilk a nil ka-i pc'wat / cannot swim.

kfi-i akil nu k<')kant ko'shtat / cannot climb the pine tree.

k.'i-i nu'sh shfugat tata he can never kill me (under these conditions),

96, 22. Cf 121), 7.
pil miiklaks huk shla't sku'ks only dead Indians can see spirits, 129, 2.
tarn i 8ii;fes%enfsh ;ci? can you row? lit. "are you a rower"?
ni nanukash shlil'sh ki / can see everywhere, 22, 1 7.

Whenever the ability of performing an act is negatived, there are two
verbs in Klamath expressing what we render by / cannot, kdshga (or
kn'shka, a derivative of ka-i not) and tcli.ina. IVitli of th(\'-.(' take their

I'OSSIUILITY, V(>LITIC)N.

619

verbal object in the form of the verbal indefinite in -sh (-ash, -iHli), as seen
l)reviouHly ; cf page MS.

ki'slifrji iiu shli'-ish lu'inkclam F can or could not see him; lit. "I cannot

bo a seer of bini."
pi a ki^slika nkil henic'^ish he is iinahk to speak loud.
kesliga a nu pi'iuuasb / cannot drink.
ki'shka x'Ai »A kii'kotko / did not .succeed when trying.
tchaniah uu 8;^ri'H]i gi / cannot row.
tchiinish tcliuluish giuga/or beinr/ unable to swim, Mod.

B. — /'ossibiliti/. Tlie idea of possibility, referring to acts or occurrences
pliysi(uilly i)08sil)le, or dependent u])on the arbitrary decision of men, ex-
jH-essed in Kiiglish by / mni/ or niiffht, I expect, prohahhj, possibly, and other
particles of this kind, is rendered in Klaniiith by uk, ka and their (combina-
tions with other particles, generally accompanied by the conditional mode..

liA'kt kain gatpant he may come; I hope he will come.

\ kan) gatpant yni expert to come.

ya-a ak .t. a nen / hciirre ye arc cryiny.

shift ak nu Iflhanl-sh hii ni shk'at na'sli / tvould .shoot a deer if Isaiv one.

nA akii hun shlc'a, or hflnk ak taksli An nu shU'at lean see him (if I wish

to do so).
Anii);jiinkni ak sas huslits(');{Hapk the Wasco Indians miyht kill them, 93, 7.
liil tidshf gitk maklaks, tiinkt ni ge'nt //' the people were yood-hcarted

then I miyht yo there, !)3, 9.
k'lakat n' A'nk slilfi-(')k / may pos.sihly die for haviny xeen him, 129, Fk
tchiitch ni'sa kj'i-i siugat then he may imsibly not kill me, 129, 6.

Some instances of possibility are found in Texts, page 118, 10-12; the
verb stands in the declarative mode of the future tense, for the future tense
of the finite verb has no conditional form in -t.

Two instances where the verbal conditional of the future tense is used
instead of a finite verb to express possibility are as follows:

sbuluashka tch'A'nk gitki gi: "i-i f-amnash kewe-uapkasiit" he told him
to take off his dress: "you miyht break your heads,'' Mod.

620

GRAMiMAU OF THE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

S3 •

^ I

S«^ 1

5 1

< 'I

a I

.«

»liU8hatel(5ma tt'lish, p'ria'sh ktclial;(islitka shkuklui'ipkaslit tley smear it
on their faces to preserve thcmsckes from ^os»ih\e chapping on account
of sunburns, 150, H. Cf. 135, .').
C. — Volition is expressed in a similar manner as possibility, and the lan-
guage has no word equivalent to our / will It may be rendered by shana-
ho'H to wish, desire, to want, as in lOfj, 11, a verb for which the Modocs
often use ham6ni; or wo find it expressed by the future tense, when it is
equivalent to / am resolved, I am willful, or one of the above suppositivo
particles may be used. All these dirterent means are resorted to to express
volition, because the language lacks a real optative mode.

medshampc'lf-uapka nil / will remove to the former place again.

pi a nfsh tula gt'nuapk he will go with me.

ki'i-a mfsh nA ka-a ni mbushc'aluapka very much I want you for a husband,

182; 7; cf 182; fi.
nfi kam hi'tksh teli'ilit / wish to look down on it from there, 192; 4.
nfl kam tchi'k mish shleat / wish I could sec yon again, Mod.

THE OBJECTIVE RELATION.
Whenever the sentence, composed of subject, predicate, and copula,
becomes enlarged beyond this narrowly circumscribed limit, it will soon
extend in the direction of its objective relation. The intransitive verb
will complement itself by means of some indirect object. Transitive verbs
are either objectless or objective ; that is, some of them re(iuire no direct
object, some do ; and the same may be said of the impersonal verbs, lint
these three sorts of verbs may all be qualified by indirect objects, which
often correspond to the dative and ablative case, or contain locative or tem-
poral indications, or have to be expressed , , a whole sentence. This gives
origin to a compound sentence, of which another chapter will treat. But
when the object is expressed by a noun or jHonoun, no distinction is made
in Klamath between the direct and the indirect object, except under the
restriction mentioned below. Several verbs which in English require a
preposition before the object are in Klamath connected with the objective
case without postposition : kiii'la gutila to enter into the ground; Aishishash

THE DIRECT OBJECT.

621

I. An gdWshui unite yourself to Aislmh, 193 ; 11 ; spautish shnidktcha to send
.for poison, 13, 14.

The linguiHtic matter coming witln'n the scope of the objective relation
will be treated under the following headings: Object expressed (a) by a
»oun ; (ft) by a pronoun ; (c) by a verbal form. In the case of the ir.dh-ect
object the noun is often accompanied by a postposition. The distinction
drawn between the direct and the indirect object is made from the stand-
point of English, not of Klamath grammar.

THE DIRECT OBJECT.
Only transitive and some impersonal verbs can take a direct object.
I he dn-ect object, if nominal or pronominal, must be in the objective case
_ A. Nouns as OBJEcrs.-The substantives of the animate class, which
n.cludes persons, personified beings, quadrupeds, etc.; all the adjectives and
the numeral adjectives assume the terminal -ash, -sh in the objective case
whereas the substantives of the inanimate order, which comprehend all the
lower animals, plants, lifeless objects, and abstract nouns, form their object-
ive case like the subjective. The possessive pronouns have to be classed
wth the mammate order of substantives in regard to their objective case

But tins rule often becomes infringed by phonetic influences, by the
use of adjectives as attributes of nouns, and by other circumstances.' Of
tins a separate chapter gives the particulars. There are a few instances
where tho object is expressed by other oblique cases:

li'lhankshti I'tpa he brought venison, 112, 15.

nanuktuanta pepuadshnish one who spends everything.

We would expect here: li'lhankshti tchule'ks i'tpa and nanuktualash '
pepuadshnish (from puedsha to spend, throw away).

There are also instances of one verb having two or more direct objects,
commonly one to designate a person and the other or others an inanimate
thing :

skil'tash aha pallapka hfi'nksh they robbed him of a blanket
n^-iins shlfn wii'k E-ukshki'shas he had shot another (man), a Klamath
Lake, in the arm, 24, 2.

';1

■ T \
(^ I.

-3 I

622 GUAMMAU OP TUIi KLAMATU LANUUAOE.

ilkslipff/ni a hIiu shnt'ika n<Tp k'lrtkapkash «/ /At- /yrafe then scue Uic de-
ceased bjf the hand, H'i \ 0.
Afsliisliash slitdta HJiniViash he sntt Aishish njlcr a nest, f'4, 9.

One object is jH-ononiinal »m\ tin otiior nominal in :
jjA'taHli nfi'sh kiTpfja nfiHli a louse bites me on the head, 119, 8.
tfl'm shasli ngii'-isha Moatoki'sliash nur/ij of these Modoc men they

wounded ; lit. "many tliom tlioy wounded Modoc8," 21, 16.
vusso'k sas tiili'ndsa wvwmiush friffhtenrd, they abandoned their females ;

lit "them they left the women," 19, 16.

In the last two examples .shasli, as hrt'nk does in others, appears super-
fluous to us, but it does not appear so to those who speak the Khunaili
lang'uage correctly.

The regular and natural position of the nominal object in the sentence
is after the subject and before the verb.

B. Pkonouns as OB.JECTS.— When the direct object is expressed by a
personal or demonstrative, interro<>ative or relative i)ronouii, these are ;riven
in the full or syncopated, absolute or distiibutive form of the objective case.
Wiien expressed in their full form, their position in the sentence is usually
before the verb, but when the syncopated form is emj)loyed they may be
placed before or after it. Hefloctive and emphatic pronouns are dealt with
in the same manner as personal pronouns. When the direct personal or
impersonal object is expressed by a demonstrative pronoun, its distance
from the speaker, and the circumstance whether it is within his sight or
not, is indicated by the selection of the pronoun. Even the deceased are
■ referred to by special pronouns, as hil't, hu'ksht, etc. ; for it would be a sin
against the sacred customs of this people to pronounce the name by whicli
a deceased person was known during life. The above has been referred to
in numerous examples given on previous pages of tiie Grammar.

Impersonal verbs have their pronominal or personal object in the
objective case; but whether this is a direct or an indirect object in the
sense employed in the grammars of European languages is not always easy
to determine. Cf. the list of objective impersonal verbs on page 430, and
Note to 72, 1.

i i

TIIK INDIUKCT OBJECT.

623

ProiiuuiiH Horviiig to oxprosw a direct object arc HonietitneH HUpprcHsed
in tlio convorsational form of laiiguagii, whenever they can be easily 8up-
plied by tlie hearer fron» what precedes.

tHi'ii Ha hVhia<,'shi thm thvij made captives; siii)ply: shash them, 1!), 16.
Hha Hhii'iga titeif killed ; supply hiVnlcHh her, \2'A, 7.

In 40, 5 it is uncertain whetlier tiio object nish belongs t(» niliuliiksht as
direct object, or to ginti'ltak they will lie under me, as indirect object.

Reciprocal and refle<!tive verbs bear their pronominal direct object
within thoniselves, since it is embodied in the prefixes sh- and h- sh-. Long
lists of these verbs are <,'iven in this (iramniar, pages 27H, 27!), 2H[), 29(1,
42;{-42.5. The majority of the prefixes give a hint at the form, ([uality, or
iiuinber of their direct objects, l)ut tli(%se have to bo expressed by separate
words to make the reference intelligible. Thus luyrga nil means I pick
up one round object, and pe-uy('ga mani/ of them, but lewash ball or tala
dollar- eoin have to be added to determine the kind of the ol)ject or objects
which were picked up by me.

C. Vkkiih am oiuects. — Wheri the direct object is expressed by a verb,
this verb will either be the verb of a 8ei)arate sentence, and then the sen-
tence itself is in fact the object, not the verb alone; or the verb will assume
the form of a verbal indefinite in -sh or that of a verbal intentional. This
can bo done only when the finite verb of tlie sentence belongs to certain
classes, the particulars to be found under "Verbal Indefinite," pages 410-
41.'}, r)!)fi-r)n8, and "Verbal Intentional," pages 41G-417, fiOD-GlO.

These matters have been anticipated and described under "Predicative
lielation." .

THE INDIKEGT OBJECT,

Every verb may take to itself an indirect object or complement, and,
wiien the sentence requires it, two or more of those may be governed by
one and the same verb. The fact that the objective case is one of the forms
to express the indirect object and also the direct object proves that this
case is not really a grammatic or relational case, but has an admixture of a
material, or, we might say, locative function. The indirect object is in its

624

(iUAMMAK OF TIIK KI-AMATII LANdUAClK.

. 9
1

■■•m

naturo nmcli nioro varied tlmii tlio diroct object, and thiiH it requiroH differ-
ent modes oF expresHion.

A. Nouns as oiukcts. — All the Hovon ohliquo cnsoH and the five post-
position-cuHOH of the noun may serve to express iiulirect ol)ii'cts, thou;fh
some are more frecpiontly employed than others.

1. 'I'he ohjectivo rase in -ash, -sh is employed whenever the indirect
object corresponds to what we are wont to call the dative case, which is
introduced by the particles to,fot, at, in behalf of, a(jainst, or the locutions
for the bvnvftt of, to flw ilamaifc of, etc. This case also stands when an obj(!ct
or thinf,' is mentioned upon wliirh the verbal act extends ; the parts of the
human or animal body or parts of tlie dress are frequently construed after
this rule, which answers exactly to tliat of the accusative of relation in Greek
{i^rammar, and is, in fact, when combined with the accusative of the person,
nothing else but an inaninnite direct object expressed by the accusative
case. Whether we have to regard these objects, when mentioned in that
connection, as direct or indirect comiilements of the verl) it is dilHcult to
state ; but by all means this constriction corresponds to what is called the
accusative of relation, as previously mentioned

(«). Instances of a personal or animate indirect object :

hulludshui K'nu'ikamtchash he ran up to Kvuikamlch, 96, 14.

at uni'ik nii'-ulakta Afsisas then after daybreak he plotted against Aishish,

100, 1.
Boshtin jifpa mu'ni lakiash shnigota Americans sent hy mail a petition to

the President, 3(i, 21.
maklakshash wi'ishmush shiukii'shtka he tvould kill an ox for the Indians,

13, 13.
mo-<')we ktchidshuash hutnan the mole running against the bat, 127, 5.
hemta m'na tapia he said to his younger brother.
k'nukaga mi tupakshash nc'-i hand the thread to your sister.
hil a tfdsh shutankui'ipka na'lash if ye will negotiate with us, 38, 19.
hii nl skuyu'shkuapka m'sh if [ should separate (\\gy) from you, 61, 1.

(6). Instances of an inanimate indirect object; parts of the body, etc.:

shtfC shupGl6ka nCi'ss she laid resin on her head, 89, 6.

THK INDIIIECT OBJECT.

625

nA-ontlH nft'sh slilfn another man was shot in the head, 21, 18. Cf. 24, 7.
wii'k Hhmmliiif'Xiink liVluags srizing each captive by tlie arm, Hi, 12.

Cf. 24, 2.
tHiii'pnl 811 hIiKii thei/ wounded him in the shoulder, 24, 1.
huHlmata a h'hIj spi'luish I burnt myself' on </'<-' index Jinycr.
mVd nauknH)) inama'Hlia we hare sore throats.
watcliftm tcliA'lcks k'lokapkasli i'dshxa they place the horse's flesh upon the

corpse, 85, 8.
tsuyii'sli ni sliHn / was shot thrnuyh the hat or cap, l.'$8, 2.
hilnk K-ukHliik(.shaHli tclu'ik niaklakH shuta he created the Klamath Lake

people from a service-berry hush, 103, 1. 2.

Whenever the indirect object w of a temporal import, refeiring to time
or Hections of time, it is frequently expressed by a noun standing in the
objective case, as in the following instances :

kndwa pshfn, or kni'wa nanuk ps(n to put out the fishing-line for the night.

Cf. 54, G, and Note to 83, 3.
g('n waftaHh kt(')tchuapka it will rain to-day.

la'p shiippash (nu) spA'lhi / imprison {\\\m) for two months, fil, 11.
tc-uniipni ilh'jlash (sha) tula tchia they lived toyether for ten years, 54, 3.
tumr'ni illolash through many years.

2. The locative case in -tat. abbr. -ta, -at, may express the indirect
object whenever this contains a locative comj)lenient to the verb of the sen-
tence and is expressed in English by prepositions like in, into, at, on, upon,
through, towards, from, out from, out of. The ending is often dropped,
especially when the noun is attributively connected with an adjective, but
sometimes, also, when the object noun stands for itself, as in kiifla, tchpfnu
below, and tlien may be easily confounded with the objective case.

ke'kga mbfi'shan kft'metat they went out of the cave next morning, 43, 3.

la'p fshka atf kiifla two they took to a distant place or land, 44, 7.

vud'hitakut'la ktiiyat he rolled (him) over the rocks, 131, 11.

na's wfpka hA ambotat one escaped into the water, 88, 7.

shnt'l^a ti^ks hilnk tchpfnil (instead of tchpfniitat) they cremated on the

burying-ground.
40

626

(iRAMMAK OF TOE KLAISIATH LANdUAdE.

shakalshtat laki tnuniiak the tmclhak-squirrcl is most imvcrful in games
(as a charm), 134, 6.

Many other instances will be found on pages 479 sqq.

3. Besides the objective and the locative there are other cases employed
to express the indirect object of verbs : the partitive case in -ti, syntactic
instances of which were given on pages 477, 478; the instrumental case in
-tka, page 479 ; the illative and the transitional case in -zeni and -na, and
the temporal case in -omi, pages 482-485. The five case-postpositions are
all subservient to the same purpose, and when -ksaksi changes into -ksuksi
;t becomes temporal, like -emi, but refers to the past tense only.

The indirect complement of the verb is expressed just as frequently by
nouns connected with postpositions, which may be of a locative or temporal
character. When motion is implied, these nouns usually stand in the ob-
jective, when rest, in the locative, but frequently in the objective case as

well. Cf page 554.

In addition to the frequent examples of indirect objects presented in
the previous portions of the Grannnar, 1 add the following syntactic
instances, which could be multiplied ml infinitum from our Texts :
(rt). Object expressed by cases and case-postpositions :
koi shtapka ktiiyatka the if pound the hv'I-roof with stones, 147, 11.
tsi'ii sa safkiin gt'na then they icent to the prairie, 107, 2.
sluH'-ikkshtala gutoktcha fheif nrnt into the fire-plaee, 120, 20.
wayalpa nanuk wa shin everythini) froze in the lodge. 111, 20, and Note,
sta-ila sha kshune'mi they gather (it) at haying-time, 148, 3.
gt5na hiink, haftkal maklakuish gislii he then started and folloived them

to their camping-place, Mod.
(6). Object expressed by a noun and postposition :
at Afsis tu' kiilo wika't now Aishish {was) far away, almost up to the sly,

101, 6.
^-ush guni'gshta kililalfa he made a world for them beyond the ocean,

103, 5.
Kayutchish hii'k gatpa Ki'uti kiiitit Gray Wolf arrived at a place above
Kiuti, 131, 5.

Tlll<} INIHKKCT OH.IKOT.

627

klji'm mitiiyakfa niikosli gii'taiit (they) thrciv fish to the, other side of the
(lam, ],'$2, ;{. 4.

at luliilpjat ])ii)r-lantan Isli now lie. ye dnvn on each side of me, Mod.
iniuli guni'ta linwalic'fra he ran up the hill hei/ond your lodge, 1H3 ; 17.

4. Forms of tlie coiiii)o.site noiiniial inflection may be used for express-
ing indirect obje( ts just as well as the case-forms of the simple declension.
This composite inflection is either binary or ternary ; instances of it may be
found in the paradigms of substantival inflection, pages 493, 494, 495, and
syntactic examples on page 491.

H Pkonouns as oiuects.— When a personal or reflective pronoun is
the indirect object of a transitive or intransitive verb, it is usually expressed
by the objective case in -sii, -a, unless some locative or other reference re-
quires another case or the combination o*' the pronoun with some postposition.

The objective case of the personal j)ronoun may be used to indicate
somel)ody's home, house, or dwelling, just as in French rhe^ moi, chez soi.
Special forms of the reflective pronoun are those in -i, as hunitak within or
by oncficlf in one's mind; and the suffix -gien, -giank, -gianggi, formed of the
participle of gi to net, perform (gi'ank) and the above particle i; cf page .'529.

luya mish nil h'wash / r/ive you a playiny-hall.

shewana 'sh nadsluishak yire all at once to me. Mod.

ani'k tchakela ii's skai tak / send a basket to yet me somcthiny in, 75, 9.

lutatkatki pfsh shiitela he hired (her) to interpret for him, l.S, 11.

tankt mish ni skuyiVshkuapk Jinally J shall separate (her) from you,
(io, 22.

slii'bopk hu'nitak tiV sas hishd'kst he knew by himself that out there they
had killed each other, 108, 5.

kani'ta pi'sh outside of his lodge, lit. "outside of himself,'' 71, 2.

ini>ih j^wni'ta beyond your home, 18;!; 17.

'J'he indirect object of a medial verb is pronominal, and is indicated by
the medial prefix sh-, s- ; the object of some of the reciprocal verbs is an
indirect object in English, and in Klamath is referred to by the .samo prefix
sh- or by the compound i)refix h-sh-. Cf page 425.

C. OiUECT EXPRKSSFD i!V VF.UBS.— The indirect object in a sentence
may find expression in a verl), and in that case an incident clause is usually

628

(JRAMMAR OP TFIK KLAiMxVTIl LANGUAGE.

, f.1
J

formed dopendeiit on the verb of the main sentence. Tliis clause may
appear under the form of an adverbial, conditional, or other clause, and as
such will be spoken of under the hcadinji^ "(compound Sentence"; or the
verbal object appeai.s under the form of a causative, intentional, durative,
or other verbal, examples of which have been presented under their respect-
ive headings in previous parts of the Syntax.

Man}' verbs which are accompanied by a nominal or pronominal indi-
rect object figuring as a separate term have a way of pointing to that object
bv means of some sound or syllable forming an integral p>irt of these verbs.
Among these affixes we remark -in, -I'ya, a, verbal suffix pointing to an ani-
mate being for which, or in whose interest, an act is performed, and -pa, a
suffix referring to an act directed toward the subject of the verb. Cf. -c'a,
•gien, and the above two, in: List of Suffixes.

The external form of an indirect object, like that of a direct one, is
outlined by a number of prefixes, as a-, i-, 1-, n-, nu-, pe-, shl-, n-, and
others, some of these being also indicators of lumiber. To make the refer-
ence intelligible, the indirect object has to be added, and this is usually
done by means of a noun. Li'na lo trard describes travel by means of a
round object, and the phrase is complete only when we say: tchfktchikatka
k'na i you travel on a wagon, cart, or carriar/c; tkeka to perforate tvith some-
thing long, as a knife, or the hand: wutitka, ncpatka; npata, upatia to inflict
a wound with a long article, as with a knife ; w.ititka, ulii'txa to knock down
iritli a fitick or elnb. The following distinctions remind us of the six instru-
mental prefixes occurring in the Dakota language : latchaya to split with a
knife, ntchaya to split with edge and maul, patchaya to split with some tool
in hand, ntchaya to split with the long way ax or hatchet; add to this: kta-
tdu'iya to cut into strips.*

THE ATTRIBUTIVE RELATION.

After the simple sentence has become enlarged by the addition of a
direct and indirect complement to the finite verb, it can expand still further

"In till" Siiinx Di'kotaii dinlect, p.i- indinatos iiii act pt'rfornicd by pnnliiii){ or rubbing with tlio
liand ; n.'i- an art performed witli the feet ; ya- with tho month ! ba- by enttin}; or Hawing; bn- by pierc-
ing; ku- by striking witli a stick or ax.

THE ATTKIBUTIVE KELATlON.

629

in the direction of the attribute. The attributive relation is a relation quali-
fying either the verb or the noun. The verb may become qualified or
determined by an adverb, an adverbial phrase or locution, or an adverbial
clause containing a finite verb. The noun, generally the substantive oidy,
may be determined by some attributive, so-called adnominal term ; this
may be either an appositive noun or a qualifying noun (added to it in the
possessive or partitive case), an adjective (qualitative or numeral), or a
pronoun.

The compoundiiKj of words and the extent to which it is carried on forms
an important chapter in every language. I have omitted it in the Mor-
phology in order to treat more fully of it in Syntax, and in fact this lin-
guistic feature belongs rather to the syntactic than to the morphologic part
of grammar, for it finds its true position in the chapter on the attributive
relation. Under the term of v.ord-composition I comprehend the compound
verbs and compound nouns only, excluding all the other ways of word-
compounding, as the polysynthesis of formative affixes, otherwise called
derivation; the incorporative process, etc.

Word-com})osition is a process of synthesis whirli is of greater gram-
niatic importance than it would seem at first to be. We have first to
observe carefully which one of the terms, the (jualitying or the (jualified
one, stands before the other, tor this gives us an insight into the logical facul-
ties of the people speaking the language. Usually the qualifying term has
the precedence, because it is considered more important for the understand-
ing of the whole sentence. The location of the rhetoric accent upon the
first or the second part of the compound is not without signification, and
the combination of the two elements into a new word with a curious or
unexpected definition is at times of great ethnographic and psycliologic
importance. The compounding may be eflfected in two ways, whether
tliere are two, three, or more elements to be combined into one: («) by
(((/(jhdinatioii, viz., by connecting the elements without any or without im-
portant phonetic alteration, the parts retaining their usual accentuation ;
(^) by fusion, viz., by an intimate, thorough connection of the elements
to form a new term, attended by the loss of ac;centuation on one side and
an occasional entire change of signification, as well as a loss of phonetic

630

(iUAMMAUOF TUE KLAMATU LAJSUUAGK.

••I

J lit
J

'■■4 '

elements by contraction. This second stivgo forms the transition to what is
generall}- called incoiporation, and many of the forms produced by fusion
are decidedly incorporative, like metsmetsawals obsidian arrowhead, mCl=lak(
head-chief.

The attributive relation thus presents itself under the following as-
pects :

A. The verb, attributively qmUficd:

(rt). By an adverb standing separate.

{h). Hy an adverb agglutinated to it as a pretix, and thus forming a
comjiound verb.

(('). By the agglutination of two verbs into a ( ompound verb.

li. The noun, attribut'veli/ qualified:

(«). By another noun placed before it in the possessive or partitive case.

(/>). By another noun forming apposition.

(r). Ty another noun, both forming a compound noun.

((?). By an adjective or numeral.

A— THE VERB WITU ITS ATTRIBUTIVE QUALIFICATION.

When verbs become qualified by other terms, these terms are most
generally of an adverbial description. They may be either adverbs, or
jihrases used in an adverbial sense, or separate clauses determining the verb
adverl)ially, that is, in regard to quantity and degree, to space, to time, to
(jnality. These adverbial clauses will be spoken of in a sep.a'-ate chapter
as a p.art of the division "(compound Sentence." Adverbial phrases are
composed of two or more words forming but one idea, such as tapi ti'tna a
short time afterward, pii'dshit pshi'n tn-iiii/ht, wakaktoksh in the same manner
as, tn muna deep down .- while others form tlie rudiments of separate clauses,
though they have to be considered as locutions or phrases only : humasht
gink i)i that manner, wak a gniga of course, nanuk pshi'n gisht every night.

{a). Adverb standing separately .

Of the adverb the usual position in the sentence is before the verb it
qualifies, and, therefore, whenever it coalesces with the verb into one word,

ATTKIUUTK OF THE VKRIJ.

681

it beconiea its prefix or first part, Wlien .standing separate, some of them
assume tlie reduplicated form when used in a distributive s'^nse, tliough the
majority of adverl)s hick tliis granmiatic form ; tlio (puilified verb sometimes
assumes the distributive form also. A few adverbs are exactly like the
adjectives formed of the same basis, and concerning these it may bo difficult
to decide whether the Indian uses them as adverbs or as adjectives ; of.
wdnnitoks k("k shuta he acts differoitli/ from others.

The numeral adverb corresponding to our four times, Jive times, etc.,
and some of the locative adverbs pointing to direction, or to tlie points of
the compass, show the ending -ni. which remains uninflected. Another
series of numeral and other adverbs ends in -ash, a terminal which repre-
sents the objective case of the numeral adjective. Both endings have been
discussed in Morphology, pages fj.'JO, !')iM.

tfdsh nil hi'ishlta I feel well, healthy.
tina'k si.' vatchna to swalloiv at one yulp.
pa'dshit ])shfn ka-a tciiemuka it is vcrij dark tn-nighl.
dti ewa the water is deep ; lit. "it stands, fills up deeply."
^i-ati o-ewa the waters are deep.
w(-uka {^or uyi'iga) e-iiwa the ivaters are shallow.
wewjini a sha hunk pen shulota they dress differently.
ndanni shuta hd he did so three times.
tunc'pni go-u lalualatko / own five pins.
sa shli'n tu'kni they shot him from the other side, 23, 21.
kokagtalkni gL'pgap'l' they returned over a brook, 2U, 14.
Mo'dokni nda'nash pelpeltampka the Modocs heyan to work at a third
place, 35, 20.

A special use is made of the numeral adverb when days and years are
mentioned, which difi'ers from English considerably. For our terms day and
year are not always expressed by the substantives illolash, illu'lsh year and
waftash, wiiitash day of twelve or day of twenty-four hours, but at times by
the V rV^ ilhiila, ill61a (in Klamath illolula) tu complete a year, to pass a full
y^-'U , aita, wiifta, wiiitola to wait ov pass one day, to lay over for a tchole day,
or day and night. Then this verb is qualified by the adverbial in -ni, not

• 3»

632

GKAMMAli OF TUE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

by the cardinal numeral, and tfna once is subatituted to na'sli or na'dsh one.
In mentioning certain numbers of days, wiii'ta or wiiitola is often dropped
from the sentence, the numeral alone remaining.

If'tp'ni illulan after fivo years, Mod., cf. h'lp'ni illolash dumiff ttvo years.
tl'na illololatk Sha't giiikak afier one year the Snake Indians left, 28,

14. Kl.
illuluapka the year will he at an end. Mod.
tfna tchfank illolula he lived one year; lit. "he completed one year while

living," Kl.
t(^-unapni illololatko ten yars old, Kl.

muk'lek tina nat waita we encamped and lay over one day, 29, 9.
ndt waftuapk (without ti'na) ive ivill wait one day, 75, 2.
nda'ni tchek ^vaxU'AunkJinaUy after the lapse of three days, 6G, C ; cf. 6G,

8. 85, 1, and nuiuy other passages mentioned in the Dictionary.

(6), Adverb prefixed.

Many adverbial particles, especially when consisting of one syllable
only, lose their accentuation when standing innnediately before a verb, and
coalesce so closely with it as to appear as prefixes. A considerable number
of these are mentioned, with granmiatic examples, in the List of Prefixes,
and are referred to on page 308 as "prefixes embodjing relations expressed
bv adverbs," having either a locative or a modal function. They are as
follows :

i-, y- No. 2 (page 2tS(;)^ locative prefix referring to the soil, ground.

ino-, inu- (page 28(i) away from.

yan-, ya- (page 286) downward, down helow.

yu- (page 287) downward.

k-, gi- (page 287) thus, so, in thii manner.

kui-, ku-, gu- (page 289) away, from, info distance.

1- No. c (page 291) alony a side, slope, declivity.

le- (page 292) not, when used in a putative sense.

tu- No. 1 (page 300) out there, out at a distance.

U-, vu- No. a (page 301) away from (horizontally and vertically).

COMPOUND VEEB.

633

Some other prefixes of this sort could be placed here almost as well,
e. g. m-, pointing to a cnrvilinear motion ulotiy the yroiuid, and its compound
km-, cf. ,)age 288. Like many other prefixes, the above often figure as
radical syllables or as parts of such ; cf page 282

There exist a number of .dverbial terms in the language which at
times occur as independent words and at other times as prefixes to verbs or
nouns, in which case they lose their accentuation. The majority of them
are real adverbs, susceptible of reduplication within the compound word
formed by them and undergoing apocope or contraction like the English
ayoiny for "on going," or doffiov "do off"."

ka-a, kii- strongly, vehemently: kay.4-a to cry aloud, for ka-a ya-a. Mod.;
kayt'ga to heyin to yrow tall, for ki'i-a uyega. Cf also kahaha.

kd-i not, no: kayai, d. kayaiyai not to cry; kai'xoma not to know, not to
recoynlze; keliak not possessed of, or absent.

kui badly: kuyega to become or fall sick; kuyowa to he disgusted at, to
dislike.

ma-, m'hii-, prefix refen-ing to the incomplete filling of a vase, recep-
tacle ; m'hiiwipca iu Jill partially ; cf \\\\yji to put into, to Jill into.

mil-, mu- largely, y really, much, the adverb of niiini great: miilbuka to
groio as a large round fruit upon the ground (also subst.; ; mu'l;i;a
to he dense, thick, from mil' \x(m ; nu'dkual;ja to emit smoke. From
the distributive form mutchutclmyjipka to laugh, smile, it appears
that mu- is the above adverb, and the second part is probably
tcluitchua to croak.

na-i on one side, tlie inessUt case of the numeral nadsh one: na-ital=
ti'lshna to ride women-fashion, lit. "to look to one side only;" na-i=
shlakgish horned beetle, lit. "pincher on one side;" na-igshtani half.

takanil;^ a to fall right side up, from talaak straight ; nc'l;^a to lay down.

tidshewa to rejoice at, to like, from tfdsh ivell, hewa to think, consider;
cf ko-ishewa, kuyewa,

(c). Two verbs forming a compound verb.

The modus of compounding a verb from two verbs is unusual in
Aryan, but not unfrequent in American languages, and is extensively em-

lua

034

GRAMMAll OF THE KLAMATJl LANGUAGE.

ployed in Iroquois, Kayo we, and AtJikapa. In Klamath it is fro(}uont
enoufrh to require a separate chapter of the Ciramniar. When the verbs
combine in one, the first one in some instances loses its conjugational suf-
fixes, and appears only in the shape of its radix or base, while the second
verb retains its inuectional elements. Compounds of exactly the same de-
scription are the verbs formed by means of the suffixes -kakiamna, -kakua,
-ki (-gj), -kfdsha, -tamna, all of which are originally verbs. To the follow-
ing list I add after the two-verb compounds those nominal compounds, the
first of which is a verb, the second a substantive formed from a verb.

lepleputii'na to play the. ^' smothcrinif'' (i(wic,nhGYGi\. from li'walewa=j)util'na;

this from Icwa to pUuj, puta to smother.
shalatchguala <o ?;t' >/k(y^ to, coiincdi'd with ; from liitcha to intertwine,

gAwal to go or place on the top of.
shepkcdsha to thank, from shapa to tell, kc^dsha to reply (differs here

from the sutHx -kfdsha).
shnoke'gi to spill, waste, lose; a compound of kt'gi, kii'gi (kfl-i gi) it is
no longer, it is absent, and the radix ni-, ne- occurring in niwa to
drive out.
shnukalena to carry a round or bulky object hy the handle; lit. "to hold
atid carry;" from slmuka to seize, hold, k'na to carry something
round. Cf. shnukalenotkish handle.
shnutchrtka to hum or sinye to death ; a compound of tch6ka, tclu'ika to

die a violent death and the radix nu- in nnta to hum.
tilampudshda to roll oneself about, from tila to roll, puedsha to cast aivay,

scatter, throw.
tchawiiya to wait for, expect, from tchia to sit, stay, wafha to wait.
tchiluycxa to brawl, halloo, male noise, from yc'ka to shout, the first term

being either tchi'luish boy or tchilla to stay together, to side with.
Compound words, of which one part is a verb and the other a noun,
are as follows :

gama-palii-ash Jlour- or grist-mill.
giinta=papalish sneak-thief.

shalatchgapshtish room in a house, lit. "structure adjacent," from liitcha
to build a lodge, lit. "to intertwine;" kaptcha to he in contact with.

ATTUlBUTJi OF THI-: NOUN.

635

Hpaki'i wGsli tool for brcak'nuf ice.

te-iiiiwii-nHli yount) woman, lit. "young growing" or "nowly existing;"

also otlior terms formed of tlio verb w/i.
trhliuyilgotkish .s7/7 in podrt-lcnifr. Made to facilitiito its opening, from

tchlfka to t/rasp, uyc'ga to lift up.

Remark. — To incorporate nouns or pronouns into the verb is a method
of vk^ord composition frequent in many languages of Europe and America.
Greek is characteristic for its facility for incorporating nouns and verbs into
one term, the noun being usually the direct object of the verb. In Nalmail
the transitive verb incorporates either its nominal object or a pronominal
particle instead of it. Bnt in Klamath I know of no instance of this sort,
for ish Inlpalpaliat male ye eyes for me ayain, 154; 11, is not derived from
Inlp eye.s and pi'lpela to work, but from Inlpala to make eyes, -pali- for -peli
ayain, at ye.

An instance of a pronoun incorporated into a verb seems to be: humasht,
d. humamasht .so, in this manner.

K—TUh] NOUN WITH ITS ATTRIBUTIVE QUALIFICATION.

The natural position of tho attribute is before the (pialified noun, and
not after it. The parts of grammar which serve to qualify the noun are
chiefly adjectives and substantives, and when two substantives unite into a
compound, this is frequently done 1)y synco])ation.

(a). Nominal eompounds expressing jwssessive relation.

Whenever a noun standing in tho possessive (-am, -lam) or in tho par-
titive case (-ti) is placed before another noun, the ante(!edent qualifies the
following noun as to ownership, appurtenance,. origin, substance, or material.
The ending of tho possessive case is sometimes shortened to -a, or drops off
altogether in rapid conversation, and this forms the transition to the prop-
erly so-called compound nouns.

Instances of possessive case :

ko'ltran w/ish otter den.

kills tgc-ush (for kulsimi tgewash) {dnce where the badger stands in vater.

! **

636 uUAMMAlt OF TUE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

Ikurn ii'-ii8h i/ar/; /«Ar, lit. "lako of coal."
lolokH^wii'gf'tiam stu railroad, lit. "firo-wagon's road."
Mo'dokisham kiifla the country of the Modocs.
p'gfshain wi'ash tJw mother's child.
shloii Hkiita«li lijnx-skin mantle.
HZi'l kaflish otter-Mn belt.
tchfkOiiion poke iron kettle.

Instances of i)artitivo case :
kiifla latchash earth lodge (for kiiflati hltcliash).
nmmeantf tapapfti liit/sh thimhlehcrry, lit. "berry on largo leaves."
nushti kako skull, lit. "on lioad the bone."
yafnati tikaga mountain quail.

More examples will bo found on page 477.
(/>). Xoun with its apposition.

Nouns with their a2)po8itions form a peculiar and rather frequent class
of nominal compounds. In the nmtual position of Itoth there is a certain
freedom, as the apposition pr<;cedes the noun just as often as it follow.s it.
The apposition occupies the first jjlaco in :

Afshish kaf nil sha illd'la / Aishish I am swinyiny my sword, 193; 10.

hishu}'ikga=k6hiegsh hoy-orphan.

mbiishaksh tuekc'itkish borer made of obsidian.

pflpil shiu'sh viryinity .sotiy.

sessah'ilisli laki leader of tear expeditions.

shuitohash lawalsh iirine-bia tder.

8hu-utank<)tkish=paksh council-pipe, lit. "peace-making pip«-'," 14, 6.

skensluiutkish mbu-itcli sinew-thread.

skuks=kiii'm spirit-fish, viz., "fish containing a dead person's soul."

.skulhash pe't ambulance-bed.

tcht'itcha=p'lii sweet sap of the suyar jiine.

The apposition stands after the noun in :
f snawii'dsh you as n woman, 58, l.^> ; cf .59, 2. 6.

NOMINAL (COMPOUNDS. 637

k»'»-o weh'kaHli the old femalu fror/.

spA'klish lilwifih prnmontorial sweat-lodge.

»U'>])fi\H\\ im\\T\\\t>\\ solitury jwclcd pine, 1^, \Q.

tchiiMlikai lakf nudr of weasel.

tchil'liHli pi'iwa hil he cats as or like a jwrdtpine, 190; 14.

tHi'ishaKh kinks the .skunk as a conjurer, I'M, H.

unaka ni'na AfsliiHiiasli his son Aishish, !)4, 8.

wekwak wi'wamiish the female hutterflies, 95, 14.

(c). Compounds formed of two or more suhstantives.

Under tliis heading are gathered compound terms which are dejiendent
on and governed by eacli other. Both portions are substantives, but one of
the two is sometimes a compound b)- itself, thus forming no longer a binary
but a ternari/ combination. The combination may consist of a sub.stantive
of verbal origin with its direct object, or with its indirect object, or with an
object accompanied by a postposition or with adverbs ; therefore, compounds
of this sort often contain nouns standing in the objective, locative, and other
cases. Here, as well as in the majority of other languages, the qualifying
noun precedes the noun qualified.

Instances of the objective case :

kiina-shushatish H(/«fr and »Ho/(?, lit. "earth-worker."
kiii'm=luek')tki.sh/s/f-Ar«7), lit. "fish-killing instrument."
k'lekapkash iwixotkish coffin, lit. "corpse-receiving tool."
Igu'm-ldaklish and lgu'm=lolii'gish moth, lit. "coal-lifter."
luluksski'itchaltko one tvrapped up in fire.
maklaksh=pap{sh (for mf'iklakshash=papfsh) man-eater, lion.
nu'sh=tilansneash turn-head.

pe'nsh lukash luel(')tkish pitfall to kill orizzly hears. Mod.
p'tish=, p'gfsh=lulatko one who 'has lost his father, mother.
tchikass^kshi'kshnish sparrow-hawk, lit. "ravisher of little birds."
IchfkCmen mpamptish blacksmith, lit. "iron-beater."
tch(')ke no-utko Jield tvith pumice-stone.
wi'itchasl^netpfish bridle of Indian manufacture.

IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-S)

.^'.-^

,.V

Zt
^

1.0

I.I

1.25

2.5
2.2

!^ U£

11^

Sut

II 11^^

|l.8

^'^

Photographic

Sciences
Corporation

23 WEST MAIN STREET

WEBSTER, N.Y. MSSO

(716) 872-4503

^-^v

^^-i"^

638 GRAMMAR OP THK KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

Instances of other inflectional cases :

ail=]iiil\a^gi'H\\ foreigner, lit. "living in a distant land."
pakshtat tulish pijie-stem, lit. "liandlo in the pipe."
8unde=kii'klkish preacher, lit. "Sunday gesticulator."
W!iwa=tutii'ksh ear-wax, for wAwakshtat tutii'ksh, lit. "what is taken
from the ears."

(■ 'H

{d). Compounds formed of adjectives and substantives.

When adjectives become connected with substantives so closely as to
form compound nouns they often appear in the apocopated form, especially
the adjectives ending in -li, -ni. Numeral adjectives also appear in a shorter
form. Having previously mentioned a few adjectives which appear chiefly
in the form of suffixes, as -amtch, -kani, -shftko, -tkani (pages f)! 8-520), and
also adjectival abbreviations like kAUkma skull-cap, and three others on page
516, I add the following examples:

Kal=Liilp " Eound-Eyc,^^ nom. pr. masc.
kal ni(')moksh glow-worm, firefly. Mod.

kal tchftchiks spider, from k,41kali round, tchl'dsha to remain.
litchkatchi'ash strong person of short stature, from litchlftchli strong, pow-
erful, and kt'tcha in ketchkani small, short.
mctsmets^sawals obsidian arrow-head.

When adjectives and numerals are used in a sentence or phrase iniply
ing possession, they may become connected with a participle of the past,
and then stand in their objective case. To the examples previously enu-
merated (page 616) I add the following, all from the Modoc dialect:

hii snAwedshash vunfpa weweshdltko this woman has four children (vu-

nfpa abbr. for vunipdnash).
kudsliH jinku shtinash/iltko a woodrat having a tvooden house.
kudshii shnawodshaltko p'gish.'i pCna a woodrat had his mother for a wife.
vunam mba-ush tchutchieshaltko dressed in elk-shin caps, 90, 17.

i-l

NOiMINAL COMPOUNDS.

(e). Other nominal compounds.

639

Substantives can form other compounds— with adverbs, for instance.
'J'hey take the second or last phico in the compound, and their verbal nature
becomes more apparent than in other compounds :

hatak tchftko settler, inhabitant.

hunashak shrshash nickname.

ketcha bubanuish tippler.

kt'tcha muatftala shlewish west-south-west wind.

kfllan shishukish brave tvarrior.

k6-i ti'miCnash noise, lit, '-disagreeable hearing."

le'p^klcks (supply p'gfshap) mother who lost her children.

muna tatjimnuish mole, lit. "walker in the deep."

nanukash=kailakni people from every land, strangers.

• POSITION OF WORDS IN THE SENTENCE,

Languages endowed with a copioiis array of inflectional affixes ex-
press the mutual relation of words by means of these, and need, there-
fore, no strict rules for position of each word in the sentence. xMono-
.■*} llabic languages cannot inflect their words ; therefore they indicate the
subject, object, etc., exclusively by their position among the other word.«,
while English, which preserves a remnant of its former wealth of inflec-
tion, is more free in this respect, and Klamath is freer still. Neverthe-
less, this language follows certain principles in arranging the elementary
l)art8 of the sentence, which are disregarded only when rhetoric effects
are attempted.

The chief rule for the simple, declarative sentence is: "The subject
stands before its verb, and its usual position is at the head of the sentence.
If the verb or predicate does not include the copula (viz., the verb to be),
then the copula comes after the predicate. Direct and, less frequently, in-
direct objects precede the verb, standing between it and its subject. The
attribute precedes the noun, the adverb the verb which it qualifies." Sen-

640

GRAMMAK OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGK.

teiiceH exhibiting the parts of the sentence in their natural order run as
follows :

nad \&p mehiash nri'ds;i;eks ngdk tchish hiink shn6kua we caught two

trouts and nine turtles,
palpali walwila'gash ku'shtat huniimSni a white butterfly flew up on the

pine-tree.

Incident clauses are not incapsulated within the parts of the main sen-
tence, as is done sometimes in English, but precede or more frequently follow
it, no matter whether they contain a verbal or a real, finite verb. This holds
good when the object or the attribute is expressed by several words, by a
phrase, or by a sentence:

hil nflsh kd-i matchi'itka tpewash he does not listen to my orders, lit. "ho

to me not listens when ordering."
ka-iu Boshtinash gsitpish, Mo'dokni mba-ush shulo'tantko (gi) before the

Americans arrived the Modocs were dressed in buckskin, 00, Ifi.
nfl mish hilnk sheshatui watchaga mumgnish wawdkash gfpkash / sold

you a dog having long ears.
sfimtsalpja Doctor John a gt^n tawi she discovered that Doctor John had

bewitched him, 64, 2 ; of. 13, 16. 17.
tidshewa nil mish gatpisht / am glad that you came.

There are many agencies which tend to modify the natural sequence of
the syntactic elements in a sentence, as outlined above. All of them are re-
ducible to rhetoric causes, viz, to greater emphasis laid upon certain words
or a whole phrase or sentence. The more important a term or phrase appears
to the speaker the more he will seek to bring it out by emphasis or transpo-
sition. In the following examples the narrator desired to lay particular
stress upon the word which he has placed j/?rs^-

kaknegatko gi mi shuhStish ! dirty is your dress!

lap'ni' sha shdljual Walamski'sas Iil-ushkni ttvice the Lake people fought

the Rogue River Indians, 16, 1.
161a A-i mish nii / believe you, lit. "believe I do you."

POSITION OF WORDS.

641

ni'shta h«H'ma mA'kash tzA't;fuk all night long does the owl screech for
presaging, 88, 6. Cf. all the terms heading paragraphs on page 76

nushtoks mdjslaks shMa the people have seen me.

nflsh tiila gfc'na i ! you come with me!

shikutchipk tchikd kfimutsAtk on a stick walks the decrepit old man, 136,
6; cf. ki'shtchipkin 136, 6.

shmauyoldshtat ktchAlLui sdppash q/ter rain comes sunshine.

• The following are instances of terms placed at the end of sentences for
emphasis :

g^na ml at huki'sh ! notv is gone your spirit! 87, 15.

pupakuak a sha ndnuktua ilzc5ta tAlatoks U-[ they hury with

him various cups hut no money, 87, 4. 5.

Transposition of words from the natural order, as the placing of the
attribute in the possessive case after the noui, on which it depends, and of
the adjectival attribute after its substantive is often resorted to to produce
variety and to relieve the monotony of the regular order of words :

m/ihiash Afshisham the shadow of Aishish, 96, 2.

pe'tch ktdkta ska'tish tapi'dshnish he cuts off the left hind leg, 134, 16.

p'tfsa m'ndlam their father, 101, 10: cf 61, 19.21.

shnii'lashtat shku'lelam in the nest of the lark, 96, 6.

snAwedsas Afsisam a tvife of Aishish, 100, 5; cf 13.

Probably for the same cause transposition has been made in :
nat ga'-iina ge'na hiink nga'-isapksh a'nok nddnna we went on slowly, car-
rying the three wounded men, 24, 7, instead of nddnna nga-isapkash
ii'nok.

nat wAl'hha kawalia'kuapk sa'-ug tve watched them, believing they would
ascend, 29, 16, instead of sJi'-ug kawalia'kuapk.

In various examples to be found on page 123 the indirect object follows '
the verb, as it does also in 24, 6 : nat guhdshktcha shewat^ii'lsi at noon tve
started, and in numerous other passages.
41

642

GItAMMAU OF TUB KLAMATH LANOUAtJK.

The syntactic feature called incorporation often causes inversion and
other changes in the natural position of the words, examples of which will
be quoted under the caption of "Incorporation."

In the negative, interrogative, and interrogative-negative sentence the
position of the words is in the main identical with the one observed in the
declarative or affirmative sentence ; in the oratio ohliqua or indirect mode of
speaking and in indirect questions it does not differ from the sequence of
words in the direct mode of speaking {oratio recta) and the direct questions.

The syntactic arrangement of the sentencQ exercises some influence
upon the word-accent. Some remarks on this have been inserted in Pho-
nology, pages 236-243.

There is, perhaps, no part of the Klamath Grammar less subject to rules
than the position of words in the sentence. This is so because this language
differentiates the parts of speech better than many other Indian languages,
and in regard to the placing of the attribute is even freer than French, En-
glish, and German. In some points all languages of the world agree, as in
the placing of the conjunctions at the head of the sentence ; the subject also
leads the sentence in the large majority of languages when it is expressed
by a noun.

Many other indications concerning the position of words are dissemi-
nated throughout the Grammar, as in the chapter on adjectives, pronouns,
and particles. The negative particle kA-i usually leads the sentence, but
the putative negative le not in most instances stands immediately before the
verb qualified by it :

pi hunk nen ak le kdpka lie does not icant to come, lie says.
watchag le gdnug wawa a dog howls for not (being permitted) to go.

THE SENTENCE.

STBUCTUEE OF THE SENTENCE.

The simple sentence is the most frequent and also the most ancient form
of the sentence. This form need not contain anything else but the subject
and its predicate, or, when the latter is a transitive verb requiring an object,

THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.

643

he subject, object, .„d predicate, The next step to a higher complexity is
the coordination of t«.o or more sentences, which may stand in a continu-
ative or in an adversative relation to each other. Next in order is the com-
pou,nl sentence, in which one or more clauses are placed in a relation of
dependency to another clause which figures as the principal clause. Many
statements which, in English, would figure as dependent or incident clauses,
are lu the more synthetic languages, as Klamath, expressed by participles,
and more especially by verbals, which of course do not form sentences b;
themselves, but express verbal ideas subordinate to the main verb. Lan-
guuges showing a complex structure in their sentences presuppose a con-
siderable mental development in their originators. The latest form of lin-
guistic evolution in the sentence is the incapsulation of many sentences into
one, implying interdependence of many sentences from a single one Lan-
guages 111 the primitive stage do not show this, and even in the best devel-
oped languages it is a difficult matter to combine incapsulation with cor-
redness of expression. Our Klamath language has remained free from this
stage. »

The above considerations prompt me to divide this syntactic section
mto two portions : the simple sentence and the compound sentence. Many
points discussed in the first portion apply as well to the principal clause of
the compound sentence, and partially also to the incident clause; e g what
is said concerning certain particles and the negative form of speech.

I. THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
According to the intention or spirit in which a speaker may address
his hearers, and the various rhetoric modes consequent upon it, the simple
sentence is subdivided in the declarative, the negative, the interro-ative
the imperative, the exhortative, the exclamatory sentence. Coordinat'e sen-
tences, when they are in the shape of principal and not of incident clauses
I also consider as simple sentences. '

A. — The declarative sentence.
This form of speech, also called affirmative, is used in communicating
thoughts or news, in stating facts, in narrating stories, fables, myths, his-

644

GRAMMAR OP THK KLAMATH LANGUAOB.

toric events, and also fij^ures prominently in the oratory and poetic style.
The declarative mode is the proper form for this sentence, the nso of the
conditional mode being rather scarce. Potentiality and possibility may bo
expressed by the declarative sentence also.

I '-il

B. — The negative sentence.

Whenever a sentence has to bo negatived, negation is expressed by
two particles : ka-i, sometimes pronounced kaf, and le, le, lil not. They are
words standing separate in most instances ; but there is a number of verbs
and other terms to which they become prefixed, to be enumerated below.
Cf pages 2{)2. G32. KA-i forms several compound particles.

The difference between the two particles consists in this : kA-i opposes
a flat denial to the statement contained in the verb or sentence, and is,
therefore, used in negative replies: no! whereas le implies i\ putative denial
existing in the minds of those acting or supposed to act or speak. Ka-i
3tands at the head of the sentence, before the verb, and this may have pre-
vented the formation of a special negative inflection of the Klamath verb,
which exists in so many foreign and American languages, e. g. of the Mas-
koki and Algonkin family ; there the negative particle figures as a suffix to
the verbal stem. Its position before the verb it has in common with all
other particles ; it also accompanies imperatives and exhortatives as a pro-
hibitory adverb when, at the head of a sentence, it is pronounced with em-
phasis and a raising of the voice.

ka-i an tush shlda pilsh / have not seen him anytvhere.

ka-i nad ukauxdsh liiashtat shltja toe do not see the moon through the fog.

kA-i kflank gAkuat shldnkoshtat, kd-uni at gdkuant! do (ye) not run

fas' over the bridge, hut go (ye) slow!
M-i nd sh(^shatuish A-i gt ! I am not a trader!

Particles and other terms derived from M-i not are: kdyak not yet,
kayu, ki'i-iu before, kaftua nothing, no one, kayutch and kAyu never, ka-itata
nowhere, no more, never, keliak or kafleak being without or deprived of, absent,
kfya to tell lies, kdshka to he unable, kt'dshika to be tired, exhausted, kii'gi or
kiiyCke to be gone, not to exist, to be weak, with its derivative heshze'gi to kill.

THE INTEUUOGATIVE 8ENTEN0E.

646

kA ikfima not to know, etc. Cf. also page 633. The U80 of those terms nega-
tives the whole phrase or sentence, and examples for their use may bo found
in the Dictionary. Another negative verb to be unable, and parallel to hi-
shga, is tcliAna : nA pt'lpelash tchi'ma or tchi'inish / cannot tvork, lit. " I do not
know how to work." On the construction of these two verbs, cf page r)!)8.

A passage in which ki'i-i stands at the end of a sentence is 87, 5 : kmft'
yi'imnash tchish, tAlatoks ku-i skull-caps and beads, money none. But hero
ki'i-i negatives not a whole sentence, only a noun, that is a portion of a sen-
tence. Our no! when it forms a reply to queries, is usually expressed in
Klanmth as a whole sentence; cf Dictionary, page l(i2.

The other negative particle, lO, is of a putative character, and is used
only when the denial is a conditional one, or when it is not outspoken and
existing only in somebody's mind, or when it is only in the stage of uncer-
tainty or doubt, and is not uttered as a flat denial. Le composes the inter-
rogative ])article lish, the verb liiki it is (/one, lewtj-ula, and several other
terms to be found in the List of Prefixes and in the Dictionary. Cf. also
Id wak, ka-i wak, on page 458 and in the Dictionary.

le nil ak gcna / do not expect to go.

lo nil wAk I am uncertain; I do not knov).

le W(5-ula a n'sh sha they do not allow it to me ; cf. 23, 9.

pi hflnk nen ak lo kepka he says lie donH want to come.

In the negative sentence the position of the words is the same as in the
declarative sentence, le and kA-i preceding the verb. In the negative cpxes-
tions the interrogative particle leads the sentence : wAk gi hil ka-i gepk 1
why does he not comef

C. — The interrogative sentence.

In the interrogative sentence the query is put either directly or indi-
I'ectly. In the language of which we treat the position of words in tlie
direct question does not differ from their position in the indirect question.
Indirect questions form here as elsewhere incident clauses dependent upon
the finite verb of a principal sentence, and hence follow the structure of the
incident clause ; of this a later chapter will treat. Thus we will have to
deal here with the form of the direct question only.

646

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAdB.

The direct question begins either with nii interrogative particle of pro-
nonunnl origin or with tlie interrogative li, ha phiced after anotlier term or
at the end of the sentence, or with some interrogative prononn standing at
the head of the sentence in one of its inHoctional cases, usually the subject-
ive. One of the particles, t/mi, occurs in interrogative sentences only, but
there is no distinction made between particles introducing questions which
require affirmative replies and those which elicit negative replies. The verb
usually closes the sentence.

Questions introduced by an intenogative particle :

tat/i 1 gepkut'ipka? tvhcn will you comef

tt'it 1 gdna ? ti'it at gdna ? where do you go? where do ye gof

tati'i mantch 1 tchf-napk hikiam Idtchashtat I vunfpni hak waftash how

long will you stay in the chiefs homef four days only.
ti'it gisht shnawt'dshash fi'nk! where is that woman f (Mod.)
tuati'ila tak i leteHna ? tvhy did you not let it alone?
wi'ik t pii'dshit hushlta? (Mod.) wAk t gi gin waftash? (Kl.) how do

you do to-day? wAk gil tvhy?
wAk lish t giuga kti-i nish vf&lxn f tvhy don't you reply to me?
Avakaftch nA ftn ne-ulaktak f how shall I decide now?
wak ma ? or wak nen f tvhat did you say? or tvhat did he sayf

Questions introduced by an inten-ogative pronoun :

kanam kek f-amnash I whose are these beads?

kanf haftch hftt gi? tvho is he? who is she?

kanf gdn pakolesh shlfn ? tvho shot this mule-deer?

ti'ink i mehiash .shn(')kua? how many trout did you catch? '

tuA i hushkanka ? what do you think about?

tui'i } yewiintku ki ? tvhat are you filled tcith?

waktchi n' iln gftak ? what shall I do now?

TAra, a purely interrogative particle untranslatable in English, like
num or an, or the postpositive -ne of Latin, introduces questions when there
is no other particle to introduce them. It frequently connects itself with
other particles for reinforcement, so to say, and precedes them : tami'i (for

TUB INTKItUOOATlVK 8ENTKNCB.

647

tarn hii), tdni hai, tamd (tam hd), tamiidBh, and (Mod.) tdm liah, tamu HhIj,
tamtl' hd.

tdm Hsh d-ati e-^wa? are the waters deep? Cf. page 631.

tdm lish i-i tchui tum6na? i-I, nu ttimOna! do you hear mef yes, I hear

you! (Mod.)
tdmAdsh kok hfshuakga ht'mkanka? can this hoy speakf
tamu a pd-ula ma'l f did ye finish eating f (Mod.)
tamfl' Hsh u mulo'la? arc ye ready f (Mod.)

Hd, ha, -d, -a, a, always occupies some place after the first word of the
sentence and refers to actual time or the time being. It expresses nearly
what we express by a raising of the voice toward the end of a question.
When it stands alone for itself, it signifies that a question has not been well
understood.

dmpu a ? t, dmpu ! do you want water? yes, I want water!

at hd pftcha ItSloks? I, pitcho'la at l^loks! is the fire gone outf yes, the

fire is out ! (Mod.)
hfln a ndnuk ko'sham wdkwakshtka hA'ntka hd i tdm6n(l? did you travel

on the top of every pine-tree there? (Mod. myth.)
kd-itak hd i nish 161a? did you not believe mef
shand-ul' i dmpu ? do you want water f
tdlaakhd? is that correct? is he right f
tud hd akd ilk I what could this he f
tud ha i shlii'popk? what are you looking at?

Direct questions may be put also by merely using the special intona-
tion of a questioner without any particle or pronoun heading the sentence.

ndwatala t hAt (or dt)? did you dip this (cloth) in water?
shuhdlulf^na nat? shall tve skip down? 119, 23.

D. — The imperative sentence.

Sentences of a mandatory character may be expressed in a harsh man-
ner as a command, behest, or in a more kindly, patronizing mode as advice
or counsel. The jussive mode, or imperative proper, serves best for the

048

GUAMMAH OF TIIK KLAMATH riANGlIAOK.

(Humnaiid, wiiilo the oxliortiitivo form in -tki oxproHHOH tlio Hocorul or lulvico-
form. It iH the verbal iutentioiuil, either in its fnll or iibbroviated Hhape.
The Htriicturo of both kincU of the imperative sentence differn in nothiiijif
from that of the dechirative Hentenco, if we except the point that the pro-
noun of the person adchessed is with greater freedom phiced either before
or after tlie verb, and is Hometimes repeated. The exhortative torm iu
found connected witli all the personal pronouns. Interjections used in
mandatory sentences are mentioned (pages ACH, Hd'!*); the negative particle
introducing prohibitory sentences is ka-i. Sometimes the form in -tki is
rejdaced by the future tense in -uapka.

Examines of the jussive sentence:

gt^n' at kuni, hultak ma nA An ! yv //« away (or) I shall kill you! (Mod.)

gi'm't ganktak i make him nfopf (Mod.)

k»i-i ge-u kshfnksh guijjfdshi ! don't cross my fence f

nAsh pc'lak kitchx<>H ! yet away from me quick!

tchfm' 1 8hn6ki ! here! take thus!

Examples of the exhortative sentence :

ka-i a liAn gum' tashtaiit a ! nobody dare to touch that!

kaftoks nt'sh tA'-una Leniaikslilna kayaktgi he should not pursue me

around Shasta Butte, 40, 3.
iiAsh i-akaslu'tki ! jircss your foot upon me!
u'tch liA'nksh gii'mpelitki ! let him go home!
u'ts gint (for gfntak), slili'tki uAsh ! never mind, they may shoot me! 22,

10; cf. 17, 9.

E. — The exclamatory sentence.

It differs from other sentences, not in the mutual arrangement of the
words composing it, but by a frequent use of interjections and a raising of
the voice to a higher pitch. The dropping of the verb ia very common in
sentences of this sort, especially when they contain a wish or conmiand.
A list of the interjections usually occurring is presented in Morphology ; a
particle often employed in them is utch, A'ds ! never mind ! mostly con-

Til 10 KXOLAMATOUY 8KNTKN0B.

049

noctcl with gt.Uuk, gi'nt. l7tc..- gt'ntak I kt il^of !« 8«id who., son.othinK
iH hold tightly.

ffiikan a na't f A'tch nfi'lnh huHhtchn'ktgi ! Id us f,o out, whether they kill
us or mil 17, !>.

gt?im i g(t', o-('.lka, kiiiliiii'na ! ame rif/ht inside, o little pirfeonf 182-4
ya! atl' a n.VlHh wiiuil'^jitk tu.V ki ! to be sure! he is somrho.h, ,mrh

stronger than tve arc! 112, 11. 12.
kd-i jjaf hd'kt gl ! it is not he! (Mod.)

tn'Hh ak noil hiVk wak kii'Ia? U'haf can the,, he doing some where f 110, H>.
ti'itntu ! wennfi.i tua g.ltpa ! bg heavens! some strange man has come in f

112,7.

ftk haf ! „k til wo'k hn, tuAn a ! why! perhaps he did some evil to him!
(Mod.)

ft'tch gfiitak am iirt gf/nt ! / have a good notion to go!

A'tch gh.tak am nil ka-i git ! I have changed mg mind and will not do it!

F.—List of particles frequently used in the simple sentence.

Under this heading I have gathered a nnn.ber of particles, partly un-
translatable, or to be rendered in English by a separate phrase or sentence
only, which are peculiar to Indian speech and of rather fretpient occurrence.
Among them are two oral particles, which in recounting stories are repeated
to satiety by the Maklaks ; similar parCcles are intniduced into almost every
sentence of a narrative by Iroquois, Omaha, Ponka, T.'.nkawo, and other
North American Indians. Some of these particles nmst be considered as
adverbs, while others participate more of the nature of conjunctions.

a. The declarative particle a represents the idea of actuality, action
at the present time; it stands either separately or forms the declarative
mode of the verb, or words of verbal origin, or composes suffixes, as -.',ga,
-tka, -uapka, etc. Standing separately it points to the present tense, a'lid
is more frequently used in this function in the northern than in tiie south-
ern dialect. In sound it is like the interrogative d, and should not be con-
founded with it.

at a na'lsh pinii'dsha now she has caught up with us, 121, 22.
1 a shuilktcha you are just weeping.

650

GRAMMAK OP THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

ki'ink a ni sii'tu I am comting so wany, 70, 9.

nu a gutpa pii'p 1, the marten, am coming, 177 ; 10.

slmedshna tchu'uk at pen a then again they went to gaiuhle (Mod.).

Instiinces where a coalesces with other particles or words may be
found in Dictionary, page 15.

at now, presently; at that time; then, hereupon, finally. This particle
may be abbreviaied into a, and is pronounced mostly with the vowel long;
(at); it either points to the present tense or to an act preceding (cf. page
58^.) or following another act. It can serve as a conjunction or as an
adverb, and its position in the sentence is very free ; when it becomes the
finjd word of a sentence it is generally pronounced with emphasis.

When closely connected with other particles, at often fulfils the office
of a mere expletive: tcha at now, presently, 87, 14; tchui at hereupon, 2'A, 4;
and in (he following particles taken from Modoc: tchfkilnk at an'l then, for
tchfk hu'nk at: atcbkilnk then, for at tchek hilnk ; atiink, iitchur.k then, here-
upon, for lit hunk, at tchish hunk. Other particles are subordinate to at
in locutions like the foUowi.;"-: atft, situi now, at present; atutii just now,
alreaihi; Jitch, ats then, for at tchish.

1. At used as a conjunction :

at gatpa at shlo'kla tvhen they had arrived th''y shot at the marl; 100, 20.
it'ha link naiuik tcimlishtat, tchulfan li'nk at kin all beads he placed on

hk huchikin shirt and thereupon he dressed in it (Mod.).
"Wanaga hunk at gcmpCle, I'-anniash nanuk i'tcha I'kgan after Young

Silver For had returned home he tvon all the heads (from them; Mod.)-

2. At serving as an adverb :

at ml k'luwi now I quit; now I have enough of it.

ki nen gepka pe'.; a noio they come again, said they (Mod.).

ats (for At tchish) nal ne tuana shuedshipka now they approach us again

for gambling (Mod.).
ka-i ktchallini ukau;(r)sh pii'dsliit at the moon ihe^ not shine to-night.
tua nad shute-uapk. at ? ivhat shall we do nowf

liai, ai, ai, a-i (Mod. liai, kai, xaf, ai)— enlarged haftcli, aftch. This
particle, whenever translatable, corresponds best to our fvidently, clearly,

LIST OF PARTICLES.

651

of course as you see; it conveys the idea timt an act or state is visible or
percepfblo to son.ebody or to all in its process or through its effects, or can
be observed at the time being. It always refers to the verb, not to the
object or any other word of the sentence, conveys en.phasis, and brings on
a Ingher p.tch to the whole sentence. Hence it often stands in interro^a-
.ve sentences when the interrogative prononn or particle heads the sen-
tence; also m exchunatory phrases. As a rule it holds the second place in
a propos.t,on, and the enlarged form haftch, thongh more impressive and
emphatic does not differ fron. haf as to its position. It n.ay be stated that
haf, haftch refer to the sense of vision in the same manner as mat and nen
reter to the sense of liearing. Examples :

at kai kapata wa'hlaks hut evidcutly they landed while hehig watched (Mod).

gc'na ai sha they have yom, as I have seen.

hu kai at gc'na ! there he goes now!

k'shma ai i' nalsh certainly you will not discover us, 121, 10.

Meacham kaf lul p.'pa ftpa Meacham openly laid down the document, 34 G

'miVtch xai nish shish.ilpja the old man wrestled with me (Mod.).

shlii'wisli a-i nish wi'llma the wind blows at me (you and I feel it^ W, .

2r.. Cf. 1(5.5; G. 171; 71.
tfdsh kaf ml hi'isidta / am in good health, as yon see.
tu'sh hai at tataksni wawatawa where the children sat outside the lodge,

as seen previously, 121, 7.
K .af la gen, nitu p^ai nuk tclu'ii tchiik u luVkt gi ! certainly, this time 1

rcasonahly suppose (hat it is himself! (Mod.)
iv(<lwa8h kaf nish palalla my spring has run dry, I perceive, 11?, ■ 4.

Connected with other particles, haf, af appears in t.'hawaf now then
from tcha-n haf; wakaf ? why? fvom wak haf, Mod. uk'hai.
The (Milarged form, liaftch or aftch, occurs in :
kiini haitch hilt gi I who is he or she.>^
tata nianlch haftch iulk hf.ihuaksh ma'sha? how long ivas this man sick."

(viz., how long did you see him to be sick?)
tuj'i haitch hut gi? what is that?
tushtal haitch sha gi^na, ? which way did you sec them yof

652 (5RAMMAK OF THE KLAMATH LANG U AG K,

uk haftcli niish nA li'n sha-amakpjikta f how can I call you one of my

relatives f (Mod.)
wakaftchf wakil'tcli ? tvhy thenf tiVsh Imitch I tvhere then?

mat, iibbr. ma, -m. 'JMiis particle serves to partly supply the want
of special granimatic forms for the indirect mode of speech, or otatio ohiiqua,
by which sentences or speeches pronounced by others are referred to or
reproduced by the relator. The adverbial particle mat refers oidy io facts,
acts, events, occurrences to be spoken of, or to the condition or state
observed upon somebody or something. It makes no difference whether
the events occurred long ago or recently, or whether they took place at
home or in foreign parts, provided the one speaking relates them from
hearsay. Mythic stories usually begin with mat, ma, which occupies the
second place in the sentence, and refers to the whole story. It corresponds
nearest to our aUeqcd hi/, as they say, as reported, etc., and to the Latin aiutit,
feruut, dicmtt, nt ferUir, etc. Verbs of saying, telling, etc., are usually
omitted, for mat supplies their function, or directly snpjjlants them, as in
the sentence below : telle mat hu'k. The form nint, 190; 19, is the oral
particle mat with i\, hu infixed, which points to elevation or distance.

hdmtchnam: "sx^tk'ish!" they shouted: '^cross me over!" (-m abbre-
viated from mat). Mod.

liu'nk ka-i mat pi'sh siukat I did not kill him, as alleged, 64, 5.

ki'ipaltch' a, mn, ka-i tu'sh ki'luii)ktak slitinashtat ki'mam "yather
stalks!" the story says, "■and do not yo to anybody's lodge any-
where." (Mod.)

Kmiikamtch mat kilda shi'ita Kmukumtch created the world, tve are told.

shue'tchna mat sha, shncna mat sha luloks they are said to hare yone
from place to place yamhliny and makiuy camp-fires; Mod.; cf. f)i), 2.

Skil'lamtch mat tchfa shetxt'-unaltx Tchashgayaks Old Marten, they say,
was the elder brother of Little Weasel, 1 01), 2.

tui'i ma! what is itf

tumSna nil mashish pil mat pA-ula I hear that the patient has at last been
eating, 140, 7.

tche mat hii'k thus he said, as reported (_Mod.).

LIST OF I'AHTICLES,

653

noil, uhbr. nen, nc, nc, -«, tho other of tlio two oral particles in the
hnigiiage, may, whenever translatable, be rendered by allcnd by, as they
say, as reported, like the preceding one, but it also supplants the verbs r say
or said; he, she says, said; they say or said so, so I am told. Not only words
spoken by oneself or others are referred to by this ubiquitous particle, but
also musical sounds, sounds of nature, noises, cries of men or animals It
however, does not refer to acts, events, situations, like mat. This may be
better understood when considering its prefix n-, which refers to n.otions
extendmg along tho ground or the earth's surface ; cf n.^na, nc<nu (nii'nrt)
iK'pka, ndpaksh, in Dictionary. This particle, which saves many circum-
locmtory sentences to tho natives, diffei-s also from mat in its capacity of
heading a sentence, and serves, like mat, to introduce verbatim quotations
or indirect speech. Nen also stands for to name, to call; cf page 458.
(a). Nen referring to sounds, noises, etc.:

kanftani nen kanf gi? ivho is outsidef (nen referring to the noise heard
outdoor).

na'n u wfka=shftko mukasli hii'ma an owl is hootim, apimrcntly close by,
as I hear, 1 92 ; 2.

nft ai nen nutu'yamna / am buzsing around, you hear, 105; 16, and Note;
said by the wasp.

• (fc). Nen referring to spoken words, often as a mere expletive :

I'ltCnen (for at a nen) gakaydluapka, na-asht nen waltka now they will

leave the woods, so I hear them say, 23, 5. G.
a't ne tchi'ii tchek Afshish grpka this time Aishish has come, so ye say

yourselres (Jlod.).
humasht tchi nen liemkanka i' ! that's the way you talk! (we heard you),
ka-i lift nen kf / shall not do what yon t^ay.
ke'ksha ak nen wi'nkat these men would hare died, I am told.
klika nii nen / say I have no time.
lakfam ne I'lnaka mpadsa ne at now they have made blind the chiefs son,

as reported (Mod.).
nen ka tanni ak that's all, lit. "just so far the)- report."

II :

654

UUAMMAU OF Tllli: KLAMATH LANiJUAGE.

W i

no'nt iio'nt! thaVs the tvay! "(the way to say, to call ; for nt'n at),
shleu tch'liAnk tu'gslitakni, at neii "gi?pka pen a" mid when those on the

other side perceived (the smoke), they said (nen) "wow they come

again" (Mod.),
shll't nlsh a iieii ! shoot ye at me, I say!
tiit ne gt^nipka f where did she say she would gof ■

tuA i nen honikank? wJuit do you talk about?
tuj'i nen? what s it you say or saidf cf. 41, 14.

tll'clsll, ta'ds is another conjunction used in connecting sentences of
an adversative import. It introduces a more unexpected contrast than tak,
taksh, and answers to our in spite of, aUhotiyh; it does not occupy the first,
but usually the second place in the sentence. A considerable number of
instances were given in the Dictionary, page 382.

tak, tok, tid; enlarged taksh, -taks, toksh, -toks, tuksli, is a connect-
ive particle, the full significance of which can be studied only from its
use in the compound sentence. Nevertlieless, some points may be brought
out hero concerning its use in the simple sentence. It belongs to the
enclitic particles and docs not reduplicate ; sometimes it can be translated
in English, sometimes not. Its purport is either of an emphatic or of an
adversative, disjunctive nature, and when used in the latter sense it cor-
responds in many cases to the German dock It is appended to all parts
of speech, though after substantives it occurs but rarely; cf. 100, 20.
Vowels before tak, toks often become elided through syncope ; e. g. telin-
tok for teh'natok. The enlarged forms of the particle virtiuiUy possess
the same signification as the simple ones, but words and sentences are
connected by them more closely to wliat precedes, and they are not em-
ployed to form a future teyse; I have tlierefore treated both in separate
articles in the Dictionary.

A. — The emphatic use of tak, toksh appears :

(a). In the emphatic pronoun : ni'itak myself; hutak himself; kahaktok
whatsoever, 71, 7, etc.; cf Emphatic, Pronoun, pages 552, 553.

(6). In verbs like the following: nu kmakatoks / look all around; cf nd
kmaka I loot around.

LIST OF rAKTlCLKS.

055

(c). After adjectives: k6-umtoks quite slow ,■ ko-idshitoks rather lad; wdn-
nitoks quite strange, abbr. from weniifni differetit, curious, strange;
ndunnantak hut for three, 142, 15. After substantives it is found
in 71, 7. 8.

{d). After adverbs like the following: kanktak enough, so far, cf kank

so much, so Viang ; tapitak right after, cf. taj)! htstlg, at last; tanktaks

long ago, cf tank some time ago; ka-itoks not at all, ka-itoks nu

lu'ishkanka ka-i gatpisht I despair entirehj of his coming.

Cf. also page 531 (first example); it aj^pears twice in liataktok right

there, at the same place; cf liatak here. It connects itself also with many

conjunctions : at toks, hii'toksh, etc.

B. — The particle tak serves in forming a future tense, though more
regularly in the Modoc than in the Klamath Lake dialect ; cf Future Tense.
This use is but a special application of the use indicated under D, q. v.

C. — Tak is used in an adversative sense, to mark contrast, difference
in quality, time, etc., in such connections as the following:

kd-itak ha i nish 161a I did you not believe mef

k6-idshitoks washam tchuleks coyote-meat is iwpalatahle (when compared
to the meat of other quadrupeds).

shnt'l^atoks hunk tchpi'nutat they formerly (hunk) cremated in the bury-
ing ground (but they do it no longer).

D. — Tak, toksh serves to connect two co-ordinate sentences, when one
of these stands in an adversative relation to the other, though not syntac-
tically depending on it. It then corresponds to our but, however.

na'dshak link hishuakshlank K'mnkamtchash, n,4nka toks ka-i shana-

hii'li one only consorted ivith K'mukamtch, but the others did not want

him, 95, 11.
.... na'sh wf-uka kslie'sh; k.shawi'nasht tuksh kaitua wf-u;tant ....

they gain one check; but if they (the teeth) fall unequally, they tvin

nothing, 80, 4. 5; cf 71, 2.

Other particles connecting simple sentences are pc'n, tcliish, abbr.
tch, ts; tchek or tchlk ; tchi'ii, t.u'ii and its compounds tclu'iyuk (tchui
huk), tchuyunk (tchui hunk), ate). .. u tchui), all these of a temporal im-

656

GKAMMAK OF TIIK KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

port. Tliey present no Byntuctic difficulties; the list of conjunctions, pages
55b'-r)G0, iind the Dictionary fully sufHco to teach the uses made of them,
which mainly consist in connectinjr co-ordinato sentences.

II. THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.

Compound sentences consist of two or more clauses with finite verbs
showing some temporal, causal, or other logical connection, and forming
but one period. When the comjiound sentence is composed of two clauses,
one of the two is subordinate to . the other ; when composed of ihreo or
more clauses, one of them figures as the principal clause, the others beiu"-
dependent of it. The sign of connection between the principal clause and
the incident clause or clauses is a conjunction. Clauses may be embodied
also in sentences in which the finite verb is replaced by a participle or
verbal ; but then they are not clauses in the grammatic .sense of the term,
although they may fulfill the same syntactic office as these. Compound
sentences may jilso be formed by a nuiltiple system of clauses, one of these
clauses being dependent from a principal one, the other clauses being inci-
dent to the one depending directly from the principal clause.

Wl-.at we express by incident clauses is often rendered in Klamath by
copulative sentences co-ordinate to each other ; and it may bo stated as a
general principle that in the languages of primitive populations the co-ordi-
nate sentence is a more natural and frequent syntactic form of expression
than the compound sentence.

ka'gi a n'sh tcho'ksh, hi ni gdnuapk though one of my legs is lame, I shall
tvalk to the lodge.

Nothing is more common in our literary languages than subjective,
objective, and attributive clauses, terms which express the fact that sub-
jects and objects of sentences and attributes of nouns are not rendered by
single words but by sentences. This practice is greatly favored by the
extensive use of the relative pronoun and the numerous particles derived
from it, as well as by the analytic character of tliese languages. But in
Klamath and many other Indian tongues the relative pronoun is seldom
employed, certain particles possess a more limited function than ours, and

THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.

657

h synthe ,c cl.aracter of these languages nulitates against an unlinute.!
use of .ncdent clauses, the structure of which is not so developed nor so
m ncate as .n our tongues. Hence our subject-, object-, and attribute-
c ause ,s n. Klamath „,ostly rendered by a participle or by a verbal, an.l
tins g.ves to the sentence a., ennnently synthetic (either adjectival or ad-
verbial) turn. Incorporative locutions also replace sonie of our incident
clauses, whereas the comparative, superlative, and annuitive of our adjec-
ive, son>etnnes of our adverb also, usually have to be expressed by two sen-
tences, winch are usually co-ordinate and not subordinate to each other
As wdl be seen by the introductory words and the list in the article
Conjunction, pages 5.5G sc,c,., the language has a cor.siderable number of
conjunctions introducing incident clauses, some of which are found iu prin-
cipal causes as well. Hut our ^rlule, u-keu, after, lecause, for can be ren-
dered by Klamath conjunctions in rare instances only; there are verbals
m the language which are intended especially for the expression of these
ISO particle in Klamath corresponds exactly to our .../, Int, however, thouoh,
then; but there are expedients to express the ideas contained in these par-
ticles as clearly as we can express them. Some of the conjunctions do not
stand at the head of the sentence.

When verbals are found in texts where we have to employ incident
clauses with a finite verb, their subject usually stands in the objective case,
a mode of synthesis which strikingly resemble, the accusativus cum infinitivo
construction of Latin. The use of the verbal indefinite in -sht corresponds
in maiy instances to the ablativus ahsoMus of Latin and the gcnetivus also-
Mm of Greek, since in both the subject has to differ from the subject of the
principal clause and the verb is not a finite verb. As far as syntax is con-
cerned, probably no parts of Klamath speech offer more analogies to Latin
and Orreek grammar than the verbals and participles.
^ COKRELATIVE SKNTENCEs coi.sist of antecedent and consequent .Causes
introduced by pronouns or particles corresponding to each other in their
signification, and therefore called correlatives. Disjunctive words used for
this purpose are: the one, the other; on one mle, on the other side ; either or-
ivhere, there; when, then; eto. One of the two sentences, generally the ante-
cedent or the one first in order, is subordinate to the other, but ii. Klamath

658

i;kajmmau of tue klajmatii language.

this 18 evidenced only by tlie pronoun or particle introducing it, not by the

position of the words. In the main sentence or apodosis the correlative term

is not unfroquently omitted for brevity, especially in conditional sentences.

hJi sliuapkst, tchii ma'lsh ngatuapk na'hlis if yc will be shot, then to you

will snap the bowstring, 21, 10.
tanktC niU hu'nk tatatG nat suko'lkip'l, tankt sa hu'nk gawal kikaskaii-
katk when we gathered in a crowd at that time, then thy found him
as they walked about, 24, 19. 20.
tiitaktak huk kalak ma'sha, gli'tak uba-ush ktvVshka as far as the re-
lapsed (patient) is infected, Just so large a (piece ol) buehskin he cuts
out, 73, 2.

The POSITION OF THK WORDS in the incident clause, which forms such a
perplexing feature in the grammars of Germanic languages, is identical
in Klamath with the position of words in the principal clause. The only
addition is formed by the conjunction introducing the clause, and if the
words are arrayed in another than the usual order, this is done for purely
rhetoric reasons.

The incident clause is not incapsulated within the main or principal
sentence, but precedes or more frequently follows it, as pointed out on a
previous })age, where examples are given.

Subdivisiou. — The various kinds of incident clauses necessitate a sub-
division of them into classes, and I have classified them under the following
headings:

Conditional clauses.

Adverbial (temporal, etc.) clauses.

Kelative clauses.

Indirect questions.

A. THE CONDITIONAL CLAUSE.

This clause is formed by a sentence stating the condition or conditions
under which the fact or circumstance expressed by the principal clause
takes place, and is subordinate to this principal clause, whether it stands
before or is placed after it. It is commonly introduced by a conditional

: W

THE CONDITIONAL CLAUSE.

659

i^l III

conjunction, as liii if, and to this corresponds, at the head of the apodosis
or main sentence, another conjunction correhitive to the above, like tchii
then, though this is frequently omitted. There are instances, also, when
the conjunction of the conditional clause is dropped and that of the apodosis
alono is inserted.

Hii, he if, suiqmhig that, is proclitic, and mostly used in a purely con-
ditional, not often in a tenjporal sense, like our tvhcn. It often combines
with a, -tak, -toks, tchish, tchi'ii into a compound particle, and then becomes
accented, as in hii'tak, hii'toks, hii' a toks hut if; hit tchui, abbr. hii'tchi,
hii'tsi if then; hii' tchish, abbr. hii'tch and if The terms for if are usuj-lly
inflected or case-forms of pronominal roots, and so hii seems formed either
from ha on hand, hy hand or from hil this one* by the addition of the tem-
poral and local particle i. Hii usually connects itself with the declarative
mode, but the conditional mode is not unheard of; cf. 87, 5.

In the apodosis, tchii then corresponds correlatively to the hii, he of the
subordinate, conditional clause, but is very frequently omitted or replaced
by some other particle. Its vocalic ending is analogous to that of hii if
and tchii, tche is etymologically connected with tclia-u noic, at the present
time, and with tchok Jinally, at last. Tche'k is nothing but the particle tchii
enlarged by the demonstrative adverb ke, ke, abbr. -k, is usually postposi-
tive and often ends the principal clause, especially when connected with
the future tense. But it also stands for our until, and in that case intro-
duces statements of a purely temporal import.

If the act or state described by the incident conditional clause is laid
in the future tense, the Modoc dialect prefers the use of the particle -tak
(not -toks, -taks) appended to the base of the verb, while the northern
dialect clings to the suffix -uapka. For the sake of parallelism, Modoc
repeats the same form in the apodosis and often adds the particle iln, lin a,
li'na in one of the clauses or in both. This particle is temporal, and coiTe-
sponds nearest to our sometime, but is not often translatable in the English
rendering of Modoc sentences.

• In the same manner our lohen U derived from hva, the radix of the relativeTnTint«rrogative
pronoun ; if, in Gothic ihn, is the instrumoiital case of the pronominal radix i ; the Latin si if is a con-
traction of svai, sei, and with the Oscau svae is the feminine locative case of the reflective pronominal
radix aca-.

660 GllAMMAU OF TUE KLAMATH LANOUAOE.

hji minuktua kii-i gi'-uapkii, taiikt ni blmiikoliii-ui'ipkan I'-alhishuHli if he
docs wrong in evetijtiiimi, thin I sliall irmorc the yuardsvion, 59, 18.

hii'toks i li'ip snawii'dsaliuipk, iiii'-ulukiiapka in'sli . . . . but if you should
marry two wives, I .shall punlah you, (iO, 1 8.

liii' tclii m's siiawiiclrth gi'iskuapk . . . . , ka-i Hpiinf-uapk a m'sh wnlcli
then if (your) wife runs away from you, she need not transfer a horse
to you, (JO, 14. If).

hii' tchilloyAga lo'k slidika, I'lt link Hlieslialulesli k'lc'za when a youny man
killed a yrizzly, then he was made a warrior, 90, 19. 20.

kukaluak taksli takant'lkuk gt'lp^n, tsui slia iia'sli ksli(t.sli wf-u^a // the.
lower (teeth) only come down in falliny riyht side up, then they win
one check, 80, 3 (taksh stands hero instead of ha). Cf. 80, 4.

wakii'iniia hissunuk, tchiitch ni'sh ka-i siugat should I recur to ninyic
sonys, then (the spirit) miyht not kill me, 12!), 5. (Hero the condi-
tional chuise is ex[)re8sed by the verbal causative.)

wAtchag wawa-a i-uni'gshtka, ku-i tchii ni'l uk if a doy tvhinesjust after
sunset, it is a bad omen for you, 1 33, G.

Sentences in the Modoc dialect :
hsi ka-i haf nish lola i, vulanuiii)ka ml niunikcnash if you do not believe

me, as I see, I will ask anybody.
hii i paltak, spulhitak sha mish tin // you (shall) steal, they tvill lock

you up.
hii 1 un shk'atok tua, raish nil iln sht'want a if T find something I may

give it to you.

THE CONCESSIVE CLAUSE.

Concessive clauses have to be regarded as a special sort of conditional
clauses. They are introduced by a concessive particle like though, although,
but, nevertheless, and Klamath expresses them more frequently by the use
of verbals and participles than by the finite verb, joined to the particle gint
or gintak, which in most cases occupies the second place in the sentence or
phrase. This postpositive location of the particle is due to its verbal nature,
since it has originated from gfant, gfant ak, and was contracted to gfnt liku

1 e

THK ADN'KUItlAIi (JLAUSK

ORl

the Hiiffix -giwk from pfiiiik.

imiiiff Ih, therefore: "mny be,
could bo 80, perbapH, for iii.staiico," and from thiw tbo oonceHHivo tlioiif/li bas
;rnidiially evolved. Tbo Modoc diidoct Hebb>m UHes it, and tbo iiiHtnnces
bcb)\v will hIiow bow fr('(|iieiitly it \h coimccted with vtfrbals and participles.
In 112, 3 we find it connected with an adjective; cf u't(di in Dictionary.

klil';C>it'* gfntak i biVtkalpalank .sblf-napk bA'nksli fhoutfh dead, you shall

skill lip at/aiii and shoot him, llO, (>.
k'mu't(!batk j^l'ntak tcbiltf^'ipeleti'inrnCik iu order to he restored aijnin to

life repeatedly, thouyh in old aye, 103, 10,
nA' ak ya liAn sbkiiyent {(i'ntak (for: sbkaini at gl'ntak) gu'bll'plit /

can certainly yet into, (dthouyh he is strony, 1 1 2, 2. 3.
tsutfsb fri'ntak kn-i gi she yets woi^se, thonyh treated (by a conjurer), 68, 8.

H. TIIK ADVERIJIAL CLAUSE.

This grammatic term comprehends all the incident clauHes by which a
fim'te verb or the principal clause containing this finite verb is determined
in an adverbial manner. Following the classification adopted in Morj)bol-
ogy, pages 5G2 aqq., we thus have adverbial clauses of {a) quantity and
degree; (Z») of space; {c) of tense; {d) quality or modality and cause.
Many of these clauses appear as rudimentary sentences, viz., as phrases
containing a verbal or participle or embodying no part of a verb at all,
like pii'dshit pshfn to-niyht. Adverbial clauses are mainly of a temporal,
sometimes of a causative import, and tlio conjunctions introducing them
either stand at the head of the sentence or occupy the second place in it.
The conjunctions occurring in this kind of clauses have all been mentioned
in the list, pages r)(i2 stjq. The " Legal Customs'' Text, pages r)8-f)3. is full
of instances where sentences which we would lender in the form of adverbial
clauses are resolved into simple sentences and made co-ordinate to the prin-
cipal clause ; cf. page (Jl. The same may be said of many of the sentences
introduced by tchui in the "Snake Fights," pages 28-33.

<4t giitpa at shlo'kla when they had arrived, they shot at the marl; 100, 20.
at gii'tak nt sayuakta, hn'masht sii'llual A'-ukskni Walamski'shasb this

is all I know how the Klamath Lakes fought the Royue River Indians,

17, 18. 19.

6fi2 (JHAMMAU ()|- Till', KLAMATH LANiil' ACii;.

at nA'ka wnkaHli, wi'ikwilrtlia at wlnn flf pnndUbf seed is ripr, Ihm Iht'tj

finlhcr it, 74, 7.
at tmikt kill ti'dsli licmkiiiikji, Md'dokiii at, f,nl'nipf'l« as m trrnlif van

niatlf at (hat time, tin' Modocs ictitnird lioitirward, ID, 17 ; cf. .'JH, I, 2.
at wiiitulaii when n daif is ovrr, 91, ;$,
liiViiiaMlit ^fislit HliniVkp'lislit lil'p MluippaMli spiVllii Iwaiusc he look (his

wife) hark I iiiiprisim him for two months, «il, 10.
k/i-iu H(')Hlitinasli fratpiHli .... Iwfore the Anirriraiis airircd, etc., 90, 16;

cf. 184; .'57.
ma'ntcli j^islit or niri'iitcli ffftko sonirliine qftcrward.
ni'inuk pulii'ii irinht rrcri/ niffht.
na'ts gaya-itHaiiii)k Klifi'ldsliasli huk, liipiak iiats {-•iil;(alj,'i'pka the nidi-

tan/ had advanced in front of its, hefore ur had descended from the

hill, 29, 17. IS.
nA'sh ak friwUik wftchnoka li'ilula 1 you arc vattUmi around (the lodge)

perhaps tiecausc ijou love me, IS.'J ; 1(1.
pA'ks pahiUko iiia'iitch gi'ntak i'pakt ramass, after it is dried, matj lie a

Ion;/ time, 14H, 14.
tsui nat lapi guli'ndsa, skuyiVi iiatcli hA'k hiliiki then two of us went

down into (that phiee), as the commanders had detailed us, 29, 11.
wak gialit how; wak gi'iig, wak gitko why, for what cause.
wafta .slu^niial, tiiir)h"t'li.><h tchek kelewi (hey fouyhl all day, until they

ceased at sundown, 37, 21.

C. THE KELATIVE CLAUSE.

The relative clause i.s introduced either by the relative pronoun kat,
abbr. ka, and its inflectional cases or by a particle formed from the pro-
nominal roots ka- (kank) and ta- (tank) for the purpose of qualifying the
subject or o])ject (direct and indirect) of the main sentence. As the lan-
guage possesses many other means to qualify these, relative clauses are
comparatively scarce, and u ually stand afcr the principal clause, or may
be incapsulated into it. SnmeHmes a demonstrative pronoun precedes it
as correlative.

TIIK INDIUKC T gllHSTION.

6G3

RoHidoH tlio oxnniploH ir'wm on pngo r»42 ixiid in tlio Dictionnry, tho
followinf,' may ho (piotod hero :

Imntclifpkii tclii'k, kt'ilmktok ni'iniiktua n»hi»n(lHhkiino then he sucks out,

irhittsocrtr /v of small sue, 71, (>. 7.
luVnkHt ni nuHh Hund.l HpA'lhi, k.it huh l.n'k wiuUluiya / impriso,, the

one /or one week, who has whipped them, 61, 17; cf. Gl, l:?, and

129, 7.
hA'nk Khdlalpksh, ki'mt hIwi sht'nks irhU^m that siek man, irhnm /'«// re-
ported killed, (J5, i H.
tchl'ikiak, ki'it jrcii jront, x«'!;« '/"' V/. «''"' "''•"' ""'■''- '•'■ '''"''■
wft'la Ha tiViiipiiiiH, kat \u\k t.'mkt niak'K'^a lltei, asked those five, who at
that time had encamped there, 17, 7.

1). THE INDIRECT QUESTION.

Tho direct questionmcMitions tho wordHof the inquirer vcrhally, whereas
tho indirect question givoH only the sense of then., and clothes its contents
in tho sarb of a subordinate clause. Utterances of doubt, suspicion, incer-
titude, when enunciated in a clause dei)cn(lin- of a principal clause, also
come under tho caption of queries indirectly put. Ordy their contents, not
the position of tho words, stamp them as indirect questions; they are not
always introduced by conjunctions, and verbals or particii.les sometimes
serve to express them. A comparison of the exan.ples added below, with
those mentioned under "The Interrogative Sentence" will be the best means
to show the syntactic difference between the two modes of interrogation.
Like tho direct .piestion, the indirect question may bo affirmative or nega-
tive, and if introduced by any conjunctions at all, these conjunctions are
about the same as used in making direct questions.

ki'i-i nft shayuiikta tarn nA iln shlc-etak / do not know whether I shall

find (him, it),
kil-itoks nu hushki'mka ka-i gAtpisht / despair of his comimj ; lit. "not

indeed I think (he) not to be coming."
ki'uks suawiuuk sas k,',nts sliuapkst when a eotijurer examined them (to

Uml oni) irhomitiht he unmided,2\,\l\0.

QCA

GRAMMAK OF TIIK KLAMATH T,AN(JUAfiE.

LCmt^-ish gi'ikua shlii'dsluilv, Skrlamtcliasli tiimiVdsli ktunslitsht one of
the Thunders erosscd oirr h observe whether Old Marten was asleep
(or not), 113, If); d. 122, 3. 4.

vA'la Shu'kamtchasli, t/im tatakiash dilo'sht? she asked Old Crane
whether he had seen the children, 122, 18.

wAk gt Jul ki'i-i gepk? tvhat is if, that he does not comef

What is called in Latin syntax oratio ohliqua, viz., tlio paraphrasing of
the verbatim quotation of what has been said or written into the fcrm of a
dependent clause, also exists to a certain extent in Klamath syntax, and in
its structure comes as near as possible to the "indirect question." Perhaps
more frequently than this, it is expressed by verbals, and in our printed
texts the informants avoided this form as much as possible, preferring the
oratio recta, or verbatim quotation of spoken words. All sentences intro-
duced by gishapa, ksluipa to declare, to say so, are also worded in the oratio
obliquu; cf Dictionarj'.

hemki'mka ni'muk maklaks : at n/mnk tchckeli vumf p'lu'ilam shellua-
luish all the tribes declared, that now all blood is- buried of their former
finhts, .54, 18; p'milam instead of nalam in oratio recta.

sha'ti-la hunk snawt^dshash: maklr.ks gatpantki, shu-utiinktgi pi'sh
gii'iga maklaks: shapfya, miiklilkshash wushmush shiiikii'stka he
instructed this tvoman (to say) that the Indians shotdd come, that he
wanted to meet the Indians in council; he announced that he would
hill an or. for the Indians, 13, 12. 13. Cf A?, 22.

Toby heniki'.nka: "k/i-i huluUchantgi," Tobif shouted that then should not
run, 54, 8.

By the oral particle nen, m words are introduced which were spoken
by others, and therefore sentences with nen f(irm a substitute for the oratio
ohliqua of European languages. This may be said also of many sentences
embodying the particle mat. Cf mat and nen, pages (Jr)2-(J.')4.

II^COKPOKATION.

I have relegated this important topic to the close of the .syntactic por-
tion because incorporati.>n is a gen(>ral feat.n-e, and p.irvades to some extent

INCOItl'OBATION.

(5fir>

all portions of tliis language, altliougli the instances where we can trace it
are not very fr'^qnent.

There has been nnich wrangling and contention among linguists con-
cerning "incorporation in American languages." Although many of them
were agreed as to the facts, and acknowledged also the existence of incor-
poration in Basque and other languages of the Eastern hemisphere, the
main cause of the strife was this, that every one of the contestants had a
definition of the term "incorporation" for himself Lucien Adam regards
it as a special sort of polysynthesis,* while others use both terms for the
same sort of linguistic structure. 1). G. Brinton gives a circumstantial
definition of the two,t an . considers incorporation us a structural process
confined to the verb only. Several recent authors refer to "the incorpo-
rating languages of America" in a manner likely to induce readers into the
belief that all Indian languages of America possess this mode of structure.
Hut of the whole number of from three to five hundred dialects spoken in
North, Central, and South America we are accpiainted with perhaps one-
tenth only ; thus nobody is entitled to include the other nine-tenths, of
which wo know nothing, into a classification of this sori. At all events, the
American languages which have been studied differ enormously among each
other as to the (piality, degree, and extent of their incorporative faculties.

In the present V(*port I iim using the two terms above mentioned in
the following sense, to avoid all further misconception :

I'oh/si/ntJiesis I regard as jui exclusively morphologic term, and mean
by it tiu) combination of a radix with one, two, or more oloments of a rela-
tional or material signification, joined to it to build up words either by
inflection or by derivation.

By incorporation I mean tlie combination of two or more words exist-
ing in the language into our wJiolc, be it a phrase or a sentence, non-jiredi-
cative or ])redici;tive, nominal or verbal, l)y aphaeresis or apocope of the
inflectional or deri\ationiil iifiixes; the operation bearing the imj)ress of a
s^-ntactic, not of a morphologic, process, and producing in the lionrer's
mind the effect of an inseparable whole or entirety.

* Profttco to liiH "fitiidrs sur six laii'

:iicM iiiiKMicaiiirN," I'nris, 1S78, paj^'ii vii.

tOii liolysyiithcHisiiiiil iiicoi|Miia(ion iis .Iiar.iffriisticH.if AniiMicap liiiiKiiaK«'N; J'liilad.li.liia, ISS.'i,
pasrs II, 1,-. (f,iiiiis],aH of TiaiiMiiit. Am. I'liihisdiili. So.., I'liila., vol. xxiii, -IH-h;).

666

ORAMMAU OF TIIK KLAMATH LANOIJAGK.

From tho abovo it follows that i)olysyntlioais as well as incorporation
can occnr in agglutinative and inflective languages only, and that tho modes
and degrees of both species of synthesis must be almost infniite in number.
The Greek language exhibits more polyaynthetism than Latin, (lerman,
English, the Semitic, and many American languages, but many of the latter
incorporate in a larger degree than most Kurope.in tongues. Going into
further details, tho two modes of synthesis which occupy our attention
extend over tho following grammatic points :

PoLYSYNTHEsra end)racoH the phenomena as below :

(a). Prr fixation and si((/i.iation for inflexional and derivational purposes;
also iiijirntioii. of elements into the radix, wherever this uncommon mode of
synthesis can bo traced with certainty. The order in which the aflixes
Adlow eac^h other is too important to be neglected by tho stiulents of lan-
guage.

(/>). rimictic channe of the radix or of aflixcs, when traceable not to
the (Maut, but to elements reaching the radix through extraneous addition.

(c). licdiiplication of the radix or of its parts, or of other portions of the
word, for the purpose of inflection or of derivation.

(d). Cwmiuatiou or phonetic repetition or lengthening of certain ele-
ments in the word.

Incorporation as a syntactic feature may manifest itself in tho follow-
ing processes :

(rt). In the formation of compound terms by binary, ternary, or other
multiple romhinatioii. Only then are the parts combined by real incorpora-
tion into one term, when one or some are losing sounds or syllables by tho
process, either by aphaeresis, ellipse, or apocope. For Klamath wo have
instances of this in kiibknia, L('.k Pshi'sh, tchawiiya : nouns and verbs are
equally liable to undergo this mode of synthesis. More instances will bo
mentioned under the heading: "Conversational torni of lantruajre."

{})). Direct and indirect nominal and pronominal ohjeds are incorpo-
rated into the verb whenever they become aUcml from their n.sual form
and placed between the pronominal subject and the verb. Incorporation
also takes place when tho in-onominal ol)joct is so closely affixed, either

INCOUrOHATION.

G67

profixod or postfixed, to tho verb as to lose its accent and form one word
with it, and tlion it usually occurs in the altered form, as In French : donne-
Ir-lui, or in tho Italian: a rivoder vi (o sre you atjain. Klamath does not
alter the nominal obje(!t, hut concerniufr the personal pronominal ohject a
beginning of incorporation is itercoptible. Tn some instances the j)ronomi-
nal subject is also changed and incorporated into the verb l>y postfixation,
by what I call tho synthetic form of inflection.

(r). The effect of incorporation is shown in many striking instances in
tho m.sr-iv fleet ion of tho substantive, when inflected sinuiltaneously with an
adje(;tive or pronoun used attributivc-ly. The use of the apocopated form
in numerals, as lap, ndan, etc., implies incorporation also. In these adnom-
inal parts of speech (sase-forms are tiot .so extensively developed nor .so poly-
synthetic as in tho substantive, and j)laced by the side of it have some of
their endings truncated, altered, f>r lost, because the words are no longer
felt to bo separate words, 'i'luiy aie nigarded now as a unity or combina-
tion, ami hence one ca.se-terminal, either in the noun or in its attribute, is
thought to Hufhce for both. The princijjal relation in whi<'h Klamath is
incorporativo is the attributive relation, and the examples below will show
what kinds of combination the noun is able to undergo, especially if the
verbal signification is .still apparent. Klamath i.s undoubtedl}- an incorpo-
rating language, but in a limited degree, and polysynthetic more in the
derivation of verbs than in their inflection.

Instances of incorporation like the ones to be considered occur in all
European huiguages, when phrase-like compoimds or ])arts of senteiu'cs,
(!Von whole sentences, are u.sed as single words, often in a i-ather burles(pie
manner. Thus we have in Si)ani.sli: tamailo size, from Latin tanturn so
much, magnus large; in Germ.ui: Gottseibeiuns, for the devil; in French:
affaire {h, ffiire: business, lit. "something to do"), un tete-ti-tete, un en-tout-
ciis ; in English, popular wit and ingenuity are inexhaustible in forming
such combinations as go-ahead people; get-up bell; penny-a-liner; stick-in-
the-mud concern; a go-as you-please match; a catch-as-cntch-can wrestler;
a how-come-you-so condition. A twncf/i/s^ omelet is an instance of com-
pounding by juxtaposition ; a two-egg-omelet one of compounding by incor-
jxiration.

668

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH TvANGUAGR.

The Kliimatli examples do not differ imich from the above except that
they are susceptible of inflection by case-endings. If I am justified in re-
garding word-composition as a syntactic process, nominal compounds might
all be considered as instances of incorporation. But it is safer to regard
them so only when such compounds show loss or alteration by aphaeresis
or apocope, because this goes to prove that the combining of the eleuieiits
has been of a close and forcible nature.

idikiiihi-gish forchpicr, for atfnish kiiilatat gish.

ga-uHpkan e-ushtat gunfgshta aniviiuf at the opposite shore of (Jic lake,
Mod ; stands for ga-ulfpkan gunfgslitant d-ush.

hiitak=tchi'tko settler, lit. "a liver there."

yaiikela stiipuyuk stina'sh menstrual lodge, lit. "cry and dance- for first
menses-lodsro."

kiUla^atilmnuish mole, for kiiflatat tatamnuish.

kapkiigatat=stinri'sh luti'la to stay in a hrush-lodqe. This inversion from
kapkiiga-shtina'shtat can take j)lace only, because both terms are
practically considered as being one word.

kc'tcha.bubiinuiah tippler, lit. "a pettily drinker."

liiliiks=skutclialtko wrapped in fire, for lulukshtat skutchaltko.

niilshishtat shi'-usha shatelaks salve, lit. "on sorcs-to line-oneself rub-
bing-substance."

jji'iksh go-u ipakshkshiikshi gc'na nu / go to my eamass-storing place.
f paksh storiny-plaee stands for fpkash through metathesis, and is the
verbal indefinite of fpka to be kept or stored; pi'iksh c(;:nass is object-
ive case depending of fpaksli, the verbal function being retained.

8hiillkish;^eni "Md'dok Point" shi'shash gishi gati)a they went to the reser-
vation called Modoc Point, lit. "to the reservation Modoc Point (its)
nameat they went," 34, l!l. Cf also slu'sha in 18f); 3, and Note.

spakii-we'sh ice-punch, ice-breaker, for we'sh spakd'tkish.

vil'l^'ishti kill' wash siikutatk n'hlutuina dressed in a borrowed woodpecker
skin mantle he trails it along the ground, IS!); G. Here vil'l^ashti
and kill' wash arc both equally dependent of siikutatk ("dressed in
mantle"), and \ il'l^ashti again depends of kili'wash. The full case-
form would here be vu'lxashti kili'washti or kili'washtat, but the
fiuffix -ti occurring in one part of the combine will do for both.

INUOltrOKATION.

669

{(1). Only a limited number of adverbs, mostly monosyllables, can
become incorporated into the verbs which they define and then they
ligure as their prefixes, as the natural position assigned to attributes is
before, not after the word qualified. Adverbial prefixes of this descri{)tion
Hoinetiuies partake of the functions of our separable and inseparable prep-
ositions, and a list of them is found in " Syntax," under "Adverb Pre-
fixed," page fi32. A list of adverbs which can appear also as independent
words with an accent of their own, like ka-a, ku-i, mil, tfdsh, is added to
tlio above list. But wherever any adverb included in the above lists be-
comes a real prefix, there, of course, we have to do with polysynthesis and
no longer with incorporation.

RHETORICAL FIGURES.

To conclude the syntactic section of this grammar, a chapter on figures
is subjoined, to some of which allusion has been made previously. Rhetorical
figures occur in all languages of the world, though one and the same figure
may largely diifer as to frequency in the one or the other tongue; anaphora,
ellipsis, metaphor, and tautology are perhaps the most frequent, no language
being deficient in them.

Alliierntkm should be given a separate place amoi.g the rhetoric figures,
because it is a phonologic rather that a syntactic feature of language. We
know it best through its frequent use in the poems of the Germans and
Anglo-Saxons dating before A. D. 1100, in a literary period when rhyming
was yet unknown as a factor in rhythmic poetry. We find alliteration in
many of our Kliimath song-lines, but whether the song-makers used it there
on purpose and designedly like the Anglo-Saxon poets or not 1 am unable
to say. Syllabic redu|)lication must have prompted its use. The allitera-
tion is consonantic only, whereas the Germanic nations made use also of
vowels for this rhythmic purpose. A h\\ examples of alliteration are as
follows :

(): gutitgulash gc-u nc'pka, 166; 27.

A;.- ktsaluikialam gc'-uke-ish, 165; 14. Cf 13.

I: luash ai mVsh a liiiamnapka, 158; 57. Cf 157; 40.

670

GliAMMAli OF THE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

^andjf).- paUk! ish hfl lAlpalpaliat ! 154; 11.
«.- naimktiia ml papi'sh g\, 168; 53,. Cf. Hif); 10, 16.
n and w: waiiani wt'ash nil wilanuiili)ka, 15(5; ;50.
w: wiwiwa! nish shi'iwalsh witnank! 153; 2.

In our prose texts nothing occurs worth noticing tliat could bo called
alliteration. A sort of rhi/me is sometimes produced in the song-lines by
repeating the same word at the end of two or three lines following each
other. Of assonance used as a metrical help but few instances can be
found.

AnakoluthoH consists in a change of syntactic construction within the
range of the same period. Tluis we sometimes notice a change of subjects
in sentences following each other, where no intimation of such a chansre
going to occur is given by pronouns or other words.

Piil snawii'dshla Pampiani pil'ia lupi' ; tsi'ii wil'kala, tsui tata mantsak
mbusii'lan gi ; tsui ka'tsa . ... at first Paul married PdmpCs
daughter, then (she) bore a child (and he) lived with her quite a
while, then (he) left her .... 77, 1. 2. Cf 78, 1.
Anaphora, or repetition of a term or phrase, even of a sentence, gen-
erally with interposition of some words, is more frequently met with in
Klamath than any other rhetoric figure. Emphasis is the main cause for
anaphora, and short, monosyllabic pronouns are chiefly figuring in these
constructions. The repetition of personal pronouns has been previously
alluded to.

a ni nA-asht gi : "hagga shlii'k!" tchi ni gi then I said: ''let mc shoot

now!" so I said, 22, 19.
1 pi'l, i hissuaksh pfl shil'wanuapk watch you only, you the husband must

transfer horses, (JO, If). 16.
kiifla ml guti'la ml I am crawling into the ground, 154 ; 5. Cf. 167 ; 36.
tclu'ii ni ml InliipCli T then ran down again, 23, 15.
tsiii ni shli'u, pato n shli'n then I shot him, I wounded him on the cheek,

30, 16.
tiinep tala i skuktanuapk hunk pii, mil'yiins pi'la lakiash five dollars you

hare to pay to him, to the head-chief only, CO, 8.

KIIETOIUCAL FIGUKES.

671

Asyndeton, or lack of connective particle between two nouns, phrases,
or sentences (co-ordinate or subordinate). Since the language possessed
no particle corresponding to our and, this rhetorical figure is rather natural,
unless it occurs where a subordinate sentence has to be connected with the
principal one. And is often replaced by tchlsh aUo and by tchiii hereupon
and its compounds.

kii's wd-uzalks tselash gJ'tk, shlapsh gi'tk the ipo-plant has a furcated
stem (and) has flowers, 147, 8.

lap Modokfshftsh shuenka, ndan shliuiya, etc., thci/ killed two Modocs,
then wounded three, .... 54, 13.

t'shi'siuip p'ki'shap k'lcka (her) father (and) mother died, 54, 2.

Ellipsis, or the dropping of words and short phrases from a sentence,
is frequently met with in the conversational style, when tlie sentence can
1)0 easily understood or its meaning guessed at without their presence.
Thus, the ellipsis of the verb gi to he, to sai/, is of a very frequent occur-
rence, as in : ki'llitk nii'-ulaks lahikiam the laws of the chiefs are rigorous,
00, 4; tAlaak ha! is that corrects tsui nish sa (gi) then they (said) to me.

Metaphors and metonymies are of rare occurrence in tliis language. A
metaphor implies a resemblance between two objects by assigning to one
the name, attribute, or action of the other, while through metonymy we
call one object bj- the name of another that possesses an acknowledged
relation to it The oratory of these Indians is not by far so much given to
flowery, symbolic, figurative language as that of the Eastern Indians, among
whom this stylo forms such a paramount feature. There are, however,
some instances in our Texts, and we nnist take care not to confound them
with idiomatic forms of speech.

at lah'iki hu'ntsak i nen l(')la, kClamtsank si'tk lu'dshna now ye chiefs, ye
are believiny ivithout any ground, ye walk along as with closed eyes,
64, 10. Cf also 54, 18.

p'laiki'sham palpdlish shi'l k'hi'ulCp^an raising the ivhite flag of the one in
heaven, 14, 2.

Syllepsis is called the construing of words according to the meaning
they convey and not by the strict requirements of gramnuitic rules. It is

672

Git^VMMAU OF TUK KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

a coHstrudio ad sensum, of whiiih a phonetic parallel exists exemplified by
mo uiuler "Assimilation," page 2i}3. It might also bo called syntactic
(ithadioH wherever no omission of terms has taken place as in the seventh
example below.

ga-uHpkan c'-ushtat giinigshtat iandiiifj oh the opposite sliore of the lake,

Mod., where <■'' ushtat stands for c'-ush.
gt'mpOli ilk Kamu.sh Afshisham shiVluatnan KUniikamteh went home

dressed in Aishish's yanncnt^i, Mod. myth. Here shuhUish garments

has to be supplied between Aishishan* and shiVluatnan.
ka-i i wiitsani tchi'kluapk wiinniki'sham yoti shdl not ride a stranrier's

horse, 58, 11; where wats would bo the correct form,
kiitok ni ge-u siigsii'wa / think I told my truth, G5, 7; stands for: "I

told the truth as I think it to be."
Modoki'shilsh sliishukshG'mi at the time of the Modoc war, 55, 19 ; lit.

"at the time of the Modocs being fought by the Americans," the

latter, Bi')shtinam, being omitted from the sentence,
nutak hilnk shk'papka g(j-utantkak lulpatko / observed with my otvn

eyes. Hero lulpatko ("having eyes") is made to agree with nutak

myself, whereas the correct form would be liilpatka with eyes, by

eyes, forming agreement with gt'-uta)!*^^ka ak. ■
tolak gr-u my arrow, instead of tclak shiukish ge-u the arrow that killed

me, i;5S, 1.

Tautology repeats a word, j)hrase, or idea by using not the same words,
as is done by anapliora, but synonymous or ec^uivalent terms :

lii' a nat Wiik ka-.i, lii' nat wak galdsawia-a ! we do not know hotv to act,

not how to approach ! 22, 2.
tua ni w.ik giug shfukuapk ? why should I have killed him? 64, 9; why

is here repeated twice.

AlTIiNDICES TO THE OBAMMAB.

673

APPENDICES.

The chapters following do not form a structural part of the grammar
proper, and therefore they wore relegated to the end of this section as
appendices. They include many points needed for acquiring a thorough
knowledge of Klamath, but could not be conveniently inserted in either
the lexical or grammatic section because they partake equally of the char-
acter of both. Several of these chapters could have been made consider-
ably more voluminous, but, as there must be a limit to everything, what
is given Iv low was thought to suffice as specimens of the subject-matter
treated. ' he subjects are treated in the following order :

Appendix I : Idioms.

Apepndix II : Conversational form of language.

Appendix III : Dialectic differences.

Appendix IV : Syntactic examples.

Appendix V: Complex synonymous terms.

Appendix VI : Roots with their derivatives.

I. IDIOMS.

Idioms are certain modes of expression having something striking,
quainl, pointed, or unusual about them, although they are founded in the
stuictureof the language to which they belong, and they do not unfre-
"ntlv appear as rhetorical figures. Idiomatic expressions may be con-
» phrases or sentences or in single words ; occasionally the idiomatic
t.A '>f certain terms implies another meaning than the common one,

anu / peculiar wording often renders their translation into other lan-
guages difficult. Agencies most active in producing idiomatic formr. of
language are the psychic qualities of the people, social customs, historic
occurrences, climatic associations, witty sayings, and similar causes. They
impart life and color to language, and no investigator of popular thought
can dispense entirely with the study of tliem. Books composed in our lit-
erary languages do not often exhibit them conspicuously, but a freer display

of them is made in the conversational style, in curses, oaths and other assov-
43

674

(iUAMMAU OF THK KLAMATH hAN(ilIA(iH.

I \i

emtions, in fc.lklorc, in flio coinic. dninin, tlio nows[)iii)er, iind (ho diiiloctH, in
l)rovc'rl)S and provirbial Idcntions. Anion},' tlio cxclanmtions luul intorjec-
tiouH umny iiro idiomatic, iind sovoral iircliaic tornis have to bo considered
as sucli also.

Anion},' idiomatic expressions there are some special classes, and one of
the more remarkable is that of the cant (cnii.s, though I have not found it to
be much developed in this lan<,'nago. In the southern dialect we may class
hero the use of wrvvalilksli when it is denoting generically the females, and
not the "old women" only. In Klamath Lake we can regard aa cant terms
yaka (for yii'ka, yi'ka), 8hnik8h<')kslmka, tchinnlf^iuand Kii/katilsh, a term
invented for deriding white men who are wearing beards.

The chissifiurs used with the inunerals above the number trn have also
to bo considered idiomatic, although such are occurring in several other
languages on the Pacific slope. Verbification of certain particles, as at
gii'tak, hftak, k'wak, le wak ka-a, nen, etc., as emnneratetl in Morphology,
page 457 »([., also belong.s to the idioms. Women use the same terms and
phonetic forms as men, and there are no reverential or ceremonial forms
found hero as we find them frequently occurring further south and among
the tribes of the Mississipjii plains. The use of certain pronouns in order to
avoid giving the proper names of deceased individuals is found to be the
custom all along the I'acitic (^oast, probably elsewhere too, and in this sense
may be considered idiomatic. Klaniaths use for this purpose hft'k, hfi'nkt,
hft'ksht that one, those ones, etc.

The manner by which the verb to be has to be expressed in Klamath,
when connected witli a locative adjunct, appears to us idiomatic, though it
is found in many other Indian languages, and is much less artificial than
our use of the verb to be, in this coimection. Whenever an animate or inan-
imate subject or object is referred to as bcint/ somewhere, either indoor or
outdoor, around, below, between, or above somebody or something, in the
water or on the ground, the verb gi to he is not employed, but the adverbial
idea becomes verbified in the form of some intransitive verb, so that helotv,
e. g., becomes i-utfla 'o t)e or lie below, mulernenth. The mode of existence
has also to be distinctly qualified in that verbified term ; it has to be stated
whether the subject or object was standing, sitting or lying, staying, living.

IIJIOMS.

675

Bloop.ns. UHuulIy tho uloa of stayinfr and living coincidoH with tl.at of
«.ttn,;r, and sleeping with that of lying ,„, „ eortain npot. Moreover
nu,„hn- luiH to be expressed by tho nse either ..f the verbal singnlar or of
tho d..al or plural, and exterioy or form is indicated by tho form-prefixes
80 frequently discussed in tho Grammar. What term has to bo um-d in
ovory mstanco can bo found out best by consulting tho second part of the
Dictionary.

The 'JY-xts and the Dictionary are full of instances showing the partic-
nlar use of the verbs alluded t<., an,l the following examples will perhaps
prove sufficient for a prelin.inary guidance of tho reader:

kii'lo hiitakt ti'iya (vjumpcr-trcc was there below (mo), 30, 12.
watch tkiilamna n horse was or stood above, on a Mil, 'M), 2.
latchash tupka a house stands on the same level (with mo),
watch safgatat tchfa, tgi'itga the horse is on the prairie.
watch tchfktchikat levuluta horses are (harnessed) before the earriage.
lt(»ks shtd(')tishtat lalfga a stain is on the dress.
nalam pu'ks kiiflatat iyiku our catuass is, lies on the floor.
WfUksAm mn'na u'sha kii'latat the wdtksam-plant is or grows deep in the
ground, 149, I'J.

tsuni'ka kiiflatat luslia the tsuntka-bulb is (found) above the around

149, 18.
wiitchag tebullat i-utfla dogs are or lie under the table.
kiii'm iimbutat wti flsh are or lire in the, water.
n;'.nuk laLTki hUchashtat Hupjuga all the ehicfs are {sit or lie) within the

lodge.

wewanuish wiiK'.ta liukii'imnank the women accompany (the conjurer's)
song while being around him, 71, 5.

The following words and sentences may be regarded as specimens of
idioms, representing both dialects; for a thorough understanding of them tho
Dictionary should be consulted.

Ambu wigata "near water," when used for island (Kl.).

at kiipakt gi tcha ! all he quiet now! nu kapakt gi lam quiet.

G76

UUAMMAU OF TUH KLAMATH LANdUAOB.

I'l^ii, il. 0-iilxn, elliptic for slu-Mlmsli iHxi '« ff^'"' «"'"^' '" ««»"'•' ♦'»" <^-
form o-i'ilzii also ^» m/(/; rl^u uIho elliptic for Hlit'HlmtuiHli or slii'-
Hliiwh I'l^H /« .s(< II price or raliic upon; k('ti:liu, ti'imii t'l^u to sell
cheap, dear.

gii'tak! (Kl.) ki'uiktak ! {'SWV) >^top! ceme! enom/h of this! VVlion ii
story is fiiUHhed, the Kliiumtli Lukes say: at gii'tak; the Modoi-s:
lien ka taiiui ak just so far!

gftkulsh! T cannot think of it now ! (Mod.); sko "come up !" (Kl.).

lii'mii ! tvait!

h( or liit'nasli, when used for brother, sister, and connot'tod only with
posseiisive pronouns in the locative case. From li( in the lodge, at
home; cf. -yena, -hit'na, a verbal suffix referring to an act per-
formed indoors, within, in the lodtfe. Mf hit'nash, mienash your
brother or sister ; kii'gi gc'-utant hi (or hienash) / lost my brother,
sister; gt'-utant, in'niitant hic'nash shlc'u nA / see my or his brother,
sister ; viz., "I see (those) within my, his lodge;" p'niitant hii'nash
from her brother. The locative case here indicates a dwelling or
stay within the lodge.

I'.iHluii'ikshash, snawt'dshash jialla to seduce a married man, woman.

hftak 1 tcla'm ! (for tclifmi) hold on now! (Mod.).

i, tcho tchunk I yes, so it is! or yes, so he, she said.

yj'i-uka tulaak right in the next house; just in the neighborhood.

ka-A mish nu ko-ishc'watko shk'a / am quite glad to find you.

kiiflash stiini ! you dirty fellow!

ke-asli, kii'-ash bad thing; term used to prevent children from doing
certain things ; cf. kil-ashtamna.

k'lekapkashtala telshampka (abbr. k'le'kshtala, k'le'ksh telslu'impka) to
be moribund; lit. "to look toward a deceased one."

ko-idshi, ti'dshi stefnash ofivicked, of good disposition, mind.

k()-i gi-uiipka it would not he a good way.

k(')-i ti'unenitsh noise, clatter ; lit. "disagreeable hearing."

iiii-itala tt'lshnank hushd'tcliiia to ride sidnvays on horseback.

nii'tu in fact, really, it is ay* (Mod.).

(COLLOQUIAL FORMS.

G77

ndHh/ika ntsh iiAgshtant nia'sliok fcriw/; (lr<\fin one onr I cannot hear with

it; car \n omitted,
pii'dshit nu in'rifk ktiiim T yiept rerif lit/It' last ni/jht.
pukrwisli iuVhIi, p. hIiiViii hlocklmul, lit. "loutlior head," "leather mouth."
tfdsh hi'mkaiika, lit. "to spoak favorably": to conclude peace ; to make a

satisfactory arraugcrnvnt; to speak in favor of order Justice ; to give lam.
tfdHh, ko-i hushkauku to he or feel happi/; to be sorrouful.
tufnika (for tuiiiixatko) tak i An ijou tvill be a man in tvoman's clothes;

aaid to little boy.s, when di-sobedient.
tdhil' iii'l uk it is a bad omen for you.
tchui kf-h'wi then I, he, she, they quit; often added unnecessarily, as a

standiiij^ formula, at the end of narratives.
I'ltawa ! dead broken ! exclamation of despair,
wak yi'inhua I wakfanua ! / tvill he dead if I do!
watchag shliVki na'sh Ifklash piila-ash the dog ate up the whole loaf; lit.

"the flour l}ing there in one heap."

IL CONVERSATIONAL FORM OF LANGUAGE.

In every language two modes of speaking are easily distinguished from
each other. One of these is the style of conversation used in everyday in-
tercourse which, by its free unconventionality, differs from the more elabo-
rate forms heard in oratory and poetry and in historic or other narratives.
While the latter employs rounded up, unabbreviated, and carefully worded
grammatic forms and sentences, and has a more extended vocabulary at its
disposal, the popular or conversational mode of expression shows a tendency
toward brevity, truncation of words, contractions and ellipses of sounds and
words, indistinct utterance of sounds and incomplete phraseology. When
opportunity is offered for literary development, it is the former that will
develop into a literary language, whereas the latter may degenerate into a
jargon full of slang and cant terms, or, when used as means of interna-
tional intercourse, lose its grammatic affixes, as we see it done in the trade
jargons spoken in several parts of the world.

Of the differences existing between the two styles in the Klamath lan-
guage only a few examples can be given within the narrow limits allotted,

678

(IRAMMAll or THE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

and these I have classified under the headings of Phonology, Morphology,
and Syntax.

PHONOLOGY.

Of unusual sounds occurring only in the conversational style of lan-
guage I have met three: (1) a thick I pronounced witii the tongue-tip
applied to the middle palate, and resembling exactly the Polish 1 in dlony ;
1 heard it in such terms as tii]>l:al looyi. (2) a real /-sound was heai-d in
kofka to bite for kopka, pii'f daiiyhter for i)ii'-ip ; however, I consider it safer
to spell these terms: kuv'hka, pii'v'h, for v is known to be a sound of the
language, while f is not. (,'{) the palatalized 1 (or ]) I have met in one
Modoc word only: kaia to enter a lod</c, wiiich is related to gu'hli, guli to
enter, go into. Here the unusual '1 sound, so commo.i in the languages of
the Willamet Valley and on Columbia River (where / occurs also) prob-
ably originated from hi

Some vowels show frequent interchangeability among themselves; e
and e are rather frequently replacing i and ! : e, e for i, I thou, e'ki for ike
thou here; pjellitk foreihle for ki'llitk ; ne'l fnr for nl'l; Ni'laks, nom. pr. for
Ndakshi ; me thine for mi. In popular talk we also meet t'hua to he full for
c'wa; iiwalues island, 74, 14, for awaluash; kiii'lu juniper for kii'lu, kii'lo;
kai'ki, kiiyeke it is not for kJi'gi, ke'gi ; hiapat;)joksh stoclduf/ for yapatzoksh;
.Mod. hipat;;^oksh. Preference is frequently given to the deep vowels o and
a over a, whether the vowel be long or short, as in miikloks 2>i'ople for mak-
laks, ydpontk du// for yc'pantko, 87, H, ishkopi-li to take out ai/ain for ishka-
pC'li, kt6pka to slap for ktupka, notodsha to hurl for nutf/dsha, ndsaskop'l to
wipe off again for ndshashkapeli, st(')ka to sfah, gig for sti'ika, su(jtchuopk for
shuddshuapka, fut. of shucdsha to gamble, ta'pia younger for tapia, 114, 2.
In distributive reduplication, short o and u occasionally appear instead of
short a in the second or reduplicated syllable. In many of tiiese instances
the removal of the accent had something to do with the vocalic interchange.
To use pji'p, pe'p instead of pe-ip daughter is considered a vulgarism, and
might cause confusion with pe'p pine-marten, sable.

Among the consonants, s, ts, are more frequently heard in conversation
than sh and ts, whether initial, medial, or final, and Dave Hill's text-pieces

COLLOQUIAL FORMS.

679

will give full evidence of this. The simple sounds are also more original
than the assibilated sh, tch, and belong to an earlier status of the language.
Both sometimes appear in the same word, as in sdshash name, su'ldshas and
shuldshas soldier. The use of ts, tch instead of s. eh is not unfrequent,
especiall}' in Modoc, but is considered faulty ; cf. tsufna for shuina to sirir/,
90, 12 ; but pi'iwatch ionffue, in Molale apa-us, is regarded as more coirect
than pa wash.

Conversational speech likes gemination of such consonants as can be
doubled: genalla (k'nalla), ndanni, sassaga, tchimma-ash, etc., and also
shows tendency toward nasalizing such terminals in substantives as -t, -tka,
-tki into -nt, -ntka, -ntki, -ntk. Instead of -tka, the sutHx of the instru-
mental case, we often hear -tko, -tku, -tki, -tk. Tsh'pa shoulder is a vulgar-
ism for tsnfpal, tchnfpal.

MORPHOLOGY.

In the second or morphologic part of grammar the difference between
conversational and oratorical style is chiefly brought about by the tendency
of saving exertion in speaking. Owing to hurried sjjeaking and the retro-
ceding of 'the accent consequent upon it, numerous contractions and apo-
copes occur, not of one sound or syllable only, but even of two syllables,
so that certain words become unrecognizable. Aphaeresis is of rare occur-
rence, except in words like 'miitcha old man for kCmutcha, this from kgmu-
tchatko, "grown old."

Contractions by ellipsis, ekthlipsis, synizesis, and otlier losses from the
middle of the word are not more frequent than in the oratorical style, and
are observed in sulpsoks for shulapshkish forearm, elhoic; lulpatko for li'dp-
filtko 2)rovided with eyes; tatamnish for tatamnuish traceler.

Apocope is observed in the ending -a replacing the longer -atko : pahii
dried for pahiitko ; slu'sha named for shc'shatko, 189 ; JJ ; cf page 408 ; in the
loss of -tki of the verbal intentional as in li'iela giug for luelatki or luc'ltki
giiiga, etc.; cf page 417, 4,")0; in the loss of the verbal endings -a and -na,
as in atsik for atchfga to twist, sahamui for shahamiiya, nik'kang ni'p to
beckon for nik'kanka m'p, yi'kii-u for yekc'wa to break, smash, tp^alam between
for t^alamna, klamtchtam for kelamtchtanuia to nictate. Under the influence

680

ORA.MMAU OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

of words following in immodiiite succeBsion other terminals are lost in lakf
for liikinsh the. chief, 44, 2 ; laiaki for lalAkiash chiefs, !)(), 1 ; shitk, sit for
shftko alike, tiii'mant himirii for tiil'mantko, ])i'm up to for jwni, tugshtakni
coming from the opposite side for tugslitali'ikni, inuatcli, ohj. case of nu'ini
larne, for miinish, kftolik little for kitchkani ; the endings -atch and -ot"h
for -(')tki8h, as in shi'imaluatch, of pages 325. 3G;5. In its abbreviated form
tupaksh, the word tiipakship ynimffer sister is more frecpient than in the full
form.

The pronouns kat who, kanf ? who? what kind off are frequently abbre-
viated into ka, ga ; so are also the adverbs ka-a (jreutl/j, kaiik so much, and
the abbreviation ta may represent either tala merelif, hut, or tala then in wak
tagfug hvv thenf why thenf or tata, tat where, whereto: til lish git'mpka tf
where did you go to f

SYNTAX.

In rapid conversation two or three words often coalesce so closely to-
gether as to be pronounced as one only; this ciiiefly occurs with enclitic
and other short words when united to words which preserve the accent.
Thus Wiin ak becomes nak, ktiipka mat : ktiipkam, hA nen : hann, gd-ishtka
gi nat let us depart: kfshtkak, inuhuashkApk' i, 139, 6 : imihuaslikpak. The
enclitic pronouns appearing in pi'iUansh for palla nish, no-ulapkam'shni for
nd-ulapka mtsh nt, tchfyash ambu for tchfya i ish anibii, tcliiinduk for tchii
mdlash ftk, and other sentences like these implying the use of object i)ro-
nouns have been mentioned repeatedly; cf pages 232. 240-242. 419. 430.
and "Pronouns." The verb gi in its different functions loses its vowel and
becomes agglutinated to the preceding word: ni'i-ashtg, Mod. nc^-ashtg;
la'pik for lapi gi ; ka-i n' gi'tkik m's pfla not to you alone I tell to do it, 61, 4,
and Note ; katak to tell the truth for kiitak gi ; cf page 242. Tiie frequent
and unnecessary repetition of the personal pronouns iii or ml, i, nat or na,
etc., is also characteristic for the conversational form of language, and is
found in the conjurers' songs as well.

Apocope is of frequent occurrence in compound words, and since I
have treated of these in the syntactic part, and also under the heading of
incorporation, a short mention of them will suffice here. It is tim (lualify-

COLLOQUIAL FORMS.

681

ing word that loses some of its phonetic elements, not the qualified one,
und lit times tlie loss is so great that the word is with difficulty recogniz-
able. Lxiilziimiifwhti lulinash fjround-up Uli/sccd packed away, 74, 10, be-
comes Ixal/am luh'nash, and vvawakshtat tutfi'ksli ear-wax turns into wawa
tutu'ksh. Proper names, especially of persons, are usually i)ronounced
fast, and thus their first or qualifying element suffers loss by attrition :

Gushu Lulp " lloffs Eye," for Gfi'shuam Li'dp.

La'k=Pshi'sh '^Grizzhfs No^e," for Lukam Pshi'sh.

Mak Ni'ish '' Lif/ht-hmon Head," for Makmakli NiVsh.

Tatakti'ik Jlpatu Gi'tk ''Bed Pimpled Cheeks," for Tataktaklish Mpatu
Gftko.

Tchi'ik Pshi'sh ''Sharp Nose," for Tchaktchakli Pshi'sh.

TchubPshl'sh ''Pierced Nose," for Shulftko Pshi'sh.

Omission of the verb from a sentence occurs very frequently in Kla-
nuith conversation, especially in such connections where it can be readily
supplied by the liearer. Several instances of this have been exemplified
under "Idioms," and under " Particles used as Verbs." This feature is often
met with in .sentences beginning with wak, I'lk, uk how, and u'tch, an exclam-
atory particle, and nothing is moi'o frequent than the onii.ssion of the verb
gi to exist, to he, to become, to do from sentences where it is easily supplied by
hearer. Cf pages 477. r)!)2. fi 1 4-6 16.

ki'itgash at ak i nish ye will helieve that I told the truth (Mod.); the verb

161a is omitted before t.
pakish wak kil'tsag ! how good is the ffiidgeon to cat! 178 ; 1 (Kl).
u'k gish a lish ! do as you like! (Mod.).

u'k hai, il'k hak ta how then, in which manner (shall I call it; Mod.),
fik i mri'ntch tchkash ! how lony hare yon been away! (Mod.),
il'ts kain i nish ! please do not trouble me! (Mod.).

III. DIALECTIC 1)IFPEREN(^KS.

Upon the pages preceding frequent occasions were off'ered to refer to
the discrepancies existing between the Klamath Lake and the Modoc dia-
lect, but this topic (!an only bo discussed systematically and in a bulk after

682

GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUA(JE.

TW' i

!■'

t ■

i •

I '

I .
|V. -

J i» r

a full elucidation of the grammatic laws upon which the structure of the
language is resting. Only then a full comprehension of these differences
is made possible, and since they extend over the lexicon as well as over the
three parts of grammar the best i)lace to consider them is the appendix part
of the volume.

On the whole the two dialects differ but slightly, and this made it pos-
sible to treat them both in the same work. The existing differences are
much more of a lexical than of a grammatic nature, and in grammar the
morphologic part shows more differences than the phonologic portion. The
Indians, having the auditory sense keenly developed, are well aware of
these differences ; they are very apt to find fault with unusual terms or
accentuation, and hence visitors are told by the people on Upper Klamath
Lake that the Modocs "do not speak correctly" (Mo'dokni ka-i tfilaak
ht'mkanka), or that "their talk is strange" (wonni hcmkanka). All over
the world we find people that think their own dialect to be the only good one.

Other petty linguistic differences exist between each portion or settle-
ment of both divisions, as, for instance, between the Klamatlis on the Lake
and the Klamaths on Sprague River; they chiefly refer to the mode of pro-
nunciation. The Tchakil'nkni or "Inhabitants of the Service Berry Tract,"
near Flounce Rock, north of Fort Klamatli, intruders from the Molale tribe
of Oregon, were reputed to speak the Klamath very incorrectly.

The Texts obtained from individuals of both sections clearly show
some disparity in the languages of the two, but afford no distinct clue upon
the length of time during which tiiey have lived separately. Before the
Modoc war of 1872-1873 they lived at a distance of sixty to seventy miles
from each other ; they met every year at the Klamath Marsh, when Imnt-
ing and collecting pond-lily seed, and besides this often joined their forces
to undertake raids in common upon surrounding tribes ; in spite of the
rivalry existing between both sections, intermarriages often took place.
The more ancient customs and myths are common to both, nevertheless the
name M(')atokni or "southerners," which implies segmentation of the. tribe, must
date from an early epoch. The northern dialect is more archaic or original
in some terms, as niids;(eksh nine, nO'g absrni, whereas the southern shows
earlier forms in knanflasli hat-species, shiaiihish rafter.

DIALECTIC DIFFEKENCES.

683

PHONOLOGIC DIFFERKNCE8.

In regard to the vocalism of the two dialects, the Modoc sometimes
uses the diphthong ai where Klamath Lake has e, e: kokai (and koke)
river, creek, Klamath L. koke, kuka; kailpoks heat, hot, Klamath L. kd'lpoks,
kc'lpoksh ; shnailigsh eyebrow, Klamath L. slmc-kCiisli.

Klamath iva-, tvo-, is in a few t(3rms replaced in Modoc by u-: I'lk for
wak how; ukash for \v6kas\i jwnd-Uli/ seed.

Of more importance is tiie substitution of short and long a of Klamath
Lake by short and long e, also by (i, in Modoc. This ia observed almost
exclusively in accented syllables, and even then in a few instances only;
these vowels always stand between two consonants. This singular fact
cannot be explained by a supposed insertion of i after the a of Klamath
Lake because the e resulting from a contraction of al would in most in-
stances remain long, whicih is not the case. Examples :

ga-ash, Mod. gc'ash thus, so.
yaiia. Mod. yana and yc'na downward, downhill.
nd-asht, nA-ash, Mod. nc'asht thus, so, in this manner.
ndshki, Mod. ncshki to butcher, fluif ; nashkotkish, etc.
padshii. Mod. pii'dshit in the morning.
palak, Mod pclak fust, quichly.
shalakla. Mod. shelakhi to cut, .slash oneself.
shatma. Mod. shotma to call to oneself.
shnaijc'mpema. Mod. shnept'inpema to fool somebody,
ulaplpa. Mod. uk'plpa to flicker aliout.
weweshiiltko, Mod. wewesheltko having offspring.
But there are also instances on hand where the reverse takes place,
Modoc showing a where Klamath Lake has e:

nu'tkla, mii'tkla, Mod. nuitkla to carry on hack, shoulder.
nn'g, dimin. nc'kag, Mod. na'g, nakag that absent one.
wektash, Mod. waktash plait of females; the verb being wekta in both
dialects.

The term for brown varies in both dialects : ka-uka-uli, kii-uka'-uli, ke-
ukL'-uli, kovkt'vli.

■i ■■::

684

GIIAMMAR OF TUB KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

DissmilatioH in the iteratively reduplicated adjectives, all ending in li,
as described on page 234, is observed much less in the southern tlian in the
norther 1 1 dialect.

In the consomtitic sounds of the Klamath language s-, sh-, si-, shl-,
when initial, are oftener replaced by ts-, tch-, tsl-, tchl- in t'-.t ■-: ^op tlian
in the Klamath Lake dialect, where this is considered as ption;

tchki'i for shkii U bloivs hard or cold, tchkc'l for shkt'l marten, ts;(Uii. xor shkiile
lark, tchlt'yamna for shlryamna to hold something soft in hand, tchpal for
spal ocher. Cf pages 21)fi. 297.

Modoc redoubles I in a few words like kt<llak beinff ivithout, kalliu fur-
mantle, where Klamath Lake has kc'liak, kafliu.

In a very limited number of terms Modoc has / where Klamath Lake
shows m; cf hesheliota to barter, Mod. sheniiita; kfntchna to go single file,
Mod. kfldshna. Cf. shniintatka (below).

Another change, already referred to on page 230, is "the substitution
of the arrested sound '- for the lingual k in Modoc only, which disappears
in the following terms, e. g.: '6ga for k(')ga to bite; 'u'hpa, '6pa for k(')pa to
think; 'iixpash for k(');^pash thought; 'u'hlf for ku'hli to enter, creep into; '6ke
forkoke river, creek; 'olkoli for k61koli, kiilkuli round, globiform ; '6'sh for
ko'sh, ku'sh pitch-pine. When k is a final sound, or stands within the word,
it is not dropped ; and even when k and g are pronounced, the arrested
sound is always heard after them; cf pages 216. 226

If;

I *5

MORPHOLOGIC UIFPERENCE8,

A few slight differences between the two dialects occur in the forma-
tion of the distributive reduplication, which have been alluded to under
that heading.

A difference in the prefix is noticed in the verbs kpulf to drive into,
kpii'l^a to expel, kputcha to oust, drive out, etc., where Modoc has tpulf,
tpul;ja, tputcha, or tpudsha. All these forms are used when the act of driv-
ing refers to a few (not many) objects ; cf. page 436. In both dialects the
prefix M- may also be pronounced vu-, wu-, q. v.

More difference is observable in derivational suffixation. The Modoc
verbal suffix -i is in some instances replaced by -a in tiio northern dialect'

DIALECTIC DIFFEEENCE8.

685

Bliftchpalui to tattoo; Kl. sliftolipulua ; shuatt'iwi to stretch oneself; Kl. sliu-
atawa. Otlier Modoc verbs liave -a as well as -i: tchlalala and tchlah'ili to
roast upon the coals. To designate an act almost completed, -hiiya, -uya is
more frequent in Modoc than -kshska, -kska, which is preferred by the
Klamath lake dialect. For inchoative or inceptive verbs -t'ga, -ii'<>-a is
preferred by Klamath Lake, -tampka by Modocs, though both suffixes oc-
cur extensively in either dialect. Cf List of Suffixes. For hfshuaks hiis-
hantl, man, Modoc has in the subjective case : hishuakshash ; for snawedsh
wife, tvoman: snawi'dshash, and from these terras the verbs for to marrij are
also shaped differently. Transposition of sounds takes place in some sub-
stantives ending in -ksh ; thus Klamath waltoks, waltaksh discourse, talk,
speech, appears in Modoc as wAltkash ; others are enumerated page 349.

As to inflectional stiffixation, the most important discrepancy exists in
the formation of the present participle, where Modoc has -n (-an) and Kla-
math Lake the compound ending -tik (-ank); a fact discussed repeatedly in
the previous pages. The inflection of the noun is eff"ected by the same
case-suffixes and case-postpositions in both dialects, except that in the em-
phatic adessive case the compound -kshi gi'shi of Modoc is condensed into
-ksaksi, -kshakshi, -ksfksi and -ksu'ksi in Klamath Lake.

Of the impersonal objective verbs many differ in regard to their struct-
ure in both dialects, as shown pages 429. 430. From this it would appear
that Modoc usually prefers to place the person in the subjective case when
expressed either by a pronoun or a noun.

The following peculiaritif s are of a morphologic as well as of a syn-
tactic character, and therefore may be appended here :

Tiie future tense, composed with the particle tak, is preferred by Modoc
in the incident and in many principal clauses to the future in -uapka. In
the Klamath Lake Texts the future in tak occurs nowhere except in 70, 2.
The particle,* pen, piin, and lin are much more frequent in the soutliern than
in the northern dialect; this may be said of pen especially in its function
of connecting the small numerals with the decades.

In interrogative and other sentences the particle lish is largely used in
Modoc, and placed after the interrogative or initial particle. The northern
dialect employs that particle rather s})aringly.

lil. .

686

(iHAMMAU OF Tllli KLAMATJl LANGIJAOK.

Ill
si
^1

LEXICAL niKKKRENCES.

Tho number of Modoc words diffuriiifr in nidicala, in <lorivat,ion, or in
sound from their oquivulents in the northern dialect is considerable, as may
be gathered from a short inspection of the Dictionary. I have therefore
comi)iled a specimen list of lexical difterences, including only representative
vocables fron< the Dictionary and from information obtained lately, and
placing the Modoc term with letter M. offer the Klamath Lake term. With
the exception of a few, the Modoc terms are readily understood by their
congeners on Upper Klamath Lake, but some are not in actual use among
them, or, if they are, they have adopted a signification differing materially
or slightly from theirs. The Modocs have adopted more terms from the
Shasti language than the Klamath Lake Indians, and these more terms
from Chinook jargon than the ^fodocs. Among the terms of relationship
some differ in the formation of the distributive form and also in their mean-
ings. Some of the Modoc terms were entirel)- unknown to my Klamath
Lake informants, as kalm<')moks f/hwwonn, ksh(ta to escape, and its causa-
tive shm^kshita; lumk.'.ka to take a steam hath, tikesh t%, loam, tchatchakma
haee is faming, tchfptchima to drizzle down in atoms.

epka to bring, haul, carry to; M. ftpa.

lit'sha to send away; M. shnl'dsha.

hushka, hnshkanka ^> </»•«/•, reflect; M. k.'.pa: hushkanksh thought; M.
k«');fpash, 'u'hpash.

luishtanka to go and meet somebody; M. shu-utiinka.

fsha, flktcha, p'nana to bury, to dispose of the dead by interment or cre-
mation ; M. ilktcha, vumi ; Kl. use vumf only for caching jjrovi-
sions, etc.

ka-ishna to close an opening, doorflap, door; M. shlii-uki.

kapka little pitch-pine tree; M. kuga, dim. o{ Vo' s\i pine.

katak truly and to tell the truth; M. kana, katak, katchau truly, surely;
kdna tche'k certainly.

ku, kl thus, so, in this strain ; M. kfe, ke.

kla'dsh dry, rocky land, table land; M. kna't.

k'lt'ka to reach, to die; M. often pronounces: krdiika, kalaka.

III'

DIALECTIC DIFFKKENCES.

687

li'itdiasli, geuoric term for hxhic, IuMUkj, hnusv; M. Htina'ali.

Iiuiiii to produce a romhn/, rushhi;/ smim/, as a lanilslido; umi.sod in Kl.

luela, liiislitdioxii to kill more than ono object; M. luela, liesli;^!!'^!,

Hhiu'nka.
li'ikslaksh nshrs, Kl. and M.; the M. lapkrksli mca'.Mi finest, atomic ashes.
nadsx^'kisli, nadsp^Gksli nine; M. ski'kisli.
nandasli, smallest species of hat; M. knanilasli.
pa'iipash ear wax; M. wawa tutu'ksli, from ti'ita to take from.
pj'ila-ash flour, bread; M. sliapele.
papkasli in the sense o{ poker ; M. kpa-u, kpA.
p'tfsliap/«//it7-; M. t'ahfsliap, from t'shfn to (f row.
ptclifkl^a to pat, caress; M, ptcliakl;(a.
slmnhish rafter; M. sliianhisli.

sliavvalinii'-asli companion, fellow, friend; M. shftchlip.
sliewatpfa it is noon-time; M. ga-ulapka.
skiiitchna to crawl, creep, as reptiles ; M. s;^ fdslia.
slik'laluash eyelid; M. slik'lalnisli, which means cream in Kl.
shhVktchna to spit, spit out; M. distinguishes between kpftchtclma to

spit close by, and shlu'ktchna to spit into distance.
shnikfvva to throw, hurl, cast; M. shnikoa.
shnuntatka to interpret; M. shnultatka.
spek'taklntch rake; M. wakatchotkish.
shukfkash parents, progenitors; M. shokoka-asli.
sinu'ntch baby-hoard; M. stiwi;{(')tkisli.
te'lilti-'hli /«/, depressed, low; deep; j\I. teltclhi.
tupakship, abbr. tiipaksh younyer sister; M. sister.
tclnitchgalam bur, pine-bur; M. tchatchgalinks.
vuyukiaks armpit; M. yukii'kish.

vulan to watch fish over ice-holes; M. uli'iwa. •

waklgish and paklgish table; M. paklgish only.
Walamskni Bogue Biver Indian; M. Walamswash.
walish, wali'sh rock-cliff; M. wali'dsh ; also generic for rim.
waltoks, wiiltaksh talk, speech ; M. waltkash.
wftchiak rainbow; M. slitchjilapshtish,
wftchkinah dew; M. tcln'taksh.

688

(iUAMMAU OF TIIK KLAMATH LAN(5UA(1K.

IV. SYNTACTIC EXAMl'LKS.

Whiit follows is a Holection of sentences which wore omitted while com-
posin^r the previous pages of the Graniniar to exemplify grannnatic facts.
What is dialectic in them is not so much the syntactic structure of the sen-
tences as the morphologic and lexical character of the terms oc(!urring in
them. Sentences worded in the Klamath liako dialect are not marked as
siich, but those obtained from Modoos jiro designated by the letter M.
When two sentences are combined in the same item, and have the English
rendering between them, the former is of the Klamath Lake, the latter of
the Modoc dialect. This does not signify that any of the Klamath Lake
sentences is unintelligible to the Modocs, or conversely, but that it is their
more natural mode of utterance. In some of these items the decisive words
are arranged alphabetically.

Distributive reduplication.
tumi mAklaks a-at(ni many Indians are tall. (M.)
gdgamtchi shutka shle'sh gi it looks like these thinrfs. (M.)
wa-utchaga i-efptl kiiflanti the dogs scratch in the t/round ; cf. yt-pa.
tataksni, ish Iiiloktchi pC'lakak slu'mksh paki'sh children, bring vie each

one watermelon, quickly.
t'dshash nat pi'ipanua nanuk rve all drink milk.
ti'im i ki'itkoga ndp 8hashtashz«')kan tkiitka I do you stand with your

handa in pocket because you feel coldf (M.)

The future tense.

In the third, fourth, and fifth sentence the future form is used impera-
tively.

tam i nalash tula genuiipkaf will you go with usf

tam intch (for i nisli) gen shenii'itxipk' i-amnash f will you barter beads

with mef tam lish i shiyutuApka niish yamnash ?
ka-i kanf hf gatpanuapka nobody <-,■ allowed to go there. (M.)
shumalu'lasht tchek i nush hemd;Ki-uapk speak only after I have written.
hii'nk=shitk hak k-\ i hemt';(i-uapk, m.'imantchak gltk, ge-unf liak repeat

it exactly the same tvay (lit "you shall Hj)eak just oidy alike to")

stopping at intervals, and but slowly.

111.

8VNTA<JTl(J KXAMI'LI'X

tml Mu wliuto-u/ipka iit ? i.n.l An nfulHli/.Mlmk tH-un! g(<ntak tvhat shall

u'c do now* wv will !io to town tofjvthvr. (M.)
turn I r.iHh wutch viilpcu/ipka ? toill i/on. lend me your horse*
ti.lslirwa.. n»i8h nil rtn vrt'lktak / shall lend it to you willinr/h/. (M.)
I.ii. ilii lul.Imn ,'.-ati knitak at kcno'lasht tcl.g.Vnnnmpka, viislnnu^I. un
k.sl.iin k.^shkti.k i)nHh(t), Hht/.wan An wonktak if deep snow falls in
winter, and after the snowfall frost should come, the cattle will U
una!,!,, w eat the f/rass, and will starve to death. (M )
Iiii k.'i-i kt.'.dahtnk shk.',, kii'gitok un k^ln'.n vnsl..nu«han. if it does not

rain in spriny, there will he no (jrnssfor the eattk. (M.)
l.'-ntak na nn nfilam pshiikani luiHlMiashtat, pii'dsliit ; tclfntok nat nn lo-

dan we will jdaij in our uncle's yarden .• he tvill allow d to as. (M )
tchrks i sli(;wai:!ok lii'mkcsli tala you have to pay money to him. (M.)
lielak niiHh na't An slil(^-olkitak we will soon come to visit you. (M.)

The imperative mode.

enif i,sl. HluK^ntch, or: enif isli hand that baby (on tl , cradlo-board) over
to me. (M.)

gon a tcl.ol;.ank gi'pk' i ; or : gin k tcholzC gi<pko ! come (cloHe to n,o)

and sit down riyht here.
pa'u hiiiur;^' i ; kt-niii liak lienic^' i say this once more; .'iay it slowly.
naiika isli sIiiA'ngH hakisli I'ktchi bring me some watermelons.
ka-i mi pcti'ke skuta.«li do not tear your blanket; ka-i mi spakag i

shkutasli.

sliatua liol gi i'sh do the thiny with me; tclifmil isli tiila .shiloi'itclia i.

nush wika sliii-ulantclii yo a short distance with me. (M.)

k'nuks ish hun ski<n' i (or: skii-an i' takj buy a rope for me; tuntisl.

isli skii'-an i'.
kitchkani ! i sldaukipfdo hoy! shut that door. (M.)
Khli'pkipal' i'sh go-u tc'nish r 'po briny mr my new coat.
tfdsli shnalalianipk' i take yood care of it.
gin a tchiil;^' (or tclR'l;^' i) sit riyht here.

tciiclryan liun i uiantcliakash wliajR-le give some bread to this old man. CM..)
44

(VJO

GHAMMAU OK THK KI-AMATII l/ANii'.'ACiK.

■u

The present jmrticiplc.

i kilfwurtli ftiiiui ])tik('wi«litiit //«« arc sewhiif the. irnndpeeker-scalp u/mn

the Imekskhi ilre.ss. (M.)
UtfltJilMli y)'i-uks hIiowi'iiiuii licslmiimpf'Ii I'tHlalsli ejficts eitrr.s liif i/iriiiif

medicine. (M.)
yt'nu nil gi'n gi'nu; guli'Hlit m*iwh 'nuitclH'igii s;(ri'lpkiiii ktiiiiiiii lilokii f

went ihnvn stairs ; when I came in, the old man n-as sleepinij in bed

and snorintf. (M.)
iiiri'ntcli nrt tclu'itr'iiiiii kt'kish lioHliiii'mipr'li / treated him a lowj time and

cured him. (M.)

The pant partieipfc.

(a). Used in an active Higiiitication.

kayudsii liisliiiiikgu liut lii'iiikaiikiitk gi this litth' hoij cannot speak yet.
tiMH'piiish laliialsli I'yamna uA / had fire jttns; tiuu'piii g('-ii lalnalatkti

(abbr. from lalualaltko)
kayak toka nil liunk siiK'atko gi / could not see him.
nalam liikf tfdsh shislu'ikatki (f(ir sliislmkatko gi), tfdsh slii'iyuaksh our

chief is a yoodfifihter and intelliffent.

(b). With a passive or intransitive signification,
nish gt'-u niinuk gnknatko my neck is all swollen. (M.)
li'ilp liahantakujitko gi his eyes were wide open. (M.)
ipkiiijkash ankn shiVdslia at ye are burniny piled- up wood. (M )
inniaks mil kikannala(-tko) heads with a wide perforation. (M.)
tcliokt'yaltko slia-ika (gi) the field is covered with yrarel.
kr-k a kshn'ii fpka ati u} rgatk this haystack is very hiyh.
tarn lish ml)ns]ian ki'itags gi-uapka? will li he cold tomorrow? iVna
pslifr! kii-a katags gt'-nga (iinpu tclu'pki'tko wi'n last niyht it was very
cold, so that the water froze in the pad; lit. "tlie pailed water." (M.)

The verljals.
(a). The infinitive :

ne-uh'ikta sha, kokiii'kisli u'nk iK^-nl^a mua.sli slilcwftki they decided
that the conjurers should order the tvind to blow from the south. (M.)

SYNTACTIC KXAMJMJ':H.

6'.)l

kuymnaHl.tut l.A tMsl, j-rt utcl.fn in muddy wafrr url-Jishinu is profit-
able. (M.)

kiil'm tcliilku Hliiitmii thif call tlw Jiah to swim up-stnmi, l.'Jf), 4 Cf.
nlHo 107, 2. ll.'l, 1.

(l>). Tlio verlml iiidofinito:

uk hi'i pMwi ./iHhnUi in (his manner he treated (mo) ; lit. "that k how IiIm
Imiulliiig- wjiH." (M.)

Ydnmkni tiVm yuliu IuoI.'.IIhIi ki the. northern Indians (l.al.itually) Idltnl

many huffaloes. (M.)
tAiikak nuentk Hunditku p.'i-uliiHh go-u late (of it) lust week.
wi'ik lisji hil .slilr-'Hli ki ? how does this look." (M.)
k(-'s.lifrii ml Hlili-iali iii'iiikoluni / eotdU not sec him or her. (M.)
HJiuiiauk sl.ftko Hhlr/Hh kJKli Hliana-iili he mints to look alike. (M.)
tua i Hhanaiiiili siiiyiitaHli ? for what will you barter thisf (JI.)

(r). Tho verbal causative :
ko-inlicwa iiii.sli ml slilc^uga / am ylad to .see you.
tnta gen shle-uga kiip^paktak i mlsli tvhen you see this, remember me. (M.)

(d). The verbal conditional :
tftatnak hiinK^;^' i ; U-ito) ~ ni luVslikanka pap'lak niish honu^isht tell
me only one word at a time; I do not remember (them) when you
speak fast.

ki'i-iu kt.'.tchasht ktclialhui si'.ppash before the rain the sun shines. (M.)
(e). The verbal intentional :

ml hun tpL^wa pelpdltki, lewitchta ta'dsh pt'lpelsh I ordered him to work,

hut he refuses to work. (M.)
gt'utki mri'lsh ml gi' / order you to yo. (M.)
hunktiash we-ulii'kash nutotki gii'iga i-a'sh nii)ampatkanka the willows

were sputteriny in the fire to burn up these women. (M. myth.)

The intransitive verb.

t'wa vu'nsh e-ushtat the canoe floats upon the lake. (M.)
Wfisa a natcli ginuipk' lu'iya the coyotes are cominy near us; wash naish
wigatan lifduipka.

II j

ft •■!

692 GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATU LANGUAGE.

udshiiksh huli(;fi the sucker fish skips out of the water. (M.)

hii yaki anko i-utfla, shldmp'Ie ! if the seed-basket is under the tree, take

it home! (M.)
li'ipi ilnku ysimpka two sticks lie on the ground (M.)
Hupka sha wiiftash (or wiiftash nanuk) they sit around the whole day.
ka-i hilt pftclika loloks the fire is not out.
tam lish tchfwa slitina'shtat (or stina'sh)? hii tchfwa; was he in the

house f Yes, he tvas. (M.)
nanuktua kiifla yutfla wA all that grows under ground (bulbs, etc.).

fl:-

The interrogative sentence.

(a). Introduced by the particle tam.

tam kanf giti'i gatpa ? has anybody been here? (M.)

tam i shk'a gt'-u p'tfsha? i' ! have you seen my father? yes! tAm i gd-u

t'shfshashk'a? i' !
tam i shk'a p'gi'sha m'naf ka-i ! have you seen his mother? no! tam i

shk'a hu'nkelam p'gi'sha ? ka-i !
tam lish hu shfla? is he, she sick? (M.)
tam lish i-i tclu'ii tumgna'l i-i, nii tiimena! do you hear mef yes, I hear

you! (M.)

(Jb). Introduced by the pronoun tua.

tua haitch hu't gi ? what is that? tua hu?

tuA haitch w<4k gi f wak lish i gi ? what is the matter? what does it

mean ?
tuA lish i hu'shkank ? what are you studying about? or: what do you

think of this?
tud i pc'lpela? shi'shatuish X'^i nu ki ; what is your business ? I am a

trader. (M.)

(c). Introduced by the particles wak, wak lish, Wiik giuga.

wak lish i giiiga ka-i ge-u l(')loksgish t'pkaf ka-i lish shk'-uka tvhy did

you not bring my rifle? because I did not find it. (M.)
wak lish i gfuga ka-i nish v/alza! tvhy donH you ansurr me?

SYNTACTIC EXAMPLES.

693

wdk (- n|ah gi'ug kil-i walzu? why don't you reply to me? wdk lish i iien
kA-i Wi'il;^a?

OO- Introduced by various pronouns and particles,
watch iia lul gil is that a horse f (M.)
tank } mdhiiisli slin6kua k(5ketat? how many trout did you catch in the

river? lap nit'hiiish ! two trout! (M.)
tanni latchash malani kaflatat ! how many lodges are on your land?
tdnni mi t'shfshilni watch gi? how many horses has your father? (M.)
tilta t i)atkel(5]a? what time did you rise from sleep? tush kish i patkal?
tatA nia'ntch haftch hiik hishuaksh nidsha f how long was this man sick?

The cases of the substantive,

(a). The objective case.

1 hushnakpi'ipka ni^p you are holding your hands together upon some-
thing. (M.)

luepalsh shtina'sh poweteka the lightning-stroke shattered the house. (M.)
shnuikf'itan' nfi gt^t ml shul^tish / am wetting that garment ; nu'toks hun

shpaga shulotish.
gok muslmiush hip'ni t/i-unep shesha this cow is worth twenty dollars.
pt't'atko pshi'sh one tvhose nose-perforation is disrupted. (M.)
hashuash lul hdshua I am planting maize. (M.)
hu sti'ini yaina-iiga '.inia'tch the ant-hill teems idith ants. (M.)
Wi'itchkina nush koka spt'luish a raccoon hit me in the index-finger.
klash hiln mi t^c'-una shewan' i give *his hide to your elder brother. (M.)
(i). The possessive and partitive case.

niAklaksam shnn'itka na (for nj'ilam) shtina'sh the house is fidl of our

people. (M.)
letumiioti ttimi pan they have a carousal, or feast; lit. "many of them

eat in a noise."

(c). The locative case.

kiUwash ankutat ska-ukua the red-headed woodpechcr picks holes in the

tree. (M.)

694 GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

pii'lppli lift tclift'slink yi'ilknnint Ic ivoHs in lad ticdthr oil the time; liA

ko-itchi'mta iikUliin niui'iklkisli.
gd-u t'shfalmi) ampil kiinutut kftitcliim wry father hux spilt the water on

the (jround. (M.)
slunvdni ish ti'iki go-u kiii'mat ! pay me for mi/finhf (M.)
ntlinik mi vuslimflsli sufgatat pi'iwa all i/oitr cattle f/raze on the 2>rairie. (M.)
hft Tftxash sha'lun(')ka Hlitiiia'slitat he called TilaJc oat of the house. (M.)
tfiluks i-ukukag shtiiiaalitat the haslrt w inside the lodf/e. (M.)
pa'dshit kliilha tinolulrslitat there leas a hailstorm at sundown to-daif,
ml neyc'iui tchuyt'shlat I am linin// a hat. (M.)

(d ). The instrumental case,
tiimi a gvk tii'htash gvn iV\i6\^ti\\, ki'i-itoks ni'i-entka illolAshtka ti'imi wil'
tank there were many yrasshojtpers this year, hut not many last year.
puishtka liushiitautko (gi) he wears afrintjed licit. (M.)

lite adjective.

ti'it pClafwashani shni'ilash wikayanta ka ti'iiiian tcliiVdHliui pinakpkA-

gishtat kugatat (gi) there the vest tf the yolden eayle (lay) upon a

lotv pine-tree, only that hiyh, and dwarfed. (^^.)
viinipa t ship ati=kiifla=gi-l8hasli nadshc'nash niaklaksliasli sliowan i yon

sold four sheep to a foreiyner ; lit. "to oiio in distant-land living."
ki'iyani nn'muiutch nakslitanish sliepatp^a liu he tore to pieces one of a

jackass-rabbit^s ears. (M. niytli.)
wdwanuish niaklaksanikslikni kika.slikanka wakalak i-nkoga women of

the tribe are walki)i(i inside of the inelosiire.
nil link shi'itku gftak lul'nksh / would act as he did. (M.)

The adrerb.

pi Ank slmoka i yi'ikiak he eauyht a mockiny-bird on the yrotmd; \\\\ kaf

lif yi'ikiak shm'ika.
wak ka tan nisli ko k'k'ka somethiny is probably the mutter with me. (M.)
lo ml pan, bil'mia / do not eat, drink.
snawc'dsliash lui)itkni gatpa, nutoks yainatkni the tvonutn comes from the

east, I come from the north. (M.)

8YNTAt3TIO EXAMPLES.

695

gdnrt ImnAshuk nil Hhlii'pupka I am looking at it unintentionally. (M.)
tfdHli Hhii luHliui'itclizush simalulifiaipka they watch the man closehj. (M.)
turn tcliiltcliui dnipA i bi'inim you drank too much water. (M.)
tank ml na'sli illulash vuiishtat szuM;(iyaniiiiHh \r\, t/uiktohikni gt'-u

kewii wil'k lust year I was able to row the canoe, (but) since then I

broke my arm. (M.)

Temporal locutions, mainly of an adverbial nature.

tfna ill(')laHli funk iiA liftri shU'a T saw him a year ago.

tfiia ok ilhola jjii-ulash gi'-ii / ate (of it) lust year.

iialatu a slii'p ti'iin nl'l a gin illri'luh our sheep have much ivool tlm year.

lapiii tdulk illo'lan Hlickolui sht'llualsh after two years the war came to

an end. (M.)
ta'iitriHli jri'iitka pata ti'inii wa, taiiktoks kaftua there were many grass-

hoppcrs this summer, but not any last year.
pj'ita mri'iitcli wafta, luldani toks pi'pc'lak wafta in summer the days are

long, in winter they are .short; lit. "the days [jass rapidly."
gt'ntka Ii'ildani kii-i gi-uiipka wc'hIi this winter there tvill be no ice. (M.)
tank nfi'sli sliappf'sh koke wetko gi' last month the river was frozen. (M.)
nia'ntchtoka at piidsliit waftash the days are long notv. (M.)
una lia shtfpa wafta it tvas cloudy all day yesterday. (M.)
nfahta wu.sli yc'a the prairie wolves have howled all night,- pii'dsliit pslii'n

yo-a wash.

The conjunction.

(a). The particle ak, aka, ka expresses probability and potentiality,
ku-i ak niish ne'pkia you mag feel micomfortuhle. (M.)
hunk ak taksh un (for hu'n) nu shK'at / can see him; nil aka liun shk'a.
nu kaf ak hu'nkish luVnkptohi a 'gi) / would act, do, or be like him. (M.)
Hhk'at ak taksh un nu (un for: liiVn) T can see that.
ti'iin i kokaiit ko'shtati ka-i akil ml kukant can you climb the pine-tree f
I cannot.

[)N

696 GRAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

kA-i ak niish gd-u t'shfshap wewi'iltaiit probably my father tvill not allow

it to me. (M.)
ki'i-i aka kCk^ka, or : kj'i-i nA It'da InVnkesh k'k'ksht / do not believe he is

dead. (M.)
kA-i aka hfi' ukauzo'sh klchiUhui piulsliit at I do not think that the moon

shines notv, 12, 132; lit. "to-day." (M.)
tiiin hak tcha i hushpfakta! you ask probably too much for it! ti'ini haf i

nen i\xi\. I

{b). The particle ha, a.

niinuk a n' ftnk ho'shkanka / recollect all (these) fhinffs; hft'nktaka nil

hushkiinka nuuuk.
kek nis;(/ijj^a kj'i-i a inish tidshewa this little girl does not like you.
ko-e a udiidomtclma ambiitatyio//,s' live in the water; k6-e ka( ani|)Utat v/A.
ka-i 1 pen ha huniiisht gi-uilpka you will never do it ayain. (M.)

(c). The particle hai (haftch, z^iO-
ke haf litchli'tclili nuiklaks that man is certainly robust (M.)
tann' a haftch wevvcash gitk hikff how many children has the chief f

tanni lish lakiain wewi'ash ?
ki'mi haftch hut gi ? who is he, she? kani hil ?

gc'ash xiif n)ish ml kupa tchu'shak //;m,v I alien ys think of you. (M.)
tuii haftch i shaiii'ihuli huntkaf what do you want for iff

{d ). The particle nen.

tuj'i i nen hc'nikank ? what do you talk about! wiik lish i henikank?

ka-i nu nen ki / refuse to do so. (M.)

wak lish na (for: nen a) gif tvhat is the matter? wak lish I

(e). The particle toks (taksh, tak).

li'iki toksh til s^il'lpka shiloka the chief lies sick in bed. (M.)
hunkf'lnni iinak ko-idshi, pe'-ip toks tidslif his son is ugly, but his daugh-
ter is pretty. (M.)
k;.')-idshitoks kf'k jafna this mnmitain is rpiife rough or steep. (M.)

HPECJMENS OF SYNONYMY.
V. COMl'LKX SYNONYMOUS TERMS.

697

g complex

The great fiicility posHessed by certain languages of formin
or polysyntheti(! words by an exuberant power of derivational affixation is
also productive of certJiin complex synonymous terms, which the analytic
languages of modern Kurope habitually express by separate words, mainly
of an attributive character, or transcribe by sei)arate sentences. Some lan-
guages of the American aborigines are rich in terms of tiiis .sort, and wo
are often wondering why the punctilious and .seemingly unimportant dis-
tinctions embodied in them are expressed by a single word formed ivith this
jmrpose. It is curious to observe how nuich stress is laid upon using spe-
cific terms for certain things and acts which white people do not even notice
as being distinct from other things or acts of a similar nature; and, on the
other side, objects which are totally different among themselves are called
by the same term in certain languages on account of some resemblance
observed upon them. 'V\\\\n, green and ycUotv, green and blue, are expressed
by the same term in many languages. The Cherokee expresses huiferjig
and elephant by the same '. , :c.imania, both being provided with a pro-
boscis shaped alike. In Creek rahbit and sheep are both called tchi'ifi, in
Chicasa tchi'ikfi, on accotmt of their wocdly covering, and the horse is to
the Creeks the great deer: ftchu 'lako, alibr. tclm'Iako.

Sometimes the reason for expressing tiie same act or condition by dif-
ferent verbs does not lie in the act itself, but in the difference of the verbal
subject or object, its shape, quality, or nunduu-; of this we have conspicu-
ous examples in this language in the chapter on verbal "Inflection for
number," pages 43,")-441, to which may be added the instances, pages 4GU.
461, referring to the verb to give, and what is said about prefixes in general.
The English-Klamath part of the Dicitionary mentions six terms for gray,
eight for to seize, twelve for to sever, fourteen for to wash, about as man}- for
to walk, wear, weep, while the terms expressing the different modes of going,
runmng, standing, lying, sitting, looking, rolling, placing, and lifting consider-
ably exceed the above in nund)er. The list of the adjectives expressing color
does not reach that of a Ilerero tribe in Southern Africa, wlrcli po .sesses
twenty-six terms for such cattle alone as is spotted in different wa . *

'Cf. U. MugiiiiH, (1. Furljiiiixiiin bei il. NatiirviilkiTii, imgcs <». 1(1. li»-'il (.Icn, IHHO).

698

GKAMMAK OF TUE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

but IS extensive enough to equal tl.at of English, if we deduct from this the
large number of artificial terms derived from manufactured objects. Wounds
are called differently according to the weapon or instrument which inflicts
them; scars, when flesh is removed, are shuktashkuish; without removal of
flesh, shAktkaluish. * When a strong wind shakes a tree, the lending down-
ward of the tree is waw/wi, but its moving up to the former position is wa-
xvflakptdi, the continual rocking wawikanka. To roll an object in ihe mouth
IS kpfanma when it protrudes fron) it, but when wholly inclosed in the
mouth, shikpualki'ina.

Many more examples of this sort might be mentioned to show the keen
sense of perception and graphic expressiveness traceable in the language.
Utilitarians will regard this mental tendency as productive of cumbersome,
unnecessary toil, while the philosophical linguist sees in it a sign of fresli
and poetical ingenuity, which is manifesting itself everywhere in genuine
conceptions of the untutored children of nature.

Below I present some instances of verbs and nouns, the definitions of
which are ideas not simple, but of considerable complexity-, and in which
the great power of fornn-ng synonyms is traceable into the more nu'imte
details. Several of these terms were taken from the collection of Modoc
vocables recently acquired by me.

The act of carryimf a babe is expressed in many different ways, which
chiefly differ among themselves by the circumstance whether the carrying
is done ujjon the shuc^ntch or cradle-hoard or without it. The verb c<ma "to
hand over to somebody a baby tied upon the cradle-board" forms several
derivatives: t^mtchna "to go and carry, to bring it son.ewhere ui)on the
board" (also upon the arm), for which ksla^na may be used as well; c^m-
tchipka "to carry it toward somebody," cmtakla (or cmtkal) and c^mkiana.
"to carry on the back a babe tied to the board." "To carry on the back"
any other object except a babe is ti'itkal, "to carry home on one's back"
tutchampeli. Shmamka "to nurse or take care of a baby" is probably
derived from dma also. "To carry a babe, when just born, on the back"
and not tied to the board, is spukutakla and shlukutakla; stintakla (or
stfntp^al) when not on the board and not necessarily upon the back. Ila-

•Cf. also ii'blopiitaii;! itml iiiPiiti:i in the Dictionary. '

SPECIMENS OF SYNONYMY.

699

sluipnt'liimnii is "to tie it around tlie back in a piece of dotli," ImsliiJUiikia
"to curry it wiiile placing the arms or one arm under its legs," liaslikaga
"to carry it on tlio breast."

FoUUhh is expressed generically by 8p/igal;Ka, "to fold, double up;"
the nouns piikalaksh and spagalaksh signify "fold, crease," and the former
term figures in numeral adjectives like fourfold, sixfold.* These words
are all derivatives from paka, mbaku "to break." "'Jo fold" in such u
manner as blankets or other sheets are folded in a Avarehouse is skupal^a ;
"to fold" as folds api)ear in the dress as worn, shkashkap.shtchiil;/a; skutash
shkashkapshtchal;^atko "the blanket shows folds when enveloping the body."

To (jrasp, when used in the general sense of "taking, seizing," is slmuka,
shnukua, "taking to oneself" shnukpa; "to grasp a small object," so that
the fingers of the seizing hand touch the thumb on the other side, shatash-
tanka; when the object is larger, so that the "fingers do not meet on the
side opposite," shatasht;ji'i))ka (-apka expressing distance); when the object
is "grasped so that the fingers of one or both hands keep moving along its
circumference," shatashkakiiimna.

To stick up on oiic'>i head is an act expi-cssed by a large variety of terms.
Sha-ula is "to stick up something upon the top of the head" that will ex-
tend upon it from the forehead to tin- occiput, hence shawalsh crest of biids
and other related significations, q. v. "To take off that object from the
head-top" is sha-ulola; "to place erect upon, to make stand one object on
one's head," is shatuala, upon "another person's head" hashatuala; hence
shatualtko lash "one feather standing up vertically on one's head," hasha-
tualtko lash "on another person's head." When many objects are "made
to stand up straight on one's head in a bunch," this is shildshuala; "feathers
set up" in that manner: shiltchawaltko or sildshualtko lash. Shakwal is
"to place a bunch of feathers on the top of one's head," sluikwaltko lash "a
bunch of feathers stuck up there;" shaki^i is "to have it" or "wear it upon
the back of the head or the shoulders;" shaki;{itko lash "one who wears it"
there. "A crest of hair going over the top of the head" is hi'shkwaltko lak.
Tuta, d. ti'itata, ti'it'ta, signifies "to stick obliquely one long object upon
somebody," either on his head or body; hence the reflective form slu'iteta

"Cf. Nliiiiitcliakfitnlko in Dictioiinry iiiiil on jiago WAX (irOrunimar.

700

(lUAMMAH OK THK KLAMATH LAN()UA(JK.

is 1

fe :

r •

"to stick up on ono Hide of one's liead or body;" p'liifwasliiun (lash) sliut'-
tantko 'wearing an eaglt^'s feather stuck up obliquely." Hut when many
feathers or hing objects "are stuck up obHquely on oneself," this is ex-
pressed by hashki'itchka : hisli hashkatchtantko nu'sh "many feathers faat-
eneu on one's head." Shutewaltko "fixed or fastened upon the head" may
refer to objects of various form, not to long articles oidy. lint when
"I fasten a feather ui)on my forehead," this is nu shateKka lash; ui)on
"another's forehead," hashtelfka ; hashtelikatko h'l.sh may refer to more
than one feather also, and describe it as "standin<>- erect" or as "Icaninjf
back across the top of the !<ead."

iS'o/.sc and /o iiKdte noise is a fruitful field for word-formation in all lan-
guages, aiid onomatopii'ia often plays a large jiart in if. 'i'he large num-
ber of expressions compels us to separate the noises made by man and
animals from those made b}- the elementary forces of nature. Among the
former, hii'ma is generic for all the roaring, crying, whooping, and chirj)ing
produced by animals; also for the shouts and cries uttered by man to call
other people's attention. To shout at festivals, dances, is yi'ka, "to howl,
cry, or sing in chorus;" hence probably yai'ikela "to perionn a i)nberty-
dance." Yii-uya or yau}awa refers more particularly to a noise made
Avith a rattle,* and voise in general is ko-i ti'mienash "disagreeable to hear."
"To behave in a boisterous, loud manner," is h'dula, waltka, and tchilu-
yi'xa. "To crack with the teeth" is i)uki)uka. Other noises a.scribed to
human beings are expressed by the verbs uka and tchl'lga ; the noisy re-
joicings heard of children when they see their parents coming is sln'tiaika.
Ya-a, yea is "to scream" or 'howl aloud," and wawa-a "to whine." The
noises made by the elemental powers are just as nudtiform in their lexical
rendering as they are with us. "To exj)lode" is ndjiiwa; "to cause an
explosion by a stroke of the hand," shniimbua. The noise made by the
surf or by waterfalls 's tfwish, from tfwi "to rush with force;" the roaring
of a landslide or falling rocks Ifuna, of other elementary noises shtchaya-
shla, of the wind yewa, the cracking of 2»lants, rotten wood, etc., walta, the
rustling, crackling of hay, straw, dry bulrushes, etc, kushkusha. "To
beat a drum" is udfntena; "to ring," when .siid of a little bell, liuixa, v.

* To rattle wlicn Huitl of llic riinlvHiiakc Ih hlmali li;illi Imn. iIh ihIiIk: Nlil:i-iiiiiigHli.

UOOTS AND DKUIVATIVB8.

701

I'ntr., hoiico tlio clapper of tlio bell is named liu-ipfiitko "making noise ;" tfntan
lili'iipju "little hells are tinkling." "The sizzling of hot water" is tchiya-a,
tehia-a, a derivative of yi'i-a, and the s])nttering ont of steam inclosed in
hnrning wood is mpampat'ta, the cracking of the wood mpfltchitchka. La-
ulawa is said of the clattering noise made by dry substances, as bones,
striking against each other.

Vf. ROOTS WITH T[IEIR DKRIVATIVES.

There is no better means of sliowing the mode of word-derivation in a
language than to unite and class all the derivatives of one root systematic-
ally under the heading of that root. The functions and frequency of each
(Jerivational means employed, as affixation, reduplication, vocalic change,
or the compounding of words then appear at once and illustrate each other
mutually. 8(>mo roots of the Klamath language have given origin to fam-
ilies of derivatives of wonderful extent, and the stems or bases formed by
them have branched off into different directions again, so that the progeny
or offspring has exi)anded into a startling multiplicity. The association of
ideas and the branching out of one idea from another often bear a peculiar
stamp which will surprise those not accustomed to Indian thought. Many
of the verbal radices quoted below gave origin to transitive as well as in-
transitive verbs ; some show a predilection for prefixation, others for suffix-
atioii. Vocalic chiinges are not infrequent in the radix, and many of them
can be explained by a weakening of the vowel through a lengthening of the
word and tiio shifting of the accent consequent upon it.

The items given below do not aim at any degree of completeness, but
are intended only to serve as specimens of derivation. They will give a
general idea of the method which has to be followed whenever a complete
"root-dictionary" of this upland tongue should be attempted, a task which
can bo undertaken only at a future time, when a much larger stock of
vocables and texts has been gathered among the individuals speaking both
dialects.

lilNA to hrinff, to earn/, originally referred to a plurality of objects only,
but its use has extended over a wider range, so that the verb may pass for
being the generic term for to cany. The nimiber of prefixes which con-

702

GKAMMAR OF TllK KLAMATH I.ANGUAdK.

I
I.

nect " ~^l8{; ves with Jnn is remarkably largo, as will bo seon from tlio list
follow lug: an.i to take away from, uhstract, with aiifa and other derivatives;
ki^na It is smwimi, l.'t. "it is carrying (snow) obiiciuely, or from the sides";
kslu'na tn carry something hmf in the arm or arms, as a l)al)y, a load of
wood, straw, grass, etc., whence kshi'ni liny; Irna to carry a round object, or
to travel upon something round, as the wheels of a wagon, car, etc.; hence
glc'nn, kU'na (1) to carry fire by means of a stick l)urning at the end and
swung in a circle; (2) to hop, viz., "to swing one's body in a circular way" (a
derivative of this being klukalgi); sIiK^na to more something in a circle, or in
a round orbit, as is done with the small rubbing stone or lipaklish (Mod.),
shflaklkish or pe'ksh (Kl.), upon the mealing stone or lemiitch; cf le'ntko.
The verb shlin to shoot appears to l)(. originally tho same word as shlena,
though now differentiated from it in signification; it may have referred at
first to the curved or round path in tlie air described by the arrow when
impelled by tho relaxation of tlio bowstring. Nona to carry something thin
and to move something flat, as the wings ; pana to dire, pliim/e; pit^na to scrape
sideways really moans "to carry or bring upon tho ground toward oneself"
There is another verb shlena differing from tlie one above as to tho origin
of its i)refix, and signifyi'ig to take along garments, mantles, etc, or somo-
thing soft or pliant. StiMia is to carry in a Imcket, pail, or other portable
vase of this sort. Shuentcli haby-hoard, in Modoc hahy, is lit. "what is car-
ried on oneself," and presupposes a verb shuc'na, which is not recorded.
But there is a verb wena to wear out, to use up, as garments, the original
function of it being aj)parently "to wenr, to carry njjon oneself" A verb
tchena to go, ivalk; serves in Modoc to express a plurality of subjects walk-
ing or going ; cf Graniu)ar, pago 4.'3S».

Lna also forms dei-i\atives with some suffixes; enfa to carry to some-
body, e'mpf'li, for I'napoli, to convey hack or /lome, and e'ni spirit-land, jdace
where spirits are being cari-ied or wafted ; cf the Latin: manes, from manare
to be moved, fima to briny, hand over, said of infants, contains the same
radix e- with the suffix -ma of motion upon the ground, and forms a largo
number of derivatives by means of compound suffixes.

KwA to be full of to be filled up by, refers especially to water, liquids,
and such substances as .sand, seeds, food, etc., and forms a family of words

HOOTS AND DKUIVATIVBS.

703

very instructive in regard to its prefix-oIomontH. In it8 Hignification unci
<lenvntivi,H it ol(»«oIy .ipprondieK I'wa, but nuint Ik, (liHtinrruisl.o,! from it nn
.'wa referH nw.re Hpc-ially t<. .soraothing being i.side. Vlmt ibrn.H c<-uh1i
n'-usi, Me, s/urf of watn; wifb its din.inutivo owaga /ittk Mr, and a lar.re
munber of vorbn, some of win,!, assume transitive functions, as owa does
itseli when it signifies /. n„ph, upo>. Ah an impersonal verb it means to h
satiated tvith: hence t^una to Jill oneself with food, ewfsi to di,jest, e-un.'.Ia /.
dejeeate. From c^va descends (juite a family of terms (h'stinct by their pre-
fixes, as th. verbs ycwn, ksh.^wa, Icwa, nc^wa, pdwa, stc^va, shmVa, icluWva
^cwa to hunow really menus the filling of th,. den with winter provisions
by the rodonts which ex,-avate the dens, yc^-ush, the prefix i-, y- pointing
to a nudtitude of long objects. Kshcwa to put upon or place inside refers to
one long or animate object only; cf Dictionary, page 147. Of h^va, which
diff-crs somewhat from Hwa, q. v., the original signification is to he in the
midst of a curlr, or to he within something round; then to form a cluster, to
be or ex,st together in the shape of bunches, clusters, grapes, the prefix 1-
bemg n.dicative of round shape. Thus Ic-usham, d. lek^-ushan, flower de-
scribes "what is in a cluster," pushp.'.shli Ifwavaks is the pupil of the eye
Nc'-wa to form a sheet is said of large water-sheets, prairies, and level lands-
hence m^-ush tUled fjround, uc-utko feld, nd-upka to run into a lake, said of
rivers : kni^va to let the fsh-line float on the water over day or night the
oblique direction of the pole or line being indicated by the prefix k-. KnJ-
udshi is the object causing the line to fioat; this being made of lio-ht bark
the term finally came to mean hark. IVwa to he in the water refers to ani-
mate beings, and passes into the signification of bathing or swimmin-.- and
washing oneself in cold water, pcwasli Imthiwi place; stowa is to mix a° sub-
stance with a liquid, and may be used in reference to kneading doi.-d,
Shudwa is a medial verb coming nearest in signification to kncwa to 'fish
tmth the line, to anr,le; its derivatives being shuc-ush, shud-udsha, shue-utka
Ichdwa means to float, as aquatic birds; when said of men it refers to a
plurality of them, and belongs to gc^va to cjo into the wafer; cf. page 43!l
Tchi'wa to form a hod// of water is identical in meaning with owa (I) and (-J)
in Dictionary, and forms tchi'wish standim/ water, pool, or spring, tchiwi^i
to put a liquid into a vase so as not to fill it, and tchl'i.ka to he full of ov to
contain water or some other liquid, it being a contraction of tchiwfpka.

704

(iUAMMAU OK TIII'J KLAMATH l.AN(ilJA(ii;.

Idhua, (tHii lo enn-jf, transport, to viah' i/n, to rniinrf, iippenrM m n verb
iisBuniiiijjf various jmjfixcs, hut aluo ri<,iirt;s as a siittix (ir ratlior as u part of
siiftix in otliors. Ori{^iiially it roforred, ami still ilocs so in many instaiicoH,
to a plurality of lon^'-Hliapod ohjocts, especially jioophs, ami ktclii'dsha to
crawl, crci'p ahuf) the. around, stands for kslifdslia, and in fact n^prosonts tlio
ningular form of the verb. Hdslui means to .inrk; crtract hij sHvliin/i, hut
refers to hlood, water, and milk (I'dsliash) oidy, while hantchna, has reference
to other ohjet'ts. Thus (dsha forms transitive as well as intransitive verbs,
one verb heinjf often used in hoth senses. Thus pftclia is to (wcomc extinct
(fire), but its medial form spftcha is used for to rjrtint/uish, put out, to draff
Ix'hind or to pull after oneself, besides the intransitive to po out. Kfdsha is
to crawl, creep, and to swim under the tvater's siirftice, to dive, orif^inally "to
make go sideways;" hencio ki'dshasliy?« and kudsha dorxal hack Jin and (jud-
tjeon. More distantly derived from ki'dsha are ki'ntchna to walk, march, move
in a Jile, skintclma to crawl, creep, for which Modoc; has s;{i'dsha, and kf-insh,
ki'ush wasp. Mcdslia to migrate, to trarel refers especially to the prairie, lit.
"to remove in u curvilinear direction," honco the medial form shemashla to
mif/rate with one's family, and the derivative kima'dsh ant, lit. "the one mov-
ing obliquely." Another derivative, shnl'dsha, also pronounced tchnl'dsha,
means "to go forward in a straightout direction." The original function of
idsha to carri/, tninsport has become reflective in the verb nit'dsha, but re-
appears in mi'dsho spoon, "what serves for carrying (to the nuiuth)."

Ik.\ to take out, remove from, is another prolific derivative of the radix
i-, and like fdsha, fla, (ta has formed a good nund)er of derivatives by pro-
fixation. Thus wo have e-ika, ei'^a to put the head out, ktchika to crawl off,
viz. "to take oneself out oblicjuely," nfk'ka, nfka to put the arm or arms out,
8])ii'ka to lie spread out on tho ground, spfka to draw, pull out, spfkanash
needle, s])uka lo put the feet out and to lie down, shi'ika lo drive out of, if this
is not the medial form of huka to run at ; finally tcdu'ka lo leak. Tho verl)s
and nouns formed by suflfixation from ika are all arranged in alphabetic
order in the Dictionary; they are ikaga, ikayula, I'kaks, ikampeli and fkna,
yfkashla, fkla and fklash, fkta, fktcha, ikuga and ikuak])eli with kslu'kuga

K.vKo, K.\Kii hone is a term which reajtpears Avith a nasalized initial in
ngak, nki'ik top of the head, skull top, which joined to gi to produce, to make,

i{<»<)TH AND IH:i{IVATIVKH.

7()r>

io<h fot^H tl.o verb nku'k,n, „,akgi ,o ,U. Urih, I„ Hoan-Lin^ Hftcr tl.«
or^'H. of tins torn, tl.o fact Hug^oHtH itnolf that in <lolivo.y tl.o top of tl.o

w. Idy .l.non..t n.to.-,,.-otatio„: /. ,ro,Uur honn, kak' ,.i. in vi.n^ of tl.o ho-
.e n.rront ,u..ong Hovoral t.ihoH that lifo .-oally ...sides i,. tl.o hon<.s, and
not ,n tl.« floHl. nervoH, o.- blood; or that n.nn has two ho..1s, ono of whi.h
.■.•".an.K aftor death i,. his body. ]„ the Tonkawo lan^uago of Texas t.
/- ^..7. .s .,fkan,an yokcHva "to bocon.o bones - In fact, ..ftc- doceaso the
»kolot<„. t,-a.no ot a person outlasts all other part« of the body, a..d slx.nld
the Hon .•o,..a.n n. it this is .-eascn. enongl. to explain the nnh-orsal d.-cad
abont the revenge of the one buried. This is one of the g,-eat causes ac-
'•'•m.t.ng for tl.o reluctance of many I„dia..s to refer to anything .ocalli....
the n.,.,..ory of the deceased. Kako is formed by reduplication of the .a.lix
ka, ko ku which wo fi,.d i.. „,any verbs of hilln,, : k.'.ka to hite, ko-.'.vuu
(pl.u-.of obj.). ko-ftchatchta, k.',kanka, shk.'.ks, shuk.'.ka, kuatchala (T)icti<,..-
Hry, pages 514. 51.''.), and a few othe.-s not i,. the Dictionary, as kowaki.'-
kala to cat holes into, to ynaw to pieces, to spoil h,, onamru,; kuakikakiamna
iooo arouml an object n-Me eating of it. The ,adix is not .•oduplicated in
kata to gnaw, kil'dsho ehln, kuatcl.a to hlte off s.udl pieces, kuatchaka /. lile
into ku.a ka to bite or tear off from, kw.Vldsha /. erode, kw.Vshka to hlte off'
k,.pka to hlte or eat repeatedly, kcMsh rattlesnake. The jaw is our or.mn fo,'
biting, and is called kako just like the hone.

Lama to he dizzy, giddy, drunk, heivlldered, and to curse contains a .-adix
lain-, the p.-i,nitive signification of which is that of turning in a ci.rle ,e-
volvng, ..oeling. This will appear f.-on. the following derivatives .- IrMuiucl.
(tor lan.o tkish) the Indian mealing stone ov Mexican metate (Aztec: .netlatl)
upon which the shilaklgLsh or rMng-stone, flat below, is .noved in ci.cular
hnes for grinding seeds and g.-ains. The te.-m for thunder, lf,mc-?sh, shows
that tl.,s phenomenon of natu.-e was likened to the ci.-cular n.otion of ,„//-
tng rocks or something heavy, for l'm.^na, Ir-mc^na it thunders is f,-on. lamc^na
LCmewflza means to he moved offhy circular motion, as log., in a river I en.
lema, the iterative reduplication of lama, is to he duzy, to reel, himlcmsh
wit^ vo^ahc^,saimilation,^z>^meM, <^Wrf^^^ but lam spirituous liquor is

Tf. .Toarnal of American Folk-Lore. Vol.!. 237 Bq. and iT, 68 (Cambridge, Mans., 1888. 1889). ~

70(5

GKAMMAH OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAGE.

I . ;

derived from rum through tlio Chinook jargon. Slilaniia is to fc4 hcwiMered,
dvvi)hj cufiirkved by the loss of a relative or friend ; hence also io mourn some-
body's death. Cf. Irnne'sham and lenu'walieksh in the Dictionary.

Ni'TA to hum, to hlaze up, v. intr. and impers., can turn into a transitive
verb to destroy hj fire. Its numerous derivatives are remarkable by the
vocalic changes which the radix nu- is undergoing in them. The vowel u-
is preserved in the noun nut and its diminutive nntak, the small seed of the
glycerium-^/flss, which explodes when heated; also in niiyua and nutkolua
to shine from a distance. The causative form of the latter verb is shni'itkolua-
Nuka or noka to roast, cook, and to hecome ripe, forms nuk/.la to shrink hy
heat, shnu'xa to parch, nokla to roast or holl on the hot coals ; n^uta and
n^utagia (for nokuta etc.), to hum at the hottom of a cooking vessel ; by a
vocalic change we get shnikanua to allow time for ripeulm/ and its iterative
shnikanuanka, which is also applied to fishing, not to fruits or seeds only.
Other derivatives of shnu'^a are slmitchi'xa to fry and shnitchkua, v. trans.,
to hroil, to fry, to dry such substances as meft, etc. The medial form of
nuta: slmuta, is transitive only: to hum, to huild a fire, and to parch, and
from it are derived shnuya, abbr. shnui, v. intr., to hum, to shine; also when
noun : 2}ohir HyM ; slmuitampka to keep humlny, shni'iish a peculiar smoke or
foy appearing at times in the northwest and ascribed by the natives to deities;
shnutchoka to hum or sinye to death, a verb compounded of the two stems
nu- and tchok- in tchuka to die; shnuikia to hulId afire next to something, as
a wall, hole, tree. The vowel a appears in other derivatives of the same
radix, as in natchaka v. intr. to melt hy heat and its causative shnatchaka, v.
trans., to melt, dissolve by fire-heat, as wax; natspka to he consumed hy fire;
natkalga to hlaze up and its causative shnatkalga to kindle up, set on fire.
Na'hlua, n(51ua to he hurnt on the skin or surface as by tlie sun, fire, begins
a series of derivatives showing the vowel e. From it we have the causative
.shnc^lua to stain, color, dye and the noun shnt'luash dye-stuff, coloring matter.
Shncka is intransitive and means {\) to he lit up, to shine, (2) to hum one-
self, and (3) to hum through; hence shnekupka to shine from ahove or from a
distanc". Ni'lka, ni'l^a to he hurnt up is probably identical with nl'lka it is
dawning, but both are now pronounced with different vowels ; lu'lka gave
origin to slmdlza (for shm^-ilza) to set on fire, to hum doivn, whence shne-

BOOTS AND DERIVATIVES.

707

ihMi fin-place, hearth, and lodye. Sliiiena is to huild afire when out travel-
ing; shne-ish camp-fire made on a journey, shne'nkisli the sjwt wliere such a
fire is or was made. Shne'pka (for shnJ-ipka) to huild a camp-fire hiUtually
is a usitative verb formed by the suffix -pka; its noun shnc^-ipaksh usual
fire-place, also stands for the lodye or habitation, itself, and differs from shni'-
ilaksh only by the circumstance that people stay longer in the latter than
in the former. Nl'ika it is dawning is closely connected with nilfwa to hurst
into a lif/ht, and refers to the rays of sunliglit shooting up from the horizon
and apparently coming from a burning fire; it forms derivatives like m'lakla,
metathetically for nflkala, to appear first, as daylight, the local name Ni'lak-
shi, q. v., nilaklola, nilakloltamna ; cf. Dictionary, iiider m'lakla.

This radix nu-, one of the most fecund in forming derivatives in this
upland language, must be carefully distinguished from another element
nu-, which signifies to throtv and to fly, when round or bulky objects ai-e
spoken of. It is a contraction from niwa to drive, and is found in nudslia,
nulidsha, nutolala, nut6dsha, shnuntowa-udsha, and other terms.

Paha to he or hecome dry is transitive also : to render dry, to exsiccate,
and does not apply to the fading processes of the vegetable world only, but
as well to sickness of men and animals. A relation between disease and
dryness is traceable in many languages, as disease induces fever, and fever
is productive of thirst, which is the result of loss of water from the blood ;
our term sick, the German sievh are in fact identical with the Latin siccus
dry. With the use of three different verbal suffixes the root jm- in i)aha
forms paka (through pa'hka), pala (from pahala, i>a'hla), pata (from pa'hta).
The verb paka, among other significations, means to wither, fade, and to hral;
crack from being dry, and then is usually pronounced mbaka ; mbakla to he
parched up, to crack, is transitive also, with change of vowel mbi'ika, puka ;
when <ised as a noun, this means dust. Mpakuala is to dry up on the top, and
is said of trees. Pii'ka to render dry, to dry out, has special reference to
thirst, and appears also as an impersonal verb : pii'ka nish / am thirsty, lit.
"it makes me dry"; pii'kam is the dry moss grov/ing below trees. Pnla to
he dry and to render dry also forms many derivatives, and in some of their
number the 'li after the radix pa- is still ))ronoHnced, as in the noun pa'hla,
pi'ila tray, originally "implemont for drying seeds," etc., now used for a

708

OBAMMAR OF THE KLAMATH LANGUAOIO.

I H

matted dish, and a sort of scoop or paddle, larger than the sliaplash (for shil-
))a'hhish) viattcd plate, dish, or paddk. Pahv also desifrnates the Hver, an
organ of tlie body which tlie popuhu- mind puts in close connection with
the feelings of thirst. Pala-ash is dried food, uither flour or hreod palala,
an inchoative verb: to become dri/, palkish dry riverbed, pdlpali (for jmlpal-li)
white, lit. "bleached," or the color of dry vegetation ; spal, in Modoc tchpal
ocher, yellow paint, lit. "becoming dry upon somebody," wapalash dead tree,
for upalash ; stopGla and atopillsha to scrape of the fibrous bark of pine-trees,
lit. "to render dry (pine-trees) on the top;" stopalsh Jlhrrbark of conifera\
The verb pata it is dry season or sitnimer also became a noun : summer,
summer-heat, and in the form of pata, mpata, mpatasli also means milt,
spleen. Pj'iha forms pahalka to dry, v. trans., to become dry, v. intr. and to
suffer of a lingering disease, whence p.Vhlaksh emaciated; pahalka to be per-
vianeiifly sick, papahuatko haritiy dried-up eyes, pa'htchna to be thirsty, pa'h-
pa'hsh, i)a'hpash earwax, lit. "what turns dry."

Pkt'a to disrupt contains a radix pet- resendding in its function that of
pu- in piii. The derivatives of it are petila to be a midwife and midwife, v.i'.
page 31 f) ; ktept'ta or kti'pta to notch, indent and lept'ta to tear off particles
from the rim of a round object and to mark the cars of cattle ; lelpc'tatko
indented. This radix also appears with change of vowei in kmapat'hic'na-
tko wrinkled, furrowed; but i)etc'ga, pitt^a to break, tear has to be derived
fi'om tega, ndt'ga, not from pt't'a.

P'lai, plaf up, above, on hiyh, and upward has formed many derivatives
without and with vocalic alteration of the radix. Directly derived from it
are p'lafkni the one bciny above or coming from the upper parts of, p'laftankiu
(same), p'le'ntana upon the top, p'lafwash yolden eayle, lit. "the one staying
high up," p'letoi'xi to lift or purse up, especially said of the lips, etc. With
the vowel c p'laf appears in pelpela to work, which seems to refer to repeated
lifting of the arms or hands for manual labor; in pc'lta to put out the tonyuc,
pclhipeli to draw the tongue in; the vowel e becomes displaced by anathesis
in shepalta to touch part of one's body with the tonyuc, shepalua to put the
tongue in and out as a gestm-e of niockery, shepolamna to carry about on one's
shoulders, an act which implies a lifting up like its causative hishphVmna to
tow by means of a rope or string slung over the shoulder. With the vowel a

ROOTS AND DERIVATIVES.

709

the radix api>ear8 in palla to steal, purloin, in Modoc also pfllna, to wl.icli wo
may con.pare P^nglish terms like "to lift cattle," "shoplifter; " p,'ilak, Modoc
pcHak fjuirkl,,, rapidly, implying a rapid lifting of the feet, palakmulank at a
rapid ifait. The suffix -pf,l(, -pK, -blf is a form not derived from p'luf, but
sprung from the i)ronoininal pf directly, as a form parallel to p'laf, and from
tins came pipCldngshta on both sides. Pfl, pfla on him, on her has to be dis-
tinguished from pfl, pila only, hut, merely, and from the former p'l.'i fat,
yrease, seems derived, together with pflui to smell, v. intr., piluyt^-ash emitting,
smell or stink, ship'lkanka (and shipalk/inka) to yo about stinkim,, p'Hn to
beeomefat, p'Htko fat, adj., shnfpClan to fatten.

Pri to cut into strips or frinyes forms a basis which has been (juite fer-
tile in all sorts of derivatives. The radix pn- points to a separation or cut-
ting asunder so as to cause divergence below. Wo meet it in the noun:
p.Vsh whorl, as seen on the cat-tail, etc., and in its derivatives pA'shak hunch
of pine-needles, piV sh;cam twiy of conifera;. PiV ish is a frinye, leather fringe
when loose; after being fastened to the garment it is called puith'mtchish ;
pi'iash a Jtour-sack made of cloth. PukcWish set of frinyes, frinye of a skin
garment, strap and leather belongs to the same radix pu-, which refers as
well to the diverging of the legs in the human and animal body, as may
be gathered from terms like pu'shaklish part of ley between hip and knee,
spi'iya. Mod., to .stretch the leys, pi'itchka to part the leys or feet and pu'tchta,
hushpfl't^a to touch with the feet, sputchta and hushpAtchta to friyhten, scare,
lit. "to make the legs part;" pi'itchkanka to move the leys quickly and to fiold
them apart. Very probabl}^ pe'tch foot (and ley with smaller animals) is
of the same radix, though the change of the vowel is not quite plain ; cf.
siiepatchtila to place the leys under oneself and spidga to help up another on
his leys. Another prefix occurs in I'biVka (for IpA'ka) to lie on the yround,
said of round subjects, as roots, bulbs, etc.

Trap stalk, stem of plant, maize-stalk appears as -kap in its compounds
and derivatives, t- being the prefix indicating upright position of one sub-
ject. Tka-, tga- also forms the radix in the verbs of standing when the
subject is in the singular number. Kdp as a base or stem in the sense of
stick or pole is found in yankilpshtia and kmaki'.pshti to place into an opcniny
and to bar an entrance with sonie long object, as a stick. For .stalk and

710

GRAMMAU OP THE KLAMATU LANGIIA(;E.

maize stalk the Modoc dialect has kj^p, not tkap; cf. ki'iprthi, kiipnltchn to ho
about nathering stalks, reeds, etc. In Klanmth Liiko kapka, a spocios of low
pine, rinus coutorta, stands for tkapaga, tkapka, and lias a diminutive kajy-
ki'iga i/ounif kdpka-pine; for kapku Modoc prefers ku'ga, diminutive of kr.'sli,
ku'sh pine. The radix found in kapiita to reach up to, gfiiptcliu to hide or tjo
behind is ka-, related to gt^na to fjo and not to kap.

T'siii'n or tCshi'n, d. t'shi't'slian and ti't'slian /« //row applies to men and
ainnmls only, kedsha to plants. Though intransitive, this verb is a parallel
to tchfya to give to somebody a liquid, as ivatcr, milk; t'shfn therefore means
to be brought up with milk, water, etc., in the earliest st..ge of life. Cf.
Tpi(pEtv to feed on milk, to feed, to curdle. From that verb comes t'shisliap
KI father, like Tpocpo? nurse from Tpegteiy; the Modoc form p'tfshap recalls
the distributive form tft'shan of t'shi'n. The circumstance that the father or
progenitor is only called the "feeder," "nourisher," throws an interesting
light upon the primitive conditions once existing among these westei-n In-
dians ; besides this, p'gfshap mother really means "the maker." From t'shi'n
are further derived : (1) t'shika to grow old, to be old, and as a noun : old man.
Its diminutive t'shika-aga is short old man and parent. (2): ndshflo, dim.
ndshfluaga /f'AHrtfc animal, lit, "the suckler, feeder." (3): hi-shtAtcha, the
causative form of t'shi'n, to bring up, raise, said of children and the young
brood of animals.

Wt-KTA to plait. A series of words beginning with w- possesses in com-
mon the signification of twisting, plaiting, but varies considerably in regard
to the vowel following the initial sound, thus forming thematic roots like
wa-, we-, wi- ; the real radi.x is apparently u-, wiiich as a component of
diphthongs turns into w-. We also find that, e. g., wapalash dead tree is a
transformation of upalash, wa8hulal;(a for huhasholalxa, watakia for utakia.
From the fortn wa- the radix u- forms terms like wapd'ma to tie, twist, <»r
wind around, waptash water running /rough ponds and small lakes with
visible motion resembling a twisting, w.-j/tasha-iga rope twisted out of grass,
stalks, etc., wakog.sh bucket, called so because of the hoops winding around
it, wakshna moccasin, viz., garnient tied around the feet. The diphthong
we- stands as initial in wt'kta to plait, whence wc'ktash (Kl.) plait of females,
for which Modoc has waktash, a form less original than wc'kta.sh; wcpla to

UOOTd AND DKUIVATIVKH.

711

wh,d Boinotliing nrouml, to tvnip up, rnvrlop,- wq.lakimnim (o heml or coil up,
lojonn rh,„s; vviViaks mUkUv part of Iww, bccu.iHf, Htreiifrtlioned by loatl.cr
tm\ urou.Hl it: wi,,ka onr.shnc or amr of shor consLsfinfr of twiHto.l ,n,it,.n«I.
From wftcl.xii, v. tr, to wind uromid as u rope, nro derived witchk/.fko
»/o««/«*« ,/-/,/'■ M.,1 wftcluak, tho Modoc tor... for minhotv, both ..a,..od after
tlioir wiiidiiioi' sbajx).

WiTA to t>tow at coi.tuii.s u i-adix m- ...eai.i.ifr <o />/o«-, but g.-eutly vary-
ing i.i its sig„ifi,,,tio„8 ucu-o.-,li„g to tho .si.rtixoH that n.uy bocomo co.inocted
with .t. Wfta a..d w.'t,.H form wftka /. l>low out of wit^.i-'-la to cease Idnuhn,
Old of; tho basis w(ka to tdow out, to cunt air, gave rise to tl.o .lo.-ivativos
w.ka.isha to hlow acros.s, to sweep ore,; ai.d to wiklawi to Mow in a side direc-
tio», to d.-ift along tho g.-..n.,d, a...l to wfk.rish tr/ltale, tattler, o.io "who
blows at somobod)-." Wfii is to tdow or wafl throur,h, wilahi to blow iuto the
Jirc. Wftcha rofo.-s to continual Idowim,, a..d forms witch('.hi to cease to hlow
witchulfua to blow underneath, wit.-h.,yekta..,na to Idow son.othi.ig up co.,tin-
ually (implying a.. i.,choative ve.-b witchi.yc'ga), a.i.l wftrhtku to continue
blonnny ,n return, forms wftchtaks tempest, storm. Finally wo havo wfna
which, with tho suffix -..a b.dicating g,-adual procoss ami sl.o.t distance'
moans to sin,,, lit, "to I)low at intervals;" win.'.ta to sin,, in a chorus, espe-
cially when tho song is sta.-tod by the conju.-or. Tho medial for,,, shu.'na
to stnf, .•ofe.-.-od originally to a solo chant, but ,.ow applies to choruses as
well ; .ts noun sln.l'sh is not son,, only, but also m,i,,ic song effecting cu.-es
o\ disease and obtai.ied by inspii-ation thi-ough dreams. For tho other
de.ivatives of wfiiu and shufna see Dictionary.